JAGUAR 2010XFRWorkshop PDF

m
Workshop Manual
co
s.
oc
gD
X250 - XFR
Ja
5.0 Litre S/C

www.JagDocs.com
2010 to 2011MY
Version 1.3
March 2015
Table of Contents
Contents
1: General Information
100: Service Information
100-00: General Information
Description and Operation
About This Manual
Application and Use of Specifications
Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety Precautions
Brake System Health and Safety Precautions
Diesel Fuel System Health and Safety Precautions
General Service Information
Health and Safety Precautions
How To Use This Manual
Important Safety Instructions
Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions
Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives
Standard Workshop Practices
Symbols Glossary
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions
Road/Roller Testing
Window Glass Health and Safety Precautions
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Adaptive Damping Module (SUMB)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Audio Amplifier Module (AAM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Blind Spot Monitoring System Module (SODL/SODR)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Central Junction Box (CJB)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Climate Control Module (HVAC)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Digital Audio Broadcast Module (DABM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Driver Door Module/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Electric Parking Brake (PBM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Front Seat Climate Control Module (DCSM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Headlamp Control Module (HCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Instrument Cluster (IPC)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Integrated Audio Module (IAM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Integrated Control Panel (FCIMB)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Pedestrian Protection System Control Module (PPSCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Rear Junction Box (RJB)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Remote Keyless Entry Module (RFA)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Satellite Digital Audio Radio System Module (SARM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Speed Control Module (CCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Steering Column Lock Module (VIM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Television Module (TVM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Tire Pressure Monitoring System Module (TPM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Touch Screen Display (FCDIM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexVehicles With: 6HP28 6-Speed Automatic Transmission, DTC:
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Transmission Shift Module (GSM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Portable Audio Interface Control Module (PAICM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Hybrid Digital Radio Control Module (HDRCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Infotainment Control Module (ICM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Telephone Module (TEL)
100-01: Identification Codes
Identification Codes
100-02: Jacking and Lifting
Jacking
Lifting
100-04: Noise, Vibration and Harshness
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Diagnosis and Testing
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
General Procedures
Exhaust System Neutralizing
2: Chassis
204: Suspension
204-00: Suspension System - General Information
Specification
Suspension System
General Procedures
Camber and Caster Adjustment
Four-Wheel Alignment
Front Toe Adjustment (57.65.01)
Rear Toe Adjustment (57.65.08)
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check
Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check
204-01: Front Suspension
Specification
Component Location
Overview
System Operation and Component Description
Front Suspension
Removal and Installation
Front Shock Absorber (60.30.04)
Front Lower Arm (60.35.53)
Rear Lower Arm (60.35.54)
Rear Lower Arm Bushing (60.40.12)
Shock Absorber Bushing (60.30.16) (60.30.23)
Front Stabilizer Bar - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Front Stabilizer Bar Link (60.10.02)
Stabilizer Bar Link Bushing (60.10.03)
Upper Arm LH (60.35.41)
Upper Arm RH (60.35.42)
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Wheel Knuckle (60.25.23)
Front Lower Arm Bushing
204-02: Rear Suspension
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Rear Suspension
Lower Arm (64.35.43)
Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
Shock Absorber Lower Bushing (64.30.39)
Rear Stabilizer Bar (64.35.08)
Rear Wheel Bearing
Upper Arm
Disassembly and Assembly
Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
204-04: Wheels and Tires
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Wheels and Tires
Tire Low Pressure Sensor
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Receiver
Wheel and Tire
204-05: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
Component Location - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Overview - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
System Operation and Component Description - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
Adaptive Damping Module
Front Suspension Vertical Accelerometer
Rear Suspension Vertical Accelerometer
204-06: Ride and Handling Optimization
Component Location
Overview
205: Driveline
205-00: Driveline System - General Information
Driveline System
General Procedures
Driveline Angle Inspection
205-01: Driveshaft
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Component Location
Overview
Driveshaft
General Procedures
Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
Driveshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
205-02: Rear Drive Axle/Differential
Specification - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Component Location
Overview
Rear Drive Axle and Differential
General Procedures
Differential Draining and Filling
Differential Case - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Differential Front Bushing - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Drive Pinion Seal
Differential Locking Motor
205-05: Rear Drive Halfshafts
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Rear Drive Halfshafts
Rear Halfshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.10.33)
Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.10.32)
206: Brake System
206-00: Brake System - General Information
Specification - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Brake System
General Procedures
Brake Disc Runout Check
Brake System Bleeding (70.25.03)
Front Brake Disc Runout Check - With Wheel On - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Rear Brake Disc Runout Check - With Wheel On
206-03B: Front Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Disc Shield (70.10.18) - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
206-04B: Rear Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Disc Shield (70.10.19)
206-05: Parking Brake and Actuation
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Parking Brake
General Procedures
Parking Brake Cable Tension Release
Parking Brake Cable LH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Parking Brake Cable RH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Parking Brake Module
Parking Brake Switch
Parking Brake Release Actuator
206-06: Hydraulic Brake Actuation
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Hydraulic Brake Actuation
Brake Fluid Reservoir (70.30.16)
Brake Master Cylinder (70.30.08)
206-07: Power Brake Actuation
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Power Brake System
Brake Booster (70.50.17)
Brake Vacuum Pump - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
206-09: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module (70.60.02)
Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (70.60.18) (70.60.19)
Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (70.60.04)
Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor
Yaw Rate Sensor and Accelerometer
211: Steering System
211-00: Steering System - General Information
Specification
Steering System
General Procedures
Power Steering System Bleeding (57.15.02 )
Power Steering System Flushing (57.15.08)
Power Steering System Filling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
211-02: Power Steering
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Power Steering
Steering Gear (57.10.01)
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Power Steering Pump - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
211-03: Steering Linkage
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Steering Linkage
Tie Rod End (57.55.02)
211-04: Steering Column
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Steering Column
Steering Column
Steering Column Flexible Coupling
Steering Wheel (57.60.01)
211-05: Steering Column Switches
Component Location
Overview
Steering Column Switches
Hazard Flasher Switch
Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH
Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH
Steering Column Lock Actuator
3: Powertrain
303: Engine
303-00: Engine System - General Information
Engine - 5.0L
General Procedures
Bearing Inspection
Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
Camshaft End Play
Camshaft Lobe Lift
Camshaft Surface Inspection
Connecting Rod Cleaning
Connecting Rod Large End Bore
Crankshaft End Play
Cylinder Bore Out-of-Round
Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection
Leakage Test Using Smoke Test Equipment
Piston Inspection
Piston Pin Diameter
Piston Pin to Bore Diameter
Piston Ring End Gap
Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance
Valve Spring Free Length
Valve Stem Diameter
Cylinder Head Distortion
Cylinder Compression Test - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
303-01D: Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Engine
General Procedures
Engine Oil Draining and Filling
Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check
Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment
Valve Clearance Check
Valve Clearance Adjustment
Camshaft LH
Camshaft RH
Crankshaft Front Seal
Crankshaft Pulley
Crankshaft Rear Seal
Cylinder Head LH
Cylinder Head RH
Engine Mount LH
Engine Mount RH
Exhaust Manifold LH
Exhaust Manifold RH
Flexplate
Oil Cooler
Oil Filter Element
Oil Pan
Oil Pan Extension
Oil Pump
Timing Cover
Timing Drive Components
Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover RH
Cylinder Block Oil Gallery Plug
Fuel Pump Camshaft - Assembly Part Number: INA Timing Drive
Fuel Pump Camshaft - Assembly Part Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Lower Timing Cover
Valves
Removal
Engine
Installation
Engine
303-03C: Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Cooling System Draining and Vacuum Filling
Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Auxiliary Radiator
Coolant Expansion Tank
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud - Vehicles With: Supercharger
Cooling Module - Vehicles With: Supercharger
Coolant Pump - Vehicles With: Supercharger
Radiator (26.40.01) - Vehicles With: Supercharger
Thermostat Housing - Vehicles With: Supercharger
303-03D: Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Component Location
Overview
Radiator
303-04E: Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Fuel Charging and Controls
General Procedures
Fuel Injection Component Cleaning
Fuel Injectors
Fuel Rail LH
Fuel Rail RH
Left-Hand Fuel Rail High-Pressure Fuel Pump
Right-Hand Fuel Rail High-Pressure Fuel Pump
Throttle Body
303-05D: Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Supercharger Belt Idler Pulley
Supercharger Belt Tensioner
303-06C: Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Starting System
Starting System - Vehicles With: Smart Key
Starter Motor
303-07B: Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Engine Ignition
Ignition Coil-On-Plug - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
303-08C: Engine Emission Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Component Location
Overview
Engine Emission Control
303-12D: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
Air Cleaner Element
Air Cleaner LH
Air Cleaner RH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector
Charge Air Cooler
Supercharger
Supercharger Spring Isolator
303-13B: Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Evaporative Emissions
Evaporative Emission Canister
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
303-14D: Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Electronic Engine Controls
General Procedures
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-Test
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor LH
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor RH
Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Engine Oil Level Sensor
Front Knock Sensor (KS) LH
Front Knock Sensor (KS) RH
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Rear Knock Sensor (KS) LH
Rear Knock Sensor (KS) RH
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid LH
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid RH
307: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
307-01B: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Diagnostics
General Procedures
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Input Shaft Seal
Extension Housing Seal
Transmission Control Module (TCM) and Main Control Valve Body
Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter
Transmission Support Insulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Transmission, Transmission Fluid Cooler and Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Transmission and Transmission Fluid Cooler - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
Transmission - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Installation
Transmission - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
307-02B: Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Transmission Cooling
Transmission Fluid Cooler - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
307-05B: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
External Controls
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Knob
Emergency Park Position Release Lever
UpshiftPaddle Switch
Downshift Paddle Switch
309: Exhaust System
309-00C: Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Exhaust System
Catalytic Converter LH
Catalytic Converter RH
Exhaust Sound Enhancement Valve
Exhaust System
Front Muffler
Rear Muffler
310: Fuel System - General Information
310-00: Fuel System - General Information
Specification
General Procedures
Fuel System Pressure Release - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Fuel Tank Draining
Spring Lock Couplings
Quick Release Coupling
Quick Release Coupling - Push Connect
310-01C: Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Fuel Tank and Lines
Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Pump and Sender Unit
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Fuel Rail High-Pressure Fuel Pump Supply Line
310-02: Acceleration Control
Specification
Acceleration Control
Accelerator Pedal
310-03C: Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Speed Control
General Procedures
Speed Control Sensor Adjustment
Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Speed Control Module
Speed Control Sensor
Speed Control Switch
4: Electrical
412: Climate Control System
412-00: Climate Control System - General Information
Specification
Climate Control System
General Procedures
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging (82.30.30)
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Flushing
Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
Electronic Leak Detection
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection
Inspection and Assembly Requirements
Manifold Gauge Set Connection
Refrigerant Oil Adding - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Refrigerant System Tests
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Commissioning
412-01: Climate Control
Specification
Air Distribution and Filtering
Component Location
Overview
Heating and Ventilation
Component Location
Overview
Air Conditioning
Component Location
Overview
Control Components
Component Location
Overview
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Blower Motor
Blower Motor Control Module
Center Registers
Climate Control Assembly
Climate Control Module
Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator
Driver Side Register
Evaporator
Floor Console Register
Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator
Heater Core
Heater Core and Evaporator Core Housing
Instrument Panel Register Trim Panel
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Passenger Side Register
Pollen Filter
Recirculation Blend Door Actuator
Sunload Sensor
Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Desiccant Bag - V6 3.0L Petrol/V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
412-02: Auxiliary Climate Control
Specification
Component Location
Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump
Electric Booster Heater
412-03: Air Conditioning
Specification
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Condenser Core - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Pressure Cutoff Switch (82.10.32)
413: Instrumentation and Warning Systems
413-01: Instrument Cluster
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster Lens
413-06: Horn
Specification
Horn
Horn Switch
413-08: Information and Message Center
Component Location
Overview
Information and Message Center
413-09: Warning Devices
Component Location
Overview
Warning Devices
413-13: Parking Aid
Component Location
Overview
Parking Aid
Proximity Camera
Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor
Parking Aid Camera
Parking Aid Module
Rear Parking Aid Sensor
414: Battery and Charging System
414-00: Battery and Charging System - General Information
Battery Care Requirements
Quiescent Drain
Battery Report Form – In Service Batteries Only
Charging System
414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Battery
General Procedures
Battery Disconnect and Connect
Battery
414-02C: Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Generator - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
415: Information and Entertainment Systems
415-00: Information and Entertainment System - General Information
Navigation System Map Updates
Information and Entertainment System
Cellular Phone
Navigation System
415-01A: Information and Entertainment System
Specification
Audio System
Component Location
Overview
Speakers
Component Location
Overview
Operation andComponent Description
Cellular Phone
ComponentLocation
Overview
System Operationand Component Description
Navigation System
Component Location
Overview
Video System
ComponentLocation
Overview
System Operationand Component Description
Information and Entertainment System
Audio Unit
Audio Unit Antenna Amplifier
Audio and Climate Control Assembly
Front Door Speaker
Information and Entertainment Display
Information and Entertainment Module
Instrument Panel Speaker
Rear Door Speaker
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Subwoofer Amplifier
Subwoofer Speaker
Satellite Radio Tuner
415-01B: Information and Entertainment System - DTC: Audio Input Control Module
Audio Input Control Module
417: Lighting
417-01: Exterior Lighting
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Headlamps
General Procedures
Headlamp Adjustment (86.40.18)
Approach Lamp
Headlamp Assembly
Headlamp Leveling Front Sensor
Headlamp Leveling Rear Sensor
High Mounted Stoplamp
Rear Fog Lamp
Rear Lamp Assembly
Side Turn Signal Lamp
417-02: Interior Lighting
Component Location
Overview
Interior Lighting
417-04: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Overview
418: Electrical Distribution
418-00: Module Communications Network
Overview
Communications Network
Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB)
Central Junction Box (CJB)
418-02: Wiring Harnesses
Wiring Harness
General Procedures
Wiring Harness Repair
Luggage Compartment Lid Wiring Harness
419: Electronic Feature Group
419-01A: Anti-Theft - Active
Component Location
Overview
Anti-Theft - Active
Anti-Theft Alarm Horn (86.52.03)
419-01B: Anti-Theft - Passive
Component Location
Overview
Anti-Theft - Passive
419-05: Telematics
Telematics
419-07: Navigation System
Description and Operation Diagnosis and Testing
Navigation System
Navigation System Antenna (86.62.06)
Navigation System Module (86.62.05)
419-08: Cellular Phone
Bluetooth Module
419-10: Multifunction Electronic Modules
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Driver Door Module (DDM)
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Module
Passenger Door Module (PDM)
Driver Seat Module (DSM)
Passenger Door Module (PDM)
Rear Door Module (RDM)
5: Body and Paint
501: Body and Paint
501-02: Front End Body Panels
Specification
Air Deflector
Cowl Vent Screen (76.10.01)
Engine Rear Undershield
Fender Splash Shield
Hood
Radiator Splash Shield
Secondary Bulkhead Center Panel
Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
501-03: Body Closures
Front Door
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Door Assembly
Luggage Compartment Lid (76.19.01)
Rear Door
501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation
Specification
A-Pillar Trim Panel
B-Pillar Lower Trim Panel
B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel
C-Pillar Lower Trim Panel
C-Pillar Trim Panel
Cowl Side Trim Panel
Engine Cover - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Front Door Trim Panel (76.34.01)
Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Instrument Panel Speaker Grille
Headliner
Loadspace Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Loadspace Trim Panel
Loadspace Trim Panel LH
Loadspace Trim Panel RH
Luggage Compartment Lid Trim Panel
Parcel Shelf
Rear Door Trim Panel
Rear Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Sun Visor (76.10.48)
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror
501-08: Exterior Trim and Ornamentation
Specification
Radiator Grille
Luggage Compartment Lid Moulding
Front Fender Moulding
Rocker Panel Moulding
501-09: Rear View Mirrors
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Rear View Mirrors
Exterior Mirror
Exterior Mirror Cover
Exterior Mirror Glass
Exterior Mirror Motor
Interior Rear View Mirror
501-10: Seating
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Seat Cover Inspection
Seats
Heater Mats
Seats - Vehicles With: Climate Controlled Seats
General Procedures
Seat Smoothing
Front Seat (76.70.01)
Front Seat Backrest (76.70.06)
Front Seat Backrest Cover (76.70.15)
Front Seat Bolster
Front Seat Bolster Pump
Front Seat Cushion Cover
Front Seat Track Motor
Lumbar Assembly
Memory Seat Position Switch
Seat Base
Rear Seat Backrest Cover (76.70.48) (78.90.12)
Rear Seat Cushion (76.70.37)
Front Seat Height Adjustment Motor
Front Seat Control Switch
Front Seat Head Restraint Motor (86.75.17)
Rear Seat Bolster
Front Seat Backrest Cover Trim Panel
501-11: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
Fixed Window Glass
General Procedures
Door Window Motor Initialization
Driver Door Window Control Switch (86.25.03) (86.25.08)
Front Door Window Glass
Front Door Window Regulator and Motor (76.31.45)
Rear Door Fixed Window Glass
Rear Door Window Glass
Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor
Rear Window Glass
Windshield Glass
Door Window Regulator Motor (86.25.04)
501-12: Instrument Panel and Console
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Floor Console
Floor Console Cup Holder
Floor Console Double Cup Holder
Floor Console Side Trim Panel
Glove Compartment
Instrument Panel Console
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel
Overhead Console
501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
Door Lock Cylinder Cover
Exterior Front Door Handle
Exterior Luggage Compartment Lid Release Switch
Exterior Rear Door Handle
Front Door Latch
Front Door Lock Cylinder
Interior Front Door Handle
Luggage Compartment Lid Latch Actuator
Luggage Compartment Lid Lock Cylinder
Rear Door Latch
501-16: Wipers and Washers
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Wipers and Washers
Headlamp Washer Jet
Headlamp Washer Pump
Rain Sensor
Windshield Washer Reservoir
Windshield Wiper Motor
Windshield Wiper Pivot Arm
Windshield Washer Pump
501-17: Roof Opening Panel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Roof Opening Panel
General Procedures
Roof Opening Panel Alignment
Motor Synchronization (76.82.48)
Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose
Roof Opening Panel Frame
Roof Opening Panel Glass
Roof Opening Panel Motor
Roof Opening Panel Rear Drain Hose
Roof Opening Panel Weatherstrip
501-19: Bumpers
Specification
Front Bumper (76.22.08)
Front Bumper Cover
Front Bumper Cover Insert
Rear Bumper Cover
Rear Bumper
501-20A: Safety Belt System
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Safety Belt System
Front Safety Belt Buckle
Front Safety Belt Retractor
Rear Center Safety Belt Retractor
Rear Safety Belt Buckle
Rear Safety Belt Retractor
Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster
501-20B: Supplemental Restraint System
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
General Procedures
Air Bag Disposal
B-Pillar Side Impact Sensor
Clockspring
C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor
Crash Sensor
Driver Air Bag Module
Occupant Classification Sensor
Passenger Air Bag Module
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Side Air Bag Module (76.73.47)
Side Air Curtain Module
501-20C: Pedestrian Protection System
Component Location
Overview
Pedestrian Protection System
Pedestrian Impact Sensor
Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator LH
Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator RH
Pedestrian Protection Module
501-25A: Body Repairs - General Information
Body Repairs
501-25B: Body Repairs - Corrosion Protection
Corrosion Protection
501-25C: Body Repairs - Water Leaks
Water Leaks
501-26: Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks
Body and Frame
501-27: Front End Sheet Metal Repairs
Front End Sheet Metal
Fender Apron Closing Panel Front Section
Fender Apron Panel
Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel
Fender Apron Panel Front Extension
Fender Apron Panel Front Section
Front Bumper Mounting
Front Fender
Front Fender Support Bracket
Front Side Member
Front Side Member and Suspension Top Mount Assembly
Front Side Member Closing Panel
Front Side Member Closing Panel Section
Front Side Member Section
Front Wheelhouse Section
Hood Latch Panel
Hood Latch Panel Mounting Bracket
501-28: Roof Sheet Metal Repairs
Roof
Roof Panel - Vehicles With: Sliding Roof Opening Panel
Roof Panel - Vehicles Without: Sliding Roof Opening Panel
501-29: Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs
Side Panel Sheet Metal
A-Pillar Outer Panel
A-Pillar Reinforcement
B-Pillar Inner Panel
B-Pillar Reinforcement
Front Door Skin Panel
Rear Door Skin Panel
Rocker Panel
Rocker Panel and B-Pillar Outer Panel
Rocker Panel Front Section
Rocker Panel Inner Reinforcement
Rocker Panel Rear Section
501-30: Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs
Rear End Sheet Metal
Back Panel
Quarter Panel
Quarter Panel Lower Extension
Rear Bumper Mounting
Rear Floor Side Extension
Rear Side Member Closing Panel Section
Rear Side Member Section
Rear Wheelhouse Outer
Spare Wheel Well
502: Frame and Mounting
502-00: Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System
Specification
Front Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Rear Subframe Rear Bushing (64.25.36) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Published: 11-May-2011
General Information - About This Manual
Introduction
This manual covers diagnosis and testing and repair procedures.
It is structured into groups and sections, with specific system sections collected together under their relevant group.
A group covers a specific portion of the vehicle. The manual is divided into five groups, General Information, Chassis,
Powertrain, Electrical and Body and Paint. The number of the group is the first number of a section number.
Within Etis, the navigation tree will list the groups. After selecting a group the navigation tree will then list the sections
within that group. Each section has a contents list detailing Specifications, Description and Operation, Diagnosis and Testing,
General Procedures, Disassembly and Assembly, Removal and Installation.
References to LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand)
All LH and RH references to the vehicle are taken from a position sitting in the driver seat looking forward.
Vehicle LH and RH definition
Item Part Number Description

1 - LH
2 - RH
All LH and RH references to the engine are taken from a position at the flywheel looking towards the crankshaft front pulley.
Powertrain LH and RH definition
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 front
2 right
3 rear
4 left
How to use Repair Procedures

This manual has been written in a format that is designed to meet the needs of technicians worldwide. It provides general
descriptions for accomplishing repair work with tested and effective techniques.
Important Safety Instructions
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor vehicles as
well as the personal safety of the individual carrying out the work.
Anyone who departs from the instructions provided in this manual must first establish that personal safety or vehicle integrity
is not compromised by the choice of method, tools or components.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual
WARNING: Warnings are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Cautions are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in damage to the vehicle or
equipment being used.
NOTE: Notes are used to provide additional essential information required to carry out a complete and satisfactory repair.
Generic warnings or cautions are in their relevant description and operation procedure within section 100-00. If the generic
warnings or cautions are required for a procedure, there will be a referral to the appropriate description and operation
procedure.
If a warning, caution or note only applies to one step, it is placed at the beginning of the specific step.
Trustmark Authoring Standards (TAS) Repair Procedur
NOTE: TAS style procedures can be identified by steps that have no accompanying step text and the magenta color of the
electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps or clips.
A TAS removal and installation procedure uses a sequence of color illustrations to indicate the order to be followed when
removing/disassembling or installing/assembling a component.
Many of the TAS procedures will have the installation information within the removal steps. These procedures will have the
following note at the beginning of the procedure:
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
Reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets
The following list details the general policy for the reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets.
Types of self-locking nuts and bolts
NOTE: There are more types of self-locking fasteners available than shown in following illustration.
Item Description
1 Completely coated self-locking bolt
2 Partially coated self-locking bolt
3 Self-locking bolt with a locking washer
4 Self-locking nut with a plastic locking insert
5 Self-locking nut with thread deformation (3 dents)
6 Self-locking nut with thread deformation (squeeze of thread to oval shape)
7 Self-locking nut with integrated locking ring
All types of seals and gaskets must be discarded and new seals and gaskets installed unless otherwise stated within
the procedure.
Nuts and bolts with a chemical coating for locking and/or sealing and/or antiseize must be discarded unless the
procedure advises to reapply the coating with a specified material.
Nuts and bolts with a mechanical locking such as thread inserts, thread deformation or locking washers must be
discarded and new nuts and bolts installed unless otherwise stated within the procedure.
Torque to yield bolts must be discarded and new torque to yield bolts installed unless otherwise stated within the
procedure, recognizable by a tightening torque with more than one stage together with a torque angle.
Specification data
Specification procedures will only contain technical data that is not already part of a repair procedure.
Sequence of tasks
If components must be removed or installed in a specific sequence, the sequence will be identified numerically in a graphic and
the corresponding text will be numbered accordingly.
Special Tools, Equipment, Materials and Torque Figures
Special tools will be shown with the tool numbers in the illustration. The special tool numbers, general equipment, materials
and torque figures used for the procedure step will be shown in the text column.
TAS Graphics
Colors used in the graphic are as follows:
Blue - Component to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled.

Green and Brown - Additional components that need to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled prior to the
target component.
Yellow - Component that is touched or affected in a way but remains in the vehicle. It may be detached, attached,
moved, modified, checked, adjusted etc.
Magenta - Electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps and clips.
Pale Blue - Special tool(s) and general equipment.
One illustration may have multiple steps assigned to it.
Numbered pointers are used to indicate the number of electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps and
clips.
Items in the illustration can be transparent or use cutouts to show hidden details.
TAS Symbols
Symbols are used inside the graphics and in the text area to enhance the information display. The following paragraphs
describe the various types and categories of symbols.
For additional information, refer to: Symbols Glossary (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
Prohibition symbols advise on prohibited actions to either avoid damage or health and safety related risks. These symbols are
Health and Safety symbols recommend the use of particular protection equipment to avoid or at least reduce the risk or
severity of possible injuries.
www.JagDocs.com
Warning symbols are used to indicate potential risks resulting from a certain component or area.
Instruction symbols are used to apply sealer, lubricant, weight, tape or cleaning detergent to a component.
Location symbols are used to show the location of a component or system within the vehicle.
Gearshift lever or selector lever position symbols are used to show which gearshift lever or selector lever position is to be set.
www.JagDocs.com
Pointer symbols are used to draw attention to components and give special instructions such as a required sequence or number
of components. The number of components is reflected by the value inside the luty arrow. A sequence number is located inside
the circle. Numbers inside circles are also used to allocate special information such as tightening torques or chemicals to a
particular component.
Movement arrows are used to show three dimensional or rotational movements. These movements can include specific values
inside the symbol if required.
Standard tool symbols recommend the use of certain standard tools. These tools can include dimension values if required.
The following graphic illustrates a set of symbols that are used to provide detailed information on where to apply a material.
Measurement symbols provide detailed information on where to carry out a specific measurement. These symbols can include
specific values if required.
How to use Diagnosis and Testing procedures

Inspection and Verification
Visual Inspection Charts, Symptom Charts and other information charts (such as diagnostic routines) or supplement test
procedures with technical specifications will navigate the user to a specific test procedure.
Symptom Chart
The symptom chart indicates symptoms, sources and actions to address a condition.
Pinpoint Tests
For electrical systems, pinpoint test steps are used to identify the source of a concern in a logical, step-by-step manner.
Pinpoint tests have two columns: CONDITIONS and DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS.
The CONDITIONS column is used exclusively for graphics and icons (with or without captions) and the DETAILS/RESULTS
/ACTIONS column provides direction to another test step or specific corrective actions.
The boxed numbers indicate the order in which the described action is to be carried out.
Component Tests
A component test is used when a component is tested in multiple pinpoint tests, or if a procedure is too complicated to be
formatted within a single page of the pinpoint test.
Graphics
Test graphics show the measurement or test to be carried out in a test step.
A representative tester graphic is used for voltmeters and ohmmeters.
If multiple measurements are made in a single graphic, the test leads are drawn with a solid line until the test lead splits to
indicate the multiple measurements, at which point dashed lines are used.
Breakout box type testers are represented by a double circle test pin. Test pins are labeled with the pin number.
General Information - Application and Use of Specifications
Torque Specifications
Torque specifications are shown in the torque specifications chart located at the front of the relevant section.
General Information - Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety
Precautions
WARNINGS:
Batteries contain sulphuric acid, avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear safety goggles when working near the
battery to protect against possible splashing of the acid solution.
EYE CONTACT: If acid comes into contact with the eyes, flush immediately with plenty of running water for a minimum of
15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: If acid comes into contact with the skin, flush immediately with plenty of running water for a minimum of
15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
SWALLOWED: If acid is swallowed, rinse the mouth with plenty of water and then drink plenty of water or milk. Do not
induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases. Do not allow naked flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the
battery.
When charging the battery shield your face and wear safety goggles. Provide adequate ventilation.
CAUTION: Boost charging with excessive current or voltage above 16 volts will damage the battery.
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Brake System Health and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
EYE CONTACT: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with the eyes. Wash hands thoroughly
after handling. If brake fluid comes into contact with the eyes, flush the eyes with plenty of cold running water for 15 minutes.
Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. If swallowed, drink plenty of water. Seek immediate
medical attention.
INHALED: Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.
Only use new specified brake fluid from airtight containers.
CAUTION: If brake fluid is spilled on the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately washed down with cold water.
General Information - Diesel Fuel System Health and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Fuel may not give adequate warning before toxic or harmful effects arise.
Exposure to fuel can be harmful and can cause severe health damage or death.
Provide adequate ventilation when working on fuel systems.
Extreme care must be exercised when handling hot fluids. Always wash off spilled fluids from affected areas of skin
immediately.
Fuel must not be used as a cleaning agent.
Keep fuel containers tightly closed, out of direct sunlight and in a cool area. Keep away from heat sources, ignition
sources and oxidizing agents.
SKIN CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the skin and may cause dermatitis due to defatting effect. Remove
contaminated clothing. Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Seek medical attention for any persistent skin
irritation or abnormality. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
SKIN CONTACT: Excessive or prolonged skin contact with diesel fuel may cause serious skin disorders including skin
cancer.
EYE CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the eyes. Flush with plenty of running water, blinking as often as possible. Do
not force the eyelid open. Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Fuel is moderately toxic and tends to foam on vomiting. If drawn into the lungs, inflammation may
develop. Do not induce vomiting. If spontaneous vomiting occurs place the victim in a forward position to reduce the risk of
fuel being drawn into the lungs. Give nothing by mouth. If breathing but unconscious, place in the recovery position. If
breathing has stopped, apply artificial respiration. Seek immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Fuel is toxic to the respiratory and other body systems. Exposure may result in various symptoms including
drowsiness, unconsciousness or severe health damage. Move a victim to fresh air. Keep a victim warm and at rest. If
unconscious, place in the recovery position. If not breathing, apply artificial respiration. Give cardiac massage if necessary.
Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that absolute
cleanliness is observed when working with these components.
Make sure that the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible.
Make sure that non-plated tools are used.
Tools must be cleaned using a new brush and fresh suitable evaporative cleaning agent.
Make sure to use a steel topped workbench covered with clean, lint-free, non-flocking material.
Make sure that all parts removed from the vehicle are placed on the lint-free, non-flocking material.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free, non-flocking material.
Make sure to wear non-powdered latex type gloves.
Make sure to protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking material before using the
suitable evaporative cleaning agent.
NOTE: Soot, discomfort and irritation usually give adequate warning of hazardous fume concentrations.
Published: 28-Dec-2012
General Information - General Service Information
Repairs and Replacements

When service parts are required, it is essential that only genuine Jaguar/Daimler replacements are used.
Attention is drawn to the following points concerning repairs and the installation of replacement parts and accessories:
Safety features embodied in the vehicle may be impaired if other than genuine parts are installed. In certain territories,
legislation prohibits the installation of parts which are not produced to the vehicle manufacturer's specification.
Torque wrench setting figures given in this manual must be strictly adhered to. Locking devices, where specified, must
be installed. If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be renewed.
Owners purchasing accessories while travelling abroad should make sure that the accessory and its installed location on
the vehicle conform to mandatory requirements existing in their country of origin.
The vehicle warranty may be invalidated by the installation of other than genuine Jaguar/Daimler parts. All
Jaguar/Daimler replacements have the full backing of the factory warranty.
Jaguar/Daimler dealers are obliged to supply only genuine service parts.
Vehicle Specifications
Purchasers are advised that the specification details set out in this manual apply to a range of vehicles and not to any specific
one. For the specification of a particular vehicle, purchasers should consult their dealer.
The Manufacturer reserves the right to vary the specifications, with or without notice, and at such times and in such manner as
the Manufacturer thinks fit. Major as well as minor changes may be involved, in accordance with the Manufacturer's policy of
continuous improvement.
Whilst every effort is made to make sure the accuracy of the particulars contained in this manual, neither the Manufacturer nor
the Dealer, by whom the manual is supplied, shall in any circumstances be held liable for any inaccuracy or the consequences
thereof.
Service Repair Operation Numbering

A master index of numbered operations has been compiled for universal application to all vehicles manufactured by Jaguar
Land Rover Limited.
Each operation is allocated a number from the master index and cross-refers with an identical number in the Repair Operation
Times schedule. The number consists of six digits arranged in three pairs.
Each maintenance procedure in this manual is described in the sequence necessary to complete the operation in the minimum
time, as specified in the Repair Operation Times schedule.
References to Bank-1 and Bank-2

References to Bank-1 and Bank-2 are made with regard to the engine. When viewed from the flywheel the right-hand bank will
be Bank-1 and the left-hand bank will be Bank-2.
Special Tools
Any special tools and equipment required to perform a maintenance procedure, are shown at the beginning of each procedure.
When possible, illustrations are given to assist in identifying the tool needed.
Disconnecting/Connecting the Battery

Always stop the engine before disconnecting the battery negative lead and make sure the battery positive lead is isolated i.e.
wrapped in a suitable cloth.
WARNING: Radio code saving devices must not be used when conducting work on Air Bag or Fuel systems. It must be
noted that, when using these devices, the vehicle electrical system is still live albeit with a reduced current flow.
NOTE: Before disconnecting the battery make sure that the radio receiver/cassette player/mini disc player and compact
disc player keycodes are known and, that no data is required from the Engine Control Module (ECM) as battery disconnection
will erase any fault codes and idle/drive values held in the Keep Alive Memory (KAM).
Always disconnect the battery before commencing repair operations which require:
The vehicle to be jacked up

Work on the engine
Work underneath the vehicle
Arc welding
Alternatively a Radio Code Saver may be used, when not working on the Air Bag or Fuel systems. With the battery
disconnected, a Radio Code Saver will allow sufficient current to pass to maintain the radio receiver/cassette player/mini disc
player and compact disc player memory, operate the clock and supply the door operated interior lights while isolating the
battery in the event of a short circuit.
Reconnecting the Battery
WARNING: If the battery has been on bench charge the cells may be giving off explosive hydrogen gas. Avoid creating
sparks, and if in doubt cover the vent plugs or covers with a damp cloth.
Always make sure that all electrical systems are switched OFF before reconnecting the battery to avoid causing sparks or
damage to sensitive electrical equipment.
Always reconnect the battery positive lead first and the negative last, ensuring that there is a good electrical contact and the
battery terminals are secure.
Restart the clock (where installed) and set it to the correct time.
Enter the radio receiver/cassette player/mini disc player and compact disc player keycodes and preset' frequencies, if known.
Following reconnection of the battery, the engine should be allowed to idle until it has reached normal operating temperature
as the stored idle and drive values contained within the ECM have been lost. Allow the vehicle to idle for a further three
minutes. Drive the vehicle at constant speeds of approximately 48 km/h (30 mph), 64 km/h (40 mph), 80 km/h (50 mph), 96
km/h (60 mph) and 112 km/h (70 mph) for three minutes each. This will allow the ECM to relearn idle and drive values, and
may cause driveability concerns if the procedure is not carried out.
Connecting a Slave Battery Using Jump Leads
WARNING: If the slave battery has recently been charged and is gassing, cover the vent plugs or covers with a damp
cloth to reduce the risk of explosion should arcing occur when connecting the jump leads.
CAUTIONS:
A discharged battery condition may have been caused by an electrical short circuit. If this condition exists there will be
an apparently live circuit on the vehicle even when all circuits are switched off. This can cause arcing when the jump leads are
connected.
Whilst it is not recommended that the vehicle is jump started, it is recognized that this may occasionally be the only
practical way to mobilize a vehicle. In such an instance the discharged battery must be recharged immediately after jump
starting to avoid permanent damage.
Always make sure that the jump leads are adequate for the task. Heavy duty cables must be used.
Always make sure that the slave battery is of the same voltage as the vehicle battery. The batteries must be connected
in parallel.
Always make sure that switchable electric circuits are switched off before connecting jump leads. This reduces the risk
of sparks occurring when the final connection is made.
WARNING: Make sure that the ends of the jump leads do not touch each other or ground against the vehicle body at any
time while the leads are attached to the battery. A fully charged battery, if shorted through jump leads, can discharge at a rate
well above 1000 amps causing violent arcing and very rapid heating of the jump leads and terminals, and can even cause the
battery to explode.
Always connect the jump leads in the following sequence.
Slave battery positive first then vehicle battery positive.

Slave battery negative next and then vehicle ground at least, 300 mm (12 in) from the battery terminal e.g. engine
lifting bracket.
www.JagDocs.com
Always reduce the engine speed to idle before disconnecting the jump leads.
Before removing the jump leads, switch on the heater blower (high) or the heated rear screen, to reduce the voltage peak
when the leads are removed.
Always disconnect the jump leads in the reverse order to the connecting sequence and take great care not to short the ends of
the leads.
Do not rely on the generator to restore a discharged battery. For a generator to recharge a battery, it would take in excess of 8
hours continuous driving with no additional loads placed on the battery.
Component Cleaning
To prevent ingress of dirt, accumulations of loose dirt and greasy deposits should be removed before disconnecting or
dismantling components or assemblies.
Components should be thoroughly cleaned before inspection prior to reassembly.
Cleaning Methods:
Dry Cleaning
Removal of loose dirt with soft or wire brushes
Scraping dirt off with a piece of metal or wood
Wiping off with a rag
CAUTION: Compressed air is sometimes wet so use with caution, especially on hydraulic systems.
Blowing dirt off with compressed air (Eye protection should be worn when using this method)
Removal of dry dust using vacuum equipment. This method should always be used to remove friction lining material
dust (asbestos particles)
Steam Cleaning
Calibration of Essential Measuring Equipment
WARNING: Failure to comply may result in personal injury or damage to components.
It is of fundamental importance that certain essential equipment e.g. torque wrenches, multimeters, exhaust gas analysers,
rolling roads etc., are regularly calibrated in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Use of Control Modules

Control modules may only be used on the vehicle to which they were originally installed. Do not attempt to use or test a
control module on any other vehicle.
Functional Test
On completion of a maintenance procedure, a thorough test should be carried out, to ensure the relevant vehicle systems are
working correctly.
Preparation
Before disassembly, clean the surrounding area as thoroughly as possible. When components have been removed, blank off
any exposed openings using grease-proof paper and masking tape. Immediately seal fuel, oil and hydraulic lines when
separated, using plastic caps or plugs, to prevent loss of fluid and the entry of dirt. Close the open ends of oil ways, exposed
by component removal, with tapered hardwood plugs or readily visible plastic plugs. Immediately a component is removed,
place it in a suitable container; use a separate container for each component and its associated parts. Before dismantling a
component, clean it thoroughly with a recommended cleaning agent; check that the agent will not damage any of the materials
within the component. Clean the bench and obtain marking materials, labels, containers and locking wire before dismantling a
component.
Dismantling
Observe scrupulous cleanliness when dismantling components, particularly when parts of the brake, fuel or hydraulic systems
are being worked on. A particle of dirt or a fragment of cloth could cause a dangerous malfunction if trapped in these systems.
Clean all tapped holes, crevices, oil ways and fluid passages with compressed air.
WARNING: Do not permit compressed air to enter an open wound. Always use eye protection when using compressed air.
Make sure that any O-rings used for sealing are correctly reinstalled or renewed if disturbed. Mark mating parts to make sure
that they are replaced as dismantled. Whenever possible use marking materials which avoid the possibilities of causing
distortion or the initiation of cracks, which could occur if a center punch or scriber were used. Wire together mating parts where
necessary to prevent accidental interchange (e.g roller bearing components). Tie labels on to all parts to be renewed and to
parts requiring further inspection before being passed for reassembly. Place labelled parts and other parts for rebuild in
separate containers. Do not discard a part which is due for renewal until it has been compared with the new part, to make sure
that the correct part has been obtained.
Inspection
Before inspecting a component for wear or performing a dimensional check, make sure that it is absolutely clean; a slight
smear of grease can conceal an incipient failure. When a component is to be checked dimensionally against figures quoted for
it, use the correct equipment (surface plates, micrometers, dial gauges etc.) in serviceable condition. The use of makeshift
equipment can be dangerous. Reject a component if its dimensions are outside the limits quoted, or if damage is apparent. A
component may be reinstalled if its critical dimension is exactly to the limit size and it is otherwise satisfactory. Use
Plastigauge 12 Type PG-1 for checking bearing surface clearance, e.g. big end bearing shell to crank journal. Instructions for
the use of Plastigauge and a scale giving bearing clearances in steps of 0,0025 mm (0.0001 in) are supplied with the package.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD)

This vehicle uses programmed electronic control systems to provide engine management and emission regulation, automatic
transmission operation and anti-lock braking control. These control systems are integral with the On-Board Diagnostics (OBD)
facility that is used in conjunction with either the Jaguar approved diagnostic system or the more restricted scan tools.
The OBD information in this manual provides diagnostic and rectification procedures for emission related electrical and
mechanical systems. The information is intended to facilitate fault diagnosis and the subsequent rectification of the vehicle
without recourse to the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
The diagnosis and testing sections within the manual cover:
System principles of operation with links to the relevant Description and Operation sections
Self tests (where appropriate)
Inspection and Verification - manual checks, symptom and Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) driven diagnostic charts with
actions required to rectify concerns
Component tests (where appropriate)
Circuit Diagrams
To understand the relationship between the vehicle electrical system and the system circuit diagrams, Refer to the Electrical
Guide.
In the interest of clarity, single lines may represent multiple wires. Refer to the color code (1st alpha) followed by the wire
reference (numeric/alpha/numeric) to trace origin and destination.
e.g. BW 647B002. BW (black with white trace) 647 (wire reference) B002 (stage from origin).
Glossary of Terms
This glossary of terms is intended to cover mainly emissions-related (to SAE J 1930) terminology, and other abbreviations that
may be used in this manual.
The required term may be looked-up in the left-hand column, and subsequent columns give the standard acronym, unit or
abbreviation, and definition.
Acronym/Unit
Term(s) /Abbreviation Definition
Air Conditioning A/C
Accelerator Pedal Position APP Is a multitrack sensor which inputs the drivers demand into the engine
control module (ECM)
After Bottom Dead Center ABDC Event occurring after bottom dead center
After Top Dead Center ATDC Event occurring after top dead center
Anti-lock Brake System ABS System which prevents wheel lock-up under braking by sensing lack of
rotation of a wheel(s) and diverting fluid pressure away from it (them)
Alternating Current ac
Amplitude Modulation AM
Automatic Temperature Control ATC
Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF
Ampere A SI unit of current
Ampere hour Ah
Barometric Pressure BARO Pressure of surrounding air at any given temperature and altitude
Battery positive voltage B+ The positive voltage from a battery or any circuit connected directly to it
Before Bottom Dead Center BBDC Event occurring before bottom dead center
Before Top Dead Center BTDC Event occurring before top dead center
Bottom Dead Center BDC Lowest point of piston travel in a reciprocating engine
Battery Junction Box BJB
Brake Pedal Position BPP
Brake Horsepower BHP Effective horsepower developed by an engine or motor, as measured by a
brake applied to its output shaft
British Standard BS Standard specification issued by the British Standards Institution
Brake Traction Control System BTCS
Acronym/Unit
Bus Topology of a
communication
network
Coast Clutch Solenoid CCS
Camshaft Position CMP Indicates camshaft position
Carbon dioxide CO² Colorless gas with a density of approximately 1.5 times that of air
Carbon monoxide CO Poisonous gas produced as the result of incomplete combustion
Chlorofluorocarbon CFC
Catalytic converter In-line exhaust system device used to reduce the level of engine exhaust
emissions
Celsius C SI term for the Centigrade scale, with freezing point at zero and boiling
point at 100 degrees
Compact Disc CD
Cylinder Head Temperature CHT Sensor A sensor for measuring the temperature of the cylinder head
Sensor
Central Junction Box CJB
Crankshaft Position CKP Indicates crankshaft position
Clutch Pedal Position CPP Indicates clutch pedal position
Controller Area Network CAN A communication system which allows control modules to be linked
together
Constant Velocity CV
Cubic centimeter cm³
Central Security Module CSM Electronic module to support security system functionality
Data Link Connector DLC Connector providing access and/or control of the vehicle information,
operating conditions, and diagnostic information
Driver Door Module DDM Electronic module to support driver door functionality
Driver Seat Module DSM Electronic module to support driver seat functionality
Daytime Running Lamps DRL
Deutsche Institut fur Normung DIN German standards regulation body
Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC An alpha/numeric identifier for a fault condition identified by the On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD) system
Direct current dc Current which flows in one direction only, though it may have appreciable
pulsations in its magnitude
Domestic Data Bus D2B
Digital Versatile Disc DVD
Electronic Automatic EATC
Temperature Control
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGRT Sensing EGR function based on temperature change
Temperature Sensor
Electronic Brake Force EBD
Distribution
Engine Control Module ECM Electronic module to support engine functionality
Electronic Crash Sensor ECS Sensor to measure severity of impact
Engine Coolant Temperature ECT
Engine Oil Pressure EOP
European On-Board Diagnostic EOBD
Electronic Pressure Control EPC
Electrically Erasable EEPROM
Programmable Read-Only
Memory
Erasable Programmable EPROM
Read-Only Memory
Evaporative Emission EVAP System designed to prevent fuel vapor from escaping into the atmosphere.
Typically includes a charcoal filled canister to absorb fuel vapor
Flash Electrically Erasable FEEPROM
Programmable Read-Only
Memory
Front Electronic Module FEM
Flash Erasable Programmable FEPROM
Read-Only Memory
Frequency Modulation FM
Fuel Pump Driver Module FPDM
Fuel Rail Pressure FRP
Generic Electronic Module GEM
Ground GND Electrical conductor used as a common return for an electrical circuit or
circuits, and with a relative zero potential
Global Positioning System GPS
Global System for Mobile GSM
Communication
Gross Vehicle Weight GVW
Heated Oxygen Sensor HO2S Electrically heated oxygen sensor which induces fuelling corrections
Acronym/Unit
Hydrofluorocarbon HFC
High tension HT
Hydrocarbon HC
Idle Air Control IAC Stepper motor driven device which varies the volume of air by-passing the
throttle to maintain the programmed idle speed
Intake Air Temperature IAT Temperature of intake air
Inertia Fuel Shut-off IFS An inertia system that shuts off the fuel supply when activated by
pre-determined force limits brought about by (e.g.) collision
Input Shaft Speed ISS Indicates input shaft speed
Key On, Engine Off KOEO
Key On, Engine Running KOER
Kilogram (mass) kg
Kilogram (force) kgf
Kilogram force per square kgf/cm²
centimeter
Kilometer km
Kilometer per hour km/h
Kilopascal kPa
Kilovolt kV
Knock Sensor KS Sensor which detects the onset of detonation, and signals the ECM to
retard the ignition
Liquid Crystal Display LCD Optical digital display system, to which applied voltage varies the way the
crystals reflect light, thereby modifying the display
Lighting Control Module LCM
Light Emitting Diode LED
Low Tension LT Primary circuit of the ignition system, linking the battery to the primary
winding in the ignition coil
Left-Hand LH
Left-Hand Drive LHD
Mass Air Flow MAF System which provides information on the mass flow rate of the intake air
to the engine
Manifold Absolute Pressure MAP Absolute pressure of the intake manifold air
Manifold Absolute Pressure and MAPT
Temperature
Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL A required on-board indicator to alert the driver of an emission related
malfunction
Meter (measurement) m
Metric (screw thread, e.g. M8) M
Farad F Unit of electrical capacitance
Millimeter mm
Millimeter of mercury mmHg
Millisecond ms
Model year MY
Newton N SI unit of force. 1 N = 0.2248 pounds force
Newton Meter Nm SI unit of torque. Must not be confused with nm (nanometer)
Negative Temperature NTC
Coefficient
Naturally aspirated N/A Fuelling system using intake air at atmospheric pressure; not
supercharged or turbocharged
Noise, Vibration and Harshness NVH
North American Specification NAS Vehicles for sale in the USA and Canadian markets
On-Board Diagnostic OBD A system that monitors some or all computer input and output control
signals. Signal(s) outside the pre-determined limits imply a fault in the
system or a related system
Oxides of Nitrogen Nox
Oxygen Sensor O2S A sensor which detects oxygen content in the exhaust gases
On-board Refuelling Vapour ORVR
Recovery
Output State Control OSC
Output Shaft Speed OSS
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation PAD
Pulsed Secondary Air Injection PAIR
Passive Anti-Theft System PATS
Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV
Parameter Identification PID An index number referring to a parameter within a module without
knowledge of its storage location
Park/Neutral Position PNP
Pulse Width Modulation PWM
Programmable Electronic PECUS Process whereby a common ECM is programmed on the production line to
Control Units System suit the market requirements of a particular vehicle
Acronym/Unit
Programmable Read-only PROM ROM with some provision for setting the stored data after manufacture
Memory
Portable Support Electronics PSE
Power Steering Pressure PSP
Polytetrafluoroethylene PTFE
Random Access Memory RAM Fast access memory store which is accessible for entry or extraction of
data
Read Only Memory ROM Fast access memory in which data is fixed and may not be changed
Restraints Control Module RCM Electronic module to support functionality of the Supplemental Restraints
System
Radio Data System RDS
Rear Electronic Module REM
Remote Keyless Entry RKE
Right-hand RH
Right-hand drive RHD
Research Octane Number RON
Rear Seat Module RSM Electronic module to support functionality of rear seats
Supercharger SC An intake system which utilizes a supercharger (mechanically driven
device that pressurizes intake air, thereby increasing density of charge air
and the consequent power output from a given displacement)
Serial Communications Link SCL
Standard Corporate Protocol SCP A high-speed, serial communications system linking all body system
control modules. Control messages and data are passed between modules
at up to 786 messages per second
Supplemental Restraints SRS
System
Shift Solenoid SS Controls shifting in an automatic transmission
Seat Control Module SCM Module controlling the seat motor systems (not electric raise/lower-only
seats)
Secondary Air Injection AIR System used for a period of time each time the engine is started, unless
certain temperature criteria are met. Pumps air directly into the exhaust
system which generates extra heat and reduces the time taken for the
catalytic converters to reach operating temperature
Service Repair Operation SRO Number generated by Jaguar Methods & Techniques system which relates
(number) to the time allowed to complete a repair operation. Further information on
the system can be found in the separate Jaguar Publications (for each
model range) entitled 'Repair Operation Times'
Society of Automotive SAE
Engineers
Timing/Coast Clutch Solenoid T/CCS
Torque Converter Clutch TCC
Transmission Control Indicator TCIL
Lamp
Throttle Position TP
Top Dead Center TDC
Transmission Control Module TCM Controls the shifting pattern of the (automatic) transmission
Transmission Control Switch TCS Modifies the operation of electronically controlled transmissions
Transmission Fluid Temperature TFT Indicates temperature of transmission fluid
Transmission Range TR The range in which the transmission is operating
Turbine Shaft Speed TSS Indicates rotational speed of transmission output shaft or turbine shaft
Variable Assist Power Steering VAPS
Variable Camshaft Timing VCT A system by which the relationship of the crankshaft and camshaft may be
altered during engine running
Vehicle Identification Number VIN Number assigned to the vehicle by the manufacturer, primarily for
licensing and identification purposes
Vehicle Speed Sensor VSS Sensor which provides vehicle speed information
Worldwide Diagnostic System WDS Jaguar approved diagnostic system
Wide Open Throttle WOT Full throttle position
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Health and Safety Precautions
The Health and Safety Precautions subsection refers to some commonly used chemicals and materials, hazards associated with
their use, and safety measures to be taken. Some of these chemicals may be included in the following list either in their own
right or as an ingredient in a sealer or adhesive.
Acids and Alkalis

See also Battery Acids.
e.g. caustic soda, sulphuric acid.
Used in batteries and cleaning materials.
Irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, nose and throat. Cause burns. Can destroy ordinary protective clothing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear suitable protective impervious apron, gloves and goggles. Do not breath
mists.
Ensure access to eye wash bottles, shower and soap are readily available for splashing accidents.
Display Eye Hazard sign.
Air Bags
See also Fire, Chemical Materials - General
Highly flammable, explosive – observe No Smoking policy.
Used as a part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), mounted in various positions around the vehicle.
The inflator contains a high-energetic propellant which, when ignited, produces a VERY HOT GAS (2500° C).
The gas generant used in air bags is Sodium Azide. This material is hermetically sealed in the module and is completely
consumed during deployment. No attempt should be made to open an air bag inflator as this will lead to the risk of exposure
to Sodium Azide. If a gas generator is ruptured, full protective clothing should be worn when dealing with the spillage.
After normal deployment, gloves and safety goggles should be worn during the handling process.
Deployed air bags should be disposed of in a plastic bag in accordance with local regulations at an approved chemical waste
site.
Following any direct contact with gas generant.
Wash affected areas thoroughly with water

Seek medical assistance if necessary
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted
before repairing or replacing any SRS components. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery negative
cable and wait for one minute. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTE: The storage, transportation, disposal and/or recycling of air bag modules must be carried out in accordance with all
applicable federal, state and local regulations including, but not limited to, those governing building and fire codes,
environmental protection, occupational health and safety and transportation.
Air Bags - Do's
Do store in an air bag safe when not installed to the vehicle.

Do store modules in an upright position
Do keep modules dry
Do carry modules with the cover side pointing away from the body
Do place modules with their cover side upwards
Do carefully inspect modules for damage
Do stand to one side when connecting modules
Do make sure all test equipment is properly calibrated and maintained
Do wash you hands after handling deployed air bags
Do wear safety glasses when carrying out repairs to the SRS or when handling an air bag module
Only carry out a system test with the air bag modules fully installed
Do inspect the condition of the impact sensor mounting bracket and sensor flylead if the vehicle has been involved in
an impact. Replace if damaged, even if there has been no deployment.
Air Bags - Do Nots
Do not store highly flammable material together with modules or gas generators
Do not store gas generators at temperatures exceeding 80° C
Do not store modules upside down
Do not attempt to open a gas generator housing
Do not expose gas generators to open flame or sources of heat
Do not place anything on top of a module cover
Do not use damaged modules
Do not handle a deployed device or gas generator for at least 20 minutes
Do not probe air bag module electrical connectors or any other SRS component
Air Conditioning Refrigerant

See also Chlorofluorocarbon, Chemical Materials
Highly flammable, combustible – observe No Smoking policy.
Skin contact may result in frostbite.
Instructions given by the manufacturer must be followed. Avoid naked lights, wear suitable protective gloves and goggles.
If refrigerant comes into contact with the skin or eyes, rinse the affected areas with water immediately. Eyes should also be
rinsed with an appropriate irrigation solution and should not be rubbed. SEEK MEDICAL ASSISTANCE IF NECESSARY.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant - Do Nots
Do not expose refrigerant bottles to sunlight or heat

Do not expose refrigerant bottles to frost
Do not drop refrigerant bottles
Do not vent refrigerant to atmosphere under any circumstance
Do not mix refrigerants i.e. R12 (Freon) and R134a
Antifreeze
See also Fire, Solvents.
e.g. isopropanol, ethylene glycol, methanol.
Highly flammable, flammable, combustible.
Used in vehicle coolant systems, brake air pressure systems, screenwash solutions.
Vapors may be given off from coolant antifreeze (glycol) when heated. Avoid breathing these vapors.
Antifreeze may be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities. Antifreeze, if swallowed can be fatal and medical
attention should be sought immediately.
These products must not be used in any cooling or industrial water system which is connected or linked to general, food
preparation or drinking water supplies.
Asbestos
Used in brake and clutch linings, transmission brake bands and gaskets. Jaguar original production and replacement items are
asbestos free.
See also Warning Symbols on Vehicles at the end of this subsection.
Breathing asbestos dust may cause lung damage or, in some cases, cancer.
The use of drum cleaning units, vacuum cleaning or damp wiping is preferred.
Asbestos dust waste should be dampened, placed in a sealed container and marked to make sure safe disposal. If any cutting
or drilling is attempted on materials containing asbestos the item should be dampened and only hand tools or low speed
power tools used.
Battery Acids
See also Acids and Alkalis.
Gases released during charging are explosive. Never use naked flames or allow sparks near charging or recently charged
batteries.
Ensure adequate ventilation.
Brake and Clutch Linings and Pads

See Asbestos.
Brake Fluids (Polyalkylene Glycols)

See also Fire.
Splashes to the skin and eyes may cause irritation. Avoid skin and eye contact as far as possible. Vapor inhalation hazards do
not arise at ambient temperatures because of the very low vapor pressure.
Brazing
See Welding.
Chemical Materials
See also Legal Aspects.
Chemical materials such as solvents, sealers, adhesives, paints, resin foams, battery acids, antifreeze, brake fluids, fuels, oils
and grease should always be used with caution and stored and handled with care. They may be toxic, harmful, corrosive,
irritant or highly flammable and give rise to hazardous fumes and dusts.
The effects of excessive exposure to chemicals may be immediate or delayed; briefly experienced or permanent; cumulative;
superficial; life threatening; or may reduce life-expectancy.
Chemical Materials - Do's
Do carefully read and observe hazard and precaution warnings given on material containers (labels) and in any
accompanying leaflets, posters or other instructions. Material health and safety data sheets can be obtained from
manufacturers
Do remove chemical materials from the skin and clothing as soon as practical after soiling. Change heavily soiled
clothing and have it cleaned
Do organise work practices and protective clothing to avoid soiling of the skin and eyes, and the breathing in of vapors,
aerosols, dusts or fumes
Do wash before breaks, before eating, smoking, drinking or using toilet facilities when handling chemical materials
Do keep work areas clean, uncluttered and free from spills
Do store chemical materials according to national and local regulations
Do keep chemical materials out of the reach of children
Chemical Materials - Do Nots
Do not mix chemical materials except under the manufacturer's instructions; some chemicals can form other toxic or
harmful chemicals, give off toxic or harmful fumes or become explosive when mixed together
Do not spray chemical materials, particularly those based on solvents, in confined spaces e.g. when people are inside a
vehicle
Do not apply heat or flame to chemical materials except under the manufacturer's instructions. Some are highly
flammable and some may release toxic or harmful fumes
Do not leave containers open. Fumes given off can build up to toxic, harmful or explosive concentrations. Some fumes
are heavier than air and will accumulate in confined areas, pits etc.
Do not transfer chemical materials to unlabeled containers
Do not clean hands or clothing with chemicals. Chemicals, particularly solvents and fuels, will dry skin and may cause
irritation leading to dermatitis or be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities
Do not use emptied containers for other materials except when they have been cleaned under supervised conditions
Do not sniff or smell chemical materials. Brief exposure to high concentrations of fumes can be toxic or harmful
Chlorofluorocarbons (CFC)
There is concern in the scientific community that CFCs and Halons are depleting the upper ozone layer which filters out harmful
ultraviolet radiation. Decreased filtration of ultraviolet radiation may result in increases in skin cancer, cataracts and immune
system suppression in humans, as well as decreased productivity of crops and aquatic systems.
CFCs are used primarily as refrigerants in vehicle air conditioning systems and as aerosol propellants. Halons are used as fire
extinguishants.
Jaguar supports worldwide elimination of CFC usage and it is recommended that Company subsidiaries and affiliates should
phase out CFC usage as soon as acceptable substitutes are commercially available.
Clutch Fluids
See Brake fluids.
Clutch Linings and Pads

See Asbestos.
Corrosion Protection Materials

See also Solvents, Fire.
Highly flammable, flammable – observe No Smoking policy.
These materials are varied and the manufacturer's instructions should be followed. They may contain solvents, resins,
petroleum products etc. Skin and eye contact should be avoided. They should only be sprayed in conditions of adequate
ventilation and not in confined spaces.
Cutting
See Welding.
Dewaxing
See Solvents and Fuels (Kerosene).
Dusts
Powder, dusts or clouds may be irritant, harmful or toxic. Avoid breathing dusts from powdery chemical materials or those
arising from dry abrasion operations. Wear respiratory protection if ventilation is inadequate.
Fine dusts of combustible material can present an explosion hazard. Avoid explosive limits and/or sources of ignition.
Electric Shock
Electric shock can result from the use of faulty electrical equipment or from the misuse of equipment in good condition.
Ensure that electrical equipment is maintained in good condition and frequently tested. Faulty equipment should be labelled
and preferably removed from the work station.
Ensure that flexes, cables, plugs and sockets are not frayed, kinked, cut, cracked or otherwise damaged.
Ensure that electrical equipment and flexes do not come into contact with water.
Ensure that electrical equipment is protected by the correct rated fuse.
Never misuse electrical equipment and never use equipment which is in any way faulty. The results could be fatal.
Ensure that the cables of mobile electrical equipment cannot get trapped and damaged, such as in a vehicle hoist.
Ensure that the designated electrical workers are trained in basic First Aid.
In cases of electrocution:
Switch off the power supply before approaching the victim

If this is not possible push or drag the victim from the source of electricity using dry non-conductive material
Commence resuscitation if trained to do so
SUMMON MEDICAL ASSISTANCE
Engine Oils
See Lubricants and Grease.
Exhaust Fumes
These contain asphyxiating, harmful and toxic chemicals and particles such as carbon oxides, nitrogen oxides, aldehydes, lead
and aromatic hydrocarbons. Engines should be run only under conditions of adequate exhaust extraction or general ventilation
and not in confined spaces.
Gasolene (petrol) engine

There may not be adequate warning of odour or of irritation before toxic or harmful effects arise. These may be immediate or
delayed.
Fibre Insulation
See also Dusts.
Used in noise and sound insulation.
The fibrous nature of surfaces and cut edges can cause skin irritation. This is usually a physical and not a chemical effect.
Precautions should be taken to avoid excessive skin contact through careful organization of work practices and the use of
gloves.
Fire
See also Welding, Foams, Legal Aspects.
Many of the materials found on or associated with the repair of vehicles are highly flammable. Some give off toxic or harmful
fumes if burnt.
Observe strict fire safety when storing and handling flammable materials or solvents, particularly near electrical equipment or
welding processes.
Ensure, before using electrical or welding equipment, that there is no fire hazard present.
Have a suitable fire extinguisher available when using welding or heating equipment.
First Aid
Apart from meeting any legal requirements it is desirable for someone in the workshop to be trained in First Aid procedures.
Splashes in the eye should be flushed carefully with clean water for at least ten minutes.
Soiled skin should be washed with soap and water.
Individuals affected by inhalation of gases, fumes etc. should be removed to fresh air immediately. If effects persist, consult a
doctor.
If liquids are swallowed inadvertently, consult a doctor giving the information on the container or label. Do not induce vomiting
unless this action is indicated on the label.
Fluoroelastomer
See Viton.
Foams - Polyurethane
See also Fire.
Used in sound and noise insulation. Cured foams used in seat and trim cushioning.
Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Unreacted components are irritating and may be harmful to the skin and eyes. Wear gloves and goggles.
Individuals with chronic respiratory diseases, asthma, bronchial medical problems, or histories of allergic diseases should not
work in or near uncured materials.
The components, vapors or spray mists can cause direct irritation, sensitivity reactions and may be toxic or harmful.
Vapors and spray mists must not be inhaled. These materials must be applied with adequate ventilation and respiratory
protection. Do not remove the respirator immediately after spraying, wait until the vapor/mists have cleared.
Burning of the uncured components and the cured foams can generate toxic and harmful fumes. Smoking, naked flames or the
use of electrical equipment during foaming operations and until vapors/mists have cleared should not be allowed. Any heat
cutting of cured foams or partially cured foams should be conducted with extraction ventilation.
Freon
See Air Conditioning Refrigerant.
Fuels
See also, Fire, Legal Aspects, Chemicals and Solvents.
Avoid skin contact with fuel where possible. Should contact occur, wash the affected skin with soap and water.
Gasoline (Petrol)
Highly flammable - observe No Smoking policy.
Swallowing can result in mouth and throat irritation and absorption from the stomach can result in drowsiness and
unconsciousness. Small amounts can be fatal to children. Aspiration of liquid into the lungs e.g. through vomiting, is a very
serious hazard.
Gasoline dries the skin and can cause irritation and dermatitis on prolonged or repeated contact. Liquid in the eye causes
severe pain.
Motor gasoline may contain appreciable quantities of benzene, which is toxic upon inhalation, and the concentration of
gasoline vapors must be kept very low. High concentrations will cause eye, nose and throat irritation, nausea, headache,
depression and symptoms of drunkenness. Very high concentrations will result in rapid loss of consciousness.
Ensure there is adequate ventilation when handling and using gasoline. Great care must be taken to avoid the serious
consequences of inhalation in the event of vapor build up arising from spillages in confined spaces.
Special precautions apply to cleaning and maintenance operations on gasoline storage tanks.
Gasoline should not be used as a cleaning agent. It must not be siphoned by mouth. See First Aid.
Gas - oil (Diesel Fuel)

See warnings and cautions in relevant manual sections.
Combustible.
www.JagDocs.com
Gross or prolonged skin contact with high boiling point gas oils may also cause serious skin disorders including skin cancer.
Kerosene (Paraffin)
Used also as heating fuel, solvent and cleaning agent.
Flammable - observe No Smoking policy.
Irritation of the mouth and throat may result from swallowing. The main hazard from swallowing arises if liquid aspiration into
the lungs occurs.
Liquid contact dries the skin and can cause irritation or dermatitis. Splashes in the eye may be slightly irritating.
In normal circumstances the low volatility does not give rise to harmful vapors. Exposure to mists and vapors from kerosene at
elevated temperature should be avoided (mists may arise in dewaxing). Avoid skin and eye contact and make sure there is
adequate ventilation.
Gas Cylinders
See also Fire.
Gases such as oxygen, acetylene, argon and propane are normally stored in cylinders at pressures of up to 13.790 kPa, (2000
lb/in²) and great care should be taken in handling these cylinders to avoid mechanical damage to them or to the valve gear
attached. The contents of each cylinder should be clearly identified by appropriate markings.
Cylinders should be stored in well ventilated enclosures, and protected from ice and snow, or direct sunlight. Fuel gases (e.g.
acetylene and propane) should not be stored in close proximity to oxygen cylinders.
Care should be exercised to prevent leaks from gas cylinders and lines, and to avoid sources of ignition.
Only trained personnel should undertake work involving gas cylinders.
Gases
See Gas Cylinders.
Gaskets (Fluoroelastomer)
See Viton.
General Workshop Tools and Equipment

It is essential that all tools and equipment are maintained in good condition and the correct safety equipment is used where
required.
Never use tools or equipment for any purpose other than that for which they were designed. Never over – load equipment such
as hoists, jacks, axle and chassis stands or lifting slings. Damage caused by overloading is not always immediately apparent
and may result in a fatal failure the next time that the equipment is used.
Do not use damaged or defective tools or equipment, particularly high speed equipment such as grinding wheels. A damaged
grinding wheel can disintegrate without warning and cause serious injury.
Wear suitable eye protection when using grinding, chiselling or sand blasting equipment.
Wear a suitable breathing mask when using abrasive blasting equipment, working with asbestos-based materials or using
spraying equipment.
Ensure adequate ventilation to control dusts, mists and fumes.
High Pressure Air, Lubrication and Oil Test Equipment

See also Lubricants and Greases.
Always keep high pressure equipment in good condition, and regularly maintained, particularly at joints and unions.
Never direct a high pressure nozzle, e.g. diesel injector, at the skin as the fluid may penetrate to the under - lying tissue etc.,
and cause serious injury.
Halon
See CFCs.
Legal Aspects
Many laws and regulations make requirements relating to health and safety in the use and disposal of materials and
equipment in workshops. Some of these laws which apply in the UK are listed. Similar laws exist for other territories:
The Factories Act (1961)

The Asbestos Regulations (1969)
Highly Flammable Liquids and Liquified Petroleum Gases Regulations (1972)
Control of Pollution Act (1974)
Health and Safety at Work Act (1974)
The Classification, Packaging and Labelling of Dangerous Substances Regulations (1978, 1981, 1983, 1984)
Control of Lead at Work Regulations (1980)
Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) Regulations (1989)
Abrasive Wheels Regulations (1970)
Reporting of injuries, diseases and dangerous occurrences regulations 1985 (RIDDOR)
Workshops should be familiar, in detail, with these and associated laws and regulations.
Consult the local factory inspectorate if in any doubt.
Lubricants and Greases

Avoid all prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oils. All lubricants and greases may be irritating to the eyes and skin.
Used Engine Oil

Prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oil will result in the removal of natural oils from the skin, leading to dryness,
irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin cancer.
Adequate means of skin protection and washing facilities must be provided.
Do not employ used engine oils as lubricants or for any application where appreciable skin contact is likely to occur.
There are publications describing the problems and advising on precautionary measures. For the UK a typical Health and Safety
Executive publication is: SHW 397: Cautionary Notice: Effects of mineral oil on the skin.
Health Protection Precautions
Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils
Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable
Do not put oily rags into pockets
Avoid contaminating clothing with oil
Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly
First Aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to enable easier removal of dirty oil and grease from the
skin
Wash with soap and water to make sure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations
containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed
Do not use gasoline (petrol), kerosene (paraffin), diesel fuel (gas oil), thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay
Where practical, degrease components prior to handling
Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, goggles or face shields; in addition an
eye wash facility should be provided
Environmental Precautions
Burning used engine oil in small space heaters or boilers can be recommended only for units of approved design. In the UK the
heating system must meet the requirements of HM Inspectorate of Pollution for small burners of less than 0.4 MW. If in doubt
check with the appropriate local authority and/or manufacturer of approved appliances.
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors or licensed waste disposal sites, or to
the waste oil reclamation trade, batteries should also be disposed off under similar arrangements. If in doubt, contact the
relevant local authority for advice on disposal facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil, antifreeze and automatic transmission fluid on to the ground, down sewers, drains, or into water
courses.
Noise
Some operations may produce high noise levels which could, in time, damage hearing. In these cases, suitable ear protection
must be worn.
Noise Insulation Materials

See Foams, Fibre Insulation.
0-Rings (Fluoroelastomer)
See Viton.
Paints
See also body and paint manual.
See also Solvents, Chemical Materials.

Highly flammable, flammable - observe No Smoking policy
Pressurized Equipment
See High Pressure Air, Lubrication and Oil Test Equipment.
Solder
Solders are a mixture of metals such that the melting point of the mixture is below that of the constituent metals (normally
lead and tin). Solder application does not normally give rise to toxic lead fumes, provided a gas/air flame is used.
Oxy-acetylene flames should not be used, as they are much hotter and will cause lead fumes to be produced.
Some fumes may be produced by the application of any flame to surfaces coated with grease etc. and inhalation of these
should be avoided.
Removal of excess solder should be undertaken with care, to make sure that fine lead dust is not produced, which can give
toxic effects if inhaled. Respiratory protection may be necessary.
Solder spillage and filings should be collected and removed promptly to prevent general air contamination by lead.
High standards of personal hygiene are necessary in order to avoid ingestion of lead or inhalation of solder dust from clothing.
Solvents
See also Chemical Materials, Fuels (Kerosene), Fire.
e.g. acetone, white spirit, toluene, xylene, trichloroethane.
Used in cleaning and de-waxing materials, paints, plastics, resins, thinners etc.
Some may be highly flammable or flammable.
Skin contact will degrease the skin and may result in irritation and dermatitis following repeated or prolonged contact. Some
can be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities.
Splashes in the eye may cause severe irritation and could lead to loss of vision.
Brief exposure to high concentrations of vapors or mists will cause eye and throat irritation, drowsiness, dizziness, headaches
and, in the worst circumstances, unconsciousness.
Repeated or prolonged exposure to excessive but lower concentrations of vapors or mists, for which there might not be
adequate warning indications, can cause more serious toxic or harmful effects.
Aspiration into the lungs (e.g. through vomiting) is the most serious consequence of swallowing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear protective gloves, goggles and clothing if necessary.
Ensure good ventilation when in use, avoid breathing fumes, vapors and spray mists and keep containers tightly sealed. Do not
use in confined spaces.
When spraying materials containing solvents, e.g. paints, adhesive, coatings, use extraction ventilation or personal respiratory
protection in the absence of adequate general ventilation.
Do not apply heat or flame except under specific and detailed manufacturer's instructions.
Sound Insulation
See Fibre Insulation, Foams.
Suspended Loads
CAUTION: Never improvise lifting tackle.
There is always a danger when loads are lifted or suspended. Never work under an unsupported, suspended or raised load e.g.
suspended engine, etc.
Always make sure that lifting equipment such as jacks, hoists, axle stands, slings, etc., are adequate and suitable for the job,
in good condition and regularly maintained.
Transmission Brake Bands

See Asbestos.
Underseal
See Corrosion Protection.
Viton
In common with many other manufacturers' vehicles, some components installed to the Jaguar range have 'O' rings, seals or
gaskets which contain a material known as 'Viton'.
Viton is a fluoroelastomer, that is a synthetic rubber type which contains Fluorine. It is commonly used for 'O' rings, gaskets
and seals of all types. Although Viton is the most well known fluoroelastomer, there are others, including Fluorel and
Tecmoflon.
When used under design conditions fluoroelastomers are perfectly safe. If, however, they are exposed to temperatures in
excess of 400º C, the material will not burn, but will decompose, and one of the products formed is hydrofluoric acid.
This acid is extremely corrosive and may be absorbed directly, through contact, into the body.
'O' rings, seals or gaskets which have been exposed to very high temperatures will appear charred or as a black sticky
substance.
DO NOT, under any circumstances touch them or the attached components.
Enquiries should be made to determine whether Viton or any other fluoroelastomer has been used in the affected 'O' ring, seal
or gasket. If they are of natural rubber or nitrile there is no hazard. If in doubt, be cautious and assume that the material may
be Viton or any fluoroelastomer.
If Viton or any other fluoroelastomers have been used, the affected area should be decontaminated before the commencement
of work.
Disposable heavy duty plastic gloves should be worn at all times, and the affected area washed down using wire wool and a
limewater (calcium hydroxide) solution to neutralize the acid before disposing of the decomposed Viton residue and final
cleaning of the area. After use, the plastic gloves should be discarded carefully and safely.
Welding
See also Fire, Electric Shock, Gas Cylinders.
Welding processes include Resistance Welding (Spot Welding), Arc Welding and Gas Welding (and cutting).
Resistance Welding (Spot Welding)
This process may cause particles of molten metal to be emitted at a high velocity, and the eyes and skin must be protected.
Arc Welding
This process emits a high level of ultraviolet radiation which may cause arc-eye and skin burns to the operator and to other
persons nearby. Gas-shielded welding processes are particularly hazardous in this respect. Personal protection must be worn,
and screens used to shield other people.
CONTACT LENS WEARERS ARE ADVISED TO REVERT TO ORDINARY SPECTACLES WHEN ARC WELDING as the arc spectrum is
believed to emit microwaves which dry out the fluid between the lens and the eye. This may result in blindness when the lens
is removed from the eye.
Metal spatter will also occur, and appropriate eye and skin protection is necessary.
The heat of the welding arc will produce fumes and gases from the metals being welded, the rods and from any applied
coatings or contamination on the surfaces being worked on. These gases and fumes may be toxic and inhalation of these
should be avoided. The use of extraction ventilation to remove the fumes from the working area may be necessary particularly
in cases where the general ventilation is poor, or where considerable welding work is anticipated. In extreme cases or confined
spaces where adequate ventilation cannot be provided, air-fed respirators may be necessary.
Gas Welding (and Cutting)
Oxy-acetylene torches may be used for welding and cutting, and special care must be taken to prevent leakage of these gases,
with consequent risk of fire and explosion.
The process will produce metal spatter and eye and skin protection is necessary.
The flame is bright, and eye protection should be used, but the ultraviolet emission is much less than that from arc welding,
and lighter filters may be used.
The process itself produces few toxic fumes, but such fumes and gases may be produced from coatings on the work,
particularly during cutting away of damaged body parts, and inhalation of the fumes should be avoided.
In brazing, toxic fumes may be produced from the metals in the brazing rod, and a severe hazard may arise if brazing rods
containing cadmium are used. In this event particular care must be taken to avoid inhalation of fumes and expert advice may
be required.
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN BEFORE ANY WELDING OR CUTTING TAKES PLACE ON VESSELS WHICH HAVE
CONTAINED COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS, E.G. BOILING OR STEAMING OUT OF FUEL TANKS.
Warning Symbols on Vehicles

Decals showing warning symbols will be found on various vehicle components.
These decals must not be removed. The warnings are for the attention of owners/operators and persons carrying out service or
repair operations on the vehicle.
The most commonly found decals are reproduced below together with an explanation of the warnings.
1. Components or assemblies displaying the warning triangle and open book symbol advise consultation of the relevant
section of the owners handbook before touching or attempting adjustments of any kind.
2. Components or assemblies displaying the warning triangle with the electrified arrow and open book symbol give
warning of inherent high voltages. Never touch these with the engine running or the ignition switched on. See Electric
Shock in this subsection.
3. Jaguar vehicles and replacement parts which contain asbestos are identified by this symbol. See Asbestos in this
subsection.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Components or assemblies displaying this symbol give warning that the component contains a corrosive substance. See
Acids and Alkalis in this subsection.
5. Vehicles displaying the caution circle with a deleted lighted match symbol, caution against the use of naked lights or
flames within the immediate vicinity due to the presence of highly flammable or explosive liquids or vapors. See Fire in
this subsection.
6. All vehicles with the passenger air bag installed from the factory have a warning sticker attached to the instrument
panel, prohibiting the use of rear facing child seats in the front seating position. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in personal injury.
White Spirit
See Solvents.
Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Working on the fuel system results in fuel and fuel vapor being present in the atmosphere. Fuel vapor is extremely
flammable, hence great care must be taken whilst working on the fuel system. Adhere strictly to the following precautions:
Do not smoke in the work area

Display 'no smoking' signs around the area
Disconnect the battery before working on the fuel system
Do not connect/disconnect electrical circuits, use electrical equipment or other tools or engage in working practices
which in any way may result in the production of sparks
Ensure that a CO² fire extinguisher is close at hand
Ensure that dry sand is available to soak up any fuel spillage
Empty fuel using suitable fire proof equipment into an authorized explosion proof container
Do not empty fuel while working in a workshop or a pit
Ensure that working area is well ventilated
Ensure that any work on the fuel system is only carried out by experienced and well qualified maintenance personnel
Ensure that fume extraction equipment is used where appropriate
Fume extraction equipment must be in operation when solvents are used e.g. Trichloroethane, white spirit, sbp3,
methylene chloride, perchlorethylene. Do not smoke in the vicinity of volatile degreasing agents.
Whenever possible, use a ramp or pit whilst working beneath a vehicle, in preference to jacking. Position chocks at the wheels
as well as applying the parking brake. Never rely on a jack alone to support a vehicle. Use axle stands, or blocks carefully
placed at the jacking points, to provide a rigid location. Check that any lifting equipment used has adequate capacity and is
fully serviceable. Ensure that a suitable form of fire extinguisher is conveniently located. When using electrical tools and
equipment, inspect the power lead for damage and check that it is properly earthed. Disconnect the earth (grounded) terminal
of the vehicle battery. Do not disconnect any pipes of the air conditioning refrigeration system unless you are trained and
instructed to do so. A refrigerant is used which can cause blindness if allowed to come into contact with the eyes. Ensure that
adequate ventilation is provided when volatile degreasing agents are being used.
Adhere strictly to handling and safety instructions given on containers and labels. Keep oils and solvents away from naked
flames and other sources of ignition. Do not apply heat in an attempt to free seized nuts or fittings; as well as causing
damage to protective coatings, there is a risk of damage from stray heat to electronic equipment and brake lines. Do not leave
tools, equipment, spilt oil etc. around the work area. Wear protective overalls and use barrier cream when necessary.
Environmental Protection
In some countries it is illegal to pour used oil onto the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water courses. The burning of
used engine oil in small space heaters or boilers is not recommended unless emission control equipment is installed. Dispose
of used oil through authorized waste disposal contractors, to licensed waste disposal sites or to the waste oil reclamation
trade. If in doubt, contact the Local Authority for advice on disposal facilities.
General Information - How To Use This Manual
Workshop Manual Organization

This manual covers descriptive, diagnostic (including OBD), and repair aspects to service the vehicle effectively.
The manual is arranged in sections, each section dealing with a specific part of a vehicle system. For example, Section 412-03
[Air Conditioning] covers air conditioning, which is part of the climate control system.
The first digit of the section number indicates the group (in the above example this being Electrical). There are five groups:
General Information.
Chassis.
Powertrain.
Electrical. Body
and Paint.
The second and third digits of the section number indicate the vehicle system (12 in the above example being Climate
Control).
The last two digits of the section number indicate the part of the system covered by the section (03 in the example denotes
Air Conditioning).
General Information - Important Safety Instructions
Safety Notice
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor vehicles,
as well as the safety of the person doing the work. This manual provides general directions for accomplishing service and
repair work with tested effective techniques. Following them will help assure reliability.
There are numerous variations in procedures, techniques, tools, and parts for servicing vehicles, as well as in the skill of the
person doing the work. This manual cannot possibly anticipate all such variations and provide advice or cautions as to each.
Accordingly, anyone who departs from the instructions provided in the manual must first establish that neither personal safety
or vehicle integrity is compromised from choices of methods, tools or parts.
General Information - Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and
Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Fuel may not give adequate warning before toxic or harmful effects arise.
Exposure to fuel can be harmful and can cause severe health damage or death.
Extreme care must be exercised when handling hot fluids. Always wash off spilled fluids from affected areas of skin
immediately.
Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may ignite when working on fuel systems. Do not allow naked flames,
sparks or lighted substances to come near fuel related components.
Fuel must not be used as a cleaning agent.
Keep fuel containers tightly closed, out of direct sunlight and in a cool area. Keep away from heat sources, ignition
sources and oxidizing agents.
SKIN CONTACT: Excessive or prolonged skin contact with diesel fuel may cause serious skin disorders including skin
cancer.
SKIN CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the skin and may cause dermatitis due to defatting effect. Remove
contaminated clothing. Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Seek medical attention for any persistent skin
irritation or abnormality. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
EYE CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the eyes. Flush with plenty of running water, blinking as often as possible. Do
not force the eyelid open. Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Fuel is moderately toxic and tends to foam on vomiting. If drawn into the lungs, inflammation may
develop. Do not induce vomiting. If spontaneous vomiting occurs place the victim in a forward position to reduce the risk of
fuel being drawn into the lungs. Give nothing by mouth. If breathing but unconscious, place in the recovery position. If
breathing has stopped, apply artificial respiration. Seek immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Fuel is toxic to the respiratory and other body systems. Exposure may result in various symptoms including
drowsiness, unconsciousness or severe health damage. Move a victim to fresh air. Keep a victim warm and at rest. If
unconscious, place in the recovery position. If not breathing, apply artificial respiration. Give cardiac massage if necessary.
Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that absolute
cleanliness is observed when working with these components.
Make sure that the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible.
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives
WARNING: Always handle all solvents, sealers and adhesives with extreme care. Some contain chemicals or give off
fumes which can be dangerous to health. Always follow the manufacturers instructions. If in doubt about any substance,
particularly a solvent, DO NOT use it.
CAUTION: If in doubt about the suitability of any proprietary solvent or sealer for a particular application, contact the
manufacturer of the product for information regarding storage, handling and application.
The Solvents, Sealers and Adhesives subsection refers to some commonly used chemicals and materials, hazards associated
with their use, and safety measures to be taken.
Adhesives and Sealers

Highly flammable, flammable, combustible – observe No Smoking policy.
Generally should be stored in No Smoking' areas. Cleanliness and tidiness in use should be observed e.g. disposable paper
covering benches; should be dispensed from applicators where possible; containers, including secondary containers, should be
labelled appropriately.
Solvent - based Adhesives/Sealers - See Solvents

Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Water - based Adhesives/Sealers

Those based on polymer emulsions and rubber latexes may contain small amounts of volatile toxic and harmful chemicals. Skin
and eye contact should be avoided and adequate ventilation provided during use.
Hot Melt Adhesives

In the solid state, they are safe. In the molten state they may cause burns and health hazards may arise from the inhalation
of toxic fumes.
Use appropriate protective clothing and a thermostatically controlled heater with a thermal cut - out and adequate extraction.
Resin - based Adhesives/Sealers e.g. Epoxide and Formaldehyde Resin - based

Mixing should be carried out in well ventilated areas, as harmful or toxic volatile chemicals may be released.
Skin contact with uncured resins and hardeners can result in irritation, dermatitis, and absorption of toxic or harmful chemicals
through the skin. Splashes can damage the eyes.
Provide adequate ventilation and avoid skin and eye contact.
Anaerobic, Cyanoacrylate (Super - glues) and other Acrylic Adhesives

Many are irritant, sensitizing or harmful to the skin and/or respiratory tract. Some are eye irritants.
Skin and eye contact should be avoided and the manufacturer's instructions followed.
Cyanoacrylate adhesives (super-glues) MUST NOT contact the skin or eyes. If skin or eye tissue is bonded, cover with a clean
moist pad and seek immediate medical attention. Do not attempt to pull tissue apart. Use in well ventilated areas as vapors
can cause irritation to the nose and eyes.
For two - pack systems see Resin - based and Isocyanate Adhesives/Sealers.
Isocyanate (Polyurethane) Adhesives/Sealers

See also Resin - based Adhesives
Individuals suffering from asthma or respiratory allergies should not work with or near these materials as sensitivity reactions
can occur.
Over exposure is irritating to the eyes and respiratory system. Excessive concentrations may produce effects on the nervous
system including drowsiness. In extreme cases, loss of consciousness may result. Long term exposure to vapor concentrations
may result in adverse health effects.
Prolonged contact with the skin may lead to skin irritation and, in some cases, dermatitis.
Splashes entering the eye will cause discomfort and possible damage.
Any spraying should preferably be carried out in exhaust ventilated booths removing vapors and spray droplets from the
breathing zone.
Wear appropriate gloves, eye and respiratory protection.

Published: 04-Jul-2014
General Information - Standard Workshop Practices
Protecting the Vehicle

Always install covers to protect the fenders before commencing work in the engine compartment. Always install the interior
protection kit, wear clean overalls and wash hands or wear gloves before working inside the vehicle. Avoid spilling hydraulic
fluid, antifreeze or battery acid on the paintwork. In the event of spillage, wash off with water immediately. Use polythene
sheets in the luggage compartment to protect carpets. Always use the recommended service tool, or a satisfactory equivalent,
where specified. Protect temporarily exposed screw threads by replacing nuts or installing caps.
Vehicle in Workshop
When working on a vehicle in the workshop always make sure that:
The parking brake is applied or the wheels are securely chocked to prevent the vehicle moving forwards or backwards
If the engine is to be run, there is adequate ventilation, or an extraction hose to remove exhaust fumes is installed
There is adequate room to jack up the vehicle and remove the wheels, if necessary
Fender covers are always installed if any work is to be carried out in the engine compartment
The battery is disconnected if working on the engine, underneath the vehicle, or if the vehicle is jacked up
CAUTION: When electric arc welding on a vehicle, always disconnect the generator wiring to prevent the possibility of a
surge of current causing damage to the internal components of the generator.
If using welding equipment on the vehicle, ensure a suitable fire extinguisher is readily available.
Screw Threads
Damaged nuts, bolts and screws must always be discarded. Attempting to recut or repair damaged threads with a tap
or die impairs the strength and fit of the threads and is not recommended.
NOTES:
During certain repair operations, it may be necessary to remove traces of thread locking agents using a tap. Where this
is necessary, the instruction to do so will appear in the relevant operation and it is essential that a tap of the correct size and
thread is used.
New Taptite bolts when used cut their own threads on the first application.
Some bolts are coated with a thread locking agent and unless stated otherwise, they must not be reused. New bolts
having the same part number as the original must always be installed. When nuts or bolts are to be discarded, the
repair operation and relevant torque chart will include an instruction to that effect. Do not use proprietary thread
locking agents as they may not meet the specification required. See also Encapsulated ('Patched') Bolts and Screws.
Always make sure that replacement nuts and bolts are at least equal in strength to those that they are replacing.
Castellated nuts must not be loosened to accept a split pin except in recommended cases when this forms part of an
adjustment.
Do not allow oil or grease to enter blind holes, the hydraulic action resulting from tightening the bolt or stud can split
the housing and also give a false torque reading.
Always tighten a nut, bolt or screw to the specified torque figure, damaged or corroded threads can give a false torque
reading.
Nut and bolt loosening and tightening sequences, where given, must ALWAYS be followed. Distortion of components or
faulty sealing of joints will result if the sequences are not followed. Where an instruction is given to tighten in stages,
these stages must be adhered to; do not attempt to combine stages particularly where certain stages involve
tightening by degrees.
To check or re-tighten a fixing to a specified torque, first loosen a quarter of a turn, then retighten to the specified
torque figure.
Unless instructed otherwise, do not lubricate bolt or nut threads prior to installing.
Where it is stated that bolts and screws may be reused, the following procedures must be carried out:
Check that threads are undamaged.

Remove all traces of locking agent from the threads.
CAUTION: DO NOT use a wire brush; take care that threads are not damaged.
Make sure that threads are clean and free from oil or grease.
Apply the specified locking agent to the bolt threads.
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Precautions
WARNING: Do not install rear facing child seats in the front passenger seat.
The SRS contains components which are potentially hazardous to service personnel if not handled correctly. The following
guidelines and precautions are intended to alert personnel to potential sources of danger and emphasise the importance of
ensuring the integrity of the SRS components installed to the vehicle.
WARNING: The following precautions MUST be adhered to when working on the SRS system:
The correct procedures must always be used when working on SRS components.
Persons working on the SRS system must be fully trained and have been issued with the safety guidelines.
The airbag modules contain extremely flammable and hazardous compounds. Contact with water, acids or heavy
metals may produce harmful or explosive results. Do not dismantle, incinerate or bring into contact with electricity
before the unit has been deployed.
Always replace a seat belt assembly that has withstood the strain of a severe vehicle impact or if the webbing
shows signs of fraying.
Always disconnect the vehicle battery before carrying out any electric welding on a vehicle installed with an SRS
system.
CAUTION: Do not expose airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners to temperatures exceeding 85° C (185° F).
It should be noted that these precautions are not restricted to operations performed when servicing the SRS system. The same
care should be exercised when working on ancillary systems and components located in the vicinity of SRS components; these
include but are not limited to:
Steering wheel airbag, rotary coupler.

Passenger front airbag.
Head airbag modules - front and rear.
Seat belt pre-tensioners.
SRS harnesses, link leads and connectors.
Side (thorax) air bags.
Making the system safe
Before working on or in the vicinity of SRS components, make sure the system is rendered safe by performing the following
operations:
Remove the ignition key.

Disconnect battery, earth lead first.
Wait 2 minutes for the SRS power circuit to discharge before commencing work.
NOTE: The SRS uses energy reserve capacitors to keep the system active in the event of electrical supply failure under
crash conditions. It is necessary to allow the capacitors sufficient time to discharge (2 minutes) in order to avoid the risk of
accidental deployment.
Installation
In order to make sure system integrity, it is essential that the SRS system is regularly checked and maintained so that it is
ready for effective operation in the event of a collision. Carefully inspect SRS components before installation. Do not install a
part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation.
WARNING: The integrity of the SRS systems is critical for safety reasons. Make sure the following precautions are always
adhered to:
Do not install accessories or other objects to trim panels which cover ITS airbags.
Never install used SRS components from another vehicle or attempt to repair an SRS component.
When repairing an SRS system, only use genuine new parts.
Never apply electrical power to an SRS component unless instructed to do so as part of an approved test
procedure.
Special fixings are necessary for installing an airbag module – do not use other fixings and make sure that all
fixings are tightened to the correct torque.
Always use new fixings when replacing an SRS component.
CAUTIONS:
Take care not to trap airbag modules when installing interior trim components.
Make sure SRS components are not contaminated by oil or grease.
NOTES:
Following seat belt pre-tensioner deployment, the seat belts can still be used as conventional seat belts but will need to
be replaced as soon as possible to make sure full SRS protection.
If the SRS components are to be replaced, the part number/bar code of the new unit must be recorded.
SRS component testing precautions
The SRS components are triggered using relatively low operating currents, always adhere to the following :
WARNING: Never use a multimeter or other general purpose equipment on SRS components. Use only approved JLR
diagnostic equipment to diagnose system faults.
WARNING: Do not use electrical test equipment on the SRS harness while it is connected to any of the SRS components,
it may cause accidental deployment and injury.
Handling and storage
Always observe the following precautions when handling SRS components:
Never drop an SRS component. The airbag diagnostic control unit is a particularly shock sensitive device and must be
handled with extreme care. Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners could deploy if subjected to a strong shock.
Never wrap your arms around an airbag module. If a module has to be carried, hold it by the cover with the cover
uppermost and the base away from your body.
Never transport airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in the passenger compartment of a vehicle. Always use the
luggage compartment of the vehicle for carrying airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioner units.
Never attach anything to an airbag cover or any trim component covering an airbag module. Do not allow anything to
rest on top of an airbag module.
Always keep components cool, dry and free from contamination.
Never apply grease or cleaning solvents to seat belt pre-tensioner units, component failure could result.
Always store an airbag module with the deployment side uppermost. If it is stored deployment side down, accidental
deployment will propel the airbag module with sufficient force to cause serious injury.
Keep new airbag modules in their original packaging until just prior to installing. Place the old module in the empty
packaging for carriage.
WARNINGS:
When handling an inflatable tubular structure (ITS) airbag module, hold by the gas generator housing, DO NOT hold by
the airbag. Do not wrap the thumb around the gas generator while holding. Do not drape airbag over shoulder or around neck.
For seat buckle type pre-tensioners, hold by the piston tube, with the open end of the piston tube pointing towards the ground
and the buckle facing away from your body. Do not cover the end of the piston tube. DO NOT hold buckle type pre-tensioners
by the bracket assembly or cable. Never point the piston tube towards your body or other people.
Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners are classed as explosive devices. For overnight and longer term storage,
they must be stored in a secure steel cabinet which has been approved as suitable for the purpose and has been registered
with the local authority.
Store airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in a designated storage area. If there is no designated storage area
available, store in the locked luggage compartment of the vehicle and inform the workshop supervisor.
CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag module making it inoperative. If you suspect
the airbag module has been damaged, install a new module and refer to the deployment/disposal procedures for disposal of
the damaged module.
SRS harness and connectors
Always observe the following precautions with regards to SRS system electrical wiring:
Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring.

Never install electrical equipment such as a mobile telephone, two-way radio or in-car entertainment system in such a
way that it could generate electrical interference in the airbag harness. Seek specialist advice when installing such
equipment.
NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by a special yellow outer sleeve protecting the wires (black with yellow stripe
protective coverings are sometimes used).
www.JagDocs.com
WARNING: Always make sure SRS wiring is routed correctly. Be careful to avoid trapping or pinching the SRS wiring.
WARNING: Do not leave the connectors hanging loose or allow SRS components to hang from their harnesses. Look for
possible chafing points.
Side impact crash sensor inspection
After any degree of side body damage, inspect the side impact crash sensors. Replace a crash sensor if there is any sign of
damage.
CAUTION: Take extra care when painting or carrying out bodywork repairs in the vicinity of the crash sensors. Avoid direct
exposure of the crash sensors or link harnesses to heat guns, welding or spraying equipment. Take care not to damage sensor
or harness when reinstalling components.
Rotary coupler
CAUTION: Always follow the procedure for installing and checking the rotary coupler as instructed in the SRS repairs
section. Comply with all safety and installation procedures to make sure the system functions correctly. Observe the following
precautions:
Do not unlock and rotate the rotary coupler when it is removed from the vehicle.
Do not turn the road wheels when the rotary coupler is removed from the vehicle.
Always make sure the rotary coupler is removed and installed in its central position and with the front road wheels in
the straight ahead position - refer to SRS repair section for the correct removal and installation procedure.
If a new rotary coupler is being installed, make sure the locking tab holding the coupler's rotational position is not
broken; units with a broken locking tab must not be used.
Airbag location labels
WAITING AIRBAG LOCATION AND DESIGN LABELS - DUE MARCH - NEIL HARRISON 46404
Airbag and pre-tensioner deployment
WARNING: During deployment parts of the airbag module become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after
deployment before touching the airbag module.
Deployment procedures and precautions as detailed in this manual should be strictly adhered to. Only personnel who have
undergone the appropriate training should undertake deployment of airbag and pre-tensioner modules. The following
precautions must be complied with:
Only use deployment equipment approved for the intended purpose.

Deployment of airbag / pre-tensioner modules must be performed in a well ventilated area which has been designated
for the purpose.
Make sure airbag / pre-tensioner modules are not damaged or ruptured before attempting to deploy.
Where local legislation exists, notify the relevant authorities of intention to deploy airbag and pretensioner units.
When deploying airbag pre-tensioner units, make sure that all personnel are at least 15 metres (45 feet) away from the
deployment zone.
Make sure deployment tool is connected correctly, in compliance with the instructions detailed in the SRS section of this
manual. In particular, make sure deployment tool is NOT connected to battery supply before connecting to airbag
module connector.
When deploying seat belt pre-tensioners, make sure pre-tensioner unit is secured correctly to the seat.
When removing deployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units, wear protective clothing. Use gloves and seal
deployed units in a plastic bag.
Following deployment of any component of the SRS system within the vehicle, all SRS components must be replaced.
DO NOT reuse or salvage any parts of the SRS system.
Do not lean over an airbag module when connecting deployment equipment.
If a vehicle is to be scrapped, undeployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units must be manually deployed. In this case
airbags can be deployed in the vehicle. Before deployment, make sure the airbag module is secure within its correct mounting
position. Deployment of the driver's airbag in the vehicle may damage the steering wheel; if the vehicle is not being scrapped,
deploy the module outside of the vehicle.
SRS Component Replacement Policy

CAUTIONS:
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) will log a crash fault after every impact which is severe enough to cause airbag
deployment. It is possible to have three crashes/impacts logged after one event where, for example, a front, side and
rollover has occurred. After the third fault is logged, the SRS warning lamp will be illuminated and the RCM must be
installed. After any airbag deployment a new RCM must be installed.
The SRS side impact sensor must be replaced if there are any signs of physical damage or if the restraints control module
(RCM) is registering a fault.
The following information details the policy for replacement of SRS components as a result of a vehicle accident.
Impacts which do not deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
Check for structural damage in the area of the impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures, longitudinals and
bracketry.
Impacts which deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
The replacement and inspection policy is dependent on the type and severity of the crash condition. The following guidelines
are the minimum that should be exercised as a result of the deployment of specific SRS components.
Check for structural damage in the area of impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures, longitudinals and
bracketry.
Front Airbag Deployment - Driver and Passenger
CAUTION: If the front airbags are deployed, the following components must be replaced:
Driver airbag module

Passenger airbag module
Fly leads (where applicable) connecting front airbag modules to SRS harness
Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioner
Rear seat belt pre-tensioners - if installed
Driver's seat belt retractor - if installed
Rotary coupler
Any front impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Restraints control module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
Additionally, the following items must be inspected for damage and replaced as necessary:
Front passenger's seat belt retractor and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage point
Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, body anchorage points and tongue latching function
Fascia moulding adjacent to passenger airbag module
Steering wheel
Front seat frames and head restraints
Steering column - if adjustment is lost or if there are signs of collapse
Seat belt height adjusters
Rear seat belts
Side Air Bags
CAUTION: If the side (thorax) air bags are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side of the
vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
Side (thorax) airbag

Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Restraints Control Module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
Front seat belts, retractors and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage points
Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, tongue latching function, and body anchorage points
Front seat frame and head restraints
Door trim casing
Rear seat belts
Head airbag modules
CAUTION: If the head airbag modules are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side of the
vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
Head airbag modules

Link lead between airbag gas generator and restraints control module (RCM) harness
Airbag retaining clips
Internal trim finisher
Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioners
Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Headlining
Component mounting brackets
Adjacent trim components
Rear impacts
CAUTION: If the seat belt pre-tensioners are deployed during a rear impact, the following components must be replaced:
Seat belt pre-tensioners

Front and rear seat belt retractors used during the impact

General Information - Symbols Glossary
Symbols are used inside the graphics and in the text area to enhance the information display.
Movement Symbols
Movement symbols provide detailed information to a required component movement. These component movements can be
rotational or 1-3 dimensional movements.

1 - Minor component movement clockwise/counterclockwise
2 - Major component movement clockwise/counterclockwise
3 - Component movement to the left/right/up/down
4 - Component movement towards/away
5 - 3 dimensional component movement
6 - 2 dimensional component movement
7 3 dimensional component rotation
8 3 dimensional component cycling
Turn Symbols
Turn symbols are used to provide further information on the direction or angle of component turns.
Item Description
1 Turn the component clockwise through 45°
2 Turn the component counterclockwise through 45°
7 Turn the component clockwise through 2 complete turns
8 Turn the component counterclockwise through 2 complete turns
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Wheel Symbols
Steering wheel symbols are used to provide further information to a required steering wheel position or steering column lock
status.
Item Description
1 Steering wheel in straight ahead position
2 Steering column lock locked
3 Steering column lock unlocked
4 Turn the steering wheel to the 90° left position
5 Turn the steering wheel to the 90° right position
6 Turn the steering wheel to the left-hand end position
7 Turn the steering wheel to the right-hand end position
Item Description
1 3, 4, 5-door body style
2 Wagon body style
3 Sports utility vehicle body style
4 Coupe body style
5 Convertible body style
6 Van body style
7 3, 4, 5-door body style - Top View
8 Wagon body style - Top View
9 Underview
10 Right-hand drive (RHD) vehicle
11 Left-hand drive (LHD) vehicle
Gearshift lever and selector lever position symbols
Gearshift lever and selector lever position symbols are used to show the lever position that is required to be selected to carry
out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Set the selector lever to the park (P) position
2 Set the selector lever to the reverse ®) position
3 Set the selector lever to the neutral (N) position
4 Set the selector lever to the drive (D) position
5 Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the park (D) position
6 Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the manual (M) position
7 Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the shift down (-) position
8 Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the shift up (+) position
9 Set the gearshift lever to the neutral (N) position
10 Further gearshift lever positions that may appear in illustrations
Screwdriver symbols
The screwdriver symbols are used to show which screwdriver bit is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Screwdriver
2 Cross bladed screwdriver
3 Flat bladed screwdriver
4 Hexagonal screwdriver
5 TORX screwdriver
www.JagDocs.com
Pliers symbols
The pliers symbols are used to show which pliers is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Combination pliers
2 Side cutter pliers
3 Securing ring pliers - inner
4 Securing ring pliers - outer
5 Hose clamp pliers
6 Locking pliers
7 Long nose pliers
Drill symbols
The drill symbols are used to show which type and size of drill bit is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Drill bit with a specified diameter
2 Hole saw with a specified diameter
3 Stepped drill bit with a specified diameter
4 Tap with a specified diameter
5 Die with a specified diameter
6 Scraper for circular holes
7 Scraper for straight edges
Cutting tool symbols
The cutting tool symbols are used to show which type of cutting tool is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Cutting knife
2 Air body saw
3 Scissors
4 Grinder
5 Jig saw
6 Plasma cutter
7 Sanding Paper
8 Drill through the shown number of body panel layers with a specified diameter
9 Drill through the shown number of body panel layers with a suitable diameter
10 Drill through 1 body panel layer with a specified diameter
11 Drill through 1 body panel layer with a suitable diameter
12 Wire brush
Apply Chemical or load symbols
The apply chemical or load symbols are used to show where to apply which type of chemical or load to carry out a procedure
step.
Item Description
1 Apply a bead from the specified tube
2 Apply a bead from the specified cartridge
3 Apply the specified chemical with a brush
4 Apply the specified load to the specified component
5 Apply a bead with a specific diameter from the specified tube
www.JagDocs.com
6 Apply a bead with a specific diameter from the specified cartridge
7 Apply the specified chemical with a roller
8 Apply hot glue to the specified component
9 Apply the specified amount of fluid from the fluid can
10 Apply fluid from the fluid can
11 Clean the specified component with the specified material
12 Apply a broken bead from the specified tube
13 Apply the specified chemical from a spray can
14 Apply the specified lubricant to the specified component
15 Apply spot welds to the specified component
16 Apply a continuous weld to the specified component
17 Handle the fluid using a syringe
18 Extract the specified amount of fluid using a syringe
Measurement symbols
The measurement symbols are used to show where to measure which type of measurement to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Measure the current using a digital multimeter
2 Measure the voltage using a digital multimeter
3 Measure the resistance using a digital multimeter
4 Measure the length/distance
5 Check that the specified pressure is available using a suitable pressure gauge
6 Measure the pressure at the specified port using a suitable pressure gauge
7 Measure the time using a suitable stopwatch
8 Wait for the specified period of time
9 The specified task requires the specified minimum temperature
10 The specified task requires the specified maximum temperature not to be exceeded
11 The specified task requires the specified temperature range
12 The specified task requires the specified temperature
13 Measure and check for the specified value using a dial indicator gauge
14 Measure and check for the specified MAX value using a dial indicator gauge
15 Measure and check for the specified MIN value using a dial indicator gauge
General equipment symbols
The general equipment symbols are used to show where to use which type of general equipment to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Hot air gun
2 Soldering iron
3 Scraper
4 Scriber
5 Securing strap
6 File with a specified size
7 Center punch
8 Marker
9 Metal inert gas (MIG) welding equipment
10 Hose clamp
11 Interior trim remover
12 Vacuum cleaner
13 Strap wrench
14 Wedge
15 Pin Punch
Material symbols
The material symbols are used to show where to use which type of material to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Remove/Install the specified blind rivet
2 Apply tape to the specified component/area
3 Remove/Install the specified cable tie
www.JagDocs.com
Miscellaneous symbols
These symbols provide further information that is required to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Set the ignition switch to the 0 position
2 Set the ignition switch to the II position
3 The procedure step requires the aid of the specified number of supporting technicians
4 Self contained breathing apparatus
5 General prohibition used in combination with another symbol
6 Do not use power tools
7 Visual check
8 Noise check
9 Dispose the specified component
10 Replaced by item 9 (Dispose the specified component)
11 Set the engine speed to the specified value
12 Fully apply the parking brake lever
13 Fully release the parking brake lever
14 Do not dispose of batteries into the waste bin
15 Visual check using a mirror
16 Area/component must be dry
Mandatory Protective equipment - Health and safety symbols
The protective equipment symbols advise to use a mandatory protective equipment to avoid or at least reduce possible health
and safety risks.
Item Description
1 Wear protective gloves
2 Wear face guard
3 Wear safety goggles
4 Wear ear protectors
5 Wear safety goggles and ear protectors
6 Wear a respirator
Prohibition - Health and safety symbols and component damage
The prohibition symbols are used to prohibit the specified actions to avoid or at least reduce possible component damage and
health and safety risks.
Item Description
1 General prohibition symbol
2 No naked flames
3 No smoking
4 No water
5 Do not touch
6 Do not switch
7 No grinding
Warning symbols - Health and safety and component damage
The warning symbols are used to advise on hazardous conditions to avoid or at least reduce possible component damage and
health and safety risks.
Item Description
1 Hazardous voltage/Electrical shock/Electrocution
2 Fire Hazard/Highly flammable
3 Burn hazard/Hot surface
4 Automatic start-up
5 Toxic
6 Explosive material
7 Battery hazard
8 Corrosive material
9 Lifting hazard
10 Hand crush/Force from above
11 Cutting of fingers or hand
12 Pressure hazard
Control Diagram symbols - Description and Operation procedures
These symbols provide further information on the type of connectivity, direction of flow or type of data bus of a system.
Item Description
1 Mid-speed Controller Area Network (CAN)
2 High-speed Controller Area Network (CAN)
3 Local Interconnect Network (LIN)
4 Wires crossing not connected
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and
Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Only qualified technicians are allowed to work on pyrotechnic components.
INHALED: Exposure to pyrotechnic residue may cause low blood pressure, severe headache, irritation of mucous
membranes, fainting, shortness of breath or rapid pulse. Move a victim to fresh air. Seek immediate medical attention.
EYE CONTACT: Exposure to unburned pyrotechnic residue may cause irritation, burning and etching of the eyes. Flush
immediately with plenty of cold running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
EYE CONTACT: Exposure to burned pyrotechnic residue may cause irritation, burning and etching of the eyes. Flush
immediately with diluted boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: Unburned pyrotechnic residue may be rapidly absorbed through the skin in toxic quantities. Wash
immediately with plenty of soap and water. Seek medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: Burned pyrotechnic residue may be rapidly absorbed through the skin in toxic quantities. Wash with
plenty of water. Do not use soap. Seek medical attention.
SWALLOWED: Unburned pyrotechnic residue is extremely toxic. If conscious drink plenty of water then induce vomiting.
Seek immediate medical attention. If unconscious, or in convulsions do not attempt to induce vomiting or give anything by
mouth. Seek immediate medical attention.
SWALLOWED: Burned pyrotechnic residue is extremely toxic. Drink plenty of water and seek immediate medical attention.
The deployment key must only be accessible to authorized personnel.
Make sure that the deployment key remains removed from the deployment equipment except during deployment.
If permenantly disabling or enabling the passenger air bag a new seat belt for vehicles without or with a passenger air
bag must be installed.
Undeployed pyrotechnic components must not be deployed in the vehicle.
Pyrotechnic components must be deployed following local regulations.
Check thoroughly that no loose objects can be spread during the deployment of pyrotechnic components.
Pyrotechnic components must be transported following local regulations.
Never carry out any electrical measurement on disconnected, undeployed pyrotechnic components.
Pyrotechnic components must not be disassembled.
Pyrotechnic components are not interchangeable between vehicles.
Always carry a live air bag module away from the body with the air bag or trim cover pointing upwards.
Live air bag modules must be placed in a suitable cage when removed from the vehicle. The air bag or trim cover must be
facing upwards.
Do not install a rearward facing child safety seat to the passenger seat with an activated passenger air bag.
CAUTIONS:
Pyrotechnic components must not be subjected to temperatures higher than 110°C.
Never install aftermarket accessories to the vehicle on or adjacent to the supplemental restraint system module.
General Information - Road/Roller Testing
Road or roller testing may be carried out for various reasons and a procedure detailing pre-test checks, through engine starting
and stopping, pre-driving checks, on-test checks to final checks on completion of the test is given in this section.
Unless complete vehicle performance is being checked, the full road test procedure need not be carried out. Instead, those
items particularly relevant to the system/s being checked can be extracted.
Pre - Test Checks
WARNING: If the brake system hydraulic fluid level is low, pedal travel is excessive or a hydraulic leak is found, do not
attempt to road test the vehicle until the reason for the low fluid level, excessive pedal travel or hydraulic leak is found and
rectified.
It is suggested that pre-test checks, and functional tests of those systems/circuits which affect the safe and legal operations
of the vehicle, such as brakes, lights and steering, should always be carried out before the road or roller test.
Engine oil level

Engine coolant level
Tires, for correct pressure, compatible types and tread patterns, and wear within limits
There is sufficient fuel in the tank to complete the test
All around the engine, transmission and under the vehicle for oil, coolant, hydraulic and fuel leaks. Make a note of any
apparent leaks and wipe off the surrounding areas to make it easier to identify the extent of the leak on completion of
the test
Starting the Engine
CAUTION: On initial drive away from cold and within the first 1.5 km (1 mile), do not depress accelerator pedal beyond
half travel until the vehicle has attained a minimum speed of 25 km/h (15 miles/h). Never operate at high engine speed or
with the accelerator pedal at full travel whilst the engine is cold.
With the ignition switched off, check:
The parking brake is applied

The transmission selector lever is in Park
All instrument gauges (except fuel gauge) read zero
With the ignition switched on, check:
Ignition controlled warning lamps come on

Engine coolant temperature gauge registers a reading compatible with the engine coolant temperature
Fuel gauge registers a reading appropriate to the fuel level in the tank
The operation of the parking brake and brake fluid level warning lamps
On Road or Roller Test Check:
CAUTION: If road testing, check the brake operation while still travelling at low speed before continuing with the test. If
the brakes pull to one side, or appear to be otherwise faulty, do not continue with the road test until the fault has been found
and rectified.
Initial gear engagement is smooth

Parking brake control operates smoothly and the parking brake releases quickly and completely
Transmission takes up the drive smoothly, without judder
The engine power output is satisfactory, full power is achieved, acceleration is smooth and pedal operation not stiff or
heavy, and engine speed returns to idle correctly
There is no excessive or abnormally colored smoke from the engine under normal driving, heavy load or overrun
conditions
Steering operation, including power steering, is smooth, accurate, not excessively heavy or with excessive free play or
vibration. Does not pull to one side and self centres smoothly after cornering
Speedometer, oil pressure warning lamp, coolant temperature gauge and tachometer register the correct readings or
operate correctly
Switches and controls operate smoothly and positively, warning lamps operate correctly and the direction indicator
control self cancels when the steering is returned to the straight ahead position
Heating and ventilation systems work correctly and effectively
Brake operation and efficiency
Brake Testing
WARNING: When brake testing, avoid breathing the smoke or fumes from hot brakes, this may contain asbestos dust
which is hazardous to health, see Health and Safety Precautions.
Avoid brake testing on busy roads where it can cause inconvenience or danger to other road users.
CAUTION: Brake testing which includes heavy brake applications should not be carried out with new brake pads/discs or
linings/drums until the components have bedded-in. New brake friction components will not reach full efficiency until the
bedding-in process is complete.
Test the brakes at several speeds within the normal operating range using both light and heavy pedal pressure. Note any
tendency to snatch, pull or drag, and any undue delay in application or release.
Allow the vehicle to coast and note any tendency to pull to one side, or evidence that the brakes are binding.
After stopping the vehicle (not immediately after a period of heavy braking), carefully check the brake temperature. A disc
which feels hot, or appreciably hotter than the others, indicates that the brake is binding.
After completion of the test, check for:
Oil, coolant, hydraulic, air and fuel leaks

Abnormal temperature of any moving components or assemblies, e.g. wheel hubs, transmission, axle etc., which might
indicate over tightness or lack of lubrication
General Information - Window Glass Health and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Cured polyurethane (PU) adhesive can degrade if subjected to high temperatures. Isocyanide compounds can be released
when grinding or welding in close proximity to cured PU adhesive.
SKIN CONTACT: Prolonged exposure to polyurethane (PU) adhesive may cause skin irritation. If PU adhesive comes into
contact with the skin, remove any contaminated clothing. Immediately wash the skin with soap and water. Seek medical
attention for any persistent skin irritation or abnormality.
EYE CONTACT: Polyurethane (PU) adhesive may cause severe irritation or damage. If PU adhesive comes into contact with
the eyes, immediately flush eyes with plenty of running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
SWALLOWED: If polyurethane (PU) adhesive is swallowed, flush the mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Provide
rest, warmth and fresh air. Seek immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Persons having a respiratory allergy may have an allergic reaction when handling polyurethane (PU) adhesive.
INHALED: Polyurethane (PU) adhesive can cause asthma like symptoms. Isocyanate vapor from primer or PU adhesive can
cause allergies in the respiratory tract.
INHALED: If polyurethane (PU) adhesive fumes are inhaled, move victim to fresh air. Provide oxygen if necessary. If
breathing stops, provide artificial respiration. Keep a victim warm and at rest. Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the direct glazing for bonded glass cutting blades are changed where the cutting depth changes to avoid
damage to the body and trim panels.
During the curing period of the PU adhesive, the door windows must be left open to avoid a build up of pressure when the
doors are opened and closed.
www.JagDocs.com
Published: 17-Apr-2014
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Adaptive
Damping Module (SUMB)
Adaptive Damping Module (SUMB)
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle
NOTES:
If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the scan tool to
the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information read by the
manufacturer-approved diagnostic system)
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places and with a
current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into account
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion
If diagnostic trouble codes are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent
concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
Where an 'on demand self-test' is referred to, this can be accessed via the 'diagnostic trouble code monitor' tab on the
manufacturers approved diagnostic system
Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required
he table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the adaptive damping module, for additional
diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section
For additional information, refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Diagnosis and Testing).
DTC Description Possible Causes Action

C101D-12 Left Front
vertical Left Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front
acceleration acceleration sensor vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to power or
sensor - Short circuit short to power another circuit. Repair circuit, clear the DTC and retest the
to power system
C101D-14 Left Front

vertical Left Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front vertical
acceleration acceleration sensor acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open circuit. If
sensor - Short circuit short to no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace sensor, clear
to ground, open ground, open circuit DTC and retest the system
circuit Vertical acceleration
sensor fault
C101D-22 Left Front

vertical Left front vertical With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Left Front Vertical
acceleration acceleration sensor Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to 2.1
sensor - Signal insecurely mounted volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts, loose
amplitude > Left front vertical connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then suspect
maximum acceleration sensor faulty sensor/incorrectly fitted sensor. Check the sensor is
signal circuit short to correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as required. Refer
another circuit to the new module/component installation note at the top of
Left front vertical the DTC Index, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
C101D-26 Left Front

vertical Left front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Left Front
acceleration acceleration sensor Vertical Accelerometer signal circuit for faults, if circuit is
sensor - Signal signal circuit short to correct suspect faulty sensor, refer to the new
rate of change another circuit module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
below threshold Left front vertical Index. Replace the sensor, clear the DTC and retest the
acceleration sensor system
internal fault
C101D-78 Left Front

vertical Left front vertical Check Left Front Vertical Accelerometer for location and
acceleration acceleration sensor security, if correct suspect faulty Accelerometer, refer to the
sensor - bracket bent new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
Alignment or Left front vertical Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
adjustment acceleration sensor retest the system
incorrect damaged
C101E-12 Right Front

vertical Right Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
to power system

vertical Right Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
acceleration acceleration sensor vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open
sensor - Short circuit short to circuit. If no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace
to ground, open ground, open circuit sensor, clear DTC and retest the system
sensor fault

vertical Right front vertical With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Right Front
acceleration acceleration sensor Vertical Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to
sensor - Signal insecurely mounted 2.1 volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts,
amplitude > Right front vertical loose connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then
maximum acceleration sensor suspect faulty sensor/incorrectly fitted sensor. Check the
signal circuit short to sensor is correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as
another circuit required. Refer to the new module/component installation
Right front vertical note at the top of the DTC Index, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault

vertical Right front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Front
below threshold Right front vertical Index. Replace the sensor, clear the DTC and retest the
internal fault

vertical Right front vertical Check Right Front Vertical Accelerometer for location and
Alignment or Right front vertical Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
incorrect damaged
C1024-00 System
Temporarily Loss of power to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power and
Disabled Due To control module whilst ground circuits to Adaptive Damping Control Module for
Power driving intermittent or poor connection. Repair wiring circuits as
Interruption required, clear DTC and retest the system
During Driving -
No sub type
information
C1030-12 Left Rear
vertical Left Rear vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear
to power system
C1030-14 Left Rear
vertical Left rear vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear
acceleration acceleration sensor vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open
sensor - Short circuit short to circuit. If no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace
to ground, open ground, open circuit sensor, clear DTC and retest the system
sensor fault
C1030-22 Left Rear

vertical Left Rear vertical With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Left Rear Vertical
acceleration acceleration sensor Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to 2.1
sensor - Signal insecurely mounted volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts, loose
amplitude > Left Rear vertical connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then suspect
maximum acceleration sensor faulty sensor/incorrectly fitted sensor. Check the sensor is
signal circuit short to correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as required. Refer
another circuit to the new module/component installation note at the top of
Left Rear vertical the DTC Index, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
C1030-26 Left Rear

vertical Left Rear vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Left Rear
below threshold Left Rear vertical Index. Replace the sensor, clear the DTC and retest the
internal fault
C1030-78 Left Rear

vertical Left Rear vertical Check Left Rear Vertical Accelerometer for location and
Alignment or Left Rear vertical Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
incorrect damaged
C1A03-12 Left Front

Height Sensor - Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Left
Circuit short to shorted to another Height Sensor circuit for short to power, If circuit correct
power cable suspect Sensor internal fault, replace as required
Height sensor internal
fault
C1A03-14 Left Front

Height Sensor - Wiring to sensor Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
Circuit short to (signal) open circuit connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water
ground or open Wiring to height ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at Control
sensor partial short to Module. A: Check for short circuits between any of the 3
ground terminals and vehicle ground. B: Check for electrical continuity
Wiring to height between the two connectors for each of the 3 terminals.
sensor short to other Reconnect electrical connector at Control Module only. C:
cable Check voltages at terminals within height sensor connector
Height sensor internal (sensor not connected), with respect to vehicle body. •
electrical fault Voltage to sensor ground connection should be ~0v • Voltage
to sensor signal connection should be ~0v • Voltage to sensor
supply connection should be ~5v All voltages should be within
± 0.15v
C1A03-21 Left Front

Height Sensor - Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height
Signal amplitude not connected sensor fixings were slackened or found to be loose or if a
< minimum Height sensor or height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be
bracket loose re-calibrated. Confirm that the correct height sensor part
Height sensor bracket number is fitted, as specified in the service parts database.
bent To check height sensor: Disconnect electrical connector to
Incorrect height height sensor and inspect connecter pins & terminals for
calibration evidence of corrosion or water ingress. If no corrosion found,
Height sensor linkage disconnect harness at Control Module. A: Check for short
toggled circuits between any of the 3 terminals and vehicle ground. B:
Height sensor water Check for electrical continuity between the two connectors for
ingress each of the 3 terminals. Reconnect electrical connector at
Wiring to height Control Module only. C: Check voltages at terminals within
sensor partial short to height sensor connector (sensor not connected), with respect
ground to vehicle body. • Voltage to sensor ground connection should
Wiring to height be ~0v • Voltage to sensor signal connection should be ~0v •
sensor short to other Voltage to sensor supply connection should be ~5v All
cable voltages should be within ± 0.15v. To check sensor operation
Height sensor on the vehicle: Check for water ingress around the height
electrical fault sensors, electrical connectors or shaft end. Check for
Height sensor linkage excessive movement in the shaft in all directions. Raise
bent vehicle (ideally on wheels-free ramp) until suspension on
Incorrect height corner under investigation is at rebound to gain access to
sensor fitted height sensor. Access may be improved by removing road
wheel. Carefully disconnect the height sensor link from the
upper suspension arm. Monitor the height sensor signal
voltage output for the height sensor under investigation.
Position the sensor arm so it is in the mid position and
confirm that the voltage is around 2.5 volts. Move the sensor
arm over the range ±40° around the mid position and confirm
that the voltage changes smoothly between around 0.2 volts
and 4.8 volts. If voltages are incorrect or do not change
smoothly then replace sensor. NOTE: For angles of movement
beyond ±40°, the sensor signal will clamp to a voltage of
~0.15v or ~4.85v, depending on position of sensor lever. This
is normal. When investigation is complete, refit height sensor
link to upper arm. If any fixings to the height sensor body or
mounting bracket were slackened or found to be loose or if a
height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be
re-calibrated. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual for the calibration procedure
C1A03-22 Left Front

> maximum Height sensor or height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be
C1A03-76 Left Front

Height Sensor - Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
Wrong mounting calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
position
C1A03-78 Left Front
Alignment or calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
adjustment
incorrect
C1A04-12 Right Front
Height Sensor - Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Right
fault

± 0.15v


www.JagDocs.com

position
adjustment
incorrect
C1A05-12 Left Rear Height
Sensor - Circuit Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Left
short to power shorted to another Height Sensor circuit for short to power, If circuit correct
cable suspect Sensor internal fault, replace as required
fault

Sensor - Circuit Wiring to sensor Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
short to ground (signal) open circuit connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water
or open Wiring to height ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at Control
± 0.15v

Sensor - Signal Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height
amplitude < not connected sensor fixings were slackened or found to be loose or if a
minimum Height sensor or height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be

Sensor - Signal Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height
amplitude > not connected sensor fixings were slackened or found to be loose or if a
maximum Height sensor or height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be

Sensor - Wrong Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
mounting calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
position
Sensor - Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
adjustment
incorrect
C1A06-12 Right Rear
Height Sensor - Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Right
fault
C1A06-14 Right Rear

± 0.15v
C1A06-21 Right Rear

C1A06-22 Right Rear

C1A06-76 Right Rear

position
C1A06-78 Right Rear
adjustment
incorrect
C110C-01 Left Front
Damper Left front damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Left
Solenoid - solenoid circuit fault damper solenoid circuit for faults, If no faults are evident
General suspect a faulty control module, refer to the new module
electrical failure installation note at the top of the DTC Index
C110C-18 Left Front

Damper Front Left Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Left
Solenoid - Actuator open circuit Damper Solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
Circuit current at startup should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms
below threshold
C110C-19 Left Front
Solenoid - Solenoid circuit Damper Solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
Circuit current current above should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms
above threshold threshold
C110C-14 Left Front

Damper Left front damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Solenoid - Short solenoid circuit - short the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
to ground, open to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check left front damper solenoid
circuit Left front damper circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and install a
failure new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110C-1D Left Front

Damper Left front damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Solenoid - solenoid circuit - short the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Circuit current to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check left front damper solenoid
out of range circuit circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check and
Left front damper install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy
failure and procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110C-64 Left Front

Solenoid - Solenoid Measured Damper Solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
Signal Current control loop should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms
plausibility failed
failure Front Left Damper
Solenoid open circuit
C110D-01 Right Front
Damper Right front damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Right

Damper Front Right Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Right
below threshold

Damper Right front damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
to ground, open to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check Right front damper
circuit Right front damper solenoid circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and
failure install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110D-1D Right Front

Damper Right front damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Circuit current to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check Right front damper
out of range circuit solenoid circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check
Right front damper and install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty
failure policy and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect

plausibility failed
failure Front Right Damper
C110E-01 Left Rear

Damper Left Rear damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Left
C110E-18 Left Rear

Damper Rear Left Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Left
below threshold
C110E-19 Left Rear
C110E-14 Left Rear

Damper Left Rear damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
to ground, open to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear damper solenoid
circuit Left Rear damper circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and install a
failure new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110E-1D Left Rear

Damper Left Rear damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Circuit current to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear damper solenoid
out of range circuit circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check and
Left Rear damper install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy
failure and procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110E-64 Left Rear

www.JagDocs.com
plausibility failed
failure Rear Left Damper
C110F-01 Right Rear

Damper Right Rear damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Right
Electrical Failure installation note at the top of the DTC Index
C110F-18 Right Rear

Damper Rear Right Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Right
below threshold
C110F-19 Right Rear
C110F-14 Right Rear

Damper Right Rear damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
to ground, open to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Rear damper
circuit Right Rear damper solenoid circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and
failure install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy
C110F-1D Right Rear

Damper Right Rear damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Circuit current to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Rear damper
out of range circuit solenoid circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check
Right Rear damper and install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty
failure policy and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
C110F-64 Right Rear

plausibility failed
failure Rear Right Damper
C1B14-1C Sensor Supply

Voltage A - Out Left Front Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor
of range Sensor or Right Front supply for circuit fault. Check all height sensors. Check
Height Sensor or Left module sensor supply output voltage measured voltage
Rear Height Sensor or should be between 4.995 volts and 4.85 volts
Right Rear Height
Sensor supply partial
short to other circuit
or ground
Left Front Height
Sensor or Right Front
Height Sensor or Left
Rear Height Sensor or
Right Rear Height
Sensor internal failure
Internal control
module failure
C1B15-1C Sensor Supply

Voltage B - Out Left Front Vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor
of range Acceleration Sensor or supply for circuit fault. Check all Vertical Acceleration Sensors.
Right Front Vertical Check control module sensor supply output voltage Measured
Acceleration Sensor or voltage should be between 4.995 volts and 4.85 volts
Left Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor or
Right Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor
supply partial short to
other circuit or
ground. Left Front
Vertical Acceleration
Sensor or Right Front
Sensor or Left Rear
Sensor or Right Rear
Sensor supply partial
short to other circuit
or ground
Left Front Vertical
Right Front Vertical
Left Rear Vertical
Right Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor
internal failure
Internal control
module failure
U0001-88 High speed CAN

communication Lost Communication Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
bus - Bus off With Engine Control electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit for faults,
Module (ECM) (CAN check CAN circuits for open circuits or shorts to power, ground
Bus circuit fault) or other circuits
U0100-00 Lost
Communication Missing message from Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With ECM/PCM A ECM electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus for circuit fault
- No sub type
information
U0101-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to
with TCM - No with Transmission the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus for circuit
sub type control module (TCM) fault
information (CAN Bus circuit fault)
U0103-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Gear Shift Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With Gear Shift With Gear Shift electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus for circuit faults
Control Module Module (GSM) (CAN
A - No sub type Bus circuit fault)
information
U0121-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Anti lock Brake System Control Module for stored DTCs.
With Anti-Lock With Anti-Lock Brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus
Brake System System (ABS) Control circuit to Anti lock Brake System Control Module for circuit
(ABS) Control Module (CAN Bus faults
Module - No sub circuit fault)
type information
U0132-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Air Suspension Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to
With Suspension With Air Suspension the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit to Air
Control Module Control Module (CAN Suspension Control Module for circuit faults
A - No sub type Bus circuit fault
information
U0136-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Rear Differential Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer
With Differential With Rear Differential to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus circuit to
Control Module - Control Module (CAN Rear Differential Control Module for circuit faults
Rear - No sub Bus circuit fault)
type information
U0140-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Body Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With Body With Body Control electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit to Body
Control Module - Module (Front Smart Control Module for faults
No sub type Junction Box) (CAN
information Bus circuit fault)
U0142-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Rear Smart Junction Box for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With Body with rear smart electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus circuit to Rear
Control Module junction box (CAN Bus Smart Junction Box for faults
B - No sub type circuit fault)
information
U0155-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Instrument Panel Cluster for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With Instrument With Instrument Panel electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus to Instrument
Panel Cluster Cluster (IPC) Control Panel Cluster for circuit fault
(IPC) Control Module (CAN bus
Module - No sub circuit fault)
type information
U0300-00 Internal control
module software CAN master Check Front Smart Junction Box vehicle configuration file,
incompatibility - configuration ID check part number of adaptive damping control module
No sub type incorrect
information
U0401-68 Invalid Data
Received from Invalid Data Received Check Engine Control Module for DTCs. Refer to the relevant
ECM/PCM A - from Engine Control DTC index
Event Module
information
Received from Invalid Data Received Check for Transmission Control Module DTCs. Refer to relevant
TCM - Event from Transmission DTC index
information control module

Received from Invalid data received Check Gear Shift Control Module for DTCs. Refer to the
Gear Shift from gear shift control relevant DTC index
Control Module module
A - Event
information
Received From Invalid Data Received Check for Anti lock Brake System DTCs. Refer to the relevant
Anti-Lock Brake From Anti-Lock Brake DTC index
System (ABS) System (ABS) Control
Control Module - Module
Event
information
Received from Invalid Data Received Check Air Suspension Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to
Suspension From Air Suspension the relevant DTC index
Control Module Control Module
A - Event
information
Received From Invalid Data Received Check Body Control Module (Front Smart Junction Box) for
Body Control From Body Control stored DTCs. Refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - Event Module (Front Smart
information Junction Box)

Received From Invalid Data Received Check Rear Differential Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer
Differential From Rear Differential to the relevant DTC index
Control Module - Control Module
Rear - Event
information
Received From Invalid Data Received Check rear smart junction box for DTCs and refer to relevant
Body Control From body control DTC index
Module B - module B (Rear Smart
Event Junction Box)
information
U1A14-00 CAN
initialization CAN network harness Refer to circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit for fault
failure - No sub short, disconnected (short to power, ground or open circuit)
type information
U2100-00 Initial
Configuration Car Configuration Install car config to Front Smart Junction Box. Clear DTC and
Not Complete - Data not loaded (New retest systems
No sub type Body Control Module
information (Front Smart Junction
Box) fitted to vehicle
and not initialized)
Internal Body Control
Module (Front Smart
Junction Box) failure
U2101-00 Control Module

Configuration Car Configuration Carry out the new module software installation procedure
Incompatible - Data transmitted over
No sub type CAN does not match
information adaptive damping
control module
internal config
U3000-01 Control module -
General General electrical Check integrity of electrical connectors and pins to module.
Electrical Failure failure Check damper negative circuits for short to Ground. Refer to
the new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
Install a new Adaptive Damping Control Module
U3000-04 Control Module -

System Internal Module Internal Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check all damper
Failure failure solenoid circuits for short to power. If no harness faults are
found suspect adaptive damping control module. Install a new
module, refer to new module installation note at top of DTC
Index

Special memory Module Internal Suspect Adaptive Damping Control Module internal failure.
failure failure Install a new module, refer to the new module/component
installation note at the top of the DTC Index

Program memory Module Internal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power and
failure failure ground circuit for fault. Clear DTC turn off ignition, wait 1
minute. Turn on ignition, check for DTCs. If DTC returns
suspect Adaptive Damping Control Module internal failure.
Install a new module, refer to the new module/component

Watchdog / Module Internal If this DTC is logged contact your local in-market support
safety Micro Failure
controller failure
Not activated Adaptive Damping Install the latest software / Carry out the new-module
Control Module has (software) install procedure
been replaced and not
programmed

Missing Adaptive damping Install the latest software / Carry out the new-module
calibration control module has (software) install procedure
been replaced and no
software is installed
U3003-1C Battery voltage

- Circuit voltage Circuit voltage out of Check the battery is in good condition and fully charged, refer
out of range range (Supply Voltage to the battery care manual. Refer to the starting and charging
at adaptive damping section of the workshop manual and check the performance of
control module < the charging system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
10.5v or Supply and check power and ground circuit to adaptive damping
Voltage at adaptive control module for faults, including intermittent high
damping control resistance
module > 18v for 30s)
U3003-62 Battery Voltage

- Signal compare High Resistance Check the battery is in good condition and fully charged, refer
failure Connections to the battery care manual. Refer to the starting and charging
Adaptive Damping section of the workshop manual and check the performance of
Control module the charging system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Internal Failure and check power and ground circuit to adaptive damping
control module for faults, including intermittent high
resistance
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Anti-Lock
Braking System (ABS)
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the anti-lock braking system module, for
additional diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Diagnosis
and Testing).

C0021-09 Brake Booster
Performance - No vacuum available from Check integrity of brake booster vacuum hose.
Component Failures engine due to split/leaking Check and install a new brake booster as required
hose etc
Brake booster servo has
failed due to lack of vacuum
C0030-38 Left Front Tone

Wheel - Signal Left front magnetic pulse Check the left front magnetic pulse ring for damage
frequency incorrect ring damaged/contaminated or contamination. Clean or replace as required. If no
Incorrect component damage/contamination found, suspect wheel speed
installed sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
Sensor internal fault manual if a module/component is suspect. To
validate the repair and extinguish the lamps, the
vehicle needs to be driven above 9mph/15kph for
more than 10 seconds
C0031-12 Left Front Wheel

Speed Sensor - Electrical wiring harness Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Short to battery fault wheel speed sensor circuit for short to power. Repair
Sensor internal fault harness as required. If no harness fault found,
suspect wheel speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedures manual if a
www.JagDocs.com
module/component is suspect

Circuit short to fault wheel speed sensor circuit for short to ground or
ground or open Sensor internal fault open circuit. Repair harness as required. If no
harness fault found, suspect wheel speed sensor.
Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual
if a module/component is suspect

Signal fault wheel speed sensor circuit for partial or
shape/waveform Sensor internal fault intermittently grounded signal circuit. Repair
failure harness as required. If no harness fault found,
module/component is suspect. To validate the repair
and extinguish the lamps, the vehicle needs to be
driven above 9mph/15kph
C0031-2F Left Front Wheel

Signal erratic fault wheel speed sensor circuit for intermittent short to
Sensor internal fault power, ground or open circuit. Repair harness as
required. If no harness fault found, suspect wheel
speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
Procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect. To validate the repair and extinguish the
lamps, the vehicle needs to be driven above
9mph/15kph

Speed Sensor - No Electrical wiring harness Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
signal fault wheel speed sensor circuit for open circuit or high
Magnetic pulse ring resistance. Check connectors for damage or
de-magnetised or damaged corrosion. Check the wheel speed sensor for correct
Sensor internal fault location and contamination. Check the magnetic
pulse wheel for contamination, damage or
de-magnetisation. Clean or replace the sensor or
wheel bearing as required. Refer to the Warranty

Signal compare fault wheel speed sensor circuit for intermittent short to
failure Sensor internal fault power, ground or open circuit. Repair harness as
9mph/15kph

Speed Sensor - Incorrect wheels/tyres Check the correct wheels and tyres are installed.
Signal plausibility installed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
failure Electrical wiring harness wheel speed sensor circuit for intermittent short to
fault power, or ground. Check for EMC influences on the
EMC influences on left front speed sensor and circuits. Check magnetic pulse
wheel speed sensor and wheel for damage/contamination and
supply line de-magnetisation. Repair Wiring harness, install a
Magnetic pulse wheel new sensor or wheel bearing as required. Refer to
damaged/contaminated, the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
de-magnetised module/component is suspect
Sensor internal fault
C0032-11 Left Front wheel

Speed Sensor Electrical wiring harness Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Supply - Circuit fault wheel speed sensor circuit for short to ground.
short to ground Sensor internal fault Repair harness as required. If no harness fault
found, suspect wheel speed sensor. Refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
C0033-38 Right Front Tone
Wheel - Signal Right front magnetic pulse Check the right front magnetic pulse ring for
frequency incorrect ring damaged/contaminated damage or contamination. Clean or replace as
Incorrect component required. If no damage/contamination found,
installed suspect wheel speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty
Sensor internal fault Policy and Procedures manual if a
driven above 9mph/15kph for more than 10 seconds
C0034-12 Right Front Wheel



C0034-2F Right Front Wheel

9mph/15kph


9mph/15kph

EMC influences on right front speed sensor and circuits. Check magnetic pulse
supply line de-magnetisation. Repair wiring harness, install a

C0036-38 Left Rear Tone

Wheel - Signal Left rear magnetic pulse ring Check the left rear magnetic pulse ring for damage
frequency incorrect damaged/contaminated or contamination. Clean or replace as required. If no
Incorrect component damage/contamination found, suspect wheel speed
installed sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
Sensor internal fault manual if a module/component is suspect. To
validate the repair and extinguish the lamps, the
vehicle needs to be driven above 9mph/15kph for
more than 10 seconds
C0037-12 Left Rear Wheel



C0037-2F Left Rear Wheel

9mph/15kph

9mph/15kph

EMC influences on left rear speed sensor and circuits. Check magnetic pulse
supply line de-magnetisation. Repair Wiring harness, install a

C0039-38 Right Rear Tone

Wheel - Signal Right rear magnetic pulse Check the right rear magnetic pulse ring for damage
frequency incorrect ring damaged/contaminated or contamination. Clean or replace as required. . If
Incorrect component no damage/contamination found, suspect wheel
installed speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
Sensor internal fault Procedures manual if a module/component is
9mph/15kph for more than 10 seconds
C003A-12 Right Rear Wheel



C003A-2F Right Rear Wheel

9mph/15kph
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Audio
Amplifier Module (AAM)
Audio Amplifier Module (AAM)
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
If a control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component.
manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places, and with
an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into
account.
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion.
If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may be the
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Audio Amplifier Module (AAM). For
additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00 Information and Entertainment System -
General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1A01-11 Speaker #1 - Circuit
short to ground Front left tweeter or Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
mid-range speaker tweeter speaker circuit for short to ground
circuit - Short to
ground

short to battery Front left tweeter or Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
mid-range speaker tweeter speaker circuit for short to power
circuit - Short to
power

open Front left tweeter or Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
mid-range speaker tweeter speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit - Open circuit
B1A01-1A Speaker #1 - Circuit

resistance below Front left tweeter or Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold mid-range speaker using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
circuit - Resistance
below threshold
www.JagDocs.com
B1A01-49 Speaker #1 - Internal
electronic failure Internal electronic Suspect the audio amplifier module, check and install a
failure new module as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index

short to ground Front right tweeter or Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
mid-range speaker tweeter speaker circuit for short to ground
circuit - Short to
ground

short to battery Front right tweeter or Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
mid-range speaker tweeter speaker circuit for short to power
circuit - Short to
power

open Front right tweeter or Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
mid-range speaker tweeter speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit - Open circuit

resistance below Front right tweeter or Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold mid-range speaker using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
circuit - Resistance
below threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Front left woofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
speaker circuit - Short woofer speaker circuit for short to ground
to ground

short to battery Front left woofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
speaker circuit - Short woofer speaker circuit for short to power
to power

open Front left woofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
speaker circuit - Open woofer speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit

resistance below Front left woofer Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold speaker circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Resistance below
threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Front right woofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
speaker circuit - Short woofer speaker circuit for short to ground
to ground

short to battery Front right woofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
speaker circuit - Short woofer speaker circuit for short to power
to power

open Front right woofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
speaker circuit - Open woofer speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit
resistance below Front right woofer Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Resistance below
threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Rear left speaker Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
circuit - Short to speaker circuit for short to ground
ground

short to battery Rear left speaker Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
circuit - Short to speaker circuit for short to power
power

open Rear left speaker Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
circuit - Open circuit speaker circuit for open circuit

resistance below Rear left speaker Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold circuit - Resistance using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
below threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Rear right speaker Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
circuit - Short to speaker circuit for short to ground
ground

short to battery Rear right speaker Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
circuit - Short to speaker circuit for short to power
power

open Rear right speaker Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
circuit - Open circuit speaker circuit for open circuit

resistance below Rear right speaker Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold circuit - Resistance using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
below threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Rear left surround Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
speaker circuit - Short surround speaker circuit for short to ground
to ground

short to battery Rear left surround Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
speaker circuit - Short surround speaker circuit for short to power
to power

open Rear left surround Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
speaker circuit - Open surround speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit
resistance below Rear left surround Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Resistance below
threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Rear right surround Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
speaker circuit - Short surround speaker circuit for short to ground
to ground

short to battery Rear right surround Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
speaker circuit - Short surround speaker circuit for short to power
to power

open Rear right surround Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
speaker circuit - Open surround speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit

resistance below Rear right surround Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Resistance below
threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Center speaker circuit Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check center
- Short to ground speaker circuit for short to ground

short to battery Center speaker circuit Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check center
- Short to power speaker circuit for short to power

open Center speaker circuit Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check center
- Open circuit speaker circuit for open circuit

resistance below Center speaker circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold - Resistance below using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Left subwoofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left
speaker circuit - Short subwoofer speaker circuit for short to ground
to ground

short to battery Left subwoofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left
speaker circuit - Short subwoofer speaker circuit for short to power
to power

open Left subwoofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left
speaker circuit - Open subwoofer speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit
resistance below Left subwoofer Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Resistance below
threshold
B1A10-49 Speaker #10 -

Internal electronic Internal electronic Suspect the audio amplifier module, check and install a
failure failure new module as required, refer to the new
DTC Index

short to ground Right subwoofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right
speaker circuit - Short subwoofer speaker circuit for short to ground
to ground

short to battery Right subwoofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right
speaker circuit - Short subwoofer speaker circuit for short to power
to power

open Right subwoofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right
speaker circuit - Open subwoofer speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit

resistance below Right subwoofer Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Resistance below
threshold
B1A11-49 Speaker #11 -

Internal electronic Internal electronic Suspect the audio amplifier module, check and install a
failure failure new module as required, refer to the new
DTC Index
U2003-98 Fibre Optic

Communication Bus - Component or system Clear DTC and allow system to cool, monitor for
Component or system over temperature re-occurrence of DTC
over temperature
System programming Software Re-configure the audio amplifier as an existing control
failures incompatibility module, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
The version of the system
Local Configuration
file does not match
that expected

General memory General memory Re-configure the audio amplifier as an existing control
failure failure module, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear DTC, cycle ignition and read DTCs. If DTC
returns, suspect audio amplifier module and install a
new module. Refer to the new module/component
U3000-44 Control module - Data

memory failure Data memory failure Re-configure the audio amplifier as an existing control
module, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear DTC, cycle ignition and read DTCs. If DTC
returns, suspect audio amplifier module and install a
new module. Refer to the new module/component
U3000-55 Control Module - Not

configured Incorrect car Check/up-date Car Configuration File using manufacturer
configuration data approved diagnostic system
received

Missing message Missing message Check CJB for DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Check
information and entertainment module for Car
Configuration File and MOST network DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC Index. Carry out MOST/CAN network tests
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U3003-16 Battery Voltage -
Circuit voltage below Circuit voltage below Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system

Circuit voltage above Circuit voltage above Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Blind Spot
Monitoring System Module (SODL/SODR)
Blind Spot Monitoring System Module (SODL/SODR)
guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component.
manufacturer approved diagnostic system).
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three decimal places,
and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads into
account.
If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may be the
Where an 'on demand self-test' is referred to, this can be accessed via the 'DTC Monitor' tab on the manufacturers
approved diagnostic system.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Blind Spot Monitoring System Module, for
additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Warning Devices (413-09 Warning Devices, Diagnosis and Testing).

B11C9-11 Driver Display Status
LED - Circuit short to Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground driver display status LED circuit for short to
ground
B11C9-15 Driver Display Status

LED - Circuit short to Circuit short to power or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery or open open circuit driver display status LED circuit for short to
ground
B11D6-11 Driver Display Alert LED -

Circuit short to ground Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
driver display status LED circuit for short to
ground
B11D6-15 Driver Display Alert LED -

Circuit short to battery Circuit short to power or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open open circuit driver display status LED circuit for short to
ground
U0010-00 Medium Speed CAN

Communication Bus - No No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
sub type information the power and ground connections to the module.
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the CAN network
U0140-00 Lost Communication

With Body Control No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Module - No sub type the power and ground connections to the module.
information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
the CAN network between the Central Junction
Box and Blind Spot Monitoring System Module

With Instrument Panel No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Cluster (IPC) Control the power and ground connections to the module.
Module - No sub type Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
the CAN network between the Instrument Cluster
and Blind Spot Monitoring System Module

With Blind Spot CAN bus circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Monitoring System Harness fault between left the power and ground connections to the module.
Module - Left - No sub side mirror and left side Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
type information module system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
the CAN network between the left Blind Spot
Monitoring System Module and the right Blind
Spot Monitoring System Module
the left side harness between the left side mirror
and left hand module

With Blind Spot CAN bus circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Monitoring System Harness fault between the power and ground connections to the module.
Module - Right - No sub right side mirror and right Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
type information side module system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
the CAN network between the left Blind Spot
Monitoring System Module and the right Blind
Spot Monitoring System Module
the right side harness between the right side
mirror and right hand module
U0300-00 Internal Control Module

Software Incompatibility No sub type information Check Central Junction Box for related DTCs and
- No sub type refer to the relevant DTC Index. Check Restraints
information Control Module for related DTCs and refer to DTC
Index. Check correct components are installed
and that the latest software version is installed
U0415-68 Invalid Data Received

From Anti-Lock Brake Event information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
System (ABS) Control system check the central junction box and the
Module - event anti-lock brake system (ABS) control module for
information related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index

From Body Control Event information Check the Central Junction Box for related DTCs
Module - Event and refer to the relevant DTC index
information
U2100-00 Initial Configuration Not
Complete - No sub type Car Configuration File Check/amend Car Configuration File using
information information not received manufacturer approved diagnostic system
completely

Configuration Car Configuration File Check/amend Car Configuration File using
Incompatible - No sub information incompatible manufacturer approved diagnostic system
type information to Control module
U3000-44 Control Module - Data

memory failure Control module data Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
memory failure the power and ground circuits to the component.
Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual if a module is suspect
Watchdog/safety Control module internal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
microcontroller failure watchdog/safety the power and ground circuits to the component.
MicroController failure Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
U3000-49 Control Module - Internal

electronic failure Control module internal Clear DTC, cycle ignition and retest. If fault
electronic failure (internal persists, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
error) and check the power and ground circuits to the
component. Repair as required, clear DTC and
retest
If fault persists, check and install a new
blindspot monitoring control module as required.
U3003-62 Battery Voltage - Signal

compare failure Mis-match in battery Check the module connector for security and
voltage, between Central integrity. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Junction Box and Blind and check the Control module supply voltage.
Spot Monitoring System Check vehicle battery voltage and state of
module, of 2 volts or more charge. Check the power signal line to the
module
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Central
Junction Box (CJB)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Central Junction Box (CJB). For additional
diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).

B00D5-11 Restraint System
Passenger Disable PAD lamp supply circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Indicator - Circuit short to ground PAD lamp supply circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Indicator - Circuit short to power PAD lamp supply circuit for short to power
short to battery
Indicator - Circuit open circuit PAD lamp supply circuit for open circuit
open
B1009-51 Ignition Authorisation
- Not programmed Faulty instrument cluster Check ignition, power and ground supplies to CJB
Target SID and instrument cluster. Re-synchronize ID by
re-synchronisation error re-configuring the instrument cluster as a new
following programming module. Check CAN communications between
CAN fault instrument cluster and tester

- Signal compare Low speed CAN fault Check CAN communications between CJB and
failure CJB fault instrument cluster. Check ignition, power and
Instrument cluster fault ground supplies to CJB and instrument cluster.
Incorrect module installed Confirm correct module is installed.
(CJB/Instrument cluster) Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the
Target SID synchronisation instrument cluster as a new module. Check CAN
error following network for interference/EMC related issues
re-programming
Noise/EMC related error

- Circuit/component CJB fault Check Power and Ground supplies to CJB and
protection time-out Low speed CAN fault instrument cluster. Check CAN communications
Instrument cluster fault between CJB and instrument cluster. Check
Low battery voltage <9V battery is in fully charged and serviceable
condition, refer to the battery care manual

- Signal plausibility CJB fault Check power and ground supplies to CJB and
failure Low speed CAN fault instrument cluster. Check CAN communications
Instrument cluster fault between CJB and instrument cluster
B102B-67 Passive Key - Signal

incorrect after event CJB fault Check power and ground supplies to CJB and RKE
Low speed CAN fault module. Check CAN communications between CJB
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and RKE module. Re-synchronise ID by
module fault re-configuring the RKE module as a new module
Write target SID
synchronisation error
following re-programming
B102B-87 Passive Key - Missing

message CJB fault Check power and ground supplies to CJB, RKE
Low speed CAN fault module and receiver. Check CAN communications
RKE module fault between CJB and instrument cluster. Check key
Key fob battery low/battery fob battery. Confirm vehicle surroundings, move
contact issue vehicle. Check CAN network for interference/EMC
Interference from other RF related issues. Disconnect battery, then
signal re-connect - confirm operation by re-programming
EMC/noise keys. Check serial circuit between receiver and
Receiver fault RKE module. Confirm spare key works. Refer to
Receiver not programmed the electrical circuit diagrams and test circuits to
correctly all 3 antennas. Check whereabouts of key
Serial communications fault
(between receiver and RKE
module)
Key fault
Passive antenna fault
Confirm placement of key
within vehicle
B1084-13 Boot/Trunk Motor

Close Switch - Circuit Trunk latch open signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open circuit - open circuit trunk latch open signal circuit for open circuit
B1087-83 LIN Bus "A" - Value of

signal protection Checksum of the received Check operation of rain/light sensor by covering
calculation incorrect LIN frame from battery sensor or applying water to screen, install a new
backed sounder, roof header sensor as required
console, and/or rain/light
sensor is incorrect
B1087-88 LIN Bus "A" - Bus off

Bus off. Battery backed Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
sounder, roof header DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
console, and/or rain/light system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor LIN circuit - short to and check battery backed sounder, roof header
ground, power console, and rain/light sensor LIN circuit for short
to ground, power
B108A-11 Start Button - Circuit

short to ground Start/Stop switch analogue Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
input circuits 1 or 2 - short Start/Stop switch analogue input circuits 1 and 2
to ground for short to ground
B108A-12 Start Button - Circuit

short to battery Start/Stop switch analogue Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
input circuits 1 or 2 - short Start/Stop switch analogue input circuits 1 and 2
to power for short to power
B1095-12 Wiper On/Off Relay -

Circuit short to battery Wiper On/Off relay control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuit - short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check wiper On/Off relay control circuit for
www.JagDocs.com
short to power
B1095-14 Wiper On/Off Relay -

Circuit short to ground Wiper On/Off relay control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open circuit - short to ground, wiper On/Off relay control circuit for short to
open circuit ground, open circuit
B1096-12 Wiper High/Low Relay

- Circuit short to Wiper Fast/Slow relay Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery control circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
power system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check wiper Fast/Slow relay control circuit for
short to power
B1096-14 Wiper High/Low Relay

- Circuit short to Wiper Fast/Slow relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground or open control circuit - short to wiper Fast/Slow relay control circuit for short to
ground, open circuit ground, open circuit
B1097-12 Heated Windshield

Relay - Circuit short to Heated windshield relay Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
and check heated windshield relay control circuit
for short to power
B1097-14 Heated Windshield

Relay - Circuit short to Heated windshield relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground or open control circuit - short to heated windshield relay control circuit for short to
ground, open circuit ground, open circuit
B10A6-12 Main Light Switch -

Circuit short to battery Master light switch signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
from roof header console master light switch signal from roof header
circuit - short to power console circuit for short to power

Signal stuck low Master light switch signal Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
from roof header console DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
signal stuck low. Switch is system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
read as ON for too long a and check master light switch signal from roof
time header console for short to ground
B10AD-09 Rain Sensor -

Component failures Component failures Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Suspect the rain/light sensor, check and
install a new sensor as required
B10AD-11 Rain Sensor - Circuit

short to ground Rain/light sensor power Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuit - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check rain/light sensor power circuit for short
to ground
B10AD-96 Rain Sensor -

Component internal Component internal failure Suspect the rain/light sensor, check and install a
failure new sensor as required
B10E5-11 PCM Wake-up Signal -

Circuit short to ground ECM wake-up signal circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to ground ECM wake-up signal circuit for short to ground

Circuit short to battery ECM wake-up signal circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to power ECM wake-up signal circuit for short to power

Circuit open ECM wake-up signal circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open circuit ECM wake-up signal circuit for open circuit
B10F1-11 Key In Switch - Circuit

short to ground Keyless vehicle module, key Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
IN status circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check keyless vehicle module, key IN status
circuit for short to ground
short to battery Keyless vehicle module, key Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
IN status circuit - short to keyless vehicle module, key IN status circuit for
power short to power

open Keyless vehicle module, key Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
IN status circuit - open keyless vehicle module, key IN status circuit for
circuit open circuit
B10F2-11 Sunroof Control -

Circuit short to ground Sunroof enable signal circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check sunroof enable signal circuit for short
to ground

Circuit short to battery Sunroof enable signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
- short to power sunroof enable signal circuit for short to power

Circuit open Sunroof enable signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
- open circuit sunroof enable signal circuit for open circuit
B10F3-11 Left Front Position

Light - Circuit short to Left front side lamps circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ground short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check left front side lamps circuit for short to
ground
B10F3-15 Left Front Position

Light - Circuit short to Left front side lamps circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery or open short to power, open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check left front side lamps circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B10F4-11 Right Front Position

Light - Circuit short to Right front side lamps circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ground - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check right front side lamps circuit for short
to ground
B10F4-15 Right Front Position

Light - Circuit short to Right front side lamps circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery or open - short to power, open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check right front side lamps circuit for short
to power, open circuit
B10F8-12 Accessory socket 'A'

relay - Circuit short to Accessory socket 'A' relay Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
and check accessory socket 'A' relay control circuit
for short to power
B10F8-14 Accessory socket 'A'

relay - Circuit short to Accessory socket 'A' relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground or open control circuit - short to accessory socket 'A' relay control circuit for short
ground, open circuit to ground, open circuit
B10F9-12 Accessory socket 'B'

relay - Circuit short to Front powerpoint, trailer tow Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery connector, road pricing front powerpoint, trailer tow connector, road
connector, sunblind power pricing connector, sunblind power supply circuits
supply circuits - short to for short to power
power

relay - Circuit short to Front powerpoint, trailer tow Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground or open connector, road pricing front powerpoint, trailer tow connector, road
connector, sunblind power pricing connector, sunblind power supply circuits
supply circuits - short to for short to ground, open circuit
ground, open circuit
relay - No operation Front powerpoint, trailer tow Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
connector, road pricing DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
connector, sunblind power system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
supply circuits - short to and check front powerpoint, trailer tow connector,
power, ground, open circuit road pricing connector, sunblind power supply
circuits for short to power, ground, open circuit
B10FA-93 Delayed Power Off

relay - No operation ADRC ECM, roof header Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
console lamp, glove box DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
lamp , RH/LH footwell system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
lamps, JAG Sense glove box and check ADRC ECM, roof header console lamp,
module, RH/LH sunvisor glove box lamp , RH/LH footwell lamps, JAG
lamps, rear dome lamps Sense glove box module, RH/LH sunvisor lamps,
switched power circuits - rear dome lamps switched power circuits for short
short to power, open circuit to power, open circuit
B10FF-11 Ignition control -

Circuit short to ground ECM and FPDB ignition Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
control circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check ECM and FPDB ignition control circuit
for short to ground
B10FF-13 Ignition control -

Circuit open ECM and FPDB ignition Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
control circuit - open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check ECM and FPDB ignition control circuit
for open circuit
B1100-11 O2 sensor heater relay

- Circuit short to FPDB O2 sensor heater relay Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ground control circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check FPDB O2 sensor heater relay control
B113D-12 Sunroof Global

Open/Close Control - Roof opening panel global Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Circuit short to battery open/close control circuit - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short to power system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check roof opening panel global open/close
control circuit for short to power
B113D-14 Sunroof Global

Open/Close Control - Roof opening panel global Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to ground open/close control circuit - roof opening panel global open/close control
or open short to ground, open circuit circuit for short to ground, open circuit
B1140-11 Engine Crank

Authorisation - Circuit Engine crank authorisation Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to ground signal circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check engine crank authorisation signal circuit
for short to ground
B1142-11 Ignition Status 1 -

Circuit short to ground Ignition supply 1 circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check all ignition supply 1 circuits for short to
ground

Circuit short to ground Ignition supply 2 circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
and check all ignition supply 2 circuits for short to
ground
B1144-11 Heated Steering

Wheel Supply - Circuit Heated steering wheel Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to ground supply circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check heated steering wheel supply circuit for
short to ground
B1145-11 Glovebox Locking
Motor - Circuit short to Glovebox latch locking motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ground circuit - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check glovebox latch locking motor circuit for
short to ground

Motor - Circuit short to Glovebox latch locking motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery control circuit - short to glovebox latch locking motor control circuit for

Motor - Circuit open Glovebox latch locking motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
control circuit - open circuit glovebox latch locking motor control circuit for
open circuit
B1146-12 Passive sounder

Supply - Circuit short Security passive sounder Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to battery control circuit - short to security passive sounder control circuit for short
power to power
B1146-14 Passive sounder

Supply - Circuit short Security passive sounder Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to ground or open control circuit - short to security passive sounder control circuit for short
ground, open circuit to ground, open circuit
B1158-11 Front Passenger Seat

Heater Sensor - Circuit Front passenger seat heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to ground sensor circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check front passenger seat heater sensor
B1158-13 Front Passenger Seat

Heater Sensor - Circuit Front passenger seat heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
open sensor circuit - open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check front passenger seat heater sensor
circuit for open circuit
B1159-11 Driver Seat Heater

Sensor - Circuit short Driver seat heater sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
to ground circuit - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check driver seat heater sensor circuit for
short to ground
B1159-13 Driver Seat Heater

Sensor - Circuit open Driver seat heater sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuit - open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check driver seat heater sensor circuit for
open circuit
B115A-11 Front Passenger Seat

Heater - Circuit short Front passenger seat heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
to ground supply circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check front passenger seat heater supply
B115A-15 Front Passenger Seat

Heater - Circuit short Front passenger seat heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
to battery or open supply circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
power, open circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check front passenger seat heater supply
circuit for short to power, open circuit
B115B-11 Driver Seat Heater -

Circuit short to ground Driver seat heater supply Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuit - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check driver seat heater supply circuit for
short to ground
B115B-15 Driver Seat Heater -
Circuit short to battery Driver seat heater supply Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open circuit - short to power, open DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check driver seat heater supply circuit for
short to power, open circuit
B1175-13 Driver Door Ajar

Switch - Circuit open Driver door ajar switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
signal circuit - open circuit driver door ajar switch signal circuit for open
circuit
B1176-13 Passenger Door Ajar

Switch - Circuit open Passenger door ajar switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
signal circuit - open circuit passenger door ajar switch signal circuit for open
circuit
B1177-12 Screenwash Level

Switch - Circuit short Screenwash level switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to battery signal circuit - short to screenwash level switch signal circuit for short to
power power
B11C0-13 Driver Side Rear Door

Ajar Switch - Circuit Left rear door ajar switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open signal circuit - open circuit left rear door ajar switch signal circuit for open
circuit
B11C1-13 Passenger Side Rear

Door Ajar Switch - Right rear door ajar switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit open signal circuit - open circuit right rear door ajar switch signal circuit for open
circuit
B1222-23 Master Lock/Unlock

Switch - Signal stuck Master lock or unlock switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
low digital input circuit - signal master lock and unlock switch digital input
stuck low circuits for short to ground, open circuit
B1237-11 Gear Shift Module

Early Wake-up - Transmission shift module Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Circuit short to ground wake-up control circuit - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short to ground system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check transmission shift module wake-up
control circuit for short to ground

Early Wake-up - Transmission shift module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to battery wake-up control circuit - transmission shift module wake-up control circuit
short to power for short to power

Early Wake-up - Transmission shift module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit open wake-up control circuit - transmission shift module wake-up control circuit
open circuit for open circuit
B123E-13 Crank Enable - Circuit

open OK to crank signal circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open circuit OK to crank signal circuit for open circuit
B1A85-96 Ambient Light Sensor

- Component internal Light sensor internal Check and install a new sensor as required
failure electronic failure
B1C45-13 Front Wiper Park

Position Switch - Windshield wiper motor park Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit open switch signal circuit - open windshield wiper motor park switch signal circuit
B1C45-23 Front Wiper Park

Position Switch - Signal stuck low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Signal stuck low front wiper park position switch input circuit for
short, open circuit
B1C78-12 Powerwash Relay -

Circuit short to battery Powerwash relay control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short to power powerwash relay control circuit for short to power
B1C78-14 Powerwash Relay -

Circuit short to ground Powerwash relay control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open circuit - short to ground, powerwash relay control circuit for short to
open circuit ground, open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Climate
Control Module (HVAC)
Climate Control Module
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Climate Control Module. For additional
For additional information, refer to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).

B105A-01 Cabin
Temperature Aspirator motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Sensor Fan - diagnostic circuit - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
General electrical short to ground, open electrical circuit diagrams and check aspirator motor
failure circuit diagnostic circuit for short to ground, open circuit
Aspirator fan
component failure
B1081-00 Left Temperature

Damper Motor - Left hand blend stepper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
No sub type motor internal or the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information external fault
B1081-49 Left Temperature

Damper Motor - Left hand blend stepper Suspect the left hand blend stepper motor. Check and
Internal electronic motor internal install a new stepper motor as required, refer to the new
failure electronic failure module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
B1082-00 Right Temperature

Damper Motor - Right hand blend Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
No sub type stepper motor internal the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information or external fault
Damper Motor - Right hand blend Suspect the right hand blend stepper motor. Check and
Internal electronic stepper motor internal install a new stepper motor as required, refer to the new
Index
B1083-01 Recirculation
Damper Motor - RECIRC servo motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
General electrical circuits - short to the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
failure ground, power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check RECIRC servo motor
circuit circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit
B1085-00 Defroster Damper

Motor - No sub Defrost stepper motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
type information internal or external the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
fault
B1085-49 Defroster Damper

Motor - Internal Defrost stepper motor Suspect the defrost stepper motor. Check and install a new
electronic failure internal electronic stepper motor as required, refer to the new
failure module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
B1086-00 Air Distribution

Damper Motor - Panel/foot stepper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
No sub type motor internal or the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information external fault
B1086-49 Air Distribution

Damper Motor - Panel/foot stepper Suspect the panel/foot stepper motor. Check and install a
Internal electronic motor internal new stepper motor as required, refer to the new
Index
B1087-88 LIN Bus "A" - Bus

off LIN Bus power #1 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
circuit - open circuit the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check LIN Bus power #1
B1088-88 LIN Bus "B" - Bus

off LIN Bus power #2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
circuit - open circuit the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check LIN Bus power #2
B11ED-68 Electric Heater

Control Module - Event information. Clear DTC. With engine coolant temperature low, set
Event information Electric heater - invalid climate temperature to high and re-test. If DTC remains in
communication isolation suspect the PTC heater, check and install a new
message heater as required, refer to the new module/component
installation note at the top of the DTC Index. If additional
LIN related DTCs are logged refer to the Actions for these
DTCs

Control Module - Electric heater - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Missing message missing communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
message

Control Module - Component internal Suspect the PTC heater, check and install a new heater as
Component failure required, refer to the new module/component installation
internal failure note at the top of the DTC Index

Control Module - Component or system Clear DTC. With engine coolant temperature low, set
Component or over temperature climate temperature to high and re-test. If DTC remains
system over suspect the PTC heater, check and install a new heater as
temperature required, refer to the new module/component installation
note at the top of the DTC Index
B11EE-01 A/C Compressor -

General electrical Air conditioning Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
failure compressor clutch the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
solenoid circuits - short electrical circuit diagrams and check air conditioning
to ground, power, open compressor clutch solenoid circuits for short to ground,
circuit power, open circuit
B11F0-11 Air Intake Damper
Position Sensor - RECIRC servo motor air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RECIRC
Circuit short to intake feedback and 5 servo motor air intake feedback and 5 volt supply circuits
ground volt supply circuits - for short to ground
short to ground
B11F0-15 Air Intake Damper

Position Sensor - RECIRC servo motor air Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Circuit short to intake feedback and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
battery or open ground circuits - short electrical circuit diagrams and check RECIRC servo motor air
to power, open circuit intake feedback and ground circuits for short to power, open
circuit
B11F8-00 Left Outer Vent -

No sub type Left outer IP vent Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
information actuator internal or the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
external fault
B11F8-49 Left Outer Vent -

Internal electronic Left outer IP vent Suspect the left outer IP vent actuator. Check and install a
failure actuator internal new actuator as required, refer to the new
electronic failure module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
B11F9-00 Left Inner Vent -

No sub type Left inner IP vent Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
external fault
B11F9-49 Left Inner Vent -

Internal electronic Left inner IP vent Suspect the left inner IP vent actuator. Check and install a
Index
B11FA-00 Right Inner Vent -

No sub type Right inner IP vent Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
external fault
B11FA-49 Right Inner Vent -

Internal electronic Right inner IP vent Suspect the right inner IP vent actuator. Check and install a
Index
B11FB-00 Right Outer Vent -

No sub type Right outer IP vent Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
external fault
B11FB-49 Right Outer Vent -

Internal electronic Right outer IP vent Suspect the right outer IP vent actuator. Check and install a
Index
B11FF-84 A/C Refrigerant

Pressure - Signal Signal below allowable This DTC can be logged by the system due to low ambient
below allowable range. A/C System temperature soak (below 3°C) reducing the pressure in the
range Refrigerant Pressure refrigerant gas system. If the cabin temperature logged
too low along with the DTC at the time is below 10°C this could
indicate low temperature. If the air conditioning
performance is satisfactory and the in-cabin temperature is
below 10°C then it is likely that the system contains a
suitable amount of gas and the DTC is being recorded as
an effect of the low ambient temperature. If this is not the
case carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check air conditioning
pressure sensor circuits for short, open circuit. Check for
correct charge weight
B11FF-85 A/C Refrigerant

Pressure - Signal Signal above allowable Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
above allowable range. A/C System the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
range Refrigerant pressure electrical circuit diagrams and check air conditioning
too high pressure sensor circuits for short, open circuit
B1A59-11 Sensor 5 Volt
Supply - Circuit Air conditioning Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check air
short to ground pressure sensor or conditioning pressure sensor and RECIRC servo motor 5 volt
RECIRC servo motor 5 supply circuits for short to ground
volt supply circuits -
short to ground

Supply - Circuit Air conditioning Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check air
open pressure sensor 5 volt conditioning pressure sensor 5 volt supply circuit for open
supply circuits - open circuit
circuit
B1A60-11 Pollution Sensor -

Hydrocarbon - Pollution sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check pollution
Circuit short to hydrocarbon input sensor hydrocarbon input circuit for short to ground
ground circuit - short to ground
B1A61-11 Cabin
Temperature In car temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check In car
Sensor - Circuit sensor circuit - short to temperature sensor circuit for short to ground
short to ground ground
B1A61-15 Cabin
Temperature In car temperature Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Sensor - Circuit sensor circuit - short to the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
short to battery or power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check In car temperature
open sensor circuit for short to power, open circuit
B1A63-11 Right Solar Sensor

- Circuit short to Right sun load sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right sun
ground signal circuit - short to load sensor signal circuit for short to ground
ground
B1A64-11 Left Solar Sensor

- Circuit short to Left sun load sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left sun
ground signal circuit - short to load sensor signal circuit for short to ground
ground
B1A67-13 Sensor Ground -

Circuit open Sensor ground circuits - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor
open circuit ground circuits for open circuit
B1A69-01 Humidity Sensor -

General electrical Humidity sensor PWM Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
failure input circuit - short to the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
ground, power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check humidity sensor PWM
circuit input circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check
Sensor component and install a new sensor as required
failure
B1B62-11 Pollution Sensor -

NOx - Circuit Pollution sensor NOx Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check pollution
short to ground input circuit - short to sensor NOx input circuit for short to ground
ground
B1B71-11 Evaporator
Temperature Evaporator temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check evaporator
Sensor - Circuit sensor signal circuit - temperature sensor signal circuit for short to ground
short to ground short to ground
B1B71-15 Evaporator
Temperature Evaporator temperature Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Sensor - Circuit sensor signal circuit - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
short to battery or short to power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check evaporator
open circuit temperature sensor signal circuit for short to power, open
circuit
B1B72-11 LIN Bus #1 Power

Supply Circuit - Stepper motor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check stepper
Circuit short to LIN Bus #1 power motor circuit LIN Bus #1 power supply for short to ground
ground supply - short to
ground
C1B14-13 Sensor Supply

Voltage A - Circuit RECIRC servo motor 5 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RECIRC
open volt supply circuit - servo motor 5 volt supply circuit for open circuit
open circuit
C1B15-13 Sensor Supply
Voltage B - Circuit RECIRC servo motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RECIRC
open and EVAP sensor servo motor and EVAP sensor ground circuits for open
ground circuits - open circuit
circuit
P0530-11 A/C Refrigerant

Pressure Sensor A Air conditioning Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check air
Circuit - Circuit pressure sensor signal conditioning pressure sensor signal circuit for short to
short to ground circuit - short to ground ground
P0530-15 A/C Refrigerant

Pressure Sensor A Air conditioning Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Circuit - Circuit pressure sensor signal the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
short to battery or circuit - short to power, electrical circuit diagrams and check air conditioning
open open circuit pressure sensor signal circuit for short to power, open
circuit
U0010-88 Medium Speed

CAN Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Bus - Bus off
U0300-00 Internal Control
Module Software Invalid configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
Incompatibility - message is received diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is
No sub type still logged suspect the climate control module, refer to the
information new module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
U1A14-49 CAN Initialisation

Failure - Internal Internal electronic Suspect the climate control module, check and install a
electronic failure failure new module as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index

Not configured Incorrect car Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
configuration data diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC
received remains suspect the climate control module. Check and
install a new module as required, refer to the new
Index

Missing message Missing message Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Check climate control module for DTCs
and refer to the DTC Index. Carry out CAN network integrity
tests using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
If DTC remains suspect the climate control module. Check
and install a new module as required, refer to the new
Index
U3002-81 Vehicle
Identification Vehicle/component Check and install original/new module as required, refer to
Number - Invalid mis-match. Corrupt VIN the new module/component installation note at the top of
serial data data being transmitted, the DTC Index
received module previously
installed to other
vehicle
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Digital Audio
Broadcast Module (DABM)
Digital Audio Broadcast Module (DABM)
NOTES:
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged on the digital audio broadcast module, for
additional diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.

B11A4-11 L-Band Antenna -
Circuit short to Digital audio broadcast Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check digital audio
ground L-band antenna circuit - broadcast L-band antenna circuit for short circuit to ground
short circuit to ground
B11A4-15 L-Band Antenna -

battery or open L-band antenna circuit - broadcast L-band antenna circuit for short circuit to power,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high
resistance
B11A5-11 Band 3 Antenna -

ground band 3 antenna circuit - broadcast band 3 antenna circuit for short circuit to ground
short circuit to ground
B11A5-15 Band 3 Antenna -

battery or open band 3 antenna circuit - broadcast band 3 antenna circuit for short circuit to power,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high
resistance
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Driver Door
Module/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Driver/Passenger Door Modules
(DDM/PDM). For additional diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.
For additional information, refer to: Driver Door Module (DDM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Diagnosis and
Testing).

B108F-23 Cabin Lock/Unlock
Switch - Signal stuck low Cabin lock/unlock switch signal Check the switch operation and
stuck serviceability. Refer to the electrical circuit
Switch pressed for longer than diagrams and check the switch circuit
20 seconds
Switch circuit short circuit to
power or ground
Switch failure
B109C-11 Front Courtesy Light -

Circuit short to ground Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
test front courtesy light circuit for short to
ground

Circuit short to battery Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
or open test front courtesy light circuit for short to
power or open circuit
B10EB-11 Driver Door Double

Locking Motor - Circuit Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short to ground test driver door double locking motor circuit
for short to ground
Locking Motor - Circuit Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short to battery or open test driver door double locking motor circuit
for short to power or open circuit
B10EC-11 Passenger Door Double

short to ground test passenger door double locking motor

short to battery or open test passenger door double locking motor
circuit for short to power or open circuit
B10ED-11 Rear Door Driver Side

Double Locking Motor - Rear driver door double locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to ground motor circuit short circuit to check the circuit
ground

Double Locking Motor - Rear driver door double locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to battery motor circuit short circuit to check the circuit
or open power or open circuit
B10EE-11 Rear Door Passenger

Side Double Locking Rear passenger door double Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Motor - Circuit short to locking motor circuit short check the circuit
ground circuit to ground

Side Double Locking Rear passenger door double Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
battery or open circuit to power or open circuit
B1108-11 Driver Door Central

short to ground test driver door central locking motor circuit
for short to ground

short to battery or open test driver door central locking motor circuit
for short to power or open circuit
B1109-11 Passenger Door Central

short to ground test passenger door central locking motor

short to battery or open test passenger door central locking motor
B110A-11 Rear Door Driver Side

Central Locking Motor - Rear driver door central locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to ground motor circuit short circuit to check the circuit
ground

Circuit short to battery motor circuit short circuit to check the circuit
or open power or open circuit
B110B-11 Rear Door Passenger

Side Central Locking Rear passenger door central Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground circuit to ground

battery or open circuit to power or open circuit
B1163-11 Left Mirror Heater

Output Short To Ground Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
- Circuit short to ground test left mirror heater output circuit for short
to ground
Output Short To Power - Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to battery test left mirror heater output circuit for short
or open to power or open circuit
B1164-11 Right Mirror Heater

- Circuit short to ground test right mirror heater output circuit for
short to ground

Circuit short to battery test right mirror heater output circuit for
or open short to power or open circuit
B1165-11 Left Front Puddle Lamp

- Circuit short to ground test left front puddle lamp output circuit for
short to ground

Output Open Load Or Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Short To Power - Circuit test left front puddle lamp output circuit for
short to battery or open short to power or open circuit
B1166-11 Right Front Puddle Lamp

- Circuit short to ground test right front puddle lamp output circuit for
short to ground

Short To Battery - Circuit test right front puddle lamp output circuit for
B117C-07 Rear Power Window Up -

Mechanical Failures Set when window is reversed Check for mechanical problems with the
during window up due to window operation. Check for obstructions in
mechanical problems, window the window channels and that the glass is
channel restriction preventing not restricted in the full range of travel
window closure or Window
mechanism fault

Actuator stuck open Door module internal relay Renew the relevant rear door module. Refer
sticking open to the warranty policy and procedures

Actuator stuck closed Door module internal relay Renew the relevant rear door module. Refer
sticking closed to the warranty policy and procedures

Performance or incorrect Set when auto window up was Check the window operation. Clear the DTC
operation interrupted (e.g. by pressing and retest
local switch)
B117D-72 Rear Power Window

Down - Actuator stuck Door module internal relay Renew the relevant rear door module. Refer
open sticking open to the warranty policy and procedures

closed sticking closed to the warranty policy and procedures
B117E-07 Front Power Window Up

- Mechanical Failures Set when window is reversed Check for mechanical problems with the
mechanism fault
- Actuator stuck open Door module internal relay Renew the relevant front door module. Refer

- Actuator stuck closed Door module internal relay Renew the relevant front door module. Refer

- Performance or Set when auto window up was Check the window operation. Clear the DTC
incorrect operation interrupted (e.g. by pressing and retest
local switch)
B117F-72 Front Power Window

Down - Actuator stuck Door module internal relay Renew the relevant front door module. Refer

B1189-29 Front Window Position

Sensor - Signal invalid Missing signal from hall sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
1 or 2 check the hall sensor circuit between the
Sensor circuit fault door module and window motor. Repair as
Hall sensor fault necessary. If the problem persists, renew the
window motor
B118A-29 Rear Window Position

Sensor - Signal invalid Missing signal from hall sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
1 or 2 check the hall sensor circuit between the
Sensor circuit fault door module and window motor. Repair as
Hall sensor fault necessary. If the problem persists, renew the
window motor
B11D1-83 LIN Bus "C" - Value of

signal protection LIN Bus checksum error; driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
calculation incorrect switchpack internal fault check the LIN Bus circuit between the driver
door window switch and the door module.
Check the connectors for integrity and
security. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
problem persists, renew the driver door
window switch
B11D1-86 LIN Bus "C" - Signal

invalid LIN Bus header error; driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
switchpack internal fault check the LIN Bus circuit between the driver
window switch
B11D1-87 LIN Bus "C" - Missing

message Slave node communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
missing; driver switchpack check the LIN Bus circuit between the driver
internal fault door window switch and the door module.
window switch
B11F6-11 Driver Folding Mirror

Motor - Circuit short to Driver folding mirror motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground circuit short circuit to ground check the mirror fold circuit between the
Mirror motor failure drivers door module and the mirror assembly.
Repair as necessary

Motor - Circuit short to Driver mirror heater output Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
battery or open circuit short circuit to power or check the mirror fold circuit between the
open circuit drivers door module and the mirror assembly.
Mirror motor failure Repair as necessary
www.JagDocs.com
B11F7-11 Passenger Folding Mirror
Motor - Circuit short to Passenger folding mirror motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mirror motor failure passenger door module and the mirror
assembly. Repair as necessary

Motor - Circuit short to Passenger mirror heater output Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open circuit passenger door module and the mirror
Mirror motor failure assembly. Repair as necessary
B1A98-83 LIN Bus Circuit #1 -

Value of signal Value of signal protection Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
protection calculation calculation incorrect check the LIN Bus circuit between the rear
incorrect door control unit and the Driver Door Module.
problem persists, renew the rear door control
module

Signal invalid Signal invalid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the LIN Bus circuit between the rear
door control unit and the Driver Door Module.
module

Missing message Missing message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
door control unit and the Driver Door Module.
module
B1C09-11 Driver Left/Right Mirror

Motor Circuit - Circuit Driver mirror adjustment motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short to ground circuit short circuit to ground check the mirror motor circuit between the
Mirror left/right motor failure drivers door module and the mirror assembly.
Repair as necessary

short to battery or open circuit short circuit to power or check the mirror motor circuit between the
Mirror left/right motor failure Repair as necessary
B1C10-11 Driver Up/Down Mirror

Mirror motor failure drivers door module and the mirror assembly.
Repair as necessary

B1C11-11 Passenger Left/Right

Mirror Motor Circuit - Passenger mirror adjustment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to ground motor circuit short circuit to check the mirror motor circuit between the
ground passenger door module and the mirror

Circuit short to battery motor circuit short circuit to check the mirror motor circuit between the
or open power or open circuit passenger door module and the mirror
B1C12-11 Passenger Up/Down

General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC:
Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM)
Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Driver/Passenger Seat Module
(DSM/PSM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Diagnosis and Testing).

B105F-11 Seat Cushion Extension
Motor Output - Circuit short Driver seat cushion extension Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
to ground motor circuit - short to ground with this DTC using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat cushion extension motor circuit for
short to ground
B105F-15 Seat Cushion Extension

Motor Output - Circuit short Driver seat cushion extension Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
to battery or open motor circuit - short to power, with this DTC using the manufacturer
open circuit approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
seat cushion extension motor circuit for
B1060-11 Seat Headrest Motor

Output - Circuit short to Driver seat headrest motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
ground circuit - short to ground with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat headrest motor circuit for short to
ground
Output - Circuit short to Driver seat headrest motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
battery or open circuit - short to power, open with this DTC using the manufacturer
circuit approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
seat headrest motor circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B1063-31 Seat Cushion Extension

Motor Speed/Position Harness/connector problem Check the seat wiring harness/connectors
Sensor - No signal No signal from sensor for security/integrity
Sensor/motor malfunction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the seat cushion motor sensor
circuit. Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC
and retest

Speed/Position Sensor - No Harness/connector problem Check the seat wiring harness/connectors
signal No signal from sensor for security/integrity
check the seat headrest motor sensor
and retest
B1065-24 Cushion extend switch -

Signal stuck high Signal stuck high Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the
seat switch pack to seat module LIN circuit
for short, open circuit and cushion extend
B1066-24 Cushion retract switch -

for short, open circuit and cushion retract
B106D-24 Headrest up switch - Signal

stuck high Signal stuck high Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the
for short, open circuit and headrest up
B106E-24 Headrest down switch -

for short, open circuit and headrest down
B1A98-83 LIN Bus Circuit #1 - Value

of signal protection Value of signal protection Check LIN network for interference/EMC
calculation incorrect calculation incorrect related issues
B1A98-86 LIN Bus Circuit #1 - Signal

invalid LIN bus Header error Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
with this DTC using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Check LIN
network for interference/EMC related
issues

Missing message Slave node communication Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test
missing. LIN bus circuit - short LIN Bus between seat switch pack and
to ground, power, open circuit control module for short to ground, power,
(ECU Types 7 & 8) open circuit, check power and ground
supplies to switch pack
B1A98-88 LIN Bus Circuit #1 - Bus off

Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
approved diagnostic system. Refer to
electrical circuit diagrams and test LIN Bus
between seat switch pack and control
module for short to ground or power
B1B86-11 Seat Height Motor Relay -
Circuit short to ground Driver seat parallel height Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
motor circuit - short to ground with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat parallel height motor circuit for short
to ground
B1B86-15 Seat Height Motor Relay -

Circuit short to battery or Driver seat parallel height Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
open motor circuit - short to power, with this DTC using the manufacturer
open circuit approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
seat parallel height motor circuit for short
B1B87-31 Seat Height Motor

check the seat height motor sensor circuit.
Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC and
retest
B1B88-11 Seat Slide Motor Relay -

Circuit short to ground Driver seat slide motor circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
short to ground with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat slide motor circuit for short to ground
B1B88-15 Seat Slide Motor Relay -

Circuit short to battery or Driver seat slide motor circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
open short to power, open circuit with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat slide motor circuit for short to power,
open circuit
B1B89-31 Seat Slide Motor

check the seat slide motor speed sensor
and retest
B1B90-11 Seat Tilt Motor Relay -

Circuit short to ground Driver seat tilt motor circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
short to ground with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat tilt motor circuit for short to ground
B1B90-15 Seat Tilt Motor Relay -

Circuit short to battery or Driver seat tilt motor circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
open short to power, open circuit with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat tilt motor circuit for short to power,
open circuit
B1B91-31 Seat Tilt Motor

check the seat tilt motor speed sensor
and retest
B1B92-11 Seat Recline Motor Relay -

Circuit short to ground Driver seat recline motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
circuit - short to ground with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat recline motor circuit for short to
ground
B1B92-15 Seat Recline Motor Relay -
Circuit short to battery or Driver seat recline motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
open circuit - short to power, open with this DTC using the manufacturer
circuit approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
seat recline motor circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B1B93-31 Seat Recline Motor

check the seat recline motor speed sensor
and retest
B1B94-24 Seat Height Up Switch -

for short, open circuit and seat height up
B1B95-24 Seat Height Down Switch -

for short, open circuit and seat height
down circuit for short to ground
B1B96-24 Seat Slide Forward Switch -

for short, open circuit and seat slide
forward circuit for short to ground
B1B97-24 Seat Slide Backward Switch

- Signal stuck high Signal stuck high Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the
for short, open circuit and seat slide
backward circuit for short to ground
B1B98-24 Seat Tilt Up Switch - Signal

for short, open circuit and seat tilt up
B1B99-24 Seat Tilt Down Switch -

for short, open circuit and seat tilt down
B1C00-24 Seat Recline Up Switch -

for short, open circuit and seat recline up
B1C01-24 Seat Recline Down Switch -

for short, open circuit and check seat
recline down circuit for short to ground
B1C02-24 Memory Store Switch -

for short, open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
B1C03-24 Memory #1 Switch - Signal


U0010-88 Medium speed Can

communication Bus - Bus Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
off with this DTC using the manufacturer
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
network to climate controlled seat module
U0140-00 Lost communication with

CJB - No sub type Lost communication with CJB Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
information with this DTC using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Check CJB for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Index

RJB - No sub type Lost communication with RJB Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
information with this DTC using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Check RJB for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Index
U0155-00 Lost communications with

instrument cluster - No sub Lost communications with Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
type information instrument cluster with this DTC using the manufacturer
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
network to climate controlled seat module
and instrument cluster for short, open
circuit

Driver Door Module (DDM) - Lost communication with DDM Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
No sub type information with this DTC using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system
U0300-00 Internal control module

software incompatibility - Invalid configuration message Re-configure the RJB using the
No sub type information is received manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is still
logged suspect the DSM/PSM, refer to the
new module installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
U1A14-49 CAN Initialisation failure -

Internal electronic failure Internal electronic failure Install a new DSM, refer to the new
module installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
U1A4C-68 Build/end of line mode

active - Event information Manufacturing mode has not Place DSM in to customer mode using
been removed manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U3000-49 Control module - Internal

electronic failure Internal electronic failure Install a new DSM, refer to the new
module installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
U3000-55 Stored vehicle
configuration data does not Incorrect car configuration data Re-configure the RJB using the
match - Not configured received manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains
suspect the DSM, refer to the new module
installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
U3000-87 Control Module - Missing

message Missing message Re-configure the RJB using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Check DSM for DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index. Check CAN network integrity using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
U3001-46 Control module improper

shutdown - Calibration/parameter memory Check for DTCs that could indicate power
Calibration/parameter failure failure to the module and refer to the DTC
memory failure Index
U3002-81 Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) - Invalid Vehicle/component mis-match. Install original module, check for DTCs and
serial data received Corrupt VIN data being refer to relevant DTC Index
transmitted, module previously
installed to other vehicle
U3003-16 Battery Voltage - Circuit

voltage below threshold Circuit voltage below threshold Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
U3003-17 Battery Voltage - Circuit

voltage above threshold Circuit voltage above threshold Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Electric
Parking Brake (PBM)
Electric Parking Brake (PBM)
NOTES:
Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSM's which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as needed.
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the electric parking brake module, for
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).

P1536-62 Parking Brake Switch
Circuit - Signal compare Wiring harness fault All signals from the switch are active at the same
failure Switch internal fault time. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check all the switch apply, release and return
circuits for short circuit or open circuit. Repair
wiring harness as required
If no fault with wiring harness suspect switch has
an internal fault. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
P1536-66 Parking Brake Switch

Circuit - Signal has too System abuse
NOTE: The Electric Parking Brake system will be
many transitions / Wiring harness fault
locked out if the module receives more then 30
events Switch internal fault
apply/release requests within 1 minute.
Cycle the ignition to clear the fault mode. Clear

the DTC and test the system
all the switch apply, release and return circuits for
intermittent short circuit or open circuit. Repair
If there are no wiring faults and the DTC resets
suspect the switch. Refer to the Warranty Policy
and Procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
P1571-64 Brake Switch - Signal

plausibility failure Wiring harness fault The signal from the hardwired brake pedal switch
Brake pedal switch fault does not agree with the brake status message
broadcast on CAN. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the brake pedal switch
circuits for short circuit or open circuit. Repair
If there are no wiring harness faults suspect
switch. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
C1127-31 Position Sensor - No

Signal Parking brake motor hall Inspect mechanical linkages for faults/damage.
effect position sensor Repair as required. Refer to the electrical circuit
power circuit fault diagrams and check parking brake motor hall
Parking brake motor hall effect position sensor circuits for short, open
effect position sensor circuit. Check and install a new sensor actuator as
ground circuit fault required
Parking brake motor hall
effect position sensor
signal circuit fault
Mechanical fault with
sensor/actuator
C1129-39 Actuator engage -

Incorrect has too few Motor engage current Carry out parking brake calibration procedure.
pulses reached before full apply check for mechanical failure of parking brake
travel distance system
Service brake adjustment
incorrect after brake lining
replacement
Brake cables broken,
seized, trapped.
Caliper malfunction
C1129-3A Actuator engage -

Incorrect has too many Motor engage current not Carry out parking brake calibration procedure.
pulses reached or travelled too far check for mechanical failure of parking brake
upon apply system
Service brake adjustment
incorrect after brake lining
replacement
Brake cables broken,
seized, trapped
Caliper malfunction
C112A-39 Actuator disengage -

Incorrect has too few Intermittent motor or Check for additional motor or circuit DTCs and
pulses circuit - open circuit refer to DTC index. check for mechanical failure of
Actuator malfunction parking brake
C1D00-11 Park brake apply switch

- Circuit short to ground Connector fault - bent, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
loose or corroded pin(s) switch primary and secondary apply circuits for
Harness fault - short to short to ground. Repair circuit faults or install a
ground new switch as required
Switch fault

circuit - Circuit short to Connector fault - bent, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
battery or open loose or corroded pin(s) switch primary and secondary apply circuits for
Harness fault - short to short to power or open circuit. Repair circuit faults
power or open circuit or install a new switch as required
Switch fault
C1D00-1C Park brake apply switch

- Voltage out of range Connector fault - bent, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
loose or corroded pin(s) primary parking brake apply switch circuits for
Harness fault - low short to ground
resistance to ground Check and install a new switch as required
Switch fault
- Signal compare failure Connector fault - bent, Apply switch active then release switch active,
loose or corroded pin(s) refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
Harness fault apply/release switch circuits
Switch fault Check and install a new switch as required

- Signal plausibility Connector fault - bent, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
failure loose or corroded pin(s) parking brake primary and secondary apply circuits
Harness fault - primary or Check and install a new switch as required
secondary apply circuit
Switch fault
C1D01-11 Park brake release

switch - Circuit short to Connector fault - bent, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
ground loose or corroded pin(s) park brake primary and secondary circuit for short
Harness fault - short to to ground
ground Check and install a new switch as required
Switch fault

switch - Circuit short to Connector fault - bent, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
battery or open loose or corroded pin(s) parking brake primary and secondary release
Harness fault - open circuit circuits for open circuits or short to power
Harness fault - short to Check and install a new switch as required
power
Switch fault
C1D01-1C Park brake release

switch - Voltage out of Connector fault - bent, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test park
range loose or corroded pin(s) brake switch primary and secondary switch circuits
Harness fault - low for low resistance to ground
resistance to ground Check and install a new switch as required
Switch fault

switch - Signal compare Connector fault - bent, Release switch active then apply switch active.
failure loose or corroded pin(s) Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
Harness fault switch circuits for open circuits or shorts. Repair
Switch fault circuit or replace switch as required

switch - Signal Connector fault - bent, Primary and secondary release switch inputs
plausibility failure loose or corroded pin(s) signals do not match. Check connectors for
Harness fault damaged pins, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Switch fault and check switch circuits for open circuits or
shorts. Repair circuit or replace switch as required

Signal plausibility The hard wired ignition Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure status signal does not parking brake module ignition power supply for
agree with CAN messages. short to ground, open circuit
Ignition power supply is
detected open circuit when
ignition status is set to
'ON'
U0001-87 High Speed CAN

communication bus - CAN Bus circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Missing message Power distribution fault the power and ground connections to the module.
the CAN network
U0001-88 High speed CAN

communication Bus - CAN Bus circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Bus off Power distribution fault the power and ground connections to the module.
the CAN network

with ECM/PCM A - No Engine control module / Check the Engine Control Module for related DTCs
sub type information system fault and refer to the relevant DTC index
Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the power and ground connections to the module.
www.JagDocs.com
the CAN network
U0103-00 Lost communication

With Gear Shift Module Gear shift control module / Check the Gear Shift Control Module for related
A - No sub type system fault DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
information Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the CAN network

With Cruise Control Speed control module / Check the Speed Control Module for related DTCs
Module A - No sub type system fault and refer to the relevant DTC index
the CAN network

with Anti-Lock Braking Anti-Lock Braking System Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Control
System (ABS) Control control module / system Module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Module - No sub type fault DTC index
the CAN network

With Instrument Panel Instrument Cluster / Check the Instrument Cluster for related DTCs
Cluster (IPC) Control system fault and refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - No sub type Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
information the power and ground connections to the module.
the CAN network

Software Car configuration file Check all control modules for related DTCs and
Incompatibility - No sub stored in Park Brake refer to the relevant DTC index
type information Module does not match the Check the components installed on the vehicle
master car configuration were installed by the factory or a dealer
file Install the original components or a new one as
Master car configuration required
file not being transmitted
by master control module

From ECM/PCM - No sub Invalid message from the Check the Engine Control Module for related DTCs
type information Engine Control Module and refer to the relevant DTC index

From Gear Shift Control Invalid message from the Check the Gear Shift Control Module for related
Module A - No sub type gear shift control module DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
information
From Anti-Lock Braking Invalid message from the
NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault
System (ABS) Control anti-lock Braking system
condition is present and should be ignored unless the
Module - No sub type module
customer has reported a electronic park brake concern.
information Clear the DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern
prior to diagnosis
Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Control

Module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
U0422-00 Invalid data received

from Central Junction Invalid message from the Check the Central Junction Box for related DTCs
Box - No sub type Central Junction Box and refer to the relevant DTC index
information
From Instrument Panel Invalid message from the Check the Instrument Cluster for related DTCs
Control Module - No sub instrument panel control and refer to the relevant DTC index
type information module

From Cruise Control Incorrect apply request
NOTE: The Park Brake Module has received a
Front Distance Range from the speed control
request to apply the parkbrake from the Adaptive Speed
Sensor - Signal module when the
Control module but the conditions were not correct for
plausibility failure conditions were not correct
the apply to take place. E.g. the vehicle was moving. The
module will ignore the request but this DTC is logged for
safety reference
Check the Speed Control Module for related DTCs

and refer to the relevant DTC index
U2001-68 Reduced System

Function - Event Invalid or missing message
NOTE: There has been invalid or missing data
information from Anti-Lock Braking
detected from the Anti-Lock Brake System Control
System with ignition OFF
Module. This DTC may be logged if the ignition is
and vehicle speed > 3Kph
switched off with the vehicle still moving. This DTC will
never be recorded as confirmed and is stored for
historical analysis only
Check the Speed Control Module for related DTCs

U2005-64 Vehicle Speed - Signal

implausibility failure Implausible speed
NOTE: Implausible speed is defined as passing
message from the
from high speed dynamic mode to static mode without
Anti-Lock Braking System
passing through low speed dynamic mode
control module
Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Control
Module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
U200D-4B Control Module Output

Power A - Over Actuator FET circuit over Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
temperature current / over temperature actuator circuit for low resistance. Repair circuit
faults or install a new actuator as required
U2011-11 Motor - Circuit short to

ground Electric park brake motor Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
output short to ground actuator circuit for short to ground. Repair circuit
U2011-12 Motor - Circuit short to

battery Electric park brake motor Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
output short to power actuator circuit for short to power. Repair circuit
U2011-13 Motor - Circuit open

Electric park brake motor Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
output open circuit actuator circuit for open circuit. Repair circuit

Watchdog/safety micro Defective ECU Lost communication with secondary micro
controller failure processor, check power and ground connections to
module. Clear DTC, perform battery reset and
retest system. If DTC reoccurs suspect the
Parking Brake control module
Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
manual if a module/component is suspect

Number (VIN) - Invalid The Park Brake Module has Check and install the original, or a new Park Brake
serial number previously been installed Module
to another vehicle Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
manual if a module/component is suspect

compare failure Power distribution fault There is a difference of more than 2 volts
Wiring harness fault between the power supply to the parking brake
module and the battery voltage value broadcast
on CAN. Check other control modules for battery
voltage related DTCs. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the power and ground
supply circuits to the Park Brake Module. Repair
wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest the
system
U3006-16 Control Module Input

Power A - Circuit ECU logic voltage is high Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check power
voltage below threshold (over 18 volts for 40mS) supplies and ground connections to the park brake
Wiring harness fault control module. Check battery voltage and
Charging system fault charging system. Repair wiring harness or
charging system as required, clear DTC, perform
battery reset. Retest system

Power A - Circuit ECU logic voltage is low Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check power
voltage above threshold (below 8 volts for 2000mS) supplies and ground connections to the park brake
Wiring harness fault control module. Check battery voltage and
Charging system fault charging system. Repair wiring harness or
charging system as required, clear DTC, perform
battery reset. Retest system

Power B - Circuit short Connector fault - bent, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check Park
to ground or open loose or corroded pin(s) Brake Module high power feed circuit for open
Harness fault circuits or short to ground. Repair wiring harness
as required, clear DTC
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM)
Engine Control Module (PCM) 5.0L SC V8 - AJ133
WARNING: Fuel injector voltage will reach 65 Volts during operation and have a high current requirement.
NOTES:
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. Match the five digits from the scan
tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give additional information
read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
When performing electrical voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three decimal
places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads
into account.
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the electronic engine control module, for
For additional information, refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Diagnosis and Testing).

B10A2-31 Crash Input - No signal
Refer to the electrical circuit
NOTE: - Circuit SRS_SIGNAL -
diagrams and check restraints
Loss of communication between control module pulse width
restraints control module and modulated SRS signal line circuit,
engine control module hard wired connection between
engine control module and restraints
control module for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit. Repair circuit as required,
clear the DTC and retest
B10AC-81 Cruise Control Switch -

Invalid serial data received The engine control module has Clear the DTC and press all the
received an invalid command from steering wheel switches, re-check for
the steering wheel switch pack DTCs. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the speed
control switch circuit for open circuit,
short circuit to power, short circuit to
ground, disconnected
Check and install a new steering
wheel module as required. Refer to
the warranty policy and procedures
manual, or determine if any prior
approval programme is in operation,
prior to the installation of a new
module/component
B10AC-82 Cruise Control Switch - Alive

/ sequence counter incorrect Cruise buttons alive counter is not Refer to the electrical circuit
/ not updated incrementing. Which suggests that diagrams and check the speed
the LIN bus is faulty control switch circuit for open circuit,
Steering wheel module is not short circuit to power, short circuit to
connected ground, disconnected
Steering wheel module failure Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the LIN bus
between steering wheel module and
the CAN gateway
wheel module as required. Refer to
module/component
B10AC-83 Cruise Control Switch - Value

of signal protection Cruise buttons checksum incorrect, Check and install new cruise
calculation incorrect incorrect cruise switches fitted to switches as required. Refer to the
vehicle warranty policy and procedures
module/component
B10AC-96 Cruise Control Switch -

Component internal failure Speed control switch circuit, open Check for related DTCs in other
circuit, short circuit to power, short central junction boxes
circuit to ground, disconnected Refer to the electrical circuit
Speed control switch failure diagrams and check the speed
Steering wheel module failure control switch circuit for open circuit,
short circuit to power, short circuit to
ground, disconnected
Check and install a new speed
control switch as required. Check and
install a new steering wheel module
as required. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation, prior to
the installation of a new
module/component
B10FF-68 Ignition Control - Event

information Spark plug(s) fault Refer to repair manual and check
Wiring harness fault spark plug(s) for condition and
Ignition coil(s) fault security. Replace any defective
components as required
Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
and check ignition coil circuit for
intermittent open circuit, short
circuit to power, short circuit to
ground
Check and install a new coil(s) as
required. Refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual, or determine
if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of
a new module/component
B11DB-01 Battery Monitoring Module -

General electrical failure Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY -
and check charging system for faults.
Charging system fault Battery Perform any repairs required
monitoring signal line Refer to the electrical wiring
circuit fault diagrams and check the battery
Vehicle battery fault monitoring system module circuit for
open circuit, short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power
Refer to the workshop manual and
the battery care manual, inspect the
vehicle battery and ensure it is fully
charged and serviceable before
performing further tests
B11DB-87 Battery Monitoring Module -
Missing message Refer to the electrical wiring
NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY -
diagrams and check the battery
Battery signal line circuit fault monitoring system module circuit for
open circuit, short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power
diagrams and check the LIN circuit
for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit
B1206-68 Crash Occurred - Event

information Refer to the electrical circuit
NOTE: - Circuit SRS_SIGNAL -
diagrams and check the engine
Engine control module has control module to restraints control
detected the vehicle has crashed - module circuit for short circuit to
event information DTC only ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit. Repair circuit as required,
clear the DTC and retest
C0031-00 Left Front Wheel Speed

Sensor - No sub type Invalid data received from anti-lock Check anti-lock braking system
information braking system module - left front module for related DTCs and refer to
wheel speed signal fault relevant DTC index
C0034-00 Right Front Wheel Speed

information braking system module - right front module for related DTCs and refer to
C0037-00 Left Rear Wheel Speed

information braking system module - left rear module for related DTCs and refer to
C003A-00 Right Rear Wheel Speed

information braking system module - right rear module for related DTCs and refer to
P0010-13 Intake (A) Camshaft Position

Actuator (Bank 1) - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A -
open diagrams and check intake (A)
Intake (A) camshaft position camshaft position actuator (Bank 1)
actuator (Bank 1) open circuit circuit for open circuit
Engine control module interface Refer to the electrical circuit
harness open circuit diagrams and check engine control
module interface harness for open
circuit

Timing - Over-Advanced Refer to the electrical circuit
(Bank 1) - No sub type diagrams and check intake (A)
information Intake (A) camshaft position camshaft position actuator (Bank 1)
circuit
P0013-13 Exhaust (B) Camshaft

Position Actuator (Bank 1) - Refer to the electrical circuit
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A -
Circuit open diagrams and check exhaust (B)
Exhaust (B) camshaft position camshaft position actuator (Bank 1)
circuit

Position Timing - Check for related DTC P0365-00.
Over-Retarded (Bank 1) - No Refer to the electrical circuit
sub type information Exhaust (B) camshaft position diagrams and check exhaust (B)
actuator (Bank 1) open circuit, camshaft position actuator (Bank 1)
short circuit to ground, short circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
to power ground, short circuit to power
www.JagDocs.com
P0016-00 Crankshaft Position -
Camshaft Position Check engine timing. Check camshaft
Correlation - Bank 1 Sensor A sensor timing plate is installed
- No sub type information The relative positions of the correctly. Check timing chain is
crankshaft position sensor and cam installed correctly
timing plate teeth are not correct
Engine timing incorrect
Timing chain installed incorrectly
Variable valve timing forced fully
advanced

Camshaft Position Check for related DTC P0365-00.
Correlation - Bank 1 Sensor B Check engine timing. Check camshaft
- No sub type information The relative positions of the sensor timing plate is installed
crankshaft position sensor and correctly. Check timing chain is
camshaft timing plate teeth are installed correctly
not correct Refer to the electrical circuit
Engine timing incorrect diagrams and check exhaust (B)
Timing chain installed incorrectly camshaft position actuator (Bank 1)
Variable valve timing forced fully for open circuit, short circuit to
advanced ground, short circuit to power

NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B -
Correlation - Bank 2 Sensor A sensor timing plate is installed
crankshaft position sensor and installed correctly
camshaft timing plate teeth are
not correct
advanced

NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B -
Correlation - Bank 2 Sensor B sensor timing plate is installed
crankshaft position sensor and installed correctly
camshaft timing plate teeth are
not correct
advanced

Actuator (Bank 2) - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
open diagrams and check intake valve
Intake valve solenoid 2 open circuit solenoid 2 for open circuit

Position Actuator (Bank 2) - Refer to the electrical circuit
Circuit open diagrams and check exhaust (B)
Exhaust (B) Camshaft Position camshaft position actuator (Bank 2)
actuator (Bank 2) circuit, open circuit for open circuit
circuit
P0026-72 Intake Valve Control

Solenoid Circuit Check operation of intake valve
Range/Performance (Bank 1) solenoid 1. Check and install a new
- Actuator stuck open Intake valve solenoid 1 angle less intake valve solenoid 1 as required.
than target Refer to the warranty policy and
Intake valve solenoid 1 slow or not procedures manual, or determine if
operating any prior approval programme is in

- Commanded position not Intake valve solenoid 1 angle intake valve solenoid 1 as required.
reachable greater than target Refer to the warranty policy and
Intake valve solenoid 1 not procedures manual, or determine if
returning to target in time any prior approval programme is in
Intake valve solenoid 1 stuck a new module/component
advanced
P0027-72 Exhaust Valve Control

Solenoid Circuit Check operation of exhaust valve
- Actuator stuck open Exhaust valve solenoid 1 angle exhaust valve solenoid 1 as
less than target required. Refer to the warranty policy
Exhaust valve solenoid 1 slow or and procedures manual, or determine
not operating if any prior approval programme is in

- Commanded position not Exhaust valve solenoid 1 angle exhaust valve solenoid 1 as
reachable greater than target required. Refer to the warranty policy
Exhaust valve solenoid 1 not and procedures manual, or determine
returning to target in time if any prior approval programme is in
Exhaust valve solenoid 1 stuck operation, prior to the installation of
advanced a new module/component

- Actuator stuck open Intake valve solenoid 2 angle less intake valve solenoid 2 as required.
than target Refer to the warranty policy and
Intake valve solenoid 2 slow or not procedures manual, or determine if
operating any prior approval programme is in

- Commanded position not Intake valve solenoid 2 angle intake valve solenoid 2 as required.
reachable greater than target Refer to the warranty policy and
Intake valve solenoid 2 not procedures manual, or determine if
returning to target in time any prior approval programme is in
Intake valve solenoid 2 stuck operation, prior to the installation of

- Actuator stuck open Exhaust valve solenoid 2 angle exhaust valve solenoid 2 as
less than target required. Refer to the warranty policy
Exhaust valve solenoid 2 slow or and procedures manual, or determine
not operating if any prior approval programme is in

- Commanded position not Exhaust valve solenoid 2 angle exhaust valve solenoid 2 as
reachable greater than target required. Refer to the warranty policy
Exhaust valve solenoid 2 not and procedures manual, or determine
returning to target in time if any prior approval programme is in
Exhaust valve solenoid 2 stuck operation, prior to the installation of
P0031-11 HO2S Heater Control Circuit NOTES:

Low (Bank 1, Sensor 1) - Using the manufacturer approved
Circuit short to ground diagnostic system check datalogger
signal, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
- Circuit HTR_CTRL_A_UPSTREAM - Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1 (0x03A1)
diagrams and check pre catalyst
LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER A - oxygen sensor-odd heater control
circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 1) circuit for
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-odd short circuit to ground
heater control circuit (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) circuit short circuit to
ground
Circuit open diagnostic system check datalogger
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-odd open circuit
Sensor 1) circuit, open circuit

High (Bank 1, Sensor 1) - Using the manufacturer approved
Circuit short to battery diagnostic system check datalogger
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-odd short circuit to power
power
P0036-00 HO2S Heater Control Circuit

(Bank 1, Sensor 2) - No sub Using the manufacturer approved
NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_A -
type information diagnostic system check datalogger
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater signal, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
circuit control fuse failure Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 2 (0x03A2)
Post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd Refer to the electrical circuit
heater control circuit short circuit diagrams and check post catalyst
to ground, short circuit to power, oxygen sensor-odd sensor fuse for
open circuit open circuit
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit control relay circuit short diagrams and check post catalyst
circuit to ground, short circuit to oxygen sensor-odd sensor circuit for
power, open circuit short circuit to ground, short circuit
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater to power, open circuit
circuit control relay failure Refer to the electrical circuit
Post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd diagrams and check catalyst oxygen
failure sensor heater circuit control relay
circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open circuit
Check and install a new catalyst
oxygen sensor heater control relay,
as required. Check and install a new
post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd as

Circuit short to ground diagnostic system check datalogger
- Circuit HTR_CTRL_B_UPSTREAM - Duty Cycle Bank 2 Sensor 1 (0x03A4)
LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER B - oxygen sensor-even heater control
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-even short circuit to ground
ground

Circuit open diagnostic system check datalogger
open circuit
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-even
Sensor 1) circuit, open circuit

High (Bank 2, Sensor 1) - Using the manufacturer approved
Circuit short to battery diagnostic system check datalogger
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-even short circuit to power
power
P0054-00 HO2S Heater Resistance NOTES:

diagrams and check post catalyst
LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER A - oxygen sensor-odd sensor fuse for
open circuit
circuit control fuse failure diagrams and check post catalyst
Post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd oxygen sensor-odd sensor circuit for
heater control circuit short circuit short circuit to ground, short circuit
to ground, short circuit to power, to power, open circuit, high
open circuit, high resistance resistance
circuit control relay circuit short diagrams and check catalyst oxygen
circuit to ground, short circuit to sensor heater circuit control relay
power, open circuit circuit for short circuit to ground,
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater short circuit to power, open circuit
circuit control relay failure Check and install a new catalyst
Post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd oxygen sensor heater control relay,
failure as required. Check and install a new
post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd as
P0056-00 HO2S Heater Control Circuit

NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_B -
Post catalyst oxygen sensor-even signal, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
heater control circuit short circuit Duty Cycle Bank 2 Sensor 2 (0x03A5)
to ground, short circuit to power, Refer to the electrical circuit
open circuit diagrams and check post catalyst
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater oxygen sensor-even sensor circuit for
circuit control relay circuit short short circuit to ground, short circuit
circuit to ground, short circuit to to power, open circuit
power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater diagrams and check catalyst oxygen
circuit control relay failure sensor heater circuit control relay
Post catalyst oxygen sensor-even circuit for short circuit to ground,
failure short circuit to power, open circuit
Check and install a new catalyst
oxygen sensor heater control relay,
post catalyst oxygen sensor-even, as
P0060-00 HO2S Heater Resistance NOTES:

LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER B - diagrams and check post catalyst
oxygen sensor-even sensor fuse for
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater open circuit
circuit control fuse failure Refer to the electrical circuit
Post catalyst oxygen sensor-even diagrams and check post catalyst
heater control circuit short circuit oxygen sensor-even sensor circuit for
to ground, short circuit to power, short circuit to ground, short circuit
open circuit, high resistance to power, open circuit, high
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater resistance
circuit control relay circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to ground, short circuit to diagrams and check catalyst oxygen
power, open circuit sensor heater circuit control relay
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater circuit for short circuit to ground,
circuit control relay failure short circuit to power, open circuit
Post catalyst oxygen sensor-even Check and install a new catalyst
failure oxygen sensor heater control relay,
post catalyst oxygen sensor-even as
P0069-29 MAP - Barometric Pressure

Correlation - Signal invalid Manifold absolute pressure sensor Using the manufacturer approved
failure diagnostic system check datalogger
Engine control module failure signal, Barometric Pressure Sensor
Voltage (0x035A). Check for related
manifold absolute pressure sensor
DTCs
diagrams and check manifold
absolute pressure sensor circuit for
short circuit to ground, short circuit
Check and install new manifold
absolute pressure sensor as
required. Check and install a new
engine control module as required.
Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if
any prior approval programme is in
P0071-21 Ambient Air Temperature NOTES:

Sensor Range/Performance - Using the manufacturer approved
Signal amplitude < minimum diagnostic system check datalogger
signal, Ambient Air Temperature
Jaguar - Circuit Sensor Voltage (0x03BA)
AMBIENT_TEMP_SENSOR - Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check ambient air
temperature sensor circuit for short
LR - Circuit TAMB TEMP - circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit
Ambient air temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check temperature and
circuit to power, open circuit manifold absolute pressure sensor
Temperature and manifold absolute circuit for short circuit to ground,
pressure sensor circuit short circuit short circuit to power, open circuit
to ground, short circuit to power, Check and install a new ambient air
open circuit temperature sensor as required.
Ambient air temperature sensor Check and install a new temperature
failure and manifold absolute pressure
Temperature and manifold absolute sensor as required. Refer to the
pressure sensor failure warranty policy and procedures
module/component

Sensor Range/Performance - Using the manufacturer approved
Signal amplitude > maximum diagnostic system check datalogger
- Circuit AMBIENT_TEMP_SENSOR - Sensor Voltage (0x03BA)
www.JagDocs.com
LR - Circuit TAMB TEMP - temperature sensor circuit for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to
Ambient air temperature sensor power, open circuit
circuit short circuit to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to power, open circuit diagrams and check temperature and
Temperature and manifold absolute manifold absolute pressure sensor
pressure sensor circuit short circuit circuit for short circuit to ground,
to ground, short circuit to power, short circuit to power, open circuit
open circuit Check and install a new ambient air
Ambient air temperature sensor temperature sensor as required.
failure Check and install a new temperature
Temperature and manifold absolute and manifold absolute pressure
pressure sensor failure sensor as required. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures
module/component

Sensor Circuit Low - No sub Using the manufacturer approved
circuit to ground, open circuit, high
Ambient air temperature sensor resistance
circuit short circuit to ground, open Check and install a new ambient air
circuit, high resistance temperature sensor as required.
Ambient air temperature sensor Refer to the warranty policy and
failure procedures manual, or determine if

Sensor Circuit High - No sub Using the manufacturer approved
signals Ambient Air Temperature
circuit to ground, high resistance,
Ambient air temperature sensor short circuit to power. Check
ground circuit high resistance, connector terminals for corrosion or
open circuit damage
Ambient air temperature sensor Check and install a new ambient air
signal circuit short circuit to power temperature sensor as required.
Ambient air temperature sensor Refer to the warranty policy and
failure procedures manual, or determine if
P007B-23 Charge Air Cooler

Temperature Sensor Circuit Using the manufacturer approved
NOTE: - Circuit TMAP_TEMP_SENSOR
Range/Performance (Bank 1) - diagnostic system check datalogger
- Signal stuck low signal, Charge Air Temperature
Charge air cooler temperature Voltage (0x03EE)
sensor circuit poor / intermittent Refer to the electrical circuit
connection diagrams and check charge air cooler
Charge air cooler temperature temperature sensor circuit for poor,
sensor failure intermittent connection
Check and install a new charge air
cooler temperature sensor as
Temperature Sensor Circuit Inspect connectors for signs of water
NOTE: Jaguar circuit reference
Range/Performance (Bank 1) IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL & ingress, and pins for damage and/or
- Signal stuck high corrosion
BOOST_PRESS_SENSOR_TEMP_SIG. Land
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Rover circuit reference O_S_CACWPR &
and check for fuse failure, install
I_A_BTS
new fuse as required
Connector is disconnected, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
connector pin is backed out, and check the temperature and
connector pin corrosion manifold absolute pressure sensor
Fuse failure circuit for short circuit to ground,
Temperature and manifold absolute short circuit to power, open circuit,
pressure sensor circuit, short high resistance
circuit to ground, short circuit to Check and install a new temperature
power, open circuit, high resistance and manifold absolute pressure
Temperature and manifold absolute sensor as required
pressure sensor failure Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Air charge coolant pump and and check the air charge coolant
control circuit, short circuit to pump and control circuit for short
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit to ground, short circuit to
circuit, high resistance power, open circuit, high resistance
Air charge coolant pump relay Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
failure and check the air charge coolant
Air charge coolant pump failure pump for open circuit, high
resistance
Refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual and check the air
charge coolant pump for correct
operation. Check and install a new
air charge coolant pump as required
Clear DTC and retest

Temperature Sensor Circuit Inspect connectors for signs of water
NOTE: Jaguar circuit reference
Range/Performance (Bank 1) IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL & ingress, and pins for damage and/or
- Signal invalid corrosion
BOOST_PRESS_SENSOR_TEMP_SIG. Land
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Rover circuit reference O_S_CACWPR &
and check for fuse failure, install
I_A_BTS
new fuse as required
Connector is disconnected, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
connector pin is backed out, and check the temperature and
connector pin corrosion manifold absolute pressure sensor
Fuse failure circuit for short circuit to ground,
Temperature and manifold absolute short circuit to power, open circuit,
pressure sensor circuit, short high resistance
circuit to ground, short circuit to Check and install a new temperature
power, open circuit, high resistance and manifold absolute pressure
Temperature and manifold absolute sensor as required
pressure sensor failure Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Air charge coolant pump and and check the air charge coolant
control circuit, short circuit to pump and control circuit for short
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit to ground, short circuit to
circuit, high resistance power, open circuit, high resistance
Air charge coolant pump relay Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
failure and check the air charge coolant
Air charge coolant pump failure pump for open circuit, high
resistance
workshop manual and check the air
charge coolant pump for correct
operation. Check and install a new
air charge coolant pump as required
Clear DTC and retest
P007C-00 Charge Air Cooler

Temperature Sensor Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
Low (Bank 1) - No sub type diagrams and check charge air cooler
-
information temperature sensor (Bank 1) circuit
Charge air cooler temperature for short circuit to ground, open
sensor (Bank 1) circuit short circuit circuit, high resistance
to ground, open circuit, high Check and install a new charge air
resistance cooler temperature sensor (Bank 1)
Charge air cooler temperature as required. Refer to the warranty
sensor (Bank 1) failure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component
P007D-00 Charge Air Cooler
Temperature Sensor Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
High (Bank 1) - No sub type diagrams and check charge air cooler
-
information temperature sensor (Bank 1) circuit
Charge air cooler temperature for short circuit to power, open
sensor (Bank 1) circuit short circuit circuit, high resistance
to power, open circuit, high Check and install a new charge air
resistance cooler temperature sensor (Bank 1)
Charge air cooler temperature as required. Refer to the warranty
sensor (Bank 1) failure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component
P0087-00 Fuel Rail/System Pressure -

Too Low - No sub type Using the manufacturer approved
NOTE: - Circuit
information diagnostic system check datalogger
FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR -
signal, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor -
Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit High Range Sensor Voltage (0x0377)
short circuit to ground, open Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit, high resistance diagrams and check fuel rail pressure
Fuel rail pressure sensor failure sensor circuit for short circuit to
Fuel lines leaking or restricted ground, open circuit, high resistance
Fuel pump failure Check for fuel pump related DTCs.
Check fuel lines for leakage or
restriction
Check and install new fuel rail
pressure sensor as required. Check
and install a new fuel pump as
P0088-00 Fuel Rail/System Pressure -

Too High - No sub type Using the manufacturer approved
NOTE: - Circuit
information diagnostic system check datalogger
FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR -
signal, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor -
Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit High Range Sensor Voltage (0x0377)
short to each other, high Refer to the electrical circuit
resistance, short circuit to power diagrams and check fuel rail pressure
Fuel rail pressure sensor failure sensor circuit for short to each other,
high resistance, short circuit to
power
Check and install new fuel rail
pressure sensor as required. Refer to
module/component
P008A-00 Low Pressure Fuel System

Pressure - Too Low - No sub Using the manufacturer approved
NOTE: - Circuit
LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR -
signal, Fuel Rail Pressure - Low
Low pressure fuel sensor circuit Range Sensor Voltage (0x0376)
failure, short circuit to ground, Check fuel system for leakage
short circuit to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
Fuel pump driver module circuit diagrams and check low pressure
short circuit to ground, short circuit fuel sensor circuit for short circuit to
to power, open circuit ground, short circuit to power, open
Low pressure fuel circuit
Fuel pump driver module failure Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check fuel pump driver
module circuit short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit
Check and install a new low pressure
fuel sensor as required. Check and
install a new fuel pump driver
module as required. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures
module/component
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Front Seat
Climate Control Module (DCSM)
Front Seat Climate Control Module (DCSM)
NOTES:
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the seat climate control module, for additional
diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Diagnosis and Testing).

B10B9-13 Blower Control - Circuit
open Connectors disconnected or Check for any disconnected connectors or damaged
connector pin damage connector pins
Seat blower left circuit - Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
Open circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
Blower motor assembly - present
Short circuit to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Front seat climate control the front seat climate control module - Circuit
module failure reference LH_FANS_RTN, Circuit reference
LH_FANS_PWR - For open circuit. Repair circuit as
required, clear DTC and retest
Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
approved diagnostic system to confirm
rectification. Alternatively, carry out any pinpoint
tests associated with this DTC using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system
B10B9-4B Blower Control - Over

temperature Mechanical restriction in Check for mechanical restriction or debris in seat
blower motor assembly blower
Short circuit to ground approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
LH_FANS_PWR - For short circuit to ground. Repair
circuit as required, clear DTC and retest
B1157-13 Blower Control "B" -

Circuit open Connectors disconnected or Check for any disconnected connectors or damaged
Seat blower right circuit - Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
Open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
module failure reference RH_FANS_RTN, Circuit reference
RH_FANS_PWR - For open circuit. Repair circuit as
B1157-4B Blower Control "B" -

Over temperature Mechanical restriction in Check for mechanical restriction or debris in seat
RH_FANS_PWR - For short circuit to ground. Repair
B120E-13 Right Thermal Electric

Device Control - Circuit Connectors disconnected or Check for any disconnected connectors or damaged
open connector pin damage connector pins
Seat backrest thermal Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
electric device right circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
- Open circuit present
Seat cushion thermal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
electric device right circuit the front seat climate control module - Circuit
- Open circuit reference RH_SEAT_BACK_TED+, Circuit reference
Front seat climate control RH_SEAT_BACK_TED- - For open circuit. Repair
module failure circuit as required, clear DTC and retest
the front seat climate control module - Circuit
reference RH_CUSHION_TED+, Circuit reference
RH_CUSHION_TED- - For open circuit. Repair circuit
as required, clear DTC and retest

Device Control - Circuit Seat backrest thermal Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
current above threshold electric device right circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
- Short circuit to ground present
- Short circuit to ground reference RH_SEAT_BACK_TED+, Circuit reference
Front seat climate control RH_SEAT_BACK_TED- - For short circuit to ground.
module failure Repair circuit as required, clear DTC and retest
RH_CUSHION_TED- - For short circuit to ground.
Repair circuit as required, clear DTC and retest
www.JagDocs.com
B120E-4B Right Thermal Electric

Device Control - Over Restriction in thermal Check for blockage or restriction in thermal electric
temperature electric device air path device air path
B120F-98 Left Seat Cushion -

Component or system Blocked or restricted Check for blockage or restriction in thermal electric
over temperature thermal electric device fan device fan exhaust vent
exhaust vent Check for restricted thermal electric device fan
Restricted thermal electric movement
device fan movement Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
B1223-13 Right Seat Cushion

Temperature Sensor - Connectors disconnected or Check for any disconnected connectors or damaged
Circuit open connector pin damage connector pins
Seat cushion temperature Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
sensor right circuit - Open approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
circuit present
Front seat climate control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
module failure the front seat climate control module - Circuit
reference RH_CUSHION_SENSOR, Circuit reference
RH_CUSHION_SENSOR_RTN - For open circuit.
B1224-13 Left Thermal Electric

electric device left circuit - approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
Open circuit present
electric device left circuit - the front seat climate control module - Circuit
Open circuit reference LH_SEAT_BACK_TED+, Circuit reference
Front seat climate control LH_SEAT_BACK_TED- - For short circuit to ground.
reference LH_CUSHION_TED+, Circuit reference
LH_CUSHION_TED- - For short circuit to ground.
current above threshold electric device left circuit - approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
Short circuit to ground present
Short circuit to ground reference LH_SEAT_BACK_TED+, Circuit reference
B1224-4B Left Thermal Electric

B1225-13 Right Seat Back

Seat backrest temperature Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
circuit present
reference RH_SEAT_BACK_SENSOR, Circuit
reference RH_SEAT_BACK_SENSOR_RTN - For open
circuit. Repair circuit as required, clear DTC and
retest
B1229-13 Left Seat Back

sensor left circuit - Open approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
circuit present
reference LH_SEAT_BACK_SENSOR, Circuit
reference LH_SEAT_BACK_SENSOR_RTN - For open
retest
B122A-11 Right Seat Cushion
Blower Speed Sensor - Seat cushion blower speed Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
Circuit short to ground right circuit - Short circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
to ground present
Blower motor assembly - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Short circuit to ground the front seat climate control module - Circuit
Front seat climate control reference RH_CUSHION_FAN_SPEED - For short
module failure circuit to ground. Repair circuit as required, clear
DTC and retest

Circuit short to battery right circuit - Short circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
to power present
Short circuit to power the front seat climate control module - Circuit
module failure circuit to power. Repair circuit as required, clear
DTC and retest
B122B-11 Right Seat Back Blower

Speed Sensor - Circuit Seat backrest blower speed Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
short to ground right circuit - Short circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
to ground present
Front seat climate control reference RH_SEAT_BACK_FAN_SPEED - For short
DTC and retest

short to battery right circuit - Short circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
to power present
DTC and retest
B122C-11 Left Seat Cushion

Circuit short to ground left circuit - Short circuit to approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
ground present
Front seat climate control reference LH_CUSHION_FAN_SPEED - For short
DTC and retest
Circuit short to battery left circuit - Short circuit to approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
power present
DTC and retest
B122D-11 Left Seat Back Blower

short to ground left circuit - Short circuit to approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
ground present
Front seat climate control reference LH_SEAT_BACK_FAN_SPEED - For short
DTC and retest

short to battery left circuit - Short circuit to approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
power present
DTC and retest
B122E-98 Right Seat Cushion -

B122F-98 Right Seat Back -

B1230-98 Left Seat Back -

B1231-7A Right Seat - Fluid leak
or seal failure Seat backrest assembly - Check for blockage or restriction in seat
Air path leaking backrest/seat cushion thermal electric device fan
Seat cushion assembly - ducts
Air path leaking Check seat backrest/seat cushion thermal electric
Seat assembly damaged device fan exhaust vent is clear
B1232-7A Left Seat - Fluid leak or

seal failure Seat backrest assembly - Check for blockage or restriction in seat
B1235-13 Left Seat Cushion

circuit present
reference LH_CUSHION_SENSOR, Circuit reference
LH_CUSHION_SENSOR_RTN - For open circuit.

Communication Bus - Medium speed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Bus off communication - Bus off the power and ground connections to the module
system, complete a CAN network integrity test
approved diagnostic system to confirm rectification

With Body Control Lost communication with
Module - No sub type central junction box
information customer has reported a climate seat concern. Clear the
DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
diagnosis

the power and ground connections to the module
the CAN network between the front seat climate
control module and central junction box

With Body Control Lost communication with Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Module "B" - No sub rear junction box the power and ground connections to the module
type information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module and rear junction box
www.JagDocs.com
With Instrument Panel Lost communication with Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Cluster (IPC) Control instrument cluster the power and ground connections to the module
information system, complete a CAN network integrity test
control module and instrument cluster

With Information Lost communication with Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Center "A" - No sub rear seat entertainment the power and ground connections to the module
type information control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module and rear seat entertainment
control module

Software Software stored in front Check the front seat climate control module is
Incompatibility - No seat climate control configured correctly
sub type information module is not compatible Reconfigure the front seat climate control module
with master configuration using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear the DTC and retest the system

From ECM/PCM - No The engine control module Check the engine control module for related DTCs
sub type information has transmitted engine and refer to the relevant DTC index
speed quality factor CAN On software levels previous to 8X23-14B663-AE
signal at a specific value clear the DTC and take no further action if the
for a greater than expected system is operating correctly
time period
U2101-00 Control module

Configuration Compatible central car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Incompatible - No sub configuration file not system check and update the car configuration file
type information received by front seat as required. Carry out on demand self test using
climate control module manufacturer approved diagnostic system to
confirm rectification. Clear the DTC and retest

System internal Front seat climate control Check and install new front seat climate control
failures module - Internal failure module as required. Carry out on demand self test
using manufacturer approved diagnostic system to
confirm rectification

Signal compare failure Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Battery internal failure the power and ground connections to the front
Charging system fault seat climate control module and the central
junction box
Refer to the battery care manual and verify that
the vehicle battery is fully charged and serviceable
before continuing with further diagnostic tests
Check the vehicle charging system
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Headlamp
Control Module (HCM)
Headlamp Leveling Control Module (HLCM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Headlamp Leveling Control Module
(HLCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop
manual.
For additional information, refer to: Headlamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1041-04 Leveling Control -
System internal Module internal Suspect Headlamp Leveling Module internal fault. Replace
failures failure as required, refer to the new module/component
B1041-54 Leveling Control -

Missing calibration NOTE: This DTC will NOTE: Sensor calibration routine must be carried out with the
normally be logged when a vehicle unladen.
new module has been
installed. Calibrate the Headlamp Leveling Sensors using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry the out
Leveling sensor routine 'Headlamp Control Module System Calibration' from
calibration routine the 'Module programming and configuration - Setup and
not carried out Configuration - Lighting'
B10AE-11 Headlamp Leveling

Motor - Circuit short Headlamp Leveling Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Headlamp
to ground Motor Control Circuit - Leveling Motor Control Circuit for short to ground
short to ground

Motor - Circuit short Headlamp Leveling Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Headlamp
to battery Motor Control Circuit - Leveling Motor Control Circuit for short to power
short to power
Motor - Signal Signal plausibility Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
plausibility failure failure voltage out of Headlamp Leveling Motor circuits for failure. Disconnect one
range headlamp connector, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC cleared,
suspect Headlamp Leveling Module or circuits to the
disconnected side. If DTC remains, reconnect first
headlamp and disconnect second, clear DTC and re-test. If
DTC cleared, suspect Headlamp Leveling Module or circuits
to the disconnected side. If DTC remains, suspect common
circuits of the failure. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check as required

Supply - Circuit Headlamp Leveling Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check Headlamp
short to ground Sensor 5 volt supply Leveling Sensor 5 volt supply circuit for short to ground
circuit short to ground

Supply - General Headlamp Leveling Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check Headlamp
electrical failure Sensor 5 volt supply Leveling Sensor 5 volt supply circuit for short to power
circuit short to power
C1A04-11 Right Front Height

Sensor - Circuit Right front Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Right
short to ground Sensor circuit short to Front Height Sensor circuit for short to ground
ground

Sensor - Circuit Right front Height Check Right Front Height Sensor connector for security.
short to battery or Sensor circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Right
open power or open circuit Front Height Sensor circuit for short to power or open circuit

Sensor - Signal Sensor (PWM) Signal
NOTE: This DTC may be logged if the vehicles wheels have
plausibility failure out of range
been raised from the floor
Check the location, security and mechanical operation of

the Height Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,
and check Right Front Height Sensor signal circuit for fault
C1A06-11 Right Rear Height

Sensor - Circuit Right rear Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Right
short to ground Sensor circuit short to Rear Height Sensor circuit for short to ground
ground

Sensor - Circuit Right rear Height Check Right Rear Height Sensor connector for security. Refer
short to battery or Sensor circuit short to to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Right Rear
open power or open circuit Height Sensor circuit for short to power or open circuit

Sensor - Signal Sensor (PWM) Signal
NOTE: This DTC may be logged if the vehicles wheels have
plausibility failure out of range
been raised from the floor
Check the location, security and mechanical operation of

the Height Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,
and check Right Rear Height Sensor signal circuit for fault

Communication Bus CAN Bus Off Check other modules for stored DTCs. Carry out the CAN
- Bus off CAN Bus Circuit fault Network Integrity test using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

with TCM - No sub Lost communication Check the Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs.
type information with the Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
CAN network fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the
Transmission Control Module

With Anti-Lock Lost communication Check the Anti-lock Brake System Module for stored DTCs.
Brake System (ABS) with the Anti-lock Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module - No Brake System Module complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
sub type CAN network fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
information between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the Anti-lock
Brake System Module
Module Software Car Configuration File Check/amend the Car Configuration File (CCF) using the
Incompatibility - No (CCF) information manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Confirm the
sub type incompatible to latest Strategy and Calibration software is installed in the
information Headlamp Leveling Headlamp Leveling Module, using the manufacturer
Module approved diagnostic system update the Headlamp Leveling
Module software as required. If DTC returns suspect an
internal fault with the Headlamp Leveling Module Replace
as required, refer to the new module/component

Received From NOTE: Steering angle NOTE: The steering wheel center (straight ahead) position is
Anti-Lock Brake sensor not calibrated recalculated each ignition cycle
System (ABS)
Control Module - No Invalid data received Clear the DTC then cycle the ignition state to off then on.
sub type from ABS module Carry out a short road test to calibrate the Steering Wheel
information Angle Sensor. If DTC returns, check the Anti-lock Brake
System Module for related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
Index
U2100-00 Initial Configuration

Not Complete - No Car Configuration File
NOTE: The Car Configuration File (CCF) parameters required
sub type (CCF) information not
are (Vehicle type)(Headlamp type)(Gearbox type) and (Dayrunning
information received completely
light)
Check/amend Car Configuration File (CCF) as required using

the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the stored
DTC then cycle the Ignition State to off, wait 30 seconds.
Return the Ignition state to on and check for stored DTCs,
if the DTC returns check other modules for related stored
DTCs. If no other modules have related DTCs confirm the
security and condition of the Headlamp Leveling Module
circuit connections. If no other DTCs are stored and the
circuit is correct suspect an internal fault with the
Headlamp Leveling Module Replace as required, refer to the
new module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index

Configuration Car Configuration File
NOTE: The Car Configuration File (CCF) parameters required
Incompatible - No (CCF) information
are (Vehicle type)(Headlamp type)(Gearbox type) and (Dayrunning
sub type incompatible to
light)
information Headlamp Leveling
Module Check/amend Car Configuration File (CCF) as required using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U3002-81 Vehicle
Identification The stored Vehicle Check the correct Headlamp Leveling Module is installed to
Number - Invalid Identification Number vehicle specification. Refit original or replace the module as
serial data received is not the same as required. Refer to the new module/component installation
the Central Broadcast note at the top of the DTC Index
Vehicle Identification
Number
The Headlamp
Leveling Module has
previously been
installed to another
vehicle

Circuit voltage The power supply to Suspect Battery or Charging fault. Check the battery
below threshold the Module has been condition and state of charge. Check the vehicle charging
below 9 Volts for system. Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
more than 1000 Clear the DTC, cycle ignition state to off then on, if DTC
milliseconds returns refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
power and ground circuit to the Headlamp Leveling Module

Circuit voltage The power supply to Suspect Charging fault. Check the battery condition and
above threshold the Module has been state of charge. Check the vehicle charging system. Refer
above 16 Volts for to the relevant workshop manual section
more than 1000
milliseconds
Signal compare Difference in battery Check other modules for related stored DTCs. Refer to the
failure voltage, of 2 volts or electrical circuit diagrams and check power and ground
more, between the voltages at the Headlamp Leveling Module
central broadcast
voltage (via CAN Bus)
and Headlamp
Leveling Module

Received From Check the Steering Angle Sensor Module for stored DTCs.
NOTE: Steering Angle
Steering Angle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Sensor not calibrated
Sensor Module - No complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
sub type Invalid Data Received electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
information from the Steering between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the
Angle Sensor Module Transmission Control Module

Received From Invalid Data Received Check the Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs.
Transmission from the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module - No Transmission Control complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
sub type Module electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
information Transmission between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the
component fault Transmission Control Module

With Steering Angle Lost communication Check the Steering Angle Sensor Module for stored DTCs.
Sensor Module - No with the Steering Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
sub type Angle Sensor Module complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
information CAN network fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the Steering
Angle Sensor

With Body Control Lost communication Check the Auxiliary Junction Box for stored DTCs. Using the
Module "B" - No sub with the Auxiliary manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete the
type information Junction Box CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
CAN network fault diagrams and check the CAN network between the
Headlamp Leveling Module and the Auxiliary Junction Box
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Instrument
Cluster (IPC)
Instrument Cluster (IC)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Instrument Cluster (IC). For additional
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1008-11 Wiper Mode Switch -
Circuit short to ground Master wiper switch circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to ground master wiper switch circuit for short to ground
B1008-15 Wiper Mode Switch -

Circuit short to battery Master wiper switch circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open short to power, open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check master wiper switch circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B1009-51 Ignition Authorisation -

Not programmed Instrument cluster power Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
and ground supply circuits - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short, open circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Target SID synchronization and check instrument cluster power and ground
error following supply circuits for short, open circuit. Perform
re-programming the Immobilisation application from the Set-up
CAN fault menu using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Check CAN communications
between instrument cluster and tester

Signal compare failure LS CAN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
CJB ignition, power and DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground supply circuits - system. Check CAN communications between
short, open circuit CJB and instrument cluster. Refer to the
Instrument cluster power electrical circuit diagrams and check CJB ignition,
and ground supply circuits - power and ground supply circuits for short, open
short, open circuit circuit and instrument cluster power and ground
Incorrect CJB or instrument supply circuits for short, open circuit. Check
cluster installed correct CJB and instrument cluster installed.
Target SID synchronization Perform the Immobilisation application from the
error following Set-up menu using the manufacturer approved
re-programming diagnostic system. Check CAN network for
Noise/EMC related error interference/EMC related issues

Missing message CJB ignition, power and Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ground supply circuits - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LS CAN fault and check CJB ignition, power and ground supply
Instrument cluster power circuits for short, open circuit and instrument
and ground supply circuits - cluster power and ground supply circuits for
short, open circuit short, open circuit. Check CAN communications
Low battery voltage <9 between CJB and instrument cluster. Check
volts battery is in serviceable condition and fully
charged
B100A-62 Fuel Pump Authorisation

- Signal compare failure LS CAN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
RJB power and ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
supply circuits - short, open system. Check CAN communications between
circuit RJB and instrument cluster. Refer to the
Instrument cluster power electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power
and ground supply circuits - and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit
short, open circuit and instrument cluster power and ground supply
Incorrect RJB or instrument circuits for short, open circuit. Check correct RJB
cluster installed and instrument cluster installed. Perform the
Target SID synchronization Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu
error following using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
re-programming system. Check CAN network for interference/EMC
Noise/EMC related error related issues

- Signal plausibility Target SID synchronization Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
failure error following DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
re-programming system. Perform the Immobilisation application
RJB power and ground from the Set-up menu using the manufacturer
supply circuits - short, open approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power
LS CAN fault and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit.
Check CAN communications between RJB and
instrument cluster

- Missing message RJB power and ground Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
supply circuits - short, open DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LS CAN fault and check RJB power and ground supply circuits
Instrument cluster power for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
and ground supply circuits - power and ground supply circuits for short, open
short, open circuit circuit. Check CAN communications between RJB
Low battery voltage <9 and instrument cluster. Check battery is in
volts serviceable condition and fully charged
B100B-67 Column Lock Ground

Authorisation - Signal Algorithm based failure- If a non start issue has not been identified,
incorrect after event signal is incorrect after the clear the DTC and check vehicle starts correctly.
event If a non start issue has been identified run the
Instrument cluster power manufacturers approved diagnostic system Start
and ground supply circuits - Authorisation Application. Carry out any pinpoint
short, open circuit tests associated with this DTC using the
LS CAN fault manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer
RJB power and ground to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB
supply circuits - short, open power and ground supply circuits for short, open
circuit circuit and instrument cluster power and ground
Vehicle speed present when supply circuits for short, open circuit. Check CAN
attempting to power ESCL communications between RJB and instrument
Engine speed present when cluster. Check for invalid vehicle speed signal
attempting to power ESCL from ABS/instrument cluster gateway. Check for
PowerMode status > 4 when invalid engine speed signal from ECM/instrument
attempting to perform lock cluster gateway. Check for invalid signal from
action CJB
B100B-87 Column Lock Ground
Authorisation - Missing Instrument cluster power Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
message and ground supply circuits - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LS CAN fault and check RJB power and ground supply circuits
RJB power and ground for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
circuit circuit. Check CAN communications between RJB
and instrument cluster
B100C-67 Column Lock Supply

Authorisation - Signal Instrument cluster power Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
incorrect after event and ground supply circuits - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LS CAN fault and check CJB power and ground supply circuits
CJB power and ground for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
circuit circuit. Check CAN communications between CJB
Vehicle speed present when and instrument cluster. Check for invalid vehicle
attempting to power ESCL speed signal from ABS/instrument cluster
Engine speed present when gateway. Check for invalid engine speed signal
attempting to power ESCL from ECM/instrument cluster gateway. Check for
PowerMode status > 4 when invalid signal from CJB
attempting to perform lock
action
B100C-87 Column Lock Supply

Authorisation - Missing Instrument cluster power Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
message and ground supply circuits - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LS CAN fault and check CJB power and ground supply circuits
CJB power and ground for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
circuit circuit. Check CAN communications between CJB
and instrument cluster
B100D-62 Column Lock

Authorisation - Signal CAN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
compare failure ESCL power and ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
supply circuits - short, open system. Check CAN communication between
circuit Electronic Steering Column Lock and instrument
Instrument cluster power cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and ground supply circuits - and check Electronic Steering Column Lock power
short, open circuit and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit
Incorrect ESCL or instrument and Instrument cluster power and ground supply
cluster installed circuits for short, open circuit. Check correct
Target SID synchronization Electronic Steering Column Lock and instrument
error following cluster installed. Perform the Immobilisation
re-programming application from the Set-up menu using the
Noise/EMC related error manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
CAN network for interference/EMC related issues

Authorisation - Signal Algorithm based failure- If the customer has not reported a non start
plausibility failure signal plausibility failure issue, clear the DTC and check vehicle starts
CAN fault correctly. If a non start issue has been reported
ESCL power and ground run the manufacturers approved diagnostic
supply circuits - short, open system Start Authorisation Application and
circuit follow the actions required for this DTC. Carry
Instrument cluster power out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
and ground supply circuits - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short, open circuit system. Check CAN communication between
Electronic Steering Column Lock and instrument
cluster (check transmission out speed, vehicle
speed, engine speed, gear position and
powermode signals to Electronic Steering
Column Lock). Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check Electronic Steering Column
Lock power and ground supply circuits for short,
open circuit and Instrument cluster power and
ground supply circuits for short, open circuit

Authorisation - Missing Missing message Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car using
message - Missing CAN fault the key fob and retest. Check for related DTCs
message No response from electric and refer to the relevant DTC index
steering column lock control If the fault is cleared, notify the customer that
module, instrument cluster, the steering column lock may fail to unlock if the
central junction box vehicle is parked with a high steering angle or
Battery voltage at electric with the road wheel against a curb. If the
steering column lock control column lock is failing to disengage, the customer
module too low may be able to rectify this by rotating the
Electric steering column lock steering wheel while pressing the engine start
control module, instrument button
cluster, central junction box If fault persists, complete a CAN network
fault integrity test using the manufacturers approved
diagnostic system. Alternatively, refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits
between the central junction box, the instrument
cluster and the electronic steering column lock.
the central junction box, the instrument cluster
and the electronic steering column lock power
and ground supply circuits for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. Clear
DTC, perform an on demand self-test and retest
If fault persists, check that the vehicle battery
supply voltage is between 9-16 volts. Rectify as
required

Authorisation - Battery voltage at electric Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car using
Component internal steering column lock control the key fob and retest
failure module too low If fault persists, check that the vehicle battery
Torque load on steering supply voltage is between 9-16 volts. Rectify as
column required
CAN fault Ensure the column lock bolt movement is not
Electric steering column lock obstructed or restricted (the parked position of
control module - Internal the road wheels may be exerting a turning force
failure through the steering column, preventing the lock
from releasing. The steering wheel may need to
be held against the force to allow the column
lock to release). Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and
unlock car using the key fob and retest
If fault persists, complete a CAN network
integrity test using the manufacturers approved
diagnostic system. Alternatively, refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits
between the central junction box, the instrument
cluster and the electronic steering column lock.
the central junction box, the instrument cluster
and the electronic steering column lock power
and ground supply circuits for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. Clear
If fault persists, check and install a new electric
steering column lock control module as required
B1024-87 Start Control Unit -

Missing message Smart card docking station Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
failure - slave node not DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
responding system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the smart card docking station LIN
circuit for short, open circuit. Suspect the smart
card docking station, check and install a new
docking station as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
B1046-11 Front Fog Lamp Control

Switch - Circuit short to Fog lamp switch circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground short to ground fog lamp switch circuit for short to ground
B1046-15 Front Fog Lamp Control

Switch - Circuit short to Fog lamp switch circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery or open short to power, open circuit fog lamp switch circuit for short to power, open
circuit
B1048-11 Brake Fluid Level Switch

- Circuit short to ground Brake fluid level switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short to ground brake fluid level switch circuit for short to ground
B10A0-11 Wiper/ Washer Switch -
Circuit short to ground Wash/wipe circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground wash/wipe circuit for short to ground
B10A0-15 Wiper/ Washer Switch -

Circuit short to battery Wash/wipe circuit - short to Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open power, open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check wash/wipe circuit for short to power,
open circuit

Circuit short to ground Master lighting switch circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
- short to ground master lighting switch circuit for short to ground

Circuit short to battery Master lighting switch circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open - short to power, open DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check master lighting switch circuit for short
B112B-87 Steering Wheel Module -

Missing message Steering wheel module Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
failure - slave node not DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
responding system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the clockspring LIN circuit for short,
open circuit. Suspect the clockspring, check and
install a new clockspring as required, refer to the
new module/component installation note at the
top of the DTC Index
B115C-7A Transfer Fuel Pump -

Fluid leak or seal failure Fuel pump system fault Check for fuel system jet pump or jet pump fuel
level sensor fault
B1A85-15 Ambient Light Sensor -

Circuit short to battery Autolamp sensor circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open short to power, open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check autolamp sensor circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B1B01-00 Key Transponder - No

sub type information Operator only cycles one key Ensure all keys to be programmed are available.
During transponder key Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
programming the instrument power and ground supply circuits to all relevant
cluster, smartcard docking modules. Replace faulty key and repeat key
station or key loses programming. Check CAN network for
power/circuit failure interference/EMC related issues
Faulty key during key
programming
Unable to program
transponder key due to
noise/EMC related error
B1B01-05 Key Transponder -

System programming Error following SCU Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
failures replacement DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Smartcard docking station system. Perform the Immobilisation application
power and ground supply from the Set-up menu using the manufacturer
circuits - short, open circuit approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
LIN fault electrical circuit diagrams and check smartcard
Instrument cluster power docking station power and ground supply circuits
and ground supply circuits - for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
short, open circuit power and ground supply circuits for short, open
circuit. Check LIN communications between
smartcard docking station and instrument cluster
B1B01-51 Key Transponder - Not

programmed LIN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Instrument cluster power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and ground supply circuits - system. Check LIN communications between
short, open circuit smartcard docking station and instrument
Key fault cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Smartcard docking station and check smartcard docking station power and
power and ground supply ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and
circuits - short, open circuit instrument cluster power and ground supply
Attempted to program a non circuits for short, open circuit. Confirm
www.JagDocs.com
default key transponder key operation. Ensure new keys are
from a known source
B1B01-55 Key Transponder - Not

configured Un-programmed key Confirm the correct keys are used
inserted in SCU2
A non default key inserted
during key programming

Signal compare failure Instrument cluster power Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
and ground supply circuits - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Incorrect instrument cluster circuits for short, open circuit. Check correct
or smartcard docking station instrument cluster and smartcard docking station
installed are installed. Perform the Immobilisation
Error during or following the application from the Set-Up menu using the
Write Target SID routine manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
Noise/EMC related error CAN network for interference/EMC related issues

Signal plausibility LIN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
failure Instrument cluster power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Transponder key fault cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Error occurred during circuits for short, open circuit. Confirm
transponder key transponder key operation. Repeat transponder
programming key programming

Signal incorrect after LIN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
event Instrument cluster power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Transponder key fault cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Another key in close circuits for short, open circuit. Confirm
proximity transponder key operation. Confirm single key
Instrument cluster in operation. Ensure instrument cluster in correct
incorrect programming state mode i.e. Auto Enable, Key erase etc. Ensure
Attempted to program a non new keys are from a known source. Check for
default key intermittent power and ground to instrument
Instrument cluster Cold init cluster. Design condition - advise customer of
whilst in Ignition On state, starting sequence. Design condition - determine
without key being present in customer transponder key usage
the SCU
Race condition caused by
closing driver door and
pressing the start button
within a small time window
Passive Key search function
from last door closed and
key inserted in the SCU

Missing message LIN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Instrument cluster power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Smartcard docking station cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
power and ground supply and check smartcard docking station power and
circuits - short, open circuit ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and
instrument cluster power and ground supply
circuits for short, open circuit
B1B33-05 Target I.D. Transfer -

System programming CAN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
failures ECM ignition, power and DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short, open circuit ECM and instrument cluster. Refer to electrical
Instrument cluster power circuit diagrams and check ECM ignition, power
ECM or instrument cluster circuits for short, open circuit. Perform the
incorrectly configured Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system

Signal compare failure CAN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ECM ignition, power and DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Incorrect ECM or instrument circuits for short, open circuit. Check correct ECM
cluster installed and instrument cluster installed. Perform the
Synchronisation error Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu
following re-programming using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Noise/EMC related error system. Check CAN network for interference/EMC
related issues
B1B33-64 Target identification

transfer - Signal Algorithm based failure - If the customer has not reported a non start
plausibility failure signal plausibility failure issue, clear the DTC and check vehicle starts
CAN fault correctly. If a non start has been reported run
ECM ignition, power and the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
ground supply circuits - Start Authorisation Application and follow the
short, open circuit actions required for this DTC. Carry out any
Instrument cluster power pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
and ground supply circuits - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short, open circuit Check CAN communications between ECM and
electronic steering column instrument cluster. Refer to electrical circuit
lock status incomplete diagrams and check ECM ignition, power and
Race condition caused by ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and
closing driver door and instrument cluster power and ground supply
pressing the start button circuits for short, open circuit. Check electronic
within a small time window steering column lock operation. Advise customer
of starting sequence and to allow time to elapse
between closing door and pressing start button

Missing message CAN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ECM ignition, power and DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Low battery voltage circuits for short, open circuit. Check battery is
in serviceable condition and is fully charged,
check terminals etc
B1C32-77 Steering Column Tilt

Solenoid - Commanded TILT axis fails to move Check for restricted/jammed steering column
position not reachable minimum distance within motor mechanism. Refer to the electrical circuit
allotted time period. Motion diagrams and check steering column motor
may have been prohibited UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit for short, open circuit
due to motor jamming,
stalling or solenoid pin not
engaging

Solenoid - Unexpected TELE axis moves when it Check for stuck/jammed solenoid/switch. Refer
operation has not been commanded to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to. Motion may have steering column motor UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit
occurred due to solenoid pin for short, open circuit
not disengaging or
mechanism has been
jammed on, whilst REACH
axis has been commanded
to move

Feedback Signal - Circuit Steering column tilt Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to battery feedback signal circuit - steering column tilt feedback signal circuit for
short to power short to power
Feedback Signal - Circuit Steering column tilt Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to ground or open feedback signal circuit - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short to ground, open circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check steering column tilt feedback signal
circuit for short to ground, open circuit
B1C34-77 Steering Column

Telescope Solenoid - REACH axis fails to move Check for restricted/jammed steering column
Commanded position minimum distance within motor mechanism. Refer to the electrical circuit
not reachable allotted time period. Motion diagrams and check steering column motor
may have been prohibited UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit for short, open circuit
due to motor jamming,
stalling or solenoid pin not
engaging

Telescope Solenoid - REACH axis moves when it Check for stuck/jammed solenoid/switch. Refer
Unexpected operation has not been commanded to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to. Motion may have steering column motor UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit
occurred due to solenoid pin for short, open circuit
not disengaging or
mechanism has been
jammed on, whilst TILT axis
has been commanded to
move

Telescope Feedback Steering column TELE Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Signal - Circuit short to feedback signal circuit - steering column TELE feedback signal circuit for
battery short to power short to power

Telescope Feedback Steering column TELE Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Signal - Circuit short to feedback signal circuit - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground or open short to ground, open circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check steering column TELE feedback signal

Tilt/Telescope Switch - Steering column adjust Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to ground switch circuit - short to steering column adjust switch circuit for short to
ground ground
B1C48-11 Flash to Pass Switch -

Circuit short to ground Main beam flash switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short to ground main beam flash switch circuit for short to
ground
B1C48-15 Flash to Pass Switch -

Circuit short to battery Main beam flash switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open circuit - short to power, DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
open circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check main beam flash switch circuit for
B1C53-11 Front Wiper Intermittent

Data - Circuit short to Intermittent wipe switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground circuit - short to ground intermittent wipe switch circuit for short to
ground
B1C53-15 Front Wiper Intermittent

Data - Circuit short to Intermittent wipe switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery or open circuit - short to power, DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check intermittent wipe switch circuit for
B1D36-11 Turn Indicator Switch -

Circuit short to ground Direction indicator switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short to ground direction indicator switch circuit for short to
ground
B1D36-15 Turn Indicator Switch -

Circuit short to battery Direction indicator switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open circuit - short to power, DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check direction indicator switch circuit for
B1D37-11 Wiper Switch
Connection Circuit - Flick wipe switch circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to ground short to ground flick wipe switch circuit for short to ground
B1D37-15 Wiper Switch

Connection Circuit - Flick wipe switch circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Circuit short to battery short to power, open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
or open system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check flick wipe switch circuit for short to
power, open circuit
C1110-64 Power steering

Calibration Data - Signal Invalid VAPS curve loaded Re-configure the instrument cluster as new to
plausibility failure download VAPS curve data
P0635-11 Power Steering Control

Circuit - Circuit short to VAPS ignition supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground - short to ground VAPS ignition supply circuit for short to ground

Circuit - Circuit short to VAPS ignition supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery - short to power VAPS ignition supply circuit for short to power

Circuit - Circuit open VAPS ignition supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
- open circuit VAPS ignition supply circuit for open circuit

Circuit - Signal First valid received speed Check ABS module for DTCs and refer to relevant
amplitude > maximum value above threshold DTC Index

Circuit - Data memory Data memory failure Re-configure the instrument cluster as new to
failure download VAPS curve data

Communication Bus - Bus Off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Bus off DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Carry out CAN network integrity test
and check HS CAN network to instrument cluster

Communication Bus - Bus Off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Bus off DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Carry out CAN network integrity test
and check MS CAN network to instrument cluster

With ECM/PCM “A” - No Loss of CAN communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
sub type information with ECM DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check ECM for DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index

with TCM - No sub type Loss of CAN communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
information with TCM DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check TCM for DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index

With Gear Shift Module Loss of CAN communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- No sub type with transmission shift DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information module system. Check transmission shift module for
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index

With Cruise Control Loss of CAN communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Module - No sub type with speed control module DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system. Check speed control module for DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC Index

With Anti-Lock Brake Loss of CAN communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
System (ABS) Control with ABS module DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No sub type system. Check ABS module for DTCs and refer to
information the relevant DTC Index
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Integrated
Audio Module (IAM)
Integrated Audio Module (IAM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Integrated Audio Module (IAM). For

B1B69-15 12 Volt supply circuit
- Circuit short to Antenna power supply Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery or open circuit - short to battery, DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
high resistance system.
B1B69-11 12 Volt supply circuit

- Circuit short to Antenna power supply Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ground circuit - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
the antenna power supply circuit for short to ground
B1D19-16 Compact Disc Unit -

Circuit voltage below Circuit voltage below Suspect the integrated audio module, check and
threshold threshold install a new module as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index

Commanded position Commanded position not Suspect the integrated audio module, check and
not reachable reachable install a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
No operation No operation Suspect the integrated audio module, check and
the DTC Index

short to ground Front driver speaker circuits Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
test front driver speaker circuits for short to ground

short to battery Front driver speaker circuits Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test front driver speaker circuits for short to power

resistance below Front driver speaker circuits Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold - resistance below DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system
B1A01-1B Speaker #1 - Circuit

resistance above Front driver speaker circuits Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold - resistance above DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system
B1A01-1C Speaker #1 - Circuit

voltage out of range Front driver speaker circuits Suspect the integrated audio module. Check and
- voltage out of range. install a new module as required, refer to the new
Power IC failure internal to module/component installation note at the top of
the integrated audio the DTC Index

short to ground Front passenger speaker Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuits - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test front passenger speaker circuits for short to
ground

short to battery Front passenger speaker Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuits - short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test front passenger speaker circuits for short to
power

resistance below Front passenger speaker Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold circuits - resistance below DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system

resistance above Front passenger speaker Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold circuits - resistance above DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system

voltage out of range Front passenger speaker Suspect the integrated audio module. Check and
circuits - voltage out of install a new module as required, refer to the new
range. Power IC failure module/component installation note at the top of
internal to the integrated the DTC Index
audio

short to ground Rear left speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
test rear left speaker circuits for short to ground

short to battery Rear left speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test rear left speaker circuits for short to power
resistance below Rear left speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold resistance below threshold DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system

resistance above Rear left speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold resistance above threshold DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system

voltage out of range Rear left speaker circuits - Suspect the integrated audio module. Check and
voltage out of range. Power install a new module as required, refer to the new
IC failure internal to the module/component installation note at the top of
integrated audio the DTC Index

short to ground Rear right speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
test rear right speaker circuits for short to ground

short to battery Rear right speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test rear right speaker circuits for short to power

resistance below Rear right speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold resistance below threshold DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system

open Rear right speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
resistance above threshold DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system

voltage out of range Rear right speaker circuits - Suspect the integrated audio module. Check and
voltage out of range. Power install a new module as required, refer to the new
IC failure internal to the module/component installation note at the top of
integrated audio the DTC Index
B1A56-13 Antenna - Circuit

open Antenna circuit - open Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
check antenna circuit for open circuit
B1D78-11 Auxiliary Input -

Circuit short to Auxiliary input circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
test Auxiliary input circuits for short to ground

Circuit short to Auxiliary input circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test Auxiliary input circuits for short to power

Circuit open Auxiliary input circuit - high Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
resistance DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test Auxiliary input circuits for high resistance
B1D79-11 Microphone Input -

Circuit short to Microphone input circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
test microphone input circuits for short to ground

Circuit short to Microphone input circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test microphone input circuits for short to power
Circuit open Microphone input circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
high resistance DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test microphone input circuits for high resistance
B1134-11 Phone Input - Circuit

short to ground Phone input circuit - short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
to ground phone input circuits for short to ground

short to battery Phone input circuit - short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
to power phone input circuits for short to power

open Phone input circuit - high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
resistance phone input circuits for high resistance

Not Complete - No Car configuration data not Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
sub type information received DTC Index

Configuration Incorrect car configuration Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Incompatible - No sub data received DTC Index. Check/amend Car Configuration File
type information using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system

Internal electronic Internal electronic failure Suspect the integrated audio module, install a new
failure module as required, refer to the new module

configured Incorrect car configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
data received approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test.
If the DTC remains suspect the integrated audio
module, refer to the new module installation note
at the top of the DTC Index

Missing message Missing message Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Check integrated audio
module for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index. Check
CAN network integrity using the manufacturer

Component or system Component or system over Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
over temperature temperature Clear DTC and re-test/monitor condition

Signal compare failure Mis-match in battery Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
voltage, of 2 volts or more, DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
between integrated audio system
module and RJB
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Integrated
Control Panel (FCIMB)
Integrated Control Panel (ICP)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Integrated Control Panel (ICP). For

B1012-23 Heated Windshield Switch
- Signal stuck low Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
down/jammed install a new integrated control panel as required
Integrated control
panel failure
B1013-23 Heater Rear Defog Switch

- Signal stuck low Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
Integrated control
panel failure
B1014-23 Recirculation Switch -

Signal stuck low Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
Integrated control
panel failure
B1015-23 Screen On/Off Switch -

Integrated control
panel failure
B1016-23 Status Switch - Signal
stuck low Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
Integrated control
panel failure
B1017-23 Left Temperature Decrease

Switch - Signal stuck low Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
Integrated control
panel failure

Decrease Switch - Signal Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
stuck low down/jammed install a new integrated control panel as required
Integrated control
panel failure
B1019-23 Left Temperature Increase

Integrated control
panel failure
B101A-23 Right Temperature

Increase Switch - Signal Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
stuck low down/jammed install a new integrated control panel as required
Integrated control
panel failure
B101B-23 Defrost Switch - Signal

Integrated control
panel failure
B101C-23 Seek Up Switch - Signal

Integrated control
panel failure
B101D-23 Seek Down Switch - Signal

Integrated control
panel failure
B101E-23 Air Conditioning Mode

Integrated control
panel failure
B101F-23 Eject Switch - Signal stuck

low Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
Integrated control
panel failure
B1020-23 Load Switch - Signal stuck

Integrated control
panel failure
B1021-23 Source Switch - Signal

Integrated control
panel failure
B1022-23 Audio On/Off Switch -

Integrated control
panel failure
www.JagDocs.com
B11A9-23 Tone Button - Signal stuck
Integrated control
panel failure
B121F-23 Climate Switch - Signal

Integrated control
panel failure

Communication Bus - Bus Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
off using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U0140-00 Lost Communication With

Body Control Module - No Missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
sub type information from CJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system

Body Control Module "B" - Missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
No sub type information from RJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system

Instrument Panel Cluster Missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated to this DTC
(IPC) Control Module - No from instrument using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
sub type information cluster

Information Center "A" - Missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
No sub type information from information and using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
entertainment control
module

Software Incompatibility - Invalid car Re-configure the integrated control panel as new.
No sub type information configuration data Clear DTC and re-test, if DTC remains suspect the
received integrated control panel. Check and install a new
integrated control panel as required, refer to the new
DTC Index
U3000-41 Control Module - General

checksum failure Checksum error, Suspect the integrated control panel, check and
internal module install a new integrated control panel as required,
failure refer to the new module/component installation note
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
NOTES:
It is advisable not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on the restraints
control module or associated systems
Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to Air Bag module circuits are not acceptable.
Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the replacement of a harness.
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the occupant classification system, for
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20
Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1193-53 Crash Event
Storage Full and Crash event occurred Clear diagnostic trouble code and re-test
Locked -
Deactivated
B1A54-01 Occupant Belt
Tension Sensor - General electrical failure Clear diagnostic trouble code and re-test. If the problem
General Electrical persists, check and install a new safety belt tension
Failure sensor as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a
new module/component

Tension Sensor - General signal failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check safety
General signal belt tension and mat pressure sensor circuits for short to
failure each other
Tension Sensor - Safety belt tension Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check safety
Circuit short to sensor voltage reference belt tension sensor voltage reference and signal circuits
ground or signal circuit - short for short to ground
to ground

Circuit short to sensor voltage reference belt tension sensor voltage reference and signal circuits
battery or signal circuit - short for short to power
to power

Circuit open sensor voltage reference belt tension sensor voltage reference and signal circuits
or signal circuit - open for open circuit
circuit
B1A62-02 Pressure Sensor -

General signal General signal failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check safety
failure belt tension and mat pressure sensor circuits for short to
each other

Circuit short to Mat pressure sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check mat
ground voltage reference or pressure sensor voltage reference and signal circuits for
signal circuits - short to short to ground
ground

Circuit short to Mat pressure sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check mat
battery voltage reference, pressure sensor voltage reference, ground and signal
ground or signal circuits circuits for short to power
- short to power

Circuit open Mat pressure sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check mat
voltage reference or pressure sensor voltage reference and signal circuits for
signal circuit - open open circuit
circuit
B1A62-7B Pressure Sensor -

Low fluid level Low fluid level - bladder Check and install new bladder as required. Refer to the
damaged warranty policy and procedures manual, or determine if
any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module/component

Communication Bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
Bus - Bus off network for short, open circuit. Carry out the CAN
network integrity test using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U0151-00 Lost
Communication Restraints control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power
With Restraints module missing and ground supplies to restraints control module. Carry
Control Module - message out CAN network integrity test using the manufacturer
No sub type approved diagnostic system
information
Module Software Master car configuration Check correct occupancy seat module is installed for
Incompatibility - file ID does not vehicle specification. Check rear junction box for related
No sub type correspond diagnostic trouble codes and refer to relevant diagnostic
information trouble code index

Main Software - Main software not Check and install a new occupancy seat module as
Not programmed programmed required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is
in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
U201A-51 Control Module

Main Calibration Main calibration data not Check and install a new occupancy seat module as
Data - Not programmed required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
programmed manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is
module/component
System Internal Occupancy seat module Check and install a new occupancy seat module as
Failures internal electronic failure required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
module/component

Missing calibration This diagnostic trouble Check the following criteria have all been achieved:
code is set if a 'calibrate Ignition status set to RUN/START. Verify seat is always
occupancy seat module empty after power-up before re-zero is requested. The
empty seat offset' occupancy seat module has gone through the seat
routine is requested and assembly plant calibration. No collision event received
fails due to one of the from the restraints control module during the current
pre-conditions to ignition cycle. No faults present in the current ignition
execute the routine cycle. The trigger message for calibrate empty seat
offset has been received from the diagnostic tool.
Occupancy seat module has enough time to begin
classification. Temperature is between 6C (42F) and 36C
(97F)

Circuit voltage Circuit voltage below Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable
below threshold threshold condition. Check integrity of charging system

Circuit voltage Circuit voltage above Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable
above threshold threshold condition. Check integrity of charging system
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Parking Aid
Module (PAM)
Parking Aid Control Module (PACM)
NOTES:
Physical damage to the sensor (impact damage or scratched sensor surface) must NOT be changed under warranty.
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Parking Aid Control Module (PACM). For
For additional information, refer to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1B36-01 Front Right Outer
Sensor - General Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
Electrical Failure Front right outer sensor bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
- Component internal circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
failure power, open circuit. Repair or replace any wiring
harness as required
Check the connector for integrity and damage, then
re-connect sensor to confirm connection
Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
clear the DTC and run the on demand self test
If the problem persists remove the suspect sensor
from the bumper. Inspect the sensor connector for
signs of water ingress/corrosion. Exchange the
suspect sensor with another sensor within the
bumper that is not reporting a fault. Clear the DTC
and run the on demand self test to confirm if the
fault code now appears for the new position of the
suspect sensor. Renew the faulty sensor
www.JagDocs.com
Sensor - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
to battery bumper harness for damage. Check sensor circuit for
short circuit to power. Repair or replace any wiring
harness as required

Sensor - Component Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
internal failure Front right outer sensor bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B38-01 Front Right Inner

Electrical Failure Front right inner sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
Component internal circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
harness as required

harness as required

internal failure Front right inner sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B40-01 Front Left Outer
electrical failure Front left outer sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required

harness as required

internal failure Front left outer sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B42-01 Front Left Inner Sensor

- General electrical Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
failure Front left inner sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required

- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
battery bumper harness for damage. Check sensor circuit for
harness as required
- Component internal Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
failure Front left inner sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B44-01 Rear Right Outer

Sensor - General Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
electrical failure Rear Right Outer Sensor bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required

Sensor - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
harness as required

Sensor - Component Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
internal failure Rear Right Outer Sensor bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B46-01 Rear Right Inner

Sensor - General Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
electrical failure Rear Right Inner Sensor bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required

Sensor - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
harness as required

Sensor - Component Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
internal failure Rear Right Inner Sensor bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B48-01 Rear Left Outer Sensor

- General electrical Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
failure Rear Left Outer Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required

- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
harness as required

- Component internal Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
failure Rear Left Outer Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B50-01 Rear Left Inner Sensor

- General electrical Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
failure Rear Left Inner Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required

- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
harness as required

- Component internal Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
failure Rear Left Inner Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B54-11 Function LED - Park Aid

- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
ground Switch/LED - Component parking aid LED circuit for short circuit to ground.
internal failure Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
clear the DTC and run the on demand self test. If the
problem persists, suspect the switch/LED
B1B54-12 Function LED - Park Aid

- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
battery Switch/LED - Component parking aid LED circuit for short circuit to power.
internal failure Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
Control Module - Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
Component internal clear the DTC and run the on demand self test. If the
failure problem persists, suspect the switch/LED
B1B57-11 Front Sensors Power

Circuit- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Check front and rear bumper harness for signs of
ground Control Module - damage and security of connections
Component internal Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
failure parking assist front sensor power circuit and rear
sensor power circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair
or replace any wiring harness as required
problem persists, suspect the control module
www.JagDocs.com
Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up parking
aid system and check corrective action
B1B58-11 Rear Sensors Power

Circuit - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Check rear and front (if front PDC fitted) bumper
to ground Control Module - harness for signs of damage and security of
Component internal connections
failure Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
parking assist rear sensor power circuit and front
sensor power circuit (if front PDC fitted) for short
circuit to ground. Repair or replace any wiring harness
as required
problem persists, suspect the control module
Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up parking
aid system and check corrective action
B1C30-73 Disable Switch -

Actuator stuck closed Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Control Switch - parking assist switch and switch circuit. Repair or
Component internal replace any wiring harness as required
failure Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
problem persists, suspect the control switch
Check the switch function

Communication Bus - Medium speed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
No sub type failure - bus off parking aid control module medium speed CAN bus
information for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit between
the paired CAN wires
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
complete a CAN network integrity test
Cycle the ignition off, then on, and check if the DTC
is still logged

Communication Bus Control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
"A" Off - No sub type communication Bus "A" parking aid control module high speed CAN bus for
information failure - bus off short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit, high resistance, or short circuit between the
paired CAN wires
is still logged

With Body Control Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Module - No sub type communication with power and ground connections to the central junction
information central junction box box. Clear DTC and retest
complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the central junction box and the parking aid
control module

With Body Control Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Module "B" - No sub communication with power and ground connections to the auxiliary
type information auxiliary junction box junction box. Clear DTC and retest
control module

With Instrument Panel Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Cluster (IPC) Control communication with power and ground connections to the instrument
Module - No sub type instrument cluster cluster. Clear DTC and retest
information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
control module
Module Software Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Incompatibility - No stored in parking aid check all other control modules, for related DTCs and
sub type information control module does not refer to the relevant DTC index
match the master car Check the components installed on the vehicle were
configuration file installed by the factory or a dealer
Master car configuration Install the original component or a new one as
file not being required
transmitted by master
control module

From Body Control Invalid data received Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - No sub type check central junction box, for related DTCs and refer
information to the relevant DTC index
is still logged
Clear the DTC and re-test

From Instrument Panel Invalid data received Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module - No check instrument cluster, for related DTCs and refer
sub type information to the relevant DTC index
is still logged

From Body Control Invalid data received Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module "B" - No sub check auxiliary junction box, for related DTCs and
type information refer to the relevant DTC index
is still logged

Not Complete - No sub Car configuration file not
NOTE: After updating the car configuration file, set the
type information the same as expected by
ignition to on and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs
the parking aid control
module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
check and update the car configuration file as
required. Clear the DTC and retest

Configuration Parking aid control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Incompatible - No sub module configuration check and up-date the car configuration file as
type information error required. Clear the DTC and re-test

Internal electronic Parking aid control Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
failure module internal failure clear the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then on, and
check if the DTC is still logged
If the DTC is still logged suspect the parking aid
control module

Number - Invalid serial VIN Mismatch, stored Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
data received VIN does not match clear the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then on, and
broadcast VIN check if the DTC is still logged
If the DTC is still logged replace the parking aid
control module
U3003-16 Battery voltage -

Circuit voltage below Circuit voltage below Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
threshold threshold check central junction box, for related DTCs and refer
to the relevant DTC index
Check the vehicle charging system performance to
ensure the voltage regulation is correct
Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
battery care manual. Check battery state of charge
and starting/charging system performance
parking aid control module power and ground circuits
for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit
Clear the DTC and retest

Circuit voltage above Circuit voltage above Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
threshold threshold check central junction box, for related DTCs and refer
to the relevant DTC index
Check the vehicle charging system performance to
ensure the voltage regulation is correct
Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
open circuit

Signal compare failure Signal compare failure in Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
battery voltage, of 2 check central junction box, for related DTCs and refer
volts or more, between to the relevant DTC index
parking aid control Check the vehicle charging system performance to
module and central ensure the voltage regulation is correct
junction box Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
open circuit
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Pedestrian
Protection System Control Module (PPSCM)
Pedestrian Protection System Control Module (PPSCM)
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST
BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY PEDESTRIAN PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT TWO MINUTES. FAILURE TO FOLLOW
THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Pedestrian Protection System Control
Module (PPSCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection System (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Diagnosis and
Testing).

B1001-11 Right Hood Deployment
Control - Circuit short to Right hood deployment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground control circuit short circuit check the right hood deployment control circuit
to ground for short circuit to ground. Install a new wiring
harness as necessary. If no wiring harness
fault exists, using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest.
If the fault persists, install a new right hood
deployment control
B1001-12 Right Hood Deployment

Control - Circuit short to Right hood deployment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
battery control circuit short circuit check the right hood deployment control circuit
to power for short circuit to power. Install a new wiring
harness as necessary. If no wiring harness
fault exists, using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest.
If the fault persists, install a new right hood
deployment control
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Rear
Differential Control Module (RDCM)
Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM)
NOTES:
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
If the rear differential control module, rear differential actuator or the rear differential are replaced, the on demand self
test (ODST) must be carried out to calibrate the components
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as needed
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the rear differential control module, for
For additional information, refer to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Diagnosis and
Testing).

P0562-00 System Voltage Low -
No sub type Rear differential control Check the battery charge condition, refer to the
information module voltage supply electrical circuit diagrams and check the wiring to
below 9 volts the rear differential control module, repair as
necessary
P0563-00 System Voltage High -

No sub type System voltage high Check engine control module for stored DTCs,
information (supply voltage supply suspect charging system fault. Refer to the
greater than 16 volts) electrical circuit diagrams and check, power and
ground circuit for fault
P0604-00 Internal Control Module

Random Access Memory Rear differential control Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
(RAM) Error - No sub module internal error renew the control module. Refer to the warranty
type information policy and procedures manual, or determine if any
prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
the installation of a new module/component

Read Only Memory Rear differential control Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
(ROM) Error - No sub module internal error renew the control module. Refer to the warranty
type information policy and procedures manual, or determine if any
www.JagDocs.com
prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
P0606-00 Control Module

Processor - No sub type Watchdog reset - internal This is a control module internal check DTC. If no
information control module failure other DTCs are logged and no customer complaint
exists, clear/ignore this DTC. If the problem
persists, renew the control module. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
P0607-00 Control Module

Performance - No sub Rear differential control Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
type information module internal error - renew the control module. Refer to the warranty
charge pump voltage policy and procedures manual, or determine if any
below threshold prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
P0652-00 Sensor Reference

Voltage B Circuit Low - Position sensor supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
No sub type below 5.7V the differential actuator sensor position circuit,
information Sensor failure (within repair as necessary. Clear the DTC and retest
actuator) If no circuit problems exist, renew the differential
actuator. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior
approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module/component
P0653-00 Sensor Reference

Voltage B Circuit High - Motor position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
No sub type supply above 8.3 V the differential actuator hall sensor reference
information Internal control module voltage at the control module or the actuator
failure If voltage is too high, then renew control module.
manual, or determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation, prior to the installation
P0666-00 PCM / ECM / TCM

Internal Temperature Internal electronic control This is a control module internal check DTC. If no
Sensor A Circuit - No unit temperature sensor other DTCs are logged and no customer complaint
sub type information value above 105°C exists, clear this DTC and retest. Check the
security of control module fixings. Check the
module ground connection. Consider environmental
conditions before suspecting the control module. If
the problem persists, renew the control module.
P0702-64 Transmission Control

System Electrical - Implausibility of Check the rear differential oil quantity and
Signal plausibility differential motor specification. Refer to the relevant section of the
failure temperature sensor and workshop manual. Check both temperature sensor
oil temperature sensor circuits and connectors for damage/water ingress,
readout detected repair as necessary. Where available, after vehicle
Motor or oil temperature has been switched off for at least an hour, use the
sensor circuit - short manufacturer approved diagnostic system to read
circuit to ground or power motor temperature and oil temperature sensor
values. Temperature difference should be less than
25°C. Clear the DTC and retest
motor temperature sensor and oil sump
temperature sensors and circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power
P0712-00 Transmission Fluid

Temperature Sensor A Differential actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit Low - No sub internal temperature rear differential actuator motor temperature sensor
type information sensor circuit - open circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
circuit or short circuit to resistance. Clear the DTC and retest. If no circuit
ground problems exist, renew the differential actuator.
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Rear
Junction Box (RJB)
Rear Junction Box (RJB)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Rear Junction Box (RJB). For additional
For additional information, refer to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).

P0460-11 Fuel Level Sensor A
Circuit - Circuit short to Fuel level sensor A Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
ground analogue input circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
fuel level sensor A analogue input circuit for short to
ground
P0460-15 Fuel Level Sensor A

Circuit - Circuit short to Fuel level sensor A Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
battery or open analogue input circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit fuel level sensor A analogue input circuit for short to
power, open circuit
P0571-12 Brake Switch A Circuit -

Circuit short to battery Footbrake switch digital Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
input signal circuits - footbrake switch digital input signal circuits for
short to power short to power
P1230-12 Fuel Pump Low Speed

Malfunction (VLCM) - High Side output not Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to battery driven - Diagnosis fuel pump delivery module for short to power
feedback indicates
output is short to power
Malfunction (VLCM) - High Side output not Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to ground driven - Diagnosis fuel pump delivery module for short to ground, open
or open feedback indicates circuit
output is short to

Malfunction (VLCM) - No High Side output not Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
operation driven - Diagnosis using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
feedback indicates Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
output is at open load fuel pump delivery module for short to power, open
or short to power circuit
P1346-11 Fuel Level Sensor B

Circuit - Circuit short to Fuel level sensor B Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
fuel level sensor B analogue input circuit for short to
ground
P1346-15 Fuel Level Sensor B

Circuit - Circuit short to Fuel level sensor B Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
circuit fuel level sensor B analogue input circuit for short to
power, open circuit
P1624-13 Anti-theft System -

Circuit open Anti-theft signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
from CJB - open circuit anti-theft signal circuit from CJB for open circuit
C111A-11 Right Stop Lamp -

Circuit short to ground Right stomp lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
control circuit - short to using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
right stomp lamp control circuit for short to ground

Circuit short to battery Right stomp lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
control circuit - short to right stomp lamp control circuit for short to power
power

Circuit open Right stomp lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
control circuit - open right stomp lamp control circuit for open circuit
circuit
C111B-11 Left Stop Lamp - Circuit

short to ground Left stomp lamp control Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
circuit - short to ground using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
stomp lamp control circuit for short to ground
C111B-13 Left Stop Lamp - Circuit

open Left stomp lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
circuit - open circuit stomp lamp control circuit for open circuit
C1120-11 Reversing lamp - Circuit

short to ground Reverse lamp control Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
reverse lamp control circuit for short to ground

short to battery Reverse lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short to power reverse lamp control circuit for short to power

open Reverse lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - open circuit reverse lamp control circuit for open circuit

short to battery or open Reverse lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short circuit to reverse lamp control circuit for short circuit to power,
power, open circuit, high open circuit, high resistance. Repair wiring harness
resistance as required. Clear DTC and retest
- Not programmed RJB fault Check power and ground supplies to RJB. Check CAN
Low speed CAN fault communications between RJB and instrument
Instrument cluster fault cluster. Check power and ground supplies to
instrument cluster

- Signal compare failure Low speed CAN fault Check CAN communications between RJB and
RJB fault instrument cluster. Check power and ground supplies
Instrument cluster fault to RJB and instrument cluster. Confirm correct
Incorrect module module installed. Re-synchronise ID by
installed re-configuring the RJB as a new module. Check CAN
(RJB/Instrument cluster) network for interference/EMC related issues
Write target SID
following
re-programming

- Circuit/component RJB fault Check power and ground supplies to RJB and
protection time-out Low speed CAN fault instrument cluster. Check CAN communications
Instrument cluster fault between RJB and instrument cluster. Check battery
Low battery voltage <9V is in fully charged and serviceable condition, refer to
the battery care manual
B1026-12 Steering Column Lock -

Circuit short to battery Steering column lock Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground circuit - short to steering column lock ground circuit for short to
power power

signal protection The checksum of the Check the battery monitoring system and rear
calculation incorrect received LIN frame is parking aid system for DTCs and refer to relevant
incorrect DTC Index
B1087-86 LIN Bus "A" - Signal

invalid The header of the LIN Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
message received is using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
incorrect Check the battery monitoring system and rear
parking aid system for DTCs and refer to relevant
DTC Index

Battery monitoring Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
system LIN circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground, power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery monitoring system LIN circuit for short to
ground, power
B108A-23 Start Button - Signal

stuck low Start/Stop switch digital Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
input signal circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
stuck low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Start/Stop switch digital input signal circuit for short
to ground
B10A1-11 Trailer Tow Detection -

Circuit short to ground Trailer tow detection Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
digital input circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
trailer tow detection digital input circuit for short to
ground
B10AF-12 Blower Fan Relay -

Circuit short to battery High Side output not Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
driven - Diagnosis blower motor supply circuit for short to power
feedback indicates
B10AF-14 Blower Fan Relay -

Circuit short to ground High Side output not Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open driven - Diagnosis blower motor supply circuit for short to ground, open
feedback indicates circuit
output is short to
B10AF-93 Blower Fan Relay - No
operation High Side output not Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
driven - Diagnosis using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
output is at open load blower motor supply circuit for short to power, open
or short to power circuit
B10DD-11 Airbag Deployed -

Circuit short to ground Airbag deployed digital Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
input signal circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
airbag deployed digital input signal circuit for short
to ground
B10DD-15 Airbag Deployed -

Circuit short to battery Airbag deployed digital Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
or open input signal circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit airbag deployed digital input signal circuit for short
B10DD-38 Airbag Deployed - Signal

frequency incorrect Signal frequency Check the RCM for related DTCs and refer to the
incorrect relevant DTC Index
B10DE-11 Low Fuel Warning

Switch - Circuit short to Diesel run-dry switch Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
diesel run-dry switch analogue input circuit for short
to ground
B10DE-15 Low Fuel Warning

Switch - Circuit short to Diesel run-dry switch Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
circuit diesel run-dry switch analogue input circuit for short
B1112-11 Park Aid Ignition -

Circuit short to ground Parking aid ignition Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
supply circuit - short to using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
parking aid ignition supply circuit for short to ground
B1112-12 Park Aid Ignition -

Circuit short to battery Parking aid ignition Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
supply circuit - short to parking aid ignition supply circuit for short to power
power
B1115-11 High Mounted Stop

Lamp Control - Circuit High mounted stop lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
short to ground control circuit - short to using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
high mounted stop lamp control circuit for short to
ground
B1116-11 Left Tail Lamp - Circuit

short to ground Left hand tail lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
hand tail lamp control circuit for short to ground
B1117-11 Right Tail Lamp - Circuit

short to ground Right hand tail lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
right hand tail lamp control circuit for short to
ground
B111A-11 Number Plate Lamps -

Circuit short to ground Right hand or left hand Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
number plate lamp using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
control circuits - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground right hand and left hand number plate lamp control
circuits for short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
Circuit short to battery Right hand or left hand Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
number plate lamp right hand and left hand number plate lamp control
control circuits - short to circuits for short to power
power

Circuit open Right hand or left hand Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
number plate lamp right hand and left hand number plate lamp control
control circuits - open circuits for open circuit
circuit

Circuit short to battery Right or left side licence Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open plate lamp(s) right side and left side licence plate lamp control
inoperative circuits for short circuit to power, open circuit, high
Right or left side licence resistance. Repair wiring harness as required. Clear
plate lamp control DTC and retest
circuits - short circuit to
power, open circuit, high
resistance
B111D-12 Boot/Trunk Motor Open -

Circuit short to battery Luggage compartment Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
lid latch actuator control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
luggage compartment lid latch actuator control
circuit for short to power
B111D-14 Boot/Trunk Motor Open -

Circuit short to ground Luggage compartment Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
or open lid latch actuator control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open circuit luggage compartment lid latch actuator control
B111E-11 Boot/Trunk Lamps -

Circuit short to ground Luggage compartment Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
lamp control circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
luggage compartment lamp control circuit for short
to ground

Circuit short to battery Luggage compartment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
lamp control circuit - luggage compartment lamp control circuit for short
short to power to power

Circuit open Luggage compartment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
lamp control circuit - luggage compartment lamp control circuit for open
open circuit circuit

Circuit short to battery Luggage compartment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open lamp inoperative luggage compartment lamp control circuit for short
Luggage compartment circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair
lamp control circuit - wiring harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
short circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B1123-12 Restraints Ignition

Relay - Circuit short to High Side output not Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
battery driven - diagnosis using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
output is short to power restraints ignition relay output for short to power

Relay - Circuit short to High Side output not Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
ground or open driven - diagnosis using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
output is short to restraints ignition relay output for short to ground,
ground, open circuit open circuit

Relay - No operation High Side output not Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
driven - diagnosis using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
output is at open load restraints ignition relay output for open load or
or short to power short to power
B1124-11 Lamp Fade Control -

Circuit short to ground Interior lamp fade Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
control circuit - short to interior lamp fade control circuit for short to ground
ground
B1124-12 Lamp Fade Control -

Circuit short to battery Interior lamp fade Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
control circuit - short to interior lamp fade control circuit for short to power
power
B113C-12 Hazard Switch

Illumination - Circuit Hazard switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to battery illumination control hazard switch illumination control circuit for short to
circuit - short to power power
B113C-14 Hazard Switch

Illumination - Circuit Hazard switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to ground or open illumination control hazard switch illumination control circuit for short to
circuit - short to ground, ground, open circuit
open circuit
B113E-12 External Boot/Trunk

Release Switch - Circuit External luggage Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to battery compartment lid release external luggage compartment lid release switch
switch digital input digital input circuit for short to power
circuit - short to power
B113E-23 External Boot/Trunk

Release Switch - Signal External luggage Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
stuck low compartment lid release using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
switch digital input Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - signal stuck low external luggage compartment lid release switch
digital input circuit for short to ground
B11D9-49 Vehicle Battery -

Internal electronic Vehicle battery Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable
failure damaged/worn out condition using the Midtronics battery tester and
the battery care manual
B11DB-49 Battery Monitoring

Module - Internal Internal electronic Suspect the battery monitoring module. Check and
electronic failure failure install a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index
B11DB-87 Battery Monitoring

Module - Missing Battery monitoring Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
message module connector using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
dis-connected/poor If additional DTCs B108783, B108786, B108787 are
connection logged, suspect the RJB. Check and install a new
Battery monitoring RJB as required, refer to the new module/component
module to RJB LIN installation note at the top of the DTC Index. If
circuit - open circuit additional DTCs B108783, B108786, B108787 are
Battery monitoring NOT logged, check for good/clean contact at battery
module to battery monitoring module connector, refer to electrical
positive monitor circuit - circuit diagrams and check battery monitoring
open circuit module to RJB LIN circuit and battery monitoring
Battery monitoring module to battery positive monitor circuit for open
module/RJB failure circuit. Clear DTC and repeat automated diagnostic
procedure using manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. If DTC remains suspect the battery
monitoring module, check and install a new battery
monitoring module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index
B123A-11 Left Front Turn Indicator

- Circuit short to ground Left front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
lamp control circuit - front turn signal lamp control circuit for short to

- Circuit short to battery Left front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
lamp control circuit - front turn signal lamp control circuit for short to
short to power power
- Circuit open Left front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
lamp control circuit - front turn signal lamp control circuit for open circuit
open circuit

- Circuit short to battery Left front turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left
or open lamp control circuit - front turn signal lamp control circuit for short circuit
short circuit to power, to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair wiring
open circuit, high harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
resistance
B123B-11 Right Front Turn

Indicator - Circuit short Right front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to ground lamp control circuit - right front turn signal lamp control circuit for short
short to ground to ground

Indicator - Circuit short Right front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to battery lamp control circuit - right front turn signal lamp control circuit for short

Indicator - Circuit open Right front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
lamp control circuit - right front turn signal lamp control circuit for open

Indicator - Circuit short Right front turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right
to battery or open lamp control circuit - front turn signal lamp control circuit for short circuit
resistance
B1247-11 Left Rear Turn Indicator

- Circuit short to ground Left rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
lamp control circuit - rear turn signal lamp control circuit for short to

- Circuit short to battery Left rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
lamp control circuit - rear turn signal lamp control circuit for short to

- Circuit open Left rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
lamp control circuit - rear turn signal lamp control circuit for open circuit
short to power, open
circuit

- Circuit short to battery Left rear turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left
or open lamp control circuit - rear turn signal lamp control circuit for short circuit
resistance
B1248-11 Right Rear Turn

Indicator - Circuit short Right rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to ground lamp control circuit - right rear turn signal lamp control circuit for short to

Indicator - Circuit short Right rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to battery lamp control circuit - right rear turn signal lamp control circuit for short to

Indicator - Circuit open Right rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
lamp control circuit - right rear turn signal lamp control circuit for open

Indicator - Circuit short Right rear turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right
to battery or open lamp control circuit - rear turn signal lamp control circuit for short circuit
resistance
B1261-13 Fuel Flap/Door Release
Switch - Circuit open Fuel filler flap digital Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
input signal circuit - fuel filler flap digital input signal circuit for open
B1A79-11 Rear Fog Lamp - Circuit

short to ground Rear fog lamp control Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
rear fog lamp control circuit for short to ground

short to battery Rear fog lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short to power rear fog lamp control circuit for short to power

open Rear fog lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - open circuit rear fog lamp control circuit for open circuit
B1C55-12 Horn Relay - Circuit

short to battery Horn control circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to power horn control circuit for short to power
B1C55-14 Horn Relay - Circuit

short to ground or open Horn control circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to ground, open horn control circuit for short to ground, open circuit
circuit
B1C83-12 Rear Defog Relay -

Circuit short to battery High Side output not Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
driven - diagnosis heated rear window power supply circuit for short to
feedback indicates power
B1C83-14 Rear Defog Relay -

Circuit short to ground High Side output not Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open driven - diagnosis heated rear window power supply circuit for short to
feedback indicates ground, open circuit
output is short to
B1C83-93 Rear Defog Relay - No

operation High Side output not Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
driven - diagnosis using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
output is at open load heated rear window power supply circuit for open
or short to power load and short to power
B1C91-12 Fuel Flap/Door Lock

Relay Coil Circuit - Fuel filler flap locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to battery motor control circuit - fuel filler flap locking motor control circuit for short
B1C91-14 Fuel Flap/Door Lock

Relay Coil Circuit - Fuel filler flap locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to ground motor control circuit - fuel filler flap locking motor control circuit for short
or open short to ground, open to ground, open circuit
circuit
B1D35-12 Hazard Switch - Circuit

short to battery Hazard warning lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
switch digital input hazard warning lamp switch digital input circuit for
circuit - short to power short to power
B1D35-23 Hazard Switch - Signal

stuck low Hazard warning lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
switch digital input using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - signal stuck low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
hazard warning lamp switch digital input circuit for
short to ground
U0019-88 Low Speed CAN

Communication Bus - Bus off Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Bus off using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system

With Body Control No sub type information Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Module - No sub type using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information
With Instrument Panel No sub type information Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Cluster (IPC) Control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Module - No sub type
information
With Parking Assist No sub type information Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Control Module "A" - No using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
sub type information
With HVAC Control No sub type information Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Module - No sub type using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information
With Remote Function No sub type information Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Actuation - No sub type using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information
Software Incompatibility Calibration/parameter Suspect the RJB. Check and install a new RJB as
- Calibration/parameter memory failure required, refer to the new module/component
memory failure installation note at the top of the DTC Index
U1000-00 Solid State Driver

Protection Active -Driver No sub type information Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Disabled - No sub type using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information
Failure - Internal Internal electronic Suspect the RJB. Check and install a new RJB as
electronic failure failure required, refer to the new module/component

Internal electronic Internal electronic Suspect the RJB. Check and install a new RJB as
failure failure required, refer to the new module/component

configured Not configured Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Remote
Keyless Entry Module (RFA)
Remote Keyless Entry Module (RFA)

CAUTIONS:
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not guarantee
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle
When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit, part number
3548-1358-00
NOTES:
warranty policy and procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the remote keyless entry module, for
For additional information, refer to: Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Module (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Diagnosis
and Testing).

B102B-00 Passive Key - No sub
type information Response Error - general Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure system, clear all passive keys, re-learn all passive
keys
B10C1-00 Left Front Unlock Pull

Switch - No sub type No power supply to door Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
information handle DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Switch circuit open, or system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short circuit to power check the power supply to the door handle. Check
the switch circuit is not open circuit or short to
power. Repair wiring as required
B10C1-24 Left Front Unlock Pull

Switch - Signal stuck Signal stuck high - button Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
high stuck in active position DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check for stuck left front unlock switch.
left front unlock switch circuit for short to ground
B10C2-00 Left Rear Unlock Pull
B10C2-24 Left Rear Unlock Pull

system. Check for stuck left rear unlock switch.
left rear unlock switch circuit for short to ground
B10C3-00 Right Front Unlock Pull

B10C3-24 Right Front Unlock Pull

system. Check for stuck right front unlock switch.
right front unlock switch circuit for short to ground
B10C4-00 Right Rear Unlock Pull

B10C4-24 Right Rear Unlock Pull

system. Check for stuck right rear unlock switch.
right front unlock switch circuit for short to ground
B10C5-24 Trunk Unlock Pull

system. Check for stuck luggage compartment lid
unlock switch. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check luggage compartment lid unlock
switch circuit for short to ground
B10C6-1F Exterior Trunk Antenna

- Circuit intermittent Circuit intermittent - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
general electrical error DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
check exterior luggage compartment antenna
circuits for short to ground, power, open circuit
B10C7-1F Interior Trunk Antenna

check interior luggage compartment antenna circuits
for short to ground, power, open circuit
B10C8-1F Interior Center

Antenna - Circuit Circuit intermittent - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
intermittent general electrical error DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
check interior center antenna circuits for short to
ground, power, open circuit
B10C9-1F Interior Front Antenna

check interior front antenna circuits for short to
ground, power, open circuit
B10CA-1F Left Rear Door Handle

check left rear door handle antenna circuits for short
to ground, power, open circuit
B10CB-1F Right Rear Door Handle

check right rear door handle antenna circuits for
short to ground, power, open circuit
B10CC-24 Left Front Latch Clutch

Switch - Signal stuck Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck left front door latch clutch switch.
high stuck in active position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
left front door latch clutch switch circuit for short to
ground
B10CD-24 Left Rear Latch Clutch

Switch - Signal stuck Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck left rear door latch clutch switch.
ground
B10CE-24 Right Front Latch

Clutch Switch - Signal Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck right front door latch clutch switch.
stuck high stuck in active position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground
B10CF-24 Right Rear Latch Clutch

Switch - Signal stuck Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck right rear door latch clutch switch.
ground
B10D1-24 Left Front Lock Button

- Signal stuck high Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck left front door handle lock switch.
stuck in active position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground
B10D2-24 Left Rear Lock Button -

Signal stuck high Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck left rear door handle lock switch.
ground
B10D3-24 Right Front Lock

Button - Signal stuck Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck right front door handle lock switch.
ground
B10D4-24 Right Rear Lock Button

- Signal stuck high Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck right rear door handle lock switch.
ground

Communication Bus - No subtype information Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
No subtype information DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Carry out CAN network integrity test using

With Body Control Missing message from Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Module - No subtype CJB DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system. Carry out CAN network integrity test using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power
and ground supplies to CJB
With Body Control Missing message from Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Module "B" - No RJB DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
subtype information system. Carry out CAN network integrity test using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer
and ground supplies to RJB

With Instrument Panel Missing message from Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Cluster (IPC) Control instrument cluster DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No subtype system. Carry out CAN network integrity test using
information the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer
and ground supplies to instrument cluster

Module Software Invalid configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
Incompatibility - No message is received approved diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and
subtype information retest. If the DTC is still logged suspect the remote
keyless entry module, refer to the new module
U201F-00 External Receiver - No

subtype information No subtype information - Suspect the RF receiver, check and install a new RF
communication error receiver as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at top of DTC
Index
U201F-13 External Receiver -

Circuit open Line open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test RF
receiver communication circuit to remote keyless
entry module for short to ground or open circuit
U201F-87 External Receiver -

Missing message Transmission error Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the data line between the RF receiver and the
remote keyless entry module for short, open circuit.
Suspect the RF receiver or remote keyless entry
module, check and install a new RF receiver or
remote keyless entry module as required, refer to
the new module/component installation note at top
of DTC Index

Not Complete - No No subtype information Configure the Remote Keyless Entry module using
subtype information the manufacturer approved diagnostic system

Configuration No subtype information Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
Incompatible - No approved diagnostic system
subtype information
Internal electronic Internal electronic failure Install a new remote keyless entry module, refer to
failure the new module installation note at the top of the
DTC Index

Number - Invalid serial Vehicle/component Install correct/new module to vehicle specification,
data received mis-match. Module refer to the new module/component installation
previously installed to note at the top of the DTC Index
other vehicle

Signal compare failure Mis-match in battery Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
voltage, of 2 volts or DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
more, between remote system
keyless entry module and Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
RJB manual and test the battery and charging system
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Restraints
Control Module (RCM)

WARNINGS:
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED
BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT ONE MINUTE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW
THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY
Do not use a multimeter to probe the restraints control module. It is possible for the power from the meter battery to
trigger the activation of the airbags. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
It is advisable not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on the restraints
control module or associated systems.
Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to air bag module circuits are not acceptable.
Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the replacement of a harness.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Restraints Control Module (RCM). For
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B
Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis and Testing).

B0001-09 Driver Frontal Stage 1
Deployment Control - Driver front stage 1 air bag - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
Component failures internal driver failure with this DTC using the manufacturer
www.JagDocs.com
Deployment Control - Circuit Driver front stage 1 air bag Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
short to ground circuit - short to ground test driver front stage 1 air bag circuit
for short to ground

short to battery circuit - short to power test driver front stage 1 air bag circuit
for short to power
B0001-1A Driver Frontal Stage 1

Deployment Control - Circuit Circuit resistance below Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
resistance below threshold threshold with this DTC using the manufacturer
B0001-1B Driver Frontal Stage 1

Deployment Control - Circuit Circuit resistance above Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
resistance above threshold threshold with this DTC using the manufacturer
B0001-1C Driver Frontal Stage 1

voltage out of range circuit - high resistance test driver front stage 1 air bag circuit
for high resistance

Deployment Control - Incompatible configuration Re-configure the RCM using the
Invalid/incomplete manufacturer approved diagnostic
configuration system

Deployment Control - Incorrect Crosscoupling with other Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
assembly firing loop test driver front stage 1 air bag circuit
for crosscoupling with other firing loop

Deployment Control - Driver front stage 2 air bag - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
Component failures internal driver failure with this DTC using the manufacturer

Deployment Control - Circuit Driver front stage 2 air bag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
short to ground circuit - short to ground and test driver front stage 2 air bag

Deployment Control - Circuit Driver front stage 2 air bag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
short to battery circuit - short to power and test driver front stage 2 air bag
B0002-1A Driver Frontal Stage 2

B0002-1B Driver Frontal Stage 2

B0002-1C Driver Frontal Stage 2

voltage out of range circuit - high resistance test driver front stage 2 air bag circuit
for high resistance


assembly firing loop test driver front stage 2 air bag circuit
for crosscoupling with other firing loop
B0010-09 Passenger Frontal Stage 1

Deployment Control - Passenger front stage 1 air Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
Component failures bag - internal driver failure with this DTC using the manufacturer
Deployment Control - Circuit Passenger front stage 1 air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
short to ground bag circuit - short to ground and test passenger front stage 1 air bag

short to battery bag circuit - short to power and test passenger front stage 1 air bag
B0010-1A Passenger Frontal Stage 1

Deployment Control - Circuit Circuit resistance below Carry out the pinpoint tests associated
B0010-1B Passenger Frontal Stage 1

Deployment Control - Circuit Circuit resistance above Carry out the pinpoint tests associated
B0010-1C Passenger Frontal Stage 1

Deployment Control - Circuit Passenger front stage 1 air Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
voltage out of range bag circuit - high resistance test passenger front stage 1 air bag
circuit for high resistance


assembly firing loop test passenger front stage 1 air bag
circuit for crosscoupling with other firing
loop

Deployment Control - Passenger front stage 2 air Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
Component failures bag - internal driver failure with this DTC using the manufacturer

short to ground bag circuit - short to ground and test passenger front stage 2 air bag

short to battery bag circuit - short to power and test passenger front stage 2 air bag
B0011-1A Passenger Frontal Stage 2

B0011-1B Passenger Frontal Stage 2

B0011-1C Passenger Frontal Stage 2

Deployment Control - Circuit Passenger front stage 2 air Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
voltage out of range bag circuit - high resistance test passenger front stage 2 air bag
circuit for high resistance


assembly firing loop test passenger front stage 2 air bag
loop
B0020-09 Left Side Air Bag Deployment
Control - Component failures Left side air bag circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
internal driver failure with this DTC using the manufacturer

Control - Circuit short to Left side air bag circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
ground short to ground and test left side air bag circuit for short
to ground

Control - Circuit short to Left side air bag circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
battery short to power and test left side air bag circuit for short
to power
B0020-1A Left Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Circuit resistance Circuit resistance below Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
below threshold threshold with this DTC using the manufacturer
B0020-1B Left Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Circuit resistance Circuit resistance above Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
above threshold threshold with this DTC using the manufacturer
B0020-1C Left Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Circuit voltage out of Left side air bag circuit - Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
range high resistance test left side air bag circuit for high
resistance

Control - Invalid/incomplete Incompatible configuration Re-configure the RCM using the
configuration manufacturer approved diagnostic
system

Control - Incorrect assembly Crosscoupling with other Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
firing loop test left side air bag circuit for
crosscoupling with other firing loop
B0028-09 Right Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Component failures Right side air bag circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
internal driver failure with this DTC using the manufacturer

Control - Circuit short to Right side air bag circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
ground short to ground and test right side air bag circuit for
short to ground

Control - Circuit short to Right side air bag circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
battery short to power and test right side air bag circuit for
short to power
B0028-1A Right Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Circuit resistance Circuit resistance below Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
B0028-1B Right Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Circuit resistance Circuit resistance above Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
B0028-1C Right Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Circuit voltage out of Right side air bag circuit - Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
range high resistance test right side air bag circuit for high
resistance

Control - Invalid/incomplete Incompatible configuration Re-configure the RCM using the
system

Control - Incorrect assembly Crosscoupling with other Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
firing loop test right side air bag circuit for
crosscoupling with other firing loop
B0029-09 Right Curtain Deployment
Control 1 - Component failures Right curtain deployment Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
control 1 circuit - internal with this DTC using the manufacturer
driver failure approved diagnostic system

Control 1 - Circuit short to Right curtain deployment Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
ground control 1 circuit - short to check right curtain deployment control 1
ground circuit for short to ground

Control 1 - Circuit short to Right curtain deployment Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
battery control 1 circuit - short to check right curtain deployment control 1
power circuit for short to power
B0029-1A Right Curtain Deployment

Control 1 - Circuit resistance Circuit resistance below Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
B0029-1B Right Curtain Deployment

Control 1 - Circuit resistance Circuit resistance above Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
B0029-1C Right Curtain Deployment

Control 1 - Circuit voltage out Right curtain deployment Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
of range control 1 circuit - high test right curtain deployment control 1
resistance circuit for high resistance

Control 1 - Invalid/incomplete Incompatible configuration Re-configure the RCM using the
system

Control 1 - Incorrect assembly Crosscoupling with other Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
firing loop test right curtain deployment control 1
loop
B0050-11 Driver Safety Belt Sensor -

Circuit short to ground Driver safety belt sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit - short to ground and test driver safety belt sensor circuit
for short to ground

Circuit short to battery Driver safety belt sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit - short to power and test driver safety belt sensor circuit
for short to power

Circuit open Driver safety belt sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit - open circuit and test driver safety belt sensor circuit
for open circuit
B0050-1E Driver Safety Belt Sensor -

Circuit resistance out of range Driver safety belt sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
circuit - resistance out of with this DTC using the manufacturer
range approved diagnostic system

Invalid/incomplete Incompatible configuration Re-configure the RCM using the
system
B0052-11 Passenger Safety Belt Sensor -

Circuit short to ground Passenger safety belt sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit - short to ground and test passenger safety belt sensor

Circuit short to battery Passenger safety belt sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit - short to power and test passenger safety belt sensor

Circuit open Passenger safety belt sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit - open circuit and test passenger safety belt sensor
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Satellite
Digital Audio Radio System Module (SARM)
Satellite Radio Module (SARM)
NOTES:
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged on the satellite radio module, for additional
diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.

B1A89-01 Satellite Antenna -
General electrical Wiring harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure Coaxial cable between satellite digital audio radio antenna coaxial cable for
satellite radio module and short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
the satellite antenna circuit, high resistance. Repair wiring harness as
Internal electronic failure required, clear DTC and retest
- Satellite digital audio If fault persists, check and install a new satellite digital
radio antenna audio radio antenna
Internal electronic failure If fault persists, check and install a new satellite radio
- Satellite radio module module
Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component

Circuit short to Satellite antenna circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground short to ground satellite antenna circuit for short circuit to ground.
Repair wiring harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
www.JagDocs.com
Circuit short to Satellite antenna circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery short to power satellite antenna circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
wiring harness as required. Clear DTC and retest

Circuit open Satellite antenna circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open circuit, high satellite antenna circuit for open circuit, high
resistance resistance. Repair wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
and retest

System internal System internal failure Check and install a new satellite radio module as
failures required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
module/component
U3000-4A Control Module -

Incorrect Satellite radio module - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
component Incorrect component select the vehicle configuration main menu>vehicle
installed installed configuration>display and modify the vehicle
Car configuration configuration file data
mismatch Check update as required

Not configured Satellite radio module - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Incorrect component select the vehicle configuration main menu>select
installed configure existing modules menu and program the
Incorrect car configuration satellite radio module
file data received

Missing message The satellite radio module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
has not received the check that the satellite radio module is configured
configuration file correctly
Master module not Check that the configuration file is being transmitted by
transmitting configuration the master module
file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
complete a MOST network integrity test

Component or Satellite radio module Check for possible causes of the satellite radio module
system over cooling vents obstructed overheating. Check that the ventilation is not
temperature Wiring harness fault obstructed
Internal electronic failure Check for short circuit related DTCs. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check ground circuit for
high resistance. Check antenna circuit for short to power
or ground. Repair wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
and retest
Check for internal electronic failure related DTCs
If fault persists, check and install a new satellite radio
module. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
module/component

Signal compare Signal compare failure Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
failure Satellite radio module battery care manual. Check battery state of charge and
voltage differs more than starting/charging system performance. Check power
±2V compared to rear supply circuit from rear junction box to satellite radio
junction box voltage module
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
and ground supply circuits to the module. Repair wiring
harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Speed
Control Module (CCM)
Adaptive Speed Control Module (ASCM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Adaptive Speed Control Module (ASCM).
For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Speed Control (310-03C Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and
Testing).

B1A84-81 Car Configuration Data
- Invalid serial data RJB reporting invalid Re-configure the RJB using manufacturer approved
received data diagnostic system
C1A67-54 Forward Looking Sensor

- Missing calibration Speed control sensor out Check speed control sensor for correct vertical
of alignment alignment, and carry out speed control sensor
alignment procedure using manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

- Invalid serial data Yaw voltage Clear DTC and re-test, if DTC remains suspect speed
received unreasonable for 0.5 control sensor. Check and install a new sensor as
seconds or unchanged required, refer to the new module/component
for 1.2 seconds. Note: installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Yaw sensor internal to
speed control sensor

- Missing Message Incorrect or missing data Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
from speed control DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
sensor system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check power and ground supplies for short, open
circuit. Check private CAN network between speed
control sensor and speed control module for failure,
clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains suspect the
speed control sensor, check and install a new sensor

- Component internal Internal hardware failure Suspect the speed control sensor. Check and install a
Failure new sensor as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

- Component or system Sensor reduced visibility Check for blockage in front of radar. Note: This DTC
operation obstructed or will be cleared automatically when environmental
blocked conditions allow

- Component or system Speed control sensor Allow system to cool. Note: This DTC will be cleared
over temperature internal temperature automatically when environmental conditions allow
exceeded threshold
P174E-81 Output Shaft

Speed/ABS Wheel Follow speed is Clear DTC and re-test
Speed Correlation - mis-calculated to too
Invalid serial data high a value
received
Communication Bus - Vehicle CAN Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Bus off condition DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Carry out CAN network integrity tests using
U0100-00 Lost Communications

With ECM/PCM "A" - No ECM missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
sub type information DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index

With TCM - No sub TCM missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
type information DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check TCM for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index

With Gear Shift Control No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Module A - No sub type power and ground connections to the Transmission
information Shift Module. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, complete a CAN network integrity
test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the CAN network between the Transmission
Shift Module and Speed Control Module

With Gear Shift Module Transmission shift Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- Missing Message module missing message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check transmission shift module for related

With Anti-lock Brake ABS missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
System (ABS) Control DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No sub type system. Check ABS for related DTCs and refer to the
information relevant DTC Index

With Park Brake Module Parking brake missing Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- No sub type message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system. Check parking brake module for related

With Instrument Panel Instrument cluster Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Cluster (IPC) Control missing message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No sub type system. Check instrument cluster for related DTCs
information and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Software Invalid configuration Re-configure the speed control module using the
Incompatibility - No message is received manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear
sub type information DTCs and re-test. If DTC still logged, suspect
incorrect speed control module installed. Check and
install a new module as required, refer to new
Index

Software RJB - at least one of the Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
Incompatibility - Not car configuration approved diagnostic system
configured parameters is not
configured

From ECM/PCM A - No ECM did not respond Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to relevant
sub type information properly to speed control DTC Index
cancel or auto brake
cancel request

From ECM/PCM A - ECM did not respond Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to relevant
Signal incorrect after properly to speed control DTC Index
event resume request

From ECM/PCM A - Invalid data received Check the Engine Control Module for related DTCs
Invalid serial data from engine control and refer to relevant DTC Index. If U040181 is
received module logged as historic but no other DTCs have logged in
Bus signal/message the engine control module at the same time and
failure distance, it may be caused by cranking with low
Speed control inhibited voltage conditions. Check battery and charging
by ECM system according to instructions in the battery care
manual. Install the latest Engine Control Module
software using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, contact Dealer Technical Support before
replacing components

From Anti-Lock Braking Event information Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Module for
System (ABS) Control Deactivated related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - De-activated
From Anti-lock Brake Stability assist fault Check ABS module for related DTCs and refer to
System (ABS) Control relevant DTC Index
Module - Invalid serial
data received
From Park Brake Parking brake module did Check parking brake module for related DTCs and
Control Module - Signal not respond properly to refer to relevant DTC Index
incorrect after event apply request

From Park Brake Speed control inhibited Check parking brake module for related DTCs and
Control Module - by parking brake module refer to relevant DTC Index
Invalid serial data
received
From Brake System Event information Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Module for
Control Module - Event related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
information
From Suspension Invalid serial data Check the Suspension Control Module for related
Control Module 'A' - received DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Invalid serial data
received
From Instrument Panel Speed control inhibited Check instrument cluster, CJB and RJB for related
Control Module - by instrument cluster DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index
Invalid serial data
received
U1A00-88 Private Communication
Network - Bus off Bus off The module setting this code has disabled CAN
transmission. Check for other bus off codes. Check
the module and circuits. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams. Clear all DTCs and road test the vehicle. If
the concern reoccurs contact Dealer Technical
Support for further advice. Under no circumstance
should any parts be replaced to overcome this issue

Failure - Internal Internal electronic failure Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
electronic failure a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

Configuration Data sent from RJB is Check/amend Car Configuration File using the
Incompatible - No sub invalid manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear DTC
type information and re-test. If DTC remains, re-configure RJB using
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear DTC
and re-test. If DTC remains check RJB for DTCs and
refer to DTC Index

General checksum Internal micro controller Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
failure error a new module as required, refer to the new
Checksum fault module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index

General memory failure Internal RAM test fault Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

Internal electronic Internal control module Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
failure failure a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

Circuit/component Circuit/component The Control module internal protection has been
protection time-out protection time-out activated. Check for other related DTCs that could
lead to this event. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
problem persists, renew the module. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
suspect

Signal compare failure Signal compare failure Check vehicle battery and charging system. Refer to
Battery supply voltage the relevant section in the workshop manual. Refer
below a recognized value to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
and ground supply circuits to the modules
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Steering
Column Lock Module (VIM)
Steering Column Lock Module (VIM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Steering Column Lock Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Diagnosis and Testing).

Authorisation - Not Module not programmed Configure the Steering Column Lock Module using the
programmed manufacturers approved diagnostic system

Authorisation - Signal compare failure Configure the modules using the manufacturers approved
Signal compare - This DTC will be diagnostic system. If the problem persists, complete a
failure logged if the CAN network integrity test using the manufacturers
encrypted data approved diagnostic system. Perform an on demand
exchange does self-test and retest
not match
between Steering
Column Lock and
the Central
Junction Box

Authorisation - Signal plausibility failure
NOTE: Prior to clearing this DTC, carry out the Vehicle
Signal plausibility Steering Column Lock
Functional Reset application using the manufacturer approved
failure unable to perform lock
diagnostic system
action
CAN Network fault Check the serviceability of the steering column and lock.
Anti-lock Braking Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, carry
System, Engine Control out CAN Network Integrity Test and Module Self Test
Module, Central Junction using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Box fault Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check CAN Network

Authorisation - Missing message
NOTE: Prior to clearing this DTC, carry out the Vehicle
Missing message CAN fault
Functional Reset application using the manufacturer approved
No response from
diagnostic system
electric steering column
lock control module, Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car using the key
instrument cluster, fob and retest. Check for related DTCs and refer to the
central junction box relevant DTC index
Battery voltage at If the fault is cleared, notify the customer that the
electric steering column steering column lock may fail to unlock if the vehicle is
lock control module too parked with a high steering angle or with the road wheel
low against a curb. If the column lock is failing to disengage,
Electric steering column the customer may be able to rectify this by rotating the
lock control module, steering wheel while pressing the engine start button
instrument cluster, If fault persists, complete a CAN network integrity test
central junction box fault using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system.
Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check CAN circuits between the central junction box, the
instrument cluster and the electronic steering column
lock. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
central junction box, the instrument cluster and the
electronic steering column lock power and ground supply
circuits for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required.
Clear DTC, perform an on demand self-test and retest
If fault persists, check that the vehicle battery supply
voltage is between 9-16 volts. Rectify as required

Communication Bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Bus - Bus off power and ground connections to the module. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the CAN network

Module Software No sub type information Refer to network communication section of the workshop
Incompatibility - manual. Clear the DTC and ensure the vehicle battery
No sub type supply voltage is between 9-16Volts. Using the
information manufacturers approved diagnostic system, complete a
CAN integrity test. Perform an on demand self-test and
retest

Internal electronic Internal electronic Refer to network communication section of the workshop
failure failure detected during manual. Clear the DTC and ensure the vehicle battery
self test or lock/unlock supply voltage is between 9-16Volts. Perform an on
operation demand self-test and if the DTC returns suspect the
electric steering column lock, refer to the warranty policy

Missing message Configuration message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
not received power and ground connections to the module. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the CAN network. Check modules are
configured correctly using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U3002-81 Vehicle
Identification Invalid vehicle Confirm the correct VIN details are stored in Steering
Number - Invalid identification number Column Lock Module using the approved diagnostic
serial data system
received
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Television
Module (TVM)
Television Control Module (TVCM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Television Control Module (TVCM). For

short to ground Antenna circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
short to ground manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
circuit diagrams and check antenna circuit for short to ground

short to battery Antenna circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
short to power manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
circuit diagrams and check antenna circuit for short to power

open Antenna circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
open circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
circuit diagrams and check antenna circuit for open circuit
B1D55-11 Antenna#2 - Circuit

short to ground Antenna #2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
circuit short to manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
ground circuit diagrams and check antenna #2 circuit for short to
ground

short to battery Antenna #2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
circuit short to manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
power circuit diagrams and check antenna #2 circuit for short to power
open Antenna #2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
circuit open manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
circuit circuit diagrams and check antenna #2 circuit for open circuit
B1D56-11 Antenna #3 Circuit -

Circuit short to Antenna #3 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
ground circuit short to manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
ground

battery circuit short to manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical

Circuit open Antenna #3 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the

ground


Circuit open Antenna #4 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
B1D58-11 Television Output -

Circuit short to Television output Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
ground circuit diagrams and check television output circuit for short to
ground

Circuit short to Television output Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
power circuit diagrams and check television output circuit for short to
power

Circuit open Television output Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
circuit circuit diagrams and check television output circuit for open
circuit

Internal electronic Internal Suspect the television module, check and install a new module
failure electronic failure as required, refer to the new module/component installation

Circuit voltage below Circuit voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
threshold below threshold manufacturer approved diagnostic system

Circuit voltage above Circuit voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
threshold above threshold manufacturer approved diagnostic system
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Module (TPM)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System, for
For additional information, refer to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and Testing).

C1A56-31 Left Front Tire Pressure
Sensor and Transmitter Missing, incompatible or For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
Assembly - No signal defective tire pressure Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
sensor or radio frequency Testing).Go to pinpoint test F in section 204-04,
receiver Diagnosis and Testing, Wheels and Tires

Sensor and Transmitter Information only - vehicle No action required
Assembly - Event exposed to extreme
information temperature environment
and/or tire pressure
sensor low battery
voltage event

Sensor and Transmitter Tire pressure sensor has Replace defective tire pressure sensor. Refer to
Assembly - Parametric reported out of range the relevant section of the workshop manual
information for pressure,
temperature or
acceleration

Sensor and Transmitter No tire pressure sensor For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
Assembly - No operation can be localized at this Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
position due to an Testing).Go to pinpoint test G in section 204-04,
initiator or tire pressure Diagnosis and Testing, Wheels and Tires
www.JagDocs.com
sensor malfunction
C1A57-11 Left Front Initiator -

Circuit short to ground Left front initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
is short to ground Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test B1 in section 204-04,
Diagnosis and Testing, Wheels and Tires

Circuit short to battery Left front initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
is short to power Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and

Circuit open Left front initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
open Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
C1A58-31 Right Front Tire Pressure


sensor low battery
voltage event

Sensor and Transmitter Tire pressure sensor has Replace defective tire pressure sensor. refer to
temperature or
acceleration

sensor malfunction
C1A59-11 Right Front Initiator -

Circuit short to ground Right front initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
is short to ground Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test C1 in section 204-04,

Circuit short to battery Right front initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
is short to power Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and

Circuit open Right front initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
C1A60-31 Left Rear Tire Pressure


Sensor and Transmitter Information only - Vehicle No action required
sensor low battery
voltage event
Sensor and Transmitter Tire pressure sensor has Replace defective tire pressure sensor, refer to
temperature or
acceleration

sensor malfunction
C1A61-11 Left Rear Initiator -

Circuit short to ground Left rear initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
short to ground Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test D1 in section 204-04,

Circuit short to battery Left rear initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
short to power Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test D2 in section
204-04,Diagnosis and Testing, Wheels and Tires

Circuit open Left rear initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test D9 in section 204-04,
C1A62-31 Right Rear Tire Pressure


sensor low battery
voltage event

Sensor and Transmitter Tire pressure sensor has Replace defective tire pressure sensor, refer to
temperature or
acceleration

sensor malfunction
C1A63-11 Right Rear Initiator -

Circuit short to ground Right rear initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
short to ground Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test E1 in section 204-04,

Circuit short to battery Right rear initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
short to power Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Testing). Go to pinpoint test E2 in section 204-04,

Circuit open Right rear initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test E9 in section 204-04,
C1A64-68 Spare Wheel Tire
Pressure Sensor and Information only - vehicle No action required
Transmitter Assembly - exposed to extreme
Event information temperature environment
sensor low battery
voltage event

Pressure Sensor and Tire pressure sensor has Replace defective tire pressure sensor, refer to
Transmitter Assembly - reported out of range the relevant section of the workshop manual
Parametric information for pressure,
temperature or
acceleration

Pressure Sensor and Missing, incompatible or For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
Transmitter Assembly - defective tire pressure Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
No operation sensor or radio frequency Testing).Go to pinpoint test H in section 204-04,
C1D19-11 External Receiver Data

Line - Circuit short to Tire pressure monitoring For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
ground system radio frequency Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
receiver or data line Testing).Go to pinpoint test A in section
circuit is short to ground 204-04,Diagnosis and Testing, Wheels and Tires

Line - Circuit short to Tire pressure monitoring For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
battery system radio frequency Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
receiver or data line Testing).Go to pinpoint test I in section 204-04,
circuit is short to power diagnosis and testing

Line - Missing message Radio Frequency For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
reception blocked Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Tire pressure monitoring Testing).Go to pinpoint test J in section 204-04,
system radio frequency Diagnosis and Testing, Wheels and Tires
receiver faulty
Tire pressure monitoring
system radio frequency
receiver or data line
circuits open circuit
Missing, incompatible or
defective tire pressure
sensors

Communication Bus - Bus CAN bus fault Carry out CAN network integrity tests. Refer to
off the electrical wiring diagrams and check CAN
network for short, open circuit

body control module - No CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
sub type information Central junction box fault central junction box power and ground supplies
for short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
integrity tests

Body Control Module "B" - CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
No sub type information Rear junction box fault rear junction box power and ground supplies for
short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
integrity tests

With Instrument Panel CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
Cluster (IPC) Control Instrument cluster fault instrument cluster power and ground supplies for
Module - No sub type short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
information integrity tests

HVAC Control Module - No CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
sub type information Climate control module climate control module power and ground supplies
fault for short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
integrity tests
Software Incompatibility - Incompatible tire Check correct tire pressure monitoring system
No sub type information pressure monitoring module is installed to vehicle specification,
system module for otherwise suspect the rear junction box
vehicle CAN network

From Anti-Lock Brake Invalid data received Check anti-lock braking system control module
System (ABS) Control from the anti-lock braking and Instrument Cluster for related DTCs and refer
Module - No sub type system control module to the relevant DTC index. Carry out CAN network
information CAN bus fault integrity tests
Anti-lock braking system
fault

From HVAC Control HVAC control module Check climate control module for related DTCs
Module - No sub type fault and refer to relevant DTC index
information
U1A14-49 CAN Initialisation Failure
- Internal electronic Tire pressure monitoring Install a new tire pressure monitoring module.
failure system module fault Refer to the new module/component installation
note at the top of the DTC index

configured Tire pressure monitoring Check and amend the car configuration file
system configuration data
is invalid
U3000-87 Control Module - Missing

message Tire pressure monitoring Check the rear junction box for related DTCs and
system configuration data refer to the relevant DTC index. Carry out CAN
not received network integrity test

Number - Invalid serial Tire pressure monitoring
NOTE: This DTC indicates that the tire pressure
data received system module and
monitoring system module is not the original part
vehicle VIN mismatch
installed to the vehicle at the factory/dealer and could
have been substituted. Refer to the note above the DTC
index about replacing components which may remain
under manufacturer warranty.
Re-install the original or a new tire pressure

monitoring system control module
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Touch
Screen Display (FCDIM)
Touch Screen (TS)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Touch Screen (TS). For additional

B100E-25 Video Input 'A' - Signal
shape/waveform ODST Only - TV video Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
failure synch mis-match using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
B100F-25 Video Input 'B' - Signal

shape/waveform ODST Only - Reverse Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
failure Camera video synch using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
mis-match
U1A01-01 Communication Link -

General electrical ODST Only - cable Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
failure from navigation using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
module not correctly Check electrical harness from navigation module is
installed correctly installed
U1A01-15 Communication Link -

Circuit short to battery TSD to navigation Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
or open module circuit - short using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check TSD to
navigation module circuit for short to power, open circuit
U1A4B-48 Control Module

Processor B - Supervision software Re-configure the TSD using the manufacturer approved
Supervision software failure diagnostic system
failure
www.JagDocs.com
memory failure EEPROM, External Suspect the TSD, check and install a new TSD as
RAM access failure required, refer to the new module/component

Supervision software Supervision software Re-configure the TSD using the manufacturer approved
failure failure diagnostic system
U3000-4B Control Module - Over

temperature Touch panel backlight Allow the system to cool, clear the DTC and
- high temperature check/monitor system for re-occurrence. If DTC re-occurs
detected suspect the TSD. Check and install a new TSD as
required, refer to the new module/component

configured Incorrect Car Check/amend Car Configuration File using the
Configuration manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Parameters received

Missing message Car Configuration File Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
not received Index. Check CAN and MOST networks, carry out the
CAN and MOST network tests using the manufacturer

Component or system TSD internal Allow the system to cool, clear the DTC and
over temperature temperature over check/monitor system for re-occurrence. If DTC re-occurs
limit suspect the TSD. Check and install a new TSD as

Circuit voltage below Circuit voltage below Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC

Circuit voltage above Circuit voltage above Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index Vehicles With:
6HP28 6-Speed Automatic Transmission, DTC: Transmission Control Module
(TCM)
Transmission Control Module (TCM) 6 speed (6HP28 Applications)
NOTES:
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the transmission control module, for
additional diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section
For additional information, refer to: Diagnostics (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

P0121-86 Throttle/Pedal Position
Sensor A Circuit Throttle/Pedal Position Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
Range/Performance - Sensor Fault (Data
Signal invalid received over CAN Bus)
P0219-86 Engine Overspeed

Condition - Signal invalid Engine speed too low or Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
too high (Data received
over CAN Bus)
P0500-81 Vehicle Speed Sensor A -

Invalid serial data Vehicle Speed Sensor Check Dynamic Stability Control module for stored
received fault (Data received over DTCs
CAN Bus)
P0501-81 Vehicle Speed Sensor A

Range/Performance - Vehicle Speed receive Check Dynamic Stability Control module for stored
Invalid serial data over CAN Bus does not DTCs. Check correct Differential is installed to the
received match Transmission vehicle
Output-Shaft speed
P0561-1C System Voltage Unstable
- Circuit voltage out of Power supply voltage out Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
range of range when engine Check Charging System and Battery condition
running
P0562-21 System Voltage Low -

Signal amplitude < Circuit low voltage. Refer to Circuit diagrams and check Power and
minimum Battery supply voltage to Ground Circuit for fault. Check Engine Control
Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs. Check Charging System
Module and Battery condition
P0563-22 System Voltage High -

Signal amplitude > High Battery charge, Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
maximum alternator fault Check Charging System and Battery condition

Memory Check Sum Error Software error Re-configure the Transmission Control Module
- General checksum Transmission Control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure Module failure system, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains,
Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
new Transmission Control Module as required,
refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
if a module/component is suspect.

Random Access Memory Shift-by-Wire fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
(RAM) Error - No sub type new Transmission Control Module as required,
information refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

Read Only Memory (ROM) General checksum failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Error - General checksum new Transmission Control Module as required,
failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0606-04 TCM Processor - System

Internal Failures Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
component faults new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0606-26 TCM Processor - Signal

rate of change below Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
threshold component faults new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0606-49 TCM Processor - Internal

electronic failure Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-04 TCM Processor - System

Internal Failures Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-06 TCM Processor -

Algorithm Based Failures Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-11 TCM Processor - Circuit

Short to Ground Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

Short to Battery Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Open Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

Short to Ground or Open Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

amplitude < minimum Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

amplitude > maximum Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-47 TCM Processor -

Watchdog / safety Micro Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
controller failure new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0613-49 TCM Processor - Internal

electronic failure Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-68 TCM Processor - Event

Information Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P061B-02 Internal Control Module

Torque Calculation Transmission Control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Performance - General Module - positive torque new Transmission Control Module as required,
signal failure signal not valid refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P061B-26 Internal Control Module

Torque Calculation Transmission Control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Performance - Signal rate Module positive torque new Transmission Control Module as required,
of change below signal not valid refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
threshold if a module/component is suspect.
P062F-04 Internal Control Module

EEPROM Error - System EEPROM communication Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Internal Failures error new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0642-21 Sensor Reference Voltage

A Circuit Low - Signal Sensor supply voltage Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude < minimum fault low new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0643-22 Sensor Reference Voltage

A Circuit High - Signal Sensor supply voltage Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude > maximum fault high new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0657-13 Actuator Supply Voltage

A Circuit / Open - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Open control valves etc) Open new Transmission Control Module as required,
Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
www.JagDocs.com
P0657-1C Actuator Supply Voltage
A Circuit / Open - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Refer to electrical Circuit diagrams and check
voltage out of range control valves etc) Transmission Control Module connector for signs of
voltage plausibility fault water ingress or damage, check pin 7 for Short to
Power or Ground (should NOT be connected and
harness terminal should have a bung installed). If
no fault identified, suspect the Transmission
Control Module. Check and install a new
Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module/component is suspect.

A Circuit Low - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Short to Ground control valves etc) new Transmission Control Module as required,
voltage Short to Ground refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

A Circuit High - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Short to Battery control valves etc) new Transmission Control Module as required,
voltage Short to Power refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0667-01 PCM / ECM / TCM Internal

Temperature Sensor A General electrical failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Range/Performance - new Transmission Control Module as required,
General Electrical Failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

Temperature Sensor A Internal Electronic Failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
System Internal Failures refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

Temperature Sensor A Internal electronic failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Internal electronic failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

System (MIL Request) - General Signal failure Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and
General signal failure Investigate as required

System (MIL Request) - Double fault from If any of the following DTCs are also present;
Signal amplitude > monitoring of internal P074013, P096712, P273912, P273012, P272112,
maximum power supply and P096312, P276312, P097112, suspect the
pressure Transmission Control Module, check and install a
regulator/solenoid control new Transmission Control Module as required,
software refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

System (MIL Request) - Emergency Position Not Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and
Emergency Position Not Reachable investigate as required
Reachable
Temperature Sensor A Transmission fluid Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit - Circuit Open temperature sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Circuit Open Circuit Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Temperature Sensor A General electrical failure Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Range/Performance - Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
General Electrical Failure the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Temperature Sensor A Signal amplitude > Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
Circuit maximum. Excessive driving vehicle until normal operating temperature
Range/Performance - jump in temperature is achieved. Reads DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect
Signal amplitude > the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
maximum Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Circuit Low - Circuit Short temperature sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
to Ground Circuit Short to Ground Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Temperature Sensor A General electrical failure Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit High - General Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Electrical Failure Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Circuit High - Circuit temperature sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Short to Battery Circuit Short to Power Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
P0716-14 Turbine/Input Shaft

Speed Sensor A Circuit Turbine/Input Shaft Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Range/Performance - Speed Sensor Circuit Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Circuit Short to Ground or Short to Ground or Open Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
Open Circuit the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Speed Sensor A Circuit Turbine/Input Shaft Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
Range/Performance - Speed Sensor signal too the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal amplitude < small Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
minimum the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Speed Sensor A Circuit Turbine/Input Shaft Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
Range/Performance - Speed Sensor signal the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal amplitude > above maximum Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
maximum the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Speed Sensor A Circuit Turbine/input shaft speed Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
No Signal - Circuit Short sensor A Circuit Short to Transmission Control Module. Install a new
to Battery Power Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
P0720-12 Output Shaft Speed

Sensor Circuit - Circuit Transmission output Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Short to Battery shaft speed sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Circuit Short to Power Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Sensor Circuit - Circuit Transmission output Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Short to Ground or Open shaft speed sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Circuit Short to Ground or Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
Open Circuit the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Sensor Circuit Transmission output Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
Range/Performance - shaft speed sensor signal the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal amplitude > above maximum Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
maximum the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Sensor Circuit Output shaft speed Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
Range/Performance - negative gradient too the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal rate of change high Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
above threshold the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
Sensor Circuit Signal plausibility failure Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Range/Performance - Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal plausibility failure Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
P0729-07 Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio -

Mechanical Failures Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Mechanical Failures re-detects suspect Transmission (mechanical)
internal fault. Install a new Transmission as
required, refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect.

suspect.

suspect.

suspect.

suspect.

suspect.
P0736-07 Reverse Incorrect Ratio -

suspect.
P0740-13 Torque Converter Clutch

Solenoid Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit Open 2 Circuit Open Circuit Transmission Control Module. Install a new

Solenoid Circuit Too high slip at torque Suspect torque converter lockup clutch. Install a
Performance/Stuck Off - converter clutch. new torque converter, refer to the warranty policy
Mechanical Failures Mechanical Failures and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect. If transmission fluid is in very poor
condition and dirty, install a new transmission,
P0745-04 Pressure Control Solenoid
A - System Internal System Internal Failures Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failures new Transmission Control Module as required,

A - Supervision Software Supervision Software Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure Failure new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0758-12 Shift Solenoid B Electrical

- Circuit Short to Battery Circuit Short to Power Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0758-13 Shift Solenoid B Electrical

- Circuit Open Solenoid valve 1 or Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Pressure control Solenoid new Transmission Control Module as required,
G Circuit Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0771-71 Shift Solenoid E

Performance/Stuck Off - Actuator stuck Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Actuator stuck new Transmission Control Module as required,

B - System Internal System Internal Failures Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

B - Supervision Software Supervision Software Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure Failure new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0781-07 1-2 Shift - Mechanical

Failures Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.
P0781-77 2-1 Shift - Commanded

position not reachable Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.

suspect.

suspect.

suspect.

suspect.

suspect.

suspect.
P0798-1A Pressure Control Solenoid

C Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below C Circuit resistance below new Transmission Control Module as required,
Threshold threshold refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0798-1E Pressure Control Solenoid

C Electrical - Circuit Short Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground C electrical circuit short new Transmission Control Module as required,
to ground refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

C Electrical - Signal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude < minimum C Electrical signal new Transmission Control Module as required,
amplitude < minimum refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0814-62 Transmission Range

Display Circuit - Signal Transmission Range Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
compare failure Display Circuit signal new Transmission Control Module as required,
compare failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0826-08 Up and Down Switch

circuit - Bus Signal Invalid CAN signal from Check Central Junction Box and Instrument Cluster
Message Failures Central Junction for stored DTCs. Check gear change switches for
Box/Instrument Cluster correct operation. Refer to circuit diagrams and
Stuck Sprintronic switch check CAN bus for a circuit fault
CAN bus circuit fault

Circuit - Invalid serial Invalid Can signal from Check Central Junction Box and Instrument Cluster
data received Central Junction Box / for stored DTCs. Check Gear Change Switches for
Instrument Cluster correct operation. Refer to Circuit diagrams and
Stuck Sprintronic switch check CAN Bus for Circuit fault
CAN Bus Circuit fault

Circuit - Bus off Steering Wheel Module to Check Central Junction Box and Steering Wheel
Central Junction Box / Ice Switches for stored DTCs. Refer to Circuit
Instrument Cluster LIN diagrams and check LIN Bus for Circuit fault
Bus failure

suspect.
www.JagDocs.com
Position Not Reachable Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.
P084F-01 Park / Neutral Switch

Input Circuit - General Wrong voltage level Check for correct output at Transmission Control
Electrical Failure detected on Park/No Park Module park signal pin (check in all positions) 12
signal volts in Park, 0 volts in all other positions. If fault
identified, suspect the Transmission Control
Module. Install a new Transmission Control Module
as required, refer to the warranty policy and
suspect. If no fault identified, check Park signal
circuit to Transmission Shift Module for short, open
circuit
P0850-01 Park / Neutral Switch

Input Circuit - General General electrical failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Electrical Failure new Transmission Control Module as required,

Input Circuit - General General signal failure Check Parklock mechanism, If Parklock operation
signal failure correct suspect the Transmission Control Module.
Install a new Transmission Control Module as
suspect.

Input Circuit - Signal Signal Invalid Check Parklock mechanism, If Parklock operation
invalid correct suspect the Transmission Control Module.
Install a new Transmission Control Module as
suspect.
P0850-1C Park / Neutral Switch

Input Circuit - Circuit Circuit voltage out of Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
voltage out of range range new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0919-93 Gear Shift Position

Control Error - No No shifting despite driver Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
operation request new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0919-94 Gear Shift Position

Control Error - Shifting without driver Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Unexpected operation request new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0938-29 Hydraulic Oil Temperature

Sensor Transmission fluid Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
Range/Performance - temperature compared driving vehicle until normal operating temperature
Signal invalid with module temperature is achieved. Read DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect
fault the Transmission Control Module. Install a new

A Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery 1 Circuit Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,

B Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Open B Control Circuit Open new Transmission Control Module as required,

B Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or B Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open Ground or Open refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

B Control Circuit Low - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground 2 Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

B Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

C Control Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or 3 Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open or Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

C Control Circuit Low - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground 3 Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

C Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0972-22 Shift Solenoid A Control

Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Range/Performance - 1 current too large new Transmission Control Module as required,
Signal amplitude > refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
maximum if a module/component is suspect.

Circuit Low - Circuit Short Shift solenoid A control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

Circuit Low - Circuit Short Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground or Open 1 Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,
or Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0973-1A Shift Solenoid A Control

Circuit Low - Circuit Shift Solenoid A control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below circuit resistance below new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0973-1E Shift Solenoid A Control

Circuit Low - Circuit Shift Solenoid A control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Out Of Range circuit resistance out of new Transmission Control Module as required,
range refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0976-11 Shift Solenoid B Control

Circuit Low - Circuit Short Solenoid valve 2 Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0976-14 Shift Solenoid B Control

Circuit Low - Circuit Short Solenoid valve 2 Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground or Open Short to Ground or Open new Transmission Control Module as required,
Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P1674-04 Control Module Software
Corrupted - System System internal failures Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Internal Failures new Transmission Control Module as required,
P1674-48 Control Module Software

Corrupted - Supervision Supervision software Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Software Failure failure new Transmission Control Module as required,
P1707-07 Transfer Case Neutral or

Park/Neutral Indication Transfer case neutral or Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging
Circuit - Commanded park/neutral indication and disengaging the parking lock several times. If
position not reachable circuit - mechanical the DTC recurs, check parking lock components
failures and replace as required. If no faulty parklock
component is found Clear DTC and the DTC returns
suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

Park/Neutral Indication Transfer case neutral or Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging
Circuit - Actuator Stuck park/neutral indication and disengaging the parking lock several times. If
Open circuit - Actuator stuck the DTC recurs, check parking lock components
open and replace as required. If no faulty parklock

Park/Neutral Indication Commanded position not Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging
Circuit - Commanded reachable and disengaging the parking lock several times. If
position not reachable the DTC recurs, check parking lock components
and replace as required. If no faulty parklock
P2700-07 Transmission Friction

Element A Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Range/Performance - Mechanical Failures re-detects suspect Transmission (mechanical)
Mechanical Failures internal fault. Install a new Transmission as
suspect.

Element B Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.

Element C Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.

Element D Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.
Element E Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.

D - System Internal System internal failures Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

D - Supervision Software Supervision software Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure failure new Transmission Control Module as required,

D Electrical - Signal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude > maximum D Electrical signal new Transmission Control Module as required,
amplitude > maximum refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

D Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below D circuit resistance below new Transmission Control Module as required,

D Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Out Of Range D circuit resistance out of new Transmission Control Module as required,

D Control Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or D Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open or Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

D Control Circuit Low - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground D Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

D Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery D Circuit Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,

E - System Internal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failures E system internal failures new Transmission Control Module as required,

E - Supervision Software Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure E supervision control new Transmission Control Module as required,
software failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

E Electrical - Signal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude > maximum E Electrical signal new Transmission Control Module as required,

E Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below E electrical resistance new Transmission Control Module as required,
Threshold below threshold refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
E Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Out Of Range E circuit resistance out of new Transmission Control Module as required,

E Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or E Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open Ground or Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

E Control Circuit Low - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground E Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

E Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery E Circuit Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,

F - System Internal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failures F no sub type information new Transmission Control Module as required,

F - Supervision Software Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure F supervision software new Transmission Control Module as required,
failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

F Electrical - Signal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude > maximum F Electrical signal new Transmission Control Module as required,

F Electrical-Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below F electrical circuit new Transmission Control Module as required,
Threshold resistance below refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
threshold if a module/component is suspect.

F Electrical-Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Out Of Range F electrical circuit new Transmission Control Module as required,
resistance out of range refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

F Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or F Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open Ground or Open refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

F Control Circuit Low - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground F Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Ground refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

F Control Circuit High - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery F Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Power refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

Pressure Control Solenoid Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Control Circuit High - F Circuit Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,
Circuit Short to Battery refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
www.JagDocs.com
Pressure Control Solenoid Torque converter clutch Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Control Circuit Low - pressure control solenoid new Transmission Control Module as required,
Circuit Short to Ground control Circuit Short to refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Ground if a module/component is suspect.
P2764-1A Torque Converter Clutch

Circuit Resistance Below control circuit resistance refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Threshold below threshold if a module/component is suspect.
P2764-1E Torque Converter Clutch

Circuit Resistance Out Of control circuit resistance refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Range out of range if a module/component is suspect.

G - Circuit Short to Park solenoid Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Ground Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

G - Circuit Short to Park solenoid Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Battery Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,

G - Circuit Open Park solenoid Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Open Circuit new Transmission Control Module as required,

G - Circuit Short to Park solenoid Circuit Carry out any diagnostic pinpoint tests associated
Ground or Open Short to Ground or Open with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
Circuit diagnostic system. Suspect the Transmission
Control Module. Install a new Transmission Control
Module as required, refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect.
B1087-82 LIN Bus "A" - Alive /

sequence counter Alive counter fault Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
incorrect / not updated Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Transmission Control Module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN
Bus)

signal protection Checksum error Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs
calculation incorrect Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Transmission Control Module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN
Bus)
B1087-87 LIN Bus "A" - Missing

message Transmission Shift Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs
Module is NOT visible to Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
the Transmission Control Transmission Control Module to Transmission Shift
Module on the LIN Bus Module for Short or Open Circuit (LIN Bus)

LIN Bus Circuit fault. Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Check hardware of LIN Transmission Control Module to Transmission Shift
connection between Module LIN bus circuit for Short, Open Circuit.
transmission and Check Transmission Shift Module for related DTCs
Transmission Shift
Module

Communication Bus - Bus CAN Bus off Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
off CAN Bus for Circuit fault
ECM/PCM "A" - Alive / Alive counter fault Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
sequence counter
incorrect / not updated
ECM/PCM "A" - Value of Checksum fault Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
signal protection
calculation incorrect
ECM/PCM "A" - Missing CAN Timeout
NOTE: Do NOT install a new Engine Control Module
message if an Engine Control Module Timeout DTC is only logged in
the Transmission Control Module, the failure is NOT with
the Engine Control Module
Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.

Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault

Gear Shift Control Module Alive counter fault Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
A - Alive / sequence Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
counter incorrect / not
updated
Gear Shift Control Module Checksum fault Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
A - Value of signal Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
protection calculation
incorrect
Gear Shift Control Module CAN Timeout Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
A - Missing message Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault

Vehicle Dynamics Control Alive counter fault Check Dynamic Stability Control (ABS) for stored
Module - Alive / DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
sequence counter
Vehicle Dynamics Control Checksum fault Check Dynamic Stability Control (ABS) for stored
Module - Value of signal DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
incorrect
Vehicle Dynamics Control CAN Timeout Check Dynamic Stability Control (ABS) for stored
Module - Missing DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
message
Steering Angle Sensor Lost Communication With Check SAS for stored DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit
Module - No sub type Steering Angle Sensor for fault
information Module

Park Brake Control CAN timeout electronic Check Electronic Parking Brake Module (EPB) for
Module - Missing parking brake module stored DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
message
Body Control Module - Alive counter fault Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Check
Alive / sequence counter CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Body Control Module - Checksum fault Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Check
Value of signal protection CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Body Control Module - CAN Timeout Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Check
Missing message CAN Bus Circuit for fault

Instrument Panel Cluster CAN timeout instrument Check Instrument Cluster for stored DTCs. Check
(IPC) Control Module - cluster CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Missing message
U0300-68 Control Module - Event
information Transmission software Check Central Junction Box software level, Check
does not match vehicle Transmission Control Module Software level,
network Update software as required using the
manufacturer approved process
From ECM/PCM A - Bus Inaccurate engine speed, Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs,
Signal Message Failures torque information Check CAN Bus circuit for faults

from ECM/PCM A - Event Inaccurate engine speed, Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
information torque information Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault

from ECM/PCM A - Signal Inaccurate engine speed, Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
Invalid torque information Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault

from Gear Shift Control Incorrect CAN data Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Module A - Event received from Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN
information Transmission Shift Bus for Circuit fault
Module

from Gear Shift Control Incorrect LIN data Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Module A - Invalid Serial received from Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN
Data Received Transmission Shift Bus for Circuit fault
Module

From Vehicle Dynamics Event information brake Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
Control Module - Event information Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
information
From Body Control Event information invalid Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Check
Module - Event Power mode information CAN Bus Circuit for fault
information
U101B-87 Lost Communication With
GSM - Multiple Bus - Missing message lost Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Missing message communication with Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN
Transmission Shift Bus for Circuit fault
Module (multiple Bus)
U3000-49 Control Module - Internal

electronic failure Internal electronic failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
U3000-4B Control Module - Circuit

resistance above Internal electronic failure Check and correct oil level. Check hydraulic flow
threshold through oil cooler and pipe circuit for restriction or
blockage. If no restrictions found, suspect the
Transmission Control Module. Install a new
U3000-81 Control Module - Invalid

serial data received Vehicle or Engine type Reflash the Transmission Control Module using the
signal incorrect from manufacturer approved process
Central Junction Box or
incorrect Transmission
Control Module software
installed
U3001-94 Control Module Improper

Shutdown - Unexpected Control Module Improper Check Engine Control Module For Power
operation Shutdown (voltage (alternator) faults. Check Power and Ground
related) Circuit and Battery for fault. Clear DTCs. Road
Test. If DTC reoccurs suspect the Transmission
Control Module. Install a new Transmission Control
Module as required, refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect.
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Transmission
Shift Module (GSM)
Gear Shift Module (GSM)
NOTES:
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the gear shift module, for additional diagnosis
and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.
For additional information, refer to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V6 3.0L
Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1087-08 LIN Bus "A" - Bus
Signal / Message LIN bus 'A' Error Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Failures check LIN input signal circuit for short circuit
to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit, high resistance
B1087-81 LIN Bus "A" -

Invalid serial data Transmission control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
received message error - LIN/CAN signal check LIN input signal circuit for short circuit
mismatch (complement fault) to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit, high resistance. Check transmission
control module for related DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC index
B1087-82 LIN Bus "A" - Alive

/ sequence counter Transmission control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
incorrect / not message error - Alive counter fault check LIN input signal circuit for short circuit
updated to ground, short circuit to power, open
relevant DTC index
B1087-83 LIN Bus "A" - Value
of signal protection Transmission control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
calculation message error - checksum fault check LIN input signal circuit for short circuit
incorrect to ground, short circuit to power, open
relevant DTC index
B1087-87 LIN Bus "A" -

Missing message Transmission control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
message error - Missing message check LIN input signal circuit for short circuit
relevant DTC index

Signal compare Hardwired ignition and CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
failure powermode signals differ check ignition supply circuit for short circuit
circuit, high resistance
B123C-01 Dynamic Stability

Control Status Dynamic stability control LED failure Check transmission shift module, check
Indicator - General operation of the dynamic stability control
Electrical Failure button status illumination, check and install
new transmission shift module as required.
programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module
B123D-64 Dynamic Stability

Control Button - Dynamic stability control button may Check for normal dynamic stability control
Signal plausibility be stuck, may be due to a faulty button functionality. If it operates normally
failure button or to the user holding the then no further action required. If the
button for a prolonged period dynamic stability control button fails to
(dynamic stability control button operate normally then may be due to an
detected as pressed for 30 seconds) internal fault, check and install new
(S1) transmission shift module as required. Refer
to the warranty policy and procedures
B123F-01 Adaptive Speed

Limiter Mode Adaptive speed limiter LED failure Check transmission shift module, check
Indicator - General operation of the active speed limiter button
Electrical Failure status illumination, check and install new
transmission shift module as required. Refer
B1241-64 Adaptive Speed

Limiter Button - May be due to a faulty button or to Check for normal adaptive speed limiter
Signal plausibility the user holding the button for a button functionality. If it operates normally
failure prolonged period (adaptive speed then no further action required. If the
limiter button detected as pressed adaptive speed limiter button fails to
for 30 seconds) operate normally then may be due to an
internal fault, check and install new
B1242-64 Winter Button -

Signal plausibility May be due to a faulty button or to Check for normal winter button functionality.
failure the user holding the button for a If it operates normally then no further action
prolonged period (winter button required. If the winter button fails to operate
detected as pressed for 30 seconds) normally then may be due to an
internal fault, check and install new
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Portable
Audio Interface Control Module (PAICM)
Portable Audio Interface Control Module (PAICM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Portable Audio Interface Control Module
(PAICM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop
manual.

U3000-13 Control
Module - Universal serial bus Check for correct connection of universal serial bus (USB) harness
Circuit open (USB) harness between portable audio interface panel and user interface panel.
between portable Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check portable audio
audio interface panel interface module connection detect circuit between portable audio
and user interface interface panel and user interface panel is grounded. Install
panel is not properly universal serial bus (USB) harness between portable audio
connected interface panel and user interface panel as required, refer to the
Connection - detect new module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
circuit between Index
portable audio
interface panel and
user interface panel
is not grounded
Universal serial bus
(USB) harness
between portable
audio interface panel
and user interface
panel is open circuit
U3000-44 Control
Module - Data Portable audio Suspect the portable audio interface module. Check and install a
memory interface module new module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
failure internal RAM memory procedures manual if a module is suspect
failure
U3000-45 Control
Module - Portable audio Suspect the portable audio interface module. Check and install a
Program interface module new module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
memory internal flash memory procedures manual if a module is suspect
failure failure
U3000-55 Control
Module - Not Portable audio Re-program the portable audio interface module, clear DTC and
configured interface module not re-test. If DTC remains carry out MOST tests and test USB cable
configured correctly for open, short circuit, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains
suspect the portable audio interface module, check and install a
new module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module is suspect
U3003-62 Battery
Voltage - Portable audio Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuses, power
Signal interface module and ground connections to both modules
compare voltage differs more
failure than ±2V compared
to central electronics
module voltage
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Hybrid
Digital Radio Control Module (HDRCM)
Hybrid Digital Radio Control Module (HDRCM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Hybrid Digital Radio Control Module
(HDRCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop
manual.

B1A56-02 Antenna - General
signal failure Antenna general signal failure Renew the diversity antenna amplifier

short to ground Diversity antenna amplifier circuit short Refer to the electrical guides and check
to ground the diversity antenna amplifier circuit and
the antenna for short circuit to ground

short to battery Diversity antenna amplifier circuit short Refer to the electrical guides and check
to power the diversity antenna amplifier circuit and
the antenna for short circuit to power

open Diversity antenna amplifier circuit open Refer to the electrical guides and check
circuit the diversity antenna amplifier circuit and
the antenna for open circuit
U200D-14 Control Module

Output Power A - Diversity antenna amplifier power supply Refer to the electrical guides and check
Circuit short to circuit short to ground or open circuit the diversity antenna amplifier power
ground or open circuit
System internal Diversity antenna amplifier internal Renew the amplifier module
failures failure
U3000-4A Control Module -

Incorrect Diversity antenna amplifier internal Using the manufacturer approved
component incorrect component installed diagnostic system select the vehicle
installed - The module has been installed to configuration main menu, select configure
a vehicle not configured to accept existing modules menu and program the
it module

Not configured Diversity antenna amplifier not Using the manufacturer approved
configured correctly diagnostic system select the vehicle
configuration main menu, select configure
existing modules menu and program the
module

Missing message Missing message Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system select the vehicle
configuration main menu, select configure
existing modules menu and program the
module

Component or Diversity antenna amplifier component or Consider moving the amplifier mounting
system over system over temperature position to prevent unit overheating. Cool
temperature the vehicle interior down by ensuring it is
in the shade and have the A/C on cool.
When cool, clear the DTC and retest. If
the problem persists, renew the amplifier
module

Signal compare Mismatch in battery voltage of 2 volts or Refer to the electrical guides and check
failure more for longer than 1 minute, between that power supply voltage at Digital Audio
the measured battery voltage at the Control Module C and Rear Junction Box is
Digital Audio Control Module C and the not different by more than 2 volts. Rectify
battery voltage signal sent from the Rear as required
Junction Box.
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Infotainment
Control Module (ICM)
Infotainment Control Module (ICM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Infotainment Control Module (ICM). For

B1D21-11 Remote control
switch - Circuit The information and Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front
short to ground entertainment module has remote circuit for short to ground
detected a ground
measurement for a period
longer than expected or has
detected a ground
measurement when another
value was expected
Front remote circuit short
circuit to ground
U0010-00 Medium speed CAN

communication bus General failure Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- No sub type Open circuit medium speed DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information CAN negative circuit system. Clear DTC and re-test, if DTC remains, refer
Short circuit to power to electrical circuit diagrams and check for open
medium speed CAN negative circuit, short to power, short to ground on medium
circuit speed CAN negative circuit. Check for open circuit,
Short circuit to ground short to power, short to ground on medium speed
medium speed CAN negative CAN positive circuit. Check for short circuit between
circuit medium speed CAN positive circuit and medium
Open circuit medium speed speed CAN negative circuit
CAN positive circuit
Short circuit to power
medium speed CAN positive
www.JagDocs.com
circuit
Short circuit to ground
circuit
Short circuit between
circuit and medium speed
CAN negative circuit
U0156-4A Lost communication

with information The information and Suspect incorrect instrument cluster installed. Refer
center "A" - entertainment module has to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
Incorrect component detected a mismatch module is suspect. Check the system is operating
installed between the hardware correctly and there are no DTCs
connected and the expected
hardware
Module has incorrect serial
number

with parking assist General failure Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
control module "A" - Parking aid module, battery DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
No sub type supply circuit, open circuit system. Check parking aid module for DTCs and
information Parking aid module, ground refer to the relevant DTC Index. Refer to electrical
supply circuit, open circuit circuit diagrams, check battery and ground supplies,
Parking aid module medium to parking aid module for open circuit. Check
speed CAN negative circuit, medium speed CAN negative and positive harness
open circuit to parking aid module, repair as necessary
parking aid module medium
speed CAN positive circuit,
open circuit

with navigation General failure Check the navigation system module for DTCs and
control module - No Navigation system module, refer to the relevant DTC index. Using the
sub type battery supply circuit, open manufacturing approved diagnostic system carry out
information circuit MOST ring test. Using the manufacturers approved
Navigation system module diagnostic system re-configure the navigation
ground supply circuit, open system module. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
circuit check battery and ground supplies to navigation
Navigation system module, system module for open circuit. Repair as necessary.
MOST network, open circuit Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Navigation system module if module is suspect. Check the system is operating
not configured correctly and there are no DTCs
Navigation system module
failure

with navigation The information and Suspect incorrect navigation module installed. Refer
control module - entertainment module has to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
hardware
number

with radio - No sub General failure Check the integrated audio module for DTCs and
type information Integrated audio module refer to the relevant DTC index. Using the
battery supply circuit, open manufacturing approved diagnostic system carry out
circuit MOST ring test. Using the manufacturers approved
Integrated audio module diagnostic system re-configure the integrated audio
ground supply circuit, open module. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams check
circuit battery and ground supplies to integrated audio
Integrated audio module module for open circuit. Repair as necessary. Refer
MOST network, open circuit to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
Integrated audio module not module is suspect. Check the system is operating
configured correctly and there are no DTCs
Integrated audio module
failure

with radio - The information and Suspect incorrect integrated audio module installed.
Incorrect component entertainment module has Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
installed detected a mismatch if module is suspect. Check the system is operating
between the hardware correctly and there are no DTCs
hardware
number

with audio amplifier General failure Check the amplifier audio module for DTCs and refer
"A" - No sub type Amplifier audio module to the relevant DTC index. Using the manufacturing
information battery supply circuit, open approved diagnostic system carry out MOST ring
circuit test. Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
Amplifier audio module system re-configure the amplifier audio module.
ground supply circuit, open Refer to electrical circuit diagrams check battery and
circuit ground supplies to amplifier audio module for open
Amplifier audio module circuit. Repair as necessary. Refer to the warranty
MOST network, open circuit policy and procedures manual if module is suspect.
Amplifier audio module not Check the system is operating correctly and there
configured are no DTCs
Amplifier audio module
failure

with audio amplifier The information and Suspect incorrect amplifier audio module installed.
"A" - Incorrect entertainment module has Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
component installed detected a mismatch if module is suspect. Check the system is operating
between the hardware correctly and there are no DTCs
hardware
number

with television - No General failure Check the television receiver module for DTCs and
sub type Television receiver module refer to the relevant DTC index. Using the
information battery supply, open circuit manufacturing approved diagnostic system carry out
Television receiver module MOST ring test. Using the manufacturers approved
ground supply circuit, open diagnostic system re-configure the television
circuit receiver module. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Television receiver module check battery and ground supplies to television
MOST network, open circuit receiver module for open circuit. Repair as
Television receiver module necessary. Refer to the warranty policy and
not configured procedures manual if module is suspect. Check the
Television receiver module system is operating correctly and there are no DTCs
failure

with television - The information and Suspect incorrect television receiver module
Incorrect component entertainment module has installed. Refer to the warranty policy and
installed detected a mismatch procedures manual if module is suspect. Check the
between the hardware system is operating correctly and there are no DTCs
hardware
number

with digital audio General failure Check the digital audio broadcast module/satellite
control module A - Digital audio broadcast radio module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
No sub type module/satellite radio index. Using the manufacturing approved diagnostic
information module battery supply system carry out MOST ring test. Using the
circuit, open circuit manufacturers approved diagnostic system
Digital audio broadcast re-configure the digital audio broadcast
module/satellite radio module/satellite radio module. Refer to electrical
module ground supply circuit diagrams check battery and ground supplies
circuit, open circuit to digital audio broadcast module/satellite radio
Digital audio broadcast module for open circuit. Repair as necessary. Refer
module/satellite radio to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
module MOST network, open module is suspect. Check the system is operating
circuit correctly and there are no DTCs
Digital audio broadcast
module/satellite radio
module not configured
Digital audio broadcast
module/satellite radio
module failure

with digital audio The information and Suspect incorrect digital audio broadcast
control module A - entertainment module has module/satellite radio module installed. Refer to the
Incorrect component detected a mismatch warranty policy and procedures manual if module is
installed between the hardware suspect. Check the system is operating correctly
connected and the expected and there are no DTCs
hardware
number

with telephone General failure Check the telephone control module for DTCs and
control module - No Telephone control module refer to the relevant DTC index. Using the
sub type battery supply circuit, open manufacturing approved diagnostic system carry out
information circuit most ring test. Using the manufacturers approved
Telephone control module diagnostic system re-configure the telephone
ground supply circuit, open control module. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
circuit check battery and ground supplies to telephone
Telephone control module control module for open circuit. Repair as necessary.
MOST network open circuit Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Telephone control module if module is suspect. Check the system is operating
not configured correctly and there are no DTCs
Telephone control module
failure

with telephone The information and Suspect incorrect telephone module installed. Refer
control module - entertainment module has to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
hardware
number

with digital audio General failure Check the module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
control module C - High definition radio module DTC index. Using the manufacturing approved
No sub type battery supply circuit, open diagnostic system carry out MOST ring test. Using
information circuit the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
High definition radio module re-configure the high definition radio module . Refer
ground supply circuit, open to electrical circuit diagrams check battery and
circuit ground supplies to high definition radio module for
High definition radio module open circuit. Repair as necessary. Refer to the
MOST network, open circuit warranty policy and procedures manual if module is
High definition radio module suspect. Check the system is operating correctly
not configured and there are no DTCs
High definition radio module
failure

with digital audio The information and Suspect incorrect high definition radio module
control module C - entertainment module has installed, Refer to the warranty policy and
Incorrect component detected a mismatch procedures manual if module is suspect. Check the
installed between the hardware system is operating correctly and there are no DTCs
hardware
number

with accessory General failure Check the portable audio interface console for DTCs
protocol interface Portable audio interface and refer to the relevant DTC index. Using the
module - No sub console battery supply manufacturing approved diagnostic system carry out
type information circuit, open circuit MOST ring test. Using the manufacturers approved
Portable audio interface diagnostic system re-configure the portable audio
console ground supply interface console. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
circuit, open circuit check battery and ground supplies to portable audio
Portable audio interface interface console for open circuit. Repair as
console MOST network, open necessary. Refer to the warranty policy and
circuit procedures manual if module is suspect. Check the
Portable audio interface system is operating correctly and there are no DTCs
console not configured
Portable audio interface
console failure

with accessory The information and Suspect incorrect portable audio interface console
protocol interface entertainment module has installed. Refer to the warranty policy and
module - Incorrect detected a mismatch procedures manual if module is suspect. Check the
component installed between the hardware system is operating correctly and there are no DTCs
hardware
number
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Telephone
Module (TEL)
Telephone Module
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Telephone Module. For additional
For additional information, refer to: Cellular Phone (415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information,

B1A56-13 Antenna - Circuit open
Bluetooth antenna circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check blue
- open circuit tooth antenna circuit for open circuit

Signal below Signal amplitude < Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
allowable range minimum microphone input circuit for short/open circuit. Check
integrated audio module for related DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC Index
U1A00-88 Private
Communication Bluetooth phone module Suspect the module. Check and install a new
Network - Bus off internal communications telephone module as required, refer to the new
failure module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index

Not Complete - No Initial configuration not Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
sub type information complete diagnostic system. If DTC remains, carry out CAN
network integrity tests using the manufacturer

Configuration Configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
Incompatible - No sub incompatible diagnostic system. If DTC remains, suspect the
type information telephone module. Check and install a new telephone
module as required, refer to the new
DTC Index

memory failure Data memory failure Re-configure the telephone module. If the DTC
remains, suspect the telephone module. Check and
install a new telephone module as required, refer to
the new module/component installation note at the

Program memory Program memory failure Re-configure the telephone module. If the DTC
failure remains, suspect the telephone module. Check and
install a new telephone module as required, refer to

configured Incorrect car Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
configuration data diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC
received remains suspect the telephone module. Check and
DTC Index

Component or system Component or system Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
over temperature over temperature Clear DTC and re-test/monitor condition for
re-occurrence

Signal compare failure Mis-match in battery Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
voltage, of 2 volts or using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
more, between
telephone module and
RJB
Identification Codes - Identification Codes
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

The official Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) for title and registration purposes is stamped on a metal plate and fastened to
the instrument panel. It is positioned close on the left-hand side of the vehicle and is visible from the outside.
The VIN is also located on the vehicle certification label.

1 — VIN (stamped) To the end of 11MY
2 — Bar code label (USA)
3 — VIN label (Europe/Rest of World shown)
4 — VIN plate
5 — VIN (stamped) From 12MY onwards
Vehicle Identification Number (Typical)
Item Description
1 World manufacturer identifier
2 Market, air bag specification
3 Transmission and steering code
4 Body code
5 Emission control system
6 Check digit
7 Model year
8 Assembly plant, model line
9 Production sequence number
World Manufacturer Identifier

VIN Positions 1
Codes Manufacturer Make Type
SAJ Jaguar Cars Limited, England Jaguar Passenger Car
Market, Air Bag Specification

VIN position 2
VIN code Description
A Rest of World with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
K Japan with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
W USA with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
X Canada with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
Y Mexico with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
Transmission, Steering Code

VIN Position 3
VIN Code Description
A Automatic LHS
C Automatic RHS
www.JagDocs.com
Body Code - All except USA and Canada - 2010 and 2011 model years
VIN Position 4
05 Luxury
06 Premium luxury
07 Sport luxury/Portfolio/SV8
08 'R'
Body Code (USA and Canada) 2010 and 2011 model years
VIN Position 4
0F Luxury
0G Premium luxury
0H Portfolio/SV8
0J 'R'
Body Code - All except USA and Canada - 2012 model year
VIN Position 4
04 Entry
05 Luxury
06 Premium luxury
07 Sport luxury/Portfolio/SV8
08 'R'
85 Luxury+speedpack
86 Premium luxury+speedpack
87 Sport luxury/Portfolio/SV8+speedpack
88 'R' + speedpack
Body Code (USA and Canada) 2012 model year

VIN Position 4
0F Luxury
0G Premium luxury
0H Portfolio/SV8
0J 'R'
8E Luxury+speedpack
8F Premium luxury+speedpack
8G Sport luxury/Portfolio/SV8+speedpack
8H 'R' + speedpack
Engine Emission System - 2009 model year

VIN Position 5
NOTES:
*1 EU. Includes the following markets; Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Rep, Denmark, Eire, Estonia, Finland,
France, Germany, Greece, Holland, Hungary, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovenia,
Slovakia, Spain (incl. Canary Islands), Sweden and UK.
*2 East Europe. Includes the following markets; Albania, Bosnia, Croatia, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia,
Kosovo, Montenegro and Serbia.
*3 Russia. Includes the following markets; Belarus, Kazakhstan, Ukraine and Uzbekistan.
*4 Middle East. Includes the following markets; Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Dubai, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Oman, Qatar and
Saudi Arabia.
*5 Caribbean. Includes the following markets; Bahamas, Barbados, Grand Cayman, Grenada and Trinidad and Tobago.
VIN
Code Engine Market
D 3.0L *5 Caribbean, Chile, Dominican Rep, Guatemala, Indonesia, Malaysia, *4 Middle East, Morocco,
F 4.2L Panama, Phillipines, Singapore, Sri Lanka and Uruguay
VIN
Code Engine Market
G 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
M 3.0L China
N/A 4.2L
N/A 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
M 3.0L *2 East Europe, *1 EU, Israel, Norway, *3 Russia, Switzerland and Turkey
P 4.2L
R 4.2L
Supercharged
1 2.7L Diesel
W 3.0L Brazil
X 4.2L
Y 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
S 3.0L Egypt and Syria
U 4.2L
V 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
H 3.0L Japan
K 4.2L
L 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
N/A 3.0L USA
B 4.2L
C 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
N/A 3.0L Canada
B 4.2L
C 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
N/A 3.0L Mexico
K 4.2L
L 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
N/A 3.0L South Korea
B 4.2L
C 4.2L
Supercharged
1 2.7L Diesel
D 3.0L South Africa
F 4.2L
G 4.2L
Supercharged
1 2.7L Diesel
M 3.0L Argentina, Australia, Cyprus, Hong Kong, Malta, New Zealand, Taiwan, Thailand and UK (and Eire)
P 4.2L
R 4.2L
Supercharged
1 2.7L Diesel

VIN Position 5
NOTES:
*1 EU. Includes the following markets; Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Rep, Denmark, Eire, Estonia, Finland,
France, Germany, Greece, Holland, Hungary, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovenia,
Slovakia, Spain (incl. Canary Islands), Sweden and UK.
*2 East Europe. Includes the following markets; Albania, Bosnia, Croatia, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia,
Kosovo, Montenegro and Serbia.
*3 Russia. Includes the following markets; Belarus, Kazakhstan, Ukraine and Uzbekistan.
*4 Middle East. Includes the following markets; Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Dubai, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Oman, Qatar and
Saudi Arabia.
*5 Caribbean. Includes the following markets; Bahamas, Barbados, Grand Cayman, Grenada and Trinidad and Tobago.
VIN
Code Engine Market
D 3.0L Algeria, Brunei, *5 Caribbean, Dominican Rep, Guatemala, Indonesia, Libya, *4 Middle East, Morrocco,
F 5.0L Pakistan, Panama, Phillipines, Sri Lanka, Tunisia and Uruguay
G 5.0L
Supercharged
H 3.0L China
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
H 3.0L Chile
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
H 3.0L Argentina
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
H 3.0L *1 EU, *2 East Europe, Israel, Norway, Switzerland and Turkey
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
2 3.0L Diesel
W 3.0L Brazil
X 5.0L
Y 5.0L
Supercharged
S 3.0L - Egypt Egypt and Syria
only
F 5.0L
G 5.0L
Supercharged
H 3.0L Japan
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
A 4.2L USA
B 5.0L
C 5.0L
Supercharged
A 4.2L Canada
B 5.0L
C 5.0L
Supercharged
A 4.2L Mexico
B 5.0L
C 5.0L
Supercharged
B 5.0L South Korea
C 5.0L
Supercharged
2 3.0L Diesel
H 3.0L Malaysia
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
D 3.0L South Africa
F 5.0L
G 5.0L
Supercharged
2 3.0L Diesel
VIN
Code Engine Market
H 3.0L Taiwan
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
2 3.0L Diesel
D 3.0L Thailand
F 5.0L
G 5.0L
Supercharged
D 3.0L Singapore
F 5.0L
G 5.0L
Supercharged
H 3.0L Australia, Cyprus, Hong Kong, Malta, New Zealand and UK (and Eire)
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
2 3.0L Diesel

VIN Position 5
NOTES:
*1 EU. Includes the following markets; Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark,
Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, India (gasoline only), Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania,
Luxembourg, Malta, Moldova, Monaco, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, San Marino, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia,
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, UK; (Canary Islands, Azores, Madeira, Martinique, Guadeloupe, Reunion are included as
remote parts of sovereign states).
*2 With Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), includes the following markets; Australia, Belarus, Gibraltar, Hong Kong, Iceland,
Israel, Korea (diesel), Macau, Morocco, New Zealand, Palestine, Singapore (diesel only), South Africa (Diesel), Taiwan, Tunisia.
*3 With-out DPF, includes the following markets; Argentina, Bermuda, Chile, China, Guadeloupe, India (diesel only),
Kazakhstan, Morocco, Ukraine, Russia.
*4 Rest Of World (ROW), includes the following markets; Barbados, Benin, Botswana, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Brunei,
Cameroon, Central African Republic, Chad, Congo, Costa Rica, Democratic Republic of Congo, Dominican Republic, Equatorial
Guinea, Ethiopia, Falklands, Fiji, Gabon, Gambia, Ghana, Guatemala, Guinea, Guinea Bissau, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Ivory
Coast, Lesotho, Liberia, Madagascar, Malawi, Mali, Mozambique, Mauritania, Namibia, New Caledonia, Niger, Panama, Papua
New Guinea, Rwanda, Sierra Leone, Singapore (gasoline only),Somalia, Swaziland, Tahiti, Tanzania, Togo, Trinidad & Tobago,
Uganda, Western Sahara, Zambia, Zimbabwe.
*5 Emergent World, With-out OBD, includes the following markets; Albania, Angola, Bolivia, Colombia, Ecuador, Georgia,
Indonesia, Jamaica, Kenya, Kyrgystan, Macedonia, Malaysia, Mauritius, Nigeria, Paraguay, Peru, Philippines, South Africa
(gasoline only), Sri Lanka, Turkmenistan, Uruguay, Uzbekhistan, Venezuela, Vietnam.
*6 Hot Climate, With-out OBD, includes the following markets; Algeria, Azerbaijan, Bahrain, Bangladesh for gasoline,
Bhutan, Dubai, Egypt, Iraq, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon (gasoline only), Libya, Oman, Pakistan, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Sudan, Syria
(gasoline only), Thailand, Tunisia, United Arab Emirates, Yemen.
B 5.0L USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea

C 5.0L Supercharged USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea
D 3.0L *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
E 5.0L Supercharged USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea
F 5.0L *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
G 5.0L Supercharged *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
H 3.0L #(*2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF),* Japan and *1 EU
J 5.0L Supercharged *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
K 5.0L Supercharged Brazil
L 5.0L Supercharged *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
P 5.0L *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
R 5.0L Supercharged *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
W 3.0L Brazil
X 5.0L Brazil
Y 5.0L Supercharged Brazil
2 3.0L Diesel *1 EU and *2 With DPF
3 3.0L Diesel *1 EU
5 3.0L Diesel *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World, *3 With-out DPF, Japan and *6 Hot Climate
#( ) 3.0L Gasoline EU4 is compliant with european emission requirements until December 2010.

VIN Position 5
NOTES:
*1 EU. Includes the following markets; Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Chile(diesel only), Croatia, Cyprus, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, India (gasoline only), Ireland, Italy, Latvia,
Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Moldova, Monaco, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, San Marino,
Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, UK; (Canary Islands, Azores, Madeira, Martinique, Guadeloupe,
Reunion are included as remote parts of sovereign states).
*2 With DPF, Australia, Belarus, Gibraltar, Hong Kong, Iceland, Israel, Korea (diesel only), Macau, Morocco, New Zealand,
Palestine, Singapore (diesel only), South Africa (Diesel), Taiwan, Tunisia
*3 With-out DPF, Argentina, Bermuda, Chile (gasoline only), China, Guadeloupe, India (diesel only), Kazakhstan, Mexico
(diesel only), Morocco, Ukraine, Russia.
*4 Rest Of World (ROW), includes the following markets; Barbados, Benin, Botswana, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Brunei,
Cameroon, Central African Republic, Chad, Congo, Costa Rica, Democratic Republic of Congo, Dominican Republic, Equatorial
Guinea, Ethiopia, Falklands, Fiji, Gabon, Gambia, Ghana, Guatemala, Guinea, Guinea Bissau, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Ivory
Coast, Lesotho, Liberia, Madagascar, Malawi, Mali, Mozambique, Mauritania, Namibia, New Caledonia, Niger, Panama, Papua
New Guinea, Rwanda, Sierra Leone, Singapore (gasoline only),Somalia, Swaziland, Tahiti, Tanzania, Togo, Trinidad & Tobago,
Uganda, Western Sahara, Zambia, Zimbabwe.
*5 Emergent World, With-out OBD, includes the following markets; Albania, Angola, Bolivia, Colombia, Ecuador, Georgia,
Indonesia, Jamaica, Kenya, Kyrgystan, Macedonia, Malaysia, Mauritius, Nigeria, Paraguay, Peru, Philippines, South Africa
(gasoline only), Sri Lanka, Turkmenistan, Uruguay, Uzbekhistan, Venezuela, Vietnam.
*6 Hot Climate, With-out OBD, includes the following markets; Algeria, Azerbaijan, Bahrain, Bangladesh for gasoline,
Bhutan, Dubai, Egypt, Iraq, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon (gasoline only), Libya, Oman, Pakistan, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Sudan, Syria
(gasoline only), Thailand, Tunisia, United Arab Emirates, Yemen.
B 5.0L USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea

C 5.0L Supercharged USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea
D 3.0L *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
E 5.0L Supercharged USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea
F 5.0L *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
G 5.0L Supercharged *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
H 3.0L *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
J 5.0L Supercharged *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
K 5.0L Supercharged Brazil
L 5.0L Supercharged *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
P 5.0L *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
R 5.0L Supercharged *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
T 2.2L Diesel *1 EU and *2 With DPF
W 3.0L Brazil
X 5.0L Brazil
Y 5.0L Supercharged Brazil
5 3.0L Diesel *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World, *3 With-out DPF, Japan and *6 Hot Climate
Check Digit
VIN Position 6
0 - 9 or X Calculated in accordance with American standard CFR part 565
www.JagDocs.com
Model Year
VIN Position 7
9 2009 model year
A 2010 model year
B 2011 model year
C 2012 model year
Assembly Plant and Model Line

VIN Position 8
D Castle Bromwich 2.2L Diesel
F Castle Bromwich 3.0L Petrol
H Castle Bromwich 4.2L Normally aspirated Petrol
L Castle Bromwich 5.0L Normally aspirated Petrol
M Castle Bromwich 5.0L Supercharged Petrol
N Castle Bromwich 3.0L Diesel
1 Castle Bromwich 4.2L Supercharged Petrol
7 Castle Bromwich 2.7L Diesel
Production Sequence Number

VIN Position 9
Sequence Number
R00001 - R99999
S00001 - S99999
T00001 - T99999
VIN Label
VIN Label (Europe and Rest of world)
Item Description
1 Whole Vehicle Type Approval (WVTA) - Only shown for certain markets
2 VIN
3 Gross vehicle weight
4 Gross train weight
5 Maximum permitted front axle loading
6 Maximum permitted rear axle loading
7 Date of manufacture
8 Interior trim code
9 Paint code
VIN Label (North America)
Item Description
5 VIN
6 Type
8 Paint code
VIN Label (Saudi Arabia and Gulf States)
Item Description
2 VIN
4 Paint code
VIN Label (Canada)
Item Description
5 VIN
6 Paint code
8 Type
VIN Label (China)
Item Description
1 Occupant number
2 Engine specification (Type/Capacity/Power)
3 VIN
4 Trade mark
5 Vehicle type
8 Manufacturer name
VIN Label (Argentina)
Item Description
1 VIN
2 Trade mark and manufacturer adress (in Spanish)
4 Gross train weight
9 Paint code
Automatic Transmission Number

The serial number of the transmission unit is displayed on a metal label or bar code (if equipped) attached to the transmission
casing.
Engine Number(s)
Engine Number - 2.2L Diesel
The serial number is stamped on an engine web on the right-hand side of the cylinder block behind the engine mounting.
Engine Number - 3.0L
The engine number is contained on a bar code label on the front cover and is also stamped in the cylinder block casting on the
www.JagDocs.com
left-hand side of the engine below the engine mounting.
Engine Number - 4.2L and 4.2L Supercharged
The serial number is stamped on an engine web on the left-hand side of the cylinder block behind the engine mounting. The
emission code is also located here, on the transmission flange.
Engine Number - 5.0L and 5.0L Supercharged
The serial number is stamped on an engine web on the left-hand side of the cylinder block behind the engine mounting.
Jacking and Lifting - Jacking
Safety Precautions
WARNING: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to raise the vehicle for any other purpose. Refer to the Driver Handbook when
using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
The following safety precautions must be observed when raising the vehicle to carry out service operations:
Never rely on a jack alone to support a vehicle. Always use suitable vehicle stands to provide rigid support.
When working beneath a vehicle, whenever possible use a vehicle hoist instead of a jack and vehicle stands.
Make sure that the vehicle is standing on firm, level ground before using a jack.
Do not rely on the parking brake alone; chock the wheels and put the automatic transmission into Park if possible.
Check that any lifting equipment used has adequate capacity for the load being lifted and is in correct working order.
Jacking and Lifting - Lifting
Lifting Points—Twin-Post Hoist and Floor Jack

CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the hoist adapters to contact the steering linkage, suspension arms, stabilizer bar, rear subframe stabilizer
brackets or to compress the lower suspension arm stabilizer bar insulator. Damage to the suspension, exhaust and steering
linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters of two-post hoists prior to lifting
the vehicle.
Never use the differential housing as a lift point. Damage to the differential housing and cover may occur.
When using a floor jack, a cushioned pad must be utilized to avoid body damage.
Vehicle Support Points
Vehicle Recovery
NOTE: Prior to vehicle recovery, make sure the vehicle keys are available and the security system is disarmed.
Vehicle recovery methods are:
By flat-bed transporter.
By rear suspended tow.
By rear suspended tow.
Transporter or Trailer Recovery
When the vehicle is being recovered by transporter or trailer:
The parking brake must be applied and the wheels chocked.

The gear selector lever must be in Neutral. Do not select Park on automatic transmission vehicles, as the parking lock
mechanism may be damaged by the forward and backward rocking motion of the vehicle.
The vehicle must be securely tied down to the transporter or trailer.
Rear Suspended Tow
When the vehicle is being recovered by rear suspended tow:
The ignition key must be removed from the ignition switch to lock the steering.
The rear wheels must be correctly positioned in the lifting cradle and securely tied down.
Emergency Towing
WARNING: If the engine is not running, the steering will become heavy and the force necessary to effectively apply the
brakes will be greatly increased.
CAUTION: A vehicle with a defective transmission must be towed by rear suspended tow.
When the vehicle is being towed on its own wheels:
Local regulations for the towing of vehicles must be followed. In some countries the registration number of the towing
vehicle and an 'On Tow' sign or warning triangle must be displayed at the rear of the towed vehicle.
The gear selector lever must be in Neutral.
The ignition switch must be in position II to release the steering lock and make the direction indicators, horn and stop
lamps operate.
A distance of 0,8 km (0.5 mile) must not be exceeded.
A speed of 48 km/h (30 mph) must not be exceeded.
The tow rope must be attached to the front towing eye.
www.JagDocs.com
Noise, Vibration and Harshness - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) is becoming more important as vehicles become more sophisticated and passenger
comfort levels increase. This section is designed to aid in the diagnosis, testing and repair of NVH concerns.
Noise is defined as sounds not associated with the operation of passenger compartment equipment that interface with
customer satisfaction.
Vibration is defined as impulses felt by the customer that are not caused by road surface changes.
Harshness is a ride quality issue where the customer feels that the vehicle response to the road surface is sharply
transmitted to the customer.
Diagnostic Theory
Diagnosis is more than just following a series of interrelated steps in order to find the solution to the specific condition. It is a
way of looking at systems that are not functioning the way they should and finding out why. Also it is knowing how the system
should work and whether it is working correctly.
There are basic rules for diagnosis. If these rules are followed, the cause of the condition is usually found the first time
through the system.
Know the System

Know how the parts go together.
Know how the system operates as well as its limits and what happens when the system goes wrong.
Sometimes this means checking the system against one that is known to be working correctly.
Know the History of the System

A clue in any one of these areas may save time:
How old or new is the system?

What kind of treatment has it had?
Has it been repaired in the past in such a manner that might relate to the present condition?
What is the repair history?
Know the History of the Condition

Did it start suddenly or appear gradually?
Was it related to some other occurrence such as a collision or previous part renewal?
Know how the condition made itself known; it may be an important clue to the cause.
Know the Probability of Certain Conditions Developing

Look for the simple rather than the complex.
For example:
- Electrical conditions usually occur at connections rather than components.
- An engine no-start is more likely to be caused by a loose wire or small adjustment rather than a sheared-off
camshaft.
Know the difference between impossible and improbable. Certain failures in a system can be improbable but still
happen.
New parts are just that, new. It does not mean they are always good functioning parts.
Do Not Cure the Symptom and Leave the Cause

Lowering the pressure in a front tire may correct the condition of a vehicle leaning to one side, but it does not correct the
original condition.
Be Positive the Cause is Found

Double check the findings.
What caused a worn component?
A loose transmission or engine mount could indicate that other mounts are also loose.
Diagnostic Charts
Charts are a simple way of expressing the relationship between basic logic and a physical system of components. They help
discover the cause of a condition in the least time. Diagnostic charts combine many areas of diagnosis into one visual display:
probability of certain things occurring in a system

speed of checking certain components or functions before others
simplicity of carrying out certain tests before others
elimination of checking huge portions of a system by carrying out simple tests
certainty of narrowing down the search to a small portion before carrying out in-depth testing
The fastest way to find a condition is to work with the tools that are available. This means working with proven diagnostic
charts and the correct special equipment for the system.
Published: 16-Sep-2013
Noise, Vibration and Harshness - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Principle of Operation
For a detailed description of Noise, Vibration and Harshness issues, refer to the Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Description and Operation).

1. Verify the customer's concerns by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition.
2. Visually inspect the vehicle to determine any obvious cause(s) of the concern(s).
3. If the inspection reveals obvious causes that can be readily identified, repair as necessary.
4. If the concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s) and refer to the Symptom Chart.
How To Use This Diagnostic Procedure Section

Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) concerns have become more important as vehicles have become more sensitive to
these vibrations. This section is designed as an aid to identifying these situations
The section provides diagnostic procedures based on symptoms. If the condition occurs at high speed, for instance, the
most likely place to start is under High Speed Shake
The road test procedure will tell how to sort the conditions into categories and how to tell a vibration from a shake
A series of Road Test Quick Checks is provided to make sure that a cause is either pinpointed or eliminated
Name the condition, proceed to the appropriate section and locate the correct diagnosis. When the condition is
identified, the job is partly done
Follow the diagnostic procedure as outlined
Quick Checks are described within the step, while more involved tests and adjustments are outlined in General
Procedures
Always follow each step exactly and make notes to recall important findings later
Customer Interview
The road test and customer interview (if available) provide information that will help identify the concerns and will provide
direction to the correct starting point for diagnosis.
Identify the Condition

NVH problems usually occur in a number of areas:
tires
engine accessories
suspension
driveline
air leakage (wind noise)
squeaks and rattles
heating ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC)
electrical (e.g. motor noise)
transmission
engine
It is important, therefore, that an NVH concern be isolated into its specific area(s) as soon as possible. The easiest and
quickest way to do this is to carry out the Road Test as outlined.
Noise Diagnostic Procedure
Non-Axle Noise
The five most important sources of non-axle noise are exhaust, tires, roof racks, trim and mouldings, and transmission.
Therefore, make sure that none of the following conditions are the cause of the noise before proceeding with a driveline tear
down and diagnosis.
Under certain conditions, the pitch of the exhaust may sound very much like gear noise. At other times, it can be
mistaken for a wheel bearing rumble
Tires, especially snow tires, can have a high pitched tread whine or roar, similar to gear noise. Radial tires, to some
degree, have this characteristic. Also, any non-standard tire with an unusual tread construction may emit a roar or
whine type noise
Trim and mouldings can also cause whistling or a whining noise
Clunk may be a metallic noise heard when the automatic transmission is engaged in reverse or drive, or it may occur
when the throttle is applied or released. It is caused by backlash somewhere in the driveline
Bearing rumble sounds like marbles being tumbled. This condition is usually caused by a damaged wheel bearing
Noise Conditions
Gear noise is typically a howling or whining due to gear damage or incorrect bearing preload. It can occur at various
speeds and driving conditions, or it can be continuous
Chuckle is a particular rattling noise that sounds like a stick against the spokes of a spinning bicycle wheel. It occurs
while decelerating from approximately 64 km/h (40 miles/h) and can usually be heard all the way to a stop. The
frequency varies with vehicle speed
Knock is very similar to chuckle, though it may be louder and occurs on acceleration or deceleration. The tear down will
disclose what has to be corrected
Check and rule out tires, exhaust and trim items before disassembling the transmission to diagnose and correct gear noise.
The noises described under Road Test usually have specific causes that can be diagnosed by observation as the unit is
disassembled. The initial clues are the type of noise heard on the road test and the driving conditions.
Vibration Conditions
NOTE: New Constant Velocity (CV) joints should not be installed unless disassembly and inspection revealed unusual
wear.
Clicking, popping or grinding noises may be caused by the following:
Cut or damaged CV joint boots resulting in inadequate or contaminated lubricant in the outboard or inboard CV joint
bearing housings
Loose CV joint boot clamps
Another component contacting the rear drive half shaft
Worn, damaged or incorrectly installed wheel bearing, suspension or brake component
Vibration at highway speeds may be caused by the following:
Out-of-balance front or rear wheels

Out-of-round tires
Driveline imbalance
Driveline run-out (alignment)
NOTE: Rear drive half shafts are not balanced and are not likely to contribute to rotational vibration disturbance.
Shudder or vibration during acceleration (including from rest) may be caused by the following:
Driveline alignment
Excessively worn or damaged outboard or inboard CV joint bearing housing
Excessively high CV joint operating angles caused by incorrect ride height. Check ride height, verify correct spring rate
and check items under Inoperative Conditions
Excessively worn driveshaft components
Leakage Conditions
1. Inspect the CV joint boots for evidence of cracks, tears or splits.
2. Inspect the underbody for any indication of grease splatter in the vicinity of the rear drive half shaft, outboard and
inboard CV joint boot locations, which is an indication of CV joint boot or CV joint boot clamp damage.
3. Inspect the inboard CV joint bearing housing seal for leakage.
Inoperative Conditions
If a CV joint or rear drive half shaft pull-out occurs, check the following:
suspension components for correct location, damage or wear

bushings for wear
subframe for damage
bent or worn components
- Stabilizer bar link
- Left-hand rear suspension lower arm and bushing
- Right-hand rear suspension lower arm and bushing
- Rear wheel hub and rear drive half shaft
Road Test
A gear-driven unit will produce a certain amount of noise. Some noise is acceptable and may be audible at certain speeds or
under various driving conditions as on a newly paved blacktop road. The slight noise is in no way detrimental and must be
considered normal.
The road test and customer interview (if available) provide information needed to identify the condition and give direction to
the correct starting point for diagnosis.
1. Make notes throughout the diagnosis routine. Make sure to write down even the smallest piece of information, because
it may turn out to be the most important.
2. Do not touch anything until a road test and a thorough visual inspection of the vehicle have been carried out. Leave the
tire pressures and vehicle load just where they were when the condition was first observed. Adjusting tire pressures,
vehicle load or making other adjustments may reduce the conditions intensity to a point where it cannot be identified
clearly. It may also inject something new into the system, preventing correct diagnosis.
3. Make a visual inspection as part of the preliminary diagnosis routine, writing down anything that does not look right.
Note tire pressures, but do not adjust them yet. Note leaking fluids, loose nuts and bolts, or bright spots where
components may be rubbing against each other. Check the luggage compartment for unusual loads.
4. Road test the vehicle and define the condition by reproducing it several times during the road test.
5. Carry out the Road Test Quick Checks as soon as the condition is reproduced. This will identify the correct diagnostic
procedure. Carry out the Road Test Quick Checks more than once to verify they are providing a valid result. Remember,
the Road Test Quick Checks may not tell where the concern is, but they will tell where it is not.
Road Test Quick Checks

1. 24-80 km/h (15-50 miles/h): With light acceleration, a moaning noise is heard and possibly a vibration is felt in the
front floor pan. It is usually worse at a particular engine speed and at a particular throttle setting during acceleration at
that speed. It may also produce a moaning sound, depending on what component is causing it. Refer to Tip-In Moan in
the Symptom Chart.
2. Acceleration/deceleration: With slow acceleration and deceleration, a shake is sometimes noticed in the steering
wheel/column, seats, front floor pan, front door trim panel or front end sheet metal. It is a low frequency vibration
(around 9-15 cycles per second). It may or may not be increased by applying brakes lightly. Refer to Idle Boom/Shake
/Vibration in the Symptom Chart.
3. High speed: A vibration is felt in the front floor pan or seats with no visible shake, but with an accompanying sound or
rumble, buzz, hum, drone or booming noise. Coast with the clutch pedal depressed or shift control selector lever in
neutral and engine idling. If vibration is still evident, it may be related to wheels, tires, front brake discs, wheel hubs
or front wheel bearings. Refer to High Speed Shake in the Symptom Chart.
4. Engine rpm sensitive: A vibration is felt whenever the engine reaches a particular rpm. It will disappear in neutral
coasts. The vibration can be duplicated by operating the engine at the problem rpm while the vehicle is stationary. It
can be caused by any component, from the accessory drive belt to the torque converter which turns at engine speed
when the vehicle is stopped. Refer to High Speed Shake in the Symptom Chart.
5. Noise/vibration while turning: Clicking, popping, or grinding noises may be due to a worn, damaged, or incorrectly
installed front wheel bearing, rear drive half shaft or CV joint.
6. Noise/vibration that is road speed relative: This noise/vibration can be diagnosed independent of engine speed or gear
selected (engine speed varies but torque and road speed remain constant). The cause may be a rear drive
axle/differential whine.
Road Conditions
An experienced technician will always establish a route that will be used for all NVH diagnosis road tests. The road selected
should be reasonably smooth, level and free of undulations (unless a particular condition needs to be identified). A smooth
asphalt road that allows driving over a range of speeds is best. Gravel or bumpy roads are unsuitable because of the additional
road noise produced. Once the route is established and consistently used, the road noise variable is eliminated from the test
results.
NOTE: Some concerns may be apparent only on smooth asphalt roads.
If a customer complains of a noise or vibration on a particular road and only on a particular road, the source of the concern
may be the road surface. If possible, try to test the vehicle on the same type of road.
Vehicle Preparation
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the vehicle before carrying out the road test. Note anything which is unusual. Do not
repair or adjust any condition until the road test is carried out, unless the vehicle is inoperative or the condition could pose a
hazard to the technician.
After verifying the condition has been corrected, make sure all components removed have been installed.
Lift Test
After a road test, it is sometimes useful to do a similar test on a lift.
When carrying out the high-speed shake diagnosis or engine accessory vibration diagnosis on a lift, observe the following
precautions:
WARNING: If only one drive wheel is allowed to rotate, speed must be limited to 55 km/h (35 miles/h) indicated on the
speedometer since actual wheel speed will be twice that indicated on the speedometer. Speed exceeding 55 km/h (35 miles/h)
or allowing the drive wheel to hang unsupported could result in tire disintegration, differential failure, constant velocity joint
and drive half shaft failure, which could cause serious personal injury and extensive vehicle damage. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The suspension should not be allowed to hang free. When the CV joint is run at a very high angle, extra
vibration as well as damage to the seals and joints can occur.
The rear suspension lower arm should be supported as far outboard as possible. To bring the vehicle to its correct ride height,
the full weight of the vehicle should be supported in the rear by floor jacks. REFER to: (100-02 Jacking and Lifting)
Jacking (Description and Operation),

Lifting (Description and Operation).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. REFER to: (100-02 Jacking and Lifting)
2. Explore the speed range of interest using the Road Test Quick Checks as previously described.
3. Carry out a coast down in neutral. If the vehicle is free of vibration when operating at a steady indicated speed and
behaves very differently in drive and coast, a transmission concern is likely.
Note, however, that a test on the lift may produce different vibrations and noises than a road test because of the effect of the
lift. It is not unusual to find vibrations on the lift that were not found in the road test. If the condition found on the road can
be duplicated on the lift, carrying out experiments on the lift may save a great deal of time.
Exhaust Neutralization Procedure

1. Raise vehicle on lift and slacken all exhaust fixings.
2. With all fixings loose, neutralize the exhaust system.
3. Tighten all fixings to correct torque, starting at the rear-most point working towards the front of the vehicle.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Cause Action

High-speed shake GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Wheel end vibration
Engine/transmission
Driveline
Tip-in moan GO to Pinpoint Test B.

Air cleaner
Power steering
Powertrain
Engine mounts
Exhaust system
Idle boom/shake/vibration, or shudder GO to Pinpoint Test C.

Cable(s)/hoses(s)
Intake air distribution and filtering system
Engine mounts
Exhaust system
Belt/pulleys
Wheel end vibration analysis GO to Pinpoint Test D.

Suspension/rear drive halfshaft and CV joints
Tires/wheels
Wheel bearings
CV joint boots
Non-axle noise GO to Pinpoint Test E.

Trim/mouldings
A/C system
Accessories
Pinpoint Tests
NOTE: These Pinpoint Tests are designed to take the technician through a step-by-step diagnosis procedure to determine
the cause of a condition. It may not always be necessary to follow the chart to its conclusion. Carry out only the Pinpoint Test
steps necessary to correct the condition. Then check operation of the system to make sure the condition is corrected.
After verifying that the condition has been corrected, make sure all components removed have been installed.
PINPOINT TEST A : HIGH-SPEED SHAKE
TEST DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
www.JagDocs.com
PINPOINT TEST B : TIP-IN MOAN
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK THE AIR CLEANER
1 Check the air cleaner.
Check the air cleaner, inlet tube, outlet tube, resonators and all other components associated with
the air induction system for correct installation and tightness of all connections.
Are the components OK?

Yes
GO to B2.
No
Correct the condition. Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
B2: CHECK THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
1 Carry out the exhaust system neutralizing procedure in this section.
Is the exhaust system OK?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
Repair as necessary. Restore vehicle. Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
B3: CHECK THE POWER STEERING
1 Remove the auxiliary drive belt and test for tip-in moan.
Is the tip-in moan OK?
Yes
Repair the power steering as necessary. For additional information, refer to Section 211-00.
No
Check and install new engine/transmission mounts as necessary. Repeat Road Test as outlined.
PINPOINT TEST C : IDLE BOOM/SHAKE/VIBRATION/SHUDDER
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK CABLE/HOSES
1 Check the engine compartment for any component that may be grounding between the engine and body
or chassis. Example: air conditioning (A/C) hoses.
Are the components OK?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
C2: CHECK THE COOLING RADIATOR
1 Check the engine cooling radiator mountings and bushings for security and condition. Check the radiator
installation for any component that may have a touch condition.
Are the installation and bushings OK?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
C3: CHECK THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
1 Carry out the exhaust system neutralizing procedure in this section.
Is the exhaust system OK?
Yes
Check and install new engine/transmission mounts as necessary. Repeat Road Test as outlined.
No
Repair as necessary. Repeat Road Test.
PINPOINT TEST D : WHEEL END VIBRATION ANALYSIS
TEST CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS

D1: INSPECT THE TIRES
1 Inspect the tires.
Raise and support the vehicle. REFER to: (100-02 Jacking and Lifting)
Inspect the tires for:
Correct tire size
Tire/wheel compatibility
Wear or damage
Tire beads correctly seated
Are the tires OK?

Yes
GO to D2.
No
Inspect the wheels. For additional information, refer to Section 204-00.
D2: INSPECT WHEEL BEARINGS
1 Inspect the wheel bearings. For additional information, refer to Section 204-00.
Are the wheel bearings OK?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
Repair as necessary. Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
D3: INSPECT THE CONSTANT VELOCITY (CV) JOINT BOOTS
1 Inspect the CV joint boots.
Spin the rear tire by hand
Inspect for evidence of cracks, tears, splits or splattered grease
Are the CV joint boots OK?

Yes
GO to D4.
No
Repair as necessary. Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
D4: INSPECT WHEEL AND TIRE RUNOUT
1 Inspect the wheel and tire runout.
Carry out the Wheel and Tire Check procedure.
REFER to: Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
Is the wheel and tire runout OK?

Yes
Balance the wheels and tires. Refer to the wheel balance equipment manufacturers instructions.
No
Repair as necessary.
Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
PINPOINT TEST E : NON-AXLE NOISE
CONDITIONS
E1: INSPECT VEHICLE TRIM
1 Check the grille and trim mouldings to see if they are the source of the noise.
Are the vehicle trim components causing the noise?
Yes
Install new trim or repair as necessary. For additional information, refer to Section 501-08.
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK THE A/C SYSTEM FOR NOISE
1 Check the A/C system components for noise by turning the A/C system on and off.
Is the A/C system causing the noise?
Yes
Diagnose the A/C system.
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK NON-FACTORY ACCESSORIES
1 Inspect any accessories for being the source of the noise. Example: grounding body-to-frame,
antennas, visors, bug deflectors and fog lights?
Are the accessories the cause of the noise?
Yes
Adjust, repair or install new accessories or fasteners as required.
No
Verify the customer concern.
Noise, Vibration and Harshness - Exhaust System Neutralizing
General Procedures
1. Loosen the muffler inlet pipe and resonator pipe to exhaust manifold
fasteners at the flanges and the muffler inlet connection.
2. Place a stand to support the muffler parallel to the vehicle frame with
the muffler pipe bracket free of stress.
3. Tighten the muffler connection.
4. Position the exhaust pipes to the manifolds and tighten. Make sure that
the catalytic converter and heat shield do not contact the frame rails.
5. With the complete exhaust system tight (and cooled) the rear hanger
insulator should be angled forward, to allow the system to expand
rearward when heated during normal running
Published: 27-Aug-2013
Suspension System - General Information -
Vehicle Ride Height
NOTE: All figures are at "Kerb" height - For additional information, refer to Vehicle Ride Height below.
Description Measurement
Description Front/Rear Kerb mm (inch) Tolerance mm (inch)
Vehicles without supercharger Front 388 (15.28) ±12 (0.5)
Rear 391 (15.39) ±12 (0.5)
Vehicles with supercharger Front 385 (15.16) ±12 (0.5)
Rear 384 (15.12) ±12 (0.5)
Vehicles with All wheel drive Front 404 (15.90) ±12 (0.5)
Rear 391 (15.39) ±12 (0.5)
Ride height is measured from the centre of the wheel to the apex of the wheel arch, through the wheel centre line.
Kerb - with all fluids at full and a full tank of fuel, no occupants/luggage.
Tires must be inflated to normal pressure -
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Specifications).
Wheel Alignment - Front Camber
NOTE: *1 Camber Balance = left-hand camber - right-hand camber.
Description Left-hand Right-hand Balance*1

Markets Degrees/Minutes Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
All right-hand drive and Japan Degrees/Minutes -0° 36' ±45' -0° 12' ±45' -0° 24' ±45'
Decimal Degrees -0.6° ±0.75° -0.2° ±0.75° -0.4° ±0.75°
USA, Canada, Mexico and Dominican Republic Degrees/Minutes -0° 12' ±45' -0° 33' ±45' 0° 21' ±45'
(Federal) Decimal Degrees -0.2° ±0.75° -0.55° ±0.75° 0.35° ±0.75°
Rest of world Degrees/Minutes -0° 12' ±45' -0° 24' ±45' 0° 12' ±45'
Decimal Degrees -0.2° ±0.75° -0.4° ±0.75° 0.2° ±0.75°
Vehicles with All wheel drive Degrees/Minutes -0° 11' ±45' -0º 32' ±0.45' 21' ±45'
Decimal Degrees -0.19° ±0.75º -0.54º ±0.75º 0.35º ±0.75°
Wheel Alignment - Front Caster
NOTE: *2 Caster Balance = left-hand caster - right-hand caster.
Description Left-hand Right-hand Balance*2

All right-hand drive and Japan Degrees/Minutes 6° 53' ±45' 6° 20' ±45' 0° 33' ±45'
Decimal Degrees 6.88° ±0.75° 6.33° ±0.75° 0.55° ±0.75°
USA, Canada, Mexico and Dominican Republic Degrees/Minutes 6° 36' ±45' 6° 45' ±45' -0° 8' ±45'
(Federal) Decimal Degrees 6.61° ±0.75° 6.74° ±0.75° -0.14° ±0.75°
Rest of world Degrees/Minutes 6° 36' ±45' 6° 36' ±45' 0° 0' ±45'
Decimal Degrees 6.61° ±0.75° 6.61° ±0.75° 0° ±0.75°
Vehicles with All wheel drive Degrees/Minutes 6° 2' ± 45' 6° 11' ± 45' - 9' ± 45'
Decimal Degrees 6.04º ±0.75° 6.19° ± 0.75° -0.15° ± 0.75°
Wheel Alignment - Front Toe
Description Total Toe
Markets Degrees/Minutes Nominal Tolerance
All right-hand drive and Japan Degrees/Minutes 0° 13' ±12'
Decimal Degrees 0.22° ±0.20°
USA, Canada, Mexico and Dominican Republic (Federal) Degrees/Minutes 0° 13' ±12'
Rest of world Degrees/Minutes 0° 13' ±12'
Vehicles with All wheel drive Degrees/Minutes 16' ± 12'
Decimal Degrees 0.27° ± 0.20°
Wheel Alignment - Rear Camber (Vehicles without supercharger)
Description Left-hand Right-hand
Markets Degrees/Minutes Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
All Markets Degrees/Minutes -0° 47' ±45' -0° 47' ±45'
Decimal Degrees -0.78° ±0.75° -0.78° ±0.75°
Wheel Alignment - Rear Camber (Vehicles with supercharger)
All Markets Degrees/Minutes -0° 59' ±45' -0° 59' ±45'
Decimal Degrees -0.98° ±0.75° -0.98° ±0.75°
Vehicles with All wheel drive Degrees/Minutes - 53' ± 45' - 53' ± 45'
Decimal Degrees -0.89° ± 0.75° -0.89° ± 0.75°
Wheel Alignment - Rear Toe
Description Left-hand Right-hand Total Toe
All Markets Degrees/Minutes 0° 5' ±8' 0° 5' ±8' 0° 10' ±12'
Decimal Degrees 0.083° ±0.14° 0.083° ±0.14° 0.17° ±0.20°
Vehicles with All wheel drive Degrees/Minutes 5' ± 8' 5' ± 8' 9' ± 12'
Decimal Degrees 0.08° ± 0.14° 0.08° ± 0.14° 0.15° ± 0.20°
Wheel Alignment - Rear Thrust Angle
NOTE: *5 Rear Thrust Angle = (left-hand toe - right-hand toe) ÷ 2.
Markets Rear Thrust Angle*5

Markets Degrees/Minutes Nominal Tolerance
All Markets Degrees/Minutes 0° 0' ±8'
Decimal Degrees 0° ±0.14°
Vehicles with All wheel drive Degrees/Minutes 0° 0' ±8'
Decimal Degrees 0° ±0.14°
General Specifications
Item Specification
Clear Vision
Clear vision (negative value is counterclockwise) 0° ± 3°
Ball Joint Radial Play
Lower ball joint — maximum 0.8 mm (1/32 in)
Upper ball joint — maximum 0.8 mm (1/32 in)
www.JagDocs.com
Suspension System - General Information - Suspension System
For a detailed description of the suspension system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the workshop
manual. REFER to:
Front Suspension (204-01 Front Suspension, Description and Operation),

Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Description and Operation),
Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Description and Operation),
Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Description and Operation).

1. Verify the customer concern by carrying out a road test on a smooth road. If any vibrations are apparent, refer to
section 100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity.
Visual Inspection Chart

Mechanical
Damaged tires
Wheel bearing(s)
Loose or damaged front or rear suspension components
Loose, damaged or missing suspension fastener(s)
Incorrect spring usage
Damaged or sagging spring(s)
Damaged or leaking shock absorber(s)
Damaged or leaking strut(s)
Worn or damaged suspension bushing(s)
Loose, worn or damaged steering system components
Damaged axle components
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported condition is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
the next step.
4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the following Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Sources Action

Crabbing * Incorrect rear thrust angle. * Check the rear toe adjustment.
REFER to: Rear Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, General Procedures).
* Front or rear suspension components. * Inspect the front and rear suspension systems. Repair or
install new suspension components as necessary.
* Drive axle damaged. * Install a new rear drive axle/differential.
REFER to: Axle Assembly - V6 3.0L Petrol (205-02 Rear
Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and Installation).
Drift/Pull * Unequal tire pressure. * Check and adjust the tire pressures. Inspect the tire for
excessive wear.
REFER to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
Specifications).
* Incorrect wheel alignment. * Check and adjust the wheel alignment. REFER to:
(204-00 Suspension System - General Information)
Front Toe Adjustment (General Procedures),
Rear Toe Adjustment (General Procedures),
Camber and Caster Adjustment (General Procedures).
* Tires. * Check and adjust the tire pressures. Inspect the tire for
excessive wear.
Specifications).
* Unevenly loaded or overloaded vehicle. * Notify the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
* Damaged steering components. * Check the steering system.
* Brake drag. * Check the brakes.
REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System - General
Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Front Bottoming or * Coil springs. * Check the ride height. Install new springs as necessary.
Riding Low REFER to:
Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension,
Removal and Installation),
Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly (204-02 Rear
Suspension, Removal and Installation).
Incorrect Tire Wear * Incorrect tire pressure (rapid center rib * Check and adjust the tire pressure. Inspect the tire for
or inner and outer edge wear). excessive wear.
Specifications).
* Excessive front or rear toe (rapid inner * Check and adjust the wheel alignment. REFER to:
or outer edge wear). (204-00 Suspension System - General Information)
* Excessive negative or positive camber * Check and adjust the wheel alignment. REFER to:
(rapid inner or outer edge wear). (204-00 Suspension System - General Information)
* Tires out of balance (tires cupped or * Balance the tires.
dished).
Rough ride * Spring(s) * Check and install new spring(s) as necessary. REFER to:
Shimmy or Wheel Tramp * Loose wheel nut(s). * Check and tighten the wheel nuts to specification.
Specifications).
* Loose front suspension fasteners. * Check and tighten the suspension fasteners to
specification.
REFER to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension System -
General Information, Specifications).
* Front wheel bearing(s). * Check the wheel bearings.
* Worn or damaged suspension * Check and install new components as necessary.
component bushing.
* Wheel/tires. * Check the wheels/tires. Balance or install new
wheel/tires as necessary.
REFER to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
* Loose, worn or damaged ball joint(s). * Check the Ball Joint(s).
* Loose, worn or damaged steering * Check and install new components as necessary.
components.
* Front wheel alignment. * Check and adjust the wheel alignment. REFER to:
* Shock absorber(s). * Check and install new shock absorber(s) as necessary.
REFER to:
* Spring(s). * Check and install new springs as necessary. REFER to:
Poor self center action of * Ball joints. * Check the Ball Joints.
the steering * Steering components. * Check and install new components as necessary.
Steering wheel off-center * Unequal front or rear toe settings. * Check and adjust the wheel alignment. REFER to:
* Steering components. * Check and install new components as necessary.
Sway or roll * Overloaded, unevenly or incorrectly * Notify the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
loaded vehicle.
* Loose wheel nut(s). * Check and tighten the wheel nut(s) to specification.
Specifications).
* Coil spring(s). * Check and install new coil springs as necessary. REFER
to:
* Loose front stabilizer bar or rear * Check and tighten the stabilizer bar to specification.
stabilizer bar. REFER to:
Specifications (204-01 Front Suspension, Specifications),
Specifications (204-02 Rear Suspension, Specifications).
* Worn lower suspension arm stabilizer * Install new lower suspension arm stabilizer bar as
bar insulators. necessary. REFER to:
Front Stabilizer Bar - 2.7L Diesel (204-01, Removal and
Installation),
Front Stabilizer Bar - V6 3.0L Petrol (204-01 Front
Suspension, Removal and Installation),
Front Stabilizer Bar - 4.2L (204-01, Removal and
Installation),
Rear Stabilizer Bar (204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal
and Installation).
REFER to:
Vehicle Leans to One * Unevenly loaded or overloaded vehicle. * Notify the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
Side * Front or rear suspension components. * Inspect the front and rear suspension systems. Repair or
install new suspension components as necessary.
REFER to:
* Coil spring(s). * Check and install new spring(s) as necessary. REFER to:
* Incorrect ride height. Lateral tilt out of * Check the ride height. Install new spring(s) as
specification. necessary. REFER to:
Vibration/Noise * Tires/wheels. * Check and install new components as necessary.
* Wheel bearings.
* Wheel hubs.
* Brake components.
* Suspension components.
* Steering components.
Wander * Unevenly loaded or overloaded vehicle. *
Notify the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
* Ball joint(s). *
Check the Ball Joint(s).
* Front wheel bearing(s). *
Check the wheel bearings.
* Loose, worn or damaged suspension *
Check and install new suspension components as
components. necessary.
* Loose suspension fasteners. * Check and tighten the suspension fasteners to
specification.
REFER to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension System -
General Information, Specifications).
* Steering components. * Check and install new steering components.
* Wheel alignment (excessive total front * Check and adjust the wheel alignment. REFER to:
toe-out). (204-00 Suspension System - General Information)
Component Tests
Ball Joint Inspection
NOTE: The front suspension is shown in the following procedures. The inspection of the rear suspension upper ball joint
is similar.
1. Raise and support the vehicle. REFER to: (100-02 Jacking and Lifting)
2. Prior to carrying out any inspection of the ball joints, inspect the front wheel bearings.
3. CAUTION: The safety stand beneath the suspension lower arm must only support the weight of the suspension and
not the full weight of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the components.
Position a safety stand beneath the front suspension lower arm or rear suspension lower arm to be tested.
4. While an assistant pulls and pushes the top and bottom of the tire, observe the relative movement between the ball
joint and the front suspension lower arm. Any movement at or exceeding the specification indicates a worn or damaged
ball joint. Install a new wheel knuckle as necessary.
REFER to: Wheel Knuckle (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
5. While an assistant pulls and pushes the top and bottom of the tire, observe the relative movement between the ball
joint and the front suspension upper arm or rear suspension upper arm. Any movement at or exceeding the specification
indicates a worn or damaged ball joint. Install a new upper arm as necessary. REFER to: (204-01 Front Suspension)
Upper Arm LH (Removal and Installation),
Upper Arm RH (Removal and Installation).
6. Remove the safety stand.
7. Lower the vehicle.
www.JagDocs.com
Published: 16-Oct-2013
Suspension System - General Information - Camber and Caster Adjustment
General Procedures
NOTES:
The camber and caster adjustment for the left-hand side is shown, the procedure for adjusting the right-hand side is
similar.
This procedure must be carried out using a 4-post ramp.
Adjustments to the camber will affect the toe settings. Therefore, the camber and toe may need to be adjusted at the
same time to achieve the correct settings.
Adjustments to the camber may affect the caster settings. Therefore, the caster will need to be checked, and adjusted as
necessary.
All vehicles
1. Vehicles with air suspension.

For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Manual Tight
Tolerance Setting Mode (204-05, General Procedures).
2. Check the rear toe adjustment.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Toe Adjustment (204-00
Suspension System - General Information, General Procedures).
Adjust as necessary.
3. Check the front toe adjustment.

For additional information, refer to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-00
Adjust as necessary.
4. Check the camber and caster settings. Follow the equipment

manufacturer's instructions.
5. NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
Loosen the tie-rod end lock nut.

Clean and lubricate the lock nut and tie-rod threads.
6. NOTES:
Do not allow the tie-rod end or steering gear boot to twist

when the tie-rod is rotated.
Left-hand, shown right-hand similar.
Rotate the tie-rod to adjust the toe.
Vehicles requiring camber adjustment
Loosen the rear lower arm lock nut.
Rotate the camber adjustment cam bolt to adjust the camber.
9. Check the camber and toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's
instructions. Adjust as necessary.
10. NOTES:
Make sure the camber adjustment cam bolt does not

rotate.
Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
Tighten the rear lower arm lock nut.

Tighten to 175 Nm.
Vehicles requiring caster adjustment
Loosen the front lower arm lock nut.
12. NOTES:
Adjustments to the caster will affect the toe settings.

Therefore, the caster and toe may need to be adjusted at the
same time to achieve the correct settings.
Rotate the caster adjustment cam bolt to adjust the caster.
13. NOTES:
Make sure the caster adjustment cam bolt does not

rotate.
Tighten the caster adjustment cam bolt lock nut.

Tighten to 175 Nm.
14. NOTES:
Make sure the tie-rod or tie-rod end does not rotate.
Tighten the tie-rod end lock nut

Tighten to 55 Nm.
15. NOTE: Make sure that all fixings are torqued to the correct
specification.
Check the caster and toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's
instructions. Adjust as necessary.
Suspension System - General Information - Four-Wheel Alignment
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the vehicle is on a flat level surface.
Make sure the tire pressures are within specification.
Make sure that only the manufacturers' recommended four wheel alignment equipment is used.
Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead position.
1. For wheel alignment information, refer to the suspension specification

section.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, Specifications).
2. Check the tie rod ends, suspension joints, wheel bearings and wheels
and tires for damage, wear and free play.
Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly adjusted
components.
3. Check and adjust tire pressures.
4. Position the vehicle on a calibrated, level, vehicle lift.

6. Release the vehicle parking brake.
7. Using only four-wheel alignment equipment approved by Jaguar, check

the wheel alignment.
8. NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar. To
adjust, loosen the toe link locknuts.
www.JagDocs.com
9. CAUTION: Do not allow the gaiter to twist.
NOTES:
Both tie rods must be rotated by an equal amount.
LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
Adjust the rear toe.
10. Tighten the toe link locknuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).
11. NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
To adjust the caster, loosen the front lower arm lock nuts.
Rotate the caster adjustment cam bolt.
13. CAUTION: Make sure the caster adjustment bolt does not rotate
while the lock nut is being tightened.
Tighten the caster adjustment cam bolt nut.

Tighten the nut and bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
14. CAUTION: Adjustments made to the camber setting will
affect the front toe setting. Therefore , the camber and toe
may need to be adjusted at the same time.
NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
To adjust the camber, loosen the rear lower arm lock nuts.
Rotate the camber adjustment cam bolt.
16. CAUTION: Make sure the camber adjustment bolt does not rotate
while the lock nut is being tightened.
Tighten the camber adjustment cam bolt nut.

Tighten the nut and bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
To adjust, loosen the tie rod end lock nuts.

NOTES:
Adjust the front toe.
19. Tighten the tie rod end lock nuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).

Suspension System - General Information - Front Toe Adjustment
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the vehicle is on a flat level surface.
Make sure the tire pressures are within specification.
1. For wheel alignment information, refer to the suspension specification

section.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, Specifications).
2. Check the tie rod ends, suspension joints, wheel bearings and wheels
and tires for damage, wear and free play.
Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly adjusted
components.
3. Check and adjust tire pressures.
4. Position the vehicle on a 4 post lift.
5. Release the vehicle parking brake.

7. For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Manual Tight


9. NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar. To
adjust, loosen the tie rod end lock nuts.

NOTES:
Adjust the front toe.
Tighten the tie rod end lock nuts to 55 Nm.

www.JagDocs.com
Suspension System - General Information - Rear Toe Adjustment
General Procedures

2. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's

instructions.
3. NOTE: Left-hand, shown right-hand similar.
Loosen the lock nut.

Clean and lubricate the lock nut and toe link threads.
4. Rotate the toe link to adjust the toe settings.
5. Tighten the lock nut.
6. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's

instructions.
Published: 14-Feb-2012
Suspension System - General Information - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout
Check Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
RH illustration shown, LH similar.
1. WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle stands.
Raise the front of the vehicle.
2. Remove the front wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper support bolts.

Push the brake caliper pistons back to release the pads from the disc.
Detach the brake caliper and position to one side with suitable tie strap.
4. Remove the disc.

Remove the 2 clips.
5. Mount special 6. Position

tool 100-053 the Dial
on the lower Test
caliper support Indicator
bracket as (DTI)
shown. gauge
A probe on
spacer the hub
washer flange
may be as
required shown.
under
the
tool.
Use the
brake
caliper
support
bolt
and
suitable
nut.
7. Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to measure hub runout. hub runout must not
exceed 0.015 mm.
8. If the hub runout exceeds the limit, install a new hub and bearing.For additional information, refer to:
(204-01 Front Suspension)
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V6 3.0L Petrol (Removal and Installation),
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (Removal
and Installation).
9. If the hub runout is within the limit install the removed components.
10. tighten the brake caliper bolts to 115 Nm.

Suspension System - General Information - Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel
Hub Runout Check
General Procedures
NOTES:
It is recommended that the DTI is capable of measurements of 0.005 mm.
Raise the rear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the rear wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and
Tires, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper support bolts.

Push the brake pads back to release the brake
caliper from the disc.
Detach the brake caliper and position to one side
with suitable tie strap.
4. Remove the disc.

Remove the 2 clips.
5. Mount special tool 100-053 on the lower caliper support
bracket as shown.
A spacer washer may be required under the tool.
Use the brake caliper support bolt and suitable nut.
6. CAUTION: Take care not to contact the studs.
Position the Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge probe on the

hub flange as shown.
7. Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to measure hub
runout. Hub runout must not exceed 0.025 mm.
8. If the hub runout exceeds the limit, install a new hub and bearing.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing (204-02 Rear
9. If the hub runout is within the limit install the removed components.
10. Tighten the brake support caliper bolts to 103 Nm.

Front Suspension -
Torque Specification
Description Nm lb-ft lb-in
Steering gear to subframe retaining bolts 100 74 -
Toe link ball joint to wheel knuckle retaining nut 133 98 -
Stabilizer bar link to stabilizer bar retaining nut 43 32 -
Stabilizer bar link to lower arm retaining nut and bolt 70 52 -
Stabilizer bar clamp to subframe retaining bolts 55 41 -
Rear lower arm to wheel knuckle ball joint retaining nut 75 55 -
Rear lower arm to subframe retaining nut and bolt 175 129 -
Front lower arm to subframe retaining nut and bolt 175 129 -
Front lower arm to rear lower arm retaining nut and bolt Stage 1 - 60 Stage 2 - 135 Stage 1 - 44 Stage 2 - 135 -
degrees degrees
Upper arm ball joint to wheel knuckle retaining nut 90 66 -
Upper arm to body retaining nuts and bolts 47 35 -
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting to body 28 20 -
retaining nuts
Shock absorber and spring assembly to lower arm retaining nut and 175 129 -
bolt
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting retaining nut 50 37 -
(without adaptive damping)
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting retaining nut 27 20 -
(with adaptive damping)
Wheel hub and bearing assembly to wheel knuckle retaining bolt 90 66 -
Wheel and tire to wheel hub retaining nuts 125 92 -
Front Suspension - Front Suspension - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Subframe
2 Spring and damper assembly
3 Upper control arm
4 Wheel knuckle
5 Wheel hub and bearing assembly
6 Lower lateral control arm
7 Lower forward control arm
8 Stabilizer bar
9 Stabilizer bar link
www.JagDocs.com
Front Suspension - Front Suspension - Overview
OVERVIEW
The front suspension is a fully independent design assembled on a non-isolated subframe. The wheel knuckle attaches to the
wishbone type upper and lower control arms.
The stabilizer bar attaches to the front of the subframe and varies in shape depending on the engine variant.
The spring and damper assemblies are located between the lower control arm and the front suspension housing in the inner
wing. Dependant on vehicle model there are three types of coil spring and damper available:
a standard oil passive damper (All models except supercharged),

an adaptive damper, also known as Computer Active Technology Suspension (CATS) on 4.2L supercharged vehicles up to
2010MY,
Refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - 4.2L (204-05, Description and Operation).
a continuously variable adaptive damper, also known as Adaptive Dynamics System on 5.0L supercharged vehicles from
2010MY.
Refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension,
Description and Operation).
Published: 20-Jun-2011
Front Suspension - Front Suspension - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
The front suspension is a fully independent design assembled on a non-isolated subframe mounted by four bolts to the vehicle
body. This rigid mounting arrangement provides the driver with optimum steering feel and facilitates towards the vehicle's
sporty dynamic suspension.
The suspension arrangement is a double-wishbone type with the length ratio between the upper and lower wish-bone control
arms calculated to minimize track and camber changes.
An adaptive damping system is available on specified models. For additional information refer to Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
4.2L or 5.0L.
Component Description
COMPONENTS
Item Description
1 Subframe
3 Upper control arm
4 Wheel knuckle
7 Lower lateral control arm
8 Lower forward control arm
9 Stabilizer bar
Upper Control Arm
The forged-aluminum upper control arm is a wishbone design and connects to the vehicle body through two plain bushes, and
links to the swan neck wheel knuckle by an integral ball joint. The upper control arm is inclined to provide anti-dive
characteristics under heavy braking, while also controlling geometry for vehicle straight-line stability.
Lower Control Arm

The forged aluminum lower control arms are of the wishbone design; the arms separate to allow for optimum bush tuning:
The rear lateral control arm is fitted with a bush at its inner end which locates between brackets on the subframe. The
arm is secured with an eccentric bolt which provides the adjustment of the suspension camber geometry. The outer end
of the control arm has a tapered hole which locates on a ball joint fitted to the wheel knuckle. An integral clevis bracket
on the forward face of the lateral control arm allows for the attachment of the forward control arm. A bush is fitted
below the clevis bracket to provide for the attachment of the stabilizer bar link. A cross-axis joint is fitted to a
cross-hole in the control arm to provide the location for the clevis attachment of the spring and damper assembly.
The forward control arm is fitted with a fluid-block rubber bush at its inner end which locates between brackets on the
subframe. The arm is secured with an eccentric bolt which provides adjustment of the castor and camber geometry. The
outer end of the control arm is fitted with a cross-axis joint and locates in the integral clevis bracket on the lateral
control arm.
Wheel Knuckle
The cast aluminum wheel knuckle is a swan neck design and attaches to the upper control arm and lower lateral control arm.
The lower lateral control arm locates on a non serviceable ball-joint integral with the wheel knuckle. The lower boss on the
rear of the knuckle provides for the attachment of the steering gear tie-rod ball joint.
The wheel knuckle also provides the mounting locations for the:
wheel hub and bearing assembly

the wheel speed sensor (integral to the wheel hub and bearing assembly)
brake caliper and disc shield.
Stabilizer Bar
The stabilizer bar is attached to the front of the subframe with bushes and mounting brackets. The pressed steel mounting
brackets locate over the bushes and are attached to the cross member with bolts screwed into threaded locations in the
subframe. The stabilizer bar has crimped, 'anti-shuffle' collars pressed in position on the inside edges of the bushes. The
collars prevent sideways movement of the stabilizer bar.
The stabilizer bar is manufactured from 32mm diameter tubular steel on supercharged models and 31mm diameter tubular
steel on diesel and normally aspirated models and has been designed to provide particular characteristics in maintaining roll
rates, specifically in primary ride comfort.
Each end of the stabilizer bar curves rearwards to attach to a ball joint on a stabilizer link. Each stabilizer link is secured to a
bush in the lower lateral arm with a bolt and locknut. The links allow the stabilizer bar to move with the wheel travel providing
maximum effectiveness.
The only difference between the front stabilizer bars, in addition to the diameter, is in the shape to accommodate engine
variant:
a slightly curved bar, between bush centers, for V6 diesel (31 mm dia) and V8 gasoline supercharged (32 mm dia),
a straight bar, between bush centers, for V6 and V8 normally aspirated gasoline engines (31 mm dia).
Spring and Damper Assembly

The spring and damper assemblies are located between the lower lateral arm and the front suspension housing in the inner
wing. Dependant on vehicle model there are three types of coil spring and damper available:

2010MY, For additional information refer to Vehicle Dynamic Suspension 4.2L.
2010MY. For additional information refer to Vehicle Dynamic Suspension 5.0L.
The dampers are a monotube design with a spring seat secured by a circlip onto the damper tube. The damper's lower
spherical joint is an integral part of the lateral lower control-arm, and the damper takes the form of a clevis-end, which
straddles the spherical joint.
The damper piston is connected to a damper rod which is sealed at its exit point from the damper body. The threaded outer
end of the damper rod locates through a hole in the top mount. A self locking nut secures the top mount to the damper rod.
The damper rod on the adaptive damper has an electrical connector on the outer end of the damper rod.
Supercharged 4.2L vehicles up to 2010MY: The adaptive damper functions by restricting the flow of hydraulic fluid through
internal galleries in the damper's piston. The adaptive damper has a solenoid operated valve, which when switched allows a
greater flow of hydraulic fluid through the damper's piston. This provides a softer damping characteristic from the damper. The
adaptive damper defaults to a firmer setting when not activated. The solenoid is computer controlled and can switch between
soft and hard damping settings depending on road wheel inputs and vehicle speed.
Supercharged 5.0L vehicles from 2010MY: The variable damper functions by adjustment of a solenoid operated variable orifice,
which opens up an alternative path for oil flow within the damper. When de-energized the bypass is closed and all the oil flows
through the main (firm) piston. When energized the solenoid moves an armature and control blade, which work against a
spring. The control blade incorporates an orifice which slides inside a sintered housing to open up the bypass as required. In
compression, oil flows from the lower portion of the damper through a hollow piston rod, a separate soft (comfort) valve, the
slider housing and orifice and into the upper portion of the damper, thereby bypassing the main (firm) valve. In rebound the oil
flows in the opposite direction
The damper rod is fitted with a spring aid which prevents the top mount making contact with the top of the damper body
during full suspension compression and also assists with the suspension tune.
The spring rate of the coil springs can differ between models and are color coded for identification. The coil spring locates on a
spring packer and a lower spring seat which is located on the damper body. The spring locates in an upper spring seat which is
located on the underside of the top mount. The majority of the roll stiffness is provided by the springs rather than the
stabilizer bar as this arrangement allows for a natural frequency of roll and consequently a consistent suspension ride.
India-Specific Spring and Damper Assembly Spacers
Front and rear spring and damper assemblies are fitted with spacers to raise ride height in India-specific vehicles. The front
and the rear spacers are the same, their color is black.
www.JagDocs.com
Front Suspension - Front Suspension
manual.REFER to: (204-01 Front Suspension)
Front Suspension (Description and Operation),

Front Suspension (Description and Operation),
Front Suspension (Description and Operation).

1. Verify the customer concern
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Damaged suspension dampers
the next step
4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the following Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Evidence of fluid on suspension damper
Fluid on damper from an external source Damper not faulty, do not renew
Fluid leaking from damper GO to Pinpoint Test A.
PINPOINT TEST A : DAMPER FLUID LEAK DIAGNOSIS

A1: ASSESS LEAK
NOTES:
Residual oil left over from the damper assembly process may create oil staining on the damper tube. This will not affect
the function of the damper.
Slight seepage is considered normal.
1 Assess the extent of the oil leakage

Is the leakage serious enough to indicate that the damper seal has failed?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Damper not faulty, do not renew.
PINPOINT TEST B : CONFIRM LEAK

B1: ROAD TEST
1 Clean all traces of oil from the damper
2 Drive the vehicle over a speed bump or similar ten times
Is any fluid visible on the outside of the damper?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test C.
No
PINPOINT TEST C : DAMPER STICKOUT TEST

C1: DAMPER STICKOUT TEST
NOTE: If a significant quantity of fluid has leaked out of the damper, the dividing piston will be displaced upwards in the
tube by the pressure of the gas below it. This will limit the downward travel of the piston.
1 Remove the suspension strut assembly

REFER to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension,
Removal and Installation).
2 Remove the spring
3 Remove the bump stop
4 Push the damper piston fully into the damper tube
5 Measure and record the stickout dimension (the distance
between the damper tube cap and the piston rod shoulder)
Is the stickout dimension greater than 12.0mm?

Yes
Damper unserviceable. Install a new suspension damper.
Enclose a record of the stickout dimension with the returned
part.
No
Damper serviceable. Re-assemble and re-install the
suspension strut
REFER to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension,
Front Suspension - Front Shock Absorber
Removal
NOTES:
Fuse box release only required on removal of the RH front shock absorber.
Expansion tank release only required for supercharged variant removal of the LH front shock absorber.
All vehicles
1. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a

jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the front wheel and tire.

3. Remove the front stabilizer bar link.

For additional information, refer to: Front Stabilizer Bar Link (204-01
Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
4. Release the front shock absorber from the lower arm.
5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the wheel knuckle is supported. Failure to

follow these instructions may result in damage to the vehicle.
Use an Allen key to prevent the ball joint rotating whilst

removing the nut.
Disconnect the upper arm from the wheel knuckle.

7. Release the fuse box.
Remove the 2 bolts and 1 nut.
Position the fuse box aside for access to the inboard
retaining nut.
8. Release the coolant expansion tank for access.
Vehicles with supercharger
9. Disconnect the front shock absorber electrical connector.
All vehicles
10. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but
the essential information is always correct.
Remove the front shock absorber and spring assembly.
11. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for

access only.
Install the front shock absorber and spring assembly in the spring
compressor.
12. WARNING: The spring is under extreme tension, care

must be taken at all times. Failure to follow these instruction
may result in personal injury.
Compress the spring.
13. Remove the front shock absorber retaining nut
14. Carefully release the spring tension.
www.JagDocs.com
15. Remove the front shock absorber.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Vehicles without adaptive damping: Tighten the nut to 50 Nm.
2. Vehicles with adaptive damping: Tighten the nut to 27 Nm.
3. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the

essential information is always correct.
Install the front shock absorber and spring assembly.

Tighten the nuts to 27 Nm.

4. Connect the front shock absorber electrical connector.
All vehicles
5. Secure the fuse box.
6. Secure the coolant expansion tank.

Tighten to 10 Nm.
7. Raise the vehicle.

8. CAUTIONS:
Use an Allen key to prevent the ball joint rotating whilst

installing the nut.
Make sure the wheel knuckle is supported. Failure to

follow these instructions may result in damage to the vehicle.
Secure the upper arm to the wheel knuckle.

Tighten the nut to 90 Nm.
9. Connect the front shock absorber and spring assembly to the

lower arm.
Tighten the bolt to 175 Nm.
10. Install the front stabilizer bar link.

11. Install the front wheel and tire.


Front Suspension - Front Lower Arm
Removal

2. Remove the air deflector.

For additional information, refer to: Air Deflector (501-02 Front End Body
Panels, Removal and Installation).

4. NOTES:
Note the fitted position.
RH illustration shown, LH is similar
Release the front lower arm.

Remove the 2 bolts and discard the nuts.
Installation
1. NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar
Install the front lower arm.

Install the bolt and tighten the new nut to 60 Nm +
135 degrees.
Install the front lower arm inner retaining nut and
bolt, but do not fully tighten at this stage.
2. Install the front wheel and tire.


4. CAUTION: The final tightening of the front lower arm inner
retaining nut and bolt must be carried out with the vehicle
on its wheels
Tighten the 14mm bolt to 175 Nm.
5. Install the air deflector.


the wheel alignment, and adjust if required.
www.JagDocs.com
Front Suspension - Rear Lower Arm
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint splitter
204-327
Removal

Raise the vehicle on a 4 post lift.
2. Remove the engine undertray.

3. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack.

Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
Raise and support the body.
4. Remove the wheel and tire.

5. Remove the stabilizer bar link.

6. Release the tie rod.

7. Release the steering gear.
8. Secure the steering gear.
Release the shock absorber and spring assembly.
9.
Remove the rear lower arm inner bolt.

10.
Release the front lower arm.
Remove and discard the nut and bolt.
11.
CAUTION: Prevent the rear lower arm ball joint ball pin
12. hexagon from rotating. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the lower ball joint boot.
Loosen the rear lower arm ball joint retaining nut.
hexagon from rotating. Failure to follow this instruction may
Adjust the rear lower arm ball joint retaining nut until the ball
joint thread cannot be seen.
13.
WARNING: Make sure the special tool is supported while

carrying out the operation. Failure to follow this instruction
14. may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the special tool is supported while carrying out

the operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the special tool.
Make sure the special tool is correctly located and the

lower ball joint boot is not damaged while carrying out the
operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the component.
Using the special tool, release the rear lower arm ball joint
from the wheel knuckle lower pivot.
Tighten the special tool adjusting bolt to a maximum of
60 Nm.
If the rear lower arm ball joint releases from the wheel
knuckle lower pivot, using no more than 60 Nm on the
special tool adjusting bolt, proceed to step 13.
If the rear lower arm ball joint does not release from
the wheel knuckle lower pivot, using no more than 60
Nm on the special tool adjusting bolt, proceed to step
12.
15. WARNING: Make sure the special tool is supported while

carrying out the operation. Failure to follow this instruction
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the special tool is supported while carrying out

the operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the special tool.
Make sure the special tool is correctly located and the

lower ball joint boot is not damaged while carrying out the
operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
NOTE: Do not carry out this step if the rear lower arm
ball joint released from the wheel knuckle lower pivot in step
12.
Using the special tool, release the rear lower arm ball joint
from the wheel knuckle lower pivot.
Tighten the special tool adjusting bolt to a maximum of
60 Nm.
Strike the top surface of the special tool directly above
the rear lower arm ball joint at the point indicated
using a copper mallet.
16. CAUTION: Prevent the rear lower arm ball joint ball pin
Remove the rear lower arm.

Remove and discard the retaining nut.
Installation
1. WARNING: Make sure that a new lower arm ball joint nut
is installed.
Install the rear lower arm.

2. NOTE: Install a new retaining nut and bolt.
Secure the front lower arm.

Stage 1: Tighten to 60 Nm.
Stage 2: Tighten to a further 135 degrees.
3. Secure the rear lower arm.

Install the rear lower arm inner retaining nut, but do
not tighten fully at this stage.
4. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly.

Tighten the bolt to 175 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Remove and discard the retaining straps.
6. Install the steering gear.

Tighten the bolts to 100 Nm.
7. Secure the tie rod end.

8. Install the stabilizer bar link.

9. Install the wheel and tire.

10. Lower the body.
11. CAUTION: The final tightening of the upper arm must be

carried out with the vehicle on it's wheels.
Tighten to 175 Nm.
12. Install the engine undertray.


and adjust the wheel alignment.
For additional information, refer to: Camber and Caster Adjustment
(204-00 Suspension System - General Information, General Procedures).
Front Suspension - Rear Lower Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Rear lower arm bushing remover and installer
204-464
Rear lower arm bushing remover
204-333
Rear lower arm bushing installer
204-332
204-465
204-334
Removal
CAUTION: Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle on the suspension.

2. Remove the rear lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Lower Arm (204-01 Front
3. NOTE: Note the fitted position.
Using the special tools, remove and discard the lower arm rear
bushings.
Installation
1. Install the special tools to the rear lower arm.

Tighten the bolts.
2. NOTE: Align to the position noted on removal.
Position the bushing in the special tool.
3. Using the special tools, partially install the lower arm bushing.
4. Change the special tools, then complete installation of the
bushing.
5. Install the rear lower arm.

www.JagDocs.com
Front Suspension - Shock Absorber Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Replacer support-bush
204-337
Replacer-bush
204-338
Remover-bush
204-336
Remover support-bush
204-335
Removal
CAUTION: Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle on the suspension.


3. NOTE: Take note of the fitted position of the bush. Using
the special tools, remove the shock absorber bushing.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the shock absorber bushing boot is

correctly located into the special tool.
Install the bushing into the special tool.
Using the special tools, install the shock absorber bushing.

Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
303-021
Engine support bracket
Removal
1. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and
Cables, General Procedures).

3. Refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and

Charging (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, General
Procedures).
4. Refer to: Radiator Splash Shield (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal
and Installation).
5. Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
6. Refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
7. Refer to: Engine Cover - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (501-05
Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
8.
Secure the radiator assembly.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
10. Torque: 8 Nm
12. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur,

but the essential information is always correct.
Torque: 45 Nm

Torque: 100 Nm
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.

20. Torque: 5 Nm

22. Torque:
M6 9 Nm
M10 40 Nm
23. CAUTIONS:
Support the engine on a jack. The angle may need to

be adjusted during this procedure.
Make sure to protect the paintwork.
Special Tool(s): 303-021

25.
www.JagDocs.com
26.
Torque: 43 Nm
28. During installation tighten the bolts in the following

sequence.
Torque:
Bolt 1 55 Nm
Bolt 2 55 Nm
Bolt 1 55 Nm
29.
30.
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2. Refer to: Camber and Caster Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System -

General Information, General Procedures).
Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal


3. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball joint

rotating.
Remove the front stabilizer bar link.

Remove and discard the 2 nuts.
Installation

rotating.
Install the front stabilizer bar link.

Tighten the upper nut to 47 Nm.
Tighten the lower nut to 70 Nm.

Front Suspension - Stabilizer Bar Link Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Bush installer
204-340
Bush remove
204-342
Support
204-341
Support
204-339
Removal
CAUTION: The final tightening of the suspension components must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.


3. Using the special tools, remove and discard the stabilizer bar
link bushing.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply water to lubricate the bushing.
Using the special tools, install the stabilizer bar link bushing.

www.JagDocs.com
Front Suspension - Upper Arm LH
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front
3. Remove the secondary bulkhead panel LH.

For additional information, refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH - 3.0L
NA V6 - AJ27 (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the air cleaner.

For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A, Removal and
Installation) /
Air Cleaner (303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V6 3.0L
Petrol, Removal and Installation) /
Air Cleaner (303-12C, Removal and Installation) /
Air Cleaner LH (303-12D, Removal and Installation).

Remove the upper arm retaining nut.


7. Remove the upper arm.
Installation
1. Install the upper arm.

Install the upper arm retaining nut, but do not tighten fully at
this stage.

this stage.
4. Install the front shock absorber.

5. CAUTION: The final tightening of the suspension components

must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but

Tighten to 47 Nm.
6. CAUTION: The final tightening of the suspension

components must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.

Tighten to 47 Nm.
7. Install the air cleaner.

For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A, Removal and
Installation) /
Air Cleaner (303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V6 3.0L
Air Cleaner (303-12C, Removal and Installation) /
Air Cleaner LH (303-12D, Removal and Installation).
8. Install the secondary bulkhead panel LH.

Front Suspension - Upper Arm RH
Removal


3. Remove the secondary bulkhead panel RH.

For additional information, refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH - 3.0L


6. Remove the upper arm.

Installation
1. Install the upper arm.

this stage.

this stage.
4. Install the front shock absorber.

www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTION: The final tightening of the suspension components
must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.

Tighten to 47 Nm.

components must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.

Tighten to 47 Nm.
7. Install the secondary bulkhead panel RH.

Front Suspension - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
2. Torque: 125 Nm
3. Torque: 10 Nm
5. CAUTION: Discard the bolts.
NOTES:
Secure with cable ties.
Torque: 115 Nm

7. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolts.
Make sure that the area around the component is

clean and free of foreign material.
Do not attempt to release the wheel hub by hitting it

with a hammer directly, loosen the wheel hub retaining
bolts partially before applying an even amount of force to
the head of each bolts to release the wheel hub from the
wheel knuckle. Failure to follow this instruction may cause
NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the

Install the components to their original fitted

positions.
Torque: 90 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Front Suspension - Wheel Knuckle
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint splitter
204-327
Removal

2. Remove the hub assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
- V6 3.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
Remove the brake disc shield.

Remove the 3 rivets.
4. NOTES:
Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball joint

rotating.
Disconnect the steering gear tie rod end ball joint.

Remove and discard the tie rod end retaining nut.
5. NOTES:

rotating.
Disconnect the upper arm from the wheel knuckle.

Remove and discard the nut.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the ball joint seal is not

damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the premature failure
of the joint.
NOTES:

rotating.
Remove the wheel knuckle.

Using the special tool, release the ball joint from
the lower suspension arm.
Installation

rotating.
Install the wheel knuckle.

Clean the component mating faces.
rotating.
Connect the upper arm and wheel knuckle.

3. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the

component from rotating.
Connect the tie-rod end ball joint.

4. Install the brake disc shield.

Install the rivets.
5. Install the hub assembly.

- V6 3.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
Published: 19-Nov-2013
Front Suspension - Front Lower Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
JLR-204-813
Remover/Installer, Lower Arm Bush
JLR-204-814
JLR-204-815
General Equipment
Center punch
Hydraulic press
Removal
NOTE: Removal and installation of the bush requires the use of a press.
1. Visually inspect the lower arm for signs of a center punch mark. If
four marks are located on the lower arm in the area illustrated,
install a new front lower arm.
www.JagDocs.com
2. Only continue with the procedure below if there is less than four marks
on the lower front arm.
Refer to: Front Lower Arm (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
3. Measure and note the value both sides of the bush as illustrated prior to
removal.
4. CAUTION: Note the orientation of the bush prior to removal.
Using suitable marking tools, mark the bush and lower arm prior to
removal.
5. Using the special tools, remove the bush.
Special Tool(s): JLR-204-813, JLR-204-814

General Equipment: Hydraulic press
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the bush is correclty seated in the special
tool.
Special Tool(s): JLR-204-815

2. Using the special tools, remove the bush.
Special Tool(s): JLR-204-813, JLR-204-815

General Equipment: Hydraulic press
www.JagDocs.com
3. Make sure that the bush has been installed to the noted removal
position.
4. Make sure that measurement taken prior to removal is still correct.
5. Mark the front lower arm with a center punch, once the procedure
has been completed.
General Equipment: Center punch

6. Refer to: Front Lower Arm (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
Rear Suspension -
Halfshaft outer constant velocity joint retaining nut 300 221 -
Lower arm to wheel knuckle retaining nut and bolt 190 140 -
Lower arm to subframe retaining nut and bolt 192 142 -
Lower arm to subframe retaining bolt 192 142 -
Upper arm ball joint to wheel knuckle retaining nut 96 71 -
Upper arm to subframe retaining nut and bolt 115 85 -
Toe link to subframe ball joint retaining nut 90 66 -
Toe link to wheel knuckle retaining nut and bolt 63 46 -
Toe link setting nut 55 41 -
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting to body retaining nuts 28 21 -
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting retaining nut (without adaptive damping) 50 37 -
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting retaining nut (with adaptive damping) 27 20 -
Shock absorber to lower arm retaining bolt 133 98 -
Stabilizer bar link to stabilizer bar retaining nut 48 35 -
Stabilizer bar clamp to subframe retaining bolt 55 41 -
Stabilizer bar link to lower arm retaining nut 48 35 -
Wheel and tire to wheel hub retaining nuts 125 92 -
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Subframe
2 Upper control arm
5 Toe link
7 Wheel knuckle
8 Lower control arm
9 Shear bracket
10 Cross brace
11 Single brace
12 Stabilizer bar
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension - Overview
OVERVIEW
The double wishbone type rear-suspension is a fully independent design assembled on a steel subframe; large diameter
bushes isolate the subframe from the vehicle's body.
A toe-link located between the wheel knuckle and the subframe is used to adjust the toe angle of the rear wheels.
The wheel knuckle attaches to the upper and lower control arms, and the coil spring and damper assembly is located between
the lower control arm and the vehicle body.
Dependant on vehicle model there are three types of coil spring and damper available:

Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
The double wishbone type rear-suspension is assembled on a fabricated high-grade steel subframe. Large diameter mounting
bushes are used to isolate the subframe from the vehicle's body; the front bushes are hydrabushes, the rear are voided rubber.
To achieve optimum suspension refinement a cross-brace is used to increase the torsional stiffness of the subframe. The single
brace attached to the shear brackets helps to reduce the transmission of road noise.
An adaptive damping system is available on specified models. For additional information refer to Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
4.2L or 5.0L.
COMPONENTS
Item Description
1 Subframe
2 Stabilizer bar
3 Upper control arm
5 Toe link
6 Wheel knuckle
9 Lower control arm
Upper Control Arm

The cast aluminum upper control arm locates to the subframe via one cross-axis joint and one plain rubber bush, and links to
the aluminum wheel knuckle via an integral ball-joint.
Lower Control Arm

The aluminum lower arm locates to the subframe via one cross-axis joint and one plain rubber bush, and to the wheel knuckle
via a second plain rubber bush.
The rear of the control arm has mounting points for the damper and the stabilizer link.
Toe-Link
The toe-link is located between the wheel knuckle and brackets on the subframe.
The toe-link comprises an inner rod with integral axial ball joint. The inner ball joint has a threaded spigot which locates in a
bracket on the subframe and is secured with a locknut. The rod has an internal thread which accepts the outer rod.
The outer rod has a cross-axis joint at its outer end which is located in a clevis on the wheel knuckle, and is secured with a
bolt and locknut.
The length of the toe-link can be adjusted by rotating the inner rod. This allows for adjustment of the toe angle for the rear
wheel. Once set the inner rod can be locked in position by tightening a locknut on the outer rod against the inner rod.
Wheel Knuckle
The cast aluminum wheel knuckle attaches to:
the upper control arm via a ball-joint located in the arm,

the lower control arm via a plain rubber bush located in the arm,
the toe-link via a cross-axis joint located in the toe link.
The wheel knuckle also provides the mounting locations for the:
wheel hub assembly,

wheel bearing,
wheel speed sensor,
brake caliper,
and disc shield.
Stabilizer Bar
The solid construction stabilizer bar and bushes have been designed to provide particular characteristics in maintaining roll
rates, specifically in primary ride comfort. There are six derivatives of rear stabilizer bar, with different diameters, to support
the various powertrains:
V6 gasoline - 12.7 mm solid bar

V8 4.2L and 5.0L gasoline - 13.6 mm solid bar
V6 2.7L diesel -14.5 mm solid bar
V6 3.0L diesel - 14.5 mm solid bar
V6 3.0L diesel with Adaptive Damping – 16mm tubular
V8 4.2L gasoline supercharged – 16mm tubular
V8 5.0L gasoline supercharged
- SV8 - 17mm tubular
- XFR - 18mm tubular
The stabilizer bar is attached to the top of the subframe with two bushes and mounting brackets. The stabilizer bar has
crimped, 'anti-shuffle' collars pressed in position on the inside edges of the bushes. The collars prevent sideways movement of
the stabilizer bar.
Each end of the stabilizer bar curves rearward to attach to a ball joint on each stabilizer link. Each link is attached via a
second ball joint to a cast bracket on the lower control arm. The links allow the stabilizer bar to move with the wheel travel
providing maximum effectiveness.
Spring and Damper Assembly

The spring and damper assembly are attached to cast brackets on the lower control arms and to the vehicle body by four studs
secured by locking nuts. Dependant on vehicle model there are three types of coil spring and damper available:

The dampers are a monotube design with a spring located by a circlip onto the damper tube. The lower end of the damper has
a spherical joint which locates in the lower control arm and is secured with a bolt.
The damper piston is connected to a damper rod which is sealed at its exit point from the damper body. The threaded outer
end of the damper rod locates through a hole in the top mount. A self locking nut secures the top mount to the damper rod.
The damper rod on the adaptive damper has an electrical connector on the outer end of the damper rod.
www.JagDocs.com
Supercharged 4.2L vehicles up to 2010MY: The damper functions by restricting the flow of hydraulic fluid through internal
galleries in the damper's piston. The adaptive damper has a solenoid operated valve, which when switched allows a greater
flow of hydraulic fluid through the damper's piston. This provides a softer damping characteristic from the damper. The
adaptive damper defaults to a firmer setting when not activated. The solenoid is computer controlled and can switch between
soft and hard damping settings depending on road wheel inputs and vehicle speed.
Supercharged 5.0L vehicles from 2010MY: The variable damper functions by adjustment of a solenoid operated variable orifice,
which opens up an alternative path for oil flow within the damper. When de-energized the bypass is closed and all the oil flows
through the main (firm) piston. When energized the solenoid moves an armature and control blade, which work against a
spring. The control blade incorporates an orifice which slides inside a sintered housing to open up the bypass as required. In
compression, oil flows from the lower portion of the damper through a hollow piston rod, a separate soft (comfort) valve, the
slider housing and orifice and into the upper portion of the damper, thereby bypassing the main (firm) valve. In rebound the oil
flows in the opposite direction
The damper rod is fitted with a spring aid which prevents the top mount making contact with the top of the damper body
during full suspension compression and also assists with the suspension tune.
The spring rate of the coil springs can differ between models and are color coded for identification. The coil spring locates on a
spring packer and a lower spring seat which is located on the damper body. The spring locates in an upper spring seat which is
located on the underside of the top mount. The majority of the roll stiffness is provided by the springs rather than the
stabilizer bar as this arrangement allows for a natural frequency of roll, providing a consistent suspension ride.
India-Specific Spring and Damper Assembly Spacers
Front and rear spring and damper assemblies are fitted with spacers to raise ride height in India-specific vehicles. The front
and the rear spacers are the same, their color is black.
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension
manual.REFER to: (204-02 Rear Suspension)
Rear Suspension (Description and Operation),

Rear Suspension (Description and Operation),
Rear Suspension (Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Damaged suspension dampers
the next step
4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the following Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Evidence of fluid on suspension damper
Fluid on damper from an external source Damper not faulty, do not renew
Fluid leaking from damper GO to Pinpoint Test A.
PINPOINT TEST A : DAMPER FLUID LEAK DIAGNOSIS

A1: ASSESS LEAK
NOTES:
Residual oil left over from the damper assembly process may create oil staining on the damper tube. This will not affect
the function of the damper.
Slight seepage is considered normal.
1 Assess the extent of the oil leakage

Is the leakage serious enough to indicate that the damper seal has failed?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST B : CONFIRM LEAK

B1: ROAD TEST
1 Clean all traces of oil from the damper
2 Drive the vehicle over a speed bump or similar ten times
Is any fluid visible on the outside of the damper?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : DAMPER STICKOUT TEST

C1: DAMPER STICKOUT TEST
NOTE: If a significant quantity of fluid has leaked out of the damper, the dividing piston will be displaced upwards in the
tube by the pressure of the gas below it. This will limit the downward travel of the piston.
1 Remove the suspension strut assembly

REFER to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly (204-02
Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
2 Remove the spring
3 Remove the bump stop
4 Push the damper piston fully into the damper tube
5 Measure and record the stickout dimension (the distance
between the damper tube cap and the piston rod shoulder)
Is the stickout dimension greater than 12.0mm?

Yes
Damper unserviceable. Install a new suspension damper.
Enclose a record of the stickout dimension with the returned
part.
No
Damper serviceable. Re-assemble and re-install the
suspension strut
REFER to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly (204-02
Rear Suspension - Lower Arm
Removal
NOTES:
Before commencing work on the vehicle ensure the park brake is in the off position.
LH shown RH similar.
Raise the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to: W heel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and
3. Release the shock absorber and spring assembly from the

lower arm.
4. Release the rear stabilizer bar link.
www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on the
brake hose.
NOTE: Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Release the rear brake caliper and tie aside.
6. Release the lower arm from the wheel hub assembly.
7. Remove the lower arm.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the

weight of the vehicle on the suspension.
Install the lower arm.

Secure the lower arm to the wheel hub assembly.
3. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on the

brake hose.
NOTE: Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Secure the rear brake caliper.

4. Secure the rear stabilizer bar link.


Secure the shock absorber and spring assembly to the lower

arm.

For additional information, refer to: W heel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and
8. Tighten to 175 Nm.

Rear Suspension - Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
Removal
All vehicles
1. Remove the luggage compartment side trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel LH (501-05
Vehicles with active damping
2. Disconnect the active suspension damper electrical connector.
All vehicles
3. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly top mount

nuts. TORQUE: 28 Nm
Raise the vehicle.

6. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is
removed for access only.
Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly. TORQUE: 133

Nm
7. WARNINGS:
Make sure the shock absorber is secured by fully

inserting the locking pin in to the special tool. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
As the spring is under extreme tension care must be

taken at all times. Failure to follow these instructions may
Make sure that a new nut is installed.
Using the special tool, compress the suspension spring to

remove the shock absorber.
Remove the nut. TORQUE: 27 Nm
Vehicles without active damping
8. WARNINGS:



remove the shock absorber.
Remove the nut. TORQUE: 50 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
All vehicles
9. Remove the shock absorber rod components.

Installation
All vehicles
1. Install the shock absorber rod components.
2. WARNINGS:



install the shock absorber.
Vehicles without active damping
3. WARNINGS:



install the shock absorber.

Tighten to 133 Nm.

All vehicles
6. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly top mount

nuts.
Tighten to 28 Nm.
7. Connect the active suspension damper electrical connector.
All vehicles
8. Install the luggage compartment side trim panel.

Rear Suspension - Shock Absorber Lower Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Bushing Remover / Installer
204-335
Bushing remover
204-533
Bushing installer
204-534
Removal
1. WARNING: Failure to follow this instruction may cause damage to

the vehicle.
Mark the orientation of the shock absorber in relation to the lower

suspension arm.
2. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly. For additional

information, refer to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly (204-02 Rear
3. NOTES:
Place the shock absorber with the recessed side facing

upwards.
With assistance make sure the special tool is aligned.
Using the special tool, support the shock absorber.
www.JagDocs.com
4. NOTES:
Position the special tool onto the recessed side of the

bush.
With assistance make sure the special tool is aligned.
Position and align the special tool to the shock absorber

bushing.
5. Using the special tools, carefully remove the bushing from the
shock absorber.
Installation
1. NOTES:
Make sure the bush is clean and free from oil or grease.
Use a suitable lubricant to allow the bush to locate into

the special tool.
Locate the new bushing in the special tool.
2. WARNING: Failure to follow this instruction may cause

damage to the vehicle.
NOTES:
Make sure the shock absorber is clean and free from oil or
grease and is not damaged prior to pushing in the new bush.
Make sure the bush is installed following the same

direction as removal.
Make sure correct alignment is maintained.
Using the special tools, align the bushing to the shock

absorber.
3. NOTE: Make sure correct alignment is maintained.
Slowly push the bush into the shock absorber until the tool
reaches the stop.

For additional information, refer to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
(204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
Rear Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Bar
Special Tool(s)
Powertrain Assembly Jack, HTJ
1200-2
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect
(414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
3. Remove both rear wheels and tires.

4. Drain the fuel tank.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank Draining (310-00 Fuel
5. Remove the exhaust system.

For additional information, refer to: Front Muffler (309-00B Exhaust
System - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
6. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to

prevent contamination.
NOTES:
To prevent the loss of brake fluid, using the special

tool apply the brake pedal and set to 40mm ( 1.6 in ) below
the rest position.
RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
Disconnect the brake hose from the brake caliper.

Using the special tool, press and hold the brake
pedal.
Remove and discard the two sealing washers.
Release the brake caliper.

Remove and discard the 2 bolts.
Tie the brake caliper aside.
Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor.
9. Disconnect the electronic parking brake actuator electrical

connector.
Disconnect both parking brake cables from the rear brake

calipers.
Detach the shock absorber.
12. Detach the fuel filler hose.
13. CAUTION: Under no circumstances must the flexible

coupling (or its fixings) be loosened or removed from the
driveshaft.
Detach the driveshaft from the rear drive axle flange.

Mark the position of the driveshaft in relation to the
rear drive axle flange.
Mark the position of the balance nut in relation to the
rear drive axle flange. (if fitted).
Mark the position of each nut and bolt in relation to the
driveshaft flexible joint.
Remove the rear subframe reinforcement plate retaining bolts.
www.JagDocs.com
Install the special tool to support the rear subframe.
15.
NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
Remove the rear subframe rear retaining bolt.
16.
17. Remove the rear subframe front retaining bolt.
Remove the rear subframe.
18.
19. Remove the stabilizer bar link nuts.
20. Remove the rear stabilizer bar.

Remove the stabilizer bar bushings.
Installation
1. During installation tighten the bolts in the following

sequence.
Bolt 1: 55 Nm.
Bolt 2: 55 Nm.
Bolt 1: 55 Nm.
2. Install new nuts to the stabilizer bar links.
Tighten to 48 Nm.
3. Install the rear subframe.
Loosely install the rear subframe front bolt.
5. Loosely install the rear subframe rear bolt.

Loosely install the rear subframe reinforcement plate bolts.
7. Tighten the subframe bolts.

Tighten to 80 Nm + 240°.
8. Remove the special tool.
9. Tighten the rear subframe reinforcement plate retaining bolts.

Tighten to 47 Nm.
Install the shock absorber.

Tighten to 133 Nm.
11. NOTE: Install the components to their original fitted

positions.
Attach the driveshaft to the rear drive axle flange.
12. Attach the fuel filler hose to the fuel tank.
13. Connect both park brake cables to the rear brake calipers.
www.JagDocs.com
14. Connect the parking brake actuator electrical connector.
15. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
16. Install the brake caliper.

17. Connect the brake hose to the brake caliper.

Install new sealing washers.
Tighten the union to 38 Nm.
18. Install the exhaust system.
For additional information, refer to: Front Muffler (309-00B Exhaust
System - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
19. Refill the fuel tank.

20. Bleed the brake system.

For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00
Brake System - General Information, General Procedures).
21. Install the rear wheels and tires.

22. Connect the battery ground cable.


For additional information, refer to: Camber and Caster Adjustment
(204-00 Suspension System - General Information, General Procedures).
Rear Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing
Special Tool(s)
204-250
Wheel bearing install and removal tool
204-269
Flange remover forcing screw
204-305
Remover, Wheel Bearing
204-725
Support Tool, Wheel Hub
204-726
Remover/Installer, Wheel Bearing
204-727A
Installer, Wheel Bearing
204-791
Installer, Wheel Bearing
205-491
Hub puller
205-491-1
Adapter nuts
Removal
2. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
3.
4.
5.
6.
www.JagDocs.com
7.
8.
CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to detach the

halfshaft from the hub assembly, failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the halfshaft.
Special Tool(s): 205-491, 205-491-1, 204-269
9.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the
10.
11. Special Tool(s): 204-726, 204-725
12. Special Tool(s): 204-305, 204-726, 204-725
13.
14. Special Tool(s): 204-726
Installation
1. NOTES:
Make sure bearing is installed in correct direction,

encoder ring incorporated into the inboard seal of the wheel
bearing.
Make sure correct alignment of the bearing is

maintained when installing into the hub carrier.
Special Tool(s): 204-727A, 204-791

2.
3. NOTE: Make sure the correct alignment of the drive

flange is maintained when installing into the hub carrier
and bearing assembly.
Special Tool(s): 204-726, 204-250

components must be carried out with the vehicle on its
wheels.
Torque: 90 Nm
5. CAUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.
NOTE: The wheel hub nut is not tightened at this

stage.
wheels.
Torque: 150 Nm

wheels.
Torque: 55 Nm
8. Torque: 6 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
9.
10. Torque: 103 Nm
11. CAUTION: Do not use air tools to install the nut.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the component.
Torque: 300 Nm
Installation).
Rear Suspension - Upper Arm
Removal
CAUTION: The final tightening of the suspension components must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.
NOTES:
Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
1. Raise and lower the vehicle on a 4 post ramp.
Installation).
4. Refer to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly (204-02, Removal and
Installation).
5.
6.
7. CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new

blanking caps.
Torque: 38 Nm
8. Torque: 96 Nm
9. Torque: 115 Nm
Installation
2. Refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00, General Procedures).

Rear Suspension - Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
Special Tool(s)
Compressor, Coil Spring
204-476
Disassembly
1. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly.

For additional information, refer to Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
in this section.
2. WARNING: Make sure the shock absorber is secured by fully

Install the shock absorber and spring assembly to the special

tool as shown.
3. WARNING: AS THE SPRING IS UNDER EXTREME TENSION

CARE MUST BE TAKEN AT ALL TIMES. FAILURE TO FOLLOW
THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Clamp the road spring.
4. Remove the shock absorber retaining nut.

Remove and discard the retaining nut.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Release the road spring.
6. Remove the shock absorber.
Assembly
1. CAUTION: Make sure the spring ends butt correctly

against the spring seats.
Install the shock absorber and spring assembly to the special

tool.
2. WARNING: AS THE SPRING IS UNDER EXTREME TENSION

CARE MUST BE TAKEN AT ALL TIMES. FAILURE TO FOLLOW
THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Clamp the road spring.

3. Vehicles without adaptive damping.
Install a new retaining nut.
Tighten to 50 Nm.
4. Vehicles with adaptive damping.

Install a new retaining nut.
Tighten to 27 Nm.
5. Release the road spring.
6. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly from the

special tool.
Wheels and Tires -
Description Nm lb/ft lb/in
Wheel nuts 125 92 -
Tire Pressures
Summer Tyres (ROW) Up to 100 mph Over 100 mph
235/55R17 99W Front 2.3 bar (34 lbf/in²) 2.3 bar (34 lbf/in²)
Rear 2.3 bar (34 lbf/in²) 2.3 bar (34 lbf/in²)
245/45R18 100 W&Y X/L Front 2.1 bar (31 lbf/in²) 2.6 bar (38 lbf/in²)
245/40R19 98 Y X/L Front 2.1 bar (31 lbf/in²) 2.5 bar (36 lbf/in²)
235/35R20 97Y X/L Front 2.3 bar (34 lbf/in²) 2.3 bar (34 lbf/in²)
Rear - -
285/30R20 99y X/L Front - -
Tire Pressures
All Season Tyres (USA & Canada) 0 mph - 121 mph
245/45R18 96H Front 2.1 bar (31 lbf/in²)
Rear 2.1 bar (31 lbf/in²)
245/40R19 94H Front 2.4 bar (35 lbf/in²)
Rear 2.4 bar (35 lbf/in²)
Wheel Specification
Wheel Type Wheel Size
Libra 7.5 x 17
Cygnus 8.5 x 18
Venus 8.5 x 18
Auriga 8.5 x 19
Carelia 8.5 x 19
Volans (front) 8.5 x 20
Volans (rear) 9.5 x 20
Selena 8.5 x 20
Tires and Fitment
Wheels
Description Type Tire Type
Vehicles with 2.7L Diesel and 3.0L engine Libra 235/55R17 99W Pirelli P7
Cygnus 245/45R18 100W Dunlop SP01
Vehicles without supercharger Cygnus 245/45R18 100W Dunlop SP01
Vehicles without supercharger (ROW) Venus 245/45R18 100Y Pirelli PZero
Carelia 245/40R19 98Y Dunlop SP01
Auriga 245/40R19 98Y Dunlop SP01
Vehicles without supercharger (ROW) and vehicles with supercharger (USA & Cygnus 245/45R18 96H Continental
Canada) ProContact
Auriga 245/40R19 96H Continental
ProContact
Vehicles with supercharger Volans 255/35R20
97Y Pirelli PZero
(front)
Volans (rear) 285/30R20 99Y Pirelli PZero
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires - Component Location
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Component Location
Item Description
1 Tire pressure sensor
2 Tire pressure monitoring system module
3 Tire pressure receiver
4 Tire pressure monitoring system initiator
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires - Overview
OVERVIEW
A number of alloy wheel designs are available ranging from 17 to 20 inch in diameter. A Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) is used to monitor the air pressure in each tire and inform the driver if the pressure falls below predetermined
thresholds.
All wheels are of cast construction in aluminum alloy with the choice of wheel design dependant on the vehicle trim level and
engine derivative.
On normally aspirated petrol models and all diesel models a 4J X 18 inch temporary spare wheel is supplied as standard,
supercharged petrol models are supplied with a 4Jx19 inch temporary spare wheel. In some major European markets an Instant
Mobility System is offered as an alternative to the spare wheel. The Instant Mobility System is capable of providing a
temporary repair and tire inflation to a puncture of up to 6mm in diameter in the tread area of the tire. A puncture in the tire
wall cannot be repaired using the system.
The vehicle jack and accessories are stored in the spare wheel-well in the luggage compartment.
Tire Changing
WARNINGS:
Tires must be inflated to the recommended pressures when the tires are cold (ambient temperature) only. Refer to label
on the 'B' pillar for recommended tire pressures. If the tires have been subjected to use or exposed to direct sunlight, move
the vehicle into a shaded position and allow the tires to cool before checking or adjusting the pressures.
Valve stem seal, washer nut, valve core and cap should be replaced at every tire change. Valve stem seal, washer and
nut must be replaced if the valve retention nut is loosened. Sensor units and nuts must be fitted using correct torque figures
and associated profile. Damage to the vehicle and consequently injury to the vehicle's occupants may result if these
instructions are not adhered to.
NOTE: The TPMS valve should be serviced using the suitable service kit, each time the tyre is dismounted, to ensure an
air tight seal. Attention should be made to the detail of fitting this kit.
Vehicles fitted with TPMS can be visually identified by an external metal locknut and valve of the tire pressure sensor on the
road wheels. Vehicles without TPMS will have rubber tire valve.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Tire valve and pressure sensor
2 Tire fitting/removal tool initial start position
3 High tire and bead tension area
4 Low tire and bead tension area
When removing the tire, the bead breaker must not be used within 90 degrees of the tire valve in each direction on each side
of the tire.
When using the tire removal machine, the fitting arm start position must be positioned as shown in the tire changing
illustration for each side of the tire. The wheel can then be rotated through 180 degrees in a counter-clockwise direction. This
will relieve tension from the tire bead allowing the remaining 180 degrees of the tire to be manually pulled from the rim.
When refitting the tire, position the fitting arm as shown. Rotate the tire and take care that the bead on the low tension side
of the tire does not damage the sensor.
Run-Flat Tires
Run-flat tires are not available on vehicles from 2011MY.
TREAD Act - NAS Only
Vehicles supplied to the North American markets must comply with the legislation of the Transport Recall Enhancement,
Accountability and Documentation (TREAD) act. Part of the requirement of the TREAD act is for the vehicle to display a label
which defines the recommended tire inflation pressure, load limits and maximum load of passengers and luggage weight the
vehicle can safely carry. This label will be specific to each individual vehicle and will be installed on the production line. The
label is positioned on the driver's side 'B' pillar on NAS vehicles and the inside rear face of the LH door on Canadian
specification vehicles.
This label must not be removed from the vehicle. The label information will only define the specification of the vehicle as it
came off the production line. It will not include dealer or owner fitted accessory wheels and tires of differing size from the
original fitment.
If the label is damaged or removed for body repair, it must be replaced with a new label specific to that vehicle. A new label is
requested from Jaguar parts and will be printed specifically for the supplied VIN of the vehicle.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is a driver assistance system which assists the driver to maintain the tire
pressures at the optimum level. TPMS is standard fitment on NAS vehicles and an optional fitment in other markets. TPMS
provides the following benefits:
Maintain optimal fuel consumption.

Maintain ride and handling characteristics.
Reduce the risk of rapid tire deflation - which may be caused by under inflated tires.
Comply with legislation requirements in relevant markets.
CAUTION: TPMS is not intended as a replacement for regular tire pressure and tire condition checks and should be
considered as additional to good tire maintenance practices.
The TPMS measures the pressure in each of the vehicle's tires and issues warnings to the driver if any of the pressures deviate
from defined tolerances. The space saver spare wheel is not monitored.
NOTE: TPMS is not designed to warn the driver of a tire 'blow-out', as due to the short duration of a 'blow-out', it is not
possible to give the driver sufficient warning that such an event is occurring. The design of the TPMS is to assist the driver in
keeping the tires at the correct pressure, which will assist to reduce the likelihood of a tire 'blow-out' occurring.
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; F = RF Transmission; N = Medium speed CAN bus; W = LF Transmission
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (250A)
3 CJB (central junction box)
4 RJB (rear junction box)
5 TPMS receiver
6 Tire pressure sensors
7 Initiators
8 TPMS module
9 Instrument cluster
System Operation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The controlling software for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is located within a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Module. The software detects the following:
When the tire pressure is below the recommended low pressure value - under inflated tire.
The location of the tire on the vehicle that is below the recommended pressure.
Malfunction warning.
The TPMS system comprises:
Tire pressure monitoring system module located below the right-hand front seat.
Tire pressure receiver located near the gear shifter within the floor console.
Two front initiators positioned forward of the wheels and behind the fender splash shields.
Two rear initiators positioned rearward of the wheels and assembled on dedicated brackets located behind the fender
splash shields.
Four sensors, each sensor is integral with a tire valve and located within the tire; the space saver spare wheel is not
fitted with a sensor.
The four initiators are hard wired to the TPMS module. The initiators transmit 125 KHz Low Frequency (LF) signals to the tire
pressure sensors which respond by modifying the mode status within the Radio Frequency (RF) transmission. The 315 or 433
MHz RF signals are detected by the tire pressure receiver which is connected directly to the TPMS module. The received RF
signals from the tire pressure sensors are passed to the TPMS module and contain identification, pressure, temperature and
acceleration information for each wheel and tire.
The TPMS module communicates with the instrument cluster via the medium speed CAN bus to provide the driver with
appropriate warnings. The TPMS module also indicates status or failure of the TPMS or components.
Tire Location and Identification
The TPMS can identify the position of the wheels on the vehicle and assign a received tire pressure sensor identification to a
specific position on the vehicle, for example front left, front right, rear left and rear right. This feature is required because of
the different pressure targets and threshold that could exist between the front and rear tires.
The wheel location is performed automatically by the TPMS module using an 'auto-location' function. This function is fully
automatic and requires no input from the driver. The TPMS module automatically re-learns the position of the wheels on the
vehicle if the tire pressure sensors are replaced or the wheel positions on the vehicle are changed.
The TPMS software can automatically detect, under all operating conditions, the following:
one or more new tire pressure sensors have been fitted

one or more tire pressure sensors have stopped transmitting
TPMS module can reject identifications from tire pressure sensors which do not belong to the vehicle
two 'running' wheels on the vehicle have changed positions.
If a new tire pressure sensor is fitted on any 'running' wheel, the module can learn the new sensor identification automatically
through the tire learn and location process.
The tire-learn and location process is ready to commence when the vehicle has been stationary or traveling at less than 12
mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. This is known as 'parking mode'. The learn/locate process requires the vehicle to be driven at
speeds of more than 12 mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. If the vehicle speed reduces to below 12 mph (20 km/h), the learn
process timer is suspended until the vehicle speed increases to more than 12 mph (20 km/h), after which time the timer is
resumed. If the vehicle speed remains below 12 mph (20 km/h) for more than 15 minutes, the timer is set to zero and process
starts again.
Low Pressure Monitoring
The tire low pressure sensor transmits by RF (315 MHz or 433 MHz depending on market) signal. These signals contain data
which corresponds to tire low pressure sensor identification, tire pressure, tire temperature, acceleration and tire low pressure
sensor mode.
Each time the vehicle is driven, the tire pressure monitoring system module activates each LF antenna in turn. The
corresponding tire low pressure sensor detects the LF signal and responds by modifying the mode status within the RF
transmission.
The system enters 'parking mode' after the vehicle speed has been less than 20 km/h (12.5 miles/h) for 12 minutes. In parking
mode the tire low pressure sensors transmit a coded signal to the tire pressure monitoring system module once every 13
hours. If the tire pressure decreases by more than 0.06 bar (1 lbf/in²) the tire low pressure sensor will transmit more often as
pressure is lost.
As each wheel responds to the LF signal from the tire pressure monitoring system module, it is assigned a position on the
vehicle and is monitored for the remainder of that drive cycle in that position.
When the vehicle has been parked for more than 15 minutes and then driven at a speed of more than 20 km/h (12.5 miles/h),
the antennas fire in turn for 6 seconds on all except North American Specification (NAS) vehicles or for 18 seconds on NAS only
vehicles in the following order:
Front left
Six second pause (for the tire pressure monitoring system module to detect a response from the tire low pressure
sensor)
Front right
Six second pause
Rear right
Six second pause
Rear left
Six second pause.
Each tire low pressure sensor responds in turn so the tire pressure monitoring system module can establish the tire low
pressure sensor positions at the start of the drive cycle. This process is repeated up to three times but less if the tire low
pressure sensor positions are already known in the tire pressure monitoring system module.
This process is known as 'Auto Location' and takes:
three to five minutes on all except North American specification vehicles to complete, and
seven to eight minutes on North American specification vehicles to complete.
During this period the tire low pressure sensors transmit at regular intervals:
once every 5 seconds on all except North American specification vehicles, and
once every 15 seconds on North American specification vehicles.
For the remainder of the drive cycle the tire low pressure sensors transmit once every 60 seconds or if a change in tire pressure
is sensed until the vehicle stops and the tire pressure monitoring system returns to parking mode.
Once the wheel position is established, the antennas stop firing and do not fire again until the vehicle has been parked for
more than 15 minutes. The signal transmissions from each tire low pressure sensor continue at one minute intervals whilst the
vehicle is being driven. This transmission is to monitor the tire pressure. The warning occurs at 25% deflation and comprises
the low tire pressure warning indicator and an appropriate message displayed in the instrument cluster message center. The
message center will also display additional information about the position of the affected wheel(s).
Spare Tire Monitoring
Tire pressure sensors are not fitted to the space saver spare wheel and therefore the spare wheel is not monitored.
Initiator
Each initiator has a connector which connects to the vehicle body harness. The initiator is a passive, LF transmitter. The
initiators transmit their signals which are received by the tire pressure sensors, prompting them to modify their mode status.
The TPMS module energizes each initiator in turn using LF drivers. The corresponding tire pressure sensor detects the LF signal
and responds by modifying the mode status within the RF transmission.
www.JagDocs.com
Tire Pressure Sensor
The TPMS uses active tire pressure sensors which are located on each wheel, inside the tire cavity. The sensor incorporates the
tire valve and is secured in the wheel by a nut on the outside of the wheel. The sensor contains a Printed Circuit Board which
houses a PTC (positive temperature coefficient)sensor, a Piezo pressure sensor, a radio receiver and transmitter and a lithium
battery.
The tire pressure sensors use the PTC sensor and the Piezo sensor to periodically measure the pressure and temperature of
the air inside the tire. The data is transmitted by RF data signals at either 315 MHz or 433 MHz dependant on market
requirements.
The RF transmission from the sensor contains a unique identification code in its transmission data. This allows the TPMS to
identify the wheel on the vehicle. If the sensor is replaced on a wheel, the new sensor identification will be learnt through the
learn and location process.
The tire pressure sensor can also detect when the wheel is rotating. In order to preserve battery power, the sensor uses
different transmission rates when the wheel is stationary or moving.
NOTE: For important information regarding the removal and fitting of tire pressure sensors and associated valves, see the
Tire Changing section.
Instrument Cluster Indications
Item Description
1 Low tire pressure warning indicator
2 Message center
The warning indications to the driver are common on all vehicles fitted with TPMS. The driver is alerted to system warnings by
a low tire pressure warning indicator in the instrument cluster and an applicable text message in the message centre.
The TPMS module passes system status information to the instrument cluster on the medium speed CAN bus. The instrument
cluster converts this data into illumination of the warning indicator and the display of an appropriate message.
When the ignition is switched on, the warning indicator is illuminated for 3 seconds for a bulb check.
NOTE: If the vehicle is not fitted with the TPMS, the warning indicator will not illuminate.
The instrument cluster checks, within the 3 second bulb check period, for a CAN bus message from the TPMS. During this time
the TPMS performs internal tests and CAN bus initialization. The warning indicator will be extinguished if the TPMS module
does not issue a fault message or tire pressure warning message.
If a TPMS fault warning message is detected by the instrument cluster at ignition on, the warning indicator will flash for 72
seconds after the 3 second bulb check period and then remain permanently illuminated.
If a tire pressure warning message is detected by the instrument cluster at ignition on, the warning indicator will extinguish
briefly after the 3 second bulb check period, before re-illuminating to indicate a tire pressure warning.
The following table shows the warning indicator functionality for given events:
Event Instrument Cluster Indications

Low pressure warning limit reached in one wheel Warning indicator illuminated. 'CHECK TYRE PRESSURE' message displayed
and applicable tire highlighted on display.
Low pressure warning limit reached in one or Warning indicator illuminated. 'CHECK ALL TYRE PRESSURES' message
more wheels in low speed mode (only if displayed.
programmed or learning)
TPMS fault Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then permanently
illuminated. The flash sequence repeats after ignition on cycle. 'TYRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message displayed.
No transmission from a specific tire pressure Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then permanently
sensor or Specific tire pressure sensor fault illuminated. The flash sequence repeats after ignition on cycle. 'TYRE NOT
MONITORED' message displayed.
No transmission from more than one tire pressure Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then permanently
sensor or more than one tire pressure sensor illuminated. The flash sequence repeats after ignition on cycle. 'TYRE
fault PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message displayed.
CAN (controller area network) signals missing Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then permanently
illuminated. The flash sequence repeats after ignition on cycle. 'TYRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message displayed.
Vehicle enters high speed mode (only available in Warning indicator illuminated. 'TYRE PRESSURE LOW FOR SPEED' message
certain markets) displayed.
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires
For a detailed description of the wheels and tires, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Wheels and Tires (Description and Operation),

Wheels and Tires (Description and Operation),
Wheels and Tires (Description and Operation).
1. Verify the customer complaint. As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist in
diagnosing the cause(s). Confirm which of the following two warning types (A or B) exist for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System when the ignition status is switched from 'OFF' to 'ON'
(A) Check Tire Pressure Warnings. A low tire pressure warning will continuously illuminate the low tire
pressure warning lamp. This warning may be accompanied by a text message such as CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
(refer to owner literature). The manufacturer approved diagnostic system does NOT need to be used. Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) are not generated with this type of warning. To extinguish this warning it is essential that,
with the ignition 'ON', all vehicle tires (including the spare) are to be set to the correct pressure as stated in the
vehicle handbook or as indicated on the placard label in the passenger/driver door aperture. It is not necessary
to drive the vehicle to clear 'check tire pressure' warnings - just changing the tire pressure causes the tire
low pressure sensor to transmit new data.
NOTES:
The tire pressures should be set by:
Using a calibrated tire pressure gauge

With 'cold' tires (vehicle parked in the ambient temperature for at least one hour, not in a garage with an
artificial ambient temperature)
If the tire pressure warning does not clear within two minutes, it is likely that the gauge is not correctly
calibrated or the tires are 'warm'. Carry out the following steps until the warning has cleared:
Increase the tire pressures by 3psi

Wait a further two minutes
When the tires are at ambient temperature and a calibrated gauge is available, reset the tire pressures
to the correct pressure.
Tire pressure adjustments are part of routine owner maintenance. Tire pressure adjustments that are
required due to a lack of owner maintenance are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.
(B) System Fault Warnings. When a system fault is detected, the low tire pressure warning lamp will flash for
approximately 75 seconds prior to being continuously illuminated. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage
and system integrity. Check for the presence of tire low pressure sensors on all four wheels (note: a tire low
pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one).
2. Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
NOTE: If the tester fails to communicate with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module, the following actions are
recommended:
Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse, inspect and re-install (if intact). Test to see if
communications have been re-established.
Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System ignition fuse (if applicable), inspect and re-install (if intact). Test to see if
communications have been re-established.
With ignition status set to 'ON', refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Tire Pressure Monitoring System
module for power, ignition and ground supplies .
Carry out CAN network integrity test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
DTC Index
CAUTION: When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit, part
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
the installation of a new module/component.
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. If this is the case, match the five
digits from the scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give extra
information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
account.
DTC Description Possible Cause Action

C1A56-31 Left Front Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Sensor and Transmitter Missing, incompatible or
Assembly-no signal defective tire low pressure
sensor or radio frequency
receiver
C1A56-68 Left Front Tire Pressure No action required.

Sensor and Transmitter Information only - vehicle
Assembly-event information exposed to extreme
temperature environment
and/or tire low pressure
sensor low battery voltage
event
C1A56-91 Left Front Tire Pressure Replace defective tire low pressure sensor. Refer to
Sensor and Transmitter Tire low pressure sensor the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Assembly-parametric has reported out of range
temperature or acceleration
C1A56-93 Left Front Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test G.

Sensor and Transmitter No tire low pressure sensor
Assembly-no operation can be localized at this
position due to an initiator
or tire low pressure sensor
malfunction
C1A57-11 Left Front Initiator-circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B. Refer to Pinpoint test B1

short to ground Left front initiator circuit is
short to ground
C1A57-12 Left Front Initiator-circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B. Go to Pinpoint test B2

short to battery Left front initiator circuit is
short to power
C1A57-13 Left Front Initiator-circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B. Go to Pinpoint test B9

open Left front initiator circuit
open
C1A58-31 Right Front Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test F.

receiver
C1A58-68 Right Front Tire Pressure No action required.

event
C1A58-91 Right Front Tire Pressure Replace defective tire low pressure sensor. refer to
C1A58-93 Right Front Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test G.

malfunction
C1A59-11 Right Front Initiator-circuit GO to Pinpoint Test C. Go to Pinpoint test C1

short to ground Right front initiator circuit
is short to ground

short to battery Right front initiator circuit
is short to power

open Right front initiator circuit
open
C1A60-31 Left Rear Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test F.

receiver
C1A60-68 Left Rear Tire Pressure No action required.

event
C1A60-91 Left Rear Tire Pressure Replace defective tire low pressure sensor, refer to
C1A60-93 Left Rear Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test G.

malfunction
C1A61-11 Left Rear Initiator-circuit GO to Pinpoint Test D. Go to Pinpoint test D1

short to ground Left rear initiator circuit
short to ground

short to battery Left rear initiator circuit
short to power

open Left rear initiator circuit
open
C1A62-31 Right Rear Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test F.

receiver
C1A62-68 Right Rear Tire Pressure No action required.

event
www.JagDocs.com
C1A62-91 Right Rear Tire Pressure Replace defective tire low pressure sensor, refer to
C1A62-93 Right Rear Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test G.

malfunction
C1A63-11 Right Rear Initiator-circuit GO to Pinpoint Test E. Go to Pinpoint test E1

short to ground Right rear initiator circuit
short to ground

short to battery Right rear initiator circuit
short to power

open Right rear initiator circuit
open
C1A64-68 Spare Wheel Tire Pressure No action required.

event
C1A64-91 Spare Wheel Tire Pressure Replace defective tire low pressure sensor, refer to
C1A64-93 Spare Wheel Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test H.

Assembly-no operation defective tire low pressure
receiver
C1D19-11 External Receiver Data GO to Pinpoint Test A.

Line-circuit short to ground Tire pressure monitoring
receiver or data line circuit
is short to ground
C1D19-12 External Receiver Data GO to Pinpoint Test I.

Line-circuit short to battery Tire pressure monitoring
receiver or data line circuit
is short to power
C1D19-87 External Receiver Data GO to Pinpoint Test J.

Line-missing message Radio Frequency reception
blocked
receiver faulty
receiver or data line
circuits open circuit
Missing, incompatible or
defective tire low pressure
sensors
U0010-88 Medium Speed CAN Carry out CAN network integrity tests. Refer to the
Communication Bus-bus off CAN bus fault electrical wiring diagrams and check CAN network for
short, open circuit.
U0140-00 Lost communication with Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
body control module-no sub CAN bus fault Central Junction Box power and ground supplies for
type information Central Junction Box fault short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity
tests.
U0142-00 Lost Communication With Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
Body Control Module "B" CAN bus fault Auxiliary Junction Box power and ground supplies for
-no sub type information Auxiliary Junction Box fault short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity
tests.
U0155-00 Lost Communications With Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
Instrument Panel Cluster CAN bus fault instrument cluster power and ground supplies for
(IPC) Control Module-no Instrument cluster fault short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity
sub type information tests.
U0164-00 Lost Communication With Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
HVAC Control Module-no CAN bus fault climate control module power and ground supplies for
sub type information Climate control module short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity
fault tests.
U0300-00 Internal Control Module Check correct tire pressure monitoring system module
Software Incompatibility-no Incompatible tire pressure is installed to vehicle specification, otherwise
sub type information monitoring system module suspect the Auxiliary Junction Box.
for vehicle CAN network
U0415-00 Invalid Data Received From Check Anti-Lock Braking System control module and
Anti-Lock Brake System Invalid data received from Instrument Cluster for related DTCs and refer to the
(ABS) Control Module-no the Anti-Lock Braking relevant DTC Index. Carry out CAN network integrity
subtype information System Control Module tests.
CAN bus fault
Anti-Lock Braking System
fault
U0424-00 Invalid Data Received From Check climate control module for related DTCs and
HVAC Control Module-no HVAC control module fault refer to relevant DTC Index.
sub type information
U1A14-49 CAN Initialisation Failure- Install a new tire pressure monitoring module. Refer
internal electronic failure Tire pressure monitoring to the new module/component installation note at
system module fault the top of the DTC Index.
U3000-55 Control Module-not Check and amend the car configuration file.
configured Tire pressure monitoring
system configuration data
is invalid
U3000-87 Control Module-missing Check the Auxiliary Junction Box for related DTCs and
message Tire pressure monitoring refer to the relevant DTC Index. Carry out CAN
system configuration data network integrity test.
not received

Number - invalid serial data Tire pressure monitoring
NOTE: This DTC indicates that the tire pressure
received system module and vehicle
monitoring system module is not the original part
VIN mis-match
installed to the vehicle at the factory/dealer and
could have been substituted. Refer to the note above
the DTC index about replacing components which may
remain under manufacturer warranty.
Re-install the original or a new tire pressure

monitoring system control module.
Component Tests
Wheels and Tires
For wheel and tire specification information (pressures, torques, etc).
When replacing wheels or tires, local legislation regarding health and safety must be complied with.
If the vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitoring System installed, only Jaguar approved wheels and tires should be used. If the
wheel and tire size is changed (for example from R18 to R20) the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module should be updated
with the correct pressure information appropriate to the new wheel and tire set. Update the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
module using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
As a general guideline, only replace tires in pairs or as a set, and only with tires of equivalent size and specification.
Confirm the symptoms of the customer complaint.
As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist in diagnosing the cause(s).
1. Before a road test, carry out a basic inspection to make sure the vehicle is safe and legal to drive.
Basic inspection
Correct tire inflation

Legal tire tread depth
Cuts/Bulges in tire sidewall(s)
Tire ply separation
Embedded objects
Wheel rim damage
Correct tire installation (specification, direction of rotation, etc)
Any obvious distortion of the tire (flat/high spots)
Worn/Damaged steering or suspension components
Road test
If the results of the basic inspection are acceptable, carry out a road test to confirm the symptoms.
To reproduce the symptoms, test the vehicle on similar roads to those on which the fault occurs and at similar speeds
(provided it is legal to do so).
If the vibration or noise can be reproduced, note the speed at which it occurs and see if it is possible to drive through the
symptom, meaning, is it possible to alter the fault by driving faster or slower than the speed at which it occurs?
If it is possible, it is likely that the fault is caused by an imbalance in the wheel or tire.
If the vibration or noise gets worse as the vehicle speed increases, it is likely that the fault is caused by distortion in the
wheel or tire, or worn or damaged components.
Distortion checks
Check for distortion by raising the vehicle so that the wheels are free and placing an axle stand or similar fixed object next to
each wheel in turn.
If the stand is placed at the tread of the tire, the tire can be checked for ovality by turning the wheel by hand and checking for
high or low spots where the gap between the tread and the stand increases or reduces.
If the stand is placed next to the wheel rim or tire sidewall, the wheel and tire can be checked for run-out in a similar way.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : C1D1911 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE
CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

A1: C1D1911 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, C3MC45.
3 Measure the resistance between
C3MC45, harness side Battery

Pin 1 Negative terminal
Is the resistance less than 5 Ohms?
Yes
GO to A2.GO to A2.
No
GO to A3.GO to A3.
A2: C1D1911 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector, C3MC39B.

Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to A4.GO to A4.
A3: C1D1911 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
GROUND
1 Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, C3MC45.
2 Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system run On Demand Self Test (0x0202).
Is the DTC C1D1911 set?
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
Investigate possible cause of intermittent failure.
A4: C1D1911 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
GROUND
1 Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector, C3MC39B.
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module.
No
PINPOINT TEST B : LEFT FRONT LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

B1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the left hand front low-frequency initiator electrical
connector, C1MC40.
3 Measure the resistance between:

Is the resistance less than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to B5.
No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Pin 2 Positive terminal
Yes
GO to B6.
No
GO to B3.
B3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND

Yes
GO to B7.
No
GO to B4.
B4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
GO to B8.
No
GO to B9.
B5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
1 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module connector,
C3MC39A.

Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. This circuit contains intermediate
connector, C13-B. For additional information, refer to the wiring
diagram. Clear the DTC and run an On Demand Self Test (ODST)
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
rectification.
No
INSTALL a new Tire Pressure Monitoring System module. REFER to:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module (204-04 Wheels
and Tires, Removal and Installation).
C3MC39A.

Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.
www.JagDocs.com

Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.

Yes
rectification.
No
B9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
C3MC39A, harness side C1MC40, harness side

Pin 14 Pin 2
Is the resistance greater than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the high resistance circuit. This circuit contains
intermediate connector, C13-B. For additional information, refer to
the wiring diagram. Clear the DTC and run an On Demand Self Test
(ODST) using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system to
confirm rectification.
No
GO to B10.
B10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Pin 13 Pin 1
Yes
No
INSTALL a new left hand front low-frequency initiator. REFER to:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (204-04
Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
PINPOINT TEST C : RIGHT FRONT LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

C1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the right hand front low-frequency initiator electrical
connector, C1MC41.


Yes
GO to C5.
No
GO to C2.
C2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
GO to C6.
No
GO to C3.
C3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND

Yes
GO to C7.
No
GO to C4.
C4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
GO to C8.
No
GO to C9.
C5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
C9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Pin 16 Pin 2
Yes
No
GO to C10.
C10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Pin 15 Pin 1
Yes
No
INSTALL a new right hand front low-frequency initiator. REFER to:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (204-04
PINPOINT TEST D : LEFT REAR LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

D1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the left hand rear low-frequency initiator electrical
connector, C4MC42.


Yes
GO to D5.
No
GO to D2.
D2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
GO to D6.
No
GO to D3.
D3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND

Yes
GO to D7.
No
GO to D4.
D4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
www.JagDocs.com

Yes
GO to D8.
No
GO to D9.
D5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
C3MC39A.


Yes
connector, C44-W. For additional information, refer to the wiring
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
D9: CHECK THE INITIATOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Pin 6 Pin 2
Yes
intermediate connector, C44-W. For additional information, refer to
No
GO to E1.
D10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Pin 5 Pin 1
Yes
intermediate connector, C44-W. For additional information, refer to
No
INSTALL a new rear left hand low-frequency initiator. REFER to:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (204-04
PINPOINT TEST E : RIGHT REAR LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

E1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the right hand rear low-frequency initiator electrical
connector, C4MC43.


Yes
GO to E5.
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
GO to E6.
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND

Yes
GO to E7.
No
GO to E4.
E4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
GO to E8.
No
GO to E9.
E5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
C3MC39A.


Yes
connector, C44-Y. For additional information, refer to the wiring
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
E9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Pin 8 Pin 2
Yes
intermediate connector, C44-Y. For additional information, refer to
No
GO to E10.
E10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
www.JagDocs.com

Pin 7 Pin 1
Yes
intermediate connector, C44-Y. For additional information, refer to
No
INSTALL a new rear right hand low-frequency initiator. REFER to:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (204-04
PINPOINT TEST F : MISSING, INCOMPATIBLE OR DEFECTIVE RUNNING TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
OR RECEIVER
CONDITIONS
F1: CHECK FOR CORRECT WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY AND TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Establish that a full size running wheel and tire assembly has a tire low pressure sensor installed. As a
visual confirmation, a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one and
cannot be installed to a mini/space saver spare wheel.
Is a full size wheel and tire assembly with tire low pressure sensor installed?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
Install the correct wheel and tire assembly or tire low pressure sensor, of correct frequency, in accordance
with that defined in the manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor
application.
F2: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse and re-install it. Clear DTCs and leave
the vehicle stationary for 15 minutes, then drive it at a speed greater than 15.5 mph (25 kph)
continuously for at least 10 minutes.
(Note: If the vehicle speed drops below this value, the drive time to complete the test will need to be increased.)
The use of the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal ’Tire pressure
monitor system status – learn mode status’ will verify the completion of the test when the value returns
to ‘Inactive’.
2 Check for additional DTCs C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031, C1A6231, with identical time stamps.
Have all four DTCs logged with identical time stamps in the tire pressure monitoring system module?
Yes
Replace the tire pressure monitoring system radio frequency receiver.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Receiver (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
No
GO to F3.
F3: VERIFY THE POSITION OF THE DEFECTIVE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Check tire pressure monitoring system DTCs.
Are any C1AXX31 DTCs logged?
Yes
Install the correct tire low pressure sensor, of correct frequency, in accordance with that defined in the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application, to the position
identified by the logged DTC.
REFER to: Tire Low Pressure Sensor (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
No
No further action is required.
(Note: The use of the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal ’Tire pressure monitor system status – learn
completed successfully’ will verify the successful completion of the test.)
PINPOINT TEST G : LOCALIZATION FAILURE
CONDITIONS
G1: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Check for additional DTCs: C1A5711, C1A5712, C1A5713. C1A5911, C1A5912, C1A5913, C1A6111,
C1A6112, C1A6113, C1A6311, C1A6312, C1A6313.
Are any of the DTCs listed above also logged?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index and remedial actions.
No
GO to G2.
G2: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Check for additional DTCs: C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031 or C1A6231
Is a C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031 or C1A6231 DTC also logged?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index and remedial actions.
No
GO to G3.
G3: CHECK INITIATOR INSTALLATION
1 Check for correct installation of Initiator. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (Removal and Installation).
Is the Initiator correctly installed?
Yes
GO to G4.
No
Rectify as required. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (Removal and Installation).
G4: CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN INITIATOR HARNESS
1 Locate and remove module blue connector L.
2 Measure the resistance across the relevant initiator circuits within the blue connector.
Is the resistance less than 1 Ohm?
Yes
A value of less than 1 Ohm indicates a short circuit, rectify the short circuit as required.
No
manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application, to the position
identified by the logged DTC.
REFER to: Tire Low Pressure Sensor (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
PINPOINT TEST H : SPARE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR NO OPERATION
CONDITIONS
H1: ESTABLISH THE TYPE OF SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY INSTALLED
1 Establish the type of spare wheel and tire assembly Installed.
Is the spare wheel a mini/space saver type?
Yes
Tire low pressure sensors are not installed to mini/space-saver spare wheels. Tire low pressure sensors
are installed to full size spare wheels only. The DTC is to be ignored and no repair action is required.
No
GO to H2.
H2: ESTABLISH THAT THE SPARE WHEEL HAS A TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR INSTALLED
1 Establish that the spare wheel has a tire low pressure sensor installed, considering the following
additional information:
a) As a visual confirmation, the tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber
one.
Is a tire low pressure sensor installed?

Yes
GO to H3.
No
A new spare tire low pressure sensor should be installed. Note: Refer to the note above the DTC index
about replacing components which may remain under manufacturer warranty. Refer to the relevant section
of the workshop manual.
H3: CONFIRM OPERATION OF THE SPARE WHEEL PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Deflate the spare tire, in close proximity to the vehicle, until it is completely deflated.
2 Complete an ignition cycle to ignition on and verify that the instrument cluster reports a spare tire
pressure warning for approximately 20 seconds.
3 Re-inflate the spare tire, in close proximity to the vehicle, to the recommended spare tire pressure.
4 Complete an ignition cycle to ignition on and verify that the instrument cluster no longer reports a spare
tire pressure warning.
Does the instrument cluster continue to report a spare tire pressure warning?
Yes
GO to H4.
No
No repair action is required. It is possible that the customer may have placed items in the vehicle's
luggage compartment that prevented correct RF reception.
H4: VERIFY THAT THE SPARE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR ID HAS BEEN CORRECTLY PROGRAMMED TO THE
MODULE
1 Remove tire low pressure sensor. Record the 8 character hexadecimal ID written on the casing.
2 Use the approved diagnostic system to read the spare tire sensor ID from the module. Refer to the
relevant procedure in the workshop manual.
3 Compare the IDs from steps 1 & 2.
Do the IDs match?
Yes
Replace the spare tire low pressure sensor. Refer to the relevant installation section in the workshop
manual.
The identification for the sensor must be programmed into the tire pressure monitoring system module
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. The identification code is provided on a label with
the complete assembly and is also printed on the casing of each sensor.
No
Program the spare tire sensor ID, recorded in step 1, to the module using the approved diagnostic
system. The identification code is provided on a label with the complete assembly and is also printed on
the casing of each sensor.
Repeat test to ensure correct operation.GO to H3.
PINPOINT TEST I : C1D1912 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE
CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER

I1: C1D1912 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER
1 Ignition off.

Yes
GO to I2.
No
GO to I3.
I2: C1D1912 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to I4.
I3: C1D1912 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
POWER
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
I4: C1D1912 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST J : C1D1987 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE
MISSING MESSAGE
CONDITIONS
J1: C1D1987 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE MISSING MESSAGE
Yes
GO to J2.
No
GO to J5.
J2: C1D1987 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT
1 Ignition off.
C3MC45, harness side C3MC39B, harness side

Pin 1 Pin4
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to J3.
No
REPAIR the high resistance/open circuit in wiring harness.
J3: C1D1987 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.GO to J4.
No
J4: C1D1987 CHECK TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE
Yes
No
Test is complete. No further action is required.
J5: C1D1987 CHECK WHEELS HAVE TIRE SENSORS INSTALLED
NOTE: As a visual check, a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one
and cannot be installed to a mini/space saver spare wheel.
1 Check that all full size running wheel and tire assemblies have tire low pressure sensors installed.
Is a full size wheel and tire assembly with tire low pressure sensor installed to all running wheel positions?
Yes
GO to J6.
No
If agreed with the customer install correct tire low pressure sensors in accordance with that defined in
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application, as required.
(Note: Confirm why the vehicle has non-Tire Pressure Monitoring System wheel & tire assemblies installed before installing tire low
pressure sensors, which are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.)
J6: C1D1987 CHECK TIRE SENSOR COMPATIBILITY TO TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM RECEIVER
1 Remove tire low pressure sensor from 1 wheel.
2 Verify the tire low pressure sensor part number from the information on the casing.
Is the tire low pressure sensor the correct part for the vehicle?
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.Carry out the following to verify repair.
Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse and re-install it. Clear DTCs and leave
the vehicle stationary for 15 minutes, then drive it at a speed greater than 15.5 mph (25 kph)
continuously for at least 10 minutes.
(Note: If the vehicle speed drops below this value, the drive time to complete the test will need to be increased. The use of the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal ’Tire pressure monitor system status – learn mode status’ will verify
the completion of the test when the value returns to ‘Inactive’.)
No
manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application, to the position(s)
identified.
(Note: Confirm why the vehicle has incorrect Tire Pressure Monitoring System wheel & tire assemblies installed before installing tire low
pressure sensors, which are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.)
Wheels and Tires - Tire Low Pressure Sensor
Removal
Installation).
3. Remove the tire from the wheel, release the tire bead from the rim 180
degrees from the valve.
4.
5.
Discard the tire valve and retaining nut.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the seal is correctly located.
Make sure that new components are installed.
Install the washer and seal, making sure the valve remains
pressed fully onto its seat.
2. WARNINGS:
Make sure that any corrosion or dirt is removed from the

mating surfaces.
Make sure that a new tire valve, valve core, seal, washer,
cap and retaining nut is installed.
CAUTIONS:
Use lint free cloth.
Only use moderate force when installing the sensor.
NOTE: Only tighten the nut finger tight at this stage.
Install the tire low pressure sensor and support the

sensor body in position.
Support the back of the valve stem in order to prevent
rotation to the tire low pressure sensor body.
Gently push the nut towards the center of the wheel.
Tighten the nut.
Torque: 8 Nm
3. Install the tire and balance the wheel.
Installation).
Lower the vehicle.

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna
Removal
2. NOTES:
This step requires the aid of another technician.
Lower the radiator splash shield enough to access the tire pressure
monitoring system front antenna.
Note the position of the component before removal.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is secured in the retainer.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is installed to the noted

removal position.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna
Removal
Installation).
3.
4. NOTE: Note the position of the component before

removal.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is secured in the retainer.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is installed to the noted

removal position.

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module
Removal
1. Switch the igntion off.
2. Remove the right-hand front seat.
Refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: B-Pillar Lower Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
4. Detach and reposition the floor covering.
5.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
Installation

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Receiver
Removal
NOTES:
The tire pressure monitoring system receiver is installed in the same location on both LHD and RHD vehicles.
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Remove the left-hand floor console side trim panel.
Refer to: Floor Console Side Trim Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel and
Console, Removal and Installation).
3.
4.
Installation
2. Configure the tire pressure monitoring system using the diagnostic tool.
Wheels and Tires - Wheel and Tire
Removal
2. Torque: 125 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Apply a small amount of grease to the hub and wheel mating
surfaces before installation. Make sure the grease does not come into
contact with the vehicles braking components and the wheel stud
threads. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol - Component Location
Component Location - Supercharged Vehicles from 2010MY
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) front-spring and damper assembly
2 RH rear suspension height sensor
3 RH rear-spring and damper assembly
4 Rear vertical accelerometer
5 LH (left-hand) rear-spring and damper assembly
6 LH rear suspension height sensor
7 Adaptive damping module
8 LH front-spring and damper assembly
www.JagDocs.com
9 LH front suspension height sensor
10 LH front vertical accelerometer
11 RH front suspension height sensor
12 RH front vertical accelerometer
S/C 5.0L Petrol - Overview
OVERVIEW
Adaptive Dynamics - Supercharged Vehicles from 2010MY
The adaptive dynamics system, is an electronically controlled suspension system which constantly adjusts the damping
characteristics of the suspension dampers in reaction to the existing driving conditions. The adaptive dynamics system is
available on specified models.
The system is controlled by an Adaptive Damping Module (ADM), located beneath the right-hand front seat. The module
receives signals from three dedicated vertical accelerometers; two at the front of the vehicle and one at the rear, which,
together with four suspension height sensors, determine the state of the body and wheel motions. In addition to these inputs,
further signals from other vehicle electronic system components to determine vehicle state and driver inputs are monitored by
the adaptive damping module. These combined signals are used by the adaptive damping module to continuously adjust the
damping characteristics of each of the suspension dampers in reaction to the current driving conditions to give the optimum
body control and vehicle ride.
S/C 5.0L Petrol - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) (Megafuse (250 A)
3 AJB (auxiliary junction box)
5 ATC (automatic temperature control) module
6 Fuse 36 (10 A) - from delayed power-off relay
7 Rear accelerometer
9 JaguarDrive selector module
10 ABS (anti-lock brake system) module
11 TCM (transmission control module)
12 ECM (engine control module)
13 RH (right-hand) rear damper
14 RH front damper
15 LH (left-hand) front damper
16 LH rear damper
17 LH rear suspension height sensor
18 RH rear suspension height sensor
19 LH front suspension height sensor
20 RH front accelerometer
21 RH front suspension height sensor
22 Adaptive damping module
23 LH front accelerometer
System Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The adaptive damping module uses a combination of information from other system modules and data from the accelerometers
and suspension height sensors to measure the vehicle and suspension states and driver inputs. Using this information, the
adaptive damping module applies algorithms to control the dampers for the current driving conditions.
The adaptive damping module receives signals on the high speed CAN bus from the following system components:
Brake Pressure - ABS module.

Brake Pressure Quality Factor - ABS module.
Car Configuration Parameters - AJB.
Center Differential Range Actual - ECM.
Engine Speed - ECM.
Engine Speed Quality Factor - ECM.
Engine Torque Flywheel Actual - ECM.
Engine Torque Flywheel Actual Quality Factor - ECM.
Gear Position Target - TCM.
Lateral Acceleration - ABS module.
Power Mode (Ignition Signal) - CJB.
Power Mode Quality Factor - CJB.
Roll Stability Control Mode - ABS module.
Steering Wheel Angle - ABS module.
Steering Wheel Angle Speed - ABS module.
Steering Wheel Angle Status - ABS module.
Terrain Mode Requested - JaguarDrive selector.
Torque Converter Slip - TCM.
Vehicle Information Parameters HS - AJB
Vehicle Speed - ABS module.
Vehicle Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Front Left Wheel Speed - ABS module.
Front Left Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Front Right Wheel Speed - ABS module.
Front Right Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Rear Left Wheel Speed - ABS module.
Rear Left Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Rear Right Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Rear Right Wheel Speed - ABS module.
The adaptive damping module also outputs information on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems as follows:
Fault Message - instrument cluster.

Terrain Mode Change Status - JaguarDrive selector.
Terrain Mode - JaguarDrive selector.
The adaptive damping module monitors the input signals and operates the damper solenoids. The input signals are used in
control modes and a force required for each damper for that mode is calculated. An arbitration mode monitors the force
requirements from each mode and apportions a force to a damper. The force is converted to the appropriate current and sent to
the damper.
The control modes are as follows:

Body Control – Uses CAN and accelerometer inputs. Calculates road induced body motions 100 times a second and sets
each damper to the appropriate level to maintain a flat and level body.
Roll Rate Control – Uses CAN inputs. Predicts vehicle roll rate due to driver steering inputs 100 times a second and
increases damping to reduce roll rate.
Pitch Rate Control – Uses CAN inputs. Predicts vehicle pitch rate due to driver throttle and braking inputs 100 times a
second and increases damping to reduce pitch rate.
Bump Rebound Control – Uses suspension height sensor and CAN inputs. Monitors the position of the wheel 500 times
a second and increases the damping rate as the damper approaches the end of its travel.
Wheel Hop Control – Uses suspension height sensor and CAN inputs. Monitors the position of the wheel 500 times a
second and detects when the wheel is at its natural frequency and increases the dampingto reduce vertical wheel
motion.
Under normal road conditions when the vehicle is stationary with the engine running, the dampers are set to the firm condition
to reduce power consumption.
The adaptive damping module receives its power supply via a relay and fuse in the CJB. The relay remains energized for a
period of time after the ignition is off. This allows the adaptive damping module to record and store any DTC (diagnostic
trouble code) relating to adaptive dynamics system faults.
DAMPERS
Item Description
A Front spring and damper assembly
B Rear spring and damper assembly
The 'Adaptive Dynamics' dampers are monotube, nitrogen gas and oil filled units, manufactured by Bilstein. The dampers are
continuously variable, which allows the damping force to be electrically adjusted when the vehicle is being driven. The variable
dampers provide the optimum compromise between vehicle control and ride comfort.
The dampers have an electrical connector on the end of the piston rod, in the center of the top mount (the dampers look
identical to those on the Computer Active Technology Suspension (CATS) system of 4.2L supercharged vehicles, but have a
different part number).
In each damper, the continuous damping adjustment is achieved by a solenoid operated variable orifice, which opens up an
alternative path for oil flow within the damper. When de-energized the bypass is closed and all the oil flows through the main
(firm) piston. When energized, the solenoid moves an armature and control blade, which work against a spring. The control
blade incorporates an orifice which slides inside a sintered housing to open up the bypass as required. In compression, oil
flows from the lower portion of the damper through a hollow piston rod, a separate soft (comfort) valve, the slider housing and
orifice and into the upper portion of the damper, thereby bypassing the main (firm) valve. In rebound the oil flows in the
www.JagDocs.com
opposite direction.
In the firm setting, oil flows through the main (firm) valve only, but when the bypass is opened by any amount the oil flows
through both valves in a pressure balance. When fully energized the solenoid moves the armature and therefore the slider to
the maximum extension and opens the orifice completely. The damper operates continuously between these two boundary
conditions.
The solenoid in each damper is operated by a 526 Hz PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the adaptive damping module.
When fully energized, the adaptive damping module applies a 1.5 A current to operate the damper in the soft setting. When
de-energized (0.0 A) the damper is in the firm setting. The current varies continuously as required to increase and decrease
the damping individually in each of the dampers.
Sectioned Views of Damper Operating States
Item Description
A Firm setting
B Soft setting
C Main oil flow
D Bypass oil flow
1 Bypass valve (open)
2 Main piston
3 Tube
4 Bypass valve (closed)
5 Piston and rod assembly
ACCELEROMETERS
Three accelerometers are used in the adaptive dynamics system. The accelerometers are located as follows:
One each on the rear edge of the radiator support panel.

One in the luggage compartment, in the rear LH corner adjacent to the rear lamp assembly.
The accelerometers measure acceleration in the vertical plane and output a corresponding analogue signal to the adaptive
damping module. The algorithms in the adaptive damping module calculate the heave, pitch and roll motions of the vehicle,
which are used by the module to control road induced body modes.
Each accelerometer is connected to the adaptive damping module via three wires, which supply ground, 5 V supply and signal
return.
The sensing element comprises a single parallel plate capacitor, one plate of which moves relative to the other dependant on
the force (acceleration) applied. This causes the capacitance to change as a function of applied acceleration. This capacitance
is compared with a fixed reference capacitor in a bridge circuit and the signal is processed by means of a dedicated integrated
circuit to generate an output voltage that varies as a function of applied acceleration. The sensors output a signal voltage of
approximately 1 V/g ± 0.05 V/g.
SUSPENSION HEIGHT SENSORS
Four suspension height sensors are used in the adaptive dynamics system, two for the front suspension and two for the rear
suspension. A front suspension height sensor is attached to each side of the front subframes and connected by a sensor arm
and sensor link to the related lower lateral arm of the front suspension. A rear suspension height sensor is attached to each
side of the rear subframe and connected by a sensor arm and sensor link to the related upper control arm of the rear
suspension. On each suspension height sensor, the sensor arm and sensor link convert linear movement of the suspension into
rotary movement of the sensor shaft.
The sensors are also used for the static dynamic headlamp leveling system on vehicles fitted with xenon headlamps.
The suspension height sensors measure suspension displacement at each corner of the vehicle and output a corresponding
analogue signal to the adaptive damping module. The algorithms in the adaptive damping module calculate the position,
velocity and frequency content of the signals and use the results for wheel control.
Each suspension height sensor is connected to the adaptive damping module via three wires, which supply ground, 5 V supply
and signal return.
The sensing element consists of an array of Hall effect devices arranged to measure the direction of the magnetic field of a
small magnet attached to the end of the sensor shaft. As the sensor shaft rotates, so do the lines of magnetic flux from the
magnet. The signals from the Hall effect elements are processed by means of a dedicated integrated circuit to generate an
output voltage that varies as the sensor shaft is rotated. The sensor has a measurement range of ± 40° around its nominal
position and the nominal sensitivity is 57 mV/° of shaft rotation.
ADAPTIVE DAMPING MODULE
The adaptive damping module is installed on the floor pan, below the RH front seat.
System Fault Message
The adaptive damping module has a high speed CAN connection to the instrument cluster. If a fault is detected by the
adaptive damping module, a message is sent to the instrument cluster and the message 'ADAPTIVE DYNAMICS FAULT' is
displayed. The adaptive damping module also logs an appropriate DTC. The adaptive damping module can be interrogated
using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system.
When a fault is detected, the adaptive damping module implements a strategy based on the type of fault. If there is an
electrical power fault, or the adaptive damping module cannot control the dampers, they default to the firm condition. If a
sensor fails that only affects one or more control modes then an intermediate damper setting is used as the lower threshold
and the remaining working modes can demand higher damping as required.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
For a detailed description of the adaptive damping system operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of
the workshop manual. REFER to: (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension)
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (Description and Operation),

1. Verify the customer concern.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical Electrical
Coil spring(s) Fuse(s)

Shock absorber(s) Wiring harness/electrical connectors
Accelerometer(s) installation Accelerometer(s)
Height sensor(s) installation Adaptive Damping Control Module
Height sensor(s)
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the
DTC index.
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Adaptive Damping Module (SUMB) (100-00 General Information,
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Adaptive Damping Module
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
3. Detach and reposition the floor covering.
4.
5.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 5 Nm
6.
Installation

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Front Suspension Vertical Accelerometer
Removal

2. Refer to: Fender Splash Shield (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal
and Installation).
3. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely delicate

component and can easily be rendered unserviceable. Never
use an accelerometer which has been dropped or subjected
to mistreatment of any type.
Torque: 5 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely delicate component

and can easily be rendered unserviceable. Never use an accelerometer
which has been dropped or subjected to mistreatment of any type.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Rear Suspension Vertical Accelerometer
Removal
1. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel LH (501-05 Interior Trim and

2. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely delicate

component and can easily be rendered unserviceable. Never
use an accelerometer which has been dropped or subjected
to mistreatment of any type.
Torque: 5 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely delicate component

and can easily be rendered unserviceable. Never use an accelerometer
which has been dropped or subjected to mistreatment of any type.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization -
Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
3 JaguarDrive Control selection buttons
Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization - Overview
OVERVIEW
JaguarDrive Control is a selectable vehicle optimisation system, designed to fine-tune the driving characteristics of the vehicle
by accommodating different driving conditions or driving styles. The system allows the performance envelope of the vehicle to
be stretched and prevents the necessity for a single, compromised configuration for all conditions. JaguarDrive Control
increases the vehicle's abilities by changing the characteristics of engine mapping, transmission shifts and stability and
traction interventions. The software for the JaguarDrive control is incorporated in the JaguarDrive selector module.
NOTE: The JaguarDrive Control system is a co-ordinating system only. It CANNOT generate a fault in one of the
participating sub-systems. All participating subsystems should be FULLY diagnosed before assuming a fault with JaguarDrive
Control. Replacing the JaguarDrive selector module should not be done until all other options have been exhausted.
www.JagDocs.com
Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization - System
Operation and Component Description
System Operation
JAGUARDRIVE CONTROL OPERATION
Engine Management System
The Engine Management System (EMS) varies the accelerator pedal maps to change the amount of torque per percentage of
pedal travel. The EMS can also change the accelerator pedal response to control the allowed torque change relative to the
speed of pedal travel.
Each driving mode uses a combination of operating parameters for each sub-system. Changing between driving modes initiates
a different set of operating characteristics, which will be noticeable to the driver. The driver will notice differences in engine
response when, for example, the accelerator pedal is held in a constant position and the driving mode is changed from Winter
to Dynamic, the driver will notice the torque and engine speed increase. Similarly, if the mode is changed from Normal or
Dynamic to Winter the driver will notice a reduction in torque and engine speed.
NOTE: The change in torque and engine speed can take approximately 30 seconds and care must be taken not to confuse
the JaguarDrive Control system operation with an EMS fault.
Transmission Control
The TCM (transmission control module) changes the shift maps for the JaguarDrive Control mode selected. This changes the
shift points providing early or late upshifts and downshifts. For example, on slippery surfaces in Winter mode the transmission
will select 2nd gear for starting from a standstill on a flat surface to minimize wheel slip.
Anti-lock Braking System Control
The ABS (anti-lock brake system) module controls several vehicle functions and adjusts the operating parameters of these
functions to optimize the selected JaguarDrive Control mode. Traction control uses different slip/acceleration thresholds to
improve traction and vehicle composure. For example, the system sensitivity is increased on slippery surfaces to reduce wheel
spin.
If TracDSC is selected or DSC is switched off, then subsequently the JaguarDrive Control mode is changed, DSC is automatically
switched back on (or to TracDSC for Dynamic mode).
The stability control uses different threshold values for the selected mode, reducing the requirement for the driver to change
the DSC system mode for optimum performance in various driving scenarios.
Incorrect Mode Usage
Selection of an inappropriate mode is discouraged in the following ways:
The active mode icon is continually displayed in the instrument cluster message center
In any special mode, when the ignition has been in the off position continuously for more than 6 hours, the JaguarDrive
Control system defaults to the special modes off (DSC on).
Selection of an inappropriate mode for the conditions will not endanger the driver or immediately cause damage to the vehicle.
Continued use of an inappropriate mode may reduce the life of some components. The driver may notice a different vehicle
response, with the engine and transmission responses being different than in the special modes off.
Driver Information
The instrument cluster contains a message center, which displays vehicle information to the driver. The message center
contains the JaguarDrive Control mode icons, which display the currently selected mode. If no symbol is displayed, no special
mode is selected and the system is in special modes off.
Any required changes to the subsystems are also passed to the driver in the form of warning illumination in the instrument
cluster or appropriate messages in the message center, DSC off for example.
In Dynamic mode when the transmission is in manual mode, the gear information is displayed in amber when the appropriate
engine speed is reached for optimum sporty change point.
DIAGNOSTICS
JaguarDrive Control relies on the correct functionality of the sub-systems. If one of the sub-systems develops a fault, the
JaguarDrive Control system will not function, even though the fault is not in the JaguarDrive Control system.
The JaguarDrive Selector module and rotary control should only be investigated if there are no apparent faults in any of the
sub-systems. If a fault in a sub-system is subsequently corrected, the JaguarDrive Control system will function normally after
an ignition on and off cycle.
JaguarDrive Control Sub-System Faults
If a fault occurs in a sub-system, the driver is alerted by the illumination of a warning indicator and/or an appropriate message
for that sub-system in the instrument cluster message center. No JaguarDrive Control message will be shown when a failed
sub-system displays its own message.
When a sub-system fault is present and the driver attempts to select a different JaguarDrive Control mode or at the next
ignition on cycle, a message 'WINTER MODE FAULT' or 'DYNAMIC MODE FAULT' will appear in the message center. This
generally implies that the JaguarDrive Control system has a fault, but only because a sub-system fault is preventing its
operation. This message will be displayed once per ignition cycle, but is repeated if a further selection is made by the driver
using the JaguarDrive Control buttons or at the next ignition on cycle.
NOTE: The message 'WINTER MODE FAULT' or 'DYNAMIC MODE FAULT' can also in very rare circumstances be generated
by a fault in the JaguarDrive Control module.
It is not possible for the JaguarDrive Control module to cause any fault behavior (warning indicator illumination or message
generation) in any of the sub-systems. Illumination of a sub-system warning indicator and/or a sub-system related message
will never be associated with a JaguarDrive Control module or JaguarDrive Control system fault.
The sub-system control modules can detect a fault with the CAN (controller area network) bus signal from the transmission
selector module. If a fault in the JaguarDrive Control system is detected, the sub-system control modules will operate in the
'special modes off' setting. The sub-system control modules will record a fault code for a failure of the JaguarDrive Control CAN
signal. These faults can be retrieved using the Jaguar approved diagnostic tool and will provide useful information to indicate
investigation of the JaguarDrive Selector module or the CAN bus network.
JaguarDrive Control System or Control Module Fault
If a fault occurs in the JaguarDrive Control system, all button icon LED (light emitting diode)'s will be turned off (background
illumination will remain on) and pressing of the JaguarDrive Control buttons is ignored. The instrument cluster message center
will display a message 'WINTER MODE FAULT' or 'DYNAMIC MODE FAULT' when the fault occurs, if the fault is present and the
driver attempts to select a special mode (if the control module is able to do this) or at the next ignition on cycle.
The JaguarDrive Control buttons and control module (JaguarDrive Selector module) are an integral unit. If a fault occurs in
either component, the whole unit will require replacement, however, this is extremely unlikely.
CAN Bus Faults
If a CAN bus fault exists and prevents JaguarDrive Control system operation, all of the JaguarDrive Control button icon LED's
will be illuminated and rotation pressing of the JaguarDrive Control buttons is ignored.
If the instrument cluster does not receive a JaguarDrive Control system CAN bus message from the JaguarDrive Control
module, the message 'SPECIAL MODE UNAVAILABLE' will be displayed when the fault occurs and will be repeated at every
ignition on cycle.
User Error
A special mode change while DSC or ABS is active (this includes ABS cycling) may be misinterpreted as a system fault.
JAGUARDRIVE CONTROL DESCRIPTION
JAGUARDRIVE CONTROLS
Item Description
1 Winter mode button
2 DSC/TracDSC mode button
3 ASL (automatic speed limiter) - Reference only, not part of JaguarDrive system
4 Dynamic mode (Supercharged models only)
The system is controlled by buttons adjacent to the JaguarDrive Selector located on the floor console. The buttons allow the
selection of one of the following 3 modes:
Special modes off

Winter mode
Dynamic mode (Supercharged models only).
The instrument cluster will display the selected JaguarDrive Control mode in the message center.
The JaguarDrive Control system uses a combination of a number of vehicle sub-systems to achieve the required vehicle
characteristics for the mode selected. The following sub-systems make up the JaguarDrive Control system:
The Engine Management System (EMS)

Automatic transmission
Brake system.
The JaguarDrive Control software is stored in the JaguarDrive Selector module located below the JaguarDrive selector. The
module detects the selection made using the buttons and transmits a signal on the high speed CAN bus, which is received by
each of the sub-system control modules.
Each of the affected sub-system control modules contain software, which applies the correct operating parameters to their
controlled system for the JaguarDrive Control mode selection made.
Each sub-system control module also provides a feedback for the selected mode so that the JaguarDrive Control software can
check that all systems have changed to the correct operating parameters.
NOTE: The JaguarDrive Control system is a co-ordinating system only. It CANNOT generate a fault in one of the
participating sub-systems. All participating sub-systems should be FULLY diagnosed before assuming a fault with JaguarDrive
Control. Replacing the JaguarDrive Selector module should not be done until all other options have been exhausted.
Winter Mode
To activate winter mode, press the winter mode button briefly (not less than 300 ms) to activate or de-activate the mode.
NOTE: Winter mode cannot be active at the same time as dynamic mode (Supercharged models only).
When active the winter mode icon and message appear in the instrument cluster message center to confirm the activation.
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
Press the DSC mode button briefly (not less than 300 ms) to switch between DSC and TracDSC. The instrument cluster
message center will display either 'DSC ON' or 'TRAC DSC' depending on which selection is made. When TracDSC is selected,
the DSC warning lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated and the DSC button is illuminated.
DSC can be manually switched off by pressing the DSC mode button for more than 10 seconds. Confirmation is given by a
chime from the instrument cluster, 'DSC OFF' is displayed in the instrument cluster message center and the DSC warning lamp
in the instrument cluster is illuminated.
NOTE: DSC is operational at all times when the engine is running unless manually switched off.
Dynamic Mode (Supercharged models only)
To activate Dynamic mode, press the button briefly. The dynamic mode and DSC buttons are illuminated. 'Dynamic Mode
Confirmed' message is displayed in the instrument cluster message center and the DSC off warning lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated (due to automatic selection of TracDSC in Dynamic mode).
NOTE: Dynamic mode cannot be active at the same time as winter mode.
Once activated, TracDSC is automatically selected. In gearbox Sport mode, the driver has full control over the transmission
shift points and the TCM will not intervene to prevent engine overspeed (for example; upshifts are inhibited in gearbox sport
mode when Dynamic mode is selected). In this setting, the gear indicator in the instrument cluster will turn amber at high
rev's to indicate an appropriate manual upshift point.
Driveline System - General Information - Driveline System
For a detailed description of driveline operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to:
Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Description and Operation),

Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Halfshafts (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Halfshafts (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Halfshafts (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation).
CAUTION: Only serviceable items can be renewed or adjusted. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the warranty
of the component being rejected.
Certain driveline trouble symptoms are also common to the engine, transmission, wheel bearings, tires, and other parts of the
vehicle. For this reason, make sure that the cause of the trouble is in the driveline before adjusting, repairing, or installing any
new components. For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual section 100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness.
1. Verify the customer concern by carrying out a road test of the vehicle.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage and system integrity.
the next step.
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Identify the Condition
Gear Howl and Whine
Howling or whining of the ring gear and pinion is due to an incorrect gear pattern, gear damage or incorrect bearing preload.
Bearing Whine
Bearing whine is a high-pitched sound similar to a whistle. It is usually caused by worn/damaged pinion bearings, which are
operating at driveshaft speed. Bearing noise occurs at all driving speeds. This distinguishes it from gear whine which is speed
dependent.
As noted, pinion bearings make a high-pitched, whistling noise, usually at all speeds. If however there is only one pinion
bearing that is worn/damaged, the noise may vary in different driving phases.
A wheel bearing noise can be mistaken for a pinion bearing noise.
Chuckle
Chuckle that occurs on the coast driving phase is usually caused by excessive clearance between the differential gear hub and
the differential case bore.
www.JagDocs.com
Damage to a gear tooth on the coast side can cause a noise identical to a chuckle. A very small tooth nick or ridge on the edge
of a tooth can cause the noise.
Knock
Knock, which can occur on all driving phases, has several causes including damaged teeth or gearset.
A gear tooth damaged on the drive side is a common cause of the knock.
Clunk
Clunk is a metallic noise heard when the automatic transmission is engaged in REVERSE or DRIVE. The noise may also occur
when the throttle is applied or released. Clunk is caused by transmission calibration, backlash in the driveline or loose
suspension components and is felt or heard in the vicinity of the rear drive axle.
Bearing Rumble
Bearing rumble sounds like marbles being tumbled. This condition is usually caused by a worn/damaged wheel bearing. The
lower pitch is because the wheel bearing turns at only about one-third of the driveshaft speed. Wheel bearing noise also may
be high-pitched, similar to gear noise, but will be evident in all four driving modes.
Symptom Chart

Noise is at constant tone over
a narrow vehicle speed range. Rear drive axle For additional information, GO to Pinpoint
Usually heard on light drive Test A.
and coast conditions
Noise is the same on drive or
coast Road No action required for road noise
Worn or damaged driveshaft joint Install new components as required
Driveshaft center bearing
Wheel bearing
Noise is produced with the

vehicle standing and driving Engine For additional information, REFER to:
Transmission Engine - 3.0L/4.2L (303-00 Engine System -
General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Engine - 2.7L Diesel (303-00 Engine System -
General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Diagnostic Strategy (307-01A Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle - V6 3.0L Petrol,
Loud clunk in the driveline

when shifting from reverse to Transmission calibration Using the Manufacturer approved diagnostic
forward Transmission Mount system, re-configure the Transmission
Transmission Control Module (TCM) with the latest
Suspension components available calibration
Backlash in the driveline Inspect and install new transmission mounts
Engine idle speed set too high as required
Engine mount For additional transmission information,
REFER to: Diagnostic Strategy (307-01A
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V6 3.0L
Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing).
Inspect and install new suspension
Inspect and install new driveline components
as required
Check and adjust the idle speed as required
Inspect and install new engine mounts as
required
Clicking, popping, or grinding

noises Inadequate or contaminated Inspect, clean and lubricate with new grease
lubrication in the rear drive as required
halfshaft constant velocity (CV) Inspect and repair as required
joint Inspect and install new components as
Another component contacting the required
rear drive halfshaft
Wheel bearings, brakes or
suspension components
Vibration at highway speeds

Out-of-balance wheel(s) or tire(s) Balance and install new wheel(s) and tire(s)
Driveline out of as required
balance/misalignment REFER to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels
Driveshaft center bearing touching and Tires, Removal and Installation).
body mounting point For additional information,
REFER to: Driveline Angle Inspection (205-00
Driveline System - General Information,
General Procedures).
Refer to the Manufacturer approved
diagnostic system for driveshaft balancing
application
Check for correct spacer washer thickness.
Inspect and install new washers as required
Shudder, Vibration During

Acceleration Powertrain/driveline misalignment Check for misalignment. Install new
High constant velocity (CV) joint components as required. For driveshaft
operating angles caused by alignment,
incorrect ride height REFER to: Driveline Angle Inspection (205-00
Driveline System - General Information,
Check the ride height and verify the correct
spring rate. Install new components as
required
Lubricant Leak
Rear drive axle breather Check oil level and correct as required
Damaged seal Install new components as required
Rear drive axle filler plug
Rear drive axle rear cover joint
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : EXCESSIVE DRIVELINE NOISE
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK NOISE FROM VEHICLE ON ROAD TEST
1 Road test vehicle to determine load and speed conditions when noise occurs.
2 Assess the noise with different gears selected.
Does the noise occur in different gears at the same vehicle speed?
Yes
Install a new rear drive axle/differential assembly.
REFER to: Axle Assembly - V6 3.0L Petrol (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and
Installation).
Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
Suspect the engine or transmission. For additional information, REFER to:
Engine - 3.0L/4.2L (303-00 Engine System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Engine - 2.7L Diesel (303-00 Engine System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Diagnostic Strategy (307-01A Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V6 3.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Driveline System - General Information - Driveline Angle Inspection
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Alignment Tool
205-535
All vehicles

All vehicles

3. Remove the engine rear undershield.

4. Remove the rear subframe crossbrace.
All except vehicles with diesel engine
5. Remove the support bracket.
6. Loosen the retaining nuts.
www.JagDocs.com
Vehicles with diesel engine
7. Remove the support bracket.

Remove the bolts.
Detach the intermediate muffler exhaust hanger
insulators.
8. Loosen the catalytic converter to diesel particulate filter

(DPF) retaining clamps.
All vehicles
9. CAUTION: Make sure that the exhaust system is

supported with a suitable transmission stand.
Lower the exhaust assembly sufficiently to gain access to

the driveshaft heat shield.
Release the 6 exhaust hangers.
10. Remove the driveshaft heat shield.
All vehicles
11. CAUTION: Make sure that the special tool is correctly

located.
Using the special tool, align the driveshaft center bearing.

Tighten to 40 Nm.
12. Install the driveshaft heat shield.
Tighten to 10 Nm.

Attach the exhaust hangers.

14. Tighten the catalytic converter to DPF retaining clamps.

Tighten to 11 Nm.
15. Install the support bracket.

Attach the intermediate muffler exhaust hanger
insulators.
Tighten to 10 Nm.
16. Tighten the retaining nuts.

Tighten to 45 Nm.
17. Install the support bracket.
Tighten to 10 Nm.
All vehicles
18. Install the rear subframe cross brace.

Tighten to 62 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
19. Install the engine rear undershield.

Driveshaft -
Centre bearing retaining bolts 48 36 -
Transmission flexible joint retaining bolts 127 94 -
Rear drive axle CV joint retaining bolts 73 54 -
Driveshaft heat shield retaining bolts 7 - 62
Driveshaft - Driveshaft - Component Location
Item Description
1 Transmission flexible joint
2 Collapsible front driveshaft tube
3 Splined slip joint
4 Center bearing
5 Universal joint
6 Rear driveshaft tube
7 Differential flexible joint
Driveshaft - Driveshaft - Overview
Driveshaft Overview
The two-piece driveshaft, manufactured from lightweight tubular steel, transmits drive from the engine, via the transmission,
to the differential. The driveshaft aligns with the centerline of the vehicle’s body and is supported by a center bearing.
Driveshaft - Driveshaft - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
Driveshaft
The two-piece driveshaft, manufactured from lightweight tubular steel, transmits drive from the engine, via the transmission,
to the differential. The driveshaft aligns with the centerline of the vehicle’s body and is supported by a center bearing.
The driveshaft's front tube is of swaged construction, which is a crash energy management feature, designed to collapse
progressively and predictably in the event of a severe frontal impact. A low-friction splined slip-joint at the center of the
driveshaft provide the driveshaft's plunge capability.
Flexible couplings connecting the driveshaft to both the transmission and the differential counteract the angular movement of
the driveshaft caused by the driveline's acceleration and braking forces.
The center universal joint is positioned at a specified angle using shims between the center bearing and the vehicle's body.
The driveline angles have been carefully configured to balance minimum power losses with excellent vibration and wear
characteristics. The universal joint is lubricated during manufacture and sealed for life.
www.JagDocs.com
Driveshaft - Universal Joints - Component Location
Item Description
1 Transmission flexible joint
2 Collapsible front driveshaft tube
3 Splined slip joint
4 Center bearing
5 Universal joint
6 Rear driveshaft tube
7 Differential flexible joint
Driveshaft - Universal Joints - Overview
Refer to: Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Description and Operation).

Driveshaft - Universal Joints - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
Refer to: Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Description and Operation).
Driveshaft - Driveshaft
For additional information.

REFER to: Driveline System (205-00 Driveline System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Driveshaft - Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
General Procedures
1. For additional information, refer to the Jaguar Approved Diagnostic

System.
www.JagDocs.com
Driveshaft - Driveshaft V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
205-932
Remover, Driveshaft
Removal
NOTE: Select NEUTRAL before disconnecting the battery, to allow the driveshaft to be turned.

3. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00C Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6. NOTE: Mark the position of the driveshaft on the

transmission flange.

coupling (or it's fixings) be loosened or removed from the
driveshaft.
8. CAUTION: Do not use the 5mm hole on the
differential case flange for the alignment mark.
NOTE: Using the 3mm hole on the differential case

flange, paint an alignment mark (as indicated) to aid
correct installation of the driveshaft to the differential case.
9. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the joint or gaiter, do

not allow the driveshaft to hang.
NOTE: Make sure that the special tool is correctly

installed to the recess on the driveshaft.

10. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the joint or gaiter, do
not allow the driveshaft to hang.
NOTE: Using a suitable hammer and drift, make sure

that you only hit the corner edges of the special tool to
remove the driveshaft.
11.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger-tight at this

stage.
2. NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark on the

driveshaft is correctly aligned to the alignment mark on the
differential case.
Torque: 75 Nm
3. NOTES:
This step only applies if a new driveshaft is being

installed.
Using the 3mm hole on the differential case flange

and paint alignment mark on the driveshaft (as indicated).
Make sure that the alignment marks are correctly aligned.
Torque: 75 Nm
4. NOTE: Make sure that you re-align the driveshaft to

the transmission flange using the alignment mark.

coupling (or it's fixings) be loosened or removed from the
driveshaft.
Torque: 127 Nm
6. Torque: 40 Nm
7. Torque: 5 Nm
8. Torque: 7 Nm

Rear Drive Axle/Differential -
Item Specification
Differential fluid - vehicles without supercharger Castrol SAF XO (75W 90)
Differential fluid - vehicles with supercharger Castrol BOT 720 (75W 90)
Initial Specifications
Item Specification
Differential fluid capacity - vehicles without supercharger 0.9 Liters
Differential fluid capacity - vehicles with supercharger 1.3 Liters
Service Specifications
Item Specification
Differential fluid capacity - vehicles without supercharger 0.85 Liters
Differential fluid capacity - vehicles with supercharger 1.25 Liters
Differential case front retaining bolt 90 66 -
Differential case rear retaining bolts 192 142 -
Differential filler plug 27 20 -
Differential drain plug 27 20 -
Halfshaft constant velocity joint nut 300 221 -
Driveshaft retaining bolts 73 54 -
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential - Component
Location
ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIAL - 5.0L SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES FROM 2010MY
Item Description
1 Electronic differential
2 Differential Locking Module (DLM)
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential - Overview
OVERVIEW
The differential has two functions:
to convert the 'angle of drive' through 90° and distribute drive, via the rear drive halfshafts, to the rear wheels.
to compensate for differences in the rotational speeds of the vehicle's rear wheels during cornering.
Two types of differential are installed:
an open differential on 5.0L V8 normally aspirated, 4.2L V8 naturally aspirated, 3.0L V6 petrol and 3.0L V6 diesel
vehicles
an electronic differential on 5.0L V8 SC (supercharger) vehicles.
Both types of differential are attached to the rear subframe at four mounting points. Each mounting point incorporates a rubber
bush to reduce NVH (noise, vibration and harshness). The bushes in the forward mounting points are installed in the
differential. The bushes in the rear mounting points are installed in the rear subframe.
The open differentials are almost identical in their design and differ only in the final drive ratio and a heavier input flange
which is fitted to 3.0L V6 diesel vehicles. The final drive ratios for the open and the electronic differentials are as follows:
5.0L V8, 4.2L V8 naturally aspirated, 5.0L V8 SC and 3.0L V6 petrol engines - 3.31:1
3.0L V6 diesel engines - 2.73:1.
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential - System
Control Diagram
Control Diagram - 5.0L Supercharger Vehicles Only
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (175 A)
3 AJB (auxiliary junction box)
4 Motor
5 Differential Locking Module (DLM)
6 Oil temperature sensor
7 High speed CAN from suspension control module
System Operation
ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIAL - 5.0L SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES FROM 2010MY

The multi-plate clutch prevents excessive differential slip and therefore maximizes the traction performance of the vehicle. This
is fundamentally different from 'braked' traction control systems, which can only counteract differential slip when it occurs.
A certain amount of differential slip is required to allow the vehicle to turn corners and to remain stable under control of the
ABS (anti-lock brake system). The system is completely automatic and does not require any special driver input.
The multi-plate clutch actively controls the torque flow through the differential and optimizes the torque distribution in the
driveline. The clutch biases the torque from the differential to the wheel with the higher grip and prevents the wheel with the
lower grip from spinning.
www.JagDocs.com
ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIAL - 5.0L SUPERCHARGER - VEHICLES FROM 2010MY
Item Description
1 Cover
2 LH rear drive halfshaft oil seal
3 Filler/Level plug
4 Temperature sensor
5 Motor
6 Input flange
7 Front mounting points with insulator assemblies
8 Carrier
9 Rear mounting points
10 Breather
11 RH rear drive halfshaft oil seal
12 Magnetic drain plug
The electronic differential has the same functionality as the open differential, but it also incorporates a locking and torque
biasing function to give improved traction performance and vehicle dynamic stability. Operation of the electronic differential is
controlled by the Differential Locking Module (DLM).
The basic construction of the electronic differential is similar to the open differential. However, the electronic differential also
has the following:
Two additional planet gears in the differential carrier, to cater for the higher torque through the differential during
locking events.
A multi-plate clutch and actuator assembly installed on the LH sun gear
A motor and reduction gearbox, attached to the cover.
A temperature sensor installed in the cover.
The DLM (differential locking module) operates the motor of the electronic differential under the control of the ADM (adaptive
damping module).
Exploded View of Electronic Differential
Item Description
1 Circlip
2 Bearing assembly
3 Input actuator
4 Actuator balls
5 Output actuator
www.JagDocs.com
6 Thrust race
7 Shim
8 Thrust plate
9 Dished washer
10 Bolt (10 off)
11 Clutch basket
12 Multi-plate clutch and pressure disc
13 Differential case
14 Screw (2 off)
15 Bearing assembly
16 Oil seal
17 Oil slinger inner
18 Oil slinger outer
19 Input flange
20 Pinion nut
21 Collapsible spacer
22 Shim
23 Bearing assembly
24 Pinion shaft
25 Mounting insulator inner (2 off)
26 Mounting insulator rubber (2 off)
27 Mounting insulator outer (2 off)
28 Carrier
29 Oil seal
30 Drain plug
31 Vent
32 Breather cap
33 Shim
34 Bearing assembly
35 Drive gear
36 Shim
37 RH sun gear
38 Circlip
39 Thrust washer (4 off)
40 Planet gear (4 off)
41 Pin (2 off)
42 Shaft
43 LH sun gear
44 Shim
45 Bearing assembly
46 Shim
47 Dowel (2 off)
48 Bolt (4 off)
49 Reduction gear casing
50 Reduction gear
51 Shaft
53 O-ring seal
54 Motor
55 Screw (4 off)
56 Cover
57 Output actuator locking pin
58 Bolt (9 off)
59 Filler/Level plug
60 Oil seal
The multi-plate clutch is contained in a clutch basket attached to the differential carrier with the crown wheel securing bolts.
Alternate plates of the clutch pack are keyed to the clutch basket and the LH sun gear. A pressure disc is installed on the outer
end of the clutch pack and keyed to the clutch basket. A thrust race on the end of the clutch basket incorporates lugs which
extend through the clutch basket onto the pressure disc.
The actuator assembly is mounted on bearings on the outboard end of the clutch basket, against the thrust race. The actuator
assembly consists of input and output actuators separated by five ball bearings. A locking pin in the cover engages with a slot
in the output actuator to prevent it turning, but allow it to move axially. The input actuator engages with the reduction gearbox
and is free to rotate relative to the cover. Ball bearings locate in curved grooves in the mating faces of the input and
output actuators. The bottom surface of each groove incorporates a ramp. Rotation of the input actuator forces the ball
bearings up the ramps in the grooves and induces an axial movement in the output actuator. The thrust race and pressure disc
transfer the axial movement from the output actuator to the clutch pack.
Item Description
1 Actuator
2 Multi-plate clutch
3 Differential
The motor is a 12 V dc motor that adjusts the frictional loading of the multi-plate clutch, via the reduction gearbox and the
actuator assembly, under the control of the DLM. Adjusting the frictional loading of the multi-plate clutch adjusts the locking
torque between the crown wheel drive gear and the sun wheel.
Four bolts attach the motor to the reduction gearbox, which is located in position on the cover with two dowels, and secured
with four bolts. An O-ring seals the joint between the motor and the reduction gearbox.
The motor is driven by a 12 V dc feed direct from the DLM. The motor also incorporates the following connections with the
DLM:
A motor temperature sensor, to prevent excessive use from damaging the motor.
Two Hall effect motor position sensors, to enable closed loop control of the motor.
The temperature sensor provides a differential oil temperature signal to the DLM, to prevent excessive use from damaging the
multi-plate clutch.
Differential Locking Module (DLM)
The DLM controls operation of the electronic differential. The DLM is attached to a bracket located on the LH side of the
luggage compartment, immediately forward of the fender tail lamp, behind the trim.
The DLM receives three battery feeds from the AJB and an ignition feed from the CJB. A connection with the high speed CAN
bus allows the DLM to communicate with other systems on the vehicle.
A certain amount of differential slip is required to allow the vehicle to turn corners and to remain stable under control of the
ABS. The ADM monitors the driver's demands through primary vehicle controls and automatically sets the slip torque in the
differential. The system is completely automatic and does not require any special driver input.
The differential strategy in the ADM includes:
A pre-loading function, increasing locking torque with increased driving torque.

A slip controller to decrease locking torque for optimum comfort, e.g. parking.
The ADM memorizes the position of the motor when the ignition is switched off.
CAN bus messages used by the ADM include wheel speed, steering angle, automatic transmission speed, temperature
information, car configuration, axle ratios and mode inputs.
The ADM also sends messages via the CAN bus to tell other control modules on the network the status of the electronic
differential. The clutch torque and default mode status are some of the main signals sent out by the ADM.
If the DLM or ADM are replaced, a Jaguar approved diagnostic system must be connected to the vehicle and the differential
self-calibration procedure must be performed. This procedure must also be performed if the motor or electronic differential is
replaced.
If a fault occurs with the electronic differential, the ADM, the DLM, or one of the required input signals, the ADM records an
error code and displays a warning in the message center.
The following messages can be displayed:
Message Description Chime

E-DIFF NOT Differential temperature has reached the overheat threshold. System deactivated until temperature Single
AVAILABLE returns within limits.
E-DIFF FAULT Fault has occurred with electronic differential. System deactivated until fault rectified. Single
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential
For a detailed description of the Rear Drive Axle and Differential, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Description and Operation).
Fixings that secure Rear Differential Control Module (Heat path Fuses/Relays
for Module Heatsink) Damaged, Loose or Corroded Connector(s)
Damage to Wiring Loom/Incorrect Location,
Stretched or Taught
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the
DTC index.
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00. REFER to: Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Check
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
1. Refer to: Specifications - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).
3.
Clean the area around the lubricant filler plug.
Position container to collect fluid loss.
4.
Clean the area around the drain plug.
Remove the fluid drain plug.
Drain the differential lubricant.
www.JagDocs.com
Adjustment
1.
Clean the drain plug.
Torque: 27 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:
Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to the

filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the differential
with lubricant, and not to act as a level indicator.
Make sure the correct specification and quanity of oil

is used.
Fill the differential with the correct amount of

lubricant.
3.
Clean the filler plug.
Torque: 27 Nm
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Case TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Special Tool(s)
205-932
Remover, Driveshaft
Removal
All vehicles

2. Refer to: Rear Halfshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).

4. CAUTIONS:
Do not use the 5mm hole on the differential case

flange for the alignment mark.
Make sure that the driveshaft is supported with

suitable retaining straps.
NOTE: Using the 3mm hole on the differential case

flange, paint an alignment mark (as indicated) to aid
correct installation of the driveshaft to the differential case.
5. NOTES:
On vehicles with diesel engine, note the illustrated

orientation of the special tool.
Make sure that the special tool is correctly installed to

the recess on the driveshaft.
6. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to damage the

surrounding components when using the special tool.
NOTE: Using a suitable hammer and drift, make sure

that you only hit the corner edges of the special tool to
remove the driveshaft.
www.JagDocs.com
7.
All vehicles
8. Support the rear differential casing.
9.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Torque:
M14 190 Nm
M12 90 Nm
2.
All vehicles
3. NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark on the driveshaft

is correctly aligned to the alignment mark on the
differential case.
Torque: 75 Nm
4. NOTES:
This step only applies if a new driveshaft is being

installed.
Using the 3mm hole on the differential case flange

and paint alignment mark on the driveshaft (as indicated).
Make sure that the alignment marks are correctly aligned.
Torque: 75 Nm
6. Refer to: Rear Halfshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
7. Check and top-up the differential case.
Torque: 30 Nm
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Front Bushing TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
Special Tool(s)
204-274
Bush install and removal tool
204-275
204-335
204-601
Bush install tool
303-1121
Installer, Crankshaft Seal
Removal

2. Refer to: Differential Case - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and
Installation).
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the new bushes are installed in the correct
orientation.
Special Tool(s): 204-275, 204-601, 303-1121, 204-274
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Drive Pinion Seal
Special Tool(s)
204-264
Pinion Seal Replacer
204-265
Remover/Installer, Drive Pinion Seal
204-266
Adapter for 204-265
204-267
Adapter for 204-265
204-269
205-053
Retainer, Drive Flange
205-053-03
Adapter, Drive Pinion Flange
Removal

2. Refer to: Driveshaft - TD4 2.2L Diesel (205-01, Removal and

Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - V6 3.0L Petrol (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-01
Driveshaft, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
3. NOTE: Measure for installation.
Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the pinion shaft.

4. NOTE: Accurately scribe a line to mark the drive pinion
shaft to the drive pinion nut and pinion flange.
5. Special Tool(s): 205-053, 205-053-03
6. Special Tool(s): 204-266, 204-265, 204-269

7. NOTE: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.
Installation
2.
3. Special Tool(s): 204-267, 204-266, 204-265
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the drive pinion flange has no end float and
is free to rotate.
Make sure that the drive pinion flange scribed mark is

aligned and is never tightend short of the scribed mark on
the drive pinion shaft and is no more than a maximum of 5
degrees past the scribed mark on the drive pinion shaft.
NOTES:
Using the special tool, counter hold the drive pinion

flange.
Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the pinion

shaft to previous noted depth.
Special Tool(s): 205-053, 205-053-03
Torque: 34 Nm
6. Refer to: Driveshaft - TD4 2.2L Diesel (205-01, Removal and

Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - V6 3.0L Petrol (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-01
Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Locking Motor
Removal
1. Refer to: Differential Draining and Filling (205-02 Rear Drive

Axle/Differential, General Procedures).
2.
3.
4.

6.
7.
8.
Installation
1. Torque: 11 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of
foreign material.
Apply a continuous bead of silicone gasket sealant

(Loctite 5999) as shown on the illustration. The application
of the sealant must be 4mm diameter. Install the
component immediately after applying the sealant without
smearing the sealant.
NOTE: New units must be configured using the

Programmable Module Installation Routine in the diagnostic
tool.
Torque: 11 Nm
Apply a suitable amount of approved sealant to one
of the mating faces.
3.
4. Refer to: Differential Draining and Filling (205-02 Rear Drive

Axle/Differential, General Procedures).
5.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
7. Torque: 62 Nm
8. Torque: 25 Nm
Rear Drive Halfshafts -
Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Item Specification
Constant velocity (CV) grease Optimal LN 584 LO
Fill Capacities
Description Grams
Grease for inner CV joint - all vehicles 140
Grease for outer CV joint - all vehicles 125
Torque Specifcations
NOTE: Make sure that a new nut is installed.
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Halfshaft outer constant velocity joint retaining nut 300 221 -
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts - Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
1 Outer constant velocity joint
2 Outer constant velocity joint gaiter
3 Left hand halfshaft
4 Inner constant velocity joint gaiter
5 Inner constant velocity joint
6 Right hand halfshaft
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts - Overview
Overview
The CV (constant velocity) joint at each end of the halfshafts meets the angle change requirements due to suspension
deflection. The plunge capability of the CV joint accommodates the length change.
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts - System Operation and
System Operation
Rear Drive Halfshafts
The solid-steel halfshafts are of unequal length, with each halfshaft comprising inner and outer CV (constant velocity) joints.
The CV joints are the 'ball and socket' type packed with grease and protected by gaiters.
The outer CV joint is an interference fit into the wheel hub and secured by a locking nut. The inner CV joint is a slide fit and is
retained in the differential with a spring clip.
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts

REFER to: Driveline System (205-00 Driveline System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Halfshaft TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
204-269
205-491
Hub puller
205-491-1
Adapter nuts
308-005
Remover, Axle oil seal
308-621-1
Installer, Halfshaft Oil Seal
www.JagDocs.com
308-621-2
Installer/Guide, Halfshaft Oil Seal
Removal

2. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire.
Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
3. With assistance, remove the halfshaft retaining nut, and

retain it for the install procedure.
4. Release the brake caliper.

5. Remove the rear brake disc.
6. Remove the wheel speed sensor.
7. Disconnect the toe link.

Release the lower arm.
8.
CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to detach the

halfshaft from the hub assembly, failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the halfshaft.
Using the special tools, release the halfshaft from the drive
flange.
Special Tool(s): 204-269, 205-491-1, 205-491
9.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the

Remove the wheel knuckle.
10. Release the halfshaft from the differential.
11.
12. Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal.
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 308-005
13. Remove and discard the circlip.
Installation
1. Clean the components mating faces.

2. Using the special tool, install a new halfshaft oil seal.
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 308-621-1, 308-621-2
3. CAUTION: Use Loctite WSK-M2G349-A4 or equivalent,

meeting the Jaguar specification.
Install a new circlip.
4. CAUTION: The halfshaft oil seal protector must be left

in place, until the halfshaft is fully installed.
Install the halfshaft oil seal protector.
www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTIONS:
Do not install the rear halfshaft fully at this stage.
Only install the rear halfshaft until the halfshaft

splines have past the halfshaft oil seal.
6. Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal plutector.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the rear halfshaft circlip is

installed correctly by pulling the halfshaft gently to make
sure it is engaged.

wheels.
Torque: 90 Nm
9. CAUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.
NOTE: Do not fully tighten the locking nut at this

stage.

wheels.
Torque: 150 Nm

wheels.
Torque: 55 Nm
12. Torque: 6 Nm
13. Install the brake disc.
14. Torque: 103 Nm

15. CAUTION: Do not use air tools to install the nut.
the component.
Torque: 300 Nm
17. Install the LH rear wheel and tire.
Installation).
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal

2. Remove the rear halfshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Halfshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
/V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts,
3. CAUTION: Use suitable protective covers to protect the halfshaft.
Using a suitable clamp, secure the rear halfshaft.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the inner constant velocity (CV)

joint is not separated from the halfshaft.
Remove and discard the inner CV joint boot retaining clip.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the CV joint ball bearings do not

drop out of the CV joint.
Using a suitable tool, remove the inner CV joint.
www.JagDocs.com
6. Remove the inner CV joint boot.
Remove and discard the retaining clip.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the protective sleeve is

correctly installed, prior to installing the CV joint boot.
2. NOTE: Install a new retaining clip.

3. CAUTIONS:
Only use lubricants meeting the Jaguar specification.
Make sure the CV joint ball bearings do not drop out

of the CV joint.
NOTE: Clean the constant velocity (CV) joint,

removing as much of the old grease as possible.
Install the inner CV joint.

Fill the CV joint with 40 grams of grease.
Fill the CV joint boot with 100 grams of grease.
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the CV joint is not separated from the

halfshaft.
Make sure enough air is present in the CV boot.
Install a new retaining clip.
5. Install a new retaining clip.
6. Remove the rear halfshaft from the clamp.

7. Install the rear halfshaft.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Halfshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
/V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts,
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal

2.
3. For additional information, refer to: Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint
Boot (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the CV joint ball bearings do not drop out of
the CV joint.
NOTE: Clean the constant velocity (CV) joint, removing as much of

the old grease as possible.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only use lubricants meeting the Jaguar

specification.
NOTE: Make sure that the protective sleeve is

correctly installed, prior to installing the CV joint boot.
Fill the CV joint with 50 grams of grease.

Fill the CV joint boot with 85 grams of grease.
2. CAUTION: Make sure enough air is present in the CV

boot.
NOTE: Install new retaining clips.
www.JagDocs.com
Brake System - General Information -
CAUTION: Do not use brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 on 2006my vehicles onwards. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: Brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 has now been superseded by Shell ESL Super Dot 4 which is the Jaguar recommended
brake fluid. Shell ESL Super Dot 4 can be used on all model years.
Item Specification
Brake fluid Shell ESL Dot 4
Brake Lining and Disc Specifications
Item Specification
Front brake pad material nominal thickness 13 mm (0.51 in)
Front brake pad material minimum thickness 2 mm (0.08 in)
Rear brake pad material nominal thickness 10.8 mm (0.43 in)
Rear brake pad material minimum thickness 2 mm (0.08 in)
Front brake disc diameter - 3.0L petrol, 3.0L diesel and 4.2L 326 mm (12.8 in)
Front brake disc diameter - 3.0L diesel and 5.0L naturally aspirated 355 mm (14.0 in)
Front brake disc diameter - 5.0L supercharged 380 mm (15.0 in)
New front brake disc nominal thickness - 3.0L petrol 3.0L diesel and 4.2L 30 mm (1.18 in)
New front brake disc nominal thickness - 3.0L diesel and 5.0L naturally aspirated 32 mm (1.26 in)
New front brake disc nominal thickness - 5.0L supercharged 36 mm (1.42 in)
Worn front brake disc minimum thickness - 3.0L petrol and 4.2L 28 mm (1.14 in)
Worn front brake disc minimum thickness - 3.0L diesel and 5.0L naturally aspirated 30 mm (1.18 in)
Worn front brake disc minimum thickness - 5.0L supercharged 34 mm (1.34 in)
Rear brake disc diameter - all vehicles except 5.0L supercharged 326 mm (12.8 in)
Rear brake disc diameter - 5.0L supercharged 376 mm (14.8 in)
New rear brake disc nominal thickness - all vehicles except 5.0L supercharged 20 mm (0.79 in)
New rear brake disc nominal thickness - 5.0L supercharged 26 mm (1.02 in)
Worn rear brake disc minimum thickness - all vehicles except 5.0L supercharged 18 mm (0.72 in)
Worn rear brake disc minimum thickness - 5.0L supercharged 24 mm (0.94 in)
Maximum front brake disc runout (installed) 0.075 mm ( 0.003 in)
Maximum rear brake disc runout (installed) 0.09 mm ( 0.004 in)
Maximum front hub face runout (installed) 0.015 mm ( 0.0006 in)
Maximum rear hub face runout (installed) 0.025 mm ( 0.0009 in)
Front brake caliper piston diameter - all vehicles except 5.0L supercharged 60 mm (2.36 in)
Front brake sliding caliper double piston diameter - 5.0L supercharged 42 mm (1.66 in)
Rear brake caliper piston diameter 45 mm (1.77 in)
Front brake caliper bleed screw - 3.0L petrol and 4.2L 8 Nm (6 lb-ft)
Front brake caliper bleed screw - 3.0L diesel and 5.0L 14 Nm (10 lb-ft)
Rear brake caliper bleed screw 14 Nm (10 lb-ft)
Brake System - General Information - Brake System
For a detailed description of the brake system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop
manual. REFER to:
Front Disc Brake (206-03, Description and Operation),

Rear Disc Brake (206-04, Description and Operation),
Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Description and Operation),
Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and Operation),
Brake Booster (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Description and Operation),
Brake Booster (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Description and Operation),
Brake Booster (206-07, Description and Operation).

Visually examine the front and rear wheel and tire assemblies for damage such as uneven wear patterns, tread worn out or
sidewall damage. Verify the tires are the same size, type and, where possible, same manufacturer. Replace the damaged
wheel or excessively worn tire.
Wheels and tires must be cleared of any foreign matter and tire pressures adjusted to the correct specification.
If the tires exhibit uneven wear or feathering, the cause must be corrected. Check the steering and suspension components for
damage or wear and, if necessary, check and adjust front wheel alignment. REFER to: (204-00 Suspension System - General
Information)
Specifications (Specifications),
Front Toe Adjustment (General Procedures).
Visual Inspection
Brake master cylinder Parking brake actuator

Brake caliper piston(s) Parking brake module
Brake discs Parking brake switch
Wheel bearings Damaged or corroded wiring harness
Brake pads Brake master cylinder fluid level switch
Power brake booster
Brake pedal linkage
Brake booster vacuum hose
Tires
Debris
Road Test
Carry out a road test to compare actual vehicle braking performance with the performance standards expected by the driver.
The ability of the test driver to make valid comparisons and detect performance deficiencies will depend on experience.
The driver should have a thorough knowledge of brake system operation and accepted general performance guidelines to make
good comparisons and detect performance concerns.
An experienced brake technician will always establish a route that will be used for all brake diagnosis road tests. The roads
selected will be reasonably smooth and level. Gravel or bumpy roads are not suitable because the surface does not allow the
tires to grip the road equally. Crowned roads should be avoided because of the large amount of weight shifted to the low set
of wheels on this type of road. Once the route is established and consistently used, the road surface variable can be
eliminated from the test results.
Before a road test, obtain a complete description of the customer concerns or suspected condition. From the description, the
technician's experience will allow the technician to match possible causes with symptoms. Certain components will be tagged
as possible suspects while others will be eliminated by the evidence. More importantly, the customer description can reveal
unsafe conditions which should be checked or corrected before the road test. The description will also help form the basic
approach to the road test by narrowing the concern to specific components, vehicle speed or conditions.
Begin the road test with a general brake performance check. Keeping the description of the concern in mind, test the brakes at
different vehicle speeds using both light and heavy pedal pressure. To determine if the concern is in the front or rear braking
system, use the brake pedal and then use the parking brake control. If the condition (pull, vibration, pulsation) occurs only
with the parking brake, the concern is in the rear brake system.
If the concern becomes evident during this check, verify it fits the description given before the road test. If the concern is not
evident, attempt to duplicate the condition using the information from the description.
If a concern exists, use the Symptom Chart in order to isolate it to a specific sub-system and condition description. From this
description, a list of possible sources can be used to further narrow the cause to a specific component or condition.
Symptom Chart

Brakes noisy GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Brake pads
Brake discs
Vibration when brakes are GO to Pinpoint Test B.

applied Wheels/tires out of balance
Wheel hub nuts loose
Brake caliper mounting bolts loose
Brake pads
Foreign material/scratches/corrosion
on brake disc contact surfaces
Excessive brake disc thickness
variation
Excessive brake disc runout
Wheel bearing wear or failure
Suspension bushing wear or failure
Steering bushing wear or failure
The brakes pull or drift GO to Pinpoint Test C.

Tire pressures/wear
Brake calipers
Brake pads
Brake discs
Wheel alignment adjustment
Wheel bearing
Suspension bushings and ball joints
The pedal feels spongy GO to Pinpoint Test D.

Air in brake hydraulic system
Leak in hydraulic system
Brake booster/master cylinder
Brake pads
The pedal goes down fast GO to Pinpoint Test E.

Air in brake hydraulic system
Leak in hydraulic system
Brake pads
The pedal goes down GO to Pinpoint Test F.

slowly Air in brake hydraulic system
Excessive brake pedal GO to Pinpoint Test G.

effort required Brake pads
Brake booster
Brake lockup during light GO to Pinpoint Test H.

brake pedal force Brake pads
Brake calipers
Brakes drag GO to Pinpoint Test I.

Parking brake control
applied/malfunction
Seized parking brake cables
Seized brake caliper slide pins
Seized brake caliper
Brake booster
Pedal gear
Excessive/Erratic brake GO to Pinpoint Test J.

pedal travel Hydraulic system
Brake pads Brake
discs
Hub and bearing assembly
The red brake warning Fill the system to specification. Check for leaks.
indicator is always on Fluid level Install a new brake master cylinder fluid reservoir as
Brake master cylinder fluid level required.
sensor REFER to: Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-06 Hydraulic
Parking brake control Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
Electrical circuit For parking brake control and circuit tests.
REFER to: Parking Brake (206-05, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Slow or incomplete brake GO to Pinpoint Test K.
pedal return Brake pedal binding
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : BRAKES NOISY
CONDITIONS
A1: INSPECT BRAKE PADS
1 Inspect the condition of the front and rear brake pads. Check for damage to any anti-squeal shims.
Are the brake pads OK?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Clean/install new front and rear brake pads as required. REFER to:
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation),
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol,
Brake Pads (206-04A Rear Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04, Removal and Installation).
Re-test vehicle for brake noise.
A2: INSPECT BRAKE DISCS
1 Inspect the brake discs for excessive corrosion, wear or disc thickness variation.
Does excessive corrosion, wear or disc thickness variation exist?
Yes
Install new front and rear brake discs and brake pads as required. REFER to:
Installation),
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04, Removal and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol,
Brake Disc (206-04A Rear Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04, Removal and Installation).
Re-test vehicle for brake noise.
No
No action required, vehicle is OK.
PINPOINT TEST B : VIBRATION WHEN BRAKES ARE APPLIED
CONDITIONS
B1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) without applying brakes.
Is the vibration present?
Yes
For noise vibration and harshness tests.
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Diagnosis and
Testing).
No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK FOR BRAKE VIBRATION
1 Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) with light and medium application on the brake
pedal.
Is a vibration present?
Yes
Check the brake caliper mounting bolts and wheel hub nuts and tighten to specification as required. Check
the balance of all road wheels and tires and repair as required. Check the brake discs for excessive wear,
runout, thickness variation or cracks. Install new brake discs and brake pads as required. GO to B3.
No
B3: IS VIBRATION STILL PRESENT UNDER BRAKE APPLICATION?
1 Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) with light and medium application on the brake
pedal.
Is a vibration present?
Yes
Check for wear or failure of steering gear bushings. Check for wear or failure of steering gear ball joints.
Check for wear or failure of front wheel bearings, suspension bushings and ball joints. Check for wear or
failure of rear wheel bearings, suspension bushings and ball joints. Refer to relevant section in workshop
manual and install new components as required.
No
PINPOINT TEST C : THE BRAKES PULL OR DRIFT
CONDITIONS
C1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal.
Does the vehicle pull or drift?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
C2: INSPECT TIRE CONDITION/PRESSURE
1 Check for excessive tire wear or incorrect pressures.
Are the tires at the correct pressure and in good condition?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
Adjust the tire pressures or install new tires if excessively worn. Re-test the system for normal
operation.
C3: CHECK CALIPERS
1 Check the disc brake caliper pistons and pins for binding, leaking or sticking.
Do the disc brake caliper pistons and pins bind, leak or stick?
Yes
Rectify sticking pins and install new brake calipers as required. REFER to:
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation),
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol,
Brake Caliper (206-04A Rear Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04, Removal and Installation).
No
GO to C4.
C4: INSPECT BRAKE DISCS
1 Check the brake discs for excessive damage, thickness variation or runout.
REFER to: Brake Disc Runout Check (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General Procedures).
Does excessive damage or runout exist?
Yes
Install new brake discs and brake pads as required. Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C5.
C5: INSPECT THE FRONT HUB AND WHEEL BEARING ASSEMBLY
1 Check the front hub and wheel bearing assembly.
Are the wheel bearings OK?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
Install new wheel bearings as required.
REFER to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V6 3.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
C6: CHECK SUSPENSION BUSHINGS AND BALL JOINTS.
1 Check all suspension bushings and ball joints.
Are the suspension bushings and ball joints OK?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
Install new front suspension bushings and ball joints as required. Install new rear suspension bushings
and ball joints as required. Refer to the relevant section in the workshop manual.
C7: CHECK VEHICLE ALIGNMENT
1 Check the vehicle alignment. REFER to:
Front Subframe - 2.7L Diesel (502-00, Removal and Installation),
Front Subframe - V6 3.0L Petrol (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and
Installation),
Front Subframe - 4.2L (502-00, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Is the alignment within specification?
Yes
No action is required, vehicle is OK.
No
Adjust the alignment as required. REFER to:
Front Subframe - 2.7L Diesel (502-00, Removal and Installation),
Front Subframe - V6 3.0L Petrol (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and
Installation),
Front Subframe - 4.2L (502-00, Removal and Installation).
PINPOINT TEST D : THE PEDAL FEELS SPONGY
CONDITIONS
D1: CHECK FOR SPONGY PEDAL (ENGINE OFF)
1 Check for a firm brake pedal.
Is the brake pedal effort and brake pedal travel normal?
Yes
No action is required, vehicle is OK.
No
GO to D2.
D2: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE (ENGINE OFF)
1 Pump the brake pedal 10 times and hold on the final application.
Does the brake pedal feel firm on final application?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
Bleed the brake system.
REFER to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General Procedures).
D3: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE (ENGINE ON)
1 With engine running at idle speed.
2 Apply the brake pedal lightly three or four times.
3 Wait 15 seconds for the vacuum to recover.
4 Push down on the brake pedal until it stops moving downward or an increased resistance to the brake
pedal travel occurs.
5 Hold the brake pedal in the applied position while increasing the engine speed to 2000 revs/min.
6 Release the accelerator pedal.
Does the brake pedal move downward as the engine speed returns to idle?
Yes
GO to D4.
No
Check the vacuum to brake booster.
D4: CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
1 Check the brake master cylinder reservoir fluid level.
Is the fluid level OK?
Yes
No
Check for leaking brake system and rectify as required. Add fluid and bleed the brake system.
PINPOINT TEST E : THE PEDAL GOES DOWN FAST
CONDITIONS
E1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal.
Yes
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL-PRESSURIZE SYSTEM
1 Pump the brake pedal rapidly (five times).
Does the brake pedal travel build up and then hold?
Yes
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK FOR BRAKE SYSTEM LEAKS
1 Check for external brake system leaks. For additional information, refer to brake master cylinder
component test in this section.
Is there a leak present?
Yes
Repair as necessary, add fluid and bleed brake system.
No
No action required, system is OK.
PINPOINT TEST F : THE PEDAL GOES DOWN SLOWLY
CONDITIONS
F1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE - CHECK BRAKE PEDAL OPERATION
1 Check if the condition occurs during actual stopping application by applying the brake pedal while the
vehicle is moving.
Does the condition occur when the vehicle is moving?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
GO to F3.
F2: CHECK FOR BRAKE SYSTEM LEAKS
1 Check for external brake system leaks. For additional information, refer to brake master cylinder
component test in this section.
Are there any external brake system leaks?
Yes
Rectify as necessary. Add fluid and bleed the brake system.
No
GO to F3.
F3: CARRY OUT A BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER BYPASS TEST
1 Test for brake master cylinder bypass condition. Refer to Brake master cylinder component test in this
section.
Has a concern been identified?
Yes
Install a new brake master cylinder, add fluid and bleed the brake system.
No
No action required, system is OK.
PINPOINT TEST G : EXCESSIVE BRAKE PEDAL EFFORT
CONDITIONS
G1: CHECK BRAKE PADS
1 Check the brake pads for wear, contamination, correct installation, damage and type.
Yes
Correctly install or install new brake pads as required. REFER to:
Installation),
No
GO to G2.
G2: CHECK VACUUM
1 Disconnect the vacuum hose from the brake booster.
2 Connect a vacuum/pressure tester to the vacuum hose.
3 Run the engine at normal operating temperature.
4 Record the vacuum reading.
Is the reading 40.5 kPa (12 in-Hg) or greater?
Yes
GO to G3.
No
Locate and rectify the source of low vacuum. Re-test the system for normal operation.
G3: INSPECT SYSTEM
1 Switch the engine off.
2 Reconnect the vacuum hose.
3Inspect the brake booster, rubber grommet, and all vacuum plumbing for cracks, holes, damaged
connections, or missing clamps.
4 Pump the brake pedal several times to exhaust the vacuum. Push down on the brake pedal and hold.
Does the brake pedal move down when the engine is started?
Yes
Vacuum system is OK.
No
GO to G4.
G4: CHECK POWER BRAKE BOOSTER VALVE
1 Check the brake booster valve. For additional information, refer to Brake Booster component test in this
section.
Is the power brake booster valve OK?
Yes
Check the brake booster. For additional information, refer to Brake Booster component test in this
section. Install a new brake booster as required. REFER to:
Brake Booster (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation),
Brake Booster - RHD (206-07, Removal and Installation).
No
Install a new brake booster valve. Re-test the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST H : BRAKE LOCKUP DURING LIGHT BRAKE PEDAL FORCE
CONDITIONS
H1: TEST BRAKE LOCKUP
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal lightly.
Do the brakes lockup?
Yes
GO to H2.
No
H2: INSPECT BRAKE PADS
1 Inspect brake pads for contamination, correct installation, damage and type.
Yes
Correctly install or install new brake pads as required. REFER to:
Installation),
No
GO to H3.
H3: INSPECT BRAKE CALIPERS
1 Inspect brake calipers for binding, leaking or sticking.
Yes
Correctly install or install new brake calipers as required. REFER to:
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation),
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol,
Brake Caliper (206-04A Rear Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04, Removal and Installation).
No
PINPOINT TEST I : BRAKES DRAG
CONDITIONS
I1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brakes.
Are the brakes functioning correctly?
Yes
No
GO to I2.
I2: CHECK BRAKE CALIPERS
1 Check the front and rear calipers pistons and pins for binding, leaking or sticking.
Do the disc brake caliper pistons and pins bind, leak or stick?
Yes
Inspect the brake calipers and parking brake cables. Install new components as required. Re-test the
system for normal operation.
No
GO to I3.
I3: CHECK BRAKE BOOSTER
1 Check the brake booster connecting rod alignment and travel.
Is the connecting rod OK?
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
Install a new brake booster as required. REFER to:
PINPOINT TEST J : EXCESSIVE/ERRATIC BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL
CONDITIONS
J1: TEST ON ROUGH ROAD
1 Road test the vehicle on rough road conditions.
2 Apply the brakes slowly.
Yes
No
GO to J2.
J2: CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
1 Check the brake master cylinder reservoir fluid level.
Is the fluid level OK?
Yes
GO to J3.
No
Check brake master cylinder reservoir sealing points. For additional information, refer to Brake master
cylinder component test in this section. Add brake fluid and bleed the brake system.
J3: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE
1 Run engine at idle speed.
2 Apply the brake pedal lightly three or four times.
3 Wait 15 seconds for the vacuum to replenish.
4 Push down on the brake pedal until it stops moving downward or an increased resistance to the brake
pedal travel occurs.
5 Hold the brake pedal in the applied position while increasing the engine speed to 2000 revs/min.
6 Release the accelerator pedal.
Does the brake pedal move downward as the engine speed returns to idle?
Yes
GO to J4.
No
Check the vacuum to the brake booster.
J4: CHECK THE FRONT WHEEL BEARING ASSEMBLY
1 Check the front wheel bearing assembly.
Are the front wheel bearings loose/damaged?
Yes
Tighten to specification or install a new front wheel bearing as required.
REFER to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V6 3.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
No
Check the front brake discs for thickness variances.
PINPOINT TEST K : SLOW OR INCOMPLETE BRAKE PEDAL RETURN
CONDITIONS
K1: CHECK FOR BRAKE PEDAL RETURN
1 Run the engine at idle while making several brake applications.
2 Pull the brake pedal rearward with approximately 44.5 N (10lb) force.
3 Release the brake pedal and measure the distance to the toe board.
4 Make a hard brake application.
5 Release the brake pedal and measure the brake pedal to toe board distance. The brake pedal should
return to its original position.
Does the brake pedal return to its original position?
Yes
No
GO to K2.
K2: CHECK FOR BRAKE PEDAL BINDING
1 Disconnect the brake booster from the brake pedal. Check the brake pedal to ensure free operation.
Is the brake pedal operating freely?
Yes
Install a new brake booster as required. REFER to:
No
Repair or install new brake pedal. Re-test the system for normal operation.
Component Tests
Brake Booster
1. Check all hoses and connections. All unused vacuum connectors should be capped. Hoses and their connections should
be correctly secured and in good condition with no holes and no collapsed areas. Inspect the valve on the brake booster
for damage.
2. Check the hydraulic brake system for leaks or low fluid.
3. With the automatic transmission in PARK, stop the engine and apply the parking brake. Pump the brake pedal several
times to exhaust all vacuum in the system. With the engine switched off and all vacuum in the system exhausted,
apply the brake pedal and hold it down. Start the engine. If the vacuum system is operating, the brake pedal will tend
to move downward under constant foot pressure. If no motion is felt, the vacuum booster system is not functioning.
4. Remove the vacuum hose from the brake booster. Manifold vacuum should be available at the brake booster end of the
hose with the engine at idle speed and the automatic transmission in PARK. Make sure that all unused vacuum outlets
are correctly capped, hose connectors are correctly secured and vacuum hoses are in good condition. When it is
established that manifold vacuum is available to the brake booster, connect the vacuum hose to the brake booster and
repeat Step 3. If no downward movement of the brake pedal is felt, install a new brake booster.
5. Operate the engine for a minimum of 10 seconds at a fast idle. Stop the engine and allow the vehicle to stand for 10
minutes. Then, apply the brake pedal with approximately 89 N (20lb) of force. The pedal feel (brake application) should
be the same as that noted with the engine running. If the brake pedal feels hard (no power assist), install a new valve
and then repeat the test. If the brake pedal still feels hard, install a new brake booster. If the brake pedal movement
feels spongy, bleed the brake system.
Brake Master Cylinder
Usually, the first and strongest indicator of anything wrong in the brake system is a feeling through the brake pedal. In
diagnosing the condition of the brake master cylinder, check pedal feel as evidence of a brake concern. Check for brake warning
lamp illumination and the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir.
Normal Conditions
The following conditions are considered normal and are not indications that the brake master cylinder is in need of repair.
Modern brake systems are designed to produce a pedal effort that is not as hard as in the past. Complaints of light
pedal efforts should be compared to the pedal efforts of another vehicle of the same model and year.
The fluid level will fall with brake pad wear.
Abnormal Conditions
Changes in the brake pedal feel or brake pedal travel are indicators that something could be wrong in the brake system. The
diagnostic procedure and techniques use brake pedal feel, warning indicator illumination and low brake fluid level as indicators
to diagnosing brake system concerns. The following conditions are considered abnormal and indicate that the brake master
cylinder is in need of repair:
NOTE: Prior to carrying out any diagnosis, make sure the brake system warning indicator is functional.
Brake pedal goes down fast. This could be caused by an external or internal leak.
Brake pedal goes down slowly. This could be caused by an internal or external leak.
Brake pedal is low or feels spongy. This condition may be caused by no fluid in the brake master cylinder, reservoir cap
vent holes clogged or air in the hydraulic system.
Brake pedal effort is excessive. This may be caused by a bind or obstruction in the pedal/linkage, a faulty non-return
valve, booster or insufficient booster vacuum.
Rear brakes lock up during light pedal force. This may be caused by damaged brake pads, a partially applied parking
brake, a damaged ABS sensor or bearing failure.
Brake pedal effort erratic. This condition could be caused by the brake booster or incorrectly installed brake pads.
Brake warning indicator is on. This may be caused by low fluid level or float assembly damaged.
www.JagDocs.com
Non Pressure Leaks
Any reduced fluid volume in the brake master cylinder reservoir may be caused by two types of none pressure external leaks.
Type 1: An external leak may occur at the brake master cylinder reservoir cap because of incorrect positioning of the gasket
and cap. Reposition cap and gasket.
Type 2: An external leak may occur at the brake master cylinder reservoir mounting seals. Repair such a leak by installing new
seals and make sure that the brake master cylinder reservoir retaining bolt is correctly installed.
Brake System - General Information - Brake Disc Runout Check
General Procedures
Check

2. Install all the wheel nuts and tighten equally to 20 Nm (15 lb.ft).
Make sure that the brake disc is fully seated against the hub
face.
3. Install a dial test indicator gauge and holding fixture to a suitable

mounting point.
4. NOTE: If the runout is outside specification, check the hub face

runout.
Using the dial test indicator, measure the inner and outer faces of the
brake disc. For additional information, refer to: (206-00 Brake System -
General Information)
Specifications - 3.0L NA V6 - AJ27 (Specifications),
Specifications - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
(Specifications).
1. Position the gauge so that it contacts the disc 10 mm (0.4 in)
from the outer edge.
2. Slowly rotate the hub/disc assembly. Note the reading.
5. If a front hub runout check is required, remove the front brake disc. For
additional information, refer to:
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake -
V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03B Front Disc Brake -
TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc
Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03B Front Disc
Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
6. If a rear hub runout check is required, remove the rear brake disc. For
Brake Disc (206-04A Rear Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04B Rear Disc
and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04B Rear Disc Brake -
Installation).
7. NOTE: The hub surface should be free from dirt and corrosion. Do not
use abrasive cloths to clean hub faces.
Using the dial test indicator, measure the hub face runout.
1. Position the gauge so that it contacts the mounting tube
between the stud and the chamfer.
2. Slowly rotate the hub and note the runout. For additional
information, refer to the specification chart.
If the front hub runout exceeds the specifications, install a new
hub, brake disc and recheck. For additional information, refer to:
(204-01 Front Suspension)
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V6 3.0L Petrol (Removal
and Installation),
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (Removal and Installation).
If the rear hub runout exceeds the specifications, install a new
hub, brake disc and recheck.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing (204-02
8. If the front hub face is within specification, install a new brake disc. For
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake -
V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03B Front Disc Brake -
Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc
Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03B Front Disc
and Installation).
If the rear hub face is within specification, install a new disc.

Brake System - General Information - Brake System Bleeding
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with new, clean brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with water.
NOTE:
All vehicles

2. Check that the brake fluid lines are secure and that there are no signs of
a brake fluid leak. If a brake fluid leak is detected, investigate and
rectify the cause of the leak before bleeding the brakes.
3. Remove the brake master cylinder cover.

Carefully release the clip.
4. WARNING: Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter

the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct
specification from airtight containers. Do not mix brands of
brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished

surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean
the area with water.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap.

Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.
5.
All vehicles
6. Install the bleed tube to the right hand rear brake caliper bleed screw
and immerse the free end of the bleed tube in a bleed jar, containing a
small quantity of approved brake fluid.
Remove the bleed screw caps.
7. Loosen the bleed screw by one-half to three-quarters of a

turn.
8. CAUTION: The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with new, clean
brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
NOTE: If the bleed tube used, does not have a one way valve the
bleed screw will need to be closed before the brake pedal is returned to
the rest position. Then opened again and the procedure repeated for
each pedal application.
With assistance, depress the brake pedal steadily through its full stroke
and allow it to return to the rest position. Repeat the procedure until
brake fluid, clean and air-free flows into the bleed jar.
9. CAUTION: Make sure the bleed screw cap is installed after

bleeding. This will prevent corrosion to the bleed screw.
With the brake pedal fully depressed, tighten the bleed screw.
Vehicles with standard brakes: Tighten the front caliper bleed
screw to 8 Nm.
Vehicles with high performance brakes: Tighten the front caliper
bleed screw to 14 Nm.
Tighten the rear bleed screw to 14 Nm.
10. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.
www.JagDocs.com
Left-hand drive vehicles
11. WARNING: Braking efficiency may be seriously

impaired if an incorrect bleed sequence is used.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each brake

caliper, following the above sequence.
Right-hand drive vehicles
12. WARNING: Braking efficiency may be seriously

impaired if an incorrect bleed sequence is used.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each brake

caliper, following the above sequence.
All vehicles
13. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.
14. Apply the brakes and check for leaks.
15. Install the brake fluid reservoir cap.
16. Install the brake master cylinder cover.

Carefully secure the clip.
Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout Check - With
Wheel On Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
1. NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential

information is always correct.
RH illustration shown, LH similar
All measurements must taken with the wheel installed.
Raise the front of the vehicle.
3. Mount the DTI Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge to the bolt as shown with
tool 100-053.
4. Make sure the DTI is securely mounted.

5. Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the outer edge of the
disc.
Zero DTI and rotate road wheel one complete
revolution to measure disc runout.
6. Position the DTI probe in the centre of the disc.

7. Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the inner edge of the
disc.
8. NOTE: The disc runout limit is 0.075 mm.
If the disc runout exceeds the limit check the hub drive flange and
bearing runout.
Runout Check - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (204-00
9. If hub runout is within the limit replace the brake disc.
10. Install the wheel.

Tighten the road wheel nuts in sequence as shown
above to the following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 60 Nm.
Stage 3: 125 Nm.
11. Re-check the disc runout as detailed above.

12. Remove DTI and install the bait. 90 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
Brake System - General Information - Rear Brake Disc Runout Check - With
Wheel On
General Procedures
1. NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential

All measurements must be taken with the wheel installed.
Raise the rear of the vehicle.
3. Modify tool 100-053 with an M8 bolt and nut as shown.
4. Mount the DTI Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge on the tool
as shown.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Securely mount the DTI on the bottom calliper mounting
bolt, a spacer washer maybe required under the tool.
6. Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the outer edge of the

disc.
7. Position the DTI probe in the centre of the disc.
8. Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the inner edge of the

disc.
9. NOTE: The disc runout limit is 0.09 mm.
If the disc runout exceeds the limit check the hub drive flange and
bearing runout.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Runout Check - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (204-00
10. If hub runout is within the limit replace the brake disc.
11. Install the wheel.
Tighten the road wheel nuts in sequence as shown
to the following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 60 Nm.
Stage 3: 125 Nm.
12. Re-check the disc runout as detailed above.
13. Remove DTI and install the bolt. 103 Nm.

Front Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -

Brake caliper anchor plate retaining bolts 115 85 -
Brake caliper retaining bolts 58 43 -
Brake hose retaining bolt 42 31 -
Front Disc Brake - Component Location
NOTE: LH (left-hand) installation shown, RH (right-hand) installation similar.
Performance Brakes - 5.0L Supercharger V8 Vehicles
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Brake pad wear sensor
2 Caliper body
3 Anti-rattle spring
4 Piston (2 off)
5 Piston seal (2 off)
6 Piston dust cover (2 off)
7 Inboard brake pad
8 Outboard brake pad
9 Retaining washer (2 off)
10 Brake disc
11 Rivet (2 off)
12 Heat shield
13 Front wheel knuckle/hub and bearing assembly
14 Caliper bolt (2 off)
15 Caliper carrier
16 Guide pin dust cover (2 off)
17 Guide pin bush (2 off)
18 Guide pin (2 off)
19 Bleed screw
20 Bleed screw dust cap
Front Disc Brake - Overview
OVERVIEW
Performance Brakes - 5.0L Supercharger V8 Vehicles
The performance front braking system features ventilated brake discs with dual piston sliding calipers. The discs are 380 mm
(14.96 in.) diameter x 36 mm (1.42 in.) thick.
The brake disc is manufactured from cast iron. The disc is retained on the wheel hub by two retaining washers and the wheel
nuts.
A brake pads wear sensors is fitted to the LH front brake.

Front Disc Brake - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (250 A)
3 Front brake pad wear sensor
4 Rear brake pad wear sensor
7 Power distribution box
System Operation
BRAKE CALIPERS
When hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the pistons extend to force the inner pad against the brake disc. The caliper
reacts and slides along two guide pins to bring the outer pad into contact with the brake disc.
BRAKE PAD WEAR SENSORS

When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the sensor wire within the pad material
is worn through and the brake pad wear sensor goes open circuit. When the instrument cluster detects the open circuit, it
illuminates the amber LED (light emitting diode) in the brake warning indicator, displays an appropriate warning in the
message center and sounds a warning chime.
Refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).
NOTE: A new pad wear sensor lead must be fitted whenever the brake pads are changed, irrespective of the brake pad
warning sensor being triggered.
BRAKE CALIPERS
Each caliper is mounted within a fixed carrier that is secured to the front wheel knuckle with two bolts. The inboard brake pad
of the LH (left-hand) brake incorporates a wear sensor.
Each outboard brake pad is installed with a pressed steel anti-rattle spring. On SC (supercharger) vehicles, a badge with the
'R' symbol is formed on the anti-rattle spring.

The brake pad wear sensor is wired in series with a wear sensor on the RH (right-hand) rear brake and the instrument cluster.
If the thickness of one of the brake pads connected to a wear sensor decreases to a predetermined limit, the instrument
cluster illuminates the brake warning indicator.
Brake Caliper Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area
with water.

2. Remove the left-hand front wheel and tire.
Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to
NOTES:

the rest position.
Remove and discard the two sealing washers.
6.
7. CAUTION: Removal of the clips is a delicate
procedure, damage will occur if any force is used.
Lever the anti-rattle spring in the center of the

spring until either side is released.
8. WARNING: If the brake caliper piston seal is damaged

a new brake caliper must be installed.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on

the brake hose.
Release the clip.

Installation
1. WARNING: Do not use compressed air to clean brake components.

Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.
CAUTION: As the piston is pushed back into the caliper housing,

the brake fluid level in the reservoir will rise. Do not allow the reservoir
to overflow.
Press the piston into the caliper housing.
2.
Apply grease C2C-39930 to the areas indicated.

Torque: 58 Nm
Secure the bottom arm of the anti-rattle spring

under the bottom anchor bracket of the caliper.
Compress the upper spring arm into the correct
position, under the upper anchor bracket, whilst
retaining the logo plate.
Using the screw-driver, tap the central locating tag
into the locked position.
7. CAUTIONS:
Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
Make sure new sealing washers are installed.
NOTES:

the rest position.
Torque: 42 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
8.
9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the road wheels are in the straight

ahead position.
Make sure that excessive force is not used. Failure to

follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that the brake hose is not twisted and is

correctly located.
Pull downwards at the position shown.
10. Refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General
Information, General Procedures).
Installation).
Brake Disc Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in pairs.

2. Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03B
Front Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
3. Torque: 115 Nm
4.
Remove the 2 clips.
Clean the components mating faces.
5. Repeat the above procedure on the opposite side.

Installation

Brake Pads Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
with water.

Installation).
3.
5.
6. CAUTION: Removal of the clips is a delicate

procedure, damage will occur if any force is used.
Lever the anti-rattle spring in the center of the

spring until either side is released.

the brake hose.
Release the clip.

10.
Installation
1. WARNING: Do not use compressed air to clean brake components.

Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.
CAUTION: As the piston is pushed back into the caliper housing,

the brake fluid level in the reservoir will rise. Do not allow the reservoir
to overflow.
Press the piston into the caliper housing.
2.
3.
Apply grease C2C-39930 to the areas indicated.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 58 Nm
Secure the bottom arm of the anti-rattle spring

under the bottom anchor bracket of the caliper.
Compress the upper spring arm into the correct
position, under the upper anchor bracket, whilst
retaining the logo plate.
Using the screw-driver, tap the central locating tag
into the locked position.
8.
9. CAUTIONS:

ahead position.
Make sure that excessive force is not used. Failure to

follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that the brake hose is not twisted and is

correctly located.
Pull downwards at the position shown.
Installation).
Brake Disc Shield Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
2. Remove the front brake disc.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High
Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
3. Remove the brake disc shield.

Remove the 2 rivets.
Installation

Install the rivets.
Rear Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Brake hose to brake caliper 42 31 -
Brake caliper anchor plate 103 76 -
Brake caliper retaining bolts 28 21 -
Brake caliper logo badge retaining bolts - Vehicles with high performance brakes 10 7 -
Rear Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Rear
Disc Brake - Component Location
Performance Brakes - 5.0L Supercharger V8

Item Description
1 Retaining washer (2 off)
2 Brake disc
3 Rivet (3 off)
4 Brake dust shield
5 Rear wheel knuckle/hub and bearing assembly
6 Caliper carrier bolt (2 off)
7 Brake pad wear sensor
8 Guide pin dust cover (2 off)
9 Guide pin bush (2 off)
10 Guide pin (2 off)
11 Caliper carrier
12 Brake caliper housing
13 Piston
14 Piston dust cover
15 Inboard brake pad and shim
16 Outboard brake pad
17 Anti-rattle spring
18 Bleed screw
19 Bleed screw dust cap
20 Knurled pin
21 Parking brake lever
22 Parking brake return spring
Disc Brake - Overview
OVERVIEW
The standard and performance rear braking systems feature ventilated brake discs and aluminum, single piston, sliding
calipers. The brake discs are:
326 mm (12.83 in.) diameter x 20 mm (0.79 in.) thick on standard brakes (the same as on base brakes).
376 mm (14.8 in.) diameter x 26 mm (1.02 in.) thick on performance brakes.
The brake disc is manufactured from cast iron. The brake disc is retained on the wheel hub by two washers and the wheel nuts.
A brake pad wear sensor is fitted to the RH (right-hand) rear brake.
Also incorporated into each rear brake caliper carrier is the parking brake mechanism.
Refer to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Description and Operation).
After any work on the rear brakes, the parking brake must be re-calibrated.
Refer to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Description and Operation).
www.JagDocs.com
Disc Brake - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (250 A)
3 Front brake pad wear sensor
4 Rear brake pad wear sensor
7 Power distribution box
System Operation
BRAKE CALIPERS
When hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the pistons extend to force the inner pad against the brake disc. The caliper
reacts and slides along two guide pins to bring the outer pad into contact with the brake disc.

When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the sensor wire within the pad material
is worn through and the brake pad wear sensor goes open circuit. When the instrument cluster detects the open circuit, it
illuminates the amber LED (light emitting diode) in the brake warning indicator, displays an appropriate warning in the
message center and sounds a warning chime.
NOTE: A new pad wear sensor lead must be fitted whenever the brake pads are changed, irrespective of the brake pad
warning sensor being triggered.
BRAKE CALIPERS
Each caliper is mounted within a fixed carrier that is secured to the rear wheel knuckle with two bolts. Each outboard brake pad
is installed with a wire anti-rattle spring.
The brake calipers on SC (supercharger) vehicles are painted and also include a logo badge, secured with two screws, which
must be removed in order to change the brake pads.
The inboard brake pad of the RH (right-hand) brake incorporates a wear sensor.

The brake pad wear sensor is wired in series with a wear sensor on the LH (left-hand) front brake and the instrument cluster. If
the thickness of one of the brake pads connected to a wear sensor decreases to a predetermined limit, the instrument cluster
illuminates the brake warning indicator.
Rear Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Brake
Caliper Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
WARNING: Failure to release the tension and calibrate the electric parking brake during rear parking brake related service
procedures, could cause the parking brake to function incorrectly or become inoperative.
with water.

Installation).
3. Refer to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05 Parking Brake and
Actuation, General Procedures).
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
6. CAUTIONS:
Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
If brake fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the affected

area must be immediately washed down with cold water.
NOTES:

the rest position.
Torque: 42 Nm
Release the 2 clips.
Release the clip.
www.JagDocs.com

the brake hose.
Torque: 28 Nm
Installation

Disc Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in pairs.

2. Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04B
Rear Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Torque: 103 Nm
3.
Remove the 2 clips.

Clean the components mating faces.
4.
Installation
Pads Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Special Tool(s)
206-080
Brake caliper piston retractor tool
206-081
Brake caliper piston retractor tool
303-588
Remover, Crankshaft Pulley/Damper
Removal
WARNINGS:
Failure to release the tension and calibrate the electric parking brake during rear parking brake related service procedures,
could cause the parking brake to function incorrectly or become inoperative.
Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct specification from
airtight containers. Do not mix brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
with water.
NOTES:
Only extraction bolt from special tool 303-588 is used.


2. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05, General

Procedures).
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
Release the 2 clips.
Release the clip.
www.JagDocs.com
8. WARNING: If the brake caliper piston seal is damaged a
new brake caliper must be installed.

the brake hose.
Torque: 28 Nm


Using the special tools, fully retract the brake
caliper piston.
11.
Installation
1. NOTE: The brake pad wear sensor retaining tang must be

installed to the sensor prior to installation to the brake
pad.

Disc Shield
Removal
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle stands.
1. Raise and support the body.
2. Remove the brake disc.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc (206-04A Rear Disc Brake
- V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the brake disc shield.

Drill out the 3 rivets
Installation

Parking Brake and Actuation -

Parking brake module retaining bolts 4 - 35
Parking brake release actuator retaining bolts 20 15 -
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake - Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
1 Parking brake switch
2 EPB (electronic parking brake) module
3 Parking brake actuator
4 Caliper and disc assemblies (2 off)
5 Stoplamp switch
6 Brake warning indicator - NAS vehicles
7 Brake warning indicator (all except NAS (North American Specification) vehicles)
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake - Overview
Overview
The parking brake is an electrically actuated system that operates on the rear brake calipers. Two cables are connected to the
rear brake calipers, and act directly on the same pistons used for normal, hydraulic rear brake actuation.
Refer to: Rear Disc Brake (206-04, Description and Operation).
The parking brake is controlled by the EPB (electronic parking brake) module. In response to commands from the driver through
the parking brake switch, the EPB module controls operation of the parking brake actuator. The actuator adjusts the tension of
the brake cables to apply and release the rear brake calipers. Features of the parking brake include:
Manual apply.
Manual release.
Automatic release.
A service mode is also available and must be activated using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system. This allows the
decoupling of the components and prevention of damage to the actuator. When in service mode all switch functions will be
inhibited.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box)
5 EPB module
6 Stoplamp switch
8 Parking brake switch
9 Parking brake actuator
System Operation
Static Apply
The EPB module receives a vehicle speed signal from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module on the high speed CAN bus. If
the parking brake switch is pulled to the 'Apply' position and vehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h), the EPB module will
instigate its 'Static Apply' mode and drive the actuator to apply full parking brake force to the rear wheels.
The EPB module monitors the current drawn by the actuator and compares this to information held within its configuration
software to determine when full braking force has been applied.
Dynamic Apply
There are two 'Dynamic Apply' modes; low speed dynamic and high speed dynamic. The low speed dynamic mode operates at
speeds between 2 mph (3 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). The high speed dynamic mode operates at speeds above 20 mph (32
km/h).
If the parking brake switch is pulled up to the 'Apply' position and vehicle speed is within the low speed dynamic range, the
EPB module drives the actuator to apply full parking brake force to the rear wheels.
If the parking brake switch is pulled up to the 'Apply' position and vehicle speed is within the high speed dynamic range, the
EPB module will apply braking force to the rear wheels at a slower rate until full braking load is reached or the switch is
released. The rate with which braking force is applied is controlled by the EPB module, which monitors both current drawn by
the actuator and positional information from the actuator hall sensor and compares this to information held within its
configuration software.
Drive Away Release

The EPB module will initiate its 'Drive Away Release' function and automatically release the parking brake if the following
conditions are detected:
The engine is running.

Drive , or reverse is selected.
Positive throttle movement is detected.
The EPB module receives messages of gear selector position and throttle angle over the high speed CAN bus from the TCM
(transmission control module) and the ECM (engine control module) respectively.
Release from Park

The EPB module will initiate its 'Release from Park' function and automatically release the parking brake if the gear selector is
moved from Park to any position except Neutral.
Repairs
Before carrying out any work on the parking brake system, the Jaguar approved diagnostic system must be connected and the
'parking brake unjam' routine run. The routine can be found in the 'Vehicle Configuration' area, under the 'Set-up and
Configuration' menu. After any work has been carried out on the parking brake, the system will require resetting.
CAUTION: Do not use the 'Emergency Release' tool to allow work to be carried out on the parking brake. Work can only be
carried out on the parking brake system after the 'parking brake unjam' routine has been run.
Resetting
If the electrical supply is disconnected from the EPB module, the actuator will loose its position memory. On battery
re-connection and ignition on, 'APPLY FOOT AND PARK BRAKE' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center
indicating the parking brake requires resetting.
Refer to: Parking Brake (206-05, Diagnosis and Testing).
Operating Voltages
The EPB module will only operate the actuator if the power supply from the battery is between 9 V and 16 V. At any voltage
within this range, the actuator is able to fully tighten and release the brake cables. If the power supply falls outside of the
range, a fault code is stored in the EPB module and can be retrieved using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
Parking Brake Switch
The parking brake switch is mounted in the floor console, rearward of the rotary gear selector. The switch has 3 states:
Apply: When the switch is pulled up to apply the parking brake.

Release: When the switch is pushed down to release the parking brake.
Neutral: The central default position. The switch returns to this position regardless of parking brake status.
The parking brake switch contains a pair of micro-switches for both the apply and release actions. The EPB module provides an
individual hardwired electrical feed to each of the four micro-switches plus a single ground connection, allowing it to constantly
monitor switch status.
EPB Module
The EPB module is mounted in the luggage compartment on the RH (right-hand) side quarter panel and is connected to the
vehicles electrical wiring by two multiplugs. The EPB module is also connected to the high speed CAN bus, allowing it to
communicate with other vehicle systems.
The EPB module monitors the condition of the parking brake switch through a series of hardwired electrical connections and
controls operation of the parking brake actuator accordingly.
Parking Brake Actuator
The parking brake actuator is mounted on the rear cross beam, underneath the vehicle. Operation of the actuator is controlled
by the EPB module in response to parking brake switch requests from the driver.
A Hall sensor is located within the actuator and provides positional information back to the EPB module. The principle function
of the Hall sensor is to ensure the actuator fully releases the parking brake when a static release request is made. The signal
provided by the Hall sensor is compared to configuration information contained within the EPB module software to determine
when a full release has been carried out.
www.JagDocs.com
Stoplamp Switch
The stoplamp switch is mounted on the brake pedal box. One of the prerequisites for releasing the parking brake is that the
foot brake is applied. The EPB module is able to determine the position of the footbrake by monitoring the status of the
stoplamp switch via a hardwired electrical connection.
The stoplamp switch also forms part of:
The ABS.
Refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Description and Operation).
The speed control system. For additional information, refer to:
Speed Control (310-03A, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03B, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03C, Description and Operation).
Instrument Cluster
Depending on market specification, the instrument cluster may contain a red and an amber brake warning indicator, or only a
red brake warning indicator. The functionality of the warning indicators is shown in the table below.
Indicator Status Details

Red Illuminated Parking brake applied
Red Flashing Parking brake electrical failure
Amber Illuminated Parking brake electrical failure
If a parking brake failure warning indicator is active, the message 'CANNOT APPLY PARK BRAKE' or 'PARK BRAKE FAULT' will
also appear in the instrument cluster message center. If the vehicle is moving with the parking brake applied, the message
'PARK BRAKE ON' will appear in the message center accompanied by a chime from the instrument cluster.
Refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center, Description and Operation).
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake
For a detailed description of the Parking Brake operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation)
Parking Brake (Description and Operation),

Parking Brake (Description and Operation),
Parking Brake (Description and Operation).
Parking Brake Calibration

The parking brake system must be calibrated whenever the battery has been disconnected or has been in a state of discharge,
or repairs have been carried out to the rear service or parking brake system.
NOTE: If new rear brake pads have been installed, pressure must be applied to the brake pedal a minimum of five times
prior to calibration of the parking brake system.
To calibrate the parking brake system:
1. Place gear selector lever in 'P' Park position.
2. Release parking brake cable tension to service position.

REFER to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General Procedures).
3. Set the ignition status to 'ON'.
4. Apply and hold the footbrake then pull up the parking brake switch.
5. To release the parking brake, apply and hold the footbrake then release and press down the parking brake switch.
Visual Inspection
Parking brake cable Fuse(s)

Parking brake actuator Wiring harness/electrical connectors
Brake caliper Check for bent/corroded pins
Brake pads Parking brake switch
Stabilizer bar drop link caps Parking brake module
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and proceed to
the DTC Index , alternatively, verify the customer concern and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart

The parking brake will not
engage or release (with no Cables fouled, trapped or damaged Check the rear and primary
parking brake warning Cables incorrectly routed or installed cables for correct installation
message) Rear lining wear and damage
Service brake incorrectly adjusted following Inspect the rear brake linings for
lining change wear
Caliper malfunction Re-calibrate the parking brake,
refer to the calibration procedure
Check the rear service brake for
correct installation and operation
The parking brake will not
engage or release (with Cables fouled, trapped or damaged Check the rear and primary
parking brake warning Cables incorrectly routed or installed cables for correct installation
message) Rear lining wear and damage
Actuator malfunction Inspect the rear brake linings for
Caliper malfunction wear
Re-calibrate the parking brake,
refer to the calibration procedure
Check the rear service brake for
correct installation and operation
No communication with the

parking brake module Fuse Check fuses
Module off Bus Ensure battery is fully charged
CAN network error and in serviceable condition.
Parking brake module fault Check battery voltage at parking
brake module
Check CAN network using
manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
'Park brake Fault' displayed on

message center with Parking brake system fault Check the parking brake module
associated warning lamps for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
Brakes drag
Parking brake not re-calibrated after battery has Re-calibrate parking brake, refer
been disconnected or has been in a state of to the calibration procedure
discharge, or repairs have been carried out to Check the service brake for
the rear service or parking brake system correct operation
Service brake system fault
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Electric Parking Brake (PBM) (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation).
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable Tension Release
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Electric parking brake release tool 206-082. Only to be used for EMERGENCY brake
release
Electric parking brake release tool link lead 206-082-01. Only to be used for EMERGENCY brake
release
1. WARNING: Always use Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment to

release the cable tension, when carrying out repair operations on the
electric park brake which require cable tension release.
Connect the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment to release the

electric parking brake cable tension.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. WARNING: The procedure below should only be used in emergency

situations, to release the electric park brake. All calibration of the
parking brake system will be lost, and the parking brake will need to be
re-calibrated to function correctly.
NOTE: The tools shown must only be used in the event of an

emergency.
Remove the RH loadspace trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel RH (501-05
www.JagDocs.com
3. WARNING: Failure to follow this instruction may result in a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) being generated.
Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors from the parking

brake module, in the sequence illustrated.

Connect the special tool to the parking brake module.
5. Release the parking brake cable tension.

An audible 'click', signals complete parking brake cable
tension release.
6. Remove the special tool and carry out any necessary repairs on the
system.
7. Connect the electrical connectors in the sequence shown.
8. Install the RH loadspace trim panel.

9. WARNING: Calibrate the electric park brake using Jaguar approved

diagnostic equipment. If Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment is not
available disconnect the battery for approximatly 30 seconds , the
vehicle will then prompt the driver to carry out the calibration procedure
as per the vehicle hand book on re-connection.
Calibrate the electric park brake.

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable LH TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
Removal
3. Refer to: Rear Subframe - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe
and Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-00
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
4.
6. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable RH TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
Removal
3. Refer to: Rear Subframe - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe
and Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-00
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
6. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Module
Removal
2. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel RH (501-05 Interior Trim and

3. Torque: 4 Nm
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal position
2. Configure the electronic parking brake (EPB) using the diagnostic tool.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Switch
Removal
NOTES:
The parking brake switch is part of the transmission control switch (TCS) assembly and therefore can not be serviced
separately.
2. Refer to: Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (307-05A Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) have
been removed after the road test.

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Release Actuator
Removal
3. Remove the differential case.
Refer to: Differential Case - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
Installation).
Refer to: Differential Case - TD4 2.2L Diesel/TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-02,
4. Torque: 7 Nm
5. Torque: 20 Nm
6.
www.JagDocs.com
7.
Installation
2. CAUTION: Make sure the wiring harness is correctly routed

to avoid contact with the halfshaft. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the component.
3. CAUTION: Calibrate the electric park brake using Jaguar approved

diagnostic system. If the Jaguar approved diagnostic system is not
available disconnect the battery for approximately 30 seconds, the
vehicle will then prompt the driver to carry out the calibration procedure
as per the vehicle hand book on re-connection.
Calibrate the electric parking brake (EPB) using the diagnostic tool.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation -
CAUTION: Do not use brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 on 2006my vehicles onwards. Failure to follow this instruction may
NOTE: Brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 has now been superseded by Shell ESL Super Dot 4 which is the Jaguar recommended
brake fluid. Shell ESL Super Dot 4 can be used on all model years.
Item Specification
Brake master cylinder to brake booster retaining nuts. 25 18 -
HCU to brake master cylinder brake tubes 17 13 -
Brake master cylinder reservoir retaining bolts 4 - 35
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Component Location
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) installation shown, LHD (left-hand drive) installation similar.
Component Location
Item Description
1 Brake master cylinder and fluid reservoir
2 Brake pedal
3 Brake pipes
4 Stoplamp switch
5 ABS (anti-lock brake system) module/ HCU (hydraulic control unit)
6 Brake booster
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Overview
Overview
The hydraulic brake system is a diagonally split dual line system. The system consists of a brake pedal, vacuum brake booster,
brake master cylinder assembly, HCU (hydraulic control unit), hydraulic pipes and brake hoses.
Brake pipes from the master cylinder supply pressure to the brake calipers at the four corners of the vehicle via the HCU.
Braided steel hoses are used to connect the brake pipes to the front and rear brake calipers.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation - System Operation
and Component Description
System Operation
When the brake pedal is pressed, the front push rod in the brake booster pushes the master cylinder primary piston along the
bore of the housing. This produces pressure in the primary pressure chamber which, in conjunction with the primary spring,
overcomes the secondary spring and simultaneously moves the secondary piston along the bore. The initial movement of the
pistons away from the piston stops closes the primary and secondary center valves in the master cylinder. Further movement of
the pistons then pressurizes the fluid in the primary and secondary chambers and thus the brake circuits. The fluid in the
chambers behind the pistons is unaffected by the movement of the pistons and can flow unrestricted through the inlet ports
between the chambers and the reservoir.
Pressurized fluid enters the HCU (hydraulic control unit), which is mounted on the front of the ABS (anti-lock brake system)
module. The HCU modulates the supply of pressurized fluid to the brakes under control of the ABS module.
www.JagDocs.com
Brake Pedal
The brake pedal is mounted to a bracket attached to the rear side of the engine bulkhead. The bracket also contains the
accelerator pedal. A clevis pin connects the brake pedal to the input push rod of the brake booster and master cylinder
assembly.
The stoplamp switch is mounted in the brake pedal bracket and is operated by the brake pedal.
Brake Master Cylinder and Fluid Reservoir
Item Description
1 Brake fluid level switch electrical connector
2 Brake fluid reservoir cap
3 Brake fluid reservoir
4 Primary circuit inlet port
5 Brake master cylinder
6 Torx bolt
7 Primary circuit outlet
8 Secondary circuit outlet
9 Secondary circuit inlet port
10 Reservoir to master cylinder seal (2 off)
The brake booster and master cylinder assembly is fitted in the engine compartment. The brake master cylinder housing
consists of two hydraulic chambers containing two pistons in tandem. The primary piston (adjacent to the brake booster)
produces pressure for the primary braking circuit and this pressure acts on the secondary piston and hence creates pressure in
the secondary circuit. A brake fluid reservoir is mounted on top of the master cylinder to provide a supply of brake fluid to the
brake system. The reservoir cap is fitted with a brake fluid level switch.
Brake Fluid Level Switch
The brake fluid level switch is located in the fluid reservoir and is hardwired to the instrument cluster. When the level of fluid
in the reservoir reaches a predetermined low level, the switch contacts close and provide a signal feed back to the instrument
cluster. On receipt of the signal, the brake fluid red warning indicator will illuminate and 'BRAKE FLUID LOW' will be displayed
in the message center.
ABS Module
Item Description
1 LH (left-hand) front brake
2 RH (right-hand) rear brake
3 LH rear brake
4 RH front brake
5 Primary circuit inlet port
6 Secondary circuit inlet port
The ABS module is located in the passenger side, rear engine bay and incorporates the HCU. The HCU is a four channel unit
that modulates the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes under control of the ABS module.
The primary and secondary outlets of the master cylinder are connected to the primary and secondary circuits within the HCU.
The primary circuit in the HCU has separate outlet ports to the RH front and LH rear brakes. The secondary circuit in the HCU
has separate outlet ports to the LH front and RH rear brakes.
CAUTION: The ABS module and the HCU are a single unit and must not be separated.
HCU Schematic Diagram
Item Description
1 Brake booster
2 Primary circuit
3 Secondary circuit
4 HCU
5 Pulsation damper
6 Pulsation damper
7 Separation valve
8 Damping chambers
9 Separation valve
10 Shuttle valve
11 Hydraulic pumps
12 Motor
13 Shuttle valve
14 Pressure sensor - all vehicles
15 Low pressure accumulator
16 Check valve
17 Low pressure accumulator
18 Inlet valve
19 Inlet valve
20 Inlet valve
21 Inlet valve
22 Outlet valve
23 Outlet valve
24 Outlet valve
25 Outlet valve
26 Pressure sensors - vehicles fitted with adaptive speed control only
27 RH front brake
28 LH rear brake
29 RH rear brake
30 LH front brake
www.JagDocs.com
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation

REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Fluid Reservoir
Removal
CAUTION: If brake fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately washed down with cold water.
1. Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap.
2. Disconnect the brake fluid level electrical connector.
3. Using a suitable suction device drain the brake fluid resrvoir.

4. Remove the brake fluid reservoir.
5. Remove and discard the O-ring seals.

Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
Installation

Tighten to 8 Nm.
Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Master Cylinder
Removal
2. Remove the cowl vent screen.

For additional information, refer to: Cowl Vent Screen (501-02 Front End
Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
3. CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled,

immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with water.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-06
Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the brake booster vacuum line from the brake vacuum
pump.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
Disconnect the master cylinder brake pipes.

6. Release the fuse box.
7. Remove the brake master cylinder.
Installation

Install new O-ring seals.
www.JagDocs.com

Power Brake Actuation -
Brake booster retaining nuts - all vehicles 25 18 -
Exhaust gas recirculation valve coolant pipe - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 9 - 80
Brake vacuum pump nut - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 23 17 -
Brake vacuum pump threaded stud - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 13 10 -
Brake vacuum pump bolts - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 23 17 -
Brake vacuum pump bolts - vehicles with 5.0L 12 9 -
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster - Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
1 Output pushrod
2 Brake booster
3 Input pushrod
4 Vacuum pipe
5 Non return valve
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster - Overview
Overview
Power assistance for the braking system is provided by a vacuum brake booster. The unit increases the input load by a ratio of
6.2 : 1 and is secured to the driver's side of the engine compartment bulkhead by four studs and nuts.
The booster and master cylinder assembly is fitted in the engine compartment. A two piece plastic vacuum pipe connects the
brake booster to the inlet manifold to provide the necessary vacuum to the booster. The connection into the brake booster has
a non return valve to maintain the vacuum level in the booster and also prevent fuel vapor from entering the brake booster.
The input push rod within the brake booster is connected to the brake pedal lever. Initially, any effort applied by the driver is
increased by pedal ratio which is transferred to the input push rod. This load is further increased by the booster. The increased
load is applied to the primary piston of the master cylinder via the output pushrod of the booster. Hydraulic pressure in the
master cylinder is then applied to the brakes.
Refer to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and Operation).
Power Brake Actuation - Power Brake System

REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster
Removal
1. Remove the brake master cylinder.
2. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum electrical connector.
3. Remove the lower trim panel.
4. Remove the retaining nut.

5. Remove the brake booster retaining nuts.
6. Remove the brake booster.
Installation
1. NOTE: Replace the brake booster/pedal box gasket.

Tighten to 25 Nm.
2. Tighten to 3 Nm.
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Vacuum Pump V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.
2. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01, General Procedures).
3.
4. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping oil.
Torque: 12 Nm
5. NOTE: Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Install a new O-ring seal. To
install reverse the removal procedure.
2. Start engine and check the brake booster operation.

Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist -
Item Specification
Brake master cylinder primary pressure transducer 30 22 –
Brake tubes to hydraulic control unit (HCU) 17 13 –
Rear wheel speed sensor retaining bolt 6 – 53
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer retaining nuts 7 – 62
Hydraulic control unit (HCU) retaining bolts 8 – 71
Steering wheel rotation sensor retaining screws 4 – 35
Steering column to lower shroud retaining screws 3 – 27
www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist -
Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
2 RH (right-hand) front wheel speed sensor
4 Steering angle sensor
5 Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor
6 RH rear wheel speed sensor
7 LH (left-hand) rear wheel speed sensor
8 LH front wheel speed sensor
Overview
Overview
The ABS (anti-lock brake system) and DSC (dynamic stability control) system features a Bosch modulator, which is an
integrated four-channel HCU (hydraulic control unit) and ABS module. The unit is located in the rear of the engine compartment
on the passenger side, and is installed in the brake hydraulic circuit between the brake master cylinder and the four brake
calipers.
The ABS module is connected to the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus, and actively interacts with other vehicle
system control modules and associated sensors to receive and transmit current vehicle operating information.
When required, the ABS module will actively intervene and operate the HCU during braking or vehicle maneuvers to correct the
vehicle attitude, stability, traction or speed. During incidents of vehicle correction, the ABS module may also request the ECM
(engine control module) to control engine power in order to further stabilize and correct the vehicle.
To provide full system functionality, the ABS and DSC system comprise the following components:
DSC switch.
Four wheel speed sensors.
Steering angle sensor.
Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor.
Stoplamp switch.
Instrument cluster indicator lamps.
Integrated ABS module and HCU.
Brake booster vacuum sensor (3.0L vehicles only).
Two variants of ABS module are available, Bosch ESP®8.1 and Bosch ESP®plus8.1. The Bosch ESP®plus8.1 system is fitted to
vehicles with ACC (adaptive cruise control) and incorporates a new feature to Jaguar known as 'electronic brake prefill'.
Electronic brake prefill, senses any rapid throttle lift off, activating a small brake hydraulic pressure build-up of approximately 3
to 5 bar (43.5 to 72.5 lbf/in²) in anticipation of the brakes being applied. This application produces a quicker brake pedal
response and consequently slightly shorter stopping distances. When the ECM detects rapid throttle lift off it signals the ABS
module which controls the HCU to apply a low brake pressure to assist in a quicker brake application.
NOTE: All vehicles with ACC are supported by the Bosch ESP®plus8.1 system.
The ABS provides the following brake functions that are designed to assist the vehicle or aid the driver:
ABS.
DSC, including Trac DSC.
CBC (corner brake control).
EBD (electronic brake force distribution).
ETC (electronic traction control).
EBA (emergency brake assist).
EDC (engine drag-torque control).
Understeer control.
Electronic brake prefill (vehicles with ACC only).
Brake vacuum assist (3.0L vehicles only).
All the brake functions listed are automatically active when the ignition is in power mode and the engine is running. The DSC
system can be selected to off using the DSC switch.
WARNING: Although the vehicle is fitted with DSC, it remains the drivers responsibility to drive safely according to the
prevailing conditions.
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; N = Medium speed CANCAN bus; V = Private
CAN bus.
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) (250 A megafuse)
4 EJB (engine junction box)
5 LH (left-hand) front wheel speed sensor
6 RH (right-hand) front wheel speed sensor
7 Brake fluid level switch
8 LH rear wheel speed sensor
9 RH rear wheel speed sensor
11 High mounted stop lamp
12 LH stop lamp
13 RH stop lamp
14 Diagnostic socket
16 Electronic parking brake module
20 JaguarDrive selector module
21 Adaptive damping control module
22 Adaptive speed control module
23 Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor
24 Roof opening panel motor/module
25 Brake booster vacuum sensor (3.0L vehicles only)
26 Steering angle sensor
System Operation
Anti-Lock Brake System
ABS controls the speed of all road wheels to ensure optimum wheel slip when braking at the adhesion limit. The wheels are
prevented from locking to retain effective steering control of the vehicle.
The brake pressures are modulated separately for each wheel. Rear brake pressures are controlled to maintain rear stability on
split friction surfaces.
Dynamic Stability Control

DSC (dynamic stability control) uses brakes and powertrain torque control to assist in maintaining the yaw stability of the
vehicle. While the ignition is energized the DSC function is permanently enabled, unless selected off using the DSC switch.
DSC enhances driving safety in abrupt maneuvers and in under-steer or over-steer situations that may occur in a bend. The
ABS module monitors the yaw rate and lateral acceleration of the vehicle, steering input and individual wheel speeds, then
selectively applies individual brakes and signals for powertrain torque adjustments to reduce under-steer or over-steer
conditions.
In general:
In an under-steer situation the inner wheels are braked to counteract the yaw movement towards the outer edge of the
bend.
In an over-steer situation the outer wheels are braked to prevent the rear end of the vehicle from pushing towards the
outer edge of the bend.
The ABS module monitors the tracking stability of the vehicle using inputs from the wheel speed sensors, the steering angle
sensor, and the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor. The tracking stability is compared with stored target data. Whenever
the tracking stability deviates from the target data, the ABS module intervenes by applying the appropriate control strategy.
The following interactions occur in an intervention situation:
High speed CAN signal to the ECM, to reduce engine torque.

Application of braking to the appropriate corner of the vehicle.
Trac DSC
TracDSC is an alternative setting of DSC with reduced system interventions. With TracDSC engaged, traction may be somewhat
increased, although stability may be reduced compared to normal DSC. TracDSC is intended for use only on dry tarmac, by
suitably experienced drivers and should not be selected for other surfaces or by drivers with insufficient skill and training to
operate the vehicle safely with the TracDSC function engaged.
The less restrictive TracDSC setting may be preferred, for example, by expert drivers engaged in high performance driving on
dry Tarmac surfaces such as tracks and circuits.
Switching between DSC and Trac DSC:

Press and hold the DSC switch for less than 10 seconds.
The message center will temporarily display either Trac DSC or DSC ON.
The warning indicator in the instrument panel will illuminate while Trac DSC is selected.
The warning indicator will flash when DSC or Trac DSC is active.
NOTE: If cruise control is engaged, it will automatically disengage if DSC activates.
Refer to: Speed Control (310-03 Speed Control - 2.7L V6 - TdV6, Description and Operation).
Corner Brake Control

CBC (corner brake control) influences the brake pressures, below and within DSC and ABS thresholds, to counteract the yawing
moment produced when braking in a corner. CBC produces a correction torque by limiting the brake pressure on one side of the
vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution

EBD (electronic brake force distribution) limits the brake pressure applied to the rear wheels. When the brakes are applied, the
weight of the vehicle transfers forwards, reducing the ability of the rear wheels to transfer braking effort to the road surface.
This may cause the rear wheels to slip and make the vehicle unstable.
EBD uses the ABS braking hardware to automatically optimize the pressure to the rear brakes, below the point where ABS is
normally invoked.
NOTE: Only the rear brakes are controlled by the EBD function.
Electronic Traction Control

ETC (electronic traction control) attempts to optimize forward traction by reducing engine torque, or by applying the brake of a
spinning wheel until traction is regained.
ETC is activated if an individual wheel speed is above that of the vehicle reference speed (positive slip) and the brake pedal is
not pressed. The brake is applied to the spinning wheel, allowing the excess torque to be transmitted to the non-spinning
wheel through the drive line. If necessary, the ABS module also sends a high speed CAN bus message to the ECM to request a
reduction in engine torque.
When the DSC function is selected off using the DSC switch, the braking and engine torque reduction features are both
disabled, except when the JaguarDrive control is in winter mode. When the JaguarDrive control is in winter mode, selecting the
DSC function off retains the braking and engine torque reduction features, but reduces intervention levels compared to DSC
and Trac DSC modes.
Emergency Brake Assist

EBA (emergency brake assist) assists the driver in emergency braking situations by automatically increasing the applied
braking effort. The ABS module invokes EBA when:
The brake pedal is rapidly pressed.

The brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation.
When the brake pedal is rapidly pressed, the ABS module increases the hydraulic pressure to all of the brakes until the
threshold for ABS operation is reached. This action applies the maximum braking effort for the available traction. The ABS
module monitors for the sudden application of the brakes, using inputs from the brake pedal switch and from the pressure
sensor within the HCU (hydraulic control unit). With the brake pedal pressed, if the rate of increase of hydraulic pressure
exceeds the predetermined limit, the ABS module invokes emergency braking.
When the brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation, the ABS module increases the
hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes up to the ABS threshold.
EBA operation continues until the driver releases the brake pedal, sufficiently for the hydraulic pressure in the HCU to drop
below a threshold value stored in the ABS module.
Engine Drag-Torque Control

EDC (engine drag-torque control) prevents wheel slip caused by any of the following: A
sudden decrease in engine torque when the accelerator is suddenly released.

A downshift using the Jaguar sequential shift function on automatic transmission vehicles.
When the ABS module detects the onset of wheel slip without the brakes being applied, the ABS module signals the ECM via
the high speed CAN bus to request a momentary increase in engine torque.
Understeer Control
Understeer Logic Control is a proactive system which monitors the vehicle for understeer by comparing signals from the yaw
rate and lateral acceleration sensor with signals from the steering angle sensor and wheel speed sensors.
www.JagDocs.com
When the ABS module detects the onset of understeer, the ABS module signals the ECM via the high speed CAN bus to request
a decrease in engine torque. At the same time the ABS module will control the HCU to apply brake pressure to the relevant
wheels to correct the understeer.
Electronic Brake Prefill (Vehicles With ACC Only)

Electronic brake prefill (Bosch ESP®plus8.1), senses any rapid throttle lift off, activating a small brake hydraulic pressure
build-up of approximately 3 to 5 bar (43.5 to 72.5 lbf/in²) in anticipation of the brakes being applied.
This application produces a quicker brake pedal response and consequently slightly shorter stopping distances. The system
supports vehicles with ACC (adaptive cruise control).
When the ABS module detects rapid throttle lift off (from the signals received from the ECM over the high speed CAN bus), it
controls the HCU to apply a low brake pressure to assist in a quicker brake application.
Brake Vacuum Assist (3.0L Vehicles Only)

Operation of Brake Vacuum Assist generally occurs at the beginning of an ignition cycle when brake booster vacuum levels are
low; refer to Brake Booster Vacuum sensor, below.
Brake vacuum assist operation will be recognized by the driver experiencing a vibrating brake pedal and slight modulator noise.
This will be similar to that experienced when ABS system is operating.
As the engine warms up, Brake Vacuum Assist operation will become less frequent. However, it can be become more active
when vacuum levels are low due to driving at high-altitudes, or during frequent heavy-braking.
Noise levels during Brake Vacuum Assist may vary with initial system activity being the loudest observed. In some
circumstances initial activity may be interpreted as a 'thump' noise, particularly if there is no immediate and significant Brake
Vacuum Assist functionality.
In this circumstance system behavior is normal and should not be a cause for fault investigation.
Dynamic Stability Control Switch
Item Description
1 DSC switch
The DSC switch is mounted in the floor console adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector.
DSC becomes active whenever the engine is running. A momentary press of the switch allows the driver to toggle between the
standard DSC settings and the optimized 'Trac DSC' settings. The message 'Trac DSC' or 'DSC on' will temporarily be displayed
in the instrument cluster message center. The amber DSC warning indicator in the instrument cluster remains illuminated while
'Trac DSC' is selected.
The DSC can be switched off by pressing and holding the switch for more than 10 seconds.
In each case the message 'DSC OFF' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center to confirm DSC has been
switched off. The amber DSC warning indicator in the instrument cluster will remain illuminated. The system can be switched
back on again by simply pressing and releasing the switch. The message 'DSC ON' will then temporarily appear in the
instrument cluster message center to confirm the system is on.
NOTE: Switch requests may be delayed if the switch is pressed while a DSC operation is taking place. The switch request
will be displayed in the instrument cluster but the ABS module will not initiate any stability changes until it is safe to do so.
If a fault is detected with the DSC switch, the ABS module defaults to the 'DSC ON' setting and any switch requests are
ignored.
WARNING: It is recommended that when using snow chains, Trac DSC is switched off and JaguarDrive control winter mode
is selected.
Wheel Speed Sensors
Item Description
1 Front wheel speed sensor
2 Rear wheel speed sensor
An active wheel speed sensor is installed in each wheel hub to provide the ABS module with a rotational speed signal from
each road wheel. The head of each front wheel speed sensor is positioned close to a magnetic encoder ring incorporated into
the inboard seal of the wheel bearing. The head of each rear wheel speed sensor is positioned close to a magnetic encoder
ring incorporated into the rear wheel bearing assembly. Each encoder ring contains 46 north and south poles. A fly lead
connects each sensor to the vehicle harness.
The wheel speed sensors each have a signal and a return connection with the ABS module. When the ignition is ON the ABS
module supplies a signal feed to the wheel speed sensors and monitors the return signals. Any rotation of the road wheels
induces current fluctuations in the return signals, which are converted into individual wheel speeds and overall vehicle speed
by the ABS module.
The ABS module broadcasts the individual wheel speeds and the vehicle speed on the high speed CAN bus for use by other
systems, although vehicle speed information to the roof opening panel motor/module is a hardwired connection.
If a wheel speed sensor fault is detected by the ABS module, 'ABS FAULT' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message
center and an amber warning indicator will illuminate.
As the wheel speed sensors are active devices, a return signal is available when the road wheels are not rotating. This enables
the ABS module to check the condition of the speed sensors while the vehicle is stationary.
Steering Angle Sensor
The steering angle sensor measures the steering wheel angle and the rate of change of the steering wheel angle. These
measurements are received by the ABS module and broadcast on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
The steering angle sensor is mounted on the steering column upper shroud mounting bracket, immediately behind the
multifunction switches, and is secured by 2 screws. A fly lead connects the sensor to the passenger compartment wiring
harness via a 4 pin multiplug.
The sensor is housed in a 'U' shaped plastic casing and contains two offset LED (light emitting diode)s facing two detectors.
An encoder ring is mounted on the inner steering column shaft and intersects the LEDs and detectors. The encoder ring
contains 60 slots which break and restore the light beams between the LEDs and the detectors as the steering wheel is
rotated. The ABS module is able to determine the direction of rotation of the steering wheel by monitoring when the light
beams change state. The LEDs and detectors are mounted in such a way that only one beam will change state, either to
broken or restored, at any one time.
The center (straight ahead) position of the steering wheel has to be learned by the ABS module every time the ignition is
switched ON. The steering angle sensor is unable to determine the center position so inputs from the yaw rate and lateral
acceleration sensor and wheel speed signals are also used by the ABS module to help it perform this process. If extreme
weather conditions are present, for example ice causing extreme wheel spin or understeer/oversteer, the ABS module may not
be able to determine the center position of the steering wheel. In this situation 'DSC NOT AVAILABLE' will be displayed in the
instrument cluster message center and the amber warning indicator will illuminate.
'DSC NOT AVAILABLE' will also be displayed if the ABS module detects a steering angle sensor fault. The amber warning
indicator will illuminate until the fault is rectified.
Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensor
The yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor is mounted on the rear parcel shelf. The sensor is secured by two screws and
connects to the vehicle wiring via a four pin multiplug.
When the ignition is ON, the sensor receives a power feed from the CJB. The ground path for the sensor is located behind the
left hand rear seat back. The sensor measures the yaw rate and lateral acceleration of the vehicle, providing values to the ABS
module via a dedicated, private high speed CAN bus connection. The ABS module broadcasts these values on the high speed
CAN bus for use by other systems.
If a sensor fault is detected by the ABS module, 'DSC NOT AVAILABLE' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message
center and the amber warning indicator will illuminate.
Stoplamp Switch
The stoplamp switch is mounted on the brake pedal box and is connected to the vehicle harness via a four pin multiplug.
When the brake pedal is pressed, the switch contacts close. This allows a hard wired signal feed to be sent to the ECM. A
stoplamp switch status message is then sent from the ECM to the ABS module on the high speed CAN bus. The ABS module is
then able to control braking force accordingly in conjunction with the HCU.
NOTE: The stoplamp switch also forms part of the speed control system.
For additional information, refer to:
Speed Control (310-03 Speed Control - 2.7L V6 - TdV6, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03 Speed Control - 3.0L NA V6 - AJ27, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03 Speed Control - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8/4.2L SC V8 - AJV8, Description and Operation).
www.JagDocs.com
Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators
Item Description
1 ABS warning indicator (USA only)
2 ABS warning indicator (Canada and Mexico only)
3 ABS warning indicator (all except USA, Canada and Mexico)
4 DSC warning indicator
5 Brake warning indicator (USA only)
6 Brake warning indicator (all except USA)
The instrument cluster and message center contains warning indicators and warning messages to display the operating status
of the anti-lock control - stability assist functions. The warning indicators and messages provide a visual notification of either
a system warning or information indication to the driver. There are three warning indicators on the instrument cluster, which
vary dependant on market, and several types of message relating to the anti-lock control - stability assist functions. The DSC
OFF message is accompanied by an audible warning.
The following anti-lock control - stability assist warning indicators are installed in the instrument cluster:
An amber ABS warning indicator.

A red brake warning indicator.
An amber DSC warning indicator.
Refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation) / Information and Message Center (413-08
Information and Message Center, Description and Operation).
ABS Module
Item Description
1 LH front brake
2 RH rear brake
3 LH rear brake
4 RH front brake
5 Primary inlet
6 Secondary inlet
The ABS module is located in the passenger side, rear engine bay and incorporates the HCU. The module is mounted on the
rear face of the HCU, which it uses to control all braking and stability functions by modulating hydraulic pressure to the
individual wheel brakes.
Two types of ABS modules are available; one for vehicles with standard Speed Control, one for vehicles fitted with Adaptive
Speed Control.
If an ABS modulator fault is detected, 'ABS FAULT' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center and the amber
warning indicator will illuminate.
CAUTION: The ABS module and the HCU comprise a single unit and must not be separated.
Hydraulic Control Unit

The HCU is a four channel unit, secured to a mounting bracket located in the passenger side, rear engine bay. The HCU
modulates the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes under the control of the ABS module.
Refer to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and Operation).
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
For a detailed description of the Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist)
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (Description and Operation),

Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (Description and Operation),
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (Description and Operation).
2. Confirm if the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) warning light was illuminated, or still is.
NOTE: An intermittent fault may allow the warning light to go off. This does not necessarily mean the fault is not
present. Some warnings will appear to clear when the ignition is cycled. This is often because the warning has flagged as a
result of one of the vehicle's on-board diagnostic routines having run to detect the fault. If the same routine is not run when
the ignition status is set to ON, the warning will not re-flag until the routine does run.
Visual Inspection
Brake fluid level Warning light operation

Vacuum system Fuses
Wheel speed sensor installation Wheel speed sensors
Wheel speed sensor air gap Connectors/Pins
Magnetic pulse wheel(s) (damaged/contaminated) Harnesses
Steering angle sensor Steering wheel rotation sensor
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer cluster installation Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer cluster
Incorrect wheel or tire size Booster pressure sensor
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
the next step.
5. If the cause is not visually evident check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) (100-00 General Information,
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
Removal
1. NOTE: The anti-lock braking system (ABS) module mounted to the

hydraulic control unit (HCU) cannot be serviced separately. If the ABS
module requires replacement, the unit must be replaced as a complete
assembly.
Remove the HCU.

For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
(206-09, Removal and Installation).
Installation
1. Install the HCU.

For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
(206-09, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal
and Installation).

5. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the component
prior to removal.
Installation

Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
Special Tool(s)
Brake pedal hold down tool
JDS9013
Removal
All vehicles

2. Remove the secondary bulkhead RH panel.

3. Remove the secondary bulkhead LH panel.

All vehicles

5. Connect brake bleed pipes and bottles to the left-hand front and the
left-hand rear brake caliper bleed nipples and loosen the brake caliper
bleed nipples.
6. NOTE: To prevent the loss of brake fluid, using the special tool
apply the brake pedal and set to 40mm ( 1.6 in ) below the rest
position.
Using the special tool, press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Remove the bleed pipes and bottles.

Tighten the left-hand front brake caliper bleed nipple.
1. For vehicles with supercharger: Tighten to 14Nm.
2. For vehicles without supercharger: Tighten to 8 Nm.
Tighten the left-hand rear brake caliper bleed nipple.

1. All vehicles: Tighten to 14 Nm.
Disconnect and remove the brake bleed pipes and bottles.

Install the bleed nipple dust caps.
Disconnect the hydraulic control unit (HCU) electrical

connector.
9. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
If brake fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the affected

area must be immediately washed down with cold water.
NOTES:
Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this operation.
Note the position of the components prior to removal.

Disconnect the 6 brake pipe unions.

Remove the HCU.

Loosen but do not remove the 2 nuts.
Lift and remove the HCU.
Installation
All vehicles
www.JagDocs.com
1. CAUTION: If accidentally dropped or knocked install a new
hydraulic control unit (HCU) and module.
NOTES:
Make sure the HCU locating grommet is correctly

seated in the bracket before installing the ABS module.
Make sure the HCU locating pin is correctly located in

the grommet, and the 2 isolators are fully seated in the
bracket slots.

Install the HCU to the retaining bracket.

Tighten to 8 Nm.
2. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that these components are installed to the

noted removal position.
NOTES:
Remove and discard the blanking caps.

Connect the brake pipe unions.

Tighten to 17 Nm.

Connect the HCU electrical connector.

6. Install the secondary bulkhead RH panel.

7. Install the secondary bulkhead LH panel.

All vehicles

9. Using the diagnostic tool, configure the new HCU.

Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal
NOTES:
The ignition must be switched off.

2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector.

3. CAUTION: Make sure that the harness retaining bracket
is not removed. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the harness.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the clip.
Release the wiring harness grommet.

prior to removal.
Remove the wheel speed sensor.

Remove the retaining bolt.
Release the wheel speed sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the component is installed to

the position noted on removal.

Tighten to 6 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor
Removal
2. Refer to: Clockspring (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal

and Installation).
3.
4.
Installation

Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Yaw Rate Sensor and Accelerometer
Removal
2. Refer to: Parcel Shelf (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
3. Torque: 6 Nm
4. CAUTION: Make sure that all diagnostic trouble codes

(DTCs) have been removed after the road test.
NOTE: Make sure that this component is installed to

the noted removal position.
Installation

Steering System - General Information -
Steering Linkage Specifications
Steering Linkage Free Play Measurement (mm) Measurement (in)
Free play (measured at the steering wheel rim) 0-6 0-0.24
Power Steering Pump Specifications
Item Specification
Power steering pump relief pressure 106-114 bar
Item Specification
Power steering fluid Dexron 3
Steering System - General Information - Steering System
For a detailed description of the steering system operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections of the
workshop manual. REFER to:
Power Steering (211-02 Power Steering, Description and Operation),

Steering Linkage (211-03 Steering Linkage, Description and Operation),
Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Description and Operation),
Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation),
Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation),
Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Tire condition/pressure Fuses

Fluid level Harnesses for damage/corrosion
Leaks Electrical connector(s)
Security, condition and correct installation of suspension components Damaged/corroded pins
Security, condition and correct installation of steering system components
CAUTION: If a steering gear assembly is returned under warranty with leaking output shaft seals, but there is also
damage to the steering gear boot/boots the steering gear warranty will be invalid. This is due to the steering gear output
shaft seals being damaged due to foreign materials entering the steering gear boot and damaging the steering gear output
shaft seals thereafter.
the next step.
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the symptom chart.
Symptom Charts
WARNING: It is not possible to CHECK the torque of a patchlock bolt, if the torque is suspected to be low, the bolt must
be REMOVED/DISCARDED and a new bolt MUST be INSTALLED and torque to the correct value.
NOTE: If the module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Fluid Leakage
NOTE: Confirm the location of the fluid leak. CLEAN the area of the leak, inspect the area and confirm the exact position.
Ensure the fluid is not from another system on the vehicle.
Symptom Possible Causes Action
Overfilled system Correct the fluid level as required
Power steering
fluid leakage Check and install new steering gear as required, refer to the new
Steering gear module/component installation note at the top of the Symptom
Charts
Damaged fluid
Check and install a new fluid cap/reservoir as required
cap/reservoir
Tighten the hose connection or latch plate fixing to the

recommended torque.
Loose or damaged
REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System - General
hoses and fittings
Information, Specifications).
O-ring or Dowty seals
Check and install new components as required
Install new O-ring or Dowty seals as required
Check and install a new fluid cooler as required, refer to the new
Fluid cooler module/component installation note at the top of the Symptom
Charts
Check and install a new power steering pump as required, refer to

Power steering pump the new module/component installation note at the top of the
Symptom Charts
Functional
Check the steering alignment.

Steering wheel REFER to: Specifications (204-00
Steering not correctly centred
misalignment Suspension System - General
Check and tighten the steering

wheel retaining bolt as required.
Steering wheel loose REFER to: Specifications (211-00
Steering System - General
Check and install new

Excess play in the steering linkage
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to

adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure to
follow this instruction will invalidate the
steering gear warranty
Steering gear not correctly adjusted (causing
excessive backlash) Check and install a new steering
gear as required, refer to the
Excessive free play at installation note at the top of
steering wheel (refer to the Symptom Charts
the Steering Linkage
Inspection and Backlash
(Free play) Check in this Check and tighten the lower
section) steering column pinch bolts as
Lower steering column universal joint pinch required.
bolts loose REFER to: Specifications (211-00

column or steering column lower
Excessive wear in steering column universal shaft as required, refer to the
joints new module/component
installation note at the top of
the Symptom Charts
Check/tighten and install new

steering gear mounting bolts as
Steering gear mounting bolts loose or required.
damaged REFER to: Specifications (211-00
www.JagDocs.com
Check and install new tie-rod

ends as required, refer to the
Wear in steering gear tie-rod end ball joints new module/component
the Symptom Charts
NOTE: Inner ball joint wear is rare. The steering

gear installed to all Jaguar vehicles has a spring
loaded pinion to ensure the correct level of Check and install new steering
engagement between the rack and pinion. This play gear as required, refer to the
is optimized with the steering gear in the central new module/component
position and should not be confused with inner ball installation note at the top of
joint wear. Check for vertical motion in the inner ball the Symptom Charts
joint with the steering gear in the central position.
Wear in steering gear inner ball joints
Check and install new

Wear in suspension ball joints/bushings

Steering gear not correctly adjusted
the Symptom Charts
Check and rectify the source of

the contamination and install
new brake pads and discs as
Veer under braking Contamination of brake pads and discs required, refer to the new
module/component installation
note at the top of the Symptom
Charts
Check and rectify sticking slide

pins and install new calipers as
required, refer to the new
Seized front brake caliper slide pins or piston
Charts
Damaged brake discs
Check and install new brake discs
as required, refer to the new
Charts
For information on diagnosis of

uneven tire wear.
REFER to: Suspension System
(204-00 Suspension System -
General Information, Diagnosis
Uneven tire wear
and Testing).
Incorrect tire pressure
Check and adjust tire pressures
as required.
Vehicle pulls to one side REFER to: Specifications (204-04
when driving on a level Wheels and Tires,
surface Specifications).
NOTE: Dealerships must keep a

copy of the BEFORE and AFTER
Incorrect geometry settings geometry figures with job card for future
reference
Check and adjust geometry as

required. REFER to: (204-00
Suspension System - General
Information)
(General Procedures),
Front Toe Adjustment (General
Procedures),
Rear Toe Adjustment (General
Procedures).
Notify the customer of incorrect

Vehicle is unevenly loaded or overloaded
vehicle loading

Steering gear is not correctly adjusted
the Symptom Charts

front suspension components as
Loose, damaged or worn front suspension required.
components REFER to: Specifications (204-00

rear suspension components as
Loose, damaged or worn rear suspension required.
components REFER to: Specifications (204-00
For information on diagnosis of

the brake system.
REFER to: Brake System (206-00
Incorrect brake operation
Brake System - General
Information, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Set underbody alignment

referring to the Removal and
Incorrect underbody alignment Installation procedures in section
502-00 of the workshop manual
for instruction
Check and adjust the tire

pressures as required.
REFER to: Specifications (204-04
Incorrect tire pressure or tire size Wheels and Tires,
Specifications).
Check and install a new tire as
required
Vehicle wanders from

side to side when driven Notify the customer of incorrect
Vehicle is unevenly or excessively loaded
straight ahead and the vehicle loading
steering wheel is held in
a firm position
Check and adjust as required.
REFER to: (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information)
Incorrect toe adjustment (General Procedures),
Front Toe Adjustment (General
Procedures),
Rear Toe Adjustment (General
Procedures).
Noise
Check for leaks and rectify as required. For further

information refer to the symptom charts for
Low power steering fluid level
leakage in this section. Fill power steering fluid
reservoir to correct level
NOTE: Look for small air bubbles Bleed the power steering system.
visible in the fluid, air may also get REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding
trapped in the hydraulic system (211-00 Steering System - General Information,
Air in hydraulic system
Continuous noise
Power steering pipe/hose in Check and reposition, or install new IF
contact with the vehicle body damaged/deformed, power steering pipe/hose
Check and clear restriction to pipe/hose

Power steering pipe/hose
Reposition power steering pipe/hose. Install new
restricted or twisted
pipe/hose IF permanently damaged/deformed
Tighten the power steering pump mounting bolts

Power steering pump mounting to the correct torque.
bolts loose REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System
- General Information, Specifications).
Check and fill power steering fluid reservoir to

NOTE: Refer to the power correct level
steering pressure check in this section Bleed the power steering system.
Noise gets worse REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding
when system is Low power steering fluid level (211-00 Steering System - General Information,
loaded Aerated fluid General Procedures).
Low power steering pump Check power steering pump pressure. If the pump
pressure pressure is low, install a new power steering
pump
Front End Accessory Check FEAD belt tension

FEAD belt incorrectly tensioned
Drive (FEAD) belt Check FEAD belt condition and install a new belt
or glazed
squeal as required
Chirp noise from the Check FEAD belt tension

steering pump when a Loose or worn FEAD belt Check FEAD belt condition and install a new belt
load is applied as required
Scrape/grind noise Steering column shroud foul Correctly install the steering column shroud to
from behind steering condition or clockspring eliminate the foul condition
wheel while steering Install a new clockspring as required
Foreign objects Remove foreign objects from between steering

column shroud and steering wheel/steering
column rotating components
Click Clockspring or steering column Correctly install and install new components as
multifunction switch LH required
Loose universal joint pinch bolt Install a new universal joint pinch bolt and
tighten to correct specification.
REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System
Squeak Steering column shroud joints Apply Krytox spray to steering column shroud
joints
Clockspring Install new clockspring as required

Loose fixings (universal joint Tighten fixings to correct specification.

Knock pinch bolt and steering column REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System
fixings) - General Information, Specifications).
Foreign objects Remove foreign objects from between steering

column shroud and steering wheel/steering
column rotating components
Rattle
Loose fixings Tighten steering column fixings to correct
specification.
REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System
Electric motor/solenoid
NOTE: Before carrying out repairs/replacement,
assess column adjustment noise levels against other
vehicles of the same model
Noise while adjusting
column Install new components as required
Motor spindle/lead screw Lubricate lead screw
Vibration
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust the

steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this
Loose or worn steering instruction will invalidate the steering gear
Wheel Fight (Kick Back) - condition warranty.
where roughness is felt in the components/bushings
steering wheel by the driver when Tighten and install new steering
the vehicle is driven over rough components/bushings as required
surfaces
Loose or worn suspension Tighten and install new suspension

components/bushings components/bushings as required
Check for wheel and tire damage. Install

Road wheel and tire new components as required
Nibble (Shimmy) - condition where
condition Check for tire uniformity. Install new
oscillation of the steering wheel
tire(s) as required
occurs (not vertical which is Shake).
This is driven by road wheel
imbalance Check and adjust road wheel balance as
Road wheel imbalance
required
NOTE: Vibration smooths out Ensure tires installed are to Jaguar

Shake - condition where vertical
after several miles of driving specification. Install new tires as
vibration of the steering
required
wheel/column occurs (not
Road wheel imbalance due Check and adjust tire pressures to
oscillation which is Nibble)
to tire flat-spotting correct specification
Component Tests
Steering Linkage Inspection and Backlash (Free play) Check
CAUTION: Steering gear boots must be handled carefully to avoid damage. Use new clamps when installing steering gear
boots.
Inspect the boots for cuts, deterioration, twisting or distortion. Check the steering gear boots to make sure they are tight.
Install new boots or clamps as required.
NOTE: The following steps must be carried out with assistance.
1. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, gently turn the steering wheel to the left and the right to check for free
play.
2. Free play should be between 0 and 6 mm (0 and 0.24 in) at the steering wheel rim. If the free play exceeds this limit,
either the ball joints are worn, the lower steering column joints are worn or the backlash of the steering gear is
excessive.
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this instruction will invalidate the steering
gear warranty.
3. The backlash of the steering gear cannot be adjusted, install a new steering gear if excessive backlash is diagnosed.
4. Grasp the steering wheel firmly and move it up and down and to the left and right without turning the wheel to check
for column bearing wear, steering wheel or steering column.
Power Steering Fluid Condition Check
1. Run the engine for 2 minutes.
2. Check the power steering fluid system level.
3. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances should be dark reddish, not brown or black.
4. Using a suitable clean syringe extract a suitable amount of fluid from the reservoir.
5. Allow the fluid to drip onto a facial tissue and examine the stain.
6. If evidence of solid material is found, the power steering fluid system should be drained for further inspection.
7. If fluid contamination or steering component failure is confirmed by the sediment in the power steering fluid system,
refer to Steering Fault Diagnosis by Symptom Charts in this section.
Power Steering Pressure Test
Test Equipment

1 211-011 Pressure Gauge Hose
2 211-011-08 Pump Return Hose
3 211-011-07 Pump Return Hose Connector
4 211-011-03/2 Test Equipment to High Pressure Hose Adaptor
5 211-011-03/1 Pump High Pressure Outlet to Hose Adaptor
6 211-011-02 Pump Adaptor to Control Valve Hose
7 211-011-01 Control Valve
8 211-011 Pressure Gauge
9 - 'O' Ring Seal
The measurement of the maximum system pressure, (which is governed by the pressure relief valve) is achieved by inserting
the Service Tool (pressure gauge and adaptors) into the fluid circuit of the power steering system. Run the engine at idle
speed, turn the steering from lock to lock and read the maximum pressure recorded on the gauge.
Installing Test Equipment
To install the pressure test equipment:
Place a suitable drain tray below the power steering pump.

Install a hose clamp on the reservoir to pump hose prior to disconnecting any hoses, to avoid unnecessary loss of fluid.
Disconnect the hose from the power steering pump high pressure outlet.
Install the pump outlet to hose adaptor (5). Do not omit the 'O' ring seal (9).
Connect the power steering pump adaptor to control valve hose (6) of the test equipment.
Install the adaptor (4) in the high pressure hose previously removed from the power steering pump outlet.
Connect the connector (3) of the test equipment hose (2) to the adaptor (4).
Remove the hose clamp from the reservoir hose.
Start the engine to check the system pressure.
www.JagDocs.com
With the control valve (7) OPEN and the engine idling, the following system pressures may be checked:
During turning when static (dry parking pressure).

When the steering is held on full lock (maximum system pressure or pressure relief).
With the steering at rest (idle pressure or back pressure).
CAUTIONS:
To avoid excessive heating of the power steering pump when checking the pressure, do not close the valve for more than
5 seconds maximum.
When checking the pump pressure DO NOT drive the vehicle with the test equipment installed.
With the control valve (7) CLOSED the power steering pump maximum output pressure can be checked.
Removing Test Equipment
To remove the test equipment:
Install a hose clamp on the reservoir to power steering pump hose.

Removing the test equipment is a reversal of the installation instructions.
Install a new 'O' ring seal (9) to the power steering pump high pressure outlet to hose connection.
Install the original hose to the power steering pump.
Remove the clamp from the reservoir to the power steering pump hose.
Top-up the reservoir fluid.
Bleed the power steering system.
REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding (211-00 Steering System - General Information, General Procedures).
Description of Terms
General Steering System Noises
Boom
Rhythmic sound like a drum roll or distant thunder. May cause pressure on the ear drum.
Buzz
Low-pitched sound, like a bee. Usually associated with vibrations.
Chatter
Rapidly repeating metallic sound.
Chuckle
Rapid noise that sounds like a stick against the spokes of a spinning bicycle wheel.
Chirp
High pitched rapidly repeating sound, like chirping birds.
Click
Light sound, like a ball point pen being clicked.
Click/Thump
Heavy metal-to-metal sound, like a hammer striking steel.
Grind
Abrasive sound, like a grinding wheel or sandpaper rubbing against wood.
Groan/Moan
Continuous, low-pitched humming sound.
Groan/Howl
Low, guttural sound, like an angry dog.
Hiss
Continuous sound like air escaping from a tire valve.

Hum
Continuous sound of varying frequencies, like a wire humming in the wind.
Knock
Heavy, loud repeating sound like a knock on a door.
Ping
Similar to knock, except at higher frequency.
Rattle
A sound suggesting looseness, such as marbles rolling around in a can.
Roar
Deep, long, prolonged sound like an animal, or winds and ocean waves.
Rumble
Low, heavy continuous sound like that made by wagons or thunder.
Scrape
Grating noise like one hard plastic part rubbing against another.
Squeak
High-pitched sound like rubbing a clean window.
Squeal
Continuous, high-pitched sound like running finger nails across a chalkboard.
Tap
Light, hammering sound like tapping pencil on edge of table. May be rhythmic or intermittent.
Whirr/Whine
High-pitched buzzing sound, like an electric motor or drill.
Whistle
Sharp, shrill sound, like wind passing a small opening.
Specific Steering System Noise Types
Belt Squeal
Belt squeal is a high frequency air-borne noise generated by slippage of the ribbed Vee belt on the power steering pump
pulley. Squeal increases with system loading and at full lock.
Clonk
Clonk is a structure-borne noise heard as a loose-sounding rattle or vibration coming from the steering column. Clonk can be
identified by driving and turning over cobblestones, rough roads, or high frequency bumps such as 25-50 mm tall tar strips.
Clonk requires a tie-rod load impact.
Column Knock
Column knock is a loose-sounding rattle or vibration generated by the steering column shaft contacting other portions of the
column assembly. The noise is both audible and tactile. Column knock is generated by driving over cobblestones or rough
pavement. It is not necessary to turn the steering wheel to create this noise.
Column Rattle
Column rattle is a metallic sounding noise created when applying a highly impulsive force to the steering wheel. Column rattle
is often used to combine the more general group of column noises including clonk and column knock. Column rattle noises can
be caused by clonk, knock, loose column components, bonus parts etc. A series of parked, straight-line driving, and cornering
tests should be carried out to isolate the source/sources.
Grinding/Scrape
Grinding is a low frequency noise in the column when the steering wheel is turned. It is generally caused by interference
between moving components such as the steering wheel to steering column shroud.
Grunt (Squawk/Whoop)
Grunt is a 'honking' sound elicited when coming off one of the steering stops. Grunt is generally excited during parking
manoeuvres with a low to medium speed steering input.
Hiss (Swish)
Hiss or Valve Hiss is a high-frequency sound coming from the steering gear when the system is loaded. It is a rushing or
'swish' noise that doesn't change frequency with RPM. Hiss is the general noise generated by the flow of hydraulic fluid through
restrictions in the steering system. Restrictions include the rotary steering valve, power steering tubes, connectors, tuning
orifices, etc. Hiss can be air-borne and structure-borne, but the structure-borne path through the steering intermediate shaft is
usually dominant.
Moan (Groan)
Moan is the general structure-borne noise of the steering system. Moan is primarily transmitted to the driver via the body
structure through the pump mount, engine mounts, power steering lines and power steering brackets. On some vehicles, moan
is a loud humming noise, often present when the wheel is turned and the system is loaded. It may change frequency with
engine RPM and if the system is loaded or unloaded.
Steering Gear Knock (Steering Gear Slap)
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this instruction will invalidate the steering
gear warranty.
Steering gear knock is a rattle sound and steering wheel vibration caused by separation of the steering gear and pinion while
driving over bumps. It is a structure-borne noise transmitted through the intermediate shaft and column. Steering gear knock
can also be heard as a 'thump' or impact noise that occurs with the vehicle stationary when the steering wheel is released
from a loaded position and allowed to return to rest. Noise occurs with the engine on or off.
Rattles
Rattles are noises caused by knocking or hitting of components in the steering system. Steering rattles can occur in the engine
compartment, the suspension, or the passenger compartment. Rattles can be caused by loose components, movable and
flexible components, and improper clearances.
Squeaks/Scrapes
Squeaks/Scrapes are noises due to friction or component rubbing anywhere in the steering system. Squeaks/Scrapes have
appeared in steering linkages and joints, in column components and in column and steering wheel trim.
Weep
Weep is an air-borne noise, occasionally generated when turning the steering across lock at a constant rate. When present on
a vehicle the noise, once initiated can often be maintained across a large proportion of the available steering movement.
Whistle
Whistle is similar to hiss but is louder and of a higher frequency. It is also more of a pure tone noise than hiss. Whistle is
air-borne and is generated by a high flow rate of hydraulic fluid through a small restriction.
Zip
Zip noise is the air-borne noise generated by power steering pump cavitation when power steering fluid does not flow freely
through the suction hose from the reservoir to the pump. Zip primarily occurs during cold weather at start-up.
Steering System Vibrations and Harshness
Buzz
Buzz is a tactile rotary vibration felt in the steering wheel when steering inputs are slow. Buzz can also be called a grinding
feel and it is closely related to grunt and is caused by high system gain with low damping. Buzz is generally excited during
parking manoeuvres with low to medium speed steering input.
Buzz (Electrical)
A different steering buzz can be caused by pulse width modulated (PWM) electric actuators used in variable assist steering
systems. This buzz is felt by turning the ignition key to run without starting the engine and holding onto the steering wheel.
In extreme cases, the buzz can be felt with the engine running also.
Column/Steering Wheel Shake
Column shake is a low frequency vertical vibration excited by primary engine vibrations.
Nibble (Shimmy)
Steering nibble is a rotary oscillation or vibration of the steering wheel, which can be excited at a specific vehicle speed.
Nibble is driven by wheel and tire imbalance exciting a suspension recession mode, which then translates into steering gear
travel and finally steering wheel nibble.
Shudder (Judder)
Shudder is a low frequency oscillation of the entire steering system (tire, wheels, steering gear and linkage, etc.) when the
vehicle is steered during static-park or at low speeds. Shudder is very dependent on road surface.
Torque/Velocity Variation (Phasing/Effort Cycling)
Steering wheel torque variation occurring twice in one revolution is normally as a result of problems with the lower steering
column (intermediate shaft), but foul conditions generally result in either constant stiffness or single point stiffness.
Depending upon the orientation of the joints, the steering can feel asymmetric (torque falling off in one direction and rising in
the other) or else it can simply have pronounced peaks and troughs as the steering moves from lock to lock.
Wheel Fight (Kick Back)
Wheel fight is excess feedback of sudden road forces through the steering system and back to the driver. It is evaluated at all
vehicle speeds over cobblestones, rough roads, and potholes. The tires, wheels, and suspension generate forces into the
steering systems. Steering friction, hydraulic damping, hydraulic compliance, mechanical compliance, steering ratio, and assist
gain all affect how much is transmitted to the driver.
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System Bleeding
General Procedures
1. Clean power steering fluid reservoir around the filler cap and fluid
indicator.
Check the power steering fluid, if aerated, wait until fluid is free
from bubbles then top-up reservoir to UPPER level mark with
recommended fluid.
2. CAUTION: Fluid must always be present in the reservoir

during bleeding.
Remove the filler cap and fill to the MAX level mark.
Install the reservoir filler cap.
3. Start the engine and allow to run for 10 seconds, stop the engine.
Check the power steering fluid, if aerated, wait until fluid is free
from bubbles then top-up reservoir to UPPER level mark with
recommended fluid.
4. CAUTION: Do not hold steering on full lock for longer than 10

seconds.
Start the engine and turn steering fully lock to lock, stop the engine.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
5. Start and run the engine for 2 minutes, turn the steering fully lock to
lock.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
www.JagDocs.com
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System Flushing
General Procedures
NOTES:
If heavy steering or contamination within the power steering system is found, it is necessary to carry out the system
flush procedure as detailed below. If any components have been replaced in the power steering system the procedure below
must be carried out in full.
1. Remove the power steering fluid reservoir cap.
2. Using a suitable syringe, remove the power steering fluid from the power
steering fluid reservoir.
3. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
Detach the power steering fluid reservoir.

Detach but do not remove the power steering fluid
reservoir.
Release the power steering fluid return hose from
the power steering fluid reservoir.
If a quick release coupling is fitted to the power
steering return hose, release the power steering
fluid return hose from the coupling by removing the
clip.
NOTE: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
Using a suitable blanking cap, cap the power steering

reservoir return pipe.
NOTE: Make sure the extended pipe is not kinked or

twisted and is correctly secured with hose clips.
Attach a suitable pipe to the power steering return hose to

allow the fluid to drain.
6. NOTES:
The suitable funnel should have the a capacity of 4

litres and O-ring seal
The suitable funnel must be tightly sealed to the

power steering fluid reservoir to avoid fluid leakage.
Install a suitable funnel onto the power steering fluid

reservoir.

Raise and support the vehicle with the wheels just clear of the ground.
8. CAUTIONS:
Steps 8 and 9 must be carried out within 2 - 3 seconds of each

other. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
power steering system.
Using the suitable funnel, top up the power steering system with the
specified fluid. Make sure the fluid level is maintained at two thirds full
in the funnel.
9. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the power steering fluid level in the

power steering fluid reservoir to fall below the minimum
power steering fluid level. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the power steering system.
Make sure the engine is switched off as soon as the

full 4 litres of power steering fluid has entered the power
steering fluid reservoir.
Flush the power steering system.

Start the engine
With assistance turn the steering slowly lock to lock
3 times at approximately 1 revolution every 5
seconds.
Continue to flush the power steering system until 4
litres of power steering fluid has been added to the
power steering reservoir. This should take
approximately 30 seconds.
Remove the suitable funnel.
Remove the suitable pipe to the power steering return

hose.

If a quick release coupling is fitted to the power steering return hose,

connect the power steering fluid return hose to the coupling by installing
the clip.
13. Install a new power steering fluid reservoir. For additional information,
refer to: (211-02 Power Steering)
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir - V6 3.0L Petrol (Removal and
Installation),
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (Removal and
Installation).
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System Filling V8
General Procedures
Draining
1.
Installation).
NOTE: Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTIONS:

The blanking plugs must not be removed until the

power steering pipes are ready to be connected.
Filling
1. CAUTIONS:

The blanking plugs must not be removed until the

power steering pipes are ready to be connected.
2. CAUTIONS:

Install new o-ring seals
Torque: 20 Nm

4. CAUTION: Fluid must always be present in the
reservoir during bleeding.
Fill the power steering reservoir.
5. Install the vacuum hand pump to the power steering fluid reservoir.
6. NOTE: Apply the maximum vacuum possible on the reservoir for 1

minute.
Apply a vacuum to the power steering fluid reservoir.
7. Remove the vacuum hand pump from the power steering fluid reservoir.

9.
Run the engine for 30 seconds.
Turn the steering fully lock-to-lock, stop the engine.
minute.
14.
minute.

19.
20.
21. Check for fluid leaks.
Installation).
Power Steering -

Lower steering column slider pinch bolt 35 26 -
Lower steering column to steering gear pinch bolt 35 26 -
Power steering control valve actuator 2 - 18
Power steering fluid cooler retaining bolts 7 - 62
Power steering pump pulley retaining bolts 20 25 -
Power steering pump retaining bolts - All except vehicles with diesel engine 25 18 -
Power steering pump retaining bolts - Vehicles with diesel engine 22 16 -
Power steering pump to steering gear pressure line 25 18 -
Steering gear retaining bolts 100 74 -
Steering gear supply and return lines 10 - 89
www.JagDocs.com
Power Steering - Power Steering - Component Location
POWER STEERING - COMPONENT LOCATION 5.0L V8
Item Description
NOTE: Naturally aspirated 5.0L V8 shown, Supercharged 5.0L V8 similar
1 Power steering fluid cooler
2 Tie-rod end (2 off)
3 Tie-rod (2 off)
4 Power steering pump
5 Low pressure fluid return hose
6 Power steering fluid reservoir
7 Feed pipe to pump
8 High pressure feed pipe to steering gear
9 Servotronic transducer valve
10 Valve unit
11 Mounting bolt (3 off)
12 Steering gear
Power Steering - Power Steering - Overview
OVERVIEW
The steering system comprises a ZF manufactured rack and pinion Servotronic 2 steering gear, a power steering pump, a fluid
reservoir, a fluid cooler (if fitted) and fluid hoses. The steering gear is an end take-off rack and pinion power assisted unit with
the addition of road speed proportional ZF Servotronic 2 assistance.
The steering rack is connected to the front wheel knuckles by adjustable tie-rods. The tie-rods allow for adjustment to
centralize the steering wheel and also adjust the toe setting of the front wheel geometry.
The steering gear has a variable ratio rack. This provides conventional response when the steering is in the centre, straight
ahead position, but provides more direct and faster steering as the turning angle increases. The variable ratio provides precise
and rapid steering response at high speeds and provides optimized steering of the vehicle when manoeuvring into parking
spaces, turning in tight areas and when cornering in extreme conditions.
Fluid is supplied to the steering gear by a fixed displacement vane pump on petrol models and a variable displacement pump
on diesel models. The pump is driven by a belt from the crankshaft pulley. The pump is mounted on the LH (left-hand) side of
the engine, above the A/C (air conditioning) compressor. A fluid reservoir is positioned at the front LH side of the engine
compartment, forward of the front suspension housing.
On petrol engine vehicles, a fluid cooler is located in front of the engine cooling radiator. Diesel models do not have a fluid
cooler.
Servotronic 2 adds electronic control and speed sensitive steering to the steering gear. The Servotronic 2 feature provides easy
and comfortable steering operation when parking, improved 'road feel' at increased road speeds and adds an integrated,
positive center feel feature which optimises steering wheel torque during high speed driving. The Servotronic 2 system is
controlled by software which is incorporated into the instrument cluster. The software responds to road speed signals and
controls the power assistance via a transducer valve located on the steering gear valve housing.
Power Steering - Power Steering - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
The following hydraulic circuits show power steering operation and fluid flow for the steering in a straight ahead, neutral
position and when turning right. The circuit diagram for turning left is similar to that shown for turning right.
Power Steering in Neutral Position
Item Description
1 Return fluid control groove
2 Radial groove
3 Feed fluid control groove
4 Radial groove
5 Axial groove
6 Feed fluid control edge
7 Feed fluid radial groove
8 Return fluid control edge
9 Return fluid chamber
10 Cut-off valve
11 Radial groove
14 Radial groove
15 Orifice
16 Balls
17 Compression spring
www.JagDocs.com
18 Torsion bar
20 Valve rotor
21 Reaction piston
22 Reaction chamber
23 Centering piece
24 Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
26 Inner tie-rod
27 Pinion
28 Valve sleeve
29 Steering gear rack
30 Steering gear housing
31 Power assist cylinder - right
32 Piston
33 Power assist cylinder - left
When the engine is started, the power steering pump draws fluid from the reservoir down the low pressure suction line. The
fluid passes through the pump and is delivered at pressure, via a hose, to the steering rack valve unit.
The pressurized fluid flows through a connecting bore in the valve and, via the feed fluid radial groove and the transverse
bores in the valve sleeve, passes to the feed fluid control groove of the valve rotor.
In the neutral (straight ahead) position , the fluid passes over the open feed fluid control edges to all valve sleeve axial
grooves. The fluid then passes through return fluid control edges and the return fluid grooves of the valve rotor, back to the
reservoir passes via the fluid cooler.
Simultaneously, the radial grooves of the valve and their associated pipes provide a connection the left and right power assist
cylinders.
Power Steering in Right Turn Position

Item Description
1 Return fluid control groove
2 Radial groove
3 Feed fluid control groove
4 Radial groove
5 Axial groove
6 Feed fluid control edge
8 Return fluid control edge
10 Cut-off valve
11 Radial groove
14 Radial groove
15 Orifice
16 Balls
18 Torsion bar
20 Valve rotor
21 Reaction piston
22 Reaction chamber
23 Centering piece
24 Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
26 Inner tie-rod
27 Pinion
28 Valve sleeve
29 Steering gear rack
30 Steering gear housing
31 Power assist cylinder - right
32 Piston
33 Power assist cylinder - left
When the steering wheel is turned to the right, the steering rack and piston moves to the left in the piston bore. The valve
rotor is rotated to the right (clockwise) and pressurized fluid is directed over the further opened feed fluid control edges and to
the associated axial grooves, the radial groove and via an external pipe to the left power assist cylinder chamber. The pressure
applied to the piston from the left power assist cylinder chamber provides the hydraulic assistance.
An adaptable pressure build-up is achieved by the partially or fully closed feed fluid control edges restricting or preventing a
connection between the fluid pressure inlet and the other axial grooves connected to the radial groove.
Simultaneously, the fluid pressure outlet to the pressurized axial grooves are restricted or partially restricted by the closing
return fluid control edges. The fluid displaced by the piston from the right power assist cylinder chamber, flows through an
external pipe to the radial grooves. From there the fluid passes to the associated axial grooves and on to the return fluid
control grooves, via the further opened return fluid control edges.
The return flow of fluid to the reservoir passes via interconnecting bores which lead to the return fluid chamber. When the
steering wheel is turned to the left the operating sequence is as above but the pressure is applied to the opposite side of the
piston.
Servotronic Operation
The Servotronic software contains a number of steering maps which are selected via the car configuration file depending on the
vehicle mode and tire fitment.
If a failure of the Servotronic valve or software occurs, the system will suspend Servotronic assistance and only normal power
steering wheel be available. Fault codes relating to the fault are stored, but no warning lamps are illuminated and the driver
may be aware of the steering being 'heavier' than usual.
When the vehicle is manoeuvred into and out of a parking space (or other similar manoeuvre), the Servotronic software uses
road speed data from the ABS module to determine the vehicle speed, which in this case will be slow or stationary. The
Servotronic software analyses the signals and outputs an appropriate control current to the Servotronic transducer valve. The
Servotronic valve closes and prevents fluid flowing from the feed fluid radial groove to the reaction chamber. An orifice also
ensures that there is return pressure in the reaction chamber. This condition eliminates any 'reaction' ensuring that the
steering is very light to operate, reducing the effort required to turn the steering wheel.
As the vehicle is driven and the road speed increases, the Servotronic software analyses the road speed signals from the ABS
(anti-lock brake system) module and reduces the amount of control current supplied to the Servotronic valve which increases
the reaction pressure. This modifies the input torque applied through the steering wheel and provides the driver with an
improved 'road feel' allowing precise steering and directional stability.
Steering Gear
Item Description
1 Locknut ( 2 off)
2 RH (right-hand) tie-rod
3 Steering gear boot (2 off)
4 Steering gear
5 Bolt and washer (3 off)
6 Servotronic valve
7 Valve unit
8 Input shaft
9 LH (left-hand) tie-rod
10 Steering gear mounting bushes
The steering gear is located at the rear of the engine and attached to the front sub-frame. The gear is secured to the
sub-frame with 3 bolts and washers which screw into threaded tubes in bushes which are integral with the sub-frame.
The steering gear comprises an aluminum, cast, valve housing which contains the hydraulic valve unit and Servotronic valve.
The mechanical steering rack and the hydraulic actuator are located in a steel cylinder which is attached to the cast valve
housing.
The steering gear uses a rack with an integrated piston which is guided on plain bearings within the cylinder and the valve
housing. The pinion, which is attached to the valve unit, runs in bearings and meshes with the rack teeth. The rack is pressed
against the pinion by a spring loaded yoke which ensures that the teeth mesh with the minimum of play. The pinion is
connected to the valve unit via a torsion bar. The rotary motion of the steering wheel is converted into linear movement of the
rack by the rack and pinion mechanism and is initiated by the valve unit. This movement is transferred into movement of the
road wheels by adjustable tie-rods.
The rack teeth angles vary from 20 degrees in the centre position to 40 degrees at the end sections of the rack. It is this
variation in teeth angles which provides the variable ratio.
The piston of the hydraulic actuator is located on the rack bar. Each side of the piston is connected to fluid pressure or fluid
return via external metal pipes which are connected to the valve unit.
Each end of the rack bar has a threaded hole which provides for the fitment of the tie-rod. The external ends of the gear are
sealed with boots which prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The tie-rod has a long threaded area which allows for the
fitment of the tie-rod end. The thread allows for the adjustment of the steering toe. When the correct toe setting is achieved,
a locknut is tightened against the tie-rod end preventing inadvertent movement.
The gear has a central hole machined along most of its length. The hole allows the air in the boots to be balanced when the
steering is turned. The boots are serviceable items and are retained on the gear housing and the tie-rod with clips.
Valve Unit
Item Description
1 Pressure/return to/from steering gear
3 Cut-off valve
4 Radial groove
6 Fluid feed radial groove
7 Radial groove
8 Orifice
9 Balls
11 Torsion bar
12 Valve rotor
13 Reaction piston
14 Reaction chamber
15 Centering piece
16 Return to reservoir
17 Pressure supply from pump
18 Pinion
19 Steering gear rack bar
20 Valve sleeve
The valve unit is an integral part of the steering gear. The principle function of the valve unit is to provide power assistance
(i.e. when parking) to optimize the effort required to turn the steering wheel.
The pinion housing of the valve is an integral part of the main steering gear casting. The pinion housing has four machined
ports which provide connections for pressure feed from the power steering pump, return fluid to the reservoir and pressure
feeds to each side of the cylinder piston.
The valve unit comprises an outer sleeve, an input shaft, a torsion bar and a pinion shaft. The valve unit is co-axial with the
pinion shaft which is connected to the steering column via the input shaft. The valve unit components are located in the
steering gear pinion housing which is sealed with a cap.
The outer sleeve is located in the main bore of the pinion housing. Three annular grooves are machined on its outer diameter.
PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene) rings are located between the grooves and seal against the bore of the pinion housing. Holes
are drilled radially in each annular groove through the wall of the sleeve. The bore of the outer sleeve is machined to accept
the input shaft. Six equally spaced slots are machined in the bore of the sleeve. The ends of the slots are closed and do not
continue to the end of the outer sleeve. The radial holes in the outer sleeve are drilled into each slot.
The input shaft has two machined flats at its outer end which allow for the attachment of the steering column intermediate
shaft yoke. The flats ensure that the intermediate shaft is fitted in the correct position. The inner end of the input shaft forms
a dog-tooth which mates with a slot in the pinion shaft. The fit of the dog-tooth in the slot allows a small amount of relative
rotation between the input shaft and the pinion shaft before the dog-tooth contacts the wall of the slot. This ensures that, if
the power assistance fails, the steering can be operated manually without over stressing the torsion bar. The central portion of
the input shaft has equally spaced longitudinal slots machined in its circumference. The slots are arranged alternately around
the input shaft.
The torsion bar is fitted inside the input shaft and is an interference fit in the pinion shaft. The torsion bar is connected to the
input shaft by a drive pin. The torsion bar is machined to a smaller diameter in its central section. The smaller diameter allows
the torsion bar to twist in response to torque applied from the steering wheel in relation to the grip of the tyres on the road
surface.
The pinion shaft has machined teeth on its central diameter which mate with teeth on the steering gear rack. A slot, machined
in the upper end of the pinion shaft mates with the dog-tooth on the input shaft. The pinion shaft locates in the pinion
housing and rotates on ball and roller bearings.
Servotronic Valve
The Servotronic transducer valve is located in a port in the side of the steering gear valve housing. The valve is sealed in the
housing with an O-ring seal and is secured with two long screws into threaded holes in the housing. The Servotronic valve is a
transducer controlled valve which responds to control signals supplied from Servotronic software in the instrument cluster.
The Servotronic valve determines the hydraulic reaction at the steering gear rotary valve and controls the input torque required
to turn the steering wheel. The Servotronic system allows the steering to be turned with the optimum effort when the vehicle
is stationary or manoeuvred at slow speed. The hydraulic reaction changes proportional to the vehicle speed, with the required
steering effort increasing as the vehicle moves faster. At high speeds, the Servotronic system provides the driver with a good
feedback through the steering providing precise steering and improved stability.
The instrument cluster receives road speed signals from the ABS module and calculates the correct controlling signal for the
Servotronic valve. The Servotronic software within the instrument cluster has a diagnostic capability which allows a Jaguar
approved diagnostic system to check the tune of the steering and retrieve fault codes relating to the Servotronic valve. Two
fault codes are stored relating to the valve for positive connection short to ground or battery and negative connection short to
ground or battery.
The Servotronic software within the instrument cluster also contains a number of steering maps which are selected via the car
configuration file depending on the vehicle model and tire fitment.
If a failure of the Servotronic valve or software occurs, the system will suspend Servotronic assistance and only a default level
of assistance will be available. Fault codes relating to the fault are stored in the instrument cluster. No warning lamps are
illuminated and the driver may be aware of the steering being 'heavier' than usual.
www.JagDocs.com
Power Steering Pump - V6 and V8 Petrol Models
NOTE: V8 pump shown
The power steering pumps used on the different petrol engine variants are basically the same pump with different flow control
valve mechanisms. The pump is a positive displacement, vane type pump which supplies a constant fluid flow to the steering
gear valve unit. The pump is driven by a Poly Vee belt from the crankshaft pulley. A self-adjusting tensioner is fitted to
maintain the correct tension on the belt.
The pump has an internal pressure relief valve and a flow control valve. The pressure relief valve limits the maximum pressure
supplied to the steering gear to 110 bar (1595 lbf in2) ± 4 bar (58 lbf in2). The flow control valve limits the maximum flow to
7.5 l/min (1.64 gal/min) ± 0.75 l/min (0.16 gal/min) regardless of engine speed. The pump has a displacement of 10.5 cm3/rev
(0.64 in3/rev).
A shaft runs longitudinally through the pump. One end of the shaft is fitted with a pressed-on drive pulley, the opposite end of
the shaft is closed by a cover. The shaft runs in bearings located in the body and oil seals at each end of the shaft prevent
leakage of hydraulic fluid. The pump contains ten vanes which rotate within a cam ring and are driven by the shaft. As the
vanes rotate, the cam ring causes the space between the vanes to increase. This causes a depression between the vanes and
fluid is drawn from the reservoir via the suction hose into the space between the vanes.
As the shaft rotates, the inlet port is closed to the vanes which have drawn in fluid, trapping the fluid between the vanes. The
cam ring causes the space between the vanes to reduce and consequentially compresses and pressurises the hydraulic fluid
trapped between them.
Further rotation of the shaft moves the vanes to the outlet port. As the vanes pass the port plate the pressurized fluid passes
from the pump outlet port into the pressure hose to the steering gear.
The pressurized fluid is subject to control by the flow control and pressure relief valve. The flow control valve maintains a
constant flow of fluid supplied to the steering gear irrespective of engine speed variations. The pressure relief valve limits the
maximum pressure on the output side of the pump. A metering orifice is included in the discharge port of the pump. If the
pressure in the orifice reaches a predetermined level, a spring loaded ball in the centre of the flow control valve is lifted from
its seat and allows pressurized fluid to recirculate within the pump.
The pressure relief valve will operate if the discharge from the pump is restricted, i.e.; steering held on full lock. If the output
from the pump is blocked, all output is recirculated through the pump. In this condition, as no fresh fluid is drawn into the
pump from the reservoir, the fluid temperature inside the pump will increase rapidly. Consequentially, periods of operation of
the steering gear on full lock should be kept to a minimum to prevent overheating of the pump and the fluid within it.
A variable displacement power steering pump is used on the diesel engine variants. The variable displacement, vane type
pump supplies the required hydraulic pressure to the steering gear valve unit. The pump is located at the front of the engine
and is driven by the FEAD (front end accessory drive) Poly Vee belt which is directly driven from the crankshaft. The output
from the pump increases proportionally with the load applied to the steering valve unit.
Item Description
1 Power steering fluid inlet port
2 Flow control valve
3 Power steering fluid outlet port
4 Variable Orifice
5 Pump rotor
6 High pressure
7 Adapter ring
8 Cam Ring
9 Low pressure
The pump consists of a shaft containing a number of slots into which vanes are inserted and these vanes run within a cam ring
in the pump body. The centerline of the shaft is not concentric with that of the bore of the body and this creates the expanding
and contracting cavities that form the pumping action.
The vanes rotate within the cam ring and are driven by the shaft. As the vanes rotate, the cam ring causes the space between
the vanes to increase. This causes a depression between the vanes and fluid is drawn from the reservoir via the suction hose
into the space between the vanes. As the shaft rotates, the inlet port is closed to the vanes which have drawn in fluid,
trapping the fluid between the vanes. The cam ring causes the space between the vanes to reduce and consequentially
compresses and pressurizes the hydraulic fluid trapped between them. Further rotation of the shaft moves the vanes to the
outlet port. As the vanes pass the port plate the pressurized fluid passes from the pump outlet port into the pressure hose to
the steering gear.
The cam ring in the pump body can move within the valve body. By moving the cam ring it is possible to vary the eccentricity of
the shaft and the vanes in relation to the cam ring. As the eccentricity is decreased, the volume of hydraulic fluid trapped
between the vanes decreases, maintaining the flow in response to pump speed. This reduces the load required to turn the
pump and therefore improves engine output and economy. This allows the flow rate to be matched to the system demands and
increased flow rate is only required when the steering wheel is turned.
The pump has an internal regulating valve which controls the eccentricity of the cam ring and therefore varies the flow rate
according to demand. The regulating relief valve limits the maximum pressure supplied to the steering gear to 110 bar (1595
lbf in2) ± 4 bar (58 lbf in2) and also limits the maximum flow to 8.5 l/min (1.86 gal/min) ± 0.5 l/min (0.1 gal/min) regardless
of engine speed.
Fluid Reservoir
Item Description
1 Bolt and washer (2 off)
2 Rubber mounting (2 off)
3 Cap
4 Reservoir body
5 Return connection
6 Suction hose connection
7 Max/Min level
8 Lanyard
The reservoir is located in the engine compartment, on the LH suspension housing. The reservoir is attached to a bracket via 2
rubber mounts, and the bracket is attached to the suspension housing.
The reservoir is a plastic moulding with an integral 80 micron, non-serviceable filter. Two moulded ports at the base of the
reservoir provide for attachment of the fluid supply hose to the power steering pump and fluid return hose from the fluid cooler.
The reservoir is fitted with a removable cap which is screwed 1/4 turn to lock into the reservoir body.
The reservoir has upper and minimum marks moulded on its outside of the body.
Fluid Cooler
Item Description
A V8 naturally aspirated and 3.0 V6
B V8 supercharged
1 Fluid cooler
2 Hose - return to fluid reservoir
3 Hose - Return from steering gear valve unit
The fluid cooler is located in the return circuit from the steering gear to the reservoir. The cooler is an aluminum fin and tube
design. Cool air entering the front of the vehicle passes over the cooler and flows through the fins. The fins act as heat
exchangers, conducting heat from the fluid as it passes through the tube.
Power Steering - Power Steering

REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System - General Information, Specifications).
www.JagDocs.com
Power Steering - Steering Gear
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the clockspring and
steering wheel switches may occur.
NOTES:
RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Center the steering wheel.

Lock in position and remove the ignition key.
3. Remove the front wheels and tires.


5. Make sure the alignment mark, on the steering gear pinion
seal protection cover, is central to the steering gear pinion
casting.
Release both track rods from tie rod ends, note the number
of turns for installation.
Loosen the tie-rod ends lock nuts.
7. Disconnect the power steering control valve actuator

electrical connector.
8. CAUTION: Air tools MUST NOT be used on steering
column bolts.
Disconnect the lower steering column from the steering

gear.
Remove and discard the bolt.
9. Release the power steering line support bracket.
10. CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting or removing the components,

make sure the area around the joint faces and connections
are clean and dry. Plug open connections to prevent
contamination.
Cap the power steering line to prevent loses of fluid

and dirt ingress.
If power steering fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the

effected area must be immediately washed down with cold
water. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this

operation.
Disconnect the power steering feed and return fluid lines

from the steering gear.
Remove the bolt.
Position a container to collect spillage.
Remove and discard both O-ring seals.
11. Remove the steering gear.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation

2. Install the tie rod end, note the number of turns until
adjacent to the locknut.
Repeat the above procedure for the other side.
3. Tighten the bolts to 117 Nm.
4. NOTE: Make sure that all the component mating faces

are clean.
Tighten to 20 Nm.
Install the new O-ring seals.
Install a new retaining bolt.
6. Fill and bleed the power steering system.

For additional information, refer to: Power Steering System Bleeding
(211-00 Steering System - General Information, General Procedures).

For additional information, refer to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-00
www.JagDocs.com
Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid Reservoir V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Removal
2. Refer to: Power Steering System Filling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (211-00 Steering System - General Information, General
Procedures).
3. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
Installation

Power Steering - Power Steering Pump V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
NOTES:

3. Refer to: Power Steering System Bleeding (211-00 Steering System -

4. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and
Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5. Refer to: Air Cleaner LH (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and Filtering -
V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
6. Torque: 25 Nm
7. NOTE: Do not loosen the bolts more than 2 turns.
Torque: 25 Nm
8.
9.
10. Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
11. Torque: 25 Nm
12. Torque: 25 Nm
13.
prior to removal.
15.
Installation

Power Steering - Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line V8
Removal
Procedures).
3. Torque: 11 Nm
4. NOTE: RHD shown, LHD is similar.

6. CAUTION: Make sure on installation the component is
correctly located.
7. WARNING: Fluid loss is unavoidable, use absorbent

cloth or a container to collect the fluid.
CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to

NOTES:
Discard the sealing washers.
Torque: 28 Nm

CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to

NOTES:
RHD shown, LHD is similar.
Discard the retaining bolt.
Discard the o-ring seals.
Torque: 20 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
10. NOTE: RHD shown, LHD is similar.
Installation

Power Steering - Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles
Procedures).
3. NOTE: If equipped.
4.

5.
6.
Installation
Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Linkage -
Tie-rod end retaining nut 133 98 -
Tie-rod end lock nut 55 41 -
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage - Component Location
STEERING LINKAGE COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Steering gear boot
2 Inner tie-rod arm
3 Locknut
4 Outer tie-rod arm
5 Taper ball joint
6 Locknut
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage - Overview
OVERVIEW
The steering linkage comprises the tie rod which provides the connection between the steering gear and the front wheel
knuckle. Each end of the steering gear has a threaded hole which provides for the fitment of the inner tie rods. The external
ends of the inner tie rods are sealed with boots to prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture into the steering gear.
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
TIE-ROD
The threads on the tie rods allow the position of the outer tie rod to be adjusted in order to set the correct toe angle for each
front wheel.
TIE-ROD
Each tie rod comprises two parts; an inner and outer tie rod. The inner and outer tie rods are screwed into each other and
locked with a locknut to prevent inadvertent movement.
The outer tie rod incorporates a non-serviceable tapered ball joint which locates in a tapered hole in the front wheel knuckle
and is secured with a self-locking nut. The ball joint has an internal hexagonal drive which enables the joint to be held
stationary when the self-locking nut is tightened.
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage

REFER to: Steering System (211-00 Steering System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Linkage - Tie Rod End
Removal


3. Loosen the tie-rod end lock nut.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the ball joint ball does not
rotate.
Remove and discard the tie rod end retaining nut.
5. Remove the tie-rod end, note the number of turns for

installation.
Installation
1. Install the tie rod end, note the number of turns until adjacent to the
locknut.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the ball joint ball does not rotate.
Connect the tie-rod end ball joint.

Install a new nut and tighten to 133 Nm.
3. Tighten the tie-rod locking nut.

4. Install the front wheel.


For additional information, refer to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00
Published: 24-Mar-2014
Steering Column -
Steering wheel retaining bolt 60 44 -
Steering column pinch bolt 35 26 -
Steering column retaining nuts 30* 22 -
Tilt solenoid retaining bolts 1 - 9
Telescopic solenoid retaining bolts 1 - 9
Telescopic housing retaining bolts 8 - 71
If you are re-using this fixing on a vehicle built prior to VIN N83337, then tighten to 25 Nm. If you are replacing a fixing, then
you must tighten to 30 Nm.
Steering Column - Steering Column - Component Location
Item Description
1 Steering wheel
2 Gear change paddle switch
3 Column adjust switch
4 Lower shroud
5 Rake adjustment housing
6 Reach adjustment housing
7 Column adjustment motor
8 Lower column - Upper collapse shaft
9 Bulkhead bearing and seal assembly
10 Lower column - Lower collapse shaft
11 Electric steering lock mechanism
12 Column mounting plate
13 Upper shroud
Steering Column - Steering Column - Overview
OVERVIEW
The steering column comprises the upper column assembly, the lower column assembly and the steering wheel. The 3
components are positively connected together to pass driver rotary input from the steering wheel to a linear output of the
steering rack.
The upper column assembly contains electrical adjustment for steering wheel reach and rake, the electric steering lock
mechanism and the steering angle sensor. Steering adjustment memory positions are stored in the driver's seat module.
The electric steering column is a standard fitment on all models. The upper column assembly contains electrical adjustment for
steering wheel reach and rake, the electric column lock mechanism and the steering angle sensor. Steering adjustment memory
positions are stored in the driver's seat module. The column also features a 'tilt away' function which moves the steering
column away from the driver allowing easier exit and entry to the vehicle.
Column adjustment is provided by a single motor for both reach and rake adjustment. Operation of the column adjustment is
controlled by a four way joystick type switch located in the column lower shroud. Column adjustment is an integral part of the
driver position memory system.
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Column - Steering Column - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) - Megafuse (175A)
4 Electric steering column lock
5 High Speed CAN (controller area network) bus to other vehicle systems
7 Rake adjustment solenoid and potentiometer
8 Reach adjustment solenoid and potentiometer
11 Steering column adjust switch
12 Driver's seat module (position memory)
System Operation
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT
Power for the column adjustment motor is supplied via a megafuse in the BJB to the CJB. A fused supply from the CJB is
passed to the instrument cluster which controls the power application to the motor.
The column adjust switch is hardwired to the instrument cluster. Up/down and in/out selections on the switch are each passed
through a resistor of differing values to the instrument cluster. The cluster monitors the output value from the switch and
operates the motor in the required direction and simultaneously energizes the required solenoid for rake or reach adjustment.
When the applicable solenoid is energized, a clutch is engaged and locates on a lead screw. The motor rotates the lead screw
and the rotational drive of the screw is transferred into linear movement of the applicable clutch to move either the rake or
reach adjustment. For reach adjustment, the lead screw drives the outer housing in or out as required. For rake adjustment the
lead screw drives a rake lever which moves the column up or down as required.
The position of the column is monitored by potentiometers which are connected to the instrument cluster. The cluster monitors
the output signal from the potentiometers to precisely control the positioning of the column in each plane.
The instrument cluster controls the memory positioning of the column via a medium speed CAN bus connection to the driver's
seat module. The driver's seat module receives information regarding the particular remote handset used to enter the vehicle
and outputs positional information relative to that stored for the handset. This information is passed to the instrument cluster
via the medium speed CAN bus which moves the column to the memorized positions.
The column logic in the instrument cluster also incorporates an entry/exit mode. When the vehicle is unlocked or the ignition is
switched off, the instrument cluster lifts the column upwards to its maximum rake position to allow the driver more room below
the steering wheel and improve access/egress of the vehicle. When the ignition is next switched on the column will adjust to
its previous position.
The electric steering column lock is controlled by the CJB.

STEERING COLUMN
Item Description
1 Rake housing
3 Mounting plate
4 Rake lever
5 Crash tube
6 Distance keeper
7 Steering wheel mounting splines
8 Steering angle sensor ring
9 Crash adaptor
10 Rake lever pivot bearing (2 off)
11 Flanged locknut (4 off) - mounting to cross-beam
12 Rake solenoid
13 Rake clutch
14 Spindle
15 Reach solenoid
16 Reach clutch
18 Outer clamping yoke
19 Clamp bolt
20 Inner tube yoke
WARNING: Do not attempt to dismantle the steering column. The crash safety of the unit will be compromised.
The steering column is attached to the in-vehicle cross-beam and secured with 4 flanged lock nuts onto 4 studs integral with
the cross-beam.
Steering Column - Sectional View
Item Description
1 Tube and clamping yoke pivot bearing
2 Tube yoke
3 Tolerance ring
4 Locking ring
5 Axial housing
6 Rake housing
7 Tube
8 Splined shaft
9 Crash adaptor
10 Steering angle sensor ring
11 Steering wheel mounting splines
12 Upper bearing
14 Lower bearing
15 Outer clamping yoke
16 Ball (12 off)
17 Distance keeper
18 Crash tube
The column comprises a cast magnesium mounting bracket which provides the attachment to the cross-beam. Attached to the
mounting bracket is a rake lever which is attached to the mounting bracket at the lower end with two pivot bearings. The
bearings allow the rake lever to rotate upwards or downward to adjust the column rake.
The rake lever also provides for the attachment of the rake housing which can slide within the lever to provide the reach
adjustment. Within the rake housing is the axial housing which is supported on each side with 6 ball bearings which allow the
rake housing to move forward or backwards. The bearings on each side are arranged in groups of 3 bearings and are separated
by a distance keeper which allows the housing to supported on bearings along its length. Within the axial housing is a tube
which is supported at the upper end of the column on the upper bearing. The tube has a central splined hole which provides for
the fitment of the splined shaft. The splined shaft can slide within the tube on the splines when the column reach is adjusted
or the column collapses in a crash condition. The splined shaft also passes rotary motion from the steering wheel through the
length of the column to the outer clamping yoke which is supported on the lower bearing.
The electric steering column lock is attached to the top of the rake lever. A lock bolt within the steering column lock engages in
one of 8 slots in the locking sleeve located at the lower end of the column preventing rotation of the steering wheel. The
locking sleeve is retained by a tolerance ring which in turn is located on the outer diameter of the tube yoke. The tolerance
ring allows a specified amount of torque to be applied to the splined shaft before it slips, preventing damage to the column
lock due to excessive force being applied to the steering wheel when the lock is engaged. The tolerance ring is designed to
slip on the splined shaft when the applied torque exceeds the fitted slip load of 200 Nm minimum. Repeated rotation of the
lock collar will reduce its slipping torque to 100 Nm minimum. The lock is controlled by the CJB.
A steering angle sensor is located at the upper end of the steering column and is attached to the crash adaptor. The sensor
measures steering rotation via a toothed wheel located on the splined tube at the upper end of the column. The sensor
receives a power supply from the CJB and supplies 2 signals (A and B) relating to the steering rotation to the ABS (anti-lock
brake system) module. The module transmits this data on the high speed CAN bus for use by other vehicle systems.
The steering column is adjustable electrically, for reach and rake. The adjustment mechanism comprises an electric adjustment
motor, a lead screw, a rake solenoid, a reach solenoid, a reach clutch and a rake clutch. The column adjustment is controlled
manually using a joystick switch located on the LH (left-hand) side of the column lower cowl. The joystick can be moved
forward and backward to adjust the column reach in and out and moved up and down to adjust the rake. The switch selection
energizes the adjustment motor in the applicable direction and also engages the applicable solenoid and clutch.
When the joystick switch is rotated to the 'auto' position, the steering column will adjust to the uppermost rake position when
the ignition is switched off. It will re-adjust to the position corresponding to the memory position for the remote handset when
the ignition is switched on.
The memory function of the electric column is linked to and controlled by the driver's seat module. The module provides for the
storage of three separate memory positions which are stored against 3 individual remote handsets.
Refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Description and Operation).
The steering wheel locates on a splined shaft in the upper column assembly and is secured with a bolt. The steering wheel
houses the driver's airbag and switches for the audio system, gear change and speed control. A clockspring is used to connect
the steering wheel electrical components to the vehicle harness.
Two plastic shrouds are fitted to the upper column assembly. The lower shroud is fitted with an energy absorbing foam pad to
minimize leg injury in the event of an accident.
www.JagDocs.com
LOWER SHAFT ASSEMBLY
Item Description
1 Yoke
2 Upper collapse shaft
3 Flexible coupling
4 Shaft plate
5 Rivet (4 off)
6 Upper tube
7 Plastic sleeve
8 Boot
9 Bearing (4 off)
10 Teeth tube
11 Lower shaft
12 Yoke clamp bolt (2 off)
13 Bearing (4 off)
14 Lower yoke
15 Spider
16 Upper yoke
The lower shaft assembly comprises 2 splined shafts connected by a universal joint in the center.
The upper collapse shaft has a flexible couple at its upper end. The flexible coupling controls axial and torsional movements
and also assists with noise and vibration damping. The flexible coupling is fitted with a shaft plate which has a boss with
machined flats on it. The flats provide positive location on the upper column outer clamping yoke. A cut-out in the boss allows
for the fitment of a clamping bolt to secure the upper column outer clamping yoke. The cut-out ensures that the lower shaft
assembly can only be fitted in one orientation.
The upper collapse shaft is connected to the stopper plate of the flexible coupling with splines. The stopper plate is connected
to the shaft plate via the flexible coupling and is secured with rivets. The upper collapse shaft has a series of splines which
engage with the upper tube. The splines allow the upper collapse shaft to slide into the upper tube in the event of an
accident.
The upper tube is positively connected to the upper half of the yoke of the universal joint. A plastic tube is located around the
upper tube and provides for the attachment of a boot which seals the lower shaft assembly where it passes through the
vehicle bulkhead.
The yoke is attached to the teeth tube which in turn is located over the lower shaft on splines. The teeth tube is fitted with a
tolerance ring which provides resistance to movement of the splines on the lower shaft. The splines of the lower shaft allow it
to slide into the teeth tube with the tolerance ring controlling the collapse.
The lower shaft is fitted with a yoke which provides the attachment to the torsion bar of the steering valve unit.
Steering Column - Steering Column

REFER to: Steering System (211-00 Steering System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Steering Column - Steering Column
Removal
2. Refer to: Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel
and Console, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor (206-09 Anti-Lock Control -

Stability Assist, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6. WARNING: Make sure that a new steering column flexible coupling bolt
is installed.
Torque: 30 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
7. Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Steering Column - Steering Column Flexible Coupling
Removal
Installation).
5. WARNING: Make sure that a new steering column

flexible coupling bolt is installed.
Torque: 30 Nm
6. Torque: 10 Nm
7. WARNING: Make sure that a new steering column
flexible coupling bolt is installed.
Torque: 30 Nm
8.
Installation

Steering Column - Steering Wheel
Special Tool(s)
Clockspring locking tool
211-326
Removal
1. Make the SRS system safe.

For additional information, refer to: Standard Workshop Practices
(100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).

3. Remove the driver air bag module.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B
Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
Remove the steering wheel.

Disconnect the electrical connector.
Loosen, but do not fully remove the bolt.
Release the steering wheel from the spline.
Remove the bolt.
Release the electrical harness.
5. CAUTIONS:
Failing to install the clockspring special tool, may result

in damage to vehicle.
Do not dismantle the clockspring, it has no serviceable

parts and must be replaced as a complete assembly.
Do not allow the clockspring to unwind.
Install the special tool to the clockspring.
www.JagDocs.com
Remove the upshift and downshift paddle switches.

Remove the Torx bolt.
Release the assembly.
Repeat the procedure and remove the opposite
hand.
7. NOTE: The steering wheel is shown removed for

clarity.
Release the steering wheel switch assembly.

Remove the Torx bolt.
Repeat the procedure and remove the opposite
hand.
8. Remove the air bag housing.

Remove the 4 Torx bolts.
Release the electrical harness.
9. Remove the air bag ground cable.

Remove the Torx screw.
Installation
1. Install the air bag ground cable.

Install the Torx screw.
2. Install the air bag housing.

Secure the electrical harness.
Tighten to 6 Nm.
3. Secure the steering wheel switch assembly.

Connect and secure the electrical connectors.
Tighten to 3 Nm.
Repeat the above procedure on the opposite hand.
4. Install the upshift and downshift paddle switches.
Connect and secure the electrical connector.
Tighten to 3 Nm.
Repeat the above procedure on the opposite hand.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the arrow on the cassette is

centered and pointing vertically prior to the steering wheel
installation. On removal of the special tool keep the
clockspring cables taught to prevent the cassette moving
from the set position. Do not allow the clockspring to
unwind. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Remove the special tool.
6. CAUTION: Check the alignment arrow is still in the

vertical position with the wheels straight ahead to make
sure that the directional indicator cancellation is central.
Install the steering wheel.

Check the clockspring is aligned.
Position the electrical harness.
Connect the electrical connector.
Tighten to 60 Nm.
7. Install the driver air bag module.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B

Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches - Component Location
STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Audio and telephone switches
2 Steering column adjustment switch
3 LH (left-hand) (-) gear change paddle switch
4 Steering column multifunction switches and clockspring
5 RH (right-hand) (+) gear change paddle switch
6 Speed control switches (Adaptive Speed Control switch pack shown, non adaptive speed control switch pack similar)
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches - Overview
OVERVIEW
The steering column multifunction switch is situated on the steering column and consists of the wiper switch, the turn signal
indicator/lighting switch and the trip computer switch.
The RH (right-hand) multifunction switch controls the following windshield wiper functions:
Flick wipe
Intermittent wipe
Slow speed wipe
High speed wipe
Wash/Wipe
Headlamp powerwash
Rain sensing / variable wipe selection.
The LH (left-hand) multifunction switch controls the following functions:
Turn signal indicators

Side lamps
Headlamps
Auto lamps
High/low beam
Headlamp flash
Headlamp timer
Trip computer.
The steering column adjustment switch is located in the steering column lower shroud on the LH side. The switch is a 4
position 'joystick' which controls reach and rake adjustment.
The trip button allows the driver to cycle though an option menu and also reset trip cycle mileage calculations. The trip
computer information is displayed in the instrument cluster message centre.
Steering wheel mounted switches on the LH side of the driver's airbag, control the audio and telephone functions. Switches on
the RH side of the driver's airbag, control the speed control functions.
The steering wheel has an internal heating element. This is controlled by the driver via the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches - System Operation
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; P = Fibre Optic MOST ring
Item Description
1 Battery
4 Heated steering wheel slip rings
5 Heated steering wheel control module
6 Steering wheel heater element
8 Steering column LH (left-hand) multifunction switch
9 Steering column RH (right-hand) multifunction switch
11 Speed control switches
12 Audio/telephone switches
13 Clockspring
14 Information and entertainment module
15 Media Oriented System Transport (MOST) ring connection to other vehicle systems
16 Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus to other vehicle systems
System Operation
LEFT HAND MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Turn Signal Indicators
The instrument cluster outputs a reference voltage to the turn signal indicator switch. When the switch is in the central off
position, the voltage flows through 3 resistors which are connected in series and back to the instrument cluster which monitors
the signal and determines the turn signal indicators are off. This information is broadcast on the medium speed CAN bus to
the CJB.
When the switch is operated in the LH turn signal indicator position, the reference voltage from the instrument cluster is
routed via 1 of the resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on
the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB. The CJB activates the applicable turn signal indicators until it receives an off message
from the instrument cluster.
When the switch is operated in the RH turn signal indicator position, the reference voltage from the instrument cluster is
routed via 2 of the resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on
the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB. The CJB activates the applicable turn signal indicators until it receives an off message
from the instrument cluster.
Lighting Control Switch
The instrument cluster outputs 2 reference voltages to the rotary lighting control switch; one feed being supplied to the light
selection function of the switch and the second feed being supplied to the autolamp exit delay function. The switch position is
determined by instrument cluster by the change in returned signal voltage which is routed through up to 4 resistors in series
depending on the selection made.
When the lighting control switch is in the off position, the reference voltage flows through 1 of the resistors. The returned
signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that
no lighting selection is made. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors which is
detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that autolamp or exit
delay has not been selected.
When the lighting control switch is in the sidelamp position, the reference voltage flows through 2 of the resistors. The
returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the
CJB to activate the sidelamps. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors which is
When the lighting control switch is in the headlamp position, the reference voltage flows through 3 of the resistors. The
CJB to activate the headlamps. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors which is
When the lighting control switch is in the autolamp position, the reference voltage flows through 4 of the resistors. The
CJB to activate the autolamp function. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors
which is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that autolamp
has been selected.
Autolamp Exit Delay
When the lighting control switch is in any of the autolamp exit delay position, the lighting control switch reference voltage
flows through 4 of the resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on
the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that autolamps has been selected.
Depending on the selected position, the reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 3, 2 or 1
resistors which is detected by the instrument cluster. The cluster outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB
that autolamp exit delay period has been selected at 30, 60 or 120 seconds respectively.
Trip Function Button
The instrument cluster outputs a reference voltage to the trip function button. When the function button is pressed a ground
path is completed and a signal voltage is returned to the instrument cluster via a resistor. The returned reference voltage is
detected by the instrument cluster and performs the requested trip function.
RIGHT HAND MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH

The instrument cluster outputs 4 separate reference voltages to the following switch functions:
Wash/wipe switch
Intermittent wipe switch
Master wiper switch
Flick wipe switch.
Wash/Wipe Switch
The reference voltage is supplied to one of two resistors connected in parallel. When the switch is not being operated the
current flows through one resistor and the returned signal voltage is monitored by the instrument cluster. When the wash/wipe
switch is operated, a connection is made and the current flows through the second resistor. The change in signal voltage is
detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB to activate the
wash/wipe function.
Intermittent Delay/Auto Wipe Switch
The reference voltage is supplied to the switch and can pass through up to 7 resistors, connected in series, for intermittent
delay selections and the auto wipe function.
When the rotary switch is in the auto position the reference voltage flows through 1 resistor. The returned signal voltage is
detected by the instrument cluster which determines auto wipe is selected. The instrument cluster outputs a message on the
medium speed CAN bus to the CJB to activate the auto wipe function.
With the rotary switch in one of the intermittent positions, the reference voltage is routed through up to 7 of the resistors
depending on the delay period selected. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which determines
selected delay period. The instrument cluster outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB to activate the
selected intermittent wipe function.
NOTE: The delay period for the intermittent selections can vary according to vehicle speed.
Master Wiper Switch
The reference voltage supplied from the instrument cluster to the master wiper switch. The voltage can pass through up to 4
resistors connected in series.
When the switch is in the off position, the reference voltage passes through 4 resistors and the returned voltage is monitored
by the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that no wiper
selections have been requested.
With the switch in the intermittent, slow wipe or fast wipe position, the reference voltage passes through 3, 2 or 1 resistors
respectively. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which determines selected delay period. The
instrument cluster outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB to activate the selected wipe function.
Flick Wipe Switch
The reference voltage is supplied to one of two resistors connected in parallel. When the switch is not being operated the
current flows through one resistor and the returned signal voltage is monitored by the instrument cluster. When the flick wipe
switch is operated, a connection is made and the current flows through the second resistor. The change in signal voltage is
detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB to activate the flick
wipe function.
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

The instrument cluster supplies 2 reference voltages to the column adjustment switch.
The first reference voltage is supplied to the joystick switch. When the switch is moved to one of its 4 positions, the switch
contact is completed and the reference voltage is passed through one of 4 different resistors with different values. The
returned signal voltage is measured by the instrument cluster which determines the selected column adjust request. The
instrument cluster outputs a supply to the steering column adjustment motor and energizes the applicable clutch solenoid to
move the column to the desired position.
The second reference voltage is supplied to the auto/manual selection of the switch. When the switch is in the auto position,
the reference voltage passes directly through the switch contacts and is measured by the instrument cluster. The instrument
cluster outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the driver seat module which responds with the recorded memory
position setting. The instrument cluster then activates the column adjustment motor and clutch solenoids to move the column
to the memorized position. When the switch is in the manual position the reference circuit is broken. The instrument cluster
detects the broken circuit and allows manual operation of the column adjustment switch to move the column.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL

The heated steering wheel receives a battery power supply via the CJB. The heated steering wheel is controlled by the driver
using a selection on the TSD. When the driver selects the heated steering wheel to be active, the request is passed from the
TSD on the MOST ring to the information and entertainment module. The information and entertainment module converts the
message into a medium speed CAN bus message which is passed to the CJB. The CJB processes the request and allows the
battery power supply to be passed via the slip ring assembly in the steering wheel to the heated steering wheel control
module. The steering wheel module supplies power to the steering wheel heater element and also monitors the temperature
via a NTC (negative temperature coefficient) temperature sensor incorporated into the heater element. The control module
varies the power supply to the element to maintain the steering wheel rim at the optimum temperature.
STEERING COLUMN MULTIFUNCTION SWITCHES
The steering column multifunction switches are situated on the steering column and consists of the wiper switch, the turn
signal indicator/lighting switch and the trip computer switch.
The steering column adjustment switch is located in the steering column lower shroud on the LH side. The switch is a 4
position 'joystick' which controls reach and rake adjustment.
Steering wheel mounted switches on the LH side of the driver's airbag, control the audio and telephone functions. Switches on
the RH side of the driver's airbag, control the speed control functions. For additional information, refer to:
Audio System (415-01A Information and Entertainment System, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03A, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03B, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03C, Description and Operation).
Two transmission paddle switches are located at the rear of the steering wheel.
Refer to: External Controls (307-05, Description and Operation).
LH Multifunction Switch
Item Description
1 High beam
2 Lighting control rotary switch
3 RH turn signal indicator
4 Headlamp flash
5 LH turn signal indicator
6 Trip computer function button
The LH multifunction switch controls the following windshield wiper functions:
Side lamps
Headlamps
Auto lamps
High/low beam
Headlamp flash
Headlamp timer
Trip computer.
The switch is located in a slot in the clockspring and secured with 2 plastic clips.
RH Multifunction Switch
Item Description
1 Auto/intermittent rotary switch
2 Fast wipe
3 Slow wipe
4 Intermittent wipe
5 Off position
6 Wash/wipe
7 Flick wipe
The RH multifunction switch controls the following windshield wiper functions:
Flick wipe
Intermittent wipe
Slow speed wipe
High speed wipe
Wash/Wipe
Headlamp powerwash
Rain sensing / variable wipe selection.
The switch is located in a slot in the clockspring and secured with 2 plastic clips.
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

The column adjustment switch is located in the steering column lower shroud and held in place with a spring clip. The switch
allows the adjustment of the steering column for both reach and rake angle. The switch has an auto position which allows the
desired position of the column to be set by the driver using the driver's seat memory buttons. The column position is
www.JagDocs.com
automatically reset once the applicable remote handset has been detected by the vehicle security systems.
STEERING WHEEL HEATER

On certain models the rim of the steering wheel contains a heater element. Operation of the heater is selected using the
Touch Screen Display (TSD).
The heater temperature is controlled by a heated steering wheel control module located within the steering wheel. Power for
the heater element is supplied to the steering wheel via 2 contacts on the clockspring and a slip ring mounted on the steering
wheel.
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches
For a detailed description of the steering column lock and switches, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in
the workshop manual. REFER to: (211-05 Steering Column Switches)
Steering Column Switches (Description and Operation),

Steering Column Switches (Description and Operation),
Steering Column Switches (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Switches Fuse(s)
Steering column lock Electrical connector(s)
Wiring Harness
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Central Junction Box (CJB) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Steering Column Switches - Hazard Flasher Switch
Removal
1. NOTE: When removing the component, some of the

clips may remain attached. These clips should be removed
and returned to their original positions in the instrument
panel.
2.
Installation

Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Installation

Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Lock Actuator
Removal
2. Refer to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and

Installation).
3. Torque: 12 Nm
Installation

Engine System - General Information - Engine 5.0L
Special Tool(s)
Oil pressure testing adaptor, 303-1451
Oil pressure testing gauge, 303-871
For a detailed description of the 5.0L engine, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop manual.
REFER to:
Engine (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),

Engine (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Engine (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Engine (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).


Visual Inspection
Coolant leaks Fuses
Oil leaks Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Leaks in the fuel system Harnesses
Visibly damaged or worn parts Sensors
Loose or missing fixings
the next step.
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
NOTES:
If an engine is suspect, and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty refer to the Warranty Policy and
Procedure manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a
new engine.
Due to the possibility of loose carbon, that has become trapped between the valve face and seat, effecting the pressure
readings, when carrying out a compression test and some cylinders are found to have low pressures, install the spark plugs,
road test the vehicle and re-test the suspect cylinders. If the correct pressures are restored, no further action is required.
www.JagDocs.com
Symptom Action
All engine related issues
Check ECM for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to DTC Index. REFER to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis
and Testing),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Difficult to start hot and

cold Carry out general engine checks:
- Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
- Valve clearances
- Spark plug condition and color
Poor idle
Ensure the air intake system is free from leaks
Carry out general engine checks:
- Valve clearances
Check for collapsed catalytic converter/blocked exhaust system
Check long and short term fuel trim datalogger signals
- Readings up to 10%: may be considered as acceptable if the readings are equal
bank to bank
- Positive readings of between 10-20%: check for air leaks in air intake system
- Negative readings of between 10-20%: check for over fuelling e.g. leaking injectors,
high fuel pressure
- Readings above 20%: check for DTCs and refer to DTC Index. REFER to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol,
Diagnosis and Testing),
Carry out a vacuum gauge check. Refer to component tests in this section
Insufficient
power/Insufficient Ensure the air intake system is free from leaks
compression Carry out general engine checks:
- Valve clearances
Check for collapsed catalytic converter/blocked exhaust system
Check long and short term fuel trim datalogger signals
- Readings up to 10%: may be considered as acceptable if the readings are equal
bank to bank
- Positive readings of between 10-20%: check for air leaks in air intake system
- Negative readings of between 10-20%: check for over fuelling e.g. leaking injectors,
high fuel pressure
- Readings above 20%: check for DTCs and refer to DTC Index. REFER to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol,
Diagnosis and Testing),
Carry out a vacuum gauge check. Refer to component tests in this section
Oil consumption
Carry out oil leak check followed by an oil consumption test. Refer to the component tests
in this section
If oil consumption is excessive:
Check the integrity of the engine breather system
Carry out general engine checks:
- Valve clearances
Noise
Refer to the Special Service Messages on the Electronic Product Quality Report (EPQR)
system for sound files. If the symptom does NOT compare to any of the sound files,
contact Dealer Technical Support (DTS)
DTC Index
For a list of DTCs that could log in the Engine Control Module (ECM) refer to section 303-14. REFER to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing).
Component Tests
Engine Oil Leaks
NOTE: Before installing new gaskets or oil seals, make sure that the fault is clearly established.
If the oil leak cannot be identified clearly by a visual inspection, carry out an Ultraviolet test:
Fluorescent Oil Additive Method
1. Clean the engine with a suitable cleaning fluid (brake cleaner).
2. Drain the engine oil and refill with recommended oil, premixed with Diesel Engine Oil Dye or equivalent. Use a minimum
14.8 ml (0.5 ounce) to a maximum 29.6 ml (1 ounce) of fluorescent additive to all engines. If oil is not premixed,
fluorescent additive must first be added to the crankcase.
3. Run engine for 15 minutes. Stop the engine and inspect all seal and gasket areas for leaks using a 12 Volt Master UV
Diagnostic Inspection Kit or equivalent. A clear bright yellow or orange area will identify leak. For extremely small
leaks, several hours may be required for the leak to appear.
4. As necessary, pressurize the main oil gallery system to locate leaks due to incorrectly sealed, loose or cocked plugs. If
the flywheel bolts leak oil, look for sealer on the threads.
5. Repair all leaks as necessary.
Compression Test
General Remarks
NOTES:
Removing fuses and disconnecting electrical components may cause the Engine Control Module (ECM) to log Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs). After the measurements have been carried out, DTCs should be cleared from memory by connecting to
the Manufacturer Approved Diagnostic System.
Only check the compression pressure with the valves set to the prescribed clearance (if this can be adjusted).
The compression pressure should be checked with the engine at normal operating temperature.
Check the Compression Pressure
WARNING: Move gear selector lever to 'P' position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay.
2. Start the engine - the engine will start, run for a few seconds then stall.
3. Remove the spark plugs.
4. Install the compression tester.
5. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch OFF, using the auxiliary starter switch,
crank the engine a minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number
of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading.
6. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes.
7. Install the removed components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening torques.
8. Clear all DTCs from the ECM.
Interpretation of the Results
NOTE: Due to the possibility of loose carbon that has become trapped between the valve face and seat effecting the
pressure readings, when carrying out a compression test and cylinders are found to have low pressures, install the spark plugs,
road test the vehicle and re-test the suspect cylinders. If the correct pressures are restored, no further action is required.
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is within 75% of the
highest reading.
If the cylinder pressures are found to be low, carry out a leakdown test to determine the location of the fault (if any leakback
can be heard through the engine breather system suspect the piston rings, if any leakback can be heard through the inlet
system suspect the inlet valve or seat, if any leakback can be heard through the exhaust manifold suspect the exhaust valve
or seat. If the measurements for two cylinders next to each other are both too low then it is very likely that the cylinder head
gasket between them is burnt through. This can also be recognized by traces of engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the
engine oil).
Oil Consumption Test
The amount of oil an engine uses will vary with the way the vehicle is driven in addition to normal engine-to-engine variation.
This is especially true during the first 16,100 km (10,000 miles) when a new engine is being broken in or until certain internal
components become conditioned. Vehicles used in heavy-duty operation may use more oil. The following are examples of
heavy-duty operation:
Trailer towing applications

Severe loading applications
Sustained high speed operation
Engines need oil to lubricate the following internal components:
Cylinder block cylinder walls

Pistons and piston rings
Intake and exhaust valve stems
Intake and exhaust valve guides
All internal engine components
When the pistons move downward, a thin film of oil is left on the cylinder walls. As the vehicle is operated, some oil is also
drawn into the combustion chambers past the intake and exhaust valve stem seals and burned.
The following are examples of conditions that can affect oil consumption rates:
Engine size
Operator driving habits
Ambient temperatures
Quality and viscosity of oil
Engine is being run in an overfilled condition (check the oil level at least five minutes after a hot shutdown with the
vehicle parked on a level surface. The oil level should not be above the top of the cross-hatched area and the letter "F"
in FULL).
Operation under varying conditions can frequently be misleading. A vehicle that has been run for several thousand miles on
short trips or in below-freezing ambient temperatures may have consumed a "normal" amount of oil. However, when checking
the engine oil level, it may measure up to the full mark on the oil level indicator due to dilution (condensation and fuel) in the
engine crankcase. The vehicle then might be driven at high speeds on the highway where the condensation and fuel boil off.
The next time the engine oil is checked it may appear that a liter of oil was used in about 160 km (100 miles). Oil
consumption rate is about one liter per 2,400 km (1,500 miles).
Make sure the selected engine oil meets Jaguar specification and the recommended API performance category "SG" and SAE
viscosity grade as shown in the vehicle Owner's Guide. It is also important that the engine oil is changed at the intervals
specified for the typical operating conditions.
The following diagnostic procedure is used to determine the source of excessive oil consumption.
NOTE: Oil use is normally greater during the first 16,100 km (10,000 miles) of service. As mileage increases, oil use
decreases. High speed driving, towing, high ambient temperature and other factors may result in greater oil use.
1. Define excessive consumption, such as the number of miles driven per liter of oil used. Also determine customers
driving habits, such as sustained high speed operation, towing, extended idle and other considerations.
2. Verify that the engine has no external oil leaks as described under Engine Oil Leaks in this section.
3. Carry out an oil consumption test:

Run the engine to normal operating temperature. Switch engine OFF and allow oil to drain back for at least five
minutes .
With vehicle parked on level surface, check the engine oil level.
If required, add engine oil to set level exactly to the FULL mark.
Record the vehicle mileage.
Instruct the customer to return for a level check after driving the vehicle as usual for 1,610 km (1000 miles).
Check the oil level under the same conditions and at the same location as the initial check.
NOTE: If the oil consumption rate is unacceptable go to Step 4.
4. Check the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) system. Make sure the system is not plugged.
5. Check for plugged oil drain-back holes in the cylinder head and cylinder block.
6. If the condition still exists after carrying out the above tests go to step 9.
7. Carry out a cylinder compression test. Refer to the Compression Test procedure in this section. This can help determine
the source of oil consumption such as valves, piston rings or other areas.
8. Check valve guides for excessive guide clearance. Install new valve stem seals after verifying valve guide clearance.
9. Worn or damaged internal engine components can cause excessive oil consumption. Small deposits of oil on the tips of
the spark plugs can be a clue to internal oil consumption.
Intake Manifold Vacuum Test
Bring the engine to normal operating temperature. Connect a vacuum gauge or equivalent to the intake manifold. Run the
engine at the specified idle speed.
The vacuum gauge should read between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg) depending upon the engine condition and the altitude at
which the test is performed. Subtract 4.0193 kPa (1 in-Hg) from the specified reading for every 304.8 m (1,000 feet) of
elevation above sea level.
The reading should be steady. As necessary, adjust the gauge damper control (where used) if the needle is fluttering rapidly.
Adjust damper until needle moves easily without excessive flutter.
Interpreting Vacuum Gauge Readings
A careful study of the vacuum gauge reading while the engine is idling will help pinpoint trouble areas. Always conduct other
appropriate tests before arriving at a final diagnostic decision. Vacuum gauge readings, although helpful, must be interpreted
carefully.
Most vacuum gauges have a normal band indicated on the gauge face.
The following are potential gauge readings. Some are normal; others should be investigated further.
1. NORMAL READING: Needle between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg) and holding steady.
2. NORMAL READING DURING RAPID ACCELERATION: When the engine is rapidly accelerated, the needle will drop to a low
(not to zero) reading. When the throttle is suddenly released, the needle will snap back up to a higher than normal
figure.
3. NORMAL FOR HIGH-LIFT CAMSHAFT WITH LARGE OVERLAP: The needle will register as low as 51 kPa (15 in-Hg) but will
be relatively steady. Some oscillation is normal.
4. WORN RINGS OR DILUTED OIL: When the engine is accelerated, the needle drops to 0 kPa (0 in-Hg). Upon
deceleration, the needle runs slightly above 74 kPa (22 in-Hg).
5. STICKING VALVES: When the needle remains steady at a normal vacuum but occasionally flicks (sharp, fast movement)
down and back about 13 kPa (4 in-Hg), one or more valves may be sticking.
6. BURNED OR BENT VALVES: A regular, evenly-spaced, downscale flicking of the needle indicates one or more burned or
damaged valves. Insufficient hydraulic valve tappet or hydraulic lash adjuster clearance will also cause this reaction.
7. POOR VALVE SEATING: A small but regular downscale flicking can mean one or more valves are not seating correctly.
8. WORN VALVE GUIDES: When the needle oscillates over about a 13 kPa (4 in-Hg) range at idle speed, the valve guides
could be worn. As engine speed increases, the needle will become steady if guides are responsible.
9. WEAK VALVE SPRINGS: When the needle oscillation becomes more violent as engine RPM is increased, weak valve
springs are indicated. The reading at idle could be relatively steady.
10. LATE VALVE TIMING: A steady but low reading could be caused by late valve timing.
11. IGNITION TIMING RETARDED: Retarded ignition timing will produce a steady but somewhat low reading.
12. INSUFFICIENT SPARK PLUG GAP: When spark plugs are gapped too close, a regular, small pulsation of the needle can
occur.
13. INTAKE LEAK: A low, steady reading can be caused by an intake manifold or throttle body gasket leak.
14. BLOWN HEAD GASKET: A regular drop of fair magnitude can be caused by a blown head gasket or warped cylinder head
to cylinder block surface.
15. RESTRICTED EXHAUST SYSTEM: When the engine is first started and is idled, the reading may be normal, but as the
engine RPM is increased, the back pressure caused by a clogged muffler, kinked tail pipe or other concerns will cause
the needle to slowly drop to 0 kPa (0 in-Hg). The needle then may slowly rise. Excessive exhaust clogging will cause
the needle to drop to a low point even if the engine is only idling.
When vacuum leaks are indicated, search out and correct the cause. Excess air leaking into the system will upset the fuel
mixture and cause concerns such as rough idle, missing on acceleration or burned valves. If the leak exists in an accessory
such as the power brake booster, the unit will not function correctly. Always repair vacuum leaks.
Engine Oil Pressure Check
NOTE: Prior to checking the engine oil pressure, a road test of 6 miles (10 kilometres), must be carried out. Do not
attempt to attain engine normal operating temperature by allowing the engine to idle.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. Refer to section 414-00 - Charging System - General Information of the workshop
manual
2. WARNINGS:
The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent scalding.
Wear protective gloves.
Remove the engine oil filter element

REFER to: Oil Filter Element (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
NOTE: Ensure the oil filter element is not contaminated during this procedure
3. Install the oil filter element into special tool (Oil filter adapter number 303-1451)
4. Install the special tool (Oil filter adapter number 303-1451) to the engine. Torque: 25 Nm
5. Install the special tool (Oil pressure testing gauge, 303-871) and tighten the union
6. Connect the battery ground cable
7. Refer to owner hand book, check and top-up the engine oil if required
8. Start and run the engine
9. Note the oil pressure readings with the engine running at idle and 3500 RPM
10. Turn off the engine
11. Disconnect the battery ground cable
12. Remove the special tools

1. Clean the components
13. Install the engine oil filter element

REFER to: Oil Filter Element (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
NOTE: Ensure the oil filter element is not contaminated during this procedure
14. Connect the battery ground cable
15. Refer to owner hand book, check and top-up the engine oil if required
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Bearing Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect bearings for the following defects.

1. Cratering - fatigue failure
2. Spot polishing - incorrect seating.
3. Imbedded dirt engine oil.
4. Scratching - dirty engine oil.
5. Base exposed - poor lubrication.
6. Both edges worn - journal damaged.
7. One edge worn - journal tapered or bearing not seated.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
General Procedures
1. Determine the diameter of the camshaft journals.

Using a micrometer measure the diameter at 90
degrees intervals to determine if the journals are
out-of-round.
Measure at two different points on the journal to
determine if there is any tapering.
If the measurements are out of the specified range,
install a new camshaft.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft End Play
General Procedures
1. NOTE: Make sure that the camshaft is to specification.
Using the special tool, measure the end play.

Slide the camshaft in both directions. Read and note
the maximum and minimum values on the dial indicator
gauge.
1. End play = maximum value minus minimum value.
If the measurement is out of specification, install new

components.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Lobe Lift
General Procedures
1. Measure the diameter (1) and diameter (2) with a vernier caliper. The
difference in measurements is the lobe lift.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Surface Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the active area. Minor
pitting is acceptable outside the active area.
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Cleaning
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not use a caustic cleaning solution or damage to

connecting rods may occur.
Mark and separate the parts and clean with solvent. Clean the oil
passages.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Large End Bore
General Procedures
1. Measure the bearing bore in two directions. The difference is the

connecting rod bore out-of-round. Verify the out-of-round is within
specification.
2. Measure the bearing bore diameter in two directions. Verify the bearing
bore is within specification.
Engine System - General Information - Crankshaft End Play
General Procedures
1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Brackets, measure the end
play.
Measure the end play by lifting the crankshaft using a
lever.
If the value is out of the specification, install new
thrust half rings to take up the end float and repeat the
measurement.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Bore Out-of-Round
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The main bearing caps or lower crankcase must be in

place and tightened to the specified torque; however, the bearing
shells should not be installed.
Measure the cylinder bore with an internal micrometer.

Carry out the measurements in different directions and at
different heights to determine if there is any out-of-
roundness or tapering.
If the measurement is out of the specified range, hone out
the cylinder block or install a new block.
Engine System - General Information - Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and
Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect the cylinder head joining flanges of the exhaust manifold for
evidence of exhaust gas leaks.
2. Inspect the exhaust manifold for cracks, damaged gasket surfaces, or

other damage that would make it unfit for further use.
Engine System - General Information - Leakage Test Using Smoke Test
Equipment
General Procedures
CAUTION: The compressed air line supply pressure must be between 3.5 and 12 bar (50 and 175 psi) for the smoke test
equipment to function correctly. Do not exceed this pressure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
smoke test equipment.
NOTES:
The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully charged before carrying out this procedure.
On vehicles with 3.0L TDV6, it will be necessary to insert smoke at both air cleaner outlet pipes independently if the right
hand turbocharger and associated hoses are to be tested.
In some cases it may be necessary to remove undertrays, trim or engine covers to obtain access to all potential leak
locations.
For further information regarding operation of the test equipment refer to the manufacturers operators manual supplied
with the kit.
1. WARNING: Use an additional support to prevent the hood

from falling if the smoke test equipment is secured to the
hood. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Install the smoke test equipment to a suitable location

under the hood.
2. Connect a suitable compressed air line to the smoke test equipment.
3. Connect the smoke test equipment positive power cable to the battery
positive terminal.
4. WARNING: Do not connect the smoke test equipment negative

cable to the battery negative terminal.
Connect the smoke test equipment negative cable to a suitable body

ground point.
5. NOTE: A flashing green light indicates low battery voltage.
In this case, place the battery on charge and make sure
that the battery is fully charged before using the smoke
test equipment.
Observe the power indicator lamp on the smoke test

equipment. Make sure that a continuous green light is
displayed.
6. NOTES:
In some cases it may be necessary to remove the air

cleaner(s) to allow access to the air cleaner outlet pipes.
In some cases it will be necessary to cap one of the

air cleaner outlet pipes. Use the blanking caps supplied in
the kit to cap the open orifice.
Disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe(s).

7. NOTE: Make sure the smoke test equipment adapter is a
good fit to the air cleaner outlet pipe. This must be an air
tight seal.
Connect the smoke test equipment supply hose to the air

cleaner outlet pipe.
1. Install the appropriate adapter to the air cleaner
outlet pipe.
2. Connect the smoke test equipment supply hose to
the adapter link hose.
8. NOTES:
The flow control valve must be in the fully open

position.
Smoke is produced for 5 minutes. The smoke test

equipment will automatically switch off after this period of
time.
Switch the smoke test equipment on.
9. Remove the oil filler cap, and observe until a constant flow of smoke is
visible leaving the oil filler orifice. Install the oil filler cap.
10. NOTE: The longer smoke is allowed to exit from a leak, the more
fluorescent dye will be deposited at a leak location.
Using the torch supplied in the kit set to white light, look for escaping
smoke. Alternatively, use the ultraviolet light to look for fluorescent dye
deposits at the source of a leak.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Piston Inspection
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not use any aggressive cleaning fluid or a wire

brush to clean the piston.
Carry out a visual inspection.

Clean the piston skirt, pin bush, ring grooves and crown
and check for wear or cracks.
If there are signs of wear on the piston skirt, check
whether the connecting rod is twisted or bent.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin Diameter
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston and piston pin are a matched pair. Do not
mix up the components.
Measure the piston pin diameter.

Measure the diameter in two directions.
If the values are not to specification, install a new
piston and a new piston pin.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin to Bore Diameter
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston and piston pin form a matched pair. Do not mix up
the components.
Measure the diameter of the piston pin bore.

Measure the diameter in two directions.
If the values are not to specification, install both a new piston
and a new piston pin.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring End Gap
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not mix up the piston rings. Install the

piston rings in the same position and location.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring gap.

The values given in the specification refer to a gauge
ring used during production.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston ring must protrude from the piston groove.
To determine the piston ring clearance, insert the Feeler
Gauge right to the back of the groove, behind the wear ridge.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring clearance.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Valve Spring Free Length
General Procedures
1. Using a vernier gauge, measure the free length of each valve

spring. Verify the length is within specification.
Engine System - General Information - Valve Stem Diameter
General Procedures
1. Using a micrometer measure the diameter of the valve stems.

If the measurements are not to specification, install a
new valve.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Head Distortion
General Procedures
Check
1. Using a suitable metallic straight edge and feeler gauge, measure the
cylinder head face in the areas illustrated. Note the maximum value.
2. CAUTION: Machine the minimum thickness of material from the cylinder

head to meet specification. If a selection of cylinder head gaskets are
available, increase the thickness of the cylinder head gasket by one
size.
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
Prior to having the cylinder head machined, prior approval is
required by Jaguar or Land Rover engineering.
If the cylinder head requires machining, this must be carried out by

a local engineering company.
If the cylinder head exceeds the maximum value (0.2mm), the cylinder
head must be machined.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Compression Test V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
General Procedures
Check
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, make sure the area around the joint faces and connections are
clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
NOTES:
The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully charged before carrying out this procedure.
1. Refer to: Ignition Coil-On-Plug - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-07B Engine

Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
2. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel injection system is

disabled before carrying out a cylinder compression test.
Failure to follow this step may result in damage to the
vehicle.
Repeat procedure for the other side.
3. Crank engine for approximately five seconds to remove any remaining

fuel in the cylinders.
www.JagDocs.com
4. NOTE: Dry cylinder compression test.
Install the compression test gauge.
5. NOTES:
Print graphic number E164747 in step 11. Use this

graphic to record each cylinder compression figure.
The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully

charged before carrying out this procedure.
Crank the engine for 10 seconds and record the figure

displayed on the compression test gauge. Make sure the
pressure is released from the compression test gauge after
each cylinder recording. Repeat the process for all cylinders.
6. Remove the compression test gauge.
7. NOTE: Wet cylinder compression test.
Using a suitable syringe add 10 ml of clean engine oil into the cylinder.
8. Install the compression test gauge.
9. NOTES:
Print graphic number E164747 in Step 11. Use this

graphic to record each cylinder compression figure.
The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully

charged before carrying out this procedure.
Crank the engine for 10 seconds and record the figure

displayed on the compression test gauge. Make sure the
pressure is released from the compression test gauge after
each cylinder recording. Repeat the process for all cylinders.
10. After each wet cylinder compression test remove the compression test
gauge and crank engine for approximately 10 seconds to remove engine
oil from the cylinder
11. NOTES:
A= dry cylinder compression test.

B= wet cylinder compression test.
12. NOTE: Remove and discard all blanking caps.
13. The minimum cylinder compression reading recorded must be within 10%
of the maximum cylinder compression reading recorded. If the difference
across the cylinders is higher than 10% please contact dealer technical
support (DTS) for further assistance.
14. Using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment, read and clear any
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Engine Data
Engine Maximum Engine Maximum Engine Compression
Engine Description Capacity Torque (EEC) (SAE) Power (EEC) (SAE) Ratio Bore Stroke
• 90° "Vee" • 8 4.999 ccm 625 Nm at 2.500 - 5.500 375 kW at 6.000 - 6.500 9.5 ± 0.50 92.509 ± 93 ± 0.1
Cylinder • 32 Valves RPM RPM 0.009 mm mm
Engine Firing Order
Standard Firing order
ISO 1:2:7:3:4:5:6:8
DIN 1:5:4:2:6:3:7:8
Engine Valve Clearance (cold)
Intake Valve Exhaust Valve
0.20 ±0.02 0.25 ±0.02
Spark Plugs
Specification Spark Plug Gap
ILKR6C-10 1 mm
NOTE: When servicing or draining the engine oil, the 0w20 oil is compatible with 5w20. Any residue mix is acceptable.
Description Specification
Engine Oil - Vehicles built up to March 2014 SAE 5W20 WSS-M2C925-A
Engine Oil - Vehicles built from March 2014 SAE 0W20 STJLR.51.5122
Sealant WSE-M4G323-A6
Core plug and stub pipe retainer WSK-M2G349-A7
Jaguar Premium Cooling System Fluid WSS-M97B44-D
Capacities
NOTE: For supercharged 5.0L engines.
Description Litres
Engine oil, initial fill 8.9
Engine oil, service fill with oil filter change 7.25
Engine oil, service fill without oil filter change 6.75
Capacities
NOTE: For naturally aspirated 5.0L engines.
Description Litres
Engine oil, initial fill 8.75
Engine oil, service fill with oil filter change 7.25
Engine oil, service fill without oil filter change 6.75
Cylinder Head and Valve Train
Item Specification
Cylinder head maximum permitted warp (flatness specification) 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
Valve guide inner diameter (mm) 5.51 ± 0.01
Intake valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 117.21 ± 0.1
Exhaust valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 94.39 ± 0.1
Valve stem to guide clearance intake diametrical (mm) 0.022 - 0.057
Valve stem to guide clearance exhaust diametrical (mm) 0.03 - 0.065
Valve head diameter intake (mm) 36 ± 0.1
Valve head diameter exhaust (mm) 30 ± 0.1
Intake valve face angle (degrees) 44.875 ± 0.125
Exhaust valve face angle (degrees) 44.875 ± 0.125
Valve stem diameter intake (mm) 5.4705 ± 0.0075
Valve stem diameter exhaust (mm) 5.4625 ± 0.0075
Valve spring free length (mm) - inlet 46.1
Valve spring free length (mm) - exhaust 46.1
Valve spring installed height (mm) - inlet 35.74
Valve spring installed height (mm) - exhaust 35.1
Camshaft lobe lift intake (mm) 10
Camshaft lobe lift exhaust (mm) 9.36
Camshaft journal to cylinder head bearing surface clearance diametrical (mm) 0.025 - 0.065
Camshaft journal diameter - all positions 26.965 ± 0.01
Bearing diameter - all positions 27.01 ± 0.01
Item Specification
Camshaft journal maximum run out limit (mm)
Camshaft journals to end journals 0.03
Camshaft journals to adjacent journals 0.015
Camshaft journal maximum out of round (mm) - all journals 0.005
Torque Specification
NOTE: A = Refer to procedure for correct torque sequence.

Engine cover mounting bolts 10 7 -
Accessory drive belt tensioner retaining bolt 40 30 -
Supercharger belt idler/tensioner bracket retaining bolts 25 18 -
Secondary drive belt idler retaining bolts 40 30 -
Power steering pump pulley retaining bolts 25 18 -
Power steering pump retaining bolts 25 18 -
Power steering pump bracket to engine retaining bolts 25 18 -
Generator retaining bolts 48 35 -
Starter motor retaining bolts 48 35 -
Air conditioning compressor retaining bolts 25 18 -
Engine mounting to engine mounting bracket retaining nuts 48 35 -
Engine mounting to subframe retaining nuts 63 46 -
Engine mounting bracket to engine retaining bolts 48 35 -
Crankshaft damper pulley retaining LH threaded bolt 200 + 270° 148 + 180° -
Flexplate retaining bolts 45 + 90° 33 + 90° -
Exhaust manifold heat shield retaining bolts A - -
Exhaust manifold retaining bolts A - -
Engine wiring harness bracket retaining bolts 10 7 -
Coolant outlet pipe 10 7 -
Intercooler retaining bolts 25 18 -
Intake manifold retaining bolts 25 18 -
Oil Cooler retaining bolts 13 10 -
Knock sensor (KS) retaining bolt 20 14 -
Ignition coil retaining bolts 8 - 71
Spark plugs 20 15 -
Fuel rail retaining bolts A - -
High pressure fuel pipe retaining bolts A - -
High pressure fuel pump retaining bolts 12 9 -
Oil filter housing assembly retaining bolts 12 9 -
Oil filter cap 28 21 -
Lifting eye bolts 25 + 90° 18 + 90° -
Manifold absolute pressure and temperature (MAPT) sensor sensor retaining bolts 5 - 44
Coolant pump retaining bolts 12 9 -
Variable valve timing (VVT) oil control solenoid retaining bolts 10 7 -
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor retaining bolts 10 7 -
Camshaft cover retaining bolts 13 10 -
Front upper timing cover retaining bolts 12 9 -
Front lower timing cover retaining bolts A - -
Engine rear cover retaining bolts A - -
VVT to camshaft retaining bolts 32 24 -
Camshaft bearing caps retaining bolts 11 8 -
Primary timing chain fixed guide retaining bolts 12 9 -
Primary timing chain tensioner retaining bolts 12 9 -
Primary timing chain tensioner guide blade retaining bolts 25 18 -
Auxiliary chain tensioner guide retaining bolts 21 15 -
Auxiliary chain fixed guide retaining bolt 12 9 -
Oil pump sprocket retaining bolt 21 15 -
Cylinder head retaining bolts A - -
Engine oil level (EOL) sensor retaining bolt 12 9 -
Oil pan to oil sump body retaining bolts 12 9 -
Oil sump body to engine retaining bolts 25 18 -
Oil pan drain plug 23 17 -
Oil transfer tube to Oil pan body retaining bolts 11 8 -
Oil pump to engine block retaining bolts 25 18 -
Pick-up pipe to oil pump retaining bolts 12 9 -
Windage tray retaining bolts 25 18 -
Piston cooling jet retaining bolts 12 9 -
Engine block coolant draining plug 50 37 -
Connecting Rod bolts
Stage 1 10 7 -
Stage 2 50 37 -
Main bearing cap
M10 bolt Stage 1 25 18 -
M10 bolt Stage 2 57 + 70° 42 + 70° -
M8 bolt Stage 1 15 11 -
M8 bolt Stage 2 33 + 75° 24 + 75° -
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine - Component Location
EXTERNAL VIEW
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine - Overview
INTRODUCTION
The 5.0L SC (supercharger) gasoline engine is a liquid cooled V8 unit featuring direct fuel injection, four overhead camshafts
and four valves per cylinder. All four camshafts incorporate VCT (variable camshaft timing).
The main structural components of the engine are all manufactured from aluminum alloy. The engine is built around a very
stiff, lightweight, enclosed V, deep skirt cylinder block. A structural windage tray is bolted to the bottom of the cylinder block
to further improve the block stiffness, minimize NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) and help reduce oil foaming. To further
enhance the stiffness of the lower engine structure, a heavily ribbed sump body is installed. The sump body also helps to
reduce engine noise.
Engine Structure
Item Description
1 LH (left hand) cylinder head (bank B)
2 Cylinder block
3 Windage tray
4 Sump body
5 Sump pan
6 RH (right hand) cylinder head (bank A)
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
Operation of the engine is controlled by the ECM (engine control module).
Refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
CYLINDER BLOCK
The cylinder block is a 90 degree configuration with cast-in iron cylinder liners and an open deck die-cast coolant jacket. The
low volume coolant jacket gives good warm-up times and low piston noise levels. The longitudinal flow design of the coolant
jacket, with a single cylinder head coolant transfer port in each bank, provides good rigidity and head gasket sealing.
The cylinders are numbered as shown below.
Item Description
A ISO standard cylinder numbering
ISO cylinder firing order 1,2,7,3,4,5,6,8
Engine Data Location
Item Description
1 Engine data location
Engine data is marked on the cylinder block at the rear of the RH cylinder bank.
CRANKSHAFT
The crankshaft is made from spheroidal graphite cast iron, which, compared with grey cast iron, has higher mechanical
strength, ductility and increased shock resistance. The undercut and rolled fillets also improve strength. Eight counter-balance
www.JagDocs.com
weights ensure low vibration levels and the large, cross-drilled main bearing journals are designed to contribute to stiffness.
An oil groove in the upper half of each main bearing transfers the oil into the crankshaft for lubrication of the connecting rod
bearings. A thrust washer is installed each side of the top half of the center main bearing.
Crankshaft Data Location
Item Description
1 Pin journal classification and plant identification
2 Main journal classification
3 Date and time codes
The main bearings are numbered 1 to 5 starting from the front of the engine. There are five grades of main bearing available,
each being color coded. Journal sizes are marked on the rear of the crankshaft. For further information refer to Engine - 5.0L,
Vehicles With: Supercharger - General Procedures.
Crankshaft Installation
Item Description
1 Coolant drain plug
2 Torque converter access plug
3 Drive plate
4 Rear cover
5 Main bearing cap
6 Identification mark
7 Front cover
8 Front pulley
The main bearing caps are made from cast iron and are cross bolted to increase rigidity. An identification mark on the bearing
cap faces the front of the engine.
At the front of the crankshaft, a tuned torsional vibration damper is incorporated into the crankshaft front pulley. At the rear of
the crankshaft a pressed steel drive plate, with a steel starter ring gear, is installed to transfer drive from the engine to the
transmission. The reluctor ring for the CKP (crankshaft position) sensor is integrated into the perimeter of the drive plate.
The crankshaft seals are located in the front and rear covers.
PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS
The diameter of each piston is graded and precisely matched to each cylinder bore to help reduce noise. In the vertical plane,
the pistons have a slight barrel form, which helps to ensure a reliable oil film is maintained between the piston and the
cylinder bore. A solid film lubricant coating is applied to both reaction faces of the piston to reduce wear and improve fuel
economy.
A three-ring piston-sealing system is used. The steel top ring is treated with a PVD (physical vapor deposition) peripheral
coating. PVD is a coating technique where material can be deposited with improved properties to ensure good cylinder bore
compatibility and wear resistance. A Napier center ring helps cylinder pressure and oil management, while the three-piece oil
control lower ring is produced from nitrided steel.
The pistons are cooled with engine oil from four piston cooling jets installed under the valley of the cylinder block. Each piston
cooling jet sprays oil onto the underside of the two adjacent pistons, one from each cylinder bank.
The connecting rods are forged from high strength steel. The cap is fracture-split from the rod to ensure precision re-assembly
for bearing shell alignment. There are three grades of large end bearing available, each being color coded. For further
information refer to Engine - 5.0L, Vehicles Without: Supercharger - General Procedures.
Item Description
1 Alignment marks
2 Connecting rod
3 Cap
4 Bearings
The correct alignment of the cap with the connecting rod is indicated by marks on adjacent faces of the two components.
Item Description
A Front of engine
1 Alignment mark
2 LH side (bank B)
3 Alignment mark
4 RH side (bank A)
5 Piston orientation arrow
The orientation of the connecting rods and pistons on the crankshaft are given below:
Bank A - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod alignment
marks must face the rear of the engine.
Bank B - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod alignment
marks must face the front of the engine.
CYLINDER HEADS
NOTE: RH (right-hand) (A bank) cylinder head shown, LH (left-hand) (B bank) cylinder head similar.
The cylinder heads are manufactured in gravity die cast aluminum alloy and are unique for each cylinder bank. Deep-seated
bolts reduce distortion and secure the cylinder heads to the cylinder block.
Each cylinder is served by four valves. To help achieve the required gas-flow characteristics, these are arranged asymmetrically
around the cylinder bore. Each cylinder has a centrally mounted fuel injector and spark plug.
The cylinder head gasket is of a multi-layer steel construction.
www.JagDocs.com
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
NOTE: LH (B bank) installation shown, RH (A bank) installation similar.
Item Description
1 Cylinder head
2 Gasket
3 Heat shield
4 Gasket
5 Exhaust manifold
6 Bolt (8 off)
7 Heat shield
8 Bolt (4 off)
9 Spacer (8 off)
The high SiMo (silicon molybdenum) cast iron exhaust manifolds are unique for each cylinder bank. Each exhaust manifold
installation includes two metal gaskets and two heat shields. Spacers on the securing bolts allow the manifolds to expand and
contract with changes of temperature while maintaining the clamping loads.
VALVE TRAIN
Item Description
1 Inlet camshafts
2 Exhaust camshaft
3 Inverted tooth timing chain
4 Nylon chain guide
5 Auxiliary chain tensioner
6 Auxiliary drive chain
7 Oil pump drive
8 Auxiliary drive camshaft
9 Timing chain tensioner
10 Tensioner lever
11 VCT unit
12 VCT solenoids
The lightweight valve train provides good economy and noise levels and is chain driven from the crankshaft.
Double overhead camshafts on each cylinder head operate the valves. For each cylinder head, an inverted tooth timing chain
transfers drive from the crankshaft to the VCT (variable camshaft timing) unit on the front of each camshaft. Graded tappets
enable setting of inlet and exhaust valve clearances.
Each timing chain has a hydraulic tensioner operated by engine oil pressure. The chain tensioners incorporate a ratchet
mechanism, which maintains tension while the engine is stopped to eliminate start-up noise. The chains are lubricated with
engine oil from jets located at the front of the engine block. Nylon chain guides control chain motion on the drive side.
Variable Camshaft Timing
Item Description
1 VCT units
2 Intake camshaft VCT solenoid
3 Camshaft position sensors
4 Exhaust camshaft VCT solenoid
The VCT system varies the timing of the intake and exhaust camshafts to deliver optimum engine power, efficiency and
emissions. The timing of the intake camshafts has a range of 62 degrees of crankshaft angle. The timing of the exhaust
camshafts has a range of 50 degrees of crankshaft angle.
In the base timing position:
The intake camshafts are fully retarded.

The exhaust camshafts are fully advanced.
VCT Operating Ranges

Camshaft Valve Opens Valve Closes
Intake 29 degrees BTDC (before top dead center) to 33 degrees ATDC (after top dead center) 207 to 269 degrees ATDC
Exhaust 244 to 194 degrees BTDC 6 to 56 degrees ATDC
The system consists of a VCT unit and a VCT solenoid for each camshaft. The ECM controls the system using PWM (pulse width
modulation) signals to the VCT solenoids.
The torsional energy generated by the valve springs and the inertia of the valve train components are used to operate the
system.
Variable Camshaft Timing Units
The VCT units change the position of the camshafts in relation to the timing chains.
Item Description
1 Bolt (3 off)
2 VCT unit
3 Filter
4 Camshaft
5 Inner plate
6 Housing and sprocket
7 Rotor assembly
8 Reed plate
9 Spring and lock pin
10 Spring (3 off)
11 Tip seal (3 off)
12 Spring (2 off)
13 Tip seal (2 off)
14 Spring
15 Dowel pin
16 Bias spring
17 Snap ring
18 Reluctor ring
19 Center plate
20 Snap ring
21 Screw (6 off)
22 Spool valve
23 Outer plate
Each VCT unit is attached to the camshaft by three bolts. A rotor assembly and a reed plate are installed inside a sprocket
housing, which consists of a sprocket, an outer plate and an inner plate held together by six screws.
A reluctor ring, for the CMP (camshaft position) sensor, a center plate and a bias spring are installed at the front of the VCT
unit. The ends of the bias spring locate on the center plate assembly and the sprocket housing, to give a turning moment to
the camshaft in the advance direction. A snap ring locates the reluctor ring on to a sleeve installed in the center of the rotor
assembly. The opposite end of the sleeve locates in a bore in the front face of the camshaft, which contains a filter.
A spring and spool valve are installed in the rotor assembly sleeve and retained by a snap ring. The spring keeps the spool
valve in contact with the armature of the related VCT solenoid.
Each VCT unit is supplied with engine oil from an oil gallery in the cylinder head, through the camshaft front bearing cap and a
bore in the center of the camshaft.
Variable Camshaft Timing Solenoids
The VCT solenoids control the position of the spool valves in the VCT units.
The VCT solenoids are installed in the front upper timing covers, immediately in front of their related VCT units. Each VCT
solenoid is secured with two screws and sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface with the
engine harness.
Each VCT solenoid incorporates a spindle that acts on the spool valve in the related VCT unit to advance and retard the
camshaft timing. The VCT solenoids operate independently and are controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM.
www.JagDocs.com
Variable Camshaft Timing Operation
When the engine is running, the compression and expansion of the valve springs causes momentary increases and decreases
in the torque acting on the camshafts. These momentary changes of torque are sensed in the VCT units and used to change
the camshaft timing.
C
It
em Description
A Camshaft torque
B Camshaft rotation (degrees)
Valve opening
D Peak lift
E Valve closing
1 1000 rev/min
2 4000 rev/min
3 7000 rev/min
4 Inertia effects from valve train rotating components
5 Force caused by valve spring
6 Bias torque from friction
NOTE: Intake camshaft VCT unit shown. For exhaust camshaft VCT unit, read advance for retard and retard for advance.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Base Timing
Item Description
1 Advance chamber
2 Retard chamber
3 Sprocket housing
4 Rotor assembly
5 Lock pin
6 Sleeve
7 Engine oil supply from camshaft
8 Inlet check valve
9 Lock pin drain
10 Spool valve
11 Advance check valve
12 Retard check valve
At engine start-up, once the engine oil pressure in the camshaft is sufficient to open the inlet check valve, engine oil flows
across the spool valve, through the advance and retard check valves and into the advance and retard chambers. During the
start cycle, the ECM signals the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve into the sleeve and connect the lock pin to inlet oil
pressure. The inlet oil pressure causes the lock pin to retract from the inner plate and unlock the rotor assembly and camshaft
from the sprocket housing.
There is a constant supply of oil to the VCT to ensure the unit remains filled during operation.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Advance
To advance the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve so that the advance
chamber oil passage is closed and the retard chamber oil passage is connected to inlet oil.
Each momentary increase of the torque acting on the camshaft generates a pressure pulse in the retard chamber. Oil moves
from the retard chamber, through the spool valve and the advance check valve to the advance chamber, to equalize the
pressures in the two chambers. The displacement of oil from the retard chamber causes the rotor assembly to advance in
relation to the sprocket housing. Each momentary decrease of torque acting on the camshaft also generates a pressure pulse
in the advance chamber, but, with the advance chamber oil passage closed, no movement of oil between the advance and
retard chambers occurs and the rotor assembly cannot move in the retard direction.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Null
Once the camshaft has reached the required timing position the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to set the spool
valve in the null position. In the null position, the advance and retard chamber oil passages are both closed by the spool valve
and the rotor assembly is hydraulically locked to the sprocket housing.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Retard
To retard the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve to close the retard
chamber oil passage and connect the advance chamber oil passage to the inlet oil.
Each momentary decrease of the torque acting on the camshaft causes oil to transfer from the advance chamber, through the
spool valve and the retard check valve to the retard chamber, and so retard the camshaft timing.
www.JagDocs.com
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Item Description
1 Oil pump outlet tube
2 Anti-drain valve
3 Oil cooler
4 Oil filter
5 Piston cooling jets
6 Timing chain lubrication jets
7 Oil evacuation tube
8 Oil pump
9 Oil temperature and level sensor
10 Oil pick-up
The oil pump is attached to the underside of the windage tray. The input shaft of the oil pump is driven from the front of the
crankshaft, by the auxiliary chain, at 0.87 engine speed.
The oil pump draws oil from the sump pan through a centrally mounted pick-up pipe. The oil is pressurized and pumped
through an output tube to the cylinder block. After passing through an anti-drain valve and a plate type oil cooler, the oil is
filtered by a replaceable cartridge installed on the front of the RH cylinder head.
The output from the oil filter is distributed through oil galleries in the cylinder heads and cylinder block. All moving parts are
lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurized oil is also provided for the VCT system, the timing chain tensioners, the piston
cooling jets and the timing chain lubrication jets.
The oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure the rapid
return of the oil to the sump pan. System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the LH cylinder head cover.
An oil evacuation tube is installed to allow oil to be drawn from the sump pan. The upper end of the oil evacuation tube is
located under the oil filler cap.
An oil drain plug is installed in the RH side of the sump pan.
Oil Pump Nominal Operating Pressures

Engine Speed, rev/min Temperature, °C (°F) Pressure, bar (lbf/in2)
Idle 20 (68) 2.0 (29.0)
1500 20 (68) 6.0 (87.0)
3000 40 (104) 6.2 (90.0)
3000 110 (230) 5.0 (72.5)
3000 130 (266) 4.0 (58.0)
Oil Level Monitoring
Oil level monitoring is provided by an oil level and temperature sensor that measures the oil level in the sump pan. The oil
level can be displayed in the message center of the instrument cluster.
The oil level and temperature sensor supplies the ECM with a signal containing the level and temperature of the oil in the
sump pan. The oil level and temperature sensor is secured to the bottom of the sump pan with three screws and sealed with a
gasket.
The oil level and temperature sensor sends an ultrasonic pulse vertically upward and measures the time taken for the pulse to
be reflected back from the top surface of the oil. This time is compared with the time taken for an ultrasonic pulse to travel a
reference distance within the oil level and temperature sensor to determine the oil level. The oil level reading is combined with
the oil temperature reading and transmitted in a PWM signal to the ECM.
Oil Level and Temperature Sensor Specifications

Feature Details
Power source Battery Voltage
Level Accuracy ±2 mm (±0.08 in.) at temperatures of -30 °C (-22 °F)) and above; (±4 mm (±0.16 in.) at
temperatures below -30 °C (-22 °F))
Temperature Accuracy ±2 °C (±3.6 °F)
Operating Level Range 116 to 147 mm (4.57 to 5.79 in.)
Feature Details
Operating Temperature -40 to 160 °C (-40 to 320 °F)
Range
Oil Level Check
For additional information, refer to Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A, General Procedures).
For accuracy, oil level checks should be performed with the vehicle on level ground when the oil is hot. The vehicle needs to
stand for approximately 10 minutes, after the engine is switched off, to allow the oil to drain back into the sump pan and the
oil level to stabilize. The oil level system will not give a reading until the oil level has stabilized.
With the ignition on, the engine stopped and the transmission in P (park), repeatedly press the trip button on the end of the
LH multifunction switch until the oil level icon and applicable message are displayed in the fuel gage/trip computer area of the
message center, as shown below:
Item Description
A Oil level is between 50% and 100% of recommended level. No top-up required.
B Oil level is between 12.5% and 50% percent of recommended level. Add 0.5 liter (0.53 US quart) of oil.
C Oil level is between 0% and 12.5% of recommended level. Add 1 liter (1.06 US quarts) of oil.
D Oil level is above maximum for safe operation. Reduce oil level to recommended level.
E Oil level is below minimum for safe operation. Add 1.5 liters (1.59 US quarts) of oil, then recheck level.
F Oil level is stabilizing. Wait 10 minutes and then recheck level. If this display is accompanied by the message ENGINE
OIL LEVEL MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT, a fault with the oil level monitoring system is indicated.
System Fault Warning
If there is a fault with the system, in addition to being displayed during an oil level check, the message ENGINE OIL LEVEL
MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT will be temporarily displayed when the ignition is first switched on.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine

REFER to: Engine - 5.0L (303-00 Engine System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Draining
WARNING: The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent scalding.
CAUTION: Correct installation of the oil filler cap can be obtained by tightening the cap until hard stop.
NOTE: Clean the components general area prior to dismantling.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the engine is warm.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop the engine.
2.
4.
Loosen the element cover 4 complete turns to allow
engine oil to drain from the filter cover.
Make sure that the O-ring seal is exposed.
5. NOTE: Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain from the oil filter
housing.
www.JagDocs.com
7. Remove and discard the oil filter element.

Installation).
10. CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping oil.
Allow at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain.
NOTE: Discard the sealing washer.

Filling
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the area around the

component is clean and free of foreign material.
NOTE: Install a new sealing washer.
Torque: 24 Nm
Installation).
3. NOTE: Install new O-ring seals.
Lubricate the oil filter element O-ring seal with clean

engine oil.
4. CAUTION: Tighten the component finger tight first.
Torque: 25 Nm
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is left for 5 minutes from
filling with oil and that the engine oil level is reading at least minimum
(by following Steps 9-13), before starting the engine.
Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles without
supercharger:
Refer to: Specifications (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

Specifications).
Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles with
supercharger:
Refer to: Specifications (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Specifications).
Clean any residual engine oil from the oil filler cap area.
6.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle has been left for 5 minutes
from filling with oil.
Follow the Steps 9-13 before starting the engine.
8.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop the
engine.
Check for leaks.
9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the selector lever and the gearshift mechanism are
in the park (P) position.
Make sure that the hood is open.
Turn the ignition on.

10.
Scroll through the trip menu to access the engine oil
level display.
11.
Press the cruise control cancel button twice within 2
seconds.
12.
The message center display will revert to the normal
display in the trip computer.
level display.
Check that the oil level display shows an oil level
reading.
Only after having started and run the engine for 10
minutes (as indicated in Step 8), switch off the
engine, then stabilizing for 10 minutes, take a
reading from the oil level display and, if necessary
top up with engine oil.
13. NOTE: If instructed to follow Steps 9-13 in a previous step, return

to Step 8 and continue the procedure.
Turn the ignition off.
14. Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil level to stabilize if there has been
additional oil top up.
15. NOTE: The following steps are to update the average

oil level value.

Press and hold the cruise control cancel button for
more than 2 seconds.
www.JagDocs.com
16.
The message center display will revert to the normal display in
the trip computer.
17. Turn the ignition off.
18. Turn the ignition on.
19.
level display.
Make sure that the average oil level value has now
been updated.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1484
Vacuum Pump, Oil Drain
303-1484-01
Adapter for 303-1484
Draining
WARNING: The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent scalding.
CAUTION: Correct installation of the oil filler cap can be obtained by tightening the cap until hard stop.
NOTES:
Make sure that the vehicle is parked on level ground.
Clean the components general area prior to dismantling.
1.
engine.
2. CAUTION: Allow 10 minutes from turning the engine off

before starting oil extraction.
4.
Loosen the element cover 4 complete turns to allow
engine oil to drain from the filter cover.
5.
Using the oil vacuum pump drain the oil out through
the oil extraction tube.
Special Tool(s): 303-1484, 303-1484-01
6.
Remove the oil vacuum pump.
7.
8. NOTE: Discard the O-ring seals.
Filling
1. NOTE: Install new O-ring seals.
Lubricate the oil filter element O-ring seal with clean

engine oil.
2. CAUTION: Tighten the component finger tight first.
Torque: 25 Nm
supercharger:

Specifications).
supercharger:

Specifications).
4.
6.
engine.
Check for leaks.
7. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com
8.
level display.
9.
seconds.
10.
level display.
reading.


oil level value.

14.
the trip computer.
17.
level display.
been updated.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1621
Alignment Tool, Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing
Check
1. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General
Procedures).
2. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack. Always

support the vehicle on safety stands.
3. Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
4. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping oil.
NOTES:
Discard the sealing washer.
Collect the engine oil in a clean container.
5.
6. CAUTIONS:
Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.
Make sure that the crankshaft is fully locked.
Install the Special Tool(s): 303-1447
7. Using a suitable marker, mark the position of the crankshaft pulley as

illustrated.
8.
9. NOTE: Discard the seal.
www.JagDocs.com
10. Remove the Special Tool(s): 303-1447
11. If required,
carefully
adjust the
crankshaft
position to
allow correct
installation
of the
special tool.
Install the
Special
Tool(s):
JLR-303-1621
12. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when adjusting the crankshaft
position.
NOTE: If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be installed, adjustment of

the fuel pump camshaft timing will be required.
If required, carefully adjust the crankshaft position to allow correct

installation of the special tool.
Install the Special Tool(s): 303-1447

If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be installed, adjustment of the
fuel pump camshaft timing will be required.
Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment (303-01C Engine -

V8 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
13. Remove the Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1621
14. NOTE: Install a new seal.
Torque: 12 Nm
15.

17. Torque: 10 Nm
18. NOTE: Install a new sealing washer.
Torque: 24 Nm
Procedures).
20. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is left for 5 minutes from filling with oil and
that the engine oil level is reading at least minimum (by following Steps 23-27), before
starting the engine.
Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles without supercharger:
Refer to: Specifications (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Specifications).

Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles with supercharger:
Refer to: Specifications (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Specifications).

21. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle has been left for 5 minutes from filling with
oil.
22.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop the engine.
Check for leaks.
23. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the selector lever and the gearshift mechanism are in the park (P)
position.

24.
Scroll through the trip menu to access the engine oil level display.
25.
Press the cruise control cancel button twice within 2 seconds.
26.
The message center display will revert to the normal display in the
trip computer.
Check that the oil level display shows an oil level reading.
Only after having started and run the engine for 10 minutes (as
indicated in Step 22), switch off the engine, then stabilizing for 10
minutes, take a reading from the oil level display and, if necessary
27. NOTE: If instructed to follow Steps 23-27 in a previous step, return to Step 22 and
continue the procedure.
28. Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil level to stabilize if there has been additional oil top
up.
29. NOTE: The following steps are to update the average oil level value.

Press and hold the cruise control cancel button for more than 2
seconds.
30.
The message center display will revert to the normal display in the trip computer.
www.JagDocs.com
33.
Make sure that the average oil level value has now been updated.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1613
Alignment Tool, Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing
Adjustment

3. Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
4. Refer to: Lower Timing Cover (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
Refer to: Lower Timing Cover (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
5. CAUTIONS:

Inspect the 3 timing chain oil nozzles for signs of

damage, install as necessary.
6. NOTE: Using a suitable tie strap, position the

tensioner to one side.

Torque: 12 Nm
7. Refer to: Lower Timing Cover (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
Refer to: Lower Timing Cover (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
9. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm
supercharger:

Specifications).
supercharger:
Specifications).
14.
engine.
Check for leaks.
15. CAUTIONS:
16.
level display.
www.JagDocs.com
17.
seconds.
18.
level display.
reading.

oil level value.

22.
the trip computer.
25.
level display.
been updated.
Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Valve Clearance Check
General Procedures
Check

3. Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
4. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
5. CAUTIONS:
Rotate the engine clockwise until the camshafts are positioned as

shown.
Do not rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise. The timing chains

may bind causing engine damage.
Camshaft lobes must be 180 degrees away from each valve tappet
or valve clearance will be incorrect.
NOTE: Using feeler gauge check the gap between the tappet and
the camshaft lobe and check against specifications table.
Using feeler gauge check the gap between the tappet and the
camshaft lobe and check against specifications table.
Repeat for the remaining valve tappets.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Valve Clearance Adjustment
General Procedures
Check

3. Refer to: Valve Clearance Check (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Adjustment
1. Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal

and Installation).
2. Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal

and Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft LH
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that the orientation and code on the top of the camshaft bearing caps is noted (along with the bank
- A or B), so that on installation the components are installed to their original position. Failure to follow this instruction may
cause damage to the vehicle.
3.
4. CAUTIONS:
Rotate the camshafts until all the valves are at their

minimum open point.
Evenly and progressively, release the camshaft

bearing caps.
NOTE: Remove the camshaft bearing caps. Note: their

position, orientation and markings. Each is marked with its
position (number) and an orientation (arrow).
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Prior to installing the camshafts, position the

crankshaft 45 degrees ATDC cylinder 1A to prevent
valve/piston collision.
Make sure that the camshafts and camshaft bearing

caps are installed in their original locations.
Evenly and progressively install and tighten the

camshaft bearing caps.
NOTE: Lubricate the camshafts and the camshaft

bearing caps with EP90 oil (or 75/90 viscosity oil will
suffice) prior to installation.
Torque: 3 Nm
2. NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm
3. CAUTION: Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.
Rotate the crankshaft untill the camshaft lobe on the valve being
checked is 180 degrees from the maximum opening position.
4. NOTE: If the valve clearance is incorrect, continue to the next step. If

the valve clearance is correct, continue to step 8.
Using feeler gauge check the gap between the tappet and the camshaft
lobe and check against specifications table.
5. CAUTIONS:
Do not use a magnet to remove the tappet.
Use the following formula to calculate the required bucket

thickness. Original thickness + measured clearance - desired clearance =
required bucket thickness.
Remove the tappet and measure the thickness.

6. NOTE: If a new tappet is installed then go back to step 1 of the
install procedure.
Install a new tappet if required.
7. Using feeler gauge check the gap between the tappet and the camshaft
8.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft RH
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that the orientation and code on the top of the camshaft bearing caps is noted (along with the bank
- A or B), so that on installation the components are installed to their original position. Failure to follow this instruction may
cause damage to the vehicle.
3.
4. CAUTIONS:
Rotate the camshafts until all the valves are at their

minimum open point.
Evenly and progressively, release the camshaft

bearing caps.
NOTE: Remove the camshaft bearing caps. Note: their

position, orientation and markings. Each is marked with its
position (number) and an orientation (arrow).
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Prior to installing the camshafts, position the

crankshaft 45 degrees ATDC cylinder 1A to prevent
valve/piston collision.
Evenly and progressively install and tighten the

camshaft bearing caps.
Make sure that the camshafts and camshaft bearing

caps are installed in their original locations.
NOTE: Lubricate the camshafts and the camshaft

bearing caps with EP90 oil (or 75/90 viscosity oil will
suffice) prior to installation.
Torque: 3 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm
Rotate the crankshaft untill the camshaft lobe on the valve being
checked is 180 degrees from the maximum opening position.
4. NOTE: If the valve clearance is incorrect, continue to the next step. If

the valve clearance is correct, continue to step 8.
Using feeler gauge check the gap between the tappet and the camshaft
5. CAUTIONS:
Use the following formula to calculate the required bucket

thickness. Original thickness + measured clearance - desired clearance =
required bucket thickness.
Do not use a magnet to remove the tappet.
Remove the tappet and measure the thickness.
www.JagDocs.com
6. NOTE: If a new tappet is installed then go back to step 1 of the
install procedure.
Install a new tappet if required.
7. Using feeler gauge check the gap between the tappet and the camshaft
8.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Front Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1434
Remover/Installer, Front Crankshaft Seal
Removal
2. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

3. CAUTION: Do not over tighten the crankshaft front seal.

the vehicle.

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Do not over tighten the crankshaft front seal. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Take extra care not to damage the seal.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Pulley
Special Tool(s)
303-1437
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer
303-1438
Crankshaft Damper Bolt Remover/Installer
303-1439
Crankshaft Damper Removal Plate
303-1440
Crankshaft Damper Removal/Installation Stud
303-1441
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer Body
303-1448
Locking Tool
Removal
3. Refer to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud - Vehicles With: Supercharger
(303-03C Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
4. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06C Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
7. CAUTION: Before removing the crankshaft pulley bolt,

note the numbers on the bolt head. If the bolt head shows
10.9, the bolt must be removed counter clockwise. If the
bolt head shows 12.9, the bolt must be removed clockwise.
the crankshaft.
Note the markings on the crankshaft pulley bolt.

8. Install the special tool.
9.
Special Tool(s): 303-1438, 303-1437
11. Torque: 25 Nm
12. NOTE: The graphic shows the tool position for LH
thread only, RH thread will be the opposite.
Support the special tool using a suitable vehicle stand.
13. CAUTION: Discard the bolt.
NOTES:
The graphic shows the step for LH thread only, RH

thread will be the opposite.
The crankshaft pulley bolt will be very tight.
The thread is left handed.

14.
16. NOTES:
If the crankshaft damper is fitted with an early RH

thread crankshaft bolt then the pulley can be removed with
a standard puller.
Discard the bolt after removal.
www.JagDocs.com
17.


21.
22. CAUTION: Discard the friction washer after removing

the crankshaft pulley.
NOTE: Make sure to clean the threads in the end of

the crankshaft and that the crank nose is free of any foreign
materials.
23.
24.
Installation
1.
Apply RTV sealant to the crankshaft pulley keyway.
Make sure that the RTV sealant is applied in a 2mm
diameter bead.
Make sure that when the RTV sealant is applied that
the RTV sealant is level with the top of the keyway.
2. CAUTION: Install a new friction washer before
installing the crankshaft pulley.
NOTES:
Make sure to clean the threads in the end of the

crankshaft and that the crank nose is free of any foreign
materials.
Skip to step 11 for engines fitted with early RH thread

crankshaft bolt.
www.JagDocs.com

6. CAUTION: Rotate the crankshaft pulley installation tool
anti-clockwise until the pulley is fully located, do not over
tighten. Failure to do this may result in damge to the
components.


10. WARNING: Make sure that a new bolt is installed.
Apply loctite 270 to the thread of the bolts.

Torque: 65 Nm

13. Torque: 65 Nm
14. NOTE: The graphic shows the tool position for LH

thread only, RH thread will be the opposite.
Using a suitable stand, support the special tool.
15. NOTE: The graphic shows the step for LH thread only,
RH thread will be the opposite.
Torque: 200 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
16. NOTES:
The graphic shows the step for LH thread only, RH

thread will be the opposite.
The use of a torque multiplyer capable of 600Nm will

be required.
Make sure that the socket is turned through 270

degrees not the torque wrench.
Torque: 270°
17. Remove the special tools.

Apply loctite 270 to the thread of the bolts.
Torque: 65 Nm
19.
20.
and Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Rear Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1442
Rear Crankshaft Seal Installer
JLR-303-1622
Alignment Tool, Engine Rear Oil Seal
Removal
1. Refer to: Flexplate (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
2.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com

Torque: 11 Nm
5. Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1622
Torque: 11 Nm
6. Refer to: Flexplate (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head LH
Removal

and Installation).
4. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold LH (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal

and Installation).
5.
6.
7. CAUTION: Discard the seal.
NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.
8.
9.
10. NOTE: Clamp the hose to minimize coolant loss.

12.
13. CAUTION: Discard the seals.
www.JagDocs.com
14.
15.
16.
17. CAUTIONS:
If a new cylinder head has been installed then new

tappets must be installed.
If the cylinder head is being removed without a new

component being installed, the tappets must be installed in
their original positions.
18.
19.
Installation
1. CAUTION: An acceptable flatness of the cylinder head is

0.1mm.
Check cylinder head face for distortion, across the center

and from corner to corner.
2. WARNING: Make sure care is taken when handling the

cylinder head gasket.
CAUTIONS:
The head gasket must be installed over the cylinder

block dowels.
foreign material.
NOTE: Install a new cylinder head gasket.

3. CAUTION: Make sure that new cylinder head bolts are
installed.
NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Torque: 20 Nm
Torque: 35 Nm
Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 90 degrees.
Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 120 degrees.
www.JagDocs.com
7. Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:


Lubricate the valve tappets with clean engine oil.
10. Torque: 10 Nm
11. CAUTION: Install the new seals.
Torque: 10 Nm
12.
13.
14.
15. CAUTION: Install a new seal.
Torque: 12 Nm
16.
17.
18. Torque: 20 Nm
19. Torque: 20 Nm
20. Torque: 12 Nm
21. Torque: 12 Nm
22. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold LH (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head RH
Removal
3. Refer to: Supercharger (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8


and Installation).
5. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold (303-01A, Removal and Installation).
6.
7.
8. CAUTIONS:
Discard the seal.
9.
10.

13.
14. CAUTION: Discard the seals.
15.
17. NOTE: Discard the gasket.
www.JagDocs.com
18.
19. CAUTIONS:


20. CAUTION: Discard the bolts.
21. NOTE: Discard the gasket.

Installation
1. CAUTION: An acceptable flatness of the cylinder head

is 0.1mm.
NOTE: For cylinder head with distortion above the

maximum allowance, the cylinder head material must be
measured.
Check cylinder head face for distortion, across the center

and from corner to corner.
2. WARNING: Make sure care is taken when handling the

cylinder head gasket.
NOTE: Install a new gasket.

3. CAUTION: Make sure that new cylinder head bolts are
installed.
Torque: 20 Nm
4. Torque: 35 Nm
5. Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 90 degrees.
6. Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 120 degrees.
www.JagDocs.com
7. Torque: 25 Nm
8. Torque: 12 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:


Lubricate the valve tappets with clean engine oil.

10. NOTE: Install a new gasket.
11. CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be installed.
NOTE: Install a new engine oil filter.

12. Torque: 12 Nm
13. Torque: 20 Nm
14. Torque: 20 Nm
15. CAUTION: Install the new seals.
Torque: 10 Nm
16.

Torque: 12 Nm
20.
www.JagDocs.com
21. Torque: 25 Nm
22. Torque: 25 Nm
23. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold (303-01A, Removal and Installation).
and Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount LH
Removal
All vehicles

3. Refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (412-03 Air Conditioning, Removal and Installation).
4. CAUTION: Support the engine on a jack. The angle may need to be

adjusted during this procedure.
Support the engine with the lifting equipment.
5.
Torque: 35 Nm
Right-hand side shown, left-hand side similar.
7.
Torque: 100 Nm
Support and release the power steering rack.
All vehicles
8.
Torque: 63 Nm
9.
Torque: 48 Nm
Raise the engine.
Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount RH
Removal
All vehicles

Installation).
All vehicles
4. CAUTION: Support the engine on a jack. The angle may need to be

adjusted during this procedure.
Support the engine with the lifting equipment.
5.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 35 Nm
7. Torque: 100 Nm
All vehicles
8. Torque: 63 Nm
9. Torque: 48 Nm

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1444-01
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
303-1444-02
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
NOTES:

3. Refer to: Power Steering Pump - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
(211-02 Power Steering, Removal and Installation).
4. Refer to: Catalytic Converter LH (309-00C Exhaust System - V8 5.0L

Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5.
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur,

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
CAUTION: Discard the bolts.
12. NOTES:
Discard the gasket.
Make sure that the position of the spacers is noted

before removal of the manifold.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
Make sure the anti-seize compound does not contact

the catalyst monitor sensor tip.
If accidentally dropped or knocked install a new

sensor.
Make sure the catalyst monitor sensor wiring harness

is not twisted more than 180 degrees and is not in contact
with either the exhaust or driveshaft.
NOTE: If the original sensor is to be installed, apply

lubricant meeting specification ESE-M12A4-A to the thread
of the sensor.
Torque: 45 Nm
2. NOTE: Install a new gasket.
Special Tool(s): 303-1444-01

3. NOTE: If a new cylinder head is installed use the
special tools in the illustration.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are installed.
NOTE: Install the spacers in the noted position.
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 18 Nm
7.
8.
Torque: 100 Nm
9.
WARNING: Make sure that a new bolt is installed.

Torque: 35 Nm
11.
Torque: 25 Nm
12.
Torque: 10 Nm
13.
Torque: 3 Nm
14.
16. Refer to: Power Steering Pump - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
(211-02 Power Steering, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1444-01
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
303-1444-02
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
All vehicles
2. NOTE: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack.

3. Refer to: Catalytic Converter RH (309-00C Exhaust System - V8 5.0L

4.
Torque: 35 Nm
6. Torque: 100 Nm
All vehicles
7. Torque: 12 Nm
Torque: 48 Nm
8.
9.
10. CAUTIONS:
11. Discard the bolts.
NOTES:
Discard the gasket.
Make sure that the position of the spacers is noted

before removal of the manifold.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Torque: 45 Nm
2. CAUTION: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
Install the special tool.

NOTE: If a new cylinder head is installed use the

special tools in the illustration.
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Torque: 10 Nm
6. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 18 Nm
8.
9.
10. Torque: 12 Nm
11. Torque: 48 Nm
Torque: 35 Nm
13. Torque: 100 Nm

14.
All vehicles

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Flexplate
Removal
2. CAUTION: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle stands.
3. Refer to: Transmission - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (307-01B

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal).
4. CAUTIONS:
Install all the bolts finger tight before final tightening.
The bolts can only be used 3 times, mark the bolts

with a center punch. If 2 punch marks are visible, discard
the bolts.
Make sure that no components fall off during removal.
Install the bolts in the noted position.
NOTES:
Make sure the crankshaft and flexplate mating faces

are clean before installation.
Make sure that the crankshaft is not rotated.
Tighten the retaining bolts working diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1:45 Nm
Stage 2:90°
Installation

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Cooler
Removal
3. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol (303-03C Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

5.
6.
www.JagDocs.com
7. CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping oil.
Be prepared to collect escaping coolant.
Torque: 13 Nm
8. CAUTION: Make sure that these components are

installed to the noted removal position.

9. CAUTIONS:

Install new o-ring seals
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

Install the new seals.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Filter Element
Removal
2.
Allow the engine oil to drain from the oil filter
element housing for two minutes.
3.
4.
Installation
1.
2. Torque: 25 Nm
3. Check and top-up the engine oil.
4. Start and run the engine.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pan
Removal
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Level Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls -
4.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Use only a plastic scraper when removing the sealing

material.
corrosion and foreign material.
Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite 5901G)

to the areas shown, and tighten the bolts within 7
minutes.
Apply a bead of sealant, 2.5 mm diameter, to the
area indicated.
2. NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Torque: 12 Nm
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Level Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls -
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pan Extension
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Lower Timing Cover Alignment tool
303-1442
Rear Crankshaft Seal Installer
303-1443
Rear Crankshaft Cover Alignment Tool
Removal
NOTES:
Procedures).

3. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Engine (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Installation).

5. CAUTIONS:
The bolts can only be used 3 times, mark the bolts with a center punch.
If 2 punch marks are visible, discard the bolts.
Make sure that no components fall off during removal.
NOTES:
Make sure the crankshaft and flexplate mating faces are clean before
installation.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15. NOTE: The high-pressure fuel pumps are removed from the illustration
for clarity.
16. CAUTIONS:
Be
prepared to
collect
escaping
fluids.
Make
sure that all
openings are
sealed. Use
new blanking
caps.
www.JagDocs.com
17.
18. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.
19.
20.
21.
22. CAUTIONS:
Discard the fuel pipes.

23. CAUTIONS:
24.

27.

31.
32.
33. NOTE: Clean the components general area prior to dismantling.
www.JagDocs.com
34. NOTE: Discard component.
35.
36. NOTE: Make sure to use the aluminium lug provided on the oil pan
extension to lever against.

access only.
Installation
1. Torque: 8 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign material.
Use only a plastic scraper when removing the sealing material.
Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite 5901G) to the areas

shown, and tighten the bolts within 7 minutes.
Torque: 25 Nm
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign material.
Use only a plastic scraper when removing the sealing material.
Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite 5901G) to the areas

shown, and tighten the bolts within 7 minutes.
Torque: 12 Nm
6. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign
material.
Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite 5901G) to the areas shown, and
tighten the bolts within 7 minutes.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of
foreign material.
NOTE: Install new lower timing cover.
Install the bolts, but do not tighten fully at this stage.
Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
10. Torque: 12 Nm
11. Torque: 10 Nm
12. Special Tool(s): 303-1442, 303-1443
13. Remove the special tools.
Torque: 11 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
15. Torque: 11 Nm
16.
Torque: 11 Nm
17. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump bucket with clean
engine oil.
18. CAUTION: Tighten the Torx screws a turn at a time until the correct
torque is achieved.
NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump O-ring seal with
clean engine oil.
Torque: 11 Nm
19. Loosen the Torx screws half a turn each.
20.
21. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump bucket with clean
engine oil.
22. CAUTION: Tighten the Torx screws a turn at a time until the correct
torque is achieved.
NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump O-ring seal with
clean engine oil.
Torque: 11 Nm
24.
25. CAUTIONS:
Install new high-pressure fuel supply lines.
Lubricate only the union threads with clean engine oil.
NOTES:
Install the bolt and unions fully finger tight before final tightening.
26. CAUTION: Care must be taken when positioning the fuel rail
high-pressure fuel pump cover to one side.
NOTE: Fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump cover shown removed for
clarity.
Torque: 11 Nm
clarity.
Torque: 11 Nm
28. NOTES:
Do not tighten at this stage.

29.
Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
30.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
31. NOTES:
Install the bolt and unions finger tight before final tightening.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
32.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
33. Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
34.
35. Torque: 25 Nm
36. Torque:
Unions 21
Nm
M6 11 Nm
37.
38. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
39. NOTE: The high-pressure fuel pumps are removed from the illustration
for clarity.
40.
41. Torque: 40 Nm
42. Torque: 25 Nm
43. Torque: 25 Nm
44. Torque: 55 Nm
45. Torque: 12 Nm
46. CAUTION: Install all the bolts finger tight before final tightening.
Torque: 25 Nm
47.
48. CAUTION: Install all the bolts finger tight before final tightening.
Torque: 48 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
49. CAUTIONS:
The bolts can only be used 3 times, mark the bolts with a center punch.
If 2 punch marks are visible, discard the bolts.
Install the bolts in the noted position.
NOTES:
Make sure the crankshaft and flexplate mating faces are clean before
installation.
Tighten the retaining bolts working diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1:45 Nm
Stage 2:90°
50. Refer to: Engine (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Installation).
51. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Procedures).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pump
Removal
3. Refer to: Oil Pan Extension (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
4. NOTE: Tsubaki timing drive only.
5. NOTE: INA timing drive only.

6.
7. CAUTION: Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
8. CAUTION: Remove and discard the O-ring seals.

9. CAUTION: Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate and install the new O-ring seals.

Torque:
M8 25 Nm
M6 12 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 21 Nm
6. NOTE: Tsubaki timing drive only.
Install the lower timing chain making sure the coloured

chain links align correctly with the fuel rail high-pressure
fuel pumps camshaft and crankshaft sprocket markings.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the tensioner spring is
correctly located.
NOTE: Tsubaki timing drive only.
Torque: 21 Nm
8. NOTE: INA timing drive only.
Install the lower timing chain making sure the coloured

correctly located.
NOTE: INA timing drive only.
Torque: 21 Nm
10. Refer to: Oil Pan Extension (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Timing Cover
Removal
3. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05D Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner (303-05D Accessory Drive - V8

5. Refer to: Thermostat Housing - Vehicles With: Supercharger (303-03C

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
and Installation).
and Installation).

9. NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation 1.
minutes.
2.
minutes.
Torque: 12 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean
and free of foreign material.
Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite 5901G) to the

areas shown, and tighten the bolts within 7 minutes.


Torque: 12 Nm
8. Torque: 12 Nm
9. Torque: 12 Nm
10. Torque: 12 Nm
11. Torque: 25 Nm
and Installation).
and Installation).
15. Refer to: Thermostat Housing - Vehicles With: Supercharger (303-03C

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
16. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner (303-05D Accessory Drive - V8
17. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05D Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Timing Drive Components
Special Tool(s)
303-1445
Timing Tool – Camshaft Alignment
303-1447
Timing Tool
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1452
Camshaft Rotating Tool
303-1482
Tensioner Tool
Removal
CAUTION: Check all timing components for wear and install new components if required.
NOTES:

Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and
3. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
4.

6. CAUTION: If the noted postion of the woodruff key is
at the 9 o'clock position, then a new flexplate must be
installed. If the woodruff key is in the 6 o'clock position
then proceed with the next step.
Note the position of the crankshaft woodruff key.
7.
8.
9.
10. CAUTION: If the variable valve timing (VVT) units are
knocked or dropped then the VVT must be replaced.
Remove the timing chain with the VVT units.
11.
www.JagDocs.com
12.
13.
14. CAUTION: If the VVT is knocked or dropped then the
VVT must be replaced.
Remove the timing chain with the VVT units.
15.
16. CAUTION: Discard the friction washer.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Install a new friction washer.

2. Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Install the special tool to each Camshaft.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
Carefully rotate the camshafts if the position is not
as shown.
5.
Install the special tool 303-1445 to the rear of the
camshafts making sure the key way's are correctly
located into each slot on each of the camshafts.
6. CAUTIONS:
Do not overturn the camshafts.
Tighten the wing nuts finger tight. Failure to follow

this instruction may result in damage to the components.
Using a suitable tool, carefully rock the camshaft

clockwise then anti-clockwise. Turn the special tool
locking nuts until there is no movement left in
camshafts.
Repeat steps 3- 6 for the camshafts on the other
cylinder head.
www.JagDocs.com
7. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the camshaft to rotate.
If the VVT is knocked or dropped then the VVT must

be replaced.
NOTE: Do not tighten at this stage.
Install the timing chain with the variable valve

timing (VVT) units.
8.
Make sure that all the timing chain alignment marks are in the
positions shown.
9. Torque: 25 Nm
10. Make sure the tensioner piston is fully extended. Then fully
depress and lock the tensioner piston with the grenade pin
before installation, failure to do this may result in damage
to the engine.
11. CAUTION: Do not release the timing chain tensioner

locking pin at this stage.
Torque: 10 Nm
12. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the camshafts to rotate.
If the VVT is knocked or dropped then the VVT must

be replaced.
NOTE: Do not tighten at this stage.
Install the timing chain with the VVT units.
13.
Make sure that all the timing chain alignment marks are in the
positions shown.
14. Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
15. Make sure the tensioner piston is fully extended. Then fully
depress and lock the tensioner piston with the grenade pin
before installation, failure to do this may result in damage
to the engine.
16. CAUTION: Do not release the timing chain tensioner

locking pin at this stage.
Torque: 10 Nm
17.
18. CAUTION: Do not use mechanical force.
Make sure that the tensioners are fully deployed.
19.
Release and reposition the oil suction tube to one
side.
20.
21. CAUTIONS:
Apply the torque to the end of the special tool.
Make sure that the torque wrench is aligned with the

special tool as illustrated in the graphic.
Install the torque wrench to the special tool.

Torque: 35 Nm
22. CAUTION: Make sure that the torque wrench does not
move whilst tightening the VVT bolts.
NOTE: Make sure to tighten the exhaust VVT unit

bolts first.
Torque: 32 Nm
23.
Install the oil suction tube.
Torque: 10 Nm
24.
25. CAUTIONS:
Apply the torque to the end of the special tool.
Make sure that the torque wrench is aligned with the

special tool as illustrated in the graphic.
Install the torque wrench to the special tool.

Torque: 35 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
26. CAUTION: Make sure that the torque wrench does not
move whilst tightening the VVT bolts.
NOTE: Make sure to tighten the inlet VVT unit bolts

first.
Torque: 32 Nm
27.
28.
29.
30.
31. CAUTION: Install the crankshaft pulley bolt with an

M16 washer to prevent damage to the crankshaft on
installation.
Torque: 50 Nm
32.
33. Rotate the engine two complete turns clockwise.

35.
36.
37.
38. CAUTIONS:
If the special tool cannot be installed, return to step

22 of the installation until the special tool 303-1445 is
installed correctly.
If directed to step 22, make sure that the VVT unit

retaining bolts are loosened prior to installing the special
tool(s).

39. CAUTION: If the special tool cannot be installed, the
timing chain installation steps must be repeated.
40.
41.
www.JagDocs.com
42.
43. Torque: 10 Nm
44. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1446
Valve Cover Alignment Tool
Removal

3. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
5. Refer to: Fuel Rail LH (303-04E Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L
6. Torque: 10 Nm
7.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

material.
Installation of the valve cover and tightening must be

carried out within 7 minutes of applying the sealant.
NOTES:

Apply two beads of silcone gasket sealant (Loctite

5901) as shown on the illustration. The application of the
sealant must be 1.5mm diameter 12mm long. Install the
valve cover immediately after applying the sealant. The
cover should be fitted directly to the head without smearing
the sealant or the seals.

Torque: 13 Nm
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1446
Valve Cover Alignment Tool
Removal

3. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Installation).
4. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and
5. Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04E Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L

www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

material.
Installation of the valve cover and tightening must be

carried out within 7 minutes of applying the sealant.
NOTE: Apply two beads of silcone gasket sealant

(Loctite 5901) as shown on the illustration. The application
of the sealant must be 1.5mm diameter 12mm long. Install
the valve cover immediately after applying the sealant. The
cover should be fitted directly to the head without smearing
the sealant or the seals.


Torque: 13 Nm
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Block Oil Gallery Plug
Removal
NOTES:
3. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold RH (303-01C Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal

and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
and free of corrosion and foreign material.
Torque:
Stage 1:40 Nm
Stage 2:180°
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part Number:
INA Timing Drive
Removal
NOTE: Some illustrations may show the engine removed for clarity.
3. Refer to: Oil Pan Extension (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
4.
5.
6.
7. CAUTION: Take extra care when removing the

component, prevent damage to the mating faces.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and
free of foreign material.
2. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the mating

faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3. Torque: 21 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm
5. Install the lower timing chain making sure the coloured

correctly located.
Torque: 21 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part Number:
Tsubaki Timing Drive
Removal
NOTE: Some illustrations may show the engine removed for clarity.
4.
5.
6.
7. CAUTION: Take extra care when removing the

component, prevent damage to the mating faces.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and
free of foreign material.
2. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the mating
faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3. Torque: 21 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm
5. Install the lower timing chain making sure the coloured

correctly located.
Torque: 21 Nm
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Lower Timing Cover
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Lower Timing Cover Alignment tool
Removal

4.
5.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
7. Refer to: Brake Vacuum Pump - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (206-07
Power Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
8.
Installation
1. Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite 5901G) to the
areas shown, and tighten the bolts within 7 minutes.


Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm
5. Refer to: Brake Vacuum Pump - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (206-07
Power Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
6. Torque: 25 Nm
7. NOTE: Install the bolt finger tight before final
tightening.
Torque: 40 Nm
8. Torque: 40 Nm

supercharger:

Specifications).
supercharger:

Specifications).
13.
engine.
Check for leaks.
14. CAUTIONS:
15.
level display.
www.JagDocs.com
16.
seconds.
17.
level display.
reading.

oil level value.

21.
the trip computer.
24.
level display.
been updated.
Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Valves
Removal

3. Refer to: Cylinder Head LH (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

4. Refer to: Cylinder Head RH (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

5.
6.
7.
8. CAUTIONS:

Make sure the working surfaces are thoroughly clean to

avoid contamination of the sensitive components.
Make sure that the valve grinding paste is kept away

from the valve stem.
Place a small amount of fine valve grinding paste

evenly around the contact face of the valve.
Place the valve in position and, using a suitable
valve grinding tool, rotate the valve back and forth a
few degrees on its seat, using light pressure.
Raise the valve frequently during lapping and turn it
into a new position after a few laps or rotations.
Lap only until a continuous but narrow lapping mark
is visible on both the valve seat and valve face.
Thoroughly clean all surfaces to remove traces of
valve grinding paste from the cylinder head, valve
seat and valve face.
Repeat steps 5 to 8 for the remaining valves.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the working surfaces are thoroughly clean to

avoid contamination of the sensitive components.
NOTE: Make sure that all the component mating faces are clean.
To install reverse the removal procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-1435
Engine Lifting Brackets Rear
NOTES:
If a new engine is to be installed, remove the intake manifold to access the top transmission retaining bolts.
3. Refer to: Cowl Vent Screen (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Air Cleaner LH (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering -
V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5. Refer to: Air Cleaner RH (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering -

Procedures).
8. Refer to: Hood (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
and Installation).
S/C 5.0L Petrol, Installation).
11. Refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank (303-03C Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L
Installation).
Installation).
14. Refer to: Power Steering Fluid Reservoir - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (211-02 Power Steering, Removal and Installation).
15.
16.
17. Torque: 40 Nm
18.
19.
20.
21.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
www.JagDocs.com
28.
29.
30. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39. NOTE: This step requires the aid of another technician.
Using a suitable tool, remove the engine.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
NOTES:
If a new engine is to be installed, remove the intake manifold to access the top transmission retaining bolts.
Install the engine assembly.
2. Torque: 45 Nm
3.
4.
5. Torque: 12 Nm
6. CAUTION: Install new o-ring seals
Torque: 9 Nm
7.
8.
9. NOTE: Remove and discard the blanking caps.
10. Torque: 3 Nm
11. Torque: 9 Nm
12. Torque: 9 Nm
13.
14. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
15. Torque: 12 Nm
16. Torque: 12 Nm
17.

19.
20.
21. Torque: 25 Nm
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27. Refer to: Power Steering Fluid Reservoir - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (211-02 Power Steering, Removal and Installation).
Installation).
Installation).
S/C 5.0L Petrol, Installation).
and Installation).
32. Refer to: Hood (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
Procedures).
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Jaguar Premium Cooling System Fluid WSS-M97B44-D
Jaguar Premium Cooling System Flush EGR-M14P7-A
Engine Capacity
5.0L with supercharger 12.32L
5.0L without supercharger 12.5L

Coolant expansion tank retaining bolt 7 - 62
Cooling fan motor and shroud retaining nuts 7 - 62
Thermostat housing retaining bolts 10 7 -
Coolant pump retaining bolts 11 8 -
Radiator retaining bolts 9 - 80
Radiator drain plug 2 - 18
Coolant bleed screw(s) 3 - 27
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Cooling -
Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - SHEET 1 OF 2 (SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES)
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Engine vent hose
2 Throttle
3 Coolant expansion tank
4 Bleed point
5 Throttle body heater hose
6 Engine oil cooler
7 Engine block heater (110 V version shown) or drain plug
8 Coolant supply/expansion hose
9 Outlet tube
10 Radiator upper hose
11 Supercharger cooling system connecting hose
12 Auxiliary radiator supply hose
13 Auxiliary radiator return hose
14 Auxiliary radiator
15 Transmission fluid cooler supply and return hoses
16 Transmission fluid cooler
17 Heater core supply and return hoses
18 Heater manifold
19 Radiator lower hose
20 Cooling fan
21 Thermostat
22 Coolant pump
23 Radiator
COMPONENT LOCATION - SHEET 2 OF 2
Item Description
1 Engine block heater
Comments:
110 V ac version shown, 240 V ac version similar.
2 Harness
3 Connector
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Cooling -
Overview
OVERVIEW
The engine cooling system maintains the engine within an optimum temperature range under changing ambient and engine
operating conditions. The system is a pressurized expansion tank system with continuous bleeds to separate air from the
coolant and prevent the formation of air locks. The engine cooling system also provides:
Heating for:
- The passenger compartment. For additional information, refer to 412-01 Climate Control.
- The throttle body.
Cooling for:
- The engine oil cooler. For additional information, refer to 303-01F Engine - 5.0L, Vehicles With: Supercharger or
303-01E Engine - 5.0L, Vehicles Without: Supercharger.
- The transmission fluid cooler. For additional information, refer to 307-02B Transmission/Transaxle Cooling -
5.0L/3.0L Diesel.
The primary components of the engine cooling system are the:
Coolant pump.
Thermostat.
Radiator.
Auxiliary radiator (SC (supercharger) vehicles only).
Cooling fan.
Expansion tank.
Engine oil cooler.
Outlet tube and heater manifold.
Connecting hoses and pipes.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Cooling - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item Description
1 Battery
4 Cooling fan
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Cooling Flow Diagram - Supercharger Vehicles
Item Description
1 Heater core
2 Bleed screw
3 RH cylinder head
4 Cylinder block
5 Throttle
6 Engine oil cooler
7 Heater manifold
8 LH cylinder head
9 Expansion tank
11 Thermostat
12 Check valve
13 Coolant pump
14 Radiator
15 Auxiliary radiator
16 Connection with supercharger cooling system
System Operation
When the engine is running, the coolant is circulated around the engine cooling system by the coolant pump. From the coolant
pump, coolant flows through the cylinder heads and the engine oil cooler into the cylinder block and the heater manifold.
In the cylinder block, the coolant flows forwards to the outlet tube. When the coolant is cold, the thermostat is closed and the
coolant flows direct from the outlet tube back to the coolant pump. Once the coolant reaches operating temperature the
thermostat begins to open, to control system temperature, and coolant flows from the outlet tube to the coolant pump via the
radiator and, on SC (supercharger) vehicles, the auxiliary radiator. When the thermostat is open, the coolant flow through the
radiator(s) also generates a coolant flow through the transmission fluid cooler.
From the heater manifold the coolant flows through the electronic throttle and the heater core, in parallel circuits that are
unaffected by the position of the thermostat. From the electronic throttle, the coolant merges with bleed coolant from the
coolant pump and the outlet tube and flows to the expansion tank. From the heater core, the coolant flows back to the inlet of
the coolant pump.
Expansion and contraction of the coolant is accommodated by an air space in the expansion tank and the compliance of the
flexible hoses.
If the coolant level in the expansion tank decreases below a predetermined value, the level sensor connects a ground to the
instrument cluster, which activates the appropriate warning. For additional information, refer to 413-01 Instrument Cluster.
The cooling fan is operated by a fan control module integrated into the cooling fan motor. The fan control module regulates the
voltage, and thus speed, of the cooling fan motor in response to a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ECM (engine
control module).
The cooling fan receives a battery feed and an ignition feed from the EJB (engine junction box). The ignition feed is supplied
from the main relay in the EJB, which is controlled by the ECM.
The ECM calculates the required fan speed from the engine temperature, A/C (air conditioning) system pressure and
transmission fluid temperature. Under hot operating conditions, the fan may continue to operate for 4 minutes after the engine
has been switched off.
COOLANT PUMP
Item Description
1 Inlet connection
2 Pump body
3 Outlet flange to RH cylinder head
4 Outlet to engine oil cooler
5 Outlet flange to LH cylinder head
6 Pulley
7 Bleed pipe connection (containing check valve)
The body of the coolant pump contains an impeller attached to a shaft supported in a bearing assembly. The impeller is driven
by a pulley, pressed on to the front of the shaft, which is driven by the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to
303-05E Accessory Drive - 5.0L, Vehicles Without: Supercharger or 303-05F - 5.0L, Vehicles With: Supercharger.
Two coolant outlet flanges attach the coolant pump to the front of the cylinder heads. A pipe connects a further coolant outlet
to a pipe from the engine oil cooler. A bleed connector is installed in the front of the coolant pump, adjacent to the coolant
inlet connection from the thermostat. A check valve is incorporated into the bleed connection.
THERMOSTAT
Item Description
1 Screw (3 off)
2 Lower body
3 Upper body
4 Thermostat
5 Seal
The thermostat is a multi-stage device located in the coolant pump inlet to provide fast response and control of the engine
outlet temperature.
The thermostat allows rapid engine warm-up by preventing coolant flow through the radiator and by limiting coolant flow
through the cylinder block when the engine is cold. During warm-up and at engines speeds above approximately 1800 rev/min,
a by-pass valve opens to control the coolant flow and pressure, to protect the engine components. When the thermostat
opening reaches 6 mm (0.24 in.), the by-pass flow is shut-off. When the thermostat opening exceeds 6 mm (0.24 in.), the
radiator coolant flow is further controlled up to the point where the thermostat is fully open. At this point maximum radiator
coolant flow is achieved to provide maximum cooling.
On both naturally aspirated and supercharger vehicles, the thermostat begins to open at 88 - 90 °C (190 - 194 °F) and is fully
open at 102 °C (216 °F).
RADIATOR
Radiator (Supercharger Vehicles)
Item Description
1 Locating spigot (2 off)
2 Upper hose connection
3 Supercharger cooling system connection
4 Auxiliary radiator inlet hose connection
5 Support (2 off)
6 Drain plug
7 Lower hose connection
8 Auxiliary radiator outlet hose connection
9 Transmission fluid cooler inlet hose connection
The radiator is a cross flow type with an aluminum core and plastic end tanks. The radiator is part of the cooling module and is
attached to the vehicle by locating spigots and supports integrated into the end tanks. The supports are installed in rubber
bushes located in mounting brackets on the front subframe. The locating spigots are installed in rubber bushes located in
mounting brackets on the front crossmember.
The two end tanks incorporate connections for the upper and lower hoses, the coolant supply hose of the transmission fluid
cooler and, on SC vehicles, the supply and return hoses of the auxiliary radiator. A drain plug is installed in the bottom of the
LH (left-hand) end tank.
AUXILIARY RADIATOR (SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES ONLY)
Item Description
1 Return hose connection
2 Supply hose connection
3 Bottom bracket
4 Top bracket
The auxiliary radiator is connected in parallel with the (main) radiator to increase the engine cooling capacity on SC vehicles.
The auxiliary radiator is installed in an air duct, to the right of the cooling module, which takes cooling air from the RH (right-
hand) grille in the front bumper. Two spigots on the top of the auxiliary radiator provide the coolant supply and return
connections with the main radiator.
COOLING FAN
Item Description
1 Shroud
2 Motor and fan control module
3 Harness
4 Fan
An electric, variable speed cooling fan is installed in a shroud attached to the rear of the radiator. The cooling fan is operated
by a fan control module, integrated into the electric motor, under the control of the ECM. An electrical connector at the RH side
of the shroud provides the interface between the cooling fan harness and the vehicle wiring.
EXPANSION TANK
Item Description
1 Filler cap
2 Vent hose connection
3 Expansion hose connection
4 Level sensor
The expansion tank is installed in the engine compartment, on the LH upper suspension housing.
A filler cap and level sensor are incorporated into the expansion tank. A MAX level marking is molded into the interior of the
tank below the filler cap. Cold fill levels are molded onto the exterior of the tank.
The expansion tank provides the following functions:
Service fill.
Coolant expansion during warm-up.
Air separation during operation.
System pressurization by the filler cap.
The expansion tank has an air space of approximately 0.5 liter (1.06 US pints), above the MAX level, to allow for coolant
expansion.
OUTLET TUBE AND HEATER MANIFOLD
Outlet Tube
Item Description
A Outlet tube on naturally aspirated vehicles
B Outlet tube on supercharger vehicles
1 Bleed hose connection
2 Radiator upper hose connection
3 Cylinder block connections
4 Thermostat hose connection
www.JagDocs.com
Heater Manifold
Item Description
1 Throttle body heater hose connection
2 Heater core supply hose connection
3 RH cylinder head connection
4 Engine coolant temperature sensor
5 LH cylinder head connection
ENGINE COOLANT
The engine coolant is formulated to last for ten years or 240,000 km (150,000 miles). The coolant is silicate free and must not
be mixed with conventional engine coolant.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
Item Description
A 110 V ac version
B 240 V ac version
For vehicle markets subject to very cold climatic conditions, an engine block heater is installed in place of the cylinder block
drain plug. The engine block heater is either a 110 V ac or 240 V ac electric heater element, depending on the market, which
can be connected to a domestic power supply via a connector in the lower center grill of the front bumper.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Cooling V8 5.0L
For a detailed description of the engine cooling system and operation, refer to the relevant description and operation section of
the workshop manual. Engine Cooling, Section - 303-03
WARNING: Moving parts can cause severe injury, keep clear of moving parts, never place your hands or any part of your
body near to moving parts
guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor vehicle
NOTES:
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage
Visual Inspection
Coolant leaks Fuses

Coolant hoses Harnesses
Coolant expansion tank Loose or corroded connector(s)
Radiator Engine coolant temperature sensor
Heater core
Accessory drive belt
Cooling fan
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the symptom chart, alternatively check for
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index
Symptom Chart

Coolant loss Carry out a visual inspection. If there are no obvious leaks, carry out a
Hoses cooling system pressure test. Rectify any leaks as necessary
Hose connections
Radiator
Water pump
Heater core
Gaskets
Engine casting cracks
Engine block core
plugs
Overheating Check the coolant level and condition. Carry out a cooling system pressure
Low/contaminated test. Rectify any leaks as necessary. Check the thermostat and rectify as
coolant necessary. Check the cooling fan operation, make sure the cooling fan
Thermostat rotates freely. Check for obstructions to the air flow over the radiator.
Cooling fan Rectify as necessary
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Restricted air flow
over the radiator
Engine not reaching Check the thermostat operation. Check the cooling fan operation, make
normal temperature Thermostat sure the cooling fan is not seized. Rectify as necessary
Cooling fan
Thermostat
Fan speed module
Engine NOT running. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the PWM circuit for short
Cooling fan is Circuit reference PWM circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
maximum speed - Duty cycle is
implausible
Circuit reference PWM
- Frequency out
of range
- Circuit is open
circuit
- Circuit is short
circuit to power
- Circuit is short
circuit to
ground
Engine IS running. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the IGN circuit for short
Cooling fan is Circuit reference - IGN circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance. Check and install a new EMS
stationary - relay and fuse
- Circuit is open
circuit
Circuit reference - IGN
-
- Circuit is short
circuit to
ground
- EMS fuse
failure
- EMS relay
failure
PINPOINT TEST A :
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK FOR COOLING FAN RELATED DTCS
NOTE: For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer
to section 100-00. Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the
5 digits from the scan tool to the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits
give extra information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check the engine control module for DTCs
2 P0480-00 & P0480 with any other different last 2 digits in the DTC
Are any of the cooling fan related DTCs listed, logged in the engine control module?
Yes
Please refer to section 100-00 and refer to the relevant DTC index and carry out repair procedure
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear all stored diagnostic trouble codes from the
diagnosis menu tab
Proceed to the test step A9 'Cooling fan validation procedure'
No
Proceed to the next step. A2 'Check for other DTCs'
A2: CHECK FOR OTHER DTCS
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check the engine control module for DTCs
Are any other DTCs listed, logged in the engine control module?
Yes
Please refer to section 100-00 and refer to the relevant DTC index and carry out repair procedure
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear all stored diagnostic trouble codes from the
diagnosis menu tab
No
Proceed to the next step. A3 'Cooling fan is operating permanently'
A3: COOLING FAN IS OPERATING PERMANENTLY
1 The cooling fan is operating permanently
Is the customer reported symptom that the cooling fan is operating permanently at maximum speed?
Yes
The cooling fan is operating permanently
Proceed to the test step A5 'Cooling fan is operating permanently'
No
The cooling fan is NOT operating permanently
Proceed to the next step. A4 'Cooling fan is NOT operating'
A4: COOLING FAN IS NOT OPERATING
1 The cooling fan is NOT operating
Is the cooling fan NOT operating?
Yes
The cooling fan is NOT operating
Proceed to the test step A6 'Cooling fan is NOT operating'
No
No fault found. Verify customer concern of cooling fan operation
A5: COOLING FAN IS OPERATING PERMANENTLY
WARNING: Moving parts can cause severe injury, keep clear of moving parts, never place your hands or any part of your
body near to moving parts
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check datalogger signal – Electric Fan PWM Control -
Commanded (0X03F9) -
2 Record the value of the datalogger signal – Electric Fan PWM Control - Commanded (0X03F9) -
Is the value of the datalogger signal – Electric Fan PWM Control - Commanded (0X03F9) -between 5% &
16% whilst the cooling fan is operating?
Yes
The cooling fan should not be rotating in this PWM range
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the following circuit's for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit, high resistanceRefer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the following
connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosionEngine control module,
connector and wiringCircuit reference - ECFC -Cooling fan motor control unit connector and wiringCircuit
reference - VBATT -Circuit reference - IGN -Circuit reference - PWM -Circuit reference - GND -Battery
junction box, connector and wiringEngine junction box, connector and wiringCheck and install a new cooling
fan
No
Proceed to the next step. A6 'Cooling fan is NOT operating'
A6: COOLING FAN IS NOT OPERATING
CAUTION: Ensure hood is closed and there are not any loose objects in front of the vehicle
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system command datalogger signal – Electric Fan PWM
Control - Commanded (0X03F9) -to 30%
Did the cooling fan start rotating?
Yes
Proceed to the next step. A7 'Electric Fan PWM Control'
No
Proceed to the step. A8 'Wiring check'
A7: ELECTRIC FAN PWM CONTROL
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system command datalogger signal – Electric Fan PWM
Control - Commanded (0X03F9) -to 90%
Did the cooling fan rotating speed increase?
Yes
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system disable output state control function for this signal
and allow the cooling fan to stop rotating
No fault found. Verify customer concern of cooling fan operation
Proceed to the test step A9 'Cooling fan validation procedure'
No
Proceed to the step. A8 'Wiring check'
A8: WIRING CHECK
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the following circuit's for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
2 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the following connectors for signs of water ingress, and
pins for damage and/or corrosion
Engine control module, connector and wiring

- Circuit reference - ECFC -
Cooling fan motor control unit connector and wiring
- Circuit reference - VBATT -
- Circuit reference - IGN -
- Circuit reference - PWM -
- Circuit reference - GND -
Battery junction box, connector and wiring
- Megafuses
- Megafuse fixing nuts
Engine junction box
- Megafuse
- Megafuse fixing nuts
- Fuses
- Engine control module relay
Were any circuits or wiring short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance or any
connectors damaged from water ingress, pin damage and/or corrosion?
Yes
Rectify as required
No
Proceed to the next step. A9 'Cooling fan validation procedure'
A9: COOLING FAN VALIDATION PROCEDURE
1 Ensure the hood is closed
2 Allow vehicle to idle
3 Switch ON air conditioning and set to lowest temperature and highest fan speed
4 Allow vehicle to reach operating temperature (approximately 90 degrees C). Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system monitor datalogger signals – Engine Coolant Temperature (0XF405) -and -
Electric Fan PWM Control - Commanded (0X03F9) - as the engine coolant temperature reaches
operating temperature the fan speed should also increase between the values of 9 and 90%
Did the cooling fan rotate at increasing speed as engine coolant temperature increased?
Yes
Return vehicle to customer
No
Contact dealer technical support
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling System Draining
and Vacuum Filling
General Procedures
Draining
and Installation).
2. WARNING: Release the cooling system pressure by slowly

turning the coolant expansion tank cap a quarter of a turn.
Cover the expansion tank cap with a thick cloth to prevent
the possibility of scalding. Failure to follow this instruction
CAUTIONS:
Since injury such as scalding could be caused by

escaping steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle cooling
system is cool prior to carrying out this procedure

4. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping coolant.

5. Torque: 2 Nm
NOTE: Only carry out the following step if the coolant

is to be drained from the engine.
7. NOTE: This step is only required if previously

removed.
Torque: 50 Nm
Filling
and Installation).

3. CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at 50%.
Install the cooling system vacuum refill adaptor to the expansion

tank.
Install the vacuum filler gauge to the cooling system vacuum
refill adaptor.
Install the venturi tube assembly to the vacuum filler gauge.
4. NOTES:
Make sure the coolant supply valve is in the closed position on the
vacuum filler gauge assembly.
The coolant vacuum fill tool needs an air pressure of 6 to 8 bar (87
to 116 psi) to operate correctly.
Small diameter or long airlines may restrict airflow to the coolant

vacuum fill tool.
Connect a regulated compressed air supply to the venturi tube

assembly.
5. Position the evacuated air hose into a container.
6. Open the air supply valve.
7. NOTE: Make sure the coolant supply hose is positioned into a container
of fifty percent mixture of Jaguar Premium Cooling System Fluid or
equivalent, meeting Jaguar specification WSS M97B44-D and fifty
percent water. Make sure no air can enter the coolant supply hose.
Open the coolant supply valve for 2 seconds to prime the coolant supply
hose.
8. Apply air pressure progressively until the arrow on the vacuum filler
gauge reaches the green segment.
9. Disconnect the compressed air supply line.
10. NOTE: Close the coolant supply valve when the coolant expansion
tank MAX mark is reached or coolant movement has ceased.
Open the coolant supply valve and allow the coolant to be drawn into
the system.
11. Remove the vacuum filler gauge and cooling system vacuum refill
adaptor assembly.
12.
13. Set the heater controls to maximum.
14. CAUTION: Observe the engine temperature gauge. If the engine

starts to over-heat switch off immediately and allow to cool. Failure to
follow this instruction may cause damage to the vehicle
Start the engine and idle until hot air is emited at the face registers.
15. Switch the heater off.
16. Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM for eight minutes.
17. CAUTION: Switch off the engine and allow the coolant temperature
to go cold.
Switch the engine off.
18. Visually check the engine and cooling system for signs of coolant
leakage.
19. WARNING: When releasing the cooling system pressure, cover the
coolant expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.
CAUTIONS:
Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or

coolant, make sure the vehicle cooling system is cool prior to carrying
out this procedure
Make sure the coolant level remains above the "COLD FILL RANGE"
lower level mark.
NOTE: When the cooling system is warm, the coolant will be

approximately 10mm above the upper level mark on the expansion tank
with the cap removed.
Check and top-up the coolant if required.

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling System Partial
Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
and Installation).
3. WARNINGS:
Release the cooling system pressure by slowly turning

the coolant expansion tank cap a quarter of a turn. Cover
the expansion tank cap with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding. Failure to follow this instruction may
Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.
CAUTION: Since injury such as scalding could be

caused by escaping steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle
cooling system is cool prior to carrying out this procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 2 Nm
Filling
and Installation).
3.
4. CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at 50%.
Fill the cooling system, keeping coolant to the upper level mark of the
expansion tank until a steady stream of coolant is seen running from the
coolant hose bleed point.
5.
Continue to fill the coolant until the maximum level
is reached.
7. Start engine and increase speed to 2000 rpm for 2 minutes.
8.
Continue to top-up with coolant with engine idling until hot air is
emitted from face vents.
When hot air is emitted from the vents, switch the heater off. Go
to Step 10.
9. If no hot air is emitted, turn the engine off for 10 seconds and the start
the engine and return to Step 7.
10. CAUTION: Correct installation of the Coolant

expansion tank cap can be obtained by tightening the cap
until an audible click is heard.
Continue to fill the coolant until the maximum level is

reached.
12. Raise the engine speed to 2000 rpm for eight minutes.
13. Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
leakage.
CAUTIONS:

out this procedure.
lower level mark.


Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
2. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Center Panel (501-02 Front End Body
Installation).
and Installation).
5. WARNINGS:
Release the cooling system pressure by slowly turning

the coolant expansion tank cap a quarter of a turn. Cover
the expansion tank cap with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding. Failure to follow this instruction may
Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.
CAUTION: Since injury such as scalding could be

caused by escaping steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle
cooling system is cool prior to carrying out this procedure.

9.
www.JagDocs.com
10. Torque: 2 Nm
11. Torque: 50 Nm
12. Carry out the procedure up to step 1 in the filling section three times,
filling the cooling system with clean water at the first two drains. At the
third refill, use a suitable measuring tool to make sure that the cooling
system maintains a 50% mix.
Filling
1.
3.
Fill the cooling system, keeping coolant to the upper level

mark of the expansion tank until a steady stream of coolant
is seen running from the coolant hose bleed point.
5. Continue to fill the coolant until the maximum level is reached.
7. Start engine and increase speed to 2000 rpm for 2 minutes.
8.
Continue to top-up with coolant with engine idling until hot air is
emitted from face vents.
When hot air is emitted from the vents, switch the heater off. Go
to Step 10.
9. If no hot air is emitted, turn the engine off for 10 seconds and the start
the engine and return to Step 7.
10. CAUTION: Correct installation of the Coolant

expansion tank cap can be obtained by tightening the cap
until an audible click is heard.
Continue to fill the coolant until the maximum level is

reached.
12. Raise the engine speed to 2000 rpm for eight minutes.
13. Switch the engine off and allow to cool.

leakage.
CAUTIONS:

out this procedure.
lower level mark.

Check and top-up the coolant system as required when cool.
Installation).
and Installation).
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Auxiliary Radiator
Removal
5. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 5.0L
Petrol (303-03C Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 9 Nm

Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Coolant Expansion Tank
Removal
2. Using a syringe, remove the cooling fluid from the expansion tank.
3. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the

component.
Torque: 7 Nm
4.
prior to removal.
NOTES:
Do not disassemble further if the component is

Make sure that the component is installed to the

position noted on removal.
Installation
2. Fill the cooling system to the upper level mark of the coolant expansion
tank.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling Fan Motor and
Shroud Vehicles With: Supercharger
Removal
and Installation).

www.JagDocs.com
6.
10. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12D Intake Air
Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
11. Refer to: Air Cleaner RH (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and Filtering -
12. Refer to: Air Cleaner LH (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and Filtering -
13. Torque: 9 Nm
14. Torque: 7 Nm
15.
16.
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling Module Vehicles
With: Supercharger
Removal

Procedures).

5. WARNINGS:

coolant, do not remove the filler cap from the coolant expansion tank
while the system is hot.
Be prepared to catch escaping fluid.

Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 S/C
6.
7.
Torque: 8 Nm
Torque: 8 Nm
11. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and
Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
12. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and
Torque: 9 Nm
18.
19.
www.JagDocs.com
20.
21.
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Coolant Pump Vehicles
With: Supercharger
Removal

9. Refer to: Supercharger Belt (303-05, Removal and Installation).
10.
11.
Torque: 40 Nm
12.
13.
WARNING: Fluid loss is unavoidable, use absorbent
14.
CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the paint
finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately remove the coolant
and clean the area with water.
Torque: 11 Nm
prior to removal.
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Radiator Vehicles With:
Supercharger
Removal

4.
5.
6. WARNINGS:

coolant, do not remove the filler cap from the coolant expansion tank
while the system is hot.
Be prepared to catch escaping fluid.
Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 S/C

Torque: 9 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
15. Torque: 7 Nm
16.

18.
20. Torque: 7 Nm
21. NOTE: Support the air conditioning (A/C) condenser.
Torque: 7 Nm

24.
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Thermostat
Housing Vehicles With: Supercharger
Removal



Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger Cooling -
Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Intake manifold assemblies
2 Supply hoses to charge air coolers
3 Charge air radiator
4 Charge air coolant pump
5 Engine cooling system connecting hose
6 Return hoses from charge air coolers
Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger Cooling -
Overview
OVERVIEW
The supercharger cooling system cools the pressurized charge air from the supercharger. The supercharger cooling system
consists of:
A charge air coolant pump.

A charge air radiator.
Two charge air coolers.
Connecting hoses and pipes.
The supercharger cooling system is operationally independent of the engine cooling system, but connected to it by a hose
installed between the charge air radiator and the radiator of the engine cooling system. The connection with the engine cooling
system accommodates thermal expansion and retraction of the coolant in the supercharger cooling system, and enables filling
and draining of the supercharger cooling system.
Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger Cooling - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item Description
1 Battery
Supercharger Cooling Flow Diagram
Item Description
1 RH (right hand) charge air cooler
2 Engine
3 LH (left hand) charge air cooler
4 Expansion hose connection (with engine cooling system)
5 Charge air radiator
System Operation
Electrical power for the charge air coolant pump is supplied from the intercooler water pump relay in the power distribution box.
When the intercooler water pump relay is energized, it connects power from the battery, via the BJB (battery junction box)
and CJB (central junction box), to the charge air coolant pump. Operation of the intercooler water pump relay is controlled by
the ECM (engine control module). The intercooler water pump relay is energized continuously while the ignition is in power
mode 6.
When the charge air coolant pump is running, coolant flows from the pump outlet through the charge air coolers, the charge air
radiator and back to the pump inlet.
CHARGE AIR COOLANT PUMP
Item Description
1 Coolant outlet connection
2 Coolant inlet connection
3 Electrical connector
The charge air coolant pump is an electric pump attached to the RH (right-hand) side of the charge air radiator. Hoses connect
the inlet of the charge air coolant pump to the charge air radiator, and the outlet to the charge air coolers. An electrical
connector provides the interface between the motor of the charge air coolant pump and the vehicle wiring.
www.JagDocs.com
CHARGE AIR RADIATOR
Item Description
1 Pipe clip bracket (2 off)
2 Coolant outlet connection
3 Lower attachment bracket (2 off)
4 Coolant inlet connection
5 Upper attachment bracket (2 off)
6 Expansion hose connection (with engine cooling system)
The charge air radiator is a cross flow type with an aluminum core and plastic end tanks. The charge air radiator is installed in
the cooling module, in front of the A/C (air conditioning) condenser. Brackets on the end tanks attach the charge air radiator to
the front of the engine cooling system radiator.
The RH end tank incorporates the coolant inlet and outlet connections, and a connection for the hose to the engine cooling
system. Hoses connect the inlet of the charge air radiator to the charge air coolers, and the outlet to the charge air coolant
pump.
CHARGE AIR COOLERS

A charge air cooler is installed in each intake manifold.
Refer to: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and
Operation).
Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Radiator
Removal

Torque: 9 Nm

6.


10. Torque: 7 Nm
11.

13.
Torque: 7 Nm
15. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
WARNINGS:
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground the vehicle to earth and maintain the ground connection until
the work is complete.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, make sure the area around the joint faces and connections are
clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
NOTE: Tighten the fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line unions and fuel rail crossover pipe unions as it is instructed
in service manual.

Ignition coil-on-plugs retaining bolts 7 - 62
Spark plugs 20 15 -
Fuel rail retaining bolt Stage 1 - 20 Stage 2 - 30 Stage 1 - 15 Stage 2 - 22 -
Fuel rail crossover pipe unions 21 15 -
Fuel rail crossover pipe retaining bolts 12 9 -
Fuel pressure regulator 33 24 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line unions 21 15 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line M8 bolt 25 18 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line M6 bolt 11 8 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line M5 nut 6 - 53
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line shield M10 bolt 29 21 -
Fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump fuel line shield M6 bolt 11 8 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump torx bolts 12 9 -
Throttle body retaining bolts 10 7 -
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolts 25 18 -
Steering column lower universal joint assembly bolts 35 26 -
Coolant expansion tank retaining bolt 10 7 -
Engine compartment brace retaining bolts 45 33 -
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Charging and Controls
- Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Crossover tube
2 LH (left hand) fuel rail
3 Fuel injector (8 off)
4 HP (high pressure) fuel lines
5 HP fuel pumps and covers
6 RH (right hand) fuel rail
7 FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor
8 LP (low pressure) fuel lines
- Overview
OVERVIEW
The fuel charging and controls system is a gasoline DI (direct injection) system controlled by the ECM (engine control module).
The fuel charging and controls system consists of:
LP and HP fuel lines.

Two HP fuel pumps.
Two fuel rails and a crossover tube.
A FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor.
Eight fuel injectors.
LP fuel from the pump in the fuel tank is pressurized by the HP fuel pumps and supplied to the fuel injectors via the fuel rails
and crossover tube. The ECM controls the fuel injectors and HP fuel pumps to inject the required volume of fuel into the
combustion chambers.
- System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item Description
1 Battery
4 No. 1 HP fuel pump
5 No. 2 HP fuel pump
6 Fuel injectors
7 ECM
8 FRP sensor
System Operation
GENERAL
The ECM (engine control module) controls the output from the HP fuel pumps to deliver the required volume of fuel at
pressures up to 150 bar (2175 lbf/in2).
The ECM uses the signal from the FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor to calculate the time the fuel injectors need to be energized
to deliver the correct mass of fuel to the combustion chambers.
LOW AND HIGH PRESSURE FUEL LINES
Item Description
A LP fuel lines
B HP fuel lines
1 Acoustic cover
2 Heat reflective and insulation sleeves
The LP fuel line connects the HP fuel pumps to the fuel delivery line from the fuel tank and lines system. A quick release
connector at the start of the LP fuel line is held in a clip integrated into the LH (left-hand) ignition coils cover. P-clips secure
the LP fuel line to the rear of each cylinder head and to the RH (right-hand) side of the cylinder block. A heat reflective and
insulation sleeves are installed on the LP fuel line where it runs behind the RH exhaust manifold.
The HP fuel lines connect the HP fuel pumps to the RH fuel rail and the crossover tube. Two P-clips and a pipe clamp attach
the HP fuel lines to the cylinder block and the RH cylinder head respectively. An integral bracket on the front HP fuel line is
attached to a stud on the front-upper RH timing cover. An acoustic cover is installed on the bottom of the front HP fuel line.
HIGH PRESSURE FUEL PUMPS
Item Description
1 Crankshaft
2 Auxiliary drive chain
3 Auxiliary camshaft
4 Tappet
5 HP fuel pump
6 Acoustic cover
The two HP fuel pumps are identical mechanically-driven pumps installed on the RH side of the sump body, behind the
generator. An O-ring seals each of the HP fuel pumps in the sump body. The rear HP fuel pump is identified as No. 1 pump; the
front HP fuel pump is identified as No. 2 pump. An acoustic cover is installed on each of the HP fuel pumps.
The HP fuel pumps are single-plunger pumps. The plunger of each pump extends through the sump body and the carrier of the
auxiliary camshaft. A tappet on the end each plunger is operated by a two-lobe cam on the auxiliary camshaft. A spring
installed on the outside of the plunger ensures the plunger and tappet remain in contact with the cam.
The auxiliary camshaft is driven by the crankshaft, via the auxiliary drive chain, at engine speed. The auxiliary camshaft is
timed to match the pump delivery strokes with crankshaft position.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 PRV (pressure relief valve)
2 To HP fuel lines
3 Check valve
4 Plunger
5 From LP fuel lines
6 Damper chamber
7 Fuel metering valve
In addition to the plunger, each HP fuel pump contains:
A damper chamber.
A fuel metering valve.
A check valve.
A PRV.
The damper absorbs pressure pulses from the plunger when the fuel metering valve is open at the start of the delivery stroke.
The fuel metering valve regulates the output pressure from the HP fuel pump. The fuel metering valve is a normally open
solenoid valve controlled by the ECM. During the inlet stroke of the plunger the fuel metering valve is de-energized, which
allows LP fuel into the pumping chamber. The ECM energizes the fuel metering valve closed during the delivery stroke of the
plunger, which forces the fuel in the pumping chamber through the check valve into the HP lines. By changing the closing point
of the fuel metering valve, the ECM can determine the volume of fuel output during the delivery stroke, and thus the pressure
in the HP side of the system.
The check valve prevents the return of HP fuel to the pumping chamber during the inlet stroke of the plunger.
The PRV protects the HP side of the system from excessive pressure if there is a failure of the fuel metering valve. If the pump
delivery pressure increases to 195 - 204 bar (2828 - 2959 lbf/in2), the PRV opens and returns fuel to the inlet side of the
plunger.
FUEL RAILS AND CROSSOVER TUBE
Item Description
1 LH fuel rail
2 Crossover tube
3 RH fuel rail
4 FRP sensor
The fuel rails and crossover tube are made from stainless steel. Bolts attach each fuel rail to the related cylinder head. The
crossover tube connects the front high pressure line to the LH fuel rail, which ensures there is equal pressure in the two fuel
rails. Four P-clips attach the crossover tube to the intercooler-tank top.
The rear of the RH fuel rail incorporates a threaded boss for installation of the FRP sensor.
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
The FRP sensor provides the ECM with a continuous signal of fuel rail pressure. The FRP sensor is installed in the rear of the
RH fuel rail. The FRP sensor is screwed into a threaded boss in the fuel rail. A flying lead and three pin connector provides the
interface with the engine harness.
The FRP sensor contains a steel diaphragm fitted with strain gages, which are incorporated into a Wheatstone bridge. The
output from the Wheatstone bridge is processed by the ECM to derive a pressure value.
FUEL INJECTORS
The fuel injectors spray fuel from the fuel rail directly into the combustion chambers. The fuel injectors are installed close to
the center of the combustion chambers, between the inlet and exhaust valves and next to the spark plug.
The fuel injectors are a push fit in the fuel rails and the cylinder heads. On each fuel injector, a rubber O-ring seals the head of
the fuel injector in the fuel rail. A teflon ring seals the nozzle of the fuel injector in the cylinder head. A clamp locks each fuel
injector to the fuel rail.
Each fuel injector contains a solenoid-operated needle valve, which opens when the solenoid winding is energized. While the
needle valve is open, fuel is sprayed into the combustion chamber. The solenoid winding is connected to a power feed and a
ground from the ECM, which operates the fuel injectors with a two stage power supply. Initially the ECM supplies the fuel
injectors with 65 V, then once the boost current reaches 11 A the power supply is switched to battery voltage. The ECM meters
the amount of fuel injected into the combustion chambers by adjusting the time that the solenoid winding is energized.
There are six holes around the tip of the nozzle through which the fuel is sprayed. Two of the holes direct fuel below the spark
plug. The other four holes direct fuel evenly around the remainder of the combustion chamber.
If a fuel injector fails, the engine will suffer from unstable idle speed, poor NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) and poor
emissions performance.
Principles of Operation
For a detailed description of the fuel charging and controls system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to:
Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04D Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04E Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04E Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04E Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
Fuel level Fuses

Fuel leaks Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Damaged fuel lines Harnesses
Damaged push connect fittings Sensor(s)
Fuel contamination/grade/quality Engine Control Module (ECM)
Throttle body
Damaged fuel tank filler pipe cap
Damaged fuel tank filler pipe
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart

Engine cranks, but does not Ensure the engine breather system is free from restriction
fire Engine breather system and is correctly installed. Check for ignition system, fuel
disconnected/restricted system and electronic engine control DTCs and refer to the
Ignition system relevant DTC Index
Fuel system
Electronic engine control
Engine cranks and fires, but Check for evaporative emissions, fuel system and ignition
will not start Evaporative emissions purge system related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
valve
Fuel pump
Spark plugs
HT short to ground (tracking)
check rubber boots for
cracks/damage
Ignition system
Difficult cold start Check the engine coolant level and condition. Ensure the
Engine coolant level/anti- battery is in a fully charged and serviceable condition.
freeze content Check for electronic engine controls, engine emissions, fuel
Battery system and evaporative emissions system related DTCs
Electronic engine controls and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) valve stuck open
Fuel pump
www.JagDocs.com
Purge valve
Difficult hot start Check for injector leak, install new injector as required.
Injector leak Check for electronic engine controls, evaporative emissions,
Electronic engine control fuel system, ignition system and engine emission system
Purge valve related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Fuel pump
Ignition system
EGR valve stuck open
Difficult to start after hot Check for injector leak, install new injector as required.
soak (vehicle standing, Injector leak Check for electronic engine controls, evaporative emissions,
engine off, after engine has Electronic engine control fuel system, ignition system and engine emission system
reached operating Purge valve related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
temperature) Fuel pump
Ignition system
Engine stalls soon after start Ensure the engine breather system is free from restriction
Breather system and is correctly installed. Check for electronic engine
disconnected/restricted control, ignition system and fuel system related DTCs and
ECM relay refer to the relevant DTC Index. Check for blockage in air
Electronic engine control filter element and air intake system. Check for air leakage
Ignition system in air intake system
Air intake system restricted
Air leakage
Fuel lines
Engine hesitates/poor Check for fuel system related DTCs and refer to the
acceleration Fuel pressure, fuel pump, relevant DTC Index. Check for injector leak, install new
fuel lines injector as required. Check for air leakage in air intake
Injector leak system. Ensure accelerator pedal is free from restriction.
Air leakage Check for electronic engine controls, ignition, engine
Electronic engine control emission system and transmission related DTCs and refer
Throttle motor to the relevant DTC Index
Restricted accelerator pedal
travel (carpet, etc)
Ignition system
Transmission malfunction
Engine backfires Check for fuel system failures. Check for air leakage in
Fuel pump/lines intake air system. Check for electronic engine controls,
Air leakage ignition system and VCT system related DTCs and refer to
Electronic engine controls the relevant DTC Index
Ignition system
Sticking variable camshaft
timing (VCT) hub
Engine surges Check for fuel system failures. Check for electronic engine
Fuel pump/lines controls, throttle system and ignition system related DTCs
Throttle motor
Ignition system
Engine detonates/knocks Check for fuel system failures. Check for air leakage in
Fuel pump/lines intake air system. Check for electronic engine controls and
Air leakage VCT system related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Electronic engine controls Index
Sticking VCT hub
No throttle response Check for electronic engine controls and throttle system
Electronic engine controls related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Throttle motor
Poor throttle response Ensure the engine breather system is free from restriction
disconnected/restricted controls, transmission and traction control related DTCs and
Electronic engine control refer to the related DTC Index. Check for air leakage in
Transmission malfunction intake air system
Traction control event Air
leakage
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Engine Control Module (ECM), please refer to Section
303-14.
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing) /
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injection Component
Cleaning
General Procedures
General Equipment
Pneumatic vacuum gun
Cleaning
WARNINGS:
Do not carry out any repairs to the fuel system with the engine running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek immediate medical attention.
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined area and arrange ' No Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the vehicle.
Wash hands thoroughly after fuel handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors
are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Before using the cleaning fluid, protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that all parts removed from the vehicle are placed on the lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that clean non-plated tools are used. Clean tools using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, prior to
starting work on the vehicle.
Use a steel topped workbench and cover it with clean, lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible. Foreign
matter from work on clutches, brakes or from machining or welding operations can contaminate the fuel system and may result
in later malfunction.
1. Using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, brush the components
being removed and the surrounding area.
2. Using a pneumatic vacuum gun, remove all traces of foreign material.
General Equipment: Pneumatic vacuum gun

Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injectors
Removal
Installation
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1450
Spark Plug Remover/Installer
310-197
Remover, Fuel Injector
310-198
Installer, Teflon Seal
310-199
Re-shape Tool, Teflon Seal
310-200-01
Fuel Rail Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
310-200-02
Fuel Rail Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that tools and equipment are clean, free of foreign material and lubricant.
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions (100-00
General Information, Description and Operation).
Procedures).
3. Refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (310-00 Fuel
4. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
5. Refer to: Fuel Injection Component Cleaning (303-04D Fuel Charging and Controls - V8
7.
www.JagDocs.com
10. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8
11. CAUTIONS:
Be
prepared to
collect
escaping
fluids.
Make
sure that all
openings
are sealed.
Use new
blanking
caps.
12.
13.
14. NOTE: RH shown LH similar.
15. CAUTION: Make a note of the fuel injector clamp alignment to the fuel
rail prior to removal.
16. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the special tool is located correctly to the fuel injector
prior to removing the fuel injector.
Make sure that the special tool is held square to the fuel injector
during removal.
Make sure that all open ports are covered to prevent any foreign
material ingress.
17. CAUTION: If the fuel injector is being removed without a new

component being installed, the fuel injector clamp must remain with the
fuel injector it is removed with.
18. CAUTIONS:
Do not use a knife to remove the Teflon seal as damage could occur to
the fuel injector.
Do not cut the Teflon seal to deep as damage could occur to the fuel
injector.
Pinch the Teflon seal to allow the tool to cut the Teflon seal without
damaging the fuel injector.
19. CAUTION: Do not use any sharp tools to remove the O-ring seal as
damage could occur to the fuel injector.
Installation
1. Install new O-ring seals.
2. Install new Teflon seals.

4. CAUTION: If the original fuel injector is being installed, the original

fuel injector clamp must installed with the fuel injector it was removed
with.
5. CAUTION: If a new cylinder head has been installed then the special
tool 310-200-02 without the thread must be used to install the fuel rail.
Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
www.JagDocs.com
6. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the area around the open fuel injector ports are clean
and free of foreign material and lubricant prior to installing the fuel injector.
When Installing the fuel injector(s), make sure that the Teflon seal is
clean and free of foreign material and lubricant.
7. CAUTIONS:
If new fuel injectors are installed, a new injector clamp must be

installed
Make sure that the fuel injector is aligned and installed into the fuel
rail correctly, as noted in the removal step.
Tighten the fuel rail retaining bolts a turn at a time until the correct
torque is achieved.
NOTE: Lubricate the fuel injector O-ring seals with clean engine oil.
Torque: 20 Nm
8. Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
9. Torque: 20 Nm
10. NOTE: Tighten in the sequence indicated.
Torque:
Bolt 2 30 Nm
Bolt 3 30 Nm
Bolt 1 30 Nm
Bolt 4 30 Nm
11. NOTE: RH shown LH similar.

Torque: 20 Nm
12. Torque: 7 Nm
13.
14. NOTES:
Lubricate
the union
threads with
clean engine
oil.
Do not
tighten at
this stage.
Remove and
discard the
blanking
caps.
15. Torque:
union 21
Nm
bolts 8
Nm
16. Torque: 21 Nm
18.
19.
20.
21.
22. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Procedures).
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1450
Spark Plug Remover/Installer
310-197
Remover, Fuel Injector
310-198
Installer, Teflon Seal
310-199
Re-shape Tool, Teflon Seal
310-200-01
Fuel Rail Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
310-200-02
Fuel Rail Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
1. Refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions (100-00
Procedures).
4. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
7.
10. CAUTIONS:
Be
prepared to
collect
escaping
fluids.
Make
sure that all
openings are
sealed. Use
new blanking
caps.
11.
12. CAUTIONS:

16. CAUTIONS:

18.
19. NOTE: LH shown RH similar.

22. CAUTION: Make a note of the fuel injector alignment to the fuel rail
prior to removal.
NOTE: LH shown RH similar.
23. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the special tool is located correctly to the fuel injector
prior to removing the fuel injector.
Make sure that the special tool is held square to the fuel injector
during removal.
material ingress.
24. CAUTION: If the fuel injector is being removed without a new

component being installed, the fuel injector clamp must remain with the fuel
injector it is removed with.
www.JagDocs.com
25. CAUTIONS:
Do not use a knife to remove the Teflon seal as damage could occur to
the fuel injector.
Do not cut the Teflon seal to deep as damage could occur to the fuel
injector.
Pinch the Teflon seal to allow the tool to cut the Teflon seal without
damaging the fuel injector.
26. CAUTION: Do not use any sharp tools to remove the O-ring seal as
damage could occur to the fuel injector.
Installation
1. Install new O-ring seals.

2. Install new Teflon seals.
4. CAUTION: If the original fuel injector is being installed, the original

fuel injector clamp must installed with the fuel injector it was removed with.
5. CAUTION: If a new cylinder head has been installed then the special tool
310-200-02 without the thread must be used to install the fuel rail.
Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
6. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the area around the open fuel injector ports are clean
and free of foreign material and lubricant prior to installing the fuel injector.
When Installing the fuel injector(s), make sure that the Teflon seal is
clean and free of foreign material and lubricant.
7. CAUTIONS:
If new fuel injectors are installed, a new injector clamp must be

installed
Make sure that the fuel injector is aligned and installed into the fuel
rail correctly, as noted in the removal step.
Tighten the fuel rail retaining bolts a turn at a time until the correct
torque is achieved.
NOTE: Lubricate the fuel injector O-ring seals with clean engine oil.
Torque: 20 Nm
Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02

Torque: 20 Nm
10. NOTES:
LH shown RH similar.
Tighten in the sequence indicated.
Torque:
Bolt 2 30 Nm
Bolt 3 30 Nm
Bolt 1 30 Nm
Bolt 4 30 Nm
11.

Torque: 20 Nm
Torque: 7 Nm
15. CAUTION: Lubricate only the union threads with clean engine oil.
NOTES:
Engine shown removed for clarity.
www.JagDocs.com
17. NOTES:
Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm

24.
25. NOTES:
Lubricate the
union threads
with clean
engine oil.
Do not
tighten at
this stage.
Remove
and discard
the blanking
caps.
26. Torque:
Unions 21
Nm
Bolts 8
Nm
27. Torque: 21 Nm
29.
30.
31.
32. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Procedures).
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Left-Hand Fuel Rail High-Pressure
Fuel Pump
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions
2. Refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (310-00
Fuel System - General Information, General Procedures).
3. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
4. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5. Refer to: Engine Cover - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (501-05 Interior Trim and
6. Refer to: Fuel Injection Component Cleaning (303-04E Fuel Charging and Controls -
V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
8.
www.JagDocs.com
10. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and Filtering -
11. CAUTIONS:
Be
prepared
to collect
escaping
fluids.
Make
sure that
all
openings
are sealed.
Use new
blanking
caps.
12.
13. CAUTIONS:
15. Refer to: Engine Mount RH (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
16. Refer to: Generator - V8 5.0L Petrol (414-02C Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L
17.
20. CAUTIONS:
Remove and discard the high-pressure fuel supply lines.

21. CAUTIONS:
22.
Loosen the Torx screws a turn each at a time.

Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump bucket with
clean engine oil.
2. CAUTION: Tighten the Torx screws a turn at a time until the

correct torque is achieved.
NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump O-ring seal
with clean engine oil.
Torque: 12 Nm
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTION: Install new high-pressure fuel supply lines.
NOTES:
Install the bolt and unions fully finger tight before final
tightening.

clarity.
Torque: 12 Nm
8. NOTES:

Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm
12. NOTES:
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
13. Torque: 21 Nm
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
16. Torque: 25 Nm
18. Refer to: Engine Mount RH (303-01D, In-vehicle Repair).
20.
21. NOTES:
Lubricate
the
union
threads
with
clean
engine
oil.
Do
not
tighten
at this
stage.
Remove
and
discard
the
blanking
caps.
22. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
24.
www.JagDocs.com
25.
26.
30. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Right-Hand Fuel Rail High-Pressure
Fuel Pump
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles
1. Refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions
2. Refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (310-00
Fuel System - General Information, General Procedures).
6. Refer to: Fuel Injection Component Cleaning (303-04E Fuel Charging and Controls -
V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).

8.
11. CAUTIONS:
Be
prepared
to collect
escaping
fluids.
Make
sure that
all
openings
are sealed.
Use new
blanking
caps.
12.
13. CAUTIONS:
Installation).
17.
18.
All vehicles
19.
www.JagDocs.com
22. CAUTIONS:
Remove and discard the high-pressure fuel supply lines.

23. CAUTIONS:
24.

Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump bucket with
clean engine oil.
2. CAUTION: Tighten on both sides simultaneously.
Torque: 12 Nm
4.
5. CAUTION: Install new high-pressure fuel supply lines.
NOTES:
Install the bolt and unions fully finger tight before final
tightening.

clarity.
Torque: 12 Nm
8. NOTES:

Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
12. NOTES:
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
13. Torque: 21 Nm
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
16. Torque: 25 Nm
17. Torque: 100 Nm

18. Torque: 35 Nm
All vehicles
Installation).
22.
23. NOTES:
Lubricate
the
union
threads
with
clean
engine
oil.
Do
not
tighten
at this
stage.
Remove
and
discard
the
blanking
caps.
24. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
26.
27.
28.
32. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Throttle Body
Removal

3. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03E,
5. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe (303-12E, Removal and Installation).
6.
7.
8.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
10.
11. Torque: 10 Nm
12. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care when removing the throttle body,

failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the manifold absolute pressure and temperature (MAPT)
sensor.
Do not attempt to clean the throttle body bore, build

up of deposits reduces air leakage past the throttle plate at
the fully closed position.
Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -

Accessory drive belt tensioner retaining bolt 40 30 -
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolt - all vehicles 40 30 -
Accessory drive belt center idler pulley retaining bolt - vehicles without supercharger 25 19 -
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolt to tensioner bracket - vehicles with supercharger 40 30 -
Supercharger belt tensioner bracket retaining bolt 25 19 -
Supercharger belt tensioner retaining bolt 40 30 -
Supercharger belt 76mm idler pulley retaining bolt 40 30 -
Supercharger belt 90mm idler pulley retaining bolt 56 41 -
Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Accessory Drive - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
A Primary accessory drive
B Secondary accessory drive
1 Coolant pump
3 Primary drive belt
4 A/C (air conditioning) compressor
5 Belt tensioner
6 Crankshaft pulley/torsional vibration damper
7 Idler pulley
8 Generator
9 Idler pulley
10 Supercharger
11 Idler pulley
12 Belt tensioner
13 Secondary drive belt
14 Idler pulley
www.JagDocs.com
Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Accessory Drive - Overview
OVERVIEW
The accessory drive is a belt system powered by a pulley attached to the front of the crankshaft. The crankshaft pulley, which
incorporates a torsional vibration damper, drives two drive belts. An automatic belt tensioner in each belt run maintains the
drive belt at the correct tension. Together with idler pulleys, the belt tensioners also guide the drive belts clear of obstructions
and set the correct 'wrap-around' of the accessory component drive pulleys to ensure a slip-free drive.
PRIMARY DRIVE BELT

The primary drive belt is a six-ribbed poly-V belt that drives the:
Coolant pump
Power steering pump
A/C (air conditioning) compressor
Generator.
SECONDARY DRIVE BELT

The secondary drive belt is an eight-ribbed poly-V belt that drives the SC (supercharger).
BELT TENSIONERS
Each belt tensioner consists of an idler pulley on the end of a spring loaded pivot arm. The pivot arms can be turned manually
for removal and installation of the drive belts.
Each belt tensioners is calibrated to automatically maintain the correct tension in the related drive belt.
Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Accessory Drive Belt
Removal
Installation).
5. Torque: 55 Nm
6. Torque: 25 Nm
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the accessory drive belt is correctly

aligned to the pulleys. Failure to follow this instruction may
Clean and inspect the accessory drive belt pulleys for

damage.
NOTES:

Installation

Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Removal
5. Torque: 25 Nm
6. Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the accessory belt is correctly aligned to the pulleys.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Clean and inspect the accessory drive belt pulleys for damage.
www.JagDocs.com
Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Removal
5. Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the accessory belt is correctly aligned to the pulleys.


Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger Belt Idler Pulley
Removal
4. NOTES:
5. Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the supercharger belt is correctly aligned to the

pulleys. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.

Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger Belt Tensioner
Removal
4.
5. Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the supercharger belt is correctly aligned to the pulleys.


Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -

Starter motor retaining bolts 47 35 -
Battery positive terminal connector retaining nut 10 7 -
Solenoid terminal connector retaining nut 7 - 62
www.JagDocs.com
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Starting System -
Component Location
NOTE: Installation on supercharged engine shown, installation on naturally aspirated engine similar.
COMPONENT LOCATION
Overview
OVERVIEW
The starter motor is manufactured by Denso and is rated at 1.8 kW. The motor is geared directly to the pinion. The motor is a
series wound motor with an overrunning clutch. The interior of the motor is ventilated through a breather tube attached to the
underside of the motor housing.
The starter motor is located on the rear right side of the engine sump body. The motor is installed in an aperture in the sump
body and the pinion is engaged with the ring gear of the crankshaft drive plate. A ground cable for the starter motor is
connected to one of the starter motor securing points.
A heat shield is attached to the starter motor, at the point closest to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter.
A heavy duty cable, which supplies the electrical power to turn the starter motor, is connected to the battery positive terminal
via the BJB (battery junction box). At the starter motor, the cable is connected to a terminal stud on the solenoid. The power
feed from the starter relay, to energize the solenoid, is connected to a second terminal stud on the solenoid.
Starter Motor Assembly
Item Description
1 Bolt (2 off)
2 Heat shield
3 Starter solenoid
4 Solenoid power terminal
5 Pinion gear
6 Starter power terminal
7 Electric motor
8 Breather tube
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Starter motor
3 EJB (starter relay)
4 ECM
5 BJB (250 A megafuse)
6 BJB (400 A megafuse)
System Operation
GENERAL
Engine crank requests are monitored by the passive anti-theft system and, if valid, passed on to the ECM (engine control
module).
Refer to: Anti-Theft - Passive (419-01B Anti-Theft - Passive, Description and Operation).
When the ECM receives a crank request, it energizes the starter relay in the EJB (engine junction box). The energized starter
relay supplies 12 V power (fed via the 250 A megafuse in the BJB (battery junction box)) to energize the pull-in coil of the
starter solenoid. Once activated, the pull-in coil engages the solenoid plunger, which engages the pinion with the ring gear.
The plunger then closes the solenoid circuit, feeding power from the 400 A megafuse in the BJB to the starter motor.
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Starting System
For a detailed description of the starting system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: (303-06C Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol)
Starting System (Description and Operation),

Starting System (Description and Operation),
Starting System (Description and Operation).
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
Gear selector lever cable adjustment (vehicles with automatic Battery

transmission) Fuses
Starter motor Starter relay
Engine (turns freely) Wiring harness(es)
Damaged, loose or corroded
connectors
Ignition switch
Generator
the next step.
Symptom Chart

The engine does Make sure the gear selector is in the P or N position and correctly
not crank (starter Gear selector not in P or N adjusted. Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check for
motor does not position (vehicles with DTCs indicating an immobilizer fault. Check the starter motor relay,
turn) automatic transmission) ignition switch and generator circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Battery Check for TCM and ECM DTCs. Check that the engine turns freely.
Starter relay
Invalid key code received by
Harness/Connectors
Starter motor
Ignition switch
Generator
Transmission Control Module
(TCM)
Engine seized
The engine does Check the starter motor installation (fasteners tight, starter motor
not crank (starter Starter motor installation square to engine, etc). Check the flywheel/drive plate ring gear teeth
motor does turn) Starter motor for damage, foreign objects, etc.
Flywheel/Drive plate ring
gear
www.JagDocs.com
Engine cranks too Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check the starter
slowly Battery motor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the engine oil
Harness/Connectors grade and condition.
Starter motor
Oil grade
Engine cranks too Check the engine compressions.

fast Low engine compression
Excessive starter Check the starter motor installation (fasteners tight, motor square to
motor noise Starter motor engine, etc). Check the starter motor casing condition. Check the
Flywheel/Drive plate ring flywheel/drive plate ring gear teeth for damage, foreign objects, etc.
gear
Starter motor
installation/casing
DTC Index
303-14. REFER to:
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Starting
System Vehicles With: Smart Key
For a detailed description of the starting system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual.

Visual Inspection
Steering column Fuses

Brake pedal Harnesses and connectors
Smart key Warning lamp operation
Steering Wheel Smart key operation
Engine start operation
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) and refer to the DTC Index.
5. Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSM's which may be valid for the specific
CAUTIONS:
3548-1358-00
NOTES:
Symptom Chart
Symptom - Message Displayed Symptom - Possible Cause Action
Smart key not found - Refer to handbook Ignition mode fails to switch on GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Symptom - Message Displayed Symptom - Possible Cause Action
Ignition mode fails to switch on GO to Pinpoint Test B.
NOTE: Back up start - 10MY onwards
Smart key not found - Refer to handbook

Press start and brake Engine fails to crank GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Steering column locked Ignition switches off after 3 seconds GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Ambient temperatures below zero GO to Pinpoint Test E.
NOTE: For diesel engines
Engine still not cranking
Pin Point Test
PINPOINT TEST A : SMART KEY NOT FOUND - REFER TO HANDBOOK
CONDITIONS
A1: IGNITION MODE FAILS TO SWITCH ON
NOTES:
In normal operation, pressing the start button for one second will cause the vehicle to enter the ignition mode. If the
procedures below are followed the engine should crank
For automatic transmission vehicles, ensure the brake pedal is depressed and the park or neutral selected
1 Ensure the smart Key is within the cabin area. Check the smart key is not close to any electrical devices
e.g. Smart phones, laptops, laptop cases, games consoles and game console bags, briefcases, metal
objects etc. All can affect the system performance and may block its communication with the vehicle. If
the smart key battery low warning message has been displayed it is likely that the smart key battery has
insufficient charge. Refer to section 'Back Up Start' for 10MY onwards
Has the vehicle started?
Yes
No further action required
No
Check and install a new battery as required. Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, contact
dealer technical support
PINPOINT TEST B : BACK UP START - 10MY ONWARDS - SMART KEY NOT FOUND - REFER TO HANDBOOK
CONDITIONS
B1: IGNITION MODE FAILS TO SWITCH ON
NOTES:
In normal operation, pressing the start button for one second will cause the vehicle to enter the ignition mode. If the
procedures below are followed the engine should crank
1 On pressing the start button, smart key not found. When this warning is displayed the smart key should
be brought into close proximity with the immobilize antenna unit. Hold the key in the location and press
the start button again. If this process fails the first time, try repositioning the key around the immobilize
antenna unit location, repeat the sequence again
Has the vehicle started?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : PRESS START AND BRAKE - (MESSAGE DISPLAYED)
CONDITIONS
C1: ENGINE FAILS TO CRANK
NOTES:
Conditions for starting in addition to pressing the start button are

PINPOINT TEST D : STEERING COLUMN LOCKED - (MESSAGE DISPLAYED)
CONDITIONS
D1: IGNITION SWITCHES OFF AFTER 3 SECONDS
NOTES:
Conditions for starting in addition to pressing the start button are
If the engine can be heard to crank there is no fault with the smart key
If the locking pin is still engaged, turn the steering wheel to overcome the side load
Start authorisation defined as Ignition functions, Steering column lock engagement, Engine immobilize and smart key
authorisation
1 Unlock the vehicle using the key fob, within 3 minutes of unlocking ensure the steering wheel can rotate
freely. Perform a further lock and unlock check and attempt to start vehicle. If the steering 'column locked'
message is still displayed, Lock the vehicle with the key fob and ensure the column is locked (If
installed) by turning the steering wheel. Then unlock the vehicle ensuring the column Steering wheel can
turn freely. Now perform another start attempt
Did the engine start?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST E : ENGINE STILL NOT CRANKING
CONDITIONS
E1: AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW ZERO
1 Hold the start button down for at least 4 seconds while starting the vehicle
2 Switch the ignition on, the passive anti theft system (PATS) LED should now be illuminated. Start the
engine, the PATS LED should switch off after 3 seconds
Did the engine start?
Yes
No
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Starter Motor
Removal
Installation).
4. Torque: 6 Nm
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the protective cover is

correctly installed over the electrical connector.
Torque: 12 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
6. Torque: 7 Nm
7. Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Item Specification
Firing order 1:2:7:3:4:5:6:8
Spark plug type - Vehicles with supercharger ILKAR6C-10
Spark plug type - Vehicles without supercharger ILKAR6C-10

Spark plugs 20 15 -
Ignition coil-on-plug retaining bolts 7 5 -
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Ignition -
Component Location
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) naturally aspirated installation shown; other installations similar.
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 RFI (radio frequency interference) suppressor
3 Spark plug (8 off)
4 Ignition coil (8 off)
Overview
OVERVIEW
The engine ignition system is a coil-on-plug, single spark system controlled by the ECM (engine control module). An iridium
tipped spark plug is installed in each combustion chamber, between the inlet and exhaust valves, and an ignition coil is
installed on each spark plug. A RFI (radio frequency interference) suppressor is connected to the power feed to the ignition
coils.
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item Description
1 Battery
3 EJB (engine junction box (ignition relay))
5 RFI suppressor
6 LH (left hand) cylinder bank ignition coil (4 off)
7 RH (right hand) cylinder bank ignition coil (4 off)
8 ECM
System Operation
GENERAL
The ignition coils are supplied with electrical power from the battery via a 250 A megafuse in the BJB (battery junction box)
and the ignition relay in the EJB (engine junction box). The control signal for the ignition relay is supplied by the CJB (central
junction box).
The ECM (engine control module) sends a separate signal to each ignition coil to trigger the power stage switching. The ECM
calculates the dwell time from the battery voltage and engine speed, to ensure a constant energy level is produced in the
secondary coil each time the power stage is switched. This ensures sufficient spark energy is available without excessive
primary current flow, which avoids overheating and damage to the ignition coils.
The ECM calculates the ignition timing for individual cylinders from:
Engine speed
Camshaft position
Engine load
Engine temperature
The knock control function
The shift control function
The idle speed control function.
IGNITION COILS
The ignition coils are installed in the cylinder head covers, under the NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) covers. Each
ignition coil locates on a spark plug and is secured to the related cylinder head cover with a single screw. Each ignition coil
incorporates a three pin electrical connector for connection to the engine harness.
Each ignition coil contains a primary and a secondary winding. The primary winding receives electrical power from the ignition
relay in the power distribution box. A power stage in the primary winding allows the ECM to interrupt the power supply, to
induce a voltage in the secondary winding and thus the spark plug. A diode in the ground side of the secondary winding
reduces any undesirable switch-on voltage, to prevent misfiring into the intake manifold. The power stage limits the maximum
voltage and current in the primary winding, to protect the power stage and limit the voltage in the secondary winding.
www.JagDocs.com
RFI SUPPRESSOR
The RFI suppressor is installed on the engine harness carrier at the rear of the engine.
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Ignition
For a detailed description of the engine ignition system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
of the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-07B Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol)
Engine Ignition (Description and Operation),

Engine Ignition (Description and Operation),
Engine Ignition (Description and Operation).
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
Engine oil level Fuses

Cooling system coolant level Wiring harness
Fuel level Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Fuel contamination/grade/quality Ignition coils
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valves Sensor(s)
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Engine cranks, but does not Ensure the engine breather system is free from restriction
fire Engine breather system and is correctly installed. Check for ignition system, fuel
disconnected/restricted system and electronic engine control DTCs and refer to the
Fuel system
Engine cranks and fires, but Check for evaporative emissions, fuel system and ignition
will not start Evaporative emissions purge system related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
valve
Fuel pump
Spark plugs
cracks/damage
Ignition system
Difficult cold start Check the engine coolant level and condition. Ensure the
Engine coolant level/anti- battery is in a fully charged and serviceable condition.
freeze content Check for electronic engine controls, engine emissions, fuel
Battery system and evaporative emissions system related DTCs
Fuel pump
Purge valve
Difficult hot start Check for injector leak, install new injector as required.
Injector leak Check for electronic engine controls, evaporative emissions,
Electronic engine control fuel system, ignition system and engine emission system
Purge valve related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Fuel pump
Ignition system
Difficult to start after hot Check for injector leak, install new injector as required.
soak (vehicle standing, Injector leak Check for electronic engine controls, evaporative emissions,
engine off, after engine has Electronic engine control fuel system, ignition system and engine emission system
reached operating Purge valve related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
temperature) Fuel pump
Ignition system
Engine stalls soon after start Ensure the engine breather system is free from restriction
disconnected/restricted control, ignition system and fuel system related DTCs and
ECM relay refer to the relevant DTC Index. Check for blockage in air
Electronic engine control filter element and air intake system. Check for air leakage
Ignition system in air intake system
Air intake system restricted
Air leakage
Fuel lines
Engine hesitates/poor Check for fuel system related DTCs and refer to the
acceleration Fuel pressure, fuel pump, relevant DTC Index. Check for injector leak, install new
fuel lines injector as required. Check for air leakage in air intake
Injector leak system. Ensure accelerator pedal is free from restriction.
Air leakage Check for electronic engine controls, ignition, engine
Electronic engine control emission system and transmission related DTCs and refer
Throttle motor to the relevant DTC Index
Restricted accelerator pedal
travel (carpet, etc)
Ignition system
Engine backfires Check for fuel system failures. Check for air leakage in
Fuel pump/lines intake air system. Check for electronic engine controls,
Air leakage ignition system and VCT system related DTCs and refer to
Electronic engine controls the relevant DTC Index
Ignition system
Sticking variable camshaft
timing (VCT) hub
Engine surges Check for fuel system failures. Check for electronic engine
Fuel pump/lines controls, throttle system and ignition system related DTCs
Throttle motor
Ignition system
Engine detonates/knocks Check for fuel system failures. Check for air leakage in
Fuel pump/lines intake air system. Check for electronic engine controls and
Air leakage VCT system related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Electronic engine controls Index
Sticking VCT hub
No throttle response Check for electronic engine controls and throttle system
Electronic engine controls related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Throttle motor
Poor throttle response Ensure the engine breather system is free from restriction
disconnected/restricted controls, transmission and traction control related DTCs and
Electronic engine control refer to the related DTC Index. Check for air leakage in
Transmission malfunction intake air system
leakage
DTC Index
303-14. REFER to:
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Ignition Coil-On-Plug V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01, General Procedures).
2. Refer to: Engine Cover - 5.0L, Vehicles With: Supercharger (501-05,

3. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH - 5.0L/3.0L Diesel (501-02,

4. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
5.
www.JagDocs.com
6. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Engine Emission Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Emission
Control - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES
Item Description
1 Part load breather
2 Full load breather
www.JagDocs.com
Control - Overview
OVERVIEW
The engine emission control system reduces the level of hydrocarbon emissions released to atmosphere from the engine. The
engine emission control system consists of a PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) system with part and full load breathers.
Piston blow-by gases are drawn through the breathers into the engine air intake and added to the air charge. The resultant
depression in the engine sump, front covers and cylinder head covers reduces the load on the joint seals in those areas.
PART LOAD BREATHER
Item Description
1 Flexible hose
2 Baffle plate
3 Oil drain
4 PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) valves
5 Oil separator
The part load breather comprises an oil separator, two PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) valves and a flexible hose. The oil
separator and the PCV valves are installed in the top of the RH (right-hand) cylinder head cover. The flexible hose connects the
RH cylinder head cover to the inlet of the SC (supercharger).
The oil separator is installed in a channel in the top of the cylinder head cover. A baffle plate, which incorporates a gas inlet
and an oil drain, is installed over the channel. The two PCV valves are installed on the outside of the cylinder head cover and
connected in parallel in the gas outlet from the channel to the flexible hose. The PCV valves prevent reverse flow into the
cylinder head cover when there is minimal depression in the inlet of the SC.
FULL LOAD BREATHER
Item Description
1 Flexible hose
2 Two-way valve
3 Oil drain
4 Baffle plate
5 Oil separator
The full load breather consists of an oil separator, a two-way valve and a flexible hose. The oil separator and the two-way valve
are installed in the top of the LH (left-hand) cylinder head cover. The flexible hose connects the LH cylinder head cover to the LH
air duct of the intake air distribution and filtering system.
The oil separator is installed in a channel in the top of the cylinder head cover. A baffle plate, which incorporates a gas inlet
and an oil drain, is installed over the channel. The two-way valve is installed in the gas outlet from the channel. The two-way
valve prevents reverse flow into the cylinder head cover when there is minimal depression in the air duct.
Control
For a detailed description of the engine emission control system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-08C Engine Emission Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol)
Engine Emission Control (Description and Operation),

Engine Emission Control (Description and Operation),
Engine Emission Control (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Exhaust gas recirculation system Fuses

Breather hoses Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Positive crankcase ventilation valve Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve
Fuel level Engine Control Module (ECM)
Fuel contamination/grade/quality
Throttle body
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Difficult to For battery information, CKP sensor, fuel system and purge valve tests,
start cold Battery refer to relevant workshop manual section. Check the EGR valve.
Crankshaft Position (CKP)
sensor
Fuel system
Evaporative emissions purge
valve
Engine stalls Check the engine breather hoses, PCV, etc. Check the Engine Control
soon after Breather system Module (ECM) relay operation. For MAF sensor, ignition system tests, air
start disconnected/restricted intake and fuel line information, refer to relevant workshop manual
Engine Control Module (ECM) section.
relay
MAF sensor
Ignition system
Air filter restricted
Air leakage
Fuel lines
Poor throttle For APP, TP, ECT, MAF sensor tests, intake system checks and
response APP sensor malfunction transmission information, refer to relevant workshop manual section.
TP sensors Check the breather system hoses, PCV, etc.
ECT sensor
MAF sensor
leakage
Breather system
disconnected/restricted
DTC Index
303-14. REFER to:
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -

Air cleaner retaining bolts 8 - 71
Supercharger retaining bolts 25 18 -
Charge air cooler lower assembly retaining bolts 20 15 -
Throttle body retaining studs 10 7 -
Charge air cooler top assembly retaining bolts 25 18 -
Manifold absolute pressure and temperature (MAPT) sensor 5 - 44
Coolant outlet pipe 11 8 -
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Intake Air
Distribution and Filtering - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Supercharger and intake manifold
2 Noise feedback system
3 Air intakes, air cleaners and air ducts
www.JagDocs.com
Distribution and Filtering - Overview
OVERVIEW
The intake air distribution and filtering system comprises:
Dual air intakes, air cleaners and air ducts.

A SC (supercharger) and intake manifolds.
A noise feedback system.
Distribution and Filtering - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item Description
1 Battery
3 EJB (engine junction box) (EMS high current relay)
4 Tuning valve
System Operation
SUPERCHARGER
At closed or partially open throttle positions, the bypass valve is fully open, allowing a flow of air from the SC (supercharger)
outlet back to the inlet side. This results in little or no pressure increase across the SC. Progressive opening of the throttle
reduces the depression downstream of the electric throttle. This is sensed by the pneumatic actuator, which moves to close
the bypass valve. As the bypass valve closes there is a corresponding increase in the outlet pressure from the SC, which
increases engine power output.
NOISE FEEDBACK SYSTEM

Sound waves from the RH (right-hand) intake manifold are filtered by the calibrated orifice in the inlet pipe connection on the
symposer. The sound waves make the paddle oscillate and generate pulsations in the outlet chambers. When the pneumatic
valve is open, the pulsations are transmitted through the outlet pipe and feedback tube to the resonator in the passenger
compartment.
The tuning valve of the noise feedback system receives a power feed from the power distribution box and is connected to
ground through the ECM (engine control module). At lower engine loads and speeds the ECM keeps the ground open circuit and
the tuning valve is de-energized closed. Atmospheric pressure is sensed at the pneumatic valve through the vent cap on the
tuning valve, which keeps the pneumatic valve closed and prevents sound from the symposer entering the feedback system.
At higher engine loads and speeds the ECM connects the tuning valve to ground. The tuning valve energizes, blanks off the
atmospheric vent and opens the vacuum line between the brake vacuum system and the pneumatic valve. The depression in
the brake vacuum system is sensed at the pneumatic valve, which opens and allows sound from the symposer into the
feedback system.
The status of the pneumatic valve at various engine loads and speeds is given below:
Pneumatic Valve Status
NOTE: Values are for valve opening with increasing engine load and speed. Deduct 0.05 g/rev and 50 rev/min for valve
closing with decreasing engine load and speed.
Engine Speed: rev/min

Engine Load: g/rev 0 500 1000 2500 3000 4000 5800 6500
1.30 Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed
1.35 Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed
1.40 Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Open
2.50 Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Open Open Open
3.00 Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Open Open Open
3.50 Closed Closed Closed Open Open Open Open Open
AIR INTAKES, AIR CLEANERS AND AIR DUCTS
Item Description
1 Throttle T-piece duct
2 Hose clamp
3 Quarter wave resonator
4 Full load breather connector stub
5 LH (left hand) air cleaner outlet tube
6 Hose clamp
7 LH air cleaner
8 LH air cleaner lower intake duct
9 LH air cleaner center intake duct
10 Hose clamp
11 LH air cleaner intake scoop
13 RH air cleaner support intake duct
14 RH (right hand) air cleaner intake scoop
15 RH air cleaner center intake duct
16 RH air cleaner lower intake duct
17 RH air cleaner
18 Hose clamp
19 RH air cleaner outlet tube
21 Hose clamp
22 Mounting grommet and bracket
23 Bypass valve actuator connector stub
Air intake scoops and ducts supply air from behind the front crossmember to the air cleaners. The air intake scoops, ducts and
air cleaner are locked together by latches and matching recesses molded into the mating joint faces.
The air cleaners are located in the forward corners of the engine compartment, on the fender front aprons. Each air cleaner is
located on the related fender front apron and front side member by two supports, and secured to a bracket at the top of the
fender front apron by a bolt and grommet.
Each air cleaner consists of an air cleaner element installed in a tray and enclosed with a cover secured by seven screws. Air
inlet and outlet connections are incorporated into the tray and cover respectively. The bottom of the tray incorporates a drain
hole to prevent the accumulation of water in the air cleaner. The air outlet connection incorporates a MAFT (mass air flow and
temperature) sensor.
Air Cleaner
Item Description
1 Cover
2 Screw (7 off)
3 Air cleaner element
4 Tray
5 Bolt
6 Grommet
7 Support
www.JagDocs.com
8 Bump stop
9 Support
10 Inlet connection
11 Outlet connection
12 MAFT sensor
The outlet tubes and T-piece duct direct the air from the air cleaners to the electric throttle. Hose clamps connect the outlet
tubes and T-piece duct together, and to the air cleaners and the electric throttle. A grommet and bracket attached the T-piece
duct to a bracket on the RH cylinder head.
The two outlet tubes and the T-piece duct each incorporate a quarter wave resonator to reduce air induction noise.
The LH (left-hand) outlet tube incorporates a connector stub for the engine full load breather pipe.
The T-piece duct incorporates a connector stub for the vacuum tube of the bypass valve actuator on the supercharger.
SUPERCHARGER AND INTAKE MANIFOLDS

The SC increases the pressure, and thus mass, of the air supplied to the engine, to increase the engine's power output. Two
separate intake manifolds direct air from the SC to the cylinder inlet ports.
The intake manifolds are attached to their related cylinder heads and the sides of the SC. Two dowels locate the SC in position
on the cylinder block. A charge air cooler tank top is installed on top of the SC and intake manifolds to form the air duct from
the SC outlet to the intake manifolds. A charge air cooler is installed in each intake manifold.
The charge air cooler tank top incorporates four studs for the attachment of the engine cover. A NVH (noise, vibration and
harshness) pad is attached to the side of each intake manifold.
Supercharger and Intake Manifolds - Assembled
Item Description
1 Engine cover rear attachment points
2 Vacuum connector stub
3 MAPT (manifold absolute pressure and temperature) sensor
4 SC filler/level plug
5 Symposer inlet pipe connection
6 Dowels
7 Engine cover front attachment points
8 EVAP (evaporative emissions) connector stub
9 Part load breather connector stub
10 MAP (manifold absolute pressure ) sensor
11 Bypass valve pneumatic actuator
12 Outlet ports
13 Inlet port
14 Pulley
15 Coolant inlet and outlet connections
Supercharger and Intake Manifolds - Exploded
Item Description
1 M08 x 35 mm screw (19 off)
3 Charge air cooler tank top
4 Gasket
5 LH charge air cooler
8 M08 x 30 mm crew (3 off)
9 LH intake manifold
10 Gasket
11 N.H. (noise vibration and harshness) pad
12 M08 x 50 mm screw
13 Bypass valve
14 SC
15 Gasket
16 RH intake manifold
17 M08 x 30 mm crew (3 off)
19 N.H. pad
22 RH charge air cooler
Supercharger
The SC is a Roots blower with high angle helix rotors driven at 2.1 x engine speed by the secondary belt of the accessory drive.
The two rotors of the SC are contained in a housing. The ends of the rotors are supported in bearings in the front cover and
the bearing plate. A rear cover seals the bearing plate and incorporates a filler/level plug for lubricant. A pulley transfers power
from the accessory drive to the shaft of one of the rotors.
A pneumatic actuator on the front cover is attached to a by-pass valve in the housing. The bypass valve regulates a flow of air
from the outlet of the SC back to the inlet side of the rotors, to control the outlet pressure of the SC. Hoses connect the
pneumatic actuator to the throttle T-piece of the air ducts, upstream of the electric throttle, and to the front cover, downstream
of the electric throttle. A lever connects the actuating rod of the pneumatic actuator to the shaft of the bypass
valve. A screw in the front cover limits movement of the lever in the closed direction to allow calibration of the SC output.
The front cover also incorporates:
The SC air inlet and mounting face for the electric throttle.
A connector stub for the part load breather.
A MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor.
A connector stub for a hose from the EVAP (evaporative emission) canister purge valve.
Intake Manifolds
Each intake manifold is attached to the SC with three screws and a bolt. Two dowels ensure correct alignment of each intake
manifold. The RHD (right-hand drive) intake manifold incorporates a connection port for the noise feedback system. The LH
intake manifold incorporates:
A connector stub for the brake vacuum system.

A MAPT (manifold absolute pressure and temperature) sensor.
NOISE FEEDBACK SYSTEM
Item Description
1 Outlet adapter
2 Clip
3 Feedback tube
4 Clip
5 Hose seal
6 Resonator
7 Vacuum hose - tuning valve to pneumatic actuator
8 Inlet pipe
9 Pneumatic valve
10 Symposer
11 Vacuum hose - tuning valve to brake vacuum system
12 Grommet assembly
13 Tuning valve
14 Outlet pipe
www.JagDocs.com
The noise feedback system generates a sporty, powerful engine sound in the passenger compartment, at high engine load and
speed settings, to enhance the driving experience. The noise feedback system consists of a symposer system, a feedback tube
and a resonator. Activation of the noise feedback system is controlled by the ECM.
Symposer System
The symposer system modifies induction sound waves of a specific frequency range, at given engine settings, to produce the
required engine sound. The symposer system consists of:
An inlet pipe and flange.

A symposer and pneumatic valve assembly. A
tuning valve and associated vacuum tubes.
An outlet pipe.
An outlet adapter.
The inlet pipe and flange transfer induction noise from the RH intake manifold to the symposer. The pipe is a push fit on the
symposer and the flange, which is attached to the rear face of the RH intake manifold.
The symposer contains two pairs of chambers, one pair on the inlet side and one pair on the outlet side. The inlet pipe
connects to one of the chambers on the inlet side of the symposer, and the pneumatic valve connects to one of the chambers
on the outlet side of the symposer. A calibrated orifice in the inlet pipe connection on the symposer limits the range of sound
waves that pass through it. A 'paddle' installed in a diaphragm forms the separating wall in each pair of chambers. The paddle
is able to pivot about its lateral axis where it passes through the wall that separates the two pairs of chambers.
Symposer
Item Description
1 Diaphragm
2 Paddle
3 Isolator
4 Inlet chamber (sealed)
5 Outlet chamber (open to pneumatic valve)
6 Screw (8 off)
7 Pneumatic valve
8 Outlet chamber
9 Inlet chamber (open to inlet pipe)
10 Inlet pipe connection
The pneumatic valve controls the flow of sound from the symposer outlet. It is a normally-closed valve connected directly to
the outlet of the symposer and operated by vacuum pressure. Two isolators, one on the pneumatic valve and one on the
symposer, locate the assembly on a bracket attached to the SC rear cover.
The tuning valve controls the application of vacuum pressure to the pneumatic valve. Two screws attach the tuning valve to the
same bracket as the symposer and pneumatic valve. The tuning valve is a normally-closed solenoid-operated valve installed in
the vacuum line between a T-connection in the brake vacuum system and the pneumatic valve. A vent cap on the tuning valve
allows atmospheric pressure into the vacuum line to the pneumatic valve when the tuning valve is closed.
The outlet pipe carries sound from the pneumatic valve to the feedback tube via the outlet adapter. The outlet pipe is a push
fit on the pneumatic valve and in the outlet adapter. A screw attaches the outlet adapter to an engine harness bracket
installed between the two intake manifolds.
Feedback Tube
The feedback tube transfers the sound from the symposer system to the resonator. Clips secure the feedback tube to the
outlet adapter of the symposer system and to the resonator.
Resonator
The resonator directs the sound from the feedback tube into the passenger compartment. The resonator is installed in the
passenger compartment side of the engine bulkhead, on two mounting grommets each consisting of an isolator and a
compression limiter. A hose seal isolates the resonator where it passes through the secondary bulkhead.
Distribution and Filtering
For a detailed description of the intake air distribution and filtering system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol)
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (Description and Operation),

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (Description and Operation),
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Hoses and ducts (damage/connections) Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor

Air cleaner element (contaminated/blocked) Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
Restricted air intake Manifold Absolute Pressure/Temperature (MAPT) sensor
Supercharger Throttle body
Supercharger (cooling fan) drive belt Harness (security/damage)
Supercharger seals and gaskets Connections (security/damage)
Charge air coolers (damage/connection)
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Vehicle does not Clear the restriction. Replace the air cleaner element as necessary.
start/hard Restricted/Blocked air intake Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
starting/poor Restricted/Blocked air
performance cleaner element
Excessive intake Check the intake system and hoses for correct installation/damage.
noise Intake pipe Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
disconnected/damaged after
the air cleaner
Air cleaner assembly
incorrectly
assembled/damaged
Lack of boost Check the supercharger and drive belt. Check the charge air coolers.
Supercharger drive belt Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
broken/slipping
Supercharger fault
Supercharger air intake fault
Major air leakage (after the
supercharger)
Noise Check the supercharger and drive belt. Remove the supercharger drive
Supercharger drive belt belt and recheck for noise. Turn the supercharger by hand and check
slipping for excessive resistance. Check for excessive play at the supercharger
Supercharger fault pulley. Check the charge air coolers. Refer to the relevant workshop
Major air leakage (after the manual section.
supercharger)
DTC Index
303-14.
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing).
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner
Element
Removal
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner LH
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4. Torque: 8 Nm
5. NOTES:



7. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations
may occur, but the essential information is always
correct.
Installation

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner RH
Removal
1.
2.
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Torque: 8 Nm
5. NOTES:


6. NOTES:


7. NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may occur,

Installation

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner Outlet
Pipe LH
Removal
1.
Installation

Pipe RH
Removal
1.
Installation

Pipe T-Connector
Removal
2. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Charge Air Cooler
Removal
Procedures).
4. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Center Panel (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
6. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
(303-03C Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
8. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential
Torque: 25 Nm
9.
10.
11.
13.
14.
15. WARNINGS:
Do not
smoke or
carry lighted
tobacco or
open flame
of any type
when
working on
or near any
fuel related
components.
Highly
flammable
vapors are
always
present and
may ignite.
Failure to
follow these
instructions
may result
in personal
injury.
Do not
smoke or
carry lighted
tobacco or
open flame
of any type
when
working on
or near any
fuel related
components.
Highly
flammable
vapors are
always
present and
may ignite.
Failure to
follow these
instructions
may result
in personal
injury.
CAUTIONS:
Make
sure that
the fuel line
union does
not rotate.
Be
prepared to
collect
escaping
fluids.
Make
sure that all
openings are
sealed. Use
new blanking
caps.
16. Torque: 10 Nm
17. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential
18. Torque: 10 Nm
19. Torque: 10 Nm
20.
21. NOTES:
Install and lightly tighten bolts in sequence illustrated.
Complete the tightening sequence.
Remove and discard the gasket.
Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
2.
WARNING:
Do not
smoke or
carry lighted
tobacco or
open flame
of any type
when
working on
or near any
fuel related
components.
Highly
flammable
vapors are
always
present and
may ignite.
Failure to
follow these
instructions
may result
in personal
injury.
NOTES:
Lubricate
only the
union
threads with
clean engine
oil.
Do not
tighten at
this stage.
Remove and
discard the
blanking
caps.
3.
WARNING:
Do not
smoke or
carry lighted
tobacco or
open flame
of any type
when working
on or near
any fuel
related
components.
Highly
flammable
vapors are
always
present and
may ignite.
Failure to
follow these
instructions
may result in
personal
injury.
Torque:
Union 21
Nm
M6 12
Nm
4. WARNINGS:
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when
working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors
are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually for
leaks. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Torque: 21 Nm
Published: 30-Jan-2014
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger
Special Tool(s)
303-1449-01
Supercharger Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
303-1449-02
Supercharger Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
CAUTION: If a new cylinder head has been installed, then new taptite bolts must be used to install the supercharger.
NOTES:
New taptite bolts when used cut their own threads on the first application.

3. Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
- V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4. Refer to: Throttle Body (303-04E Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C
5. Refer to: Supercharger Belt (303-05 Accessory Drive - 5.0L, Removal and
Installation).
6. Refer to: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (303-14D Electronic

Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
7.
8.
9.
10. Discard the gaskets.

12.
www.JagDocs.com
13.
14.
Installation
1. CAUTION: If a new cylinder head has been installed, then new

taptite bolts must be used to install the supercharger.
NOTE: New taptite bolts when used cut their own threads on the
first application.
2. Torque: 25 Nm
3. Torque: 25 Nm
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.
CAUTIONS:
If a new cylinder head has been installed then

the special tool 303-1449-02 without the thread
must be used to install the supercharger.
If a new cylinder head has been installed, then

new taptite bolts must be used to install the
supercharger.
NOTE: New taptite bolts when used cut their

own threads on the first application.
Special Tool(s): 303-1449-01, 303-1449-02

Install new gaskets.

Special Tool(s): 303-1449-01, 303-1449-02

Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 25 Nm
11.
12.
13. Refer to: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (303-14D Electronic
Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
14. Refer to: Supercharger Belt (303-05 Accessory Drive - 5.0L, Removal and
Installation).
15. Refer to: Throttle Body (303-04E Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C
16. Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
- V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger
Spring Isolator
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that all open ports are covered to prevent any foreign material ingress.

3.
4. NOTES:
Note the orientation prior to removal.
Hoses must be cut off to prevent damage to the

actuator.
5.
6.
7.
8. CAUTION: Make sure the actuator arm is rotated to
allow the front cover to be removed. Failure to follow this
9. CAUTION: Make sure that all open ports are covered to

prevent any foreign material ingress.
10.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

2. CAUTION: Apply a continuous bead of gasket sealant

as shown on the illustration. The application of the sealant
must be 1mm diameter. Install the component immediately
after applying the sealant without smearing the sealant.
3.
4.
5. Torque: 27 Nm
6. NOTE: Loosen the adjustment screw.

7.
1. Using light pressure rotate the arm counter clockwise
and hold.
2. Tighten the adjustment screw until no gap is visible.
8.
9. Torque: 5 Nm
10. Assemble the installation tool, supplied, to the actuator.
www.JagDocs.com
11. Torque: 20 Nm
12. Remove the installation tool.
13. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that spring resistance is felt in both directions of the

pulley as shown.
material ingress.
NOTE: Supercharger rotors will appear polished, this is normal.

14. CAUTION: Make sure the components are installed as
noted on removal. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the component.
15. Torque: 25 Nm
Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Evaporative emission canister retaining nut 9 - 80
www.JagDocs.com
Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Evaporative
Emissions - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION (ALL EXCEPT NORTH AMERICAN SPECIFICATION)
Item Description
NOTE: System on supercharger vehicle shown, system on naturally aspirated vehicle similar.
1 EVAP (evaporative emissions) canister
2 Vapor pipe - fuel tank to EVAP canister
3 Vapor pipe - EVAP canister to EVAP canister purge valve
4 EVAP canister purge valve
COMPONENT LOCATION (NORTH AMERICAN SPECIFICATION)
Item Description
NOTE: System on naturally aspirated vehicle shown, system on supercharger vehicle similar.
1 EVAP canister
2 Vapor pipe (filler head communication) - fuel tank to filler pipe
3 DMTL (diagnostic module - tank leakage) filter
4 Atmospheric vent pipe - DMTL pump to filter
5 DMTL pump
6 Vapor pipe - EVAP canister to EVAP canister purge valve
7 Vapor pipe - fuel tank to EVAP canister
8 EVAP canister purge valve
Emissions - Overview
OVERVIEW
The EVAP (evaporative emission) system reduces the level of hydrocarbons released into the atmosphere by fuel vapor venting
from the fuel tank. The system comprises of an EVAP canister, an EVAP purge valve, interconnecting vapor pipes and, on NAS
vehicles, a DMTL pump and filter. The vapor pipes are connected to the system components using quick release connectors.
Fuel vapor is generated by the fuel in the tank and the amount of vapor produced increases as the fuel heats up. Fuel vapor
can flow freely to the EVAP canister via the tank venting system.
On NAS vehicles the vapor generated in the fuel tank during refueling flows without restriction to the EVAP canister.
On all vehicles except NAS, the vapor is restricted in its path to the EVAP canister, but can flow freely during the refueling
operation to atmosphere via the fuel filler pipe opening.
The vapor passes into the EVAP canister where it is absorbed and stored by the charcoal. Because there is a limit to the
amount of vapor the canister can contain, the fuel vapor is purged from the canister when the engine is running and burned in
the engine.
Emissions - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
DIAGNOSTIC MODULE - TANK LEAKAGE PUMP (NAS ONLY)
To check the fuel tank and the EVAP (evaporative emission) system for leaks, the ECM (engine control module) operates the
DMTL pump and monitors the current draw. Initially, the ECM establishes a reference current by pumping air through the
reference orifice and back to atmosphere. Once the reference current is determined, the ECM closes the change-over valve,
which seals the EVAP system. The EVAP canister purge valve remains de-energized and is therefore closed. The output from
the air pump is diverted from the reference orifice and into the EVAP system.
When the change-over valve is closed, the load on the air pump falls to zero. Providing there are no leaks, the air pump will
begin to pressurize the EVAP system and the load and current draw in the pump increases. By monitoring the rate and level of
the current increase, the ECM can determine if there is a leak in the EVAP system.
During normal vehicle operation, 15 seconds after the engine has started, the ECM energizes the heating element in the pump
to prevent condensation formation and possible incorrect readings. The heater remains energized until either the engine and
ignition are off (if no DMTL test is running) or until after the DMTL test is completed.
Leaks are classified as:
Minor - equivalent to a hole diameter of 0.5 to 1.0 mm (0.02 to 0.04 in.).

Major - equivalent to a hole diameter of 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) or greater.
The ECM performs a check for major leaks each time the ignition is switched off, providing the following conditions are met:
The vehicle speed is zero.

The engine speed is zero.
The atmospheric pressure is above 70 kPa (10.15 lbf/in2), i.e. the altitude is less than approximately 3047 m (10000
feet).
The ambient temperature is between 0 and 40 °C (32 and 104 °F).
The EVAP canister vapor concentration factor is 5 or less (where 0 is no fuel vapor, 1 is stoichiometric fuel vapor and
greater than 1 is rich fuel vapor).
The fuel tank level is valid and between 15 and 85% of nominal capacity.
The engine running time during the previous cycle was more than 10 minutes.
The battery voltage is between 10 and 15 volts.
The last engine off time was more than 180 minutes.
No errors are detected with the EVAP components, the ambient air temperature and the fuel level.
NOTE: A leak test can be performed using a Jaguar recognized diagnostic tool. This overrides the above conditions and is
useful for checking correct system and component operation.
The ECM performs a check for minor leaks after every 2nd major leak check.
When the leak check is complete, the ECM stops the DMTL pump and opens (de-energizes) the change-over valve.
If the fuel filler cap is opened or refueling is detected during the leak check, by a sudden drop in the current draw or a rise in
the fuel level, the ECM aborts the leak check.
If a leak is detected during the check, the ECM stores an appropriate fault code in its memory. If a leak is detected on two
consecutive checks, the ECM illuminates the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) in the instrument cluster on the next drive cycle.
The duration of a leak check can be between 60 and 900 seconds depending on the results and fuel tank level.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE

The ECM waits until the engine is running above 55 °C (131 °F) coolant temperature with closed loop fuel operational before
the purging process is activated. Under these conditions the engine should be running smoothly with no warm up enrichment.
The EVAP canister purge valve duty (and flow) is initially ramped slowly because the vapor concentration is unknown (a sudden
increase in purge could cause unstable engine running or cause it to stall due to an extremely "rich" air/fuel mixture). The
concentration is then determined from the amount of adjustment that the closed loop fueling is required to make to achieve
the target AFR (air fuel ratio). Once the concentration has been determined, the purge flow can be increased rapidly and the
injected fuel can be pro-actively adjusted to compensate for the known purge vapor and the target AIR control is maintained.
When the purging process is active, fresh air is drawn into the EVAP canister via the DMTL filter and pump on NAS vehicles, or
via the vent port on the EVAP canister of non NAS vehicles.
DIAGNOSTIC MODULE - TANK LEAKAGE PUMP (NAS ONLY)
The DMTL (diagnostic module - tank leakage) pump periodically checks the EVAP system and the fuel tank for leaks when the
ignition is switched off. The DMTL system comprises the previously described components of the EVAP system with the
following additional components; a DMTL pump and a DMTL filter.
The DMTL pump is connected to the atmospheric vent of the EVAP canister and incorporates an electric air pump, a PTC
(positive temperature coefficient) heating element, a normally open change-over valve and a reference orifice. The DMTL pump
is only operated when the ignition is switched off and is controlled by the ECM. The ECM also monitors the electric air pump
operation and the change-over valve for faults.
The DMTL filter protects the pump from dust being drawn into the system when the pump is being operated. The filter is
located on the fuel filler head and is connected to the DMTL pump by a vapor pipe.
The DMTL test is performed after the engine has stopped following a run of 10 minutes or more, providing that the vehicle fuel
tank is between 15 and 85% full, the ambient temperature is above 0 °C (32 °F) and less than 40 °C (104 °F) and the vehicle
was not started for at least 180 minutes prior to this run.
The DMTL pump is driven to pressurize the fuel tank and the current is measured with the change-over valve in different
states.
A comparison of the current draw in each state indicates the degree of any leak, and the ECM then sets the appropriate DTC
(diagnostic trouble code).
www.JagDocs.com
EVAP CANISTER
EVAP Canister (All Except NAS)
Item Description
1 FPDM (fuel pump driver module) mounting bracket
2 Atmospheric vent
3 Connector for vapor pipe to EVAP canister purge valve
4 Connector for vapor pipe from fuel tank
EVAP Canister (NAS)
Item Description
1 FPDM mounting bracket
2 Connector for DMTL pump
3 DMTL pump bracket
4 Connector for vapor pipe to EVAP canister purge valve
5 Connector for vapor pipe from fuel tank
The EVAP canister is located immediately behind the fuel tank. Two nuts attach the EVAP canister to the underside of the
center floor pan.
The EVAP canister contains a bed of activated charcoal or carbon. The charcoal is produced using special manufacturing
techniques to treat the charcoal with oxygen. The oxygen treatment opens up millions of pores between the carbon atoms
resulting in a highly porous charcoal with a very large effective surface area which is capable of absorbing large quantities of
fuel vapor. Once treated the charcoal is known as 'activated' carbon or charcoal. The EVAP canister on NAS vehicles uses a
higher grade of charcoal to meet the stricter emissions' regulations.
A mounting bracket on the RH (right-hand) end of the EVAP canister contains the FPDM (fuel pump driver module). For
additional information, refer to 310-01D Fuel Tank and Lines.
On all except NAS vehicles, the EVAP canister has a capacity of 1400 cc (85.4 in.3). Two connectors on the EVAP canister allow
for the attachment of the vapor pipe from the fuel tank and the vapor pipe to the EVAP canister purge valve. An atmospheric
vent is located on the underside of the EVAP canister.
On NAS vehicles, the EVAP canister has a capacity of 3000 cc (183 in.3). Three connectors on the EVAP canister allow for the
attachment of the vapor pipe from the fuel tank, the vapor pipe to the EVAP canister purge valve and the DMTL pump.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
The EVAP canister purge valve is located on the LH (left-hand) side of the engine, below the ignition coils cover. A vapor pipe
is routed from the EVAP canister purge valve to the inlet of the intake manifold (naturally aspirated vehicles) or the
supercharger (supercharged vehicles). The EVAP canister purge valve is controlled by the ECM and is operated when engine
operating conditions are correct to allow purging of the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge valve is a solenoid operated
valve which is closed when de-energized.
A vapor pipe, which runs parallel with the fuel delivery line under the LH side of the vehicle, connects the EVAP canister purge
valve to the EVAP canister.
The EVAP canister purge valve is operated at 10 Hz by a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ECM. At this high
frequency, the pulses of fuel vapor flow into the intake manifold/supercharger in an almost continuous flow. The valve operates
between 7% and 100% duty or mark space ratio (percentage open time).
Atmospheric pressure is higher than the pressure at the inlet of the intake manifold/supercharger under all throttle settings
and engine running conditions. It is this pressure differential that causes air to flow through the EVAP system to the engine.
Emissions
For a detailed description of the Evaporative Emissions system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
Visual Inspection
Fuel filler cap and seal Fuses

Fuel filler neck Wiring harnesses and connectors
Fuel pipes Engine Control Module (ECM)
Fuel tank Purge valve
Evaporative emissions canister
Purge valve
the next step
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index
5. Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
Symptom Chart

Difficulty in filling
fuel tank Restriction in the vapour line between the fuel tank and the Check for
carbon canister outlet/atmospheric port restrictions/damage
Fuel smell
System leak Check for leaks
Purge valve inoperative Check the purge valve
operation
DTC Index
Emission Canister
Removal
1. Refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety
Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).

Installation).
4.
5. Torque: 9 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Emission Canister Purge Valve V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
2. Refer to: Engine Cover - 5.0L, Vehicles With: Supercharger (501-05,

Installation).


Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor(s) retaining bolt 10 7 -
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor retaining bolt 10 7 -
Heated oxygen sensor(s) (HO2S) 48 35 -
Catalyst monitor sensor(s) 48 35 -
Knock sensor(s) (KS) retaining bolt 20 15 -
Fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor 32 24 -
Manifold absolute pressure and temperature (MAPT) sensor 5 - 44
Engine oil level sensor retaining bolts 11 8 -
Variable valve timing (VVT) oil control solenoid(s) retaining bolts 10 7 -
Engine control module (ECM) retaining bolts 7 - 62
ECM retaining bracket bolts 7 - 62
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Electronic Engine Controls -
Component Location
Item Description
1 MAFT (mass air flow and temperature) sensor
2 MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor
3 Knock sensors
4 CKP (crankshaft position) sensor
5 MAFT sensor
6 CMP (camshaft position) sensors
7 ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor (ECT 2)
8 Electronic throttle
9 CMP sensors
Item Description
2 ECT sensor (ECT 1)
3 Upstream HO2S (heated oxygen sensor)
4 Downstream HO2S
5 Downstream HO2S
6 Upstream HO2S
Item Description
1 AAT (ambient air temperature) sensor
2 APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor
www.JagDocs.com
Overview
OVERVIEW
The EEC (electronic engine control) system operates the engine to generate the output demanded by the accelerator pedal and
loads imposed by other systems. The EEC system has an ECM (engine control module) that uses a torque-based strategy to
evaluate inputs from sensors and other systems, then produces outputs to engine actuators to produce the required torque.
The EEC system controls the following:
Charge air
Fueling
Ignition timing
Valve timing
Cylinder knock
Noise feedback system
Idle speed
Engine cooling fan
Evaporative emissions
On-board diagnostics
Immobilization system interface
Speed control.
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
CONTROL DIAGRAM SHEET 1 OF 2
Item Description
1 Battery
4 ECM
5 LH (left hand) intake CMP sensor
6 LH exhaust CMP sensor
7 LH MAFT sensor
8 LH front knock sensor
9 LH rear knock sensor
10 RH (right hand) rear knock sensor
11 RH front knock sensor
12 RH intake CMP sensor
13 RH exhaust CMP sensor
14 RH MAFT sensor
CONTROL DIAGRAM SHEET 2 OF 2
Item Description
1 MAP sensor
3 CKP sensor
4 Diagnostic socket
5 To other system control modules
6 ECM
7 Electronic throttle
8 APP sensor
9 AAT sensor
11 LH upstream HO2S
12 LH downstream HO2S
14 RH downstream HO2S
15 RH upstream HO2S
System Operation
ECM ADAPTIONS
The ECM (engine control module) has the ability to adapt the input values it uses to control certain outputs. This capability
maintains engine refinement and ensures the engine emissions remain within the legislated limits. The components which
have adaptions associated with them are:
The APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor

The heated oxygen sensors
The MAFT (mass air flow and temperature) sensors
The CKP (crankshaft position) sensor
Electronic throttle.
OXYGEN AND MAFT SENSORS

There are several adaptive maps associated with the fueling strategy. Within the fueling strategy the ECM calculates short-
term adaptions and long term adaptions. The ECM will monitor the deterioration of the heated oxygen sensors over a
period of time. It will also monitor the current correction associated with the sensors.
The ECM will store a fault code in circumstances where an adaption is forced to exceed its operating parameters. At the same
time, the ECM will record the engine speed, engine load and intake air temperature.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

The characteristics of the signal supplied by the CKP sensor are learned by the ECM. This enables the ECM to set an adaption
and support the engine misfire detection function. Due to the small variation between different drive plates and different CKP
sensors, the adaption must be reset if either component is renewed, or removed and refitted. It is also necessary to reset the
drive plate adaption if the ECM is renewed or replaced. The ECM supports four drive plate adaptions for the CKP sensor. Each
adaption relates to a specific engine speed range. The engine speed ranges are detailed in the table below:
Adaption Engine Speed, rev/min

1 1800 - 3000
2 3001 - 3800
3 3801 - 4600
4 4601 - 5400
MISFIRE DETECTION
Legislation requires that the ECM must be able to detect the presence of an engine misfire. It must be able to detect misfires
at two separate levels. The first level is a misfire that could lead to the legislated emissions limit being exceeded by a given
amount. The second level is a misfire that may cause catalytic converter damage.
The ECM monitors the number of misfire occurrences within two engine speed ranges. If the ECM detects more than a
predetermined number of misfire occurrences within either of these two ranges, over two consecutive journeys, it will record a
fault code and details of the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant temperature. In addition, the ECM monitors the
number of misfire occurrences that happen in a 'window' of 200 engine revolutions. The misfire occurrences are assigned a
weighting according to their likely impact on the catalytic converters. If the number of misfires exceeds a given value, the ECM
stores catalytic converter damage fault codes, along with the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant temperature.
The signal from the CKP sensor indicates how fast the poles on the drive plate are passing the sensor tip. A sine wave is
generated each time a pole passes the sensor tip. The ECM can detect variations in drive plate speed by monitoring the sine
wave signal supplied by the crankshaft position sensor. By assessing this signal, the ECM can detect the presence of an engine
misfire. At this time, the ECM will assess the amount of variation in the signal received from the CKP sensor and assign a
roughness value to it. This roughness value can be viewed within the real time monitoring feature using Jaguar approved
diagnostic equipment. TheECM will evaluate the signal against a number of factors and will decide whether to record the
occurrence or ignore it. The ECM can assign a roughness and misfire signal for each cylinder.
DIAGNOSTICS
The ECM stores each fault as a DTC (diagnostic trouble code). The DTC and associated environmental and freeze frame data
can be read using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, which can also read real time data from each sensor, the adaption
values currently being employed and the current fueling, ignition and idle speed settings.
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
The ECM is installed in the front passenger side of the engine compartment, on a bracket attached to the engine bulkhead.
The ECM has the capability of adapting its fuel and ignition control outputs in response to several sensor inputs.
The ECM receives inputs from the following:
CKP sensor.
CMP (camshaft position) sensors (4 off).
ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor.
Knock sensors (4 off).
MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor.
MAFT sensors (2 off).
MAPT (manifold absolute pressure and temperature) sensor.
Throttle position sensor.
Heated oxygen sensors (4 off).
APP sensor.
Ambient air temperature sensor.
FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor. For additional information, refer to 303-04G Fuel Charging and Controls.
Engine cooling fan. For additional information, refer to 303-03D Engine Cooling.
Stoplamp switch. For additional information, refer to 206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist.
Speed control cancel/suspend switch. For additional information, refer to 310-03D Speed Control.
Oil level and temperature sensor. For additional information, refer to 303-01F Engine.
Fuel LP (low pressure) sensor. For additional information, refer to 310-01D Fuel Tank and Lines.
Fuel pump driver module. For additional information, refer to 310-01D Fuel Tank and Lines.
The ECM provides outputs to the following:
Electronic throttle.
Main relay.
Heater elements of the heated oxygen sensors (4 off).
Fuel injectors (8 off). For additional information, refer to 303-04G Fuel Charging and Controls.
www.JagDocs.com
Ignition coils (8 off). For additional information, refer to 303-07C Engine Ignition.
VCT (variable camshaft timing) solenoids (4 off). For additional information, refer to 303-01F Engine.
Noise feedback system tuning valve. For additional information, refer to 303-12F Intake Air Distribution and Filtering.
EVAP (evaporative emission) canister purge valve. For additional information, refer to 303-13C Evaporative Emissions.
Engine starter relay. For additional information, refer to 303-06D Starting System.
Engine cooling fan. For additional information, refer to 303-03D Engine Cooling.
Intercooler water pump relay. For additional information, refer to 303-03F Supercharger Cooling.
Generator. For additional information, refer to 414-02D Generator and Regulator.
HP fuel pumps. For additional information, refer to 303-04G Fuel Charging and Controls.
Fuel pump driver module. For additional information, refer to 310-01D Fuel Tank and Lines.
DMTL (diagnostic module - tank leakage). For additional information, refer to 303-13C Evaporative Emissions.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The CKP sensor is an inductive sensor that allows the ECM to determine the angular position of the crankshaft and the engine
speed.
The CKP sensor is installed in the rear left side of the sump body, in line with the engine drive plate. The sensor is secured
with a single screw and sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The head of the CKP sensor faces a reluctor ring pressed into the outer circumference of the engine drive plate. The reluctor
ring has a 60 minus 2 tooth pattern. There are 58 teeth at 6° intervals, with two teeth removed to provide a reference point
with a centerline that is 21° BTDC (before top dead center) on cylinder 1 of bank A.
If the CKP sensor fails, the ECM:
Uses signals from the CMP sensors to determine the angular position of the crankshaft and the engine speed
Adopts a limp home mode where engine speed is limited to a maximum of 3000 rev/min.
With a failed CKP sensor, engine starts will require a long crank time while the ECM determines the angular position of the
crankshaft.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSORS
The CMP sensors are MRE (magneto resistive element) sensors that allow the ECM to determine the angular position of the
camshafts. MRE sensors produce a digital output which allows the ECM to detect speeds down to zero.
The four CMP sensors are installed in the front upper timing covers, one for each camshaft.
Each CMP sensor is secured with a single screw and sealed with an O-ring. On each CMP sensor, a three pin electrical connector
provides the interface with the engine harness.
The head of each CMP sensor faces a sensor wheel attached to the front of the related VCT unit.
If a CMP sensor fails, the ECM:
Defaults to base mapping for the ignition timing, with no cylinder correction
Disables the VCT system.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSORS
The ECT sensors are NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistors that allow the ECM to monitor the engine coolant
temperature.
There are two identical ECT sensors installed, which are identified as ECT 1 and ECT 2. Each sensor is secured with a twist-lock
and latch mechanism, and is sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface between the sensor
and the engine harness.
ECT 1
ECT 1 is installed in the heater manifold, at the rear of the RH (right-hand) cylinder head. The input from this sensor is used in
calibration tables and by other systems.
ECT 2
ECT 2 is installed in the lower hose connector which attaches to the bottom of the thermostat. The input from this sensor is
used for OBD (on-board diagnostic) 2 diagnostics and, in conjunction with the input from ECT 1, to confirm that the thermostat
is functional.
KNOCK SENSORS
The knock sensors are piezo-ceramic sensors that allow the ECM to employ active knock control and prevent engine damage
from pre-ignition or detonation.
Two knock sensors are installed on the inboard side of each cylinder head, one mid-way between cylinders 1 and 2, and one
mid-way between cylinders 3 and 4. Each knock sensor is secured with a single screw. On each knock sensor, a two pin
electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The ECM compares the signals from the knock sensors with mapped values stored in memory to determine when detonation
occurs on individual cylinders. When detonation is detected, the ECM retards the ignition timing on that cylinder for a number
of engine cycles, then gradually returns it to the original setting.
The ECM cancels closed loop control of the ignition system if the signal received from a knock sensor becomes implausible. In
these circumstances the ECM defaults to base mapping for the ignition timing. This ensures the engine will not become
damaged if low quality fuel is used. The MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) will not illuminate, although the driver may notice
that the engine 'pinks' in some driving conditions and displays a drop in performance and smoothness.
The ECM calculates the default value if one sensor fails on each bank of cylinders
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
The MAP sensor allows the ECM to calculate the load on the engine, which is used in the calculation of fuel injection time.
The MAP sensor is installed in the air inlet of the SC (supercharger). The sensor is secured with a single screw and sealed with
an O-ring. A three pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
If the MAP sensor fails, the ECM adopts a default value of 1 bar (14.5 lbf/in.2).
With a failed MAP sensor, the engine will suffer from poor starting, rough running and poor driveability.
MASS AIR FLOW AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS
The MAFT sensors allow the ECM to measure the mass and the temperature of the air flow into the engine. The mass air flow
is measured with a hot film element in the sensor. The temperature of the air flow is measured with a NTC thermistor in the
sensor. The mass air flow is used to determine the fuel quantity to be injected in order to maintain the stoichiometric air/fuel
mixture required for correct operation of the engine and the catalytic converters.
There are two MAFT sensors installed, one in each air cleaner outlet duct. Each MAFT sensor is secured with two screws and
sealed with an O-ring. On each MAFT sensor, a five pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
If the hot film element signal fails the ECM invokes a software backup strategy to calculate the mass air flow from other
inputs. Closed loop fuel control, closed loop idle speed control and evaporative emissions control are discontinued. The engine
will suffer from poor starting, poor throttle response and, if the failure occurs while driving, the engine speed may dip before
recovering.
If the NTC thermistor signal fails the ECM adopts a default value of 25 °C (77 °F) for the intake air temperature.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The MAPT sensor allows the ECM to calculate the air charge density immediately before it enters the cylinders. This is used to
adjust the ignition timing relative to the boost pressure, and to monitor the performance of the charge air coolers.
The MAPT sensor is installed in the rear of the LH intake manifold. The sensor is secured with a single screw and sealed with
an O-ring. A four pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
THROTTLE POSITION SENSORS

The TP (throttle position) sensors allow the ECM to determine the position and angular rate of change of the throttle blade.
There are two TP sensors located in the electronic throttle. See below for details of the electronic throttle.
If aTP sensor fails, the ECM:
Adopts a limp home mode where engine speed is limited to a maximum of approximately 2000 rev/min
Discontinues evaporative emissions control
Discontinues closed loop control of engine idle speed.
With a failed TP sensor, the engine will suffer from poor running and throttle response.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSORS
Item Description
A Upstream heated oxygen sensor
B Downstream heated oxygen sensor
The heated oxygen sensors allow the ECM to measure the oxygen content of the exhaust gases, for closed loop control of the
fuel:air mixture and for catalytic converter monitoring.
An upstream heated oxygen sensor is installed in the outlet of each exhaust manifold, which enables independent control of
the fuel:air mixture for each cylinder bank. A downstream heated oxygen sensor is installed in each catalytic converter, which
enables the performance of the catalytic converters to be monitored.
Oxygen sensors need to operate at high temperatures in order to function correctly. To achieve the high temperatures required,
the sensors are fitted with heater elements that are controlled by a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ECM. The
heater elements are operated immediately after each engine start and during low load conditions when the temperature of the
exhaust gases is insufficient to maintain the required sensor temperature. The PWM duty cycle is carefully controlled to prevent
thermal shock to cold sensors. A non-functioning heater delays the sensor’s readiness for closed loop control and
increases emissions.
The upstream heated oxygen sensors produce a constant voltage, with a variable current that is proportional to the lambda
ratio. The downstream heated oxygen sensors produce an output voltage dependant on the ratio of the exhaust gas oxygen to
the ambient oxygen.
The heated oxygen sensors age with mileage, increasing their response time to switch from rich to lean and lean to rich. This
increase in response time influences the ECM closed loop control and leads to progressively increased emissions. Measuring
the period of rich to lean and lean to rich switching monitors the response rate of the upstream sensors.
Diagnosis of electrical faults is continually monitored in both the upstream and downstream sensors. This is achieved by
checking the signal against maximum and minimum threshold, for open and short circuit conditions.
If a heated oxygen sensor fails:
The ECM defaults to open loop fueling for the related cylinder bank
The CO (carbon monoxide) and emissions content of the exhaust gases increases
The exhaust smells of rotten eggs (hydrogen sulphide).
With a failed heated oxygen sensor, the engine will suffer from unstable operation and reduced performance.
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
The APP sensor allows the ECM to determine the driver requests for vehicle speed, acceleration and deceleration. The ECM
uses this information to determine the setting of the electronic throttle.
The APP sensor is installed on the pedal box and secured with three screws. A six pin electrical connector provides the
interface with the vehicle harness. The accelerator pedal is connected to a spindle on the RH side of the APP sensor.
The APP sensor is a twin track potentiometer. Each track receives an independent power supply from the ECM and returns an
independent analog signal to the ECM. Both signals contain the same positional information, but the signal from track 2 is half
the voltage of the signal from track1 at all positions.
If both signals have a fault, the ECM adopts a limp home mode, which limits the engine speed to 2000 rev/min maximum.
The ECM constantly checks the range and plausibility of the two signals and stores a fault code if it detects a fault.
www.JagDocs.com
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The AAT (ambient air temperature) sensor is a NTC thermistor that allows the ECM to monitor the temperature of the air
around the vehicle. The ECM uses the AAT input for a number of functions, including engine cooling fan control. The ECM also
transmits the ambient temperature on the high speed CAN bus for use by other control modules.
The AAT sensor is installed in the LH (left-hand) exterior mirror, with the bulb of the sensor positioned over a hole in the
bottom of the mirror casing.
The ECM supplies the sensor with a 5 V reference voltage and a ground, and translates the return signal voltage into a
temperature.
If there is a fault with the AAT sensor, the ECM calculates the AAT from the temperature inputs of the MAFT sensors. If the AAT
sensor and the temperature inputs of the MAFT sensors are all faulty, the ECM adopts a default ambient temperature of 20 °C
(68 °F).
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
The ECM uses the electronic throttle to regulate engine torque.
The electronic throttle is installed between the T piece duct, of the intake air distribution and filtering system, and the inlet of
the SC. For additional information, refer to 303-12F Intake Air Distribution and Filtering.
The throttle plate is operated by an electric DC (direct current) motor integrated into the throttle body. The ECM uses a PWM
signal to control the DC motor. The ECM compares the APP sensor inputs against an electronic map to determine the required
position of the throttle plate. The ECM and electronic throttle are also required to:
Monitor requests for cruise control operation

Automatically operate the electronic throttle for accurate cruise control
Perform all dynamic stability control engine interventions
Monitor and carry out maximum engine speed and road speed cut outs
Provide different engine maps for the ride and handling optimization system.
A software strategy within the ECM calibrates the position of the throttle plate at the beginning of each ignition cycle. When
the ignition is turned on, the ECM performs a self test and calibration routine by fully closing the throttle plate and then
opening it again. This tests the default position springs and allows the ECM to learn the position of the closed hard stop.
Subsequently the ECM keeps the throttle plate a minimum of 0.5 degree from the closed hard stop.
MAIN RELAY
The main relay is used to initiate the power up and power down routines within the ECM. The main relay is installed in the EJB
(engine junction box).
When the ignition is turned on, battery voltage is applied to the ignition sense input. The ECM then starts its power up
routines and energizes the main relay.
When the ignition is turned off, the ECM maintains its powered up state while it conducts the power down routines (up to 20
minutes in extreme cases, when cooling fans are required) and on completion will turn off the main relay.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Electronic Engine Controls
For a detailed description of electronic engine controls, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the workshop
manual. REFER to: (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol)
Electronic Engine Controls (Description and Operation),

Electronic Engine Controls (Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Engine oil level and condition Fuses

Cooling system coolant level Wiring harness
Fuel level Electrical connector(s)
Fuel contamination/grade/quality Sensor(s)
Throttle body Engine Control Module
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) belt Transmission Control Module
Air cleaner condition
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the customer concern and refer to the Symptom Chart below, alternatively,
check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart

Engine non-start
Engine does not crank
Security system /Immobilizer Check that the security system is disarmed
engaged Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in this
Engine in shut-down mode section for ECM relay tests
ECM relay Ensure the battery is in fully charged and
Battery serviceable condition
Starting system For starting system tests refer to the
Engine seized relevant section of the workshop manual
For engine system tests refer to the relevant
section of the workshop manual
Engine cranks, but does not fire

Engine breather system Ensure the engine breather system is free
disconnected/restricted from restriction and is correctly installed
Ignition system For ignition system tests refer to the
Fuel system relevant section of the workshop manual
Electronic engine controls For fuel system tests refer to the relevant
Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in this
section for electronic engine control tests
Engine cranks and fires, but will not

start Evaporative emissions purge For purge valve tests refer to the relevant
valve section of the workshop manual
Fuel pump For fuel system tests refer to the relevant
Spark plugs section of the workshop manual
Ignition coil failure(s) For ignition system tests refer to the
relevant section of the workshop manual
Difficult to start
Difficult cold start
Check engine coolant Check the engine coolant level and
level/anti-freeze content condition. Refer to the relevant sections of
Battery the workshop manual
Electronic engine controls Ensure the battery is in a fully charged and
Exhaust gas recirculation serviceable condition. Refer to the battery
(EGR) valve stuck open care manual and the relevant sections of the
Fuel pump workshop manual.
Evaporative emissions purge Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in this
valve section for electronic engine control tests
workshop manual and check the Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR) valve and associated
hoses and connections.
For fuel system tests refer to the relevant
workshop manual and check the purge valve
and associated hoses and connections.
Difficult hot start

Injector leak Refer to the relevant section of the
Electronic engine controls workshop manual, carry out injector leak
Evaporative emissions purge tests, install new injectors as necessary.
valve Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in this
Fuel pump section for electronic engine control tests
Ignition system Refer to the relevant section of the
EGR valve stuck open workshop manual and check the purge valve
For ignition system tests refer to the
Difficult to start after hot soak

(vehicle standing, engine off, after Injector leak Refer to the relevant section of the
engine has reached operating Electronic engine controls workshop manual, carry out injector leak
temperature) Evaporative emissions purge tests, install new injectors as necessary.
valve Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in this
Fuel pump section for electronic engine control tests
Ignition system Refer to the relevant section of the
EGR valve stuck open workshop manual and check the purge valve
Engine cranks too fast/slow

Compressions high/low Refer to the relevant section of the
Battery workshop manual, carry out compression
Starting system tests.
Ensure the battery is in a fully charged and
serviceable condition. Refer to the battery
care manual and the relevant sections of the
workshop manual.
For starting system tests refer to the
Engine stalls
Engine stalls soon after start
Breather system Ensure the engine breather system is free
disconnected/restricted from restriction and is correctly installed
ECM relay Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in this
Electronic engine controls section for ECM relay tests
Ignition system Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in this
Air intake system restricted section for electronic engine control tests
Air leakage For ignition system tests refer to the
Fuel lines relevant section of the workshop manual
Check for blockage in air cleaner element
and air intake system
Check for leakage in air intake system
Engine stalls on overrun
Throttle position (TP) section for ECM relay and TP sensor tests
sensors
Engine stalls at steady speed

crankshaft position sensor section for ECM relay, crankshaft position
TP sensors sensor, and TP sensor tests
Engine stalls with speed control

enabled ECM relay Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in this
section for ECM relay tests
Engine stalls when manoeuvring

TP sensors section for ECM relay, and TP sensor tests
Additional engine loads Check for excessive loads being placed on
(PAS, air conditioning, etc) the engine from PAS, air conditioning
Transmission malfunction systems etc.
CAN malfunction Refer to the workshop manual or
transmission troubleshooting guide for
transmission system tests.
workshop manual and the electrical wiring
diagrams to perform CAN network tests.
Poor driveability
Engine hesitates/poor acceleration
Fuel pressure, fuel pump, For fuel system tests refer to the relevant
fuel lines section of the workshop manual
Injector leak Carry out fuel injector leak tests, install new
Air leakage injectors as necessary.
Electronic engine controls Check for leakage from air intake system
EGR valve stuck section for electronic engine control tests
Transmission malfunction For ignition system tests refer to the
Restricted pedal travel relevant section of the workshop manual
(carpet, etc) Refer to the relevant section of the
Refer to the workshop manual or
transmission troubleshooting guide for
Ensure accelerator pedal is free from
restriction
Engine backfires
Fuel pump, fuel lines For fuel system tests refer to the relevant
Air leakage section of the workshop manual
Electronic engine controls Check for leakage from air intake system
Sticking variable camshaft section for electronic engine control tests
timing (VCT) hub For ignition system tests refer to the
section for VCT system tests
Engine surges
Fuel pump, fuel lines For fuel system tests refer to the relevant
Electronic engine controls section of the workshop manual
Engine detonates/knocks
Electronic engine controls Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in this
Fuel pump, fuel lines, fuel section for electronic engine control tests
quality For fuel system tests refer to the relevant
Air leakage section of the workshop manual
Sticking VCT hub Check for leakage from air intake system
section for VCT system tests
www.JagDocs.com
No throttle response
Speed control inhibited or disabled

Default mode enabled Check message center for default message,
Speed control, brake switch read DTCs and refer to DTC Index
Electronic engine controls Refer to the relevant section of the
CAN fault workshop manual for speed control, and
brake switch tests.
workshop manual and the electrical wiring
diagrams to perform CAN network tests.
Poor throttle response

Breather system Ensure engine breather system is free from
disconnected/restricted restriction and is correctly installed
Transmission malfunction section for electronic engine control tests
Traction control event Refer to the workshop manual or
Air leakage transmission troubleshooting guide for
Check for leakage in air intake system
Engine defaults, warning light and

messages. Refer to the owner Electronic engine controls Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in this
handbook section for electronic engine control tests
DTC Index
WARNING: Fuel injector voltage will reach 65Volts during operation and have a high current requirement.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
If the module/component is suspect and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedure manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module/component.
into account.

B10A2-31 Crash Input - No signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Loss of communication between check Restraints Control Module (RCM) Pulse
Restraints Control Module (RCM) Width Modulated (PWM) SRS signal line circuit,
and Engine Control Module hard wired connection between Engine Control
(ECM) Module (ECM) and Restraints Control Module
(RCM) for short to ground, short to power, open
retest system to confirm repair.
B10AC-81 Cruise Control Switch - Clear the DTC and press all the steering wheel
invalid serial data received The Engine Control Module switches, re-check for DTCs. Refer to the
(ECM) has received an invalid electrical circuit diagrams and check the Cruise
command from the steering control switch circuit for open circuit, short to
wheel switch pack power, short to ground, disconnected. Check
and install a new Steering Wheel Module
(SWM) as required.
B10AC-82 Cruise Control Switch - alive Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
/ sequence counter incorrect Cruise Buttons alive counter is check the Cruise control switch circuit for open
/ not updated not incrementing. Which circuit, short to power, short to ground,
suggests that the LIN bus is disconnected. Check and install a new Steering
faulty Wheel Module (SWM) as required.
Steering Wheel Module (SWM) is
not connected
Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
failure
B10AC-83 Cruise Control Switch - value Check and install new cruise switches as
of signal protection Cruise buttons checksum required.
calculation incorrect incorrect, incorrect cruise
switches fitted to vehicle
B10AC-96 Cruise Control Switch - Check for related DTCs in other Central
component internal failure Cruise control switch circuit, Junction Box (CJB)s. Refer to the electrical
open circuit, short to power, circuit diagrams and check the Cruise control
short to ground, disconnected switch circuit for open circuit, short to power,
Cruise Control Switch failure short to ground, disconnected. Check and
Steering Wheel Module (SWM) install a new cruise control switch as required.
failure Check and install a new Steering Wheel
Module (SWM) as required.
B10FF-68 Ignition Control - Event Refer to repair manual and check spark plug(s)
information Spark plug(s) fault for condition and security. Replace any
Wiring harness fault defective components as required. Refer to
Ignition coil(s) fault electrical wiring diagrams and check ignition
coil circuit for intermittent open circuit, short
to power, short to ground. Check and install a
new coil(s) as required.
B11DB-01 Battery Monitoring Module - Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check
General Electrical Failure Charging system fault Battery charging system for faults. Perform any repairs
monitoring signal line required. Refer to the electrical wiring
circuit fault diagrams and check the Battery Monitoring
Vehicle battery fault System (BMS) module circuit for open circuit,
short to ground, short to power. Refer to the
battery care manual and check and install a
new battery.
B11DB-87 Battery Monitoring Module - Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and
missing message Battery signal line circuit fault check the Battery Monitoring System (BMS)
module circuit for open circuit, short to ground,
short to power.
B1206-68 Crash Occurred - event Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
information Engine control Module (ECM) has check the Engine Control Module (ECM) to
detected the vehicle has crashed Restraints Control Module (RCM) circuit for
- event information DTC only short to ground, short to power, open circuit.
system to confirm repair.
C0031-00 Left Front Wheel Speed Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module
Sensor - No sub type Invalid data received from for related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
information Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Index.
module - left front wheel speed
signal fault
C0034-00 Right Front Wheel Speed Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module
module - right front wheel speed
signal fault
C0037-00 Left Rear Wheel Speed Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module
module - left rear wheel speed
signal fault
C003A-00 Right Rear Wheel Speed Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module
module - right rear wheel speed
signal fault
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures
WARNING: Where possible, all road tests should be on well surfaced and dry roads. Always comply with speed limits and
local traffic regulations.
NOTES:
This procedure is an overcheck only. If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant system must be carried out and
claimed against.
The vehicle must exceed 50mph (80 km/h) during the road test.
1. Connect the diagnostic equipment to the vehicle.
2. Follow on screen prompts and check for engine management fault codes.
3. Clear the fault codes following the on screen procedure.
4. Disconnect the diagnostic equipment from the vehicle.
5. NOTE: Make sure cruise control is not engaged. Make sure
the engine temperature is above 60 ºC (140 ºF).
Carry out a road test and perform the following operations.

1. Accelerate to 55 mph (88 km/h) in 5th gear and cruise for 2
minutes with the engine speed at or above 1800rpm.
2. Lift off the throttle and allow the vehicle to decelerate until the
engine speed is less than 1000 rpm.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Release brake, allow the vehicle to move with no throttle for 1
minute.
5. Road test is now complete.
7. NOTE: If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant

system must be carried out and claimed against.
Follow on screen prompts and check for engine management fault codes.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures
NOTE: This procedure is an overcheck only. If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant system must be carried
out and claimed against.
2. Follow on screen prompts and check for engine management fault codes.
3. Clear the fault codes following the on screen procedure.
4. Start the engine.

Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
Raise the engine speed to 1500 rpm and hold for 3 minutes until
a temperature of 70ºC (158 ºF) is achieved.
Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
Switch off the engine.
5. NOTE: If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant

system must be carried out and claimed against.
Follow on screen prompts and check for engine management fault codes.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft Position (CMP)
Sensor LH
Removal
Refer to: Specifications (414-00 Charging System - General Information,

Specifications).
3. Refer to: Thermostat Housing - 5.0L SC V8 - AJ133 (303-03 Engine

Cooling - 5.0L NA V8 - AJ133/5.0L SC V8 - AJ133, Removal and
Installation).

Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign
material.
Make sure that the sensor tip is clean and free of foreign material.
NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft Position (CMP)
Sensor RH
Removal
Refer to: Specifications (414-00 Charging System - General Information,

Specifications).
3. Refer to: Thermostat Housing - 5.0L SC V8 - AJ133 (303-03 Engine

Cooling - 5.0L NA V8 - AJ133/5.0L SC V8 - AJ133, Removal and
Installation).

Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
material.
Make sure that the sensor tip is clean and free of foreign material.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
Removal

Installation).
4. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the component prior

to removal.
Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
If accidentally dropped or knocked install a new sensor.
Make sure the catalyst monitor sensor wiring harness is not twisted
more than 180 degrees and is not in contact with either the exhaust or
driveshaft.
Make sure the anti-seize compound does not contact the catalyst
monitor sensor tip.
NOTE: If the original sensor is to be installed, apply lubricant

meeting specification ESE-M12A4-A to the thread of the sensor.
2. NOTE: For NAS vehicles only.
If required, carry out a long drive cycle.
Refer to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
(303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
Removal

Installation).

to removal.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the anti-seize compound does not contact the catalyst
monitor sensor tip.
Make sure the catalyst monitor sensor wiring harness is not twisted
more than 180 degrees and is not in contact with either the exhaust or
driveshaft.

Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Position (CKP)
Sensor
Removal

Installation).
3. NOTE: Clean the components general area prior to

dismantling.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
material.
Make sure that the component is clean, free of foreign material and
lubricant.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Control Module
(ECM)
Removal
Installation).
Installation).
4. Torque: 25 Nm
5. Torque: 25 Nm
6. Torque: 8 Nm
7. Torque: 6 Nm
8. Torque: 10 Nm
9.
Installation
1. NOTE: New units must be configured using the Programmable

Module Installation Routine in the diagnostic tool.
www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Coolant Temperature
(ECT) Sensor
Removal
NOTES:

2. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03B
Engine Cooling - V6 3.0L Petrol, General Procedures).

4. Torque: 48 Nm
CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the paint

finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately remove the coolant
and clean the area with water.
Lift the tang and rotate the engine coolant temperature

(ECT) sensor counter clockwise.
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Level Sensor
Removal

Installation).
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01D Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol, General Procedures).
Torque: 11 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Front Knock Sensor (KS) LH
Removal


4. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Front Knock Sensor (KS) RH
Removal


4. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP)
Sensor
Removal
1. Refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (310-00 Fuel System - General Information, General Procedures).
Installation).
Installation).
Installation).
7. WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

8. WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
Torque: 32 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Heated Oxygen Sensor
(HO2S) LH
Special Tool(s)
310-121
Wrench, H02S
Removal

Installation).


to removal.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the anti-seize compound does not contact the HO2S tip.
Make sure the HO2S wiring harness is not twisted more than 180
degrees and is not in contact with either the exhaust or driveshaft.

Procedures).
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Heated Oxygen Sensor
(HO2S) RH
Special Tool(s)
310-121
Wrench, H02S
Removal

Installation).


to removal.
www.JagDocs.com

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the anti-seize compound does not contact the HO2S tip.
Make sure the HO2S wiring harness is not twisted more than 180
degrees and is not in contact with either the exhaust or driveshaft.

Procedures).
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Manifold Absolute Pressure
(MAP) Sensor
Removal
Installation).

Torque: 10 Nm

Torque: 10 Nm

Torque: 5 Nm
Installation
If required, carry out a short drive cycle.
Refer to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-Test
Procedures).
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal
2.
Installation
Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Rear Knock Sensor (KS) LH
Removal


4. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Rear Knock Sensor (KS) RH
Removal


4. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Variable Valve Timing (VVT)
Oil Control Solenoid LH
Removal
Refer to: Specifications (414-00, Specifications).
3. Refer to: Thermostat Housing - Vehicles With: Supercharger (303-03,


Torque: 10 Nm
5. CAUTION: Evenly and progressively, remove the VVT

units from each side.

Installation
foreign material.
Procedures).
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Variable Valve Timing (VVT)
Oil Control Solenoid RH
Removal
3. Refer to: Thermostat Housing - Vehicles With: Supercharger (303-03,



Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
6. CAUTION: Evenly and progressively, remove the VVT
units from each side.

Installation
foreign material.
Procedures).
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol -
CAUTION: CAUTION: Use only Shell M1375.4 Automatic transmission fluid. Use of any other fluids may result in a
transmission malfunction or failure.
Description Intervals
Normal maintenance Filled for life.
Severe duty maintenance Change the fluid at 48,000 km (30,000 miles) intervals.
NOTE: Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Transmission fluid Shell M1375.4
Sealant WSS-M4G323-A6
Metal surface cleaner WSW-M5B392-A
High temperature grease Molecote FB180
NOTE: General Specifications
Refill capacity approximate dry capacity, includes cooler and tubes. Check the level at
normal operating temperature. DO NOT OVERFILL. If it is necessary to add or change
Approximate fluid, use only fluid which has been certified by the supplier as meeting the Jaguar Cars
Vehicle Engine Liters Ltd specification shown. U.S. Quarts
XJ All 10.0 10.57
vehicles
NOTE: Torque Specifications

Transmission retaining bolts 48 35 -
Transmission mount retaining bolts 51 38 -
Transmission fluid fill plug A A A
Transmission control module (TCM) and main control valve body retaining bolts 8 - 53
Output shaft flange retaining nut 60 44 -
Torque converter retaining bolts 62 46 -
Transmission fluid cooler tube retaining bolt 22 16 -
Transmission fluid drain plug 8 - 53
Transmission fluid pan, gasket and filter retaining bolts 8 - 53
A = refer to the procedure for correct torque sequence
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Description - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Description - Overview
OVERVIEW
The ZF 6HP28 transmission is an electronically controlled, hydraulically operated, six speed automatic unit. The hydraulic and
electronic control elements of the transmission, including the TCM (transmission control module), are incorporated in a single
unit located inside the transmission and is known as 'Mechatronic'.
5.1 L SC (supercharger) and 3.0L diesel models use an uprated derivative of the ZF 6HP28 transmission used in the 5.0L
naturally aspirated models.
The ZF 6HP28 transmission has the following features:
Designed to be maintenance free

Transmission fluid is 'fill for life'
The torque converter features a controlled slip feature with electronically regulated control of lock-up, creating a smooth
transition to the fully locked condition
Shift programs controlled by the TCM
Electronic park lock, controlled by the TCM, with a mechanical emergency release
ASIS (adaptive shift strategy), to provide continuous adaptation of shift changes to suit the driving style of the driver,
which can vary from sporting to economical.
Connected to the ECM (engine control module) via the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus for communications
Default mode if major faults occur
Diagnostics available from the TCM via the high speed CAN bus.
The transmission selections are made using the rotary JaguarDrive selector in the floor console and two paddle switches on the
steering wheel. For additional information, refer to 307-05B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - 5.0L/3.0L
Diesel).
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Description - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; B = K bus; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect
network) bus
Item Description
1 Battery
6 Diagnostic socket
8 JaguarDrive selector
9 Clockspring
10 Steering wheel audio switches
11 Downshift paddle switch
12 Upshift paddle switch
System Operation
POWER FLOWS
Operation of the transmission is controlled by the TCM (transmission control module), which electrically activates various
solenoids to control the transmission gear selection. The sequence of solenoid activation is based on programmed information
in the TCM memory and physical transmission operating conditions such as vehicle speed, throttle position, engine load and
JaguarDrive selector position.
Item Description
1 Torque input from engine
2 Torque converter lock-up clutch
3 Single web planetary gear carrier
4 Single web planetary gears
5 Single web sunwheel 1
6 Double web sunwheel 2
7 Double web planetary gears - long
8 Double web planetary gear carrier
9 Double web planetary gears - short
10 Double web sunwheel 3
11 Torque output from transmission
A Multiplate clutch
B Multiplate clutch
C Multiplate brake
D Multiplate brake
E Multiplate clutch
Engine torque is transferred, via operation of single or combinations of clutches to the 2 planetary gear trains. Both gear trains
are controlled by reactionary inputs from brake clutches to produce the 6 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. The ratios are as
follows:
www.JagDocs.com
Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th Reverse
Ration 4.171 2.340 1.521 1.143 0.867 0.691 3.403
Shift Elements
Item Description
1 Turbine shaft
2 Stator shaft
3 Single web planetary gear train
4 Ring gear 1
5 Clutch A
6 Clutch B
7 Clutch E
8 Brake clutch C
9 Fixed connection to transmission housing
10 Shaft key
11 Brake clutch D
12 Double web planetary gear train
13 Planetary gears - long
14 Ring gear 2
15 Sunwheel 2
16 Sunwheel 3
17 Double web planetary gear carrier
18 Planetary gears - short
19 Single web planetary gear carrier
20 Sunwheel 1
The shift elements are three rotating multiplate clutches (A, B and E) and two fixed multiplate brakes (C and D). All shifts
from 1st to 6th gears are power-on overlapping shifts. Overlapping shifts can be described as one of the clutches continuing to
transmit drive at a lower main pressure until the next required clutch is able to accept the input torque.
The shift elements, clutches and brakes are actuated hydraulically. Fluid pressure is applied to the required clutch and/or brake,
pressing the plates together and allowing drive to be transmitted through the plates. The purpose of the shift elements
is to perform power-on shifts with no interruption to traction and smooth transition between gear ratios.
Power Flow 1st Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector valve spool are in the 'D' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
converter turbine shaft to the ring gear 1 of the single web planetary gear train and the outer plate carrier of clutch 'E'.
Ring gear 1 drives the planetary gears which rotate around sunwheel 1. This drives the planetary gear carrier 1 and also the
outer plate carrier of clutch 'A' and the inner plate carrier of clutch 'B'.
When clutch 'A' is engaged, sunwheel 3 in the double web planetary gear train is driven and meshes with the short planetary
gears.
The double web planetary gear train is locked against the transmission housing by brake 'D'. This allows ring gear 2 (output
shaft) to be driven in the same direction as the engine via the long planetary gears.
NOTE: Refer to 'Shift Elements' illustration for key

Power Flow 2nd Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector spool valve are in the 'D' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
gears.
Sunwheel 2 is locked to the transmission housing by brake clutch 'C'. The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with the
short planetary gears, roll around the fixed sunwheel 2 and transmit drive to the double web planetary gear train carrier and
ring gear 2 in the direction of engine rotation.

Power Flow 3rd Gear
gears.
Sunwheel 2 is driven via clutch 'B' which is engaged. The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with the short planetary
gears, cannot roll around the fixed sunwheel 2 and therefore transmit drive to the locked double web planetary gear train
carrier in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow 4th Gear
converter turbine shaft to ring gear 1 of the single web planetary gear train and the outer plate carrier of clutch 'E'.
gears.
The double web planetary gear carrier is driven via clutch 'E' which is engaged. The long planetary gears, which are also
www.JagDocs.com
meshed with the short planetary gears and the double web planetary gear carrier, drive ring gear 2 in the direction of engine
rotation.
Power Flow 5th Gear
gears.
The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with the short planetary gears and the double web planetary gear carrier,
drive ring gear 2 in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow 6th Gear
Clutches 'A' and 'B' are released, removing the effect of the single web planetary gear train.
Clutch brake 'C' is applied which locks sunwheel 2 to the transmission housing.
Clutch 'E' is engaged and drives the double web planetary gear carrier. This causes the long planetary gears to rotate around
the fixed sunwheel 2 and transmit drive to ring gear 2 which is driven in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow Reverse Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector spool valve are in the 'R' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
Ring gear 1 drives the planetary gears of the single web planetary gear train which rotate around the fixed sunwheel 1. This
transmits the drive to the single web planetary gear carrier, the outer plate carrier of clutch 'A' and the inner plate carrier of
clutch 'B'.
With clutch 'B' applied, sunwheel 2 in the double web planetary gear train is driven and meshes with the long planetary gears.
The double web planetary gear carrier is locked to the transmission housing by brake clutch 'D'. This allows ring gear 2 to be
driven in the opposite direction to engine rotation by the long planetary gears.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Item Description
1 Transmission selected gear status
2 MIL (malfunction indicator lamp)
3 Message center
The instrument cluster is connected to the TCM via the high speed CAN bus. Transmission status is transmitted by the TCM
and displayed to the driver in one of two displays in the instrument cluster. For additional information, refer to 413-01
Instrument Cluster.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
The MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) is located in the tachometer in the instrument cluster. Transmission related faults which
may affect the vehicle emissions output will illuminate the MIL.
The MIL is illuminated by the ECM (engine control module) on receipt of a relevant fault message from the TCM on the high
speed CAN. The nature of the fault can be diagnosed using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system which reads the fault codes
stored in the TCM memory.
Transmission Status Display
The transmission status display is located in a LCD (liquid crystal display) at the top of the instrument cluster, between the
speedometer and the tachometer. The LCD shows the JaguarDrive selector position or the selected gear when in manual
'Jaguar Sequential Shift' mode.
The following table shows the displays and their descriptions.
Symbol Description
P Park selected
R Reverse selected
N Neutral selected
D Drive selected
S Sport mode selected
1 1st gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
2 2nd gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
3 3rd gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
4 4th gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
The message center is located in the lower center of the instrument cluster. The message center is a LCD to relay vehicle
status and operating information to the driver and can display messages relating to a number of the vehicle systems. If a
transmission fault occurs, the message center will display the message 'GEARBOX FAULT'.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

The TCM outputs signals to control the shift control solenoid valve and the EPRS (electronic pressure regulating solenoid) to
control the hydraulic operation of the transmission.
The TCM processes signals from the transmission speed and temperature sensors, the ECM and other vehicle systems. From
the received signal inputs and pre-programmed data, the module calculates the correct gear, torque converter clutch setting
and optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control.
The ECM supplies the engine management data over the high speed CAN bus. The TCM requires engine data to efficiently
control the transmission operation, for example; flywheel torque, engine speed, accelerator pedal angle, engine temperature.
The steering angle sensor and the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module also supply data to the TCM on the high speed CAN
bus. The TCM uses data from these systems to suspend gear changes when the vehicle is cornering and/or the ABS module is
controlling braking or traction control.
Using the signal inputs and the memorized data, the TCM control program computes the correct gear and torque converter
lock-up clutch setting and the optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control. Special output-side modules
(power output stages, current regulator circuits), allow the TCM to control the solenoid valves and pressure regulators and
consequently precisely control the hydraulics of the automatic transmission. In addition, the amount and duration of engine
interventions are supplied to the engine management by way of the CAN bus.
The transmission has a fully electronic JaguarDrive selector with no Bowden cable connection to the transmission. The
transmission selections are made using a rotary JaguarDrive selector which rises from the floor console once the engine is
running. Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector to any of the five positions is sensed by the TCM via the high speed CAN bus.
The TCM then reacts according to the selected position. The 'S' (sport) position selection allows the TCM to operate the
transmission using the semi-automatic 'Jaguar Sequential Shift'.
Gear selections are sensed by the TCM when the driver operates the steering wheel paddle switches. Once the JaguarDrive
selector position is confirmed, the TCM outputs appropriate information on the high speed CAN bus.
If the JaguarDrive selector is in 'D', 'Jaguar Sequential Shift' is temporary and will cancel after a time period or can be cancelled
by pressing and holding the + paddle for approximately 2 seconds.
If the JaguarDrive selector is in 'S', 'Jaguar Sequential Shift' is permanent and can only be cancelled by pressing and holding
the + paddle for approximately 2 seconds or by moving the JaguarDrive selector to the 'D' position.
www.JagDocs.com
The TCM can be reprogrammed using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system using a flash code. The TCM processor has a 440 kb
internal flash memory. Of this capacity, approximately 370 kb are used by the basic transmission program. The remainder,
approximately 70 kb is used to store vehicle-specific application data.
Engine Stall
If the vehicle stalls it will coast down in gear, with the transmission providing drive to the engine. A restart can be attempted
at this point and the engine may start and the driver can continue.
If the coast down speed reduces such that the speed of the engine is less than 600 rev/min, the transmission will go to
neutral, D illumination will flash in the instrument cluster. The driver needs to select neutral or park and then press the brake
pedal to restart the engine.
If the start/stop button is pressed when driving, the message ENGINE STOP BUTTON PRESSED is displayed in the message
center but there will be no change to the ignition state. If the driver requires to switch off the engine, the start/stop button
must be pressed for a second time. The engine will be stopped and will be back driven by the transmission as the vehicle
coasts down. When the engine speed is less than 600 rev/min the transmission engages neutral (flashing D illumination in the
instrument cluster). When vehicle speed is less than 2 km/h (1.2 mph) Park is engaged. The JaguarDrive selector automatically
rotates back to its lowered P position and the vehicle ignition is switched off.
The park engagement is prevented in a stall case as the ignition power is on and D was the last selected gear. The park
engagement speed at ignition off is from the least value of the wheel speeds (CAN signal) and transmission output speed
(internal signal).
TRANSMISSION
The transmission comprises the main casing which houses all of the transmission components. The main casing also
incorporates an integral bell housing.
A fluid pan is attached to the lower face of the main casing and is secured with bolts. The fluid pan is sealed to the main
casing with a gasket. Removal of the fluid pan allows access to the Mechatronic valve block. The fluid pan has a magnet
located around the drain plug which collects any metallic particles present in the transmission fluid.
A fluid filter is located inside the fluid pan. If the transmission fluid becomes contaminated or after any service work, the fluid
pan with integral filter must be replaced.
The integral bell housing provides protection for the torque converter assembly and also provides the attachment for the
gearbox to the engine cylinder block. The torque converter is a non-serviceable assembly which also contains the lock-up clutch
mechanism. The torque converter drives a crescent type pump via drive tangs. The fluid pump is located in the main casing,
behind the torque converter.
The main casing contains the following major components:
Input shaft
Output shaft
Mechatronic valve block which contains the solenoids, speed sensors and the TCM
Three rotating multiplate drive clutches
Two fixed multiplate brake clutches
A single planetary gear train and a double planetary gear train.
Item Description
1 Torque converter lock-up clutch
2 Torque converter
3 Fluid pump
4 Single planetary gearset
5 Clutch A
6 Clutch B
7 Clutch E
8 Brake C
9 Brake D
10 Double planetary gearset
11 Park lock gear
12 Output shaft
13 Park lock pawl
14 Drain plug
15 Magnet
16 Pressure regulator
17 Mechatronic valve block
18 Fluid filter
19 Fluid pan
20 Input shaft
21 Bell housing
TORQUE CONVERTER
Item Description
1 Impeller
2 Turbine
3 Stator
4 Freewheel clutch
5 Torque converter hub
6 Stator shaft
7 Turbine shaft
8 Drive plate
9 Journal - Drive plate/crankshaft location
10 Torque converter cover
11 Lock-up clutch piston
12 Lock-up clutch plate
The torque converter is the coupling element between the engine and the transmission and is located in the bell housing, on
the engine side of the transmission. The driven power from the engine crankshaft is transmitted hydraulically and mechanically
through the torque converter to the transmission. The torque converter is connected to the engine by a drive plate attached to
the rear of the crankshaft.
The torque converter comprises an impeller, a stator and a turbine. The torque converter is a sealed unit with all components
located between the converter housing cover and the impeller. The two components are welded together to form a sealed, fluid
filled housing. With the impeller welded to the converter housing cover, the impeller is therefore driven at engine crankshaft
speed.
The converter housing cover has four threaded bosses, which provide for attachment of the engine drive plate. The threaded
bosses also provide for location of special tools which are required to remove the torque converter from the bell housing.
Impeller
Fluid Flow
Item Description
1 Turbine
2 Stator
3 Impeller
When the engine is running the rotating impeller acts as a centrifugal pump, picking up fluid at its center and discharging it at
high velocity through the blades on its outer rim. The design and shape of the blades and the curve of the impeller body cause
the fluid to rotate in a clockwise direction as it leaves the impeller. This rotation improves the efficiency of the fluid as it
contacts the outer row of blades on the turbine.
The centrifugal force of the fluid leaving the blades of the impeller is passed to the curved inner surface of the turbine via the
tip of the blades. The velocity and clockwise rotation of the fluid causes the turbine to rotate.
Turbine
The turbine is similar in design to the impeller with a continuous row of blades. Fluid from the impeller enters the turbine
through the tip of the blades and is directed around the curved body of the turbine to the root of the blades. The curved
surface redirects the fluid back in the opposite direction to which it entered the turbine, effectively increasing the turning force
applied to the turbine from the impeller. This principle is known as torque multiplication.
When engine speed increases, turbine speed also increases. The fluid leaving the inner row of the turbine blades is rotated in
a counter-clockwise direction due to the curve of the turbine and the shape of the blades. The fluid is now flowing in the
opposite direction to the engine rotation and therefore the impeller. If the fluid was allowed to hit the impeller in this
condition, it would have the effect of applying a brake to the impeller, eliminating the torque multiplication effect. To prevent
this, the stator is located between the impeller and the turbine.
Stator
The stator is located on the splined transmission input shaft via a freewheel clutch. The stator comprises a number of blades
which are aligned in an opposite direction to those of the impeller and turbine. The main function of the stator is to redirect
the returning fluid from the turbine, changing its direction to that of the impeller.
The redirected fluid from the stator is directed at the inner row of blades of the impeller, assisting the engine in turning the
impeller. This sequence increases the force of the fluid emitted from the impeller and thereby increases the torque
multiplication effect of the torque converter.
Stator Functions
Item Description
1 Blades
2 Stator held – fluid flow redirected
3 Stator rotates freely
4 Roller
5 Converter at coupling speed
6 Fluid flow from turbine
7 Converter multiplying
8 Fluid flow from impeller
9 Drive from engine
10 Impeller
11 Stator
12 Turbine
13 Output to transmission
Fluid emitted from the impeller acts on the turbine. If the turbine is rotating at a slower speed than the fluid from the impeller,
the fluid will be deflected by the turbine blades in the path 'A'. The fluid is directed at and deflected by the stator blades from
path 'B' to path 'C'. This ensures that the fluid is directed back to the pump in the optimum direction. In this condition the
sprag clutch is engaged and the force of the fluid on the stator blades assists the engine in rotating the impeller.
As the rotational speed of the engine and therefore the turbine increases, the direction of the fluid leaving the turbine changes
to path 'D'. The fluid is now directed from the turbine to the opposite side of the stator blades, rotating the stator in the
opposite direction. To prevent the stator from resisting the smooth flow of the fluid from the turbine, the sprag clutch releases,
allowing the stator to rotate freely on its shaft.
When the stator becomes inactive, the torque converter no longer multiplies the engine torque. When the torque converter
reaches this operational condition it ceases to multiply the engine torque and acts solely as a fluid coupling, with the impeller
and the turbine rotating at approximately the same speed.
The stator uses a sprag type, one way, freewheel clutch. When the stator is rotated in a clockwise direction the sprags twist
and are wedged between the inner and outer races. In this condition the sprags transfer the rotation of the outer race to the
inner race which rotates at the same speed.
www.JagDocs.com
One Way Free Wheel Clutch – Typical
Item Description
1 Sprags
2 Inner race
3 Outer race
4 Sprag and cage assembly
5 Sprag outer race
6 Sprag inner race
7 Retaining ring
The free wheel clutch can perform three functions; hold the stator stationary, drive the stator and free wheel allowing the
stator to rotate without a drive output. The free wheel clutch used in the ZF 6HP28 transmission is of the sprag type and
comprises an inner and outer race and a sprag and cage assembly. The inner and outer races are pressed into their related
components with which they rotate. The sprag and cage assembly is located between the inner and outer races.
The sprags are located in a cage which is a spring which holds the sprags in the 'wedge' direction and maintains them in
contact with the inner and outer races.
Referring to the illustration, the sprags are designed so that the dimension 'B' is larger than the distance between the inner
and outer race bearing surfaces. When the outer race rotates in a clockwise direction, the sprags twist and the edges across
the dimension 'B' wedge between the races, providing a positive drive through each sprag to the inner race. The dimension 'A'
is smaller than the distance between the inner and outer race bearing surfaces. When the outer race rotates in an
anti-clockwise direction, the dimension 'A' is too small to allow the sprags to wedge between the races, allowing the outer
race to rotate freely.
On the illustration shown, when the outer race is rotated in a clockwise direction, the sprags twist and are 'wedged' between
the inner and outer races. The sprags then transfer the rotation of the outer race to the inner race, which rotates at the same
speed.
Lock-Up Clutch Mechanism
The TCC (torque converter clutch) is hydraulically controlled by an EPRS, which is controlled by the TCM. This allows the torque
converter to have three states of operation as follows:
• Fully engaged
• Controlled slip variable engagement
• Fully disengaged.
The TCC is controlled by two hydraulic spool valves located in the valve block. These valves are actuated by pilot pressure
supplied via a solenoid valve which is also located in the valve block. The solenoid valve is operated by PWM (pulse width
modulation) signals from the TCM to give full, partial or no lock-up of the torque converter.
Item Description
A Unlocked condition
B Locked condition
1 Clutch plate
2 Clutch piston
3 Torque converter body
4 Turbine
5 Impeller
6 Stator
7 Piston chamber
8 Turbine chamber
The lock-up clutch is a hydro-mechanical device which eliminates torque converter slip, improving fuel consumption. The
engagement and disengagement is controlled by the TCM to allow a certain amount of controlled 'slip'. This allows a small
difference in the rotational speeds of the impeller and the turbine which results in improved shift quality. The lock-up clutch
comprises a piston and a clutch friction plate.
In the unlocked condition, the oil pressure supplied to the piston chamber and the turbine chamber is equal. Pressurized fluid
flows through a drilling in the turbine shaft and through the piston chamber to the turbine chamber. In this condition the clutch
plate is held away from the torque converter body and torque converter slip is permitted.
In the locked condition, the TCC spool valves are actuated by the EPRS. The fluid flow in the unlocked condition is reversed
and the piston chamber is vented. Pressurized fluid is directed into the turbine chamber and is applied to the clutch piston.
The piston moves with the pressure and pushes the clutch plate against the torque converter body. As the pressure increases,
the friction between the clutch plate and the body increases, finally resulting in full lock-up of the clutch plate with the body.
In this condition there is direct mechanical drive from the engine crankshaft to the transmission planetary gear train.
FLUID PUMP
The fluid pump is an integral part of the transmission. The fluid pump is used to supply hydraulic pressure for the operation of
the control valves and clutches, to pass the fluid through the transmission cooler and to lubricate the gears and shafts.
The ZF 6HP28 fluid pump is a crescent type pump and is located between the intermediate plate and the torque converter. The
pump has a delivery rate of 16 cm3 per revolution.
Item Description
1 Securing ring
2 Shaft oil seal
3 O-ring seal
4 Pump housing
5 Ring gear
6 Crescent spacer
7 Roller bearing
8 Impeller
9 Centering pin
10 Spring washer
11 Outlet port (high pressure)
12 Inlet port (low pressure)
The pump comprises a housing, a crescent spacer, an impeller and a ring gear. The housing has inlet and outlet ports to direct
flow and is located in the intermediate plate by a centering pin. The pump action is achieved by the impeller, ring gear and
crescent spacer.
The crescent spacer is fixed in its position by a pin and is located between the ring gear and the impeller. The impeller is
driven by drive from the torque converter hub which is located on a needle roller bearing in the pump housing. The impeller
teeth mesh with those of the ring gear. When the impeller is rotated, the motion is transferred to the ring gear which rotates
in the same direction.
The rotational motion of the ring gear and the impeller collects fluid from the intake port in the spaces between the teeth.
When the teeth reach the crescent spacer, the oil is trapped in the spaces between the teeth and is carried with the rotation
of the gears. The spacer tapers near the outlet port. This reduces the space between the gear teeth causing a build up of fluid
pressure as the oil reaches the outlet port. When the teeth pass the end of the spacer the pressurized fluid is released into
the outlet port.
The fluid emerging from the outlet port is passed through the fluid pressure control valve. At high operating speeds the
pressure control valve maintains the output pressure to the gearbox at a predetermined maximum level. Excess fluid is
relieved from the pressure control valve and is directed, via the main pressure valve in the valve block, back to the pump inlet
port. This provides a pressurized feed to the pump inlet which prevents cavitation and reduces pump noise.
MECHATRONIC VALVE BLOCK
The Mechatronic valve block is located in the bottom of the transmission and is covered by the fluid pan. The valve block
houses the TCM, electrical actuators, speed sensors and control valves which provide all electro-hydraulic control for all
transmission functions. The Mechatronic valve block comprises the following components:
TCM
Pressure regulator solenoids
Shift control solenoid
Damper
Hydraulic spool valves
Selector valve
Temperature sensor
Turbine speed sensor
Output shaft speed sensor.
Sensors
Speed Sensors
The turbine speed sensor and the output shaft speed sensor are Hall effect type sensors located in the Mechatronic valve block
and are not serviceable items. The TCM monitors the signals from each sensor to determine the input (turbine) speed and the
output shaft speed.
The turbine speed is monitored by the TCM to calculate the slip of the torque converter clutch and internal clutch slip. This
signal allows the TCM to accurately control the slip timing during shifts and adjust clutch application or release pressure for
overlap shift control.
The output shaft speed is monitored by the TCM and compared to engine speed signals received on the CAN bus from the ECM.
Using a comparison of the two signals the TCM calculates the transmission slip ratio for plausibility and maintains adaptive
pressure control.
Temperature Sensor
The temperature sensor is also located in the Mechatronic valve block. The TCM uses the temperature sensor signals to
determine the temperature of the transmission fluid. These signals are used by the TCM to control the transmission operation
to promote faster warm-up in cold conditions or to assist with fluid cooling by controlling the transmission operation when high
fluid temperatures are experienced. If the sensor fails, the TCM will use a default value and a fault code will be stored in the
TCM.
Damper
There is one damper located in the valve housing. The damper is used to regulate and dampen the regulated pressure supplied
via EPRS. The damper is load dependent through modulation of the damper against return spring pressure.
The damper comprises a piston, a housing bore and a spring. The piston is subject to the pressure applied by the spring. The
bore has a connecting port to the function to which it applies. Fluid pressure applied to the applicable component (i.e. a
clutch) is also subjected to the full area of the piston, which moves against the opposing force applied by the spring. The
movement of the piston creates an action similar to a shock absorber, momentarily delaying the build up of pressure in the
circuit. This results in a more gradual application of clutches improving shift quality.
Spool Valves
The valve block spool valves control various functions of the transmission. The spool valves are of conventional design and are
operated by fluid pressure.
Each spool valve is located in its spool bore and held in a default (unpressurized) position by a spring. The spool bore has a
number of ports which allow fluid to flow to other valves and clutches to enable transmission operation. Each spool has a
piston which is waisted to allow fluid to be diverted into the applicable ports when the valve is operated.
When fluid pressure moves a spool, one or more ports in the spool bore are covered or uncovered. Fluid is prevented from
flowing or is allowed to flow around the applicable waisted area of the spool and into another uncovered port. The fluid is
either passed through galleries to actuate another spool, operate a clutch or is returned to the fluid pan.
DRIVE CLUTCHES
Multiplate Drive or Brake Clutch – Typical
Item Description
1 Input shaft
2 Main pressure supply port
3 Piston
4 Cylinder – external plate carrier
5 Clutch plate assembly
6 Baffle plate
7 Diaphragm spring
8 Output shaft
9 Bearing
10 Dynamic pressure equalization chamber
11 Piston chamber
12 Lubrication channel
There are three drive clutches and two brake clutches used in the ZF 6HP28 transmission. Each clutch comprises one or more
friction plates dependent on the output controlled. A typical clutch consists of a number of steel outer plates and inner plates
with friction material bonded to each face.
On 5.0L SC (supercharger) and 3.0L diesel models, the uprated transmission includes additional clutch plates to enable the
transmission to manage the additional power output from these engines.
The clutch plates are held apart mechanically by a diaphragm spring and hydraulically by dynamic pressure. The pressure is
derived from a lubrication channel which supplies fluid to the bearings etc. The fluid is passed via a drilling in the output shaft
into the chamber between the baffle plate and the piston. To prevent inadvertent clutch application due to pressure build up
produced by centrifugal force, the fluid in the dynamic pressure equalization chamber overcomes any pressure in the piston
chamber and holds the piston off the clutch plate assembly.
When clutch application is required, main pressure from the fluid pump is applied to the piston chamber from the supply port.
This main pressure overcomes the low pressure fluid present in the dynamic pressure equalization chamber. The piston moves,
against the pressure applied by the diaphragm spring, and compresses the clutch plate assembly. When the main pressure
falls, the diaphragm spring pushes the piston away from the clutch plate assembly, disengaging the clutch.
PLANETARY GEAR TRAINS

The planetary gear trains used on the ZF 6HP28 transmission comprise a single web planetary gear train and a double web
planetary gear train. These gear trains are known as Lepelletier type gear trains and together produce the six forward gears
and the one reverse gear.
Single Web Planetary Gear Train
The single web planetary gear train comprises:
Sunwheel
Three (naturally aspirated versions) or four (5.0L SC and 3.0L diesel versions) planetary gears
Planetary gear carrier (spider)
Ring gear or annulus.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Cylinder
2 Baffle plate
3 Ring gear
4 Sun gear
5 Planetary gear spider
6 Torque converter input shaft
Torque Converter Input Shaft
Item Description
1 Planetary gear spider
2 Planetary gears (short)
3 Ring gear
4 Output shaft
5 Planetary gear carrier
6 Sunwheel
7 Double planetary gears (long)
8 Sunwheel
The double planetary gear train comprises:
Two sunwheels
Three short planetary gears
Three long planetary gears
Planetary gear carrier
Ring gear or annulus
ELECTRONIC PARK LOCK

The park lock is electronically actuated by solenoid valve located in the valve block. The park lock is engaged by a mechanical
spring system comprising a parking disc and a lock cylinder controlled by a solenoid valve.
The park lock is engaged when the TCM receives a park request from the JaguarDrive selector. When the park lock is released, a
solenoid valve in the valve housing directs hydraulic pressure to the lock cylinder, which moves the piston within the cylinder
and releases the park lock pawl at the rear of the transmission by means of a connecting rod. The solenoid on the lock cylinder
is energized and locks the cylinder piston in the unlocked position. Additional locking of the piston is achieved with ball
catches within the lock cylinder.
When park is selected, the solenoid on the lock cylinder is de-energized, the ball catches are released and the piston is free to
move in the lock cylinder. The solenoid in the valve housing is also de-energized. The spring loaded parking disc pulls the
cylinder piston in the park direction which allows the park disc to move on its mounting. This movement is transferred via the
connecting rod to parking pawl, which is engaged in the park lock gear.
If an electrical failure occurs, the park lock can be manually released by means of an emergency park release lever located in
the floor console. The lever is connected to the parking disc by a cable and allows the park lock to be released manually. For
additional information, refer to 307-05B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

The TCM is an integral part of the Mechatronic valve block which is located at the bottom of the transmission, within the fluid
pan. The TCM is the main controlling component of the transmission.
The TCM processes signals from the transmission speed and temperature sensors, ECM and other vehicle systems. From the
received signal inputs and pre-programmed data, the module calculates the correct gear, torque converter clutch setting and
optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control.
5.0L Petrol - Diagnostics
For a detailed description of the automatic transmission/transaxle, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section n
the workshop manual. REFER to: (307-01B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol)
Transmission Description (Description and Operation),

Transmission Description (Description and Operation),
Transmission Description (Description and Operation).
Fluid Level and Condition Check
CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is low as internal failure can result.
NOTE: The transmission fluid temperature must not be allowed to exceed 50°C (122°F) whilst checking level. Should the
temperature rise above this figure, abort the check and allow the transmission fluid to cool to below 30°C (86°F).
This vehicle is not equipped with a fluid level indicator. An incorrect level may affect the transmission operation and could
result in transmission damage. To correctly check and add fluid to the transmission.
REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
High Fluid Level
A fluid level that is too high may cause the fluid to become aerated due to the churning action of the rotating internal parts.
This will cause erratic control pressure, foaming, loss of fluid from the vent tube and possible transmission damage. If an
overfill condition is identified, with the engine at idle ensure the fluid temperature is within the specified range and allow the
excess fluid to drain until a small thread of fluid runs from the filler/level plug hole.
Low Fluid Level
A low fluid level could result in poor transmission engagement, slipping, or damage. This could also indicate a leak in one of
the transmission seals or gaskets.
REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
Adding Fluid
CAUTION: The use of any other type of transmission fluid other than that specified can result in transmission damage.
If fluid needs to be added, add fluid in 0.50 liter increments through the fill hole Opening. Do not overfill the fluid. For fluid
type, refer to the General Specification chart in this section.
REFER to: Specifications (307-01B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Specifications).
Fluid Condition Check

1. Check the fluid level.
REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
2. Observe the color and the odor of the fluid. The color under normal circumstances should be Honey.
3. Allow the fluid to drip onto a facial tissue and examine the stain.
4. If evidence of solid material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further inspection.
NOTE: In the event of a transmission unit replacement for internal failure, the oil cooler and pipes must also be replaced.


Visual Inspection
Mechanical Electrical Hydraulic
Damaged/stuck shift mechanism Blown fuse(s) Fluid level too high/low

Damaged automatic transmission casing Damaged, loose or corroded connectors Poor condition of fluid
Wiring harness Fluid leak
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
If the control module/transmission is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module/transmission.
read by the manufacturer approved diagnostic system).
into account.

P0121-86 Throttle/Pedal Position Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
Sensor A Circuit Throttle/Pedal Position
Range/Performance - signal Sensor Fault (Data
invalid received over CAN Bus)
P0219-86 Engine Overspeed Condition Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
- signal invalid Engine speed too low or
too high (Data received
over CAN Bus)
P0500-81 Vehicle Speed Sensor A - Check DSC module for stored DTCs
invalid serial data received Vehicle Speed Sensor
fault (Data received over
CAN Bus)
P0501-81 Vehicle Speed Sensor A Check Anti-lock braking system module for stored
Range/Performance invalid Vehicle Speed receive DTCs. Check correct Differential is installed to the
serial data received over CAN Bus does not vehicle
match Transmission
Output-Shaft speed
P0561-1C System Voltage Unstable - Check Engine control module for stored DTCs. Check
Circuit voltage out of range Power supply voltage out Charging System and Battery condition
of range when engine
running
P0562-21 System Voltage Low - signal Refer to Circuit diagrams and check Power and Ground
amplitude < minimum Circuit low voltage. Circuit for fault. Check Engine control module for
Battery supply voltage to stored DTCs. Check Charging System and Battery
Transmission Control condition
Module (Transmission
control module)
P0563-22 System Voltage High - signal Check Engine control module for stored DTCs. Check
amplitude > maximum High Battery charge, Charging System and Battery condition
alternator fault
P0601-41 Internal Control Module Re-configure the Transmission control module using
Memory Check Sum Error - Software error the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
general checksum failure Transmission control DTC and re-test. If DTC remains, Suspect the
module failure Transmission control module. Install a new
Transmission control module as required, refer to the
new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0604-00 Internal Control Module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Random Access Memory Shift-by-Wire fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
(RAM) Error - no sub type the new module/component installation note at the
information top of the DTC Index
P0605-41 Internal Control Module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Read Only Memory (ROM) General checksum failure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Error - general checksum the new module/component installation note at the
failure top of the DTC Index
P0606-04 Transmission control module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Processor - System Internal Micro controller new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failures component faults the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - signal rate of Micro controller new Transmission control module as required, refer to
change below threshold component faults the new module/component installation note at the
Processor-internal electronic Micro controller new Transmission control module as required, refer to
failure component faults the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - System Internal Micro controller new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Processor - Algorithm Based Micro controller new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Processor - Circuit Short to Watchdog fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground the new module/component installation note at the
Battery the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - Circuit Open Watchdog fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground or Open the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - signal amplitude Watchdog fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
< minimum the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - signal amplitude Watchdog fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
> maximum the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - watchdog / Watchdog fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
safety Micro controller the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - internal Micro controller new Transmission control module as required, refer to
electronic failure component faults the new module/component installation note at the
Processor-Event Information Watchdog fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
www.JagDocs.com
P061B-02 Internal Control Module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Torque Calculation Transmission control new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Performance - general signal module - positive torque the new module/component installation note at the
failure signal not valid top of the DTC Index
P061B-26 Internal Control Module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Torque Calculation Transmission control new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Performance - signal rate of module positive torque the new module/component installation note at the
change below threshold signal not valid top of the DTC Index
P062F-04 Internal Control Module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
EEPROM Error - System EEPROM communication new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Internal Failures error the new module/component installation note at the
P0642-21 Sensor Reference Voltage A Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Low - signal Sensor supply voltage new Transmission control module as required, refer to
amplitude < minimum fault low the new module/component installation note at the
P0643-22 Sensor Reference Voltage A Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit High - signal Sensor supply voltage new Transmission control module as required, refer to
amplitude > maximum fault high the new module/component installation note at the
P0657-13 Actuator Supply Voltage A Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit / Open - Circuit Open Actuator supply (pressure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
control valves etc) Open the new module/component installation note at the
Circuit top of the DTC Index
P0657-1C Actuator Supply Voltage A Refer to electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Circuit / Open - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Transmission control module connector for signs of
voltage out of range control valves etc) water ingress or damage, check pin 7 for Short to
voltage plausibility fault Power or Ground (should NOT be connected and
harness terminal should have a bung fitted). If no
fault identified, suspect the Transmission control
module. Check and install a new Transmission control
module as required, refer to the new
DTC Index
Circuit Low - Circuit Short to Actuator supply (pressure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground control valves etc) the new module/component installation note at the
voltage Short to Ground top of the DTC Index
Circuit High - Circuit Short to Actuator supply (pressure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Battery control valves etc) the new module/component installation note at the
voltage Short to Power top of the DTC Index
P0667-01 PCM / Engine control module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
/ Transmission control General electrical failure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
module Internal Temperature the new module/component installation note at the
Sensor A Range/Performance top of the DTC Index
- General Electrical Failure
/ Transmission control Internal Electronic Failure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
- System Internal Failures
/ Transmission control Internal electronic failure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
- internal electronic failure
P0700-02 Transmission Control System Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and
(MIL Request) - General General Signal failure Investigate as required
signal failure
P0700-22 Transmission Control System If any of the following DTCs are also present;
(MIL Request) - signal Double fault from P074013, P096712, P273912, P273012, P272112,
amplitude > maximum monitoring of internal P096312, P276312, P097112, suspect the Transmission
power supply and control module, check and install a new Transmission
pressure control module as required, refer to the new
regulator/solenoid module/component installation note at the top of the
control software DTC Index
P0700-75 Transmission Control System Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and
(MIL Request) - Emergency Emergency Position Not investigate as required
Position Not Reachable Reachable
P0710-13 Transmission Fluid Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Temperature Sensor A Circuit Transmission fluid Transmission control module. Install a new
- Circuit Open temperature sensor Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Circuit Open Circuit new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
Temperature Sensor A Circuit General electrical failure Transmission control module. Install a new
Range/Performance - Transmission control module as required, refer to the
General Electrical Failure new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0711-22 Transmission Fluid Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
Temperature Sensor A Circuit Signal amplitude > driving vehicle until normal operating temperature is
Range/Performance - signal maximum. Excessive achieved. Reads DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect the
amplitude > maximum jump in temperature Transmission control module. Install a new
the DTC Index
Low - Circuit Short to Ground temperature sensor Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Circuit Short to Ground new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
Temperature Sensor A Circuit General electrical failure Transmission control module. Install a new
High-General Electrical Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Failure new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
High - Circuit Short to temperature sensor Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Battery Circuit Short to Power new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0716-14 Turbine/Input Shaft Speed Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Sensor A Circuit Turbine/Input Shaft Transmission control module. Install a new
Range/Performance - Circuit Speed Sensor Circuit Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Short to Ground or Open Short to Ground or Open new module/component installation note at the top of
Circuit the DTC Index
P0716-21 Turbine/Input Shaft Speed Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect the
Range/Performance - signal Speed Sensor signal too Transmission control module as required, refer to the
amplitude < minimum small new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0716-22 Turbine/Input Shaft Speed Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect the
Range/Performance - signal Speed Sensor signal Transmission control module as required, refer to the
amplitude > maximum above maximum new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0717-12 Turbine/Input Shaft Speed Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Sensor A Circuit No Signal - Turbine/input shaft speed Transmission control module. Install a new
Circuit Short to Battery sensor A Circuit Short to Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Power new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0720-12 Output Shaft Speed Sensor Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit - Circuit Short to Transmission output Transmission control module. Install a new
Battery shaft speed sensor Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Circuit Short to Power new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
Circuit - Circuit Short to Transmission output Transmission control module. Install a new
Ground or Open shaft speed sensor Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Circuit Short to Ground or new module/component installation note at the top of
Open Circuit the DTC Index
P0721-22 Output Shaft Speed Sensor Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect the
Circuit Range/Performance - Transmission output Transmission control module. Install a new
signal amplitude > shaft speed sensor Transmission control module as required, refer to the
maximum signal above maximum new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0721-27 Output Shaft Speed Sensor Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect the
Circuit Range/Performance - Output shaft speed Transmission control module. Install a new
signal rate of change above negative gradient too Transmission control module as required, refer to the
threshold high new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
Circuit Range/Performance - Signal plausibility failure Transmission control module. Install a new
signal plausibility failure Transmission control module as required, refer to the
the DTC Index
P0731-07 Incorrect Gear Ratio- Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Mechanical Failures Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (gearbox) internal
Mechanical Failures fault. Install a new Transmission as required, refer to
P0740-13 Torque Converter Clutch Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Solenoid Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid Transmission control module. Install a new
Circuit Open 2 Circuit Open Circuit Transmission control module as required, refer to the
the DTC Index
P0741-07 Torque Converter Clutch Suspect torque converter lockup clutch. Install a new
Solenoid Circuit Too high slip at torque torque converter, refer to the new module/component
Performance/Stuck Off - converter clutch. installation note at the top of the DTC Index. If
Mechanical Failures Mechanical Failures transmission fluid is in very poor condition and dirty,
install a new transmission, refer to the new
DTC Index
P0745-04 Pressure Control Solenoid A Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
- System Internal Failures System Internal Failures new Transmission control module as required, refer to
- Supervision Software Supervision Software new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failure Failure the new module/component installation note at the
P0758-12 Shift Solenoid B Electrical - Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery Circuit Short to Power new Transmission control module as required, refer to
P0758-13 Shift Solenoid B Electrical - Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Open Solenoid valve 1 or new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Pressure control Solenoid the new module/component installation note at the
G Circuit Open Circuit top of the DTC Index
P0771-71 Shift Solenoid E Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a

Performance/Stuck Off - Actuator stuck new Transmission control module as required, refer to
actuator stuck the new module/component installation note at the
P0775-04 Pressure Control Solenoid B Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
- System Internal Failures System Internal Failures new Transmission control module as required, refer to
- Supervision Software Supervision Software new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failure Failure the new module/component installation note at the
P0781-07 1-2 Shift - Mechanical Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Failures Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
P0781-77 2-1 Shift - commanded Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
position not reachable Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
P0798-1A Pressure Control Solenoid C Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Electrical - Circuit Resistance Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Below Threshold C Circuit resistance the new module/component installation note at the
below threshold top of the DTC Index
P0798-1E Pressure Control Solenoid C Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Electrical - Circuit Short to Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground C electrical circuit short the new module/component installation note at the
to ground top of the DTC Index
P0798-21 Pressure Control Solenoid C Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Electrical - signal amplitude Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
< minimum C Electrical signal the new module/component installation note at the
amplitude < minimum top of the DTC Index
P0814-62 Transmission Range Display Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit - signal compare Transmission Range new Transmission control module as required, refer to
failure Display Circuit signal the new module/component installation note at the
compare failure top of the DTC Index
P0826-08 Up and Down Switch circuit - Check Central junction box and Instrument cluster for
Bus Signal Message Failures Invalid CAN signal from stored DTCs. Check gear change switches for correct
BCM/Instrument cluster operation. Refer to circuit diagrams and check CAN bus
Stuck switch for a circuit fault
CAN bus circuit fault
P0826-81 Up and Down Switch Circuit - Check Central junction box and Instrument cluster for
invalid serial data received Invalid Can signal from stored DTCs. Check Gear Change Switches for correct
BCM / Instrument cluster operation. Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN
Stuck switch Bus for Circuit fault
CAN Bus Circuit fault
P0826-88 Up and Down Switch Circuit - Check Central junction box and Steering Wheel Ice
Bus off SWM to BCM / Switches for stored DTCs. Refer to Circuit diagrams
Instrument cluster LIN and check LIN Bus for Circuit fault
Bus failure
Failures Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission internal fault. Install
Mechanical Failures a new Transmission as required, refer to the new
DTC Index
P0829-77 6-5 Shift - Commanded Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Position Not Reachable Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission internal fault. Install
Mechanical Failures a new Transmission as required, refer to the new
DTC Index
P084F-01 Park / Neutral Switch Input Check for correct output at Transmission control
Circuit - General Electrical Wrong voltage level module park signal pin (check in all positions) 12 volts
Failure detected on Park/No Park in Park, 0 volts in all other positions. If fault
signal identified, suspect the Transmission control module.
Install a new Transmission control module as required,
refer to the new module/component installation note
at the top of the DTC Index. If no fault identified,
check Park signal circuit to Transmission Shift Module
for short, open circuit.
P0850-01 Park / Neutral Switch Input Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit - General Electrical General electrical failure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failure the new module/component installation note at the
P0850-02 Park / Neutral Switch Input Check park lock mechanism. If park lock operation is
Circuit - General signal General signal failure correct, suspect the transmission control module.
failure Check and install a new transmission control module
as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
programme is in operation, prior to the installation of
P0850-29 Park / Neutral Switch Input Check park lock mechanism. If park lock operation is
Circuit - signal invalid Signal invalid correct, suspect the transmission control module.
Check and install a new transmission control module
as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
programme is in operation, prior to the installation of
P850-1C Park / Neutral Switch Input Check park lock mechanism, if park lock operation
Circuit - circuit voltage out Circuit voltage out of correct suspect the Transmission control module.
of range range Install a new Transmission control module as required,
refer to the new module/component installation note
P0919-93 Gear Shift Position Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Error - no operation No shifting despite driver new Transmission control module as required, refer to
request the new module/component installation note at the
P0919-94 Gear Shift Position Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Error - unexpected operation Shifting without driver new Transmission control module as required, refer to
request the new module/component installation note at the
P0938-29 Hydraulic Oil Temperature Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
Sensor Range/Performance - Transmission fluid driving vehicle until normal operating temperature is
signal invalid temperature compared achieved. Read DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect the
with module temperature Transmission control module. Install a new
fault Transmission control module as required, refer to the
the DTC Index
Control Circuit High - Circuit Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Short to Battery 1 Circuit Short to Power the new module/component installation note at the
Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Circuit Open B Control Circuit Open the new module/component installation note at the
Circuit Short to Ground or B Control Circuit Short to the new module/component installation note at the
Open Ground or Open top of the DTC Index
Control Circuit Low - Circuit Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Short to Ground 2 Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
www.JagDocs.com
Control Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Circuit Short to Ground or 3 Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
Open or Open Circuit top of the DTC Index
Short to Ground 3 Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
P0972-22 Shift Solenoid A Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Range/Performance - Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
signal amplitude > 1 current too large the new module/component installation note at the
maximum top of the DTC Index
Circuit Low - Circuit Short to Shift solenoid A control new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
Circuit Low - Circuit Short to Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground or Open 1 Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
or Open Circuit top of the DTC Index
P0973-1A Shift Solenoid A Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Low - Circuit Shift Solenoid A control new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Resistance Below Threshold circuit resistance below the new module/component installation note at the
threshold top of the DTC Index
P0973-1E Shift Solenoid A Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Low - Circuit Shift Solenoid A control new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Resistance Out Of Range circuit resistance out of the new module/component installation note at the
range top of the DTC Index
P0976-11 Shift Solenoid B Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Low - Circuit Short to Solenoid valve 2 Circuit new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
P0976-14 Shift Solenoid B Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Low - Circuit Short to Solenoid valve 2 Circuit new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground or Open Short to Ground or Open the new module/component installation note at the
Circuit top of the DTC Index
P1674-04 Control Module Software Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Corrupted - System Internal System internal failures new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failures the new module/component installation note at the
P1674-48 Control Module Software Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Corrupted - Supervision Supervision software new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Software Failure failure the new module/component installation note at the
P1707-07 Transfer Case Neutral or Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging and
Park/Neutral Indication Transfer case neutral or disengaging the parking lock several times. If the DTC
Circuit - commanded park/neutral indication recurs, check parking lock components and replace as
position not reachable circuit - mechanical required. If no faulty park lock component is found
failures Clear DTC and the DTC returns suspect the
Transmission control module. Install a new
the DTC Index
Park/Neutral Indication Transfer case neutral or disengaging the parking lock several times. If the DTC
Circuit - Actuator Stuck Open park/neutral indication recurs, check parking lock components and replace as
circuit - Actuator stuck required. If no faulty park lock component is found
open Clear DTC and the DTC returns suspect the
the DTC Index
Park/Neutral Indication Commanded position not disengaging the parking lock several times. If the DTC
Circuit - commanded reachable recurs, check parking lock components and replace as
position not reachable required. If no faulty park lock component is found
Clear DTC and the DTC returns suspect the
the DTC Index
P2700-07 Transmission Friction Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Element A Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
Range/Performance - Mechanical Failures fault. Install a new Transmission as required, refer to
Mechanical Failures the new module/component installation note at the
Element B Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
Element C Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
Element D Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
Element E Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
P2713-04 Pressure Control Solenoid D Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
- System Internal Failures System internal failures new Transmission control module as required, refer to
- Supervision Software Supervision software new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failure failure the new module/component installation note at the
> maximum D Electrical signal the new module/component installation note at the
amplitude > maximum top of the DTC Index
P2716-1A Pressure Control Solenoid D Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Below Threshold D circuit resistance below the new module/component installation note at the
threshold top of the DTC Index
P2716-1E Pressure Control Solenoid D Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Out Of Range D circuit resistance out the new module/component installation note at the
of range top of the DTC Index
Control Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Circuit Short to Ground or D Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
Open or Open Circuit top of the DTC Index
Short to Ground D Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
Short to Battery D Circuit Short to Power the new module/component installation note at the
P2722-04 Pressure Control Solenoid E Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
- System Internal Failures Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
E system internal failures the new module/component installation note at the
- Supervision Software Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failure E supervision control the new module/component installation note at the
software failure top of the DTC Index
> maximum E Electrical signal the new module/component installation note at the
P2725-1A Pressure Control Solenoid E Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Below Threshold E electrical resistance the new module/component installation note at the
below threshold top of the DTC Index
P2725-1E Pressure Control Solenoid E Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Out Of Range E circuit resistance out of the new module/component installation note at the
range top of the DTC Index
Circuit Short to Ground or E Control Circuit Short to the new module/component installation note at the
Open Ground or Open Circuit top of the DTC Index
Short to Ground E Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
Control Circuit High-Circuit Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Short to Battery E Circuit Short to Power the new module/component installation note at the
P2731-04 Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
F-System Internal Failures Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
F no sub type the new module/component installation note at the
information top of the DTC Index
P2731-48 Pressure Control Solenoid F - Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Supervision Software Failure Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
F supervision software the new module/component installation note at the
P2734-22 Pressure Control Solenoid F Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Electrical-signal amplitude > Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
maximum F Electrical signal the new module/component installation note at the
P2734-1A Pressure Control Solenoid F Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Electrical-Circuit Resistance Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Below Threshold F electrical circuit the new module/component installation note at the
resistance below top of the DTC Index
threshold
P2734-1E Pressure Control Solenoid F Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Electrical-Circuit Resistance Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Out Of Range F electrical circuit the new module/component installation note at the
resistance out of range top of the DTC Index
Circuit Short to Ground or F Control Circuit Short to the new module/component installation note at the
Open Ground or Open top of the DTC Index
Control Circuit Low - Circuit Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Short to Ground F Control Circuit Short to the new module/component installation note at the
Ground top of the DTC Index
Control Circuit High - Circuit Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Short to Battery F Control Circuit Short to the new module/component installation note at the
Power top of the DTC Index
P2763-12 Torque Converter Clutch Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Pressure Control Solenoid Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Control Circuit High - Circuit F Circuit Short to Power the new module/component installation note at the
Short to Battery top of the DTC Index
P2764-11 Torque Converter Clutch Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Pressure Control Solenoid Torque converter clutch new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Control Circuit Low - Circuit pressure control solenoid the new module/component installation note at the
Short to Ground control Circuit Short to top of the DTC Index
Ground
P2764-1A Torque Converter Clutch Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Control Circuit Low-Circuit pressure control solenoid the new module/component installation note at the
Resistance Below Threshold control circuit resistance top of the DTC Index
below threshold
P2764-1E Torque Converter Clutch Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Control Circuit Low-Circuit pressure control solenoid the new module/component installation note at the
Resistance Out Of Range control circuit resistance top of the DTC Index
out of range
P2807-11 Pressure Control Solenoid G Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
- Circuit Short to Ground Park solenoid Circuit new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
- Circuit Short to Battery Park solenoid Circuit new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Short to Power the new module/component installation note at the
- Circuit Open Park solenoid Circuit new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Open Circuit the new module/component installation note at the
P2807-14 Pressure Control Solenoid G Carry out any diagnostic pinpoint tests associated
- Circuit Short to Ground or Park solenoid Circuit with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
Open Short to Ground or Open diagnostic system. Suspect the Transmission control
Circuit module. Install a new Transmission control module as
B1087-82 LIN Bus "A" - alive / Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
sequence counter incorrect / Alive counter fault Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
not updated Transmission control module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN Bus)
B1087-83 LIN Bus "A" - value of signal Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs Refer
protection calculation Checksum error to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
incorrect Transmission control module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN Bus)
B1087-87 LIN Bus "A" - missing Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs Refer
message GSM is NOT visible to the to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Transmission control Transmission control module to Transmission Shift
module on the LIN Bus Module for Short or Open Circuit (LIN Bus)
B1087-88 LIN Bus "A" - Bus off Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
LIN Bus Circuit fault. Transmission control module to Transmission shift
Check hardware of LIN module for Short, Open Circuit (LIN Bus). Check
connection between Transmission Shift Module for related DTCs
transmission and GSM
U0001-88 High Speed CAN Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check CAN
Communication Bus - Bus off CAN Bus off Bus for Circuit fault
U0100-82 Lost Communication With Check Engine control module for stored DTCs
Engine control module/PCM Alive counter fault
"A" - alive / sequence
updated
U0100-83 Lost Communication With Check Engine control module for stored DTCs
Engine control module/PCM Checksum fault
"A" - value of signal
incorrect
Engine control module/PCM CAN Timeout
NOTE: Do NOT install a new Engine control
"A" - missing message module if an Engine control module Timeout DTC is
only logged in the Transmission control module, the
failure is NOT with the Engine control module
Check Engine control module for stored DTCs. Check

CAN Bus Circuit for fault
U0103-82 Lost Communication With Check Transmission shift module for stored DTCs.
Gear Shift Control Module Alive counter fault Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
A-alive / sequence counter
Gear Shift Control Module A Checksum fault Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
- value of signal protection
Gear Shift Control Module A CAN Timeout Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
- missing message
U0122-82 Lost Communication With Check Anti-lock braking system for stored DTCs. Check
Vehicle Dynamics Control Alive counter fault CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Module - alive / sequence
updated
Vehicle Dynamics Control Checksum fault CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Module - value of signal
incorrect
Vehicle Dynamics Control CAN Timeout CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Module - missing message
U0126-00 Lost Communication With Check Steering angle sensor for stored DTCs. Check
Steering Angle Sensor Lost Communication CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Module - no sub type With Steering Angle
information Sensor Module
U0128-87 Lost Communication With Check Electronic Parking Brake Module for stored DTCs.
Park Brake Control Module - CAN timeout electronic Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
missing message parking brake module
U0140-82 Lost Communication With Check Central junction box for stored DTCs. Check CAN
Body Control Module - alive Alive counter fault Bus Circuit for fault
/ sequence counter incorrect
/ not updated
Body Control Module - value Checksum fault Bus Circuit for fault
of signal protection
Body Control Module - CAN Timeout Bus Circuit for fault
missing message
U0155-87 Lost Communication With Check Instrument cluster for stored DTCs. Check CAN
Instrument Panel Cluster CAN timeout instrument Bus Circuit for fault
(Instrument cluster) Control cluster
Module - missing message
U0300-68 Control Module - event Check Central junction box software level, Check
information Transmission software Transmission control module Software level, Update
does not match vehicle software as required using the manufacturer approved
network process
U0401-08 Invalid Data Received From Check Engine control module for stored DTCs, Check
Engine control module/PCM Inaccurate engine speed, CAN Bus circuit for faults
A - Bus Signal Message torque information
Failures
U0401-68 Invalid Data Received from Check Engine control module for stored DTCs. Check
Engine control module/PCM Inaccurate engine speed, CAN Bus Circuit for fault
A - event information torque information
U0401-86 Invalid Data Received from Check Engine control module for stored DTCs. Check
Engine control module/PCM Inaccurate engine speed, CAN Bus Circuit for fault
A - Signal Invalid torque information
U0404-68 Invalid Data Received from Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Gear Shift Control Module A Incorrect CAN data Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN Bus
- event information received from for Circuit fault
Transmission shift
module
U0404-81 Invalid Data Received from Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Gear Shift Control Module A Incorrect LIN data Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN Bus
- Invalid Serial Data received from for Circuit fault
Received Transmission shift
module
www.JagDocs.com
U0416-68 Invalid Data Received From Check Engine control module for stored DTCs. Check
Vehicle Dynamics Control Event information brake CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Module - event information information
U0422-68 Invalid Data Received From Check Central junction box for stored DTCs. Check CAN
Body Control Module - event Event information invalid Bus Circuit for fault
information Power mode information
U101B-87 Lost Communication With Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
GSM - Multiple Bus-missing Missing message lost Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN Bus
message communication with for Circuit fault
Transmission Shift
Module (multiple Bus)
U3000-49 Control Module - internal Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
electronic failure Internal electronic failure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
U3000-4B Control Module - Circuit Check and correct oil level. Check hydraulic flow
resistance above threshold Internal electronic failure through oil cooler and pipe circuit for restriction or
blockage. If no restrictions found, suspect the
the DTC Index
U3000-81 Control Module - invalid Reflash the Transmission control module using the
serial data received Vehicle or Engine type manufacturer approved process
signal incorrect from BCM
or incorrect Transmission
control module software
installed
U3001-94 Control Module Improper Check Engine control module For Power (generator)
Shutdown - unexpected Control Module Improper faults. Check Power and Ground Circuit and Battery for
operation Shutdown (voltage fault. Clear DTCs. Road Test. If DTC reoccurs suspect
related) the Transmission control module. Install a new
the DTC Index
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Fluid Level Check
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
307-452
Wrench, Transmission Filler Plug
Activation
WARNINGS:
Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.
Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.
1.
The following steps must be observed before starting the
transmission fluid level check.
The vehicle must be on a horizontal ramp.
The parking brake must be applied.
The engine must be running for 2 minutes with the transmission
control switch (TCS) in the "P" position.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the transmission fluid temperature is

below 30 degrees before starting the fluid level check.
Connect Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment to the vehicle.
3.
Apply, and hold, the footbrake.
Move the selector lever from 'P' through all the gear positions,
pausing in each gear position for 2-3 seconds and return to the
'P' position.
Installation).
6. Place a suitable container under the transmission fluid fill plug.

7. CAUTIONS:
The transmission fluid level must only be checked

when the temperature of the fluid is between 30 degrees
and 50 degrees. The fluid level obtained will be incorrect if
the reading is outside this temperature range.
Discard the seal.
8. NOTE: Use transmission fluid meeting Jaguar

specification.
If the transmission fluid does not come out of the

transmission fluid fill plug hole the transmission fluid level
is insufficient. If this is the case add the transmission fluid
in 0.5 liter units into the transmission fluid fill plug hole
until fluid comes out.
9. NOTE: Make sure the transmission fluid temperature
does not exceed 50 °C (122 °F). If the transmission fluid
temperature does exceed 50 °C (122 °F) stop the
transmission fluid level check and allow the transmission
fluid to cool until the temperature is below 30 °C (86 °F).
Allow the transmission fluid to drain from the transmission

fluid filler plug hole until the flow almost stops.
Using the special tool, install the new transmission fluid fill
plug.
11. CAUTION: Make sure the transmission fluid fill plug is

tightened to the correct specification. Failure to follow this
To make sure the transmission fill plug is torqued to

the correct specification. Using the special tool and
torque wrench the following calculation steps must be
followed.
Step 1. Multiply 35 Nm by the effective length of the
torque wrench (1).
Step 2. Add the effective length of the special tool (2)
to the effective length of the torque wrench (1).
Step 3. Divide the total of step 1 by the total of step 2.
Step 4. Set the torque wrench to the figure arrived at in
step 3.
Tighten the transmission fluid fill plug to the torque
given by the calculation.

13. Remove the container.
Installation).
16. Disconnect the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment from the vehicle.
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
307-452
Wrench, Transmission Filler Plug
WARNINGS:
Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.
Installation).
3. Place a container under the transmission.

5. CAUTION: Discard the component.
Allow the fluid to drain.
6. CAUTION: Make sure that a new component is

installed.
Torque: 8 Nm
7. NOTE: Use transmission fluid meeting Jaguar

specification.
Refill the transmission with fluid.

8. Allow the transmission fluid to drain from the transmission
fluid filler plug hole until the flow almost stops.
Loosely install the transmission fluid fill plug.
10. CAUTION: Make sure the transmission fluid fill plug is

tightened to the correct specification. Failure to follow this
To make sure the transmission fill plug is torqued to

the correct specification. Using the special tool and
torque wrench the following calculation steps must be
followed.
Step 1. Multiply 35 Nm by the effective length of the
torque wrench (1).
Step 2. Add the effective length of the special tool (2)
to the effective length of the torque wrench (1).
Step 3. Divide the total of step 1 by the total of step 2.
Step 4. Set the torque wrench to the figure arrived at in
step 3.
Tighten the transmission fluid fill plug to the torque
given by the calculation.
11. Carry out a transmission fluid level check.

Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01B Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
5.0L Petrol - Input Shaft Seal
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
100-012-01
Slide Hammer Adapter
307-613
Holding Pins, Torque Converter
308-246
Installer, Front Seal
308-375
Remover, Input and Output Seal
Removal

www.JagDocs.com
3. Refer to: Transmission - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (307-01B Automatic
Petrol, Removal).
5. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the edges of the

component.
Discard the seal.
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 100-012-01, 308-375
Installation

2. NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark is visable
through the inspection hole as illustrated.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the torque converter is fully

located into the oil pump drive.
4. Refer to: Transmission - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (307-01B Automatic

Petrol, Installation).
5.0L Petrol - Extension Housing Seal
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
100-012-01
Slide Hammer Adapter
204-264
Pinion Seal Replacer
205-053
Retainer, Drive Flange
303-D121
Puller, General Purpose
308-375
Remover, Input and Output Seal
Removal
3. Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Transmission Support Insulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (307-01B

5. CAUTION: Discard the nut.
6. Special Tool(s): 303-D121
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 100-012-01, 308-375

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
Install a new seal.
2. WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is installed.
Torque: 60 Nm
3. Refer to: Transmission Support Insulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (307-01B

4. Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Control Module (TCM) and Main Control Valve
Body
Removal
NOTE: The transmission control module (TCM) is part of the main control valve body and cannot be serviced separately.
3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter (307-01B Automatic
4.
5.
6. CAUTION: Discard the component.
NOTE: Note the position of the manual park brake

release.
8.
9.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that when fully fitted, all seals protrude by

the same amount.
Install a new seal block.
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that when fully fitted, all seals protrude by

the same amount.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the manual park release is
correctly engaged.
Torque: 8 Nm
4. CAUTION: Make sure that a new component is

installed.
5.
6.
7. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter (307-01B Automatic
9. If a new component has been installed, configure using Jaguar approved

diagnostic equipment.
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter
Removal
Installation).
4. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01B Automatic

5.

7. CAUTIONS:

Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

5.0L Petrol - Transmission Support Insulator V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Removal
Installation).
3. CAUTION: During this procedure the transmission

crossmember is removed, make sure the transmission is
correctly supported to avoid damaging associated
components.
Torque: 48 Nm

Torque: 55 Nm
Installation

5.0L Petrol - Transmission, Transmission Fluid Cooler and Transmission Fluid
Cooler Tubes V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal


5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Install blanking caps to the exposed ports.
11.
12.
13.
Make sure that the alignment mark is visible through
the inspection hole on removal of the last torque
converter bolt.

15.
Using a suitable tie strap, secure the driveshaft.
16. WARNING: Make sure that the transmission is secured with

Using a suitable stand, support the transmission.
17.
18. NOTE: The transmission is lowered for access.
Lower the rear of the transmission for access.
www.JagDocs.com
20.
21.
22.
23. CAUTION: Make sure that the torque converter

remains in the transmission.
NOTE: This step requires the aid of another

technician.
Install the torque converter retainer.
24. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
Clamp the hoses to minimize coolant loss.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Installation

2. Torque: 11 Nm
3. Torque: 5 Nm
4.
5.
6. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
www.JagDocs.com


Raise the powertrain assembly jack and transmission

assembly.
9. NOTE: Transmission shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 48 Nm
10. Torque: 48 Nm
11. Torque: 48 Nm
12. Torque: 45 Nm
13. Remove the support.
14. Torque: 110 Nm
NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark is visible

Torque: 63 Nm
16.
17.
18.
19.
20. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
22.
23.


27. Check and top up the cooling system as required.
28. Set the heater controls to HOT.
29. CAUTION: Observe the engine temperature warning light. If the

warning light is displayed, switch off immediately and allow to cool.
Failure to follow this instruction may cause damage to the vehicle.
Start the engine and allow to idle until hot air is emited at the face
registers.
Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM and maintain at 2000 RPM until the
engine cooling fan operates.
to go cold.
Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
leakage.
33. WARNINGS:
When releasing the cooling system pressure, cover the coolant

expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.

out this procedure.
CAUTIONS:
lower level mark.
Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at 50%.

34. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01B Automatic

5.0L Petrol - Transmission and Transmission Fluid Cooler V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal


5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Install blanking caps to the exposed ports.
11.
12.
13.
Make sure that the alignment mark is visible through
the inspection hole on removal of the last torque
converter bolt.

15.
Using a suitable tie strap, secure the driveshaft.

17.
www.JagDocs.com
20.
21.
22.


technician.
24. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
25.
26.
27.
Installation
1. Torque: 5 Nm
2.
3.
4. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.



assembly.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 48 Nm
8. Torque: 48 Nm
9. Torque: 48 Nm
10. Torque: 45 Nm
12. Torque: 110 Nm
NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark is visible

Torque: 63 Nm
14.
15.
16.
17.
18. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
20.
21.


25. Check and top up the cooling system as required.
26. Set the heater controls to HOT.

Start the engine and allow to idle until hot air is emited at the face
registers.
www.JagDocs.com
Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM and maintain at 2000 RPM until the
engine cooling fan operates.
to go cold.
Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
leakage.
31. WARNINGS:
When releasing the cooling system pressure, cover the coolant

expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.

out this procedure.
CAUTIONS:
lower level mark.
Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at 50%.

32. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01B Automatic

5.0L Petrol - Transmission V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal


5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11.
12.
13.
Make sure that the alignment mark is visable
through the inspection hole on removal of the last
torque converter bolt.
14.


16.
www.JagDocs.com
19.
20.
21.

technician.

5.0L Petrol - Transmission V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Installation



assembly.
Torque: 48 Nm
3. Torque: 48 Nm
4. Torque: 48 Nm
5. Torque: 45 Nm
7. Torque: 110 Nm
NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark is visable

Torque: 63 Nm
9.
10.
11.
12.
13. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
15.
16.


www.JagDocs.com
Procedures).
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol -
Item Specification
Transmission fluid ATF Shell M 1375.4
Vehicles with 3.0L diesel engine
Description Nm lb-ft
Transmission fluid cooler tube to transmission housing bolt 23 17
Transmission fluid cooler tube bracket to engine oil pan retaining bolt 23 17
Vehicles with 5.0L engine
Description Nm lb-ft
Transmission fluid cooler tube to transmission housing bolt 23 17
Transmission fluid cooler tube bracket to engine oil pan retaining bolt 11 8
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Cooling - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Latch-plate
2 Feed hose and pipe (from transmission)
4 Engine coolant hose connections
5 Return hose and pipe (to transmission)
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Cooling - Overview
OVERVIEW
Transmission cooling is provided by a transmission fluid cooler, which transfers heat from the transmission to the engine
cooling system. The transmission fluid cooler is attached to a mounting bracket on the front subframe, in the front left corner
of the engine compartment.
Two hose and pipe assemblies connect the transmission fluid cooler to the automatic transmission. Two engine coolant hose
connections are incorporated into the top of the transmission fluid cooler for the supply and return of coolant from the engine
cooling system. For additional information, refer to 303-03D Engine Cooling.
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Cooling - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
Fluid from the pump in the automatic transmission flows through the feed hose and pipe to the transmission fluid cooler. The
fluid then flows through the transmission fluid cooler, and the return hose and pipe, to the sump of the automatic
transmission.
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Cooling
For a detailed description of the automatic transmission cooling system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: (307-02B Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol)
Transmission Cooling (Description and Operation),

Transmission Cooling (Description and Operation),
Transmission Cooling (Description and Operation).

1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Feed and return tubes

Connections to the automatic transmission and the automatic transmission fluid cooler
Automatic transmission fluid level
the next step.
Symptom Chart
Condition Possible Causes Action

Over heating of the Obstruction in the automatic Flush out the automatic transmission fluid cooler with new
automatic transmission fluid cooler automatic transmission fluid. If the flushing is unsuccessful,
transmission install a new transmission fluid cooler.
Over heating of the Obstruction in the automatic Flush out the automatic transmission fluid cooler tubes with new
automatic transmission fluid tubes automatic transmission fluid. If the flushing is unsuccessful install
transmission new automatic transmission fluid cooler tubes.
Loss of automatic Connections to the automatic Check the integrity of the tubes, connections and seals. Check the
transmission fluid transmission and the automatic torque of the tube fixings.
transmission fluid cooler
Loss of automatic Leak at oil cooler Check the integrity of tubes, connections and seals. Check the
transmission fluid torque of the tube fixings.
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Fluid Cooler V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
2. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01B Automatic

3. Refer to: Cooling System Draining and Vacuum Filling (303-03C Engine
Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
4. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
5.
6.
7. Torque: 5 Nm
Installation

5.0L Petrol - Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Removal
2. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01A Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle - V6 3.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
3. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
4. Torque: 11 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 23 Nm

Installation

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Uppshift paddle switch to steering wheel retaining bolt 3 - 27
Downshift paddle switch to steering wheel retaining bolt 3 - 27
Transmission control switch (TCS) to floor console bracket retaining bolts 4 - 35
Emergency park position release lever cable bracket to transmission housing retaining bolts 11 8 -
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - External Controls - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Upshift (+) paddle switch
2 Downshift (-) paddle switch
4 Emergency park release
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - External Controls - Overview
OVERVIEW
The external controls for the transmission consist of a JaguarDrive selector, two paddle switches and an emergency park
release.
The JaguarDrive selector transmits driver transmission selections to the TCM (transmission control module). The paddle
switches allow the driver to initiate gear shifts when the transmission is in the sequential shift manual mode. The emergency
park release ensures the transmission is kept in neutral during vehicle recovery operations.
Four additional switches adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector control the JaguarDrive control functions. For additional
information, refer to 204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization Description and Operation.
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - External Controls - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus
Item Description
1 Battery
6 Clockspring
7 Steering wheel audio switches
8 Upshift paddle switch
9 Downshift paddle switch
System Operation
JAGUARDRIVE SELECTOR
Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector to any of the five positions is sensed by the TCM (transmission control module) via the
high speed CAN bus. A LIN bus connection is also provided, but is only used in the event of a CAN bus failure as a back-up.
The TCM then reacts according to the selected position. The JaguarDrive selector is a magnetic system using Hall effect
sensors to determine the position of the selector.
The S (sport) position selection allows the TCM to operate the transmission using the semi-automatic Jaguar sequential shift.
Gear selections are sensed by the TCM when the driver operates the steering wheel paddle switches. Once the JaguarDrive
selector position is confirmed, the TCM outputs appropriate information on the high speed CAN bus which is received by the
instrument cluster to display the gear selection information in the message center.
The paddles can also be used on a temporary basis when the JaguarDrive selector is in the D (drive) position to override the
automatic gear selection if required.
PARK INTERLOCK AND NEUTRAL LOCK

Neutral lock is a requirement for the JaguarDrive selector. The selector is always locked at ignition on when the engine is not
running, except after an engine stall when the selector is not in P (park) or N (neutral).
If, when driving with the JaguarDrive selector in S, D or R (reverse) at a speed of more than 5 km/h (3 mph), the driver selects
P or N:
Without the brake pedal pressed, the JaguarDrive selector will be immediately locked once the vehicle speed falls to
below 5 km/h (3 mph).
With the brake pedal pressed, the JaguarDrive selector will remain locked for as long as the brake pedal remains
pressed, regardless of vehicle speed.
The transmission will only engage park once the vehicle speed is less than 2 km/h (1 mph).
If the driver selects N and releases the brake pedal with a vehicle speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the JaguarDrive selector
will be locked 2 seconds after N is selected. The selector will remain locked until the driver presses the brake pedal again.
To ensure that a driver request to change from a non-driving range (N for example) to a driving range (D for example), the park
interlock and neutral lock features are used in conjunction with the intermediate position.
If the transmission receives a range change request without the brake pedal pressed, the TCM initiates a soft lock function.
The transmission will remain in park or neutral, depending on the starting position.
If a transmission position letter is flashing in the message center and the vehicle has no drive, the driver must:
Press the brake pedal.

Reselect N or P on the JaguarDrive selector.
Select the required driving range, ensuring that the brake pedal is pressed.
Rocking Function
The rocking function compliments the neutral lock function. For all changes from a non-driving range to a driving range, it is
necessary to press the brake pedal (to release either the park interlock or neutral lock).
In situations where the driver will require to change the gear selection from R to D, or from D to R, without brake pedal input
(car park maneuvering, 3 point turns or 'rocking' the vehicle from a slippery surface for example), the rocking function gives a 2
second lock delay when N is selected on the JaguarDrive selector and the brake pedal is not pressed.
Intermediate Position
If the JaguarDrive selector is rotated slowly from P to S and back to position P with the brake pedal pressed, the R or D
position display letter in the message center will flash and the transmission will remain in park or neutral depending on the
previous starting position of the selector.
If the brake pedal is released when R or D is flashing in the message center and the JaguarDrive selector is rotated to the R or
D position, the required range will not be selected and the transmission will remain in park or neutral, depending on the
previous starting position. This feature is known as soft lock.
If the driving range letter in the message center is flashing and the vehicle has no drive, the driver should depress the brake
pedal to reselect N or P, and then select the required driving range while the brake pedal remains pressed.
JAGUARDRIVE SELECTOR
The Jaguardrive selector is a rotary selector installed in the top of the JaguarDrive selector module. The JaguarDrive selector
module is located in the floor console and controls the vehicle optimization functions on the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to: Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Description and Operation).
The TCM allows the transmission to be operated as a conventional automatic unit by selecting P, R, N, D on the JaguarDrive
selector.
Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector allows the selection of P, R, N and D. By depressing the JaguarDrive selector and rotating
clockwise from the D position, S mode can be selected. The JaguarDrive selector is fully electronic rotary transmission selector
with no mechanical connection to the transmission.
The JaguarDrive selector rises from the JaguarDrive selector module once the engine is running. When the engine is stopped
with the JaguarDrive selector in any position other than N, it retracts into the JaguarDrive selector module again. If the
selector is in position N when the engine is stopped, it remains in the raised position for up to 10 minutes, for use in a drive
through car wash for example. After 10 minutes the selector automatically retracts into the JaguarDrive selector module. The
selector also retracts if P is selected within the 10 minute period.
If the JaguarDrive selector does not rise from the console when the engine is started, but electrical power is supplied to the
selector, the retracted selector can still be rotated to make selections. If electrical power to the JaguarDrive selector is lost,
the selector will not rise from the console when the engine is started and the retracted selector will not rotate.
The JaguarDrive selector contains an internal interlock solenoid to prevent the selector from being rotated when the engine is
not running.
The engine can be stopped with the JaguarDrive selector in any position. Once the engine is stopped the selector will
automatically reset to the P position and the transmission park lock will be engaged, except if the selector is moved to the N
position when the engine is stopped.
PADDLE SWITCHES
Two gear change 'paddle' switches are fitted at the rear of the steering wheel and allow the driver to operate the transmission
as a semi-automatic manual gearbox using the Jaguar sequential shift feature.
Each paddle switch has three connections; ground, illumination PWM (pulse width modulation) supply and ground switch
signal. The paddle switches are hardwired to the steering wheel audio switches. Operation of the paddle switch completes a
ground path to the audio switch assembly. The audio switch assembly converts the completed ground signal into a LIN bus
signal which is passed via the clockspring to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster converts the signal into a high
speed CAN bus signal to the TCM.
Pulling the LH (left-hand) downshift - paddle provides down changes and pulling the RH (right-hand) upshift (+) paddle
provides up changes. The first operation of either paddle, after sport mode is selected, puts the transmission into permanent
manual Jaguar sequential shift mode. Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector back to the D position, returns the transmission to
conventional automatic operation.
Temporary operation of manual Jaguar sequential shift mode can also be operated with the JaguarDrive selector in the D
position. Operation of either the upshift or downshift paddles activates the manual mode operation. If the JaguarDrive selector
is in D, Jaguar sequential shift will cancel after a time period or can be cancelled by pressing and holding the + paddle for
approximately 2 seconds.
EMERGENCY PARK RELEASE
Item Description
1 Latch
2 Strap
3 Locking cylinder
4 Operating lever
5 Upper cable
6 Cable joint
7 Lower cable
8 Cable bracket
9 Park interlock lever
If a vehicle requires recovery/transportation, the emergency park release mechanism is used to manually disengage the park
lock and engage the transmission in neutral.
The emergency park release mechanism consists of an operating lever that is connected to a park interlock lever on the
transmission by an upper and lower cable assembly.
The operating lever is installed in the floor console, under the trim panel between the drinks holder and the cubby box. The
park interlock lever is attached to the transmission selector shaft.
One end of the operating lever is attached to a base by a hinge pin. A locking cylinder is installed in the other end of the
operating lever, to secure the operating lever to the base. The operating lever is raised by pulling on a strap.
When operated, the emergency park release mechanism turns the transmission selector shaft.
To disengage the park lock:
Open the cubby box lid and the drinks holder lid.
Remove the trim panel from between the drinks holder and the cubby box.
Rotate the locking mechanism of the emergency park release lever 90 degrees counterclockwise.
Apply the footbrake, pull the operating lever upwards and ensure it locks in the vertical position.
Raising the operating lever causes the emergency park release cable to rotate the park interlock lever on the transmission,
which disengages the parking pawl and engages neutral. This allows the vehicle to freewheel.
To re-engage the park lock:
Hold the strap on the operating lever, release the latch and lower the operating lever to the horizontal position.
Lock the operating lever by turning the locking mechanism 90 degrees clockwise.
Install the trim panel.
Close the cubby box lid and the drinks holder lid.
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - External Controls
For a detailed description of the transmission external controls, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (307-05)
External Controls (Description and Operation),

External Controls (Description and Operation),
External Controls (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Check for stuck/jammed switches and buttons Fuse(s)

Visibly damaged or worn components Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
Loose or missing fasteners Transmission control module
Transmission control switch
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
For a list of DTCs that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Transmission Control Module (TCM) (100-00, Description and Operation)
/
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (100-00, Description and Operation).
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V6 3.0L Petrol -
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Removal
2. Refer to: Audio and Climate Control Assembly (415-01A Information and
Entertainment System, Removal and Installation).
3.
4.
5. Torque: 4 Nm
6. Torque: 4 Nm
7. Torque: 4 Nm
8.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) have
been removed after the road test.

Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Knob
Removal
1.
Start the engine and make sure that 'P' is selected.
2. Torque: 2 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Emergency Park Position Release Lever
Removal
2. Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Engine Rear Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
4. Refer to: Floor Console Side Trim Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel and
5. WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle

stands.
Torque: 11 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 7 Nm
8.
9.
10. Torque: 3 Nm
11.
Installation

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V6 3.0L Petrol - Upshift
Paddle Switch
Removal
1. Torque: 3 Nm
2.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed correctly.

Downshift Paddle Switch
Removal
1. Torque: 3 Nm
2.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed correctly.

www.JagDocs.com
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Catalytic converter retaining bolts 40 30 -
Rear muffler support retaining bolts 25 18 -
Exhaust securing strap nuts 55 40 -
Exhaust support retaining bolts 25 18 -
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust System -
Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - 5.0L V8 SUPERCHARGER - FROM 2010MY - UP TO 2013MY
Item Description
1 Manifold flange (2 off)
2 Mid catalyst HO2S (2 off)
3 Catalytic converter (2 off)
4 Clamp (2 off)
5 Center resonator silencer (2 off)
6 Mounting rubber (6 off)
7 Semi-active muffler valve
8 Exhaust trim (2 off)
9 Rear silencer (2 off)
10 Clamp (2 off)
11 Mass damper
Overview
OVERVIEW
5.0L V8 NATURALLY ASPIRATED AND SUPERCHARGER - FROM 2010MY
The exhaust system fitted to models with the 5.0L V8 engines are fabricated from stainless steel. 5 separate assemblies make
up the complete system.
The front section comprises 2 separate assemblies (LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand)) incorporating a catalytic converter for
each bank of cylinders. The rear section comprises 3 separate sections; a center section and two rear sections. The center
section assembly incorporates a rear silencer which is connected to a center resonator silencer. On supercharger models, the
center resonator is a one piece assembly with two inlet pipes from the center silencer and two outlet pipes to the rear
silencers. On naturally aspirated models, each outlet pipe from the center silencer connects into an individual center resonator.
The system is attached to the underside of the body with mounting rubbers which are located on steel hanger bars that are
welded to the system. The mounting rubbers locate on corresponding hangers which are welded or bolted to the underside of
the vehicle body.
System Operation
CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
In the catalytic converters, the exhaust gases are passed through honeycombed ceramic elements coated with a special
surface treatment called 'washcoat'. The washcoat increases the surface area of the ceramic elements by a factor of
approximately 7000. On top of the washcoat is a coating containing palladium and rhodium, which are the active constituents
for converting harmful emissions into inert by-products. The palladium and rhodium add oxygen to the carbon monoxide and
the hydrocarbons in the exhaust gases, to convert them into carbon dioxide and water respectively.
SEMI-ACTIVE MUFFLER VALVE (5.0L SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES ONLY)

The semi-active muffler valve is operated by the pressure in the exhaust system. At low engine speeds the valve head is
closed or partially closed to provide a more refined noise quality. At higher engine speeds the increased pressure within the
exhaust system opens the valve head to provide a more sporting noise. This is achieved by the valve, which once open, allows
the exhaust gasses to by-pass the baffle tubes and plates in the rear silencer.
FRONT SECTION - 4.2L NATURALLY ASPIRATED (NAS ONLY) - From 2010MY
The front section comprises two separate pipes, each incorporating a catalytic converter. Each catalytic converter has a welded
inlet pipe with a flange. The inlet pipe is flared into a cone which mates with the exhaust manifold. The flange has two holes
which locate on studs in the exhaust manifold and is secured with flanged nuts. Each catalytic converter is fitted with a pre
and post catalyst HO2S (heated oxygen sensor).
Each catalytic converter has a curved outlet pipe which mates with the respective inlet pipe for the applicable resonator on the
center section. The joint on each pipe is secured with a clamp.
FRONT SECTION - 5.0L NATURALLY ASPIRATED AND SUPERCHARGER - From 2010MY

The front section is common to both the naturally aspirated and supercharger vehicles. The front section comprises two
separate pipes each incorporating a catalytic converter. Each catalytic converter has a welded pipe with a flange, which is
flared into a cone which mates with the exhaust manifold. Each flange has two holes which locate on studs in the exhaust
manifold and are secured with nuts. Each catalytic converter is fitted with a mid catalyst HO2S. The mid catalyst HO2S is
located in the catalytic converter.
NOTE: The pre catalyst HO2S is located in the exhaust manifold.
On vehicles from 2013MY, a post catalyst HO2S is located in the curved pipe from each catalytic converter.
A curved pipe from each catalytic converter locates into the resonator inlet pipes of the center section. The LH (left-hand) pipe
is fitted with a mass damper which absorbs resonance from the system.
REAR SECTION - 4.2L NATURALLY ASPIRATED (NAS ONLY) - From 2010MY

The 2 inlet pipes each connect into a separate resonator silencer. Each resonator silencer is cylindrical in shape and houses 2
perforated tubes separated by 2 baffle plates. Exhaust gasses exit each resonator silencer via an outlet pipe. The 2 outlet
pipes are joined together behind the resonators with a cross over pipe. Each pipe also has a welded hanger bracket which
allow the rear section to be supported on mounting rubbers. A further bracket is welded to each pipe which braces the 2 pipes
together.
The 2 rear silencers each have a welded inlet pipe which mate with the outlet pipes from the resonator silencers and are each
secured with a clamp. The inlet pipes each have a welded hanger bracket which support each rear silencer at the rear of the
vehicle on mounting rubbers. The fabricated rear silencers have 2 perforated tubes which are supported on 2 perforated baffle
plates. The exhaust gasses are expelled from the rear silencer via a single outlet pipe. The outlet pipe from each silencer has
a welded hanger bar which support the rear silencer on mounting rubbers. The outlet pipe is fitted with a welded outlet which
is covered with a polished stainless steel finisher which is part welded to the silencer.
REAR SECTION - 5.0L NATURALLY ASPIRATED - From 2010MY

The 2 pipes from the front section each connect into 2 short pipes on the center resonator box and are secured with clamps.
Two pipes from the resonator box split the system into 2 sections which each connect into another resonator. Each resonator
silencer houses perforated tubes separated by baffle plates. Exhaust gasses exit each resonator silencer via an outlet pipe.
The 2 outlet pipes are joined together behind the resonators with a cross over pipe. Each pipe also has a welded hanger
bracket which allow the rear section to be supported on mounting rubbers. A further bracket is welded to each pipe which
braces the 2 pipes together.
The 2 rear silencers each have a welded inlet pipe which mate with the outlet pipes from the cylindrical resonator silencers and
www.JagDocs.com
are each secured with a clamp. The inlet pipes each have a welded hanger bracket which support each rear silencer at the rear
of the vehicle on mounting rubbers. The fabricated rear silencers have 2 perforated tubes which are supported on 2 perforated
baffle plates. The exhaust gasses are expelled from the rear silencer via a single outlet pipe. The outlet pipe from each
silencer has a welded hanger bar which support the rear silencer on mounting rubbers. The outlet pipe is fitted with a welded
outlet which is covered with a polished stainless steel finisher which is part welded to the silencer.
REAR SECTION - 5.0L SUPERCHARGER - From 2010MY

The 2 pipes from the front section each connect into 2 short pipes on the center resonator box and are secured with clamps.
Two pipes from the center resonator box each connect into a second resonator silencer. The resonator silencer comprises
perforated tubes separated by 2 baffle plates. Exhaust gasses exit the resonator silencer via 2 outlet pipes. Each pipe has a
welded hanger bracket which allows the rear section to be supported on mounting rubbers. A further bracket is welded to each
pipe which braces the 2 pipes together.
The 2 rear silencers each have a welded inlet pipe which mate with the outlet pipes from the cylindrical resonator silencers and
are each secured with a clamp. The inlet pipes each have a welded hanger bracket which support each rear silencer at the rear
of the vehicle on mounting rubbers. The fabricated rear silencers have a perforated inlet tube which is supported on 2 baffle
plates. Each rear silencer has a welded hanger bar which supports the rear silencer on mounting rubbers. The outlet pipe is
fitted with a welded twin outlet which is covered with 2 polished stainless steel finishers which are part welded to the silencer.
Semi-Active Muffler Valve
NOTE: LH silencer shown, RH (right-hand) silencer similar
Item Description
1 Outer case
2 Overpipe
3 Valve cage
4 Semi-active muffler valve assembly
A semi-active muffler valve is located in the rear of each rear silencer. The valve comprises a valve head, a valve shaft, a shaft
guide, a housing shell, a membrane and a spring. The valve head is connected to the membrane by the valve shaft which is
located within the shaft guide. The valve shaft is attached to the membrane with a pin. The membrane is located inside the
housing shell and is held in position by the spring.
The valve head is located in and seals against the over pipe. When the exhaust gas pressure increases and overcomes the
spring pressure, the valve head is lifted and the gasses by-pass the valve and are expelled though slots in the valve cage into
the rear chamber and into the outlet pipe.
When the semi-active muffler valve is closed the exhaust gasses are expelled from the inlet tube through the perforations. The
exhaust gasses then pass through perforations in the outlet pipe and are expelled from the silencer via the single outlet pipe
and 2 polished stainless steel finishers.
When the semi-active muffler valve is open, the exhaust gasses are released into the rear chamber. The exhaust gasses then
pass directly into the open end of the outlet pipe and are expelled from the silencer via the outlet pipe and the 2 polished
stainless steel finishers. With the valve open, the gasses reduce through the baffle plates and tube perforations giving the
exhaust note a more 'sporty' sound.
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust System
For a detailed description of the exhaust system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the workshop
manual. REFER to: (309-00C Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol)
Exhaust System (Description and Operation),

Exhaust System (Description and Operation),
Exhaust System (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Leaks
Metal fatigue
Pipes
Catalytic converter
Muffler(s)
Joints
Mountings
Clearance around components
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Excessively Inspect exhaust system. Rectify leaks and install new components as
noisy/leaking Exhaust required. Refer to Removal and Installation instructions in this section
exhaust system/components
Loss of power Inspect exhaust system. Install new exhaust components as required.
Restricted exhaust system Refer to Removal and Installation instructions in this section. Check for
Exhaust sound fuel, ignition and electronic engine control system DTCs and refer to the
enhancement valve stuck relevant DTC Index
closed
Fuel system
Ignition system
DTC Index
303-14. REFER to:
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Catalytic Converter LH
Removal
2. WARNINGS:
Make sure to support the vehicle with axle stands.
Installation).
5. CAUTION: Make sure the catalyst monitor sensor wiring

harness is not twisted more than 180 degrees and is not in
contact with either the exhaust or driveshaft.
supported with suitable retaining straps.
Tighten the top retaining nut first.

Torque:
Top nut 40 Nm
Bottom nut 40 Nm

Torque: 55 Nm
8. CAUTIONS:


sensor.
NOTES:

If the original sensor is to be installed, apply lubricant

meeting specification ESE-M12A4-A to the thread of the
sensor.
Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Catalytic Converter RH
Removal
2. WARNINGS:
Installation).
5. CAUTION: Make sure the catalyst monitor sensor wiring

harness is not twisted more than 180 degrees and is not in
contact with either the exhaust or driveshaft.
Tighten the top retaining nut first.

Torque:
Top nut 40 Nm
Bottom nut 40 Nm

Torque: 55 Nm
8. CAUTIONS:


sensor.
NOTES:

If the original sensor is to be installed, apply lubricant

meeting specification ESE-M12A4-A to the thread of the
sensor.
Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Procedures).
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Sound
Enhancement Valve
Removal
WARNING: Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.
NOTES:
The exhaust sound enhancement valve is an integeral part of the muffler and cannot be serviced separately.

Torque:
M8 25 Nm
M10 55 Nm
Installation

Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust System
Removal
2. WARNINGS:
Installation).
5.
6.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 40 Nm
8. Torque: 40 Nm

Torque: 30 Nm

Torque: 6 Nm
Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Front Muffler
Removal
1. WARNINGS:
3. Torque: 55 Nm
4. Torque: 55 Nm

Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Rear Muffler
Removal
WARNING: Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.

Torque:
M8 25 Nm
M10 55 Nm
Installation

Fuel System - General Information -
Item Specification
Fuel tank gross capacity - all vehicles 77 liters
Fuel tank capacity - vehicles with 3.0L, 4.2L, 2.7L Diesel 69.5 (total) / 64 (usable) liters
Fuel tank capacity - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 71.1 (total) / 68.1 (usable) liters
Fuel tank capacity - vehicles with 5.0L 71.1 (total) / 69.5 (useable) liters
Fuel tank capacity - when fuel gauge indicates empty - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 64 liters
Reserve capacity - when fuel gauge indicates empty - vehicles with 3.0L, 4.2L, 2.7L Diesel 5.5 liters
Reserve capacity - when fuel gauge indicates empty - vehicles with 5.0L, 3.0L Diesel 7 liters
Fuel System - General Information - Fuel System Pressure Release V8 5.0L
General Procedures
Draining
1. Remove the fuel pump fuse.
2. Remove the fuel filler cap.
3. CAUTION: When depressurising the fuel system, make sure that

there is no throttle input. Failure to follow this instruction may cause
Start the engine and allow it to idle until the engine stalls.
4. Crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure that the
fuel rail pressure is released.
Filling
1. NOTE: Make sure all repairs have been carried out before
proceeding to the following steps.
Install the fuel pump fuse.
2. Install the fuel filler cap.
3. Read and clear stored DTC fault codes.

Fuel System - General Information - Fuel Tank Draining
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Fuel tank drain adaptor
310-154
1. For additional information, refer to: Diesel Fuel System Health and
Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
2. For additional information, refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel

Systems Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information,
Vehicles with 3.0L or 4.2L engine
3. Release the pressure in the fuel system.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V6
3.0L Petrol (310-00 Fuel System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Vehicles with 5.0L engine
4. Release the pressure in the fuel system.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (310-00 Fuel System - General
All vehicles
5. Remove the rear seat cushion.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat Cushion (501-10 Seating,
6. Detach and reposition the door opening weatherstrip.

Remove the scuff plate trim panel.
7.
Detach and reposition the floor covering.
8.
Detach and reposition the rear seat cushion insulation.
9. Remove the floor aperture cover.
10.
www.JagDocs.com
11. CAUTION: The correct measurement must be used to
remove the fuel tank drain port top. Failure to follow this
NOTE: Vehicles without Diesel engine shown, vehicles

with Diesel engine similar.
Using a suitable tool, remove the top of the fuel tank drain
port.
12. NOTES:
A fuel vacuum drain unit must be attached to the

special tool to achieve full fuel tank drain.
Vehicles without Diesel engine shown, vehicles with

Diesel engine similar.
Using the special tool, drain the right-hand side of the fuel
tank.
13. NOTE: Vehicles without Diesel engine shown, vehicles
14. CAUTION: Make sure the new fuel tank drain port
sealing cap is correctly installed. Failure to follow this

Install a new fuel tank drain port sealing cap.

15. CAUTION: The correct measurement must be used to
remove the fuel tank drain port top. Failure to follow this

Using a suitable tool, remove the top of the fuel tank drain
port.
16. NOTES:
A fuel vacuum drain unit must be attached to the

special tool to achieve full fuel tank drain.
Vehicles without Diesel engine shown, vehicles with

Diesel engine similar.
Using the special tool, drain the left-hand side of the fuel
tank.
17. NOTE: Vehicles without Diesel engine shown, vehicles
18. CAUTION: Make sure the new fuel tank drain port
sealing cap is correctly installed. Failure to follow this

Install a new fuel tank drain port sealing cap.
19. Install the floor aperture cover.

Attach the rear seat cushion insulation.
20.
Attach the floor covering.
21.
Install the scuff plate trim panel.
22. Attach the door opening weatherstrip.
23.
24. Install the rear seat cushion.

www.JagDocs.com
Fuel System - General Information - Spring Lock Couplings
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Spring Lock Coupling Tool or Equivalent
310-D005 (23-040)
Disconnect
1. WARNINGS:
Place the vehicle in a quarantined area and arrange "No

Smoking/Petrol Fumes" signs about the vehicle.
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground the
vehicle to earth and maintain the ground connection until the work is
complete.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type

when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable
vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these
The fuel system remains pressurized for a long time after the
ignition is switched off. The fuel pressure must be relieved before
attempting any repairs. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually
for leaks. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for fuel spillage

at all times and always observe fuel handling precautions. Failure to
If taken internally do not induce vomiting, seek immediate medical

attention. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or
eyewash solution and seek medical attention.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling, as prolonged contact may

cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek medical attention.
Relieve the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to the
procedure in this section: Pressure Relief.
2. Remove the safety clip from the spring lock coupling.
4. Close the special tool and push it into the female end of the
spring lock coupling.
5. Disconnect the spring lock coupling.

Connect
1. NOTES:
Install new O-ring seals.
Install a new garter spring.

Clean and inspect the male and female ends of the spring lock
coupling.
2. WARNING: Make sure the garter spring snaps over the male
end of the spring lock coupling.
Connect the spring lock coupling.
3. Check the spring lock coupling to make sure it is correctly

connected.
www.JagDocs.com
4 . Install the safety dip to the sprino lock coupling.
Fuel System - General Information - Quick Release Coupling
General Procedures
Disconnect
1. WARNINGS:

complete.

personal injury.
injury.


injury.

procedure in this section: Pressure Relief.
2. Disconnect the quick release fitting.

1. Release the retaining clip.
2. Disconnect the quick release fitting.
Connect
1. To connect, reverse the disconnect procedure.

Fuel System - General Information - Quick Release Coupling - Push Connect
General Procedures
Disconnect
1. WARNINGS:

complete.

personal injury.
injury.


injury.

procedure in this section:
For additional information, refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release
(310-00 Fuel System - General Information, General Procedures).
2. Disconnect the push connect fitting.

1. Press the tang.
2. Disconnect the push connect fitting.
Connect
1. To connect.
Support the male stub.
Push the connector fitting onto the stub until an audible
click can be heard.
Check the connection by a gentle tug test.
Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Item Specifications
Fuel system Electronic returnless fuel system (ERFS)
Fuel tank Multi layer plastic
Fuel tank sender unit Mounted on the body of the fuel pump
Fuel filter Located in the fuel tank
Fuel pump Electric,located in the fuel tank
System pressure 4.5 bar - 65 lbf/in2
Capacities
Liters
Fuel tank capacity 71.1 (total) / 69.5 (useable)
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Fuel tank filler pipe bracket retaining nut 9 - 80
Fuel tank filler pipe bracket retaining bolt 9 - 80
Fuel tank support strap retaining bolts 35 26 -
Fuel / vapor tube bracket retaining bolt in engine compartment 5 - 44
Fuel / vapor tube bracket to underbody retaining bolts 7 - 62
Fuel pump and sender unit locking ring 250 184 -
Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Tank and
Lines - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - REST OF WORLD (ROW)
Item Description
1 Fuel feed pipe connection
2 EVAP pipe connection
3 Manifold
4 Low Pressure (LP) sensor
5 Fuel feed pipe
6 Fuel vapor vent valve
7 Fuel pump module assembly
8 Fuel tank
www.JagDocs.com
9 Fuel filler hose
10 FPDM (fuel pump driver module)
11 Fuel filler pipe
12 Fuel filler cap and lanyard
13 Charcoal canister
14 Pipe - EVAP charcoal canister to purge valve
COMPONENT LOCATION - NORTH AMERICAN SPECIFICATION (NAS)
Item Description
1 Fuel feed pipe connection
2 EVAP pipe connection
3 Manifold
4 LP sensor
5 Fuel feed pipe
6 Fuel vapor vent valve
8 Fuel tank
9 Fuel filler hose
10 FPDM
11 Anti-trickle valve
12 Fuel filler cap and lanyard
13 DMTL filter
14 Fuel filler pipe
15 Charcoal canister
16 DMTL pump
17 Pipe - EVAP charcoal canister to purge valve
Lines - Overview
OVERVIEW
The fuel system uses an electronic returnless system. The system comprises a pump module mounted in the fuel tank to
deliver Low Pressure (LP) fuel at variable flow to the fuel charging and control system on the engine. Fuel pump operation is
regulated by a FPDM (fuel pump driver module) which is controlled by the ECM (engine control module). The FPDM regulates
the flow and pressure supplied by controlling the operation of the fuel pump using a PWM (pulse width modulation) output. A
LP sensor is located in the fuel feed supply line to the engine and is monitored by the ECM for fuel pump control.
Two fuel level sensors are installed in either side of the saddle tank. The sensors are a MAPPS (magnetic passive position
sensor) which provide a variable resistance to ground for the output from the fuel gage.
The fuel system also incorporates an EVAP (evaporative emission) system which is part of the on-board refueling and vapor
recovery feature. The function and operation of the system is designed to meet EVAP requirements to minimize fuel vapor
losses.
Lines - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (250A)
4 CJB (central junction box).
6 DMTL Pump
7 FPDM (fuel pump driver module)
8 LH (left-hand) fuel level sensor
9 RH (right-hand) fuel level sensor and fuel pump module
10 RCM (restraints control module)
System Operation
OPERATION
The fuel pump is a variable-speed rotary-vane type, which operates in a fuel pump module located in the RH side of the fuel
tank. A venturi transfer pump is located in the RH side of the tank. The fuel pump module is secured in the fuel tank with a
bayonet style locking ring that is welded into the tank structure. The fuel pump module has an integral top plate for the
external pipe work and electrical connectors.
Fuel level is biased towards the RH compartment in the fuel tank by drawing fuel through the internal cross over pipe via the
jet pump, which serves to deliver a constant supply of fuel to the transfer pump and swirl pot assembly. High pressure fuel
from the fuel pump is directed through the jet pump's orifice, creating a low pressure area to be formed in the cross over pipe.
The fuel is drawn into this low pressure area in the cross over pipe and directed into the swirl pot delivery pipes.
Fuel is pumped from the fuel pump to the fuel rail via the integral filter and pressure relief valve.
The pressure relief valve assists engine starting by retaining a pre-set fuel pressure in the supply pipe and fuel rail. The
pressure relief valve also limits fuel rail pressure due to temporary vapor increase in hot conditions and pressure caused by
sudden load changes, for example, a fully open to closed throttle transition.
To meet ORVR (on-board refueling vapor recovery) requirements, the fuel tank and associated components are designed to
minimize fuel vapor loss during refueling. This is achieved by preventing fuel vapor from the fuel tank venting directly to the
atmosphere. Instead fuel vapor is directed into the EVAP (evaporative emission) charcoal canister where it is stored before
being purged at intervals to the engine’s intake manifold.
North American Specification (NAS) vehicles feature additional connections and pipes at the rear of the filler head and also
incorporates a Diagnostic Monitoring Tank Leakage (DMTL) pump for leak detection requirements.
Fuel System Schematic Diagram
Item Description
2 Fuel rail
www.JagDocs.com
3 Fuel High Pressure (HP) sensor
4 Fuel LP sensor
5 Jet pump
6 Fuel filter
7 Pressure relief valve
9 RH fuel level sensor
10 LH fuel level sensor
FUEL TANK
NOTE: NAS fuel system shown
Item Description
1 Fuel filler pipe connection and spit back flap
2 FPDM
3 DMTL Pump (NAS only)
4 EVAP hose
5 Hose - EVAP charcoal canister to purge valve
6 Vapor pressure control valve
7 Hose connection - EVAP charcoal canister to purge valve
8 Fuel supply to engine
9 LH fuel level sensor float
10 LH fuel level sensor
11 Liquid Vapor Separator (LVS)
12 Fuel delivery pump outlet connection
13 RH fuel level sensor float
14 RH fuel level sensor
15 Fuel pump module
The fuel tank is a saddle type tank, blow moulded from HDPE (high density polyethylene). The tank is located forward of the
rear suspension and is mounted using two metal straps. The tank is a sealed unit with the only internal access being through
the fuel pump module aperture on the top of the tank.
The fuel pump module flange has a six pin external connector which provides the electrical connections for the fuel pump and
both fuel level sensors. A quick release connector provides for the connection of the fuel feed pipe.
The flange is fitted with a locking ring and seal. The seal locates in a groove on the tank. The locking ring locates and clamps
on the encapsulated ring that is moulded into the fuel tank. The flange has a tag which locates in the top of the tank to
ensure correct orientation.
A carrier within the tank provides for the mounting of the passive side jet pump tube, vent valve, ROV and liquid vapor
separator (LVS), level sensors and passive side drain.
FUEL PUMP MODULE

Item Description
1 Fuel supply connection
3 Flange locking ring and seal
4 Sucking jet connector
5 Fuel pump module
6 Fuel pick up filter
7 Level sensor float
8 RH level sensor
9 Fuel filter
11 Pump supply to flange connection
12 The fuel pump is a variable speed rotary vane type. The pump is energized by the fuel pump relay which is located in
the RJB and the FPDM which is located under the RH floor pan above the rear suspension stabilizer bar. The relay and FPDM are
controlled by the ECM.
A fine mesh filter is located in the lower section of the pump module. This provides filtration to the fuel as it is drawn into the
module. There is a winged filter on the fuel pump that gives additional protection and a life time fuel filter integrated into the
flange which eliminates the need for an additional filter further downstream in the fuel system.
The RH fuel level sensor is mounted into the pump module housing.
FUEL PUMP DRIVER MODULE (FPDM)
The FPDM is located on a bracket which is integral with the charcoal canister. The module is attached to one end of the
canister with a bracket.
The fuel pump operation is regulated by a FPDM which is controlled by the ECM. The FPDM regulates the flow and pressure
supplied by controlling the operation of the fuel pump using a PWM (pulse width modulation) output.
The FPDM is powered by a supply from the fuel pump relay in the RJB. The fuel pump relay is energized on opening the driver's
door, pressing the start button only or pressing the start button and the footbrake (which initiates engine cranking). The FPDM
supplies power to the fuel pump, and adjusts the power to control the speed of the fuel pump and thus the pressure and flow
in the fuel delivery line.
A PWM signal from the ECM tells the FPDM the required speed for the fuel pump. The on time of the PWM signal represents
half the fuel pump speed, e.g. if the PWM signal has an on time of 50%, the FPDM drives the pump at 100%.
The FPDM will only energize the fuel pump if it receives a valid PWM signal, with an on time of between 4% and 50%. To
switch the fuel pump off, the ECM transmits a PWM signal with an on time of 75%.
The output pressure from the fuel pump will change with changes of engine demand and fuel temperature. The ECM monitors
the input from the fuel rail LP sensor and adjusts the speed of the fuel pump as necessary to maintain a nominal output
pressure of 450 kPa (4.5 bar; 65.3 lbf/in.2), except during engine start-up. At engine start-up the target pressure for the fuel
delivery line is 630 kPa (6.3 bar; 91.4 lbf/in.2).
If the SRS (supplemental restraint system) outputs a crash signal on the high speed CAN (controller area network), the ECM
de-energizes the fuel pump relay to prevent any further fuel being pumped to the engine.
If the ECM does not detect pressure in the fuel delivery line, it stops, or refuses to start the engine and stores the appropriate
DTC (diagnostic trouble code).
The ECM receives a monitoring signal from the FPDM. Any DTC's produced by the FPDM are stored by the ECM.
DTC's can be retrieved from the ECM using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system. The FPDM itself cannot be interrogated by
the approved Jaguar diagnostic system.
FUEL LEVEL SENSORS
Item Description
1 Fuel level sensor
2 Fuel level sensor float arm
3 Fuel level sensor float
Two fuel level sensors are installed in either side of the saddle tank. One is mounted on the fuel pump module, the other is
mounted on the carrier in the LH side of the fuel tank. The sensors are a float operated MAPPS (magnetic passive position
sensor) which provide a variable resistance to ground for the output from the fuel gauge. The sensor is sealed from the fuel
preventing contamination of the contacts, increasing reliability. The fuel level sensors are connected to the external electrical
connector on the flange via the connector on the underside of the fuel pump module flange.
The sensor comprises a series of 51 film resistors mounted in an arc on a ceramic surface. The resistors are wired in series
with individual contacts. A soft magnetic foil with 51 flexible contacts is mounted a small distance above the film resistors. A
magnet, located below the ceramic surface, is attached to the sender unit float arm. As the float arm moves, the magnet
follows the same arc as the film resistors. The magnet pulls the flexible contacts onto the opposite film resistor contacts
forming an electrical circuit.
Item Description
1 Magnetic foil
2 Spacer
3 Ceramic surface
4 Magnet
5 Resistance film
The film resistors are arranged in a linear arc with resistance ranging from 51.2 to 992.11 Ohms. The electrical output signal is
proportional to the amount of fuel in the tank and the position of the float arm. The measured resistance is processed by the
instrument cluster to implement an anti-slosh function. This monitors the signal and updates the fuel gauge pointer position
at regular intervals, preventing constant pointer movement caused by fuel movement in the tank due to cornering or braking.
A warning lamp is incorporated in the instrument cluster and illuminates when the fuel level is low.
The fuel level sender signal is converted into a CAN message by the instrument cluster as a direct interpretation of the fuel
tank contents in liters. The ECM uses the CAN message to store additional OBD (on-board diagnostic) 'P' Codes for misfire
detection when the fuel level is below a predetermined capacity.
JET PUMP
The fuel system incorporates two jet pumps. One jet pump is integrated into the fuel pump and draws fuel from the RH side of
the fuel tank. The other jet pump is located on the fuel delivery module on the RH side of the tank. There is a pipe that is
located in the LH side of the tank that allows fuel to be drawn over from the LH side of the tank, delivering fuel into the swirl
pot. The jet pumps operate on a venturi effect created by the fuel at pump output pressure passing through the jet pump. This
draws additional fuel from the LH side of the tank through ports in the jet pump body, delivering additional fuel to the swirl
pot.
FUEL VENT VALVE

The fuel level vent valve is located in the upper half of the tank and is connected into a separator which is connected to the
Roll Over Valve (ROV) tank breather. The main purpose of the fuel level vent valve is to control the fill volume of the tank.
During filling, air trapped inside the tank and a small amount of vapor is passed via the fuel level vent valve to the tank
breather. The air and vapor mix then vents to atmosphere through the breather. During filling, when the tank reaches its full
level, the fuel level vent valve closes and prevents air/vapor passing through to the tank breather. The resulting back pressure
causes refueling to stop automatically.
The fuel level vent valve is always open when the fuel tank is below full, providing an unrestricted air/vapor outlet to the tank
breather.
www.JagDocs.com
FUEL FILLER PIPE
Fuel Filler Pipe (ROW)
Item Description
1 Wide bore filler neck
2 Fuel cap
3 Fuel cap lanyard
4 Fuel filler pipe
5 Fuel filler hose
6 Hose connection with fuel tank inlet check valve
Fuel Filler Pipe (NAS)
Item Description
1 Anti-trickle valve assembly
2 Wide bore filler neck
3 Fuel cap
4 Fuel cap lanyard
5 DMTL breather hose
6 DMTL breather filter
7 Fuel filler pipe
8 Connection of leak pipe to tank vapor line
9 Connection to charcoal canister
10 DMTL vapor leak pipe
11 Fuel filler hose
12 Hose connection with fuel tank inlet check valve
The fuel filler head is positioned at the rear of the vehicle, above the right hand rear wheel. The filler head is covered by a
molded plastic cover which is electrically locked when the vehicle is locked. The filler cap is a conventional screw in type which
is secured to the vehicle with a lanyard.
The filler head is stainless steel fabrication which is secured to the vehicle body with 2 brackets and a location lug on the filler
bowl. The formed pipe locates in a short flexible hose attached to the tank which is secured with worm drive clamps at each
end.
FUEL LP SENSOR
The fuel LP sensor supplies a pressure signal to the ECM to enable closed loop control of the fuel pump. The fuel LP sensor is
installed in a manifold in the fuel delivery line. The manifold is located in the rear of the front LH wheelarch, behind the splash
shield.
Lines
For a detailed description of the fuel tank and lines system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (310-01C Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol)
Fuel Tank and Lines (Description and Operation),

Fuel Tank and Lines (Description and Operation),
Fuel Tank and Lines (Description and Operation).

WARNINGS:
Eye protection must be worn at all times when working on or near any fuel related components. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury.
This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for fuel spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling
precautions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually for leaks. This should be done after the engine has
been run, but with the engine switched OFF. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
If taken internally, DO NOT induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention. Failure to follow this instruction may
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek medical attention. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in personal injury.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek medical
attention. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting any part of the system, it is imperative that all dust, dirt and debris is removed from around
components to prevent ingress of foreign matter into the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs
to any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
When measuring fuel sender resistance values with a multimeter, it is critical to use the correct multimeter setting. The
multimeter should not be on the 'Auto' setting and must be set to 'Manual'. This will help prevent incorrect diagnosis and
unnecessary replacement of fuel senders. If the multimeter range is set at 'Auto' then, during a sweep of the sender from 50
Ohms to 998 Ohms, the multimeter has to change its measurement range. For approximately 1 second, during the range switch
over point, the multimeter display indicates an open circuit. This can lead to a mis-diagnosis of a fuel sender fault.

Visual Inspection
Low/contaminated fuel Fuses

Fuel supply/return line(s) Links
Fuel tank and filler pipe Relays
Fuel leak(s) Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM)
Fuel filler cap Fuel pump module
Fuel filter Sensor(s)
Push connect fittings Engine control module (ECM)
Fuel pump Rear Junction Box (RJB)
the next step
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and proceed to the DTC Index
Symptom Chart

Engine cranks, but does not
fire Engine breather system Ensure the engine breather system is free from
Ignition system Check for ignition system, fuel system and electronic
Fuel system engine control DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Electronic engine control Index
Engine cranks and fires, but

will not start Evaporative emissions purge Check for evaporative emissions, fuel system and
valve ignition system related DTCs and refer to the
Fuel pump relevant DTC Index
Spark plugs
cracks/damage
Ignition system
Difficult cold start

Engine coolant level/anti- Check the engine coolant level and condition
freeze content Ensure the battery is in a fully charged and
Battery serviceable condition
Electronic engine controls Check for electronic engine controls, engine
Fuel pump emissions, fuel system and evaporative emissions
Purge valve system related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Index
Difficult hot start

Injector leak Check for injector leak, install new injector as
Electronic engine control required
Purge valve Check for electronic engine controls, evaporative
Fuel pump emissions, fuel system, ignition system and engine
Ignition system emission system related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index
Difficult to start after hot

soak (vehicle standing, Injector leak Check for injector leak, install new injector as
engine off, after engine has Electronic engine control required
reached operating Purge valve Check for electronic engine controls, evaporative
temperature) Fuel pump emissions, fuel system, ignition system and engine
Ignition system emission system related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index
Engine stalls soon after start

Breather system Ensure the engine breather system is free from
ECM relay Check for electronic engine control, ignition system
Electronic engine control and fuel system related DTCs and refer to the
Air intake system restricted Check for blockage in air filter element and air
Air leakage intake system
Fuel lines Check for air leakage in air intake system
Engine hesitates/poor
acceleration Fuel pressure, fuel pump, Check for fuel system related DTCs and refer to the
fuel lines relevant DTC Index
Injector leak Check for injector leak, install new injector as
Air leakage required
www.JagDocs.com
Electronic engine control Check for air leakage in air intake system
Throttle motor Ensure accelerator pedal is free from restriction
Restricted accelerator pedal Check for electronic engine controls, ignition, engine
travel (carpet, etc) emission system and transmission related DTCs and
Ignition system refer to the relevant DTC Index
Engine backfires
Fuel pump/lines Check for fuel system failures
Air leakage Check for air leakage in intake air system
Electronic engine controls Check for electronic engine controls, ignition system
Ignition system and VCT system related DTCs and refer to the
Sticking variable camshaft relevant DTC Index
timing (VCT) hub
Engine surges
Electronic engine controls Check for electronic engine controls, throttle system
Throttle motor and ignition system related DTCs and refer to the
Engine detonates/knocks
Electronic engine controls Check for electronic engine controls and VCT system
Sticking VCT hub related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
No throttle response
Electronic engine controls Check for electronic engine controls and throttle
Throttle motor system related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Index
Poor throttle response

Breather system Ensure the engine breather system is free from
Electronic engine controls Check for electronic engine controls, transmission
Transmission malfunction and traction control related DTCs and refer to the
Traction control event related DTC Index
Fuel gauge reading empty

with fuel in the fuel tank Active fuel level sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit open circuit perform the guided diagnostic routine - Fuel Level
Passive fuel level sensor Sensor Test
circuit open circuit
Instrument cluster internal
failure
Fuel gauge not reading empty

with no fuel in the fuel tank Jet pump fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Fuel crossover tube blocked check datalogger signals - Fuel Sender 2 (0x61B8) -
or leaking Fuel Sender 1 (0x61B7). Refer to the table below. If
the right sensor reads empty when the left sensor
reads more than empty, check that the jet pump is
transferring fuel from the left side to the right side
Fuel Gauge, Resistance, Voltage And Fuel Tank Level Comparison Chart
Use the chart to determine fuel tank fuel volume versus fuel gauge reading to determine the fuel level symptom and fault.
NOTES:
The vehicle must be parked on a level surface to obtain an accurate fuel level gauge reading.
The actual values may vary, according to the quantity of fuel in the left and right sides of the fuel tank.
An accurate fuel level gauge reading requires 3 to 5 minutes for levels to stabilise.
Volume, Resistance and Voltage Values

Fuel Sender 2 (0x61B8) - Right side Fuel Sender 1 (0x61B7) - Left side
Gauge Reading Fill Volume (L) Resistance (Ω) CAN Count (Tolerance ± 10) Resistance (Ω) CAN Count (Tolerance ± 10)
0 52 75 51 74
2 60 86 51 74
4 76 107 51 74
Fuel Sender 2 (0x61B8) - Right side Fuel Sender 1 (0x61B7) - Left side
Gauge Reading Fill Volume (L) Resistance (Ω) CAN Count (Tolerance ± 10) Resistance (Ω) CAN Count (Tolerance ± 10)
6 86 119 51 74
8 121 160 51 74
10 151 191 51 74
Empty 12 183 223 51 74
14 205 244 51 74
16 242 276 51 74
18 283 308 51 74
20 327 340 51 74
¼ 22 358 361 51 74
24 408 392 51 74
26 445 414 51 74
28 446 436 51 74
30 446 436 51 74
32 446 436 59 85
34 446 436 75 106
36 445 425 101 148
38 486 436 170 159
40 486 446 140 170
½ 42 486 446 160 201
44 460 425 192 223
46 486 446 204 243
48 552 457 204 243
50 626 489 204 243
52 654 521 228 254
54 654 521 241 275
56 654 521 254 286
¾ 58 654 521 281 307
60 684 531 296 318
62 707 531 326 339
64 727 541 357 350
66 737 562 373 370
Full 67 803 563 407 391
Maximum Fill Maximum Fill 911 594 425 402
DTC Index
303-14. REFER to:
Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Level Sender
Removal
2. Refer to: Fuel Pump and Sender Unit (310-01C Fuel Tank and Lines - V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
3.
Installation

Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump and
Sender Unit
Special Tool(s)
310-123
Locking Ring, Fuel Tank
Removal

2. Refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
3.
4.
5.
6.
www.JagDocs.com
7.
8.
9. NOTES:
Note the position of the locating tang.
Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
10. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the fuel tank
level sensor float and arm.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the fuel tank level sensor float and
arm.
Make sure the fuel pump and sender unit is correctly installed in to
the retaining bracket in the fuel tank.
NOTE: Make sure the locating tang is installed in the correct

position.

Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Tank
Removal
3. Refer to: Fuel Tank Draining (310-00 Fuel System - General Information,

5. Refer to: Driveshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-01


Torque: 10 Nm
7. Torque: 4.8 Nm
8. WARNING: The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during
this operation. Make sure that all necessary precautions are
taken to prevent fire and explosion.
9. NOTE: Non federal market vehicles only.
10. NOTE: Federal market vehicles only.
www.JagDocs.com
11. NOTE: On vehicles with supercharger, detach the lower
electric connector from the retaining bracket as well as the
electrical connector indicated.
12.
13. WARNING: Secure the component to the transmission

jack.
CAUTION: Use suitable packing material to prevent

Torque: 35 Nm

15.
16.
Installation

Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Tank Filler
Pipe
Removal
1. Refer to: Diesel Fuel System Health and Safety Precautions (100-00
Refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety
2. Open the fuel filler door and remove the cap.

5. Remove the right-hand wheel and tire.
Installation).
6. Remove the right-hand wheel arch liner.
7.
Torque: 9 Nm
9. Refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
Refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
Refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00D, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00E, Removal and Installation).
10.
www.JagDocs.com
11.

13. Torque: 9 Nm
14. Torque: Bolt: 9 Nm
Installation

Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail
High-Pressure Fuel Pump Supply Line
Removal
NOTES:
Some illustrations may show the engine removed for clarity.
1. Depressurize the fuel system.
Refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
3. WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open

flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related
components. Highly flammable mixtures are always
present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions
CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping fuel.

blanking caps.
4.
Installation).
7.
8.
9.
www.JagDocs.com
10.
12.
13. WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or
open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel
related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always
present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions
CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping fuel.

blanking caps.
14.
15.
17.
18.
20. CAUTION: Discard the fuel pipe.
NOTE: This step requires the aid of another technician.
With the aid of another technician remove the low pressure fuel pipe as
indicated.
Installation
1. Connect the new fuel pipe to end of the special tool as

indicated.
2. CAUTIONS:
Install a new fuel pipe.
Care must be taken not to damage the component.
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: This step requires the aid of another technician.
With the aid of another technician, install a new low pressure fuel pipe
using the special tool as indicated.
3. Inspect the low pressure fuel line for correct fitment and routing as
indicated.
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5.

7.
8.
10.
11.
www.JagDocs.com
12. Torque: 21 Nm
13.
Torque: 48 Nm
16.
17. Torque: 12 Nm
Installation).
Acceleration Control -
Acceleratror pedal 10 7 89
Acceleration Control - Acceleration Control
For a detailed description of the acceleration controls, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop
manual. REFER to: Acceleration Control (310-02, Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Accelerator pedal Fuses

Throttle body Wiring harness
Electrical connector(s)
Sensor(s)
Engine control module (ECM)
the next step.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
If the module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the Warranty
into account.

P012100 Throttle/Pedal Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Position Sensor A TP sensor sensing manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Circuit circuits TP 1 and TP circuit diagrams and check TP sensor sensing circuits TP 1 and TP 2
Range/Performance 2 - short to power, for short to power, high resistance. Check and install a new throttle
high resistance body as required
TP sensor failure
www.JagDocs.com
Circuit Low circuit TP 1 - short circuit diagrams and check TP sensor sensing circuit TP 1 for short
to ground, high to ground, high resistance. Check and install a new throttle body as
resistance required
TP sensor failure
Circuit High circuit TP1 - short circuit diagrams and check TP sensor sensing circuit TP 1 for short
to power to power. Check and install a new throttle body as required
TP sensor failure
Position Sensor/Switch TP sensor sensing manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
B Circuit Low circuit TP 2 - short circuit diagrams and check TP sensor sensing circuit TP 2 for short
to ground, high to ground, high resistance. Check and install a new throttle body as
resistance required
TP sensor failure
Position Sensor/Switch TP sensor sensing manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
B Circuit High circuit TP 2- short circuit diagrams and check TP sensor sensing circuit TP 2 for short
to power to power. Check and install a new throttle body as required
TP sensor failure
Position Sensor/Switch APP sensor circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
C Circuit Low APP 1 - short to circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuit APP 1 for short to
ground, high ground, high resistance
resistance
Position Sensor/Switch APP sensor circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
C Circuit High APP 1 - short to circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuit APP 1 for short to
power power
P210129 Throttle Actuator Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Control Motor Circuit Signal invalid manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Range/Performance Jammed throttle circuit diagrams and test throttle actuator control motor circuit for
blade, gearing or short to ground, power, high resistance. Suspect the throttle body,
motor check and install a new throttle body as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Control Motor Circuit Signal compare manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Range/Performance failure circuit diagrams and test throttle actuator control motor circuit for
Jammed throttle short to ground, power, high resistance. Suspect the throttle body,
blade, gearing or check and install a new throttle body as required, refer to the new
motor module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Control Motor Circuit Signal plausibility manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Range/Performance failure circuit diagrams and test throttle actuator control motor circuit for
Jammed throttle short to ground, power, high resistance. Suspect the throttle body,
blade, gearing or check and install a new throttle body as required, refer to the new
motor module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Control Motor Circuit Commanded manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Range/Performance position not circuit diagrams and test throttle actuator control motor circuit for
achievable short to ground, power, high resistance. Suspect the throttle body,
Throttle blade check and install a new throttle body as required, refer to the new
stuck open module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Intake air system
leak
Control Motor Circuit Signal invalid manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
High Throttle motor circuit diagrams and check throttle motor control circuit for short to
control circuit - power. If ECM is suspect, check and install a new module as
short to power required, refer to new module/component installation note at top of
ECM fault DTC Index
Control Motor Circuit Signal plausibility manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
High failure circuit diagrams and check throttle motor control circuit for short to
Throttle motor power. If ECM is suspect, check and install a new module as
control circuit - required, refer to new module/component installation note at top of
short to power DTC Index
ECM fault
Control System - Throttle MIL manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Forced Engine request due to fuel
Shutdown cut
Control Motor Current Throttle motor manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Range/Performance control circuit - circuit diagrams and check throttle motor control circuit for short to
short to ground, ground, power, high resistance
power, high
resistance
Control Throttle Body Throttle spring manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Suspect throttle body
Range/Performance faulty faulty. Check and install a new throttle body as required, refer to
the new module/component installation note at top of DTC Index
Position Sensor/Switch APP sensor circuit 2 manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
D Circuit Low - low input circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuit 2 for short to ground,
open circuit
Position Sensor/Switch Accelerator pedal manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical circuit
D Circuit Low Input position (APP) diagrams and check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit 1
sensor circuit 1 - for short to ground, power. Set ignition status to 'ON' engine 'OFF'
short to ground, check and record 'Pedal value sensor 1' datalogger signal. With
power pedal in idle position, value of signal should be approximately 0%,
Accelerator pedal if not suspect the pedal position sensor, check and install a new
position (APP) sensor as required
sensor failure
D Circuit High - high input circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuit 2 for short to power
D Circuit High Input position (APP) diagrams and check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit 1
short to power check and record 'Pedal value sensor 1' datalogger signal. With
Accelerator pedal pedal in fully depressed position, value of signal should be
position (APP) approximately 99%, if not suspect the pedal position sensor, check
sensor failure and install a new sensor as required
E Circuit Low Input position (APP) diagrams and check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit 2
short to ground, check and record 'Pedal value sensor 2' datalogger signal. With
high resistance pedal in idle position, value of signal should be approximately 0%,
Accelerator pedal if not suspect the pedal position sensor, check and install a new
position (APP) sensor as required
sensor failure
E Circuit High Input position (APP) diagrams and check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit 2
short to power check and record 'Pedal value sensor 2' datalogger signal. With
Accelerator pedal pedal in fully depressed position, value of signal should be
position (APP) approximately 99%, if not suspect the pedal position sensor, check
sensor failure and install a new sensor as required
A/B Voltage and 2 range circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuits 1 and 2 for short to
Correlation performance - ground, power and high resistance. Clear the DTCs and retest. If
sub-processor the code remains, replace the APP sensor
Position Sensor/Switch APP sensor - manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
A/B Voltage excessive difference circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuits 1 and 2 for short,
Correlation between open circuit
raw values of circuit
1 and 2 -
sub-processor
A/B Voltage and 2 range circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuits 1 and 2 for short to
Correlation performance - ground, power and high resistance. Clear the DTCs and retest. If
sub-processor the code remains, replace the APP sensor
A/B Voltage and 2 range circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuits 1 and 2 for short,
Correlation performance open circuit
Position Sensor/Switch Pedal value manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical circuit
D/E Voltage difference between diagrams and check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit 1
Correlation channel 1 and and 2 for short to ground, power. Set ignition status to 'ON' engine
channel 2 greater 'OFF' check and record 'Pedal value sensor 1' and 'Pedal value
than a threshold sensor 2' datalogger signal. With pedal in fully depressed position,
value of signals should be approximately 99%, with pedal in idle
position, value of signals should be approximately 0%, if not
suspect the pedal position sensor, check and install a new sensor
as required
Position Sensor/Switch Gradient on one manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical circuit
D/E Voltage channel without diagrams and check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit 1
Correlation gradient on the and 2 for short to ground, power. Set ignition status to 'ON' engine
other 'OFF' check and record 'Pedal value sensor 1' and 'Pedal value
sensor 2' datalogger signal. With pedal in fully depressed position,
value of signals should be approximately 99%, with pedal in idle
position, value of signals should be approximately 0%, if not
suspect the pedal position sensor, check and install a new sensor
as required
Acceleration Control - Accelerator Pedal
Removal
2.
3. Torque: 9 Nm
Installation

Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Item Specification
Speed control module vertical alignment 90° ± 0.75°

Speed control module retaining nuts 5 - 44
Speed control module alignment bolt lock nut 5 - 44
Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Speed Control -
Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION 5.0L V8
Item Description
3 Clock spring
5 Forward alert switch
7 Brake lamp/brake test switch
9 Adaptive speed control radar sensor
10 Electric throttle actuator
www.JagDocs.com
Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Speed Control -
Overview
OVERVIEW
Speed Control
The speed control system is integrated with the engine management system and uses fueling intervention to automatically
maintain a set vehicle speed. Once engaged, the system can also be used to accelerate the vehicle without using the
accelerator pedal.
The speed control system comprises the following components:
On/Off/Suspend switch
'+' and '-' (set/accelerate and decelerate) steering wheel switches
Resume switch
Clock spring
Speed control warning indicator.
Adaptive Speed Control
The adaptive speed control system uses a forward looking radar sensor to scan the road ahead, looking for objects that are
moving at a different rate to itself. When a target is identified the adaptive speed control system will monitor the time gap
between it and the target vehicle. When that gap falls below a set driver selected level the adaptive speed control system will
intervene slowing the vehicle by backing off the throttle and/ or applying the brakes, until the correct gap is attained.
The adaptive speed control system comprises the following components:
Adaptive speed control sensor

Adaptive speed control module
Steering wheel control switches
ECM (engine control module)
Electric throttle actuator
ABS (anti-lock brake system) module and pump
Adaptive speed control warning indicator (in the instrument cluster).
Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Speed Control - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus; U =
Private CAN bus
Item Description
1 ABS (anti-lock brake system) modul
5 Audio system control switches
6 Clockspring
8 Electric throttle actuator
9 Brake lamp/brake test switch
10 Adaptive speed control radar sensor
System Operation
SPEED CONTROL
The speed control system uses inputs from the brake lamp/brake test switch, the APP sensor, the ECM and the ABS module.
Speed control is operated by the driver using only the steering wheel switches. When speed control is active, the ECM
regulates the PWM (pulse width modulation) signals to the fuel injectors to adjust the fuel supply as required to maintain the
set speed.
During speed control operation, the ECM controls vehicle speed by adjusting fuel injection duration and timing. When the
accelerator pedal is pressed with speed control active, the ECM outputs a calculated throttle angle signal in place of the actual
throttle angle signals produced by the APP sensor. The calculated throttle angle is derived from fuel demand.
The minimum set speed for speed control is 18 mph (30 (km/h). Speed control is automatically suspended if the following
conditions apply:
Vehicle speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h)

The brake pedal is pressed
The cancel button is pressed
Neutral, park or reverse gear is selected
The difference between actual speed and the set speed is too great
If the engine speed becomes near to the red line (maximum engine speed)
If the accelerator pedal is used to accelerate beyond the set speed for too long.
ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL

The adaptive speed control system comprises the following components:
Adaptive speed control sensor

Adaptive speed control module
Steering wheel control switches
ECM
Electric throttle actuator
ABS module and pump
Adaptive speed control warning indicator.
The adaptive speed control system uses a forward looking radar sensor to scan the road ahead, looking for objects that are
moving at a different rate to itself. When a target is identified the adaptive speed control system will monitor the time gap
between it and the target vehicle. When that gap falls below a set driver selected level the adaptive speed control system will
intervene slowing the vehicle by backing off the throttle and/ or applying the brakes, until the correct gap is attained. The
driver can chose between four gap settings, 1, 1.4, 1.8 and 2.2 seconds.
The system will detect but not react to the following:
Vehicles in the oncoming lane

Stationary vehicles
Pedestrians
Vehicles not in the same lane.
Adaptive speed control is active when the vehicle is moving. Adaptive Speed Control only functions when a set speed is
entered in normal speed control mode. The adaptive speed control system only intervenes with the set speed when it detects
a target vehicle, and then only if the minimum time gap is breached.
It is important to note that the system is intended for use in limited driving situations, does not remove control and
responsibility from the driver, and at all times can be quickly overridden. The adaptive speed control system is not a collision
warning system and will not react to stationary objects. The system does not operate below a minimum speed of
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph) since it is unsuitable for use in cities or congested traffic. The system is best suited to main
roads/ highways with gradual bends.
The ECM, throttle body and throttle control are unchanged from those used for non adaptive speed control variants.
The adaptive speed control system is based on the use of a front mounted radar sensor. The sensor transmits a 1.5° wide
beam forward of the vehicle and detects the returning signals reflected off other vehicles and objects ahead.
The 1.5° wide radar beam is mechanically scanned at a rate of 10 sweeps/second across a total arc of 15° centered on the
longitudinal axis of the vehicle. The radar operates at millimetric wavelengths (76 - 77 GHz) and transmits a frequency
modulated continuous wave signal at a relatively low power level (no high power pulses).
With the ignition ON, the adaptive speed control module is powered up but no radar transmissions are emitted until the
vehicle is in motion.
In follow mode a set speed is selected in the normal speed control manner and this speed is maintained until a slower vehicle
is encountered in the lane ahead. When the vehicle ahead comes within the effective range of the radar sensor, the system
identifies it as a target vehicle and an icon is illuminated on the instrument cluster to indicate that the system is in "follow
mode". When the distance between the two vehicles closes to a set time gap, the adaptive speed control system closes the
throttle and if necessary applies the brakes to maintain the set time gap. Follow mode is effectively a closed loop system. If
several vehicles are ahead, the closest vehicle is chosen as the target to follow. If the target vehicle moves out of radar range,
or if either vehicle changes lane or drops below the minimum operating speed, the system exits follow mode and the follow
mode icon is extinguished. The adaptive speed control system will only raise its speed to the originally set speed, it will not
accelerate past this speed to maintain a time gap.
Driver operation of the foot brake or control switches will immediately cancel adaptive speed control.
When the vehicle is in follow mode the follow mode warning indicator is illuminated in the instrument cluster and the current
gap setting will be displayed in the message center.
Item Description
1 Forward Alert warning indicator
2 Follow mode warning indicator
The radar sensor detects three primary parameters of objects within the scanned arc. These are:
Range
Relative velocity
Angle.
Range: The radar sensor detects the presence and ranges of different vehicles and objects within the scanned arc up to a
distance of approximately 130 meters. The transmitted signal frequency changes continuously in a cyclic pattern (modulation).
This means that, in the time taken for the signal wave front, to travel to and from a target vehicle (or other object), the
transmission frequency will have changed. The difference between the received signal frequency and the new transmission
frequency is proportional to the distance between the transmitting vehicle and the target vehicle.
Relative velocity: When the signal is reflected off a vehicle moving at a different speed (opening or closing gap) an effect
known as the Doppler shift causes an extra frequency modulation to be imposed on the signal. This Doppler frequency varies
with the relative speed of the vehicle being followed, enabling the system to differentiate between vehicles traveling at
different speeds and also between moving vehicles and stationary objects.
Angle: Using a narrow angle beam to scan horizontally enables the system to distinguish between vehicles in different lanes
and between vehicles and roadside objects.
System Restrictions
The adaptive speed control system is only intended to provide enhanced speed control as described above in certain restricted
conditions. The following points should be noted:
Automatic braking is limited to approximately 30% of full pressure (0.3G deceleration) and is intended to provide a
smooth, gradual deceleration in follow mode conditions. Harsh braking by the target vehicle or following the target
vehicle down to very low speeds or to a halt will require driver override of the brakes.
While the radar sensor detects moving and stationary targets for assessment of the environment ahead, the system
does not react to or provide any control in situations other than follow mode conditions. Stationary or slow moving
vehicles (below 10 km/h), pedestrians, objects on the road and oncoming vehicles in the same lane are not recognized.
WARNING: The adaptive speed control system is not a collision warning or avoidance system and that, other than the
limited conditions of follow mode, driver intervention will be necessary to control the vehicle speed.
In follow mode, some situations may cause target ambiguities for the detection system. These situations include:
The nearby presence of a third vehicle when driving on a line slightly offset to the target vehicle.
Vehicles edging into the lane ahead which are not detected by the system until they have moved into the radar beam.
On the approach to, or exit from a bend, a target vehicle may be lost or a new target acquired as vehicles ahead change their
angular position with respect to the radar sensor. On a straight road, if the sensing vehicle is in follow mode below its selected
set speed, losing the target vehicle will cause the sensing vehicle to accelerate to this set speed. This acceleration is
undesirable either on, or entering a bend when the target is suddenly lost, and in this situation the system inhibits the
resumption of the set speed.
The speed control system compares vehicle speed data from the ABS system with the relative speed of an external object as
detected by the radar sensor to ascertain whether the object is stationary or not.
NOTE: If tires are fitted which are different in diameter from those specified for the vehicle, the vehicle speed calculated
by the ABS will not be the true road speed. This situation may cause stationary objects to be falsely identified as moving
vehicles and result in automatic deceleration on a clear road.
SPEED CONTROL SWITCHES
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Set speed adjustment switch
2 Time gap switch (only on vehicles with adaptive speed control fitted)
3 Cancel switch
4 Resume switch
The speed control switches are located on the RH (right-hand)side of the steering wheel. The switches are connected via fly
leads to the clock spring. The speed control switches are resistive ladder type switches which vary the resistance of a 5 volt
signal sent to them. The signal is returned along a LIN bus to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster routes the control
signals to the ECM on the medium speed CAN
Speed control is engaged by rotating the speed adjustment switch to the + or - positions. Once engaged the speed can be
varied by the speed adjustment switches. Each press of the speed adjustment switch will increase or decrease the set speed
in steps of 1 mph (2 kph).
ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL MODULE
The adaptive speed control module, located on the drivers side at the bottom of the 'A' post. The control module is connected
to the other vehicle systems via the high speed CAN bus. Signals from the adaptive speed control forward looking radar sensor
are received on a dedicated CAN bus between the two modules.
ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL RADAR SENSOR
The adaptive speed control radar sensor is located in the front bumper, on the RH side above the radiator grill behind the
bumper cover. The sensor is connected to the adaptive speed control, module via a private CAN bus. If the unit is replaced in
service the unit must be re-aligned vertically. Horizontal alignment is achieved by putting the sensor in service mode using an
approved Jaguar diagnostic system.
FORWARD ALERT SWITCHES
Item Description
The forward alert system utilizes the adaptive speed control system components. Forward alert is turned on and off
independently of adaptive speed control, via a switch mounted in the lower outboard knee bolster switchpack. Forward alert
will notify the driver by means of a chime, a warning indicator in the instrument cluster and an indication in the message
center, when a target vehicle comes into range. The system will NOT use throttle or brake intervention to slow the vehicle.
The forward alert switch is connected to the instrument cluster in a resistive ladder with the luggage compartment opening
switch and the fuel filler flap switch. The instrument cluster sends the forward alert information to the Adaptive speed control
module on the CAN bus.
WARNING: The system is intended as a driver aid and should be used as such. The system is NOT a collision warning or
avoidance device.
The system sensitivity can be adjusted in the same manner as the adaptive speed control, via the steering wheel mounted
switches. Each adjustment is accompanied by a message in the message center.
Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Speed Control
For a detailed description of the speed control system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual.
Visual Inspection
Speed control sensor Fuses

Ensure the speed control sensor is free from obstructions Wiring harness
Speed control module Electrical connector(s)
Brake switch Steering wheel switches
Brake switch
Speed control sensor
Speed control module
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively, check for
Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (vehicles with adaptive system installed)

An incorrectly aligned speed control sensor can cause incorrect system operation. Before starting any repair work on the speed
control system, on vehicles with the adaptive system installed, check speed control sensor for correct vertical alignment, and
carry out speed control sensor alignment procedure using manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Symptom Chart

Speed control inhibited or
disabled Power or ground supply to Check for DTCs that could be caused by power or
speed control module or speed ground failure to the module or sensor and refer to
control sensor DTC Index
Steering wheel speed control Check for sticking, jammed and broken speed control
switch/circuits switches. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Throttle sensors check speed control switch circuits for short, open
Brake switch circuit
Anti-Lock Brake System fault For throttle position sensor tests. REFER to:
Electronic Engine Controls - 3.0L Diesel (303-14
Electronic Engine Controls - 3.0L Diesel, Diagnosis and
Testing),
Electronic Engine Controls - 3.0L (303-14B Electronic
Engine Controls - V6 3.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and
Testing),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14 Electronic Engine
Controls - V8 4.2L Petrol/V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Diagnosis
and Testing).
Check for correct installation and adjustment of brake
switch. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check brake switch circuits for short, open circuit
Check ABS system for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index
Unable to regulate/adjust
vehicle speed Steering wheel switch Check for sticking, jammed and broken speed control
malfunction switches. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check speed control switch circuits for short, open
circuit
DTC Index
Vehicles WITH Adaptive System Installed
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:
If a module or component is suspect, and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the Warranty
tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give extra information read by
the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three decimal places and
with a current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads into account.

B1A84-81 Car Configuration Data
- Invalid serial data RJB reporting invalid Re-configure the RJB using manufacturer approved
received data diagnostic system

- Missing calibration Speed control sensor out Check speed control sensor for correct vertical
of alignment alignment, and carry out speed control sensor
alignment procedure using manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

- Invalid serial data Yaw voltage Clear DTC and re-test, if DTC remains suspect speed
received unreasonable for 0.5 control sensor. Check and install a new sensor as
seconds or unchanged required, refer to the new module/component
for 1.2 seconds. Note: installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Yaw sensor internal to
speed control sensor
C1A67-87 Forward Looking Sensor Incorrect or missing data from

- Missing Message speed control sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
check power and ground supplies for short, open
circuit. Check private CAN network between speed
control sensor and speed control module for failure,
clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains suspect the
speed control sensor, check and install a new sensor

- Component internal Internal hardware failure Suspect the speed control sensor. Check and install a
Failure new sensor as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

- Component or system Sensor reduced visibility Check for blockage in front of radar. Note: This DTC
operation obstructed or will be cleared automatically when environmental
blocked conditions allow
- Component or system Speed control sensor Allow system to cool. Note: This DTC will be cleared
over temperature internal temperature automatically when environmental conditions allow
exceeded threshold
P174E-81 Output Shaft

Speed/ABS Wheel Follow speed is Clear DTC and re-test
Speed Correlation - mis-calculated to too
Invalid serial data high a value
received
Communication Bus - Vehicle CAN Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Bus off condition DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Carry out CAN network integrity tests using

With ECM/PCM "A" - No ECM missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
sub type information DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index

With TCM - No sub TCM missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
type information DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check TCM for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index

With Gear Shift Control No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Module A - No sub type power and ground connections to the Transmission
information Shift Module. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, complete a CAN network integrity
test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the CAN network between the Transmission
Shift Module and Speed Control Module

With Gear Shift Module Transmission shift Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- Missing Message module missing message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check transmission shift module for related

With Anti-lock Brake ABS missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
System (ABS) Control DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No sub type system. Check ABS for related DTCs and refer to the
information relevant DTC Index

With Park Brake Module Parking brake missing Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- No sub type message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system. Check parking brake module for related

With Instrument Panel Instrument cluster Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Cluster (IPC) Control missing message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No sub type system. Check instrument cluster for related DTCs
information and refer to the relevant DTC Index

Software Invalid configuration Re-configure the speed control module using the
Incompatibility - No message is received manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear
sub type information DTCs and re-test. If DTC still logged, suspect
incorrect speed control module installed. Check and
install a new module as required, refer to new
Index

Software RJB - at least one of the Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
Incompatibility - Not car configuration approved diagnostic system
configured parameters is not
configured
www.JagDocs.com
From ECM/PCM A - No ECM did not respond Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to relevant
sub type information properly to speed control DTC Index
cancel or auto brake
cancel request

From ECM/PCM A - ECM did not respond Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to relevant
Signal incorrect after properly to speed control DTC Index
event resume request

From ECM/PCM A - Invalid data received Check the Engine Control Module for related DTCs
Invalid serial data from engine control and refer to relevant DTC Index. If U040181 is
received module logged as historic but no other DTCs have logged in
Bus signal/message the engine control module at the same time and
failure distance, it may be caused by cranking with low
Speed control inhibited voltage conditions. Check battery and charging
by ECM system according to instructions in the battery care
manual. Install the latest Engine Control Module
software using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, contact Dealer Technical Support before
replacing components

From Anti-Lock Braking Event information Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Module for
System (ABS) Control Deactivated related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - De-activated
From Anti-lock Brake Stability assist fault Check ABS module for related DTCs and refer to
System (ABS) Control relevant DTC Index
Module - Invalid serial
data received
From Park Brake Parking brake module did Check parking brake module for related DTCs and
Control Module - Signal not respond properly to refer to relevant DTC Index
incorrect after event apply request

From Park Brake Speed control inhibited Check parking brake module for related DTCs and
Control Module - by parking brake module refer to relevant DTC Index
Invalid serial data
received
From Brake System Event information Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Module for
Control Module - Event related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
information
From Suspension Invalid serial data Check the Suspension Control Module for related
Control Module 'A' - received DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Invalid serial data
received
From Instrument Panel Speed control inhibited Check instrument cluster, CJB and RJB for related
Control Module - by instrument cluster DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index
Invalid serial data
received
U1A00-88 Private Communication
Network - Bus off Bus off The module setting this code has disabled CAN
transmission. Check for other bus off codes. Check
the module and circuits. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams. Clear all DTCs and road test the vehicle. If
the concern reoccurs contact Dealer Technical
Support for further advice. Under no circumstance
should any parts be replaced to overcome this issue

Failure - Internal Internal electronic failure Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
electronic failure a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

Configuration Data sent from RJB is Check/amend Car Configuration File using the
Incompatible - No sub invalid manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear DTC
type information and re-test. If DTC remains, re-configure RJB using
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear DTC
and re-test. If DTC remains check RJB for DTCs and
refer to DTC Index

General checksum Internal micro controller Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
failure error a new module as required, refer to the new
Checksum fault module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index

General memory failure Internal RAM test fault Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

Internal electronic Internal control module Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
failure failure a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

Circuit/component Circuit/component The Control module internal protection has been
protection time-out protection time-out activated. Check for other related DTCs that could
lead to this event. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
problem persists, renew the module. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
suspect

Signal compare failure Signal compare failure Check vehicle battery and charging system. Refer to
Battery supply voltage the relevant section in the workshop manual. Refer
below a recognized value to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
and ground supply circuits to the modules
Vehicles WITHOUT Adaptive System Installed
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:
If a module or component is suspect, and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the Warranty

P0500-82 Vehicle Speed Sensor A - Alive
/ sequence counter incorrect / Vehicle speed - invalid Check ABS for related DTCs and refer to
not updated signal received over CAN relevant DTC Index
P0500-86 Vehicle Speed Sensor A -

Signal invalid Vehicle speed - invalid Check ABS for related DTCs and refer to
signal received over CAN relevant DTC Index

Range/Performance - No sub Vehicle speed signal from Carry out CAN network integrity test using
type information ABS not plausible the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Contact Dealer Technical Support
for further assistance

Range/Performance - Signal Vehicle speed - range Check ABS/TCM for related DTCs and refer
compare failure performance to relevant DTC Index
P0504-00 Brake Switch A / B Correlation

- No sub type information The brake pressure reading Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
does not agree with the this DTC using the manufacturer approved
brake light switch value diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check brake switch
circuits for short, open circuit, high
resistance
P0504-01 Brake Switch A / B Correlation

- General electrical failure Brake switch high fault: Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
- Brake lights stuck this DTC using the manufacturer approved
on diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
- Gearshift interlock circuit diagrams and check brake switch
inoperative circuits for short, open circuit, high
- Speed control resistance
inoperative
Brake switch low fault:
- Brake lights
inoperative
- Gearshift stuck in
Park
- Reduced engine
braking
P0566-00 Cruise Control OFF Signal - No

sub type information Speed control Cancel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
switch 2 stuck closed check speed control switch circuits for short,
open circuit. Check for stuck switch. Check
and install a new speed control switch as
required
P0567-00 Cruise Control DECREASE

DISTANCE Signal - No sub Speed control Resume Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
type information switch 7 stuck closed check speed control switch circuits for short,
required
P0568-00 Cruise Control INCREASE

DISTANCE Signal - No sub Speed control Accel Set Check and install a new speed control
type information Plus Switch 6 stuck closed switch as required
P0569-00 Cruise Control COAST Signal -

No sub type information Speed control Coast Set Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Minus switch 3 stuck check speed control switch circuits for short,
closed open circuit. Check for stuck switch. Check
required
P056A-00 Cruise Control INCREASE

DISTANCE Signal - No sub Speed control Headway Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
type information Plus switch 4 stuck closed check speed control switch circuits for short,
required
P056B-00 Cruise Control DECREASE

DISTANCE Signal - No sub Speed control Headway Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
type information Minus switch 5 stuck check speed control switch circuits for short,
closed open circuit. Check for stuck switch. Check
required
P0571-62 Brake Switch A Circuit - Signal

compare failure Plausibility error Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check brake light switch signal circuits for
short, open circuit. Check and install a new
brake light switch as required
P0575-01 Cruise Control Input Circuit -

General electrical failure General electrical failure Check speed control system for related
DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Carry
out CAN network integrity tests using the
P0576-16 Cruise Control Input Circuit

Low - Circuit voltage below Circuit voltage below Check speed control system for related
threshold threshold DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Carry
P0577-17 Cruise Control Input Circuit

High - Circuit voltage above Circuit voltage above Check speed control system for related
threshold threshold DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Carry
P0578-00 Cruise Control Multi-Function

Input A Circuit Stuck - No sub One of speed control Check for stuck speed control switch, install
type information switches stuck a new switch pack as required
P0578-1C Cruise Control Multi-Function

Input A Circuit Stuck - Circuit Circuit voltage out of range Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
voltage out of range check speed control switch circuits for short,
required
P0579-1C Cruise Control Multi-Function

Input A Circuit Speed control switch pack Check and install a new speed control
Range/Performance - Circuit internal failure switch pack as required
voltage out of range
Input A Circuit Signal invalid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Range/Performance - Signal check speed control switch circuits for short,
invalid open circuit. Check for stuck switch. Check
required

Input B Circuit Stuck - No sub Active speed limiter fault Check for active speed limiter fault, install a
type information new transmission shift module as required
Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Speed Control Sensor
Adjustment
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
501-F007
Inclinometer
1. CAUTION: Protect the surrounding paintwork to avoid

damage.
2. NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a

level surface.
www.JagDocs.com
3. NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a level
surface.
Special Tool(s): 501-F007
4. NOTES:
Do not release the lock nut.
Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a level

surface.
Special Tool(s): 501-F007

damage.
6.
Configure the ACC module using the diagnostic tool.
This procedure is required if:
A new ACC radar and, or ACC module are installed.
The ACC radar needed to be removed or is misaligned in its
position due to another repair operation.
7.
From the diagnostic tool menu, select: Service Alignment Mode.
The follow indicator will now be flashing, this indicates that the
vehicle is in "service alignment" and now requires driving.
The vehicle speed must be above 30mph (48 kph).
Choose a road with plenty of stationary objects, like street
lights, road signs, or barriers. Use an inside or outside lane.
Following vehicles too closely will obscure the stationary targets
from the radar, a time gap of 2 seconds is recommended.
A straight road will produce a quicker and better result, although
the process will still operate on a curved road.
The time that the ACC module takes to align will vary, depending
on the route, speed, number of targets, and individual module.
When the flashing follow indicator light extinguishes, the ACC
system is now functional, and a required vehicle speed can now
be set by the driver and the ACC system will operate as normal.
Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Speed Control Deactivator
Switch
Removal
1. Refer to: Stoplamp Switch (417-01, Removal and Installation).
Installation
1. Refer to: Stoplamp Switch (417-01, Removal and Installation).

Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Speed Control Module
Removal
2. Refer to: Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (310-03C Speed Control - V8

5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
4.
Torque: 4 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Speed Control Sensor
Removal
2. Refer to: Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (310-03C Speed Control - V8

5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).

damage.
4. Torque: 5 Nm
NOTE: Make sure that the sensor is aligned after

installation as described in the speed control sensor
adjustment procedure.
Installation

Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Speed Control Switch
Removal
Refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00 General Information,

2. Refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental Restraint

System, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Upshift Paddle Switch (307-05A Automatic

Installation).
4. Refer to: Downshift Paddle Switch (307-05A Automatic

Installation).
5. Torque: 3 Nm
6. Torque: 3 Nm
7. Torque: 6 Nm
8.
Installation

Climate Control System - General Information -
NOTE: NAS vehicles.
Air conditioning (A/C) refrigerant R-1234yf
A/C compressor oil SPA2
NOTE: ROW vehicles.
Air conditioning (A/C) refrigerant R-134a
NOTE: EU vehicles.
Air conditioning (A/C) refrigerant R-1234yf
Capacities
Description Grammes
A/C refrigerant - all engine variants 700
Refrigerant Oil Adding Capacities
NOTE: Rotate the A/C compressor shaft at least 6 to 8 turns when draining the refrigerant oil.
Item Milliliters
A/C condenser core and desiccant bag Add 25ml oil
A/C evaporator Add 30ml oil
A/C compressor 1. Drain old A/C compressor. With drain plug removed and ports uncapped, rotate
shaft to remove A/C compressor oil and measure the amount of oil captured. 2. Drain
new A/C compressor into a clean vessel. With drain plug removed and ports
uncapped, rotate shaft to remove oil. Then add back a quantity of the new oil that is
identical to the quantity of oil removed from the old A/C compressor. However, if this
quantity is less than 30ml, then make it up to 30ml.
A/C lines - if air conditioning has been Add 5ml oil per A/C line
operational.
A/C system after flushing - with new No oil should be used- new oil in new compressor is sufficient
compressor installed
A/C system after flushing - without a Add 80ml oil
new compressor installed - remaining
A/C compressor oil is to be drained.
Compressor and expansion valve must
not be flushed (removed from the circuit)
A/C compressor drain plug Torque 12Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control System - General Information - Climate Control System
For a detailed description of the Climate Control System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
Workshop Manual. REFER to:
Air Distribution and Filtering (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation),
Heating and Ventilation (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation),
Air Conditioning (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation),
Control Components (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation),
Electric Booster Heater (412-02 Auxiliary Climate Control, Description and Operation),
Electric Booster Heater (412-02 Auxiliary Climate Control, Description and Operation),
Electric Booster Heater (412-02 Auxiliary Climate Control, Description and Operation).
WARNING: Servicing must be carried out by personnel familiar with both vehicle system and the charging and testing
equipment. All operations must be carried out in a well ventilated area away from open flame and heat sources.
Visual Inspection
Coolant level Fuse(s)

Hose(s) Wiring harness
Coolant pump Electrical connectors
Control flap(s) Blower
Duct(s) Air conditioning compressor
Vent(s) Electric cooling fan
Cabin air filter Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATCM)
Drive belt Refrigerant pressure sensor
Air conditioning compressor
Thermostatic expansion valve
Evaporator
Receiver drier
Air conditioning condenser
Refrigerant pipes Auxiliary
drive belt
Fuel fired booster heater
Fuel fired booster heater fuel pump
Fuel fired booster heater fuel pipes
the next step
Symptom Chart
Air conditioning performance poor or
inoperative Refrigerant undercharged GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Refrigerant overcharged
Thermostatic expansion valve
faulty
Receiver drier restricted
Water in refrigerant
Air conditioning operates briefly and

then switches off Electric cooling fan inoperative Test the operation of the electric cooling
Air conditioning condenser fan
airflow obstructed Check the air conditioning condenser for
external obstructions
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : PRELIMINARY TESTS

A1: PRELIMINARY TEST 1
NOTES:
This test is performed with the engine not running.
Normal pressure for a correctly charged and switched off system is approximately 4.5 bar on both gauges (system
equalised).
1 Close the valves on the air conditioning station

2 Connect the air conditioning station to the vehicle charging ports
3 Check the pressure values
Is a pressure registered on both gauges?
Yes
No
GO to Pinpoint Test D.
PINPOINT TEST B : FUNCTIONALITY TESTS

B1: FUNCTIONALITY TEST 1
NOTES:
Normal pressures for a correctly charged and working system are 1.0 bar to 2.0 bar (low) and 11.0 bar to 15.0 bar (high).
Normal temperature (measured at the center air vent) for a correctly charged and working system is -7°C to -2°C when
ambient temperature is 20°C.
1 Close the valves on the air conditioning station

2 Connect the air conditioning station to the vehicle charging ports
3 Open all doors and the tailgate
4 Start the engine
5 Set the temperature to the lowest setting (all zones)
6 Set the fan speed to maximum
7 Set the recirculate switch to off
8 Insert a temperature probe into the centre air vent
9 Raise engine speed to 1500rpm and maintain this speed for 5 minutes
10 Check the temperature value
Are the pressure readings stable and in the green 'normal' region of the gauge?
Yes
Air conditioning system operating normally
No
Air conditioning system fault present. GO to Pinpoint Test C.
PINPOINT TEST C : GAUGE TESTS

CONDITIONS
C1: GAUGE TEST 1
NOTE: This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.

Did the gauges register a change in pressure when the air conditioning was switched on?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the Automatic Temperature Control Module
(ATCM) for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
C2: GAUGE TEST 2
NOTE: This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.

Are the pressure gauge readings fluctuating?
Yes
Moisture present in the air conditioning system. Recover the refrigerant. Install a new receiver drier.
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and evacuate and recharge the air conditioning
system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to C3.
C3: GAUGE TEST 3
NOTES:
This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.

Are the pressure gauge readings too low?
Yes
GO to C4.
No
GO to C6.
C4: GAUGE TEST 4
NOTE: This test is performed with the engine not running.
1 Stop the engine

2 Using the manufacturer approved refrigerant leak detector, check for a refrigerant leak
Was a refrigerant leak detected?
Yes
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and recover the refrigerant. Repair as necessary.
Evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to C5.
C5: GAUGE TEST 5
1 Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and recover the refrigerant
Was the weight of the recovered refrigerant less than specified for the air conditioning system?
Yes
No
Install a new receiver drier. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and evacuate and
recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
C6: GAUGE TEST 6
NOTES:
This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.
Are the pressure gauge readings too high?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
Test inconclusive. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
C7: GAUGE TEST 7
1 Stop the engine

2 Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and recover the refrigerant
Was the weight of the recovered refrigerant more than specified for the air conditioning system?
Yes
No
Install a new thermal expansion valve. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
PINPOINT TEST D : NITROGEN LEAK TESTS
CONDITIONS
D1: NITROGEN LEAK TEST
CAUTION: When charging the system with nitrogen, the pressure should be regulated to 7.0 bar.
1 Charge the air conditioning system with nitrogen

2 Isolate the nitrogen supply
3 Monitor the pressure gauge and check for leaks
Has the source of the leak been identified?
Yes
Rectify the leak as necessary. Install a new receiver drier. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual and evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Climate Control Module (HVAC) (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation).
Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
General Procedures
1. WARNING: Servicing must be carried out by personnel familliar with both

vehicle system and the charging and testing equipment. All operations
must be carried out in a well ventilated area away from open flame and
heat sources.
NOTE: The receiver drier need only be changed under the following
circumstances: There is dirt in the refrigerant circuit ( eg. compressor
seizure ), the system is leaking and refrigerant has been lost to
atmosphere, or the refrigerant circuit has been open more than 24 hours,
due to repair.
Refrigerant recovery.
2. Remove the dust covers from the high and low pressure
connections.
3. Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate connections.
4. Open the valves on the connections.
5. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.
6. Turn the process switch to the correct position.
7. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.
www.JagDocs.com
8. WARNING: Refrigerant must always be recycled before re-use to ensure
that the purity of the refrigerantis high enough for safe use in the air
conditioning system. Recycling should always be carried out with
equipment which is design certified by Underwriter Laboratory Inc. for
compliance with SEA J1991. Other equipment may not recycle refrigerant
to the required level of purity. R143a Refrigerant Recover Recycling
Recharging station must not be used with any other type of
refrigerant.Refrigerant R134a from domestic and comercial sources must
not be used in motor vehicles air conditioning systems.
Allow the system to recover the refrigerant from the system.
9. Close the valves on the refrigerant station.
10. Turn the main switch 'OFF'.
11. Close the valves on the connections.
12. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.
13. Install the dust covers to the connectors.
14. Open the tap at the rear of the station to drain the refrigerant oil.
15. Measure and record the quantity of refrigerant oil recovered from the
system.
16. Close the tap at the rear of the station.
17. Evacuation.
18. Remove the dust covers from the high and low pressure connections.
19. Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate connections.
20. Open the valves on the connections.
21. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.
22. Turn the process switch to the correct position.
23. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.
24. Allow the station to evacuate the A/C system.
25. CAUTION: The system must be evacuated immediatley before

recharging commences. Delay between evacuation and recharging is not
permitted
Recharging
26. Close the valves on the refrigerant station.

27. Close the valve on the oil charger.
28. Disconnect the yellow line from the refrigerant station.
29. Remove the cover from the oil charger.
30. Pour the correct quantity of refrigerant oil into the oil charger.
31. Install the cover to the oil charger.
32. Connect the yellow line to the refrigerant station.
33. Open the valve on the oil charger.
34. Move the pointer on the refrigerant gauge to mark the position of the
refrigerant drop.
35. Slowly open the correct valve on the refrigerant to allow the vacuum to
pull the refrigerant into the system.
36. Close the valve on the refrigerant station when the correct amount of
refrigerant has been drawn into the air conditioning system.
37. Turn the main switch 'OFF'.
38. Close the valves on the connections.
39. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.

Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Flushing
General Procedures
1. WARNINGS:
Use extreme care and observe all safety precautions related to the
use of refrigerants. Due to refrigerant hazards, always wear safety
goggles and non-penetrable gloves when working on or flushing air
conditioning (A/C) systems. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
When flushing the A/C system, refer to the manufacturers

equipment instructions for additional information. Failure to do so may
result in system damage or personal injury.
The A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of

any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts shop bulk refrigerant
at risk of contamination. If the vehicle A/C refrigerant is contaminated,
refer the customer to return to the repair facility that performed the last
A/C repair. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the
A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated
A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as
hazardous waste. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers
equipment instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Prior to using the A/C flushing equipment for the first time, follow
the operating instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Prior to flushing, remove and discard the desiccant sack.

Depending on the equipment used, other A/C components may have to
be removed prior to flushing. For additional information, refer to the
manufacturers equipment instructions before flushing the A/C system.
Recover the refrigerant.

For additional information, refer to Air conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging in this section.
2. Remove the desiccant sack.

For additional information, refer to Section 412-03 Air Conditioning.
3. Flush the system. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers

equipment instructions.
4. Install new refrigerant lines if blocked with debris.
5. Install a new desiccant sack.

For additional information, refer to Section 412-03 Air Conditioning.
6. Add the required amount of oil to the A/C system depending on the
repair procedure.
For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding in this section.
7. Evacuate and charge the A/C system.

For additional information, refer to Air conditioning (A/C) System
8. Carry out fluorescent dye leak detection test.

For additional information, refer to Flourescent Dye Leak Detection in
this section.
9. Check the A/C system for correct operation.

Climate Control System - General Information - Contaminated Refrigerant
Handling
General Procedures
1. If contaminated refrigerant is detected DO NOT recover the refrigerant

into your R-134a OR R-12 recovery/recycling equipment. Take the follow
actions:
1. Repeat the test to verify contaminated refrigerant is present.
2. Advise the customer of the contaminated A/C system and any
additional cost to repair the system. The customer may wish to
return to the repair facility performing the last A/C repair.
3. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery only
equipment designed for capturing and storing contaminated
refrigerant. This equipment must only be used to recover
contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to other vehicles.
As an alternative, contact an A/C repair facility in your area with
the proper equipment to perform the repair.
4. On completion of the recovery of the contaminated refrigerant, it
will be necessary to carry out the A/C system flushing procedure.
For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (AC) System
Flushing in this section.
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control System - General Information - Electronic Leak Detection
General Procedures
1. WARNING: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where A/C leak

testing is to be carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with
refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate this gas all the time.
Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake
cleaner, or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan,
even in a well ventilated area, is very helpful in removing small traces of
contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Attach an R-134a manifold gauge set or use a UL-approved

recovery/recycling device such as an R-134a A/C refrigerant center (which
meets SAE Standard J 1991). For additional information, refer to the
manufacturers equipment instructions.
Both gauges should indicate 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C
(75°F) with the engine off.
If little or no pressure is indicated, carry out the air conditioning
(A/C) system recovery, evacuation and charging procedure.
2. Use an R134-a Automatic calibration halogen leak detector to leak test

the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to the
3. If a leak is found, carry out the air conditioning (A/C) system recovery
procedure.
Climate Control System - General Information - Fluorescent Dye Leak
Detection
General Procedures
1. WARNING: Eye protection glasses supplied with the ultraviolet (UV)

lamp should be used to protect eyesight from harm.
NOTE: The air conditioning (A/C) system has an R-134a leak trace
dye wafer incorporated into the desiccant bag. The exact location of
leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow/green glow of the tracer
dye. Since more than one leak may exist, always inspect each
component. If it is necessary to add dye (due to a severe leakage for
example) use proprietary tracer dye injection equipment.
Check for leaks using ultraviolet (UV) lamp.
2. Check all components, fittings and lines of the A/C system.
3. Carry out the repair. For additional information, refer to Section 412-03
Air Conditioning.
4. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak trace dye with a
general purpose oil solvent.
5. Check the A/C system for correct operation.
6. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and inspecting
with the (UV) lamp.
Climate Control System - General Information - Inspection and Assembly
Requirements
General Procedures
1. Check for leaks using ultraviolet (UV) Lamp.

this section.
2. NOTES:
Any time a hose or component connection leak is observed, the

component and fitting must be separated, cleaned and a new O-ring
fitted and lubricated with air conditioning compressor oil.
For additional information, refer to Specifications in this section.
When separating A/C joints, cap the open connections

immediately. Do not leave open to atmosphere.
O-ring seal surfaces must be free of dirt, lint, burrs and scratches. The
O-ring and connector should be lubricated with air conditioning
compressor oil.
For additional information, refer to Specifications in this section.
Climate Control System - General Information - Manifold Gauge Set
Connection
General Procedures
1. WARNINGS:
use of refrigerants. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
For additional information, refer to the manufacturers equipment

instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury and system damage.
Install the manifold gauge set. For additional information, refer to the
2. Carry out the repair.
3. Remove the manifold gauge set. For additional information, refer to the
4. Carry out flourescent dye leak detection test.

this section.
5. Check air conditioning (A/C) system for correct operation.

Climate Control System - General Information - Refrigerant Oil Adding TDV6
3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Check
CAUTIONS:
Collect the refrigerant oil in a clean measuring cylinder.
1. NOTES:
This step only needs to be carried out when replacing

the A/C compressor.

Torque: 15 Nm
2. NOTES:
This step only needs to be carried out when replacing

the A/C compressor.

Rotate the A/C compressor shaft at least 6 to 8 turns when

draining the refrigerant oil.
3. CAUTIONS:
The refrigerant oil top-up quantity must not exceed the refrigerant
oil fill quantity.
If other A/C components are being renewed in addition to the A/C

compressor, there is no need to top up with additional refrigerant oil,
apart from filling the compressor.
Top up with the calculated quantity of new refrigerant oil.

Adjustment

Climate Control System - General Information - Refrigerant System Tests
General Procedures
1. WARNINGS:
use of refrigerants. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
The A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of

any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts shop bulk refrigerant
at risk of contamination. If the vehicle A/C refrigerant is contaminated,
refer the customer to return to the repair facility that carried out the last
A/C repair. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C
recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C
refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as
hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturers
procedures and instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
NOTE: Jaguar Land Rover Limited supports the efficient usage,

recovery and recycling of the refrigerant used in passenger car air
conditioners. Jaguar Land Rover Limited recommends the use of
UL-approved recovery/recycling device such as R-134a A/C refrigerant
center (which meets SAE Standard J 1991) during any A/C system repair
and recharge procedure which requires that the system be evacuated.
Use R-134a A/C Refrigerant Centre to evacuate and recover the A/C
system.
Follow the equipment manufactures procedures and instructions
for use of equipment.
Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor Commissioning
General Procedures
Activation
CAUTION: Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the component.
1. Set the ignition to the on position, make sure the air conditioning (A/C)
is in the off position.
2. Start the engine and allow to run for a minimum of 5 minutes.
3. Set the heater controls to 22°C, with the fan speed set to 75%.
4. Switch on the A/C system.
5. Open all air vents in the dashboard.
6. Run the A/C system for a minimum of 5 minutes, while the engine is still
at idle speed.
7. Once this is achieved the compressor is stabilized, with the oil being
distributed evenly throughout the system.
Climate Control -

Blower motor control module retaining bolts 1 - 9
Foot duct to cross car beam retaining bolt 5 - 44
Climate control assembly to cross car beam retaining bolts 9 - 80
Climate control module retaining bolts 1 - 9
Defrost vent/register blend door actuator retaining bolts 1 - 9
Evaporator pipe bracket retaining bolts 1 - 9
Evaporator housing retaining bolts 1 - 9
Footwell vent/duct blend door actuator retaining bolt 1 - 9
Heater core housing retaining bolts 2 - 18
Sunload sensor retaining bolt 2 - 18
Evaporator core pipes mounting bracket retaining bolts 1 - 9
Evaporator core pipes to thermostatic expansion valve retaining bolt 5 - 44
Thermostatic expansion valve retaining bolts 3 - 26
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Air Distribution and Filtering - Component Location
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) vehicle shown, RHD (right-hand drive) vehicle similar.
Component Location
Item Description
1 LH (left-hand) side window vent
2 Windshield vent
3 Driver's face level duct
4 Windshield/Side window vent duct
5 Front passenger's face level duct
6 RH (right-hand) side window vent
7 Front passenger's face level register
8 Pollen filter
9 RH inner face level register
10 Front passenger's footwell duct
11 RH rear footwell duct
12 Rear face level registers
13 Rear face level duct
14 LH rear footwell duct
15 LH inner face level register
16 Driver's footwell duct
17 Driver's face level register
Climate Control - Air Distribution and Filtering - Overview
Overview
The air distribution and filtering system controls the distribution and quality of air supplied to the passenger compartment. The
system comprises of a pollen filter and a number of ducts, vents and registers.
Climate Control - Air Distribution and Filtering - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus; P
= Media orientated system transport (MOST) ring.
Item Description
1 Battery
4 Touch screen display (TSD)
7 RH (right-hand) outer face level register
9 LH (left-hand) inner face level register
10 LH outer face level register
11 Face/Feet distribution stepper motor
12 RH temperature blend stepper motor
13 Windshield (defrost) distribution stepper motor
14 LH temperature blend stepper motor
System Operation
Face Level Registers
Operation of the face level registers is controlled by the ATC module, using LIN bus messages to the integral stepper motors.
The four registers operate together in both the opening and closing phases.
The face level registers can be selected to run in one of two modes; 'automatic' or 'always open'. The mode is selected on the
climate control screen of the TSD.
Refer to: Navigation System (415-01 Information and Entertainment System, Description and Operation).
In the automatic mode, operation of the face level registers is synchronized with the engine START/STOP button. When the
engine starts the ATC module opens the registers. When the engine stops, the ATC module closes the registers.
If a face level register is fouled, when it receives an open or close request, the register concerned makes a number of
attempts to reach the requested position. If the register still does not move, it is left in the fouled position. The remaining
registers will continue to open and close as normal.
The automatic mode is disabled when the climate control system is off. The ATC module closes the registers if they are open
in the automatic mode and the climate control system is selected off.
Diagnostics
If a fault occurs with the face level registers, a DTC (diagnostic trouble code) is stored in the ATC module. The DTC can be
read using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system. The Jaguar approved diagnostic system can also initiate a self test routine
to check the operation of the face level registers.
Refer to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Air Ducts
The air ducts distribute air from the heater assembly to the registers and vents in the instrument panel and the center floor
console. Air ducts also direct air from the heater assembly into the front and rear footwells.
Registers and Vents

The registers control the flow and direction of air from the air ducts. The instrument panel contains four face level registers;
one at each end and two mounted centrally. For the rear seat occupants, two registers are installed in the rear face of the
center floor console. All of the registers incorporate vertical and horizontal directional vane adjustment and full air flow
adjustment down to zero.
The four face level registers in the instrument panel each contain an integral stepper motor. The stepper motors enable the
registers to rotate between the open and closed positions. In the open position, the registers have normal appearance and
functionality. In the closed position, the registers present a smooth surface flush with the surrounding instrument panel.
The vents are fixed outlets. There are four vents in the upper surface of the instrument panel; one in each end to direct air
onto the side windows and two along the front edge to direct air onto the windshield.
Central Face Level Registers
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
A Registers closed
B Registers open
Pollen Filter
Item Description
1 Air inlet duct
2 Pollen filter
3 Cover
The pollen filter removes odors and fine particles from fresh air entering the passenger compartment. The pollen filter is
located in the air inlet duct, in the inlet to the blower. A cover on the underside of the air inlet duct provides access to the
pollen filter for servicing.
Climate Control - Heating and Ventilation - Component Location
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) vehicle shown, LHD (left-hand drive) vehicle similar.
Component Location
Item Description
1 Ventilation outlet
2 Blower relay (on RJB (rear junction box))
3 Heater assembly
4 Blower control module
5 Blower
7 Air inlet duct
8 Auxiliary coolant pump
Comments:
All except 3.0L vehicles; 5.0L version shown, 3.0L diesel version similar.
Climate Control - Heating and Ventilation - Overview
Overview
The heating and ventilation system controls the temperature and flow of air supplied to the passenger compartment. The
system is a dual zone automatic system, which can provide different temperature settings for the LH (left-hand) and RH
(right-hand) sides of the passenger compartment.
Climate Control - Heating and Ventilation - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
Item Description
1 Battery
Comments:
all except 3.0L vehicles; 5.0L version shown, 3.0L diesel version similar
www.JagDocs.com
5 Touch screen display (TSD)
6 Integrated control panel
7 Information control module
10 RH (right-hand) temperature blend stepper motor
11 LH (left-hand) temperature blend stepper motor
15 Blower
System Operation
Operation of the heating and ventilation system is controlled by the ATC module.
Refer to: Control Components (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
The system can be operated in automatic or manual mode, with temperature settings selected using the switches on the
integrated control panel.
When the engine is running, coolant is constantly circulated through the heater core by the engine coolant pump and the
auxiliary coolant pump. Where fitted, the auxiliary coolant pump is energized by the CJB on receipt of medium speed CAN bus
signals from the ATC module. The CJB broadcasts auxiliary coolant pump status over the medium speed CAN bus for use by
other vehicle systems.
The blower is supplied with power by the blower relay on the RJB and connected to ground via the blower control module. The
blower control module regulates the voltage across the blower motor to control blower speed. The voltage set by the blower
control module is controlled by a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ATC module. The ATC module uses a feedback
signal from the blower control module to monitor blower speed.
Heater Assembly
The heater assembly controls the temperature and flow of air supplied to the air distribution ducts. The heater assembly is
mounted on the vehicle centerline, between the instrument panel and the engine bulkhead.
The heater assembly consists of a casing that contains an A/C (air conditioning) evaporator, a heater core, two air distribution
control doors and two temperature blend control doors. On 2.7L diesel vehicles, the heater assembly also contains an electric
booster heater.
Refer to: Electric Booster Heater (412-02 Auxiliary Climate Control, Description and Operation).
Mounted on the heater casing are four stepper motors. Each of the stepper motors is connected to either an air distribution
control door or a temperature blend control door.
The A/C evaporator is part of the A/C system.

Refer to: Air Conditioning (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
The heater core provides the heat source to warm the air supplied to the passenger compartment. The heater core is an
aluminum two pass, fin and tube heat exchanger, and is installed across the width of the heater housing. Two aluminum tubes
attached to the heater core extend through the engine bulkhead and connect to the engine cooling system. For additional
information, refer to:
Engine Cooling (303-03A, Description and Operation),

Engine Cooling (303-03B Engine Cooling - V6 3.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Engine Cooling (303-03C, Description and Operation).
Air Inlet Duct

The air inlet duct connects the fresh air inlet in the engine bulkhead to the heater assembly. The air inlet duct is installed
behind the instrument panel on the passenger side.
The air inlet duct consists of a casing that contains a pollen filter, an air inlet door, a blower and a blower control module. A
recirculation air inlet is incorporated into the casing. A servo motor is mounted on the casing and connected to the air inlet
door, to allow selection between fresh and recirculated air.
The pollen filter is part of the air distribution and filtering system.
Refer to: Air Distribution and Filtering (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
The blower regulates the volume of air flowing through the air inlet duct to the heater assembly. The blower consists of an
open hub, centrifugal fan and an electric motor.
The blower control module regulates the power supply to the blower motor. The blower control module is installed in the air
inlet duct downstream of the blower, where any heat generated during operation is dissipated by the air flow.
Auxiliary Coolant Pump

On all vehicles except 3.0L, an auxiliary coolant pump is installed on the rear right side of the radiator housing, in the return
line from the heater core. The auxiliary coolant pump is an electric pump that boosts the flow of coolant through the heater
core.
Ventilation Outlets
The ventilation outlets allow the free flow of air through the passenger compartment. The outlets are installed in the LH and
RH rear quarter panels, below the rear lamps. Each ventilation outlet consists of a grille covered by a soft rubber flap, and is
effectively a non-return valve. The flaps open and close automatically depending on the pressure differential between the air
inside and outside the vehicle.
Climate Control - Air Conditioning - Component Location
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) .L vehicle shown, other vehicles similar.
Component Location
Item Description
1 Evaporator
2 Thermostatic expansion valve
3 Low pressure line
4 Low pressure servicing connection
5 A/C (air conditioning) compressor
6 Receiver/Drier
7 Condenser
8 Refrigerant pressure sensor
9 High pressure line
10 High pressure servicing connection
Climate Control - Air Conditioning - Overview
Overview
The A/C (air conditioning) system transfers heat from the passenger compartment to the outside atmosphere to provide the
heater assembly with dehumidified cold air. It is a sealed, closed loop system filled with a charge weight of R134a refrigerant
as the heat transfer medium. Oil is added to the refrigerant to lubricate the internal components of the A/C compressor.
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Air Conditioning - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
General
To accomplish the transfer of heat, refrigerant is circulated around a sealed system, where it passes through two
pressure/temperature regimes. In each of the regimes the refrigerant changes state, during which process maximum heat
absorption or dissipation occurs.
The low pressure/temperature regime is from the thermostatic expansion valve, through the evaporator to the compressor. The
refrigerant decreases in pressure and temperature at the thermostatic expansion valve, then changes state from a liquid to a
vapor in the evaporator to absorb heat.
The high pressure/temperature regime is from the compressor, through the condenser and receiver drier assembly to the
thermostatic expansion valve. The refrigerant increases in pressure and temperature as it passes through the compressor, then
releases heat and changes state from a vapor to a liquid in the condenser.
Operation of the A/C (air conditioning) system is controlled by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module.
The A/C system works in conjunction with:
The air distribution and filtering system.

Refer to: Air Distribution and Filtering (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
The heating and ventilation system.
Refer to: Heating and Ventilation (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
A/C System Flow Diagram
NOTE: A = Refrigerant liquid; B = Refrigerant vapor; C = Air flow.
Item Description
1 Evaporator
2 Thermostatic expansion valve
3 High pressure servicing connection
5 Engine cooling fan
6 Condenser
7 Receiver/Drier
8 A/C compressor
9 Low pressure servicing connection
10 Blower
A/C Compressor
Item Description
2 Outlet port
3 Inlet port
4 Solenoid valve
6 Pulley
The A/C compressor circulates refrigerant around the system by compressing low pressure, low temperature vapor from the
evaporator and discharging the resultant high pressure, high temperature vapor to the condenser.
The A/C compressor is a permanently engaged variable displacement unit which is driven by the engine accessory drive belt. To
protect the system from excessive pressure, a pressure relief valve is installed in the outlet side of the A/C compressor. The
pressure relief valve vents excess pressure into the engine compartment.
Condenser
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) end tank
2 Condenser core
3 LH (left-hand) end tank
4 Mounting brackets (4 off)
5 High pressure compressor discharge line connector block
6 High pressure liquid outlet line connector block
7 Receiver/Drier outlet pipe
8 Receiver/Drier inlet pipe
9 Receiver/Drier
The condenser transfers heat from the refrigerant to the surrounding air to convert the high pressure vapor from the
compressor into a liquid. The condenser is installed immediately in front of the radiator. Two brackets on each end tank attach
the condenser to the end tanks of the radiator.
The condenser is classified as a sub-cooling condenser and consists of a fin and tube heat exchanger core installed between
two end tanks. Divisions in the end tanks separate the heat exchanger into a four pass upper (condenser) section and a two
pass lower (sub-cooler) section.
The LH end tank provides the connections to the high pressure line from the A/C compressor and the high pressure liquid line
to the evaporator.
The RH end tank provides the connections to the receiver drier.
Receiver Drier
The receiver drier is integrated into the RH end tank of the condenser to remove solid impurities and moisture from the
refrigerant. It also provides a reservoir for liquid refrigerant to accommodate changes of heat load at the evaporator.
NOTE: The receiver drier is part of the condenser assembly and is not serviceable separately.
Refrigerant entering the receiver drier passes through a filter and a desiccant pack, then collects in the base of the unit before
flowing through the outlet pipe back to the condenser.
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
The refrigerant pressure sensor is located in the high pressure/temperature refrigerant line between the condenser and the
thermostatic expansion valve.
Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Item Description
1 Metering valve
2 Housing
3 Diaphragm
5 Outlet passage from evaporator
6 Inlet passage to evaporator
The thermostatic expansion valve meters the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator, to match the refrigerant flow with the
heat load of the air passing through the evaporator.
The thermostatic expansion valve is a block type valve located behind the heater assembly, and attached to the inlet and
outlet ports of the evaporator. The thermostatic expansion valve consists of an aluminium housing containing inlet and outlet
passages. A ball and spring metering valve is installed in the inlet passage and a temperature sensor is installed in the outlet
passage. The temperature sensor consists of a temperature sensitive tube connected to a diaphragm. The bottom end of the
temperature sensitive tube acts on the ball of the metering valve. Pressure on top of the diaphragm is controlled by the
evaporator outlet temperature conducted through the temperature sensitive tube. The bottom of the diaphragm senses
evaporator outlet pressure.
Liquid refrigerant flows through the metering valve into the evaporator. The restriction across the metering valve reduces the
pressure and temperature of the refrigerant. The restriction also changes the liquid stream of refrigerant into a fine spray, to
improve the evaporation process. As the refrigerant passes through the evaporator, it absorbs heat from the air flowing through
the evaporator. The increase in temperature causes the refrigerant to vaporise and increase in pressure.
The temperature and pressure of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator acts on the diaphragm and temperature sensitive tube,
which regulate the metering valve opening and so control the volume of refrigerant flowing through the evaporator. The warmer
the air flowing through the evaporator, the more heat available to evaporate refrigerant and thus the greater volume of
refrigerant allowed through the metering valve.
www.JagDocs.com
Evaporator
The evaporator is installed in the heater assembly, between the blower and the heater matrix, to absorb heat from the exterior
or recirculated air.
Most of the moisture in the air passing through the evaporator condenses into water, which drains out of the vehicle by passing
through a drain tube to the underside of the vehicle.
Refrigerant Lines
To maintain similar flow velocities around the A/C system, the diameter of the refrigerant lines varies to suit the two
pressure/temperature regimes. Larger diameter pipes are installed in the low pressure/temperature regime and smaller
diameter pipes are installed in the high pressure/temperature regime.
Low and high pressure charging connections are incorporated into the refrigerant lines for system servicing.
Climate Control - Control Components - Component Location
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) vehicle shown, LHD (left-hand drive) vehicle similar.
Component Location
Item Description
1 Pollution sensor
Comments:
where fitted
2 Sunload sensor
3 Ambient air temperature sensor
4 Windshield (Defrost) distribution stepper motor
5 Evaporator temperature sensor
8 Control switches
9 Humidity and temperature sensor
10 Air inlet servo motor
11 Blower
16 A/C (air conditioning) compressor solenoid valve
Climate Control - Control Components - Overview
Overview
The climate control system is controlled by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module. It controls the heating and
ventilation system and the A/C (air conditioning) system to regulate the temperature, volume and distribution of air into the
passenger compartment. The system is a fully automatic dual zone system capable of maintaining individual temperature
levels selected for the LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand) sides of the passenger compartment, up to a maximum differential
of approximately 3 ºC (5.4 ºF). Manual overrides for the system include inlet air source, blower speed and air distribution.
These selections can be made using either the soft switches on the home and climate control screens of the touch screen
display (TSD), or the switches on the integrated control panel.
The ATC module also controls:
The rear window heater.

The windshield heater (where fitted).
The exterior mirror heaters.
The seat heaters (where fitted).
The steering wheel heater.
TSD Home Screen
TSD Climate Control Screen

Integrated Control Panel
Item Description
1 LH temperature switches
2 Blower switch
3 RH temperature switches
4 Automatic climate control switch
5 Recirculation switch
6 Rear window heater switch
7 Windshield heater switch
Comments:
where fitted
8 Programmed defrost switch
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Control Components - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
Item Description
1 Battery
Comments:
All except 3.0L vehicles; 5.0L version shown, 3.0L diesel version similar.
6 TSD (touch screen display)
8 Evaporator temperature sensor
9 Humidity and temperature sensor
10 Sunload sensor
12 Pollution sensor
Comments:
where fitted
13 Air inlet servo motor
14 A/C (air conditioning) compressor solenoid valve
15 RH (right-hand) outer face level register
17 LH (left-hand) inner face level register
18 LH outer face level register
19 RH temperature blend stepper motor
22 LH temperature blend stepper motor
23 Windshield (Defrost) stepper motor
26 Blower
System Operation
Air Inlet Control
The source of inlet air is automatically controlled unless overridden by pressing the air recirculation switch on the integrated
control panel. During automatic control, the ATC module determines the required position of the recirculation door from its
'comfort' algorithm and, if fitted, the pollution sensor.
The ATC module provides analogue signals to the air inlet servo motor along a hardwired connection. A potentiometer in the
motor supplies the ATC module with a position feedback signal for closed loop control.
Air Temperature Control

Cooled air from the evaporator enters the heater assembly, where temperature blend doors direct a proportion of the air
through the heater core to produce the required output air temperature.
The two temperature blend doors operate independently to enable individual temperature settings for the left and right sides
of the passenger compartment. The temperature blend doors are operated by stepper motors, which are controlled by the ATC
module using LIN bus messages.
The ATC module calculates the temperature blend stepper motor positions required to achieve the selected temperature and
compares it against the current position. If there is any difference, the ATC module signals the stepper motors to adopt the
new position.
Air temperature is controlled automatically unless maximum heating (HI) or maximum cooling (LO) is selected. When maximum
heating or cooling is selected, a 'comfort' algorithm in the ATC module adopts an appropriate strategy for air distribution, blower
speed, and air source.
Temperature control in one side of the passenger compartment can be compromised by the other side of the passenger
compartment being set to a high level of heating or cooling. True maximum heating or cooling (displayed as 'HI' or 'LO' on the
TSD) can only be selected for the driver's side of the passenger compartment. If 'HI' or 'LO' is selected for the driver's side, the
temperature for the front passenger's side is automatically set to match the driver's side.
If A/C is selected off in the automatic mode, no cooling of the inlet air will take place. The minimum output air temperature
from the system will be ambient air temperature plus any heat pick up in the air inlet path.
If the Temp. sync. soft button on the TSD is pressed, the ATC module synchronizes the temperature of the passenger side of
the passenger compartment with the driver's side.
Blower Control
When the system is in the automatic mode, the ATC module determines the blower speed required from a comfort algorithm.
When the system is in the manual mode, the ATC module operates the blower at the speed selected using either the rotary
control switch on the integrated control panel or the + and - soft buttons on the touch screen display (TSD). The ATC module
also adjusts blower speed to compensate for the ram effect on inlet air produced by forward movement of the vehicle. As
vehicle speed and ram effect increases, blower motor speed is reduced, and vice versa.
Air Distribution Control

Two air distribution doors are used to direct air into the passenger compartment. The doors are operated by stepper motors,
which are controlled by the ATC module using LIN bus messages.
When the A/C system is in automatic mode, the ATC module automatically controls air distribution into the passenger
compartment in line with its 'comfort' algorithm. Automatic control is overridden if any of the TSD air distribution soft buttons
are selected. Air distribution in the passenger compartment will remain as selected until the 'Auto' switch is pressed or a
different manual selection is made.
A/C Compressor Control

When A/C is selected the ATC module maintains the evaporator at an operating temperature that varies with the passenger
compartment cooling requirements. If the requirement for cooled air decreases, the ATC module raises the evaporator
operating temperature by reducing the flow of refrigerant provided by the A/C compressor. The ATC module closely controls the
rate of temperature increase to avoid introducing moisture into the passenger compartment.
If the requirement for cooled air increases, the ATC module lowers the evaporator operating temperature by increasing the flow
of refrigerant provided by the A/C compressor.
When A/C is off, the compressor current signal supplied by the ATC module holds the A/C compressor solenoid valve in the
minimum flow position, effectively switching off the A/C function.
The ATC module incorporates limits for the operating pressure of the refrigerant system. If the system approaches the high
pressure limit, the compressor current signal is progressively reduced until the system pressure decreases. If the system falls
below the low pressure limit, the compressor current signal is held at its lowest setting so that the A/C compressor is
maintained at its minimum stroke. This avoids depletion of the lubricant from the A/C compressor.
A/C Compressor Torque

The ATC module transmits refrigerant pressure and A/C compressor current values to the ECM (engine control module) over the
medium speed then high speed CAN bus, using the CJB as a gateway. The ECM uses these values to calculate the torque being
used to drive the A/C compressor. The ECM compares the calculated value with its allowable value and if necessary forces the
ATC module to inhibit the A/C compressor by transmitting the 'ACClutchInhibit' CAN message. This forces the ATC module to
reduce the drive current to the A/C compressor solenoid valve, which reduces refrigerant flow. This in turn reduces the torque
required to drive the A/C compressor.
By reducing the maximum A/C compressor torque, the ECM is able to reduce the load on the engine when it needs to maintain
vehicle performance or cooling system integrity.
Cooling Fan Control

The ATC module determines the amount of condenser cooling required from the refrigerant pressure sensor, since there is a
direct relationship between the temperature and pressure of the refrigerant. The cooling requirement is broadcast to the ECM
on the medium speed CAN bus. The ECM then controls the temperature of the condenser using the cooling fan.
Programmed Defrost
The programmed defrost DEF switch is located on the integrated control panel. When the switch is pressed, the ATC module
instigates the programmed defrost function. When selected, the ATC module configures the system as follows:
Automatic mode off.

A/C on.
Selected temperature unchanged.
Air inlet set to fresh air.
Air distribution set to windshield.
Blower speed set to level 6.
Windshield heater (where fitted) and rear window heater on.
The programmed defrost function can be cancelled by one of the following:
Selecting any air distribution switch on the TSD.

Pressing the AUTO switch on the integrated control panel.
A second press of the DEF button.
Switching the ignition OFF.
The blower speed can be adjusted without terminating the programmed defrost function.
Rear Window Heater

Rear window heater operation is only enabled when the engine is running. The ATC module controls operation of the rear
window heater using a relay in the RJB. When rear window heater operation is required, the ATC module broadcasts a message
to the RJB on the medium speed CAN bus. On receipt of the message, the RJB energizes the relay by providing a ground path
for the relay coil. This allows a battery feed to flow across the relay to power the rear window heater element.
There are two modes of rear window heater operation; manual and automatic.
Manual operation is activated by pressing the rear window heater switch on the integrated control panel. When the switch is
pressed, the status LED (light emitting diode) in the switch illuminates and the rear window heater element is energized.
Manual operation is discontinued when the rear window heater switch is pressed a second time, 21 minutes have elapsed (the
heating phase), or the engine stops. If manual operation is discontinued by the engine stopping, the previous heating phase is
resumed if the engine is re-started within 30 seconds.
There are two variants of automatic operation; automatic operation at the start of a journey and automatic operation during a
journey.
Automatic operation at the start of a journey is initiated if the ambient air temperature is below 5 °C (41 °F). In this instance,
the switch LED is illuminated and the heater element is energized for 21 minutes. Automatic operation is discontinued if the
rear window heater switch is pressed or the engine stops.
Automatic operation during a journey is initiated when low ambient air temperatures are experienced and the vehicle has been
travelling for a set period of time above a threshold speed. In this instance, no feedback is given to the driver to inform him
the rear window heater is operational (the switch LED is not illuminated). The duration of heater operation is variable
depending on the ambient air temperature, vehicle speed and the amount of time the vehicle has been travelling.
Windshield Heater (Where Fitted)

Windshield heater operation is only enabled when the engine is running. The ATC module controls operation of the windshield
heater using two relays in the EJB (engine junction box). When windshield heater operation is required, the ATC module
broadcasts a message to the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus. On receipt of the message, the CJB energizes the relays by
providing a ground path for both relay coils. This allows a battery feed to flow across the relays to power the windshield left
and right heater elements.
There are two modes of windshield heater operation; manual and automatic.
Manual operation is activated by pressing the windshield heater switch on the integrated control panel. When the switch is
pressed, the status LED in the switch illuminates and the windshield heater elements are energized. Manual operation is
discontinued when the windshield heater switch is pressed a second time, 5 minutes have elapsed (the heating phase), or the
engine stops. If manual operation is discontinued by the engine stopping, the previous heating phase is resumed if the engine
is re-started within 30 seconds.
There are two variants of automatic operation; automatic operation at the start of a journey and automatic operation during a
journey.
Automatic operation at the start of a journey is initiated if the ambient air temperature is below 5 °C (41 °F). In this instance,
the switch LED is illuminated and the heater elements are energized for 6.5 minutes. Automatic operation is discontinued if
the windshield heater switch is pressed or the engine stops.
Automatic operation during a journey is initiated when low ambient air temperatures are experienced and the vehicle has been
travelling for a set period of time above a threshold speed. In this instance, no feedback is given to the driver to inform him
the windshield heater is operational (the switch LED is not illuminated) and the duration of operation is variable depending
upon the ambient air temperature, vehicle speed and the amount of time the vehicle has been travelling.
Exterior Mirror Heaters

Operation of the exterior mirror heaters is fully automatic and not controllable by the driver. Exterior mirror heater operation is
determined by ambient air temperature and windshield wiper status. When ambient air temperature reaches a pre-determined
level, the ATC module broadcasts an exterior mirror heating request to the door modules over the medium speed CAN bus. On
receipt of this message, the door modules provide feed and ground connections to both exterior mirror heater elements.
The amount of time the exterior mirror heaters are operational increases if the windshield wipers are switched on. This ensures
the mirrors remain mist free in damp and wet conditions, where there is an increased risk of misting.
Seat Heaters (Where Fitted)

There are four seat heater settings available; off, 1, 2 and 3, which can be selected on the home and climate control screens
of the TSD. The heat setting is relayed to the vehicle occupants through a graduated display on the TSD.
Operation of the heated seats is controlled by the ATC module. When the ATC module receives a heating request from the
TSD, it broadcasts a message to the CJB over the medium speed CAN bus. The CJB then provides a hardwired 12 V supply to
the three heater elements in the related front seat. The heater elements, two in the seat cushion and one in the seat squab,
are wired in series. The ATC module monitors seat temperature using a temperature sensor located in each seat cushion. The
CJB provides the temperature sensors with a 5 V supply. The level of the returned voltage back to the CJB is proportional to
the seat temperature. The value of the return signal is broadcast to the ATC module, over the medium speed CAN bus, which
allows it to control the seat temperature to the required level. The ATC module will suspend or disable operation of the seat
heaters if any of the following occur:
Battery voltage exceeds 16.5 ± 0.3 V for more than 5 seconds. Seat heating is re-enabled when battery voltage
decreases to 16.2 ± 0.3 V.
If a short or open circuit is detected.
If the seat heat temperature rises significantly above the target temperature setting.
The graduated display on the TSD remains illuminated until the seat heaters are turned off or the engine stops. If the engine
is restarted within 30 seconds the seat heater resumes the previous heating level.
Steering Wheel Heater
The steering wheel heater has a single heat setting and is turned on/off on the home and climate control screens of the TSD.
The on/off status of the steering wheel heater is relayed to the vehicle occupants through the TSD. When the ignition is
switched off, the steering wheel heater will reset to off.
Power for the heater element is supplied by the CJB on receipt of a request from the ATC module over the medium speed CAN
bus. Temperature control for the heater element is provided by the steering wheel heater control module which receives a
temperature feedback signal from a NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistor located within the steering wheel.
ATC Module
The ATC module is mounted on the outboard end of the air inlet duct, behind the front passenger side of the instrument panel.
The ATC module processes inputs from the TSD, the switches on the integrated control panel and the system sensors. In
response to these inputs, the ATC module outputs control signals to the A/C system and the heating and ventilation system.
Two electrical connectors provide the interface between the ATC module and the vehicle wiring. The ATC module uses hardwired
inputs from the system sensors, the LIN bus to communicate with the stepper motors and the medium speed CAN bus to
communicate with other control modules on the vehicle.
A/C Compressor Solenoid Valve

The A/C compressor solenoid valve is integral with the A/C compressor. Operation of the solenoid valve is controlled by the ATC
module using a hardwired drive current of differing values. By controlling the flow of refrigerant through the compressor, the
solenoid valve can control the A/C system pressure and the evaporator operating temperature.
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
The refrigerant pressure sensor provides the ATC module with a pressure input from the high pressure side of the refrigerant
system. The refrigerant pressure sensor is located in the refrigerant line between the condenser and the thermostatic
expansion valve.
The ATC module supplies a 5 V reference voltage to the refrigerant pressure sensor and receives a return signal voltage,
between 0 V and 5 V, related to system pressure.
The ATC module uses the signal from the pressure sensor to protect the refrigerant system from extremes of pressure. The ATC
module transmits the A/C pressure, along with the compressor drive current value, to the instrument cluster on the medium
speed CAN bus. These signals are broadcast to the ECM on the high speed CAN bus to allow it to calculate the torque being
applied to the engine by the compressor.
www.JagDocs.com
To protect the system from extremes of pressure, the ATC module sets the A/C compressor to the minimum flow position if the
pressure:
Decreases to 2.1 ± 0.2 bar (31.5 ± 3 lbf/in²); the ATC module loads the A/C compressor again when the pressure
increases to 2.3 ± 0.2 bar (33.4 ± 3 lbf/in²).
Increases to 31 ± 1 bar (450 ± 14.5 lbf/in²); the ATC module loads the A/C compressor again when the pressure
decreases to 26 ± 1 bar (377 ± 14.5 lbf/in²).
Evaporator Temperature Sensor
The evaporator temperature sensor is a NTC thermistor that provides the ATC module with a temperature signal from the
downstream side of the evaporator. The evaporator temperature sensor is mounted directly onto the evaporator matrix fins.
The ATC module uses the input from the evaporator temperature sensor to control the load of the A/C compressor and thus the
operating temperature of the evaporator.
Humidity and Temperature Sensor
The humidity and temperature sensor is installed above the glovebox in the instrument panel. The sensor incorporates:
A NTC thermistor to measure temperature.

A capacitive sensor element to measure humidity.
A motor driven fan to draw air through the sensor and over the sensing elements.
The humidity sensor element is built out of a film capacitor on different substrates. The dielectric is a polymer which absorbs
or releases water proportional to the relative humidity of the air being drawn through the sensor, and thus changes the
capacitance of the capacitor. For protection, the sensor element is contained in a nylon mesh cover.
Humidity within the passenger compartment is controlled by raising and lowering the evaporator temperature. An increase in
evaporator temperature increases the moisture content of the air entering the passenger compartment. Lowering the
evaporator temperature reduces the moisture content of the air entering the passenger compartment.
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Item Description
1 LH door mirror
2 Ambient air temperature sensor
The ambient air temperature sensor is a NTC thermistor that provides the ATC module with an input of external air
temperature. The sensor is hard wired to the ECM and its signal is transmitted to the instrument cluster on the high speed
CAN bus. The instrument cluster acts as a gateway and transmits the ambient air temperature signal to the ATC module on the
medium speed CAN bus. The sensor is installed in the LH door mirror, and is accessed by removing the mirror glass, cap and
actuator.
Sunload Sensor
The sunload sensor consists of two photoelectric cells that provide the ATC module with inputs of light intensity; one as
sensed coming from the left of the vehicle and one as sensed coming from the right. The inputs are a measure of the solar
heating effect on vehicle occupants, and are used by the ATC module to adjust blower speed, temperature and distribution to
improve comfort.
The sensor is installed in the speaker grill on the upper surface of the instrument panel. Power for the sensor is provided by a
5 V feed from the instrument cluster.
The sensor also contains the active anti-theft alarm indicator.

Refer to: Anti-Theft - Active (419-01 Anti-Theft - Active, Description and Operation).
Pollution Sensor (Where Fitted)
The pollution sensor allows the ATC module to monitor the ambient air for the level of hydrocarbons and oxidized gases such
as nitrous oxides, sulphur oxides and carbon monoxide. The sensor is attached to the center of the upper front crossmember.
The pollution sensor is powered by an ignition controlled voltage feed from the CJB and provides the ATC module with separate
signals of hydrocarbon and oxidized gas levels. With a pollution sensor fitted, the ATC module can control the air inlet source
to reduce the amount of contaminants entering the passenger compartment. This function is fully automatic, but can be
overridden by manual selection of the air source using the recirculation switch on the integrated control panel.
If there is a fault with the sensor, the ATC module disables automatic operation of the recirculation door.
Climate Control - Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Cover (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and
Installation).
2.
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
5.
Installation

Climate Control - Blower Motor
Removal
2.
3.
Installation

Climate Control - Blower Motor Control Module
Removal
2. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the clips or

screw threads. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the climate control assembly.
NOTE: RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.
3. Torque: 1.3 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Center Registers
Removal
CAUTION: Do not manually open the registers. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the internal
components.
NOTES:
The center registers must be open before carrying out this procedure. To achieve this set the registers to 'Always Open'
using the climate settings tab on the information and entertainment display. If the registers are set to 'Automatic' mode
(rotating with ignition on/off) and one or more are disconnected during an ignition cycle, a vehicle battery reset may be
required to reconnect the affected registers to the LIN BUS.
1. Set the registers to 'Always Open', using the information and

entertainment display.
2. Refer to: Passenger Side Register (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).
3. Fully extend and lower the steering column for access.
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6. CAUTIONS:
The center registers must be open to aid access and

prevent damage to surrounding trim.
Do not manually open the registers. Failure to follow

this instruction may result in damage to the internal
components.

Installation
2. Return the registers to their original setting - 'Automatic' - using the

information and entertainment display.
Climate Control - Climate Control Assembly
Removal
NOTES:
RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.
3. Refer to: Instrument Panel Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and

4.
5. Torque: 9 Nm
Torque: 9 Nm
7.
Installation

Climate Control - Climate Control Module
Removal
2. Refer to: Instrument Panel Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and

3. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the clips or screw

threads. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the climate control assembly.
Make sure that the component is correctly located on

the locating dowels.
Torque: 1.3 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator
Removal
2. Refer to: Instrument Panel Console (501-12, Removal and Installation).
3. CAUTIONS:


Torque: 1.3 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Driver Side Register
Removal
components.
NOTES:
If the registers are set to 'Automatic' mode and one or more are disconnected during an ignition cycle, a vehicle battery
reset may be required to reconnect the affected registers to the LIN BUS.
1.
2.
3.

5.
6.
7.

Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Evaporator
Removal
All vehicles
2. Refer to: Heater Core and Evaporator Core Housing (412-01 Climate
Control, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Thermostatic Expansion Valve (412-01 Climate Control,


Torque: 1.3 Nm
5. Torque: 1.3 Nm
6.
7.
All vehicles

Torque: 1.3 Nm
10. WARNING: Only use moderate force when installing

the sensor.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the evaporator temperature sensor harness

does not become trapped.
Make sure that the sensor is correctly installed.

Installation

Climate Control - Floor Console Register
Removal
1. Remove both floor console side trim panels.
2.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Remove the 2 clips.
Installation

Climate Control - Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator
Removal
2. Refer to: Climate Control Assembly (412-01 Climate Control, Removal

and Installation).
3. CAUTIONS:


Torque: 1.3 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Heater Core
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles

Torque: 1.3 Nm
4. Torque: 1.3 Nm
component.

component.
Torque: 1.3 Nm

7.
8.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Heater Core and Evaporator Core Housing
Removal

and Installation).

Torque: 1.3 Nm

Torque: 1.3 Nm
6. CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harnesses are

correctly located.
NOTE: Note the position of the wiring harnesses to

aid installation.

correctly located.
NOTE: Note the position of the wiring harnesses to

aid installation.
8. Torque: 2.4 Nm
9. Torque: 2.4 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Instrument Panel Register Trim Panel
Removal
2. Refer to: Center Registers (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and

Installation).
3.
4.
5.
6.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the clutch rib is located

between the two ribs on the car rearward (front half), of
the register housing to avoid damage on installation.

2.
• Position the Iocat1.ng peg.
E 101124'
Climate Control - In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Removal
1. Refer to: Glove Compartment (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,

2.
Installation

Climate Control - Passenger Side Register
Removal
components.
NOTES:
If the registers are set to 'Automatic' mode and one or more are disconnected during an ignition cycle, a vehicle battery
reset may be required to reconnect the affected registers to the LIN BUS.
1.
2.
3.
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6. Install the clips into the instrument panel.


and returned to their original positions in the passenger
side register carrier.
9.
Installation

Climate Control - Pollen Filter
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Installation

Climate Control - Recirculation Blend Door Actuator
Removal

3. NOTE: Make sure that the actuator is correctly aligned

to the recirculation blend door arm.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Sunload Sensor
Removal
2. CAUTIONS:
Protect the surrounding trim to avoid damage.
Make sure that the clips are correctly located.
3.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is correctly

located on the locating dowels.
Torque: 2 Nm
I nst allat ion

Climate Control - Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Removal
NOTES:

and Installation).

Torque: 1.3 Nm

Torque: 1.3 Nm
All vehicles
5. CAUTIONS:
Take care not to damage the O-ring seals during

installation.
A new O-ring seal is to be installed.
Torque: 5.3 Nm
6. CAUTIONS:

installation.
A new O-ring seal is to be installed.
Torque: 3.5 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Desiccant Bag V6 3.0L Petrol/V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Removal

Procedures).
and Installation).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 12 Nm
6.
Installation

Auxiliary Climate Control -

Electric booster heater retaining screws 1.3 - 11
Auxiliary Climate Control - Electric Booster Heater - Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
1 Evaporator
2 Heater core
3 Electric booster heater
4 Heater assembly
5 150 A megafuse
Auxiliary Climate Control - Electric Booster Heater - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN (local
interconnect network) bus.
Item Description
1 Battery
www.JagDocs.com
7 ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor
8 Ambient temperature sensor
15 150 A megafuse
System Operation
General
Operation of the electric booster heater is controlled by the ATC module, which communicates with the micro-controller in the
booster heater using the LIN bus. The temperature requested by the ATC module is based on:
The ambient air temperature.

The engine coolant temperature.
The temperatures selected on the integrated control panel.
The blower must be running for the electric booster heater to operate.
If electrical load management is in force, electric booster heater performance is reduced. For additional information, refer to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A, Description and Operation),

Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V6 3.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C, Description and Operation).
Electric Booster Heater
The electric booster heater is installed in the heater assembly, on the downstream side of the heater core. It consists of
ceramic coated thermistor elements, rated at 1.25 kW, and a micro-controller. Electrical power for the booster heater is
supplied by the BJB via a 150 A megafuse installed under the RH front seat.
Auxiliary Climate Control - Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump
Removal

2. Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02, Removal and Installation).
3.
4. NOTE: Clamp the coolant hose to minimize coolant

lose.

lose.
6.
Installation
1.

lose.
lose.
4.
6. Remove the coolant expansion tank pressure cap.
7. Fill the cooling system up to the MAX mark on the coolant expansion
tank using a fifty percent mixture of Jaguar Premium Cooling System
Fluid or equivalent, meeting Jaguar specification WSS M97B44-D and
fifty percent water.
8. Install the coolant expansion tank pressure cap.
9. Start and run the engine.
10. Set the heating system to MAX heat, the blower motor to MAX speed
and the air distribution to the instrument panel registers.
11. CAUTION: Observe the engine temperature gauge. If the engine

starts to over-heat switch off immediately and allow to cool. Failure to
follow this instruction may cause damage to the vehicle
Allow the engine to run until hot air is emitted from the instrument
panel registers, while observing the engine temperature gauge.
12. Switch the engine off.
13. Allow the engine to cool.

14. WARNINGS:
Never remove the coolant expansion tank cap under any

circumstances while the engine is operating. Failure to follow this
To avoid having scalding hot coolant or steam blowing out of the

cooling system, use extreme care when removing the coolant pressure
cap from a hot cooling system. Wait until the engine has cooled, then
wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure cap and turn it slowly
until the pressure begins to release. Step back while the pressure is
released from the system. When certain all the pressure has been
released (still with a cloth) turn and remove the coolant pressure cap
from the coolant expansion tank. Failure to follow these instructions may
Release the cooling system pressure.
15. Fill the cooling system up to the MAX mark on the coolant expansion
tank using a fifty percent mixture of Jaguar Premium Cooling System
Fluid or equivalent, meeting Jaguar specification WSS M97B44-D and
fifty percent water.
16. Install the coolant expansion tank pressure cap.
18. Check all coolant hoses for visible signs of coolant leaks.
Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Auxiliary Climate Control - Electric Booster Heater
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles
All vehicles

Torque: 1.3 Nm


Installation

Air Conditioning -
A/C compressor retaining bolts 25 18 -
A/C compressor manifold and tube retaining bolt 9 - 80
A/C condenser core retaining studs 5 - 48
A/C condenser core supply and return lines retaining nuts 8 - 71
Power steering oil cooler retaining nuts 7 - 62
A/C desiccant bag retaining screw (vehicles fitted with petrol engines) 22 16 -
A/C desiccant bag retaining screw (vehicles fitted with diesel engines) 4 - 37
A/C pressure cutoff switch 8 - 71
Air Conditioning - Air Conditioning

REFER to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Air Conditioning - Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol
Removal
Installation).

Procedures).
5. Refer to: Specifications (412-00 Climate Control System - General

6. Refer to: Refrigerant Oil Adding - V6 3.0L Petrol (412-00 Climate Control
7.
www.JagDocs.com
8. CAUTIONS:
Immediately cap all refrigerant lines to prevent

ingress of dirt and moisture.

blanking caps.
Torque: 9 Nm
9.
10. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.

installation.
Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Air Conditioning - Condenser Core V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal

Procedures).

3. Refer to: Radiator (303-03D Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,


www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 8 Nm
6. Torque: 8 Nm
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Air Conditioning - Pressure Cutoff Switch
Removal
1. For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System

Recovery, Evacuation and Charging (412-00 Climate Control System -
2. For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12, Removal and
Installation).
3.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the air conditioning (A/C) hose

does not turn when removing the low pressure switch.
TORQUE: 8 Nm
Installation

Instrument Cluster -
Illumination bulb. 3.0 Watt
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Speedometer
2 Message Center
3 Tachometer
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster - Overview
OVERVIEW
The primary task of the instrument cluster is to display current vehicle status through a series of analogue gauges, indicator
lamps, and a LCD (liquid crystal display) message center. In addition to this, the instrument cluster:
Acts as a gateway between the medium speed and high speed CAN (controller area network) bus networks
Is connected by the LIN (local interconnect network) bus to the start control unit and the steering wheel clockspring
Controls operation of the steering column adjust feature
Refer to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Description and Operation).
Acts as an interface for the passive anti-theft system.
Refer to: Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active, Description and Operation).
Two analogue gauges are located in the instrument cluster; the speedometer and the tachometer. The speedometer is located
on the LH (left-hand) side of the instrument cluster. The tachometer is located on the RH (right-hand) side of the instrument
cluster
and displays engine speeds up to 7000 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) for the supercharged engine, 8000 RPM for the naturally
aspirated engines and 6000 RPM for diesel variants.
The message center is a LCD located in a central position in the cluster. The message center displays system status
information including fuel quantity remaining.
www.JagDocs.com
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN (local
interconnect network) bus
Item Description
1 Battery
5 Sun load sensor (alarm LED (light emitting diode))
6 Servotronic valve
8 Steering column motor
9 High speed CAN bus connection to other vehicle systems
10 Engine oil pressure switch
12 Brake fluid level switch
13 LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch
14 Start control module
15 Clockspring
16 RH (right-hand) steering column multifunction switch
17 Engine coolant level sensor
18 Auxiliary lighting switch
System Operation
WARNING INDICATOR FUNCTIONALITY
Item Description
1 LH turn signal
2 RH turn signal
3 Brake warning
4 Brake warning (NAS)
5 Forward alert
6 Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)
7 Adaptive speed control
8 ABS (anti-lock brake system) warning
9 ABS warning (NAS)
10 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
11 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
12 Airbag warning
13 Front fog lamps
14 Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) warning
15 Seat belt warning
16 Side lamps
17 High beam
18 Rear fog lamps
The functionality for each of the above warning indicators is described in the following sections:
1 and 2. Turn Signal Indicators
The turn signal indicators are controlled by the CJB on receipt of medium speed CAN bus signals from the instrument cluster.
The instrument cluster outputs a voltage to the turn signal indicator switch. The switch contains resistors of different values.
When the switch is operated in either the LH or RH direction, the voltage is passed to a ground connection in the instrument
cluster which detects the reduced voltage supplied via the resistors. When the turn signal indicator switch is operated in the
LH or RH direction, the instrument cluster detects the ground voltage and determines whether a LH or RH selection is made.
The instrument cluster transmits a medium speed CAN message to the CJB for operation of the applicable turn signal
indicators. The message can contain a number of states for each possible switch position and also an out of range low and
high state for circuit faults and an initial value for the switch neutral position. The turn signal indicators are not subject to the
3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The RJB (rear junction box) software controls the flash rate of the warning indicator which sends 'ON' and 'OFF' signals to the
instrument cluster which flashes the indicators in a green color. During normal operation, the warning indicator flashes slowly,
accompanied simultaneously by a sound from the instrument cluster sounder. If a fault exists, the RJB transmits a message to
the instrument cluster which responds by displaying an appropriate message in the message center.
The hazard warning indicators are controlled by the CJB on receipt of a completed ground path from the hazard warning
indicator switch. The CJB outputs a medium speed CAN message to the instrument cluster which operates both the LH and RH
turn signal indicators simultaneously. The hazard warning indicators can operate with the ignition switched off, therefore the
CAN message from the CJB will also carry a 'wake-up' message for the instrument cluster.
3. Brake Warning Indicator
This warning indicator is displayed in a red or amber color (dependant on market) as a brake symbol in all markets except
United States of America (USA) which have the word 'BRAKE' in place of the symbol. The indicator is controlled by high speed
CAN messages from the ABS module and the parking brake control module. The indicator is illuminated in a red color for a 3
second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The instrument cluster monitors the fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir using a hardwired level switch. If the fluid level falls
to below a determined level, the switch contact is broken and the ABS module detects the low fluid level condition. The
instrument cluster illuminates the warning indicator and simultaneously displays a 'BRAKE FLUID LOW' message in the
message center.
NOTE: If both the brake warning indicator and the ABS warning indicator illuminate simultaneously, a major fault in the
brake system will have occurred.
The warning indicator also displays parking brake status. When the parking brake is applied, the warning indicator will be
illuminated by the instrument cluster and, if the vehicle is moving, the message 'PARK BRAKE APPLIED' will be also displayed
in the message center in response to a CAN message from the parking brake control module.
If a condition exists where the parking brake cannot be applied, the parking brake control module issues a CAN message to the
instrument cluster which flashes the warning lamp on and off and is accompanied with a message 'CANNOT APPLY PARK BRAKE'.
If a fault occurs in the parking brake system, the parking brake control module issues a CAN message to the
instrument cluster which illuminates the warning indicator and displays the message 'PARK BRAKE FAULT' in the message
center.
4. Forward Alert Indicator
The forward alert system uses the components of the adaptive speed control system to alert the driver of the presence of a
vehicle ahead. The system can be turned on and off using a switch located in the auxiliary lighting switch when the adaptive
speed control system is off. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the ignition is
switched on.
The forward alert system is controlled by the adaptive speed control module. When the switch is pressed, the forward alert
system is activated and the adaptive speed control module issues a forward alert active message on the high speed CAN bus
to the instrument cluster. The forward alert icon in the instrument cluster will illuminate in an amber color and a 'FORWARD
ALERT' message will be displayed in the message center. When the button is pressed a second time, the module issues a
forward alert off CAN message. The forward alert system will be deactivated, the forward alert icon will go off and a message
'FORWARD ALERT OFF' will be displayed in the message center.
5. Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) Indicator
The ASL is controlled by the ECM (engine control module). An ASL switch is located in the floor console, adjacent to the gear
selector lever. When the ASL switch is pressed, this is sensed by the ECM which issues a high speed CAN message to the
instrument cluster. The instrument cluster illuminates the ASL warning indicator in an amber color to show the driver that ASL
is active. The driver sets the required speed using the speed control SET +/- switches on the steering wheel. The selected
speed is shown by the message ' LIMITER SET XXX MPH / K/MH' in the message center. The indicator is illuminated in an
amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on. ASL can be deselected by pressing the ASL switch,
by depressing the throttle pedal initiating kick-down or by pressing the 'cancel' switch on the steering wheel. The ASL indicator
will go off and the message center will display the message 'limiter cancelled' for 4 seconds. If a fault occurs in the ASL
system, the ECM will send a message to the instrument cluster to illuminate the ASL indicator and display the message
'LIMITER NOT AVAILABLE'.
6. Adaptive Speed Control Indicator
The adaptive speed control system is controlled by the adaptive speed control module. Operation of the SET +/- switches on
the steering wheel will activate the system. Operation of the switches is detected by the adaptive speed control module. The
module issues a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster which illuminates the adaptive speed control indicator,
when the system is in 'follow mode', in an amber color and displays a 'SETSPEED XXX MPH / KM/H' message in the message
center. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
7. Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Warning Indicator
The ABS warning indicator is controlled by the ABS module. If a fault in the ABS system is detected by the ABS module, the
module issues a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster to illuminate the ABS warning indicator in an amber color
and display the message 'ABS FAULT' in the instrument cluster. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second
indicator check when the ignition is switched on. If a fault is present when the ignition is on, the bulb will remain illuminated
after the 3 second indicator check period.
NOTES:
The 'ABS FAULT' message is not displayed in NAS markets).
If both the ABS warning indicator and the brake warning indicator illuminate simultaneously, a major fault in the brake
system will have occurred.
On NAS vehicles, the ABS warning indicator is also used for parking brake operation. The NAS warning indicator does not have
'ABS' on the icon and will function as described previously for the parking brake operation of the brake warning indicator.
8. Engine Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The MIL warning indicator is controlled by the ECM and illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a message on the
high speed CAN bus from the ECM. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the
ignition is switched on.
If the MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started or illuminates when driving, a fault is present and must be
investigated at the earliest opportunity. Illumination of the MIL warning indicator alerts the driver to an OBD (on-board
diagnostic) fault which will cause excessive emissions output. This may relate to either an engine management system fault or
a transmission.
9. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Indicator
The TPMS warning indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a medium speed CAN message from the TPMS
module. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
If the indicator illuminates and is accompanied by the message 'TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' in the message center, then a
TPMS fault has occurred. If the indicator illuminates and accompanied by a different message, then a low tire pressure has
been detected, a spare wheel has been fitted or a TPMS sensor has failed.
10. Airbag Warning Indicator
The airbag warning indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for the 3
second indicator check when the ignition is switched on. The indicator remains illuminated after the 3 second period has
expired until the instrument cluster receives a turn off message on the high speed CAN bus from the RCM (restraints control
module).
11. Front Fog Lamp Indicator
The green colored front fog lamp indicator is controlled by the CJB and illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a
front fog lamp on message on the medium speed CAN bus from the CJB. The indicator is illuminated for as long as the front
fog lamps are active. The front fog lamp indicator is not subject to the 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched
on.
12. Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) Indicator
The DSC warning lamp is controlled by the ABS module and illuminated by the instrument cluster in response to messages
received on the high speed CAN bus. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for the 3 second indicator check when the
ignition is switched on. The DSC warning indicator, are permanently illuminated in an amber color if the instrument cluster
receives a high speed CAN message from the ABS module relating to one of the following faults:
Traction control fault

Yaw control fault
Engine drag torque control fault
Panic Brake Assist (PBA) fault
Signal missing relating to either traction control active, yaw control active or DSC switch input.
The above faults will also generate an applicable DSC and ABS warning message in the message center. The DSC warning
indicator will flash at 2 Hz for if the traction control or yaw control is active when the DSC system is enabled. If the DSC
system is switched off, the warning indicator will be permanently illuminated until the DSC system is subsequently
re-activated.
13. Safety Belt Warning Indicator
The safety belt warning indicator operates for both the driver and passenger safety belts. The warning indicator is controlled by
the RCM and illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of high speed CAN bus messages. The safety belt warning
indicator is not subject to the 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The operation of the passenger seat buckle switch is as described below with the exception that the instrument cluster must
receive a hardwired signal from the belt minder control module to indicate that a passenger is occupying the seat.
The safety belt warning indicator is subject to a timer. The warning indicator is activated when the following conditions exist:
Ignition is switched on
One of the front seat belts is unbuckled
USA market only - 75 seconds has elapsed after ignition on mode is selected
Vehicle is not in reverse gear
Vehicle speed is more than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Once the above parameters are met, the instrument cluster flashes the warning indicator at 2 Hz for 10 seconds accompanied
by a simultaneous chime. After 10 seconds the chime ceases and the warning indicator is permanently illuminated for 20
seconds. This sequence is repeated every 30 seconds until one of the following events occurs:
300 seconds has elapsed

The safety belt of the occupied front seats is fastened
The ignition is switched to off mode
The vehicle speed decreases to below 5 km/h (3 mph).
NOTE: On USA market vehicles, the warning indicator in not permanently illuminated.
The safety belt minder function cannot be disabled. The seat belt minder function can be disabled.
Refer to: Safety Belt System (501-20A Safety Belt System, Description and Operation).
14. Side Lamp Indicator
The instrument cluster controls the green colored side lamp indicator on receipt of a side lamp status message on the medium
speed CAN bus from the CJB and the auxiliary junction box. The lighting switch on the LH steering column multifunction switch
is connected to the instrument cluster. Selections using this switch are detected by the cluster which requests the side or
headlamp operation via a message to the CJB and the RJB. The CJB and the RJB responds with a side lamp active message
and the cluster illuminates the side lamp indicator. The side lamp indicator is not subject to the 3 second indicator check when
the ignition is switched on.
15. High Beam Indicator
The instrument cluster controls the blue colored high beam indicator on receipt of a high beam status message on the medium
speed CAN bus from the CJB. The lighting switch on the LH steering column multifunction switch is connected to the
instrument cluster. High beam or flash selections using this switch are detected by the cluster which requests the light
operation via a CAN message to the CJB. The CJB responds with a high beam active message and the cluster illuminates the
high beam indicator. The high beam indicator is not subject to the 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
16. Rear Fog Lamp Indicator
The amber colored rear fog lamp indicator is controlled by the auxiliary junction box and illuminated by the instrument cluster
on receipt of a rear fog lamp on message on the medium speed CAN bus from the RJB. The indicator is illuminated for as long
as the rear fog lamps are active. The rear fog lamp indicator is not subject to the 3 second indicator check when the ignition is
switched on.
SPEEDOMETER
The speedometer is driven by high speed CAN signals transmitted by the ABS module. The wheel speeds are measured by
sensors reading the rotational speed of the rear wheels from toothed targets on the hubs. An average of the two wheel speeds
are passed from the sensors to the ABS module in the form of pulsed signals. The ABS module converts these signals into a
speed output on the high speed CAN to the instrument cluster. The same speed outputs from the wheel speed sensors are also
used to calculate the distance the vehicle has travelled.
TACHOMETER
The tachometer is driven by an engine speed signal transmitted on the high speed CAN from the ECM. The signal is derived
from the CKP (crankshaft position) sensor. The signal is received by the instrument cluster microprocessor and the output from
the microprocessor drives the tachometer.
FUEL GAGE
The fuel gage is controlled by CAN messages from the RJB. The RJB reads the values output by the fuel level sensors every
131 ms and transmits a fuel tank contents value, corrected for battery voltage, in a CAN message to the instrument cluster. A
fuel pump symbol is displayed to the left of the linear gage. An arrow above the symbol shows the driver on which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler cap is located. Above the linear fuel gage, is a LCD (liquid crystal display) area which displays odometer
and trip readouts. When a trip computer function is selected, these are replaced by a trip computer display for the trip function
selected.
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

In the area above and below the message center is a LCD display. The area below the message center displays a linear fuel
www.JagDocs.com
gage, odometer, trip distance and trip computer readouts. The trip distance and trip computer information is derived from
information supplied on the high speed CAN bus to the instrument cluster from the ABS module and the ECM.
The area above the message center displays the transmission gear position information and speed control related information.
The transmission information is supplied on the high speed CAN bus from the TCM (transmission control module).
NOTE: There is no engine coolant temperature gage displayed. If the engine coolant temperature increases to above a
predetermined threshold, a warning message is displayed in the message center. The message is sent from the ECM in a high
speed CAN message to the instrument cluster.
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION POSITION

The gear position display shows JaguarDrive selector position or selected gear when using the Jaguar Sequential Shift. The gear
selector module transmits a CAN message to the instrument cluster for gear selector lever position. The module also
outputs a 'not in park' signal to the instrument cluster. The TCM transmits a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster
with data containing the selected gear when in Jaguar Sequential Shift mode.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - WARNING INDICATOR LOCATIONS
NOTE: Other market variants of instrument cluster are similar.
EUROPEAN MARKET - DIESEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Item Description
1 Speedometer
2 ABS indicator
3 Adaptive speed control indicator
4 Glow plug indicator
6 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator
7 Airbag warning indicator
8 Front fog lamp indicator
9 Tachometer
11 Rear fog lamp indicator
12 Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) indicator
13 High beam indicator
14 Side lamp indicator
15 Seat belt warning indicator
16 Message center
17 Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) indicator
18 Forward alert indicator
19 Brake warning indicator
NAS MARKET - V8 NORMALLY ASPIRATED INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Item Description
1 Speedometer
2 ABS indicator (NAS)
3 ABS indicator (ROW)
4 Adaptive speed control indicator
5 Tachometer
7 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator
8 Airbag warning indicator
9 Front fog lamp indicator
11 Rear fog lamp indicator
12 Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) indicator
13 High beam indicator
14 Seat belt warning indicator
15 Side lamp indicator
16 Message center
17 Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) indicator
18 Forward alert indicator
19 Brake warning indicator (NAS)
20 Brake warning indicator (ROW)
The warning indicators are located in various positions in the instrument cluster. The indicators can be split into two groups;
instrument cluster controlled and externally controlled.
Instrument cluster controlled warning indicators are dependent on software logic within the instrument cluster for activation.
The cluster software controls the indicator illumination check at ignition on (power mode 6).
Externally controlled indicators are supplied with current from another vehicle system control module or illuminated by the
instrument cluster software on receipt of a bus message from another vehicle sub-system. The indicator illumination check at
ignition on (powermode 6) is also controlled by the sub-system module for these indicators.
MESSAGE CENTER
The message center is a LCD located in a central position in the cluster. The message center displays system status
information.
ANALOGUE GAGES
Speedometer
The analogue speedometer is located on the LH side of the instrument cluster and is available in 4 market variants:
Major scale Miles Per Hour (MPH), minor scale kilometers per hour (km/h) (ROW)
Major scale MPH, minor scale km/h (NAS)
Major scale km/h, minor scale MPH
Major scale km/h only.
Tachometer
The analogue tachometer is located on the RH side of the instrument cluster. The tachometer has different Revolutions Per
Minute (RPM) scales depending on the engine variant fitted to the vehicle as follows:
4.2L V8 Naturally aspirated 8000 RPM (NAS Only)

5.0L V8 Naturally aspirated 8000 RPM
5.0L V8 Supercharger 8000 RPM
3.0L V6 Naturally aspirated 8000 RPM
3.0 V6 Diesel 6000 RPM.
ELECTRONIC GAGES
Fuel Gage
The linear fuel gage has a colored bar which moves left or right depending on the tank contents. As the bar moves to the left
the fuel tank contents displayed is decreasing. A warning message is displayed in the message center when the fuel tank
contents fall to below the reserve level.
Transmission Gear Position Display
The gear position display shows the JaguarDrive selector position or the selected gear when using the Jaguar Sequential Shift.
The applicable drive letter is highlighted to show that a selection has been made using the JaguarDrive selector.
When Jaguar Sequential Shift is selected, the letters change to numbers; 1 - 6, and the selected gear is highlighted to
emphasize the selection to the driver.
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster
For a detailed description of the Instrument Cluster, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (413-01 Instrument Cluster)
Instrument Cluster (Description and Operation),

Instrument Cluster (Description and Operation),
Instrument Cluster (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Fluid level(s) Fuse(s)

Accessory installations Wiring harness
Instrument cluster
Engine Junction Box (EJB)
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart
The instrument cluster contains a self-diagnostic mode known as engineering test mode (ETM). This can be used to show the
status of the instrument cluster inputs as well as a number of other useful features.
When in the ETM, the Message Centre displays internal data that can be cycled through. All functions except the message
centre display will continue to operate normally unless otherwise noted.
This document is to be used in conjunction with the instrument cluster ETM (see relevant section within this document) and
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) facility; this does not supersede or replace the IDS facility.
Go directly to the 'Area of Concern/Symptom' that indicates the customer concern(s) and perform the actions described within
the relevant section(s):
Area of Diagnostic
Concern/Symptom Ref. No. Actions Notes
Warning lights A-1 Perform instrument cluster Self-Diagnostic When this test is ended the warning lamps
Mode/ETM test 3. currently required to be 'ON' will remain
illuminated.
Multiple warning lights B–1 Check with IDS for DTCs related to .
'ON' identified vehicle system(s).
. B–2 Check instrument cluster battery and Specifically check continuity of Standard
ignition wiring - refer to circuit diagrams. Corporate Protocol (SCP) and Controller Area
Network (CAN) lines.
. B–3 Check instrument cluster grounds. .
. B–4 Check fuses in battery junction box. .
. B–5 Check for harness traps in facia. .
. B–6 Perform instrument cluster Self-Diagnostic Frost/ice warning illuminated in mixed red and
Mode/ETM test 3. amber; therefore colour differs from other
warning lamps. When this test is ended,
warning lamps currently required to be 'ON' will
remain illuminated.
. B–7 Check for open circuit/shorts in wiring to .
related warning lamp trigger (module,
sensor, switch).
Area of Diagnostic
Specific warning lamp C–1 Check with IDS for DTCs related to .
'ON' identified vehicle system.
. C–2 Check for open circuit/shorts in wiring .
related to warning lamp circuit (module,
sensor, switch) where appropriate.
. C–3 Perform cluster Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM Frost/ice warning illuminated in mixed red and
test 3. amber; therefore colour differs from other
warning lamps. When this test is ended,
warning lamps currently required to be 'ON' will
remain illuminated.
. C–4 Check the specific vehicle system What is the warning lamp telling me? Does this
indicated by the warning lamp check out with the DTC logged by the system
illuminated? indicating the fault?
Fuel gauge operation D–1 Perform Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 21 0 - 9 = short circuit; gauge will show empty. 10
to establish if fuel level input to cluster is – 254 = normal range. 255 = open circuit;
out of range or invalid. gauge will show empty. --- = missing signal;
gauge will show empty.
. D–2 Check gauge function versus 0 = empty, 254 = full. 255 = invalid; gauge will
Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 21. show empty.
. D–3 Check for open circuit/shorts in wiring .
between the Fuel Delivery Module, Jet
Pump Module and Rear Electronic Module
(REM).
Fuel gauge reading E–1 Check gauge position versus 0 = empty to 254 = full (255 invalid; gauge will
Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 21. show empty). Other values percentage of above
range e.g. 127 = half.
. E–2 Calculate percentage fuel level from figure Self-Diagnostic Mode fuel level percentage can
obtained from Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM be calculated as follows: Value from
test 21 and compare to IDS vehicle fuel Self-Diagnostic Mode test 26 ÷ 254 x 100 = %
percentage test. shown on gauge.
. E–3 Monitor value of Self-Diagnostic Mode 0 - 9 = short circuit; gauge will show empty. 10
test/ETM test 21 (during test drive) to – 254 = normal range. 255 = open circuit;
establish if input drops out of range. gauge will show empty. --- = missing signal;
gauge will show empty.
. E–4 Monitor 'FUEL LEVEL' in IDS data logger Gauge function is damped so will not follow
(during test drive) to correlate gauge rapidly changing Fuel Delivery Module values.
position to vehicle reported fuel level.
Speedometer H–1 Monitor Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 19 Display speed input in 1/10 mile/h, no decimal
operation (during test drive) check to establish if point shown, and is compensated for tire size
vehicle speed input to cluster is out of etc. Displays ---- or INV if message is not
range or invalid. received or if received data is invalid.
Speedometer reading I–1 During test drive compare speedometer Self-Diagnostic Mode displayed speed figure will
position to Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test be approx 3% higher than speed indicated by
19, displayed value. speedometer. Allowed tolerance – minus
nothing/+ 10% + 2.5 mile/h.
. I–2 Monitor Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 19 Displays ---- if message is not received or if
(during test drive) to establish if vehicle received data is invalid for two seconds or more.
speed input to cluster drops out of range
or is invalid.
. I–3 Check that installed wheels and tires are Non standard wheels and tires may lead to
standard Jaguar fitment. Confirm wheel speed indication inaccuracies. Incorrectly set
size in IDS, 'ADD REMOVE ACCESSORY' wheel size will result in speed indication
section. inaccuracies. Trip and odometer distance
accumulation will also be incorrect.
Tachometer operation J–1 Perform Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 20 Displays ---- or INV if message is not received
to establish if vehicle rpm input to cluster or if received data is invalid.
out of range or invalid.
Tachometer reading K–1 Check tachometer position versus Tachometer accuracy +/- 100 rpm.
Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 20,
displayed value.
. K–2 Monitor 'ENGINE RPM' in IDS data logger Tachometer accuracy +/- 100 rpm.
at constant engine rpm to compare
tachometer indicated engine rpm to
engine rpm reported by Engine Control
Module (ECM).
. K–3 Monitor Self-Diagnostic Mode test/ETM Displays ---- or INV if message is not received
test 20, (during test drive) to establish if or if received data is invalid.
input to cluster drops out of range or is
invalid.
Gauge judder L–1 Perform Self-Diagnostic Mode test/ETM .
test 2, to prove out smooth gauge
operation.
Gauge noise M–1 Perform vehicle road test. Gauges should .
not be audible during operation in drive
cycle.
www.JagDocs.com
Area of Diagnostic
. M–2 Benchmark noise against non-complaint .
vehicle.
Trip (fuel) computer N–1 Check for consistent display (during test Displays ---- , INV or 255 if message is not
drive) of valid 'Rolling Odometer' count in received, or if received data is invalid.
Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 24.
. N–2 Check that installed wheels and tires are Non standard wheels and tires or incorrectly set
standard Jaguar fit. Confirm fitted wheel wheel size may lead to Odometer increment
size in IDS, 'ADD REMOVE ACCESSORY' inaccuracies. This will impact the distance
section. accumulators, which in turn affects the rolling
average, fuel economy and range values. Trip
distance accumulation will also be incorrect.
. N–3 Consider noting odometer value and .
resetting fuel computer system. Advise
customer to conduct brim-to-brim fuel
tank test. Use collected information to
determine if system accurate.
Column adjust O-1 Check with IDS for DTCs related to .
powered column system.
O-2 Check cluster battery supply voltage and .
ground resistance. Check for loose
connections.
O-3 Check power column motors supply .
voltage.
O-4 Check power column switch for physical .
damage.
Passive Anti-Theft P–1 Check for three second prove out when .
System (PATS) vehicle start button is pressed.
indicator
. P–2 Check for loose connections/wiring .
continuity.
. P–3 Check ignition switch for physical damage. .
Cluster illumination Q–1 Check for loose connections/wiring .
continuity.
. Q–2 Check dimmer switch operation. .
Cluster backlight R–1 Is the backlight on other components .
operation inoperative.
. R–2 Check dimmer switch operation. .
. R–3 Check for loose connections/wiring .
continuity.
Chime/tone operation S–1 Check vehicle configuration. .
. S–2 Utilize lights ON, ignition OFF, door open .
warning to verify chime operation.
. S–3 Check appropriate sensing circuit. .
Continuous chime/tone T–1 Check appropriate sensing circuit. .
Unexpected chime U–1 Check vehicle configuration. .
operation
Message centre V–1 Is the backlight 'ON' and other .
display illumination components dim?
. V–2 Does the lighting level of other .
components change when dimmer
adjusted?
Message centre W–1 Perform Self-Diagnostic Mode test/ETM .
display issue tests 5 to 9, to prove out LCD display
function.
Message centre X–1 Perform Self-Diagnostic Mode test/ETM .
missing lines tests 5 to 9, to prove out LCD display
function.
Message centre Y–1 What is the message? .
incorrect message
. Y–2 Check for open circuit/shorts in wiring to .
related warning light trigger (module,
sensor, switch).
Cluster/connectivity Z–1 Check cluster battery and ignition wiring. .
. Z–2 Check cluster grounds. .
. Z–3 Disconnect/reconnect cluster. .
. Z–4 Attempt to enter Self-Diagnostic .
Mode/ETM to prove cluster response to
inputs.
No crank AA–1 Check with IDS for presence of related .
DTCs.
. AA–2 Is there a Passive Anti-Theft System .
(PATS) flash code?
. AA–3 Does the vehicle crank with the other .
passive key?
Area of Diagnostic
. AA–4 Ensure only one key is in the vehicle, try If this test starts the vehicle this tends to
both keys in the Starter Control Unit indicate an issue with the keyless vehicle
(SCU). module.
. AA-5 Tried new key?
. AA–6 Check battery voltage. .
. AA–7 Diagnose non-start condition with IDS. .
. AA–8 Attempt PATS key erase and re-learn. Ensure keys are erased from current cluster if
replacing cluster.
Crank but no-start AB–1 Diagnose non-start condition with IDS. Not usually caused by cluster issue.
Incorrect configuration AC–1 Attempt to configure cluster. .
. AC–2 Ensure battery voltage is maintained .
above 12.5 volts if cluster re-configured.
1. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Self-Diagnostic Mode
Self-Diagnostic Mode
To place the cluster in engineering test mode (ETM) carry out the following steps
1. Press and hold the stalk trip cycle button, for more than five seconds but less than eight seconds, whilst briefly pressing the
vehicle START button. There is no initial display indication that the instrument cluster has entered ETM. If ETM has successfully
been entered then 'ENGINEERING TEST MODE' will be displayed in the Message Centre when the stalk trip button is released .
2.To navigate forward through the instrument cluster Self-Diagnostic Mode tests, press the stalk trip cycle button.
3. Each push of the stalk trip cycle button will advance one step through the ETM sequence. It is not possible to move
backward through the test sequence.
4.To exit the Self-Diagnostic Mode press and hold the stalk trip cycle button for more than three seconds.
5.The Self-Diagnostic Mode is also deactivated when the ignigition switch is turned to the 'OFF' position or low battery voltage
is detected.
6.If the Self-Diagnostic Mode cannot be accessed repeat the above paying particular care to the sequence timing.
7.The ETM text is not language configurable and will be displayed in English.
Message Center Gauge/Indicator/Display

ETM Test/no. Display Tested. Range Description
1 - Self- ENGINEERING TEST . Not Applicable Establishes Self - Diagnostic mode.
diagnostic MODE. (N/A).
entry.
2 - Gauge GAUGE SWEEP. Tachometer and speedometer. (N/A). All gauges go through a full up and
sweep. Gauges display current values down pointer sweep smoothness
after test. check.
3- Warning TELL TALE TEST. All internally controlled (N/A). Illuminates all the LED warning
lamp LED's. lamps/LED's regardless of indicators that are controlled by the
software configuration. instrument cluster. When this test is
exited current vehicle warning lamps
will remain illuminated.
4 - Version PROGRAM VERSION. Software Read only memory (N/A). Display's the instrument cluster ROM
information. (ROM) and Non volatile memory and NVM level version and date or
ROM: XXXX (NVM) version and date. indication of ROM checksum fault.
NVM: XXXX
REV: XXXX
DATE: XXXX
5 - Message LCD display in Message center LCD display. (N/A). Activates all pixels of LCD display in
Center display. WHITE. White.
6 - Message LCD display in DARK Message center LCD display. (N/A). Activates all pixels of LCD display in
Center display. GREY. Dark Grey.
7 - Message LCD display in LIGHT Message center LCD display. (N/A). Activates all pixels of LCD display in
Center display. GREY. Light Grey.
8 - Message LCD display in four Message center LCD display. (N/A). Activates all pixels of LCD in four
Center display. bands black to white, bands from black to white, from top
top to bottom. to bottom.
9 - Message LCD display in four Message center LCD display. (N/A). Activates all pixels of LCD in four
Center display. bands dark to light bands from dark to light, from left
left to right. to right.
10 - Digital DIGITAL I/O. Cluster configuration settings. (N/A). Display Hex coding of cluster
I/O. configuration settings ports A to H.
A: XXXX Not defined for diagnostic purpose.
E:XXXX
B: XXXX
F:XXXX
C: XXXX
G:XXXX
D: XXXX
H:XXXX
11 - Analogue ANALOG INPUTS. Cluster inputs. TDB. Displays Hex coding of inputs 0 - 3.
Inputs.
#: RAW -
RATIO 0 - Main beam / FTP 1
0:XXX - XXXX - Master light switch
1:XXX - XXXX 2 - Power column joystick
2:XXX - XXXX switch
3.XXX - XXXX 3 - DI / Hazard
Inputs.
#: RAW -
RATIO 4 - Auto lamp sensor
4:XXX - XXXX 5 - battery in
5:XXX - XXXX 6 - Pedal position
6:XXX - XXXX 7 - Display temperature
7.XXX - XXXX
Inputs.
#: RAW -
RATIO 8 - Power column Rake
8:XXX - XXXX position
9:XXX - XXXX 9 - Power column Reach
10:XXX - position
XXXX 10 - Auxiliary switch
11.XXX - 11 - Power column mode
XXXX switch
14 - Analogue ANALOG INPUTS. Cluster inputs. TDB. Displays Hex coding of inputs 12 -
Inputs. 15.
#: RAW -
RATIO
12:XXX - 12 - Not used
XXXX 13 -Airbag LED monitor
13:XXX - 14 - Battery voltage
XXXX 15 - Low brake fluid
14:XXX -
XXXX
15.XXX -
XXXX
15- Analogue ANALOG INPUTS. Cluster inputs. TDB. Displays Hex coding of inputs 16-
Inputs. 19.
#: RAW -
RATIO
16:XXX - 16 - Fog light switch
XXXX 17 - Flick wipe switch
17:XXX - 18 - Int. wipe switch
XXXX 19 - Exit delay switch
18:XXX -
XXXX
19.XXX -
XXXX
Inputs. 23.
#: RAW -
Ratio
20:XXX - 20 - Wash wipe switch
XXXX 21 - Trip cycle switch
21:XXX - 22 - dimmer level
XXXX 23 - Master wipe switch
22:XXX -
XXXX
23.XXX -
XXXX
Inputs. 27.
#: RAW- Ratio
24:XXX -
XXXX 24 - Brake pad wear
25:XXX - 25 - Passenger seat belt
XXXX 26 - Not used
26:XXX - 27 - On-board temp ref
XXXX
27.XXX -
XXXX
18 - Analogue Cluster inputs. TDB. Displays Hex coding of inputs 28 -

Inputs. ANALOG 31.
INPUTS.
#: RAW -
Ratio 28 - On-board temp
XXXX 30 - Not used
XXXX
30:XXX -
XXXX
31.XXX -
XXXX
19 - SPEEDOMETER. Speedometer inputs. .

Speedometer. Displays present .
RAW: Speedometer inputs values;
MPH: Speedometer will indicate
KMH: present road speed.
DRIVER:
20 - TACHOMETER. Tachometer inputs. . Displays present received

Tachometer. Tachometer input values,
RAW: tachometer will indicate present
ACTUAL: engine RPM.
DRIVER:
21 - Fuel FUEL SYSTEM. Fuel indication system. . Displays present received fuel level
system. A/D inputs in decimal, fuel gauge
(A) (B) will indicate present filtered level.
RAW: X X
FILT: X X
PERCENT: X X
22 - Battery BATTERY VOLTAGE. Battery voltage. . Displays present received battery

voltage. input voltage values. If message not
LOCAL: received or invalid display will be '_
VEHICLE: _ _'.
RAW:
A/D:
23 - Rolling ROLLING COUNTS. Odometer and fuel gauge. 0 - 255. Displays present received odometer
counts. and fuel level input values in
ODO: decimal, value is a rolling count. If
FUEL: either message not received or
invalid respective display will be ' _
_ _' .
24 - VAPS. VAPS. Variable assistance power . CURRENT is displayed in mA.
steering (VAPS) status. COMMAND is last command sent to
CURRENT: VAPS chip. STATUS is last status
COMMAND: returned from VAPS chip.
STATUS:
25 - Module MODULE STATUS. Provides status of; Ignition

status. (IGN), Dynamic Stability Control CONNECTED Communication (Coms) ok
IGN (DSC), Adaptive Cruise Control WAITING Coms not received, not an
DSC (ACC) and Adaptive damping MISSING issue
ACC control module (ADCM) modules. FAULTY. Coms never received
ADCM Coms error .
26 - Module MODULE STATUS. Provides status of; Electronic

status. park brake (EPB), Pedestrian CONNECTED Communication (Coms) ok
EPB Impact ECU (PIE), Restraints WAITING Coms not received, not an
PIE control module (RCM) and MISSING issue
RCM Traction control module (TCM), FAULTY. Coms never received
TCM modules.. Coms error .
27 - Module MODULE STATUS. Provides status of; Engine

status. control module (ECM), Rear CONNECTED Communication (Coms) ok
ECM Climate Control (RCC), Driver WAITING Coms not received, not an
RCC Door Control (DDC) and MISSING issue
DDC Passenger Door Control (PDC) FAULTY. Coms never received
PDC modules.. Coms error .
28 - Module MODULE STATUS. Provides status of; Keyless

status. vehicle module (KVM), Drivers CONNECTED Communication (Coms) ok
KVM seat module (DSM), WAITING Coms not received, not an
DSM Infotainment control module MISSING issue
ICM (ICM) and Integrated control FAULTY. Coms never received
ICP panel (ICP) modules.. Coms error .
29 - Module MODULE STATUS. Provides status of; Front smart

status. junction box (FSJB), Rear smart CONNECTED Communication (Coms) ok
FSJB junction box (RSJB), Tyre WAITING Coms not received, not an
RSJB pressure monitoring system MISSING issue
TPMS (TPMS) and Adaptive front FAULTY. Coms never received
AFLS lighting system (AFLS) modules. Coms error .
30 - Module MODULE STATUS. Provides status of; Passive

status. anti-theft system (PATS), Blind CONNECTED Communication (Coms) ok
PATS Spot Monitoring (BSM), Gear WAITING Coms not received, not an
BSM shift module (GSM) and Starter MISSING issue
GSM Control Unit (SCU) modules. FAULTY. Coms never received
SCU Coms error .
31- Back to GAUGE SWEEP. Tachometer and speedometer. N/A. Repeats display cycle from test 2.
test 2.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:

B100811 Wiper Mode Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check master
Switch Master wiper switch circuit - wiper switch circuit for short to ground
short to ground
B100815 Wiper Mode Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Switch Master wiper switch circuit - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
short to power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check master wiper switch
B100951 Ignition Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Authorisation Instrument cluster power and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
ground supply circuits - short, electrical circuit diagrams and check instrument cluster power
open circuit and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit. Perform the
Target SID synchronization Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu using the
error following re-programming manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CAN
CAN fault communications between instrument cluster and tester
www.JagDocs.com
Authorisation LS CAN fault the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CAN
CJB ignition, power and communications between CJB and instrument cluster. Refer
ground supply circuits - short, to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CJB ignition,
open circuit power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and
Instrument cluster power and instrument cluster power and ground supply circuits for short,
ground supply circuits - short, open circuit. Check correct CJB and instrument cluster
open circuit installed. Perform the Immobilisation application from the
Incorrect CJB or instrument Set-up menu using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
cluster installed system. Check CAN network for interference/EMC related
Target SID synchronization issues
error following re-programming
Authorisation CJB ignition, power and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
ground supply circuits - short, electrical circuit diagrams and check CJB ignition, power and
open circuit ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument
LS CAN fault cluster power and ground supply circuits for short, open
Instrument cluster power and circuit. Check CAN communications between CJB and
ground supply circuits - short, instrument cluster. Check battery is in serviceable condition
open circuit and fully charged
Low battery voltage <9 volts
B100A62 Fuel Pump Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Authorisation LS CAN fault the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CAN
RJB power and ground supply communications between RJB and instrument cluster. Refer
circuits - short, open circuit to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power and
Instrument cluster power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument
ground supply circuits - short, cluster power and ground supply circuits for short, open
open circuit circuit. Check correct RJB and instrument cluster installed.
Incorrect RJB or instrument Perform the Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu
cluster installed using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
Target SID synchronization CAN network for interference/EMC related issues
Authorisation Target SID synchronization the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Perform the
error following re-programming Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu using the
RJB power and ground supply manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
circuits - short, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power and ground
LS CAN fault supply circuits for short, open circuit. Check CAN
communications between RJB and instrument cluster
Authorisation RJB power and ground supply the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
circuits - short, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power and ground
LS CAN fault supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
Instrument cluster power and power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit.
ground supply circuits - short, Check CAN communications between RJB and instrument
open circuit cluster. Check battery is in serviceable condition and fully
Low battery voltage <9 volts charged
B100B67 Column Lock If a non start issue has not been identified, clear the DTC
Ground Algorithm based failure-signal and check vehicle starts correctly. If a non start issue has
Authorisation is incorrect after the event been identified run the manufacturers approved diagnostic
Instrument cluster power and system Start Authorisation Application. Carry out any
ground supply circuits - short, pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
open circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
LS CAN fault electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power and ground
RJB power and ground supply supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
circuits - short, open circuit power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit.
Vehicle speed present when Check CAN communications between RJB and instrument
attempting to power ESCL cluster. Check for invalid vehicle speed signal from
Engine speed present when ABS/instrument cluster gateway. Check for invalid engine
attempting to power ESCL speed signal from ECM/instrument cluster gateway. Check for
PowerMode status > 4 when invalid signal from CJB
action
B100B87 Column Lock Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Ground Instrument cluster power and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Authorisation ground supply circuits - short, electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power and ground
open circuit supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
LS CAN fault power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit.
RJB power and ground supply Check CAN communications between RJB and instrument
circuits - short, open circuit cluster
B100C67 Column Lock Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Supply Instrument cluster power and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Authorisation ground supply circuits - short, electrical circuit diagrams and check CJB power and ground
CJB power and ground supply Check CAN communications between CJB and instrument
circuits - short, open circuit cluster. Check for invalid vehicle speed signal from
Vehicle speed present when ABS/instrument cluster gateway. Check for invalid engine
attempting to power ESCL speed signal from ECM/instrument cluster gateway. Check for
Engine speed present when invalid signal from CJB
attempting to power ESCL
PowerMode status > 4 when
action
B100C87 Column Lock Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Supply Instrument cluster power and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Authorisation ground supply circuits - short, electrical circuit diagrams and check CJB power and ground
CJB power and ground supply Check CAN communications between CJB and instrument
circuits - short, open circuit cluster
B100D62 Column Lock Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Authorisation CAN fault the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CAN
ESCL power and ground supply communication between Electronic Steering Column Lock and
circuits - short, open circuit instrument cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Instrument cluster power and and check Electronic Steering Column Lock power and ground
ground supply circuits - short, supply circuits for short, open circuit and Instrument cluster
open circuit power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit.
Incorrect ESCL or instrument Check correct Electronic Steering Column Lock and instrument
cluster installed cluster installed. Perform the Immobilisation application from
Target SID synchronization the Set-up menu using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
error following re-programming system. Check CAN network for interference/EMC related
Noise/EMC related error issues
B100D64 Column Lock If the customer has not reported a non start issue, clear the
Authorisation Algorithm based failure-signal DTC and check vehicle starts correctly. If a non start issue
plausibility failure has been reported run the manufacturers approved
CAN fault diagnostic system Start Authorisation Application and follow
ESCL power and ground supply the actions required for this DTC. Carry out any pinpoint
circuits - short, open circuit tests associated with this DTC using the manufacturer
Instrument cluster power and approved diagnostic system. Check CAN communication
ground supply circuits - short, between Electronic Steering Column Lock and instrument
open circuit cluster (check transmission out speed, vehicle speed, engine
speed, gear position and powermode signals to Electronic
Steering Column Lock). Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check Electronic Steering Column Lock power
and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and
Instrument cluster power and ground supply circuits for
short, open circuit.
B100D87 Column Lock
Authorisation - Missing message Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car using the
Missing message CAN fault key fob and retest. Check for related DTCs and refer
No response from electric to the relevant DTC index
steering column lock control If the fault is cleared, notify the customer that the
module, instrument cluster, steering column lock may fail to unlock if the vehicle
central junction box Battery is parked with a high steering angle or with the road
voltage at electric wheel against a curb. If the column lock is failing to
steering column lock control disengage, the customer may be able to rectify this
module too low by rotating the steering wheel while pressing the
Electric steering column lock engine start button
control module, instrument If fault persists, complete a CAN network integrity
cluster, central junction box test using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
fault system. Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check CAN circuits between the central
junction box, the instrument cluster and the
electronic steering column lock. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the central junction box,
the instrument cluster and the electronic steering
column lock power and ground supply circuits for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. Clear
If fault persists, check that the vehicle battery supply
voltage is between 9-16 volts. Rectify as required
B100D96 Column Lock
Authorisation - Battery voltage at electric Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car using the
Component steering column lock control key fob and retest
internal failure module too low If fault persists, check that the vehicle battery supply
Torque load on steering voltage is between 9-16 volts. Rectify as required
column Ensure the column lock bolt movement is not
CAN fault obstructed or restricted (the parked position of the
Electric steering column lock road wheels may be exerting a turning force through
control module - Internal the steering column, preventing the lock from
failure releasing. The steering wheel may need to be held
against the force to allow the column lock to
release). Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car
using the key fob and retest
If fault persists, complete a CAN network integrity
test using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
system. Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check CAN circuits between the central
junction box, the instrument cluster and the
electronic steering column lock. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the central junction box,
the instrument cluster and the electronic steering
column lock power and ground supply circuits for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. Clear
If fault persists, check and install a new electric
steering column lock control module as required
B102487 Start Control Unit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Smart card docking station the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
failure - slave node not electrical circuit diagrams and check the smart card docking
responding station LIN circuit for short, open circuit. Suspect the smart
card docking station, check and install a new docking station
as required, refer to the new module/component installation
B104611 Front Fog Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fog lamp
Control Switch Fog lamp switch circuit - short switch circuit for short to ground
to ground
B104615 Front Fog Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fog lamp
Control Switch Fog lamp switch circuit - short switch circuit for short to power, open circuit
B104811 Brake Fluid Level Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check brake fluid
Switch Brake fluid level switch circuit level switch circuit for short to ground
- short to ground
B10A011 Wiper/ Washer Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check wash/wipe
Switch Wash/wipe circuit - short to circuit for short to ground
ground
B10A015 Wiper/ Washer Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Switch Wash/wipe circuit - short to the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check wash/wipe circuit for
B10A611 Main Light Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check master
Master lighting switch circuit - lighting switch circuit for short to ground
short to ground
B10A615 Main Light Switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Master lighting switch circuit - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
short to power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check master lighting switch
B112B87 Steering Wheel Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Module Steering wheel module failure the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
- slave node not responding electrical circuit diagrams and check the clockspring LIN
circuit for short, open circuit. Suspect the clockspring, check
and install a new clockspring as required, refer to the new
Index
B115C7A Transfer Fuel Check for fuel system jet pump or jet pump fuel level sensor
Pump Fuel pump system fault fault
B1A8515 Ambient Light Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Sensor Autolamp sensor circuit - short the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
to power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check autolamp sensor circuit
for short to power, open circuit
B1B0100 Key Transponder Ensure all keys to be programmed are available. Refer to
Operator only cycles one key electrical circuit diagrams and check power and ground
During transponder key supply circuits to all relevant modules. Replace faulty key
programming the instrument and repeat key programming. Check CAN network for
cluster, smartcard docking interference/EMC related issues
station or key loses
power/circuit failure
Faulty key during key
programming
Unable to program
transponder key due to
noise/EMC related error
B1B0105 Key Transponder Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Error following SCU the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Perform the
replacement Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu using the
Smartcard docking station manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
power and ground supply electrical circuit diagrams and check smartcard docking
circuits - short, open circuit station power and ground supply circuits for short, open
LIN fault circuit and instrument cluster power and ground supply
Instrument cluster power and circuits for short, open circuit. Check LIN communications
ground supply circuits - short, between smartcard docking station and instrument cluster
open circuit
LIN fault the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check LIN
Instrument cluster power and communications between smartcard docking station and
ground supply circuits - short, instrument cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
open circuit and check smartcard docking station power and ground
Key fault supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
Smartcard docking station power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit.
power and ground supply Confirm transponder key operation. Ensure new keys are from
circuits - short, open circuit a known source
Attempted to program a non
default key
B1B0155 Key Transponder Confirm the correct keys are used

Un-programmed key inserted
in SCU2
A non default key inserted
during key programming
Instrument cluster power and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
ground supply circuits - short, electrical circuit diagrams and check smartcard docking
open circuit station power and ground supply circuits for short, open
Smartcard docking station circuit and instrument cluster power and ground supply
power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit. Check correct instrument
circuits - short, open circuit cluster and smartcard docking station are installed. Perform
Incorrect instrument cluster or the Immobilisation application from the Set-Up menu using
smartcard docking station the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CAN
installed network for interference/EMC related issues
Error during or following the
Write Target SID routine
Transponder key fault supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
power and ground supply Confirm transponder key operation. Repeat transponder key
circuits - short, open circuit programming
Error occurred during
transponder key programming
Transponder key fault supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
power and ground supply Confirm transponder key operation. Confirm single key
circuits - short, open circuit operation. Ensure instrument cluster in correct mode i.e.
Another key in close proximity Auto Enable, Key erase etc. Ensure new keys are from a
Instrument cluster in incorrect known source. Check for intermittent power and ground to
programming state instrument cluster. Design condition - advise customer of
Attempted to program a non starting sequence. Design condition - determine customer
default key transponder key usage
Instrument cluster Cold init
whilst in Ignition On state,
without key being present in
the SCU
Race condition caused by
closing driver door and
Passive Key search function
from last door closed and key
inserted in the SCU
Smartcard docking station supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
power and ground supply power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit
circuits - short, open circuit
B1B3305 Target I.D. Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Transfer CAN fault the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CAN
ECM ignition, power and communications between ECM and instrument cluster. Refer
ground supply circuits - short, to electrical circuit diagrams and check ECM ignition, power
open circuit and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and
ground supply circuits - short, open circuit. Perform the Immobilisation application from the
open circuit Set-up menu using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ECM or instrument cluster system
incorrectly configured
ground supply circuits - short, open circuit. Check correct ECM and instrument cluster
open circuit installed. Perform the Immobilisation application from the
Incorrect ECM or instrument Set-up menu using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
cluster installed system. Check CAN network for interference/EMC related
Synchronisation error following issues
re-programming
B1B3364 Target If the customer has not reported a non start issue, clear the
identification Algorithm based failure - DTC and check vehicle starts correctly. If a non start has
transfer signal plausibility failure been reported run the manufacturers approved diagnostic
CAN fault system Start Authorisation Application and follow the actions
ECM ignition, power and required for this DTC. Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
ground supply circuits - short, with this DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
open circuit system. Check CAN communications between ECM and
Instrument cluster power and instrument cluster. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
ground supply circuits - short, check ECM ignition, power and ground supply circuits for
open circuit short, open circuit and instrument cluster power and ground
electronic steering column lock supply circuits for short, open circuit. Check electronic
status incomplete steering column lock operation. Advise customer of starting
Race condition caused by sequence and to allow time to elapse between closing door
closing driver door and and pressing start button.
ground supply circuits - short, open circuit. Check battery is in serviceable condition and is
open circuit fully charged, check terminals etc
Low battery voltage
www.JagDocs.com
B1C3277 Steering Column Check for restricted/jammed steering column motor
Tilt Solenoid TILT axis fails to move mechanism. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
minimum distance within steering column motor UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit for short,
allotted time period. Motion open circuit
may have been prohibited due
to motor jamming, stalling or
solenoid pin not engaging
B1C3294 Steering Column Check for stuck/jammed solenoid/switch. Refer to the

Tilt Solenoid TELE axis moves when it has electrical circuit diagrams and check steering column motor
not been commanded to. UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit for short, open circuit
Motion may have occurred due
to solenoid pin not
disengaging or mechanism has
been jammed on, whilst
REACH axis has been
commanded to move
B1C3312 Steering Column Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check steering
Tilt Feedback Steering column tilt feedback column tilt feedback signal circuit for short to power
Signal signal circuit - short to power
B1C3314 Steering Column Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Tilt Feedback Steering column tilt feedback the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Signal signal circuit - short to electrical circuit diagrams and check steering column tilt
ground, open circuit feedback signal circuit for short to ground, open circuit
B1C3477 Steering Column Check for restricted/jammed steering column motor

Telescope REACH axis fails to move mechanism. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Solenoid minimum distance within steering column motor UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit for short,
allotted time period. Motion open circuit
may have been prohibited due
to motor jamming, stalling or
solenoid pin not engaging
B1C3494 Steering Column Check for stuck/jammed solenoid/switch. Refer to the

Telescope REACH axis moves when it has electrical circuit diagrams and check steering column motor
Solenoid not been commanded to. UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit for short, open circuit
Motion may have occurred due
to solenoid pin not
disengaging or mechanism has
been jammed on, whilst TILT
axis has been commanded to
move
Telescope Steering column TELE column TELE feedback signal circuit for short to power
Feedback Signal feedback signal circuit - short
to power
B1C3514 Steering Column Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Telescope Steering column TELE the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Feedback Signal feedback signal circuit - short electrical circuit diagrams and check steering column TELE
to ground, open circuit feedback signal circuit for short to ground, open circuit
Tilt/Telescope Steering column adjust switch column adjust switch circuit for short to ground
Switch circuit - short to ground
B1C4811 Flash to Pass Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check main beam
Switch Main beam flash switch circuit flash switch circuit for short to ground
- short to ground
B1C4815 Flash to Pass Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Switch Main beam flash switch circuit the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
- short to power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check main beam flash switch
B1C5311 Front Wiper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check intermittent
Intermittent Data Intermittent wipe switch wipe switch circuit for short to ground
circuit - short to ground
B1C5315 Front Wiper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Intermittent Data Intermittent wipe switch the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
circuit - short to power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check intermittent wipe switch
circuit circuit for short to power, open circuit
B1D3611 Turn Indicator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check direction
Switch Direction indicator switch indicator switch circuit for short to ground
B1D3615 Turn Indicator Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Switch Direction indicator switch the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
circuit - short to power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check direction indicator
circuit switch circuit for short to power, open circuit
B1D3711 Wiper Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check flick wipe
Connection Circuit Flick wipe switch circuit - short switch circuit for short to ground
to ground
B1D3715 Wiper Switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Connection Circuit Flick wipe switch circuit - short the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
to power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check flick wipe switch circuit
for short to power, open circuit
C111064 Power steering Re-configure the instrument cluster as new to download
Calibration Data Invalid VAPS curve loaded VAPS curve data
P063511 Power Steering Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check VAPS
Control Circuit VAPS ignition supply circuit - ignition supply circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Control Circuit VAPS ignition supply circuit - ignition supply circuit for short to power
short to power
Control Circuit VAPS ignition supply circuit - ignition supply circuit for open circuit
open circuit
P063522 Power Steering Check ABS module for DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index
Control Circuit First valid received speed
value above threshold
P063544 Power Steering Re-configure the instrument cluster as new to download

Control Circuit Data memory failure VAPS curve data
U000188 High Speed CAN Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Communication Bus Off the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Carry out CAN
Bus network integrity test using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check HS CAN network to instrument cluster
U001088 Medium Speed Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
CAN Bus Off the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Carry out CAN
Communication network integrity test using the manufacturer approved
Bus diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check MS CAN network to instrument cluster
U010000 Lost Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check ECM for
With ECM/PCM “A” with ECM DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check TCM for
with TCM with TCM DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
With Gear Shift with transmission shift module transmission shift module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
Module DTC Index
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check speed
With Cruise with speed control module control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check ABS
With Anti-Lock with ABS module module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Brake System
(ABS) Control
Module
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check tire
With Tire with tire pressure monitoring pressure monitoring module for DTCs and refer to the
Pressure Monitor module relevant DTC Index
Module
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check parking
With Park Brake with parking brake module brake module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
with Suspension with adaptive damping module adaptive damping module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
Control Module 'B' DTC Index
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CJB for
With Body with CJB DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check RJB for
With Body with RJB DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
"B"
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check RCM for
With Restraints with RCM DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
with Information with information and information and entertainment control module for DTCs and
Centre 'A' entertainment control module refer to the relevant DTC Index
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check climate
with HVAC with climate control module control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check DDM for
with Door Control with driver door module (DDM) DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Module 'A'
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check PDM for
with Door Control with passenger door module DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Module 'B' (PDM)
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check DSM for
with Seat Control with driver seat module (DSM) DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Module 'A'
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check KVM for
with Remote with keyless vehicle module DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Function (KVM)
Actuation
with Headlamp with headlamp control module headlamp control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
Control Module 'A' DTC Index
with Impact with pedestrian protection pedestrian protection module for DTCs and refer to the
Classification module relevant DTC Index
System Module
with Front with integrated control panel integrated control panel for DTCs and refer to the relevant
Controls Interface DTC Index
Module 'A'
U030000 Internal Control Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
Module Software Invalid configuration message diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is
Incompatibility is received still logged suspect the instrument cluster, refer to the new
Index
U040268 Invalid data Check TCM for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
received from Algorithm based failures -
TCM events information
U200411 Auxiliary Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check auxiliary
Pack Auxiliary switch signal circuit - switch signal circuit for short to ground
short to ground
U200415 Auxiliary Switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Pack Auxiliary switch signal circuit - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
short to power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check auxiliary switch signal
U300046 Control Module Suspect the instrument cluster, check and install a new
Calibration/parameter memory instrument cluster as required, refer to the new
failure module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
U300049 Control Module Suspect the instrument cluster, check and install a new
Internal electronic failure instrument cluster as required, refer to the new
Index
U300055 Control Module Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
Incorrect car configuration diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains
data received suspect the instrument cluster. Check and install a new
instrument cluster as required, refer to the new
Index
Missing message diagnostic system. Check instrument cluster for additional
DTCs and refer to the DTC Index. Carry out CAN network
integrity tests using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. If DTC remains suspect the instrument cluster.
Check and install a new instrument cluster as required, refer
to the new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
U300281 Vehicle Check and install original/new instrument cluster as required,
Identification Vehicle/component mis-match. refer to the new module/component installation note at the
Number Corrupt VIN data being top of the DTC Index
transmitted, instrument
cluster previously installed to
other vehicle
U300316 Battery Voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Instrument cluster logic power the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
supply circuit - voltage below electrical circuit diagrams and check instrument cluster logic
threshold power supply circuit for short to ground, open circuit
Instrument cluster logic power the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
supply circuit - circuit voltage charging system for over charging condition
above threshold
Mis-match in battery voltage, the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
of 2 volts or more, between electrical circuit diagrams and check instrument cluster logic
instrument cluster and RJB power supply circuit for short, open circuit
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster
Removal
CAUTION: If a new instrument cluster is to be installed, the diagnostic tool must be connected prior to removal, the data
must then be downloaded from it and the keys (remote control handsets) set into default mode. Failure to follow this
instruction will result in permanent damage to the keys.
NOTES:
If a new instrument cluster is to be installed, make sure that all keys (remote control handsets) are present.
3.
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6.
7.

instrument cluster face.
Installation
2. Configure the instrument cluster and ignition keys using the diagnostic
tool.
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster Lens
Removal
1. Fully extend the steering column for access.
3. Refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Removal and

Installation).
4. CAUTION: To prevent static damage to the circuits,

place the instrument cluster inside the electro static
discharge bag and use the gloves provided during this
procedure.
5.
6.
7. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the dials.
Installation
1. NOTE: Take care not to leave finger prints inside the new
lens.
www.JagDocs.com
2. Refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Removal and
Installation).
Horn -

Vehicle horn retaining bolt 25 18 -
Horn - Horn
Removal
2. Torque: 7 Nm
3. Torque: 7 Nm
4. Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Horn - Horn Switch
Removal
1. Refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00 General Information,

2. Refer to: Steering Wheel Audio Controls (415-01A Information and

3.
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
Installation

Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center -
Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Message center
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center -
Overview
OVERVIEW
The message center is a LCD (liquid crystal display) located in a central position in the instrument cluster. The message center
receives CAN (controller area network) bus, LIN (local interconnect network) bus, and hardwired signals from other vehicle
system control modules to display current vehicle status information. Depending on message importance, the message center
will be backlit in white, amber or red.
The message center will display:
Fuel level
Trip computer information
Gear selected
Speed control information
Vehicle map
Clock
Turn by turn satellite navigation
Voice control text
JaguarDrive Control system messages.
Operation of the message center is controlled by software within the instrument cluster.
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center - System
System Operation
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR - 3.0L V6 DIESEL, 5.0L V8 SUPERCHARGER AND 5.0L V8
NATURALLY ASPIRATED ENGINES ONLY
If the vehicle is within 3,200 kilometers (1,988 miles) of a service, the message center will display 'SERVICE REQUIRED IN
XXXX km or MILES'. The display reduces the 'service required in' readout by increments every 50 kilometers (30 miles). If this
distance drops below 1 km (0.6 miles), the message center will display 'SERVICE REQUIRED'.
These messages are displayed every time the vehicle enters power mode 6, for 4 seconds after the instrument cluster bulb
check routine has finished.
NOTE: The message center will display distance to next service in miles on an instrument cluster fitted with a Miles Per
Hour (MPH) speedometer unless the driver has changed the display units on the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
Reset Procedure
To re-set the service interval indicator, the following process switch presses must each be carried out within 3 seconds:
With the vehicle in power mode 0, (ignition off) press and hold the rear fog lamp switch
Allow the vehicle to enter power mode 6 (Press the start button without a foot on the brake)
Immediately release the rear fog lamp switch
Press and hold the trip computer cycle switch
Press and hold the rear fog lamp switch
Continue to hold the trip computer and rear fog lamp switches
If the process has been successful, the message center will display 'RESETTING SERVICE MODE' and then display
'SERVICE MODE RESET' after 10 seconds
Release both switches and return the vehicle ignition to off, power mode 0.
MESSAGE CENTER
The message center LCD (liquid crystal display) display has a viewable area of 126 pixels horizontal and 174 pixels vertical. It
is divided into six information display zones as follows, starting from the top:
Set speed
Transmission position
Warning /message display
JaguarDrive Optimization icon
Odometer/Trip computer information
Fuel level.
The message center is active at all times when the ignition is on and can also be active when the ignition is off, dependant on
the information to be displayed. The message center LCD illumination is controlled by the sun load light sensor located on the
instrument panel. In bright conditions, the illumination is set to maximum brightness. As the ambient light levels drop, the
illumination dims. When the lights are switched on or activated by the 'AUTO' function, the illumination operates in the same
way until a defined ambient light threshold is reached, at this point the setting of the panel illumination dimmer in the
auxiliary light switch will control the brightness.
If more than one message is active, each message is displayed for 4 seconds in the order of priority. Once all messages have
been displayed, they are again displayed in turn for 2 seconds each. Warning messages can be displayed when the ignition is
in accessory power mode 4 which is the initial ignition state when a door is opened.
Message Priority
Messages are assigned priorities which are defined by the effect on driving safety and functional ability of the vehicle. When
new messages are displayed they may be accompanied by a chime from the instrument cluster sounder. A new message will be
displayed immediately, providing the currently displayed message (if there is one) has been displayed for at least 4 seconds. A
warning indicator will be activated simultaneously with the message being displayed. If more than one fault warning message
is being displayed, the messages will cycle, in priority order, with each message being displayed for 2 seconds.
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The transmission display is located in the upper section of the LCD. The transmission position information is sent from the
TCM (transmission control module) in a high speed CAN (controller area network) message to the instrument cluster. The
transmission has three modes of operation:
Conventional automatic operation (JaguarDrive selector in 'D' position)

Sport automatic operation (JaguarDrive selector in 'S' position)
Manual gear operation - Jaguar Sequential Shift.
The following table shows the JaguarDrive selector position and the highlighted indication displayed in the transmission
display.
JaguarDrive Selector Position Transmission Display

P - Park P
R - Reverse R
N - Neutral N
D - Drive D
S - Sport S
The following table shows the Jaguar Sequential Shift display. Selections are made using the steering wheel mounted paddle
switches.
Jaguar Sequential Shift Gear Selection Transmission Display

First 1
Second 2
Third 3
Fourth 4
Fifth 5
Sixth 6
The transmission may inhibit a requested up or down shift if the requested gear is outside the normal engine speed operating
range. If this occurs, the transmission display will briefly display the gear requested by the driver but will then change to
display the actual gear selection.
Speed Control and Set Speed Displays
The following table shows the possible messages which can be displayed, other visual or audible warnings and a description of
the message.
Message Other Warnings Reason Action

OVERLIMIT XXX Displayed when vehicle speed exceeds Reduce vehicle speed to ASL set
MPH (km/h) Amber ASL warning indicator the ASL set speed limit
illuminated at +4.8 km/h
(+3 mph) above limit
Amber ASL warning indicator
flashing at +24 km/h (+15
mph) above limit
Amber ASL warning indicator
flashing and chime emitted
at +24 km/h (+15 mph) for
a certain time period
LIMITER None Displayed for 4 seconds when driver None

CANCELLED deselects ASL
LIMITER SET None Displays new speed setting for the ASL None
XXX MPH (km/h)
LIMITER None Displayed when ASL is activated and None
STANDBY speed control is selected
LIMITER NOT None Displayed when ECM (engine control Use an approved Jaguar
AVAILABLE module) has detected a fault Diagnostic System to diagnose
fault.
TOO FAST TO None Displayed when 'Resume' switch is Reduce vehicle speed to set
RESUME pressed but vehicle speed is 30 km/h speed then press 'Resume' switch.
(18 mph) above the set speed.
CRUISE None Driver has cancelled speed control or None
CANCELLED the brake pedal has been pressed.
CRUISE None Driver has pressed the accelerator WARNING: Adaptive cruise
OVERRIDE pedal, overriding the speed control braking will be disabled when
system. Message will go off when this message is displayed.
accelerator pedal is released and
speed control is active.
GAP 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 None Displays the current set or default If required, adjust distance using
adaptive speed control distance. the steering wheel switches.
Displayed along with a vehicle graphic
in the LCD. Chevrons (>) denote gap
figure selected.
SETSPEED XXX None Displays the new speed input for the None
MPH (km/h) speed control
DRIVER None Immediate action required by the
INTERVENE driver to apply the brakes if required. Apply brakes if required.
May also be displayed if
speed control system
loses CAN messages when
active.
www.JagDocs.com
CRUISE NOT None Speed control cannot be engaged. A fault has occurred in the speed
AVAILABLE control system. Diagnose fault
using an approved Jaguar
Diagnostic System.
RADAR SENSOR None The adaptive speed control radar Remove obstruction or clean the
BLOCKED sensor has become dirty or obstructed. radar sensor.
FORWARD ALERT None Forward alert has been switched off. None
OFF No warning will be given for objects in
the vehicles forward direction.
FORWARD ALERT None Forward alert has been switched on or None
the gap settings have changed.
FORWARD ALERT None Forward Alert and Emergency Brake Use an approved Jaguar
UNAVAILABLE Assist are not available. Diagnostic System to diagnose
fault..
Warning/Message Display
Warning and information messages are displayed in the central area of the LCD. When no messages are required, an analogue
clock is present on the display. The message display language can be changed by the driver using a selection menu on the
Touch Screen Display (TSD). The following table shows the possible messages which can be displayed, other visual or audible
warnings and a description of the message.

DSC ON DSC warning indicator Displayed for a short time when the DSC None
flashes for a short time. switch is operated to activate the DSC
system.
DSC OFF DSC warning indicator Displayed for a short time when the DSC None
illuminated. switch is operated to de-activate the
DSC system.
TRAC DSC DSC warning indicator Displayed for a short time when the DSC None
illuminated. switch is operated to activate the TRAC
DSC system.
DSC NOT DSC warning indicator A fault is present in the DSC system. A fault has occurred in the DSC
AVAILABLE illuminated. system. Interrogate ABS (anti-lock
brake system) module for faults and
diagnose fault using an approved
Jaguar Diagnostic System.
BRAKE FLUID Brake fluid level has become low and Investigate fluid loss and check brake
LOW Brake warning activated low level switch. system for leaks. Repair system as
indicator required and replenish brake fluid
illuminated. reservoir.
Red warning triangle
illuminated in LCD.
ABS FAULT A fault is present in the ABS system. A fault has occurred in the ABS system.
ABS warning Braking system will operate but ABS will Interrogate ABS module for faults and
indicator not be available. diagnose fault using an approved
illuminated. Jaguar Diagnostic System.
Amber warning
triangle illuminated
in LCD.
BRAKE ASSIST Amber warning triangle A fault is present in the braking system A fault has occurred in the brake assist
FAULT illuminated in LCD. preventing brake assist operation. system. Interrogate ABS module for
Braking system will operate but brake faults and diagnose fault using an
assist will not be available and approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
increased effort on the brake pedal may
be required.
EBD FAULT Red warning triangle A fault is present in the braking system A fault has occurred in the EBD
illuminated in LCD. preventing EBD operation. Braking system. Interrogate ABS module for
system will operate but EBD will not be faults and diagnose fault using an
available. approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
ADAPTIVE Amber warning triangle A fault is present in the Computer A fault has occurred in the CATS
DYNAMICS FAULT illuminated in LCD. Active Technology Suspension (CATS) or system. Interrogate the CATS or
the Adaptive Dynamic Suspension adaptive damping module for faults
system. Suspension will default to the and diagnose using an approved Jaguar
'hard' setting. Diagnostic System.
PARK BRAKE None Parking brake has been applied when None
APPLIED the vehicle moving at a speed 5 km/h (3
mph) or above.
PARK BRAKE A fault is present in the parking brake A fault has occurred in the parking
FAULT Brake warning system. brake system. Interrogate the parking
indicator brake module for faults and diagnose
illuminated. using an approved Jaguar Diagnostic
Red warning triangle System.
illuminated in LCD.
APPLY FOOT AND Amber warning triangle The battery has been disconnected or Apply foot brake and parking brake to
PARK BRAKE illuminated in LCD. power supply interrupted to the parking reset the parking brake module.
brake module.
CANNOT APPLY A fault is present in the parking brake A fault has occurred in the parking
PARK BRAKE Brake warning system and the parking brake cannot be brake system. Interrogate the parking
indicator flashing. applied. brake module for faults and diagnose
Red warning triangle using an approved Jaguar Diagnostic
illuminated in LCD. System.
NOTE: In certain
markets the brake
warning indicator
does not flash.
CHECK TYRE A tire pressure has decreased to below Check tires for punctures and re-inflate
PRESSURE Tire Pressure the warning threshold. to correct pressures.
Monitoring System
(TPMS) warning
indicator
illuminated.
Vehicle graphic
displaying tire
location.
TYRE NOT
MONITORED Tire Pressure One or more tire pressure Check for local RF interference.
Monitoring System sensors have developed a fault. A wheel has been fitted without
(TPMS) warning A temporary spare wheel or a a TPMS sensor fitted (space
indicator wheel without a sensor has been saver spare wheel).
illuminated. fitted at the displayed position. TPMS sensor has developed a
Vehicle graphic An unapproved accessory may be fault or the battery voltage is
displaying tire interfering with the TPMS. low.
location. A fault has occurred in the
TPMS. Interrogate the TPMS
module for faults and diagnose
using an approved Jaguar
Diagnostic System.
CHECK ALL TYRE One or more tire pressures have

PRESSURES Tire Pressure decreased to below the warning Check tires for punctures and
Monitoring System threshold. re-inflate to correct pressures.
(TPMS) warning Message may be displayed
indicator when TPMS is learning position
illuminated. of a new sensor.
Amber warning
in LCD.
Vehicle graphic
displaying tire
location.
TYRE PRESSURE A fault has occurred in the TPMS.

SYSTEM FAULT Tire Pressure Wheels and tires without sensors Interrogate the TPMS module for faults
Monitoring System have been fitted to the vehicle. and diagnose using an approved Jaguar
(TPMS) warning TPMS sensors have become Diagnostic System.
indicator defective.
illuminated. An unapproved accessory may be
Amber warning interfering with the TPMS.
triangle illuminated A fault is present in the TPMS
in LCD. system and the tire pressures
cannot be monitored.
TYRE PRESSURE TPMS has detected current tire Check tire pressures and inflate to the
LOW FOR SPEED Tire Pressure pressures are too low for sustained high correct pressures if necessary.
Monitoring System speed driving
(TPMS) warning
indicator
illuminated.
Amber warning
in LCD.
TYRE PRESSURE A fault has occurred in the TPMS.

SYSTEM FAULT Tire Pressure Wheels and tires without sensors Interrogate the TPMS module for faults
Monitoring System have been fitted to the vehicle. and diagnose using an approved Jaguar
(TPMS) warning TPMS sensors have become Diagnostic System.
indicator defective.
illuminated. An unapproved accessory may be
Amber warning interfering with the TPMS.
triangle illuminated A fault is present in the TPMS
in LCD. system and the tire pressures
cannot be monitored.
ENGINE Amber warning triangle Engine coolant temperature has

TEMPERATURE illuminated in LCD at exceeded threshold for normal Stop vehicle and allow engine
HIGH temperatures of between operation. to idle for 5 minutes. Switch off
118.0°C (244.4°F) and engine and allow to stand for
119.3°C (246.8°F). not less than 10 minutes. Check
coolant level.
If message re-appears,
investigate coolant system for
leakage.
ENGINE Red warning triangle Engine coolant temperature has

OVERHEATING illuminated in LCD at exceeded threshold for normal engine Stop vehicle and allow engine
temperatures of 119.4°C operation. to idle for 5 minutes. Switch off
(247°F) or above. engine and allow to stand for
not less than 10 minutes. Check
coolant level.
leakage.
ENGINE OIL Red warning triangle Engine oil pressure has fallen below the Stop the engine immediately. Check
PRESSURE LOW illuminated in LCD. threshold for normal operation. engine oil level. If oil level correct, do
not restart engine until oil pressure
loss has been identified and corrected.
RESTRICTED Red or Amber warning A fault has occurred which has reduced Investigate cause of engine power
PERFORMANCE triangle illuminated in LCD engine power output. loss. Interrogate control modules for
depending on nature of faults and diagnose using an approved
power loss. Jaguar Diagnostic System.
ENGINE SYSTEMS
FAULT MIL (malfunction A fault has occurred in the Investigate cause of fault.
indicator lamp) engine management system or, if Interrogate ECM and TCM for
illuminated for the MIL is illuminated, an faults and diagnose using an
certain faults. emissions related fault is present approved Jaguar Diagnostic
Red or Amber which has been detected by System.
warning triangle the On-Board Diagnostic Check start/stop switch for
illuminated in LCD. systems in the ECM and TCM. correct operation or short
A fault has occurred with the circuits.
start/stop switch.
CHECK FUEL The Diagnostic Monitoring Tank Leakage Check fuel filler cap to ensure is it is
FILLER CAP (NAS Vehicles Only) (DMTL) system has detected fuel filler correctly installed and secure or check
Red warning triangle cap has not been correctly installed or the fuel system for leakage.
illuminated in LCD. the system has a leak.
ENGINE Red warning triangle A fault has occurred in the engine Investigate cause of engine
TEMPERATURE illuminated LCD. management system and the engine temperature failure. Interrogate ECM
INDICATION temperature signal is no longer being for faults and diagnose using an
FAULT received. approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
PLEASE WAIT Amber warning triangle Message appears after start/stop switch None
COLD START IN illuminated LCD. is pressed. Glow plugs are warming up,
PROGRESS message will appear for up to 12
seconds dependant on ambient
temperature. Engine will crank once
message is switched off.
GEARBOX FAULT Battery symbol and amber TCM has detected a fault in the Investigate transmission fault.
warning triangle illuminated transmission. Transmission may default Interrogate TCM and diagnose fault
in LCD. to 'limp home' mode and only allow using an approved Jaguar Diagnostic
limited operation of forward gears and System.
reverse.
BATTERY NOT Red warning triangle Charge output from generator not Investigate cause of generator failure.
CHARGING illuminated in LCD. detected by ECM.
OVER 120 km/h Vehicle has exceeded the preset 120 Reduce vehicle speed.
(GULF States Only) km/h speed value.
Red text illuminated
in LCD.
DPF FULL SEE Amber or Red warning ECM has detected diesel particulate Drive the vehicle as described in the
HANDBOOK triangle illuminated LCD. filter is becoming blocked or has become owners handbook or the workshop
blocked. manual to clean the filter.
COOLANT LEVEL Red warning triangle Coolant level in expansion tank has
LOW illuminated in LCD. fallen below minimum level. Stop vehicle and allow engine
to idle for 5 minutes. Switch off
engine and allow to stand for
not less than 10 minutes. Check
coolant level and replenish
expansion tank to maximum
level.
leakage.
BLIND SPOT Amber warning triangle Blind spot monitoring system has a fault Drive vehicle above threshold speed or
MONITOR NOT illuminated LCD. or vehicle speed is below threshold for investigate cause of fault.
AVAILABLE system operation.
BLIND SPOT Amber warning triangle A blind spot monitoring sensor has Remove obstruction or clean the radar
MONITOR illuminated LCD. become dirty or obstructed. sensor.
SENSOR
BLOCKED
BRAKE PADS Amber warning triangle Brake pads have reached the service Replace brake pads.
LOW illuminated LCD. limit.
SERVICE Amber warning triangle If the vehicle is within 3,200 kilometers None
REQUIRED IN illuminated LCD. (1,988 miles) of a service, the message
XXXX MILES/km center will display this message. The
displayed distance will decrease in
increments of 50 km (31 miles).
SERVICE Amber warning triangle This is displayed if the distance to next Vehicle requires service.
REQUIRED illuminated LCD. service drops below 1 km (0.6 miles).
RESETTING Amber warning triangle Displayed during the service reset None
SERVICE MODE illuminated LCD. procedure.
SERVICE MODE Amber warning triangle Displayed when the service rest None
RESET illuminated LCD. procedure has been successful.
WINTER MODE Snow mode symbol Displayed when snow mode has been None
CONFIRMED illuminated LCD. selected.
DYNAMIC MODE Dynamic mode symbol Displayed when dynamic mode has been None
CONFIRMED illuminated LCD. selected.
MODE CHANGE None or Snow mode symbol Displayed when the driver has selected None
IN PROGRESS illuminated or Dynamic an alternative JaguarDrive mode.
mode symbol illuminated
LCDLCD
RECOMMEND None or Dynamic mode Displayed when the JaguarDrive senses Select winter mode.
WINTER MODE symbol illuminated LCD excessive wheel slip.
FOR CONDITIONS
WINTER MODE None Confirmation that winter mode has been None
OFF deselected.
DYNAMIC MODE None Confirmation that dynamic mode has None
OFF been deselected.
WINTER MODE Amber warning triangle A sub-system fault is present and the Investigate cause of message.
FAULT illuminated LCD. driver attempts to select a different Interrogate sub-system control
JaguarDrive Control mode. The message modules for faults and diagnose using
'WINTER MODE FAULT' can also in very an approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
rare circumstances be generated by a If no sub-system fault is found,
fault in the JaguarDrive Control module. investigate JaguarDrive Control
module.
DYNAMIC MODE Amber warning triangle A sub-system fault is present and the Investigate cause of message.
FAULT illuminated LCD. driver attempts to select a different Interrogate sub-system control
'DYNAMIC MODE FAULT' can also, in very an approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
rare circumstances, be generated by a If no sub-system fault is found,
fault in the JaguarDrive Control module. investigate JaguarDrive Control
module.
SPECIAL MODES Amber warning triangle A sub-system fault is present and the Investigate cause of message.
NOT AVAILABLE illuminated LCD. driver attempts to select a different Interrogate sub-system control
'SPECIAL MODES NOT AVAILABLE' can an approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
also in very rare circumstances be If no sub-system fault is found,
generated by a fault in the JaguarDrive investigate JaguarDrive Control
Control module. module.
LISTENING Tone emitted from the The voice button has been pressed and None
instrument cluster. the Jaguar voice system is active and
awaiting a voice command.
VOICE NOT None If the Voice button on the steering Press button a second time after a
READY wheel is pressed before the system is short delay.
ready to receive a command, VOICE NOT
READY will be displayed
INSERT MAP DISC None Navigation disc not loaded. Load navigation disc in the navigation
computer.
NOT AVAILABLE None Voice button has been pressed during a None
PHONE IN USE telephone call.
COMMAND NOT None Jaguar Voice system has not recognised Repeat the command speaking clearly.
RECOGNISED the command.
NO SPEECH None Jaguar Voice system is expecting a voice Repeat required voice command.
DETECTED command .
STORING None Jaguar Voice system is storing input None
telephone information.
COMMAND None Jaguar Voice button has been pressed Previous command cancelled.
CANCELLED and held.
SEARCHING None Jaguar Voice system is searching for None
requested information from phone book.
HOLD BUTTON None Jaguar Voice system has requested a None
TO CANCEL command to be cancelled.
FUEL LEVEL LOW Amber warning triangle Fuel level in fuel tank has fallen below Replenish fuel tank.
illuminated LCD. low fuel warning limit.
FUEL PUMP Amber warning triangle Fuel pump or FPDM fault has occurred. Investigate cause of fault. Interrogate
SYSTEM FAULT illuminated LCD. ECM for faults and diagnose using an
approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
WASHER FLUID Amber warning triangle Fluid level has fallen below low level Replenish reservoir.
LOW illuminated LCD. switch in windshield washer reservoir.
DOOR OPEN Red text is illuminated in Door is open or incorrectly closed. Close open door.
LCD and vehicle view
showing open luggage
compartment lid is
displayed.
BOOT OPEN Red text is illuminated in Luggage compartment lid is open or Close open luggage compartment lid.
LCD and vehicle view incorrectly closed.
showing open door location
is displayed.
COLUMN ADJUST None Manual column adjust has been selected None
on steering column adjustment switch.
COLUMN ADJUST None Automatic column adjust has been None
AUTO selected on steering column adjustment
switch.
MEMORY 1 / 2 / 3 None Memory button has been pressed to None
/ 4 SETTINGS recall memory positions for seat,
RECALLED steering column and mirrors.
MEMORY 1 / 2 / 3 None Memory has been saved for one of the None
/ 4 SETTINGS memory button positions.
SAVED
SEAT BELT None Engine has been started and driver Fasten seat belt(s).
MINDER and/or front passenger seat belt has not
been fastened.
CHECK Red warning triangle A fault has occurred with the pedestrian Investigate cause of fault. Interrogate
PEDESTRIAN illuminated in LCD. protection system. pedestrian protection system control
SYSTEM module for faults and diagnose using
an approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
INERTIA SWITCH Amber warning triangle Message appears when the crash status RCM can be rest with an ignition on/off
TRIPPED illuminated LCD. signal from the RCM (restraints control cycle. If fault has occurred, then
module) changes to crash detected or a investigate cause of fault and
fault in the restraints system prevents interrogate the RCM for faults and
the message from being transmitted. diagnose using an approved Jaguar
Diagnostic System.
VALET MODE None Confirmation that valet mode has been None
entered.
VEHICLE ARMED None Confirmation that alarm and None
immobilization has been achieved.
SMART KEY NOT Red warning triangle Smart key has not been detected by the Smart key not present in vehicle. May
FOUND PLEASE illuminated in LCD. passive system inside the vehicle. be caused by a flat smart key battery.
INSERT IN SLOT Replace internal battery in smart key.
May also be due to a communications
problem.
CHECK SMART None The smart key detected is not the Use the correct smart key coded to the
KEY correct smart key for the vehicle. vehicle.
REMOVE SMART None Smart key is in the start control module Remove smart key from the start
KEY and has been recognized by the passive control module.
start system.
SMART KEY None Battery voltage in smart key is Replace smart key internal battery.
BATTERY LOW becoming low, resulting in a decrease in
effective range of the smart key
transmitter.
PRESS BRAKE None The stop/start button has been pressed To start engine, press brake pedal,
WHEN STARTING without the brake pedal depressed. This then press stop/start button.
will turn on the ignition power mode 6.
GEARBOX NOT IN None The transmission is not in the 'park' Put transmission in the park position.
PARK position. Engine starting will be
prohibited until 'park' is selected.
www.JagDocs.com
STEERING Red warning triangle Fault has occurred preventing the Press the stop/start button to return to
COLUMN LOCKED illuminated in LCD. steering column lock from unlocking. accessory mode 4. If steering column
This will also prevent the engine from is still locked, investigate cause of
starting. fault and interrogate the CJB (central
junction box) for faults and diagnose
using an approved Jaguar Diagnostic
System.
IGNITION ON Red warning triangle Stop/start button has been pressed None
illuminated in LCD. without the brake pedal depressed.
Ignition is now in power mode 6.
ENGINE STOP Red warning triangle Engine stop button has been pressed Do not stop engine when vehicle is
BUTTON PRESSED illuminated in LCD. when the vehicle is moving. Engine will moving unless necessary.
not be switched off until button is
pressed quickly for a second time.
LIGHTS ON Amber warning triangle Side lamps or headlamps are on and the Switch off headlamps to avoid
illuminated in LCD. driver's door has been opened. excessive drain on battery.
AUTOLAMP None Autolamp delay feature has been None
DELAY OFF deactivated by moving light control
switch from the auto position.
AUTOLAMP None Lighting control switch has been moved None
DELAY XX:XX to one of the 4 autolamp delay
positions. Message displays delay timer
period selected.
AUTOLAMP None Autolamp delay is selected on the light None. Message will extinguish once the
DELAY control switch and the driver has selected delay timer has switched off
switched off ignition and opened driver's the headlamps.
door initiating the autolamp delay.
TAIL LAMP None The tail lamp LED (light emitting Correct fault in rear lamp assembly,
FAILURE diode)'s are not functioning correctly. RJB (rear junction box) or wiring.
Location shown on vehicle image.
BRAKE LAMP None The brake lamp LED's are not Correct fault in rear lamp assembly,
FAILURE functioning correctly. Location shown on RJB or wiring.
displayed vehicle image.
INDICATOR LAMP None A turn signal indicator bulb has failed. Replace failed turn signal indicator
FAILURE Location is shown on displayed vehicle bulb.
image.
E-DIFF NOT Amber warning triangle Differential temperature has reached the Allow differential to cool.
AVAILABLE illuminated in LCD overheat threshold. System deactivated
accompanied with a single until temperature returns within limits.
chime
E-DIFF FAULT Amber warning triangle Fault has occurred with electronic Investigate cause of fault and
illuminated in LCD differential. System deactivated until interrogate the system for faults and
accompanied with a single fault rectified. diagnose using an approved Jaguar
chime Diagnostic System.
ENGINE OIL LOW Amber warning triangle The oil is at the minimum level for safe Top-up with 1 liter (1.8 pints) of oil.
illuminated in LCD operation.
accompanied with a single
chime
ENGINE OIL Amber warning triangle This warning is displayed when the Stop the vehicle as soon as safety
HIGH illuminated in LCD engine is started, if the oil is above the permits and have the engine oil
accompanied with a single maximum level for safe operation. drained to correct level, before driving
chime the vehicle.
ENGINE OIL Red warning triangle The oil is below the minimum level for Stop the vehicle as soon as safety
CRITICALLY LOW illuminated LCD safe operation. permits and top-up with 1.5 liters (2.6
accompanied with a single pints) of oil. Wait for 10 minutes,
chime re-check the oil level reading and
top-up again if necessary.
ENGINE OIL Amber warning triangle A fault with the oil level monitoring Investigate cause of fault and
LEVEL MONITOR illuminated in LCD system is indicated. interrogate the ECM for faults and
SYSTEM FAULT accompanied with a single diagnose using an approved Jaguar
chime Diagnostic System.
WATER IN FUEL Amber warning triangle The water in fuel sensor in the fuel filter Drain fuel filter to remove collected
illuminated in LCD has detected water in the fuel system. water.
accompanied with a single
chime
Odometer Display
The odometer displays the total distance which the vehicle has traveled. This is calculated by the instrument cluster using
wheel speed signals from the ABS module.
The odometer can show 6 characters and distances up to 999,999 miles or kilometers. The total distance travelled is stored in a
EEPROM (electrically erasable programmable read only memory) and the RAM (random access memory). This ensures that the
total distance is not lost if the battery is disconnected.
The odometer value is passed to other vehicle system modules on the medium speed and high speed CAN bus. This is used to
record the total vehicle mileage for diagnostic purposes and when storing DTC (diagnostic trouble code)'s.
Trip computer Information Display
The instrument cluster contains software which controls the trip computer. The computer allows the driver to access
information for current fuel usage, current journey length, average speed and estimated vehicle range of fuel remaining.
The information is calculated from CAN messages from other vehicle systems, for example wheel speed signals from the ABS
module and fuel injector operating data from the ECM.
A 'Trip' button is located on the end of the LH (left-hand) multifunction switch and allows the driver to access, in sequence, the
available trip information by repeatedly pressing the button. The trip information is displayed in the following order:
Trip distance – The trip distance since the last reset is displayed
Average speed – The average speed since the last reset is displayed
Average fuel consumption – The average fuel consumption since the last reset is displayed
Range – The range is displayed showing the distance which can be travelled until the fuel gage reads empty. If the
range display shows dashes (-), this indicates a failure with one or both of the fuel level sensors.
The trip computer has three independent memories; A, B and Auto. Memories A and B can be set independently. The Auto
memory is reset after each ignition cycle and therefore only contains information relating the current journey.
The trip information can also be accessed from the TSD located in the center console. The TSD allows the same information
available with the trip button on the multifunction switch to be displayed on the TSD, with the addition of the option to reset
the values in the A and B memories.
If the battery is disconnected, all trip data in memories A, B and Auto are erased.
Fuel Level Display
The fuel level display is a linear LCD display to show the usable fuel tank contents. The level display is active at all times
when the ignition is on. Low fuel level is displayed as a LOW FUEL LEVEL message and an amber warning triangle in the
message center.
The fuel level is obtained by fuel level sensors in the fuel tank. These are monitored by the RJB software and their output
resistance values, corresponding fuel quantity, are transmitted to the instrument cluster on the medium speed CAN bus. The
instrument cluster uses the two level sensor signals to calculate the fuel tank contents. This calculation takes into account
fuel movement in the tank to display a steady fuel quantity in the LCD.
The fuel level information is transmitted on the medium speed and high speed CAN bus for use by other vehicle system
modules.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS
The instrument cluster can generate audible warnings to alert the driver to a displayed message and change of vehicle
operating condition. The audible warning is generated by a sounder located within the instrument cluster. The audible warnings
can be generated for the warnings below and are listed in order of priority, with the first being the highest priority:
Seatbelt reminder
EPB (High Pitch)
ACC Driver Intervene 1
Airbag fault
Key in ignition switch
ASL overspeed
ACC Driver Intervene 2
EPB (Low Pitch)
Vehicle armed (entry delay)
JaguarDrive selector not in park
Valet mode
Lights on reminder
Hood operation
Passive Entry / Passive Start (PEPS)
Memory set
Seat Belt Minder.
The audible warnings can take the form of a single chime, a number of chimes or a continuous chime. The audible warnings are
initiated by a CAN message request from the requesting sub-system control module or by the instrument cluster software.
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center

REFER to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Diagnosis and Testing).
Warning Devices - Blindspot Monitoring System - Component Location
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) door mirror
2 RH blind spot monitoring module
3 LH (left-hand) blind spot monitoring module
4 LH door mirror
Warning Devices - Blindspot Monitoring System - Overview
OVERVIEW
Eliminating blind spots is a major element in vehicle body design, but because of the structural requirements of B, C and D
posts, blind spots cannot be entirely eliminated. Statistics show that some accidents are directly attributable to drivers moving
across into the path of overtaking vehicles that have not been seen in conventional mirrors. New mirror designs have improved
the situation, but by remotely covering areas that cannot be seen either directly or by the vehicle mirrors, have led to the
introduction of a radar-based blind spot monitoring system.
The blind spot monitoring system comprises:
LH (left-hand) Blind spot monitoring sensor

RH (right-hand) Blind spot monitoring sensor
LH door mirror
RH door mirror
The system uses two radar modules operating at a frequency of 24 GHz and each combining the radar face and electronic
module in a single unit. The modules are located behind the rear bumper surface, symmetrically, one on each side of the car
behind the rear wheels. They are side facing and inclined rearwards at an angle of 16 degrees, which is dictated by the shape
at the rear of the vehicle. Each module is calibrated to detect a vehicle in the driver’s blind spot. Once a vehicle is detected
the module illuminates an amber warning ‘alert icon’ LED (light emitting diode) in the relevant exterior door mirror. If there is a
fault or blockage with the blind spot monitoring system an amber warning indicator dot LED is displayed in the exterior mirror
and the message ‘blind spot monitoring not available’ is displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
When the system initiates, it performs a self-check, during which the warning icons in the mirrors illuminate alternately for a
short period of time. Each module does a left/right determination check when the ignition is switched on. Each mirror has a
different circuit configuration so that the modules can determine which mirror they are connected to. If a module detects the
wrong mirror it will go into a fault condition.
The blind spot monitoring modules receive vehicle speed on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) and are inactive
until the vehicle reaches 16kph (10mph). Each blind spot monitor module emits a radar field greater than the blind spot area.
Each Blind Spot Monitor module emits a radar field greater than the blind spot area. The actual blind spot area is calibrated
into the module during its manufacture.
CAUTION: The blind spot monitoring system is designed as a driver aid not a safety device. The driver should always
exercise due care and attention whilst driving.
www.JagDocs.com
Warning Devices - Blindspot Monitoring System - System Operation and
Control Diagram
Item Description
1 Battery
2 LH (left-hand) door mirror
3 RH (right-hand) door mirror
5 LH blind spot monitoring module
System Operation
Blind Spot Monitoring
The purpose of the blind spot monitoring system is to detect an object moving with a positive velocity relative to the radar
module, on either side of the vehicle, at a distance of up to 2.5 meters laterally and in an area from the door mirror up to 7.0
meters behind the module. These criteria identify an overtaking vehicle within the blind-spot area and within a typical
carriageway lane width, while eliminating other objects that are not relevant, either because of their position, they are
stationary, traveling in the opposite direction, or being overtaken. A vehicle is classed as a heavy goods vehicle, car or
motorcycle. A motorcycle is defined as a minimum size of 2.0m long, 0.8m wide (widest point) and 1.1m high. The system is
not affected by the mass of the overtaking vehicle providing all identification criteria, including relative velocity of (16km/h -
10mph) or above, is met.
The system emits radar pulses and analyses the reflections, identifying anything that moves into the blind spot zone. Having
detected another vehicle in the defined blind spot zone it alerts the driver by illuminating the amber alert icon located in the
appropriate exterior mirror.
NOTE: If an overtaking vehicle is detected on both sides of the vehicle simultaneously, the warning alert icons in both
mirrors will illuminate.
The light lens is shaped so as to minimize the visibility to other drivers. The LED (light emitting diode)’s are located towards
the outside extremity of the mirror face, within the peripheral view of the driver but not in any area of the mirror where they
could obscure or distract from the image.
Item Description
1 Warning alert icon
2 System status warning indicator
The LED lighting sequence is as follows;
Amber alert LED icon permanently lit - system operational, vehicle detected in blind spot area
No LED’s lit – system active no vehicle detected in blind spot area
Amber status LED permanently lit - system not active or faulty
The system has operating limitations and is automatically turned off under certain operating conditions. During these
operating conditions the amber status LED is permanently lit.
The system operating limitations are as follows;
The area surrounding the radar face of the module must be clear of metallic items
The system is inactive until vehicle speed is greater than 16km/h - 10mph (amber status LED permanently lit)
The system is inactive if an approved trailer is connected to the vehicle (amber status LED permanently lit)
The system is inactive when reverse gear or park is selected (amber status LED permanently lit)
If either of the radar signals are blocked or distorted, for example by water, the radar face of the module is covered in mud,
sleet or snow the system may detect this and be disabled with the amber status LED permanently lit together with a ‘blind
spot monitoring blocked’ message displayed in the instrument cluster message center. The system is disabled until the
blockage is cleared.
If there is a fault in the system the amber status LED is permanently lit and a ‘blind spot monitoring not available’ message
displayed in the instrument cluster message center. The system is disabled until the fault is rectified.
System fault and blockage warnings are as follows;

The system is disabled when the radar module signal is blocked (amber status LED permanently lit and instrument
cluster message)
The system is disabled by a fault (amber status LED permanently lit and instrument cluster message)
If there is a failure in the communication network and the warning LED’s cannot be displayed in the mirror, a failure message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
When any faults are present in the system DTC (diagnostic trouble code)'s are stored in both blind spot monitoring modules
appropriate to each module. Replacement of modules requires the right hand module to be configured using the Jaguar
approved diagnostic equipment. Due to the fact that all modules are supplied as left hand modules the replacement left hand
modules do not require configuring.
Calibration of the modules using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new
technology becomes available or any fault concerns require software updates.
Warning Devices - Warning Devices
For a detailed description of the Blindspot Monitoring system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (413-09 Warning Devices)
Blindspot Monitoring System (Description and Operation),

Blindspot Monitoring System (Description and Operation),
Blindspot Monitoring System (Description and Operation).
NOTE: Particular attention should be paid to the following items where DTCs may not be logged:
Check for contamination (e.g. dirt, grime, frosting, ice) around the blindspot monitoring sensors and clear.
Visual Inspection
Exterior rear view mirror glass Fuse(s)

Mud or sleet contamination around rear bumper area Relay(s)
Blindspot Monitoring Modules Wiring Harness
Blindspot Monitoring Modules
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively, check for
Symptom Chart

Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left driver
The instrument cluster Left driver display display alert LED circuit for short to power
displays 'BSM System Fault' alert LED circuit -
DTC B11C915 is logged within short to power
the left hand Blind Spot
Monitoring module
The Left Alert icon is
constantly illuminated
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the left

The instrument cluster Left mirror ground mirror ground circuit for open circuit
displays 'BSM System Fault' circuit - open
DTC B11C915 is logged within circuit
the left hand Blind Spot
Monitoring module
No short to power or open
circuit fault on the driver
display status LED circuit
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the right

The instrument cluster Right mirror mirror ground circuit for open circuit
displays 'BSM System Fault' ground circuit -
DTC B11C915 is logged within open circuit
the right hand Blind Spot
Monitoring module
No short to power or open
circuit fault on the driver
display status LED circuit
The instrument cluster Left driver display Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
displays 'BSM System Fault' status LED circuit driver display status LED circuit for short to ground.
DTC U023200 is logged within - short to ground Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains suspect the left
the right hand Blind Spot Harness fault hand Blindspot Monitoring module
Monitoring module between left side Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
The left driver display status mirror and left left side harness between the left side mirror and left
LED does not illuminate when side module hand module
the vehicle is stationary, in Suspect left hand Check and install a new left hand Blindspot Monitoring
Park and the ignition is on module failure module only, refer to the new module/component
The instrument cluster Left driver display Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
displays 'BSM System Fault' alert LED - short driver display alert LED circuit for short to ground,
DTC U023200 is logged within to ground, open open circuit. Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains
the right hand Blind Spot circuit suspect the left hand Blindspot Monitoring module
Monitoring module Harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
When the system is powered between left side left side harness between the left side mirror and left
up the left driver display alert mirror and left hand module
LED does not illuminate during side module Check and install a new left hand Blindspot Monitoring
the bulb self-checks Suspect left hand module only, refer to the new module/component
module failure installation note at the top of the DTC Index
The instrument cluster Right driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
displays 'BSM System Fault' display status LED driver display status LED circuit for short to power.
DTC U023300 is logged within - short to power Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains suspect the
the left hand Blind Spot Harness fault right hand Blindspot Monitoring module
Monitoring module between right side Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
The right driver display status mirror and right right side harness between the right side mirror and
LED is constantly illuminated side module right hand module
Suspect right hand Check and install a new right hand Blindspot
module failure Monitoring module only, refer to the new
DTC Index
The instrument cluster Right driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
displays 'BSM System Fault' display status LED driver display status LED circuit for open circuit. Clear
DTC U023300 is logged within - open circuit DTC and re-test. If DTC remains suspect the right
the left hand Blind Spot Harness fault hand Blindspot Monitoring module
When the system is powered mirror and right right side harness between the right side mirror and
up the right driver display side module right hand module
status LED does not illuminate Suspect right hand Check and install a new right hand Blindspot
during the bulb self-checks module failure Monitoring module only, refer to the new
DTC Index
The instrument cluster Right mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
displays 'BSM System Fault' ground circuit - right mirror ground circuit for open circuit. Clear DTC
DTC U023300 is logged within open circuit and re-test. If DTC remains suspect the left hand
the left hand Blind Spot Harness fault Blindspot Monitoring module
When the system is powered mirror and right right side harness between the right side mirror and
up both the right driver display side module right hand module
LEDs do not illuminate during Suspect right hand Check and install a new right hand Blindspot
the bulb self-checks module failure Monitoring module only, refer to the new
DTC Index
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the DMM leads into
account.
When carrying out repair/diagnosis of the system, on removal of the front or rear bumper inspect the sensor connectors
to ensure they were correctly latched and check fly leads for signs of chaffing or trapped wires.

B11C911 Driver Display Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver display
Status LED Driver Display Status LED status LED circuit for short to ground
B11C915 Driver Display Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver display
Status LED Driver Display Status LED status LED circuit for short to power, open circuit
circuit - short to power,
open circuit
B11D611 Driver Display Alert Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver display
LED Driver Display Alert LED alert LED circuit for short to ground
B11D615 Driver Display Alert Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver display
LED Driver Display Alert LED alert LED circuit for short to power, open circuit
circuit - short to power,
open circuit
U001000 Medium Speed CAN Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Communication Bus No sub type information the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check MS CAN
bus state, carry out CAN network integrity tests using the
Communication Lost communication with the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CJB for
With Body Control CJB related DTCs and correct function, refer to the relevant DTC
Module Index
Communication Lost communication with the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check RJB for
With Body Control RJB related DTCs and correct function, refer to the relevant DTC
Module "B" Index
Communication Lost communication with the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
With Gateway "A" information and information and entertainment module for related DTCs and
entertainment module correct function, refer to the relevant DTC Index
Communication Lost communication with the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
With Instrument instrument cluster instrument cluster for related DTCs and correct function, refer
Panel Cluster (IPC) to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
U023200 Lost
Communication CAN bus circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
With Side Obstacle Harness fault between left power and ground connections to the module. Using
Detection Control side mirror and left side the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - Left module complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
between the left Blind Spot Monitoring System Module
and the right Blind Spot Monitoring System Module
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
left side harness between the left side mirror and left
hand module
U023300 Lost
Communication CAN bus circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
With Side Obstacle Harness fault between power and ground connections to the module. Using
Detection Control right side mirror and right the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - Right side module complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
between the left Blind Spot Monitoring System Module
and the right Blind Spot Monitoring System Module
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
right side harness between the right side mirror and
right hand module
U030000 Internal Control Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Module Software RJB car configuration data Index. Clear DTCs and re-test. If DTC still logged, re-configure
Incompatibility is not compatible with the the RJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Blindspot Monitoring Clear DTCs and re-test. If DTC still logged, re-configure the
module Blindspot Monitoring module using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test, if still logged
suspect the Blindspot Monitoring module. Check and install a
new module as required, refer to the new module/component
U041568 Invalid Data Check ABS module for related DTCs and correct function, refer
Received From Event information to the relevant DTC Index
Anti-Lock Brake
System Control
Module
U042268 Invalid Data Check CJB for related DTCs and correct function, refer to the
Received From Body Event information relevant DTC Index
Control Module
U042368 Invalid Data Check instrument cluster for related DTCs and correct function,
Received From Event information refer to the relevant DTC Index
Instrument Panel
Control Module
U210000 Initial Configuration Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Not Complete No configuration has been Index
previously set
U210100 Control Module Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Configuration Data sent from RJB is Index. Check/amend Car Configuration File using the
Incompatible invalid manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U300044 Control Module Cycle the ignition and check if the DTC is still logged. If DTC
Data memory failure remains suspect the module, refer to the new
Index
U300047 Control Module Cycle the ignition and check if the DTC is still logged. If DTC
Watchdog/safety Micro remains suspect the module, refer to the new
controller failure module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
U300049 Control Module Clear DTC, cycle ignition and retest. If fault persists, check
Internal electronic failure and install a new Blindspot Monitoring module as required,
refer to the new module/component installation note at the
U300281 Vehicle Check RJB has not been previously installed to other vehicle.
Identification Vehicle/component mis- Install original/new module as required, refer to the new
Number match. Corrupt VIN module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
data being transmitted, Index. Check RJB for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
suspect module previously
Mis-match in battery the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
voltage, of 2 volts or
more, between Blindspot
Monitoring module and RJB
Parking Aid - Parking Aid - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - PARKING AID
Item Description
1 Front parking aid sensors (4 off)
2 Parking aid switch
3 Rear parking aid sensors (4 off)
4 Parking aid module
COMPONENT LOCATION - PARKING AID CAMERA
Item Description
1 Touch Screen Display (TSD)
3 Parking aid camera
Parking Aid - Parking Aid - Overview
OVERVIEW
The parking aid system provides an audible warning to the driver when any obstacles are in the path of the vehicle during a
forward (if front sensors are fitted) or reversing manoeuver. The purpose of the system is to assist the driver when parking or
manoeuvring in a restricted space. It is not designed as a crash avoidance system or a replacement for visual interpretation by
the driver.
All vehicles are fitted with rear parking aid sensors. Higher specification vehicles may also be fitted with front parking aid
sensors.
A roof console mounted parking aid switch allows the driver to deactivate the parking aid system if operation is not required.
NOTE: The switch is only fitted to vehicles with front parking aid sensors.
A parking aid camera is a standard fitment on some models and optional on others. The parking aid camera supplements the
information provided by the parking aid system by providing the driver with a visual display of the area directly behind the
vehicle.
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Aid - Parking Aid - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PARKING AID
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; P = MOST ring

Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuses
4 Entertainment system control module
5 Integrated audio module
6 Audio amplifier
7 Audio system speakers
8 RH (right-hand) outer rear sensor
9 RH inner rear sensor
10 LH (left-hand) inner rear sensor
11 LH outer rear sensor
12 LH outer front sensor
13 LH inner front sensor
14 RH inner front sensor
15 RH outer front sensor
17 Parking aid switch
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PARKING AID CAMERA
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus; P = MOST ring; T = Co-axial cable
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuses
3 RJB
6 Parking aid camera
System Operation
PARKING AID
Two levels of parking aid system can be fitted; a rear only system or a front and rear system.
The parking aid module receives and ignition power mode 6 supply from the RJB.
The parking aid module is connected to the entertainment system control module by the medium speed CAN (controller area
network) bus and the Media Orientated System Transport (MOST). The entertainment system is used by the parking aid system
to provide the driver with an audible warning. If an obstacle is sensed by the rear parking aid sensors, the rear audio system
speakers will sound. If an obstacle is sensed by the front parking aid sensors (if fitted), the front audio system speakers will
sound.
The parking aid system operates using ultrasonic signals which are transmitted by the sensors. The reflected echo from this
output is received by the sensors and used by the parking aid module to calculate the distance from an object.
When the parking aid module activates the system, the switch LED (light emitting diode) is illuminated to indicate that the
system is operating. The parking aid module then processes signals received from the sensors to determine if there is an
object with the detection range of the sensors. A parking aid screen is automatically displayed in the Touch Screen Display. If
the vehicle has a parking aid camera fitted, the camera display is automatically displayed in the TSD in preference to the
parking aid alert display. To view the parking aid sensor display, a single touch of the TSD screen will remove the camera
image display and show the parking aid alert display.
Parking Aid Alert Display
A visual interpretation of the detection areas is given in the TSD.
The visual interpretation dynamically updates as the sensors detect an objets within the set parameters. This feature can also
be used as a diagnostic aid.
In the combined mode, the sensors emit a series of ultrasonic impulses and then switch to receiver mode to receive the echo
reflected by an obstacle within the detection range. The received echo signals are amplified and converted from an analogue
signal to a digital signal by the sensor. The digital signal is passed to the parking aid module and compared with
pre-programmed data stored in an EEPROM (electrically erasable programmable read only memory) within the module. The
module receives this data via the signal line from the sensor and calculates the distance from the object using the elapsed
time between the transmitted and received impulse. The duration of the impulse duration is determined by the module, with
the sensor controlling the frequency of the impulse output.
In receiver mode, the sensor receives impulses that were emitted by adjacent sensors. The module uses this information to
precisely determine the position and distance of the object.
If no objects are detected there are no further warning tones. If an object is detected, repeated audible tones are emitted
from either the front or rear audio speakers as appropriate. The time delay between the tones decreases as the distance
between the object and the vehicle decreases, until at approximately 300 mm (12 inches), the audible tone becomes
continuous.
After the initial detection of an object, if there is no decrease in the distance between an object and the central sensors, the
time delay between the audible warnings remains constant. If an object is detected by one of the corner sensors only, the
audible warnings stop after approximately 5 seconds if there is no change in the distance between an object and the corner
sensor.
When approaching several objects within detection range, the control module recognises the distance from the vehicle to the
nearest object.
The PDC module will prioritise the objects detected, the nearest object detected will take priority and the corresponding audio
outputs will be emitted. For example if 2 objects are detected (one front one rear) the nearest detected object will take
priority and relevant audible tone will be heard.
If two objects are detected at equal distance (one front one rear) the audible tones will alternate between the front and rear
speakers.
If reverse (R) is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on, both the front (if fitted) and rear parking aid sensors
will become operational. If a forward drive gear is subsequently selected, the front and rear parking aid sensors will remain
operational until vehicle speed increases above 16 km/h (10 mph), park (P) is selected or the PDC control switch is pressed.
If drive (D) is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on the parking aid system will have to be activated by
pressing the PDC control switch.
NOTE: The PDC system can not be activated whilst the vehicle is in park (P).
The volume output of the parking aid audible tones can be adjusted by selecting the 'Vehicle Settings' menu and selecting
'Parking' from the menu on the TSD. The volume can be adjusted using the + or - selections on the TSD.
The system can detect when a trailer is connected to the vehicle by a message output on the medium speed CAN bus from the
trailer module. When the parking aid module detects that a trailer is connected to the vehicle, the rear sensors are disabled to
prevent constant warnings due to the close proximity of the trailer.
NOTE: The ignition needs to be cycled once the trailer has been disconnected to activate the rear parking aid system.
Distance Calculation
The detection ranges of the sensors are shown in the table below.
Item Number Sensor Location Maximum Detection Range Audio Tone Continuous Audio Tone
1 Rear/Front Outer Approximately 600 mm (24 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
2 Rear Inner Approximately 1800 mm (71 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
3 Front Inner Approximately 800 mm (31 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
PARKING AID CAMERA

The parking aid camera receives an ignition power mode 6 power supply from the RJB. It also has a LIN (local interconnect
network) bus connection from the RJB which is not used at the moment but installed for a later enhancement of the parking
aid camera.
A shielded co-axial cable connection between the camera and the Touch Screen Display (TSD) is used for the video image
transmission.
The camera receives power at all times when the ignition is in power mode 6. When reverse gear is selected, the RJB
transmits a reverse selected signal on the medium speed CAN bus message to the entertainment system control module. This
message is transferred on the MOST to the TSD which displays the parking aid camera video input from the camera in
preference to the parking aid alert screen.
If the driver does not require the camera image in the TSD, a single touch on the screen will revert the display to the parking
aid alert screen. The camera view can be reselected by pressing the 'Rear Camera' softkey on the TSD.
When reverse gear is deselected, the camera image remains on the TSD for 10 seconds after the transmission has been put
into drive 'D'. This is to prevent the TSD switching between screens if the vehicle is being manoeuvred into a parking space. If
the vehicle forward speed exceeds 16 km/h (10 mph) within the 10 second period, the camera image is removed from the TSD.
If the TSD display is switched off, the camera image will be automatically displayed when reverse gear is selected. When
reverse gear is deselected and the 10 second period has expired, the TSD will revert back to its switched off state.
PARKING AID
Parking Aid Module
The parking aid module is located on the LH side of the luggage compartment.
The parking aid module has three connectors which provide for power, ground and CAN bus connections, front parking aid
sensors and rear parking aid sensors. The medium speed CAN bus connections provide for the receipt of the following
www.JagDocs.com
information from other systems:
ABS (anti-lock brake system) module - Road speed signal

TCM (transmission control module) - Reverse gear engaged signal
Trailer module - Trailer attached to vehicle
The module also outputs messages on the medium speed CAN bus which are received by the integrated audio module. The
integrated audio module processes these messages and converts them into Media Orientated System Transport (MOST) signals
which are passed to the audio system power amplifier. These signals are then used by the power amplifier to emit the
applicable warning tones from the front or rear audio speakers when an object is detected by the front or rear parking aid
sensors. A warning tone can also be emitted to alert the driver to a fault in the parking aid system.
The control module has a diagnostic connection via the medium speed CAN bus to enable faults to be retrieved using the
Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment. Additionally an on-board diagnostic routine within the control module constantly
monitors the system and alerts the driver to a system fault by emitting a 3 second continuous tone through the rear audio
system speakers when the ignition is switched on. If front parking aid sensors are fitted, the control switch LED will also flash
6 times.
Parking Aid Sensors
Four ultrasonic sensors are located in the front (if fitted) and rear bumpers.
Each sensor has a three pin connector which mates with a bumper harness, which in turn is connected to the main body
harness. Three pins provide for power supply, ground and signal lines to and from the parking aid module.
The parking aid module controls the operation of each sensor using a digital output on the signal line. The module controls the
sensor in one of two modes; combined transmitter and receiver mode or receiver mode only.
Parking Aid Switch
The parking aid switch is located in the instrument panel switch pack, above the touch screen. The switch is the LH switch with
an integral LED.
The switch is a non-latching push switch which allows the driver to select the parking aid system on or off. When pressed, the
switch momentarily connects a ground to the parking aid module.
The LED indicates when the parking aid system is active. The LED is controlled by the parking aid module.
NOTE: The control switch allows the driver to activate/deactivate the parking aid system if operation is required or not
required.
PARKING AID CAMERA
The parking aid camera receives an ignition power mode 6 power supply from the RJB. It also has a LIN bus connection with
the RJB, which is used as a gateway.
A shielded co-axial cable connection between the camera and the TSD is used for the video image transmission.
The camera receives power at all times when the ignition is in power mode 6. When reverse gear is selected, the RJB
transmits a reverse selected message on the medium speed CAN bus. The information and entertainment module transfers the
message on the MOST ring to the TSD, which displays the video input from the parking aid camera in preference to the parking
aid alert screen.
The display from the camera incorporates graphic overlays, indicating vehicle direction, width and proximity to surrounding
objects.
Item Description
A Solid line: The projected wheel trajectory
B Dotted line: The safe working width of the vehicle (including exterior mirrors)
C Luggage compartment access guideline: Do not reverse beyond this point if luggage compartment access is required
D Bumper inclusion
E Parking sensor activation: A colored area appears, to indicate which rear sensors have been activated
A single touch on the screen will revert the display to the parking aid alert screen. The camera view can be reselected by
pressing the Rear Camera soft key on the TSD.
NOTE: This can only be activated when reverse gear is selected.
When reverse gear is deselected, the camera image remains on the TSD for 2 seconds after the transmission has been put into
D (drive). If the vehicle forward speed in D exceeds 16 km/h (10 mph) the camera image is removed from the TSD.
If the TSD is switched off, the camera image will be automatically displayed when reverse gear is selected. When reverse gear
is deselected, after 10 seconds the TSD will revert back to its switched off state.
Parking Aid - Parking Aid
For a detailed description of the parking aid system, characteristics and limitations refer to the relevant description and
operation section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Description and Operation).
Parking Aid System On-Board Self-Test

As part of the strategy of the system if any DTCs are detected, a long high-pitched tone approx 3 seconds will sound and the
parking aid switch (where fitted) indicator LED will flash 6 times at ignition on
If a fault is present when the parking aid system is activated then the parking aid switch (where fitted) status LED will
flash 6 times indicating an issue with front or rear parking aid sensors, wiring switch, parking aid control module or hard
wired sounders
The rear parking aid sounder/rear audio system will emit an error tone for approx 3 seconds at ignition on if a fault is
detected with the front or rear sensors, the switch, or if there is a controller area network (CAN) bus error
(Only applicable to vehicles fitted with front parking aid and a hard wired rear parking aid sounder). If there is a fault
with the rear parking aid sounder the error tone will come from the front parking aid sounder unit (integral with the
instrument cluster)
Audible and Visual Warnings when Parking Aid System is in Error State
Rear Parking Aid
System Fitted and
No Parking Aid
System Switch Rear Parking Aid System Fitted and Parking Aid Front and Rear Parking Aid System Fitted with
Fitted System Switch Fitted Parking Aid System Switch Fitted
A long high-pitched
error tone will A long high-pitched error tone will sound at A long high-pitched error tone will sound at
sound at Ignition ignition on for approx 3 seconds and the ignition on for approximately 3 seconds and
On for approx 3 parking aid switch indicator LED will flash 6 the parking aid switch indicator LED will flash 6
seconds times at ignition on. Every time the parking times at ignition on. Every time the parking aid
aid system is activated within the same system is activated within the same ignition
ignition cycle, parking aid switch indicator cycle the parking aid switch indicator LED will
LED will flash 6 times flash 6 times

CAUTIONS:
Do not apply any grease based products to any parking aid system connector or pins
NOTE: Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
3. Ensure that the parking aid sensor face is clear of contamination that could affect the performance of the sensor
Visual Inspection
Parking aid sensor condition/damaged Battery

Parking aid sensor installation and holder Fuse(s)
Parking aid sensor alignment Relays
Parking aid sensor contamination Wiring harness
Bumper cover(s) Electrical connector(s)
Vehicle ride height Front parking aid sensor(s)
Non standard/non manufacturer approved accessories fitted Rear parking aid sensor(s)
Parking aid switch and LED
Parking aid control module
Parking aid sounder
Audio system
the next step
5. If the cause is not visually evident, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC index
Symptom Chart
CAUTION: Do not apply any grease based products to any parking aid system connector or pins
NOTES:
Please note if this diagnosis is being carried out on a vehicle without a hard wired parking aid speaker, ensure the in car
infotainment system is fully functional and configured correctly
Parking aid sensors that are painted incorrectly and not to the manufacturer standards, will not be considered in any
warranty claim
Front or rear parking aid Clean front or rear parking aid sensors
NOTE:
sensors dirty Check the front or parking aid rear sensor position
Permanent/Intermittent fault
Front or rear parking aid Check the front or rear parking aid sensor are
Parking aid system not sensor position incorrect correctly installed
functioning correctly. (No Front or rear parking aid Check front or rear parking aid sensor coupling
DTCs displayed) sensor incorrectly installed rings are installed/installed correctly
Front or rear parking aid Ensure all parking aid system connectors are
sensor coupling rings not correctly latched
installed/incorrectly installed Remove parking aid sensor and ensure correctly
Parking aid control module or painted parking aid sensor is installed
parking aid sensor connector - Parking aid sensors that are painted
not fully latched incorrectly and not to the manufacturer
Parking aid sensors painted standards, will not be considered in any
without being removed from warranty claim
the bumper assembly or not
painted to the manufacturer
specification
Parking aid sensors incorrectly Ensure the sensors are a tight fit in the holder and
NOTE:
mounted locked. Ensure the sensors are central in the holder
Permanent/Intermittent fault
Incorrect vehicle ride height and bumper and at the correct angle
Parking aid system not Dirty parking aid sensor face. Ensure vehicle ride height is within the specified
functioning correctly. (No Ice/snow covered sensor. limits. Rectify as required
DTCs displayed). System Debris trapped between Clean the sensor face as required. Defrost the
characteristics or parking aid sensor and sensor and dry as required. Clear any debris from
environmental effects parking aid sensor body. the sensor and holder as required. Water flowing
Heavy rain or water splash over the sensor is a system limitation. (no action
from the ground required)
Non standard, bumper, Check for non standard, bumper, exhausts/tailpipe,
exhausts/tailpipes, tow bar or tow bar or external spare wheel mounting that may
external spare wheel be being detected by the parking aid system.
mounting Rectify as required
Area around vehicle is not Ensure the area around the vehicle is clear of any
clear of obstacles such as obstacles, move the vehicle to a suitable area
channels, gutters or other before continuing diagnosis
items on the ground Ensure no exhaust gas or warm area clouds are in
Exhaust gas and warm air the area around the parking aid sensor detection
clouds creating ghost echoes range
Vehicle not on level ground or Ensure the vehicle is on level ground and clear of
next to a gradient any ramps, potholes or speed bumps, move the
Parking aid sensors painted vehicle to a suitable area before continuing
without being removed from diagnosis
the bumper assembly or not Remove parking aid sensor and ensure correctly
painted to the manufacturer painted parking aid sensor is installed
specification - Parking aid sensors that are painted
incorrectly and not to the manufacturer
standards, will not be considered in any
warranty claim
Parking aid sensors are being Possible issue with sensor connectors
returned with no faults found not latched correctly When either no/intermittent operation has been
or signs of water reported the following action should be taken
ingress/corrosion 1. Using Datalogger, identify the position of the
suspect parking aid sensor within the bumper
2. Visually locate the position of the suspect
parking aid sensor. Inspect and provide details in
claim if the sensor has any sign of physical
damage
3. Remove the bumper. Disconnect the wiring at
the main harness connector. Inspect the main
harness connectors and terminals for signs of
damage, backed out pins, corrosion and water
ingress, or damage to the seals. Provide details in
claim if any of the above symptoms are present
4. Attempt to remove the harness connector from
the suspect parking aid sensor without using the
connector latch i.e. lightly pull back on ALL wires
together, ensuring the harness is held close to the
back of the connector, not elsewhere on the wiring
harness. DO NOT apply excessive force. If the
connector can be removed without using the latch,
provide details in claim if connector is loose. If the
connector is fully latched, disconnect it from the
sensor
5. Inspect and provide details in claim if the
suspect sensor harness connector has any sign of
water ingress/corrosion
6. Inspect and provide details in claim if the
suspect parking aid sensor harness connector
shows any sign that the terminals have backed-out
of the connector or for any damage to the terminal
seals. Replace/repair the harness as required and
proceed
7. Remove the suspect parking aid sensor from the
bumper. Inspect the parking aid sensor connector
for signs of water ingress/corrosion. Provide details
in claim if corrosion/water ingress is present
8. Exchange the suspect parking aid sensor with
another parking aid sensor within the bumper that
is performing correctly. Reconnect all sensors and
reconnect the bumper main harness connector.
Repeat step 1. Confirm if the original fault now
appears at the new position of the suspect parking
aid sensor, if so, proceed to step 10
9. If not, carry out the appropriate open circuit and
short circuit checks between the original suspect
parking aid sensor harness connector and the
parking aid control module
10. Refit the parking aid sensors to their original
position in the bumper
11. Reconnect the parking aid sensor to the
bumper harness connector. Reconnect main harness
connector and refit the bumper
12. Repeat Step 1. If fault is still present, replace
only the faulty sensor
PINPOINT TEST A : PARKING AID SYSTEM NOT FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY WITH NO DTCS LOGGED
CONDITIONS
A1: PERMANENT FAULT
1 When the parking aid system is activated, there is a vibration on the parking aid sensor membrane. This
can be verified by touching the parking aid sensor face with a hard item such as a pencil, ball-pen, small
screwdriver, or fingernail. Ensure no damage is caused to sensor painted surface
Are the parking aid sensor(s) vibrating?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A5.
A2: SENSORS VIBRATING WITH PARKING AID FAULT
1 Clean the parking aid sensor face
Parking aid system functioning correctly?
Yes
No
www.JagDocs.com
GO to A3.
1 Check parking aid sensors correctly mounted. Parking aid sensor holder correctly mounted. Parking aid
sensor decoupler ring fitted or fitted correctly. Parking aid sensor positioning correct. Parking aid sensor
painted without being removed from the bumper assembly or not painted to manufacturer specification.
Rectify as required
Yes
No
GO to A4.
1 Carry out speaker test. Only applicable to vehicles with rear hard wired parking aid speakers. Check the
parking aid speaker wiring circuit and connector. Rectify as required. Check and install a new parking aid
speaker as required. Vehicles with audio parking aid system. Confirm audio system is functioning
correctly. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
Parking aid system functioning correctly
Yes
A5: SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PARKING AID FAULT
1 Isolate the fault to front or rear parking aid sensors
Are all rear parking aid sensors vibrating?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
GO to A10.
A6: FRONT SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PARKING AID FAULT
1 Check the parking aid control module is correctly configured. Check and update the car configuration file
as required
Yes
No
GO to A7.
1 Check the correct parking aid control module is installed to the vehicle
Yes
No
GO to A8.
1 If all 4 front parking aid sensors are not vibrating, carry out harness test on common ground, power
supply. Check main parking aid harness connector to bumper harness connector. Rectify as required
Yes
No
GO to A9.
1 Check and install a new parking aid control module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
Yes
A10: REAR SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PARKING AID FAULT
1 Check the parking aid control module is correctly configured. Check and update the car configuration file
as required
Yes
No
GO to A11.
1 If all 4 rear parking aid sensors are not vibrating, carry out harness test on common ground, power supply.
Check main parking aid harness connector to bumper harness connector. Rectify as required
Yes
No
GO to A12.
1 Check and install a new parking aid control module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
Yes
PINPOINT TEST B : PARKING AID SYSTEM NOT FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY WITH NO DTCS LOGGED
CONDITIONS
B1: PARKING AID SYSTEM GIVES WARNING SIGNAL WITHOUT OBSTACLE
1 Clean the parking aid sensor face. Check for any damage to the parking aid sensor face. Rectify as
required. Snow, water or ice on sensor face. Parking aid sensor face has been repainted to the incorrect
thickness. Rectify as required
Yes
No
GO to B2.
1 Ensure the vehicle ride height is within manufacturer specified limits. Rectify as required
Yes
No
GO to B3.
1 Check for any non standard accessories are not fitted, such as tow bar, bike rack, body kit, modified
exhaust, lighting or licence plate holder
Yes
No
GO to B4.
1 Limitations or characteristics of the parking aid system such as vehicle on a gradient, exhaust gas
vapour, signal reflection
Yes
No
For a detailed description of the parking aid system, refer to the relevant description and operation
section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Description and Operation).
DTC Index
NOTES:
If the control module is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the Warranty Policy and
Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a
new module.
account.
to ensure they were correctly latched and check fly leads for signs of chaffing or trapped wires
Physical damage to the sensor (impact damage or scratched sensor surface) must NOT be changed under warranty.

Sensor - General Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
electrical failure Front Right Outer Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
- Component internal sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
failure to power, open circuit. Repair or replace any wiring
harness as required

Sensor - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
to battery front bumper harness for damage. Check sensor
circuit for short circuit to power. Repair or replace any

Sensor - Component Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
internal failure Front Right Outer Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
harness as required

Sensor - General Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
electrical failure Front Right Inner Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
harness as required
Parking Aid - Proximity Camera
For a detailed description of the rear view camera system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual.
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
Visual Inspection
Touch screen Fuses

Rear view camera Wiring harnesses and connectors
Touch screen
Rear view camera
the next step
Symptom Chart

Rear view camera
image slow to react System operation within
NOTE: After selecting reverse, it may take up to 20 seconds for the
specification
image to be displayed.
No further action necessary
Blank screen
Rear view camera not GO to Pinpoint Test A.
functioning
Blue screen
Video in signal absent GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No tracking lines
Missing/invalid reverse Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
gear signal central junction box for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
LIN fault DTC index
Frozen tracking lines
LIN data gateway fault GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : PERMANENT BLANK SCREEN TESTS
CONDITIONS
A1: PERMANENT BLANK SCREEN TEST 1
NOTE: A blank screen is the default display when the rear view camera is not transmitting an image.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power and ground connections to the rear view
1
camera
Are the power and ground circuits within specification?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Repair power or ground circuit as necessary
A2: PERMANENT BLANK SCREEN TEST 2
CAUTION: Do not probe the coaxial cable connectors as they are prone to damage.
NOTE: A DC resistance measurement is not a reliable test method as the system operates at low voltage and high
frequency.
1 Check the integrity of the rear view camera coaxial cable connectors (at rear view camera, the touch
screen and in-line connectors)
2 Check the coaxial cable for excessive bending, clamping and insulation damage
Is the rear view camera coaxial cable disconnected or damaged?
Yes
Reconnect or install a new coaxial cable as necessary
No
Install a new rear view camera
PINPOINT TEST B : BLUE SCREEN TESTS
CONDITIONS
B1: BLUE SCREEN TEST 1
NOTE: A blue screen is the default display when the video in signal is absent.
1 Select reverse gear and observe the touch screen

Is the touch screen blue?
Yes
Check the integrity of the rear view camera coaxial cable connectors (at rear view camera, the touch
screen and in-line connectors), and retest
No
GO to Pinpoint Test A.
PINPOINT TEST C : ABSENT TRACKING LINES TESTS
CONDITIONS
C1: ABSENT TRACKING LINES TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear view camera LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Is a LIN bus circuit fault present?
Yes
Repair the LIN bus circuit as necessary
No
Install a new rear view camera
PINPOINT TEST D : FROZEN TRACKING LINES TESTS

D1: FROZEN TRACKING LINES TEST 1
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: The vehicle may take 30 seconds (or 100m) to learn the steering centre position after starting the engine. This is
normal.
1 Start the engine

2 Wait at least 30 seconds
3 Select reverse gear
4 Turn the steering wheel and observe the touch screen
Do the tracking lines react to steering input?
Yes
No fault present
No
Potential LIN data gateway fault
DTC Index
Parking Aid - Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and

Installation).
2.
Installation
1. CAUTION: If a new sensor is installed, make sure that the area

illustrated is the only area painted. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in the component malfunctioning.
NOTE: On vehicles that are equipped with black or unpainted

bumpers, the sensor(s) do not require painting.
Parking Aid - Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor
Removal

Installation).
2.
Installation
1. CAUTION: If a new sensor is installed, make sure that the area

illustrated is the only area painted. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in the component malfunctioning.
NOTE: On vehicles that are equipped with black or unpainted

bumpers, the sensor(s) do not require painting.
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Aid - Parking Aid Camera
Removal
1. Refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Moulding (501-08 Exterior Trim and
2.
Installation

Parking Aid - Parking Aid Module
Removal

3.
4.
Installation

Parking Aid - Rear Parking Aid Sensor
Removal
1. Refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and

Installation).
2.
Installation

Battery and Charging System - General Information - Battery Care
Requirements
1. INTRODUCTION
This document defines the requirements for care and maintenance of batteries, and the standard of battery care at dealers and
retailers for new vehicles.
This applies to all types of 12 Volt Lead Acid Batteries used in Jaguar and Land Rover vehicles whether they are conventional
flooded technology or Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM – also known as Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA)) technology and also
applies to both Primary, Secondary and Auxiliary Batteries. AGM batteries offer improved resistance to cycling as seen in stop
start applications.
In order to prevent damage to the battery and ensure a satisfactory service life, all processes detailed within this document
must be rigorously adhered to.
It is equally important therefore to note the following key points:
All new vehicles leave the factory with either a transit relay installed and/or have a transit mode programmed into the
vehicle control modules. The transit relay must be removed and the transit mode disabled (where applicable) using an
approved diagnostic system, NOT MORE THAN 72 HOURS before the customer takes delivery.
The battery can be discharged by the following mechanisms:
- Self Discharge: - A lead acid battery will very slowly discharge itself due to its own internal chemical processes
whether it is connected to a vehicle or not.
- Quiescent Discharge: - The vehicle electrical systems when connected to the battery will draw charge from the
battery.
12 Volt Lead Acid Batteries rely on internal chemical processes to create a voltage and deliver current. These processes and
the internal chemical structure of the battery can be damaged if the battery is allowed to discharge over a number of weeks /
months, or is left in a discharged state for a lengthy time period.
On vehicles with conventional ignition keys, these must not be left in the ignition lock barrel when the transit relay
has been removed, otherwise quiescent current will increase and the battery will discharge more rapidly.
For keyless vehicles, the Smart Key must be stored at least 5m (16 ft) away from the vehicle when the vehicle is
parked or stored.
AGM Batteries are fully sealed and cannot have the electrolyte level topped up.
NOTE: Dealers and retailers involved in the storage / handling of vehicles and replacement batteries have a responsibility
to ensure that only a fully charged battery may be processed through the distribution selling chain.
2. GENERAL RULES FOR BATTERY CARE
2.1 Dealer Demonstration Vehicles
Vehicles used as dealer demonstrator(s), in a showroom, must be connected to a JLR approved showroom conditioner capable
of delivering 50 Amps. This will prevent the battery from being damaged.
2.2 Software Reflash, SDD work or Ignition On related workshop activities
Due to the high electrical current demand and high depth of discharge that can occur during vehicle software re-flash activities,
SDD work or ignition on (power mode 6) related work in the workshop, vehicles that are undergoing such activities MUST have a
JLR approved power supply capable of delivering 50 Amps or more.
2.3 Extended Vehicle Rework
For any extended vehicle rework that results in consuming vehicle power, either the battery should be disconnected or a JLR
approved power supply connected.
2.4 Jump Starting New vehicles before they have been delivered to the customer
It is the dealer / retailers responsibility to make sure the battery is not allowed to discharge by following the
instructions and processes defined in this manual.
However, if circumstances dictate that a new vehicle must be jump started due to a discharged battery whilst the
vehicle is in the dealer / retailers care, the battery on this vehicle must be replaced with a new one prior to delivery
to the customer at the dealer / retailers liability.
The vehicle should also undergo investigation as to why the battery became discharged.
Do not connect the jump starting cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery. Always connect to the recommended
earth point. As defined in the owners handbook or service documentation for that vehicle.
2.5 AGM Batteries

AGM batteries must not be charged above 14.8 Volts. Doing so will damage them.
AGM Batteries must be tested with a capable battery tester as detailed in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this
procedure.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should the battery be disconnected with the engine running because under these
conditions the generator can give a very high output voltage. This high transient voltage will damage the electronic
components in the vehicle. Loose or incomplete battery connections may also cause high transient voltage.
3. HEALTH AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGS:
BATTERY CELLS CONTAIN SULPHURIC ACID AND EXPLOSIVE MIXTURES OF HYDROGEN AND OXYGEN GASES. IT IS
THEREFORE ESSENTIAL THAT THE FOLLOWING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
Batteries emit highly explosive hydrogen at all times, particularly during charging. To prevent any potential form of
ignition occurring when working in the vicinity of a battery:
Do not smoke when working near batteries.

Avoid sparks, short circuits or other sources of ignition in the battery vicinity.
Switch off current before making or breaking electrical connections.
Ensure battery charging area is well ventilated.
Ensure the charger is switched off when: a) connecting to a battery; b) disconnecting from the battery.
Always disconnect the ground cable from the battery terminal first and reconnect it last.
Batteries contain poisonous and highly corrosive acid. To prevent personal injury, or damage to clothing or the vehicle,
the following working practices should be followed when topping up, checking electrolyte specific gravity, removal, refitting or
carrying batteries:
Always wear suitable protective clothing (an apron or similar), safety glasses, a face mask and suitable gloves.
If acid is spilled or splashed onto clothing or the body, it must be neutralized immediately and then rinsed with clean
water. A solution of baking soda or household ammonia and water may be used as a neutralizer.
In the event of contact with the skin, drench the affected area with water. In the case of contact with the eyes, bathe
the affected area with cool clean water for approximately 15 minutes and seek urgent medical attention.
If battery acid is spilled or splashed on any surface of a vehicle, it should be neutralized and rinsed with clean water.
Heat is generated when acid is mixed with water. If it becomes necessary to prepare electrolyte of a desired specific
gravity, SLOWLY pour the concentrated acid into water (not water into acid), adding small amounts of acid while
stirring. Allow the electrolyte to cool if noticeable heat develops. With the exception of lead or lead-lined containers,
always use non-metallic receptacles or funnels. Do not store acid in excessively warm locations or in direct sunlight.
Due to their hazardous contents, the disposal of batteries is strictly controlled. When a battery is scrapped, ensure it is
disposed of safely, complying with local environmental regulations. If in doubt, contact your local authority for advice on
disposal facilities.
4. BATTERY CARE REQUIREMENTS
4.1 RECEIPT OF A NEW VEHICLE
Within 24 hours of receipt of a new vehicle, a battery condition check must be carried out in accordance with the battery test
process utilizing a JLR approved tester as outlined in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
NOTE: The Midtronics code from the tester must be recorded on the form.
Any actions must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in the Determining Battery Condition section (Section 6)
of this procedure. The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage
document.
For additional information, refer to: New Vehicle Storage Form (100-11 Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage,
4.2 NEW VEHICLE STORAGE
If the vehicle is to be stored the transit relays MUST be refitted and / or the vehicle put into transport mode.
Transit relay removal / vehicle placed in normal mode should only be completed a maximum of 72 hours prior to handover to
customer
For vehicles without either a transit mode or transit relay the battery negative cable must be DISCONNECTED from the battery.
The battery must be tested and/or re-charged every 30 days and MUST be re-charged after every 90 day period.
www.JagDocs.com
document.
4.3 PDI / DELIVERY TO CUSTOMER
Before the vehicle is handed over to the customer and as part of the PDI, the condition of the battery needs to be confirmed.
The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing a JLR approved tester as outlined
in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
document.
4.4 REPLACEMENT BATTERIES FOR SERVICE
All service replacement batteries must have the battery condition checked within 24 hours of receipt and controlled on a ‘First
In First Out’ basis to ensure batteries are not allowed to age unnecessarily.
For batteries in storage and not yet fitted to a vehicle, they must be stored in a dry environment, not in direct sunlight or
under any direct heat source. Any batteries exhibiting any forms of damage or corrosion must not be fitted to any vehicle. Any
batteries which are dropped must be scrapped, this applies even if no external damage is apparent.
The battery condition must be checked every 30 days in accordance with the battery test process utilizing a JLR approved
tester as outlined in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
of this procedure.The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage
document.
4.5 BATTERY MAINTENANCE
Any battery whether it is in a vehicle or a replacement part must be tested and/or re-charged every 30 days and MUST be
re-charged after every 90 day period.
4.6 BATTERY TEST PROCESS
It is recommended that this test is conducted at least 24 hours after the vehicle engine has been run or the battery charged to
avoid the need of surface charge removal. If time constraints make this unacceptable then the surface charge must be
removed.
Surface Charge Removal
A vehicle which has had its battery charged or been driven in a 24 hour period before the test, must have its surface charge
removed.
Turn on the ignition (power mode 6) but do not start the vehicle
Switch on the headlamps on high beam for a minimum 3 minutes
Switch off the headlamps
Wait a minimum of 5 minutes before recording test results for any battery measurements
Battery Test
The battery may be tested either on a bench or on the vehicle.
The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing a JLR approved tester as outlined
in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
document.
CAUTION: DO NOT connect the tester to any other circuit or chassis point other than the battery negative terminal.
5. EQUIPMENT
All equipment used must be functionally capable of meeting the compliance requirements. Please refer to the approved
equipment document (JLR 000015).
In the case of batteries fitted to a new vehicle at the dealership, battery condition should be measured using the appropriate
hand-held Midtronics tester as follows:
Battery Type Battery Tester Battery Tester

Jaguar Land Rover
AGM & Flooded Midtronics EXP1080, GRX 3080 Midtronics EXP1080, GRX 3080
The test results must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage document.
NOTE: All equipment must be calibrated
6 DETERMINING BATTERY CONDITION
TESTER RESULTS ACTION

GOOD BATTERY Return to service.
GOOD RE-CHARGE Fully charge battery and return to service.
CHARGE AND RE-TEST Fully charge battery. Remove surface charge. Re-test battery. If same result replace battery.
REPLACE BATTERY OR BAD Verify surface charge removed. Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test. If result repeats after
CELL BATTERY surface charge removal, replace battery. DO NOT RECHARGE.
UNABLE TO DO TEST Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test.
7 BATTERY CHARGING
It is essential that a suitably ventilated defined area exists in each dealership / retailer for battery charging.
CAUTION: It is very important that when charging batteries using the traction charger or other stand-alone chargers that
the charger is set for the correct type of battery before charging commences. If the wrong switch is selected the result would
be a battery that is not charged fully and / or overheating can occur. Follow the manufacturers operating instructions.
Batteries MUST BE tested and if necessary charged every 30 days and charged after 90 days irrespective of any test. It is
recommended that dealers / retailers always have fully charged batteries ready for use.
CAUTION: Do not charge AGM batteries with voltages over 14.8 Volts as this will damage the battery.
A designated controlled area must be allocated for scrap batteries and clearly controlled as such.
To bring a discharged but serviceable battery back to a fully charged condition proceed as follows:
Check and if necessary top-up the battery electrolyte level. (Flooded maintainable batteries only)
Charge the battery using a JLR approved charger as detailed in the approved equipment document following the
manufacturers operating instructions.
NOTE: When using the Midtronics Diagnostic Charger, automatic mode must always be used. After charging and analysis,
the charger may display ‘Top-Off Charging’, Hit STOP To End. Do not stop charging until the current falls to 5A or less,
otherwise the battery will not be fully charged.
Following charging, a post charge battery condition test must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in the
Determining Battery Condition section (Section 6) of this procedure.
document.
8 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
If it is determined that a battery requires replacement, always refer to the appropriate section of the workshop manual for
instructions on removing and installing the battery from the vehicle.
On in service vehicles fitted with a Battery Monitoring System (BMS), the BMS control module must be reset following the
installation of a new battery. The BMS control module reset procedure must be performed using an approved diagnostic
system.
9 CONFIRMING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

WARNINGS:
BEFORE CHECKING AND TOPPING-UP THE BATTERY ELECTROLYTE, REFER TO THE HEALTH AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION.
AGM TECHNOLOGY BATTERIES ARE FULLY SEALED FOR LIFE AND NO ATTEMPT SHOULD BE MADE TO CHECK OR TOP UP
THE ELECTROLYTE LEVEL.
On certain types of battery the electrolyte level may need to be checked.
Make sure the battery is of a type suitable for topping up. These types of batteries will have cell plugs visible on the
top face of the battery or a removable access panel to allow access to the cells.
On batteries with a clear or opaque case and level marks, check the electrolyte level by visual inspection of the
maximum level indicator mark on the battery casing indicating adequate level above the battery separators.
On batteries with black cases, remove the cell plugs or access panel and ensure the electrolyte level is level with the
indicator in the cell hole. A flashlight may be required to see the electrolyte level on this type of battery.
If the electrolyte level is low, top-up using distilled water.
NOTE: Maintenance free and Valve Regulated (AGM) batteries are sealed and therefore cannot be topped up.
CAUTION: DO NOT overfill.

Battery and Charging System - General Information - Quiescent Drain
VEHICLE QUIESCENT CURRENT TESTING

On vehicles fitted with a Battery Monitoring System (BMS), the diagnostic routine for quiescent drain testing in the approved
Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system should be utilized.
If a customer complains of a vehicle battery that discharges continuously or when left for a prolonged period of time, it is
recommended that a quiescent drain test is performed as described below.
The battery drain should be measured using the approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system or a Digital Multi-Meter
(DVOM). A procedure for quiescent drain measurement using the diagnostic system is available in the Diagnosis and Testing
section of the Workshop Manual. The vehicle should be in the locked/armed state (for example vehicle alarm fully armed), all
doors, engine and luggage compartment lids are open and latched (so as to appear closed from an electrical point of view).
The test should take place after the vehicle has entered shutdown mode. The time taken for this to occur after the ignition is
switched off varies according to model (Refer to the Topix On line resource for details).
When the vehicle is armed, the effect of the security system Light Emitting Diode (LED) flashing is to cause a pulsation in the
measured current drain. In this case, either the average current should be taken (using a Digital Multi- Meter (DVOM) with an
averaging system) or the current reading taken, ignoring the brief high current peaks.
EQUIPMENT
Approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system with current probeOR Digital Multi-Meter (DVOM) with current probe.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
Using an Approved Jaguar or Land Rover Diagnostic System.
1. Switch off all electrical loads and ensure that the ignition is off
2. Connect the current probe to the approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system
3. Calibrate the probe
4. Install a clamp around the battery lead/junction box lead
5. Go to the Quiescent Current Testing section in this procedure
Using a digital multimeter
Do not use an in-line DVOM to measure the quiescent drain on vehicles fitted with an electronic throttle (for example XK 2006
onwards). The current exceeds the maximum amount the fuse in the DVOM is capable of handling.
1. Switch off all electrical loads and ensure that the ignition is off
2. Connect the current probe to the digital multmeter
3. Calibrate the probe
4. Install a clamp around the battery lead/junction box lead
5. Go to the Quiescent Current Testing section in this procedure
QUIESCENT CURRENT TESTING

1. Switch ignition to ‘on’ or select ignition mode in keyless vehicles and switch to ‘off’ (do not crank)
2. Remove key from ignition switch (if equipped)
3. Open and latch all doors, hood and luggage compartment lid
4. Lock the vehicle using the remote function on the remote handset. (Single lock only to avoid volumetric alarm arming)
5. Remove any other potential electrical drains such as accessories plugged into accessory sockets
6. Record the amperage readings after the shutdown period referenced in the Topix on line resource for details. Note all
cars from 10MY onwards and XK from 07MY and XF from 08MY should be less than 30mA after 30 minutes
7. Record the final reading on the battery report form
The preferred method of testing following an excessive current consumption figure is to use a current probe around individual
junction box leads to the various suspected circuits to identify a potential cause. This is in preference to the old method of
removing fuses for the following reasons:
The drain may be caused by a module remaining active and preventing the quiescent drain from reducing to normal
levels
The drain may be caused by a relay winding that is activated. Pulling the fuse can allow this to ‘reset’ and the drain will
be lost and go un-diagnosed
QUIESCENT DRAIN - TYPICAL VALUES
NOTE: The quiescent drain after the initial shutdown period should not exceed the value shown in the table.
Jaguar Quiescent Drain Values

MODEL SHUT DOWN PERIOD (minutes) TYPICAL VALUES BATTERY DRAIN (mA)
XJS 3.2 60 <30
Sovereign 3.2 60 <37.3
MODEL SHUT DOWN PERIOD (minutes) TYPICAL VALUES BATTERY DRAIN (mA)
XJ6 4.0 60 <38.6
XJS 60 <43.9
XJ6 (X300) (1995MY) 60 <43
XJ8 (X300) 60 <30
XK8 (X100) 60 <30
S-Type (X200) 60 <30
X-Type (X400) 30 <30
XJ6 (X350) 40 <30
XJ8 (X350) 40 <30
XK (X150) - From 2006MY <20 (after lock/arm condition) ² <30
33 (unlocked) <30
XF (X250) - From 2008MY <20 (after lock/arm condition) ² <30
33 (unlocked) <30
XF (X250) - From 2013MY <10 (after lock/arm condition) ² <25
XF SportBrake (X250) - From 2013MY <10 (after lock/arm condition) ² <25
<20 (unlocked) <25
XJ (X351) - From 2010MY - 2012MY 10 (afterlock/arm condition) ² <20
30 (unlocked) <20
XJ (X351) - From 2013MY 10 (afterlock/arm condition) ² <20
<20 (unlocked) <20
F - Type (X152) - From 2013MY 10 (afterlock/arm condition) ² <20
<20 (unlocked) <20
NOTE:
1. The total current drain will be higher if certain approved accessories are fitted (for example: tracker, trailer module, etc.)
2. Applies to vehicles without Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Vehicle shut-down period with TPMS is approximately 15
minutes.
www.JagDocs.com
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Battery Report Form –
In Service Batteries Only
NOTE: Fields marked with * are mandatory and must be completed.
General Information
*Vehicle Identification Number (VIN): Vehicle Engine type:
Model:
*Mileage: *Repair -
Date:
Customer Questions
*1: What is the customer’s reason for dealer visit? (tick symptoms as Non crank Crank but non Warning Other:
appropriate) start message
*2: How long was the vehicle left prior to issue. *
*3: How was the car left (Locked/unlocked) *
*4: How did you access to the vehicle Key fob Manual key Handle pull
*5: Has the vehicle required assistance for battery issues previously? Yes No
*6: Is the vehicle used? (tick symptoms as appropriate) Daily Every other Weekly Less than
day weekly
*7: Average journey length *
*8: How many starts do you typically do in a day *
*9: Did the customer see any instrument pack warnings prior to the *
issue?
*10: Have any of the features been used Radio Power point CD DVD USB or IPOD TV Rear seat
without the engine running in the last 3 days accessory connection entertainment
(if fitted?)
11: Customer comments:- Please add any additional comments that *
are relevant.
Diagnostics (Battery Testing) - - - -
1: Loose battery clamps Yes * No *
2: Loose hold down clamps Yes * No *
3: Corroded terminal posts Yes * No *
4: Physical damage/leaks Yes No *
5: Low electrolyte (Flooded batteries only) Yes * No *
6: Battery Date Code *
7: FEAD belt tension OK * Not OK *
8: Quiescent Drain mA *
9: Vent tube correctly installed Yes * No *
10: Number of Times Battery Charged: *
10: Vent tube correctly installed Yes No
11: Remove the Surface (414-00 battery care requirements) Yes * No *
12: Battery voltage *
13: Midtronics test code before charging (EXP-1080) *
13a: If Midtronics indicates that the battery needs re-charging, charge *
the battery following instructions on the recommended battery charger
13b: Midtronics test code after charge *
13c: Midtronics test code result after charge *
13d: If "good and re-charge" charge the battery following instructions *
on the recommended battery charger
13e: If "charge and re-test" for both before and after the charge *
renew the battery
13f: Only renew the battery if "renew battery", "bad cell" or charge *
and re-test has been displayed twice.
Technician Comments:- Please add any additional comments that are relevant.
*
*
*
*
*
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Charging System

REFER to: Battery (414-01, Diagnosis and Testing).
Battery, Mounting and Cables -
Battery Specification
Vehicle Specification
Europe
Vehicles fitted without electrical Vehicles fitted with electrical Rest of
Engine Specification optional extras optional extras world
Vehicles fitted with 2.7L diesel 90 Ahr 90 Ahr 90
engine Ahr
Vehicles fitted with 3.0L petrol 80 Ahr 90 Ahr 90
engine Ahr
Vehicles fitted with 4.2L petrol 90 Ahr 90 Ahr 90
engine Ahr
Battery cold cranking Specification
Item Specification
90 Ahr 800 Amps
80 Ahr 700 Amps
Battery positive cable to rear junction box retaining nut 12 9 -
Battery monitoring system retaining nut to battery positive terminal 5 - 44
Battery ground cable to body retaining bolt 12 9 -
Battery tray 10 - 89
Battery cable terminal 6 - 53
Battery clamp bolt 8 - 71
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery and Cables - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - SINGLE BATTERY VEHICLES
Item Description
5 BMS (battery monitoring system)
6 Battery
8 Generator
COMPONENT LOCATION - DUAL BATTERY VEHICLES
Item Description
1 CJB Generator
2 BJB Starter motor
3 GWM (gateway module)
4 DBM (dual battery module)
5 RJB Duel battery module
6 Battery to BJB terminal
7 BMS (battery monitoring system) Duel battery fuse box
8 Primary battery
9 Transit relay
10 Secondary battery
11 DBJB (dual battery junction box)
12 ECM
13 Generator
14 EJB
www.JagDocs.com
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery and Cables - Overview
OVERVIEW
Single Battery Vehicles
Mounted on the battery negative terminal is a BMS (battery monitoring system) module. The BMS module is integral with the
battery negative cable and is controlled by the ECM (engine control module).
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the battery monitoring system module, always use a suitable body ground point rather than
the battery negative terminal when connecting a slave power supply to the vehicle.
If a new battery is fitted to the vehicle, the BMS module will require re-calibrating using the Jaguar approved diagnostic
system.
Fitted on the battery positive terminal is a transit relay. The transit relay must be removed from the vehicle during the
Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI). For additional information, refer to the PDI Manual.
The vehicle battery provides power to the BJB (battery junction box). The BJB contains 3 megafuses, delivering power to the
RJB (rear junction box), the CJB (central junction box) and the EJB (engine junction box). In addition to containing fuses and
relays, the RJB and RJB contain software to control a number of vehicle systems. These functions are covered in the
appropriate sections of this manual.
Dual Battery System Vehicles - TD42.2L Engine Variants Only
Two batteries are fitted to accommodate the dual battery system used for the Stop/Start system.
A primary battery is located in the luggage compartment floor in a plastic molded tray and secured with a metal rod. The
secondary battery is located in the DBJB (dual battery junction box).
The primary battery is a 90Ahr, 850A CCA AGM Battery.

The secondary battery is a 14Ahr, 200A CCA Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) Battery.
A BMS (battery monitoring system) control module is mounted on the primary battery negative terminal. The BMS control
module is integral with the battery negative cable and is controlled by the GWM (gateway module).
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the BMS control module, always use the ground (negative (-)) terminal stud point on the
right side top mount. Never connect directly to the primary battery negative terminal when connecting a slave power supply to
the vehicle, the BMS control module can be damaged.
If a new primary battery is fitted to the vehicle, the BMS control module will require re-calibrating using a Jaguar approved
diagnostic system.
When the vehicle leaves the factory, a transit relay is fitted to the battery positive terminal. The transit relay is connected to
the CJB which limits the electrical functions to essential items only, to reduce loads on the primary battery. The transit relay
must be removed from the vehicle during the PDI (Pre-Delivery Inspection). For additional information, refer to the PDI.
The primary battery provides power to the BJB. The BJB contains three megafuses, delivering power to the RJB, the EJB and
the starter motor and generator. In addition to containing fuses and relays, the RJB and CJB contain software to control a
number of vehicle systems. These functions are covered in the appropriate sections of this manual.
A jump start terminal is located adjacent to the EJB. A cover protects the terminal when not in use. If jump starting is
required, the cover must be removed and the positive (+) jump lead attached securely. The negative (-) jump lead is attached
to a stud located on the right side top mount in the engine compartment. The cover must be fitted to the positive terminal
when not in use.
Dual Battery System
The dual battery system is used on vehicles with the stop/start system. The dual battery system prevents the vehicle
electrical systems being subjected to undesirably low voltages during repeated engine restarts. If the electrical systems are
subject to low voltages the customer may notice degraded performance of components and systems and incorrect fault DTC
(diagnostic trouble code)'s may be stored.
The dual battery system isolates all electrical components and systems sensitive to low supply voltage from the primary
battery while an engine start is in progress, and supplies them from the secondary battery. Without the dual battery system,
the electrical power required by the TSS (Tandem Solenoid Starter) motor to crank the engine for each start would cause a
voltage drop across the entire vehicle electrical network, and cause control modules to function incorrectly and in some cases
reset and/or record DTC's.
If the dual battery system is unable to prevent electrical supplies to the vehicle systems being subjected to low voltage levels
during engine stop/start operations, due to the condition of the primary and/or secondary batteries or a system fault, the
stop/start feature is disabled.
The dual battery system comprises the following components:
Dual Battery Module (DBM).
Dual Battery Junction Box (DBJB).
Gateway Module (GWM).
Primary battery.
Secondary battery.
The GWM hosts most of the software required to control the dual battery system and components. The GWM monitors the
components and can store fault related DTC's.
The GWM also controls the charging system software in conjunction with the ECM, RJB, CJB and ABS (anti-lock brake system)
control module via the high speed and medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus. The GWM software will monitor the
status of the stop/start system and determine when a stop/start event can occur. It can also intervene to maintain vehicle
systems by keeping the engine running or initiating a restart due to, for example, climate control system requirements or
request for restart from the ECM. A brake pressure signal is received from the ABS control module which will indicate to the
GWM that an engine restart is required from driver operation of the foot brake.
The GWM contains the intelligent power management system and the BMS software. Monitoring of the primary battery
condition for stop/start is controlled by the GWM and the BMS control module.
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery and Cables - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired, D = High speed CAN (Controller Area Network) bus, N = Medium speed CAN bus, O = LIN (Local
Interconnect Network) bus.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - SINGLE BATTERY VEHICLES
Item Description
1 Battery Monitoring System (BMS) control module
2 Battery
3 Battery junction box (BJB)
4 Generator
6 Instrument Cluster
7 Rear Junction Box (RJB)
CONTROL DIAGRAM - DUAL BATTERY SYSTEM VEHICLES
Item Description
1 Battery Monitoring System (BMS) control module
2 Tandem Solenoid Starter (TSS) motor
3 Generator
4 Engine Junction Box (EJB)
5 Engine Control Module (ECM)
6 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control module
7 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
8 Central Junction Box (CJB)
9 Gateway Module (GWM)
10 Dual Battery Module (DBM)
11 Secondary battery
12 Dual Battery Junction Box (DBJB)
13 Rear Junction Box (RJB)
14 Megafuse
15 Battery Junction box (BJB)
16 Primary battery
System Operation
BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM - TD4 2.2L DIESEL VEHICLES ONLY
Periodically the battery monitoring system module will instigate a self-calibration routine. To self calibrate, the battery
monitoring system first charges the battery to its full condition.
NOTE: If the vehicle is only driven for short periods the charging process could take a number of days to complete.
Once the battery is fully charged, the battery monitoring system will discharge the battery to approximately 75% of its full
state of charge, but never lower than 12.2 V. The time taken to complete this part of the routine is dependent on the electrical
load on the vehicle.
When the second part of the routine has been successfully completed, the battery monitoring system will return the battery to
its optimum level of charge. The optimum level of charge will be between 12.6 V and 15 V, depending on battery condition,
temperature and loading.
The battery monitoring system module also monitors the battery condition with the engine switched off. If a low voltage
condition is detected the module can request the infotainment system is switched off to protect battery voltage. Once the
infotainment system has been switched off, the vehicle must be run for at least 5 minutes to charge the battery before the
infotainment system can be operated with the engine switched off.
BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM - SINGLE AND DUAL BATTERY SYSTEM VEHICLES

When the ignition is off (power mode 0), the BMS control module records the primary battery state of charge and begins to
monitor the battery condition from this point.
If the battery state of charge falls by 7%, the BMS control module will monitor the primary battery for 5 minutes. If after the 5
minute monitoring period, the primary battery charge has continued to fall due to the quiescent drain current being too high,
the BMS control module will determine that some control modules are still 'awake'. The BMS control module sends a shutdown
message on the LIN (local interconnect network) bus to the GWM (Gateway Module). The GWM sends a CAN (controller area
network) bus message on both the medium and high speed networks to all control modules, requesting them to shutdown.
The BMS control module will monitor the primary battery state of charge for a further 5 minutes and determine if the primary
battery state of charge is still dropping. If a quiescent drain current continues, the primary battery state of charge will
continue to drop. If the state of charge falls to 12% of the initial monitoring value, the BMS control module determines that
one or more control modules are still awake and a failure to respond to the shutdown request may indicate an error state
within the control module(s).
BMS Low Battery Warning and Energy Management Messages
The BMS continuously monitors the condition of the primary vehicle battery. If excessive battery discharge occurs, the system
will begin to shut down non-essential electrical systems in order to protect the battery.
If the BMS calculates that battery condition is not within set parameters, there are 3 messages that can be displayed, 2 on the
touch screen and 1 on the message center. These inform the user that the battery is either at a low level of charge or the
engine-off power consumption limit has been exceeded.
Low Battery - Please switch engine on or system will shutdown in 3 minutes: is displayed as a Warning on the
touch screen if the engine is not running. This indicates that the battery has fallen below a predefined threshold. As
soon as the battery is charged back above this threshold then the message will be removed.
Low Battery - Please start your engine is displayed on the message center if the engine is not running. This indicates
that the battery has fallen below a predefined threshold. As soon as the battery is charged back above this threshold
then the message will be removed or it can be manually removed by pressing 'OK'.
System will shut down in 3 minutes: is displayed as an Energy management on the touch screen if the engine is not
running, and system features are causing excessive battery discharge. After 3 minutes the BMS will begin shutting
down vehicle systems. Normal system operation will resume when the engine is started.
This is based on a percentage of battery capacity available for the customer to use with the engine off. The percentage can
change based upon several factors.
Once triggered, the resetting of this message will not occur until the vehicle is driven for 10 minutes with the engine running
(to allow the battery to recoup any lost charge). However, if the engine is run for less than 10 minutes, the message will only
be displayed after an additional 5 minutes with the ignition on but engine off.
BMS Control Module Self Calibration
Periodically the BMS control module will instigate a self-calibration routine. To self calibrate, the battery monitoring system
www.JagDocs.com
first charges the battery to its full condition.
NOTE: If the vehicle is only driven for short periods the charging process could take a number of days to complete.
Once the battery is fully charged, the BMS control module will discharge the battery to approximately 75% of its full state of
charge, but never lower than 12.2 V. The time taken to complete this part of the routine is dependent on the electrical load on
the vehicle.
When the second part of the routine has been successfully completed, the BMS control module will return the battery to its
optimum level of charge. The optimum level of charge will be between 12.6 V and 15 V, depending on battery condition,
temperature and loading.
The BMS control module also monitors the primary battery condition with the engine switched off. If a low voltage condition is
detected the BMS control module can request the infotainment system is switched off to protect battery voltage.
DUAL BATTERY SYSTEM - DUAL BATTERY SYSTEM VEHICLES ONLY

The dual battery system prevents electrical loads on the vehicle being subjected to low voltage levels during an ECO
(stop/start system) engine start. Low voltage can occur due to the power demand of the TSS (Tandem Solenoid Starter) motor
and could result in degraded performance of components and/or system control modules. The GWM contains the software to
control the dual battery system and electrical load management system to ensure that ECO engine starts do not affect other
vehicle systems.
The dual battery system isolates all power supply sensitive electrical components which may be affected by low voltage from
the primary battery due TSS motor operation, and supplies them with power from the secondary battery when an engine start
is in progress.
The DBJB (Dual Battery Junction Box) contains two contactors, which operate to change the power supply into two separate
circuits when an ECO engine start is required. Sensitive electrical components are supplied from the secondary battery. The
primary battery power is used exclusively to supply the TSS motor and maintain essential power loads to the engine
management system required for engine starting. The contactors are operated by the DBM (Dual Battery Module) on receipt of
LIN bus information from the GWM.
Dual Battery System - Normal State (Engine Running)
Item Description
2 Primary battery
3 Power and engine management system loads
4 Field Effect Transistor (FET)
5 Contactor 1 - closed
6 Contactor 2 - open
7 Secondary battery
8 Sensitive loads
9 Generator
NOTE: A = Primary battery supply
When the engine is running, the electrical systems are powered from the primary battery and the generator. The GWM and the
DBM communicate via the LIN bus and the DBM controls the DBJB contactors to isolate the secondary battery from the system
by opening its contactor.
The GWM monitors the state of charge of both the primary and secondary batteries to ensure that sufficient voltage is
available for the next ECO engine start. The GWM can apply charging to the secondary battery via the DBM and the DBJB if
required.
Dual Battery system - ECO Engine Stop/Start State
Item Description
2 Primary battery
3 Power and engine management system loads
4 Field Effect Transistor (FET)
5 Contactor 1 - open
6 Contactor 2 - closed
7 Secondary battery
8 Sensitive loads
9 Generator
NOTE: A = Primary battery supply, B = Secondary battery supply
When an ECO engine start is required, the DBJB must change the battery supply via the two contactors before the TSS motor
is operated to crank the engine. The GWM is connected to the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) control module via the high speed
CAN bus. With the vehicle stationary and the engine off after an ECO engine stop, when the driver releases the brake pedal
the ABS control module senses the reduction in brake pressure. This change of brake pressure state is sent as a high speed
CAN message which is received by the GWM and the ECM. The GWM reacts within 105ms to instruct the DBM via the LIN bus
to operate the two contactors in the DBJB to supply the sensitive loads from the secondary battery and supply the TSS motor
direct from the primary battery.
When the engine is running and the generator is supplying power to the vehicle systems, the GWM again instructs the DBM to
operate the two contactors in the DBJB to supply all vehicle systems from the primary battery and the generator and to isolate
the secondary battery.
Secondary Battery Charging
The DBM also controls the charging of the secondary battery. The GWM contains electrical load management software and
monitors both batteries for their state of charge. The primary battery is monitored by the BMS control module which is
connected to the DBM via the LIN bus. The DBM communicates the primary battery condition to the GWM via a LIN bus
connection. The GWM sends a signal to the DBM via the LIN bus to instruct it to apply charging from the generator to the
secondary battery when required. The contactor 2 is closed by the DBJB to complete the secondary battery circuit, and the
generator output is applied to the secondary battery to charge it.
The generator output is controlled by the GWM which monitors and controls the electrical load management system. The
generator is connected to the GWM by a LIN bus allowing the GWM to control the output of the generator to maintain electrical
system load requirements and battery charging.
Electrical Load Management
The electrical load management is controlled by the GWM and the BMS control module.
The GWM will monitor the vehicle system power loads before and during an ECO engine stop.
Before an ECO engine stop, the GWM will transmit a signal to system control modules on the CAN bus to request a power save
on all electrical loads and set a minimum electrical value override. The GWM monitors the vehicle electrical loads and will
inhibit a ECO engine stop until the load current is at a value low enough to be supported by the secondary battery.
If the electrical loads cannot be reduced sufficiently, the GWM will inhibit the ECO engine stop.
When the engine is stopped after an ECO engine stop, the GWM will continue to monitor the primary battery state of charge.
If the primary or secondary battery voltage falls below 11.0V, a level which will result in degraded starting performance or
possible primary battery damage, the GWM will initiate an engine start.
System Inhibits
The ECO stop/start system is inhibited if the dual battery system is not be capable of preventing electrical loads on the
vehicle being subject to unacceptably low voltage levels during ECO stop/start operations due to a fault.
ECO stop/start inhibit monitoring of the primary battery is performed by the BMS control module. If the primary battery voltage
is too low to support an ECO stop/start, then the BMS control module will send a message to the GWM on the LIN bus to
suspend ECO stop/start.
The GWM monitors the secondary battery and the dual battery system components. Any fault found will cause the GWM to
inhibit ECO stop/start and the GWM will record a DTC (diagnostic trouble code).
Fault Diagnosis
The GWM performs passive and active diagnostics on the dual battery system to determine the status of the system
components.
Passive diagnostics can detect faults in the DBJB and can check for stuck open or closed contactors and failure of DBM
contactor command signals.
Active diagnostics is a routine to test the capability of the contactors to respond to open or close command signals sent from
the GWM to the DBM. This routine also checks the FET's (Field Effect Transistors) activate as required. (Refer to Dual Battery
Junction Box below for description of FET operation)
The GWM will also check the dual battery system components for faults in a controlled environment when the generator is
providing a charging output. This will ensure that the detection of a fault will not result in sensitive electrical loads being
subjected to low voltage which may occur during an ECO stop/start with a fault present.
The GWM will illuminate the charge warning indicator in the instrument cluster if fault is detected in the dual battery system
which will result in a degraded power supply.
If a fault is detected the GWM transmits a CAN message to inhibit ECO stop/start operation. In some cases it will record a
DTC, display a warning message in instrument cluster and also illuminate charge warning indicator.
PRIMARY BATTERY - ALL VEHICLES
The primary battery is located in a plastic tray under the luggage compartment floor in the right side of the luggage
compartment, adjacent to the spare wheel. The battery is vented via a tube which is connected with a T piece to the vent from
the secondary battery (if fitted) and passes through a grommet in the floorpan.
On new vehicles the primary battery positive terminal is fitted with a transit relay. The transit relay must removed using the
correct process detailed in the Pre Delivery Inspection (PDI) manual.
The battery negative terminal is fitted with a BMS control module. The control module is integral with the battery negative
cable and communicates with the GWM via a LIN bus connection. The battery condition information is passed to the GWM
which controls the generator output accordingly.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the BMS control module, always use the body ground point in the engine compartment and
not the battery negative terminal when connecting a slave power supply.
Failure to use the recommended ground point will lead to the setting of a DTC. Incorrect information of battery condition will
be retained by the BMS control module due to the unmonitored current flow into the battery. The system will however,
recognize and compensate for the change in battery status after a period of time.
If a new battery is fitted, the BMS control module will require re-calibration using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
Replacement of the BMS control module requires no action as the control module will re-calibrate automatically.
SECONDARY BATTERY - DUAL BATTERY VEHICLES ONLY

The secondary battery is located in a tray on the next of the primary battery and is secured to the DBJB with a bracket. The
battery negative (-) terminal is connected via a cable to the vehicle body. The positive (+) terminal is connected by a cable to
the DBJB. The battery is vented via a tube which is connected with a T piece to the vent from the primary battery and passes
through a grommet in the floorpan.
The state of charge of the secondary battery is monitored by the Gateway Module (GWM).
BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM (BMS)
The BMS (battery monitoring system) control module is located on the primary battery negative (-) terminal. The module is
located on the battery post and is clamped to the post with a bolt and nut.
The primary battery negative ground cable is connected to the BMS control module and is attached to a ground stud on the
vehicle body.
The BMS control module is connected into the vehicle wiring harness via a multiplug. The BMS control module receives a 12V
power supply direct from the primary battery positive terminal. A LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection provides
communication between the BMS control module and the ECM for control and monitoring of the primary battery current drain
and state of charge.
The BMS control module measures battery current and voltage, which it communicates to ECM.
CAUTION: Due to the self-calibration routine, it is recommended that all power supply diagnostic testing is carried out
using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system rather than a digital multimeter.
The BMS control module is able to generate DTC (diagnostic trouble code)'s to help diagnose primary battery or generator
power supply issues. These DTC's can be read using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system. The Jaguar approved diagnostic
system can also be used to implement a primary battery and generator self test routine. For additional information, refer to
the Diagnosis and Testing section of the workshop manual.
If a fault is detected, the GWM (gateway module) will override the BMS control module.
The BMS control module DTC's can be used to help diagnose battery or generator power supply faults. The DTC's are stored in
GWM. The Jaguar approved diagnostic system has a process for an automated power supply diagnostic procedure. The
procedure provides a menu driven process to locate a fault in a logical sequence. The procedure uses the capability of the BMS
control module and generator LIN bus controlled functions to provide current flow information and will detect if the BMS control
module or generator are functioning correctly.
GATEWAY MODULE (GWM)
The GWM (gateway module) is located at the rear of the right wheel arch in the luggage compartment, adjacent to the DBM
(dual battery module). The GWM is attached to a bracket, which is attached to a second bracket secured to the vehicle body.
The GWM contains software to control the following functions:
• Determine condition of primary and secondary batteries

• Control the output from the generator using load management software
• Controls ECO stop/start using power management to inhibit unnecessary electrical loads
• Control the DBJB (dual battery junction box) via the DBM to enable the switching of the contactors.
The GWM communicates with other system modules on the high speed and medium speed CAN (controller area network)
buses.
The GWM communicates with the BMS (battery monitoring system) control module and the DBM via a LIN bus.
DUAL BATTERY MODULE (DBM)
The DBM (dual battery module) is located at the rear of the right wheel arch in the luggage compartment, adjacent to the
GWM (gateway module) and the RJB (rear junction box). The DBM is attached to a bracket, which is attached to a second
bracket secured to the vehicle body.
The DBM is connected by two hardwired connections to the DBJB (dual battery junction box). The DBM uses these two
connections to apply battery voltage to the contactor coils in the DBJB. A LIN bus connection from the GWM passes contactor
operation signals to the DBM which operates the contactors as applicable.
The GWM will also instruct the DBM to apply charging to the secondary battery via a LIN bus message. The GWM instructs the
DBM of the charging current required for the secondary battery and the DBM applies the requested stabilized current to the
secondary battery via a dedicated connection direct to the secondary battery.
The DBM diagnoses the coils of the contactors and will report a fault via the LIN bus to the GWM.
The DBM receives a fused power supply from the RJB.
www.JagDocs.com
DUAL BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (DBJB)
The DBJB (dual battery junction box) is located adjacent to the primary battery. The DBJB houses two contactors which are
controlled by the DBM (dual battery module) and the GWM (gateway module) for switching power supplies during ECO
stop/starts and also for charging the secondary battery.
FET's (field effect transistor's) are also located in the DBJB. The FET's are connected in parallel with contactor 1 and allow the
primary battery power to flow to the sensitive loads during the contactor switching process to ensure there is no interruption in
power supply to the sensitive loads. The FET's also act as a secondary path to allow power to be supplied to the sensitive
loads should a fault occur and the contactor 1 becomes stuck open. The FET's will allow a current of up to 200A to flow through
them.
The DBJB receives a battery supply direct from the primary battery to contactor 1 and a battery supply from the secondary
battery to contactor 2. Two connections from the DBM are used for contactor coil control. A third connection from the DBM
applies a stabilized voltage to the secondary battery for charging when requested by the GWM.
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery
For a detailed description of the battery system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: Battery and Cables (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Description and Operation).
NOTES:
into account.
Visual Inspection
Generator Generator
Drive belt Battery
Drive belt tensioner Battery connections
Generator pulley Starter motor
Check the security of the generator fixings Harnesses and connectors
Fuses
Charge warning lamp function
the next step.
Symptom Chart
Battery power to vehicle High resistance between battery terminals and GO to Pinpoint Test
interrupted clamps A.
Midtronics EXP-1080 User Guide

Carry out the following: -
Surface Voltage Removal Process
A vehicle which has had its battery charged or been driven in a 24 hour period before the test, must have its surface charge
removed
1. Turn on the ignition but do not start the vehicle
2. Switch on the headlamps on high beam for a minimum 3 minutes
3. Switch off the headlamps
4. Wait a minimum of 5 minutes before recording test results for any battery measurements
PINPOINT TEST A : VOLTAGE DROP

A1: GROUND CIRCUIT
NOTE: This test checks for high resistance between the battery terminal and the battery clamp
1 Start the engine, turn on the following:
(1) ) Air conditioning
(2) ) Blower fan on full speed
(3) Headlights on main beam
(4) Heated screen - rear
(5) Heated screen - front (if installed)
(6) Heated seats (if installed)
2 Connect the multimeter between the battery negative terminal

and the battery clamp as shown in picture below (do not
disconnect the battery at this stage)
3 Set the multimeter to read DC voltage and record the reading
Is reading equal to or below 0.1 volts?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Switch all electrical loads and engine off, return the vehicle to
an ignition off condition. Disconnect the battery negative
clamp, clean clamp and terminal then reconnect and repeat test
GO to A1.
A2: POWER CIRCUIT
NOTE: This test checks for high resistance between the battery terminal and the battery clamp
1 Start the engine, turn on the following:
(1) ) Air conditioning
(2) ) Blower fan on full speed
(3) Headlights on main beam
(4) Heated screen - rear
(5) Heated screen - front (if installed)
(6) Heated seats (if installed)
2 Connect the multimeter between the battery positive terminal

and the battery clamp as shown in picture below (do not
disconnect the battery at this stage)
3 Set the multimeter to read DC voltage and record the reading
Is reading equal to or below 0.1 volts?
Yes
Carry out midtronics battery test procedure
No
Switch all electrical loads and engine off, return the vehicle to
an ignition off condition. Disconnect the battery power clamp,
clean clamp and terminal then reconnect and repeat test GO to
A2.
Reference Description
1 LCD screen with main menu
2 Control panel (key board and power button)
3 Positive and negative fly leads
4 Fly leads connection
6 Infra-red sensor (data transfer for printer)
7 Amp hour
8 Battery rating (CCA)
9 Rating units
10 Battery type
NOTE: Flooded batteries does not have AGM on the label
The following steps must be carried out to ensure correct operation of the EXP-1080 during the battery test procedure
Checks Action
Battery fluid leakage, check for battery fluid leaks or damage
to the battery casing NOTE: If visible damage to the case is evident do not
return battery under warranty
Replace the battery if there is any battery fluid leaks evident

Battery vent pipe routing Check for routing, ensure there are no kinks
EXP-1080 fly lead, condition of clamps Clean or replace as required
EXP-1080 fly lead connection Confirm secure connection
NOTE: The Midtronics EXP-1080 is suitable for testing flooded and absorbed glass mat (AGM) type batteries including
Primary and Secondary batteries
Midtronics Battery Test Procedure
This midtronics battery test procedure will confirm the serviceability of the battery
1. Connect the fly-lead to the midtronics EXP-1080

2. Connect the fly-leads to the battery terminals
- Black lead to negative terminal
- Red lead to positive terminal
- Confirm the connections are secure
3. The EXP-1080 will power on automatically when connected to a battery, screen below is displayed
NOTE: MAIN MENU SCREEN
4. Main Menu. Select Battery test and press SELECT
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: BATTERY LOCATION
5. Battery Location
Select Next
6. VIN. When IN VEHICLE selected, enter the last six of the VIN using the key pad
NOTE: BATTERY RATING
7. Battery Type. Select the correct battery type (Regular or AGM)
NOTE: ALL AGM batteries are marked (Refer to battery label) Flooded batteries have no reference to being Flooded.
Select Next
NOTE: BATTERY TYPE
8. Battery Units. Select the correct battery rating from the battery label in brackets (number 9). Scroll using the arrow
on the Midtronics panel and select Next
NOTE: UNITS
NOTE: BATTERY RATING
9. BATTERY RATING. Scroll using the arrow keys on the midtronics panel, select the correct CCA rating (For CCA refer
to battery label)
Select Next
NOTES:
TEMPERATURE
Ensure that the temperature sensor does not touch any part of the battery or vehicle, this will cause damage not be
covered under the midtronics warranty and will require the unit to be returned to a service center
10. Temperature. Aim the temperature sensor towards the battery casing (Maintain distance of 5cm)
Select Next
NOTE: TESTING
11. Testing. The screen displays clock hand's rotating, the EXP-1080 will automatically advance when test has
completed
NOTES:
SURFACE CHARGE
If there is no surface charge this step will not show. Go to next step
11a. Surface Charge. This next step is an additional surface charge test required if the voltage is above 12.4v with a
low CCA measured. Ensure the ignition state is on. Switch on the headlights (high beam) until EXP-1080 shows Turn
off headlights then return ignition state to off
NOTES:
BATTERY CHARGE
If the state of charge is sufficient this step will not show. Go to next step
11b. Battery Charge. Select Before Charging if battery has not been on a recommended mains charger for the
recommended time shown on the results screen
Select After Charging if battery has been on a recommended mains charger for the recommended time shown on the
results screen
NOTE: For a warranty claim you must supply both before and after test codes in the technical comments box when
submitting the claim
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: DEEP SCAN TECHNOLOGY
This may not pop up on the screen and is automated program within the unit
NOTE: This test is automated and will show if required. Go to next step
12. Testing. The EXP-1080 will carry out the deep scan test, then automatically advance when test has completed
Number Description
1 Battery test result
2 CCA (Measured capacity rating)
3 Voltage
4 CCA (Manually entered)
5 Temperature
6 State Of Charge (SOC)
NOTE: RESULTS
Test Result Action

GOOD BATTERY Test complete no action required
CHARGE AND RE-TEST Charge battery using a recommended mains charger (minimum 50 amp) until charging complete.
Retest. If the result is the same replace battery
REPLACE BATTERY / BAD Replace battery. Do Not Recharge
CELL BATTERY
UNABLE TO COMPLETE TEST Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test
NOTES:
TEST CODE
Battery test code, must be given if a battery, starter motor or generator is exchanged under warranty
12b. If test result equals "Charge and Re-test" scroll down using the arrow keys to Time To Charge screen and follow
the 50AMP charge time for all vehicles apart from Defender which can be charged with a 25Amp charger
Results. From the result display use the arrow keys on the control panel to view the test code
The test code must be quoted with every battery claim under warranty
Flooded Battery Care Point
If the vehicle is equipped with a flooded battery, ensure the replacement battery is a flooded battery of the same specification
(cold cranking amperage (CCA) / amp hour rating (Ah)) as the original battery
Under no circumstances should you fit a flooded battery to a vehicle that originally had an AGM battery, unless formally
instructed by Jaguar/Land Rover
AGM Battery Care Point
If the vehicle is equipped with an absorbed glass mat (AGM) battery, ensure the replacement battery is a AGM battery of the
same specification (cold cranking amperage (CCA) / amp hour rating (Ah)) as the original battery, unless formally instructed by
Jaguar/Land Rover
DTC Index
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery Disconnect and Connect
General Procedures
Disconnect
1. Refer to: Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety Precautions
2. Obtain and record the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
3.
4. NOTE: Where fitted.
5. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the wiring

harness.
6.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the battery negative cable

does not move when detaching the negative terminal from
the battery.
Connect

to the body retaining bolt is not loose and fully tightened.
Torque: 9 Nm
2. Torque: 6 Nm
3.
4. NOTE: Make sure that both the positive and negative battery
terminals are correctly located.
www.JagDocs.com
6. NOTE: This step is only necessary when installing a new

component.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, reset the battery

monitoring system.
7. Refer to: Door Window Motor Initialization (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, General Procedures).
8. Enter the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
9. Reset the clock to the correct time.
10. Start the engine and allow to idle until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.

Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery
Removal
1. Obtain and record the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
2.
4.
5. Torque: 6 Nm

does not move when detaching the negative terminal from
the battery.
7. Torque: 6 Nm
8.
9. Torque: 13 Nm
10.
Installation

to the body retaining bolt is not loose and fully tightened.
Torque: 9 Nm
2. NOTE: Make sure that both the positive and negative battery
terminals are correctly located.
3. NOTE: This step is only necessary when installing a new

component.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, reset the battery

monitoring system.
4. Refer to: Door Window Motor Initialization (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, General Procedures).
5. Enter the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
6. Reset the clock to the correct time.
7. Start the engine and allow to idle until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
www.JagDocs.com
Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -

Generator retaining bolts 47 35 -
Battery positive cable retaining nut 12 9 -
Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Generator -
Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Overview
OVERVIEW
On 5.0L V8 vehicles (naturally aspirated and supercharger), the charging system consists of a 150 Amp output generator and
regulator assembly. The generator and regulator assembly generates electrical power for the vehicle electrical system and
maintains the battery in a charged state.
When the engine is running the generator produces an alternating current, which is converted to a direct current internally. The
output from the generator is controlled by the voltage regulator (located inside the generator) and then supplied to the battery
through the main battery positive cable. The generator is mounted on the front right side of the engine and driven at
approximately 3 times engine speed by the accessory drive belt.
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN (local
interconnect network) bus
D
Item Description
1 Battery monitoring system module
2 Battery
4 Generator and regulator
System Operation
GENERAL
The output voltage required from the generator and regulator is calculated by the battery monitoring system. For additional
information refer to Battery, Mounting and Cables 414-01.
The battery monitoring system signals the calculated voltage to the ECM via the RJB and the instrument cluster. The ECM then
transmits the calculated voltage to the generator and regulator on the LIN bus connection.
The ECM will over-ride the voltage value requested by the battery monitoring system if it detects a fault in the generator and
regulator. The ECM also signals the instrument cluster to display a warning message if it detects a fault with the generator and
regulator. For additionalinformation refer to Instrument Cluster 413-01.
GENERATOR AND REGULATOR
The regulator provides a controlled variable voltage output from the generator. Two electrical terminals are provided on the
outer casing of the generator. One terminal supplies the DC (direct current) voltage output from the generator to the battery
positive terminal. The second terminal provides the LIN bus connection between the regulator and the ECM.
www.JagDocs.com
Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Generator V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
NOTES:
Installation).
4. Torque: 12 Nm
5.
Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Navigation
System Map Updates
Map Update Applicability - DVD/USB

Vehicle Pre - 10MY 10 MY 11 MY 12MY 13MY 14MY
XK DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD
F-Type - - - - - USB
XF DVD DVD DVD USB USB USB
XJ - USB USB USB USB USB
Freelander DVD DVD DVD DVD USB USB
Discovery 3 DVD - - - -
Discovery 4 - External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool USB USB USB
Range Rover Evoque - - - USB USB USB
Range Rover Sport (L320) DVD External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool USB USB USB
Range Rover Sport (L494) - - - - - USB
Range Rover (L322) DVD External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool - -
Range Rover (L405) - - - - USB USB
NOTE: For vehicles using SD card navigation updates refer to SD Card Navigation Updates (Asia Navigation) below.
Mapping Regions
Region Mapping Area
1 North America (USA, Canada and Mexico)
2 Western and Eastern Europe
3 Japan
4 Middle East (Bahrain, Jordan, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia and UAE
5 South Africa
6 South America (Brazil and Argentina)
7 Russia
8 Pacific (Australia and New Zealand)
9 South East Asia (Malaysia and Singapore)
DVD Map Updates
Vehicles equipped with the 'remote' navigation module are supplied with a DVD map update which is loaded into and left in
the navigation module. Map data is read directly from the DVD. This update can be carried out by the customer.
www.JagDocs.com
External HD Service Tool Map Updates
Discovery 4, Range Rover Sport and Range Rover vehicles, equipped with a HDD (hard disc drive) integrated into the touch
screen, are updated at point of service. Dealers are supplied with a set of master pack map update DVD's which are loaded
onto the dealer Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment. The map data is then loaded from the diagnostic
equipment onto the navigation tool hard drive. The map data is loaded to the touch s screen from the navigation tool hard
drive.
The following process should be used to update the map data:
NOTE: The navigation update tool does not need the map data loading every time. This is only necessary when a new
map update DVD is released.
Using the approved Jaguar/Land Rover diagnostic equipment select the navigation update tool.
Select Setup on th navigation update tool.

Connect the navigation update tool to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment using the USB cable and
press Continue proceed.
The navigation update tool will then check the connection.

Select your preferred language from the drop down menu then press Save and Continue Setup to proceed.
When the navigation update tool confirms the initial setup is complete, press Continue to proceed.
The navigation update tool will the return to the main menu screen, select Load Map Data to proceed.
Disconnect then reconnect, the USB cable connecting to the navigation update tool to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved
diagnostic equipment, press Continue proceed.
The navigation update tool will then check the connection.
Insert map update disk 1 into the DVD drive of the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment and press
Continue proceed
www.JagDocs.com
The navigation update tool will then read the map data
Map data will then be copied from disk 1 to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Insert map update disk 2 into the DVD drive and press Continue proceed
Map data will then be copied from disk 2 to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Map data is now ready to be uploaded onto the navigation update tool, press Continue proceed.
The map data is now being uploaded onto the navigation update tool.
Map data upload is now complete.
Disconnect the navigation update tool from Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Connect the navigation update tool to the vehicle using the firewire cable.
Select Navigation using the touch screen display soft key.
Select Navigation Setup using the touch screen soft key.

Select Map Change using the touch screen.
Select map region using the touch screen display and press Map Data Update to continue.
The current map data version and the proposed update map data versions will now be shown, Select the relevant
region, using the related touch screen key to proceed.
Select OK to input the licence key using the touch screen.
www.JagDocs.com
Input the licence key using the touch screen display and press OK to continue.
Select OK using the touch screen.
The map update will begin.

When the map update is complete a message will be shown in the touch screen, select OK to continue using the touch
screen display soft key. The navigation system will restart with the new map data.
Disconnect the navigation update tool from the vehicle.
USB Map Updates
All Gen 2.1 equipped vehicles are supplied with a USB map updates, these updates can be carried out by the customer.
The following process should be used to update the map data:
Start the engine.

Navigate to the touch screen Home Menu screen.
Insert the USB memory stick containing the map data into the vehicle USB port.
Press Continue on the touch screen to proceed with the installation of the map update.
using the touch screen enter the licence code and press OK to proceed.
NOTE: Selecting 'Cancel' returns to the 'Home Menu' screen, the map update will continue to run in the background
The map update will begin and a message will be displayed in the touch screen display advising that navigation is
unavailable.
Map update progress can be viewed as a percentage of the completed download in the Home Menu screen.
When the update is complete a message is displayed informing the user.

The navigation will restart upon completion of the map update.
NOTE: Remove USB stick immediately
Turn off the engine.

Exit, lock the vehicle and leave for at 15 minutes before using the navigation system.
Japanese Navigation
The Japanese satellite navigation system uses a separate navigation computer module.
The HDD in the ACM/IAM is not used for navigation downloads in this market.
Map updates are supplied in DVD format. The DVD is loaded into the navigation module. Map data is read directly from the
DVD.
SD Card Navigation Updates (Asia Navigation)

The Asia market navigation system is an aftermarket unit.
Map updates are supplied in an SD card format. The SD card is loaded into the navigation module. Map data is read directly
from the SD card.
NOTE: The following countries use SD card navigation updates.
Country
ANGOLA
ARGENTINA
AZERBAIJAN
BAHAMAS
BARBADOS
BENIN
BOTSWANA
BRAZIL
BRUNEI
BURUNDI
CAYMAN ISLANDS
CHILE
CHINA
COLOMBIA
EGYPT
FIJI
GHANA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
ISRAEL
JAMAICA
KENYA
LEBANON
LESOTHO
MALAWI
MALI
MAURITIUS
MONGOLIA
MOROCCO
MOZAMBIQUE
NAMIBIA
NIGER
www.JagDocs.com
Country
NIGERIA
PERU
PHILIPPINES
RWANDA
SENEGAL
SOUTH AFRICA
SRI LANKA
SAINT LUCIA
SWAZILAND
TAIWAN
TANZANIA
THAILAND
TOGO
TUNISIA
UGANDA
URUGUAY
VENEZUELA
VIETNAM
ZAMBIA
ZIMBABWE
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Information
and Entertainment System
For a detailed description of the Information and Entertainment System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: (415-01A Information and Entertainment System)
Audio System (Description and Operation),

Audio System (Description and Operation),
Audio System (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Information and entertainment module Fuses

Audio amplifier module Loose or corroded connector(s)
Integrated audio module Information and entertainment module
Portable audio interface module Audio amplifier module
Digital audio broadcast module Integrated audio module
Integrated control panel Portable audio interface module
Touch screen display Digital audio broadcast module
Satellite radio module Integrated control panel
Television module Touch screen display
Navigation system module Satellite radio module
Telephone module Television module
Compact disc player jammed, not loading Navigation system module
Scratched/dirty compact discs Telephone module
Speakers Speakers
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Display Possible Causes Action

Poor audio quality (all Display normal
sources) MOST harness Check MOST harness connectors for
connections loose security
MOST harness Check MOST harness connectors for
connections contamination
contaminated Check the routing of the MOST harness
MOST harness
misrouted
- Too many
bends
- Bend radius
less than
25mm
Information and Touch screen blank or

entertainment system displaying a flashing MOST network fault REFER to: Communications Network
inoperative logo (418-00 Module Communications Network,
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00. REFER to:
(100-00 General Information)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Audio Amplifier Module (AAM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Integrated Audio Module (IAM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Infotainment Control Module (ICM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Integrated Control Panel (FCIMB) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Satellite Digital Audio Radio System Module (SARM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Digital Audio Broadcast Module (DABM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Hybrid Digital Radio Control Module (HDRCM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Touch Screen Display (FCDIM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Television Module (TVM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Portable Audio Interface Control Module (PAICM) (Description and Operation).
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Cellular
Phone
For a detailed description of the Cellular Phone System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual.
Visual Inspection
Microphone Electrical connectors

Bluetooth antenna Wiring harness for damage or corrosion
Fuses
the next step.
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Action
Unable to pair
Not Auto Connecting

No Audio to 3rd Party

No Audio from 3rd Party

No Audio
GO to Pinpoint Test E.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:

B1A5613 Antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check blue tooth
Bluetooth antenna circuit - antenna circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B1D7984 Microphone Input Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test microphone
Signal amplitude < input circuit for short/open circuit. Check integrated audio
minimum module for related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index
U1A0088 Private Suspect the module. Check and install a new telephone
Communication Bluetooth phone module module as required, refer to the new module/component
Network internal communications installation note at the top of the DTC Index
failure
U210000 Initial Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved

Configuration Not Initial configuration not diagnostic system. If DTC remains, carry out CAN network
Complete complete integrity tests using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
Configuration Configuration incompatible diagnostic system. If DTC remains, suspect the telephone
Incompatible module. Check and install a new telephone module as
required, refer to the new module/component installation note
U300044 Control Module Re-configure the telephone module. If the DTC remains,
Data memory failure suspect the telephone module. Check and install a new
telephone module as required, refer to the new
Index
U300045 Control Module Re-configure the telephone module. If the DTC remains,
Program memory failure suspect the telephone module. Check and install a new
telephone module as required, refer to the new
Index
Incorrect car configuration diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains
data received suspect the telephone module. Check and install a new
module as required, refer to the new module/component
U300098 Control Module Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Clear DTC
Component or system over and re-test/monitor condition for re-occurrence
temperature
voltage, of 2 volts or more,
between telephone module
and RJB
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : UNABLE TO PAIR
CONDITIONS
A1: 'NO PHONE FITTED' DISPLAY
NOTE: Prior to continuing with any diagnosis, ensure that the Customer telephone and level of software is included on
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the bluetooth function is activated
and the telephone handset is placed within the vehicle cabin area.
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is shown on vehicle display.
Is 'No Phone Fitted' displayed?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Locate the connected telephone and if not Customer telephone, disconnect from the system.
A2: TELEPHONE BLUETOOTH DEVICE SEARCH
1 Carry out Bluetooth device search using Customer handset.
www.JagDocs.com
Is 'Jaguar' identified in Bluetooth device list?
Yes
Select device from list, then continue with diagnosis.GO to A3.
No
Carry out further Bluetooth device search, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately 20 seconds
between searches. If 'Jaguar' still not identified in Bluetooth device list, set ignition status to OFF, wait
approximately 30 seconds and set ignition status to ON. Carry out further Bluetooth device search, to a
maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately 20 seconds between searches. If 'Jaguar' still not identified in
Bluetooth device list, contact your local in market support for further assistance.
A3: TELEPHONE HANDSET ERROR
1 Check for any error shown on the telephone handset when 'Jaguar' is selected from the Bluetooth device
list.
Was an error immediately shown on the telephone handset?
Yes
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt selection, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If error still being displayed, contact your local in
market support for assistance.
No
Enter PIN '1313' then continue with diagnosis.GO to A4.
A4: PIN ENTRY STATUS
1 Check for successful PIN entry.
Was PIN entry successful?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt PIN entry, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If PIN entry is still un-successful, contact your local in
market support for assistance.
A5: 'NO PHONE FITTED' DISPLAY
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is still shown on vehicle display.
Is 'No Phone Fitted' still displayed?
Yes
From the telephone handset, select the connect option for the 'Land Rover' device identified in the
Bluetooth device list. If 'No Phone Fitted' is still displayed, suspect a telephone handset fault. Carry out
Pinpoint test again using known good telephone handset.
No
The telephone is paired and connected to the system. No further action is required for this symptom.
PINPOINT TEST B : NOT AUTOMATICALLY CONNECTING
CONDITIONS
B1: BLUETOOTH MODULE PAIRED DEVICE LIST
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the bluetooth and auto connect
functions are activated and the telephone handset is placed within the vehicle cabin area.
1 Carry out checks to determine if the Customer telephone is shown in the Bluetooth Module paired device
list.
Is the Customer telephone in the Bluetooth Module paired device list?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Carry out Unable to Pair Pinpoint Test.GO to A.
B2: CUSTOMER HANDSET PAIRED DEVICE LIST
1 Carry out checks to determine if the Bluetooth Module is shown in the Customer telephone paired device
list.
Is the Bluetooth Module in the Customer telephone paired device list?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
Carry out Unable to Pair Pinpoint Test.GO to A.
B3: CUSTOMER TELEPHONE IN POSITION 1
1 Carry out checks to determine if the Customer telephone is in position 1 in the Bluetooth Module paired
device list.
Is the Customer telephone in position 1?
Yes
GO to B4.
No
Advise Customer that auto connection will only be attempted with the device that is shown in position 1
in Bluetooth Module paired device list.
B4: CHECK FOR DTC B1A56-13
1 Using Manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for DTC B1A56-13.
Is DTC B1A56-13 logged?
Yes
Carry out remedial actions as outlined in DTC Index. If symptom remains, contact your local in market
support for assistance.
No
GO to B5.
B5: BLUETOOTH CONNECTION
1 Carry out checks to determine if Bluetooth connection icon is shown on Customer Bluetooth telephone
screen but shows 'No Phone Fitted' on vehicle screen.
Is Bluetooth connection icon shown on the Customer handset but 'No Phone Fitted' displayed on vehicle
screen?
Yes
GO to B9.
No
GO to B6.
B6: 'LAND ROVER' AUTHORISATION
NOTE: Some handsets may require operator intervention to manually authorise connection.
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'Land Rover' is authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone device
list menu.
Is 'Land Rover' authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone device list menu?
Yes
GO to B7.
No
Advise customer that 'Land Rover' needs to be authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone device
list menu, or operator intervention may be required to manually authorise connection.
B7: SEARCH FOR DEVICES SCREEN
1 Select the search for devices button on the vehicle display.
Does pressing the search for devices button bring up the searching screen on the vehicle display?
Yes
Contact your local in market support for assistance.
No
GO to B8.
B8: CYCLE IGNITION AND CHECK SEARCH FOR DEVICES SCREEN
1 Lock vehicle (wait 60s) before unlocking and turning Ignition status back to ON.
Does pressing the search for devices button bring up the searching screen on the vehicle display?
Yes
No further action required for this Symptom. Possible intermitent fault.
No
B9: PAIRED DEVICE
1 Check Customer telephone paired device list to establish which device the Customer telephone is
connected to.
Is the Customer telephone connected to the vehicle?
Yes
Lock vehicle (wait 60s) before unlocking and turning Ignition status back to ON. If Not Automatically
Connecting, contact you local in market support for assistance.
No
Using the Customer telephone controls, disconnect from the currently connected device and delete from
paired device list. Lock vehicle (wait for 60s) before unlocking and turning Igition status to ON. If Not
Automatically Connecting, contact your local in market support for assistance.
PINPOINT TEST C : NO AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY

C1: MICROPHONE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the telephone is placed within the
vehicle cabin area and is connected to the vehicle via bluetooth.
1 Using the Manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for any logged microphone DTCs in
Audio Front Control module.
Is DTC B1D79-01 logged?
Yes
Carry out diagnosis of electrical failure as advised in Action column of DTC Index.
No
PINPOINT TEST D : NO AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY

D1: 'IN CALL' DISPLAY
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'In Call' is shown on the vehicle display.
Is vehicle display showing 'In Call'?
Yes
No
Call has ended. No further action is required for this symptom.
PINPOINT TEST E : NO AUDIO

E1: AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the Third Party.
Is there Audio from the Third Party?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
Refer to the 'No Audio From Third Party' Pinpoint test.GO to D.
E2: AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio to the Third Party.
Is there Audio to the Third Party?
Yes
GO to E3.
No
Refer to the 'No Audio To Third Party' Pinpoint test.GO to C.
E3: CD OR RADIO AUDIO
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the CD or Radio.
Is there Audio from the CD or Radio?
Yes
GO to E4.
No
Suspect MOST ring fault, refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check/rectify MOST ring as
necessary.
E4: TELEPHONE HANDSET AUDIO
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the telephone handset.
Is there Audio from the telephone handset?
Yes
Ensure vehicle is parked. Disconnect and reconnect handset. If issue not resolved, contact your
local in market support for assistance.
No
Contact you local in market support for assistance.
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Navigation
System
For a detailed description of the Navigation System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (415-01 Information and Entertainment System)
Navigation System (Description and Operation),

Video System (Description and Operation),
Video System (Description and Operation),
Video System (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Information and entertainment module Fuses

Integrated audio module Information and entertainment module
Portable audio interface module Audio amplifier module
Digital audio broadcast module Integrated audio module
Integrated control panel Portable audio interface module
Touch screen display Digital audio broadcast module
Satellite radio module Integrated control panel
Television module Touch screen display
Navigation system module Satellite radio module
Telephone module Television module
Compact disc player jammed, not loading Navigation system module
Scratched/dirty compact discs Telephone module
Speakers Speakers
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
DTC Index
Navigation System Module
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:

B1A8911 Satellite Check satellite antenna connections. Refer to the electrical circuit
Antenna Satellite antenna circuit - diagrams and check satellite antenna circuit for short to ground
short to ground
B1A8913 Satellite Check satellite antenna connections. Refer to the electrical circuit
Antenna Satellite antenna circuit - diagrams and check satellite antenna circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B1A891B Satellite Suspect navigation module. Check and install a new navigation system
Antenna Satellite antenna - circuit module as required, refer to the new module/component installation
resistance above note at the top of the DTC Index
threshold
B1D5514 Antenna #2 Check TMC/VICS FM antenna connections. Refer to the electrical circuit
TMC/VICS FM antenna diagrams and check TMC/VICS FM antenna circuit for open circuit
circuit - open circuit
B1D5614 Antenna #3 Check VICS antenna connections. Refer to the electrical circuit
Circuit VICS antenna circuit - diagrams and check VICS antenna circuit for open circuit
open circuit
U200531 Vehicle Check ABS module and Instrument Cluster for speed related DTCs and
Speed Missing vehicle speed refer to relevant DTC Index
message
U300049 Control Suspect the navigation module. Check and install a new navigation
Module Internal electronic failure system module as required, refer to the new module/component
U300055 Control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check/amend the
Module Incorrect car Car Configuration File parameter in block 2, byte 127 to match vehicle
configuration data market/specification. If the DTC remains check navigation system
received module part number and ensure the correct component is installed to
vehicle market/specification
U300087 Control Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module Missing message system. Check navigation module for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index.
Check CAN network integrity using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U300098 Control Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Clear DTC and
Module Component or system re-test/monitor condition for re-occurrence
over temperature
U300317 Battery Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Voltage Circuit voltage above manufacturer approved diagnostic system
threshold
U300362 Battery Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Voltage Mis-match in battery manufacturer approved diagnostic system
voltage, of 2 volts or
more, between
navigation module and
RJB
Touch Screen Display (TSD)
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com

B100E25 Video Input 'A' Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
ODST Only - TV video manufacturer approved diagnostic system
synch mis-match
B100F25 Video Input 'B' Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
ODST Only - Reverse manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Camera video synch
mis-match
U1A0101 Communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Link ODST Only - cable from manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check electrical harness
navigation module not from navigation module is correctly installed
correctly installed
U1A0115 Communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Link TSD to navigation manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
module circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check TSD to navigation module circuit for
power, open circuit short to power, open circuit
U1A4B48 Control Module Re-configure the TSD using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Processor B Supervision software system
failure
U300044 Control Module Suspect the TSD, check and install a new TSD as required, refer to
EEPROM, External RAM the new module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
access failure Index
U300048 Control Module Re-configure the TSD using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Supervision software system
failure
U30004B Control Module Allow the system to cool, clear the DTC and check/monitor system
Touch panel backlight - for re-occurrence. If DTC re-occurs suspect the TSD. Check and
high temperature install a new TSD as required, refer to the new module/component
detected installation note at the top of the DTC Index
U300055 Control Module Check/amend the Car Configuration File using the manufacturer
Incorrect Car approved diagnostic system
Configuration
Parameters received
U300087 Control Module Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Check
Car Configuration File CAN and MOST networks, carry out the CAN and MOST network
not received tests using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U300098 Control Module Allow the system to cool, clear the DTC and check/monitor system
TSD internal for re-occurrence. If DTC re-occurs suspect the TSD. Check and
temperature over limit install a new TSD as required, refer to the new module/component
U300316 Battery Voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Circuit voltage below manufacturer approved diagnostic system
threshold
U300317 Battery Voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Circuit voltage above manufacturer approved diagnostic system
threshold
Information and Entertainment System -

Audio antenna unit to "D" pillar retaining bolts 9 - 80
Digital Radio antenna pod retaining nuts 5 - 48
Amplifier retaining nuts 7 - 62
Information and entertainment display retaining bolts 2 - 17
Information and entertainment display mounting bracket to Information and entertainment display retaining bolts 3 - 26
Information and entertainment module retaining bolts 3 - 26
Instrument panel speaker retaining screws 2 - 18
Steering wheel audio control switch retaining screws 3 - 26
Subwoofer amplifier retaining nuts 7 - 62
Subwoofer speaker retaining bolts 6 - 53
Information and Entertainment System - Audio System - Component Location
Item Description
1 IAM (integrated audio module)
2 Touch-screen
3 ICP (integrated control panel)
4 ICM (information control module)
5 Roof pod antenna module (DAB band L and satellite radio receiver antennas)
6 RF filter
7 DAB (digital audio broadcasting) radio receiver (Optional - Europe only)
8 Satellite radio digital receiver (Optional - NAS only)
9 Power amplifier (Not fitted to the Jaguar Sound System)
10 RF filter
11 Diversity antenna module (AM/FM and DAB band III antennas)
12 Portable audio interface console (Optional)
13 Portable audio module (Optional)
14 Steering wheel remote audio controls
Information and Entertainment System - Audio System - Overview
OVERVIEW
The audio system is available in three versions.
Jaguar Sound System

Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System
Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System
The audio systems are instrument panel mounted and combine the radio tuner with a slot loading single or 6 disc CD (compact
disc) player. All units have AM/FM diversity reception, through the diversity antenna module, which receives signals from
antennas located in the heated rear window. The audio systems have various levels of user control through the Touch-screen,
ICP (integrated control panel) and steering wheel control panel. The Jaguar Sound System (base audio unit) with single CD
player is only compatible with standard CD's. All other versions of CD player are compatible with standard CDs and CDs with
MP3 or WMA (windows media audio) files.
A portable audio module allows for the connection of a range of portable audio devices to the car’s audio system. The portable
audio module is controlled through the IAM (integrated audio module) and Touch-screen with play back through the car’s
speaker system. The introduction of this system allows the user to import their personal portable media player to interface
with the car, including iPod and other MP3 players, or USB mass storage devices such as memory sticks. MP3 players can also
be controlled through the Touch-screen if they are configured as mass storage devices. Details of how to do this will be
contained in the manufacturers instructions.
The chosen audio device can be plugged into the car using an interface panel located in the floor console between the front
seats. The interface includes a 3.5mm auxiliary jack-plug socket, a 12-volt power supply, a dedicated iPod connector with
charging function, plus a USB2 connector which allows connectivity for a wide variety of USB devices. The USB port also
provides a charging function although it does not support a USB hub. The maximum charging current supplied is 500ma. The
user can connect an iPod and USB device at the same time, changing the source via the Touch-screen. The non selected source
will still charge.
The Jaguar Sound System is the basic audio system which comprises of an IAM (integrated audio module) with no external
amplifier and 8 speakers.
The Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System has the addition of an AUD 8 power amplifier and a 9 speaker system.
The Bowers & Wilkins 440w Surround Sound System additions include an AUD 12 power amplifier, a Dolby Pro-Logic 2 7.1
Surround Sound System, and 14 speakers.
DAB (digital audio broadcasting) is available for most European markets and gives access to digital radio channels for better
sound quality and enhanced functionality depending on local service availability. The DAB (digital audio broadcasting) module
is located in the luggage compartment. The system receives reception signals from the following sources to ensure optimum
signal strength.
DAB band L antenna located in the roof pod antenna module

DAB band III antenna located in the heated rear window.
For NAS vehicles the digital format adopted is satellite radio which specifically links to the Sirius network. The system operates
in the S-band frequency range, and as a result of the use of satellite transmission, has the ability to provide CD quality audio
broadcasts over very large areas (typically continents). The satellite radio receiver is located in the luggage compartment. The
system receives reception signals from the satellite radio antenna located in the roof pod module.
Primary user control of the audio system is via the ICP (integrated control panel) and the Touch-screen which are located in the
center of the instrument panel. Control signals from the ICP (integrated control panel) are relayed on the medium speed CAN
(controller area network) bus to the ICM (information control module). The ICM (information control module) relays the control
signals to the rest of the audio system on the MOST (media oriented systems transport) ring. The ICM (information control
module) is the timing master for the MOST (media oriented systems transport) ring and also hosts a gateway function between
the medium speed CAN bus and the MOST (media oriented systems transport) ring. Audio output signals on the Jaguar 320W
Premium Sound System and Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System are sent on the MOST (media oriented systems
transport) ring from the IAM (integrated audio module) to the power amplifier for speaker output.
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Audio System - System Operation
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN bus; P = MOST ring; T = Coaxial
Item Description
1 Battery
7 Portable audio module
8 Clock spring
10 Portable audio interface panel
11 Microphone
12 Touch-screen
13 Power amplifier
14 Diversity antenna module
16 DAB receiver/Satellite Radio receiver (Note: There is no co-axial link from the diversity antenna module to the satellite
radio receiver)
17 Roof pod
Item Description
1 Navigation computer (Optional)
2 DAB (digital audio broadcasting) radio receiver (Optional - Europe only)
3 Satellite Radio digital receiver (Optional - NAS only)
4 Telephone control module (Optional)
5 Touch-screen
6 TV tuner (Optional)
7 Power amplifier (Not fitted to the Jaguar Sound System)
9 Portable audio module (Optional)
System Operation
AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
The components of the audio/infotainment system are all connected on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring.
The MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring is a fibre optic communications bus for multimedia applications. Audio
and control information is passed around the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring and can be picked up by any of
the systems units. For example, radio station tuning/selection input by the vehicle user into the Touch-screen is sent along the
MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring and collected by the IAM (integrated audio module) which then selects the
requested radio station.
MOST (media orientated systems transport) technology uses a plastic optical fibre which forms a network connecting the audio
and multimedia system components. Each component in the ring is connected to the plastic optical fibre through a device
known as a FOT (fibre optical transceiver). Each FOT (fibre optical transceiver) has two optical connections; one connection is
sensitive to light and is the input, the second connection forms the light source and is the output. The system operates by
connecting the output from one FOT (fibre optical transceiver) to the input of another FOT (fibre optical transceiver).
The light signals are sent in one direction only and are formed in the following way:
Electrical signals are converted into an electrical current

The current then drives an LED (light emitting diode) in the FOT (fibre optical transceiver) to produce a high intensity
red light
The LED transmits the light through a fibre optic cable
A photo diode in the FOT (fibre optical transceiver) at the opposite end of the fibre optic cable detects the light.
The following components may be connected to the MOST ring dependant on the vehicle equipment level:
IAM (integrated audio module)

Touch-screen
ICM (information control module)
DAB (digital audio broadcasting) radio receiver (Optional - Europe only)
Satellite radio digital receiver (Optional - NAS only)
Power amplifier (Not fitted to the Jaguar Sound System)
Portable audio module (Optional)
Telephone control module (Optional)
Navigation computer (Optional)
TV tuner (Optional)
NOTE: Do not view the red light directly
MOST is a synchronous network. A timing master supplies the clock information and all other devices on the network
synchronize their operation to this clock. The timing master for the MOST (media orientated systems transport) network on this
vehicle is the ICM (information control module). This unit also controls and manages the MOST (media orientated systems
transport) ring and the system components.
An Optical Bus tester is used in conjunction with the Jaguar diagnostic system to diagnose the MOST (media orientated
systems transport) system. The Optical Bus tester emits a visible, high intensity red light which can be connected into the ring
at any point to test the ring integrity. Disconnecting a MOST (media orientated systems transport) connector will reveal if the
high intensity red light is visible.
If a break occurs in the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring fault codes are stored in the ICM (information control
module) which can be retrieved using the Jaguar diagnostic system equipment.
With reference to the audio system information and signal transfer the instrument cluster is the gateway between the high
and medium speed CAN bus communication protocols. The ICM (information control module) is the gateway between medium
speed CAN and the MOST (media orientated systems transport) systems.
A typical example of information transfer is vehicle speed information from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module used to
control the automatic volume control function. The vehicle speed information from the ABS module is sent on the high speed
CAN network and collected by the instrument panel gateway. The signal is passed to the medium speed CAN network and onto
the ICM (information control module) gateway. The ICM (information control module) calculates the volume adjustment
required. The corrected audio volume level signal is sent on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) network to the
IAM (integrated audio module) or Power amplifier (dependant on vehicle equipment level) for output to the speaker system.
AUDIO SYSTEM GATEWAY FUNCTIONS
With reference to the audio system information and signal transfer the instrument cluster is the gateway between the high
and medium speed CAN bus communication protocols. The ICM is the gateway between medium speed CAN and the MOST
systems.
A typical example of information transfer is vehicle speed information from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module used to
control the automatic volume control function. The vehicle speed information from the ABS module is sent on the high speed
CAN network and collected by the instrument panel gateway. The signal is passed to the medium speed CAN network and onto
the ICM gateway. The ICM calculates the volume adjustment required. The corrected audio volume level signal is sent on the
MOST network to the IAM or Power amplifier (dependant on vehicle equipment level) for output to the speaker system.
AUDIO SYSTEM USER CONTROLS

Touch-Screen
Item Description
1 Touch-screen
2 Home menu button
3 Touch-screen on/off button
The Touch-screen forms the basis of the audio system. It communicates with the rest of the audio/infotainment system on the
MOST ring and allows control of the audio system and other infotainment systems from a single point.
The Touch-screen communicates with the IAM on the MOST ring and provides the primary user interface and display of the
audio system controls. No configuration procedure is required if the touch-screen is replaced.
Calibration of the Touch-screen using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new
The touch-screen provides user control of the following systems:
System Functions
Audio Radio display AM/FM or DAB, auxiliary and portable audio, digital TV or CD (compact disc)
Climate Air conditioning, distribution, seats, heated steering wheel, automatic air recirculation
control
Telephone Digit dialer, phone book, last ten calls (made, received, missed)
Navigation Destination, stored locations, navigation setup, route options
Vehicle Security, parking, valet mode, trip computer, clock, brightness, contrast, system settings, vehicle settings,
display settings
Item Description
1 Touch-screen
2 CD load
3 CD load and eject slot
4 Seek up
5 Settings button
6 Audio system on/off and volume control
7 Audio source
8 Seek down
9 Eject
The ICP duplicates many of the touch-screen audio user control features. Any volume setting made whilst in audio, TV, phone,
navigation or voice activation mode will be memorized for that system. The ICP communicates with the ICM on the medium
speed CAN. The ICM converts control/command signals from the ICP and then distributes the information onto the MOST
system to the audio system and other information and entertainment systems.
No configuration procedure is required if the ICP is replaced. There is no option to calibrate the ICP using the Jaguar approved
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Wheel Controls
Item Description
1 Volume adjustment
2 Change pre-set radio stations or CD tracks
3 Select audio source
4 Audio mute control/JaguarVoice control
Additional control of the audio system is available in the form of steering wheel mounted switches which are located on the
left hand side of the steering wheel. The four switches provide for volume adjustment, change pre-set radio stations or CD
tracks, select audio source and finally audio mute control. The mute control is also used for JaguarVoice control.
The steering wheel audio control switches are hardwired through the clock spring to the ICM. The ICM processes the analogue
signals from the switches into digital signals. The digital signals are then passed from the ICM onto the MOST system to
control the requested audio functions.
AVC (automatic volume control) controls the audio volume in relation to vehicle speed. As vehicle speed increases the audio
level is adjusted to compensate for extra road and vehicle noise. There are three settings for AVC:
Low
Medium
High
Setting of the AVC level is made using the audio controls. The default setting is medium.
The vehicle speed signal is used to enable the ICM to calculate the volume adjustment required. The vehicle speed signal is
received over the CAN. The signal is an average of the four wheel speed sensor signals. Should an invalid speed signal be
received the AVC will not alter the output volume.
INTEGRATED AUDIO MODULE
The IAM is located in the center console behind the ICP faceplate, and combines the radio tuner and CD player. The head unit
controls which of the two sources is routed to the speakers. All tuner versions have AM/FM reception. Each audio system
features auto-store, with a press and hold function to store selected channels as pre-sets. The standard search facility finds
the nine strongest channels currently available, while search and manual tuning allow channels to be stored as above.
The Jaguar Sound System IAM uses an internal amplifier which directly drives the system speakers. The Jaguar 320W Premium
Sound System and Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System differs from the Jaguar Sound System with the addition of
an external amplifier. Audio output signals from the IAM are sent on the MOST system to the external amplifier which drives
the system speakers.
Depending on audio specification the slot-loading CD unit is either a single-disc type or six-disc auto-changer. The system
automatically detects the CD format of the source (standard CD, MP3 or WMA files) and offers a full range of options,
presenting folders on the touch-screen, listed by albums and tracks, to browse as on a PC. Both versions have mix and repeat
functions and the six-disc version displays disc names.
The IAM communicates on the MOST system with the rest of the audio system. If the IAM is replaced it must be configured as
a new module using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment.
Calibration of the IAM using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new technology
becomes available or any fault concerns require software updates.
Audio Antennas
Item Description
1 Single TV antenna module
2 RF filter
4 Heated rear window
5 Heated rear window upper section
6 Heated rear window lower section
7 Triple TV antenna module
8 RF filter
The diversity antenna module, located on the left hand side of the heated rear window, receives signals from four antennas
located in the heated rear window, where one antenna is dedicated as an AM antenna.
The diversity tuning system ensures that the strongest signals are used by the radio system to ensure the best possible FM
reception. Using the three remaining receiving antennas serves to eliminate multipath signal distortion. Typically, the signal
from the antenna with the least noise is chosen, and the other antennas are ignored.
The diversity antenna module is an interface between the antenna aerials in the heated rear window and audio system
modules/tuners. It provides antenna signals to the AM/FM tuner in the IAM, to the DAB receiver and to the VICS (vehicle
information and communication systems) or TMC (traffic message channel) in the navigation computer.
There are three different types of diversity antenna module fitted depending on the vehicle market and infotainment
equipment specification:
AM/FM with one co-axial output

AM/FM and VICS/TMC with two co-axial outputs
AM/FM, VICS/TMC and DAB band III with three co-axial outputs
The diversity antenna module receives a power supply from the IAM.
Vehicle or other component generated electromagnetic interference may cause unwanted disturbances in the radio and TV
reception signals. The disturbance may interrupt, obstruct, or otherwise degrade or limit the effective performance of the
circuit. It frequently affects the reception of AM radio in urban areas and can also affect FM radio and television reception,
although to a lesser extent.
The RF filters, which act as RF isolators, are located on both sides of the heated rear window and are used to reduce the
electromagnetic interference. The left hand side RF filter is connected across the heated rear window power supply and used to
separate the DC (direct current) interference from the RF signals. The right hand side RF filter is used in conjunction with the
TV antenna module (if fitted). If the TV system is not fitted the filter is linked directly to ground.
INFORMATION CONTROL MODULE
The ICM is located beneath the IAM in the center console. The unit performs a range of infotainment and some climate-control
functions.
The ICM, which is the timing master of the MOST system; supplies clock information to all other devices on the network which
synchronize their operation to this clock.
The unit also controls and manages the MOST ring and provides the allocations of channels, system power management,
functionality and co-ordination of the other system components.
The system becomes operational when the vehicle is unlocked and a 'wake up' signal is received by the ICM on the medium
speed CAN. The ICM 'wakes up' all the control modules on the MOST system ready for immediate operation by the vehicle user.
If the ICM is replaced it must be configured as a new module using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment.
Calibration of the ICM using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new technology
becomes available or any fault concerns require software updates.
PORTABLE AUDIO MODULE
The portable audio module, located under the left hand front seat, allows for the connection, control and playback of a range
of portable audio devices through the car’s audio system.
No configuration procedure is required if the portable audio module is replaced. Calibration of the portable audio module using
the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new technology becomes available or any
fault concerns require software updates.
Item Description
1 iPod connection
2 USB connection
3 Auxiliary connection
The chosen audio device is plugged into the car using the interface panel located in the center console between the front
seats. Vehicles with the optional iPod function are supplied with a bespoke iPod lead in the vehicle delivery pack .
A menu option is available through the Touch-screen audio section when selecting a portable audio device for operation
through the vehicle audio system.
After the connection of an iPod or USB mass storage device the Touch-screen is used to operate and search the connected
device. Due to safety regulations, the normal control interfaces of either the iPod or USB device are disabled when it is
plugged into the interface panel.
NOTE: Some MP3 players have their own file system that is not supported by this system. To use the MP3 player it must
be set to USB Removable Device or Mass Storage Device mode. The manufacturer's information should include details of this
procedure. Only music that has been added to the device in this mode can be played via the vehicle's portable audio system.
Conversely, connection of any devices through the auxiliary connection cannot be controlled through the touch-screen and are
www.JagDocs.com
controlled through the device itself.
NOTE: The system will support devices with a storage capacity up to 256 GB which is approximately 65,000 audio tracks.
The wiring link harness between the portable audio module and interface panel consists of hardwired and digital connections
for data and signal exchange. The MOST carries the communication signals and information between the portable audio module
to the IAM and touch-screen. Audio output to the speaker system is controlled by the IAM or power amplifier depending on the
audio system specification.
POWER AMPLIFIER
The audio system has three amplification options dependant on the audio system specification:
IAM internal amplifier

Alpine AUD 8
Alpine AUD 12
The power amplifier is located in the left hand side of the luggage compartment and is connected to the audio system via the
MOST bus. Speaker connections are hardwired.
If the power amplifier is replaced it must be configured as a new module using the Jaguar diagnostic equipment.
Calibration of the power amplifier using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new
DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING

DAB is a digital radio network designed to provide reliable, multi-service broadcasting for reception by mobile, portable and
fixed receivers.
DAB provides a clear signal with minimal interference, hiss or fading. After a channel (or station) has been tuned and stored, it
does not need retuning.
NOTE: Radio signals travel in a straight line so large obstacles, such as tall buildings, can shield the vehicle from the
signal causing temporary loss of reception (known as dead spots).
Digital radio is transmitted from regional terrestrial transmitters. Some local digital radio channels are not available outside
the range of a transmitter. To receive new local channels during vehicle movement around a country, the auto-tune function is
used to build new channel lists.
NOTE: When the vehicle DAB radio is first used the system will not receive any digital stations until the auto-tune
function has been completed.
Digital radio channels are organized into groups called ensembles (also known as multiplexes). Some individual channels may
also provide a number of subchannels. For example, if several sports events are being held simultaneously, the channel may
temporarily choose to broadcast each different event on a separate subchannel.
DAB is broadcast across Europe, Canada and parts of Asia. System transmission is via a terrestrial network, on two separate
broadcasting bands:
DAB band-L
DAB band III
The DAB system requires additional components to be added to the audio system. DAB antennas and a receiver are fitted to
allow reception of the service.
Operation of the DAB system is the same as the radio operation with selections made through the touch-screen and ICP to
access and navigate the system functions.
The DAB receiver is a dedicated tuner which is controlled by the ICM on the MOST ring. The receiver processes the signals from
the DAB antennas. Information is transmitted on the MOST ring and processed by the ICM. The processed information is sent
out to the power amplifier or IAM (with internal amplifier) and broadcast through the speaker system.
No configuration procedure is required if the DAB receiver is replaced. Calibration of the DAB receiver using the Jaguar
approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new technology becomes available or any fault concerns
require software updates.
Digital Audio Broadcasting Antennas
Item Description
1 Roof pod
The DAB band III antenna is located in the heated rear window and is part of the diversity antenna module circuit. The two
antenna circuits each have a co-axial connection to the DAB module.
DAB signals are transmitted on either DAB band III (174 - 240 MHz) or DAB band-L (1452 - 1492 MHz). Some countries may
only use the band III signals, while others may only use the band-L signals. Some countries use both frequency ranges within
the same geographical area. The type of DAB signal received depends on the vehicle market location.
The DAB antennas are designed with 50 ohm output impedance. The DAB receiver is fitted with 50 ohm fakra II connectors to
ensure compatibility with the antenna. For optimum performance 50 ohm low loss coaxial cable is used between the antenna
and receiver.
SATELLITE RADIO (NAS VEHICLES ONLY)
The digital radio format adopted for NAS vehicles is satellite radio. Satellite service providers transmit a signal from their
up-link facility (which is the original point of transmission of data, voice or other information through an antenna system) to a
satellite where the signal is then down linked to both the terrestrial repeater network and the individual satellite car radios.
The radio switches between the satellite signal and the repeater network signal depending on the strength of the signal at any
given time.
The Sirius satellite system comprises:
Satellites
Ground repeaters
Up-link ground stations
Radio receiver systems
The Sirius satellite radio system uses three satellites on an inclined elliptical orbit. This ensures that each satellite spends
approximately 16 hours a day over the continent of the USA, with at least one satellite over the country at any one time.
The satellites beam their signals down to the ground where the signal is picked up by receivers or is transmitted to repeater
stations to cover built up areas where the signal is obscured. The satellite service comprises over 100 channels of digital
entertainment which is provided by subscription requiring a monthly payment.
Operation of the satellite radio system is the same as the radio operations with selections made through the Touch-screen and
ICP to access and navigate the system functions.
The satellite radio receiver is a dedicated tuner which is controlled by the ICM on the MOST ring. The receiver filters the
signals from the satellite radio antenna. Information is transmitted on the MOST ring and processed by the ICM. The processed
information is sent out to the power amplifier or IAM (with internal amplifier) and broadcast through the speaker system.
No configuration procedure is required if the satellite radio receiver is replaced. Calibration of the satellite radio receiver using
the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new technology becomes available or any
Satellite Radio Antenna
The satellite radio antenna is located in the roof pod and is shared with the navigation system GPS (global positioning system)
antenna where fitted. The roof pod is located externally in a central position towards the rear of the roof.
Similar to the DAB system the satellite radio antenna is designed with 50 ohm output impedance. The satellite radio receiver
is fitted with 50 ohm fakra II connectors to ensure compatibility with the antenna. For optimum performance 50 ohm low loss
coaxial cable is used between the antenna and receiver.
The antenna is designed to receive one of two signals, using the strongest signal with the least distortion to process for audio
output. For example, if the vehicle drives into a tunnel, the signal received will change from a satellite signal to a repeater
station signal maintaining the strongest signal.
Information and Entertainment System - Speakers - Component Location
ItemDescription
1 LH (left-hand) front tweeter speaker (All models)
2 Front center speaker (Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System only)
3 RH (right-hand) front tweeter speaker (All models)
4 RH front mid-range speaker (Bowers & W ilkins 440W Surround Sound System only)
5 RH front mid-bass speaker (All models)
6 RH rear tweeter speaker (All models)
7 RH rear mid-bass speaker (All models)
8 RH rear full range speaker (Bowers & W ilkins 440W Surround Sound System only)
9 Subwoofer enclosure (Not fitted to Jaguar Sound System)
10 LH rear full range speaker (Bowers & W ilkins 440W Surround Sound System only)
11 LH rear mid-bass speaker (All models)
12 LH rear tweeter speaker (All models)
13 LH front mid-bass speaker (All models)
14 LH front mid-range speaker (Bowers & W ilkins 440W Surround Sound System only)
Information and Entertainment System - Speakers - Overview
Overview
The vehicle has three levels of audio system available:
Jaguar Sound System

Jaguar Premium Sound System
Bowers & Wilkins Surround Sound System
The Jaguar Sound System has 8 speakers, comprising an identical mid-bass and tweeter combination in each door. All
speaker domes in this system are of standard textile construction. The speakers are driven directly by the IAM (integrated
audio module) internal amplifier.
The Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System has 9 speakers including mid-bass and tweeters in the doors, adding a
sub-woofer in the spare wheel well. The speakers are driven by an Alpine AUD 8 amplifier located in the LH (left-hand)
side of the luggage compartment.
The Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System uses an Alpine AUD 12 amplifier, a Dolby Pro-Logic 2 7.1 Surround
Sound System and has 14 speakers. This layout adds a mid-range speaker to each front door while retaining a mid-bass
and tweeter in each rear door. It also adds an instrument panel center speaker, 2 surround-effect speakers in the rear
parcel shelf, and has the luggage compartment-mounted sub-woofer as the Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System. The
speakers are driven by an AUD 12 power amplifier located in the luggage compartment.
The main speakers on the Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System and the Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System
are identified by the bright yellow Kevlar constructed domes which are visible through the speaker grilles. The tweeter
speaker domes are an aluminum construction. The sub-woofer speakers are a textile dome construction.
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Speakers - System Operation and
Control Diagram
• NOTE: A = Hardwired
CONTROL DIAGRAM - JAGUAR SOUND SYSTEM
ItemDescription
1 Battery
5 RH (right-hand) rear mid-bass speaker
6 RH rear tweeter speaker
7 RH front mid-bass speaker
8 RH front tweeter speaker
9 LH (left-hand) front mid-bass speaker
10 LH front tweeter speaker
11 LH rear tweeter speaker
12 LH rear mid-bass speaker
CONTROL DIAGRAM - JAGUAR 320W PREMIUM SOUND SYSTEM
ItemDescription
1 Battery
2 BJB
3 RJB
4 Power amplifier
5 RH rear mid-bass speaker
9 Subwoofer enclosure
10 LH front mid-bass speaker
CONTROL DIAGRAM - BOWERS & WILKINS 440W SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM
ItemDescription
1 Battery
2 BJB
3 RJB
4 Power amplifier
5 RH rear full range speaker
6 RH rear mid-bass speaker
9 RH front mid-range speaker
11 Front center speaker
12 Subwoofer enclosure
13 LH front mid-bass speaker
14 LH front mid-range speaker
18 LH rear full range speaker
System Operation
The Jaguar Sound System has 8 speakers, comprising an identical mid-bass and tweeter combination in each door. All
speaker domes in this system are of standard textile construction. The speakers are driven directly by the IAM (integrated
audio module) internal amplifier.
The Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System has 9 speakers including mid-bass and tweeters in the doors, adding a
sub-woofer in the spare wheel well. The speakers are driven by an Alpine AUD 8 amplifier located in the LH side of the
luggage compartment.
The Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System uses an Alpine AUD 12 amplifier, a Dolby Pro-Logic 2 7.1 Surround
Sound System and has 14 speakers. This layout adds a mid-range speaker to each front door while retaining a mid-bass
and tweeter in each rear door. It also adds an instrument panel center speaker, 2 surround-effect speakers in the rear
parcel shelf, and has the luggage compartment-mounted sub-woofer as the Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System. The
speakers are driven by an AUD 12 power amplifier located in the luggage compartment.
The main speakers on the Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System and the Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System
are identified by the bright yellow Kevlar constructed domes which are visible through the speaker grilles. The tweeter
speaker domes are an aluminum construction. The sub-woofer speakers are a textile dome construction.
Information and Entertainment System - Cellular Phone - Component
Location
ItemDescription
2 Touch-screen
4 Microphone
5 Steering wheel controls
6 Navigation Computer
7 Power amplifier
8 Speakers
9 Telephone control module
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Cellular Phone - Overview
Authoring Template
OVERVIEW
The cellular phone system uses the customers own Bluetooth® capable handset in conjunction with the vehicle
information and entertainment system. The telephone control module is located under the left-hand front seat, and has a
Bluetooth® antenna integrated into the unit. Telephone handsets must be paired with the telephone control module,
requiring input of a PIN (personal identification number) before they can be used with the vehicle system. Once paired, any
phone can be docked to the car without re-entering a PIN (personal identification number). In addition to this, the last
connected device will dock automatically the next time it is placed in the vehicle and the ignition is in power mode
(ignition on).
The system has the ability to pair and dock telephone handsets from the telephones themselves. By supplying a fixed PIN
(personal identification number), a user will be able to use their telephone or other telephone related Bluetooth® device
and pair with it without using the touch screen. This enables devices such as Blackberry's and other secure PDA's (personal
digital assistants) to pair and dock with the vehicle system.
Up to 5 telephone handsets can be paired with the vehicle, but only 1 telephone can be used at a time. The Touch-screen
displays phone functionality, including dialing, and (if compatible) the handset’s phone book. The Touch-screen also
displays the phone's signal strength and battery meter (if supported by the phone). These functions allow the user to view
the displays on the Touch-screen and not have to use the handset.
• NOTE: There is no physical connection (cradle) between the phone handset and the telephone control module.
Communications between the 2 components are purely Bluetooth®. This can limit the available functions dependant on
the handset used.
The system allows the driver to make, receive and end phone calls using the Touch-screen, steering wheel switches and
voice recognition system (if fitted).
Phone dialing is achieved using one of the following methods:
Dialing a number using the Touch-screen keypad

Selecting a number from the handsets (automatically or manually downloaded) phonebook on the Touch-screen
Selecting a number from the handsets (automatically or manually downloaded) phonebook in the instrument cluster
message center
Selecting from the handsets (downloaded) call register, typically the last 10 calls made, received and missed
The telephone control module is connected to the information and entertainment system on the MOST (media oriented
systems transport) ring. This allows audio and control signals to be routed to and from the telephone control module.
Information and Entertainment System - Cellular Phone - System Operation
Control Diagram
• NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN bus; P = MOST ring
ItemDescription
1 Touch-screen
2 Power amplifier
3 Speakers
5 Microphone
6 Telephone control module
7 Clock spring
8 Steering wheel controls
11 Navigation computer
System Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Primary user control of the phone system is via the Touch-screen and JaguarVoice control switch. Selection of
'phone/comms' on the Touch-screen home menu sends a control signal to the telephone control unit on the MOST (media
orientated systems transport) ring, opening the phone submenu options.
When making an outgoing phone call using the JaguarVoice function the ICM (information control module) processes the
analogue signal from the switch into a digital signal. The digital signal is passed from the ICM (information control
module) onto the MOST (media orientated systems transport) system to the JaguarVoice control unit which is integral with
the navigation computer.
The navigation computer sends an instruction via MOST (media orientated systems transport) to the IAM (integrated audio
module) to turn on the microphone facility.
The voice command signals are relayed from the IAM (integrated audio module) via the MOST (media orientated systems
transport) ring to the navigation computer for processing.
The processed voice command is relayed on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring from the navigation
computer to the phone control module.
Speech output information is transferred from the phone control module via the Bluetooth® connection to the cell phone.
Incoming calls are received from the Bluetooth® phone by the phone control module. The information is processed by the
phone control module and transferred on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring to the power amplifier or IAM
(integrated audio module) for audio output through the vehicle’s audio speaker system.
A number of responses by the telephone and voice systems are reinforced by messages appearing in the instrument cluster
message center display. Information is relayed to the message center from the phone control module and navigation
computer on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring to the ICM (information control module).
The ICM (information control module) is the gateway from the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring to the
medium speed CAN. The ICM (information control module) transfers the message center information onto the medium
speed CAN which is received and processed for display on the instrument cluster message center.
Users can pair & dock their handset using their phone or the touch screen. If there is no phone already docked with the
system, a user can use their phone to search for Bluetooth Devices. If the vehicles Bluetooth system has been successfully
discovered, the phone will display "Jaguar" as a device to pair & connect to. Using this method requires the user to enter
the Jaguar PIN of 1313. Alternatively, after accessing the phone menu from the Touch-screen home menu, selecting
‘Search New’ searches for the Bluetooth® enabled handsets within range, displays their identities on screen, and allows
the user to pair and dock the phone ready for use, using a random four-digit security code displayed on screen. The system
will normally try to dock (automatically) to the last phone docked, but if a different Bluetooth® enabled phone enters the
car it will become available on the screen’s list of handsets once the search has been completed.
Once a phone is paired and docked a digit dial screen is displayed, including phonebook options. W ith a Bluetooth®
compatible handset and software version there is the option, through the settings menu, to automatically download the
contents of the handset’s phonebook to the vehicle system. Because there is no industry standard for arranging the
phonebook, the downloaded lists from individual handsets may vary.
Cell phone handset manufacturers continually update hardware and software to standard specifications laid down by the
Bluetooth® Special Interest Group (SIG), which defined how Bluetooth® would work in an automotive environment.
However, because different makes and models may use different software, not all handsets are fully compatible with
Jaguar, but through testing individual handset models Jaguar has produced a list of compatible handsets and the
appropriate software version for Jaguar Bluetooth® connectivity. Referral to the list also describes how to check the
software version of each individual cell phone manufacturer. This list must be consulted by users, sales & service teams to
confirm whether customer's handsets are compatible or not.
Jaguar is continually validating compatible handset and software combinations. The most up-to-date compatibility list will
always be available on-line from Jaguar.
• NOTE: To achieve full Bluetooth® handset functionality it is crucial that the phone software level matches the version
detailed in the list of compatible handsets.
The upgraded hands free profile of this system allows the display of the network signal strength, network operator and
phone battery level indication on the vehicle display. Also, if applicable, the phone handset will show a "car" or "headset"
symbol to indicate it is in handsfree profile.
BLUETOOTH®
Bluetooth® is a short-range RF (radio frequency) technology that operates at 2.4 GHz and is capable of transmitting voice
and data wirelessly. The effective range of Bluetooth® devices is 32 feet (10 meters) with a data transfer rate of 1 Mbps.
Bluetooth® is essentially a wireless connection which operates with the user's own mobile handset, does not have to be
fixed into the car and is designed to function without an external aerial. The handset can be located anywhere within the
cabin, even in a bag, or jacket pocket. It could work from the luggage compartment, although the signal could be
compromised. The handset can be charged from the 12 volt power socket or USB (if supported) while in use.
Touch-Screen
The Touch-screen communicates with the telephone control module on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring
and provides the primary user interface and display of the phone system.
ItemDescription
1 Touch-screen
3 Home menu button
The following functions are available on the phone menu:
Digit dial
Phone book
Last ten calls (made, received, missed)
Voicemail
ItemDescription
1 Volume adjustment
2 Scroll up/down to next/previous memory location.
3 Audio source (Long press for instrument cluster message center phonebook access)
4 JaguarVoice button. Briefly press to initiate or end a call. This is also used for voice control functions
Additional control of the phone system is available in the form of steering wheel mounted switches which are located on
the left hand side of the steering wheel. The switches provide for volume adjustment, scroll up/down to next/previous
memory location, instrument cluster message center phonebook access and finally JaguarVoice/call control.
The steering wheel control switches are hardwired through the clock spring to the ICM (information control module). The
ICM (information control module) processes the analogue signals from the switches into digital signals. The digital signals
are then passed from the ICM (information control module) onto the MOST (media orientated systems transport) system
for control unit processing and operation of the requested functions.
JaguarVoice
JaguarVoice enables activation of several voice activated functions of the infotainment and climate control systems
without the need to touch any controls manually. The following systems include JaguarVoice functionality;
Navigation system
Phone system
Climate control system
Vehicle display system
Vehicle notepad
The 'notepad' facility allows voice notes to be recorded. Nametags for phone dialing and navigation locations allow the
system to be personalized and there is a help and tutorial function to provide advice on using the system.
The system allows the vehicle user to concentrate fully on driving the vehicle, without any need to divert their eyes from
the road ahead in order to check information read outs on the vehicle instrument panel information units. The voice control
system also feeds back audible information to the vehicle user.
JaguarVoice is a key component of the phone system, allowing hands free control and use of the Bluetooth® enabled
phone.
The system is controlled by the voice button on the left hand side of the steering wheel. Voice commands are picked by
the dedicated microphone. When giving a voice command audible feedback will be heard through the vehicle’s audio
speakers. Received call voice/speech is also broadcast on the vehicle audio speaker system. All speakers are used for
voice/speech output with the exception of the front center speaker (only fitted on the Bowers & W ilkins 440W Surround
Sound System) due to echo return picked up by the microphone.
ItemDescription
1 JaguarVoice button
Efficient operation of JaguarVoice is reliant on the user understanding some of the following basic operating conditions;
Face forwards, sitting in a normal driving position

After pressing the voice button, always wait for the end of the audible tone before speaking.
Speak naturally, as if you were talking to a passenger or on the phone without pausing between words
When the system asks for more information, always wait for the end of the tone before responding
Always say numbers correctly
Excessive noise, for example while driving with windows open, may cause voice command mis-recognition. If it is
too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized
Most accents are understood without difficulty, but if the system does not recognize the command it will respond "SORRY"
and allow two more attempts to say the command.
Voice feedback is given in the same language as the command recognition. It is possible to change the language of the
speech control system.
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Navigation System - Component
Location
Item Description
2 Touch-screen
4 Microphone
5 Roof pod antenna module (GPS antenna)
6 RF filter
8 Power amplifier
9 RF filter
10 Diversity antenna module (VICS/TMC antenna)
12 VICS (vehicle information and communication system) beacon antenna - Japan only
Information and Entertainment System - Navigation System - Overview
OVERVIEW
The navigation system provides audible and visual route guidance information to enable the driver to reach a desired
destination. The system allows the driver to choose the desired route using minor or major roads and will present 3 routes to
the driver based on user preferences. Directions to hospitals, museums, monuments and hotels are also available. The
navigation computer uses map information stored on a DVD (digital versatile disc) to determine the best route for the journey
and provide the driver with details of directions and approaching junctions.
The navigation system has various levels of user control through the Touch-screen and JaguarVoice system. System volume
adjustment can be made using the ICP (integrated control panel), Touch-screen and steering wheel controls.
There are 3 navigation system variants specific to various markets. On all systems the GPS (global positioning system) signal
is received by the GPS (global positioning system) antenna located in the roof pod antenna module.
The European navigation system includes the TMC (traffic messaging channel) function, which receives traffic information from
an FM antenna integrated into the heated rear window. On a pre-selected route the system will offer re-routing options
depending on traffic conditions.
The Japanese navigation system includes the VICS (vehicle information and communication systems) function. The VICS
(vehicle information and communication systems) supplies information to enable the navigation computer to re-route the
navigation guidance or to inform the vehicle driver of traffic conditions in the vehicles vicinity. Information is provided to the
system through an FM antenna integrated into the heated rear window and a VICS beacon located in the LH upper side of the
instrument panel.
The NAS (North American specification) variant does not include any additional traffic information systems.
The navigation system is primarily controlled from the Touch-screen which is located in the center of the instrument panel.
Control signals from the Touch-screen are sent on the MOST (media oriented systems transport) ring to the navigation
computer. The navigation computer uses a dedicated GVIF (gigabit video interface) bus to transmit video signals to the Touch-
screen.
Depending upon the audio system version fitted the navigation audio output signals are sent on the MOST (media oriented
systems transport) ring to the IAM (integrated audio module) or the power amplifier for speaker output.
Information and Entertainment System - Navigation System - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN bus; N = Medium Speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus; P = MOST ring; Q = GVIF; T
= CoAxial
Item Description
3 Touch-screen
4 Power amplifier
5 Speakers
7 Microphone
9 VICS (vehicle information and communication system) beacon antenna - Japan only
10 Roof pod antenna module (GPS (global positioning system) antenna)
11 Diversity antenna module (VICS/TMC antenna)
14 Clock spring
System Operation
Authoring Template
INTRODUCTION TO THE GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM

The system used to calculate the current position of the vehicle is called the GPS. The system utilizes satellites which are
owned by the United States Department of Defense. A total of 24 satellites circular orbit the earth every 12 hours at a height
of 20,000 km (12500 miles), and between 5 and 11 of these satellites can be seen from a single point at any given time. The
orbits are tilted to the earth's equator by 55 degrees to ensure coverage of polar regions. Each satellite transmits radio signals
to provide information about the satellite position i.e. latitude, longitude, altitude, almanac data and an accurate time signal
generated by an on-board atomic clock. Each satellite contains four atomic clocks.
The vehicle needs to receive data from at least four different satellites to give a three dimensional fix on its current position.
As the vehicle moves, this information is continually being updated. The computer determines which satellites are 'visible' to
the system and their current position and relationship to each other. Using this information the computer can account for
positional deviations of the satellites and compensate to enhance the accuracy of the navigation system.
www.JagDocs.com
The GPS signal is also known as the PPS (precision positioning signal).
PPS (precision positioning signal) predictable accuracy is:
22 meters horizontal accuracy

27.7 meters vertical accuracy
200 nanoseconds time accuracy
The navigation system receives GPS information via the GPS antenna. The GPS signals are used by the navigation computer to
calculate the vehicles position. Once the driver has input a desired destination the navigation computer can calculate a route,
based on the driver's pre-determined preferences or the default settings in the navigation computer.
The navigation system is accessed from the Touch-screen home menu.
Navigation is initiated by the driver inputting a destination. This can be achieved by:
Entering an address using the Touch-screen

Entering a post code
Choosing a previous destination
Choosing a point of interest from the map disc database
Choosing the home location
Choosing a memory stored location
The driver is then guided to the destination by a scrolling map display and voice guidance. The display can be varied by scale
and display type.
In addition to the standard navigation system there are two market dependant systems that supply extra information to the
navigation system and the driver. These are:
TMC (traffic message channel) (Europe only)

VICS (vehicle information and communication system) (Japan only)
The TMC (traffic message channel) is a function of the FM (frequency modulation)RDS (radio data system). The system
broadcasts real-time traffic and weather information. Data messages are received and decoded by the TMC (traffic message
channel) integral receiver and processed by the navigation computer. TMC (traffic message channel) messages can be filtered
by the navigation computer so that only those relevant to the current journey are displayed, allowing the navigation system to
offer dynamic route guidance - alerting the driver of a problem on the planned route and calculating an alternative route to
avoid the incident. All TMC (traffic message channel) events on the map can be viewed not just the ones on the calculated
route.
TMC (traffic message channel) traffic information systems conform to a global standard that has been adopted by traffic data
gatherers, information service providers, broadcasters and vehicle/receiver manufacturers.
All TMC (traffic message channel) receivers use the same list of event codes, while the location database (on the map disc)
contains both a country-specific set of location codes for the strategic European road network.
TMC (traffic message channel) traffic data is currently broadcast in many European countries.
The VICS (vehicle information and communication system) is broadcast in the Japanese market.
The VICS (vehicle information and communication system) supplies information to enable the navigation computer to re-route
the navigation guidance or to inform the vehicle driver of traffic conditions in the vehicles vicinity. Information is provided to
the system through 3 routes:
RF (radio frequency) transmission

Infra-red transmission
FM multiplex transmissions
The RF (radio frequency) transmissions are generally transmitted from road side beacons mainly on expressways. The
information transmitted is as follows:
Traffic congestion
Travel time to next intersection
Traffic conditions in surrounding areas and expressway turn offs
Traffic accidents
Speed limits
Lane regulations
Tire change
Parking availability at expressway service areas and parking areas
Infra-Red transmissions are transmitted from road side beacons on major trunk roads. The information transmitted is:
Traffic congestion and travel time

Traffic accidents
Breakdowns
Road works restrictions
Parking availability
FM transmissions are broadcast as part of the FM multiplex broadcasting system from NHK FM stations. Information
transmitted is:
Traffic congestion and travel time for wide areas

Traffic accidents, road works, speed limits and lane restrictions for a wide area
Parking availability information
The traffic data is split from the normal FM transmissions by the diversity antenna module.
Selection of 'Navigation' on the Touch-screen home menu and subsequent sub-menu selection sends a control request signal to
the navigation computer on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring. The requested control information is
processed by the navigation computer.
If voice guidance is operational the voice signal information is relayed from the navigation computer on the MOST (media
orientated systems transport) ring to either the IAM (integrated audio unit) or Power Amplifier, dependant on equipment level,
for output on the speaker system. The navigation audio output is through the front speakers whilst the background audio, for
example radio or CD (compact disc), is played at a reduced volume on the rear speakers.
The GPS signal is available to the navigation system at all times when the vehicle ignition is switched on.
Navigation user voice commands are made using the JaguarVoice system. The ICM (information control module) processes the
analogue signal from the JaguarVoice switch into a digital signal. The digital signal is passed from the ICM (information control
module) onto the MOST (media orientated systems transport) system to the JaguarVoice control unit which is integral with the
navigation computer.
The navigation computer sends an instruction via the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring to the IAM (integrated
audio module) to turn on the microphone facility.
The microphone is hardwired to the IAM (integrated audio module). The spoken voice command signals are relayed from the
IAM (integrated audio module) via the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring to the navigation computer for
processing.
The processed voice command is relayed from the navigation computer to the Touch-screen.
Traffic data from TMC (traffic message channel) or VICS (vehicle information and communication system) is processed by the
navigation computer, distributed to the Touch-screen with any supporting voice instruction relayed through the MOST (media
orientated systems transport) ring to either the IAM (integrated audio unit) or Power Amplifier, dependant on equipment level,
for output on the speaker system.
A number of actions, when using the navigation voice system, are reinforced by messages appearing in the instrument cluster
message center display. Information is relayed to the message center from the navigation computer on the MOST (media
orientated systems transport) ring to the ICM (information control module).
The ICM (information control module) is the gateway from the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring to the medium
speed CAN (controller area network). The ICM (information control module) transfers the message center information onto the
medium speed CAN which is received and processed for display on the instrument cluster message center.
NAVIGATION COMPUTER
The navigation computer is located in the left hand side of the luggage compartment.
The navigation computer incorporates the following:
GPS receiver
VICS (vehicle information and communication system) receiver (Japan only)
TMC (traffic message channel) receiver (Europe only)
JaguarVoice control module
The navigation computer contains a solid state piezo gyro which measures the motion of the vehicle around its vertical axis.
The gyro operates on the principle known as the coriolis force. The coriolis force is the force that appears to accelerate a body
moving away from its rotational axis against the direction of rotation of the axis.
Using inputs from the ABS module, the GPS antenna and the gyro sensor, the computer calculates the vehicle's current
position, direction and speed.
The navigation computer houses the DVD (digital versatile disc) drive. The drive is used to read map data from region specific
DVD's. The number of DVD's issued per region varies depending on the amount of information available. The regions are as
follows:
Europe (2 versions, Western Europe and Whole of Europe)

NAS (North American specification)
Japan, Middle East, Australia and South Africa
A button, located adjacent to the DVD slot, is provided to eject the DVD from the unit. Prior to ejecting the disc the slot
protection has to be slid to the side. If the ignition is on, or the entertainment system is in 1-hour mode, one press of the
button will eject the DVD.
The navigation computer uses non-volatile memory to store settings and configuration information when it is powered down.
This process takes place just before the computer turns off.
No configuration procedure is required if the navigation computer is replaced. There is no option to calibrate the navigation
computer using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment; however in some regions a software download, contained in the
DVD disc, is required before the navigation system becomes operational.
MICROPHONE
A single microphone is used for hands-free operation using the JaguarVoice system. The microphone has an integrated noise
suppression system for hands-free use. The microphone is a standard directional type and is located in the front roof overhead
console. The microphone is hardwired to the IAM (integrated audio module). When replacing the microphone extra care must be
taken to make sure it is fitted into its securing clips for correct positioning and orientation.
GPS Antenna
The GPS antenna passes signals from the GPS satellites to the navigation computer for processing. The antenna is located in
the roof pod and is shared with the DAB (digital audio broadcasting) band L antenna or satellite radio antenna where fitted.
The roof pod is located externally in a central position towards the rear of the roof.
The GPS antenna is designed with 50 ohm output impedance. The navigation computer is fitted with 50 ohm fakra II
connectors to ensure compatibility with the antenna. For optimum performance 50 ohm low loss coaxial cable is used between
the antenna and navigation computer.
It is possible for the GPS antenna to lose the signal from the GPS satellites;
In hilly or tree lined areas

Built up areas with tall buildings
In multi storey car parks
In garages
In tunnels
On bridges
During heavy rain or thunderstorms
When the signal is lost the navigation computer will continue to give guidance using memory mapped data from the DVD map
until the signal is restored.
TMC/VICS FM Antenna
Data messages for both TMC (traffic message channel) and VICS (vehicle information and communication system) are received
through the FM antennas and diversity antenna module located in the heated rear window.
VICS Beacon Antenna (Japan Only)
The VICS (vehicle information and communication system) beacon antenna receives infra red and RF (radio frequency) traffic
data signals from road side transmitters. The antenna is connected to the navigation computer which incorporates a VICS
(vehicle information and communication system) receiver.
Touch Screen Display
The Touch-screen is the control interface for the following vehicle systems;
System Functions
Audio Radio display AM/FM or DAB (digital audio broadcast), auxiliary and portable audio, digital TV or CD
Climate Air conditioning, distribution, seats, heated steering wheel, automatic air recirculation
control
Telephone Digit dialer, phone book, last ten calls (made, received, missed)
www.JagDocs.com
System Functions
Navigation Destination, stored locations, navigation setup, route options
Vehicle Security, parking, valet mode, trip computer, clock, brightness, contrast, system settings, vehicle settings,
display settings
The screen is a touch sensitive 7 inch LCD (liquid crystal display) VGA screen containing 800 x 480 pixels in a 15:9 format. The
screen processes its own video for system operation but receives the navigation graphics from the navigation computer.
Item Description
1 Volume adjustment
2 Scroll wheel (No navigation functionality)
3 Audio source (No navigation functionality)
4 JaguarVoice control
Additional control of the navigation system is available in the form of steering wheel mounted switches which are located on
the left hand side of the steering wheel. 2 switches are used for navigation functions;
Volume adjustment
JaguarVoice control
JaguarVoice enables operation of several voice activated functions of the infotainment and climate control systems without the
need to touch any controls manually. The following systems include JaguarVoice functionality;
Navigation system
Phone system
Climate control system
Vehicle display system
Vehicle notepad
The 'notepad' facility allows voice notes to be recorded. Nametags for phone dialing and navigation locations allow the system
to be personalized and there is a help and tutorial function to provide advice on using the system.
The system allows the vehicle user to concentrate fully on driving the vehicle, without any need to divert their eyes from the
road ahead in order to check information read outs on the vehicle instrument panel information units. The voice control system
also feeds back audible information to the vehicle user.
JaguarVoice is a key component of the navigation system, allowing hands free control when issuing navigation commands.
The system is controlled by the voice button on the left hand side of the steering wheel. Voice commands are picked up by a
dedicated microphone. When giving a voice command audible feedback will be heard through the vehicle’s audio speakers.
Item Description
1 JaguarVoice button
Efficient operation of JaguarVoice is reliant on the user understanding some of the following basic operating conditions;
Face forwards, sitting in a normal driving position

After pressing the voice button, always wait for the end of the tone before speaking.
Speak naturally, as if you were talking to a passenger or on the phone without pausing between words
When the system asks for more information, always wait for the end of the tone before responding
Always say numbers correctly
Excessive noise, for example while driving with windows open, may cause voice command mis-recognition. For example
if it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
Most accents are understood without difficulty, but if the system does not recognize the command it will respond "SORRY" and
allow two more attempts to say the command.
Voice feedback is given in the same language as the command recognition. It is possible to change the language of the speech
control system.
Information and Entertainment System - Video System - Component
Location
ItemDescription
2 Touch-screen
4 Microphone
5 Triple TV (television) antenna module
6 RF filter
7 Single TV (television) antenna module
8 Power amplifier
9 TV (television) tuner
10 RF filter
12 Steering wheel remote controls
Information and Entertainment System - Video System - Overview
OVERVIEW
The Television system combines digital and analogue reception. The digital element is similar to the home based freeview
system, and displays information such as current channel detail. The Japanese market uses the analogue signal as the
digital format is not compatible.
For legal reasons, the Touch-screen Television image can only be displayed when the vehicle is at rest, however the
system is configured not to constantly switch on and off in stop-start traffic. It is possible to listen to Television sound as
the vehicle is moving.
Information and Entertainment System - Video System - System Operation
Control Diagram
• NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN bus; P = MOST ring; T = CoAxial; I
= Composite video signal
ItemDescription
2 TV (television) tuner
3 Touch-screen
4 Microphone
6 Speakers
7 Power amplifier
8 Clock spring
9 Steering wheel remote controls
www.JagDocs.com
System Operation
The Television system has various levels of user control through the Touch-screen, ICP (integrated control panel) and
steering wheel control panel. The system includes nine analogue and nine digital channel pre-sets. As with the audio
system, the user can search up or down and store by a long press of the selected channel button. The system offers a
choice of screen aspect ratios similar to a typical domestic receiver, giving options between the standard 4:3 format, wide
screen 16:9 format and zoom to fill the screen.
To provide the strongest possible signal the Television tuner receives signals from 4 antenna sources located in the
heated rear window. Unlike domestic systems this system gives a more progressive picture loss if the signal is lost. The
signal loss is indicated to the user by a ‘loss of reception’ screen message.
The Television system is primarily controlled from the Touch-screen and the ICP (integrated control panel) which are
located in the center of the instrument panel. Control signals from the Touch-screen display are sent on the MOST (media
oriented systems transport) ring to the Television tuner. The Television tuner uses a dedicated CVBS (composite video
signal) bus to transmit video signals to the Touch-screen.
Control signals from the ICP (Integrated control panel) are relayed on the medium speed CAN bus to the ICM (information
control module). The ICM (information control module) relays the control signals to the Television tuner on the MOST
(media oriented systems transport) ring. The ICM (information control module) is the timing master for the MOST (media
oriented systems transport) ring and also hosts a gateway function between the medium speed CAN bus and the MOST
(media oriented systems transport) ring.
Depending upon the audio system version fitted the Television tuner audio output signals are sent on the MOST (media
oriented systems transport) ring to the IAM (integrated audio module) or the power amplifier for speaker output.
TELEVISION TUNER
The television tuner is a DVB-T (digital video broadcasting - terrestrial) receiver and consists of a 'front end' which is made
up of a tuner and a demodulator. Following pre-filtering, the tuner converts the signal from the antenna to an intermediate
frequency. In the demodulator, the signal is first converted to a basic frequency, so that a signal from a transponder can
be forwarded to the MPEG decoder as a transport stream. The transport stream usually contains several television
channels along with relevant auxiliary services such as teletext, subtitles and electronic program guides.
• NOTE: Not all digital features such as text and programme listings are currently available.
Control signals from the Touch-screen display are sent on the MOST (media oriented systems transport) ring to the
television tuner. The television tuner uses the dedicated CVBS (composite video signal) bus to transmit its video signals
to the Touch-screen. The CVBS (composite video signal) system utilizes a single wire transmission system and is limited in
bandwidth to less than 6MHz.
No configuration procedure is required if the television tuner is replaced. Calibration of the television tuner using the
Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new technology becomes available or any
Television Antennas
ItemDescription
2 RF filter
4 Heated rear window
5 Heated rear window upper section
6 Heated rear window lower section
8 RF filter
The television tuner receives digital and analogue television signals through 4 antennas located in the heated rear
window. 3 of the antennas are connected to the triple antenna amplifier/module located on the RH (right-hand) side of the
heated rear window. A fourth antenna is connected to the single antenna amplifier/module located on the LH (left-hand)
side of the heated rear window.
The combination of signals from several antennas is known as 'diversity' reception. For example using two or more
antennas can reduce the signal error rate by 50%, which is of critical importance for mobile receivers.
Vehicle or other component generated electromagnetic interference may cause unwanted disturbance in the television
reception signals. The disturbance may interrupt, obstruct, or otherwise degrade or limit the effective performance of the
circuit.
Double coil RF (radio frequency) filters, which act as RF (radio frequency) isolators, are located on both sides of the heated
rear window and are used to reduce any electromagnetic interference. The LH side RF (radio frequency) filter is connected
across the heated rear window power supply and used to separate the DC (direct current) interference from the RF (radio
frequency) signals. The positive filter is present on all vehicle types and markets.
The right hand side double coil RF (radio frequency) filter is only used in conjunction with the television antenna modules
and is connected across the heated rear window ground circuit. If a television system is not fitted a filter is used which is
linked directly to ground.
Touch-Screen
ItemDescription
1 Touch-screen
3 Home menu button
The Touch-screen is the primary user interface for the television system. From the 'Home' screen menu television is a
sub-menu of 'Audio'. The Touch-screen communicates with the television tuner. Video signals to the Touch-screen are
transmitted from the television tuner.

ItemDescription
1 Touch-screen
2 Seek up button
3 Settings button
4 On/off and volume control
5 Source button
6 Seek down button
The ICP (integrated control panel) duplicates many of the Touch-screen television user control features. The ICP
(integrated control panel) communicates with the television system through the medium speed CAN and MOST (media
orientated systems transport) bus systems.
ItemDescription
1 Volume adjustment
2 Change pre-set TV (television) stations
3 Select source
4 Audio mute control/JaguarVoice control
Additional control of the television system is available in the form of steering wheel mounted switches which are located
on the left hand side of the steering wheel. The 4 switches provide for volume adjustment, change pre-set television
stations, select media source and finally audio mute control. The mute control is also used for JaguarVoice control.
Information and Entertainment System - Information and Entertainment
System
For additional information. REFER to: (415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information)
Information and Entertainment System (Diagnosis and Testing),

Cellular Phone (Diagnosis and Testing),
Navigation System (Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Audio Unit
Removal
3. CAUTION: Protect the surrounding trim to avoid

damage.
4. CAUTION: Cover fiber optic cable connectors to

minimize dust ingress and avoid bending the cables in a
radius of less than 30 mm.
Torque: 3 Nm
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Audio Unit Antenna Amplifier
Removal
2. Refer to: C-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4.
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Audio and Climate Control
Assembly
Removal
1. Remove both floor console side trim panels.
2. Torque: 4 Nm
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Front Door Speaker
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05, Removal and Installation).
2.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Display
Removal
2. Refer to: Center Registers (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and

Installation).
3. Torque: 2 Nm
4. CAUTION: Cover fiber optic cable connectors to

minimize dust ingress and avoid bending the cables in a
radius of less than 30 mm.
Torque: 3 Nm
Installation

Module
Removal
2. Refer to: Audio Unit (415-01A Information and Entertainment System,

3. Torque: 3 Nm
Installation
1. NOTE: New units must be configured using the Programmable

Module Installation Routine in the diagnostic tool.

Information and Entertainment System - Instrument Panel Speaker
Removal
2. Refer to: Instrument Panel Speaker Grille (501-05 Interior Trim and
3. Torque: 2 Nm
4.
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Rear Door Speaker
Removal
1. Refer to: Rear Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
2.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Removal

2. Refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental Restraint

3. Refer to: Upshift Paddle Switch (307-05A Automatic

Installation).
4. Refer to: Downshift Paddle Switch (307-05A Automatic

Installation).
5. Torque: 3 Nm
6. Torque: 3 Nm
7. Torque: 6 Nm
8.
9.
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Subwoofer Amplifier
Removal

3. Torque: 7 Nm
4. Torque: 7 Nm
5.

Torque: 7 Nm
7. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Subwoofer Speaker
Removal
2.
3. Torque: 6 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4. Torque: 6 Nm
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Satellite Radio Tuner
Removal
NOTES:
3.
Torque: 10 Nm
6. Torque: 10 Nm
7.
Installation
1. NOTE: If a new component is installed, a link lead must

be installed to the module in the position shown.

Information and Entertainment System - DTC: Audio Input Control Module -
Audio Input Control Module
This section of the manual concerns diagnostic procedures for the Dension audio input control module. For a detailed
description of the information and entertainment system, refer to the relevant description and operation sections in the
workshop manual
Visual Inspection
Audio input control module Fuses

Integrated audio module Audio amplifier module
Integrated control panel Integrated audio module
Touch screen display Integrated control panel
Loudspeakers Touch screen display
Loudspeakers
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for diagnostic trouble codes and refer to the relevant diagnostic trouble codes
index
Audio Input Control Module Diagnostics
NOTE: If problems are reported with the audio input control module, prior to further diagnostic checks or replacement of
components, first perform a hardware reset by depressing the reset button for a minimum of two seconds. If problems persist,
refer to the symptom charts below
Performing A Hardware Reset
Symptom Chart - Intermittent Fault With iPOD® Playback

Intermittent fault
with iPOD® The connected iPOD® unit has See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A1
playback crashed or frozen "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
www.JagDocs.com
The connected iPOD® unit's See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A2
battery is not holding charge and "Check The iPOD® Battery" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
requires replacement
The iPOD® dock cable is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A3
securely installed "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When Connected To The
The iPOD® dock cable is faulty Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Symptom Chart - Intermittent Fault With Playback From USB Device

Intermittent fault
with USB The USB memory stick Check for correct operation by connecting another working USB
playback is damaged or faulty memory stick loaded with a compatible test file (files may be
The USB memory stick downloaded from Dension website). If fault clears, then the original
is incompatible with USB stick should be replaced. If problem persists, suspect a fault with
the audio input control the USB extension cable
module
The USB extension See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test B3 "Check The
cable is not securely USB Extension Cable Is Operational And Securely Installed" below GO
installed to Pinpoint Test B.
The USB extension
cable is faulty
The audio input control Ensure all connectors of the audio input control module power harness
module power harness are correctly secured
is not securely installed If problem persists, check and install a new audio input control
The audio input control module power harness
module power harness
is faulty
Not all sound

files on the USB Sound files may be Check that affected sound file is encoded in a compatible file format
are played saved in an - Compatible file formats: AAC (up to 320 kbit/s); MP3 (up to
incompatible file format 320 kbit/s); MP3 variable bit rate (up to 320 kbit/s); WAV -
uncompressed files; OGG (up to 320 kbit/s); WMA - except
DRM protected files (up to 320 kbit/s)
Sound files may be Check integrity of affected files and remove any damaged files from
corrupted the memory stick
Symptom Chart - No Response From CDC Button

No response
when the CDC USB input or iPOD® input First check operation of iPOD® playback. If iPOD® operates
button is pressed faulty normally but USB playback is faulty, then follow diagnostic
procedures as specified in pinpoint test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback operates normally,
then follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A
The auxiliary input may be See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A5:
switched to bypass mode "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary Input Unit Is
Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
The audio input control Ensure all connectors of the audio input control module power
module power harness is not harness are correctly secured
securely installed See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint tests C1:
The audio input control "Check The Integrity Of Power Supply From Vehicle" and C2:
module power "Check The Integrity And Operation Of The Audio Input Control
supply/harness is faulty Module Power Harness" below GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Optical cables/connectors (if Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately to avoid
fitted) are not securely pinching the cable and with no excessive bends or kinks. Ensure
installed all connectors of the optical cables are correctly secured. Replace
Optical cables/connectors (if any damaged or faulty optical cables and/or connectors as
fitted) are faulty required
If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical cables are
configured in a closed loop so that the optical circuit is intact
Symptom Chart - iPOD® Related Faults
iPOD® inoperative
iPOD® configured or If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback operates
connected incorrectly normally, then follow diagnostic procedures as
specified in pinpoint test A GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® does not operate and

in-car display shows "99" on The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
the screen unit has crashed or frozen A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test

unit's battery is flat and A2 "Check The iPOD® Battery" below GO to Pinpoint
requires charging Test A.
The connected iPOD®
unit's battery is not
holding charge and
The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
compatible with the audio A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The Audio
input control module Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® playback drops out and

system reverts to radio input USB input or iPOD® input First check operation of iPOD® playback. If iPOD®
faulty operates normally but USB playback is faulty, then
follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback operates
normally, then follow diagnostic procedures as

unit has crashed or frozen A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.

holding charge and
The auxiliary input unit is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
faulty A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary Input Unit"
below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® unit will not charge

when connected to the audio The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
input control module compatible with the audio A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The Audio
The iPOD® dock cable is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
not securely installed A3 "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When Connected To
The iPOD® dock cable is The Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint
faulty Test A.
iPOD® unit keeps cutting out

and rebooting The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
The iPOD® dock cable is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
not securely installed A3 "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When Connected To
The iPOD® dock cable is The Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint
faulty Test A.

holding charge and
Unable to select specific

content on the iPOD® (ie: an Content/sound files Check if files/content can be accessed by iPOD® when
individual artist, album or corrupted or incompatible it is disconnected from the audio input control module.
song) with the iPOD® If fault persists, advise customer to renew or replace
the affected files
iPOD® not recognised when

connected The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
unit has crashed or frozen A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
USB input or iPOD® input First check operation of iPOD® playback. If iPOD®
faulty operates normally but USB playback is faulty, then
follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback operates
normally, then follow diagnostic procedures as
The auxiliary input may See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
be switched to bypass A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary
mode Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
The auxiliary input unit is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
faulty A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary Input Unit"
below GO to Pinpoint Test A.

holding charge and
The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
iPOD® connector pins are

misaligned The iPOD® dock cable is Replace dock cable as required. To ensure optimum
faulty compatibility, the cable with the white mini-DIN
connector - Part No C2S51762 - should be used
iPOD® not working at all. If

reset, the system will work for Optical cables/connectors Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately to
6 songs then cuts out again. (if fitted) are not securely avoid pinching the cable and with no excessive bends
CDC button inoperative and installed or kinks. Ensure all connectors of the optical cables
CD sometimes cuts off for 2-3 Optical cables/connectors are correctly secured. Replace any damaged or faulty
seconds (if fitted) are faulty optical cables and/or connectors as required
If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical
cables are configured in a closed loop so that the
optical circuit is intact
iPOD® inoperative. Display

shows no magazine The auxiliary input may See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
be switched to bypass A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary
mode Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® inoperative. Display

shows menu for CD6 and has Audio input control Download and install the latest system software.
to load all the tracks module software requires Software releases are available on the Dension
updating website - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
Symptom Chart - USB Memory Stick/Storage Device Related Faults

No playback from memory
stick/storage device Memory stick/storage If iPOD® operates normally but USB playback is faulty,
device configured or then follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
connected incorrectly test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Symptom Chart - System Faults
System defaults to Audio/CD
Changer The auxiliary input unit See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
may be switched to test A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary
bypass mode Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
The auxiliary input unit is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

faulty test A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary Input
Unit" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
The memory stick/storage See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

device is not correctly test B1 "Check For Correct Formatting" below GO to
formatted Pinpoint Test B.
The USB extension cable See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

is not securely installed test B3 "Check The USB Extension Cable Is
The USB extension cable Operational And Securely Installed" below GO to
is faulty Pinpoint Test B.
The USB memory stick is Check for correct operation by connecting another
damaged or faulty working USB memory stick loaded with a compatible
The USB memory stick is test file (files may be downloaded from Dension
incompatible with the website). If fault clears, then the original USB stick
audio input control should be replaced. If problem persists, suspect a
module fault with the USB extension cable
The storage capacity of See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

the memory stick/storage test B4 "Check The Capacity Of The Memory
device is close to or Stick/Storage Device" below GO to Pinpoint Test B.
exceeds 8 Gigabytes
The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

unit's battery is flat and test A2 "Check The iPOD® Battery" below GO to
requires charging Pinpoint Test A.
holding charge and
The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

compatible with the audio test A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The
input control module Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint
Test A.
The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

unit has crashed or frozen test A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below
No sound from speakers The audio input control Ensure all connectors of the audio input control
(either front/rear or module power harness is module power harness are correctly secured
left/right) during not securely installed See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
playback from The audio input control tests C1: "Check The Integrity Of Power Supply From
iPOD®/memory stick module power Vehicle" and C2: "Check The Integrity And Operation
Audio system loses supply/harness is faulty Of The Audio Input Control Module Power Harness"
connection to below GO to Pinpoint Test C.
iPOD®/memory stick
during playback
iPOD® and radio Optical cables/connectors Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately to
playback skips after unit (if fitted) are not securely avoid pinching the cable and with no excessive bends
has been operating for 4 installed or kinks. Ensure all connectors of the optical cables
minutes Optical cables/connectors are correctly secured. Replace any damaged or faulty
(if fitted) are faulty optical cables and/or connectors as required
If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical
cables are configured in a closed loop so that the
optical circuit is intact
The iPOD® dock cable is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

not securely installed test A3 "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When
The iPOD® dock cable is Connected To The Audio Input Control Module" below
faulty GO to Pinpoint Test A.
PINPOINT TEST A : IPOD® INOPERATIVE
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE IPOD®
1 Check if the iPOD® has crashed or frozen (it is unresponsive to any control commands)
Has the iPOD® crashed or frozen?
Yes
Reset the iPOD® or refer to Apple service procedures
No
GO to A2.
A2: CHECK THE IPOD® BATTERY
1 Check the charge state of the iPOD® battery
Is the iPOD® battery flat?
Yes
Charge the iPOD® battery for at least 10 minutes either by connecting to the charger supplied with the
iPOD® or by connecting to the audio input control module. If iPOD® will not charge when connected to
the audio input control module and with the ignition on thenGO to A3.
No
GO to A3.
A3: CHECK THE IPOD® IS CHARGING WHEN CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE
iPOD® Dock Connector - Pin Configuration
1 Check that the iPOD® is charging when connected to the audio input control module
2 Ignition switch in position II.
3 Ensure the iPOD® dock cable is securely connected
Does the iPOD® charge up while connected to the audio input control module?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
Check the integrity of the iPOD® dock cable and its connections. Disconnect the iPOD® and check the
voltage readings of the iPOD® dock cable using a multimeter (Pin B8: 5 volts/Pin B15: GND). If a fault is
noted, replace dock cable as required. To ensure optimum compatibility, the cable with the white mini-DIN
connector - Part No C2S51762 - should be used. If iPOD® will not charge after replacement, then GO to
A4.
A4: CHECK THE IPOD® IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE
NOTES:
Some of the earlier (pre-2004) iPOD® models may not be compatible with the audio input control module. In order to
optimise functionality the audio input control module may require a firmware update and/or connection via the latest iPOD®
dock cable with the white mini-DIN connector - Part No C2S51762. See the manufacturer website for further details -
http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
Some of the earlier (pre-2004) iPOD® models may not be compatible with the audio input control module. In order to
optimise functionality the audio input control module may require a firmware update and/or connection via the latest iPOD®
dock cable with the white mini-DIN connector - Part No C2S51762. See the manufacturer website for further details -
http://www.dension.com
1 Determine whether the iPOD® model being used is compatible with the audio input control module
installed in the vehicle
2 Ensure the latest firmware updates are installed and an appropriate iPOD® dock cable is securely
connected
3 For advice, check details on the Dension website - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
www.JagDocs.com
Is the iPOD® compatible with the audio input control module?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Advise customer that an alternative device is required
A5: CHECK IF THE BYPASS SWITCH ON THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT IS ACTIVATED
Auxiliary Input Unit - Bypass Switch
1 Check the status of the bypass switch on the auxiliary input unit
Is the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
Toggle the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position. Turn off the ignition and wait two
minutes until the blue LED on the auxiliary input unit is extinguished. Switch ignition back on the complete
the switching process
A6: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT
1 Check the operation of the auxiliary input unit
2 Disconnect the auxiliary input unit from the audio input control module.
3 Ignition switch in position 0.
4 Wait two minutes
5 Install a new auxiliary input unit
Is the iPOD® now working?
Yes
No
Check the integrity of the iPOD® dock cable and its connectionsGO to A3.
PINPOINT TEST B : USB/STORAGE DEVICE DOES NOT POWER UP WHEN CONNECTED
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FOR CORRECT FORMATTING
NOTE: The storage device needs to be configured to FAT16 or FAT32 format
1 Check if the memory stick/storage device is correctly formatted

Is the storage device/memory stick configured to the FAT16 or FAT32 format?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Reformat the storage device as required
B2: CHECK FOR FAULTY OR INCOMPATIBLE MEMORY STICK/STORAGE DEVICE
NOTE: Test files may be downloaded from Dension website
1Check the operation of the USB port on the auxiliary input unit by connecting another working USB
memory stick/storage device loaded with a compatible test file
Does the system operate normally when another USB memory stick/storage device is connected?
Yes
Replace the original USB memory stick/storage device
No
GO to B3.
B3: CHECK THE USB EXTENSION CABLE IS OPERATIONAL AND SECURELY INSTALLED
1 Check the integrity of the USB extension cable and its connections
Is the USB extension cable securely pushed into the USB connection port on the audio input control module
Yes
Replace the USB extension cable
No
Secure connections and retest
B4: CHECK THE CAPACITY OF THE MEMORY STICK/STORAGE DEVICE
NOTE: The higher the capacity of the memory stick is the longer it takes to register with the audio input control module
and power up. The maximum permitted capacity is 8 Gigabytes
1 Check the storage capacity of the memory stick/storage device does not exceed 8 Gigabytes
Is the storage capacity of the memory stick/storage device 8 Gigabytes or less?
Yes
High capacity devices may require longer to register and should be allowed up to two minutes to power up
following connection to the USB port. If memory stick fails to power up after two minutes, suspect a
faulty memory stick GO to B2. or USB extension cable GO to B3.
No
The memory stick/storage device exceeds the maximum permitted capacity. Replace with a device with a
capacity of 8 Gigabytes or less
B5: CHECK IF THE BYPASS SWITCH ON THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT IS ACTIVATED
Auxiliary Input Unit - Bypass Switch
1 Check the status of the bypass switch on the auxiliary input unit
Is the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position?
Yes
GO to B6.
No
Toggle the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position. Turn off the ignition and wait
two minutes until the blue LED on the auxiliary input unit is extinguished. Switch ignition back on the
complete the switching process
B6: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT
1 Check the operation of the auxiliary input unit
2 Disconnect the auxiliary input unit from the audio input control module.
3 Ignition switch in position 0.
4 Wait two minutes
5 Replace auxiliary input unit
Is the USB memory stick/storage device now powering up?
Yes
No
Check the integrity of the USB extension cable and its connectionsGO to B3.
PINPOINT TEST C : POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/POWER HARNESS CHECKS
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY
1 Remove the retrofitted audio input control module power harness
2 Reconnect the original power harness
Are the standard infotainment components on the vehicle operating normally?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
Check power and ground connections to the affected modules. Check for related power or lost
communications DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index. Check fuses and battery charging system.
Rectify as necessary
C2: CHECK THE INTEGRITY AND OPERATION OF THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE POWER HARNESS
1 SELECT APPROPRIATE HARNESS TYPE BASED ON CONFIGURATION OF MICROFIT CONNECTOR
Audio Input Control Module Power Harness - 2x11 Microfit Connector
2 Reconnect the retrofit audio input control module power harness

3 Check the voltages of the 2x11 audio input control module microfit connector using a multimeter
Red wire: permanent 12 volts supply
Black wire: GND
Blue wire: switched 12 volts
Audio Input Control Module Power Harness - 2x2 Microfit Connector
4 Reconnect the retrofit audio input control module power harness

5 Check the voltages of the 2x2 audio input control module microfit connector using a multimeter
Red wire: permanent 12 volts supply
Black wire: GND
Purple wire: switched 12 volts
Are the voltage readings correct?

Yes
No further action
No
Replace the audio input control module power harness
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to the relevant DTC index
Exterior Lighting -
Item Specification
Low beam headlamp bulb - Vehicles with conventional headlamps - non Federal H7
Low beam headlamp bulb - Vehicles with conventional headlamps - Federal H11
Low beam headlamp bulb - Vehicles with xenon headlamps D1S
High beam headlamp bulb H7
Cornering lamp bulb H8
Side repeater lamp bulb WY5W
Side marker lamp bulb - Federal W5W
Front turn signal lamp bulb - non Federal PY21W
Front turn signal lamp bulb - Federal 3457 AK
Rear turn signal lamp bulb PY19W
Front side/parking lamp bulb - Vehicles built up to 01/2009 W5W halogen cool blue
Front side/parking lamp bulb - Vehicles built 02/2009 onwards W5W
Reversing lamp bulb PS19W
Exterior Lighting - Exterior Lighting - Component Location
Item Description
1 Front height sensor
2 Headlamp leveling module
3 Rain/light sensor
4 Rear height sensor
5 Light switch - LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch
7 Side marker lamp (NAS only) (2 off)
8 Front turn signal indicator (2 off)
9 Halogen or xenon headlamp projector module (2 off)
10 Cornering/Static bending lamp (where fitted) (2 off)
www.JagDocs.com
11 Headlamp telescopic power washer (2 off)
12 Front side lamp (2 off)
13 High beam only halogen lamp (2 off)
14 High Mounted Stop Lamp (HMSL) LED (light emitting diode)'s
15 License plate lamps (2 off)
16 Rear fog lamp (2 off)
17 Rear turn signal indicator (2 off)
18 Reverse lamp (2 off)
19 Side lamp/stop lamp LED's (2 off)
20 Side marker LED's (All markets) (2 off)
21 Side repeater lamp (2 off)
Exterior Lighting - Exterior Lighting - Overview
OVERVIEW
The lighting systems are controlled by the EJB (engine junction box), RJB (rear junction box) and the CJB (central junction
box). The two boxes contain fuses, relays and microprocessors to control the power supply and functionality of the lighting
systems.
Driver lighting selections using the LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch or the auxiliary lighting switch are
passed to the CJB via the instrument cluster.
The lighting system has an 'auto' lights function which is controlled by the CJB on receipt of signals from the rain/light sensor
located at the top of the windscreen. The exterior lights are turned on or off in response to ambient light signals from the
rain/light sensor on a LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection to the CJB . The auto lights can also be activated when
the windshield wipers are activated by signals from the rain sensor, which is located at the top of the windshield or when the
driver activates the wipers in the fast wipe position.
Two levels of headlamp specification are available; halogen or xenon. In certain markets the headlamps feature a cornering
lamp or a static bending lamp which illuminates the area at the side of the vehicle when turning into driveways for example.
North American Specification (NAS) vehicles have a side marker lamp installed in the headlamp assembly. Replacement of any
of the headlamp bulbs requires removal of the headlamp assembly.
The tail lamp comprises two separate lamp assemblies. The turn signal indicator, side and stop lamps and reverse lamps are
located in each rear fender tail lamp assembly. The rear fog lamps are located in separate units attached to the luggage
compartment lid. A side marker lamp is fitted to the rear fender tail lamp assembly and is fitted in all markets.
Two systems of headlamp leveling are available; manual leveling which is only available on halogen headlamps and static
dynamic leveling which is available on xenon headlamps. The manual system uses a thumbwheel rheostat to adjust the
vertical alignment of the headlamps to compensate for differing vehicle loading. The static dynamic system uses height
sensors fitted to the front and rear suspension and a headlamp leveling module which periodically monitors the vehicle
attitude and adjusts the headlamp vertical alignment accordingly.
Exterior Lighting - Exterior Lighting - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
XENON HEADLAMPS - CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item Description
A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus
1 Battery
5 Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus to other vehicle systems
7 Front height sensor
8 Rear height sensor
9 RH (right-hand) headlamp assembly
10 LH (left-hand) headlamp assembly
11 Lighting control switch - LH steering column multifunction switch
HALOGEN HEADLAMPS - CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item Description
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus
1 Battery
2 BJB
3 CJB
4 EJB
6 RH headlamp assembly
7 LH headlamp assembly
SIDE LAMPS/TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS/FOG LAMPS - CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item Description
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus
1 Battery
2 BJB - Megafuse
3 Stop lamp switch
7 RH licence plate lamp
www.JagDocs.com
8 LH licence plate lamp
9 LH fog lamp
10 RH fog lamp
11 High mounted stop lamp
12 RH tail lamp assembly
13 LH tail lamp assembly
14 RH door mirror side repeater
15 LH door mirror side repeater
16 RH front door module
18 LH front door module
20 Rain/light sensor
22 RH headlamp assembly - side lamp and side marker lamp (if fitted)
23 CJB
24 LH headlamp assembly - side lamp and side marker lamp (if fitted)
System Operation
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX (CJB) AND REAR JUNCTION BOX (RJB)
The CJB is an integrated unit which controls body functions and power distribution. The CJB is located on the RH 'A' pillar.
The RJB also controls body functions and power distribution and is located in the RH side of the luggage compartment.
Central Junction Box
The CJB receives inputs from the following switches via the instrument cluster and the medium speed CAN bus:
LH Steering column multifunction switch

- Side lamp position
- Headlamp position
- Automatic (AUTO) position
- Timer delay positions
- Turn signal indicators
- Headlamp flash and main beam positions.
The CJB receives direct inputs from the following components:
Stop lamp switch

Rain/light sensor.
The CJB provides power supplies to the following lamps:
LH and RH front side lamps

LH and RH front side marker lamps (if fitted)
LH and RH static bending lamp (if fitted)
LH and RH low beam headlamp
LH and RH high beam headlamp.
Rear Junction Box
The RJB provides power supplies to the following lamps:
LH and RH tail lamps

LH and RH stop lamps
LH and RH front turn signal indicators
LH and RH rear turn signal indicators
LH and RH licence plate lamps
LH and RH side marker lamps
High mounted stop lamp
Rear fog lamps
Reverse lamps.
The RJB also provides a power supply to the LH and RH door modules. The door modules use the power supply to activate the
turn signal indicator side repeater lamps located in the door mirrors, on receipt of a medium speed CAN bus message from the
RJB.
Circuit Protection
The CJB and the RJB provide circuit protection for their respective lighting circuits. The exterior lighting circuits are protected
by Field Effect Transistors (FET's). The FET's can detect overloads and short circuits and respond to heat generated by
increased current flow caused by a short circuit.
On a normal conventionally protected circuit this would cause a fuse to blow. The FET's respond to the heat increase and
disconnect the power supply to the affected circuit. When the fault is rectified or the FET has cooled, the FET will reset and
operate the circuit normally. If the fault persists the FET will cycle, disconnecting and reconnecting the power supply.
The CJB and the RJB store fault codes which can be retrieved using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system. The fault code will
identify that there is a fault on a particular output circuit which will assist with fault diagnosis and detection.
Alarm Indications
The exterior lighting system is used for alarm arm and disarm requests to show alarm system status.
When the driver locks and arms the vehicle, a visual indication of a successful lock and arm request is displayed to the driver
by a single flash of the hazard flashers. If the vehicle is superlocked, then the hazard flashers will flash a second time (200 ms
off and 200 ms on) to confirm the superlock request.
If the alarm is activated, the hazard flashers are operated for 10, 30 second cycles of 200 ms on and 200 ms off, with a 10
second delay between each cycle.
NOTE: On North American Specification (NAS) vehicles, the delay between the cycle when the alarm is activated is 60
seconds.
Lights on Warning
When the ignition is in the off power mode 0 or accessory power mode 4 and the lighting control switch is in the side lamp or
headlamp position, a warning chime will sound if the driver's door is opened. This indicates to the driver that the exterior
lights have been left switched on.
The chime is generated from the instrument cluster sounder on receipt of a lights on signal, a driver's door open signal and an
ignition off power mode 0 or accessory power mode 4 signal via a medium speed CAN bus signal from the CJB.
Headlamp Timer
The RJB controls the headlamp timer function which allows the headlamps to remain on for a period of time after leaving the
vehicle. This is a driver convenience feature which illuminates the driveway after leaving the vehicle.
To operate the timer function the lighting control switch must be in one of the three headlamp timer positions when the
ignition status is changed from ignition on power mode 6 to the off power mode 0. The timer function will then be initiated and
the low beam headlamps will be illuminated for the selected timer period.
NOTE: If the lighting switch is in the AUTO position, the headlamp timer will not function when the ignition is changed to
off power mode 0.
When the lighting control switch is in the autolamp exit delay position, the lighting control switch reference voltage flows
through 4 of the resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the
medium speed CAN bus to the RJB that autolamps has been selected.
Depending on the selected exit delay position, the reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 3, 2
or 1 resistors which is detected by the instrument cluster. The cluster outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the
RJB that autolamp exit delay period has been selected at 30, 60 or 120 seconds respectively.
Crash Signal Activation
When a crash signal is transmitted from the RCM (restraints control module), the RJB activates the hazard flashers. The hazard
flashers continue to operate until the ignition is in the off power mode 0 or accessory power mode 6. Once this ignition state
has occurred, the RCM will cease to transmit the crash signal.
LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCH

The instrument cluster outputs 2 reference voltages to the rotary lighting control switch; one feed being supplied to the light
selection function of the switch and the second feed being supplied to the auto headlamp exit delay function. The switch
position is determined by instrument cluster by the change in returned signal voltage which is routed through up to 4 resistors
in series depending on the selection made.
OFF - When the lighting control switch is in the off position, the reference voltage flows through 1 of the resistors. The
CJB that no lighting selection is made. The reference voltage to the auto headlamp exit delay switch is routed through 4
resistors which is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that
auto headlamp or exit delay has not been selected.
SIDE LAMPS - When the lighting control switch is in the side lamp position, the reference voltage flows through 2 of the
resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed
CAN bus to the CJB to activate the side lamps. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 4
resistors which is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that
auto headlamp or exit delay has not been selected.
HEADLAMPS - When the lighting control switch is in the headlamp position, the reference voltage flows through 3 of the
CAN bus to the CJB to activate the headlamps. The reference voltage to the auto headlamp exit delay switch is routed through
4 resistors which is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB
that auto headlamp or exit delay has not been selected.
AUTOLAMPS - When the lighting control switch is in the auto headlamp position, the reference voltage flows through 4 of the
CAN bus to the CJB to activate the autolamp function. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed
through 4 resistors which is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the
CJB that auto headlamp has been selected.
AUXILIARY LIGHTING SWITCH

Headlamp Leveling Rotary Thumbwheel (Halogen headlamps only)
A power supply is passed to the headlamp leveling thumbwheel from the ignition relay in the EJB. Depending on the position
of the thumbwheel, the voltage passes through 1, 2 or 3 resistors connected in series. The voltage through the resistors is
passed to the headlamp leveling motor controller in each headlamp. The received voltage is determined as a request for the
appropriate level position and the controller powers the headlamp level motors to the applicable position for each headlamp.
Rear Fog Lamp Switch
The instrument cluster supplies a reference voltage and return to the rear fog lamp switch. The fog lamp switch is a
non-latching, momentary switch.
When the fog lamp switch is off the reference voltage is passed through a 1Kohm resistor. The voltage through the resistor is
returned to the instrument cluster that determines that no request for fog lamp operation has been made.
When the driver presses the fog lamp switch, the reference voltage is passed through a 330 ohm resistor. The change is return
voltage is sensed by the instrument cluster which determines fog lamp operation has been requested. The instrument cluster
transmits a medium speed CAN bus signal to the RJB providing the lighting control switch is in the correct position. The RJB
reacts to the message and provides a power supply to the 3 LED (light emitting diode)'s in each rear fog lamp. A fog lamp
warning lamp in the instrument cluster will also be illuminated when the fog lamps are operating.
The RJB will only activate the rear fog lamps if the headlamps are selected on or are active with auto headlamp activation.
When the headlamps are turned off the fog lamps are also turned off. When the headlamps are next switched on, the fog
lamps will not be activated until the driver requests fog lamp operation.
NOTE: The fog lamps do operate when DRL (daytime running lamps) are active.
HEADLAMP LEVELING
Manual Headlamp Leveling - Halogen headlamps only
A power supply is passed to the headlamp leveling motor in each headlamp from the ignition relay in the EJB. When a signal
voltage is received from the headlamp leveling rotary thumbwheel, the headlamp leveling motor controller in each headlamp
uses the power supply to operate the motors and move the headlamp to the requested position.
Static Dynamic Headlamp Leveling - Xenon headlamps only
The headlamp leveling module receives a power supply from the ignition relay in the EJB. The same power supply is also
supplied to the headlamp leveling motor in each headlamp assembly. The front and rear height sensors are connected to the
headlamp leveling module and receive a power and ground from the module. Each sensor has a signal line to the headlamp
leveling module to return height information to the module. The module uses the height signals from the sensors to calculate
the vehicle attitude and supplies a signal to each motor to power the headlamp to the required position.
EXTERIOR BULB TYPE/RATING
The following table shows the bulbs used for the exterior lighting system and their type and specification.
NOTE: The tail lamps, side marker lamps, stop lamps, high mounted stop lamp and rear fog lamps are illuminated by
LED's and are non-serviceable components.
Bulb Type Rating

Halogen headlamp - Projector module low/high beam - Not NAS H7 55W
Halogen headlamp - Projector module low/high beam - NAS only H11 60W
Xenon headlamp - Projector module low/high beam - All markets D1S 35W
High beam only (halogen) - High/low beam (xenon) - All markets H7 55W
Front side lamps - all markets W5W Halogen cool blue (HCB) 5W
Front turn signal indicators - Not NAS PY21W 21W
Front turn signal indicators - NAS only 3457AK 27W
Rear turn signal indicators - All markets PSY19W 19W
Turn signal indicator side repeaters - All markets WY5W 5W
Bulb Type Rating
Reverse lamps - All markets PS19W 19W
Licence plate lamps - All markets W5W 5W
LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCH
Item Description
1 Off position
2 Side lamp position
3 High beam position
5 Headlamp flash/high beam off position
7 Headlamp position
8 AUTO headlamp position
9 Headlamp timer 120 second delay position
10 Headlamp timer 60 second delay position
11 Headlamp timer 30 second timer delay position
The lighting control switch is located on the LH steering column multifunction switch. The lighting control switch is a rotary
control with positions for the following lighting functions:
Off
Side lamps
Headlamps
AUTO headlamps
Headlamp timer (3 time period selections).
The LH steering column multifunction switch also provides for the following functions:
Low beam headlamps

High beam headlamps
Headlamp flash
LH and RH turn signal indicators
Trip computer function button.
The switch has a turn signal indicator lane change function. If the switch is gently pushed to either turn signal indicator
position and then released, the applicable turn signal indicators will flash 3 times and then will be automatically cancelled. If a
turn signal indicator bulb fails, the green turn signal warning indicator in the instrument cluster will flash at twice the normal
rate and the audible ticking from the instrument cluster sounder will also be at twice the normal rate.
AUXILIARY LIGHTING SWITCH
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) switch shown
Item Description
1 Headlamp leveling rotary thumbwheel (halogen headlamps only)
2 Instrument panel illumination dimmer thumbwheel
3 Luggage compartment lid release switch
4 Forward alert switch (if fitted)
5 Rear fog lamp switch
The auxiliary lighting switch is located in the instrument panel, adjacent to the steering column. The switch has a rear fog
lamp switch and a rotary thumbwheel to adjust headlamp leveling on vehicles with halogen headlamps. The auxiliary lighting
switch also has a forward alert switch (if fitted) and a rotary thumbwheel for instrument panel illumination dimming.
The rear fog lamp switch is a non-latching switch which provides a momentary signal to the instrument cluster. The fog lamps
can only be activated if the ignition is in power mode 6 and the headlamp or auto headlamps are selected on. If the fog lamp
switch is pressed when the fog lamps are operating, they will be switched off. If the lighting control switch is moved to the
side lamp or off position or if the auto headlamps turns off the headlamps the rear fog lamps will be extinguished. If the
headlamps are subsequently turned on the rear fog lamp operation will not be active and the rear fog lamp switch must be
pressed to activate the lamps.
HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY
Two types of headlamp are available; xenon or halogen. The headlamp is secured in the front of the vehicle with three bolts;
one outboard bolt is screwed into the front upper cross member, one inboard bolt in the front upper body gusset and one bolt
located at the rear of the headlamp assembly which locates in the front fender reinforcing panel. Bulb replacement requires the
removal of the 3 bolts and the headlamp assembly.
The rear of the headlamp has removable panels which allow access to the bulbs for replacement. A large cover can be rotated
counter-clockwise for removal allows access the headlamp low beam halogen or xenon D1S bulb. Another large removable cover
can be rotated for removal to provide access to the high beam bulb, side lamp bulb and cornering/static bending lamp bulb (if
fitted).
The headlamps have 2 adjustment screws on the rear which allow for the manual setting of the vertical and horizontal
alignment.
On NAS vehicles, the headlamp is regarded as 'Visual Optically Left' aiming. The adjustment screws must be turned equal
amounts to maintain the correlation in the vertical axis only. There is no horizontal adjustment. Refer to the Service Repair
Procedures manual for headlamp alignment data and procedures.
Each headlamp has an integral 16 pin connector which provides inputs and outputs for the various functions of the headlamp
assembly.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Xenon control module (not fitted on halogen low beam headlamps)
2 Turn signal indicator
3 Side marker lamp (NAS only)
4 Projector module - Low beam headlamp(Halogen) – Low/High beam headlamp (xenon)
5 Cornering/static bending lamp (if fitted)
6 Side lamp
7 High beam headlamp
8 Power wash jets trim cover
9 Headlamp powerwash
10 Side marker lamp bulb (NAS only)
11 Turn signal indicator bulb
12 Headlamp adjuster screw (2 off)
13 Cover - Low beam headlamp projector module bulb
14 Mounting collar
15 Xenon igniter unit and bulb
16 Xenon igniter electrical connector
17 Cornering/static bending lamp bulb (if fitted)
18 Side lamp bulb
19 High beam headlamp bulb
20 Cover - Side lamp, cornering/static bending lamp (if fitted) and high beam headlamp bulbs
Bi-Xenon Headlamp
The bi-xenon headlamp uses a projector lens, similar to the halogen headlamp. The projector module comprises an ellipsoidal
lens and a reflector. The projector reflector collects the light produced by the halogen bulb and projects the light into a focal
plane containing a shield. The contour of the shield is projected onto the road by the lens. A complex surface reflector is used
for the halogen fill in high beam lamp. This type of reflector is divided into separate parabolic segments, with each segment
having a different focal length. The low and high beam bulbs are quartz halogen H7, with a rating of 55W. The bulbs are
retained in the headlamp unit with conventional wire retaining clips.
A tourist lever mechanism is located on the right hand side of the projector module. This mechanism moves a flap to blank off
a portion of the beam spread to enable the vehicle to be driven in opposite drive hand markets without applying blanking
decals to the headlamp lens. The beam is changed by removing the access cover at the rear of the lamp assembly and moving
a small lever located near the bulb holder, at the side of the projector.
NOTE: The tourist lever is not fitted to NAS vehicles.
WARNING: The Xenon system generates up to 30000 volts and contact with this voltage could lead to fatality. Make sure
that the headlamps are switched off before working on the system.
The following safety precautions must be adhered to when working on the xenon low beam headlamp system:
DO NOT attempt any procedures on the xenon headlamps when the lights are switched on.
Handling of the D1S xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment; for example gloves and
goggles. The glass part of the bulb must not be touched.
Xenon bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
Only operate the bulb in a mounted condition in the projector module installed in the headlamp.
The xenon headlamp is known as 'bi-xenon' because it operates as both a low and high beam headlamp unit. The xenon lamp,
or High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamp as they are sometimes referred to, comprises an ellipsoidal lens with a solenoid
controlled shutter to change the beam output from low to high beam.
NOTE: If the lighting control switch is in the 'off' position, both the xenon lamp and the halogen high beam lamp will
operate when the high beam 'flash' function is operated.
The xenon headlamp system is controlled by the CJB using a control module for each headlamp and an igniter. The control
modules and the igniters provide the regulated power supply required to illuminate the bulbs through their start-up phases of
operation.
The xenon headlamp is a self contained unit located within the headlamp assembly. The unit comprises a reflector, an adaptor
ring, the lens, a shutter controller and the xenon bulb, which together forms an assembly known as the projector module. The
reflector is curved and provides the mounting point for the xenon bulb. The bulb locates in a keyway to ensure the correct
alignment in the reflector and is secured by a plastic mounting ring. The bulb is an integral component of the igniter and is
electrically connected by a connector located in the igniter unit.
The shutter controller is a solenoid which operates the shutter mechanism via a lever. The shutter is used to change the beam
projection from low beam to high beam and vice versa.
The xenon bulbs illuminate when an arc of electrical current is established between 2 electrodes within the bulb. The xenon
gas sealed in the bulb reacts to the electrical excitation and the heat generated by the current flow to produce the
characteristic blue/white light.
To operate at full efficiency, the xenon bulb goes through 3 full stages of operation before full output for continuous operation
is achieved. The 3 phases are; start-up phase, warm-up phase and continuous phase.
In the start-up phase, the bulb requires an initial high voltage starting pulse of up to 30000 volts to establish the arc. This is
produced by the igniter. The warm-up phase begins once the arc is established. The xenon control module regulates the supply
to the bulb to 2.6A which gives a lamp output of 75W. During this phase, the xenon gas begins to illuminate brightly and the
environment within the bulb stabilizes, ensuring a continual current flow between the electrodes. When the warm-up phase is
complete, the xenon control module changes to continuous phase. The supply voltage to the bulb is reduced and the operating
power required for continual operation is reduced to 35W. The process from start-up to continuous phase is completed in a very
short time.
The xenon control modules (one per headlamp) receive an operating voltage from the CJB when the headlamps are switched
on. The modules regulate the power supply required through the phases of start-up.
The igniters (one per headlamp) generate the initial high voltage required to establish the arc. The igniters have integral coils
which generate high voltage pulses required for start-up. Once the xenon bulbs are operating, the igniters provide a closed
circuit for the regulated power supply from the control modules.
Halogen Low/high Beam Headlamp
The halogen low/high beam headlamp uses a projector lens, similar to the xenon headlamp. The projector module comprises
an ellipsoidal lens and a reflector. The projector reflector collects the light produced by the halogen bulb and projects the light
into a focal plane containing a shield. The contour of the shield is projected onto the road by the lens. The low/high beam
bulbs are quartz halogen and are retained in the headlamp unit with conventional wire retaining clips.
A tourist lever mechanism is located on the right hand side of the projector module. This mechanism moves a flap to blank off
a portion of the beam spread to enable the vehicle to be driven in opposite drive hand markets without applying blanking
decals to the headlamp lens. The beam is changed by removing the access cover at the rear of the lamp assembly and moving
a small lever located near the bulb holder, at the side of the projector.
Halogen High Beam Headlamp - Xenon and Halogen

The xenon and halogen headlamps use a complex surface reflector for the halogen fill in high beam lamp only lighting unit,
which is of the same design on both headlamp types. This type of reflector has the reflector divided into separate parabolic
segments, with each segment having a different focal length.
The high beam headlamp bulbs are quartz halogen and are retained in the headlamp unit with conventional wire retaining
clips.
Cornering Lamps
NOTE: The cornering lamps are not fitted to NAS vehicles.
The cornering lamps are an optional feature designed to illuminate the direction of travel when cornering at low speeds. The
design of the lens projects a spread of light from the vehicle at approximately 45 degrees to the vehicle axis. The cornering
lamp is incorporated into the headlamp assembly and shares the same housing as the low beam headlamp. The cornering lamp
uses a 35W Halogen H8 bulb which is permanently located in an integral holder which is connected on the headlamp housing.
The holder is located in an aperture in the headlamp housing and rotated to lock. The bulb is accessible via a removable cover
on the base of the headlamp housing.
The cornering lamps are controlled by the LH steering column multifunction switch with the lighting control switch in the
headlamp position and the ignition in power mode 6. The cornering lamps are supplied power via the ignition circuit to ensure
that they do not function with the headlamp delay feature. The cornering lamps are deactivated if the vehicle speed exceeds
25 mph (40 km/h). Only one cornering lamp will illuminate at any one time. If the left hand turn signal indicators are selected
on, the left hand cornering lamp will be illuminated and vice versa, providing the vehicle speed and lighting control switch
positions are correct.
Static Bending Lamps
NOTE: The static bending lamps are not fitted to NAS vehicles.
The static bending lamps are designed to illuminate the direction of travel when cornering at low speeds. The static bending
lamp functionality, which is controlled by the CJB and the headlamp leveling module, operates using inputs from the steering
angle sensor and vehicle speed information from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module. The static bending lamp is
incorporated into the headlamp assembly and shares the same housing as the low beam headlamp. The design of the lens
projects a spread of light from the vehicle at approximately 45 degrees to the vehicle axis. The static bending lamp uses a
35W Halogen H8 bulb which locates in a holder which is connected via wires to the main connector on the headlamp housing.
The holder is located in an aperture in the headlamp housing and rotated to lock. The bulb is accessible via a removable cover
at the rear of the headlamp housing.
The static bending lamps operate with a steering angle sensor CAN bus signal which is received by the CJB. The CJB monitors
this signal and vehicle speed and activates the static bending lamp bulb. When the operation parameters of the lamp are
reached, the CJB fades the static bending lamp bulb on using a PWM (pulse width modulation) voltage over a period of
approximately 2 seconds. When the lamp is switched off, the CJB fades the bulb off by decreasing the PWM voltage in a linear
manner depending on steering angle and vehicle speed. The cornering lamps can only be active for a maximum of 3 minutes.
NOTE: Static bending lamps only operate when the transmission is in DRIVE or in SPORT.
Turn Signal Indicators
The turn signal indicator lamp is incorporated into the outer part of the headlamp assembly. The turn signal indicator lamp
uses a PY21W bayonet orange colored bulb in ROW markets, a S8W 27/7W wedge bulb is used in NAS markets. The bulb is
fitted into a holder which connects with contacts in the headlamp housing. The holder is fitted into an aperture in the
headlamp housing and rotated to lock into position.
When active, the turn signal indicator lamps will flash at a frequency cycle of 380ms on and 380ms off. If a bulb fails, the
remaining turn signal lamps bulbs continue to flash at normal speed. The turn signal indicators in the instrument cluster will
flash at double speed to indicate the bulb failure to the driver.
Side Lamps
The side lamp is located between the headlamp projector module and the high bean headlamp. The side lamp uses a W5W
wedge fitting bulb which locates in a holder which connected via wires to the main connector on the headlamp housing. The
holder is a push fit into a receptacle in the headlamp housing. The bulb is accessible by removal of the inner cover on the rear
of the headlamp housing. Access to the bulb requires removal of the headlamp from the vehicle. The side lamps are operated
by selecting side lamps or headlamps on the lighting control switch. The side lamps are functional at all times and are
dependant on a particular ignition mode status. The side lamps will also be illuminated when the lighting control switch is in
the AUTO position and a 'lights on' signal is received by the CJB from the rain/light sensor
Side Marker Lamps (NAS only)
The side marker lamp is located in the outer part of the headlamp assembly. The side marker lamp uses a W5W wedge fitting
bulb. The bulb is fitted into a holder which connects with contacts in the headlamp housing. The holder is fitted into an
aperture which connects with contacts in the headlamp housing. The side marker lamp is active at all times when the side
lamps are active.
AUTOMATIC HEADLAMP OPERATION

The automatic headlamp function is a driver assistance system. The driver can override the system operation by selection of
side lamp or headlamp on if the ambient light conditions require front and rear lighting to be active. The automatic headlamp
system uses a light sensor and the CJB, which are connected via a LIN (local interconnect network) bus to control the
headlamp functionality. The light sensor is incorporated in the rain/light sensor located on the inside of the windshield, below
the rear view mirror. The wiper system also uses the rain/light sensor for automatic wiper operation.
The light sensor measures the ambient light around the vehicle in a vertical direction and also the angular light level from the
front of the vehicle. The rain/light sensor uses vehicle speed signals, wiper switch position and the park position of the front
wipers to control the system. The automatic headlamp operation uses ambient light levels which are monitored by photodiode
incorporated in the rain/light sensor. The rain/light sensor sends a lights on/off request to the CJB on the LIN bus, which
responds by switching on the low beam headlamps, front side lamps and rear tail lamps. The automatic headlamps are
activated under the following conditions:
Twilight
Darkness
Rain
Snow
Tunnels
Underground or multistoried car parks.
Operation of the automatic headlamps requires the ignition to be in ignition mode 6, the lighting control switch to be in the
'AUTO' position and a lights on request signal from the light sensor. If the rain sensor signal activates the fast speed wipers,
the low beam headlamps are activated, providing the lighting control switch is in the 'AUTO' position.
HEADLAMP LEVELING
Headlamp leveling provides for the adjustment of the vertical aim of the headlamps. The leveling system is primarily required
to minimise glare to other road users when a heavy load is in the rear of the vehicle. Two systems of headlamp leveling are
available; manual and static dynamic.
Manual Headlamp Leveling
The manual system uses a thumbwheel rheostat to adjust the vertical alignment of the headlamps to compensate for differing
vehicle loading. The rotary thumbwheel is located on the auxiliary lighting switch, adjacent to the illumination dimmer
thumbwheel. Three positions are available to adjust the headlamps to a position to prevent glare to other road users.
Static Dynamic Headlamp Leveling
The static dynamic headlamp leveling system uses the following components:
Front and rear vehicle height sensors

Two headlamp leveling, vertical adjustment motors
Headlamp leveling module
Ignition in mode 6
Vehicle speed information from ABS module.
The static dynamic system uses height sensors fitted to the front and rear suspension and a headlamp leveling module which
periodically monitors the vehicle attitude and adjusts the headlamp vertical alignment accordingly.
Static dynamic headlamp leveling is controlled by a headlamp leveling module located in the lower instrument panel, behind
the glovebox.
The height sensors are both located on the RH side of the vehicle. The front sensor is attached to the front suspension lower
arm with a strap and to the front sub frame with a bracket and 2 bolts. The rear sensor is attached to the rear suspension
upper control arm with a cable tied clip and to the rear sub frame with a bracket and 2 bolts. Each sensor has 3 connections to
the headlamp leveling module; power, ground and signal.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)

Refer to DRL section for details.
Refer to: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (417-04 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL), Description and Operation).
REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY

The rear lamp assembly is a 2 piece unit, with one part located in the rear quarter panel and the second part attached to the
luggage compartment lid. The outer rear lamp assembly is located in a recess in the vehicle body. The lamp is secured with 2
studs inboard studs on the lamp body which are secured to the vehicle body with 2 nuts. A third outboard stud and nut secures
a clip to the vehicle body. To remove the lamp assembly, only the 2 inboard nuts require removal. The outboard nut retains a
sliding clip in position on the vehicle body. To remove the rear lamp assembly, remove the 2 inboard nuts and slide the lamp
rearwards to release the outboard clip.
The inner rear lamp is located in a recess in the luggage compartment lip and secured with a clip.
Item Description
1 Nut (3 off)
2 Reverse lamp bulb and holder
3 Rear lamp electrical connector
4 Turn signal indicator bulb and holder
5 Securing clip
6 Rear fog lamp electrical connector
7 Rear fog lamp LED's and Printed Circuit Board (PCB)
8 Side marker LED's (4 off - all markets)
9 Reverse lamp
10 Turn signal indicator lamp
11 Side lamp/stop lamp LED's (24 off)
12 Rear fog lamp LED's (3 off)
Rear Stop and Side Lamp
The turn signal indicator, side and stop lamps and reverse lamps are located in each outer rear lamp assembly. The side lamps
and stop lamps use 24 LED's. The 24 LED's are illuminated at a higher intensity than the side lamp when the stop lamp switch
is operated by pressing the brake pedal. A side marker lamp is fitted to the outer rear lamp assembly and is fitted in all
markets. The side marker lamp also uses 4 LED's and are active at all times when the side lamps are selected on.
The stop lamps can also be activated by the adaptive speed control system. A signal from the adaptive speed control module
is sent via the high speed CAN bus to the RJB which activates the stop lamps until an off message is received.
Turn Signal Indicator
The turn signal indicator lamp uses a Phillips Hypervision glass filament bulb. The bulb is located in a holder which has
contacts which mate with contacts on lamp body. The holder locates in the lamp body and is rotated to lock.
If a bulb fails, the remaining turn signal indicator lamps continue to flash at the normal speed. The applicable turn signal
indicator in the instrument cluster will flash at double speed to indicate the bulb failure to the driver.
www.JagDocs.com
Reverse Lamp
The reverse lamp also uses a Phillips Hypervision glass filament bulb. The bulb is located in a holder which has contacts which
mate with contacts on lamp body. The holder locates in the lamp body and is rotated to lock.
The reverse lamps are activated on receipt of a reverse selected message sent on the medium speed CAN bus to the RJB.
Rear Fog Lamp
The rear fog lamps are located in separate units attached to the luggage compartment lid. The rear fog lamps each use 3 high
intensity LED's. The fog lamp locates in a recess in the luggage compartment lid has a seal to prevent the ingress of water
into the luggage compartment. The lamp is secured in the recess with a metal securing clip. The rear fog lamp is activated
using a button located on the auxiliary lighting switch in the instrument panel.
LICENCE PLATE LAMPS

Two licence plate lamps are located in the luggage compartment lid trim finisher. One is located adjacent to the emergency
luggage compartment lid release key barrel cover and the other is adjacent to the rear view camera (if fitted). The licence plate
lamps are active at all times when the side lamps are operating. Each lamp can be removed from the finisher by inserting a
wide, flat screwdriver blade or similar tool in a slot between the lamp lens and the finisher and gently levering the lamp from
the surround. The bulb is a push fit in a holder which in turn is a press fit in the lamp housing.
HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP

The high mounted stop lamp is located at the bottom of the rear windshield. The lamp is secured to a bezel in the parcel shelf
with 2 screws.
The high mounted stop lamp uses 12, red colored LED's which illuminate through a clear lens. The high mounted stop lamp
functionality is the same as that described for the stop lamps.
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR SIDE REPEATER LAMPS

The turn signal indicator side repeaters are located in each door mirror. On vehicles from 10MY the lamp is an LED unit which
illuminates in an orange color. The LED unit is secured to the mirror bezel with 2 screws and is connected to the mirror wiring
harness with a 2 pin connector.
The side repeaters have the same functionality and operate in conjunction with the front and rear turn signal indicators and
the hazard warning flashers.
HAZARD FLASHERS
The hazard flashers are activated by a non-latching switch located in the switch pack located in the center of the instrument
panel. The hazard flashers operate at all times when selected and operate independent of the ignition mode.
When the hazard flashers are selected on by the driver, a ground path is momentarily completed to the CJB which activates the
front and rear and side repeater turn signal indicators. A second press of the switch is sensed by the CJB and the hazard
flasher are deactivated. When the hazard flashers are active, they override any request for turn signal indicator operation.
The hazard flashers can also be activated by a crash signal from the RCM.
Refer to: Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Exterior Lighting - Headlamps
For a detailed description of the exterior lighting system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (417-01 Exterior Lighting)
Exterior Lighting (Description and Operation),

Exterior Lighting (Description and Operation),
Exterior Lighting (Description and Operation).
Safety Information
WARNINGS:
The Xenon Headlamp system generates up to 28,000 volts. Make sure that the headlamps are switched off before
working on the system. Failure to follow this instruction may lead to fatality.
The following safety precautions must be followed when working on the Xenon Headlamp system:
DO NOT attempt any procedures on the Xenon Headlamps or circuits when the system is energized.
Handling of the xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment, e.g. gloves and goggles. The glass
part of the bulb must not be touched.
Only operate the lamp in a mounted condition in the reflector.
All safety procedures and precautions must be followed to prevent personal injury.
CAUTION: Xenon bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
There are instructions on the correct procedures for Xenon Headlamp System repairs in the manual, refer to section 100-00 -
General Information, Standard Workshop Practices of the workshop manual.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Headlamp Leveling Module (HLM)

Bulb(s)
Photocell(s)
Ballast
Wiring harness/electrical connectors
Fuse(s)
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to DTC Index.
Symptom Chart

Low beam lamp(s) Check the bulb and fuse condition (see visual inspection). Check the
inoperative Bulb failure headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control switch function. Check the
Fuse(s) blown left-hand steering column multifunction switch operation. Refer to the
Circuit fault electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a headlamp or related circuit
Lighting control switch fault.
High beam lamp(s) fault
inoperative Left-hand steering
column multifunction
switch fault
Low beam lamp(s) Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the tourist lever is set
dim Incorrect bulb rating correctly. Check the headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control switch
Tourist lever set in the function. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch
wrong position function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Circuit fault
Lighting control switch
High beam lamp(s)
fault
dim
Left-hand steering
switch fault
Low beam lamp(s) Check the headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control switch function.
stuck on Circuit fault Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch operation. Check
Lighting control switch the headlamp timer function. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs
fault indicating a headlamp circuit fault
Left-hand steering
High beam lamp(s) column multifunction
stuck on switch fault
Headlamp timer
function fault
Headlamp low/high Check the headlamp circuits. Check the left-hand steering column
beam switching Circuit fault multifunction switch operation. Check the xenon lamp shutter mechanism
function inoperative Left-hand steering operation. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a
column multifunction headlamp circuit fault
switch fault
Xenon lamp shutter
mechanism fault
Warning lamp(s) Check the fuse(s) (see visual inspection). Check the lighting control switch
inoperative Fuse(s) blown function. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch
Lighting control switch function. Check the warning lamp circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
fault Check for DTCs indicating an instrument cluster or CAN system fault.
Left-hand steering
switch inoperative
Circuit fault
Instrument cluster
fault
Headlamp Wet - Check for outstanding Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) relating to
Internal Condensation 'Headlamp Internal Condensation'. Carry out the instructions in the service
Water Ingress bulletin to determine if the fault is related to condensation or water
ingress.
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00. REFER to:
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module (HCM) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Adjustment
General Procedures
1. Make sure to check and adjust the tyre pressures to the correct
level.
Park the vehicle on a horizontally level surface.
2. Align the headlamp beam setting equipment to one headlamp.

Headlamp beam setter
3. NOTE: The headlamp setting is 1 % below horizontal and parallel.
Check the headlamp beam alignment.
4. Open the hood.
5. Adjust the headlamps with an Allen Key.
6. To adjust the second headlamp, repeat the above procedure.

Exterior Lighting - Approach Lamp
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Glass (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and
Installation).
2.
3.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Assembly
Removal
NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to full LH lock.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Installation
1.
2.
3. Torque: 5 Nm
4. Torque: 5 Nm
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Leveling Front Sensor
Removal

2. Remove the headlamp leveling sensor.

Disconnect the height sensor link.
Remove the 2 bolts.

access only.
Remove the height sensor link.
Remove the bracket.

Remove the 2 Allen bolts.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
Install the bracket.

Tighten to 5 Nm.
2. Install the height sensor link.
3. Install the headlamp leveling sensor.

Tighten to 25 Nm.
Connect the height sensor link.
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Leveling Rear Sensor
Removal

2. Remove the headlamp leveling sensor.

Disconnect the height sensor link.
Release and disconnect the electrical connector.
Remove the 2 bolts.
3. NOTES:

Remove the bracket.

Remove the 2 Allen bolts.
Installation
Install the bracket.

Tighten to 5 Nm.
2. Install the headlamp leveling sensor.
Tighten to 25 Nm
Install the height sensor link.
Exterior Lighting - High Mounted Stoplamp
Removal
and Installation).
2.
Installation

Exterior Lighting - Rear Fog Lamp
General Equipment
Spatula
Removal
1. Refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Moulding (501-08 Exterior Trim and
2. CAUTIONS:
Protect the surrounding paintwork to avoid damage.
Take extra care not to damage the edges of the

component.
General Equipment: Spatula
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Exterior Lighting - Rear Lamp Assembly
Removal
1. Refer to: Loadspace Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
Torque: 3 Nm
4. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the edges of
the component.

Installation

Exterior Lighting - Side Turn Signal Lamp
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Cover (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and
Installation).
2.
3.
Installation

Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting - Component Location
INTERIOR LIGHTING COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Glovebox lamp
2 Door casing LED (light emitting diode) illumination
3 Approach lamp
4 Vanity mirror illumination
5 Overhead console
6 Vanity mirror illumination
7 Rear overhead console
8 Luggage compartment lamp
9 Approach lamp
10 Door casing LED illumination
11 Footwell lamps
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting - Overview
OVERVIEW
Interior lighting is provided to enable the safe entry and departure from the vehicle for the driver and passengers in low
ambient light conditions, without any manual switching of the lights.
NOTE: The term interior lamps also includes the door mirror approach lamps.
The interior lamps are controlled by the CJB (central junction box) and the RJB (rear junction box) and have 2 modes of
operation: manual and automatic. The front interior lamps in the front overhead console are operated using the 'JaguarSense'
system. The system uses capacitive proximity sensor technology for the switch operation which is integral with the overhead
console. The rear overhead console interior lamps have conventional switches.
In the manual mode the interior lamps can be switched on and off with the JaguarSense system. Positioning your hand
adjacent to each lamp in the front overhead console will switch interior lamps on or off and completely disable the interior
lamp system. In the automatic mode the interior lamp functionality is controlled by the CJB and the RJB and reacts to the
vehicle being locked or unlocked and opening the vehicle doors.
In manual mode the interior lamps can be operated by placing your finger(s) close to, or touch, the surface of the appropriate
lamp. The courtesy light and map reading lamps can be operated manually by the 'JaguarSense' system. When in automatic
mode, the courtesy lamp functionality is also controlled by the CJB and the RJB and reacts to the vehicle being locked or
unlocked and opening the vehicle doors. To deactivate or activate automatic illumination, touch the front courtesy lamp for
approximately 2 seconds
The driver's and passenger door approach lamps are controlled by the driver's door module and the passenger door module
respectively and operate with the automatic mode. The door modules receive a power supply from the RJB and receive
information to illuminate the approach lamps on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus from the RJB and the
CJB.
www.JagDocs.com
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
CONTROL DIAGRAM (SHEET 1 OF 2)
Item Description
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN Bus
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) - Megafuse
3 BJB - Megafuse
5 Driver's door mirror approach lamp
6 Driver's door module
7 Passenger door mirror approach lamp
8 Passenger door module
9 LH (left-hand) rear door latch
10 RH (right-hand) rear door latch
11 LH front door latch
12 RH front door latch
14 LH front door handle LED (light emitting diode) illumination
15 RH front door handle LED illumination
CONTROL DIAGRAM (SHEET 2 OF 2)
Item Description
A = Hardwired
1 Battery
2 BJB - Megafuse
3 BJB - Megafuse
4 RJB
5 Glovebox lamp
6 Glovebox lamp switch
7 LH footwell lamp
8 RH footwell lamp
9 LH vanity mirror
10 RH vanity mirror
11 LH rear interior lamp
12 RH rear interior lamp
13 CJB
14 Ambience lighting LED's
15 LH map reading lamp
16 Courtesy lamp
17 RH map reading lamp
System Operation
JUNCTION BOXES
Inputs
The CJB receives the following inputs which affect the operation of the interior lamps:
Ignition mode
Lock/unlock
Luggage compartment lid latch switch
Door latch switches.
Outputs
The RJB outputs the following for the interior lighting system:
Luggage compartment lamp power supply

Driver and passenger door module power supplies
Fade on and off grounds for front and rear overhead console interior lamps and footwell lamps
PWM (pulse width modulation) power output for the ambience lighting.
Interior Lamp Time-Out
The interior lamps are controlled by a timer within the CJB which allows a 60 second delay period for the lamps to remain
active after the ignition mode has been changed to off power mode 0 or the vehicle has been unlocked. The interior lamp fade
off is controlled by the RJBvia a delayed power off relay in the CJB. The following interior lamps are subject to the delay
period:
Front overhead console interior lamp

Rear interior lamps
Footwell lamps
Door mirror approach lamps.
The timer delay is activated when the CJB receives one of the following signals:
An unlock signal from the Smart Key via the keyless vehicle module.
Ignition mode is changed from the crank power mode 9 or ignition power mode 6 to the accessory power mode 4 to the
off power mode 0.
If a second occurrence of the above actions occurs within the timer period, the timer will be rest and the delay period timer will
restart.
The timer delay is deactivated when the CJB receives one of the following signals:
A lock signal from the Smart Key via the keyless vehicle module
Ignition mode is changed from the off power mode 0 to the accessory power mode 4 or ignition power mode 6
The CJB receives a door opened signal (even if that door is subsequently closed).
Battery Saver
The battery saver provides an automatic shut-off of the interior lamps after a period of 15 minutes in order to prevent
excessive power drain on the battery.
When the ignition mode is changed from the ignition power mode 6 or accessory power mode 4 to the off power mode 0, the
CJB starts a timer which de-energizes a delayed power off relay in the CJB, removing the power supply to the interior lamps
after a period of 15 minutes, switching off all or any interior lamps which have remained on for any reason.
Once the timer has expired and the lamps are off, any one of the following will 'wake up' the battery saver and the interior
lamps will function again. The timer will be restarted as soon as an input is received by the CJB from one of the following:
Ignition mode changed from off power mode 0 to accessory power mode 4, ignition power mode 6 or crank power mode
9.
Any door, including the luggage compartment lid is opened
An unlock request is received from the Smart Key via the keyless vehicle module
Overhead console interior lamp is switched on via the JaguarSense function.
INTERIOR LAMPS
When the interior lighting system switches the interior lamps on, the CJB ramps the lamps up to full power over a period of 1.3
seconds. When the system switches the lamps off, after the time-out period has expired, the CJB fades the lamps off over a
period of 2.6 seconds.
The interior lighting system will illuminate the interior lamps when one of the following events occurs:
The CJB receives an unlock signal from the Smart Key via the keyless vehicle module
Any door is opened including the luggage compartment lid
The ignition mode is changed from ignition power mode 6 or accessory power mode 4 to off power mode 0.
The interior lighting system will turn off the interior lamps when one of the following events occurs:
Once the time-out timer delay has expired since the lamps were either activated or the last door is closed and the
vehicle is not locked
The ignition is in off power mode 0 and an external lock is requested (using either the door lock buttons or the Smart
Key) with all doors closed
The ignition mode is changed from the off power mode 0 or the accessory power mode 4 to the ignition power mode 6
The last door is closed and the vehicle is externally locked, on receipt of an unlock request from the Smart Key or door
handle operation detected when the time-out timer is still active.
DELIVERY MODE
Delivery mode is set at the factory on vehicles to minimize battery drain. The mode enables the switching off of non-critical
electrical components, including the interior lighting system. The delivery mode feature is cancelled by the dealer during the
Pre-Delivery Inspection using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system.
CRASH ILLUMINATION
When a crash signal is received from the RCM (restraints control module), the CJB activates the interior lamps once the vehicle
speed has reduced to 5 km/h (3.1 mph). The hazard flashers are also activated and the doors are prevented from being locked.
The lamps remain on until the crash signal is removed, they cannot be switched off using the JaguarSense feature. The crash
signal is removed by completing one ignition on and off cycle.
INTERIOR BULB TYPE/RATING
The following table shows the bulbs used for the interior lighting system and their type and specification.
NOTE: The front overhead console and the front door ambience lighting is illuminated by LED's and are non-serviceable
components.
Bulb Type Rating

Front overhead console - interior lamp W6WX 6W
Front overhead console - LH/RH map reading lamps W6WX 6W
Rear interior lamps W6WX 10W
Sunvisor lamps TS1.3W 1.3W
LH/RH footwell lamps W5W 5W
Glovebox lamp W5W 5W
LH/RH door mirror approach lamps W5W 5W
Luggage compartment lamp S10W 10W
JUNCTION BOXES
The CJB is an integrated unit located on the RH 'A' pillar, below the instrument panel. The CJB contains fuses, relays and
number of microprocessors which control the power supply and functionality of the interior lighting system and other vehicle
systems.
The RJB is located on the RH side of the luggage compartment. The RJB contains fuses, relays and microprocessors which in
conjunction with the CJB control the interior lighting system and other vehicle systems.
Circuit Protection
The CJB and the RJB provide circuit protection for all interior lamp circuits. The lamps are protected by fuses in the CJB and the
RJB.
FRONT OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Item Description
1 LH map reading lamp bulb
2 Interior lamp bulb
3 RH map reading lamp bulb
4 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) - JaguarSense
5 Ambience lighting LED's
6 RH map reading lamp
7 Interior lamp
8 LH map reading lamp
The overhead console is located near the windshield in the head lining. The console can be removed by carefully levering out
the rear edge of the housing to release 2 spring clips, and then pulling the console rearwards to release 2 locating tabs.
Removal of the console is required to replace any of the interior or map reading lamp bulbs.
The interior lamps and air bag off warning lamp in the front overhead console are common to all vehicles. The overhead
console can also contain security system intrusion detection module and volumetric sensors, sunroof switch and a voice
activation microphone depending on vehicle specification and market.
The interior lamp can operated manually using the JaguarSense feature to switch the lamp on and off. The lamp is also
controlled as part of the automatic interior lighting system.
The map reading lamps only operate manually using the JaguarSense feature to activate the lamps.
The interior and map reading lamp bulbs are located in holders which locate in a PCB. The PCB also provides for the operation
of the ambience lighting LED's, the air bag off warning lamp and the JaguarSense proximity sensors which are integral with the
PCB.
The overhead console also contains 2 LED's for the ambience lighting system. The ambience lighting is part of the lighting
control switch functionality and is subject to the setting of the instrument panel illumination dimmer control in the auxiliary
lighting switch. The ambience lighting provides very limited illumination of the instrument panel and floor console when the
vehicle is being driven without affecting the driver's visibility.
www.JagDocs.com
REAR OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Item Description
1 Lamp body
2 Lamp lens
3 Interior lamp bulbs
4 LH lamp switch
5 RH lamp switch
6 Bulb holders
The rear overhead console is located in the head lining, at the rear of the vehicle. The console can be removed by carefully
levering the lamp lens from the body. This releases 2 tabs which are integral with the lens allowing the body to removed from
the aperture in the head lining.
the lamp comprises the lamp body and lens and 2 separate lamps with 2 switches to operate each lamp individually.
The rear interior lamps can operated manually using the 2 switches located on the lamp body. The lamp is also controlled as
part of the automatic interior lighting system.
The bulbs are located in bulb holders which locate in a PCB connected to each switch. Removal of the rear overhead console is
required to replace the bulbs.
GLOVEBOX LAMP
The glovebox lamp is located in the top of the glovebox housing in the instrument panel. The lamp is located in a cover on the
outside, upper surface of the housing and projects the light into the top of the glovebox.
The lamp is operated by a switch located at the rear of the glovebox housing. The switch protrudes into the housing and is
operated by the rear face of the glovebox lid tray when the glovebox is opened or closed.
The bulb is located in a holder which is fitted into the side of the glovebox lamp cover. Replacement of the bulb requires the
removal of the glovebox housing.
The glovebox lamp is active at all times when the interior lamps are active and will illuminate only when the glovebox is
opened.
FOOTWELL LAMPS
The footwell lamps are located under the instrument panel. Each lamp comprises a bulb and holder which is part of the
instrument panel wiring harness. The bulb and holder is located in a hole in the front footwell air ducts. The footwell lamps are
active at all times when the interior lamps are active.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LAMP

The luggage compartment lamp is located in the luggage compartment trim, in a central position below the rear screen. The
lamp comprises a molded lens and housing and two electrical contacts which locate the bulb.
The lamp is accessible be removed by levering one end from the trim panel to gain access to the bulb. The lamp is active at all
times when the interior lamps are active.
VANITY MIRROR LAMPS
Four vanity mirror lamps are fitted, two in each vanity mirror. The lamps are illuminated when the mirror cover is raised. The
vanity mirror lamps operate at all times when the interior lamps are active.
The vanity mirrors use low voltage, 1.2W festoon type bulbs.
DOOR MIRROR APPROACH LAMPS

A door mirror approach lamp is located on the underside of each exterior door mirror.
The approach lamps are active at all times when the interior lamps are active.
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting
For a detailed description of the interior lighting system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (417-02 Interior Lighting)
Interior Lighting (Description and Operation),

Interior Lighting (Description and Operation),
Interior Lighting (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Bulbs Fuses/relays (refer to electrical guide)

Wiring harness
Correct engagement of electrical connectors
Loose or corroded connections
the next step.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:

B116511 Left Front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left front puddle
Puddle Lamp Left front puddle lamp lamp control circuit for short to ground
Output control circuit - short to
ground
B116515 Left Front Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Puddle Lamp Left front puddle lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Output control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and test left front puddle lamp control circuit
power, open circuit for short to power, open circuit
B116611 Right Front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right front
Puddle Lamp Right front puddle lamp puddle lamp control circuit for short to ground
Output control circuit - short to
ground
B116615 Right Front Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Puddle Lamp Right front puddle lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Output control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and test right front puddle lamp control circuit
power, open circuit for short to power, open circuit
B111E11 Boot/Trunk Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Lamps Luggage compartment lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check luggage compartment lamp control
ground circuit for short to ground
B111E15 Boot/Trunk Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Lamps Luggage compartment lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check luggage compartment lamp control
power, open circuit circuit for short to power, open circuit
B112412 Lamp Fade Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check interior lamp
Control Interior lamp fade control fade control circuit for short to power
B113C12 Hazard Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check hazard switch
Illumination Hazard switch illumination illumination control circuit for short to power
control circuit - short to
power
B1A8596 Ambient Light Check and install a new sensor as required

Sensor Light sensor internal
electronic failure
U201012 Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check switch/interior
Illumination Switch/interior illumination illumination PWM supply circuit for short to power
PWM supply circuit - short to
power
U201014 Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check switch/interior
Illumination Switch/interior illumination illumination PWM supply circuit for short to ground, open circuit
PWM supply circuit - short to
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - Overview
OVERVIEW
DRL (daytime running lamps) use the full intensity low beam headlamps which are permanently illuminated when the vehicle is
being driven.
Two DRL systems are available depending on market requirements.
www.JagDocs.com
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - System
System Operation
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX (CJB)
The CJB (central junction box) controls the operation of the DRL (daytime running lamps). The DRL are activated once the CJB
detects an ignition on power mode 6 signal.
The CJB also monitors the lighting control switch and the auto lamps feature and overrides the DRL if required.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS - CANADA
The DRL for this market use full intensity low beam headlamps. The side marker lamps, tail lamps and license plate lamps will
be on, but instrument cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the following parameters are met:
PARK is not selected on the electronic transmission selector

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) is off
Power mode 6 (ignition on) detected by the CJB
The CJB receives an engine running signal
The lighting control switch is in the off or side lamps position.
NOTES:
If the lighting control switch is moved to the headlamp position, DRL are deactivated and normal side lamp and
headlamp functionality is operational.
When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column multifunction switch will operate
normally.
The high beam headlamp function using the left hand steering column stalk switch will be deactivated. When the transmission
is in PARK, DRL are turned off. This is to reduce battery discharge during long periods of engine idling in cold climate
conditions. When the electronic transmission selector is moved from the PARK position, normal DRL functionality is restored.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS - DENMARK, HOLLAND, NORWAY, SWEDEN, FINLAND AND

POLAND
NOTE: DRL for Poland is on vehicles from 2008MY.
DRL for these markets use full intensity low beam headlamps. Side lamps and license plate lamps will be on, but instrument
cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the following parameters are met:
Power mode 6 (ignition on) detected by the CJB

The CJB receives an engine running signal
The lighting control switch is in the off position.
NOTE: When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column multifunction switch will
operate normally. The high beam headlamp function using the left hand steering column stalk switch will be deactivated.
If the lighting control switch is moved to the side lamp or headlamp positions, DRL are deactivated and normal side lamp and
headlamp functionality is operational.
AUTOMATIC HEADLAMPS
On vehicles fitted with the automatic headlamps feature, DRL are overridden if the lighting control switch is in the 'Auto'
position and the CJB receives a signal from the rain/light sensor to activate the exterior lights.
When the CJB receives a signal to de-activate the automatic headlamps feature the DRL function is restored providing the
parameters for DRL activation are met.
Module Communications Network - Communications Network - Overview
OVERVIEW
A number of different types of communication network are incorporated into the vehicle wiring harnesses for the transmission
of commands and information between control modules. The configuration installed on a particular vehicle depends on the
model and equipment level.
NOTE: The control diagrams shown later in this section are schematics reflecting communications networks fitted to LH
(left-hand) vehicles only. For detailed layouts of the various communications networks fitted to LHD (left-hand drive) and RHD
(right-hand drive) vehicles, refer to the Electrical Guide.
The communications networks available on the vehicle are shown in the table below.
Network Baud Rate

LIN (local interconnect network) bus 9.6 kbits/s
Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus 125 kbits/s
High speed CAN bus 500 kbits/s
Media Orientated System Transport (MOST) ring 24 mbits/s
Module Communications Network - Communications Network - System
Control Diagram
NOTE:
CONTROL DIAGRAM - LIN BUS - SHEET 1 OF 2
Item Description
O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus
2 Battery backed sounder
3 Intrusion detection module
4 Rain/Light sensor
7 Rear view camera
9 Generator
10 Driver's door switch pack
11 Rear door control module
12 Driver's door control module
14 Electronic transmission selector
15 Driver's seat module
16 Driver's seat switch pack
17 Rear door control module
18 Front passenger door control module
19 Clockspring
20 Audio and telephone steering wheel switches
CONTROL DIAGRAM - LIN BUS - SHEET 2 OF 2
Item Description
O = LIN bus
2 Stepper motor - Windshield defrost
3 Stepper motor - Face/feet distribution
4 Stepper motor - LH (left-hand) temperature blend
5 Stepper motor - RH (right-hand) temperature blend
7 Stepper motor - RH outer face level vent
8 Stepper motor - RH inner face level vent
9 Stepper motor - LH inner face level vent
10 Stepper motor - LH outer face level vent
www.JagDocs.com
CONTROL DIAGRAM - MEDIUM SPEED CAN BUS
Item Description
N = Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus
2 RJB
3 Keyless vehicle module
6 Front seat climate control module
7 Information control module
8 ATC module
9 CJB
13 Front passenger door control module
14 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) module
15 Driver's door control module
CONTROL DIAGRAM - HIGH SPEED CAN BUS
Item Description
D = High speed CAN bus
3 Diagnostic socket
6 Occupant classification system control module
9 ECM
10 TCM
11 Pedestrian protection system control module
12 Electric park brake module
CONTROL DIAGRAM - MOST RING
Item Description
P = MOST ring
2 Software download socket
4 Portable audio interface
5 Bluetooth® telephone module
7 Multi-media module
8 DAB/SDARS receiver
9 Television (TV) tuner
10 Audio system amplifier
System Operation
OPERATION
Refer to the relevant system section for details of system operation.
DESCRIPTION
Refer to the relevant system section for details of system description.
Module Communications Network - Communications Network
For a detailed description of the Communications Network, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (418-00 Module Communications Network)
Communications Network (Description and Operation),

Communications Network (Description and Operation),
Communications Network (Description and Operation).

CAUTIONS:
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.
Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Fuses (refer to electrical guide)

Wiring harness
Correct engagement of electrical connectors
Loose or corroded connections
Routing of fibre optic harnesses
Correct engagement of optical connectors
Correct placement of optical connectors (ring order)
Correct assembly of optical connectors (backout, etc)
Damage to fibre (chafing, abrasion, kinking, cuts, etc)
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index
Symptom Chart

MOST network fault - Touch screen
display displaying flashing logo MOST ring broken after the touch screen display GO to
Control module on MOST network power or ground circuit open Pinpoint Test
circuit, high resistance B.
Control module on MOST network internal failure
MOST network fault - Touch screen

display blank MOST ring broken between the information and entertainment GO to
control module and the touch screen display Pinpoint Test
Information and entertainment control module or touch screen H.
display power or ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
Wake up signal not received by the information and
entertainment control module
Information and entertainment control module or touch screen
display internal failure
Controller Area Network (CAN)

Control Module Connections to the CAN Harness
Control modules are connected to the CAN harness either in a 'loop' or 'spur' configuration. In the 'loop' type configuration the
CAN harness loops into the module (via two connector pins) and then loops out of the module (via another two connector
pins). In the 'spur' type configuration, a harness spur is spliced into the main 'backbone' of the CAN harness and the module is
connected to the harness spur via two connector pins.
www.JagDocs.com
CAN Harness Architecture
For a detailed description of the CAN Networks and architecture, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
Workshop Manual.
CAN Network Integrity Tests
If a control module is suspected of non-communication, the Network Integrity test application available on the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system can be used to confirm if communication is possible between the control modules on the vehicle
and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system (via the J1962 diagnostic connector ). The results from the test can be used
to determine if either a single module or multiple modules are failing to communicate.
CAN Terminating Modules
If the Network Integrity test indicates that one or more module on one of the CAN networks (HS or MS) are failing to
communicate, there are several checks that can be made. The first step is to identify if both of the CAN terminating modules
on each individual CAN Bus are communicating. If both CAN terminating modules for each individual CAN Bus are
communicating (identified via the Network Integrity test), then it can be confirmed that the main 'backbone' of the CAN
harness is complete. The main 'backbone' of the CAN harness consists of all the modules connected to the CAN harness via a
'loop' configuration and also includes the two terminating modules.
Communication with both CAN terminating modules via the Network Integrity test confirms the physical integrity of the main
'backbone' of the CAN harness (and the harness spur to the J1962 diagnostic connector). This means that there is no
requirement to check the resistance of the CAN Network. This is because the standard check for 60 ohms across the CAN High
and CAN Low lines will not provide any additional information regarding the physical condition of the CAN harness, beyond
what has already been determined from the Network Integrity test.
Non-Communication of a Terminating Module
If a Network Integrity test reveals a terminating module is failing to communicate it can indicate a break in the main
'backbone' of the CAN harness. The first checks should always be to confirm the power and ground supplies to the
non-communicating module are correct. Providing these are correct, the resistance between the CAN High and CAN Low lines at
the J1962 connector can be checked to determine the integrity of the main 'backbone' of the CAN harness. After disconnecting
the battery a reading of 120 ohms would indicate an open circuit in the main 'backbone' of the CAN harness. Alternatively, a
reading of 60 ohms would indicate that there is no open circuit fault with the main 'backbone' of the CAN harness.
It is worth noting that even if one of the terminating modules is disconnected from the CAN harness, communications between
the modules still connected may still be possible. Therefore communication between the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system and the connected modules may also be possible.
Locating CAN Harness Open Circuits
In the case where multiple modules, including a terminating module, are failing to communicate, having first confirmed the
power and ground supplies are correct, the approximate location of the open circuit can be identified from analysis of the
Network Integrity test results and reference to the relevant CAN network circuit diagrams. For example, if an open circuit
existed in a certain position on the CAN harness, any module positioned on the Network between the J1962 connector and the
open circuit should return a response during the Network Integrity test. No responses would be returned from any modules
past the open circuit fault in the Network.
CAN Harness 'Spur' Type Configuration Circuits
If, after the initial checks (Network Integrity test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and power and ground
supplies to the module have been checked and confirmed as correct), a module that is connected to the CAN harness via a
'spur' type configuration is suspected of not communicating, then the physical integrity of the CAN harness 'spur' can be
checked.
This is most easily undertaken by individually checking the continuity of the CAN High and CAN Low lines between the
non-communicating module connector (with the module disconnected) and the J1962 diagnostic connector.
'Lost Communications' DTCs
As well as the methods described so far in this document, which can be used to determine the location of an open circuit in
the CAN harness, 'Lost Communications' DTCs can also be used for this purpose. Lost communication DTCs mean that a
module is not receiving CAN information from another module.
For example, if a global DTC read were to be carried out, only DTCs stored in the modules that the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system could communicate with would be displayed. If there was an open circuit fault in a certain position on the
CAN harness, the modules that could display DTCs would all be prior to the open circuit on the Network, and these modules
should display 'Lost Communications' DTCs with all the modules located on the Network past the open circuit fault.
'Bus off' DTCs
The references to bus and its condition refer to the network concerned and the modules on that network.
If a module logs a 'Bus Off' DTC, it means that the module has detected CAN transmission errors and has disabled it's own
CAN transmissions and disconnected itself from the network in an attempt to allow the rest of the network to function. At this
point the 'Bus Off' DTC is set. A common cause of 'Bus Off' DTCs can be a short circuit in the CAN network.
Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST)
NOTE: Items 1, 2, 3 and 6 will always be present. The remaining items are optional and/or market specific.
Item Description
1 Information and entertainment control module
2 MOST diagnostic connector
3 Touch screen display
4 Telephone module
5 Portable audio interface module
7 Power amplifier
8 Navigation control module
9 DAB tuner module
10 Television receiver
Overview
The basic guidelines are covered in the description and operation section, such as not attempting to repair fibre optic cables,
but additional precautions include:
Do not touch the exposed ends of the optical fibres (grease from skin can contaminate the fibre)
Whenever the fibre optic cable is disconnected, cover the connectors to prevent dust contamination
Do not expose the fibre optic cable to heat
Do not bend the fibre optic cable through less than a 25 mm (one inch) radius
Do not use laser pens to test the fibre optic cable's ability to pass light
MOST Diagnostic Tools
There are two dedicated tools for testing the MOST system:
MOST tester. The MOST tester is connected to the MOST network in place of a control module. It will confirm receipt of any
existing MOST signal and transmit it to the next control module on the network. Perform the following tests to validate the
operation of the MOST tester. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
MOST prism. The MOST prism is connected in the same way as the MOST tester but will simply reflect any existing signal
onward to the next control module. Using the MOST prism before or after a long run of harness may cause a ring break as a
good signal may be too weak after travelling the extended distance. Also, the MOST prism will pass light in either direction so
will not detect reversed MOST terminals elsewhere in the network. For these reasons, the MOST tester is the preferred tool and
should be used unless limited access does not permit it
MOST Ring Break Indication
A ring break in the MOST network is indicated by a blank touch screen display if the break is before the touch screen display or
a flashing logo of the break is after the touch screen display. Possible causes of ring breaks are listed in the symptom chart
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : MOST TESTER TESTS

A1: MOST TESTER BATTERY TEST
1 Set the MOST tester power switch to 'on'
Is the power LED illuminated?
Yes
Test passed. GO to A2.
No
Test failed. Install a new battery into the MOST tester. GO to A1.
A2: 2+0 INPUT/OUTPUT TEST
NOTES:
'2+0' indicates that the loop harness connector consists of 2 fibre optic terminals and 0 electrical terminals.
The MOST tester may continue to emit a tone or illuminate the LED after the test switch is released. This does not
indicate a fault.

2 Set the connector selector switch to '2+0'
3 Set the indication switch to 'beep' or 'LED'
4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+0 connector and the 2+0 loop harness connector
5 Connect the 2+0 loop harness to the MOST tester 2+0 connector
6 Operate the test switch and check the MOST tester beep/LED
Did the MOST tester emit a tone or illuminate the LED?
Yes
No
Test failed. MOST tester or 2+0 harness fault
A3: 2+4 INPUT/OUTPUT TEST
NOTES:
'2+4' indicates that the loop harness connector consists of 2 fibre optic terminals and 4 electrical terminals.
indicate a fault.

4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+4 connector and the 2+4 loop harness connector
5 Connect the 2+4 loop harness to the MOST tester 2+4 connector
Yes
No
Test failed. MOST tester or 2+4 harness fault
A4: ADAPTER HARNESS AND PRISM TEST
NOTE: The MOST tester may continue to emit a tone or illuminate the LED after the test switch is released. This does
not indicate a fault.

4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+0 connector, the prism, and the adapter harness
connectors
5 Connect the adapter harness to the MOST tester 2+0 connector
6 Connect the prism to the adapter harness
Yes
Test passed
No
Test failed. MOST tester, adapter harness or prism fault
PINPOINT TEST B : MOST NETWORK INITIAL TESTS
CONDITIONS
B1: MOST NETWORK INITIAL TEST 1
NOTE: When connecting the MOST tester, use the 2+0 or 2+4 socket as appropriate and set the connector selector
switch to match the socket in use
1Switch on the audio/video system

2Disconnect the MOST harness connector from a control module located after the touch screen display and
before the information and entertainment control module
4 Connect the MOST harness connector to the MOST tester
5 Check the touch screen display for indication of a MOST network fault
Has the MOST network been restored?
Yes
The disconnected control module is causing the MOST network fault. GO to Pinpoint Test E.
No
The disconnected control module is not causing MOST network fault. GO to B2.
B2: MOST NETWORK INITIAL TEST 2
1 Check the MOST tester beep/LED
Yes
MOST signal received. The MOST network fault is located downstream of the MOST tester. GO to Pinpoint
Test C.
No
MOST signal not received. The MOST network fault is located upstream of the MOST tester. Disconnect
the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester and reconnect it to the control module. GO to
Pinpoint Test D.
PINPOINT TEST C : MOST NETWORK DOWNSTREAM TESTS
CONDITIONS
C1: MOST NETWORK DOWNSTREAM TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and identify the succeeding control module on the MOST network
Is this control module the information and entertainment control module?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test F.
No
GO to C2.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector
2 Direct the MOST harness connector at a suitable surface and check for the presence of red light
Is red light present?
Yes
Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester and reconnect it to the control module.
GO to C3.
No
The fault is in the MOST harness between the MOST tester and the disconnected MOST harness
connector. Install a new MOST harness as necessary
1 Connect the succeeding MOST harness connector to the MOST tester

Yes
No
The disconnected control module is not causing the MOST network fault. GO to C1.
PINPOINT TEST D : MOST NETWORK UPSTREAM TESTS
CONDITIONS
D1: MOST NETWORK UPSTREAM TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and identify the preceding control module on the MOST network
Is this control module the touch screen display?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test G.
No
GO to D2.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the control module
www.JagDocs.com
Yes
The MOST network fault is in the control module or the MOST harness to the succeeding control
module. GO to D3.
No
The MOST network fault is located upstream of the disconnected control module. Reconnect the MOST
harness connector to the control module. GO to D1.

Yes
No
The fault is in the MOST harness between the MOST tester and the succeeding control module. Install a
new MOST harness as necessary
PINPOINT TEST E : CONTROL MODULE TESTS
CONDITIONS
E1: CONTROL MODULE TEST 1
NOTES:
When connecting the MOST tester, use the 2+0 or 2+4 socket as appropriate and set the connector selector switch to
match the socket in use
indicate a fault.
1 Connect the MOST tester to the relevant control module using the adapter harness
Yes
MOST signal received. Tests inconclusive. Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the control module
and confirm that the MOST network fault is still present. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to
Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to E2.
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the relevant control module power and ground circuits for
open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to E3.
No
Repair the power and/or ground circuit
1 Reconnect the MOST harness to the control module
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new control module
PINPOINT TEST F : MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST
CONDITIONS
F1: MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST 1
NOTES:
When connecting the MOST tester, use the 2+0 or 2+4 socket as appropriate and set the connector selector switch to
match the socket in use
indicate a fault.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester

2 Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the control module
3 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the information and entertainment control module
Yes
GO to F2.
No
The fault is in the harness between the information and entertainment control module and the
preceeding control module. Install a new MOST harness as necessary
F2: MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST 2
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester
2 Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the information and entertainment control module
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new information and entertainment control module
PINPOINT TEST G : MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TESTS
CONDITIONS
G1: MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TEST 1
NOTE: The MOST tester may continue to emit a tone or illuminate the LED after the test switch is released. This does
not indicate a fault.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the touch screen display
2 Connect the MOST tester to the touch screen display using the adapter harness
Yes
The fault is in the MOST harness between the touch screen display and the succeeding control module.
Install a new MOST harness as necessary
No
GO to G2.
G2: MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TEST 2
1 Reconnect the MOST harness to the touch screen display
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new touch screen display
PINPOINT TEST H : BLANK SCREEN TESTS
CONDITIONS
H1: BLANK SCREEN TEST 1
1 Switch on the audio/video system

2 Remove the cover from the MOST diagnostic connector
4 Connect the MOST tester to the MOST diagnostic connector
Yes
The MOST diagnostic connector cover is causing the MOST network fault. GO to H2.
No
The MOST diagnostic connector cover is not causing MOST network fault. GO to H3.
1 Disconnect the MOST tester
2 Install the cover to the MOST diagnostic connector
Yes
No
Install a new MOST diagnostic connector cover
1 Check the MOST tester beep/LED
Yes
MOST signal received. The MOST network fault is located downstream of the MOST tester. GO to H4.
No
MOST signal not received. The MOST network fault is located upstream of the MOST tester. Disconnect
the MOST tester from the MOST diagnostic connector and install the cover. GO to H5.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the touch screen display
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test J.
No
The fault is in the MOST harness between the MOST diagnostic connector and the touch screen display.
Install a new MOST harness as necessary
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the information and entertainment control module
2 Direct the information and entertainment control module at a suitable surface and check for the
presence of red light
Yes
Install a new MOST harness between the information and entertainment control module and the MOST
diagnostic connector
No
GO to Pinpoint Test I.
PINPOINT TEST I : INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE TESTS
CONDITIONS
I1: INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE TEST 1
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the information and entertainment control
module for related DTCs
Is communication possible between the manufacturer approved diagnostic system and the information and
entertainment control module?
Yes
Refer to the relevant DTC index
No
GO to I2.
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the information and entertainment control module power
and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to I3.
No
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Is the medium speed CAN bus within specification?
Yes
Install a new information and entertainment control module
No
Repair the medium speed CAN bus circuit
PINPOINT TEST J : TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY TESTS
CONDITIONS
J1: TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the touch screen display power and ground circuits for
open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to J2.
No
J2: TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY TEST 2
1 Reconnect the MOST harness to the touch screen display
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new touch screen display
DTC Index
CAUTIONS:
3548-1358-00
NOTES:

B00D511 Restraint System Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check PAD
Passenger Disable PAD lamp supply circuit - short lamp supply circuit for short to ground
Indicator to ground
Passenger Disable PAD lamp supply circuit - short lamp supply circuit for short to power
Indicator to power
Passenger Disable PAD lamp supply circuit - open lamp supply circuit for open circuit
Indicator circuit
B100951 Ignition Check ignition, power and ground supplies to CJB and
Authorisation Faulty instrument cluster instrument cluster. Re-synchronize ID by re-configuring
Target SID re-synchronisation the instrument cluster as a new module. Check CAN
error following programming communications between instrument cluster and tester
CAN fault
B100962 Ignition Check CAN communications between CJB and instrument

Authorisation Low speed CAN fault cluster. Check ignition, power and ground supplies to CJB
CJB fault and instrument cluster. Confirm correct module is
Instrument cluster fault installed. Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the
Incorrect module installed instrument cluster as a new module. Check CAN network
(CJB/Instrument cluster) for interference/EMC related issues
Target SID synchronisation
B100963 Ignition Check Power and Ground supplies to CJB and instrument
Authorisation CJB fault cluster. Check CAN communications between CJB and
Low speed CAN fault instrument cluster. Check battery is in fully charged and
Instrument cluster fault serviceable condition, refer to the battery care manual
Low battery voltage <9V
B100964 Ignition Check power and ground supplies to CJB and instrument
Authorisation CJB fault cluster. Check CAN communications between CJB and
Low speed CAN fault instrument cluster
Instrument cluster fault
B102B67 Passive Key Check power and ground supplies to CJB and RKE
CJB fault module. Check CAN communications between CJB and
Low speed CAN fault RKE module. Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the RKE
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) module as a new module
module fault
Write target SID
synchronisation error following
re-programming
B102B87 Passive Key Check power and ground supplies to CJB, RKE module
CJB fault and receiver. Check CAN communications between CJB
Low speed CAN fault and instrument cluster. Check key fob battery. Confirm
RKE module fault vehicle surroundings, move vehicle. Check CAN network
Key fob battery low/battery for interference/EMC related issues. Disconnect battery,
contact issue then re-connect - confirm operation by re-programming
Interference from other RF keys. Check serial circuit between receiver and RKE
signal module. Confirm spare key works. Refer to the electrical
EMC/noise circuit diagrams and test circuits to all 3 antennas. Check
Receiver fault whereabouts of key
Receiver not programmed
correctly
Serial communications fault
(between receiver and RKE
module)
Key fault
Passive antenna fault
Confirm placement of key
within vehicle
B108413 Boot/Trunk Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check trunk
Close Switch Trunk latch open signal circuit - latch open signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B108783 LIN Bus "A" Check operation of rain/light sensor by covering sensor or
Checksum of the received LIN applying water to screen, install a new sensor as
frame from battery backed required
sounder, roof header console,
and/or rain/light sensor is
incorrect
B108788 LIN Bus "A" Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Bus off. Battery backed using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
sounder, roof header console, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check battery
and/or rain/light sensor LIN backed sounder, roof header console, and rain/light
circuit - short to ground, power sensor LIN circuit for short to ground, power
B108A11 Start Button Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Start/Stop switch analogue Start/Stop switch analogue input circuits 1 and 2 for
input circuits 1 or 2 - short to short to ground
ground
www.JagDocs.com
B108A12 Start Button Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Start/Stop switch analogue Start/Stop switch analogue input circuits 1 and 2 for
input circuits 1 or 2 - short to short to power
power
B109512 Wiper On/Off Relay Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Wiper On/Off relay control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check wiper
On/Off relay control circuit for short to power
B109514 Wiper On/Off Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check wiper
Wiper On/Off relay control On/Off relay control circuit for short to ground, open
circuit - short to ground, open circuit
circuit
B109612 Wiper High/Low Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Relay Wiper Fast/Slow relay control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check wiper
Fast/Slow relay control circuit for short to power
B109614 Wiper High/Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check wiper
Relay Wiper Fast/Slow relay control Fast/Slow relay control circuit for short to ground, open
circuit
B109712 Heated Windshield Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Relay Heated windshield relay control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heated
windshield relay control circuit for short to power
B109714 Heated Windshield Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heated
Relay Heated windshield relay control windshield relay control circuit for short to ground, open
circuit
B10A612 Main Light Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check master
Master light switch signal from light switch signal from roof header console circuit for
roof header console circuit - short to power
short to power
B10A623 Main Light Switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Master light switch signal from using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
roof header console signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check master
stuck low. Switch is read as ON light switch signal from roof header console for short to
for too long a time ground
B10AD09 Rain Sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Component failures using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Suspect the rain/light sensor, check and install a new
sensor as required
B10AD11 Rain Sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Rain/light sensor power circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
rain/light sensor power circuit for short to ground
B10AD96 Rain Sensor Suspect the rain/light sensor, check and install a new
Component internal failure sensor as required
B10E511 PCM Wake-up Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check ECM
Signal ECM wake-up signal circuit - wake-up signal circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Signal ECM wake-up signal circuit - wake-up signal circuit for short to power
short to power
Signal ECM wake-up signal circuit - wake-up signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B10F111 Key In Switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Keyless vehicle module, key IN using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
status circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check keyless
vehicle module, key IN status circuit for short to ground
B10F112 Key In Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check keyless
Keyless vehicle module, key IN vehicle module, key IN status circuit for short to power
status circuit - short to power
B10F113 Key In Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check keyless
Keyless vehicle module, key IN vehicle module, key IN status circuit for open circuit
status circuit - open circuit
B10F211 Sunroof Control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Sunroof enable signal circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sunroof
enable signal circuit for short to ground
B10F212 Sunroof Control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sunroof
Sunroof enable signal circuit - enable signal circuit for short to power
short to power
B10F213 Sunroof Control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sunroof
Sunroof enable signal circuit - enable signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B10F311 Left Front Position Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Light Left front side lamps circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
front side lamps circuit for short to ground
B10F315 Left Front Position Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Light Left front side lamps circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
front side lamps circuit for short to power, open circuit
B10F411 Right Front Position Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Light Right front side lamps circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
front side lamps circuit for short to ground
B10F415 Right Front Position Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Light Right front side lamps circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
front side lamps circuit for short to power, open circuit
B10F812 Accessory socket 'A' Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
relay Accessory socket 'A' relay using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
control circuit - short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
accessory socket 'A' relay control circuit for short to
power
B10F814 Accessory socket 'A' Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
relay Accessory socket 'A' relay accessory socket 'A' relay control circuit for short to
control circuit - short to ground, ground, open circuit
open circuit
B10F912 Accessory socket 'B' Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
relay Front powerpoint, trailer tow powerpoint, trailer tow connector, road pricing connector,
connector, road pricing sunblind power supply circuits for short to power
connector, sunblind power
supply circuits - short to power
B10F914 Accessory socket 'B' Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
relay Front powerpoint, trailer tow powerpoint, trailer tow connector, road pricing connector,
connector, road pricing sunblind power supply circuits for short to ground, open
connector, sunblind power circuit
supply circuits - short to
B10F993 Accessory socket 'B' Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
relay Front powerpoint, trailer tow using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
connector, road pricing Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
connector, sunblind power powerpoint, trailer tow connector, road pricing connector,
supply circuits - short to power, sunblind power supply circuits for short to power, ground,
ground, open circuit open circuit
B10FA93 Delayed Power Off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
relay ADRC ECM, roof header console using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
lamp, glove box lamp , RH/LH Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check ADRC
footwell lamps, JAG Sense ECM, roof header console lamp, glove box lamp , RH/LH
glove box module, RH/LH footwell lamps, JAG Sense glove box module, RH/LH
sunvisor lamps, rear dome sunvisor lamps, rear dome lamps switched power circuits
lamps switched power circuits - for short to power, open circuit
B10FF11 Ignition control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
ECM and FPDB ignition control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check ECM and
FPDB ignition control circuit for short to ground
B10FF13 Ignition control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
ECM and FPDB ignition control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check ECM and
FPDB ignition control circuit for open circuit
B110011 O2 sensor heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
relay FPDB O2 sensor heater relay using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
control circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check FPDB O2
sensor heater relay control circuit for short to ground
B113D12 Sunroof Global Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Open/Close Control Roof opening panel global using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
open/close control circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check roof
short to power opening panel global open/close control circuit for short
to power
B113D14 Sunroof Global Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check roof
Open/Close Control Roof opening panel global opening panel global open/close control circuit for short
open/close control circuit - to ground, open circuit
short to ground, open circuit
B114011 Engine Crank Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Authorisation Engine crank authorisation using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
signal circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check engine
crank authorisation signal circuit for short to ground
B114211 Ignition Status 1 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Ignition supply 1 circuits - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check all
ignition supply 1 circuits for short to ground
B114311 Ignition Status 2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Ignition supply 2 circuits - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check all
ignition supply 2 circuits for short to ground
B114411 Heated Steering Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Wheel Supply Heated steering wheel supply using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heated
steering wheel supply circuit for short to ground
B114511 Glovebox Locking Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Motor Glovebox latch locking motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
glovebox latch locking motor circuit for short to ground
B114512 Glovebox Locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Motor Glovebox latch locking motor glovebox latch locking motor control circuit for short to
control circuit - short to power power
B114513 Glovebox Locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Motor Glovebox latch locking motor glovebox latch locking motor control circuit for open
control circuit - open circuit circuit
B114612 Passive sounder Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check security
Supply Security passive sounder passive sounder control circuit for short to power
control circuit - short to power
B114614 Passive sounder Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check security
Supply Security passive sounder passive sounder control circuit for short to ground, open
control circuit - short to ground, circuit
open circuit
B115811 Front Passenger Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Seat Heater Sensor Front passenger seat heater using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
sensor circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
passenger seat heater sensor circuit for short to ground
B115813 Front Passenger Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Seat Heater Sensor Front passenger seat heater using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
sensor circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
passenger seat heater sensor circuit for open circuit
B115911 Driver Seat Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Sensor Driver seat heater sensor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat heater sensor circuit for short to ground
B115913 Driver Seat Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Sensor Driver seat heater sensor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat heater sensor circuit for open circuit
B115A11 Front Passenger Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Seat Heater Front passenger seat heater using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
supply circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
passenger seat heater supply circuit for short to ground
B115A15 Front Passenger Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Seat Heater Front passenger seat heater using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
supply circuit - short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
open circuit passenger seat heater supply circuit for short to power,
open circuit
B115B11 Driver Seat Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Driver seat heater supply circuit using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
- short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat heater supply circuit for short to ground
B115B15 Driver Seat Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Driver seat heater supply circuit using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
- short to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat heater supply circuit for short to power, open circuit
B117513 Driver Door Ajar Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
Switch Driver door ajar switch signal door ajar switch signal circuit for open circuit
B117613 Passenger Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Ajar Switch Passenger door ajar switch passenger door ajar switch signal circuit for open circuit
signal circuit - open circuit
B117712 Screenwash Level Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Switch Screenwash level switch signal screenwash level switch signal circuit for short to power
B11C013 Driver Side Rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear
Door Ajar Switch Left rear door ajar switch signal door ajar switch signal circuit for open circuit
B11C113 Passenger Side Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Rear Door Ajar Right rear door ajar switch rear door ajar switch signal circuit for open circuit
Switch signal circuit - open circuit
B122223 Master Lock/Unlock Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check master
Switch Master lock or unlock switch lock and unlock switch digital input circuits for short to
digital input circuit - signal ground, open circuit
stuck low
B123711 Gear Shift Module Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Early Wake-up Transmission shift module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
wake-up control circuit - short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to ground transmission shift module wake-up control circuit for
short to ground
B123712 Gear Shift Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Early Wake-up Transmission shift module transmission shift module wake-up control circuit for
wake-up control circuit - short short to power
to power
B123713 Gear Shift Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Early Wake-up Transmission shift module transmission shift module wake-up control circuit for
wake-up control circuit - open open circuit
circuit
B123E13 Crank Enable Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check OK to
OK to crank signal circuit - crank signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B1A8596 Ambient Light Check and install a new sensor as required

Sensor Light sensor internal electronic
failure
B1C4513 Front Wiper Park Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Position Switch Windshield wiper motor park windshield wiper motor park switch signal circuit for open
switch signal circuit - open circuit
circuit
B1C4523 Front Wiper Park Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
Position Switch Signal stuck low wiper park position switch input circuit for short, open
circuit
B1C7812 Powerwash Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Powerwash relay control circuit powerwash relay control circuit for short to power
- short to power
B1C7814 Powerwash Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Powerwash relay control circuit powerwash relay control circuit for short to ground, open
- short to ground, open circuit circuit
B1C7911 Front Washer Pump Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Screenwash pump control screenwash pump control circuit for short to ground
B1C7913 Front Washer Pump Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Screenwash pump control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
screenwash pump control circuit for open circuit
B1C9812 Left Corner Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
Circuit Left front corner lamp control front corner lamp control circuit for short to power
B1C9814 Left Corner Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
Circuit Left front corner lamp control front corner lamp control circuit for short to ground, open
circuit
B1C9912 Right Corner Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Circuit Right front corner lamp control front corner lamp control circuit for short to power
B1C9914 Right Corner Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Circuit Right front corner lamp control front corner lamp control circuit for short to ground, open
circuit
B1D0011 Left Low Beam Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Left dip beam control circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left dip
beam control circuit for short to ground
B1D0012 Left Low Beam Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left dip
Left dip beam control circuit - beam control circuit for short to power
short to power
B1D0013 Left Low Beam Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left dip
Left dip beam control circuit - beam control circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B1D0111 Right Low Beam Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Right dip beam control circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right dip
beam control circuit for short to ground
B1D0112 Right Low Beam Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right dip
Right dip beam control circuit - beam control circuit for short to power
short to power
B1D0113 Right Low Beam Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right dip
Right dip beam control circuit - beam control circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B1D0211 Left High Beam Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left high
Circuit Left high beam control circuit - beam control circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Circuit Left high beam control circuit - beam control circuit for short to power
short to power
Circuit Left high beam control circuit - beam control circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B1D0311 Right High Beam Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Circuit Right high beam control circuit high beam control circuit for short to ground
- short to ground
Circuit Right high beam control circuit high beam control circuit for short to power
- short to power
Circuit Right high beam control circuit high beam control circuit for open circuit
- open circuit
B1D1711 Battery Backed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check battery
Sounder Battery backed sounder backed sounder inclination sensor control circuit for short
inclination sensor control circuit to ground
- short to ground
B1D1811 Volumetric Sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Intrusion sensor module supply using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
intrusion sensor module supply circuit for short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
B1D2711 Heater Coolant Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Pump Heater coolant pump control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heater
coolant pump control circuit for short to ground
B1D2713 Heater Coolant Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Pump Heater coolant pump control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heater
coolant pump control circuit for open circuit
B1D9796 Tilt Sensor Suspect the battery backed sounder, check and install a
Component internal failure new battery backed sounder as required
P057112 Brake Switch A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit Footbrake switch circuit - short footbrake switch circuit for short to power
to power
P080111 Reverse Inhibit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Control Circuit Electrochromic rear view mirror, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
reverse inhibit circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground electrochromic rear view mirror, reverse inhibit circuit for
short to ground
P080112 Reverse Inhibit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Control Circuit Electrochromic rear view mirror, electrochromic rear view mirror, reverse inhibit circuit for
reverse inhibit circuit - short to short to power
power
P080113 Reverse Inhibit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Control Circuit Electrochromic rear view mirror, electrochromic rear view mirror, reverse inhibit circuit for
reverse inhibit circuit - open open circuit
circuit
P085013 Park/Neutral Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Input Circuit Park/Neutral signal circuit - Park/Neutral signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
P162413 Anti-theft System Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB
RJB anti-theft signal circuit - anti-theft signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
P254F13 Engine Hood Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check hood
Circuit/Open Hood ajar switch signal circuit - ajar switch signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
U001988 Low Speed CAN Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Communication Bus Bus OFF using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
U014200 Lost Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Communication No sub type information using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
With Body Control
Module "B"
With Instrument
Panel Cluster (IPC)
Control Module
With Information
Center "A"
With HVAC Control
Module
U016800 Lost Check power and ground supplies to vehicle security
Communication No sub type information module
With Vehicle
Security Control
Module
With "Door Control
Module A"
With "Door Control
Module B"
With Remote
Function Actuation
U023100 Lost Check power and ground supplies to rain sensing module.
Communication No sub type information LIN circuit fault
With Rain Sensing
Module
U030000 Internal Control Suspect the CJB. Check and install a new CJB as
Module Software No sub type information required, refer to the new module/component installation
Incompatibility note at the top of the DTC Index
U1000-00 Solid State Driver
Protection Active - Central junction box output
NOTE: The relevant output is disabled while this
Driver Disabled - circuit - Short circuit to ground,
DTC is set. Do not clear the DTC until the fault has been
No sub type short circuit to power
rectified
information
system, check for other central junction box short
circuit to ground and/or short circuit to power
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index for
corrective actions
Once circuit faults have been rectified, clear DTC
and retest
U1A1449 CAN Initialisation Suspect the CJB. Check and install a new CJB as
Failure Internal electronic failure required, refer to the new module/component installation
U200813 Sensor Cluster Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Instrument cluster security instrument cluster security signal circuit for open circuit
signal circuit - open circuit
U201012 Switch Illumination Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Switch/interior illumination switch/interior illumination PWM supply circuit for short
PWM supply circuit - short to to power
power
U201014 Switch Illumination Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Switch/interior illumination switch/interior illumination PWM supply circuit for short
PWM supply circuit - short to to ground, open circuit
U210000 Initial Configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
Not Complete RJB configuration (parameters) diagnostic system
failure

Internal electronic Central junction box - Internal
NOTE: The relevant output is disabled while this
failure failure
DTC is set

system, check for other central junction box short
circuit to ground and/or short circuit to power
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index for
corrective actions
Install a new central junction box as required.
Clear DTCs and retest
Not configured diagnostic system. Check the correct CJB is installed to
vehicle market/specification. Install a new/correct CJB as
required, refer to the new module/component installation
U300087 Control Module Carry out CAN network integrity test using the
Missing message manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN network
between RJB and CJB for short, open circuit. Check RJB
and then CJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC Index
U300281 Vehicle Suspect the CJB has previously been installed to another
Identification Invalid serial data received vehicle. Check and install the original or a new CJB
Number
U300317 Battery Voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Circuit voltage above threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Mis-match in battery voltage, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
of 2 volts or more, between
CJB and RJB
Rear Junction Box (RJB)
CAUTIONS:
3548-1358-00
NOTES:

P046011 Fuel Level Sensor Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
A Circuit Fuel level sensor A manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
analogue input circuit - circuit diagrams and check fuel level sensor A analogue input
short to ground circuit for short to ground
A Circuit Fuel level sensor A manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
analogue input circuit - circuit diagrams and check fuel level sensor A analogue input
short to power, open circuit for short to power, open circuit
circuit
P057112 Brake Switch A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check footbrake switch
Circuit Footbrake switch digital digital input signal circuits for short to power
input signal circuits -
short to power
P123012 Fuel Pump Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel pump
Speed High Side output not delivery module for short to power
Malfunction driven - Diagnosis
(VLCM) feedback indicates output
is short to power
P123014 Fuel Pump Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel pump
Speed High Side output not delivery module for short to ground, open circuit
Malfunction driven - Diagnosis
(VLCM) feedback indicates output
is short to ground, open
circuit
P123093 Fuel Pump Low Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Speed High Side output not manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Malfunction driven - Diagnosis circuit diagrams and check fuel pump delivery module for short to
(VLCM) feedback indicates output power, open circuit
is at open load or short
to power
B Circuit Fuel level sensor B manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
analogue input circuit - circuit diagrams and check fuel level sensor B analogue input
B Circuit Fuel level sensor B manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
analogue input circuit - circuit diagrams and check fuel level sensor B analogue input
circuit
P162413 Anti-theft System Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check anti-theft signal
Anti-theft signal circuit circuit from CJB for open circuit
from CJB - open circuit
C111A11 Right Stop Lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Right stomp lamp control manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit - short to ground circuit diagrams and check right stomp lamp control circuit for
short to ground
C111A12 Right Stop Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right stomp
Right stomp lamp control lamp control circuit for short to power
C111A13 Right Stop Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right stomp
Right stomp lamp control lamp control circuit for open circuit
C111B11 Left Stop Lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Left stomp lamp control manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit - short to ground circuit diagrams and check left stomp lamp control circuit for
short to ground
C111B13 Left Stop Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left stomp lamp
Left stomp lamp control control circuit for open circuit
C112011 Reversing lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Reverse lamp control manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit - short to ground circuit diagrams and check reverse lamp control circuit for short
to ground
C112012 Reversing lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check reverse lamp
Reverse lamp control control circuit for short to power
C112013 Reversing lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check reverse lamp
Reverse lamp control control circuit for open circuit
C1120-15 Reversing lamp -

circuit short to Reverse lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check reverse
battery or open circuit - short circuit to lamp control circuit for short circuit to power, open circuit,
power, open circuit, high high resistance. Repair wiring harness as required. Clear
resistance DTC and retest
B100A51 Fuel Pump Check power and ground supplies to RJB. Check CAN
Authorisation RJB fault communications between RJB and instrument cluster. Check
Low speed CAN fault power and ground supplies to instrument cluster
Instrument cluster fault
B100A62 Fuel Pump Check CAN communications between RJB and instrument cluster.
Authorisation Low speed CAN fault Check power and ground supplies to RJB and instrument cluster.
RJB fault Confirm correct module installed. Re-synchronise ID by
Instrument cluster fault re-configuring the RJB as a new module. Check CAN network for
Incorrect module interference/EMC related issues
installed (RJB/Instrument
cluster)
Write target SID
following re-programming
B100A63 Fuel Pump Check power and ground supplies to RJB and instrument cluster.
Authorisation RJB fault Check CAN communications between RJB and instrument cluster.
Low speed CAN fault Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable condition, refer
Instrument cluster fault to the battery care manual
Low battery voltage <9V
B102612 Steering Column Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check steering column
Lock Steering column lock lock ground circuit for short to power
ground circuit - short to
power
B108783 LIN Bus "A" Check the battery monitoring system and rear parking aid system
The checksum of the for DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index
received LIN frame is
incorrect
B108786 LIN Bus "A" Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
The header of the LIN manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check the battery
message received is monitoring system and rear parking aid system for DTCs and
incorrect refer to relevant DTC Index
B108788 LIN Bus "A" Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Battery monitoring manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
system LIN circuit - short circuit diagrams and check battery monitoring system LIN circuit
to ground, power for short to ground, power
B108A23 Start Button Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Start/Stop switch digital manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
input signal circuit - circuit diagrams and check Start/Stop switch digital input signal
stuck low circuit for short to ground
B10A111 Trailer Tow Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Detection Trailer tow detection manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
digital input circuit - circuit diagrams and check trailer tow detection digital input
B10AF12 Blower Fan Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check blower motor
High Side output not supply circuit for short to power
driven - Diagnosis
feedback indicates output
is short to power
B10AF14 Blower Fan Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check blower motor
High Side output not supply circuit for short to ground, open circuit
driven - Diagnosis
circuit
B10AF93 Blower Fan Relay Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
High Side output not manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
driven - Diagnosis circuit diagrams and check blower motor supply circuit for short
feedback indicates output to power, open circuit
to power
B10DD11 Airbag Deployed Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Airbag deployed digital manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
input signal circuit - short circuit diagrams and check airbag deployed digital input signal
to ground circuit for short to ground
B10DD15 Airbag Deployed Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Airbag deployed digital manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
input signal circuit - short circuit diagrams and check airbag deployed digital input signal
to power, open circuit circuit for short to power, open circuit
B10DD38 Airbag Deployed Check the RCM for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Signal frequency incorrect Index
B10DE11 Low Fuel Warning Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Switch Diesel run-dry switch manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
analogue input circuit - circuit diagrams and check diesel run-dry switch analogue input
www.JagDocs.com
B10DE15 Low Fuel Warning Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Switch Diesel run-dry switch manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
analogue input circuit - circuit diagrams and check diesel run-dry switch analogue input
circuit
B111211 Park Aid Ignition Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Parking aid ignition manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
supply circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check parking aid ignition supply circuit for
ground short to ground
B111212 Park Aid Ignition Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check parking aid
Parking aid ignition ignition supply circuit for short to power
supply circuit - short to
power
B111511 High Mounted Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Stop Lamp High mounted stop lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Control control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check high mounted stop lamp control circuit
ground for short to ground
B111611 Left Tail Lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Left hand tail lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check left hand tail lamp control circuit for
B111711 Right Tail Lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Right hand tail lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check right hand tail lamp control circuit for
B111A11 Number Plate Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Lamps Right hand or left hand manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
number plate lamp circuit diagrams and check right hand and left hand number plate
control circuits - short to lamp control circuits for short to ground
ground
B111A12 Number Plate Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right hand and
Lamps Right hand or left hand left hand number plate lamp control circuits for short to power
number plate lamp
control circuits - short to
power
B111A13 Number Plate Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right hand and
Lamps Right hand or left hand left hand number plate lamp control circuits for open circuit
number plate lamp
control circuits - open
circuit
B111A-15 Number Plate

Lamps - circuit Right or left side licence Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
short to battery plate lamp(s) inoperative side and left side licence plate lamp control circuits for
or open Right or left side licence short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair
plate lamp control wiring harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
circuits - short circuit to
power, open circuit, high
resistance
B111D12 Boot/Trunk Motor Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Open Luggage compartment lid manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
latch actuator control circuit diagrams and check luggage compartment lid latch
circuit - short to power actuator control circuit for short to power
B111D14 Boot/Trunk Motor Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Open Luggage compartment lid manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
latch actuator control circuit diagrams and check luggage compartment lid latch
circuit - short to ground, actuator control circuit for short to ground, open circuit
open circuit
B111E11 Boot/Trunk Lamps Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Luggage compartment manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
lamp control circuit - circuit diagrams and check luggage compartment lamp control
B111E12 Boot/Trunk Lamps Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check luggage
Luggage compartment compartment lamp control circuit for short to power
lamp control circuit -
short to power
B111E13 Boot/Trunk Lamps Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check luggage
Luggage compartment compartment lamp control circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B111E-15 Boot/Trunk Lamps

- circuit short to Luggage compartment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check luggage
battery or open lamp inoperative compartment lamp control circuit for short circuit to
Luggage compartment power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair wiring harness
lamp control circuit - as required. Clear DTC and retest
short circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B112312 Restraints Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Ignition Relay High Side output not manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
driven - diagnosis circuit diagrams and check restraints ignition relay output for
feedback indicates output short to power
is short to power
feedback indicates output short to ground, open circuit
circuit
feedback indicates output open load or short to power
to power
Control Interior lamp fade control fade control circuit for short to ground
Control Interior lamp fade control fade control circuit for short to power
Illumination Hazard switch illumination control circuit for short to power
illumination control
Illumination Hazard switch illumination control circuit for short to ground, open circuit
illumination control
circuit - short to ground,
open circuit
B113E12 External Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check external
Boot/Trunk External luggage luggage compartment lid release switch digital input circuit for
Release Switch compartment lid release short to power
switch digital input circuit
- short to power
B113E23 External Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Boot/Trunk External luggage manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Release Switch compartment lid release circuit diagrams and check external luggage compartment lid
switch digital input circuit release switch digital input circuit for short to ground
- signal stuck low
B11D949 Vehicle Battery Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable condition using
Vehicle battery the Midtronics battery tester and the battery care manual
damaged/worn out
B11DB49 Battery Suspect the battery monitoring module. Check and install a new
Monitoring Internal electronic failure module as required, refer to the new module/component
Module installation note at the top of the DTC Index
B11DB87 Battery Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Monitoring Battery monitoring manufacturer approved diagnostic system. If additional DTCs
Module module connector B108783, B108786, B108787 are logged, suspect the RJB. Check
dis-connected/poor and install a new RJB as required, refer to the new
connection Battery module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
monitoring If additional DTCs B108783, B108786, B108787 are NOT logged,
module to RJB LIN circuit check for good/clean contact at battery monitoring module
- open circuit
Battery monitoring connector, refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check battery
module to battery monitoring module to RJB LIN circuit and battery monitoring
positive monitor circuit - module to battery positive monitor circuit for open circuit. Clear
open circuit DTC and repeat automated diagnostic procedure using
Battery monitoring manufacturer approved diagnostic system. If DTC remains
module/RJB failure suspect the battery monitoring module, check and install a new
battery monitoring module as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index
B123A11 Left Front Turn Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front turn
Indicator Left front turn signal signal lamp control circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Indicator Left front turn signal signal lamp control circuit for short to power
short to power
Indicator Left front turn signal signal lamp control circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B123A-15 Left Front Turn

Indicator - circuit Left front turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left front
short to battery lamp control circuit - turn signal lamp control circuit for short circuit to power,
or open short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair wiring harness as
open circuit, high required. Clear DTC and retest
resistance
B123B11 Right Front Turn Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front turn
Indicator Right front turn signal signal lamp control circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Indicator Right front turn signal signal lamp control circuit for short to power
short to power
Indicator Right front turn signal signal lamp control circuit for open circuit
open circuit

Indicator - circuit Right front turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
resistance
B124711 Left Rear Turn Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear turn
Indicator Left rear turn signal lamp signal lamp control circuit for short to ground
ground
Indicator Left rear turn signal lamp signal lamp control circuit for short to power
power
Indicator Left rear turn signal lamp signal lamp control circuit for open circuit
power, open circuit
B1247-15 Left Rear Turn

Indicator - circuit Left rear turn signal lamp Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear turn
short to battery control circuit - short signal lamp control circuit for short circuit to power, open
or open circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair wiring harness as required.
circuit, high resistance Clear DTC and retest
B124811 Right Rear Turn Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right rear turn
Indicator Right rear turn signal signal lamp control circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Indicator Right rear turn signal signal lamp control circuit for short to power
short to power
Indicator Right rear turn signal signal lamp control circuit for open circuit
open circuit

Indicator - circuit Right rear turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right rear
resistance
B126113 Fuel Flap/Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel filler flap
Release Switch Fuel filler flap digital digital input signal circuit for open circuit
input signal circuit - open
circuit
B1A7911 Rear Fog Lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Rear fog lamp control manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit - short to ground circuit diagrams and check rear fog lamp control circuit for short
to ground
B1A7912 Rear Fog Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear fog lamp
Rear fog lamp control control circuit for short to power
B1A7913 Rear Fog Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear fog lamp
Rear fog lamp control control circuit for open circuit
B1C5512 Horn Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check horn control
Horn control circuit - circuit for short to power
short to power
B1C5514 Horn Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check horn control
Horn control circuit - circuit for short to ground, open circuit
short to ground, open
circuit
B1C8312 Rear Defog Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heated rear
High Side output not window power supply circuit for short to power
driven - diagnosis
is short to power
B1C8314 Rear Defog Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heated rear
High Side output not window power supply circuit for short to ground, open circuit
driven - diagnosis
circuit
B1C8393 Rear Defog Relay Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
High Side output not manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
driven - diagnosis circuit diagrams and check heated rear window power supply
feedback indicates output circuit for open load and short to power
to power
B1C9112 Fuel Flap/Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel filler flap
Lock Relay Coil Fuel filler flap locking locking motor control circuit for short to power
Circuit motor control circuit -
short to power
B1C9114 Fuel Flap/Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel filler flap
Lock Relay Coil Fuel filler flap locking locking motor control circuit for short to ground, open circuit
Circuit motor control circuit -
circuit
B1D3512 Hazard Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check hazard warning
Hazard warning lamp lamp switch digital input circuit for short to power
switch digital input circuit
- short to power
B1D3523 Hazard Switch Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Hazard warning lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
switch digital input circuit circuit diagrams and check hazard warning lamp switch digital
- signal stuck low input circuit for short to ground
U001988 Low Speed CAN Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Communication Bus off manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Bus
U014000 Lost Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Communication No sub type information manufacturer approved diagnostic system
With Body
Control Module
With Instrument
Panel Cluster
(IPC) Control
Module
With Parking
Assist Control
Module "A"
With HVAC
Control Module
With Remote
Function
Actuation
U030046 Internal Control Suspect the RJB. Check and install a new RJB as required, refer
Module Software Calibration/parameter to the new module/component installation note at the top of the
Incompatibility memory failure DTC Index
U100000 Solid State Driver Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Protection Active No sub type information manufacturer approved diagnostic system
-Driver Disabled
U1A1449 CAN Initialisation Suspect the RJB. Check and install a new RJB as required, refer
Failure Internal electronic failure to the new module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
U300049 Control Module Suspect the RJB. Check and install a new RJB as required, refer
Internal electronic failure to the new module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
U300055 Control Module Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Not configured system
www.JagDocs.com
Module Communications Network - Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB)
Removal

3.
Installation

Module Communications Network - Central Junction Box (CJB)
Removal
All vehicles
2. Refer to: Cowl Side Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
3.
All vehicles
4.
5.
Installation
2. Configure the CJB using the diagnostic tool.

Wiring Harnesses - Wiring Harness
Introduction
CAUTION: Do not use any other heat shrink sleeve other than the approved glue lined heat shrink sleeve mentioned in
the repair procedure.
The purpose of this document is to promote quick and efficient minor repair to harness connectors or cables using approved
methods. Repairs may only be made to cables and connectors which have been mechanically, not electrically damaged. It also
applies where the whole extent of the damage can be clearly identified and rectified.
Care and neatness are essential requirements in making a perfect repair.
Caution:
This harness repair guide, does not approve repairs to any of the following circuits:
1. Any media orientated system transport network harnesses.

2. Supplement restraint system (SRS) firing circuits (Air bags).
3. Link lead assembles, which are unique to safety critical circuits such as anti-lock brake system (ABS) and thermocouple
circuits. An example of this is the ABS wheel speed sensors with moulded connectors.
4. 4. Screened cables, leads and wiring harness(s).
If any harness(s) with defective electrical connector terminals or wires from the above circuits are a concern, new
components must be installed.
Repair Components
CAUTION: Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient
heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined heat
shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
The wiring harness repair components comprises:
Pre-terminated wiring harness(s) of different sizes and types

Three sizes of butt splice connectors
A selection of colored cable identification sleeves
Two sizes of glue lined heat shrink sleeves
A suitable heat source, for shrinking heat shrink sleeves will be required.
The pre-insulated diamond grip range of electrical connector terminals and in-line, butt splice connectors are the only
acceptable product for the repairs of wiring harnesses. The butt connectors not only grip the wire but also the insulation,
making a very secure joint.
If an electrical connector terminal is not available approval for the repair is NOT given and in these circumstances a new wiring
harness must be installed.
Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) and Butt Splice Connectors
The pre-terminated wiring harness(s) are supplied with the insulation in one of three colors, red, blue or yellow. The colors do
not apply to any particular circuit but to the harness wire size. See the Relationship Table in the Repair Method section.
Butt splice connectors are also supplied with red, blue or yellow coverings, which must be matched to the pre-terminated
wiring harness insulation color.
Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s)
The illustration shows:
The pre-terminated wiring harness(s) which are available via Jaguar/Land Rover authorised parts.
The part number of the pre-terminated wiring harness
The letter showing the extractor tip which must be used to remove this type of electrical connector terminal
Those electrical connector terminals which are gold
Some of the pre-terminated wiring harness(s) have seals installed to the insulation for sealed connector applications. It is
www.JagDocs.com
essential for prevention of moisture ingress that a sealed pre-terminated wiring harness must be used where a sealed terminal
was removed.
CAUTION: Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient
heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined heat
shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
Two sizes of heat shrink sleeving are available. Each heat shrink sleeve contains a sealant glue. These must be used when
connecting wiring harness(s) or electrical connector terminal(s) at all times. The smaller diameter heat shrink sleeve is to be
used with the red and blue butt splice connectors and the larger diameter sleeve with the yellow butt splice connectors.
For ease and speed, some of the pre-terminated wiring harness(s) may already have the insulation partly stripped at the splice
end. If the repair requires insulation to be stripped from the cable, refer to the Relationship Table for the correct length of
insulation to be stripped.
The Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) illustration shows the electrical connector terminal type, the part number of the
pre-terminated wiring harness and the letter of the extractor tip which must be used to extract the electrical connector
terminal from the connector housing. Additionally, those electrical connector terminal(s) which are gold are identified, all
others are therefore, tinned and not gold.
Wiring Harness Cable Identification Sleeves
A selection of colored sleeves are available for maintaining the wiring harness cable identification on the pre-terminated wiring
harness. Place the correct colored sleeve(s) over the pre-terminated wiring harness insulation as near to the electrical
connector as possible with the main wiring harness cable color nearest to the electrical connector.
For example, if the original wiring harness cable color is pink with a black trace put the pink wiring harness cable identification
sleeve on the pre-terminated wiring harness first followed by a black sleeve, and slide both along the wiring harness cable to
the electrical connector terminal.
List of Parts
Description Part Number Quantity

Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) 418-066 to 418-103 10 each
inclusive
Glue Lined Heat Shrink Pack – small diameter 418-104 25 per pack
Glue Lined Heat Shrink Pack – larger diameter 418-105 10 per pack
Case Assembly Comprising – carry case, lid, inner lid, base, insert, trays foam 418-106 1
spacers
Butt Splice Connector – Red 418-107 50 per pack
Butt Splice Connector – Blue 418-108 50 per pack
Butt Splice Connector – Yellow 418-109 20 per pack
Sleeve Identification Pack – for Red insulation 418-112 500
Sleeve Identification Pack – for Blue insulation 418-113 500
Sleeve Identification Pack – for Yellow insulation 418-114 500
Harness repair components can be ordered from Jaguar/Land Rover authorised parts.
Repair Tools
The wiring harness repair tools comprises:
Crimping pliers
A wire cutter and insulation stripper
An electrical connector terminal extraction handle and tips
Extraction Handle and Tips
The extraction handle, in conjunction with the correct tip, is used to remove a terminal from an electrical connector. Each tip is
marked with an identification letter, A to K inclusive. Each tip has been specially designed to extract a particular type of
electrical connector terminal. The use of any other tool is not recommended and is liable to cause damage to the electrical
connector. The tip is fastened to the handle by a screw which holds the tip firmly yet allows it to be easily replaced.
Extraction Handle and Tips
Insulation Stripper
The moving jaw has an adjuster wheel which has a series of holes in it. Turning the wheel and placing the cable in the
matching size hole will automatically adjust the jaw to the correct pressure. Note that some wiring harness(s) may have a
harder insulation and slight adjustment of the wheel may be needed to make a clean strip but exercise care not to damage the
wire.
Insulation Stripper
By pressing the outer edges of the wiring harness cable length stop together the adjuster can be slid up or down the jaw. This
decreases or increases the length by which the wiring harness cable insulation will be stripped from the pre-terminated wiring
harness or wiring harness wire. The adjuster has a position indicator to align with a graduated scale and this sets the correct
length in millimetres, of insulation to be stripped. The amount of insulation to be stripped is shown in the Relationship Table.
The illustration shows the insulation stripper tool and a wiring harness correctly gripped in the jaws. A wire cutter is provided
on the outer side of the fixed jaw.
Cable Correctly Gripped in Stripper Blades

Crimping Pliers
Crimping Pliers
The crimping pliers have a moving jaw and a stationary jaw, with three different sized crimping enclosures. Each of the
enclosures is identified by a red, blue or yellow coloured dot which corresponds to the three colours of the pre-terminated
wiring harness(s) and butt splice connector colors.
Description Part Number Quantity

Extraction Tool Handle 418-110 1
Extraction Tip Pack consists of 2 spare screws plus 418-S111 1
Tip A 418-118 1
Tip B 418-119 1
Tip C 418-120 1
Tip D 418-121 1
Tip E 418-122 1
Tip F 418-123 1
Tip G 418-124 1
Tip H 418-125 1
Tip I 418-126 1
Tip J 418-127 1
Tip K 418-128 1
Crimping Pliers YRW500010 1
Wire Stripping Tool 418-117 1
Harness repair tools can be ordered from:
Bosch Automotive Service Solutions
Ironstone Way
Brixworth Industrial Estate
Brixworth
Northants
NN6 9UD
United Kingdom
Telephone: +44 (0) 1327 303400
Fax: +44 (0) 1327 303499
Email: css.uk@bosch-automotive.com
Repair Methods
CAUTION: Several different types and sizes of terminal may be found in a single electrical connector housing.
It is necessary to identify:
The conductor (wire) size of the affected wiring harness

The electrical connector range from which the damaged wiring harness is to be removed
The terminal type
Use of the approved diagnostic tool will greatly assist in the quick identification of electrical connectors and faulty pin
terminal(s).
Reference can also be made to the vehicle Electrical Guides, held by Dealers, to identify wiring harness(s) and electrical
connector(s).
By using the Relationship Table, the wiring harness conductor (wire) size can be related to a suitable pre-terminated wiring
harness by the color of the insulation. Also, the correct length of insulation to be stripped from the wiring harness lead is
identified.
Relationship Table
CABLE RANGE SPLICE STRIP LENGTH

0.35 mm² to 1.50 mm² RED 6.00 to 7.00 mm
1.00 mm² to 2.50 mm² BLUE 6.00 to 7.00 mm
4.00 mm² to 6.00 mm² YELLOW 9.00 to 9.50 mm
Electrical Connector Terminal Extraction
It must be noted that some electrical connector(s) have anti-backout devices which prevent the terminals from being removed
from the electrical connector. Some examples of these are shown in following illustrations. The anti-backout device must be
released before attempting to remove the terminal from the electrical connector. Some anti-backout devices require a special
tip to release the device. Most can be released by carefully using a suitable small screwdriver.
Various types of electrical connector have seals installed internally or externally to prevent moisture ingress. These normally
do not have to be removed but make sure that they are installed when the electrical connectors are connected.
The illustrations show examples of each tip used on different types of electrical connector(s). There are a large number of
different types of electrical connector used on vehicles therefore only one example using each tip is shown. Technicians
experience and judgement will dictate which type of tip should be used for those electrical connector(s) which are not shown.
Care should be exercised to avoid further damage when removing the terminals from the electrical connector.
NOTE: Examples of the extraction tips and anti-backout tips.
www.JagDocs.com
:13!748
:13!749
'13l750
EIJ07SI
()_;
E130752
:131753
:131754
:131755
NOTE: The chart shows the electrical connector types, terminal pins/sockets, extractor tip and anti-backout tip.
Electrical connector terminal type Pin or socket Extractor tip Anti-backout tip
Mulitlock 040 series D A
Mulitlock 040 series B A
Mulitlock 070 series B B
Mulitlock 040 series D B
Econoseal III 070 series D B
Econoseal III 070 series B B
Econoseal III 070 series B B
Econoseal III J2 D B
Econoseal III 250 series B F
Micro-timer II 1.5mm D C
Micro-timer II 1.5mm B C
Std power timer 4.8 flat D G
Std power timer 5.8 flat B D
Std power timer 2.8 flat D D
Std power timer 4.8 flat D G
Ford 2.8 flat D E H
Mulitlock 070 series D B
Mulitlock 070 series B B
Junior power timer 2.8 flat D D
Sumitomo TS90 connector B B H
Modu IV gold plated D B
Mulitlock 040 series gold plated D A
Micro qualock D I
EECV D B
EECV D B
Kostal dia 1.50 series D J
AMP 6.3 flat D B
Junior power timer 2.8 flat D D
2.8 series D B I
Sumitomo TS90 connector D B H
Ducon 0.60 gold plated D K
AMP 6.3 flat D D
Repair Procedure
CAUTIONS:
Do not use crimping pliers, insulation strippers, butt splice connectors, heat shrink sleeves or pre-terminated wiring
harness(s) that are not supplied with by authourised Jaguar/Land Rover parts. Each part has been designed to be used only
with the other parts available from Jaguar/Land Rover parts.
Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient heat to the
glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined heat shrink
sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
It is not correct to make more than five repair joints on the wiring harness to any electrical connector and if more damage is
found at the same electrical connector then a new wiring harness must be installed.
1. Remove the faulty terminal from the electrical connector using the extractor tool and correct tip. Make sure that any
anti-backout device is released before trying to remove the terminal.
2. CAUTION: A number of electrical connector terminals are gold plated or gold flashed. When defective, they must
be installed with a gold pre-terminated wiring harness(s). It is not always easy to identify the female as gold but the
male pins are visually easier, therefore always check both male and female terminals to identify those which are gold.
Under no circumstances are gold and tin terminals to be mixed as this will lead to early failure of the electrical contact.
NOTE: Never use a harness lead with a smaller diameter than the original harness lead.
Select the correct size and type of pre-terminated wiring harness and butt splice connector.
3. Using the wire cutter on the stripping tool, cut the pre-terminated wiring harness and the harness cable to the required
length.
4. NOTE: See illustration: Stripping Insulation
From the Relationship Table, find the correct length of insulation to be stripped from the pre-terminated wiring harness
and set the adjustable cable length stop to the correct length. Place the pre-terminated wiring harness in the wire
stripper and remove the insulation.
5. Put the cable identification sleeve(s) on to the wiring harness with the main cable colour nearest to the terminal.
6. During this next step do not over tighten. Place the selected butt splice connector in the crimping tool, matching the
aperture and the butt connector colours. Make sure that the window indentation in the butt connector is resting over
the guide bar on the lower jaw. Partially close the grip until the butt connector is securely held in the aperture. This will
give support to the butt connector while the pre-terminated wiring harness is inserted into it.
7. NOTE: See illustration: Splice Correctly Located
Insert the pre-terminated wiring harness into the butt connector and make sure that the wire is against the wire stop.
Close the grip firmly, crimping the lead to the butt connector. When the handles have been completely closed the butt
connector will be freed from the tool as the handles are released. If the handles have not been completely closed then
the jaws will hold the butt connector and it cannot be removed from the tool until the crimp is fully made by closing the
handles completely.
8. Make sure that the harness cable has been squarely cut and the correct length of insulation removed. If more than one
splice is needed the butt connectors must be not be crimped to the wiring harness at the same distance from the
connector. The splices must be staggered to prevent a bulk of splices in the same area of the wiring harness.
9. It is preferable to cover the butt splice joint with heat shrink sleeve. This is desirable not essential, except where the
electrical connector is a sealed electrical connector. Use the smaller diameter sleeve for red and blue pre-terminated
wiring harness(s) and the large diameter sleeve for the yellow pre-terminated wiring harness(s). It is advisable to place
the heat shrink over the completed joint but in some instances the sleeve will not pass over the terminal. Check, and if
required, place the correct size sleeve onto the harness cable or pre-terminated wiring harness before crimping the butt
splice to the wiring harness.
10. Place the harness cable into the butt splice with the splice window over the guide bar. Make sure that the cable harness
wire is against the stop in the butt splice, crimp the butt splice connector to the wiring harness.
11. Gently pull the harness cables each side of the butt splice to make sure that a secure joint has been made.
12. WARNING: Do not use a naked flame in areas where fuel or oil have been spilt. Clean the area of residual oil and
fuel and wait until the fuel spill has fully evaporated.
CAUTIONS:
When using a heat source make sure that it is localised and causes no damage to surrounding materials.
Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient heat
to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined
heat shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
Using a suitable heat source, shrink the sleeve over the butt splice.
13. If further pre-terminated wiring harness(s) are to be installed to the same electrical connector, make sure that the lead
is cut at a different length to the previous joint. This makes sure that the splices will, where possible, be staggered on
the wiring harness and prevent a bulk of splices in one area.
14. When all of the splices have been made, fit the terminal(s) to the electrical connector, taking care that the terminals
are correctly orientated.
15. Install the wiring harness cover and secure with adhesive electrical tape. Do not cover the wiring harness right to the
electrical connector as the terminals must have a little movement and not be firmly bound to the electrical connector or
wiring harness. Make sure that the cable identification sleeve(s) are showing at the wiring harness electrical connector.
www.JagDocs.com
Stripping Insulation
Splice Correctly Located

Wiring Harnesses - Wiring Harness Repair
General Procedures
1. For additional information, refer to: Wiring Harness (418-02 Wiring

Harnesses, Description and Operation).
Wiring Harnesses - Luggage Compartment Lid Wiring Harness
Removal
1. Remove the luggage compartment lid trim panel.
Refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
2.
3.
Installation

Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft - Active - Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
1 Alarm indicator
2 Latch mechanism - front door
4 Latch mechanism - rear door
5 Central locking Radio Frequency (RF) receiver
6 Luggage compartment lid latch mechanism
8 Latch mechanism - rear door
9 Latch mechanism - front door
10 Start control unit
12 Passive sounder
13 Hood latch mechanism
14 Vehicle horn
www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft - Active - Overview
Overview
The active anti-theft system is available with three different levels of vehicle protection depending on market specification:
Hinged panel sensing

Hinged panel and intrusion sensing
Hinged panel, intrusion and inclination sensing.
The CJB (central junction box) automatically arms and disarms the active anti-theft system when it functions the central
locking system.
Refer to: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Description and
Operation).
Depending on market specification two modes of protection are used: perimeter mode and volumetric mode.
Perimeter mode
Perimeter mode, monitors the security of the hinged panels, which include:
all doors,
luggage compartment lid, and
engine compartment lid.
When perimeter mode is active, the CJB monitors the panel ajar switches in the latch mechanisms of the hinged panels.
Volumetric mode
In volumetric mode the CJB monitors the interior of the vehicle for movement using an ultrasonic sound wave sensor.
If the battery backed sounder incorporates an inclination sensor the vehicle will also be monitored for unauthorised tilting; for
example towing or jacking.
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft - Active - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN; O = LIN bus
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (250 amp)
5 Vehicle horn
7 Central locking - Radio Frequency (RF) receiver
8 Engine compartment lid - latch mechanism
9 Passive sounder
11 Alarm indicator
13 Start control unit
14 Luggage compartment lid - latch mechanism
15 Door latch mechanism - LH (left-hand) rear
16 Door latch mechanism - RH (right-hand) rear
17 Door latch mechanism - RH front
18 Door latch mechanism - LH front
19 Door module - LH rear
20 Door module - RH rear
21 Door module - RH front
22 Door module - LH front
System Operation
Anti-Theft - Active
The active anti-theft system is available with three different levels of vehicle protection depending on market specification:
Hinged panel sensing

Hinged panel and intrusion sensing
Hinged panel, intrusion and inclination sensing.
The system is controlled by software in the CJB and RJB and indicates a trigger condition:
Visually, using the direction indicators, and

Audibly, using the vehicle horn and either a passive or active sounder to indicate a trigger condition.
The passive sounder takes the form of an anti-theft disc horn located at the rear of the engine compartment on the LH side.
The active sounder takes the form of a battery backed sounder located in the same position.
Depending on market specification, the battery backed sounder may be fitted with an inclination sensor. Both types of battery
backed sounder are visually identical and can only be identified by their part number. Both are also intelligent units, and
communicate to the CJB over a LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection.
Monitoring of the hinged panels is carried out using switches located in each door latch assembly, the engine-compartment-lid
latch assembly, and the luggage-compartment-lid latch assembly. The condition of the switches is monitored by the CJB.
Monitoring of front door lock status is carried out using switches located in the door latch mechanisms. The condition of the
switches is monitored by the front door modules and transmitted to the CJB over the medium speed CAN (controller area
network) bus.
Monitoring of the cabin interior is carried out using an intrusion detection module mounted behind the roof console. The
intrusion detection module comprises an ultrasonic sound wave sensor to determine if there is movement within the cabin.
Information from the intrusion detection module is communicated to the CJB over a LIN bus connection.
CAUTIONS:
The intrusion detection module electrical connections, particularly those to the sensors mounted in the roof console, are
very delicate and must be handled with care.
The intrusion detection module is an electro-statically sensitive part and should only be handled in an electro-statically
controlled environment.
When armed, the active anti-theft system can be triggered in one of the following ways:
A door ajar switch indicates a door has been opened.

The engine compartment lid or luggage compartment lid ajar switches indicate that either has been opened.
Either front door latch mechanism indicates a door has been unlocked.
The emergency key blade is used to open either the LH front door or luggage compartment.
The CJB or RJB are disconnected (this may result in only a partial trigger).
An attempt is made to start the engine without a valid signal from the Smart Key.
The battery backed sounder is disconnected (partial trigger only).
The vehicle battery is disconnected on a vehicle fitted with a battery backed sounder (partial trigger only).
The inclination sensor detects a change in vehicle attitude.
The intrusion detection module detects movement within the cabin.
Door Modules
The door modules provide the interface between the door latch-motors, the door latch-switches and the CJB. The door modules
provide door switch status information and enable the door latch-motors on request from the CJB or the keyless vehicle
module.
Keyless Vehicle Module

The keyless vehicle module interfaces with the Central locking, Radio Frequency (RF) receiver and collects RF signal information
which is transmitted from the Smart Key. This information is translated into commands which are passed on the medium speed
CAN bus to the:
CJB,
RJB,
door modules, and
instrument cluster.
The keyless vehicle module also monitors:
2 interior antennae,
1 luggage compartment antenna,
a rear bumper antenna, and
4 door handle antennae if the passive entry system is fitted.
On vehicles with passive entry, the additional fast latch motors are controlled via the keyless vehicle module and the locking
status is passed to the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus.
Instrument Cluster
The instrument cluster controls the alarm indicator, and in conjunction with the ECM (engine control module), the engine
immobilization. The ECM controls the engine crank and fuel functions and the instrument cluster processes the valid
transponder information.
Alarm Indicator
The alarm indicator is a LED (light emitting diode) located in the body of the sunload/light sensor. When the ignition is off the
indicator gives a visual indication of the active anti-theft system to show if the alarm system is active or not active. Operation
of the alarm indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster which varies the flash rate of the LED to indicate the system
status of the alarm and the immobilization systems.
When the ignition is on, the indicator provides a visual indication of the status of the passive anti-theft (engine
immobilization) system. If the immobilization system is operating correctly, the LED will be illuminated for 3 seconds at
ignition on and then extinguish. If a fault exists in the immobilization system, the LED will be either permanently illuminated
or flashing for 60 seconds. This indicates that a fault exists and fault code has been recorded. After the 60 second period the
LED will flash at different frequencies which indicate the nature of the fault.
Passive Anti-Theft Horn

The passive anti-theft horn is hardwired to the CJB which activates the horn when the alarm is triggered.
Battery Backed Sounder

Operation of the battery backed sounder is controlled by the CJB on the LIN bus. The sounder is also connected with a
permanent battery supply via the CJB. An integral, rechargeable battery powers the sounder if the battery power supply from
the CJB is interrupted.
Dependant on vehicle, a incitation sensor is incorporated into the battery backed sounder, to monitor vehicle attitude, see
Inclination Sensor.
Inclination Sensor
The CJB monitors the inclination sensor and will activate the alarm system if the vehicle is being raised.
Intrusion Detection Module

The intrusion detection module comprises an ultrasonic sound wave sensor which monitors the vehicle's interior.
The intrusion detection module is activated with volumetric mode which in turn is enabled when the vehicle is double locked.
The vehicle can be locked and alarmed with the module de-activated if a pet is to be left in the vehicle for example by single-
locking the active anti-theft system. The intrusion detection modules can also be de-activated by deselecting the 'Alarm
Sensors' option in the 'Vehicle Settings' screen on the Touch Screen Display.
NOTE: The Touch Screen method of de-activation of the intrusion detection module is only for one arm cycle, it will revert
to active once the engine is next started.
When the volumetric mode is active and the vehicle battery voltage falls below 9 volts, the CJB will ignore any inputs from the
intrusion detection module to prevent false alarm activation.
www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft - Active
For a detailed description of the anti-theft - active system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active)
Anti-Theft - Active (Description and Operation),

Anti-Theft - Active (Description and Operation),
Anti-Theft - Active (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Door latch micro switches Fuse(s)

Hood ajar switch Electrical
Passive anti-theft alarm horn (if installed) connector(s)
Battery backed sounder (if installed) or battery backed sounder with tilt sensor (if Wiring Harness
installed)
Vehicle horns
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC Index. For
additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop
manual
REFER to: Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Module (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Diagnosis and Testing).
DTC Index
NOTES:
into account.

signal protection Checksum of the received LIN Check operation of rain/light sensor by
calculation incorrect frame from battery backed covering sensor or applying water to screen,
sounder, roof header console, install a new sensor as required
and/or rain/light sensor is
incorrect

Bus off. Battery backed sounder, Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
roof header console, and/or this DTC using the manufacturer approved
rain/light sensor LIN circuit - diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
short to ground, power circuit diagrams and check battery backed
sounder, roof header console, and rain/light
sensor LIN circuit for short to ground, power
B108F-23 Cabin Lock/Unlock

Switch - Signal stuck Cabin lock/unlock switch signal Check the switch operation and
low stuck serviceability. Refer to the electrical circuit
Switch pressed for longer than diagrams and check the switch circuit
20 seconds
Switch circuit short circuit to
power or ground
Switch failure

test front courtesy light circuit for short to
ground

or open test front courtesy light circuit for short to

Locking Motor - Circuit Driver door double locking motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short to ground control circuit - short to ground test driver door double locking motor control
circuit for short ground

Locking Motor - Circuit Driver door double locking motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
short to battery or open control circuit - short to power, this DTC using the manufacturer approved
open circuit diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and test driver door double
locking motor control circuit for short to

Locking Motor - Circuit Passenger door double locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short to ground motor control circuit - short to test passenger door double locking motor
ground control circuit for short ground

Locking Motor - Circuit Passenger door double locking Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
short to battery or open motor control circuit - short to this DTC using the manufacturer approved
power, open circuit diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and test passenger door
double locking motor control circuit for short
to power or open circuit

Double Locking Motor - Rear door driver side double Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to ground locking motor control circuit - test rear door driver side double locking
short to ground motor control circuit for short ground

Double Locking Motor - Rear door driver side double Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
Circuit short to battery locking motor control circuit - this DTC using the manufacturer approved
or open short to power, open circuit diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and test rear door driver
side double locking motor control circuit for
short power, open circuit
Side Double Locking Rear door passenger side double Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Motor - Circuit short to locking motor control circuit - test rear door passenger side double locking
ground short to ground motor control circuit for short ground

Side Double Locking Rear door passenger side double Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
Motor - Circuit short to locking motor control circuit - this DTC using the manufacturer approved
battery or open short to power, open circuit diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and test rear door
passenger side double locking motor control
circuit for short power, open circuit

short to ground Keyless vehicle module, key IN Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
status circuit - short to ground this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check keyless vehicle
module, key IN status circuit for short to
ground

short to battery Keyless vehicle module, key IN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
status circuit - short to power check keyless vehicle module, key IN status

open Keyless vehicle module, key IN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
status circuit - open circuit check keyless vehicle module, key IN status

Locking Motor - Circuit Driver door central locking motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short to ground control circuit - short to ground test driver door central locking motor control
circuit for short ground

Locking Motor - Circuit Driver door central locking motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
short to battery or open control circuit - short to power, this DTC using the manufacturer approved
open circuit diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and test driver door central
locking motor control circuit for short to
power, open circuit

short to ground test passenger door central locking motor

short to battery or open test passenger door central locking motor

Circuit short to ground motor control circuit - short to test rear driver door central locking motor
ground control circuit for short ground

Circuit short to battery motor control circuit - short to test rear driver door central locking motor
or open power, open circuit control circuit for short to power, open circuit

Motor - Circuit short to locking motor circuit short circuit check the circuit
ground to ground

Motor - Circuit short to locking motor circuit short circuit check the circuit
battery or open to power or open circuit

- Circuit short to ground test left mirror heater output circuit for short
to ground
Circuit short to battery test left mirror heater output circuit for short
or open to power or open circuit

- Circuit short to ground test right mirror heater output circuit for
short to ground

Circuit short to battery test right mirror heater output circuit for
or open short to power or open circuit

- Circuit short to ground test left front puddle lamp output circuit for
short to ground

Short To Power - Circuit test left front puddle lamp output circuit for

- Circuit short to ground test right front puddle lamp output circuit
for short to ground

Short To Battery - test right front puddle lamp output circuit
Circuit short to battery for short to power or open circuit
or open
B1175-13 Driver Door Ajar Switch -
Circuit open Driver door ajar switch signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit - open circuit check driver door ajar switch signal circuit
for open circuit
B1176-13 Passenger Door Ajar

Switch - Circuit open Passenger door ajar switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
signal circuit - open circuit check passenger door ajar switch signal

Mechanical failures Set when window is reversed Check for mechanical problems with the
mechanism fault

Actuator stuck open Door module internal relay Renew the relevant rear door module. Refer

Actuator stuck closed Door module internal relay Renew the relevant rear door module. Refer

Performance or incorrect Set when auto window up was Check the window operation. Clear the DTC
operation interrupted (e.g. by pressing and retest
local switch)


- Mechanical failures Set when window is reversed Check for mechanical problems with the
mechanism fault

- Actuator stuck open Door module internal relay Renew the relevant front door module. Refer

- Actuator stuck closed Door module internal relay Renew the relevant front door module. Refer

- Performance or Set when auto window up was Check the window operation. Clear the DTC
incorrect operation interrupted (e.g. by pressing and retest
local switch)


B1189-29 Front Window Position

Sensor - Signal invalid Missing signal from position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
sensor 1 or 2 check the position sensor circuit between
Sensor circuit fault the door module and window motor. Repair
Position sensor fault as necessary. If the problem persists, renew
the window motor
B118A-29 Rear Window Position

Sensor - Signal invalid Missing signal from position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
sensor 1 or 2 check the position sensor circuit between
Sensor circuit fault the door module and window motor. Repair
Position sensor fault as necessary. If the problem persists, renew
the window motor
B11C0-13 Driver Side Rear Door

Ajar Switch - Circuit Left rear door ajar switch signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open circuit - open circuit check left rear door ajar switch signal circuit
for open circuit
B11C1-13 Passenger Side Rear

Door Ajar Switch - Right rear door ajar switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit open signal circuit - open circuit check right rear door ajar switch signal
B11D1-83 LIN Bus "C" - Value of

signal protection LIN Bus checksum error; driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
calculation incorrect switchpack internal fault check the LIN Bus circuit between the driver
window switch
B11D1-86 LIN Bus "C" - Signal

invalid LIN Bus header error; driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
switchpack internal fault check the LIN Bus circuit between the driver
window switch
B11D1-87 LIN Bus "C" - Missing

message Slave node communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
missing; driver switchpack check the LIN Bus circuit between the driver
internal fault door window switch and the door module.
www.JagDocs.com
window switch

Motor - Circuit short to Driver folding mirror motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mirror motor failure drivers door module and the mirror

Motor - Circuit short to Driver mirror heater output Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open circuit drivers door module and the mirror

Motor - Circuit short to Passenger folding mirror motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mirror motor failure passenger door module and the mirror

Motor - Circuit short to Passenger mirror heater output Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open circuit passenger door module and the mirror
B1222-23 Master Lock/Unlock

Switch - Signal stuck Master lock or unlock switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
low digital input circuit - signal check master lock and unlock switch digital
stuck low input circuits for short to ground, open
circuit

Value of signal Value of signal protection Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
protection calculation calculation incorrect check the LIN Bus circuit between the rear
incorrect door control unit and the Driver Door
Module. Check the connectors for integrity
and security. Clear the DTC and retest. If
the problem persists, renew the rear door
control module

Signal invalid Signal invalid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
door control unit and the Driver Door
control module

Missing message Missing message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
door control unit and the Driver Door
control module

Mirror left/right motor failure drivers door module and the mirror

Mirror left/right motor failure assembly. Repair as necessary

Mirror motor failure drivers door module and the mirror





Motor Feedback Circuit - Driver mirror adjustment motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to ground circuit short circuit to ground check the mirror motor circuit between the
Mirror motor failure driver door module and the mirror assembly.
Repair as necessary

Circuit short to battery circuit short circuit to power or check the mirror motor circuit between the
or open open circuit driver door module and the mirror assembly.

Circuit short to ground circuit short circuit to ground check the mirror motor circuit between the
Mirror motor failure driver door module and the mirror assembly.
Repair as necessary

Circuit short to battery circuit short circuit to power or check the mirror motor circuit between the
or open open circuit driver door module and the mirror assembly.

Mirror Motor Feedback Passenger mirror adjustment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit - Circuit short to motor circuit short circuit to check the mirror motor circuit between the
ground ground passenger door module and the mirror

battery or open power or open circuit passenger door module and the mirror

ground ground passenger door module and the mirror

battery or open power or open circuit passenger door module and the mirror
B1C39-29 Key Lock Switch - Signal
invalid Key lock switch signal invalid, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
stuck/jammed the key lock switch circuit. Clear the DTC
Switch held for longer than 20 and retest. If no other DTCs are present,
seconds ignore this fault. If the DTC returns, suspect
Key lock switch circuit short to an internal fault with the Central Junction
ground (where connected) Box. Refer to the warranty policy and
Key lock switch failure procedures manual if a module is suspect
Central Junction Box fault
B1D06-11 Left Turn Indicator -

Circuit short to ground Left turn signal short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground check left turn signal for short circuit to
ground
B1D06-15 Left Turn Indicator -

Circuit short to battery Left turn signal short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
or open power check left turn signal for short circuit high
Left turn signal high resistance, resistance, open circuit
open circuit
B1D07-11 Right Turn Indicator -

Circuit short to ground Right turn signal short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground check right turn signal for short circuit to
ground
B1D07-15 Right Turn Indicator -

Circuit short to battery Right turn signal circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
or open circuit to power check right turn signal for short circuit high
Right turn signal circuit high resistance, open circuit
resistance, open circuit
B1D17-11 Battery Backed Sounder

- Circuit short to ground Battery backed sounder Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
inclination sensor control circuit check battery backed sounder inclination
- short to ground sensor control circuit for short to ground
B1D18-11 Volumetric Sensor -

Circuit short to ground Intrusion sensor module supply Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
circuit - short to ground this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check intrusion sensor
module supply circuit for short to ground
B1D97-96 Tilt Sensor - Component

internal failure Component internal failure Suspect the battery backed sounder, check
and install a new battery backed sounder as
required
C1B14-11 Sensor Supply #1 -

test window sensor supply circuit for short
to ground
C1B14-15 Sensor Supply #1 -

or open test window sensor supply circuit for short
to power or open circuit
C1B15-11 Sensor Supply Voltage A

- Circuit short to ground Position sensor supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short to ground check the position sensor supply circuit
Position sensor fault between the rear door module and the
window motor. If the problem persists,
renew the window motor
C1B15-15 Sensor Supply Voltage A

- Circuit short to battery Position sensor supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
or open short to power or open circuit check the position sensor supply circuit
Position sensor fault between the rear door module and the
window motor. If the problem persists,
renew the window motor
P1624-13 Anti-Theft System -

Circuit open RJB anti-theft signal circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open circuit check RJB anti-theft signal circuit for open
circuit
P254F-13 Engine Hood Switch
Circuit/Open - Circuit Hood ajar switch signal circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open open circuit check hood ajar switch signal circuit for open
circuit

Communication Bus - No Medium speed CAN Carry out network integrity test using
sub type information communication Bus manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test
Medium speed CAN network for open, short
circuit and high resistance

With CJB - No sub type Logged when subscribed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
information message missing from CJB test power and ground supplies to Central
Junction Box. Check CAN network between
Driver Door Module and Central Junction
Box. Carry out network integrity test using

With Driver Seat Module Missing message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
(DSM) - No sub type test power and ground supplies to Driver
information Seat Module. Check CAN network between
Driver Door Module and Driver Seat Module.
Carry out network integrity test using

Software Incompatibility Car configuration file mismatch
NOTE: After updating the car configuration
- No sub type with vehicle specification
file, set the ignition to on and wait 30 seconds
information before clearing the DTCs

system, check and up-date the car
configuration file as necessary
U2002-24 Switch - Signal stuck

high Signal stuck high Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains,
install a new passenger side window switch
U2004-24 Auxiliary Switch Pack -

Signal stuck high Signal stuck high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Left or right rear door local check the left and right door switch circuits
switch pressed for longer than
20 seconds
Switch circuit short to ground or
power
U2010-11 Switch Illumination -

Circuit short to ground Switch illumination circuit short Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
to ground the switch illumination circuit
U2012-08 Car Configuration

Parameter(s) - Bus Bus signal/message failures Cycle the ignition status and re-test. If DTC
signal/message failures remains, re-configure the RJB using the
U2013-24 Switch Pack - Signal

stuck high Signal stuck high Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains,
install a new driver side window switch pack

Hardware - Data Data Memory Failure Install a new DDM/PDM, Refer to the
memory failure warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect
U2100-00 Initial Configuration Not

Complete - No sub type Driver/passenger door module is Re-configure the DDM/PDM using the
information not configured correctly manufacturer approved diagnostic system

Configuration Car configuration file mismatch Re-configure the module using the
Incompatible - No sub with vehicle specification manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
type information Check the configuration of the Car
Configuration File (CCF)
compare failure Mis-match of battery voltage, of Check vehicle battery and charging system.
2 volts or lower, between Refer to the relevant section in the
DDM/PDM and RJB workshop manual. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the power and
ground supply circuits to both modules
www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft Alarm Horn
Removal

For additional information, refer to: Cowl Vent Screen (501-02 Front End
2. Remove the engine compartment brace.
3. Remove the secondary bulkhead LH panel.

4. Remove the pedestrian protection actuator.

Reposition the pedestrian protection hood actuator.
5. Release the pedestrian protection actuator bracket.
6. Remove the anti-theft alarm horn.
Installation
1. Install is the reverse of removal.

Tighten to 7 Nm.
3. Tighten to 8 Nm.
4 . Tighten to 25 Nm.
Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft - Passive - Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
2 Radio frequency receiver
5 Low frequency antennae (3 off)
www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft - Passive - Overview
Overview
The PATS (passive anti-theft system) prevents the vehicle's engine from being started by unauthorized persons.
Engine starting is prevented by inhibiting the fuel, engine (spark, injectors and crank) and ignition systems from operating.
This is achieved by using a uniquely coded Smart Key and an encoded data exchange between multiple control modules.
The system is automatic and requires no input from the driver.
The engine start system is initiated when the encoded data between the Smart Key and vehicle control modules is verified.
The engine can then be started when the drive selector is in the 'Park' position, and the start/stop switch and the brake pedal
are pressed simultaneously.
Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft - Passive - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN; N = Medium speed CAN; O = LIN bus
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Drive selector
4 ABS (anti-lock brake system)
7 Low frequency antenna - front
8 Low frequency antenna - center
9 Low frequency antenna - rear
System Operation
The passive start function prevents the vehicle from being started by unauthorized persons. It does this by immobilizing the
ignition, fuel and engine crank functions. The system is automatic and requires no input from the driver.
At the request of the CJB, the keyless vehicle module prompts each of the Low Frequency (LF) antennae to output a signal.
When the Smart Key is in the vehicle cabin, it detects the LF signals and responds with a Radio Frequency (RF)
data-identification signal back to the keyless vehicle module via the RF receiver.
If the data received matches that stored in the keyless vehicle module it continues the passive start process by
communicating a 'Smart Key valid’ signal to the CJB via the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
Once the CJB receives the authorization and confirms a response with an internal calculation, it passes the result to the
instrument cluster on the medium speed CAN bus.
Before the instrument cluster sends a mobilization signal to the ECMit will exchange encrypted data with:
The electric steering lock mechanism to authorize unlocking the steering column.
The RJB to authorize fuel pump operation. Once the RJB receives the authorization and confirms the response with an
internal calculation, it will enable the FPDM (fuel pump driver module).
The CJB to authorize the ignition status. If the drive selector is in the park position and the driver presses the brake
pedal and simultaneously presses the start/stop switch, the CJB interprets this as an engine crank request. Before the
engine crank request is allowed, the CJB compares a brake pressure signal received from the ABS module. The brake
pressure signal is compared to an internally stored threshold value within the CJB. If the signal is greater than the
stored threshold value, a crank request signal is sent to the ECM on the high speed CAN bus.
Once these factors have been confirmed, and the vehicle is in 'Park', the engine can be started by pressing the brake pedal and
the Stop/Start button simultaneously.
NOTES:
If the keyless vehicle module fails to locate the Smart Key, the message 'SMART KEY NOT FOUND PLEASE INSERT IN
SLOT' will appear in the instrument cluster message center. When inserted the start control module will read the transponder
within the Smart Key. If the transponder identification is valid, authorization will be transmitted to the instrument cluster on
the LIN (local interconnect network) bus.
When the vehicle is delivered from the factory the passive start function is inhibited. In this condition the vehicle can
only be started by placing the Smart Key in the start control module. The system should be switched on during the Pre-Delivery
Inspection (PDI) using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system. For additional information, refer to the PDI Manual.
To ensure optimum long term reliability of the smart key the battery must be replaced with a brand new, unused battery. If a
used battery is installed the "SMART KEY BATTERY LOW" message may not be cleared. To avoid contamination of the contacts
the battery should be removed from its packaging and installed into the smart key while wearing gloves. To confirm that the
replacement battery is working correctly press the unlock button twice while holding the smart key outside the vehicle, then
enter the vehicle with the smart key, press the start button and confirm that the "SMART KEY BATTERY LOW" message is not
displayed.
Start Control Module
The start control module is used if the keyless vehicle module is unable to authorise the Smart Key.
If the keyless vehicle module is unable to identify the Smart Key, for example if the Smart Key battery voltage is low or there
is local RF interference, the transponder within the Smart Key can be read in the conventional manner. The driver will be
alerted to this by a chime and a message in the instrument cluster message center 'SMART KEY NOT FOUND PLEASE INSERT IN
SLOT'.
Once inserted the start control module will read the transponder within the Smart Key. If the transponder identification is
valid, authorization will be transmitted to the instrument cluster on the LIN bus.
NOTE: Inserting the Smart Key into the start control module will not charge the Smart Key battery. The battery is
non-chargeable and must be replaced if defective.
A message 'REMOVE SMART KEY' will be displayed if the Smart Key is still in the start control module and the driver's door is
opened.
Low Frequency Antenna

Three Low Frequency (LF) antennae for the passive start system are positioned in specific locations in the vehicle; refer to
Component Location graphic.
NOTE: On vehicles with the passive entry system, five additional antennae are used; one integrated into the rear bumper
and one in each door handle assembly. These are only used by the passive entry system and have no function in the passive
start system.
The keyless vehicle module transmits an LF signal via the antennae which is received by the Smart Key. The Smart Key then
responds by transmitting a Radio Frequency (RF) signal which is received by the RF receiver and passed to the keyless vehicle
module for authorization.
Keyless Vehicle Module

The keyless vehicle module controls signal transmissions to and from the Smart Key and provides authorization to allow the
vehicle to be started. The module has a medium speed CAN connection to the CJB for authorizing vehicle starting.
Radio Frequency Receiver

The Radio Frequency (RF) receiver transmission is received from the Smart Key to enable key identification.
Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft - Passive
For a detailed description of the Anti-Theft - Passive system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (419-01B Anti-Theft - Passive)
Anti-Theft - Passive (Description and Operation),

Anti-Theft - Passive (Description and Operation),
Anti-Theft - Passive (Description and Operation).
Anti-theft - Passive
The best method to confirm the correct operation of the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) is to check the LED (located in the
center of the instrument panel). The LED should illuminate solid for 3 seconds, when the ignition status is set to ON, and then
extinguish. This validates all PATS functions (i.e. the key transponder matches a stored key code, the challenge/response
sequence between the respective modules was successful resulting in the EMS being enabled).
Ignition fails to operate
Check that the smart key is located within the vehicle interior, and that it is the correct one for the vehicle.
Insert the smart key into the start control unit (located at out board side of driver instrument panel lower panel), this is an
alternative method to allow Ignition On/Engine Start.
Check that the start button circuit to the CJB is not open circuit or short circuit to power.
Check that the Low Speed CAN network is not malfunctioning, i.e. open circuit or short circuit. This would mean that the
remote keyless entry module, Central Junction Box (CJB) and instrument cluster would be unable to communicate.
Engine fails to crank
If a PATS fault is detected, the LED will flash for 60 seconds at 4Hz with a 50% duty cycle. At the end of this period, the LED
will flash a 2 digit code; this code is repeated 10 times. The meaning of these fault codes along with the frequency of flashing
is given in the accompanying table. As a general rule a fault code of 16 or less will cause the vehicle not to crank. Additionally,
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system should be used to check the instrument cluster, CJB & ECM for Diagnostic Trouble
Codes (DTCs).
One potential occurrence for failing to crank could be due to the P & N start switch (input to the ECM).
Check the Crank Request output from the CJB to ECM is not short circuit to ground or open circuit.
www.JagDocs.com
Check the Starter Relay circuit.
NOTE: On petrol engine variants, due to Smart Start, both sides of Relay Coil are switched directly from ECM (If
conditions correct). On diesel engine variants the low side only is switched directly from the ECM.
Check that the Steering Column Lock correctly operates and the steering wheel can turn freely.
Check that the High Speed CAN network is not malfunctioning, i.e. the CAN circuit is open or short circuit. This would mean
that the instrument cluster and ECM would be unable to communicate resulting in no Challenge being performed to enable the
ECM. This would be supported by LED Flash Code 24, see PATS Fault Code Table.
Also check the CAN network between the ABS module and the CJB. The CJB uses the CAN_BrakePressureTMC signal to
determine if the brake pedal has been pressed in order to allow an engine crank. The CJB uses a value of 0x05, if the CJB sees
a value less than this, it will not enable the Crank Request Output.
Engine cranks but will not start
If the Engine is cranking it means that the ECM has passed the authorisation required with the Instrument Cluster. If this
authorisation failed, the ECM would not engage the starter relay. This could be confirmed by verifying the PATS LED prove out
(illuminated solid for 3 seconds) or by reading DTCs from the instrument cluster and ECM.
In this case, the fuel pump circuit should be verified. The Fuel Pump Delivery Module (FPDM), which is supplied via the RJB
(authentication required with the instrument cluster) and controlled by the ECM, supplies the fuel pump.
In all cases of suspected non-start issues, the most logical failure modes should be eliminated first. i.e.
1. Check all relevant supplies and grounds to the relevant modules listed herein.
2. Note any unusual behaviour from other systems/functionality.
3. Note any functions that are not operating as expected.
PATS Fault Codes
For the various PATS modes/faults listed in the table , the instrument cluster will store a DTC and indicate this to the customer
during the detection period defined in the 'when logged' column, by illuminating the indicator as described for 60 seconds and
then flashing the LED 10 times as appropriate. The indication will stop immediately the ignition status is set to OFF any time
during the fault indication sequence. Up to 4 DTCs could be stored per key read sequence (1-10 read attempts). No DTCs will be
stored until all retry attempts are complete. Only the highest priority fault code will be flashed.
To determine the fault code from the LED: The LED will flash initially ten times with 1.5 seconds between. The LED will remain
OFF for 2.5 seconds then flash a number of times with 0.5 seconds between (the number of times the LED flashes represents
the first digit of the code), the LED will remain OFF for 1.5 seconds then flash a number of times with 1.5 seconds between
(the number of times the LED flashes represents the second digit of the code).
The PATS LED will be commanded on as shown under 'indication'. Normal PATS operations are complete within 400ms of the
ignition switch transition from OFF to ON or START, worst case for ECM communication problems will be less than 2 seconds. If
PATS is not complete during the 2 seconds the ECM will terminate PATS and await the next ignition ON or START event. PATS
faults will be indicated via the LED as soon as possible and will terminate the LED prove out. At ignition OFF all previous
flashing will cease and the perimeter anti-theft system will control the LED when the vehicle is locked and armed.
PATS Fault Code Table

LED
Ignition Fault
Mode of Operation/Fault When Logged Status DTC Code Indication
Prove out N/A Transition N/A N/A 3 Seconds of steady
from OFF to illumination
ON
Perimeter Anti-theft Control N/A OFF - N/A N/A Off or 0.5Hz flashing
Vehicle at 5% duty cycle ±
locked and 20% until Off
armed
Start Control Unit already programmed Key Insert Any B1B0105 N/A No Indication
Start Control Unit status = invalid response Key Insert Any B1B0167 N/A No Indication
Start Control Unit programming error Key Insert Any B1B0151 N/A No Indication
Start Control Unit challenge response error Key Insert OFF B1B0162 N/A No Indication
Key Programming timer expired or Key Auth Timer Key Insert Any B1B0187 N/A No Indication
expired
Transponder challenge response error Key Insert Any B1B0164 N/A No Indication
Transponder keys stored below minimum number B&A/Dealer Any B1B0100 N/A No Indication
required
Transponder not programmed B&A/Dealer Any B1B0155 N/A No Indication
If the instrument cluster sends a 'theft' key status EMS CAN OFF to ON B1B3364 16 60 seconds of 4Hz
to the ECM or the ECM returns a status message communication flashing at 50% duty
containing the data 'Disabled/Theft', the instrument cycle followed by fault
cluster will set this DTC code 16 flashing 10
times
LED
Ignition Fault
Mode of Operation/Fault When Logged Status DTC Code Indication
During manufacturing a Target ID is transferred from B&A/Dealer OFF to ON B1B3305 22 60 seconds of steady
the ECM when requested by the instrument cluster. indication followed by
The instrument cluster stores this unique vehicle fault code 22 flashing
number in EEPROM. If this ID fails to store in 10 times
EEPROM correctly, the instrument cluster will set this
DTC
If the status message received from the ECM Challenge/Response OFF to ON B1B3362 23 60 seconds of steady
contains the data challenge response error, the indication followed by
instrument cluster will set this DTC fault code 23 flashing
10 times
After the instrument cluster has transmitted its first Idle message OFF to ON B1B3387 24 60 seconds of steady
PATS idle message, it will start a 2 second timer missing indication followed by
running. If the PATS sequence does not complete fault code 24 flashing
(Cluster received the Enable msg) within this time 10 times
period the instrument cluster will set this DTC
the next step.
2. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Telematics - Telematics
The complexity of the electronics involved with the JaguarNet system, of which the GPS antenna and navigation display are
parts, and the multiplexed communication network which are connected to it preclude the use of workshop general electrical
test equipment. Therefore, reference should be made to the approved Jaguar diagnostic system for detailed instructions on
testing the VEMS unit.
The approved Jaguar diagnostic system tests and analyses all functions of the VEMS and the various systems affected by it.
Where a fault is indicated, some basic diagnostic methods may be necessary to confirm that connections are good and that
wiring is not damaged before installing a new component.
Navigation System - Navigation System
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage, water ingress and system integrity.
Visual Inspection
Navigation system DVD player Mechanism Navigation system display

Navigation system module
GPS antenna
Wiring harness for damage and corrosion
ABS Module
Audio unit
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Poor satellite reception GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Electrical harness open/short
circuit, dis-connected
Component failure
No reception from satellite
Map disc will not insert/eject GO to Pinpoint Test B.

Component failure
Map disc failure
Black screen (navigation map GO to Pinpoint Test C.

screen does not display) Electrical harness open/short
Component failure
GVIF cable
Navigation map screen color GO to Pinpoint Test D.

is abnormal Electrical harness open/short
Component failure
GVIF cable
Vehicle’s current position GO to Pinpoint Test E.
mark turns independently Electrical harness open/short
Component failure
Vehicle on a turntable in a parking
building
Car current position not GO to Pinpoint Test F.

stable Electrical harness open/short
Component failure
Map display is incomplete GO to Pinpoint Test G.

Map disc contaminated/damaged
Incorrect market map disc
Component failure
No navigation voice guidance GO to Pinpoint Test H.

Voice guidance soft key set to OFF
position
Volume level set too low
Component failure
No response to pressing GO to Pinpoint Test I.

navigation menu Interruption during map disc
update
Incorrect Navigation Control
Module (NCM) installed
Incorrect car configuration data
received
'NO DVD PLEASE INSERT MAP Insert the correct map disc
DVD' message is displayed A disc other than the map disc is
inserted
'UNABLE TO READ DATA Check and install a new Navigation Control Module
CONSULT YOUR DEALER' DVD player abnormality (NCM) as required. Refer to the new
message is displayed module/component installation note at top of DTC
Index.
'UNABLE TO READ DATA Move the vehicle to a cool location, and turn the
TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH' Operating temperature has been engine OFF. Wait for a while, then verify conditions
message is displayed exceeded again. If the temperature around the Navigation
Navigation Control Module (NCM) Control Module (NCM) is high, take measures to lower
internal temperature is high temperature
'UNABLE TO READ DVD Clean the map disc and retest, replace the map disc
CORRECTLY CHECK IF THE Check map disc for contamination,
DVD IS DAMAGED OR DIRTY' deformation, cracks, scratches or
message is displayed non-genuine disc
'UNABLE TO READ DATA Insert a map disc with the correct part number
CHECK IF MAP DVD IS Incorrect DVD map disc is inserted
CORRECT' message is
displayed
Pinpoint Tests
NOTES:
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval Program is in operation, prior to the
Navigation Diagnostic Screen Access
1.With the vehicle at rest, place the ignition switch in either "ACC", "ON", or start the engine.
2.On the "Menu" screen, press the top center of the screen for more than three seconds.
3.Enter the PIN code, and then touch "OK". 660: Diagnosis Menu screen 661: System Check screen (DTC code
verification screen) 662: GPS Information screen.
4.The diagnostics screen will be displayed.
PINPOINT TEST A : POOR SATELLITE RECEPTION
www.JagDocs.com
PINPOINT TEST B : MAP DISC WILL NOT INSERT/EJECT
NOTE: Ensure the parking brake is applied, and ignition status is set to Auxiliary or ON.
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK NAVIGATION DISC SLOT SHUTTER
1 Check the navigation map disc slot shutter is open.
Is the navigation map disc slot shutter is open?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Open the map disc slot shutter.
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK NAVIGATION MAP DISC WILL INSERT/EJECT
1 Check that it is possible to insert/eject navigation map disc.
Is it possible to insert/eject navigation map disc?
Yes
Operation is normal.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power supply and ground connections to the Navigation
Control Module (NCM). If power supply and ground connections are good, install a new Navigation Control
Module (NCM) as required. Refer to the new module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
PINPOINT TEST C : BLACK SCREEN (NAVIGATION MAP SCREEN DOES NOT DISPLAY)
NOTE: Ensure the parking brake is applied, and ignition status is set to Auxiliary or ON.
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK SCREEN SAVER FUNCTION
1 Check the screen saver function operation.
Does the screen saver function operate?
Yes
Press the display panel button.GO to C2.
No
GO to C2.
C2: CHECK DISPLAY BACKLIGHT
1 Check the display backlight operation.
Does the display backlight operate?
Yes
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module
(NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected.
If the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected, check
and install a new GVIF cable as required. Refer to the new module/component installation note at top of
DTC Index.
If the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected and
NOT damaged, check and install a new Navigation Control Module (NCM) as required. Refer to the new
module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
Re-check the system.
No
Check the HLDF display.
PINPOINT TEST D : NAVIGATION MAP SCREEN COLOUR IS ABNORMAL
CONDITIONS
D1: COLOUR BAR CHECK
1 Carry out the display diagnostics 'colour bar check' (PIN code 660).
Are the results of the display diagnostics 'colour bar check' normal?
Yes
Check the HLDF display.
No
Check the condition of the map disc for dirt or scratches.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module
(NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected.
If the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected, check
and install a new GVIF cable as required. Refer to the new module/component installation note at top of
DTC Index.
If the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected and
NOT damaged, check and install a new Navigation Control Module (NCM) as required. Refer to the new
PINPOINT TEST E : VEHICLE’S CURRENT POSITION MARK TURNS INDEPENDENTLY
CONDITIONS
E1: VEHICLES CURRENT POSITION MARK TURNS INDEPENDENTLY
1 Determine if the ignition status was turned to Auxiliary or On, while the vehicle was in motion with
steering turned such as after an engine stall.
Was ignition status set to Auxiliary or On?
Yes
The angular speed of the vehicle at the time of the ignition status change will be logged as the standard
value. To re-set the standard value, turn ignition status to 'OFF' then to 'Auxiliary' or 'On' with the
vehicle stationary.
Re-test the vehicle.
No
Check and install a new Navigation Control Module (NCM) as required. Refer to the new
PINPOINT TEST F : CAR CURRENT POSITION NOT STABLE
CONDITIONS
F1: SYSTEM CHECK FOR DTCS
1 Check the system for DTCs which may be logged.
Are any system DTCs logged?
Yes
Carry out repair actions to correct the DTCs logged.
Re-check the system for car current position not stable.
No
GO to F2.
F2: VEHICLE SPEED INPUT CHECK
1 Select Vehicle Sensor from the navigation diagnostic menu screen (PIN code 660), check Current speed.
The current speed must match the speedometer.
From the Vehicle Sensor screen, does the current speed must match the speedometer?
Yes
GO to F3.
No
Carry out MOST ring circuit checks.
Check the Anti-Lock Brake System Module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Carry out network integrity tests using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits if required. Repair wiring harness as required.
F3: CHECK NUMBER OF SATELLITES
1 From the navigation diagnostic GPS information screen (PIN code 662), check the number of satellites
displayed.
Is the number of satellites displayed on the screen 0?
Yes
Carry out pinpoint test A "Poor Satellite Reception"
No
GO to F4.
F4: CHECK IF SYMPTOMS ARE OCCURRING IN PARTICULAR LOCATIONS
1 Confirm if the 'car current position not stable' symptom is occurring in particular locations.
Is the 'car current position not stable' symptom occurring in particular locations?
Yes
Signal reflections from buildings or a particular location may be responsible.
No
Carry out pinpoint test A "Poor Satellite Reception"
PINPOINT TEST G : MAP DISPLAY IS INCOMPLETE
CONDITIONS
G1: SYSTEM CHECK FOR DTCS
Are any system DTCs logged?
Yes
Carry out repair actions to correct the DTCs logged.
Re-check the system for 'Map display is incomplete'.
No
GO to G2.
G2: CHECK MAP DISC
1 Check map disc for contamination, deformation, cracks, scratches or non-genuine disc and correct
market.
Has a fault been identified with the map disc?
Yes
Replace the map disc.
Re-check the system for 'Map display is incomplete'.
No
PINPOINT TEST H : NO NAVIGATION VOICE GUIDANCE
CONDITIONS
H1: CHECK ALL AUDIO OUTPUT SYSTEMS
1 Check audio output across all systems.
Is there sound output across all systems?
Yes
GO to H2.
No
GO to H3.
H2: CHECK VOICE GUIDANCE SOFT KEY
1 Check navigation screen menu, voice guidance soft key is not set to OFF position.
Is the voice guidance soft key set to OFF position?
Yes
Set the voice guidance soft key to ON position.
Re-check the system
No
GO to H3.
H3: VOLUME LEVEL CHECK
1 Check the volume level is not set too low.
Is the volume level set too low?
Yes
Increase the volume level and re-test vehicle.
No
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of amplifier and speaker system wiring harness
and connectors.
GO to H4.
H4: NAVIGATION VOICE ONLY NOT AUDIBLE
NOTE: Only the navigation voice cannot be heard.
1 Press the 'Navigation voice repeat' soft key.

After the navigation voice repeat soft key is pressed, can voice still not be heard even though it has
become louder?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST I : NO RESPONSE TO PRESSING NAVIGATION MENU
CONDITIONS
I1: NO RESPONSE TO PRESSING NAVIGATION MENU
NOTE: 15 minutes are required for the program to update. If the engine is accidentally turned OFF, start the engine
again, and wait for 15 minutes.
1 Check that the engine was not turned 'OFF' during a navigation software update.
Was the engine turned 'OFF' during a navigation software update?
Yes
Check the correct map disc is inserted into the Navigation Control Module (NCM). Start the engine and
allow to idle for 15 minutesTurn the engine 'OFF', and then start the engine again.Verify that the
navigation screen displays. Navigation was in the program update mode.
No
GO to I3.
1 Check that the engine was not turned 'OFF' after inserting the new map disc.
Was the engine turned 'OFF' after inserting the new map disc?
Yes
allow to idle for 15 minutesTurn the engine 'OFF', and then start the engine again.
No
GO to I3.
1Check the "Loading" button on the navigation diagnostics screen (PIN code 660) has been pressed, and
"YES" has been selected.
Has the "Loading" button on the navigation diagnostics screen been pressed, and has "YES" been selected?
Yes
allow to idle for 15 minutesTurn the engine 'OFF', and then start the engine again.
No
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of navigation system wiring harness and
connectors.
GO to I4.
I4: SYSTEM CHECK FOR DTCS
Is DTC U300055 logged?
Yes
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check/amend the Car Configuration File parameter in
block 2, byte 127 to match vehicle market/specification. If the DTC remains check navigation system
module part number and ensure the correct component is installed to vehicle market/specification.
No
GO to I5.
1 Turn the engine 'OFF', wait for a moment, and then turn the engine 'ON' again.
Does the navigation screen fail to display even if the navigation button is pressed?
Yes
Check the HLDF is installed correctly.
Check the Navigation Control Module (NCM) is installed correctly.
No
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Navigation Control Module (NCM) (100-00, Description and Operation).
Navigation System - Navigation System Antenna
Removal
1. Remove the interior lamp lens.
2. Release the interior lamp.
www.JagDocs.com
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the latch is pressed before
disconnecting the electrical connector.
Release and disconnect the 2 electrical connectors.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Remove the reinforcement plate.
4. Remove the global positioning sensor (GPS) antenna.
Installation

Tighten to 6 Nm.
Navigation System - Navigation System Module
Removal

2. Remove the LH luggage compartment side trim panel.

3. Release the navigation system module.
4. Remove the navigation system module.
Installation

2. Tight en to 10 Nm.
Cellular Phone - Bluetooth Module
Removal

2. Remove the left hand front seat.
3. Lift the carpet for access.
4. Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors.

5. Remove the bluetooth module.
Installation

Tighten to 10 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
Multifunction Electronic Modules -
Rear electronic module retaining bolts 10 7 89
Multifunction voice activated module retaining bolts 10 7 89
Front electronic module retaining bolts 10 7 89
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Module Controlled Functions - Component
Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - LIN BUS (Sheet 1 of 2)
Item Description
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) vehicle shown
4 Steering wheel switches
5 Rain/light sensor
7 Passenger side rear door module
8 Driver's door switches
11 Rear view camera
12 Driver's side rear door module
14 Driver's seat switches
17 Clockspring
20 Generator
COMPONENT LOCATION - LIN BUS (Sheet 2 of 2)
Item Description
NOTE: LHD vehicle shown
2 RH (right-hand) outer face level vent
3 RH inner face level vent
4 LH (left-hand) inner face level vent
5 LH outer face level vent
7 Stepper motor - LH temperature blend
8 Stepper motor - windshield defrost
9 Stepper motor - RH temperature blend
10 Stepper motor - face/feet
COMPONENT LOCATION - MEDIUM SPEED CAN BUS
Item Description
1 CJB
2 ATC module
4 Audio system control panel
6 RJB
www.JagDocs.com
14 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) control module
16 Climate seat module
COMPONENT LOCATION - HIGH SPEED CAN BUS
Item Description
1 ECM - V8 shown
2 Headlamp leveling control module
3 Occupant classification system control module
7 Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) module
11 Pedestrian protection control module
13 TCM
COMPONENT LOCATION - MOST
Item Description
4 Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB)/Satellite Digital Audio Radio System (SDARS)
5 Multimedia module
6 Audio system amplifier
7 Television (TV) tuner
8 Portable audio interface
9 Blue tooth phone module
10 Software download socket
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Module Controlled Functions - Overview
OVERVIEW
The vehicle electrical system comprises a number of control modules which are interconnected via several network systems.
The following network systems are used on the vehicle:
High speed CAN (controller area network) bus

Medium speed CAN bus
LIN (local interconnect network) bus
K Bus
Media Orientated Systems Transport (MOST) ring.
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Module Controlled Functions - System
System Operation
MODULE CONTROLLED FUNCTIONS
Refer to the relevant section for details of system operation.
MODULES, SYSTEMS AND FUNCTION
The CJB (central junction box) is the 'gateway' for the network systems which allows information to be exchanged between
networks.
The entertainment system components are connected on a fiber optic MOST ring. The MOST ring can send and receive
information to/from the other network systems via a 'gateway' in the Integrated Control Module.
The following table shows each vehicle control module, the network system to which it is connected, its function and location
in the vehicle.
Module Network System Function Vehicle Location

Instrument cluster High speed CAN Receives data from other vehicle systems to provide Instrument panel.
(controller area information to the driver. Also functions as the
network) bus gateway for the bus systems.
Steering column High speed CAN Controls the locking and unlocking of the steering Upper steering column.
bus column.
Diagnostic socket High speed CAN Allows the transfer of vehicle information using a In the lower instrument panel
bus Jaguar approved diagnostic system or other on the driver's side, adjacent
diagnostic tool. to the start control module.
RCM (restraints control High speed CAN Controls the deployment of the supplementary At rear of floor console.
module) bus restraint components.
TCM (transmission High speed CAN Controls automatic transmission operation. Inside the transmission and
control module) bus accessible via the fluid pan.
ECM (engine control High speed CAN Controls engine management and fuel system Rear of the engine
module) bus operation. compartment on the
bulkhead.
ABS (anti-lock brake High speed CAN Controls all aspects of the braking system Rear of the engine
system) bus compartment on the
bulkhead.
Headlamp leveling High speed CAN Controls the static dynamic headlamp leveling In the lower instrument
module bus function. panel, behind the glovebox.
Occupant classification High speed CAN Detects when a passenger is in the front passenger Below the front passenger
system control module bus seat and can determine their size and weight. seat.
(NAS only)
Adaptive damping High speed CAN Controls the adjustment of the dampers. Below the front passenger
control module bus seat.
Electronic Parking Brake High speed CANControls the application and release of the electronic In the luggage compartment,
(EPB) module bus parking brake. above the RH (right-hand)
wheel arch.
Pedestrian protection High speed CAN Controls and monitors the pedestrian protection LH (left-hand) 'A' pillar.
module bus system.
Adaptive speed control High speed CAN Controls the vehicle's road speed in relation to other Behind the instrument panel
module bus vehicles when in speed control mode. on the driver's side.
Electronic transmission High speed CAN Allows the driver to electronically select the required In the floor console.
selector bus automatic transmission mode. Transmits driver
selections to the TCM.
Jaguar Drive control High speed CAN Controls the Jaguar Drive function and communicates Integral with the electronic
module bus with other system modules. transmission selector
software in the floor console.
CJB Medium speed CAN Controls body functions and power distribution. On RH 'A' pillar.
bus
Diagnostic socket Medium speed CAN Allows the transfer of vehicle information using a In the lower instrument panel
bus Jaguar approved diagnostic system or other on the driver's side, adjacent
diagnostic tool. to the start control module.
Passenger door module Medium speed CAN Controls window and locking functions. In the front passenger door.
bus
Parking aid module Medium speed CAN Controls the parking aid system. In the LH side of the luggage
bus compartment, adjacent to
the keyless vehicle module.
www.JagDocs.com
Driver's seat module Medium speed CAN Controls driver's seat positioning and also memory Below the driver's seat.
bus functions of other personalized functions.
Instrument cluster Medium speed CAN Receives data from other systems to provide driver In the instrument panel.
bus information.
Driver's door module Medium speed CAN Controls window and locking functions. In the driver's door.
bus
ATC (automatic Medium speed CAN Contains controls for the heating and air On the end of the air
temperature control) bus conditioning systems. conditioning evaporator and
module blower assembly.
Information control Medium speed CAN Contains controls for the entertainment systems. In the instrument panel
module bus below the integrated control
panel.
Integrated control Medium speed CAN Contains controls for the entertainment systems and In the instrument panel.
panel bus gateway between audio system and other vehicle
systems.
Front seat climate Medium speed CAN Controls the temperature requirements of the driver Below the RH front seat.
control module bus and passenger front seats.
LH blind spot Medium speed CAN Controls the operating parameters of the system and Behind the outer part of the
monitoring module bus provides driver indications and fault monitoring. rear bumper, rearward of the
rear wheel.
RH blind spot Medium speed CAN Controls the operating parameters of the system and Behind the outer part of the
monitoring module bus provides driver indications and fault monitoring. rear bumper, rearward of the
rear wheel.
Keyless vehicle module Medium speed CAN Allows the vehicle to be opened and closed without In the LH side of the luggage
bus the use of a key. compartment, adjacent to
the parking aid module.
RJB (rear junction box) Medium speed CAN Controls body functions and power distribution. RH of luggage compartment.
bus
Tire pressure Medium speed CAN Monitors the vehicle tires to warn of deflation. Below the rear of the floor
monitoring control bus console.
module
TCM K Bus Data transfer between TCM and diagnostic socket. Inside the transmission and
NOTE: Only fitted to early build vehicles. accessible by removal of the
fluid pan.
Driver's side rear door LIN (local Controls window and locking operation. In the driver's side rear door.
module interconnect
network)
Passenger side rear LIN Controls window and locking operation. In the passenger side rear
door module door.
Driver's door module LIN Memory/adjustment functions for seat, steering In the driver's door.
column and mirrors and door security functions.
Passenger front door LIN Memory/adjustment functions for seat, steering In the passenger door.
module column and mirrors and door security functions.
Driver's door switches LIN Transmit driver selections to the driver's door In the driver's door panel.
module.
ECM LIN Receives a load signal from the generator. In the engine compartment
on the bulkhead.
Generator LIN Provide load signal to the ECM. On the LH side at the front of
the engine.
Driver's seat module LIN Control position of driver's seat. Below the driver's seat on
the floor pan.
Driver's seat switches LIN Provide driver selection inputs to the driver's seat On the outside of the trim
module. panel on the driver's seat.
Air quality sensor LIN Measures quality of air entering the vehicle interior. At the front of the vehicle,
behind the air intake grill.
Windshield (defrost) LIN Moves flaps within the heater assembly to direct air On the heater assembly.
stepper motor flow to the windshield.
Face/feet stepper motor LIN Moves flaps within the heater assembly to direct air On the heater assembly.
flow to instrument panel vents and/or footwell.
LH temperature blend LIN Moves flaps within the heater assembly to control On the heater assembly.
stepper motor temperature in LH side footwell.
RH temperature blend LIN Moves flaps within the heater assembly to direct air On the heater assembly.
stepper motor flow to RH side footwell.
Electric booster heater LIN Controls operation of the electric booster heater. Inside the heater assembly.
LH outer face level vent LIN Controls the operation of the face level vent stepper In the instrument panel.
motor.
LH inner face level vent LIN Controls the operation of the face level vent stepper In the instrument panel.
motor.
RH inner face level vent LIN Controls operation of the face level vent stepper In the instrument panel.
motor.
RH outer face level vent LIN Controls operation of the face level vent stepper In the instrument panel.
motor.
ATC module LIN Controls operation of the climate system functions. In the instrument panel.
Steering wheel audio LIN Converts analogue signals from steering wheel On the steering wheel.
switches switches into digital messages.
Steering wheel LIN Passes digital messages from the steering wheel Behind the steering wheel,
clockspring audio switches to the instrument cluster. on the upper steering
column.
Instrument cluster LIN Receives digital signals from other vehicle systems. On the driver's side of the
instrument panel.
Battery backed sounder LIN Activated by CJB when alarm trigger is received. In the LH side of the engine
compartment, near the
bulkhead.
CJB LIN Controls body functions and power distribution. On the RH 'A' pillar.
RJB LIN Controls body functions and power distribution. On the RH of the luggage
compartment.
Battery monitoring LIN Monitors the condition and charge of the vehicle On the vehicle battery
system module battery. positive terminal in the
luggage compartment.
Intrusion detection LIN Detects movement in the vehicle interior and In the front overhead
module activates the anti-theft system. console.
Rain/light sensor LIN Detects ambient light levels and moisture on the On the inside of the
windscreen for operation of the automatic windshield behind the interior
headlamps and wiper systems. rear view mirror.
Start control module LIN Used to identify the Smart Key - component of the In the lower instrument panel
keyless start system. on the driver's side.
Rear view camera LIN Passes digital images data from the rear view In the luggage compartment
camera to the RJB lid trim finisher.
Driver's window switch LIN Controls operation of the driver's window. In the driver's door trim
panel.
Electronic transmission LIN Sends selector position to the TCM. In the floor console.
selector
TCM LIN Receives selector position information to control the Inside the transmission and
transmission. accessible by removal of the
fluid pan.
Information control Media Oriented Contains controls for the entertainment system and In the instrument panel
module System Transport gateway between audio system and other vehicle below the integrated control
(MOST) systems. panel.
Integrated control MOST Contains controls for the entertainment system. In the instrument panel.
panel
Digital Audio Broadcast MOST Receives digital radio broadcasts. In the LH side of the luggage
(DAB) receiver (SDARS compartment, above the
NAS only) keyless vehicle module.
Bluetooth® phone MOST Controls operation of the Bluetooth® phone system. Below the LH front seat,
module adjacent to the portable
audio module.
Amplifier/tuner MOST Provides amplification for the entertainment systems In the LH side of the luggage
and reception of radio RF broadcasts. compartment.
Navigation computer MOST Reads map data from a DVD (digital versatile disc) In the LH side of the luggage
to calculate and display visual route guidance compartment.
information via the TSD and audible guidance via the
amplifier to the driver.
Touch Screen Display MOST Provides the driver interface to the entertainment, In the center of the
(TSD) navigation and driver personalization functions. instrument panel.
TV tuner MOST Controls the reception of television signals and In the LH side of the luggage
audio/visual inputs. compartment.
Portable Audio Module MOST Controls the auxiliary inputs for additional audio Below the LH front seat,
inputs via the portable audio interface. adjacent to the Bluetooth®
phone module.
MOST diagnostic MOST Allows for diagnostic fault detection of the MOST Below the air ducting in the
connector ring. floor console.
Refer to Communications Network section for further details.
Refer to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Description and Operation).
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Driver Door Module (DDM)

For a detailed description of the multifunction electronic control modules, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules)
Module Controlled Functions (Description and Operation),

Module Controlled Functions (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Wiring Harness
the next step.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
into account.

B10EB11 Driver door double Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test driver
locking motor Driver door double locking motor door double locking motor control circuit for short ground
control circuit - short to ground
B10EB15 Driver door double Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
locking motor Driver door double locking motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
control circuit - short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test driver
open circuit door double locking motor control circuit for short to
B10EC11 Passenger door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
double locking Passenger door double locking passenger door double locking motor control circuit for
motor motor control circuit - short to short ground
ground
B10EC15 Passenger door Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
double locking Passenger door double locking using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
motor motor control circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
power, open circuit passenger door double locking motor control circuit for
short to power or open circuit
B10ED11 Rear door driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
side double locking Rear door driver side double door driver side double locking motor control circuit for
motor locking motor control circuit - short ground
short to ground
B10ED15 Rear door driver Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
side double locking Rear door driver side double using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
motor locking motor control circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
short to power, open circuit door driver side double locking motor control circuit for
B10EE11 Rear door passenger Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
side double locking Rear door passenger side double door passenger side double locking motor control circuit
motor locking motor control circuit - for short ground
short to ground
B10EE15 Rear door passenger Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
side double locking Rear door passenger side double using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to power, open circuit door passenger side double locking motor control circuit
for short power, open circuit
B110811 Driver door central Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test driver
locking motor Driver door central locking motor door central locking motor control circuit for short
control circuit - short to ground ground
B110815 Driver door central Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
locking motor Driver door central locking motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
open circuit door central locking motor control circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B110A11 Rear door driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
side central locking Rear driver door central locking driver door central locking motor control circuit for short
motor motor control circuit - short to ground
ground
B110A15 Rear door driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
side central locking Rear driver door central locking driver door central locking motor control circuit for short
motor motor control circuit - short to to power, open circuit
power, open circuit
B116311 Left Mirror Heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left
Output Left mirror heater control circuit mirror heater control circuit for short to ground
- short to ground
B116315 Left Mirror Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Output Left mirror heater control circuit using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
- short to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left
mirror heater control circuit for short to power, open
circuit
B116411 Right Mirror Heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
Output Right mirror heater control circuit mirror heater control circuit for short to ground
- short to ground
B116415 Right Mirror Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Output Right mirror heater control circuit using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
- short to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
circuit
B116511 Left Front Puddle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left front
Lamp Output Left front puddle lamp control puddle lamp control circuit for short to ground
B116515 Left Front Puddle Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Lamp Output Left front puddle lamp control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left front
circuit puddle lamp control circuit for short to power, open
circuit
B116611 Right Front Puddle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
Lamp Output Right front puddle lamp control front puddle lamp control circuit for short to ground
B116615 Right Front Puddle Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Lamp Output Right front puddle lamp control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
circuit front puddle lamp control circuit for short to power, open
circuit
B117C07 Rear Power Window Check rear window mechanism for mechanical failure
Up Mechanical failure
B117C72 Rear Power Window Suspect the rear door module. Check and install a new
Up Actuator stuck open module as required, refer to the new module/component
Up Actuator stuck closed module as required, refer to the new module/component
B117C92 Rear Power Window Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear
Up Performance or incorrect door module power and ground supplies
operation
B117D72 Rear Power Window Suspect the rear door module. Check and install a new
Down Actuator stuck open module as required, refer to the new module/component
Down Actuator stuck closed module as required, refer to the new module/component
B117E07 Front Power Window Check front window mechanism for mechanical failure
B117E72 Front Power Window Suspect the DDM. Check and install a new DDM as
Up Actuator stuck open required, refer to the new module/component
B117E73 Front Power Window Suspect the DDM. Check and install a new DDM as
Up Actuator stuck closed required, refer to the new module/component
B117F72 Front Power Window Suspect the DDM. Check and install a new DDM as
Down Actuator stuck open required, refer to the new module/component
B117F73 Front Power Window Suspect the DDM. Check and install a new DDM as
Down Actuator stuck closed required, refer to the new module/component
B118929 Front Window Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Position Sensor Front window hall position using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
sensor - signal invalid
B118A29 Rear Window Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Position Sensor Rear window hall position sensor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
- signal invalid
B11D183 LIN Bus Circuit "C" Suspect driver switchpack. Check and install a new
Value of signal protection driver switchpack as required, refer to the new
calculation incorrect module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
B11D186 LIN Bus Circuit "C" Signal invalid Suspect driver switchpack. Check and install a new
driver switchpack as required, refer to the new
DTC Index
B11D187 LIN Bus Circuit "C" Missing message Suspect driver switchpack. Check and install a new
DTC Index
B11F611 Driver Folding Mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
Motor Driver folding mirror motor folding mirror motor control circuit for short to ground
B11F615 Driver Folding Mirror Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Motor Driver folding mirror motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
control circuit - short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
open circuit folding mirror motor control circuit for short to power,
open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
B1A9883 LIN Bus Circuit #1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check LIN
Value of signal protection circuit between DDM and rear door module for
calculation incorrect short/open circuits
B1A9886 LIN Bus Circuit #1 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Signal invalid using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check LIN
circuit between DDM and rear door module for
short/open circuits
Missing message using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short/open circuits
B1C0911 Driver Left/Right Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Mirror Motor Circuit Driver left/right mirror motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
control circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test driver
left/right mirror motor control circuit for short to ground
Mirror Motor Circuit Driver left/right mirror motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
open circuit left/right mirror motor control circuit for short to power,
open circuit
B1C1011 Driver Up/Down Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Mirror Motor Circuit Driver up/down mirror motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
control circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test driver
up/down mirror motor control circuit for short to ground
Mirror Motor Circuit Driver up/down mirror motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
open circuit up/down mirror motor control circuit for short to power,
open circuit
B1C1311 Driver Up/Down Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test driver
Mirror Motor Driver up/down mirror motor up/down mirror motor feedback circuit for short to
Feedback Circuit feedback circuit - short to ground
ground
Mirror Motor Driver up/down mirror motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Feedback Circuit feedback circuit - short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test driver
open circuit up/down mirror motor feedback circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B1C1411 Driver Left/Right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test driver
Mirror Motor Driver left/right mirror motor left/right mirror motor feedback circuit for short to
Feedback Circuit feedback circuit - short to ground
ground
Mirror Motor Driver left/right mirror motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Feedback Circuit feedback circuit - short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test driver
open circuit left/right mirror motor feedback circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B1D0611 Left Turn Indicator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
Left side turn indicator repeater side turn indicator repeater lamp circuit for short to
lamp circuit - short to ground ground
B1D0615 Left Turn Indicator Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Left side turn indicator repeater using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
lamp circuit - short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
open circuit side turn indicator repeater lamp circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B1D0711 Right Turn Indicator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Right side turn indicator side turn indicator repeater lamp circuit for short to
repeater lamp circuit - short to ground
ground
repeater lamp circuit - short to power, open circuit
power, open circuit
C1B1411 Sensor Supply #1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test window
Window position hall sensors position hall sensors supply circuit for short to ground
supply circuit - short to ground
C1B1415 Sensor Supply #1 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Window position hall sensors using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
supply circuit - short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test window
open circuit position hall sensors supply circuit for short to power,
open circuit
Hall sensor supply circuit - short position hall sensors supply circuit for short to ground
to ground
Hall sensor supply circuit - short using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test window
position hall sensors supply circuit for short to power,
open circuit
U001000 Medium Speed CAN Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Communication Bus Bus off using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U014000 Lost Communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
With Body Control Missing message from CJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Module
With Seat Control Missing message from driver using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Module "A" seat module
Module Software Invalid configuration message is diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC
Incompatibility received remains suspect the DDM. Check and install a new
U200224 Switch Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains, suspect the
Signal stuck high passenger side window switch. Check and install a new
passenger side window switch
U200424 Auxiliary Switch Check for stuck rear window switch. Refer to the
Pack Left or right rear door local electrical circuit diagrams and check left or right rear
switch - signal stuck high door local switch circuit for short circuit
U201011 Switch illumination Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear
Rear window switch illumination window switch illumination circuit for short to ground
U201208 Car Configuration Cycle the ignition status and re-test. If DTC remains,
Parameter(s) Bus signal/message failures re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U201324 Switch Pack Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains, install a new
Signal stuck high driver door switch pack
U201444 Control Module Suspect the DDM. Check and install a new DDM as
Hardware Data memory failure required, refer to the new module/component
U210000 Initial Configuration Re-configure the DDM using the manufacturer approved
Not Complete No sub type information diagnostic system
U300049 Control Module Suspect the DDM. Check and install a new DDM as
Internal electronic failure required, refer to the new module/component
U300255 Vehicle Re-configure the DDM as new using the manufacturer
Identification Not configured approved diagnostic system and re-test. If DTC remains
Number install a new module, refer to the new
DTC Index
U300281 Vehicle Check and install correct/new module as required, refer
Identification Vehicle/component mis-match. to the new module/component installation note at the
Number (VIN) Corrupt VIN data being top of the DTC Index
U300362 Battery voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Mis-match in battery voltage, of using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
2 volts or more, between DDM
and RJB
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Module
For a detailed description of the Remote Keyless Entry system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules)

Visual Inspection
Misaligned door(s), hood or luggage compartment lid Fuse(s)

Door latch(s) Wiring harness
Actuating rod(s) Electrical connector(s)
Exterior door handle(s) Door lock actuator(s)
Interior door handle(s) Remote transmitter batteries
Door lock cylinder Vehicle battery
Cable(s) Remote transmitter
Luggage compartment lid exterior release switch Door lock switch(s)
the next step.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
into account.
B102B00 Passive Key Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
Response Error - general all passive keys, re-learn all passive keys
failure
B10C100 Left Front Unlock Pull Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Switch No subtype information the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
B10C124 Left Front Unlock Pull Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Switch Signal stuck high - button the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check for
stuck in active position stuck left front unlock switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check left front unlock switch circuit for short
to ground
B10C200 Left Rear Unlock Pull Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
B10C224 Left Rear Unlock Pull Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
stuck in active position stuck left rear unlock switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check left rear unlock switch circuit for short
to ground
B10C300 Right Front Unlock Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Pull Switch No subtype information the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
B10C324 Right Front Unlock Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Pull Switch Signal stuck high - button the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check for
stuck in active position stuck right front unlock switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check right front unlock switch circuit for
short to ground
B10C400 Right Rear Unlock Pull Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
B10C424 Right Rear Unlock Pull Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
stuck in active position stuck right rear unlock switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check right front unlock switch circuit for
short to ground
B10C524 Trunk Unlock Pull Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
stuck in active position stuck luggage compartment lid unlock switch. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check luggage compartment
lid unlock switch circuit for short to ground
B10C61F Exterior Trunk Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Antenna Circuit intermittent - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
general electrical error electrical circuit diagrams and check exterior luggage
compartment antenna circuits for short to ground, power,
open circuit
B10C71F Interior Trunk Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
general electrical error electrical circuit diagrams and check interior luggage
compartment antenna circuits for short to ground, power,
open circuit
B10C81F Interior Center Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
general electrical error electrical circuit diagrams and check interior center antenna
B10C91F Interior Front Antenna Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Circuit intermittent - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
general electrical error electrical circuit diagrams and check interior front antenna
B10CA1F Left Rear Door Handle Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
general electrical error electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear door handle
antenna circuits for short to ground, power, open circuit
B10CB1F Right Rear Door Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Handle Antenna Circuit intermittent - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
general electrical error electrical circuit diagrams and check right rear door handle
antenna circuits for short to ground, power, open circuit
B10CC24 Left Front Latch Check for stuck left front door latch clutch switch. Refer to
Clutch Switch Signal stuck high - button the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front door
stuck in active position latch clutch switch circuit for short to ground
B10CD24 Left Rear Latch Clutch Check for stuck left rear door latch clutch switch. Refer to
Switch Signal stuck high - button the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear door latch
stuck in active position clutch switch circuit for short to ground
B10CE24 Right Front Latch Check for stuck right front door latch clutch switch. Refer to
Clutch Switch Signal stuck high - button the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front door
B10CF24 Right Rear Latch Check for stuck right rear door latch clutch switch. Refer to
Clutch Switch Signal stuck high - button the electrical circuit diagrams and check right rear door
B10D124 Left Front Lock Button Check for stuck left front door handle lock switch. Refer to
Signal stuck high - button the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front door
stuck in active position handle lock switch circuit for short to ground
B10D224 Left Rear Lock Button Check for stuck left rear door handle lock switch. Refer to
Signal stuck high - button the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear door
B10D324 Right Front Lock Check for stuck right front door handle lock switch. Refer to
Button Signal stuck high - button the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front door
B10D424 Right Rear Lock Check for stuck right rear door handle lock switch. Refer to
Button Signal stuck high - button the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front door
U001000 Medium Speed CAN Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Communication Bus No subtype information the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Carry out
CAN network integrity test using the manufacturer
U014000 Lost Communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
With Body Control Missing message from CJB the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Carry out
Module CAN network integrity test using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check power and ground supplies to CJB
With Body Control Missing message from RJB the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Carry out
Module "B" CAN network integrity test using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check power and ground supplies to RJB
With Instrument Missing message from the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Carry out
Panel Cluster (IPC) instrument cluster CAN network integrity test using the manufacturer
Control Module approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check power and ground supplies to
instrument cluster
Module Software Invalid configuration diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is
Incompatibility message is received still logged suspect the remote keyless entry module, refer
to the new module installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
U201F00 External Receiver Suspect the RF receiver, check and install a new RF receiver
No subtype information - as required, refer to the new module/component
communication error installation note at top of DTC Index
U201F13 External Receiver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test RF receiver
Line open communication circuit to remote keyless entry module for
short to ground or open circuit
U201F87 External Receiver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the data
Transmission error line between the RF receiver and the remote keyless entry
module for short, open circuit. Suspect the RF receiver or
remote keyless entry module, check and install a new RF
receiver or remote keyless entry module as required, refer
to the new module/component installation note at top of
DTC Index
U210000 Initial Configuration Configure the Remote Keyless Entry module using the
Not Complete No subtype information manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Configuration No subtype information diagnostic system
Incompatible
U300049 Control Module Install a new remote keyless entry module, refer to the
Internal electronic failure new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index
U300281 Vehicle Identification Install correct/new module to vehicle specification, refer to

Number Vehicle/component the new module/component installation note at the top of
mis-match. Module the DTC Index
previously installed to other
vehicle
www.JagDocs.com
voltage, of 2 volts or more,
between remote keyless
entry module and RJB
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Passenger Door Module (PDM)

For a detailed description of the multifunction electronic control modules, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules)

Visual Inspection
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Wiring Harness
the next step.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
into account.

B10EB11 Driver door double Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test driver
locking motor Driver door double locking motor door double locking motor control circuit for short ground
B10EB15 Driver door double Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
locking motor Driver door double locking motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
open circuit door double locking motor control circuit for short to
B10EC11 Passenger door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
double locking Passenger door double locking passenger door double locking motor control circuit for
ground
B10EC15 Passenger door Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
double locking Passenger door double locking using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
motor motor control circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
power, open circuit passenger door double locking motor control circuit for
short to power or open circuit
B10ED11 Rear door driver side Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
double locking Rear door driver side double door driver side double locking motor control circuit for
short to ground
B10ED15 Rear door driver side Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
double locking Rear door driver side double using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to power, open circuit door driver side double locking motor control circuit for
B10EE11 Rear door passenger Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
side double locking Rear door passenger side double door passenger side double locking motor control circuit
motor locking motor control circuit - for short ground
short to ground
B10EE15 Rear door passenger Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
side double locking Rear door passenger side double using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to power, open circuit door passenger side double locking motor control circuit
for short power, open circuit
B110911 Passenger door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
central locking Passenger door central locking passenger door central locking motor control circuit for
ground
B110915 Passenger door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
central locking Passenger door central locking passenger door central locking motor control circuit for
motor motor control circuit - short to short to power, open circuit
power, open circuit
B110B11 Rear door passenger Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
side central locking Rear passenger door central passenger door central locking motor control circuit for
short to ground
B110B15 Rear door passenger Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
side central locking Rear passenger door central passenger door central locking motor control circuit for
motor locking motor control circuit - short to power, open circuit
B116311 Left Mirror Heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left
Output Left mirror heater control circuit mirror heater control circuit for short to ground
- short to ground
B116315 Left Mirror Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Output Left mirror heater control circuit using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
- short to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left
circuit
B116411 Right Mirror Heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
Output Right mirror heater control circuit mirror heater control circuit for short to ground
- short to ground
B116415 Right Mirror Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Output Right mirror heater control circuit using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
- short to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
circuit
B116511 Left Front Puddle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left front
Lamp Output Left front puddle lamp control puddle lamp control circuit for short to ground
B116515 Left Front Puddle Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Lamp Output Left front puddle lamp control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left front
circuit puddle lamp control circuit for short to power, open
circuit
B116611 Right Front Puddle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
Lamp Output Right front puddle lamp control front puddle lamp control circuit for short to ground
B116615 Right Front Puddle Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Lamp Output Right front puddle lamp control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
circuit front puddle lamp control circuit for short to power, open
circuit
B117C07 Rear Power Window Check rear window mechanism for mechanical failure
Up Actuator stuck open module as required, refer to the new module/component
Up Actuator stuck closed module as required, refer to the new module/component
B117C92 Rear Power Window Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear
Up Performance or incorrect door module power and ground supplies
operation
Down Actuator stuck open module as required, refer to the new module/component
Down Actuator stuck closed module as required, refer to the new module/component
B117E07 Front Power Window Check the front window mechanism for mechanical
Up Mechanical failure failure
B117E72 Front Power Window Suspect the PDM. Check and install a new PDM as
Up Actuator stuck open required, refer to the new module/component
B117E73 Front Power Window Suspect the PDM. Check and install a new PDM as
Up Actuator stuck closed required, refer to the new module/component
B117F72 Front Power Window Suspect the PDM. Check and install a new PDM as
Down Actuator stuck open required, refer to the new module/component
B117F73 Front Power Window Suspect the PDM. Check and install a new PDM as
Down Actuator stuck closed required, refer to the new module/component
B118929 Front Window Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Position Sensor Front window hall position using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
sensor - signal invalid
B118A29 Rear Window Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Position Sensor Rear window hall position sensor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
- signal invalid
B11D183 LIN Bus Circuit "C" Suspect driver switchpack. Check and install a new
Value of signal protection driver switchpack as required, refer to the new
calculation incorrect module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
B11D186 LIN Bus Circuit "C" Signal invalid Suspect driver switchpack. Check and install a new
DTC Index
B11D187 LIN Bus Circuit "C" Missing message Suspect driver switchpack. Check and install a new
DTC Index
B11F711 Passenger Folding Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Mirror Motor Passenger folding mirror motor passenger folding mirror motor control circuit for short
control circuit - short to ground to ground
B11F715 Passenger Folding Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Mirror Motor Passenger folding mirror motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
control circuit - short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open circuit passenger folding mirror motor control circuit for short
B1A9883 LIN Bus Circuit #1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check LIN
Value of signal protection circuit between DDM and rear door module for
calculation incorrect short/open circuits
Signal invalid using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short/open circuits
Missing message using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short/open circuits
B1C1111 Passenger Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Left/Right Mirror Passenger left/right mirror motor passenger left/right mirror motor control circuit for short
Motor Circuit control circuit - short to ground to ground
B1C1115 Passenger Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Left/Right Mirror Passenger left/right mirror motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Motor Circuit control circuit - short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
open circuit passenger left/right mirror motor control circuit for short
B1C1211 Passenger Up/Down Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Mirror Motor Circuit Passenger up/down mirror motor passenger up/down mirror motor control circuit for short
control circuit - short to ground to ground
B1C1215 Passenger Up/Down Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Mirror Motor Circuit Passenger up/down mirror motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
control circuit - short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
open circuit passenger up/down mirror motor control circuit for short
Mirror Motor Passenger up/down mirror motor passenger up/down mirror motor feedback circuit for
Feedback Circuit feedback circuit - short to short to ground
ground
Mirror Motor Passenger up/down mirror motor passenger up/down mirror motor feedback circuit for
Feedback Circuit feedback circuit - short to power, short to power, open circuit
open circuit

Left/Right Mirror Passenger left/right mirror motor passenger left/right mirror motor feedback circuit for
Motor Feedback feedback circuit - short to ground short to ground
Circuit

Left/Right Mirror Passenger left/right mirror motor passenger left/right mirror motor feedback circuit for
Motor Feedback feedback circuit - short to power, short to power, open circuit
Circuit open circuit
B1D0611 Left Turn Indicator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
Left side turn indicator repeater side turn indicator repeater lamp circuit for short to
lamp circuit - short to ground ground
B1D0615 Left Turn Indicator Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Left side turn indicator repeater using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
lamp circuit - short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
open circuit side turn indicator repeater lamp circuit for short to
power, open circuit
repeater lamp circuit - short to ground
ground
repeater lamp circuit - short to power, open circuit
power, open circuit
C1B1411 Sensor Supply #1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front
Front window position hall window position hall sensor supply circuit for short to
sensor supply circuit - short to ground
ground
www.JagDocs.com
Front window position hall using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
sensor supply circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front
power, open circuit window position hall sensor supply circuit for short to
power, open circuit
Hall sensor supply circuit - short position hall sensors supply circuit for short to ground
to ground
Hall sensor supply circuit - short using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test window
position hall sensors supply circuit for short to power,
open circuit
U001000 Medium Speed CAN Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Communication Bus Bus off using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
With Body Control Missing message from CJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Module
With Seat Control Missing message from driver using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Module "A" seat module
Module Software Invalid configuration message is diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC
Incompatibility received remains suspect the PDM. Check and install a new
U200224 Switch Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains, suspect the
Signal stuck high passenger side window switch. Check and install a new
passenger side window switch
U200424 Auxiliary Switch Check for stuck rear window switch. Refer to the
Pack Left or right rear door local electrical circuit diagrams and check left or right rear
switch - signal stuck high door local switch circuit for short circuit
U201011 Switch illumination Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear
Rear window switch illumination window switch illumination circuit for short to ground
U201208 Car Configuration Cycle the ignition status and re-test. If DTC remains,
Parameter(s) Bus signal/message failures re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U201324 Switch Pack Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains, install a new
Signal stuck high driver door switch pack
U201444 Control Module Suspect the PDM. Check and install a new PDM as
Hardware Data memory failure required, refer to the new module/component
U210000 Initial Configuration Re-configure the PDM using the manufacturer approved
Not Complete No sub type information diagnostic system
U300049 Control Module Suspect the PDM. Check and install a new PDM as
Internal electronic failure required, refer to the new module/component
U300255 Vehicle Re-configure the PDM as new using the manufacturer
Identification Not configured approved diagnostic system and re-test. If DTC remains
Number install a new module, refer to the new
DTC Index
U300281 Vehicle Check and install correct/new module as required, refer
Identification Vehicle/component mis-match. to the new module/component installation note at the
Number (VIN) Corrupt VIN data being top of the DTC Index
U300362 Battery voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Mis-match in battery voltage, of using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
2 volts or more, between PDM
and RJB
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Driver Door Module (DDM)
Removal
2. Refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
3.
Installation

Multifunction Electronic Modules - Driver Seat Module (DSM)
Removal
1. Make the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) safe.

3.
Installation

Multifunction Electronic Modules - Passenger Door Module (PDM)
Removal
3.
Installation

Multifunction Electronic Modules - Rear Door Module (RDM)
Removal
2. Refer to: Rear Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
3. Torque: 1.5 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Front End Body Panels -

Air deflector retaining nuts 7 - 62
Air deflector retaining bolts 7 - 62
Engine rear undershield retaining bolts 7 - 62
Secondary bulkhead left-hand panel retaining bolts 5 - 44
Secondary bulkhead right-hand panel retaining bolts 5 - 44
Front End Body Panels - Air Deflector
Removal

2. NOTE: Note the fitted position of the washers.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Front End Body Panels - Cowl Vent Screen
Removal
CAUTION: Always protect paintwork and glass when removing exterior components.
1. For additional information, refer to: Windshield Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16
Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).
2.
3.
4.
5.
Installation

Front End Body Panels - Engine Rear Undershield
Removal
2. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Front End Body Panels - Fender Splash Shield
Removal
Installation).
3.
Installation

Front End Body Panels - Hood
Removal
1. NOTE: The hood is manufactured from aluminium. The
hood is serviced as a separate bolt-on panel.
2. WARNING: The hood and its associated components form part of the
pedestrian protection system, it is essential that any repair or
replacement operations do not affect the safe working of the system.
For additional information relating to the pedestrian safety system

please see the following:
For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection System
(501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Description and Operation).
3. For additional information relating to this repair procedure please see

the following:
For additional information, refer to: Health and Safety Precautions
(100-00 General Information, Description and Operation) /
Body Repairs (501-25A Body Repairs - General Information, Description
and Operation) /
Corrosion Protection (501-25B Body Repairs - Corrosion Protection,
Description and Operation) /
Body and Frame (501-26 Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and
Tolerance Checks, Description and Operation).
4. NOTE: This step requires the aid of another
technician.
Release the clips and disconnect the struts and remove the
retaining nuts.

Remove the hood pad.

6. Remove the hood safety hook.
7. Remove the hood strikers.

Installation
1. NOTES:
If the hood hinges are deformed as a result of the pedestrian

protection system deployment, they will need to be replaced.
Offer up the panel and loosely install the hood hinge retaining nuts.
2. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if not, rectify and

recheck before proceeding.
3. Tighten the hood hinge retaining nuts to 17 Nm and connect the struts
and secure with the clips.
4. Loosely install both hood strikers.
5. Gently close the hood so that the strikers are aligned to the latches.

7. Tighten the hood striker nuts to 17 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
8. Install the hood safety hook.
Tighten to 17 Nm.
9. Install the hood pad.

Front End Body Panels - Radiator Splash Shield
Removal
2.
Installation

Front End Body Panels - Secondary Bulkhead Center Panel
Removal
Installation).
2.

Installation

Front End Body Panels - Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
Removal
All vehicles
2.
Torque: 25 Nm
3.
4.
Vehicles with 5.0L
5.
Torque: 7 Nm
All vehicles
6.
Torque: 5 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Front End Body Panels - Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
Removal
All vehicles
2. Torque: 25 Nm

4.

Vehicles with 5.0L
6. Refer to: Air Cleaner RH (303-12G, Removal and Installation).

7.
All vehicles
8.
9.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Body Closures - Front Door
Removal
1. NOTE: The front door is manufactured from mild steel, it

contains a side impact reinforcement manufactured from
boron steel.
The front door is serviced as a separate bolt-on panel.

the following:
and Operation) /
3. NOTE: If the procedure includes removal of the front door components,

the battery can remain connected to aid their removal and disconnected
afterwards.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.

4. NOTE: For new front door installation, this step may be carried out
later in the removal procedure.
Disconnect the front door wiring harness, accessed behind the grommet
on the A-pillar.
5. NOTE: For new front door installation, this step may be carried out
Release the front door check strap from the body.
6. NOTE: This step is for removing the fully trimmed front door for access
only, for installing a new front door, continue to removal step 7.
Remove the front door upper and lower hinge pivot bolts and lift the
front door to remove.
7. Remove the front door window regulator and motor.

For additional information, refer to: Front Door Window Regulator and
Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
8. Remove the exterior mirror.

For additional information, refer to: Exterior Mirror (501-09 Rear View
Mirrors, Removal and Installation).
9. Remove the front door latch.

For additional information, refer to: Front Door Latch (501-14 Handles,
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
10. Remove the front door outer window frame mouldings.
11. Remove the front door weatherstrips.
12. Remove the front door wiring harness.
13. Remove the front door impact absorbers.
14. Remove the front door check strap.
15. Remove the front door glass run felt.

16. Remove any miscellaneous front door clips, grommets and blanking
covers.
17. NOTE: If new hinges are being installed, install the

complete hinges to the A-pillar. To align the hinges at the
A-pillar it will be necessary to remove the front fender.
Remove the upper and lower front door hinge fixing bolts
and remove the front door.
Installation
1. NOTE: If the front door has been removed for access only, it can be
installed back on to its upper and lower hinge pivots and secured with
the upper and lower hinge pivot bolts.
Offer up the front door and loosely install the front door hinge bolts.

3. Tighten the front door hinge bolts to 30 Nm.
4. When correctly aligned and with the front door hinge bolts tightened,
the new front door can be removed at its upper and lower hinge pivot
bolts for refinishing.
5. NOTE: Install the front door upper frame weatherstrip prior to
installing the front door.
The installation of associated panels and components is the reversal of

removal procedure.
Tighten the front door upper and lower hinge pivot bolts to 30
Nm.
Body Closures - Fuel Filler Door
Removal
CAUTION: Do not align the bowl using the hinge arm.
1.

damage.
Release the clip.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Body Closures - Fuel Filler Door Assembly
Removal
CAUTION: Do not align the bowl using the hinge arm.

2. Refer to: Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (310-01, Removal and Installation).
3.
4.
5.
CAUTION: Protect the surrounding paintwork to avoid

damage.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is

Release the clip.
6.
Installation

Body Closures - Luggage Compartment Lid
Removal
1. NOTE: The luggage compartment lid is manufactured from

mild steel.
The luggage compartment lid is serviced as a separate

bolt-on panel, less its hinges.

the following:
and Operation) /

4. Remove the loadspace trim panel RH.

5. Disconnect the luggage compartment lid wiring harness.
Remove the luggage compartment lid.

access only.
Remove the luggage compartment lid moulding.

For additional information, refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Moulding
(501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
8. Remove the luggage compartment lid latch actuator.

For additional information, refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Latch
Actuator (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal
and Installation).
9. Remove both rear fog lamps.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Fog Lamp (417-01 Exterior
Lighting, Removal and Installation).
10. Remove both luggage compartment lid buffers.
11. Remove the luggage compartment lid wiring harness.

For additional information, refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Wiring
Harness (418-02 Wiring Harnesses, Removal and Installation).
12. NOTE: Where it is not practical to re-use the luggage compartment

lid badges, they should be renewed, therefore removal is not required.
Remove the luggage compartment lid badges.

Installation
Offer up the panel and loosely install the luggage compartment lid hinge
retaining nuts.
2. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if not rectify and

3. Tighten the luggage compartment lid hinge retaining nuts to 25 Nm.
4. The installation of associated panels and components is the reversal of

removal procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
Body Closures - Rear Door
Removal
1. NOTE: The rear door is manufactured from mild steel, it

contains a side impact reinforcement manufactured from
boron steel.
The rear door is serviced as a separate bolt-on panel.

the following:
and Operation) /
3. NOTE: If the procedure includes removal of the rear door components,

the battery can remain connected to aid their removal and disconnected
afterwards.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.

4. NOTE: For new rear door installation, this step may be carried out
Disconnect the rear door wiring harness, accessed behind the grommet
on the B-pillar.
5. NOTE: For new rear door installation, this step may be carried out
Release the rear door check strap from the body.
6. NOTE: This step is for removing the fully trimmed rear door for access
only, for installing a new front door, continue to removal step 7.
Remove the rear door upper and lower hinge pivot bolts and lift the rear
door to remove.
7. Remove the rear door fixed window glass.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Door Fixed Window Glass
(501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
8. Remove the rear door latch.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Door Latch (501-14 Handles,
9. Remove the rear door outer window frame mouldings.
10. Remove the rear door weatherstrips.
11. Remove the rear door wiring harness.
12. Remove the rear door impact absorbers.
13. Remove the rear door check strap.
14. Remove the rear door glass run felt.
15. Remove any miscellaneous rear door clips, grommets and blanking
covers.
16. NOTE: If new hinges are being fitted, install the
complete hinges to the B-pillar.
Remove the upper and lower rear door hinge bolts and
remove the rear door.
Installation
1. NOTE: If the rear door has been removed for access only, it can be
installed back on to its upper and lower hinge pivots and secured with
the upper and lower hinge pivot bolts.
Offer up the rear door and loosely install the rear door hinge bolts.

3. Tighten the rear door hinge bolts to 30 Nm.
4. When correctly aligned and with the rear door hinge bolts tightened, the
new rear door can be removed at its upper and lower hinge pivot bolts
for refinishing.
removal procedure.
Tighten the rear door upper and lower hinge pivot bolts to 30 Nm.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation -

Front Safety belt shoulder height adjuster retaining bolt 25 19 -
Rear safety belt lower retaining bolt 40 30 -
www.JagDocs.com
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - A-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal
1.
2.
3. Torque: 6 Nm
4.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - B-Pillar Lower Trim Panel
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
2. Refer to: Rear Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
3.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the clips are correctly

located.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel
Removal
2.
3.
4. Torque: 40 Nm
5.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
7. Torque: 6 Nm
8.
9.
10. WARNING: Failure to follow this instruction may cause
CAUTION: Make sure the locating dowels are installed

correctly.

Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - C-Pillar Lower Trim Panel
Removal
2.
3.
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6. Torque: 40 Nm
7. CAUTIONS:
Note the fitted position of the component prior to

removal.

Torque: 9 Nm
8. CAUTION: Make sure the locating dowels are installed
correctly.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - C-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal
1. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel RH - Sportbrake (501-05, Removal and

Installation).
2. CAUTIONS:

removal.
3.
4. Torque: 40 Nm
5.
6. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the locating dowels are installed correctly.
Torque: 6 Nm
7. CAUTIONS:

removal.
8. CAUTIONS:
Note the fitted position of the component prior to removal.
www.JagDocs.com
prior to removal.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Cowl Side Trim Panel
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
3.
LH side only: Remove the hood release lever.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Engine Cover V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Removal

Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Door Trim Panel
Removal
1.
2.
X13
E94750
3.

5.
6.
7.
8.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Removal
1. CAUTIONS:
Care must be taken when releasing the trim panel

from the retaining clips.

Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Instrument Panel Speaker Grille
Removal
2. CAUTIONS:
3.


Torque: 2 Nm
I nst ollation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Headliner
Removal
2. Refer to: Interior Rear View Mirror (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal
and Installation).
3. Refer to: Overhead Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,

4.
Remove both sun visors.
Refer to: Sun Visor (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,

5.
Remove both A-pillar trim panels.
Refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

6.
Remove both B-pillar upper trim panels.
Refer to: B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
7.
Remove both C-pillar trim panels.
Refer to: C-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

8.
Remove both front seats.
9. Refer to: Rear Seat Cushion (501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
10. Torque: 2 Nm
11.
12.
www.JagDocs.com
13.
Vehicles with roof opening panel
14. NOTES:
Note the different lengths of screws.

Torque: 2 Nm
Vehicles without roof opening panel
15. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
All vehicles
16.
17.
18. WARNING: This step requires the aid of another

technician.

technician.
CAUTIONS:

removal.

prior to removal.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is installed to


technician.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Loadspace Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Removal
1.
2.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Loadspace Trim Panel
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Loadspace Trim Panel LH
Removal
1. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
3.
4.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Loadspace Trim Panel RH
Removal
1. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
3.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Luggage Compartment Lid Trim Panel
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Parcel Shelf
Removal
2. Torque: 12 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
3.
4.
5.
6. NOTE: The procedure must be carried out on both

sides of the seat.
7. NOTE: The procedure must be carried out on both
sides of the seat.
Torque: 6 Nm
8.
9.
10. NOTE: On installation, use a suitable tool to make

sure that the parcel shelf is located underneath the rear
window blind.
12.
13.
www.JagDocs.com
14.
15.
16.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Door Trim Panel
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

www.JagDocs.com
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Removal
1. CAUTIONS:
Care must be taken when releasing the trim panel

from the retaining clips.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Sun Visor
Removal
1. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the edges of the

component.
2. TORQUE: 2 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
3.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Sun Visor Vanity Mirror
General Equipment
Interior trim remover
Removal
1. Using a suitable tool, release the retaining clips and

remove the sun visor vanity mirror from the sun visor.
General Equipment: Interior trim remover
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force to install the

component.
Press firmly against the areas indicated until an audible

click is heard.
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation -

Luggage compartment lid moulding retaining nuts 3 - 26
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Radiator Grille
Removal

Installation).
2.
3. NOTE: Note the fitted position of the locating pegs.
Installation

Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Luggage Compartment Lid Moulding
Removal
1. Refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
2.
3. Torque: 3 Nm
4.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
7.
Installation

Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Fender Moulding
Removal
1. CAUTION: Failure to follow this instruction may cause

NOTE: Using a screwdriver, carefully release the

moulding at the position illustrated.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the clips are correctly

located.
NOTES:
Using a thin plastic trim tool, carefully detach the clips

in order shown.
Install clip number 5 when installing the front fender

moulding
Installation

Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Rocker Panel Moulding
Removal
CAUTIONS:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. NOTE: If equipped
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
Rear View Mirrors -
Exterior mirror retaining nuts 8 — 71
Exterior mirror motor retaining screws 1 — 9
Rear View Mirrors - Rear View Mirrors - Component Location
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) shown RHD (right-hand drive) similar
Item Description
1 Passenger door mirror
2 Passenger door control module
3 Interior mirror
4 Drivers door control module
5 Mirror control switch
6 Drivers door mirror
Rear View Mirrors - Rear View Mirrors - Overview
Overview
The exterior mirrors incorporate the following:
Blind spot monitoring indicator

Auto dimming function
Approach lamps
Exterior temperature sensor
Heated mirror function
Reverse dipping function
Movement of the door mirrors is controlled from a switch pack located on the drivers door. The switch pack contains 2
non-latching mirror select buttons labeled 'L' and 'R' and a 4-way mirror movement switch. Door mirror movement commands
are transmitted to the driver's door module over the LIN (local interconnect network) bus. The drivers door module transmits
any mirror movement commands to the passenger door module over the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
Movement of the door mirrors is carried out by the respective door module. The door modules provide supply and ground paths
to the mirror motors and monitor mirror position via potentiometers located in the mirror housings.
Both exterior door mirrors and the interior mirror feature an auto dimming function. The interior rear view mirror contains one
forward and one reward facing light sensor. The light sensors control the auto dimming feature of the interior mirror to reduce
glare from the headlights of following vehicles.
When auto-dimming of the interior mirror is required, a supply is provided by the interior mirror to both door mirrors to initiate
the door mirror auto-dimming sequence.
Blind spot monitoring function alerts the driver to a vehicle located in the vehicle blind spot. A warning indicator is located in
each exterior mirror towards the outer edge.
Refer to: Blindspot Monitoring System (413-09 Warning Devices, Description and Operation).
Rear View Mirrors - Rear View Mirrors - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired, N = Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus, O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus
Item Description
2 RH (right-hand) door module
3 RH door mirror
4 LH (left-hand)side door mirror
5 Interior mirror
6 Battery
8 LH door module
9 Exterior mirror control switches
System Operation
The rear view mirrors comprise an interior mirror mounted to the windshield, and an exterior mirror mounted on each front door
cheater. The types of mirrors and associated operating functions installed depend on the specification and trim level of the
vehicle.
Interior Mirrors
The interior rear view mirror is provided as a manual dimming or an electrically operated automatic dimming type.
The manual dimming mirror comprises a prismatic glass housed within a surrounding case that is attached with a ball joint
connector to the mirror stem. Manual dimming of the mirror is achieved using the lever mounted on the underside of the mirror
body. Operating the lever will tilt the mirror head from the 'day' position to the 'night' position.
The automatic dimming mirror comprises an electro-chromatic glass housed within a surrounding case that is attached with a
ball joint connector to the mirror stem. The mirror stem incorporates an 8-pin electrical connector that is connected to the roof
panel wiring harness. The wiring harness provides hardwired and a LIN connection to the CJB.
Light sensors are mounted on the front and rear of the mirror surround case. The sensors control the automatic dimming
feature to reduce glare from the headlights of following vehicles.
The automatic dimming function is permanently active when the ignition is in power mode 4 (Accessory) and power mode 6
(Ignition). The forward facing light sensor monitors the ambient light level at the front of the vehicle; the rearward facing light
sensor monitors the light level coming from the rear of the vehicle. When light from the rear of the vehicle exceeds the
ambient light level from the front of the vehicle, the automatic dimming circuit darkens the interior mirror surface.
Automatic dimming is inhibited when reverse gear is selected to provide the driver with maximum vision. On vehicles with
automatic transmission, the reverse gear signal is provided by the TCM (transmission control module) via the high speed CAN
bus to the CJB. The CJB then provides a power feed to the mirror. On vehicles with manual transmission, the reverse gear
signal is provided by a transmission switch that is hardwired to the CJB.
Exterior Mirrors
Electrically operated and heated exterior mirrors are installed as standard. Depending on the specification and trim level of the
vehicle, the following options are available:
Power fold (switch pack operated feature) and auto fold (remote handset operated feature)
Memory recall
Reverse gear mirror dip
Mirror heating
Exterior mirror lamps.
The power fold/auto fold feature is available only when power fold mirrors are installed to the vehicle.
The mirrors can be configured to automatically fold when the vehicle is locked and unfold when unlocked. This feature can be
enabled or disabled via the Vehicle settings area of the touch screen:
Select 'Settings' from the touch screen Home menu.

Select ' Security/Vehicle'
Select 'Windows/Mirrors'
Select Power Fold 'On' or 'Off' as appropriate.
The pasenger side mirror can be configured to automatically dip when reverse gear is selected. This feature can be enabled or
disabled via the Vehicle settings area of the touch screen:
Select 'Settings' from the touch screen Home menu.

Select ' Security/Vehicle'
Select 'Windows/Mirrors'
Select Reverse dip 'On' or 'Off' as appropriate.
The LH door mirror incorporates an ambient air temperature sensor that is hardwired to the ECM (engine control module). The
ECM is connected to the CJB and other control modules via the high speed CAN bus. The sensor provides information to the
ECM that is then transmitted on the medium speed CAN bus for use by other control modules. On vehicles installed with a
high-line instrument cluster, the CJB transmits the temperature signal to the instrument cluster that provides a display of the
ambient temperature to the driver.
The exterior mirror lamps are controlled by the interior lighting function.
The door mirrors are controlled using a switch pack located on the driver's door. The switch pack contains 2 non-latching mirror
select switches labeled 'L' and 'R' and a 4-way directional joystick. The switch pack is connected to the driver door control
module via the LIN bus. The driver and front passenger door control modules are connected via the medium speed CAN bus. A
hardwired connection between each door control module and the corresponding door mirror, provides the supply and ground
paths for the mirror motors.
Each exterior door mirror incorporates 2 motors to control horizontal (left/right) and vertical (up/down) adjustments.
www.JagDocs.com
On vehicles installed with a driver's power operated memory seat and memory exterior mirrors, a potentiometer is incorporated
within each mirror motor and is used to provide information regarding the actual motor positions. The current position and
memory positions of each door mirror motor are maintained and stored within the corresponding door control module.
The memory exterior mirror positions are also monitored and stored within door control module memory when the reverse gear
mirror dip function is used.
When reverse gear is selected, the door control module stores the current mirror positions and will then dip the passenger
mirror glass to a default dip position. While reverse gear is selected it is possible to store a preferred dipped mirror position by
adjusting the driver/passenger mirror glass to the desired position via the mirror switch pack. When the desired position is
achieved using the switch, the new dip positions will be automatically stored by the door control module when reverse gear is
de-selected. Therefore when reverse gear is re-selected, the dip position recalled by the door control module will be the new
reverse gear mirror dip stored position. When reverse gear is deselected the mirror glass will automatically move to the previous
stored position prior to reverse gear selection.
If the driver selects a memory recall function using the memory seat switch pack, the driver's memory seat and exterior
memory mirrors are moved to a stored memory position.
Exterior mirrors with the power fold/auto fold feature incorporate a motor located in the hinge of each exterior mirror arm.
Operation of the power fold feature is achieved using the exterior mirror switch pack. Operation of the auto fold feature is
achieved using the remote handset.
The power fold function is active when the ignition is in power mode 6 (Ignition).
Both exterior mirrors will power fold when the mirror switch pack 'L' and 'R' switches are pressed together. Pressing the
switches again will unfold the mirrors.
When the instrument cluster is configured for the auto fold feature, the mirrors will fold in when the remote handset lock
button is pressed. The mirrors will unfold when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote handset unlock button.
NOTE: If the mirrors are folded in using the mirror switch pack (power fold) and the vehicle is then locked, subsequent
unlocking of the vehicle will not unfold the mirrors.
When the remote handset unlock button is operated, the CJB recognizes the remote handset for that vehicle and acknowledges
the request. The door control modules are connected directly to the AJB (auxiliary junction box) for power supply to the
exterior mirror folding motors.
When the vehicle is locked the door control modules reverse the polarity of the mirror fold motor, power and ground
connections to operate the mirrors in the opposite direction.
Exterior mirror heating is provided with heater elements bonded to the back of the mirror glass. Power supply for the mirror
heating elements is provided by the corresponding driver or passenger door control module via the RJB. The door control
modules receive a power supply from the RJB, and are both connected on the medium speed CAN bus to the ATC (automatic
temperature control) module. A ground terminal from each door control module completes the circuit. The ATC module
automatically controls the mirror heating function whenever the ignition is in power mode 4 (Accessory) and power mode 6
(Ignition).
Operation of the exterior mirror heaters is fully automatic and not controllable by the driver. Exterior mirror heater operation is
determined by ambient air temperature and windshield wiper status. When ambient air temperature reaches a pre-determined
level, the ATC module broadcasts an exterior mirror heating request to the door modules over the medium speed CAN bus. On
receipt of this message, the door modules provide feed and ground connections to both exterior mirror heater elements.
The mirror heating is controlled in two phases, the initial heating phase and a second PWM (pulse width modulation) controlled
phase. In the first phase the heater elements in the mirrors are permanently powered for a pre-determined length of time. This
length of time varies with the ambient temperature. During the second PWM phase, the heater elements are turned on and off
every 30 seconds. The amount of time the exterior mirror heaters are operational increases if the windshield wipers are
switched on. This ensures the mirrors remain mist free in damp and wet conditions, where there is an increased risk of misting.
Rear View Mirrors - Rear View Mirrors
For a detailed description of the rear view mirrors and systems, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (501-09 Rear View Mirrors)
Rear View Mirrors (Description and Operation),

Rear View Mirrors (Description and Operation),
Rear View Mirrors (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Exterior rear view mirror glass Fuse(s)

Relay(s)
Wiring Harness
the next step.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
account.
to ensure they were correctly latched and check fly leads for signs of chaffing or trapped wires.
B116311 Left Mirror Heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left mirror
Output Left mirror heater control heater control circuit for short to ground
B116315 Left Mirror Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Output Left mirror heater control manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
circuit - short to power, electrical circuit diagrams and test left mirror heater control
open circuit circuit for short to power, open circuit
B116411 Right Mirror Heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right mirror
Output Right mirror heater heater control circuit for short to ground
ground
B116415 Right Mirror Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Output Right mirror heater manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
control circuit - short to electrical circuit diagrams and test right mirror heater control
power, open circuit circuit for short to power, open circuit
B11F711 Passenger Folding Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check passenger
Mirror Motor Passenger folding mirror folding mirror motor control circuit for short to ground
motor control circuit -
short to ground
B11F715 Passenger Folding Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Mirror Motor Passenger folding mirror manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
motor control circuit - electrical circuit diagrams and check passenger folding mirror
short to power, open motor control circuit for short to power, open circuit
circuit
B1C0911 Driver Left/Right Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Mirror Motor Circuit Driver left/right mirror manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
motor control circuit - electrical circuit diagrams and test driver left/right mirror motor
short to ground control circuit for short to ground
Mirror Motor Circuit Driver left/right mirror manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
motor control circuit - electrical circuit diagrams and test driver left/right mirror motor
short to power, open control circuit for short to power, open circuit
circuit
B1C1011 Driver Up/Down Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Mirror Motor Circuit Driver up/down mirror manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
motor control circuit - electrical circuit diagrams and test driver up/down mirror motor
short to ground control circuit for short to ground
Mirror Motor Circuit Driver up/down mirror manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
motor control circuit - electrical circuit diagrams and test driver up/down mirror motor
short to power, open control circuit for short to power, open circuit
circuit
B1C1111 Passenger Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test passenger
Left/Right Mirror Passenger left/right left/right mirror motor control circuit for short to ground
Motor Circuit mirror motor control
B1C1115 Passenger Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Left/Right Mirror Passenger left/right manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Motor Circuit mirror motor control electrical circuit diagrams and test passenger left/right mirror
circuit - short to power, motor control circuit for short to power, open circuit
open circuit
B1C1211 Passenger Up/Down Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test passenger
Mirror Motor Circuit Passenger up/down mirror up/down mirror motor control circuit for short to ground
motor control circuit -
short to ground
B1C1215 Passenger Up/Down Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Mirror Motor Circuit Passenger up/down mirror manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
motor control circuit - electrical circuit diagrams and test passenger up/down mirror
short to power, open motor control circuit for short to power, open circuit
circuit
B1C1311 Driver Up/Down Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test driver up/down
Mirror Motor Driver up/down mirror mirror motor feedback circuit for short to ground
Feedback Circuit motor feedback circuit -
short to ground
Mirror Motor Driver up/down mirror manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Feedback Circuit motor feedback circuit - electrical circuit diagrams and test driver up/down mirror motor
short to power, open feedback circuit for short to power, open circuit
circuit
B1C1411 Driver Left/Right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test driver left/right
Mirror Motor Driver left/right mirror mirror motor feedback circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Mirror Motor Driver left/right mirror manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Feedback Circuit motor feedback circuit - electrical circuit diagrams and test driver left/right mirror motor
short to power, open feedback circuit for short to power, open circuit
circuit
Mirror Motor Passenger up/down mirror up/down mirror motor feedback circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Mirror Motor Passenger up/down mirror up/down mirror motor feedback circuit for short to power, open
Feedback Circuit motor feedback circuit - circuit
short to power, open
circuit
Left/Right Mirror Passenger left/right left/right mirror motor feedback circuit for short to ground
Motor Feedback mirror motor feedback
Circuit circuit - short to ground
Left/Right Mirror Passenger left/right left/right mirror motor feedback circuit for short to power, open
Motor Feedback mirror motor feedback circuit
Circuit circuit - short to power,
open circuit
Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror
Removal
www.JagDocs.com
5.
Installation

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Cover
Removal
NOTES:
Installation).
Installation

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Glass
Removal
NOTES:
1.
2.
Installation

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Motor
Removal
NOTES:
Installation).
2.
3.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Rear View Mirrors - Interior Rear View Mirror
Removal
1. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the clips.
2.
3.
Installation

Seating -
Front seat backrest retaining bolts 35 26 -
Front seat safety belt anchor retaining bolts 40 30 -
Front seat retaining bolts 47 35 -
Front safety belt buckle retaining bolt 40 30 -
Rear seat backrest retaining bolts 17 13 -
Side air bag module retaining nuts 7 - 62
Seating - Seats - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - MOVEMENT
Item Description
Note: 16-way LH (left-hand) driver's seat shown.
1 Seat height motor
2 Head restraint motor
3 Lumbar support motor
4 Lumbar support air cells
5 Seat squab recline motor
6 Seat switch pack
7 Seat slide motor
8 Seat cushion tilt motor
9 Seat cushion extension motor
COMPONENT LOCATION - TEMPERATURE - HEATED SEATS - SHEET 1 OF 2
Item Description
Note: Heated front seat shown
1 Squab heater element
2 Cushion heater element
www.JagDocs.com
COMPONENT LOCATION - TEMPERATURE - CLIMATE SEATS - SHEET 2 OF 2
Item Description
Note: Heated and cooled front seat shown
1 Squab liner
2 Squab climate module
3 Squab inlet duct
4 Squab blower
5 Cushion climate module
6 Cushion inlet duct
7 Cushion blower
8 Cushion liner
Seating - Seats - Overview
OVERVIEW
Leather Seat Covers
Leather is a natural product, therefore it bears natural characteristics, such as grain variations, growth & bush marks. These
non-weakening marks show the true nature of the hide and are the hallmarks of Leather. In order to maintain the beauty of the
vehicles natural Leather upholstery it requires regular cleaning, which if neglected, may cause deterioration. Where dust and
dirt are allowed to accumulate and become ingrained in the surface of the Leather, the upholstery may become permanently
damaged.
Light coloured upholstery can be particularly susceptible to soiling and staining and care should be taken to ensure that where
there is evidence of any soiling or staining on the upholstery then this should be cleaned immediately using the Jaguar/Land
Rover approved products, failure to do this could lead to the stain becoming permanent, this applies to all leather upholstery
and is not colour specific.
Leather trimmed seats will naturally exhibit areas of creasing and wrinkling over a period of time and is a normal characteristic
as the Leather ages.
Particular care should be taken where there is evidence of soiling or staining on the leather, this should be cleaned
immediately. Failure to do this could lead to the stain becoming permanent.
Particular care should be taken to prevent damage from studs, zips and buckles.
NOTES:
Please refer to Leather care label attached to seats for more information.
Creasing and wrinkling does not represent a manufacturing defect.
Damage from studs, zips and buckles do not represent manufacturing defects.
Use only Jaguar/Land Rover approved products in accordance with the instructions for use.
General
A number of front seating options are available. An 8-way electrically adjustable driver's seat is complemented by an 8-way
electrically adjustable passenger seat. A 10-way electrically adjustable driver's seat is complemented by an 10-way electrically
adjustable front passenger seat. A 16-way electrically adjustable driver's seat is complemented by a 12-way electrically
adjustable front passenger seat.
On non-memory seats, the operation of the seats is controlled directly from the driver's seat switchpack. On memory seats,
the operation of the seat motors is controlled by a seat control module which is located on the underside of the driver's seat
frame.
The driver's seat is fitted with a seat position sensor which is located on the seat rail. The sensor is used by the RCM
(restraints control module) to determine the seat position and adjust the inflation time of the airbag deployment accordingly.
Refer to: Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Seating - Seats - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
CONTROL DIAGRAM - MOVEMENT - MEMORY SEATS
Item Description
Note: A = Hardwired; O = LIN (local interconnect network)
1 Battery
3 Seat switch pack
4 Lumbar support solenoids
5 Lumbar support motor
6 Seat memory switches
7 Squab recline motor
9 Head restraint motor
10 Cushion tilt motor
11 Cushion extension motor
12 Seat slide motor
13 Seat height motor
CONTROL DIAGRAM - TEMPERATURE
Item Description
Note: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus; P = MOST ring
1 Battery
2 BJB
6 Information and Entertainment module
www.JagDocs.com
8 Passenger seat squab climate module
9 Drivers seat cushion climate module
10 Passenger seat cushion climate module
11 Drivers seat squab climate module
12 Passenger seat cushion heater element
13 Passenger seat squab heater element
14 Drivers seat cushion heater element
15 Drivers seat squab heater element
16 CJB
System Operation
HEATED SEATS - OPERATION
Heated Front Seats
The TSD receives a fused power supply from the RJB. One of the 3 seat heat temperature selections made by the driver or
passenger using the TSD soft keys are passed from the TSD on the MOST ring to the Information and Entertainment module.
The information and entertainment module processes the information and transmits the request on the medium speed CAN bus
to the ATC module.
The cushion heaters have a thermal sensor which supplies a feed back signal back to the CJB. The squab heater elements do
not have a thermal sensor and are maintained at the same temperature as the seat cushion elements.
The ATC module reacts to the driver request information received from the information and entertainment module and requests
the CJB to activate the seat heaters. The CJB measures the returned temperature signals from the thermal sensors and relays
the temperature signals back to the ATC module. The ATC module then uses the measured seat element temperatures to
provide closed-loop control of the heater elements to maintain the temperature at one the 3 heat ranges selected.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery discharge, the heated front seats will only operate when the engine is running.
Heated and Cooled Front Seats
The TSD receives a fused power supply from the RJB. Selections made by the driver using the TSD soft keys are passed from
the TSD on the MOST ring to the Information and Entertainment module. The information and entertainment module processes
the information and transmits the request on the medium speed CAN bus to the front seat climate control module. The front
seat climate control module is located beneath the RH (right-hand) front seat, on the floor cross member.
The front seat climate control module receives its power supplies from the CJB. Heating and cooling requests are generated
using the soft buttons on the TSD. These requests are transmitted to the information and entertainment module over the
MOST ring. The Information and Entertainment module forwards these requests to the front seat climate control module over
the medium speed CAN bus.
The front seat climate control module supplies power to the two climate modules in each seat. The temperature sensor in each
climate module is monitored by the front seat climate control module which uses the temperature information to control the
Peltier cells accordingly and also the blower fans to distribute the heated or cooled air.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery discharge, the heated and cooled front seats will only operate when the engine is
running.
Electric Driver's Seat Adjustment - Non-Memory Seats
The CJB supplies 3 power supplies to the driver's seat switchpack. The fused supplies provide power for the seat height and
squab recline, the seat slide and seat tilt and the lumbar adjustment respectively. The CJB only provides the power to the
driver's seat switch pack when the ignition is on (power mode 6).
For the seat movement motors, when the applicable switch is operated, the power is supplied to the applicable side of the
motor and the ground path is completed to operate the motor in the required direction. To move the motor in the opposite
direction the polarity is reversed.
For the lumbar adjustment, when the switch is operated in the inflate position, power is supplied to the pump motor to inflate
the lumbar support. When the switch is operated in the opposite direction, the power energizes a solenoid which in turn opens
a valve to deflate the lumbar support.
Electric Passenger Seat Adjustment ( 8, 10 and 12 way)
The CJB supplies 3 power supplies to the passenger seat switchpack. The fused supplies provide power for the seat height and
squab recline, the seat slide and seat tilt and the head restraint and lumbar adjustment respectively. The CJB only provides
the power to the passenger seat switch pack when the ignition is on (power mode 6).
For the seat movement and head restraint motors, when the applicable switch is operated, the power is supplied to the
applicable side of the motor and the ground path is completed to operate the motor in the required direction. To move the
motor in the opposite direction the polarity is reversed.
For the lumbar adjustment, when the switch is operated in the inflate position, power is supplied to the pump motor to inflate
the lumbar support. When the switch is operated in the opposite direction, the power energizes a solenoid which in turn opens
a valve to deflate the lumbar support.
Electric Driver's Seat Adjustment - Memory Seats (10 and 16 way)
The CJB supplies 3 power supplies to the driver's seat module and one supply to the driver's seat switch pack. The fused
supplies provide power for the movement motors in addition to the driver's seat switch pack. Power is only supplied to the
driver's seat module and the driver's seat switch pack when the ignition is on (power mode 6).
The driver's seat switch pack is connected to the driver's seat module by a LIN bus for the seat movement switches. Any
selection for seat movement generates a message which is passed via the LIN to the driver's seat module. The seat module
processes the request and operates the applicable seat function as required using the power supplies from the CJB.
Each seat motor contains a Hall position sensor. The sensor sends a feedback signal to the driver's seat module. The signal is
used for memory store and memory recall functions.
The lumbar adjustment switch on the driver's seat switch pack is wired direct to the lumbar pump and solenoids. The switch,
when moved to the inflate position for either the upper or lower inflatable cushion cell, provides a power supply to the lumbar
pump and simultaneously activates the applicable inflate solenoid valve. When the switch is released the pump stops and the
solenoid valve closes trapping the air in the inflatable cushion. When the switch is moved to the deflate position for either the
upper or lower inflatable cushion cell, power is supplied to the applicable deflate solenoid valve which opens to allow the air in
the cushion to escape. When the switch is released, the valve is closed and the remaining air in the cushion is retained.
FRONT SEATS - DESCRIPTION
The table below highlights the features available for each seating option.
Seat Type Non-Heated Heated Heated and Cooled Lumbar Support Memory
8-way Yes Optional No 2-way No
10-way Yes Optional Optional 2-way Optional (Driver's seat only)
12-way No No Yes 4-way No
16-way No No Yes 4-way Yes (Driver's seat only)
Seat Heating
The 3-stage heated front seats feature 2 heater elements located in the seat cushion and a single heater element located in
the seat squab. Operation of the heated front seats is controlled by the ATC module via the TSD, information and
entertainment control module and the CJB module on vehicles with heated seats. On vehicles with heated and cooled seats
the operation is controlled by the TSD, information and entertainment control module and the front seat climate control
module.
The heated and cooled front seats each contain 2 climate modules; one in the cushion, one in the squab. The climate modules
contain 'Peltier' cells which are able to deliver heating and cooling based on a voltage provided by the front seat climate
control module. Each climate module also contains a fan, which blows air over the Peltier cells to distribute heated or cooled
air via liners in the seat cushion and squab. The fan is also controlled by the front seat climate control module. The TSD allows
the driver and passenger to select 3 ranges of heated or cooled ventilation; off, minimum and intermediate. Also, using the
selections on the TSD, the driver and passenger can select between full seat ventilation or squab backrest ventilation only.
Vehicles fitted with the 3-stage heated front seat option also feature a heated steering wheel.
Refer to: Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation).
Electric Seat Adjustment

Lumbar Support
On 8, 10 and 12 way seats, a 2 way lumbar support is provided which allows the lumbar inflatable cushion to be inflated or
deflated as required. On 16 way seats, a 4 way lumbar support is fitted which comprises two separate cushion cells. The upper
and lower cells can be inflated or deflated individually allowing greater comfort adjustment for the driver and passenger.
The lumbar support comprises an inflatable cushion located in the seat squab, a pump and solenoids. The pump is activated
when the applicable seat switch is moved to the inflate position, inflating the cell(s) in the inflatable cushion. On 8 and 10
way seats, a single solenoid operated valve allows the inflatable cushion to be deflated. On 12 and 16 way seats, 4 solenoid
valves control the inflation and deflation of the upper and lower inflatable cushion cells, allowing each cell to be adjusted
individually.
Seat Motors
The head restraint motor is located in the upper section of each seat squab and is accessible by removal of the seat back. The
motor moves a cradle which is driven in a vertical motion by a rack and pinion arrangement. The cradle has the two head
restraint stems attached to it and therefore raises and lowers the head restraint as the motor moves the cradle. The motor
contains a Hall sensor which supplies positional information to the driver's seat module.
The seat slide motor is an integral component of the seat frame. The motor drives on a gear on a worm drive lead screw which
is integral with the floor rail. The lead screw has a stop at each end to limit the fore and aft seat movement.
The tilt motor is located below the seat. The tilt motor drives a gear on a lead screw to raise the front of the seat cushion.
The motor contains a Hall sensor which supplies positional information to the driver's seat module.
The cushion extend motor is located below the seat. The motor drives a gear on a lead screw which extends or retracts the
front of the seat cushion. The motor contains a Hall sensor which supplies positional information to the driver's seat module.
The height motor is located below the seat. The height motor drives a gear on a lead screw. The lead screw moves a lever
mechanism which raises or lowers the seat cushion. The motor contains a Hall sensor which supplies positional information to
the driver's seat module.
The squab recline motor is located in the seat back rest. The recline motor rotates a shaft which is connected the seat squab
frame and raises or lowers the back rest position. The motor contains a Hall sensor which supplies positional information to
the driver's seat module.
DRIVER'S SEAT MODULE

A memory store switch is located in the lower part of the driver's door. The switch communicates with the driver's eat module
via the LIN bus in the driver's seat switch pack. The memory store switch has two buttons; 1 and 2 to allow two separate
memory positions to be stored and 'set' button with integral LED (light emitting diode). The seat, door mirror and steering
column motors have position sensors which provide feedback to driver's seat module.
Once the driver's seat, steering column and exterior mirrors have been adjusted, the vehicle is able to memorize these
settings for future use by using the following procedure:
Push the memory 'SET' button, the LED in the switch will illuminate
Press the memory button 1 or 2 to memorize the current settings. The LED will extinguish, and a chime will sound to
confirm that the settings have been memorized. If the ignition is on, power mode 6, the message center will display a
confirmation message.
The positions can be recalled by pressing the applicable button 1 or 2.
Stall Detection
Seat, steering column and mirror motors are deemed to have stalled if there is no change in the inputs that are received from
the corresponding feedback sensors for 200 ms (seat).
If a stall condition is detected then the drive to that motor is cancelled for the remainder of that memory operation (memory
recall) or until the switch is re-selected (manual movement).
If the motor movement has stopped due to loss of sensor feedback, either stall or sensor failure, then that motor may be
activated again, to move past the stall position, by re-selecting the appropriate switch and pressing for longer than 2 seconds.
This allows control of the motor to be maintained if sensor feedback is lost.
Upon re-selection of movement, if sensor pulses are detected then the motor will continue to be driven until the switch is
released or another stall condition is detected. If sensor feedback is not detected then the motor is only driven for 0.5 second
and then stops until the switch is released and then pressed again, when a further 0.5 second of activation is permitted, and
so on, this is known as inch mode.
For all seat motor manual movements, whenever a motor is driven and a stall occurs, the memory control module records the
position at which the stall occurred. If movement occurs beyond a stall position, then that position is erased from the control
modules memory. This will always allow movement past a previously recorded stall position once movement has been
registered beyond that position. This is the case for both manual and memory movement.
Initialization
When a replacement driver's seat module is fitted, it should be calibrated a Jaguar approved diagnostic system so that the
module can learn the seats absolute position.
Battery Monitor
If the battery voltage drops below 10.5 Volts, then the driver's seat module ignores all requests for a memory recall until the
battery voltage has reached 11.5 Volts. This will conserve as much power in the vehicle battery as possible to enable engine
cranking.
REAR SEATS - DESCRIPTION

The rear seat features a single piece cushion and a 60/40 split squab. Two latches are secured to the rear bulkhead by a pair
of M8 bolts to retain the seat squabs in the upright position. The latches can be released to fold down the individual cushions
by pulling a cable release located below the rear window parcel shelf in the luggage compartment.
ISOFIX fastening points are attached to the vehicle floor to provide secure fastening for compatible child seats.
A centrally mounted center arm rest can be folded down from the 60% squab. The arm rest contains two drinks holders.
Seating - Seat Cover Inspection
Leather Seat Covers

Leather is a natural product, therefore it bears natural characteristics, such as grain variations, growth & bush marks. These
non-weakening marks show the true nature of the hide and are the hallmarks of Leather. In order to maintain the beauty of the
vehicles natural leather upholstery it requires regular cleaning, which if neglected, may cause deterioration. Where dust and dirt
are allowed to accumulate and become ingrained in the surface of the leather, the upholstery may become permanently
damaged.
Light coloured upholstery can be particularly susceptible to soiling and staining and care should be taken to ensure that where
there is evidence of any soiling or staining on the upholstery then this should be cleaned immediately using the Jaguar/Land
Rover approved products, failure to do this could lead to the stain becoming permanent, this applies to all leather upholstery
and is not colour specific.
Leather trimmed seats will naturally exhibit areas of creasing and wrinkling over a period of time and is a normal characteristic
as the leather ages.
Particular care should be taken where there is evidence of soiling or staining on the leather, this should be cleaned
immediately. Failure to do this could lead to the stain becoming permanent.
Particular care should be taken to prevent damage from studs, zips and buckles.
Seat Cover Replacement

Rest of World Vehicles
Refererence should be made to the list of documents below before any seat cover is replaced in Jaguar Land Rover warranty.
Global Warranty Policy and Procedure Manual on TOPIx.
Leather Seat Cover Finessing Process on the Excellence Academy.
Seat Smoothing Procedure in the workshop manual.
All seat covers that are replaced should be done using all available TOPIx guides. Any damage that has been done to other
components during the seat cover replacement process will not be paid under warranty.
NAS vehicles
Refererence should be made to the list of documents below before any seat cover is replaced in Jaguar Land Rover warranty.
Warranty Policy and Procedure Manual.
Leather Seat Cover Finessing Process on the Excellence Academy.
Seat Smoothing Procedure in the workshop manual.
All seat covers that are replaced should be done using all available TOPIx guides. Any damage that has been done to other
components during the seat cover replacement process will not be paid under warranty.
Leather Seat Covers Manufacturing Defect Guidelines
Examples of Damage to Seat Cover
Below are some examples of damage that would not be accepted under the terms of the Jaguar Land Rover warranty
agreement. Please note: these are examples only and do not represent all warrantable/non warrantable customer concerns.
The examples below show damage such as cuts, tears and puncture holes. These types of damage would not be accepted
under the terms of the Jaguar Land Rover warranty agreement (unless the seat cover damage was noted on the Pre Delivery
Inspection).
www.JagDocs.com
The examples below show damage such as scratches, scrapes, snags and indentation marks. These types of damage would not
be accepted under the terms of the Jaguar Land Rover warranty agreement (unless the seat cover damage was noted on the
Pre Delivery Inspection).
The examples below show damage such as pen marks and visual surface burns. These types of damage would not be accepted
under the terms of the Jaguar Land Rover warranty agreement (unless the seat cover damage was noted on the Pre Delivery
Inspection).
Examples of Natural Characteristics of Leather
Below are some examples of the natural characteristics of leather which will mature with use and ageing. These examples of
the natural charcteristics of leather are not manufacturing defects. Improvements in the seat cover can be achieved by
following the smoothing process.
The examples below show the natural characteristics of leather on the front seat cushion. These types of natural
characteristics of leather would not be accepted under the terms of the Jaguar Land Rover warranty agreement.
The examples bel ow show the natural c:harad:eri stics of leather on the front seat back and squab bolsters, These types of
natural characteristics of leather would not be accepted under the terms of the Jaguar Land Rover warranty agreement.
El67181
The examples bel ow show the natural charaderi stics of leather on the rear seat. These types of natural charaderi stics of
leather would not be aa:epted under the terms of the Jaguar Land Rover warranty agreement.
El6 7 182
www.JagDocs.com
Examples of Soiling, Stains and Incorrect Cleaning
Below are some examples of soiling, stains and incorrect cleaning that would not be accepted under the terms of the Jaguar
Land Rover warranty agreement. Please note: these are examples only and do not represent all warrantable/non warrantable
customer concerns.
The example below shows soiling on the seat cover. This type of soiling would not be accepted under the terms of the Jaguar
Land Rover warranty agreement.
The examples below show staining on the seat cover. These type of staining would not be accepted under the terms of the
Jaguar Land Rover warranty agreement.
The example below shows incorrect cleaning on the seat cover. This type of incorrect cleaning would not be accepted under the
terms of the Jaguar Land Rover warranty agreement.
Examples of Excessive Wear
Below are some examples of excessive wear on the seat covers that is often caused by studs, zips and buckles. This would not
be accepted under the terms of the Jaguar Land Rover warranty agreement. Please note: these are examples only and do not
represent all warrantable/non warrantable customer concerns.
The examples below show excessive wear on the seat covers, when studs, zips and buckles are in contact with the seat cover
while entering and exiting the vehicle. These types of wear would not be accepted under the terms of the Jaguar Land Rover
warranty agreement.
Seat Cover Replacement
Below are some examples of issues on the seat covers after they have been replaced. This would not be accepted under the
terms of the Jaguar Land Rover warranty agreement. Please note: these are examples only and do not represent all
warrantable/non warrantable customer concerns.
The example below shows excessive wrinkling or looseness due to incorrect fitment of the front seat covers. These types of
incorrect fitment would not be accepted under the terms of the Jaguar Land Rover warranty agreement.
The example below shows excessive wrinkling or looseness due to incorrect fitment of the rear seat covers.This type of
incorrect fitment would not be accepted under the terms of the Jaguar Land Rover warranty agreement.
Seating - Seats
For a detailed description of the seats and seat operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (501-10 Seating)
Seats (Description and Operation),

Seats (Description and Operation).
NOTE: Prior to carrying out any diagnosis, ensure the vehicle battery is in a good serviceable condition, refer to the
battery care manual.
Visual Inspection
Security, condition and correct installation of seat components and fixings Fuses
Harnesses for damage/corrosion
Electrical connectors
Damaged/corroded pins
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the concern and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively, check for
5. Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSM's which may be valid for the specific
Symptom Chart

No seat movement from switch pack Set ignition ON. Re-check seat function from switch pack.
(including no memory recall) Seat module has Check for DTC B1A9887 and refer to DTC Index. Check for
gone into sleep DTC B1A9888 and refer to DTC Index
mode
Seat switch pack
LIN, power or
ground circuit -
open circuit
Seat switch pack
LIN circuit - short
to power, ground
No seat movement or lumbar movement Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check seat
from switch pack (including no memory NOTE: Seat module switch pack power and ground supply circuits for open
recall) does not control the seat circuit
lumbar function
Seat switch pack

power or ground
supply circuits -
open circuit
Seat movement and lumbar movement

from switch pack is ok, however, no recall Seat switch pack to
NOTE: Memory switch pack is separate switch
from memory switch pack memory switch
hardwired to seat adjust switch
pack circuits -
short, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check seat
switch pack to memory switch pack circuits for short,
open circuit
Seat movement and memory recall works Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check seat
correctly however seat lumbar is not NOTE: Seat module movement switch to lumbar circuits for short, open
working correctly does not control the seat circuit
lumbar function
Seat movement
switch to lumbar
circuits - short,
open circuit
Seat movement from switch pack occurs Check for DTCs, B1B8731, B1B9131, B1B8931, B1B9331,
in delayed inch mode (seat axis moves Motor Hall sensor B106331, B106431. If present then check Hall sensor
short distance when switch pressed for on affected axis is feedback circuits between seat motor and seat module
longer than 2 seconds and then stops). not connected or and also check Hall sensor ground circuits for affected
This behaviour could occur on any seat not receiving axis. These DTCs are only logged if the axis is
axis (slide, height, squab, tilt, headrest expected signals attempted to be moved in both directions. When hall
or cushion) when requested sensor connection issue fixed press switch on affected
axis for longer than 2 seconds. By keeping the switch
pressed the axis movement should now operate for the
duration of switch-press. Re-calibrate affected seat
Seat movement from switch pack occurs Carry out CAN network integrity test using manufacturer
in inch mode. When seat axis movement MS CAN fault approved diagnostic system
is requested from the seat switch pack
the requested seat axis moves a short
distance then stops (does not include
lumbar). This behaviour will occur on ALL
seat axis (slide, height, squab, tilt
headrest and cushion) when requested.
MS CAN communication not possible
Seat movement from switch pack occurs Check for Instrument Cluster DTC U020800 'Lost
in inch mode. When seat axis movement Seat module is Communication With Seat Module'. If this DTC is
is requested from the seat switch pack disconnected from present, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the requested seat axis moves a short the CAN Bus seat module power and ground supplies for short, open
distance then stops (does not include circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity tests using the
lumbar). This behaviour will occur on ALL manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Seat movement from switch pack occurs Check for seat module DTC U015500 'Lost
in inch mode. When seat axis movement Instrument cluster Communication With Instrument Cluster'. If this DTC is
is requested from the seat switch pack is disconnected present, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the requested seat axis moves a short from the CAN Bus instrument cluster power and ground supplies for short,
distance then stops (does not include open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity tests using
lumbar). This behaviour will occur on ALL the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
in inch mode. When seat axis movement Driver Door Module Communication With Driver Door Module'. If this DTC is
is requested from the seat switch pack is disconnected present, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the requested seat axis moves a short from the CAN Bus driver door module power and ground supplies for short,
distance then stops (does not include open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity tests using
lumbar). This behaviour will occur on ALL the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
in inch mode. When seat axis movement Rear Junction Box Communication With RJB'. If this DTC is present, refer to
is requested from the seat switch pack (RJB) is the electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power and
the requested seat axis moves a short disconnected from ground supplies for short, open circuit. Carry out CAN
distance then stops (does not include the CAN Bus network integrity tests using the manufacturer approved
lumbar). This behaviour will occur on ALL diagnostic system
Seat movement from switch pack occurs Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CJB
in inch mode. When seat axis movement Central Junction power and ground supplies for short, open circuit. Carry
is requested from the seat switch pack Box (CJB) is out CAN network integrity tests using the manufacturer
the requested seat axis moves a short disconnected from approved diagnostic system
distance then stops (does not include the CAN Bus
lumbar). This behaviour will occur on ALL
www.JagDocs.com
Seat module is in
NOTE: Electric passenger seat can NOTE: A new module is NOT required to be
manufacturing
always be activated – there is no installed, only the module replacement routine needs to
mode
passenger seat module installed to this be performed. This will set the PID required to disable
vehicle manufacturing mode
Seat module does not go to sleep. Seat Seat module needs to be configured for customer mode.
movement is always active from driver Check for DTC U1A4C68 'Build/End of Line mode Active'.
seat switch pack If this DTC is present then configure for customer mode
by running 'New Seat Module Replacement' application
for the affected seat using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Front seat fore/aft movement not GO to Pinpoint Test A.
functioning Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Front seat excessive fore/aft free play GO to Pinpoint Test B.

Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Front seat fore/aft movement noisy GO to Pinpoint Test C.

Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Front seat height, tilt and/or seat GO to Pinpoint Test D.

extension motor movement not Carry out the
functioning pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Front seat height, tilt and/or extension GO to Pinpoint Test E.

movement noisy Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
into account.
Driver Seat Module
B105F11 Seat Cushion Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Extension Motor Driver seat cushion extension using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Output motor circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat cushion extension motor circuit for short to ground
B105F15 Seat Cushion Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Extension Motor Driver seat cushion extension using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Output motor circuit - short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
open circuit seat cushion extension motor circuit for short to power,
open circuit
B106011 Seat Headrest Motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Output Driver seat headrest motor circuit using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
- short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat headrest motor circuit for short to ground
B106015 Seat Headrest Motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Output Driver seat headrest motor circuit using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
- short to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat headrest motor circuit for short to power, open
circuit
B106331 Seat Cushion
Extension Motor Harness/connector problem Check the seat wiring harness/connectors for
Speed/Position No signal from sensor security/integrity
Sensor Sensor/motor malfunction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the seat cushion motor sensor circuit. Repair
circuit as required. Clear DTC and retest
B106431 Seat Headrest Motor

Speed/Position Harness/connector problem Check the seat wiring harness/connectors for
Sensor No signal from sensor security/integrity
Sensor/motor malfunction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the seat headrest motor sensor circuit. Repair
B106524 Cushion extend Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
switch Signal stuck high diagrams and check driver seat switch pack to seat
module LIN circuit for short, open circuit and cushion
extend circuit for short to ground
B106624 Cushion retract Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
module LIN circuit for short, open circuit and cushion
retract circuit for short to ground
B106D24 Headrest up switch Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
Signal stuck high diagrams and check driver seat switch pack to seat
module LIN circuit for short, open circuit and headrest
up circuit for short to ground
B106E24 Headrest down Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
module LIN circuit for short, open circuit and headrest
B1A9883 LIN Bus Circuit #1 Check LIN network for interference/EMC related issues
Value of signal protection
LIN bus Header error using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Check LIN network for interference/EMC related issues
B1A9887 LIN Bus Circuit #1 Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test LIN Bus
Slave node communication between seat switch pack and control module for short
missing. LIN bus circuit - short to to ground, power, open circuit, check power and ground
ground, power, open circuit (ECU supplies to switch pack
Types 7 & 8)
Bus off using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test LIN Bus
between seat switch pack and control module for short
to ground or power
B1B8611 Seat Height Motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Relay Driver seat parallel height motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat parallel height motor circuit for short to ground
B1B8615 Seat Height Motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Relay Driver seat parallel height motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
circuit seat parallel height motor circuit for short to power,
open circuit
B1B8731 Seat Height Motor
the seat height motor sensor circuit. Repair
B1B8811 Seat Slide Motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Relay Driver seat slide motor circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat slide motor circuit for short to ground
B1B8815 Seat Slide Motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Relay Driver seat slide motor circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat slide motor circuit for short to power, open circuit
B1B8931 Seat Slide Motor
the seat slide motor speed sensor circuit. Repair
B1B9011 Seat Tilt Motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Relay Driver seat tilt motor circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
seat tilt motor circuit for short to ground
B1B9015 Seat Tilt Motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Relay Driver seat tilt motor circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
seat tilt motor circuit for short to power, open circuit
B1B9131 Seat Tilt Motor
the seat tilt motor speed sensor circuit. Repair
B1B9211 Seat Recline Motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Relay Driver seat recline motor circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
seat recline motor circuit for short to ground
B1B9215 Seat Recline Motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Relay Driver seat recline motor circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
seat recline motor circuit for short to power, open
circuit
B1B9331 Seat Recline Motor
the seat recline motor speed sensor circuit.
Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC and retest
B1B9424 Seat Height Up Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
Switch Signal stuck high diagrams and check driver seat switch pack to seat
module LIN circuit for short, open circuit and seat
height up circuit for short to ground
B1B9524 Seat Height Down Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
height down circuit for short to ground
B1B9624 Seat Slide Forward Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
module LIN circuit for short, open circuit and seat slide
forward circuit for short to ground
B1B9724 Seat Slide Backward Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
module LIN circuit for short, open circuit and seat slide
backward circuit for short to ground
B1B9824 Seat Tilt Up Switch Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
module LIN circuit for short, open circuit and seat tilt
up circuit for short to ground
B1B9924 Seat Tilt Down Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
module LIN circuit for short, open circuit and seat tilt
B1C0024 Seat Recline Up Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
recline up circuit for short to ground
B1C0124 Seat Recline Down Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
module LIN circuit for short, open circuit and check seat
recline down circuit for short to ground
B1C0224 Memory Store Switch Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
module LIN circuit for short, open circuit
B1C0324 Memory #1 Switch Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the electrical circuit
U001088 Medium speed Can Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
communication Bus Bus off using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
network to climate controlled seat module for short,
open circuit
U014000 Lost communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
with CJB Lost communication with CJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Check CJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC Index
with RJB Lost communication with RJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC Index
communications Lost communications with using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
with instrument instrument cluster Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
cluster network to climate controlled seat module and
instrument cluster for short, open circuit
with Driver Door Lost communication with DDM using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Module (DDM)
U030000 Internal control Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
module software Invalid configuration message is diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC
incompatibility received is still logged suspect the DSM/PSM, refer to the new
module installation note at the top of the DTC Index
U1A1449 CAN Initialisation Install a new DSM, refer to the new module installation
failure Internal electronic failure note at the top of the DTC Index
U1A4C68 Build/end of line Place DSM in to customer mode using manufacturer

mode active Manufacturing mode has not approved diagnostic system
been removed
U300049 Control module Install a new DSM, refer to the new module installation
Internal electronic failure note at the top of the DTC Index
U300055 Stored vehicle Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
configuration data Incorrect car configuration data diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC
does not match received remains suspect the DSM, refer to the new module
Missing message diagnostic system. Check DSM for DTCs and refer to the
DTC Index. Check CAN network integrity using the
U300146 Control module Check for DTCs that could indicate power failure to the
improper shutdown Calibration/parameter memory module and refer to the DTC Index
failure
U300281 Vehicle Install original module, check for DTCs and refer to
Identification Vehicle/component mis-match. relevant DTC Index
Number (VIN) Corrupt VIN data being
Circuit voltage below threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Circuit voltage above threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : FRONT SEAT FORE/AFT MOVEMENT NOT FUNCTIONING
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK FOR FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR OPERATION
WARNING: Before work is carried out, make the air bag supplemental restraint system safe. For
additional information, refer to Standard Workshop Practices section of workshop manual.
1 Set ignition status to ' ON'.

2 From the switch pack, operate the front seat forward-rearward seat motor switch and listen for evidence
of the motor operating.
Does the motor operate?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A3.
A2: CHECK FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR DRIVE BAR
1 Check front seat drive bar for correct installation and condition
Is the front seat drive bar correctly installed and in a serviceable condition?
Yes
Re-check for correct front seat forward-rearward movement. Remove seat to allow for further investigation
if required.
No
Correctly install front seat forward-rearward seat motor drive bar, or replace if required.
A3: CHECK FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR
WARNING: When carrying out the following steps, stand clear of all moving parts and ensure link harness is routed
accordingly.
1 Set ignition status to 'OFF'.

2 Disconnect front seat forward-rearward seat motor connector.
NOTE: It may be that the seat has been driven to the limit of travel along the relevant axis, and when
the link harness is connected, the seat will remain in the same position. If this is the case, a jolt may be felt
from the motor. To confirm the motor operation, swap the link harness to alternate motor pin connections and
the seat should travel in the opposite direction.
3 Using a locally made fused link harness and power supply, connect power and ground to forward-rearward
seat motor.
Battery positive terminal Battery negative terminal

forward-rearward seat motor pin 1 forward-rearward seat motor pin 2
Yes
Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and
carry out the repair operations specified. Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
front seat forward-rearward seat motor circuits.
No
Replace front seat forward-rearward seat motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
PINPOINT TEST B : FRONT SEAT EXCESSIVE FORWARD-REARWARD FREE PLAY
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FRONT SEAT FOR EXCESSIVE FORWARD-REARWARD FREE PLAY
1 Check all accessible front seat frame fixings are installed and to the correct torque.
Are all accessible front seat frame fixings installed and to the correct torque?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Install and tighten all accessible front seat frame fixings to correct torque and re-check for excessive
free play.
www.JagDocs.com
B2: COMPARE THE FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD FREE PLAY AGAINST A SIMILAR SEAT
1 Compare the front seat forward-rearward free play against a similar seat.
Is the front seat forward-rearward free play excessive when compared to a similar seat?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
The front seat frame is operating correctly. Submit Electronic Product Quality Report (EPQR) with any
further query.
B3: CHECK REMAINING FRONT SEAT FRAME FIXINGS
1 Remove front seat and/or any seat covers/trim to allow access to check remaining front seat frame
fixings are all installed and to the correct torque.
Are all remaining front seat frame fixings installed and to the correct torque?
Yes
Replace front seat frame. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
No
Install and tighten all remaining front seat frame fixings to correct torque and re-check for excessive
free play.
PINPOINT TEST C : FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD MOVEMENT NOISY
CONDITIONS
C1: COMPARE FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD MOVEMENT NOISE TO OTHER FRONT SEAT
1 Compare the front seat forward-rearward movement noise to other front seat.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement noise excessive when compared to other front seat?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
GO to C3.
C2: COMPARE FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD MOVEMENT NOISE TO FRONT SEAT IN OTHER VEHICLE
1 Compare the front seat forward-rearward movement noise to front seat in other vehicle.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement noise excessive when compared to front seat in other vehicle?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
further query.
C3: CHECK FOR DEBRIS OBSTRUCTING SEAT MOVEMENT
1 Check for debris obstructing seat movement.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement obstructed by debris?
Yes
Remove obstruction and re-check for noisy forward-rearward seat movement.
No
GO to C4.
C4: RE-ALIGN FRONT SEAT FRAME
1 Loosen front seat frame fixings.
2 Set ignition status to 'ON'.
3 Using the front seat switch pack drive the front seat fully forward then fully rearward.
4 Tighten front seat frame fixings to the correct torque.
5 Re-check for noisy seat movement.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement still noisy?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
The front seat frame is now operating correctly.
C5: CHECK FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR DRIVE BAR
1 Check front seat drive bar for correct installation and condition.
Is the front seat drive bar correctly installed and in a serviceable condition?
Yes
Replace front seat forward-rearward seat motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
No
Correctly install front seat forward-rearward seat motor drive bar, or replace if required.
PINPOINT TEST D : FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT AND/OR SEAT EXTENSION MOTOR MOVEMENT NOT
FUNCTIONING
CONDITIONS
D1: CHECK FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOTOR
WARNINGS:
Before work is carried out, make the air bag supplemental restraint system safe. For additional information, refer to
Standard Workshop Practices section of workshop manual.
When carrying out the following steps, stand clear of all moving parts and ensure link harness is routed accordingly.
1 Set ignition status to ' OFF'.

2 Disconnect front seat height, tilt or extension motor connector.
NOTE: It may be that the seat has been driven to the limit of travel along the relevant axis, and when
the link harness is connected, the seat will remain in the same position. If this is the case, a jolt may be felt
from the motor. To confirm the motor operation, swap the link harness to alternate motor pin connections and
the seat should travel in the opposite direction.
3 Using a locally made fused link harness and power supply, connect power and ground to relevant motor.
Battery positive terminal Battery negative terminal

motor pin 1 motor pin 2
Yes
Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and
carry out the repair operations specified. Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
relevant motor circuits.
No
Replace the relevant motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
PINPOINT TEST E : FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT AND/OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT NOISY
CONDITIONS
E1: COMPARE THE HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT NOISE WITH THE OTHER FRONT SEAT
1 Compare the front seat movement noise to other front seat.

Is the front seat height, tilt or extension movement noise excessive when compared to other front seat?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
GO to E3.
E2: COMPARE FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT NOISE TO FRONT SEAT IN OTHER VEHICLE
1 Compare the front seat height, tilt or extension movement noise to front seat in other vehicle.
Is the front seat height, tilt or extension movement noise excessive when compared to front seat in other
vehicle?
Yes
GO to E3.
No
further query.
E3: CHECK FOR DEBRIS OBSTRUCTING SEAT MOVEMENT
1 Check for debris obstructing seat movement.
Is the front seat height, tilt or extension movement obstructed by debris?
Yes
Remove obstruction and re-check for noisy height, tilt or extension seat movement.
No
GO to E4.
E4: CHECK FOR HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT MECHANISM LUBRICATION
1 Check and apply manufacturer approved lubrication to seat height, tilt or extension movement
mechanism and re-test for noise.
Is the front seat height, tilt or extension noise still apparent?
Yes
Replace the relevant motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
No
The front seat height, tilt or extension motor is operating correctly.
Seating - Heater Mats
Heated seats incorporate heater elements in the cushion and the backrest of the seat. Each cushion heater element has a
thermal sensor, which supplies a feedback temperature signal to the related seat heater module. The backrest heater elements
do not have a thermal sensor, and are regulated at the same temperature as the cushion heater elements.
For a detailed description of the seat heater mat, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (501-10)



Visual inspection
Seat heater switches condition and installation Fuses
Harnesses and connectors
Seat heater module
Seat heater switches
Seat heater mat
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) and refer to the DTC Index.
NOTES:
into account.
number 3548-1358-00.
DTC Index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Seat Module (Driver/Passenger/Rear Left/Rear Right) (100-00,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Seat Climate Control Module (SCCM) (100-00, Description and Operation).
Seat Heater Mat Application Chart
NOTE: To ensure an accurate resistance reading, calibrated test equipment must be used
Minimum Maximum
Left Hand Drive Right Hand Drive Resistance Resistance
Passenger Passenger
Heater Mat Side Driver Side Side Driver Side
Vehicle / Cushion / / NTC Connector / Connector / Connector / Connector / Ohms At Ohms At
Year Backrest Resistor Pin Pin Pin Pin 20°C ±10°C 20°C ±10°C
XK 2010 Cushion Heater mat PS002/1 and DS002/1 and PS002/1 and DS002/1 and 1,2 1,6
PS002/4 DS002/4 PS002/4 DS002/4
NTC resistor PS002/2 and DS002/2 and PS002/2 and DS002/2 and 4 000 10 000
PS002/3 DS002/3 PS002/3 DS002/3
Backrest Heater mat PS003/1 and DS003/1 and PS003/1 and DS003/1 and 0,35 0,47
PS003/2 DS003/2 PS003/2 DS003/2
XF Cushion Heater mat C3HS07A/1 and C3HS02A/1 C3HS07A/1 and C3HS02A/1 1,23 1,64
C3HS07A/4 and C3HS07A/4 and
C3HS02A/4 C3HS02A/4
NTC resistor C3HS07A/2 and C3HS02A/2 C3HS07A/2 and C3HS02A/2 4 000 10 000
C3HS02A/3 C3HS02A/3
Backrest Heater mat C3HS06A/1 and C3HS01A/1 C3HS06A/1 and C3HS01A/1 0,82 1,09
C3HS01A/2 C3HS01A/2
XJ 2008 Cushion Heater mat SP14-1 and SD14-1 and SP14-1 and SD14-1 and 1,28 1,71
SP14-4 SD14-4 SP14-4 SD14-4
NTC resistor SP14-2 and SD14-2 and SP14-2 and SD14-2 and 4 000 10 000
SP14-3 SD14-3 SP14-3 SD14-3
Backrest Heater mat SP15-1 and SD15-1 and SP15-1 and SD15-1 and 0,88 1,17
SP15-2 SD15-2 SP15-2 SD15-2
XJ 2010 Cushion Heater mat C3HS07/1 and C3HS02/1 and C3HS07/1 and C3HS02/1 and 0,99 1,32
onwards - C3HS07/4 C3HS02/4 C3HS07/4 C3HS02/4
Front NTC resistor C3HS07/2 and C3HS02/2 and C3HS07/2 and C3HS02/2 and 4 000 10 000
C3HS07/3 C3HS02/3 C3HS07/3 C3HS02/3
Backrest Heater mat C3HS06/1 and C3HS01/1 and C3HS06/1 and C3HS01/1 and 0,67 0,90
C3HS06/2 C3HS01/2 C3HS06/2 C3HS01/2
XJ 2010 Cushion Heater mat C3HS78/1 and C3HS76/1 and C3HS76/1 and C3HS78/1 and 0,99 1,32
onwards - C3HS78/4 C3HS76/4 C3HS76/4 C3HS78/4
Rear NTC resistor C3HS78/2 and C3HS76/2 and C3HS76/2 and C3HS78/2 and 4 000 10 000
C3HS78/3 C3HS76/3 C3HS76/3 C3HS78/3
Backrest Heater mat C3HS79/1 and C3HS77/1 and C3HS77/1 and C3HS79/1 and 1,0 1,3
C3HS79/4 C3HS77/4 C3HS77/4 C3HS79/4
PINPOINT TEST A : SEAT HEATER MAT
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK FOR DTC'S
1 Where possible use the manufacturer approved diagnostic system to review any logged seat heater mat
DTC's
Were any seat heater mat DTC's logged?
Yes
Carry out the help text action for any logged DTC's. Clear the DTC and retest. If DTC's return follow the
tests listed below GO to A2.
No
GO to A2.
A2: MANUAL CHECK
NOTES:
The manual check should be carried out by someone familiar with correct seat heat operation
On full power the seat should be hot to touch
If required operate the vehicle air conditioning on full for 10 minutes to reduce the in vehicle ambient
1
temperature
2 Operate the seat heater on full power
Does the seat heater operate correctly?
Yes
Clear any stored DTC's and retest. If seat heater operation is correct no further action required
No
GO to A3.
A3: SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and the seat heater mat application chart (see above) to identify
the connector
2 Disconnect the connector
3 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the seat heater mat heater circuit and the NTC
resistor circuit for short circuit to ground
Are either of the circuits short circuit to ground?
Yes
Repair the circuit or replace the seat heater mat as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component. Clear any stored DTC's and retest
No
GO to A4.
A4: CIRCUIT CONTINUITY TEST
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the seat heater mat ( heater circuit ) for circuit
continuity
Does the seat heater mat heater circuit pass the continuity test?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Repair the circuit or replace the seat heater mat as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
A5: POWER CONSUMPTION
NOTE: The seat heater power supply cycles on and off dependant on the seat and cabin temperature and may only
switch on for 5 seconds in 30 seconds
Reconnect the connector

1
Operate the vehicle air conditioning on full for 10 minutes to reduce the in vehicle ambient temperature
2
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the seat heater mat ( heater circuit ) using a current
3
clamp
4 Operate the seat heater on full power
5 Use the chart above to calculate typical value (V/R=I) (Volts divided by Resistance equals Current in
Amps)
6 Examples (12 volts / 0.5 ohms =24 amps) (12 volts / 1 ohms = 12 amps) (12 volts / 2 ohms = 6 amps)
Does the seat heater mat consume the correct level of current?
Yes
Clear any stored DTC's and retest. If operation correct, no further action required
No
GO to A6.
A6: RESISTANCE CHECK
NOTES:
Ensure the multimeter used is calibrated and a resistance reading of 0 ohms is shown when the test leads are connected
together, alternately subtract any resistance shown from the result
The seat heater mat circuits should be checked at the seat heater module connector
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and to confirm the total resistance of the circuit the cushion and backrest are
connected in series
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and the seat heater mat application chart (see above) to identify
the terminals
2 Disconnect the connector
3 Using a multimeter, carry out a resistance check of the seat heater mat heater circuit and the NTC
resistor circuit. Record the results
4 Compare the results to the chart (see above)
Are the results within specification at the given ambient temperature? (tolerance +/- 0.5 Ohms)
Yes
Reconnect the connector. Clear any stored DTC's and retest. If customer concern or DTC's return refer to
electrical circuit diagrams and investigate the power and ground supply circuits
No
Replace the seat heater mat as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
www.JagDocs.com
Seating - Seats Vehicles With: Climate Controlled Seats
For a detailed description of the seating systems and operation, refer to the relevant description and operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: (501-10 Seating)

NOTES:
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
The DTC index containing an actions list is for guidance only any reference to “check and install new blower unit” should
only be carried out following failure confirmation using the pin out diagnostics and/or the over temperature and fluid/air leak
diagnostics contained below. The recording of a DTC does NOT signify a permanently failed unit
The climate system functions in a manner that means any detected error state either intermittent or permanent will shut
down the complete seat climate system until the next ignition cycle, this does not mean that both climate units within the one
seat have failed. This shut down is design intent to protect the system to ensure that the fault detected does not damage the
units, it is possible that both units are functioning correctly and that the fault lies elsewhere within the system. The following
process can be carried out without removing either the seats or the climate units from the vehicle and should correctly identify
any failed units, this should ensure that only failed units are changed under warranty. Any units exhibiting the correct reading
as per process below, should NOT be changed under warranty. If all units have a correct reading then re-confirm customer
symptom, if customer symptom is still present then carry out further system checks
Visual Inspection
Seat heater switch condition and installation Battery condition and state of charge
Fuses
Harnesses and connectors
Seat heater switch(es)
Seat heater elements
Seat module(s)
Ignition switch
Battery junction box
Central junction box
LIN circuit
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, carry out normal dealer warranty process, perform on-demand self test, check for
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
5. Allow 30 mins since the last seat/cooled operation prior to carrying out pin testing detailed below in the section
"Connector and Pin Information"
6. Locate climate seat module, (refer to Electrical Information - Electrical Reference Library, contained in TOPIx) for
guidance on how to gain access to the connector(s)
7. Locate and disconnect relevant connector prior to pin test
8. Using ohm-meter to probe each heat/cooled unit pins (at rear of connector), reading should achieve no greater than 10
ohms after 1 minute (initial fluctuations in readings may occur using ohm-meter, post 1 minute readings will have
stabilized)
Connector and Pin Information
X250 (All Model Years)

Terminal ID 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10
Climate Seat Right Right Cushion Right Right Left Cushion Left Cushion Left Left Backrest
Unit Location Cushion Backrest Backrest Backrest
Wiring Colour - GY-BU - BU - Blue BU-BN - WH - White YE-BU - BU-OG - GY-VT - WH-VT -
Left Hand Grey/Blue Blue/Brown Yellow/Blue Blue/Orange Grey/Violet White/Violet
Drive Vehicles
Wiring Colour - YE-BU - BU-OG - GY-VT - WH-VT - GY-BU - BU - Blue BU-BN - WH - White
Right Hand Yellow/Blue Blue/Orange Grey/Violet White/Violet Grey/Blue Blue/Brown
Drive Vehicles
1. If any unit reads greater than 10 ohms, replace only that defective unit
2. If all units read less than 10 ohms but faults are still suspected, do not replace any units. Refer to step 4 below
3. As a final check, when a faulty unit has been identified strip the seat to access unit connector, REFER to: Seats
(501-10, Removal & Installation) and re-check ohm reading to confirm greater than 10 ohms prior to removing unit
4. In cases where the above diagnostic routine does NOT identify a failed unit, please refer to "Over Temperature and
Fluid/Air Leak Diagnostics" below. Also check for any live technical service bulletins referring to the seat climate system
Seat Climate Control Module/Seat Climate Assembly - Further Diagnostics

In the event of suspected climate seat faults use the pinpoint tests detailed below
Connector Checks
First, check the integrity of the three seat climate control module harness connectors:
1. Disconnect each connector
2. Inspect each connector for cracks and breaks, replace as required
3. Check the integrity of connector terminals for bent terminals, backed-out or badly crimped wires. Rectify as required
4. Reconnect all connectors and retest. If seat climate functions are still faulty, note any DTCs that have been logged by
the seat climate control module(s) and refer to the table and pinpoint tests below:
Pinpoint Test
DTC Logged Required
GO to Pinpoint
NOTE: Where DTCs are marked in bold, this means that there are two possible diagnostic processes that Test A.
may be applied to resolve these faults. Check the listings below to reference an alternative set of pinpoint
tests for these DTCs
B10B9-13 Blower Control - Circuit open B10B9-

4B Blower Control - Over temperature B1157-
13 Blower Control B - Circuit open B1157-4B
Blower Control B - Over temperature
B120E-4B Right Thermal Electric Device Control - Over temperature
B1224-4B Left Thermal Electric Device Control - Over temperature
B122A-11 Right Seat Cushion Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to ground
B122A-12 Right Seat Cushion Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to battery
B122B-11 Right Seat Back Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to ground
B122B-12 Right Seat Back Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to battery
B122C-11 Left Seat Cushion Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to ground
B122C-12 Left Seat Cushion Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to battery
B122D-11 Left Seat Back Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to ground
B122D-12 Left Seat Back Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to battery
GO to Pinpoint
NOTE: Where DTCs are marked in bold, this means that there are two possible diagnostic processes that Test B.
may be applied to resolve these faults. Check the listings below to reference an alternative set of pinpoint
B120E-13 Right Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit open

Pinpoint Test
DTC Logged Required
B120E-19 Right Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit current above threshold
B1223-13 Right Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
B1224-13 Left Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit open
B1224-19 Left Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit current above threshold
B1225-13 Right Seat Back Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
B1229-13 Left Seat Back Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
B1235-13 Left Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
GO to Pinpoint
B120F-98 Left Seat Cushion - Component or system over temperature Test C.
B122E-98 Right Seat Cushion - Component or system over temperature
B122F-98 Right Seat Back - Component or system over temperature
B1230-98 Left Seat Back - Component or system over temperature
B1231-7A Right Seat - Fluid leak or seal failure
B1232-7A Left Seat - Fluid leak or seal failure
GO to Pinpoint
NOTE: Where DTCs are marked in bold, this means that there are two possible diagnostic processes that Test D.
may be applied to resolve these faults. Check the listings above to reference an alternative set of pinpoint
B120E-4B Right Thermal Electric Device Control - Over temperature

B120E-13 Right Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit open
B120E-19 Right Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit current above threshold
B1223-13 Right Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
B1224-4B Left Thermal Electric Device Control - Over temperature
B1224-13 Left Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit open
B1224-19 Left Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit current above threshold
B1225-13 Right Seat Back Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
B1229-13 Left Seat Back Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
B1235-13 Left Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
PINPOINT TEST A : CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER DIAGNOSTICS
CONDITIONS
A1: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT TO VEHICLE
CONNECTOR
1 Uncouple connector C3HS03C from the seat climate control module
2 Check the resistance of the climate seats blower speed control circuits at connector C3HS03C
For right-side seat cushion blower, check resistance at pins 3 and 7
For right-side seat backrest blower, check resistance at pins 4 and 7
For left-side seat cushion blower, check resistance at pins 11 and 15
For left-side seat backrest blower, check resistance at pins 12 and 15
Is the resistance between 290 and 420 kilo-ohms?

Yes
No circuit faults present. No further action
No
GO to A2.
A2: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER POWER CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
1 Locate the appropriate seat backrest/seat cushion climate assembly connector
2 Disconnect connector
3 Check the integrity of connector terminals for bent terminals, backed-out or badly crimped wires. Rectify
as required
4 Check the resistance of the climate seats blower power circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins
2 and 4
Yes
GO to A3.
No
Replace the seat climate assembly
A3: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE
ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR
1 Check the resistance of the climate seats blower control circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins
4 and 7
Yes
No internal circuit faults present. Check for circuit faults in wiring harness between seat climate control
module and climate seat assembly and replace as required
No
PINPOINT TEST B : CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - THERMAL ELECTRIC DEVICE (TED) DIAGNOSTICS
CONDITIONS
B1: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED SENSOR CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT TO VEHICLE CONNECTOR
1 Uncouple connector C3HS03B from the seat climate control module
2 Check the resistance of the climate seats TED sensor circuits at connector C3HS03B
For right-side seat cushion TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 2 and 3
For right-side seat backrest TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 4 and 5
For left-side seat cushion TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 7 and 8
For left-side seat backrest TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 9 and 10
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 1.1 kilo-ohms? (Note: these values are based on an ambient temperature
of 22°C/72°F)
Yes
No
GO to B2.
B2: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED SENSOR CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
as required
4 Check the resistance of the climate seats TED sensor circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins 5
and 8 (Green and Green wires)
of 22°C/72°F)
Yes
GO to B3.
No
B3: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN CIRCUIT CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
1 Check the TED supply circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins 1 and 3 (Blue and Yellow wires)
for open circuit faults
Is an open-circuit fault present?
Yes
No
module and climate seat assembly and replace as required
PINPOINT TEST C : CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER AND DUCTING DIAGNOSTICS
CONDITIONS
C1: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT TO VEHICLE
CONNECTOR
1 Uncouple connector C3HS03C from the seat climate control module
2 Check the resistance of the climate seats blower speed control circuits at connector C3HS03C
For right-side seat cushion blower, check resistance at pins 3 and 7
For right-side seat backrest blower, check resistance at pins 4 and 7
For left-side seat cushion blower, check resistance at pins 11 and 15
For left-side seat backrest blower, check resistance at pins 12 and 15

Yes
No
GO to C2.
C2: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR
as required
4 Check the resistance of the climate seats blower circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins 2 and 4
(Violet and Black wires)
Yes
GO to C3.
No
C3: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER CONTROL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
1 Check the resistance of the climate seats blower control circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins
4 and 7 (Black and Purple wires)
Yes
module and climate seat assembly and replace as required. If no harness faults are found, GO to C4.
No
C4: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER DUCTING INSPECTION
1 Check that the ducting is securely attached to the blower and thermal electric device
2 Check the ducting for holes, cuts or tears
Is the ducting undamaged and securely attached to the blower and thermal electric device?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
C5: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - EXHAUST AIRFLOW CHECKS
1 Check for blockages or restrictions at the thermal electric device exhaust vent
Are blockages or restrictions present?
Yes
Rectify as required
No
GO to C6.
C6: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER AIRFLOW CHECKS
1 Check for blockages or restrictions at the blower air intake
2 Check that the blower fan movement is not restricted
Are there any air intake blockages or restrictions to the blower fan movement?
Yes
Rectify as required
No
No further action
PINPOINT TEST D : CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - THERMAL ELECTRIC DEVICE (TED) AND DUCTING
DIAGNOSTICS
CONDITIONS
D1: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED SENSOR CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT TO VEHICLE CONNECTOR
1 Uncouple connector C3HS03B from the seat climate control module
2 Check the resistance of the climate seats TED sensor circuits at connector C3HS03B
For right-side seat cushion TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 2 and 3
For right-side seat backrest TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 4 and 5
For left-side seat cushion TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 7 and 8
For left-side seat backrest TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 9 and 10
of 22°C/72°F)
Yes
No
GO to D2.
D2: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED SENSOR CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
as required
www.JagDocs.com
Check the resistance of the climate seats TED sensor circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins 5
4
and 8 (Green and Green wires)
of 22°C/72°F)
Yes
GO to D3.
No
D3: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN CIRCUIT CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
1 Check the TED supply circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins 1 and 3 (Blue and Yellow wires)
for open circuit faults
Is an open-circuit fault present?
Yes
No
module and climate seat assembly and replace as required. If no harness faults are found, GO to D4.
D4: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED DUCTING INSPECTION
1 Check that the ducting is securely attached to the blower and thermal electric device
2 Check the ducting for holes, cuts or tears
Is the ducting undamaged and securely attached to the blower and thermal electric device?
Yes
GO to D5.
No
D5: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - EXHAUST AIRFLOW CHECKS
1 Check for blockages or restrictions at the thermal electric device exhaust vent
Are blockages or restrictions present?
Yes
Rectify as required
No
GO to D6.
D6: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER AIRFLOW CHECKS
1 Check for blockages or restrictions at the blower air intake
2 Check that the blower fan movement is not restricted
Are there any air intake blockages or restrictions to the blower fan movement?
Yes
Rectify as required
No
No further action
Over Temperature and Fluid/Air Leak Diagnostics
Check For Air Flow Diagnostic Guidance Notes

Specific DTCs
B120F-98 Once the diagnostic process detailed above has been carried out and it has been identified that
B122E-98 there has not been a failure of any of the climate units, then refer back to the relevant climate
B122F-98 system DTC codes that have been recorded
B1230-98 DTC codes listed that end in 7A or 98 indicate a possible air leak or air flow restriction within the
B1231-7A system
B1232-7A In these circumstances, starting with the seat base check all ducting connections for correct
engagement and inspect ducting for signs of damage which could result in an air leak (for
connection issues re-connect and test system). Only in the event of finding damage to the ducting
of one of the units should the unit be replaced. Note that only the specific unit should be replaced
Due to the design function of the system, both climate units in any one seat operate integrally.
Therefore, if an issue is detected in one of the units then both units are shut down to protect the
system until next ignition cycle. Under these circumstances, only replace the damaged unit and
DO NOT replace both units
DTC Index
NOTES:
into account.
Climate Controlled Seat Module

B10B9-13 Blower Control - Circuit
open Connectors disconnected or Check for any disconnected connectors or damaged
LH_FANS_PWR - For open circuit. Repair circuit as
B10B9-4B Blower Control - Over

temperature Mechanical restriction in Check for mechanical restriction or debris in seat
LH_FANS_PWR - For short circuit to ground. Repair
B1157-13 Blower Control "B" -

Circuit open Connectors disconnected or Check for any disconnected connectors or damaged
Open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
RH_FANS_PWR - For open circuit. Repair circuit as
B1157-4B Blower Control "B" -

Over temperature Mechanical restriction in Check for mechanical restriction or debris in seat
RH_FANS_PWR - For short circuit to ground. Repair

- Open circuit present
- Open circuit reference RH_SEAT_BACK_TED+, Circuit reference
Front seat climate control RH_SEAT_BACK_TED- - For open circuit. Repair
module failure circuit as required, clear DTC and retest
RH_CUSHION_TED- - For open circuit. Repair circuit
as required, clear DTC and retest

current above threshold electric device right circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
B120E-4B Right Thermal Electric

B120F-98 Left Seat Cushion -

B1223-13 Right Seat Cushion

circuit present
reference RH_CUSHION_SENSOR, Circuit reference
RH_CUSHION_SENSOR_RTN - For open circuit.

Open circuit present
Open circuit reference LH_SEAT_BACK_TED+, Circuit reference

current above threshold electric device left circuit - approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
B1224-4B Left Thermal Electric

B1225-13 Right Seat Back

circuit present
reference RH_SEAT_BACK_SENSOR, Circuit
reference RH_SEAT_BACK_SENSOR_RTN - For open
retest
B1229-13 Left Seat Back

circuit present
reference LH_SEAT_BACK_SENSOR, Circuit
reference LH_SEAT_BACK_SENSOR_RTN - For open
retest

Circuit short to ground right circuit - Short circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
to ground present
DTC and retest

Circuit short to battery right circuit - Short circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
to power present
DTC and retest

short to ground right circuit - Short circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
to ground present
www.JagDocs.com
DTC and retest

short to battery right circuit - Short circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
to power present
DTC and retest

Circuit short to ground left circuit - Short circuit to approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
ground present
DTC and retest

Circuit short to battery left circuit - Short circuit to approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
power present
DTC and retest

short to ground left circuit - Short circuit to approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
ground present
DTC and retest

short to battery left circuit - Short circuit to approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
power present
DTC and retest
B122E-98 Right Seat Cushion -

B122F-98 Right Seat Back -

B1230-98 Left Seat Back -

B1231-7A Right Seat - Fluid leak

or seal failure Seat backrest assembly - Check for blockage or restriction in seat
B1232-7A Left Seat - Fluid leak or

seal failure Seat backrest assembly - Check for blockage or restriction in seat
B1235-13 Left Seat Cushion

circuit present
reference LH_CUSHION_SENSOR, Circuit reference
LH_CUSHION_SENSOR_RTN - For open circuit.
Communication Bus - Medium speed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Bus off communication - Bus off the power and ground connections to the module

With Body Control Lost communication with
Module - No sub type central junction box
information customer has reported a climate seat concern. Clear the
DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
diagnosis

the power and ground connections to the module
control module and central junction box

With Body Control Lost communication with Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Module "B" - No sub rear junction box the power and ground connections to the module
type information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module and rear junction box

With Instrument Panel Lost communication with Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Cluster (IPC) Control instrument cluster the power and ground connections to the module
information system, complete a CAN network integrity test
control module and instrument cluster

With Information Lost communication with Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Center "A" - No sub rear seat entertainment the power and ground connections to the module
type information control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module and rear seat entertainment
control module

Software Software stored in front Check the front seat climate control module is
Incompatibility - No seat climate control configured correctly
sub type information module is not compatible Reconfigure the front seat climate control module
with master configuration using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear the DTC and retest the system

From ECM/PCM - No The engine control module Check the engine control module for related DTCs
sub type information has transmitted engine and refer to the relevant DTC index
speed quality factor CAN On software levels previous to 8X23-14B663-AE
signal at a specific value clear the DTC and take no further action if the
for a greater than expected system is operating correctly
time period
U2101-00 Control module
Configuration Compatible central car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Incompatible - No sub configuration file not system check and update the car configuration file
type information received by front seat as required. Carry out on demand self test using
climate control module manufacturer approved diagnostic system to
confirm rectification. Clear the DTC and retest

System internal Front seat climate control Check and install new front seat climate control
failures module - Internal failure module as required. Carry out on demand self test
using manufacturer approved diagnostic system to
confirm rectification

Signal compare failure Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Battery internal failure the power and ground connections to the front
Charging system fault seat climate control module and the central
junction box
Refer to the battery care manual and verify that
the vehicle battery is fully charged and serviceable
before continuing with further diagnostic tests
Check the vehicle charging system
Seating - Seat Smoothing
General Procedures
Check
WARNINGS:
Make sure that the steamer is in the OFF position before connecting or disconnecting from the electrical outlet.
Do not use another high wattage device on the same electrical circuit.
If the use of an extension cord is absolutely necessary, the cord must be rated at a minimum of 10 amps.
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, check the condition of the power cord and the steamer before use.
Make sure that the steamer is disconnected from the electrical outlet before filling or emptying the water reservoir.
The steamer must only be used and placed on its stand on a stable surface.
To prevent injury such as burns, take care whilst using the steamer. Avoid coming into contact with the hot surface of the
steamer and do not direct steam toward any persons.
The steamer must ALWAYS be switched off when not in use or left unattended.
Do not allow the power cord to come into contact with the hot surface of the steamer.
CAUTIONS:
Protect the paintwork during this operation.
Do not use any additives in the steamer. Damage to the steamer or the seat cover can result if used.
1. CAUTIONS:
Steam the leather cushions evenly and progressively. Do not use

excessive force.
Take care not to damage the leather whilst steaming into the
corners.
Do not hold the steamer in one place for longer than 10 seconds,
as this will burn the leather and damage the covers.
www.JagDocs.com
El66054
IiI l )j
Seating - Front Seat
Removal

2. NOTE: Right-hand shown, left-hand similar.
Position the front seat fully forwards.

Lower the front seat head restraint to the fully
lowered position.

Remove the safety belt lower anchor trim panel.
4. NOTE: Right-hand shown, left-hand similar. Release the
safety belt lower anchor from the front seat.
5. NOTES:

Remove the 2 rear bolts from the front seat.
6. Position the front seat fully rearwards.
Remove the 2 front bolts from the front seat.
8. Reposition the front seat to the central position.

10. Disconnect the front seat harness electrical connectors.
Tilt the front seat rearwards to aid disconnecting the
front seat electrical connectors.
11. NOTES:
Make sure no damage is caused to the vehicle trim when

removing the front seat.
Remove the front seat.
Installation

TORQUE: 47 Nm

TORQUE: 47 Nm
TORQUE: 40 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Seating - Front Seat Backrest
Removal


3. Remove the front seat.

For additional information, refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal
and Installation).

technician.
CAUTION: Take extra care when handling the

component.
Remove the front seat backrest assembly.
5. Remove the front seat backrest cover.

For additional information, refer to: Front Seat Backrest Cover (501-10
Seating, Removal and Installation).
6. Remove the backrest halo panel.

Release the 5 wiring harness clips.

access only.
Remove the front seat recliner motor.

For additional information, refer to: Front Seat Recliner Motor (501-10,
8. Remove the lumbar assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Lumbar Assembly (501-10 Seating,
9. Remove the front seat head restraint motor.

For additional information, refer to: Front Seat Head Restraint Motor
(501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
Installation

TORQUE: 35 Nm

Seating - Front Seat Backrest Cover
Removal


and Installation).
3. Remove the side air bag module.

For additional information, refer to: Side Air Bag Module (501-20B
Reposition the front seat backrest thermo-electric device.
Release the front seat backrest thermo-electric device duct
Remove the front seat backrest thermo-electric device

retaining screws.
Remove the front seat backrest thermo-electric device.

8. Remove the front seat head restraint.
9. Remove the front seat head restraint motor.

For additional information, refer to: Front Seat Head Restraint Motor
(501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).

Using a suitable tool, remove the front seat head restraint

guide sleeves.
11. Remove the front seat backrest cushion and cover from the front seat
frame.
12. Remove and discard the hog rings.

Remove the 22 hog rings.
13. Remove the front seat backrest cover.
Installation
1. NOTES:
Make sure that new hog rings are installed.
Use hog ring pliers to close the hog rings. Do not use any
other tool. The hog rings must be closed to overlap as
illustrated.
www.JagDocs.com
Seating - Front Seat Bolster
Removal
NOTES:
2. Refer to: Front Seat Backrest Cover (501-10 Seating, Removal and
Installation).
3.
4. WARNING: The procedure must be carried out on both

sides of the seat.
CAUTION: Make sure that the clips are correctly

located.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Bolster Pump
Removal
NOTES:
Installation).
3.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Cushion Cover
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Safety Belt Buckle (501-20A Safety Belt System, Removal
and Installation).
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
technician.

component.
Torque: 35 Nm
8.
9.
www.JagDocs.com
10.
11.
12.
13. NOTE: Make sure that new hog rings are installed.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Track Motor
Removal

3.
4.
5.
6.
Installation

Seating - Lumbar Assembly
Removal

Installation).
3.
4.
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
Seating - Memory Seat Position Switch
Removal
2.
Installation

Seating - Seat Base
Removal
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment, the restraints control module backup power supply must be depleted. Wait at least one
minute after disconnecting the battery ground cable(s) before commencing any repair or adjustment to the supplemental
restraint system (SRS), or any component(s) adjacent to the SRS sensors. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Always wear safety glasses when working on an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling an air bag module. Failure to
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, do not use radio key code savers when working on the
supplemental restraint system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of injury in the event of premature deployment, always carry a live air bag module with the
bag and trim cover pointed away from the body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, live air bag modules must only be placed on work benches which
have been ground bonded and with the trim cover facing up. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Never probe the electrical connectors of air bag modules or any other supplemental restraint system component. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Painting over the driver air bag module trim cover or instrument panel could lead to deterioration of the trim cover and air
bags. Do not for any reason attempt to paint discolored or damaged air bag module trim covers or instrument panel. Install a
new component. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTES:

3. Refer to: Front Safety Belt Buckle (501-20A Safety Belt System, Removal
and Installation).
4. Refer to: Front Seat Cushion Cover (501-10 Seating, Removal and
Installation).
5.
6.
7.
Torque: 35 Nm
Installation

Seating - Rear Seat Backrest Cover
Removal

2. Release both the rear seat back rest catches.
3. Fold down the rear seat backrest.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Remove the rear seat head restraint(s).
Lower both rear seats.
5. NOTES:
The procedure must be carried out on both sides of

the seat.
Remove both rear seat bolsters.

6. CAUTION: Make sure no damage is caused to the vehicle trim
when removing the rear seat.
With assistance, remove the rear seat backrest.

Both rear seat backrests need to be in an upright
position but not latched for access to retaining bolts.
7. Release the backrest cover.

Release all 4 sides.
8. Remove the rear seat backrest hinge(s).
9. Remove the rear armrest retaining screw covers.

10. Remove the rear armrest retaining screws.
Remove the 2 Torx screws.
11. CAUTION: Make sure no damage is caused to the seat

trim when removing the seat armrest.
Remove the rear seat armrest.
12. Release the rear seat backrest cover from the armrest aperture.
Release the 3 plastic retaining strips from the securing clips.
13. Remove the cappings from the rear head restraint retaining posts.
Release the rear backrest cover over the head restraint posts.
14. Remove the rear seat backrest cushion and cover from the rear seat
backrest.
15. Remove and discard the hog rings.

Remove the 36 hog rings securing the rear 60% seat
backrest cover to the backrest seat cushion.
Remove the 26 hog rings securing the rear 40% seat
backrest cover to the backrest seat cushion.
16. Remove the rear seat backrest cover.
Installation
1. NOTES:
Use hog ring pliers to close the hog rings. Do not use any other
tool. The hog rings must be closed to overlap as illustrated.

Seating - Rear Seat Cushion
Removal
1. Detach the rear seat cushion.

Release the rear seat cushion retaining clips.
Detach the rear seat cushion.

Guide the safety belt buckles through the rear seat
cushion aperture.
Remove the rear seat cushion.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Seating - Front Seat Height Adjustment Motor
Removal

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
technician.

component.
Torque: 35 Nm

Torque: 35 Nm


Installation

Seating - Front Seat Control Switch
Removal
2.
3.
www.JagDocs.com
Remove and discard the retaining clips.
4.
5.
Installation
1.
2. Install new clips.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Seating - Front Seat Head Restraint Motor
Removal
1. For additional information, refer to: Standard Workshop Practices

2. For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect

3. For additional information, refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal
and Installation).
4. For additional information, refer to: Front Safety Belt Buckle (501-20A
Safety Belt System, Removal and Installation).
5.
6.
7.
8.
www.JagDocs.com
9. Remove and discard the retaining clips.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Installation
1.
2. CAUTION: Support the head restraint motor assembly

while pushing down on the head restraint, you should hear
two audible clicks to secure the head restraint to the motor
assembly. Failure to do follow this instruction may result in
failure of the component.
3.
4.

6. Install the front seat backrest cover.
7.
www.JagDocs.com
8.
9.
10.
11. For additional information, refer to: Front Safety Belt Buckle (501-20A
12. For additional information, refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal
and Installation).
13. For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect
Seating - Rear Seat Bolster
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Backrest Cover Trim Panel
Removal
2.
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
5.
6.
Installation

2. Install the front seat back rest cover trim panel.
3.
4.
5.
6.
www.JagDocs.com
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms -
Front door window glass regulator retaining screws to BIW 7 - 62
Front door window glass regulator motor retaining screw to panel 2 - 18
Rear door window glass regulator retaining screws to BIW 7 - 62
Rear door window glass regulator motor retaining screw to panel 2 - 18
Rear door glass run retaining nuts 4 - 35
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Glass, Frames and Mechanisms -
Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
1 Window regulator motor – front passenger
2 Window control switch - front passenger
3 Door module – front passenger
4 Window control switch – RH (right-hand) rear passenger
5 Window regulator motor – RH rear passenger
6 Door module – RH rear passenger
7 Window regulator motor – LH (left-hand) rear passenger
8 Door module – LH rear passenger
9 Window control switch – LH rear passenger
10 Door module – driver's door
11 Window control switches - driver's door
12 Window regulator motor – driver's door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Overview
Overview
The windshield is manufactured from laminated green-tinted glass with two variants of windshield being available: standard
and heated.
The rear window is manufactured from toughened green-tinted glass. The heated rear window grid-wire and antennas are
incorporated in the rear window. There are two variants of rear window dependant on the TV antenna specification.
The door windows are manufactured from green-tinted toughened glass. The driver and passenger windows are electrically
operated; the rear glass sections in the rear doors are fixed units. Door windows can be operated individually, or by the driver's
window control switch. An anti-trap function is included that stops the window's travel when an obstacle is detected in the in
the window's path.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN; O = LIN bus
Item Description
1 Battery
5 Window control switches - driver's door
6 Door module – driver's door
www.JagDocs.com
7 Window regulator motor – driver's door
8 Door module – LH (left-hand) rear passenger
9 Window control switch - LH rear passenger
10 Window regulator motor – LH rear passenger
11 Door module – front passenger
12 Window control switches - front passenger
13 Window regulator motor – front passenger
14 Door module – RH (right-hand) rear passenger
15 Window control switch - RH rear passenger
16 Window regulator motor – RH rear passenger
System Operation
Door Windows
All windows can be operated individually, or by the driver’s window control switch. The operation of the windows is proportional
to the switch activation. All windows can be controlled by ‘one touch’ in an upward or downward direction. When the ‘one
touch’ operation is activated in the upwards direction ‘pinch protection‘ is enabled. If a pinch condition is detected the window
will automatically stop and travel downwards to a pre-determined position.
When the rear window ‘one touch’ operation is activated in the downward direction, the window will drop a limited way down.
This is the comfort setting to achieve optimum noise levels when vehicle is in motion with rear windows open. Further ‘one
touch’ operation will drop the window all the way down. (Only applies to vehicles post VIN R99740) The ‘one touch’ operation
to activate the upward direction will fully close the window.
Electric window operation is enabled while the ignition is in power mode 4 and 6. When the switches in the driver's door are
used to operate the passenger windows, the driver's door module outputs a related message on the LIN (local interconnect
network) bus and medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus. The passenger door module responds to the message by
operating the appropriate window. When the child lock is engaged, the rear door modules ignore inputs from the rear window
switches.
End of travel shut off
End of travel shut-off for the window motors is determined by monitoring the current draw of the motors. Each time it switches
on a window motor, the door module measures the window motor current for a preset time. The maximum value measured
within that time is stored as the switch-on current. When the window motor current next exceeds the switch-on current, the
door module assumes the window has reached the end of its travel and switches off the power supply to the window motor
even if a window switch is still being activated.
Anti-trap
The anti-trap function is enabled for window closing in both the inching and one-shot modes. If the anti-trap feature is
activated while a window is closing, the window motor is reversed for a preset period.
A Hall sensor, located in the window regulator motor, monitors the speed of the motor and if the speed decreases below a set
threshold, indicating an obstruction, the power feed to the motor is reversed so the window goes back down for preset time.
In an emergency the anti-trap function can be overridden by holding the window switch in the one-shot closed position.
After the battery has been disconnected it is necessary to initialize the door window motors to be able to operate the one-shot
up function.
Windshield
The windshield, manufactured from 5mm laminated green-tinted glass is positioned to the vehicle's body by two locator pins,
one in each top corner of the windshield. This allows for centralizing movement of the windshield across the car upon fitment.
The base of the windshield carries a leaf-screen retainer. The windshield is bonded and sealed to the vehicle body aperture
using Polyurethane (PU) adhesive. The windshield finisher is a three-sided extruded flip, taped onto the inner surface of the
glass; this helps to centralize the glass in the aperture.
Two variants of windshield are available:
standard, and
heated.
Interior Mirror and Rain Sensor

The interior mirror and rain sensor mounting positions are located at the top of the windshield.
Refer to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Description and Operation).
Rear Window
The rear window, manufactured from toughened 4mm green-tinted glass, is positioned to the vehicle's body by two locator
pins, one in each top corner of the windshield. This allows for the centralizing movement of the windshield across the car upon
fitment. The window is bonded and sealed to the vehicle body aperture using PU adhesive. The window finisher is a
three-sided extruded flip, taped onto the inner surface of the glass; this helps to centralize the glass in the aperture.
The heated rear window grid wire and antennas are incorporated in the rear window. There are two derivatives of rear window
dependant on the TV antenna specification.
Refer to: Video System (415-01, Description and Operation).
Door Windows
The door windows are manufactured from 4.85mm green-tinted toughened glass. The driver and passenger windows are
electrically operated, and are raised and lowered by a cable mechanism; the rear glass sections in the rear doors are fixed
units.
All windows can be operated individually, or by the driver's window control switch. The operation of the windows is proportional
to the switch activation. The driver window can be controlled by 'one touch' in an upward or downward direction. When the 'one
touch' operation is activated in the upwards direction an anti-trap sensor is automatically checked prior to the window closing.
If the anti-trap sensor is inoperative the window will not close. When the anti-trap sensor detects an obstacle in the window's
path, the upward travel of the window will automatically cease. Downward travel of the window will begin and then stop when a
preset time has elapsed.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
For a detailed description of the glass, frames and mechanisms, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms)
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (Description and Operation),

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (Description and Operation),
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (Description and Operation).
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system
Visual Inspection
Window glass Fuse(s)

Door window regulator Door window regulator motor
Window seals Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
Switch
Circuit(s)
the next step
4. If the concern is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC index
Window Regulator Diagnostic
This diagnostic procedure is to be carried out if the door window either: closes to the top, then reopens (Bounce back); does
not fully close to the top of the door frame; the one touch function is disabled
PINPOINT TEST A : DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
CONDITIONS
A1: DOOR WINDOW - SEAL CONDITION / FOREIGN MATERIAL
NOTE: To check that the door window seal is free from foreign material and has no sign of damage and is not worn in the
door channels
1 Carry out visual inspection for:

Foreign material
Obstruction
Signs of damage or wear to door window seal
Is the door window seal free from foreign material, damage and wear?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Remove any foreign material or were necessary install new door window seal. Test the system for
correct operation
A2: DOOR WINDOW - SEAL INSTALLATION
NOTE: To check that the door window seal is installed correctly
1 Check that the door window seal is installed correctly, ensure that it is fully installed into the corner
areas
Is the door window seal installed correctly?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
Correctly install the door window seal. Test the system for correct operation
A3: DOOR WINDOW - SECURITY
NOTE: To check the door window is secure
1 Check if the door window is installed correctly and secured to the door window regulator
Is the door window correctly installed and secure?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
Adjust the door window referring to the door window installation process REFER to: (501-11 Glass,
Frames and Mechanisms)
Front Door Window Glass (Removal and Installation),
Rear Door Window Glass (Removal and Installation).
Test the system for correct operation
A4: DOOR WINDOW - RESET PROCEDURE
1 Disconnect vehicle battery, wait for a minimum of 2 minutes, then reconnect the battery
2 For vehicles pre-VIN S08680, the latest version of the diagnostic software must be loaded. SDD must
be loaded with SDD DVD126_V6.03 and Calibration File 77 (or later)
3 For vehicles pre-VIN R54858, replace the front door window regulator motor,
REFER to: Front Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal
and Installation).
4 With the vehicle engine running, initialize the door window regulator motors,
REFER to: Door Window Motor Initialization (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General
Procedures).
5 Cycle the window 20 times, using the ‘one–touch’ function to open and close the window
6 NOTE: The door window regulator motor may thermally cut out after too many operations, if this occurs
wait 30 seconds before continuing
Is door window closing correctly and the One-touch function operational?
Yes
No further action requires
No
Replace the front door window regulator motor
REFER to: Door Window Regulator Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
, or rear door window regulator motor
REFER to: Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
Test the system for correct operation
Manual Sunblind Initialization Routine

Where a sunblind module has been replaced, there is an initialization routine available on the diagnostic tool. This requires a
new module to be initially installed in the fully down position and running of the "Initialize Specified Function/Feature"
diagnostic routine on the manufacturer approved diagnostic tool. Alternatively, the sunblind may be initialized manually by
following the procedures described below:
1. Raise the sunblind to top (fully retracted) position
2. Press and hold the door window 'down' switch for 15 seconds (the sunblind will go down and will then be in
initialization mode)
3. Release door window drop switch and press door window 'down' switch again to drive blind fully into lower block
4. Activate window switch 'up' until the sunblind reaches the top (fully retracted) position and release switch
5. The sunblind is now initialized and should have 'one-touch' functionality
DTC Index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Driver Door Module (DDM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Diagnosis and Testing).
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Fixed Window Glass
For a detailed description of the Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
Refer to Section 100-00 General Information for window glass health and safety precautions.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Physical damage to the windshield
the next step
Warranty Repairs
NOTES:
The warranty period for the windshield is twelve months with the exception of delamination and electrical faults.
Warranty repairs should be completed using genuine parts, in accordance with the Warranty Policy and Procedures
Manual.
1. Draw a line around the windshield damage using a marker pen.
2. Photograph the entire windshield. If the damage extends behind any trim, remove the trim and take further
photographs.
3. Photograph the trademark logo and code to validate the windshield as factory fitment.
Symptom Chart

Scratches
Debris trapped under a wiper blade GO to Pinpoint Test A.
www.JagDocs.com
Foreign object damage
Fouling by trim
Chips
Foreign object damage GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Cracks
Foreign object damage GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Impact damage during assembly
Delamination
Manufacturing defect GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : SCRATCH TESTS

A1: SCRATCH TEST 1
NOTE: A scratch will usually be regular in shape, following the line of the object that caused it.
1 Probe using the tip of a pencil to identify a groove in the windshield surface.
Is there a groove?
Yes
Windshield scratched. GO to A2.
No
Defect not valid.
A2: SCRATCH TEST 2
1 Check for trim, body panels, or foreign objects that may have caused the scratch.
Was the scratch caused by a foreign object?
Yes
The damage is not due to a defect or an assembly error.
No
Rectify as appropriate.
PINPOINT TEST B : CHIP TESTS

B1: CHIP TEST 1
NOTE: Impact damage may cause a crack to form.
1 Assess the damage by probing with the tip of a pencil.

Is the damaged area rough (indicating a breach of the windshield surface)?
Yes
Damage caused by the impact of a foreign object. Not a manufacturing defect.
No
Install a new windshield.
PINPOINT TEST C : CRACK TESTS

C1: CRACK TEST 1
NOTE: A crack will be detectable as a step in the glass.
1 Confirm the presence of a crack by probing with the tip of a pencil.

Is the windshield cracked?
Yes
Windshield cracked. GO to C2.
No
Windshield not cracked. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
C2: CRACK TEST 2
NOTE: Multiple cracks will radiate out from the source.
1 Assess the source of the crack by probing with the tip of a pencil.
Is there evidence of impact damage being the source of the crack?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST D : DELAMINATION TESTS

D1: DELAMINATION TEST 1
1 Visually assess the windshield for delamination.
Have the glass laminates separated?

Yes
No
No further action.
DTC Index
For a complete list of all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Door Window Motor Initialization
General Procedures
NOTES:
Make sure that the vehicle battery is fully charged before carrying out this procedure.
After the battery has been disconnected or a new window regulator and motor or door module has been installed, it is
necessary to initialize each door window motor separately to operate the one-touch and anti-trap function.
In addition to this manual procedure, the approved diagnostic tool can also be used to initialize the door window motor.
1. Start the engine.
2. Operate the window control switch until the door window glass is in the
fully closed position, continue to operate the window control switch for a
further two seconds.
3. Release the window control switch.
4. Operate the window control switch in the closed position and continue to
operate the window control switch for a further two seconds.
5. Operate the window control switch until the door window glass is in the
fully open position (one-touch down).
6. NOTES:
If the door window motor initialization has been completed

correctly, when the window control switch is operated, the door window
glass should move to the fully closed position (one-touch up)
automatically.
If the door window glass does not fully close automatically

(one-touch up), repeat the complete procedure.
Operate the window control switch once to the close position.

If multiple attempts have failed to initialize the door window
motor, refer the diagnosis and testing procedure.
For additional information, refer to: Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Diagnosis
and Testing).
7. Repeat the door window motor initialization for each door window motor.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Driver Door Window Control Switch
Removal
1. For additional information, refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05
2.
3.
Installation

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Door Window Glass
Removal
1.
2.
3.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
2.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Door Window Regulator and Motor
Special Tool(s)
Door glass release lever
501-114
Removal

3. WARNING: Do not allow the glass to drop.
4. For additional information, refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05
6. TORQUE: 7 Nm
Installation

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Door Fixed Window Glass
Removal
1. Lower the rear door window glass.
2. Remove the rear door trim panel.
Refer to: Rear Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
prior to removal.
11.
12.
13.
Installation
2. Tighten the Torx screws securing the fixed window glass after alignment
of the bright external trim.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Door Window Glass
Removal
1. Refer to: Rear Door Fixed Window Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
2. Refer to: Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames
and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
3.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor
Removal
1. Remove the rear door speaker.
Refer to: Rear Door Speaker (415-01A Information and Entertainment

2.
3. WARNING: Do not allow the glass to drop.
NOTE: The door glass should be lowered by

approximately one third.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Window Glass
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Always protect paintwork and glass when removing exterior components.
Always protect the interior components when removing body glass.
Lay the glass on felt covered supports. Do not stand on edge as this can cause chips which subsequently develop into
cracks.
NOTE: The following equipment is required: l Cutting wire and handles l Kent knife l Glazing knife l Windshield
replacement kit l Sealant applicator gun l Suction cups l A felt covered table or stand to support glass
2.
Remove the polyurethane (PU) adhesive cap and heat
the PU adhesive for a minimum of 30 minutes.
3.
4. CAUTIONS:
Protect the surrounding components.

technician.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
Correct preparation of body apertures “post painting”

to ensure satisfactory glass adhesion, must be carried out
in line with industry practise.
Prepare the window glass, window glass flange and

trimmed PU adhesive in accordance with the
instructions included with the PU adhesive kit.
2. CAUTION: Touching the adhesive surface will impair
rebonding.
NOTE: Install new spacers.
3.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that no excess sealant residue is

evident.
If water is used as a means for the leak check, then

allow sealant to dry before testing.
Spray water around the windshield glass, mark any
area that leaks. Dry the windshield glass and
sealant before applying additional sealant.
5.
www.JagDocs.com
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Windshield Glass
Removal
Installation).
2. Refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
3. Refer to: Rain Sensor (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal and
Installation).
4.
Remove the polyurethane (PU) adhesive cap and heat
the PU adhesive for a minimum of 30 minutes.
5.
6. CAUTIONS:
Protect the surrounding components.

technician.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
Correct preparation of body apertures “post painting”

to ensure satisfactory glass adhesion, must be carried out
in line with industry practise.
Prepare the window glass, window glass flange and

trimmed PU adhesive in accordance with the
instructions included with the PU adhesive kit.
2. CAUTION: Touching the adhesive surface will impair
rebonding.

technician.
CAUTIONS:

Make sure that equal pressure is applied to the full

length of the component.
If the ambient temperature falls below 10 degrees

C, apply warm air (25 degrees C) continuously for 15
minutes.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that no excess sealant residue is

evident.
If water is used as a means for the leak check, then

allow sealant to dry before testing.
Spray water around the windshield glass, mark any
area that leaks. Dry the windshield glass and
sealant before applying additional sealant.
5.
6. Refer to: Rain Sensor (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal and
Installation).
Installation).
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Door Window Regulator Motor
Removal
3. NOTE: Components removed for clarity.
www.JagDocs.com
4. NOTES:
Make sure the door window glass is in the fully closed

position.
Components removed for clarity.
Apply suitable adhesive tape to the door window

glass and over the door frame, to prevent the door
window glass from damage.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the drum remains in position.

Use a suitable flat blade screwdriver to secure the drum
while seperating the motor.
Installation
1.
Torque: 5 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:
Care must be taken not to damage the outer door

panel.
Install the retaining bolt 1 to the witness mark on

the body.
Torque:
1 1.9 Nm
2 5 Nm
3. NOTE: Components removed for clarity.
Torque: 1.5 Nm
Instrument Panel and Console -
Instrument panel retaining bolts 20 15 -
Floor console retaining nuts 5 - 44
Instrument panel support brackets retaining bolts 9 - 80
Instrument panel support brackets retaining nuts 9 - 80
Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Cross car beam
2 Glovebox switch
3 Energy absorbing brackets (2 off)
www.JagDocs.com
Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel - Overview
OVERVIEW
The instrument panel incorporates a magnesium cross car beam. North American Specification (NAS) vehicles also feature a pair
of energy absorbing brackets. The energy absorbing brackets are mounted behind the driver's side of the instrument panel.
Each is secured to the cross car beam by 2 screws.
The cross car beam acts as a support and provides mounting points for the instrument panel top pad. The instrument panel top
pad supports various other system components. These include ducting, vents and registers for the climate control system and
the passenger airbag. For additional information, refer to:
Safety Belt System (501-20A Safety Belt System, Description and Operation),
Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Description and Operation),
Pedestrian Protection System (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Description and Operation).
Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel - System Operation and
System Operation
GLOVEBOX SWITCH OPERATION
The CJB (central junction box) provides a battery voltage supply to the switch via the delayed power off relay. When the
glovebox switch is pressed, the voltage signal is passed to the CJB. If the correct conditions exist then the CJB then provides
a power supply to operate the glovebox latch to unlock the glovebox.
The glove box opening is inhibited by the CJB if the anti-theft alarm system is armed and if valet mode is selected using the
Touch Screen Display (TSD). The CJB detects the voltage signal from the switch but will not operate the glovebox latch if other
condition exists.
GLOVEBOX SWITCH DESCRIPTION
The conventional glove box switch is located behind the instrument panel veneer. The round button of the switch is visible
through an aperture in the veneer.
Two screws hold the switch in position behind the veneer. The veneer panel has two bosses which the screws are threaded
into.
Instrument Panel and Console - Floor Console
Removal
2. Refer to: Floor Console Cup Holder (501-12 Instrument Panel and
3. CAUTIONS:
Cover fiber optic cable connectors to minimize dust

ingress and avoid bending the cables in a radius of less
than 30 mm.
4. Torque: 9 Nm
5.
6. Torque: 6 Nm
7.
www.JagDocs.com
8. Torque: 6 Nm
9.
10.
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Floor Console Cup Holder
Removal
2. Refer to: Floor Console Double Cup Holder (501-12 Instrument Panel and
3.

component.

Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the veneer trim panel is correctly installed
and secured.

Instrument Panel and Console - Floor Console Double Cup Holder
Removal
2. Refer to: Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (307-05A Automatic

Installation).
3.
4.
5.
www.JagDocs.com
6. Open the floor console single cup holder.
7. Carefully release the front edge of the floor console double

cup holder from under the rear edge of the floor console
single cup holder.
8.
component.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the

component is removed for access only.
Installation
and secured.

Instrument Panel and Console - Floor Console Side Trim Panel
Removal
NOTES:
LHD right-hand floor console side trim panel shown, LHD left-hand and both RHD floor console side trim panels are
similar.
1. Recline the front seats and move to the rear most position.
2. NOTE: When removing the component, some of the clips

may remain attached. These clips should be removed and
returned to their original positions in the instrument
panel.
3.
4.
5.
6.

and returned to their original positions in the center
console.
8.
9.

www.JagDocs.com
11.
Installation
and secured.

Instrument Panel and Console - Glove Compartment
Removal
1. Refer to: Passenger Side Register (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).
2.
3. CAUTION: Fixings must be started by hand to avoid

damaging threads.
Upper 3 bolts.
Torque: 2.5 Nm
Lower 3 bolts.
Torque: 9 Nm
4.

6. Using a screwdriver, carefully release the latch and open
the glove compartment.
7.
8.
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel Console
Special Tool(s)
303-1496
Heater Hose Removal Tool
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Inspect the seals, replace if damaged.
Inspect the O-rings, replace if damaged.
All vehicles
3. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (303-03C Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Vehicles without supercharger
4. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 5.0L Petrol
(303-03C Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
5. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03A Engine
Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General Procedures).
All vehicles

Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
8. Refer to: Floor Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal
and Installation).

13. Refer to: Steering Wheel (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and
Installation).

16. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the O-ring seals

during installation.
Torque: 9 Nm
17. Torque: 4 Nm
18.
19. Torque: 30 Nm
20.
21. Torque: 4 Nm
All vehicles
22.
23. Torque: 12 Nm
24. Torque: 9 Nm
25.
www.JagDocs.com
26.
27. Torque: 20 Nm
28. Torque: 20 Nm
29. CAUTIONS:
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel
Removal
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.

damaging threads.
Upper 3 bolts.
Torque: 2.5 Nm
Lower 3 bolts.
Torque: 9 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
8.

10.
11.
Installation
Instrument Panel and Console - Overhead Console
Removal
1. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the edges of the

component.
2.

harnesses.
Take precautions to avoid any electrostatic charging,

which could damage this comopnent.
5.

harnesses.
7.
8.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

harnesses.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems -
Front and rear door latch retaining screw 7 - 62
Front and Rear exterior door handle / Door lock captive retaining screw 4 - 36
Front and Rear Exterior Door handle seperate retaining screw 3 - 28
Front and Rear Door striker retaining screw 25 18 -
Interior Door handle retaining Screw 1.3 - 11.5
Hood latch Reataining screw 10 8 -
Hood Striker Retaining screw 22 17 -
Trunk Latch Retaining screw 20 15 -
Trunk Striker Retaining screw 22 17 -
Trunk Lock Retaining screw 3 - 28
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems - Component Location
Locks and Latches
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) front door handles, latch and motor
2 RH rear door handles, latch and motor
3 Fuel filler door and motor
4 Luggage compartment emergency key barrel
5 Luggage compartment latch and motor
6 LH (left-hand) rear door handles, latch and motor
7 Door emergency key barrel - LH front door only
8 LH front door handles, latch and motor
9 Engine-compartment-lid release-lever and cable
10 Engine-compartment-lid striker
11 Engine-compartment-lid safety hook and guide
Central Locking and Keyless Vehicle Locking
Item Description
2 Keyless vehicle, RH front door antenna * – integral to the handle
3 Keyless vehicle, RH rear door antenna * – integral to the handle
4 Central locking radio frequency receiver
6 Keyless vehicle, luggage compartment antenna *
8 Keyless vehicle, LH rear door antenna * – integral to the handle
9 Keyless vehicle, LH front door antenna * – integral to the handle
Comments:
(* Only with passive entry option fitted)
Entry Systems - Overview
The hinged panels are secured with latches and strikers. A remotely operated central locking system controls the locking and
unlocking of the door and luggage compartment latches. A radio frequency Smart Key allows the vehicle to be locked and
unlocked by pressing the appropriate handset buttons. Two levels of central locking system are available:
remote central locking, and an

optional passive entry system.
The remote central locking system, provides locking and unlocking of the vehicle from inside and outside of the vehicle. The
system is operated using buttons on the Smart Key, which transmits radio frequency signals to the central locking radio
frequency receiver.
On vehicles fitted with the optional passive entry system, the vehicle can be unlocked without the use of a key or pressing
buttons on the Smart Key. The Smart Key operates the passive entry system.
www.JagDocs.com
Entry Systems - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
Central Locking
Item Description
Note: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN (controller area network); O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (250 A)
4 Door module - front passenger
5 Door ajar switch - front passenger
6 Door latch - front passenger
7 Door module - RH (right-hand) rear passenger
8 Door latch - RH rear passenger
9 Door ajar switch - RH rear passenger
10 Door latch - LH (left-hand) rear passenger
11 Door ajar switch - LH rear passenger
12 Door module - LH rear passenger
13 Door ajar switch - driver door
14 Door latch - driver door
15 Door module - driver door
17 Central-locking radio-frequency receiver
Luggage Compartment Lid and Fuel Filler Door Locking
Item Description
Note: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (250 A)
3 RJB
4 Locking motor - fuel door
5 Keylesss vehicle module
6 Emergency key barrel - luggage compartment
7 Release latch - luggage compartment lid
8 Ajar switch - luggage compartment lid
9 Fascia switch - luggage compartment lid
11 CJB
Passive Entry System
Item Description
Note: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (250 A)
3 CJB
5 Keylesss vehicle module
6 Door handle, lock/unlock switch and antenna - front passenger
7 Door latch, fast latch - front passenger
8 Door latch, fast latch - RH rear passenger
9 Door handle, lock/unlock switch and antenna - RH rear passenger
10 Door latch, fast latch - LH rear passenger
11 Door handle, lock/unlock switch and antenna - LH rear passenger
12 Door latch, fast latch - driver door
13 Door handle, lock/unlock switch and antenna - driver door
System Operation
The hinged panels are secured with latches and strikers. A remotely operated central locking system controls the locking and
unlocking of the door and luggage compartment latches. A radio frequency Smart Key allows the vehicle to be locked and
unlocked by pressing the appropriate handset buttons. Two levels of central locking system are available: remote central
locking and an optional passive entry system.
The passive entry and associated passive start system allows the driver to unlock and start the vehicle without using a vehicle
key in a door-lock or ignition switch. The passive entry system is an optional fitment while the passive start system is a
standard fitment on all vehicles. The passive start system is combined with the passive anti-theft immobilization system.
Emergency access to the vehicle is provided by two concealed key barrels: one located in the front left-hand door handle and
one located on the underside of the luggage compartment lid finisher. An emergency, removable key blade is fitted into the
Smart Key.
Operation of either key barrel unlocks the vehicle but does not disarm the alarm system. The key barrels in the door and
luggage compartment lid are concealed by a plastic cover which can be removed by inserting the blade of the emergency key
into a slot in the cover.
Locking and unlocking conditions using the emergency key in the door key barrel:
If the alarm is not armed the vehicle can be centrally unlocked.

If the alarm is armed the door only can be opened and the alarm will be triggered.
The vehicle cannot be double locked or the alarm system armed using the emergency key.
The vehicle can be centrally locked and unlocked from inside using the interior handle release levers on the front doors only.
Central locking and unlocking can also be performed using lock and unlock buttons on the vehicle's fascia. The driver can select
locking options, single point entry or drive away locking for example, from a menu available on the touch screen.
Central Locking – Radio Frequency Remote System

The radio frequency central locking system, provides locking and unlocking of the vehicle from inside and outside of the
vehicle. The system is operated using buttons on the Smart Key, which transmits radio frequency signals to the central locking
radio frequency receiver.
The system provides additional security by double-locking the doors from outside the vehicle if the lock button, on the Smart
Key, is pressed twice within 3 seconds; this function is not applicable in North American Specification (NAS) and Japanese
markets.
Additional buttons on the Smart Key provide for the convenience operation of the luggage compartment lid release, headlamp
delay and panic alarm functions. A global open or close feature is also available in certain markets using the lock/unlock
buttons.
Passive Entry
On vehicles fitted with the optional passive entry system, the vehicle can be unlocked without the use of a key blade or
pressing buttons on the Smart Key. The Smart Key operates the passive entry system in addition to the passive start system.
The passive entry system is controlled by the keyless vehicle module and five low frequency antennas. One antenna located in
each door handle and one antenna located behind the rear bumper cover.
When a vehicle door handle is pulled to the first five-percent of its travel and the Smart Key is within one meter of the handle;
the Smart Key receives the low-frequency signal transmitted from the keyless vehicle module. The Smart Key responds with a
radio frequency transmission of its authorization code. The radio frequency signal is received by the central locking radio-
frequency receiver and passed to the keyless vehicle module which checks and approves the code as valid. Once the handle is
pulled to eighty percent of its travel the keyless vehicle module then drives the fast latch directly to allow the door to be
opened. The keyless vehicle module also transmits an unlock request to the CJB. The CJB then passes an unlock request to the
door modules.
Locking of the vehicle is performed by pressing one of the buttons located on each exterior door handle, with the Smart Key
within a one meter range of the vehicle. When the door handle button is pressed, the keyless vehicle module transmits a
low-frequency signal via the low-frequency handle antenna to the Smart Key. The Smart Key transmits a radio frequency signal
which is verified by the keyless vehicle module and allows the doors to be locked or double locked and the alarm system to be
armed.
To double lock the vehicle, the button on the exterior door handle must be pressed twice within three seconds, with the Smart
Key within one meter range of the vehicle.
If a door, engine-compartment lid or the luggage compartment lid is ajar when an attempt to lock the vehicle is made, an error
tone is emitted and no locking action will occur.
Refer to: Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active, Description and Operation).
Engine Compartment Lid Latches
Two engine-compartment lid latches are located on the front crossmember. An engine-compartment lid release lever is located
below the instrument panel on the left-hand 'A' pillar and is connected with a cable to the latches. An engine-compartment lid
ajar switch is integrated in the engine-compartment lid latch.
Door Latches
The door latches are located at the rear of each door and engage with a striker on the adjacent pillar. Each door latch motor
assembly contains micro-switches for lock, unlock and door ajar. Motors provide for the central door locking and the double
locking feature. The electrical control for the door latch components is provided by the CJB and RJB via the driver's and
passenger door modules.
The interior door handles are connected by a cable to the latch release mechanisms. The interior door handles also incorporate
a locking facility to allow the doors to be locked from inside the vehicle when all the doors are closed. If a door is ajar the
locking feature is inhibited.
Luggage Compartment Lid Latch

The luggage compartment latch is attached to the bottom of the lid. The latch can be released electrically by pressing the
interior release button located on the outboard side of driver's lower knee bolster; a release button is also provided on the
Smart Key. There is also a release switch on the underside of the luggage compartment lid finisher.
On NAS vehicles an emergency release cable is attached to the latch. This allows the latch to be manually opened by pulling a
handle located in the luggage compartment lid interior trim.
Fuel Filler Door

The fuel filler door is electrically locked by a motor located on the fuel door housing. The fuel door is locked when the vehicle
is locked and alarmed. The fuel door can be opened when the vehicle is unlocked or locked:
via an interior handle,

via drive-a-way locking,
via the lock switch on the fascia,
via the external door key barrel.
www.JagDocs.com
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems
For a detailed description of the locks, latches and entry systems and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14, Description and
Operation).
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
1. Verify the customer concern, to be sure the correct issue is investigated
Visual Inspection
Incorrectly aligned door(s), hood or tailgate Fuses

Fuel filler door lock actuator Wiring harness
Hood release handle Wiring connector(s)
Hood release cables Door lock actuator(s)
Hood latch(es) Remote transmitter (key-fob or smart key)
Exterior door handle(s) Central locking switches
Interior door handle(s) Controller Area Network (CAN) circuits
Cable(s) Radio frequency (RF) receiver
Tailgate release switch Central junction box (CJB)
Rear window release switch Loose or corroded connections
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Symptom Chart
NOTE: Complete the diagnostic steps below to confirm any concern prior to replacing any component

The message center indicates that the
hood, the luggage compartment is Incorrect striker Check/adjust the strikers as
open when it appears to be closed alignment/adjustment necessary
Ajar switch circuit short circuit to Check for DTCs indicating an ajar
Vehicle indicates a miss-lock when the
ground switch fault. Refer to the DTC index
hood, luggage compartment appear to Ajar switch failure
be closed
Fuel flap does not lock/unlock
Fuel flap cable detached from body Check the condition and installation
Fuel flap actuator detached from of the fuel flap cable
mounting bracket Check the security of the fuel flap
Fuel flap actuator disconnected actuator and bracket
Fuel flap actuator failure Check the security of the actuator
electrical connector
Check for DTCs indicating a fuel flap
actuator fault. Refer to the DTC
index
Door(s) will not unlatch/open when

using outside door handle Exterior door handle Check the exterior door handle
condition/installation condition and installation
Exterior release cable disconnected Check the condition and security of
from exterior door handle or door the exterior release cable
latch Single door will not open from the
outside (but opens from the
inside) GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Door(s) will not unlatch/open when

using inside door handle Child lock(s) engaged Check that the child locks are
Interior door handle disengaged
condition/installation Check the interior door handle
Interior release cable disconnected condition and installation
from interior door handle or door Check the condition and security of
latch the interior release cable
Single Door Will Not Open From
The Inside (but opens from the
outside) GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Door(s) will not lock/unlock from key

fob, key or internal lock switch Wiring harness/connectors Check for relevant stored DTCs
Central junction box (CJB) Once any DTC related faults have
Door lock switch been rectified continue with the
Cable fault diagnostic steps below
No lock / unlock function from
key-fob GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Door ajar or miss lock signal at

message centre when door(s) are Wiring harness Latch Mounted Door Ajar Switch
closed or alarm triggering Instrument cluster Test GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Incorrect striker
alignment/adjustment
Ajar switch circuit short circuit to
ground
Ajar switch failure
DTC Index
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00, Diagnosis and Testing) /
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - DTC: With (501-14, Diagnosis and Testing).
Pinpoint Test
PINPOINT TEST A : SINGLE DOOR WILL NOT OPEN FROM THE OUTSIDE (BUT OPENS FROM THE INSIDE)

A1: CHECK THE EXTERIOR DOOR RELEASE CABLE TO EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
1 Remove the door trim panel as necessary
2 Confirm the exterior door release cable is correctly installed to

the exterior door handle
Is the cable correctly installed?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Connect the door release cable correctly. If the cable is
damaged, install a new door release cable. Test the system
for normal operation
A2: CHECK THE EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE RELEASE CONNECTION TO THE DOOR LATCH
1 Confirm the exterior door handle release connection to the door
latch is installed correctly
Is the exterior door handle release cable installed correctly?

Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST B : SINGLE DOOR WILL NOT OPEN FROM THE INSIDE (BUT OPENS FROM THE OUTSIDE)

B1: CHECK THE INTERIOR DOOR RELEASE CABLE TO INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
NOTE: Figure A - Child lock off position shown
1 Make sure the child lock is disengaged (rear door only)

Confirm the interior door release cable is correctly installed to

3
the interior door handle
Is the cable correctly installed?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
B2: CHECK THE INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE RELEASE CONNECTION TO THE DOOR LATCH
1 Confirm the interior door handle release connection to the door
latch is installed correctly
Is the interior door handle release cable installed correctly?

Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : DOOR LATCHING AND LOCKING FUNCTION TEST

C1: HARNESS CONNECTION
NOTE: Test as a single component to ensure that the door latch is not replaced unnecessarily, when another component
may be at fault

2 Disconnect harness from latch, check for corrosion or damage to
both connectors at socket points and pins. Re-connect harness
ensuring robust assembly when all parts confirmed to be in
good order. If harness or latch connectors are damaged, install
new harness/latch as necessary. Test the system for normal
operation
Check for normal operation, does latch function correctly?

Yes
Re-assemble door trim and test for normal operation
No
GO to C2.
C2: LOCK COMMAND SIGNAL FROM VEHICLE HARNESS
1 Close all vehicle doors apart from door being investigated,
please note which door, left side or right side is under
investigation
Disconnect harness from latch to enable access to socket

2
points to carry-out conductivity testing as detailed
3 Monitor the circuit for momentary power when locking the
vehicle via the key-fob or smart key between terminals 5 and 7
left side or 5 and 7 right side
Is there momentary power (for approx 8 seconds) between
terminals 5 and 7 left side or 5 and 7 right side when locking the
vehicle via the key-fob or smart key
Yes
The vehicle electrical system is locking correctly, providing the
signal to the latch GO to C3.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and investigate why
vehicle electrical system is not providing signals to the latch.
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check for
logged DTCs to localize the fault
C3: UNLOCK COMMAND SIGNAL FROM VEHICLE HARNESS
1 Monitor the circuit for momentary power when unlocking the
vehicle via the key-fob or smart key between terminals 5 and 7
left side or 5 and 7 right side
www.JagDocs.com
Is there momentary power (for approx 8 seconds) between
terminals 5 and 7 left side and 5 and 7 right side when unlocking
the vehicle via the key-fob or smart key?
Yes
The vehicle electrical system is unlocking correctly, providing
the signal to the latch GO to C4.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and investigate why
vehicle electrical system is not providing signals to the latch.
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check for
logged DTCs to localize the fault
C4: PHYSICAL TEST 1
1 Remove latch module from door
2 Inspect latch module for any visual damage
3 With the latch in hand, connect the electrical connector(s) to
connect door latch to door harness
NOTE: THE LATCH IS NOW READY TO TEST
4 Close all vehicle doors except the door being investigated

NOTES:
Figure 1 - Unlatched position shown
Figure 2 - First safety latched position shown
Figure 3 - Fully latched position shown
Test will not work if latch is only in first safety latch position
5 Rotate latch claw (using a small screw driver or similar), to the

fully latched position (figure 3)
NOTE: Unlocked position shown
6 Confirm that the latch interior release lever is in the unlocked

position as shown
NOTE: Locked position shown
7 Press the lock button on the key-fob or smart key
Does the latch interior release lever move from the unlocked
position to the locked position?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
If this is a repeat test and the vehicle electrical test section
has been completed and confirmed that vehicle is working
correctly, then replace the door latch. If replacing latch as part
of a warranty claim, please quote reference code LKINOP in
the technician comments section of the warranty claim
C5: PHYSICAL TEST 2
1 With the latch in the locked state (i.e. the latch interior release
lever is in the locked position), press the key-fob or smart key
unlock button
Does the latch interior release lever move from the locked position
to the unlocked position?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
If this is a repeat test and the vehicle electrical test section
has been completed and confirmed that vehicle is working
correctly, then replace the door latch. If replacing latch as part
of a warranty claim, please quote reference code LKINOP in
the technician comments section of the warranty claim
C6: PHYSICAL TEST 3
NOTE: Fully latched position shown
1 With the latch in its unlocked state, push the latch exterior
release lever against its return spring, whilst simultaneously
applying a light pressure to release the latch claw using a
small screw driver or similar
Does the latch claw release?

Yes
GO to C7.
No
Repeat tests C5 and C6 to confirm the fault GO to C5. If the
repeat test has confirmed that the exterior release lever will
not release the claw on an unlocked latch replace the door
latch. If replacing latch as part of a warranty claim, please
quote reference code EXTINOP in the technician comments
section of the warranty claim
C7: PHYSICAL TEST 4
NOTE: Fully latched position shown
1 Using a small screw driver or similar, rotate latch claw to the

second fully latched position
NOTE: Figure A - Child lock off position shown
2 If testing a rear door latch, ensure that the child lock is turned
to the off position
3 Confirm that the latch interior release lever is in the unlocked

position as shown
4 Whilst the latch is still in its unlocked state, push the latch
interior release lever against its return spring, whilst
simultaneously applying a light pressure to release the latch
claw using a small screw driver or similar
Does the latch claw release?

Yes
Latch has passed all tests to confirm its correct function. DO
NOT REPLACE LATCH as part of any attempts to resolve any
locking functionality issues
No
Repeat test GO to C7. If repeat test has confirmed that the
interior release lever will not release the claw when the latch is
in the unlocked state, then replace the latch. If replacing latch
as part of a warranty claim, please quote reference code
INTINOP in the technician comments section of the warranty
claim
PINPOINT TEST D : LATCH MOUNTED DOOR AJAR SWITCH TEST

D1: TEST 4 DOOR LATCH
NOTES:
If a customer is complaining of issues relating to a door ajar signal e.g. door latch won’t lock, or alarm system triggering
(indicated via DTC’s), there may be several components that generate the fault, including
www.JagDocs.com
Body wiring harness / connectors
Door wiring harness / connectors
Alarm control module
Central junction box (CJB)
Door Latch ajar switch
To investigate the functioning of the door ajar switch contained within the door latch, to prove or eliminate the door
latch mounted door ajar switch as the root cause, follow the process below. This will prevent the unnecessary replacement of
a correctly functioning door latch
1 Remove door trim from door

2 Disconnect door harness from latch for access to connector pins
for latch electrical testing
3 Inspect latch module for any visual damage
NOTES:
Figure 1 - Unlatched position shown
Figure 2 - First safety latched position shown
Figure 3 - Fully latched position shown
Test will not work if latch is only in first safety latch position
4 Using a small screw driver or similar, rotate latch claw to the

second fully latched position (figure 3)
5 Carry out continuity test between terminals 1 and 4 (left side)

or 8 and 4 (right side) with claw closed
Does the continuity test pass?

Yes
The latch ajar switch is working correctly. Do not replace latch.
Investigate for fault elsewhere in vehicle system
No
Release latch claw and repeat test from step 4 to confirm
result. If this is a repeat test and you are sure that the ajar
switch does not provide continuity when fully latched. Replace
the latch. If replacing latch as part of a warranty claim, please
quote reference code AJARINOP in the technician comments
section of the warranty claim
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Door Lock Cylinder Cover
Removal
1. CAUTION: Make sure that excessive force is not used.

the vehicle.
2.
3.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the door lock cylinder cover

is pushed firmly in the sequence shown to install all 3 clips,
and that the door lock cylinder cover is securely attached to
the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Exterior Front Door Handle
Removal
1. NOTE: Remove the screw sufficiently, only to release

the component.
Torque: 4 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
harnesses.
NOTE: Secure the connection in the service position.
4.
Installation

correctly located.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Exterior Luggage Compartment
Lid Release Switch
Removal
All vehicles
2.
3. Torque: 3 Nm
4.
Vehicles with parking aid
5.
All vehicles
6.
Installation

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Exterior Rear Door Handle
Removal
1. NOTE: Remove the screw sufficiently, only to release the

component.
Torque: 4 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
harnesses.
NOTE: Secure the connection in the service position.
4.
Installation

correctly located.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Front Door Latch
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Door Window Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Exterior Front Door Handle (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches
and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).

Torque: 7 Nm

Torque: 3 Nm
Torque: 7 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
11. NOTE: Note the position of the wiring harness.

13.
14.
15.
Installation

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Front Door Lock Cylinder
Removal
1.
2. NOTE: Remove the screw sufficiently, only to release

the component.
Torque: 4 Nm
Installation

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Interior Front Door Handle
Removal
2.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Luggage Compartment Lid Latch
Actuator
Removal
1. Refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Lock Cylinder (501-14 Handles,

2. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Luggage Compartment Lid Lock
Cylinder
Removal
2.
3. Torque: 3.2 Nm
4.
Installation

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Rear Door Latch
Removal
1. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor.
Refer to: Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames
and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the rear door exterior handle.
Refer to: Exterior Rear Door Handle (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
3. Torque: 3 Nm
4.
5. Torque: 7 Nm
6.
www.JagDocs.com
7. CAUTION: Note of the routing of the wiring harnesses.

9.
10.
11.
Drill out the rivet.
Release the clip.
12. CAUTION: Note of the routing of the wiring harnesses.
13.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harnesses are correctly

located.

Wipers and Washers -
Wiper arm retaining nuts 22 16.2 194.7
Wiper linkage bolts / screws 11 8.1 97.4
Wipers and Washers - Wipers and Washers - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Washer reservoir
2 Wiper motor and linkage assembly
3 Wiper/washer switch - RH (right-hand) steering column multifunction switch
4 Rain/light sensor
6 Headlamp washer jets (2 off)
www.JagDocs.com
Wipers and Washers - Wipers and Washers - Overview
OVERVIEW
The wipers and washers comprise a windshield wiper system with a conventional wiper linkage and 2 wiper blades and a
windshield washer with jets located on the wiper arms. A headlamp powerwash is available on certain models.
The front wipers have 4 operational states:
Flick wipe
Auto
Slow wipe
Fast wipe.
Operation of the windshield wipers and washers and the headlamp powerwash is controlled by the CJB (central junction box) in
response to driver inputs and signals from the rain/light sensor. The instrument cluster monitors the condition of the
wiper/washer control switch and transmits driver requests to the CJB over the medium speed CAN (controller area network)
bus.
The 'Auto' function requires an input from the rain sensor. The rain sensor is mounted on the inner surface of the windshield
and transmits an infra-red signal to determine the amount of water on the outer surface of the windshield. A value is then
transmitted to the CJB over the LIN (local interconnect network) bus.
Wipers and Washers - Wipers and Washers - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus
Item Description
1 Battery
3 Wiper motor
4 Headlamp washer pump
5 Rain/Light sensor
6 Washer reservoir fluid level switch
7 Windshield washer pump
8 Wiper/Washer switch - RH (right-hand) steering column multifunction switch
System Operation
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Operation of the wipers and washers is controlled by the CJB in response to driver inputs from the wiper control switch and
signals from the rain/light sensor. The instrument cluster monitors the condition of the wiper/washer control switch and
transmits driver requests to the CJB over the medium speed CAN bus.
The wiper control switch is connected via hardwired connections to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster outputs on 4
wires a reference voltage to the wash/wipe switch, the auto wiper switch, the wiper switch and the flick wipe switch. All the
switches are connected to the instrument cluster on a common ground. Each switch function is connected to ground via a
resistor or series of resistors and the instrument cluster monitors the ground signal and determines which function has been
selected. The instrument cluster then outputs the appropriate message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB which
responds to the requested wiper function. The CJB then activates the appropriate function either directly or via relays in the
EJB for the wipers and headlamp powerwashers.
Speed Dependent Mode
When the wipers are operating, a vehicle speed signal received by the CJB on the high speed CAN bus is used to operate a
speed dependent mode. If the wipers are in fast wipe and the vehicle speed decreases to below 2 km/h (1.2 mph), the wipers
will reduce to the normal wipe speed. When the vehicle speed increases to above 8 km/h (5 mph) the fast wiper speed
selection is restored. If slow speed is selected and the vehicle speed drops below 2km/h (1.2 mph), the wipers will operate in
the intermittent mode. When the vehicle speed increases to above 8 km/h (5 mph) the slow wiper speed selection is restored
– this feature is configurable by the dealer using the approved Jaguar diagnostic system.
Wiper Motor
The wiper motor is controlled by the CJB. The CJB is connected to a wiper motor normal/fast relay in the EJB on 2 wires. The
CJB is also connected to a wiper run/park relay, also located in the EJB.
Driver requests are received by the CJB which energizes the wiper motor normal/fast relay in the appropriate mode (normal or
fast wipe) and also energizes the run/park relay in the run mode by providing a ground for the relay coils. When wiper
operation is deselected by the driver, the CJB monitors a park switch which is integral with the wiper motor. On receipt of a
signal from the park switch, the CJB de-energises the run/park relay, removing the power supply through the normal/fast relay,
stopping the wipers in the park position on the windshield.
The wiper motor is a DC (direct current) motor which drives a gear wheel via a worm drive attached to the motor spindle. The
motor has 3 sets of brushes with one brush connected to ground. When the normal/fast relay is energized in the normal
position, a power feed is supplied to the brush directly opposite the ground brush and operates the motor at slow speed.
When the relay is energized in the fast position, a power feed is connected to the second motor brush, which is offset from the
ground brush and operates the motor at the fast speed. With power supplied through the offset brush, the current flows
through fewer motor coil windings. This results in a lower resistance to current flow to the ground brush and produces a higher
motor rotational speed.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
The windshield washers are controlled by the CJB. A driver request for washer operation, via the wiper control switch, is passed
to the instrument cluster on the LIN bus. The instrument cluster passes the message to the CJB on the medium speed CAN
bus.
The CJB energizes the windshield washer pump during the up stroke of the first 2 wash/wipe cycles. This ensures that wiper
fluid is pushed to the sides of the windshield and eliminates the trail of fluid which can occur if the fluid is pushed to the
bottom of the windshield. The wipers will continue for 3 more cycles, followed after a delay of 4 seconds, by a single dry wipe.
NOTE: The dry wipe feature is configurable using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system.
The operation of the washer pump on the wiper up stroke only is configurable using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system.
The washer button can be pressed and held and the wipers will operate continuously for up to 10 seconds. After this period
when the button is released, the wipers will continue for 3 more cycles, followed after a delay, by a single dry wipe. After this
period washing will be inhibited, the wipers will continue for 3 more cycles, followed after a delay, by a single dry wipe.
Reactivating the switch will recommence the wash/wipe cycle.
RESERVOIR LEVEL SWITCH

The level switch is connected directly to the CJB. The switch is operated by a float which closes contacts within the switch
when the fluid level falls to below the switch level. When the contacts are closed a ground path is completed from the CJB
through the switch. This is sensed by the CJB which issues a message to the instrument cluster which displays a low fluid level
warning.
HEADLAMP POWERWASHERS
The headlamp powerwash is activated when the driver requests windshield washer operation. The CJB receives the driver
request via a CAN bus message from the instrument cluster. The CJB then checks for an exterior lights active signal and that a
low washer fluid level signal is not present.
The CJB outputs a control voltage to a headlamp powerwash pump relay located in the EJB. The relay is energized by the CJB
for a pre-determined period to allow the headlamp telescopic washers to operate.
The CJB monitors the driver washer requests and only operates the headlamp powerwash on every fourth request for
windshield washer operation, provided that 10 minutes have elapsed since the last headlamp powerwash operation. The
powerwash sequence is reset when the headlamps or the ignition is switched off.
NOTE: If a low fluid reservoir level is present the CJB prohibits headlamp powerwash.
RAIN/LIGHT SENSOR
On receiving a request for automatic windshield wiper operation, the CJB interprets LIN bus messages received from the rain
sensor. The rain sensor provides LIN bus messages with values ranging from 0 to 7.
A signal value of 0 is interpreted by the CJB as the windshield is dry. A signal value from 1 to 5 is interpreted by the CJB as a
small amount of water hitting the windshield. In this instance, the CJB initiates a slow wipe. A signal value of 7 is interpreted
by the CJB as a large amount of water hitting the windshield. In this instance, the CJB initiates a fast wipe.
NOTES:
The CJB will only change a fast wipe routine to a slow wipe routine if the rain sensor value is lower than 7.
A = Clean and dry windshield; B = Wet and dirty windshield
Item Description
1 Windshield outer surface
2 Optical element
3 Transmitter diodes (100% light transmitted)
4 Rain sensor
5 Receiver diodes (100% light received)
6 Water droplets/film
7 Receiver diodes (less than 100% light received)
8 Lost light
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR AND LINKAGE
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) wiper linkage shown
Item Description
1 Quick release wiper blade attachment
2 RH wiper arm
3 Wiper blade (2 off)
4 LH (left-hand) wiper arm
5 Wiper arm cap (2 off)
6 Nut (2 off)
7 Wiper linkage location hole (hidden)
8 Pivot housing (2 off)
9 Screw and washer (2 off)
10 Wiper motor
The wiper linkage and motor assembly differs between LHD and RHD (right-hand drive) models. The wiper linkage and motor
assembly is not available as separate service components. If the wiper linkage and motor assembly is replaced, it is important
that alignment is made to marks on the windshield and the fixings are tightened in the correct order.
The wiper linkage and motor assembly is attached to the vehicle body with screws and washers at each end. The screws are
located in rubber bushes in the linkage assembly which isolate the linkage from the vehicle body. A rubber grommet is located
behind the motor and engages on a spigot on the vehicle body to locate the linkage.
The linkage assembly comprises a main tube with a pivot housing located at each end. The motor assembly is attached to the
tube by a clamp plate and 4 screws. The motor output shaft is fitted with a crank. A link rod is connected to the motor crank
www.JagDocs.com
and is connected at the opposite end to the LH pivot housing via a crank. The LH pivot housing crank is fitted with a second
link rod which is connected directly to the crank on the RH pivot housing.
The motor crank converts rotary motion from the motor output shaft into linear movement of the link rods. The cranks
connected to each pivot housing, convert the linear motion of the link rods back to rotary motion of the pivot housings. This
rotary motion is passed to the wiper arms and blades causing the blades to wipe an arc across the windshield.
Each wiper arm is located on a taper spline on the respective pivot housing. A nut is screwed on the end of the pivot housing
shaft and positively secures the wiper arm on the taper spline.
The wiper blades are attached to the wiper arms with a quick release fittings. The blades are of the flat blade type. These
blades have an integral spring along their full length which curves the blade to match the windshield and provides even blade
to windshield contact pressure along the entire length of the blade.
WASHER RESERVOIR
NOTE: Type 'B' washer reservoir shown

Item Description
1 Scrivet
2 Windshield washer feed pipe to washer jets
3 Reservoir cap
4 Reservoir filler neck
5 Captive nut (2 off)
6 Headlamp powerwash feed pipe to telescopic washer jets
7 Screw and washer (2 off)
8 Grommet
9 Washer fluid level sensor
10 Windshield washer pump
11 Headlamp washer pump
12 Location spigot
The washer reservoir is located in the RH wheel arch. The reservoir is a plastic moulding and is secured in the wheel arch with
2 screws and washers and a scrivet. A level sensor is located in the reservoir and is connected to the CJB. The reservoir is
fitted with a washer pump which supplies pressurized washer fluid to the windshield washer jets mounted on the wiper arms.
A vehicle fitted with optional headlamp washers is fitted with a larger reservoir and an additional pump for the headlamp
washers. The larger reservoir is identifiable by a letter 'B' moulded on the casing and has a capacity of 5.5 liters. Reservoirs
moulded with the letter 'A' are for use on vehicles with windshield washers only and have a capacity of 4.4 liters.
A filler cap is located at the top of the reservoir and is accessible from the engine compartment.
The pumps are located in rubber sealing grommets in holes in the reservoir and secured with clips. The pump fluid hoses have
quick release connectors which mate with the pumps. The fluid level sensor is a push fit into a sealing grommet in one side of
the reservoir body.
HEADLAMP POWERWASHERS (if fitted)
Item Description
1 Powerwash trim cap
2 Washer jets
3 Self-tapping screws (2 off)
4 Pressure feed from powerwash pump
5 Telescopic arm
On vehicles with headlamp powerwash, each headlamp assembly is fitted with a headlamp powerwasher. The powerwasher is
located on the underside of the headlamp assembly. The powerwasher is located in a clip at the front of the headlamp and
secured with 2 self tapping screws to the headlamp body.
The powerwasher is a telescopic unit which extends forwards from the headlamp assembly under washer fluid pressure
supplied by the headlamp powerwash pump. When the pump pressure decreases the powerwasher is automatically retracted
back into the housing. The outer end of the powerwasher is fitted with a trim which blends the powerwasher into the headlamp
when it is not operating. The powerwasher has two washer jets which direct washer fluid under high pressure onto the
headlamp lens when the powerwasher is extended.
RAIN/LIGHT SENSOR
The rain/light sensor is located at the upper edge of the windshield, behind the interior rear view mirror. Contact between the
rain sensor and windscreen is provided via a silicon pad which is compressed during the assembly process by two locking
retaining clips either side of the sensor.
The rain/light sensor unit attaches to the windshield via two clips, which latch onto formed tags on the windshield bracket.
The sensor provides information to the CJB for the optimum wiper operation for the prevailing conditions to maintain the shield
in a clear condition at all times. The rain/light sensor is an optical unit, which operates on an infrared waveband. The sensor
uses the principle of the laws of reflection on interfacing surfaces between materials with differing refraction properties.
The rain/light sensor is connected to the CJB via a LIN bus. The sensor also receives a hardwired power and ground from the
CJB. The 'auto' wipers are activated when the column stalk is moved to position 1 (first position from off in the upward
direction). The sensitivity of the sensor can be adjusted by rotating the sensitivity collar on the wiper column stalk in the
clockwise or counterclockwise direction. Clockwise rotation will decrease sensitivity, while counterclockwise adjustment will
increase sensitivity. An increase in sensitivity adjustment results in a single wipe of the front wiper motor.
NOTE: The rain sensor also contains a light sensor. The light sensor is used to control operation of the automatic
headlamps function.
Refer to: Exterior Lighting (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Description and Operation).
WIPER CONTROL SWITCH

The wiper control switch is located on the RH steering column multifunction switch. The switch allows selection of the following
functions:
Slow wipe
Fast wipe
Auto
Flick wipe
Windshield wash and headlamp powerwash (if fitted).
All wiper functions are connected to the instrument cluster by a resistor or series of resistors within the switch. The instrument
cluster uses the returned current to determine the selected function.
WIPER SERVICE POSITION

The wiper service position allows the wipers to be parked in a position to allow easy access to the wiper blades for
replacement. The service position is initiated by pulling the RH steering column multifunction switch towards the steering
wheel and pressing the start/stop button to switch on the ignition. The wipers will move and stop in a vertical position on the
windshield. The RH steering column multifunction switch can be released and the ignition switched off. The service position is
terminated at the next ignition on cycle and the wipers return to their normal park position.
Wipers and Washers - Wipers and Washers
For a detailed description of the wipers and washers, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (501-16 Wipers and Washers)
Wipers and Washers (Description and Operation),

Wipers and Washers (Description and Operation),
Wipers and Washers (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Wiper blade(s) Fuse(s)

Wiper pivot arm shaft Wiring harness
Washer reservoir Electrical connector(s)
Hose(s) Washer pump(s)
Washer jet(s) Wiper motor
the next step.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
into account.

B109512 Wiper On/Off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Relay Wiper On/Off relay control manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit - short to power circuit diagrams and check wiper On/Off relay control circuit for
short to power
B109514 Wiper On/Off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check wiper On/Off
Relay Wiper On/Off relay control relay control circuit for short to ground, open circuit
open circuit
B109612 Wiper High/Low Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Relay Wiper Fast/Slow relay manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check wiper Fast/Slow relay control circuit for
B109614 Wiper High/Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check wiper Fast/Slow
Relay Wiper Fast/Slow relay relay control circuit for short to ground, open circuit
B10AD09 Rain Sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Component failures manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Suspect the rain/light
sensor, check and install a new sensor as required
B10AD11 Rain Sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Rain/light sensor power manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit - short to ground circuit diagrams and check rain/light sensor power circuit for short
to ground
B10AD96 Rain Sensor Suspect the rain/light sensor, check and install a new sensor as
Component internal required
failure
B117712 Screenwash Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check screenwash level
Level Switch Screenwash level switch switch signal circuit for short to power
signal circuit - short to
power
B1C4513 Front Wiper Park Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check windshield wiper
Position Switch Windshield wiper motor motor park switch signal circuit for open circuit
park switch signal circuit -
open circuit
B1C4523 Front Wiper Park Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front wiper park
Position Switch Signal stuck low position switch input circuit for short, open circuit
B1C7812 Powerwash Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check powerwash relay
Powerwash relay control control circuit for short to power
B1C7814 Powerwash Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check powerwash relay
Powerwash relay control control circuit for short to ground, open circuit
open circuit
B1C7911 Front Washer Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check screenwash
Pump Screenwash pump control pump control circuit for short to ground
B1C7913 Front Washer Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Pump Screenwash pump control manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit - open circuit circuit diagrams and check screenwash pump control circuit for
open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
Wipers and Washers - Headlamp Washer Jet
Removal
1. Refer to: Headlamp Assembly (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and

Installation).
Installation

Wipers and Washers - Headlamp Washer Pump
Removal
1.
and Installation).

4.
6.
7. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the seal.
Installation
1. CAUTION: The seals are to be reused unless damaged.

Wipers and Washers - Rain Sensor
Removal
and Installation).
2.
3.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the component is secured in the

retainer.
www.JagDocs.com
Wipers and Washers - Windshield Washer Reservoir
Removal
1.
and Installation).

4.
6.
7.
Installation
1. CAUTION: The seals are to be reused unless damaged.

Wipers and Washers - Windshield Wiper Motor
Removal
Installation).
3. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
NOTE: LHD illustration shown, RHD is similar.
Torque: 12 Nm
4. NOTE: LHD illustration shown, RHD is similar.
5. NOTE: LHD illustration shown, RHD is similar.

NOTE: LHD illustration shown, RHD is similar.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Wipers and Washers - Windshield Wiper Pivot Arm
Removal
CAUTION: Always protect paintwork and glass when removing exterior components.
1.

Installation
1. Install the wiper blade.
2. CAUTION: Align the wiper blades onto the centre of the

windshield circle mark.
NOTE: After the wiper pivot arm nuts have been

tightened to the correct torque value, lift the wiper pivot
arm from the windshield and return to the windshield. Make
sure that wiper blades are not positioned below any point
of the windshield circle mark.
3.
• Torque: 22.1lm
Wipers and Washers - Windshield Washer Pump
Removal
and Installation).
2.
4. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the seal.
Installation
1. CAUTION: The seal is to be reused unless damaged.

Roof Opening Panel -
Roof opening panel frame retaining bolts 9 — 80
Roof opening panel motor retaining bolts 4 — 35
Roof opening panel glass retaining screws 4 — 35
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel - Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
2 Roof opening panel, rocker switch
3 Rear window sunblind, switch
4 Roof opening panel, motor
5 Roof opening panel, control module
6 Roof opening panel
7 Rear window sunblind
8 Rear window sunblind, motor assembly
9 Drain tubes (4 off)
www.JagDocs.com
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel - Overview
Overview
The roof opening panel is operated through a two-way rocker switch located in the roof console. A motor, attached to the front
of the roof-opening-panel frame, drives the glass panel to the tilt, open or closed positions using a pair of steel cables.
Tilt
With the roof opening panel closed, a press and release on the front of the rocker switch, tilts the rear of the panel upwards.
If the switch is pressed again before the full tilt position is reached, the panel stops at the chosen position.
Fully open
With the roof opening panel closed, a press and release on the rear of the rocker switch, moves the panel to the fully open
position automatically. It can be stopped at any point by pressing the button again.
Close
From the fully open position, press and release the front of the switch. The panel will return to the closed position
automatically.
From the tilted position, press and release the rear of the switch. The panel will return to the closed position
automatically.
Anti-trap
The roof opening panel has an 'anti-trap' function which prevents the panel from closing if an obstruction is sensed. When an
obstruction is sensed, the motor will automatically retract the panel as far as possible. When the obstruction is removed, the
panel can be closed by the normal method.
Roof opening sunblind

A sunblind integrated into the roof-opening-panel frame, is operated manually and can be opened or closed when the roof
opening panel is in either the tilted or closed position. When the roof opening panel opens (slides rearwards) the sunblind
automatically slides rearwards and cannot be pulled forward until the roof opening panel is in a forward position.
Rear window sunblind

The rear window sunblind is operated through a switch in the roof console.
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (250 A)
3 Rear window sunblind, switch
4 Rear window sunblind, motor
6 Roof opening panel, control module
7 Roof opening panel, rocker switch
System Operation
Roof opening panel
Operation of the roof opening panel is controlled by the roof opening panel control module, which is integral with the motor.
The control module receives inputs from the CJB, which provides an 'open' or 'close' signal for remote handset operation, and
an 'enable' signal when the vehicle enters power mode 6.
The control module also receives a vehicle speed signal from the ABS module. The vehicle speed signal is used by the control
module to calibrate the anti-trap feature.
If the battery is disconnected, or the power supply is interrupted while the roof opening panel is in a partially open position,
the motor and control module will need to be calibrated to restore full functionality. To recalibrate:
1. Switch ignition on.

2. Press the front of the switch, so the roof opening panel is the tilt position, and then release the switch.
3. Press the front of the switch and hold for thirty seconds.
4. After thirty seconds the roof opening panel will begin to move. Keep the front of the switch pressed until the roof
opening panel has fully opened and then closed.
5. Once the open/close cycle has completed and the roof opening panel has stopped moving, release the switch.
6. The roof opening panel can now be operated as normal.
Drain hoses are connected to the front and rear corners of the roof opening panel frame. The drain hoses are located inside of
the cabin on the 'A' and 'D' post pillars to allow water, which has collected in the frame, to escape. One-way valves fitted to
the end of each drain hose, prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture.
Rear window sunblind

The powered rear window sunblind is operated through a switch in the roof console. Power to the sunblind motor is provided by
a pair of relays located in the CJB when the vehicle enters power mode 4. The sunblind motor is located beneath the rear parcel
shelf and is supplied as a sealed unit with the sunblind mechanism.
If the battery is disconnected or a replacement sunblind is fitted, the motor will require re-calibrating. To re-calibrate the
motor the sunblind should be powered through two-full cycles of movement.
Roof opening panel, motor
The roof opening panel motor has a worm drive which drives a gear in the cast housing attached to the end of the motor. The
gear has a small pinion gear attached to the outer part of its spindle. The pinion engages with two cables to form a rack and
pinion drive. Rotation of the motor turns the pinion which in turn drives the cables in the required direction.
The two cables are attached either side of the pinion. One end of each cable is attached to the guide; the opposite end of
each cable is held in position on the pinion by a metal insert in the frame. The cables run in channels, in the panel frame to
the guides. As the panel is closed the cables are pushed through channels in the front of the frame. The displaced cable is
guided into a further two channels in the frame, which protect the cable and prevent it from snagging. The cables
manufactured from rigid spring steel can pull as well as push the panel along the guides.
The motor contains a micro-switch and Hall effect sensor. Signals received from these components enable the control module
to calculate the exact position of the roof opening panel. The Hall effect sensor is also responsible for the operation of the
anti-trap function.
If the anti-trap feature is activated while the roof opening panel is closing, the panel is reversed for 200mm or as far as
possible. The Hall effect sensor, located in the motor, monitors the speed of the motor and if the speed decreases below a set
threshold, indicating an obstruction, the power feed to the motor is reversed so the panel goes back. In an emergency the
anti-trap function can be overridden by holding the switch in the closed position.
Roof opening panel, control module

The roof opening panel control module is integrated within the motor. The control module receives inputs from the CJB, which
provides an 'open' or 'close' signal for remote handset operation, and an 'enable' signal when the vehicle enters power mode 6.
The control module also contains the algorithm for the anti-trap system and receives a vehicle speed signal from the ABS
module. The vehicle speed signal is used by the control module to calibrate the anti-trap feature.
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel
For a detailed description of the roof opening panel, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (501-17 Roof Opening Panel)
Roof Opening Panel (Description and Operation),

Roof Opening Panel (Description and Operation),
Roof Opening Panel (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Roof opening panel Fuses/relays (refer to electrical guide)

Helixed drive cables Wiring harness
Switch Correct engagement of electrical connectors
Control unit/motor Loose or corroded connections
the next step.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:

B10F211 Sunroof Control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Sunroof enable signal manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit - short to ground circuit diagrams and check sunroof enable signal circuit for short
to ground
B10F212 Sunroof Control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sunroof enable
Sunroof enable signal signal circuit for short to power
B10F213 Sunroof Control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sunroof enable
Sunroof enable signal signal circuit for open circuit
B113D12 Sunroof Global Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Open/Close Roof opening panel global manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Control open/close control circuit - circuit diagrams and check roof opening panel global open/close
short to power control circuit for short to power
B113D14 Sunroof Global Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check roof opening
Open/Close Roof opening panel global panel global open/close control circuit for short to ground, open
Control open/close control circuit - circuit
circuit
www.JagDocs.com
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Alignment
General Procedures
1. With the roof opening panel closed, check the alignment of

the glass to the roof panel. The glass should be central in
its aperture. Profile of sunroof to body should be flush or up
to 1.0 mm (0.40") low all round.
2. Open the roof opening panel blind.
3. Release the cover.

4. Loosen the 4 roof opening panel Torx screws.
5. Align the roof opening panel.

TORQUE: 4 Nm
6. Install the cover.

7. Close the roof opening panel blind.

Roof Opening Panel - Motor Synchronization
General Procedures
1. NOTE: If a new component is installed.
Press and hold the front of the switch, hold down untill the roof opening
panel has completed a full open/close cycle.
The roof opening panel is now synchronized.
2. NOTE: If the removed component is re-installed.
Press and hold the the front of the switch, the roof opening panel will
move to the tilt postion. Release the switch then press and hold the
front of the switch, then the roof opening panel will move slightly more
after 20 seconds.
The roof opening panel is now un-synchronized.
3. NOTE: If the removed component is re-installed.
Press and hold the front of the switch, hold down untill the roof opening
panel has completed a full open/close cycle.
This action must be done within 2-3 seconds of the last action.
The roof opening panel is now synchronized.
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose
Removal
and Installation).
2.
4. Refer to: Headliner (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal

and Installation).
5.
6.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Frame
Removal
1. Refer to: Motor Synchronization (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, General

Procedures).

and Installation).
3. Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Glass (501-17 Roof Opening Panel,
4.
5.
technician.
NOTE: Note the fitted position of the spacers.
Torque: 8 Nm

Torque: 4 Nm
8.
9.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is correctly located on the

locating dowels.
NOTE: Replace the spacers to the fitted position.

Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Glass
Removal
1.
2.
Repeat procedure for the other side.
Torque: 4 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Motor
Removal

2. Torque: 4 Nm
Installation

Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Rear Drain Hose
Removal


and Installation).
3. NOTE: RH side only.
4. NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar.

Installation

Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Weatherstrip
Removal
1. Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Glass (501-17 Roof Opening Panel,
2. NOTE: Make sure that this component is installed to

the noted removal position.
Installation

Bumpers -

Radiator splash shield outer retaining bolts 3 - 26
Radiator splash shield inner retaining bolts 7 - 62
Radiator splash shield inner retaining screws 2 - 18
Front bumper cover retaining bolts 2 - 18
Rear bumper cover retaining bolts 7 - 62
Rear bumper retaining bolts 25 18 -
www.JagDocs.com
Bumpers - Front Bumper
Removal
1. The front bumper is serviced as a separate bolt-on panel.
2. The front bumper is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
3. WARNING: The hood and its associated components form part of the
pedestrian protection system, it is essential that any repair or
replacement operations do not affect the safe working of the system.


the following:
and Operation) /

6. Remove the front bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19
Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
7. Release and position the front bumper wiring harness and the hood
release cable to one side.
8. NOTE: Observe the different head sizes of the bolts.
Remove the front bumper.

access only.
Remove the horns.

For additional information, refer to: Horn (413-06 Horn, Removal and
Installation).
Installation
1. Offer up the panel. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if

not rectify and recheck before proceeding.
2. Install the front bumper.

Tighten to 25Nm.

removal procedure.
Bumpers - Front Bumper Cover
Removal
2. Torque: 3 Nm
3. Torque:
Retaining screws 2 Nm
Retaining bolts 7 Nm
4. Torque: 2 Nm

technician.
6. NOTE: On both sides.

technician.
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure
www.JagDocs.com
Bumpers - Front Bumper Cover Insert
Removal

Installation).
2.

Installation

Bumpers - Rear Bumper Cover
Removal
NOTE: Removal steps may contain installation details.
1. Remove the rear lamp assemblies.
Refer to: Rear Lamp Assembly (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and
Installation).
2. Torque: 7 Nm
3.
4.
5.
Installation

Bumpers - Rear Bumper
Removal
1. Refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and

Installation).
2.
3.
4. Torque: 25 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Safety Belt System -
Front safety belt retractor to seat track retaining bolt 40 30 -
Front safety belt retractor retaining bolt 40 30 -
Front safety belt D loop retaining bolt 40 30 -
Front safety belt buckle retaining bolt 40 30 -
Front safety belt shoulder height adjuster retaining bolts 25 18 -
Rear centre safety belt retractor retaining bolts 40 30 -
Rear safety belt long end retaining bolts 40 30 -
Rear safety belt D loop retaining bolt 40 30 -
Rear safety belt long end retaining bolt 40 30 -
Rear safety belt buckle retaining bolts 40 30 -
Safety Belt System - Safety Belt System - Component Location
NOTE: Authoring Template
Item Description
1 Belt tension sensor - if fitted
2 RH (right-hand) front safety belt retractor
3 RH front safety belt
4 RH rear safety belt
5 RH rear safety belt retractor
6 Child seat tethers (3 off)
7 Center rear safety belt retractor
8 LH (left-hand) rear safety belt retractor
9 LH rear safety belt buckle
10 RH rear and center safety belt buckles
11 LH front safety belt
12 LH front safety belt retractor
13 LH front safety belt buckle and pre-tensioner
14 RH front safety belt buckle and pre-tensioner
Safety Belt System - Safety Belt System - Overview
Authoring Template
OVERVIEW
A three point safety belt is fitted to all seating positions. Each safety belt retractor incorporates an emergency locking feature.
The emergency locking retractor incorporates 2 mechanical inertia devices. One inertia device activates if the safety belt is
subjected to a sharp pull. The second inertia device activates if the vehicle is subject to a sudden deceleration or is on a
severe incline.
North American Specification (NAS) safety belt retractors also include an automatic locking feature. The Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) is fitted to all passenger seating positions and allows the safety belt to be tensioned to aid the safe fitment
of child or booster seats. For additional information, refer to the Owners Handbook.
NAS vehicles are also fitted with a belt tension sensor on the front passenger seat. The belt tension sensor is incorporated
into the seat belt lower anchorage and is attached to the seat frame by an M10 Torx head bolt. The belt tension sensor forms
part of the SRS (supplemental restraint system) occupancy detection and classification feature.
The center rear safety belt features a mini-buckle lower anchorage. The mini-buckle is disengaged by inserting a suitable tool
into the small aperture on the front face of the housing.
To aid the fitment of child seats, 3 tethers are located on the rear parcel shelf. Each tether is attached to the parcel shelf with
an M10 Torx head bolt.
A safety belt warning indicator is located in the instrument cluster to remind front seat passengers to fasten their safety belts.
The warning indicator will illuminate if the safety belt of an occupied front seat is not fastened.
Refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01, Description and Operation).
Safety Belt System - Safety Belt System - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
Refer to: Safety Belt System (501-20A Safety Belt System, Description and Operation).
www.JagDocs.com
Safety Belt System - Safety Belt System
For a detailed description of the seatbelt system and operation, refer to the relevant description and operation section of the
workshop manual REFER to: (501-20A Safety Belt System)
Safety Belt System (Description and Operation),

Safety Belt System (Description and Operation),
Safety Belt System (Description and Operation).
Safety Information
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment the back-up power supply must be depleted before beginning any work on the SRS system
or its components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury
Do not use a multimeter to probe an SRS module. It is possible for the power from the multimeter battery to trigger the
activation of the module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury
NOTE: Do not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on the SRS system or
components
Power supply depletion
Before beginning any work on the SRS system or related components:
1. Remove the ignition key
2. Disconnect the battery leads, ground first
3. Wait 2 minutes for the power circuit to discharge
There are comprehensive instructions on the correct procedures for SRS system repairs, refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines including pinpoint tests
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the seatbelt
Visual Inspection
Check for the installation of non-standard accessories which may affect or Fuses
obstruct the function of the seatbelt system Wiring harness fault
Frayed or damaged webbing Correct engagement of electrical
Missing or damaged button stop connectors
Pretensioner(s) Buckles/Stalks Loose or corroded connections
Warning lamp bulb(s)
Impact sensor(s)
Buckle sensor(s)
Pretensioner(s)
Belt tension sensor(s)
Restraints control module
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, carry out the test methods described below, alternatively check for diagnostic
trouble codes and refer to the relevant diagnostic trouble code index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to section 100-00.
REFER to: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (100-00, Description and Operation).
Symptom Chart for Seatbelt Rows 1, 2

Seatbelt jammed -
Webbing tight Backlock effect in action (webbing retracted GO to Pinpoint Test A.
quickly and came to sudden stop) GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Seatbelt retractor not installed correctly See the automatic locking retractor
Automatic locking retractor activated (clicking description below
– during retraction only)
Seatbelt jammed -
Webbing loose Seatbelt webbing trapped in seat GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Seatbelt retractor webbing guide loose GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Twist in webbing GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Interference in webbing routing GO to Pinpoint Test E.
D-loop not rotating correctly GO to Pinpoint Test G.
Seatbelt - Intermittent
jamming Seatbelt retractor not installed correctly GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Seatbelt - Slow retraction

Twist in seatbelt webbing GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Seatbelt retractor not installed correctly GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Foreign object/debris GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Seatbelt - Not retracting

Twist in seatbelt webbing GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Foreign object/debris GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Seatbelt - Not extracting

Backlock effect-in action (webbing retracted GO to Pinpoint Test A.
quickly and came to sudden stop) GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Seatbelt retractor not installed correctly GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Seatbelt retractor webbing guide loose GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Twist in seatbelt webbing GO to Pinpoint Test G.
D-loop not rotating correctly GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Foreign object/debris See the automatic locking retractor
Automatic locking retractor activated (clicking description below
– during retraction only)
Seatbelt - Noisy during

operation Automatic locking retractor activated (clicking– GO to Pinpoint Test B.
during retraction only) GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Interference in webbing routing (rubbing)
Seatbelt buckle - Not

latching / jammed Foreign object/debris
CAUTION: Do not insert any objects or
tools into the buckle head
GO to Pinpoint Test H.
Inertia Reel Seatbelts

The vehicle is equipped with (two row one) and (three row two) inertia reel seatbelts
These seatbelts are "dual sensitive" which means that they have:
Car sense system - A vehicle motion sensor, which locks the seatbelt webbing under braking, cornering, on steep
hills and in adverse camber conditions, when parked on a steep incline or driveway or two wheels on a high curb
Web sense system - A webbing motion sensor, which locks when the seatbelt webbing is extracted suddenly
The seatbelts in the following positions are equipped with an automatic locking retractor function:
Carline Market Seat position Automatic Locking Retractor Installed From Model Year
XK (X150) All Driver No 2007
XK (X150) ROW Passenger No 2007
XK (X150) US Passenger Yes 2007
XK (X150) ROW Row 2 Yes 2007
XK (X150) US Row 2 Yes 2007
XF (X250) All Driver No 2009
XF (X250) ROW Passenger No 2009
XF (X250) US Passenger Yes 2009
XF (X250) ROW Row 2 No 2009
XF (X250) US Row 2 Yes 2009
XJ (X351) All Driver No 2010
XJ (X351) ROW Passenger No 2010
XJ (X351) US Passenger Yes 2010
XJ (X351) ROW Row 2 No 2010
XJ (X351) US Row 2 Yes 2010
The automatic locking retractor function is a feature to secure a child seat or heavy load to the seat
Activation Deactivation
Automatic locking retractor is deactivated by
NOTE: When automatic locking retractor is activated, no further webbing allowing the webbing to retract until the
can be drawn from the seatbelt retractor, prior to disengagement of the clicking stops (close to park position)
automatic locking. This can be mistaken as a jammed seatbelt retractor
Activated by total extraction of the webbing

When activated the automatic locking retractor is identified by a clicking noise When deactivated the automatic locking
during webbing retraction retractor seatbelt changes state, from a static
seatbelt to an automatic seatbelt
Seatbelt Locking Test

With the vehicle stationary and on level ground take firm hold of the seatbelt webbing (on the tongue side of the upper
seatbelt anchor) and withdraw sharply, the retractor should lock. Preventing further webbing release (repeat this test 3
times). Any seatbelt retractor which fails to lock must not be used and a new seatbelt must be installed.
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00 or for removal and
installation/description and operation see Section 501-20.
Diagnostic Guide Inertia Reel Seatbelts
PINPOINT TEST A : BACKLOCK
CONDITIONS
A1: BACKLOCK
1 Visually inspect the condition of the suspect seatbelt
2 Draw a maximum of 20mm of the webbing from the seatbelt retractor with moderate force. Then
release the webbing
3 Check for correct operation twice
Does the webbing move freely then retract correctly?
Yes
No
For first row seatbelt GO to Pinpoint Test C. For second and third row seatbelts GO to Pinpoint Test B.
PINPOINT TEST B : WEBBING-TRAPPED IN SEAT
CONDITIONS
B1: WEBBING-TRAPPED IN SEAT
1 Visually inspect the condition of the suspect seatbelt
2 Lift the seat base or release the seat backrest as required
3 Free the trapped webbing, allow the webbing to retract Note: If the automatic locking retractor is
activated, allow the webbing to retract until the clicking stops
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : SEATBELT RETRACTOR-WEBBING GUIDE LOOSE
CONDITIONS
C1: SEATBELT RETRACTOR-WEBBING GUIDE LOOSE
1 Refer to 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, remove any trim panels
required to expose the D loop (anchor point) and seatbelt retractor
2 Check the webbing is not trapped or twisted and is centrally located on the seatbelt retractor spindle
3 Attempt to withdraw the webbing from the seatbelt retractor NOTE: If the seatbelt webbing is
jammed, the automatic locking retractor could be engaged
4 To release the automatic locking retractor, manually wind the webbing onto the spindle until the
automatic locking retractor deactivates (clicking stops)
5 Fully extract webbing
6 Confirm webbing guide location is correct , Confirm the fixing lugs are correctly located in the retractor
frame
7 Allow webbing to retract
Yes
Refer to the 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, reinstall any trim panels,
ensure there are no obstructions and the webbing does not catch or rub. No further action required
No
PINPOINT TEST D : TWIST IN WEBBING
CONDITIONS
D1: TWIST IN WEBBING
1 Refer to section 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, remove any trim
panels required to expose the D loop (anchor point)
2 Twist the webbing back the correct way in the loop
3 Pass the twist through the pillar loop or escutcheon as required
Yes
No
GO to Pinpoint Test E.
PINPOINT TEST E : INTERFERENCE-WEBBING ROUTING
CONDITIONS
E1: INTERFERENCE-WEBBING ROUTING
1 Refer to the 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, remove any trim panels
required to expose the D loop (anchor point)
2 Remove obstructions and foreign objects ensure the webbing does not catch or rub
3 Confirm the seatbelt does not contact the wiring harness
Yes
No
GO to Pinpoint Test F.
PINPOINT TEST F : SEATBELT RETRACTOR-INCORRECT INSTALLATION
CONDITIONS
F1: SEATBELT RETRACTOR-INCORRECT INSTALLATION
required to expose the D loop (anchor point) and the seatbelt retractor
2 Refer to the 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, correctly reinstall the
seatbelt retractor ensure that the locating "T bar" and "anti rotation pins" are correctly located
Yes
No
GO to Pinpoint Test G.
PINPOINT TEST G : D-LOOP NOT ROTATING CORRECTLY
CONDITIONS
G1: D-LOOP NOT ROTATING CORRECTLY
required to expose the D loop (anchor point) and the seatbelt retractor
2 Ensure there are no obstructions and the webbing does not catch or rub, the D loop (anchor point)
rotates correctly and if installed the confirm the height adjuster operates correctly
Yes
No
Replace as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual, or determine if any prior
approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component
PINPOINT TEST H : SEATBELT BUCKLE – NOT LATCHING/JAMMED
CONDITIONS
H1: SEATBELT BUCKLE – NOT LATCHING/JAMMED
CAUTION: Do not insert any objects or tools into the buckle head
1 Visually inspect the buckle head for evidence of damage. If damaged replace as required
2 Depress the buckle release (red button) and (Using a torch) carry out visual inspection for any
evidence of debris/material or foreign objects in the buckle head
3 If required remove the pretensioner from the vehicle. Remove the seat. Remove the pretensioner from
the seat frame
4 Do not insert any objects or tools buckle head With the buckle removed invert and attempt to shake
out any debris
5 Attempt to latch the tongue in the buckle
Does the seat belt buckle operate correctly
Yes
Reinstall any components, no further action required
No
Replace the pretensioner, REFER to:
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (100-00 General
Information, Description and Operation),
Rear Safety Belt Buckle (501-20A Safety Belt System, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Safety Belt System - Front Safety Belt Buckle
Removal
1. Refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00 General Information,

Torque: 35 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is installed. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.

Safety Belt System - Front Safety Belt Retractor
Removal
Torque: 40 Nm
3. Refer to: B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
4.
5. Torque: 40 Nm
6. Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Fixings must be started by hand to avoid damaging

threads.

Safety Belt System - Rear Center Safety Belt Retractor
Removal
and Installation).
2. Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Safety Belt System - Rear Safety Belt Buckle
Removal
1.
2. Torque: 40 Nm
Installation

Safety Belt System - Rear Safety Belt Retractor
Removal
1. Refer to: C-Pillar Lower Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
2. Torque: 40 Nm
3.
Installation

Safety Belt System - Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster
Removal
2. Torque: 40 Nm
3. Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Supplemental Restraint System -
Description Nm Lb/Ft Lb/In
Passenger air bag module retaining nuts 6 - 55
Passenger air bag earth lead retaining bolt 9 - 80
Restraints control module (RCM) retaining nuts 10 - 89
Side air curtain module inflator retaining bolts 9 - 80
Side air curtain module tether straps retaining bolts 9 - 80
Side air bag module retaining nuts 7 - 62
Side impact sensor retaining bolt 10 - 89
Front crash sensor retaining bolt 10 - 89
Clock spring retaining screws 5 - 44
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION SHEET 1 OF 2
Item Description
1 LH (left-hand) curtain airbag
2 Front passenger airbag
3 RH (right-hand) curtain airbag
4 Passenger thorax airbag
5 Front passenger seat safety belt pretensioner
7 Driver's seat safety belt pretensioner
8 Driver's thorax airbag
9 Driver's airbag
www.JagDocs.com
COMPONENT LOCATION SHEET 2 OF 2
Item Description
1 Occupant classification system pressure pad (NAS only)
2 Safety belt tension sensor (NAS only)
3 Occupant detection system pad (all, except NAS)
4 Occupant classification system control module (NAS only)
5 RH side impact sensor (pressure sensor)
6 RH rear impact sensor
7 LH rear impact sensor
8 Passenger airbag deactivation LED (light emitting diode)
9 Driver's seat position sensor
10 LH side impact sensor (pressure sensor)
12 LH front impact sensor
13 RH front impact sensor
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Overview
OVERVIEW
WARNING: All pyrotechnic devices are dangerous. Before performing any procedures on any pyrotechnic device, read all
information contained within the Standard Workshop Practices section of this manual.
Refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
The SRS (supplemental restraint system) provides additional protection for the vehicle occupants in certain impact conditions.
The system is controlled by the RCM (restraints control module), which is mounted beneath the floor console. The system
includes twin stage drivers and front passenger airbags.
The RCM receives inputs from various sensors around the vehicle and determines which, if any, airbags should be deployed.
The SRS features an occupant detection system. The occupant detection system comprises a mat fitted inside the front
passenger seat. By monitoring the condition of the mat, the RCM can determine if the front passenger seat is occupied. It uses
this information to determine which airbags to deploy in the event of an impact. This information is also used to illuminate the
safety belt instrument cluster warning lamp if the front passenger seat is occupied and the safety belt is not engaged.
North American Specification (NAS) vehicles also feature an occupant classification system. The occupant classification system
comprises a control module, pressure pad and safety belt tension sensor. The system can determine the size and weight of the
front seat passenger. This information is transmitted to the RCM over the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus. The
RCM uses this information to help determine which airbags to deploy in the event of an impact.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
Item Description
1 Battery
4 Occupant classification system control module (NAS only)
5 Safety belt tension sensor (NAS only)
6 Occupant classification system pressure pad (NAS only)
7 Passenger airbag deactivation LED (light emitting diode)
9 Occupant detection system pad (all, except NAS)
10 Driver's seat position sensor
11 Front passenger seat safety belt pretensioner
12 Driver's seat safety belt pretensioner
13 LH (left-hand) front impact sensor
14 RH (right-hand) front impact sensor
15 RH rear impact sensor
16 RH side impact sensor
17 LH rear impact sensor
18 LH side impact sensor
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB
3 RJB
4 Front passenger airbag
5 Clockspring
6 Driver's airbag
7 Front passenger seat safety belt switch
8 Driver's seat safety belt switch
9 LH curtain airbag
10 Driver's seat thorax airbag
11 Front passenger seat thorax airbag
12 RH curtain airbag
13 RCM
System Operation
System Operation
In a collision, the sudden deceleration or acceleration is measured by the impact sensors and the accelerometers in the
restraints control module. The restraints control module evaluates the readings to determine the impact point on the vehicle
and whether the deceleration/acceleration readings exceed the limits for firing any of the airbags, pretensioners, and battery
disconnect unit. During a collision, the restraints control module only fires the airbags and pretensioners if the safing function
confirms that the data from the impact sensor(s) indicates an impact limit has been exceeded.
The RCM incorporates the following impact thresholds to cater for different accident scenarios:
Front impact, pretensioners

Front impact, driver and passenger airbags stage 1, belt unfastened
Front impact, driver and passenger airbags stage 1, belt fastened
Front impact, driver and passenger airbags stage 2, belt unfastened
Front impact, driver and passenger airbags stage 2, belt fastened
Rear impact
Driver side impact
Passenger side impact.
The front impact thresholds increase in severity from pretensioners to driver and passenger airbag stage 2, belt fastened (refer
to list above).
Firing Strategies
The safety belt pretensioners are fired when the pretensioner impact limit is exceeded. The RCM only fires the pretensioners if
the related safety belt is fastened.
The driver and passenger airbags are only fired in a frontal impact. If an impact exceeds a stage 1 limit, but is less than the
corresponding stage 2 limit, only one inflator in each airbag is fired (stage 2 is still fired for disposal after a delay of 100ms).
If an impact exceeds the stage 2 limit, the two inflators in each airbag are fired simultaneously.
The passenger airbag is disabled unless the front passenger seat is occupied by a large person (NAS only), or the passenger
airbag deactivation switch is on (all except NAS & AUS).
The stage 2 inflator of the driver airbag is disabled if the driver seat is forward of the switching point of the seat position
sensor.
If there is a fault with a safety belt buckle sensor, the RCM assumes the related safety belt is fastened for the pretensioner
firing strategy and unfastened for the driver and passenger airbag firing strategies. If there is a fault with the occupant
classification sensor, the RCM disables the passenger airbag. If there is a fault with the passenger airbag deactivation switch,
the RCM disables the passenger airbag.
If a side impact limit is exceeded, the RCM fires the side airbag and the side head airbag on that side of the vehicle. If the
side impact limit on the front passenger side of the vehicle is exceeded, the RCM also evaluates the input from the occupant
classification sensor, and fires the side airbag only if the front passenger seat is occupied by a large person (NAS only).
If multiple impacts occur during a crash event, after responding to the primary impact the RCM will output the appropriate fire
signals in response to any further impacts if unfired units are available.
Front and Rear Impact Firing Strategy (All Except NAS)

Safety Belt Status Strategy
Driver Passenger Applicable Pretensioner Driver airbag Passenger airbag
Fastened - Fired at pretensioner threshold Fired at belt fastened threshold -
Unfastened - Not fired Fired at belt unfastened threshold -
- Fastened Fired at pretensioner threshold - Fired at belt fastened threshold
- Unfastened Not fired - Fired at belt unfastened threshold
www.JagDocs.com
Front and Rear Impact Firing Strategy (NAS Only)
Safety Belt Status Passenger Seat Strategy
Driver Passenger Status Applicable Pretensioner Driver airbag Passenger airbag
Fastened - - Fired at pretensioner Fired at belt fastened -
threshold threshold
Unfastened - - Not fired Fired at belt unfastened -
threshold
- Fastened Occupied allow Fired at pretensioner - Fired at belt fastened
threshold threshold
- Fastened Unoccupied Fired at pretensioner - Not fired
inhibit/empty threshold
- Unfastened Occupied allow Not fired - Fired at belt unfastened
threshold
Unfastened Unoccupied Not fired - Not fired
inhibit/empty
The battery disconnect unit is fired:
At driver and passenger airbag belt fastened threshold in a frontal impact

At the driver and passenger side impact threshold in a side impact
At the rear impact threshold in a rear impact.
Crash Signal
When the RCM outputs any of the fire signals it also outputs a crash signal to the RJB and the ECM (engine control module) on
the high speed CAN. The crash signal is also hardwired to the ECM and the RJB. The instrument cluster picks up the crash
signal from the high speed CAN and gateways it to the LCM (lighting control module). On receipt of the crash signal, the RJB
goes into a crash mode and the ECM cuts the power supply to the fuel pump relay. In the crash mode, the RJB:
Activates all of the unlock signals of the vehicle locking system, even if the vehicle is already unlocked.
Ignores all locking/superlocking inputs until it receives an unlock input, when it returns the locking system to normal
operation.
Activates the interior lamps. The interior lamps remain on permanently until they are manually switched off at the lamp
unit, or the RJB crash mode is switched off and they return to normal operation.
Disables the rear window child lock input until the crash mode is switched off.
Sends a crash message to the LCM, to activate the hazard flashers. The hazard flashers remain on until cancelled by
the hazard warning switch or the crash mode is switched off.
The RJB crash mode is switched off by a valid locking and unlocking cycle of the locking system.
Restraints Control Module
The RCM is installed on the top of the transmission tunnel, in line with the B pillars, and controls operation of the SRS
(supplemental restraint system). The main functions of the RCM include:
Crash detection and recording

airbag and pre-tensioner firing
Self-test and system monitoring, with status indication via the airbag warning lamp and non-volatile storage of fault
information.
The RCM determines which elements of the SRS are to be deployed by using two internal areas:
Crash severity evaluation
Deployment handler.
Crash severity evaluation evaluates crash severity by using data from the RCM internal accelerometer, the front crash sensor
and the safety belt buckle sensor. Based on this data, the RCM decides which level of airbag module deployment is required
and forwards the information to the second area, the deployment handler.
The deployment handler evaluates the status of the seat track position sensor and safety belt buckle sensors before a decision
is made about which restraints should finally be deployed.
Data from the side crash sensors is used by the RCM in conjunction with acceleration data from the RCM internal accelerometer
to make a deployment decision. The RCM processes the acceleration data and subject to an impact being of high enough
severity, decides whether the side airbag module should be deployed.
On board testing of the airbag modules, front safety belt pretensioner firing circuits, warning indicator circuits and module
status (the crash and side impact sensors perform basic self-tests) is performed by the RCM together with the storing of fault
codes.
The RCM drives the SRS indicator on the instrument pack via a CAN signal. If the warning lamp fails, a fault code is recorded
and a warning tone is sounded in place of the lamp if a further fault occurs. It also provides a temporary back-up power supply
to operate the airbag modules in the event that in crash conditions, the battery supply is lost. In the event of a crash, it
records certain data which can be accessed via the diagnostic connector.
A safing sensor in the RCM provides confirmation of an impact to verify if airbag and pretensioner activation is necessary. A
roll-over sensor monitors the lateral attitude of the vehicle. Various firing strategies are employed by the RCM to ensure that
during an accident only the appropriate airbags and pretensioners are fired. The firing strategy used also depends on the
inputs from the safety belt switches and the occupant monitoring system.
An energy reserve in the RCM ensures there is always a minimum of 150 milliseconds of stored energy available if the power
supply from the ignition switch is disrupted during a crash. The stored energy is sufficient to produce firing signals for the
driver airbag, the passenger airbag and the safety belt pretensioners.
When the ignition is switched on, the RCM performs a self-test and then performs cyclical monitoring of the system. If a fault
is detected the RCM stores a related fault code and illuminates the airbag warning indicator. The faults can be retrieved by the
recommended Jaguar diagnostic tool over the CAN bus. If a fault that could cause a false fire signal is detected, the RCM
disables the respective firing circuit, and keeps it disabled during a crash event.
Clock Spring
The clockspring is installed on the steering column to provide the electrical interface between the fixed wiring harness of the
steering column and the components that rotate with the steering wheel, i.e. the driver airbag, the horn and the steering
wheel switch packs.
The clockspring consists of a plastic cassette which incorporates an outer cover fixed to the steering column and an inner rotor
which turns with the steering wheel. Four securing lugs attach the cover to the multifunction switch on the steering column.
The rotor is keyed to the steering wheel by a drive peg. A lug on the underside of the rotor operates the self-cancelling feature
of the turn signal indicator switch. A ribbon lead, threaded on rollers in the rotor, links two connectors on the cover to two
connectors on the rotor. Link leads for the driver airbag are installed in one of the connectors on the rotor.
To prevent damage to the ribbon lead, both the steering and the clockspring must be centralized when removing and installing
the clockspring or the steering wheel. The clockspring is centralized when the drive peg is at six o'clock and 50 - 100% of a
yellow wheel is visible in the viewing window.
Replacement clocksprings are fitted with a stopper, which locks the cover to the rotor, in the central position. The stopper must
be broken off when the replacement clockspring is installed.
Drivers Airbag Module
The driver airbag module is controlled by the RCM which chooses between single or dual stage deployment, depending on the
occupant position and the crash severity. To reduce the risk of an airbag module induced injury to a driver that is positioned
close to the steering wheel, the airbag module deploys radially. It has a non-azide propellant that reduces particulates and
effluents. It consists of a two stage inflator with separate chambers for the two inflation stages, each being independently
activated by the RCM. It has two electrical connectors that are color coded and mechanically keyed to the respective connector
on the inflator.
Passenger Airbag Module
The passenger airbag module is controlled by the RCM which chooses between single or dual stage deployment, depending on
the occupant status and the crash severity. It consists of a two stage inflator with two airbag electrical connectors to
accommodate the two stage inflation.
The heated gas inflator consists of a high-pressure mix of clean air and hydrogen gas, triggered by two separate ignition
squibs. It produces a controlled generation of clean gas to rapidly fill the airbag. It is classified as a stored flammable gas
(not as an explosive) and as such, has less restrictive storage and transportation requirements. It produces a very clean burn
and almost no particulates and is almost free of any toxins, making disposal or recycling much easier.
Side Air Curtains
Side air curtains protect against head injuries in a side impact, while also helping to ensure unrestrained occupants are not
ejected through open or broken windows during a rollover event.
A single inflator mounted behind the rear seat unfurls the curtain and fills five separate chambers to provide head protection
cushions for occupants in side-impact and roll-over events. Steel ramps guarantee the curtain does not snag on the interior
trim as it unfurls, while tethers at the front and rear of the curtain ensure the curtain is held taut.
The side air curtain deflation characteristics are deliberately slow to ensure it remains inflated throughout the duration of a
vehicle rollover event.
Airbag - Side (Passenger/Driver) Module
A side airbag is attached to the outside of each front seat backrest frame, under the backrest cover.
The side airbags are handed, and each consist of a molded plastic case which contains the folded airbag and the inflator. A
cable connects the igniter of the inflator to a connector in the main seat harness connector block located under the front edge
of the seat cushion.
When the airbag deploys it forces the front edge of the molded plastic case apart and splits open the backrest cover.
The side airbags use compressed argon as the inflation medium. The inflated volume of each side airbag is 12 liters (0.42 ft3).
Impact/Pressure Sensors
Impact Sensor
Pressure Sensor
Impact sensors are installed in the front and both sides of the vehicle. The use of multiple impact sensors provides shorter
airbag trigger times, through faster detection of lateral and longitudinal acceleration, and improves detection accuracy.
There are two front impact sensors attached to the inner side of the upper front crossmember.
There are four side impact/pressure sensors located in the passenger compartment, as follows:
One on each side mounted in the front door panels (pressure sensors)
One on each side attached to the body by the rear wheel arch.
Each impact sensor incorporates an accelerometer and a microchip powered by a feed from the RCM. The power feed also
provides the interface connection through which the side impact sensor communicates with the RCM using serial data
messages. Acceleration is evaluated by the microchip and transmitted to the restraints control module, which then makes the
decision on whether or not to activate the airbags and pretensioners.
When the ignition is switched on, the RCM supplies power to the impact sensors, which perform a self-test. After satisfactory
self tests the impact sensors continually output 'digital acceleration' messages to the restraints control module. If a fault is
detected the relevant impact sensor sends a fault message, instead of the digital acceleration message, to the restraints
control module. The RCM then stores a related fault code and illuminates the airbag warning indicator. Faults can be retrieved
by the Jaguar approved diagnostic system from the RCM via the high speed CAN bus connection.
www.JagDocs.com
Seat Position Sensor
The seat position sensor allows the RCM to detect when the driver seat is forward of a given point on the seat track. The seat
position sensor consists of a Hall effect sensor attached to the driver seat frame. While the ignition is on, the RCM supplies
the sensor with power, and monitors the return current. When the seat frame moves forwards, the sensor moves over the edge
of the seat track, which changes the reluctance of the sensor. The change of current is detected by the RCM and used as a
switching point. The switching point is when the center of the sensor is 3 ± 4 mm from the leading edge of the seat track.
When the driver seat is forward of the switching point, the RCM increases the time delay between firing the two stages of the
inflator in the driver airbag. When the driver seat is rearward of the switching point, the RCM uses the normal time delay
between firing the two stages.
Safety Belt Sensor

A safety belt switch is installed in the buckle of each front safety belt to provide the RCM with a status signal of the related
safety belt(s). When the safety belt is unfastened the switch outputs a low current to the RCM. When the safety belt is
fastened the switch outputs a high current to the RCM.
Pretensioners
Item Description
1 Front seat safety belt switch
2 Front seat safety belt pretensioner
The pretensioners are used to tighten the front safety belts during a collision to ensure the occupants are securely held in
their seats. A pretensioner is integrated into each front safety belt buckle and attached to a bracket on the inboard side of the
seat.
Each pretensioner has a tube containing propellant and a piston. The piston is attached to a steel cable, the opposite end of
which is attached to the safety belt buckle. A squib in the base of the tube provides an ignition source when triggered by a fire
signal from the RCM.
On receipt of a fire signal from the RCM, the squib ignites the propellant. The propellant produces nitrogen gas that rapidly
expands to drive the piston along the tube, pulling the cable and drawing the buckle downwards.
Airbag Warning Indicator
The airbag warning indicator consists of a red LED behind a SRS graphic in the instrument cluster.
Operation of the airbag warning indicator is controlled by a high speed CAN bus message from the RCM to the instrument
cluster. The RCM sends the signal to illuminate the airbag warning indicator if a fault is detected, and for approximately 6
seconds during the bulb check at the beginning of each ignition cycle.
Occupant Monitoring
There are two types of occupant monitoring:
In all markets except NAS & Australia, vehicles have an occupant detection sensor
In NAS markets, vehicles have an occupant classification system
For markets which have an occupant detection sensor, this has no interface with the restraints system and only provides the
belt reminder function.
For markets that have an occupant classification system, this provides the RCM with the occupancy status of the front
passenger seat. The restraints control module uses this and the seat buckle status in the evaluation of the firing strategy for
the passenger front airbag, side airbag, and pretensioner.
Safety Belt Sensors

The buckle of each front safety belt incorporates a Hall effect sensor that provides a safety belt status signal to the RCM. The
RCM broadcasts the status of the two front safety belts on the high speed CAN bus for use by the instrument cluster. In the
event of a front impact the RCM will deploy the pretensioners provided the safety belt buckles are fastened. The safety belt
buckle pretensioners have a lower deployment threshold than that required by the airbags. Hence it is possible during a minor
collision, which exceeds the deployment threshold and will deploy only the safety belt buckle pretensioners.
Passenger Airbag Deactivation Indicator
Passenger Airbag Deactivation Warning Lamp
The passenger airbag deactivation indicator is installed on the center switch pack of the instrument panel. When appropriate,
the indicator illuminates to advise front seat occupants that the passenger airbag is disabled. Operation of the indicator is
controlled by the RCM. The RCM illuminates the indicator when:
There is a fault with the passenger airbag firing circuit(s).

The passenger airbag is deactivated with the passenger airbag deactivation switch (where fitted).
Required by passenger seat occupant monitoring (see below).
Passenger Airbag Deactivation Switch (All Except NAS)

The passenger airbag deactivation switch provides a method of manually disabling the passenger airbag. The switch is
installed in the front passenger end of the instrument panel and operated by the ignition key.
When the passenger airbag deactivation switch is operated, it changes a ground connection between two pins in the
connectors of the RCM. When the passenger airbag deactivation switch is selected to OFF, the RCM disables the passenger
airbag and, if the front passenger seat is occupied, illuminates the passenger airbag deactivation indicator.
Occupant Detection System

There are two types of occupant monitoring:
In all markets except NAS & Australia, vehicles have an occupant detection sensor
In NAS markets, vehicles have an occupant classification system
For markets which have an occupant detection sensor, this has no interface with the restraints system and only provides the
belt reminder function.
For markets that have an occupant classification system, this provides the RCM with the occupancy status of the front
passenger seat. The RCM uses this and the seat buckle status in the evaluation of the firing strategy for the passenger front
airbag, side airbag, and pretensioner.
The occupant classification system can determine if the front passenger seat is unoccupied, occupied by a small person, or
occupied by a large person. The occupant classification system consists of:
A pressure pad, installed under the cushion of the front passenger seat, which is connected to a pressure sensor
A safety belt tension sensor, integrated into the anchor point of the front passenger safety belt
An occupant classification module, installed under the front passenger seat.
The pressure pad is a silicone filled bladder. Any load on the pressure pad is detected by the pressure sensor.
The safety belt tension sensor is a strain gauge that measures the load applied by the safety belt anchor to the anchor bolt.
The sensor is located in the lower safety belt anchor point.
SAFETY BELT TENSION SENSOR (NAS only)
The occupant classification module supplies a reference voltage to the pressure sensor and the safety belt tension sensor and,
from the returned signals, measures the loads acting on the pressure pad and the safety belt tension sensor. The load
measurement from the safety belt tension sensor is used to produce a correction factor for the load measurement from the
pressure pad. The tightness of the safety belt affects the load acting on the pressure pad, so without the correction factor the
occupant classification module cannot derive an accurate occupancy status.
The occupant classification module translates the load readings into a seat occupancy status and transmits the result to the
RCM, on a dedicated high speed CAN bus link. The occupant classification module incorporates two load limits for the seat
cushion: When the load exceeds the lower limit, but is less than the upper limit, the occupant is classified as small; when the
upper limit is exceeded, the occupant is classified as large.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
For a detailed description of the supplemental restraints system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the workshop manual. REFER to: (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System)
Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (Description and Operation),
Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (Description and Operation),
Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (Description and Operation).
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST
BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS. TO
DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT ONE MINUTE. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to Air Bag module circuits are not
acceptable. Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the replacement of a harness.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Battery condition, state of charge

Make sure all electrical connector(s) are engaged correctly on the air bag circuits
Wiring harness
Air bag module(s)
Make sure the restraints control module (RCM) is correctly installed
Fuse(s)
Sensor(s)
Pretensioner(s)
Warning lamp bulb(s)
the next step.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (100-00 General Information,
www.JagDocs.com
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag Disposal
General Procedures
Deployed Air Bag
1. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag

supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air
bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
Deployed air bag modules are to be disposed of as special waste and

must comply with local environmental requirements, if in doubt, contact
Authority for disposal requirements.
2. NOTE: The storage, transportation, disposal, and/or recycling of air

bag module components must be carried out in accordance with all
applicable federal, state and local regulations including, but not limited
to, those governing building and fire codes, environmental protection,
occupational health and safety, and transportation.
Modules removed and deployed by Jaguar service are to be returned to

the importer for disposal.
Undeployed Air Bag — Inoperative
1. WARNING: Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim
cover or deployment door pointed away from your body. This will reduce
the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to
NOTE: All inoperative air bag modules have been placed on the
Mandatory Return List. All discolored or damaged air bag modules must
be treated the same as any inoperative live air bag being returned.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Remove the inoperative driver air bag module or passenger air bag
module. For additional information Driver Air Bag Module or Passenger
Air Bag Module in this section.
Undeployed Air Bag — Scrapped Vehicle

Remote Deployment
1. WARNINGS:
Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental

restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover or
deployment door pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk
of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow this
Remote deployment is to be carried out outdoors with all personnel

at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away to ensure personal safety. Due to the
loud report which occurs when the air bag is deployed, hearing protection
is required. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
Do not place the driver or passenger air bag module with the trim
cover or deployment door facing down, as the forces of the deploying air
bag can cause it to ricochet and cause personal injury. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in personal injury.
Equipment required: Universal deployment tool-Part N° 418-135 and 12V

Battery.
2. The deployment procedure should be carried out outdoors away from

other personnel.
3. Remove any loose debris from around air bag. Make sure that no
flammable liquids are present.
4. Disconnect the battery ground and positive cables.
5. Disconnect the relevant air bag module electrical connector.
6. Connect the appropriate adaptor lead to the restraint device.
7. Connect the deployment lead to the adaptor lead. Pass wire of the
deployment tool through window, close all doors, leave window with lead
for deployment tool open.
8. WARNING: Before proceeding, make sure precautions have been taken

to warn personnel of a possible loud noise upon activation. Do not allow
anybody to approach closer to restraint device than six meters. Failure
Move as far from restraint device as possible and connect the tool clips
to a 12V vehicle battery.
9. WARNING: Do not handle the deployed device immediately after

activation - it may be hot. Allow the unit to cool for at least 20 minutes.
Cooling modules should be continuously monitored to make sure heat
does not create a fire with spilled liquids or other debris. Failure to
Deploy the module by depressing both switches on the tool. If activation

does not occur, disconnect battery from tool and seek advise from Jaguar
Engineering and wait for further instructions.
10. Repeat procedure for all air bags in vehicle.
11. The vehicle is now to be scrapped in the normal manner with modules
installed.
Disposal of live air bag modules for all air bags, using tyres
1. Equipment required: Deployment tool 418-S135, Battery (12V), Safety

goggles to BS2092 grade 2, Rubber gloves to PrEN 374 class 2, Ear
protectors that have been measured to BS.EN 24869, Particulate
respirator to EN 149 grade FFP2S
2. The deployment procedure should be carried out outdoors, away from

other personnel.
3. Stack four scrap tyres, securing together with heavy gauge wire or cable.
while disconnected from any electrical power source, connect deployment
harness and place air bag adaptor portion under tyre stack, ready for
connection to air bag.
4. WARNING: Power must not be connected during this step. Failure to

CAUTION: Make sure the connector is not in contact with the

inflator or it will be damaged during the test.
Connect air bag to air bag connector, make sure the locking sleeve is
fully engaged. position the air bag with the cover facing upwards.
5. Make sure battery connections of deployment harness are ten meters

away from the tyre stack
6. Remove any loose from around the air bag . Make sure that no
flammable liquids are present.
7. WARNING: Before proceeding, make sure precautions have been taken

to warn personnel of a possible loud noise upon activation. Do not allow
anybody to approach closer to restraint device than six meters. Failure
Move as far from restraint device as possible and connect the tool clips
to a 12V vehicle battery.
8. WARNING: Do not handle the deployed device immediately after

activation - it may be hot. Allow the unit to cool for at least 20 minutes.
Cooling modules should be continuously monitored to make sure heat
does not create a fire with spilled liquids or other debris. Failure to
Deploy the module by depressing both switches on the tool. If activation

does not occur, disconnect battery from tool and seek advise from Jaguar
Engineering and wait for further instructions.
9. Allow the air bag to cool for at least 20 minutes. Cooling modules should
be continuously monitored to make sure heat generated a fire with
spilled liquids or other debris.
10. Remove the air bag from the tyre stack and seal in a plastic bag, ready
for disposal.
11. In the event of any problems or queries arising from this procedure,
contact Jaguar Engineering.
Supplemental Restraint System - B-Pillar Side Impact Sensor
Removal

2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury,

the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing
any air bag supplementary restraints system (SRS) components. To
deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground
cable and wait for one minute. Failure to follow this instruction may
4. Torque: 12 Nm
Installation

Supplemental Restraint System - Clockspring
Special Tool(s)
211-326
Locking Tool, Clockspring
Removal
WARNINGS:
Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an
air bag module.
Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury
in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant
combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this instruction
Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment, which may result in
personal injury. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Air bag modules with discolored or damaged trim covers must be replaced, not repainted.
Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental
restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. If
damaged, replace the sensor whether or not the air bag is deployed.
To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components. To deplete the backup power supply energy,
disconnect the battery ground cable and wait one minute. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Make sure the wheels are in the straight-ahead position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in

2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that special tool 211-326 is installed to the clockspring.
www.JagDocs.com
Make sure that the road wheels are in the straight ahead position,
failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Refer to: Steering Wheel (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and

Installation).
3. CAUTION: Failing to install the special tool to the

clockspring may result in damage to the vehicle.
4.
5.
6. CAUTION: Failing to install the special tool to the

clockspring may result in damage to the vehicle.
Torque: 6 Nm
7. CAUTION: Make sure no damage is occured to the

electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction may
9. Remove the special tool from the clockspring.
10.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that special tool 211-326 is installed to the

clockspring.
Make sure that the arrow on the cassette is centered

and pointing vertically (make sure that the steering wheel
has remained in the 12 o'clock position and that it has
not been turned by +/- 360 degrees) prior to the
steering wheel installation. On removal of the special tool,
keep the clockspring cables taught to prevent the cassette
moving from the set position. Failure to follow this

ahead position, failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the vehicle.

Supplemental Restraint System - C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor
Removal


3. Refer to: Rear Seat Bolster (501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
4. Torque: 12 Nm
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
Supplemental Restraint System - Crash Sensor
Removal


3. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Supplemental Restraint System - Driver Air Bag Module
Special Tool(s)
501-120
Remover, Driver Air Bag
Removal
WARNING: Refer to: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions (100-00, Description and
Operation).
2. NOTES:
Gentle pressure applied to the air bag towards the

instrument panel aids release.
Driver air bag module installation can be confirmed by

hearing 2 audible clicks, 1 for each clip.

3.
4.
Installation

Supplemental Restraint System - Occupant Classification Sensor
Removal
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment, the restraints control module backup power supply must be depleted. Wait at least one
minute after disconnecting the battery ground cable(s) before commencing any repair or adjustment to the supplemental
restraint system (SRS), or any component(s) adjacent to the SRS sensors. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Always wear safety glasses when working on an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling an air bag module. Failure to
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, do not use radio key code savers when working on the
supplemental restraint system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of injury in the event of premature deployment, always carry a live air bag module with the
bag and trim cover pointed away from the body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, live air bag modules must only be placed on work benches which
have been ground bonded and with the trim cover facing up. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Never probe the electrical connectors of air bag modules or any other supplemental restraint system component. Failure
Painting over the driver air bag module trim cover or instrument panel could lead to deterioration of the trim cover and air
bags. Do not for any reason attempt to paint discoloured or damaged air bag module trim covers or instrument panel. Install a
new component. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
The front passenger seat occupant classification sensor is available only as a service kit. No attempt should be made to
replace individual components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Check for correct operation of the front seat after completion of the procedure to make sure that the wiring harness has
not become trapped or stretched.
NOTES:
Note the routing of the seat harness.

Installation).
4.
5. NOTES:
An audible click is heard when the clips are fully

latched.
Make sure the electrical connector is securely

connected.
6.
www.JagDocs.com
7.
8.
9.
10. NOTE: Note the position of the wiring harnesses to
aid installation.
11.
12. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the clips.
13. NOTE: Note the position of the wiring harnesses to

aid installation.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19. WARNING: Do not probe supplemental restraint

system (SRS) electrical connectors.
www.JagDocs.com
20.
Installation
1. CAUTION: The front passenger seat occupant

classification sensor is available only as a service kit. No
attempt should be made to replace individual components.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
2. NOTES:
Use hog ring pliers to close the hog rings. Do not use
any other tool. The hog rings must be closed to overlap as
illustrated.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8. NOTE: Make sure that the harness is routed to the
9.
10. Torque: 4 Nm
11. NOTE: Make sure that the harness is routed to the

www.JagDocs.com
12. CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harness is routed
above the drive bar as shown, to avoid damage to the
wiring harness during movement of the front seat.
13. NOTES:
An audible click is heard when the clips are fully

latched.
Make sure the electrical connector is securely

connected.
14. Torque: 1.3 Nm

15.
16.
17. Torque: 9 Nm
18. WARNING: Do not probe supplemental restraint
system (SRS) electrical connectors.
19.
20.
Installation).
Supplemental Restraint System - Passenger Air Bag Module
Special Tool(s)
211-326
Locking Tool, Clockspring
Removal
2. Refer to: Steering Wheel (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and

Installation).
3. Refer to: Driver Side Register (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Information and Entertainment Display (415-01A Information

and Entertainment System, Removal and Installation).
5. Refer to: Instrument Panel Speaker (415-01A Information and

8.
9.
www.JagDocs.com
10.
11.
instrument cluster face.

14.
15.
16. Torque: 6 Nm
17.
18.
damaging threads.
Torque:
M8 2.5 Nm
T27 9 Nm
20.
21.
www.JagDocs.com
damaging threads.
Torque:
M8 2.5 Nm
T27 9 Nm
23.
24.
25. Torque: 20 Nm
26. Torque: 20 Nm
27. Torque: 20 Nm
28. Torque: 20 Nm
29.
30.
31.
32. Torque: 6 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Supplemental Restraint System - Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Removal


3.
4.
5.
6. Torque: 6 Nm
7.
8. NOTES:
If the SRS component is to be replaced, the bar code

of the new unit must be recorded.
The RCM will record and store impact data. The

module must be replaced when three records are noted.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Supplemental Restraint System - Side Air Bag Module
Removal



and Installation).
4. Remove the front seat backrest lower rear cover.

5. Remove the front seat hinge cover.
6. Remove the front seat backrest cover upper trim panel.
www.JagDocs.com
7. Release the front seat backrest cover.
8. WARNING: The SRS electrical connectors are unique.

DO NOT force, or attempt to connect electrical connectors
to the wrong sockets.
Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector.

9. Release the retaining strap.
10. TORQUE: 7 Nm
11. Release the locking tab.
12. Remove the side air bag module.
Installation

Supplemental Restraint System - Side Air Curtain Module
Removal
All vehicles

and Installation).

5. Refer to: Sun Visor (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
8. Refer to: C-Pillar Lower Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
9. Torque: 2 Nm
10.
11.
www.JagDocs.com
12.
Vehicles with roof opening panel
13. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
Vehicles without roof opening panel
14. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
All vehicles
15.
16.

technician.

technician.
prior to removal.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is installed to

20. CAUTIONS:

removal.
NOTES:
Make sure that this component is installed to the

Federal vehicles only.
Torque: 9 Nm
21. WARNING: The SRS electrical connectors are unique.

DO NOT force, or attempt to connect electrical connectors
to the wrong sockets.
CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the component

prior to removal.
NOTES:

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 9 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is correctly located on the

locating pegs.

Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection System - Component
Location
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) hood actuator
3 LH (left-hand) hood actuator
4 LH accelerometer
5 RH accelerometer
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection System - Overview
OVERVIEW
WARNING: All pyrotechnic devices are dangerous. Before performing any procedures on any pyrotechnic device, read all
information contained within the Standard Workshop Practices section of this manual.
Refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
The pedestrian protection system is designed to mitigate injuries in a pedestrian collision with the vehicle. It does this by
utilizing a pair of pyrotechnic actuators to lift the hood away from the engine, creating a cushioned impact between the
pedestrian and the vehicle.
The pedestrian protection system also includes passive protection integrated into the bumper system and bonnet structure.
WARNING: Do not fit any non-Jaguar approved accessories to the vehicle.
NOTE: The pedestrian protection system operates independently from the SRS (supplemental restraint system).
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection System - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus
Item Description
1 Battery
4 LH (left-hand) hood actuator
5 RH (right-hand) hood actuator
7 RH accelerometer
8 LH accelerometer
System Operation
The pedestrian protection system is operational when the vehicle is traveling at speeds between approximately 20 km/h (12.4
mph) and 45 km/h (28 mph). A vehicle speed signal is received by the pedestrian protection system control module over the
high speed CAN bus.
The system is able to determine if contact is made with a pedestrian or another object, such as a traffic cone, using signals
from accelerometers mounted behind the front bumper. When the system determines contact is made with a pedestrian it fires
the actuators to lift the rear of the hood approximately 130 mm within 35 ms of the 'fire' signal.
When an impact condition is registered, the pedestrian protection system control module outputs an impact signal on the high
speed CAN bus. This signal is used by the RJB to initiate the hazard warning lamps. If this occurs, the hazard warning lamp
switch is disabled for the remainder of the current ignition cycle.
If the pedestrian protection system control module detects a fault with the system, it outputs a message on the high speed
CAN bus to the instrument cluster message center. On receipt of this, the message center will display the message 'CHECK
PEDESTRIAN SYSTEM'.
The pedestrian protection system control module also stores the VIN (vehicle identification number). If a new control module
is fitted to the vehicle the Jaguar approved diagnostic tool must be used to program the unit with the vehicles VIN.
When the vehicle is delivered from the factory the pedestrian protection system is in a 'safe' plant mode. Normal operating
mode should be activated using the Jaguar approved diagnostic tool during the Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI) prior to delivery
to the customer. For additional information, refer to the PDI manual.
If any damage is caused to the front of the vehicle, be it cosmetic or structural, repairs must be carried out in line with the
processes contained in the workshop manual. Failure to carry out the correct repair process could compromise operation of the
pedestrian protection system. Refer to GTR for the latest information.
The vehicle must be left for 1 minute after disconnecting the battery before any work can be carried out on the pedestrian
protection system.
Failure Mode Detection

In service, if any fault is detected, or any part of the system is recognized as not being present, the message center displays
the warning 'Check Pedestrian System'.
The bonnet deployment actuators are non-serviceable components, and if they must be replaced due to a fault, or due to
having been deployed, or following any other accident, their barcode labels must be read and recorded in the service database
against the vehicle VIN for security purposes.
After deployment of the pedestrian protection system, the vehicle must be stopped as soon as it is safe to do so. The hazard
warning lamps will be activated and can only be switched off by pressing the engine START/STOP button to turn the engine off
and on again. A warning message 'CHECK PEDESTRIAN SYSTEM' will appear on the message center and the vehicle should be
transported to the nearest dealer/authorised repairer. The vehicle must not be driven when the bonnet has been deployed.
NOTE: If the warning message 'CHECK PEDESTRIAN SYSTEM' appears in the message center when the bonnet has not
been deployed, the vehicle should be taken to the nearest dealer/authorised repairer immediately. It can be driven.
If any significant damage occurs to the front bumper it should be inspected by a dealer/authorised repairer as soon as
possible.
CONTROL MODULE
The control module is mounted below the hood release lever behind the side trim in the left hand front footwell.
The deployment signal is received from the pedestrian protection system control module. The second-generation system
adopted for XF is all-new to Jaguar and, although similar, differs from that introduced on XK by having an accelerometer-based
sensing system rather than a contact-sensing system. The accelerometer-based system is supplied by Bosch. Mounted very
close to the skin of the bumper, it examines the characteristics of vibration waves caused by impact. Its response time is
quicker, because it does not rely on the front of the bumper being loaded. It uses the 'saved' time to make more complex
decisions, and so has fewer error states. The speed of vehicle and the length of the bonnet define the time available to get
the bonnet into its deployed and stabilized position. It is possible, therefore, to create a time-line counting back from the
predicted moment of head impact to the time when the deployment signals need to be sent. That in turn defines a time from
first contact to decision time.
www.JagDocs.com
HOOD ACTUATORS
The hood actuators are pyrotechnic air bags. The hood actuators are located just forward of the hood latches on either side of
the hood. The actuators comprise a pyrotechnic device to raise the hood, a secondary hood latch mechanism and a tether
sleeve. Once fired a locking device mounted on top of the actuator couples with the secondary hood latch before the airbag
inflates to raise the hood. This ensures that the hood can only deploy to a pre-determined height (approximately 130 mm). As
the hood actuator is fired two prongs located in the secondary latch housing are moved out of their retaining clamp. The
prongs are spring loaded to grip the secondary hood latch striker securing it to the actuator tether cone. Hood Actuator and
Secondary Latch.
They are mounted to brackets in the secondary bulkhead and interface to reinforced areas on the lower surface of the bonnet.
Engine Compartment Lid

The two-piece engine compartment lid is in aluminum and the inner panel has a hexagonal panel structure, which allows
energy from a pedestrian head impact to be absorbed effectively across the full area of the bonnet. It also has sufficient
strength in the rear cross-beam to accept the forces from the actuators and maintain a stable condition.
When deployed, front bonnet latch acts as the pivot point and the rear hinges allow a controlled degree of upward movement
before retaining the bonnet at the end of its deployment, thus limiting its total upward travel and stabilizing its position.
NOTE: A = Non-deployed hinge; B = Deployed hinge
Item Description
1 Firing pin
2 Stabilizing link
3 Engine compartment lid leaf
4 Intermediate leaf
5 Body leaf
The hinge system incorporates a number of leaves. This includes a leaf attached to the body, an intermediate leaf and a leaf
attached to the hood. During normal operation the hinge opens and closes using the hood and intermediate leaves. These are
attached together by a firing pin. When the actuators are fired the firing pins fail. This allows the hood and intermediate
leaves to separate and deploy the hood upwards. When the hood deploys the hood latches act as temporary hinges.
NOTE: The hinges deform during the deployment process and will need to be replaced.
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection System
For a detailed description of the Pedestrian Protection System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Pedestrian Protection System (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Description and Operation) /
Pedestrian Protection System (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Description and Operation) /
Pedestrian Protection System (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Description and Operation).

WARNINGS:
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED
BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY PEDESTRIAN PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER
SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT TWO MINUTES. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS
INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Do not use a multimeter to probe the pedestrian protection system actuators. It is possible for the power from the
multimeter battery to trigger the activation of the actuator. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTES:
account.
It is advisable not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on the pedestrian
protection system or components
Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to pedestrian protection system circuits are
not acceptable. Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the replacement of a harness.
After 5 hood deployment events, a new Pedestrian Protection System Control Module (PPSCM) and wiring harness must be
installed.
Visual Inspection
Hood Fuses
Hood hinge Wiring harnesses and connectors
Hood deployment controls Pedestrian Protection System Control Module (PPSCM)
Impact sensors
Hood deployment controls
the next step
Symptom Chart
Symptom Message Possible Causes Action

Hood CHECK
deployed PEDESTRIAN Low speed collision
WARNING: The vehicle must not be driven if the hood has been
SYSTEM with pedestrian or
deployed.
other object
NOTE: Repairs due to a collision are not warrantable.
Check the vehicle for collision damage. Repair as necessary
Hood not CHECK

deployed PEDESTRIAN Pedestrian
NOTE: The vehicle may be driven if a pedestrian protection
SYSTEM protection system
system fault is present but the hood has not been deployed.
fault
Check the vehicle for collision damage. Repair as necessary.
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
pedestrian protection system control module for related DTCs
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Pedestrian Protection System Control Module (PPSCM) (100-00 General
Information, Description and Operation).
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Impact Sensor
Removal

Installation).
2. Torque: 3 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator LH
Removal
Refer to: Cowl Vent Screen (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
3. Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator RH
Removal
Refer to: Cowl Vent Screen (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection Module
Removal
2.
3.
4. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Part N-umber Published: 11-May-2011
Body Repairs - General Information - Body Repairs
General Information
Introduction
The body plays a significant role in the increasing trend of ever more rapidly changing model variants. The different customer
groups are strongly influenced by the design and shape of the body. At the same time the stability of the body plays the most
important part in ensuring passenger and driver safety. Lightweight construction, alternative materials, composite materials,
plastics and appropriate joining processes are all design features that characterise modern Jaguar vehicle bodies.
In terms of manufacturing technology, modern safety cell bodies can be produced almost without any problems. Jaguar
guarantee high quality standards by ensuring that mechanical strength properties are tried and tested in numerous computer
simulations, crash tests, by testing materials and by employing sophisticated manufacturing technologies. In the event of
repairs it is vital that the production quality standards are upheld. This requires a well-equipped workshop, and places
particular emphasis on the qualifications of the workshop technicians. Up-to-date knowledge of current manufacturing
technologies and continuous training on new repair methods and techniques are vital for high-quality body repairs. The model-
specific repair manuals and the general repair techniques provide valuable support when undertaking body repairs.
Always follow the repair instructions published in this manual. Failure to observe this instruction can result in serious
impairment of vehicle safety. All specified safety requirements must be met after the work has been carried out.
Vehicle design
The body
The XF adopts the latest generation steels, especially in the upper body – including high carbon steels, dual-phase,
hot-formed boron steels, and bake-hardened steels to form a vertical safety ‘ring’ around the occupant cell. As well as
combining strength with lightness, these steels improve corrosion resistance, by making best use of zinc and improving e-coat
paint flow – and new thinking means that in spite of their strength, the XF’s A and B-pillars are impressively slim, to the
benefit of both visibility and accessibility. Similarly, the lower sills are the first component on any Jaguar to use incredibly
strong, dual-phase DP600 steel.
The safety of the driver and the passengers is paramount for every body design. There are two key safety aspects in the body:
Safety passenger cell

Crumple zones
Safety passenger cell
Stable pillars, rocker panel and door profiles.

Side impact protection in the doors.
Doors are designed to open even in the event of extreme deformation.
Crumple zone
Dynamic absorption of deforming forces.

Protection of the passenger cell.
www.JagDocs.com
Vehicle Design

1 Bodyshell
High Strength Steels
Most modern vehicles are constructed from a number of different steels, partly to obtain an optimised body (collision, safety,
rigidity, fuel economy, etc).
Steels are divided into several groups according to their tensile and yield strength, that is to say the force necessary to bring
about plastic deformation of the material.
Yield Summary
Yield is the strength at which the metal changes from elastic to plastic in behaviour, the point of no return.
Tensile Summary
Tensile strength is the breaking strength of a material when subjected to a tensile (stretching) force, the point of no return.
Dual Phase (DP) steel falls into both the very high strength steel (VHSS) and extra high strength steel (EHSS) classifications,
dependant on grade of DP.
Steel Type Yield Strength

Mild steel (MS) Maximum yield point up to 180 MPa
High strength steel (HSS) Steel with a yield point up to 280 MPa
VHSS Steel with a yield point up to 380 MPa
EHSS Steel with a yield point up to 800 MPa
Ultra high strength steel (UHSS) Steel with a yield point greater than 800 MPa
Welding Ultra High Strength Steel
UHSS requires welding equipment which can achieve the following equipment settings.
Spot Welding
Information to follow.
MIG Brazing
When mig-brazing use the following type of welder meeting the specifications shown: Fronius Trans Plus Synergic 2700 4
R/Z/AL MIG Welder, with CuSi3 (DIN 1733) 1.0mm filler wire with setting parameters 4, which is 92 Amps, Wire feed 4.6
m/min. Shielding gas L1 = pure Argon (DIN 439).
Steels used in body structure - Body closures
Item Type of Steel

MS1+Z Mild steel with zinc
IF220+Z Interstitial free steel - 220 MPa with zinc
Item Type of Steel
Boron Boron steel
5754NG+ALPT+ALS 5000 Series aluminium alloy
5182+ALL 5000 Series aluminium alloy
BH180+Z Bake hardened steel - 180 MPa with zinc
6111 T4+ALL 6000 Series aluminium alloy
BH220+Z Bake hardened steel - 220 MPa with zinc
Steels used in body structure - Roof panels
Item Type of Steel

MS1-4 Mild steel
BH300 Bake hardened steel - 300 MPa
Steels used in body structure - Front end panels
Item Type of Steel

MS1+4 Mild steel
HSLA340 High strength low alloy steel - 340 MPa
HI ST BAR High strength steel bar
www.JagDocs.com
Steels used in body structure - Side panels
Item Type of Steel

MS1-4 Mild steel
DP450 Dual phase steel - 600 MPa
Item Type of Steel
DP600 Dual phase steel - 600 MPa
Boron Boron
Steels used in body structure - Rear end panels
Item Type of Steel
MS1-4 Mild steel
HI ST BAR High strength steel bar
Other Other
Steels used in body structure - Floor panels
Item Type of Steel

MS1-4 Mild steel
Item Type of Steel
Other Other
NOTES:
When installing the A-pillar outer panel, the rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel, or the roof panel, they must be slot
brazed where they adjoin the A-pillar reinforcement upper.
The size of the slots are to be 20mm x 8mm and 30mm apart. Slots should be installed in accordance with this spacing.
Where this is not possible, due to the indents in the panel, the slot should be made in the location of the original spot weld.
Rocker panel and b-pillar outer panel
Item Description
1 Drill 2 x 8mm holes to form basis of slot
2 Mill out to form 20mm x 8mm slot
3 Slots spaced at 30mm intervals
www.JagDocs.com
A-pillar outer panel
Item Description
Roof panel
Item Description
NOTE: Mig brazing is carried out at a temperature of 650°C to 950°C. To avoid degradation of the ultra high strength
steel material properties, the temperature must be below 950°C.
Mig braze the slot(s) using a Fronius Trans Plus Synergic 2700 4 R/Z/AL MIG Welder, with CuSi3 (DIN 1733) 1.0mm filler wire
with setting parameters 4, which is 92 Amps, Wire feed 4.6 m/min. Shielding gas L1 = pure Argon (DIN 439).
Dress the surface of the weld cap (brazed slot) with 60/80 grit belt sanders.
Accident damage and diagnosis
General notes
Exact diagnosis of the extent of the damage enables proper repair planning.
All body repairs must be carried out in accordance with the guidelines in this Body Repair Manual.
The stability and strength properties of the body must be taken into account during body repairs. The body has exact
defined deformation patterns that must not be affected by any repair work.
For instance, the crumple zones absorb the bulk of the impact energy. If any unprofessional repair techniques or
methods are used in these areas then this can pose a fundamental threat to vehicle safety.
Hidden damage
As well as looking at external indicators like flaked off paint, it is vital to check for hidden body damage or deformation
that is not visible from the outside. Large attached parts like bumpers and inner fenders often need to be removed to
allow accurate assessment of damage to underlying body parts.
Gap dimensions
Gap dimensions offer another alternative for diagnosis by visual inspection. If any changes or misaligned edges are apparent,
then this usually indicates that the dimensions of the affected part are incorrect.
Changes in gap dimension
Item Description
1 Gap too wide
2 Gap too small
Impact effects on the body
NOTE: Vehicle components like drive shafts and trailer attachments transfer forces. If a vehicle is subjected to a rear
impact then all connected body parts and mechanical components (e.g. transmission mountings) should be thoroughly checked.
Electronic components should be checked to make sure that they still operate correctly.
Furthermore it is possible to deduce the overall extent of damage from the direction and magnitude of the impact forces. This
does however require extensive body-specific knowledge.
If, for instance, an impact occurs at the front left-hand side member, then the right-hand side member is usually also affected
as a result of the rigid body-shell design (crossmember). Often the length of this side member will not have changed, but
because of the rigid body-shell design it may have moved from its original position (often only by a very small amount). If any
deviations are present this can usually be detected by checking the gap dimensions between door and fender or by checking for
changes in dimension.
In the case of more severe impacts, the front part of the body cannot absorb all of the impact energy, and the passenger cell
is also deformed. Here the impact energy is transferred via the side member to the A-pillar (see diagram). This results in
deformations in the area of the roof and the door rocker panel.
The body reacts quite differently to side impacts where there is hardly any crumple zone. As the passenger cell is extremely
stable, there are comparatively few local deformations at the site of the impact. However, the impact forces are transferred to
the entire vehicle floor, which often results in so-called "banana damage", where the vehicle is bent into a banana shape.
Impact energy is transferred via the side member to the A-pillar
Item Description
1 Deformation area - roof rail
2 Deformation area - roof
3 Deformation area - door rocker panel
Body measurements
Measuring options
Comparison measurements can also be made on the outside of the body. Depending on the damage, comparison
measurements and diagonal measurements can be carried out using compass, telescopic rod, tape measure or ruler.
NOTE: The same reference points must be chosen on both sides when checking for changed dimensions (e.g.
bores, edges, beads/swage lines etc).
All of the important external body dimensions are listed in Tolerance Checks.
For additional information, refer to: Body and Frame (501-26 Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance
Checks, Description and Operation).
Measurements with a measuring/straightening jig.

A measuring/straightening jig is required for accurate measurements of the body. The measuring systems are
categorised by their means of operation:
Mechanical measuring system.
Optical measuring system.
Quick and accurate measuring results can be obtained using computerised measuring systems.
A minimum of three intact measuring points on the body are required for measurements of length, width and height
dimensions.
In some cases this may mean making the measuring points accessible. All of these measuring systems can be used to make
body measurements, provided all the equipment is available.
Planning a repair
The following decisions have to be made before the repairs are started:
Does the vehicle need to be put on a straightening jig, or can it be straightened by other means?
Does the body need to be measured?
Do aggregates like engine or axles need to be removed?
NOTE: It is preferable to repair body parts rather than to renew them, as this keeps the complete body-shell
intact.
Which body parts need to be renewed?

Which body parts can be repaired?
Obtaining spare parts
The availability of spare parts often determines how easily the body repairs can be carried out. The following procedure is
recommended:
Obtain all the data for the vehicle, including type, vehicle identification number, trim code, engine identification letters,
initial registration etc.
Establish all of the metal parts that need to be renewed.
Establish all of the attached parts that need to be renewed, including small parts like rivets, clips etc.
Straightening repairs
WARNING: The use of heat when pulling to straighten body panels, (such as side members), is not recommended.
Longitudinal pulling, (hot or cold), is also not recommended. A small amount of side to side pull is permissible, (cold).
When any type of pulling or straightening operation is performed it is important to observe for any movement in adjacent
panels.
A panel must retain its strength and integrity, if there is any doubt the panel must be renewed.
Straightening repairs are often required to restore the body to its original shape after an accident. This can be done with:
Alignment jigs.
Universal straightening and measuring jigs.
Welding jig system.
The following points must be followed to Make sure that the repairs are carried out professionally and that all the dimensions
are correct after the repairs have been carried out.
Structure:
- The repair sequence depends on the individual repair plan (taking any necessary disassembly work into
account).
- Clean the attachment areas.
- Anchor the vehicle free of stress on the relevant system.
- Support the aggregates to take strain off the body.
- Decide on at least three measuring/mounting points that are undamaged and as far apart as possible (for basic
adjustment).
- Check the dimensions of the measuring/mounting points.
Straightening:
NOTE: Check dimensions and gaps continuously during straightening.
- A body is always straightened in the opposite direction to that of the impact. Always carry out straightening
repairs with the complete body shell assembled (do not cut out any parts beforehand). Carry out the
straightening work in several stages. This prevents the risk of over stretching or of welded joints tearing out.
During the individual straightening steps, relieve tension by striking with an aluminium hammer while the part is
subjected to a tensile load (in the area of pre-determined folding points, dents, welded joins etc.).
Special features:
- Ultra high strength steel cannot be straightened due to its brittleness and must always be replaced.
www.JagDocs.com
Cutting out body parts
Depending on how the parts are joined/connected, different tools are suitable for cutting/separating body parts.
Spot-weld mill
NOTES:
All other parts like interior equipment, window glass etc. must be protected against flying sparks.
Make sure that the milling depth is set correctly to prevent the remaining flange from being weakened.
Rod sander
NOTE: Wear protective clothing. Protect any vulnerable body or glass areas against flying sparks. Remove explosive
materials from the vicinity.
Any spot welds that are inaccessible for the spot-weld mill (diameter > 8 mm) should be ground out using a rod sander. The
same applies to MIG spot welds or seams.
Short stroke saw
NOTE: Underlying metal parts, wiring harnesses, hoses etc. must not be damaged - remove them beforehand if
necessary.
Body saws are particularly versatile and are therefore very suitable for making severance cuts on body parts.
Reciprocating saw
In addition to the short stroke saw, the reciprocating saw can be used. With this, it is possible to make narrow and straight
cuts to an exact depth.
Carrying out the repairs
Butt joint
NOTE: The severance cut should always be kept as short as possible on sectional replacement. Only cut at the severance
lines shown in the repair chapters.
Do not make any cuts near reinforcements or pre-determined folding lines.
Prepare parts remaining on the vehicle/new parts.
NOTE: Do not use a welding torch to remove paint residue (the heat could cause the metal to deform).
- Reshape the adjoining surface of any dented body parts that are to remain on the vehicle using a hammer and a
counterhold (Make sure that the old part matches the shape of the new part). Grind off left over spot welds or
seams with an angle grinder.
- Cut the new parts to shape.
- If necessary punch or drill holes for mig plug welding.
- Grind all joining flanges to bare metal on both sides. Do not use an angle grinder for this purpose (this could
weaken the metal and damage the zinc layer). Suitable tools: rotating wire brush, belt sander or plastic disc.
- Apply welding primer liberally to all weld flanges.
- The primer must be well stirred before use.
NOTE: When using aerosols, take care not to contaminate adjacent parts with spray mist.
Fit the new part.
It must be Make sured that the new part fits exactly to the specified dimensions. Suitable equipment:
- Alignment jig.
- Universal measuring system.
- Jig system.
- Ruler or tape measure.
- Compass.
- Frame dimensions can be found in the model-specific repair manuals.
NOTE: Any attached body parts that require accurate alignment and fitting must be incorporated in this step; for
instance bumpers, seals, headlamps, rear lamps and lock assembly components. If this is not done carefully it may
result in water leaks, wind noises and substantial follow-on work.
Make sure that edges line up with adjacent parts and check that gaps are consistent (compare left and right-hand
sides). Make sure that the shape of the vehicle is retained.
Secure the new part
NOTE: The need for subsequent follow-on work can be significantly reduced if aligning and tack-welding are carried
out with due care.
Depending on accessibility the following methods for securing are available:

- Grip pliers (set of).
- Screw clamp (set of).
- Self-tapping screws.
- Tack welds.
Use a staking tool or a screwdriver to Make sure that the edges of sectional replacements of profiled parts line up. The
edge is then tack welded to Make sure that it lines up.
Aligning and tack weld
Item Description
1 Tack welds
2 Using a screwdriver to align
Longer joins are usually tack welded to prevent the panel from warping. It is important to carry out the tack welds in
the correct sequence (see diagram).
Weld in the new part following the instructions in the repair manual.
Correct tack welding sequence
Follow on repairs/corrosion protection
This step basically covers the following work:
NOTE: See corrosion protection section for cavity wax application areas.
- Grinding welded seams.

- Priming any bare metal.
- Sealing welded seams.
- Applying underbody protection.
- Sticking damping matting in place.
- Filling cavities with cavity wax.
- Cavity wax (after painting).
Panel Beating
Fundamentals of panel beating
Before carrying out any sectional replacements or complete replacements of body panels, always check carefully
whether the damaged panel(s) can be rectified by panel beating.
Panel beating is usually the easiest and most economical method of repairing a damaged panel.
Examples of applications of different panel beating techniques:
Aluminium hammer and mallet.

- Advantage: Low risk of over-stretching the panel.
- Used for repairs of small dents on panels that are accessible from both sides.
- These two panel beating tools are usually used for "finishing repairs".
Fine straightening with an aluminium hammer and a universal dolly
Sliding hammer
- If the damaged panel is only accessible from the outside, use a sliding hammer to pull it back into shape. The
discs or studs needed to mount the sliding hammer are welded onto the bare surface. Dents in the panel can be
flattened out using controlled application of the sliding hammer.
Heat-treatment of panels
It is usually inevitable that some parts of the body panels show excess material as a result of mechanical strain. If
there are any areas of excess material this will cause localised instabilities due to differences in tension. These
localised instabilities can be stabilised by applying heat-treatment techniques.
NOTE: This does not apply to high-strength low alloy steel, ultra high strength steel and aluminium.
Rule: Flattening panels by heat-treatment reduces the amount of excess material by more than they were originally
stretched.
Different heat-treatment techniques.
NOTE: Different heat-treatment techniques are used depending on the amount of excess material.
Flattening using a flame.

- A welding torch is used if the material excess extends over a larger area (torch size 0.5 - 1.0 mm). Use a soft
flame.
- The surface of the metal is briefly spot-heated and then immediately cooled with a wet sponge.
- Requirement: Ability to handle a welding torch safely and knowledge of annealing colours of steel.
- Advantage: No damage to the surface of the metal.
Flattening using a flame, supported by hammer and counterhold.
NOTE: The flattening effect is increased by speeding up the heating and cooling stages.
- If the material excess is concentrated, then the flattening effect can be increased after heating by carefully
using an aluminium or wooden hammer.
- Requirement: Ability to recognise material tension by feeling the surface that is to be flattened.
Flattening using a carbon electrode.
- If panel areas are only accessible from one side, or the panel is only slightly destabilised, then the preferred
method is flattening using a carbon electrode.
- Requirement: Bare metal surface.
- Disadvantage: Scarring and hardening of the surface.
Flattening using a copper electrode.
- Small, sharp dents that face outwards can be worked on with a copper electrode.
Flattening using a flame and body files.
NOTE: When applied correctly, this method can be used with all the attached parts still in place (roof headlining,
wiring harnesses etc.).
- Small, soft dents (only slight stretching): Working at the edges of the dent in an inward spiral pattern, the dent
is heated with an oxyacetylene torch (torch size 1 - 2 mm, excess gas flame) to approx. 250° C.
- Working rapidly with a body file extracts heat from the edge area until the dent is flattened. Preferably alternate
between two files. This increases the amount of heat that can be extracted.
Safety measures
The electronic control modules (ECM) fitted to vehicles make it advisable to follow suitable precautions prior to carrying
out welding repair operations. Harsh conditions of heat and vibration may be generated during these operations which
could cause damage to the modules. In particular, it is essential to follow the appropriate precautions when
disconnecting or removing the airbag RCM.
Do not allow electronic modules or lines to come into contact with the ground connection or the welding electrode.
Seat belt anchorages are a safety critical. When making repairs in these areas, it is essential to follow design
specifications. Note that extra strength low alloy steel may be used for seat belt anchorages. Where possible, the
original production assembly should be used, complete with its seat belt anchorages, or the cut line should be so
arranged that the original seat belt anchorage is not disturbed.
All welds within 250mm (9.842) of seat belt anchorages must be carefully checked for weld quality, including spacing of
spot welds.
Remove the battery before carrying out welding work in its vicinity.
Utmost care must be taken when welding near the fuel tank or other components that contain fuel. If the tank filler
neck or a fuel line must be detached to allow access for welding work, then the fuel tank must be drained and removed.
Never weld, on components of a filled air conditioning system. The same applies if there is a risk of the air conditioning
system heating up.
Connect the ground connection of the electrical welder directly to the part that is to be welded. Make sure that there
are no electrically insulating parts between the ground connection and the welding point.
Adjacent vehicle parts and adjacent vehicles must be shielded against flying sparks and heat.
Pedestrian protection system
The pedestrian protection system is designed to mitigate injuries in a pedestrian collision with the vehicle. It does this by
utilizing a pair of pyrotechnic actuators to lift the hood away from the engine, creating a cushioned impact between the
pedestrian and the vehicle. It is essential that any repair or replacement operations do not affect the safe working of the
system.
For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection System (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Description and
Operation).
Resistance spot welding
Where resistance spot welds have been used in production, they must be reproduced with new spot welds in replacement
where possible. All such reproduction spot welds should be spaced 25 to 30mm apart.
Setting up the equipment and co-ordinating the welding parameters.
Equipment:
- Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions for the equipment settings.
- Select the correct electrode arms (as short as possible).
- Align the electrode arms and tips exactly.
- Electrode tips should be convex (rough shaping with a file, fine shaping with a sanding block).
Body:
- Make sure that the flanges to be joined lie perfectly flat to one another.
- Prepare a bare metal joint surface (inside and outside).
Notes on technique/method:
- Carry out a test weld on a sample piece of the material coated in welding paste.
- If any metal parts are located between the electrode arms then there will be a loss of induction and therefore
power (adjust current setting).
- The power needs to be adjusted for high-strength low alloy steel.
- Repeated welding on old welding points often leads to poor quality welds.
- Keep the electrode tips as near as possible to an angle of 90° to the contact surface.
- Keep the pressure on the electrodes for a short period after finishing the weld.
- The electrodes work best if their shape is convex. Clean the contact surface of the electrodes regularly.
Resistance spot welding panels where the total thickness is 3 mm or more
For all repairs to modern Jaguar vehicles, spot-welding equipment should be suitable for reliable welding of zinc-plated,
high-strength and high-tensile steels in three or more layers, up to 5 mm total thickness. If these requirements are not
fulfilled, plug welding must be used for safety reasons. The electrical specifications (current, resistance, heat) of the
spot-welding equipment have different validity, depending upon the type of equipment. Therefore, it is essential that the
manufacturer's instructions are observed with regard to the actual welding performance.
www.JagDocs.com
MIG/MAG welding
Setting up the equipment and co-ordinating the welding parameters.
Any joins that are MIG/MAG welded in production must also be MIG/MAG welded during repairs. Also during repairs,
some resistance spot welds need to be replaced by plug welds.
If access is difficult, or if a suitably powerful spot welder (see above) for total panel thicknesses of 3 mm or more is
not available, resistance spot welding must be partially replaced by plug welding during repairs. In this case, the
increased time needed and the correspondingly more demanding corrosion protection requirements, must be taken into
account.
Welding repairs can only be carried out properly if the equipment is set up correctly and all the welding parameters are
co-ordinated.
Equipment:
- Set up the equipment as directed by the manufacturer.
- The hoses must be untwisted.
- The core must be free of abraded rod particles.
- The gas and current nozzles must be free of slag and scale residue.
- Pay attention to the quality of the welding rod and the throughput of gas.
Body:
- Make sure that the joint surface is perfect.
- Prepare a bare metal joint surface.
- Maintain the correct gaps (formation of roots).
Notes on technique/method:
NOTES:
The increased application of heat during MIG welding destroys the welding primer/zinc layer over a much larger
area than during resistance spot welding, as a result of which much more care needs to be taken when applying
anti-corrosion protection afterwards.
A test weld should always be carried out to make sure that the welded joint is not just a surface connection.
- Attach the ground cable right next to the welding point (Make sure that good contact is made).
- During plug welding start welding on the lower panel to Make sure adequate penetration.
Plug welding
Item Description
1 Welding direction: circular pattern working from the inside outwards
2 Welding starting point: centre of hole on lower panel
Bonded glazing
- The windscreen, side and rear windows are bonded directly onto the window frames on the body and liftgate.
- The windows are bonded primarily for reasons of adhesive strength. Bonded glazing provides additional torsional
stiffness to the body.
Adhesive bonding of bonded windows
Item Description
1 Rubber strip
2 Window frame
3 Adhesive
4 Window glass
Removing and installing bonded windows
Safety measures
The following safety measures must always be followed to prevent personal injury:
- Wear protective gloves and arm protection.
- Wear protective goggles.
Preparations
Before cutting out a bonded window, undo and remove any attached parts in the cutting area that are at risk, e.g. trim
panels and decorative strips, as well as all electrical connections.
Mask any painted areas that are adjacent to the window.
Cut off any surplus adhesive, as this makes it easier to cut out the window.
Secure vertical windows against dropping out.
Cutting out the window
Cut into the adhesive bead at easily accessible points using the cutting tool.
Carefully guide the cutting tool around the window, cutting through the adhesive bead.
Avoid touching the window frame and the body flange.
Use cup suction tools to lift the cut-out window out of the window aperture.
General preparations for bonding
Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Cut back the remaining adhesive bead on the metal flange to a residual height of about 1mm. Do not touch or clean the
cut surface afterwards.
Carefully rectify any paint damage (apply primer and top coat).
Renew the window stops as necessary.
Bonding the window glass
Apply an even bead of adhesive to the window or to the body flange.

Insert the window glass into the window aperture and centre it (2 technicians required).
Check the gaps.
NOTE: Open the windows and doors while the window is left to dry and do not move the vehicle (slamming doors
creates excess pressure which could cause the window to become loose).
Use adhesive tape to prevent the window from falling out or slipping.
Finishing operations
Reconnect all electrical connections and check that the components operate correctly.
Install the attached parts and check that the fit is accurate and secure.
- Carry out a visual inspection to Make sure that the gaps and joints are even.
Thoroughly clean the window glass.
Protective equipment and safety at work
Various safety measures and legal requirements must be met when carrying out repairs. All regulations relating to
health and safety at work must be followed.
Welding safety precautions
The following safety precautions must be observed to prevent the risk of personal injury:
- Protective overalls
- Safety hood (face protection).
- Welding shield.
- Safety gloves.
- Safety shoes.
- Extraction unit for welding fumes.
Welding should always be carried out in well ventilated areas. A fire extinguisher must also always be within reach.
General body repair safety measures
Extraction unit
Sealing compound, underbody protection etc. must not be burned off with a naked flame. This would produce toxic
gases. If for instance PVC is burned, then gases containing hydrochloric acid are produced. For this reason a suitable
extraction unit should always be used when performing grinding, welding or soldering work.
Always Make sure good ventilation when working with materials that contain solvents, wear breathing equipment and
use an extraction unit.
Ear defenders should always be worn when cutting, grinding or straightening metal, as the noise levels can reach or
even exceed 85 - 90 dB(A).
Take care not to look directly into any laser measuring systems, for instance used to measure the under body.
When removing components from a vehicle mounted on a lifting ramp, watch out for a shift in its centre-of-gravity.
When first placing the vehicle on the ramp, take into account that it may need to be secured against tipping over.
Chains and chain clamps must be secured with safety ropes during straightening work.
Safety rope
Body Repairs - Corrosion Protection - Corrosion Protection
General
The corrosion protection provided in production must be carefully maintained and/or reproduced during and after body repair
work. It is only then that the long-term warranty against penetrative corrosion damage can be assured.
Only Jaguar original bodywork components and Jaguar approved repair materials, (sealer, paint etc.), are to be used for
bodywork repairs.
Jaguar Original Parts
All Jaguar bodywork components have a cathodic base coating. Individual bodywork components are zinc plated on one or both
sides, (in different areas depending on vehicle model).
Together with elastic paint coating, this guarantees an optimum, highly resistant protection against corrosion caused by the
impact of small objects such as gravel.
NOTE: If possible, the individual protective layers, (zinc, cathodic base coat), on Jaguar bodywork components must not
be damaged or destroyed by sanding or other mechanical operations.
If hairline cracks at "bodywork connection areas" appear after reshaping work, (e.g. at door hinges), it must be ensured that
the corrosion protection provided in production is recreated. The complete paint covering must be re-created if necessary. The
same applies to reshaping work on heavily profiled bodywork components, (e.g. floor pan). Renew or touch-up the paint
coating, sealing beads and underbody protection as necessary.
After repair, any interior surfaces which are no longer visible or accessible must be primed before cavity wax is applied. To be
certain of an even coating on inner surfaces, careful application of spray, (twice, with drying time in-between), must be carried
out throughout the whole cavity.
If bodywork panels are strongly heated during repair work, this will invariably result in damage to or even destruction of the
applied corrosion protection material. The effectiveness of the cavity protection material is reduced if heating occurs.
Reworking of the affected areas is therefore vital.
Welded areas should be made good before corrosion protection is applied.
The corrosion protection measures to be taken when bodywork components are renewed are described on the following pages.
Corrosion Protection of New Components
All new components must be inspected for transport or storage damage such as scratches or dents. The following operations
may be necessary, depending on the extent of damage:
Undamaged New Component
Do not grind the cathodic primer.

Thoroughly clean with silicone remover and rub dry.
Slightly Damaged New Component
Sand out scratches.

Finely sand the surrounding surface.
Apply corrosion protection primer to bare areas.
Damaged New Components (bumps and dents)
Beat out the dented area and sand down to bare metal.
Apply polyester filler (only onto bare metal).
Apply filler.
Lightly sand the whole component.
Apply corrosion protection primer to bare areas.
The clinched flanges on the hood, doors, tailgate and liftgate must be sealed with clinched flange sealer, if this is not already
applied.
Weld Components
Use a stripping disc to remove the cathodic primer on the inside and outside of the area to be welded. The stripped area
should be kept as small as possible, retaining as much of the cathodic primer as possible, taking care not to damage the zinc
coating.
Apply Welding Primer
NOTE: The welding primer must be stirred well or shaken before application.
Clean the repair area thoroughly, (silicone remover).
Apply welding primer evenly to all weld flanges, (old and new components).
NOTE: The welding primer must be allowed to dry before welding is carried out.
All weld beads must be ground down after all welding is completed, taking care not to weaken the material.
Any unevenness at the joint must be made good.
If necessary, spot weld missing weld studs into position.
The vehicle must be completely cleaned of sanding dust and metal swarf because of the danger of corrosion.
Clean and prime all internal areas and those to be sealed.
NOTE: The primer must be dry before sealing mastic or underbody protection is applied. Do not use thinners when
applying sealing mastic, (the mastic will not dry).
Partial Renewal
The procedure to follow when partially renewing components is the same as described in the section "Welded Components".
The main difference when components are partially, rather than completely renewed, concerns the preparation of butt or lap
joints.
When bodywork components are cut through, attention must be paid to the adequate removal of the paint and zinc
coatings on inner areas. This specially applies to areas which are difficult to access internally.
It is important for the weld quality that the inner area is bare metal. Zinc and paint residues in the weld area burn and
cause serious hole formation during welding.
If the zinc layer and the paint coating are not removed, the zinc and paint will burn during welding. The soot produced
prevents satisfactory cavity protection.
Procedure
The paint layer must be removed for a width of 30 mm from the line of the weld using a rotating tress wire brush.
This operation must be carried out on both the new and the old parts of the bodywork.
Depending on the bodywork component, a 10 mm width of the underlying zinc layer must also be removed along the
weld line.
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: A flat scraper or a wire brush can be used instead of the rotating brush if the cavity is small. Do not use an angle
grinder, which would weaken the structure.
Application of Cavity Wax Protection on a Rocker Panel After Partial Repair
Item Description
1 Weld bead
2 Spray head
3 Distance maintainer
4 Spray gun
Classification of the different corrosion protection measures for dent removal

Corrosion Protection Method Exterior Surfaces Accessible Inner Surfaces Inaccessible Inner Surfaces
Painting X X
Cavity protection X
Classification of Different Corrosion Protection Measures for Installation of New Components
Corrosion Protection Weld Flanges Before Welding in Place All Bare Sanded Weld Flange Area Weld Flange Area Not
Method (contact surfaces) Areas Accessible Accessible
Welding primer X
Painting X X
Clinched flange X
protection
Cavity protection X
Body Sealing Materials
Item Description
1 Between Panels - Bolted
2 Panel Edge Bolted
3 Between Panels - spot welded
4 Panel edges - spot welded
5 Between panels - bonded
6 Panel edges - bonded
7 Clinch joints - type A
8 Clinch joints - type B
9 Clinch joints - type C
10 Gaps between panels - type A
11 Gaps between panels - type B
12 Lap joint
Approved Service Materials For Repair
Description - Usage Supplier Product Number

Sealing - -
Polyurethane cartridge extruded seam sealer - grey - this is not a weld through product 3M 08684
Polyurethane cartridge extruded seam sealer - white - this is not a weld through product 3M 08689
Polyurethane cartridge extruded seam sealer - black - this is not a weld through product 3M 08694
Polyurethane sachet 310ml - grey - this is not a weld through product 3M 08782
Polyurethane sachet 310ml - white - this is not a weld through product 3M 08787
Polyurethane sachet 310ml - black - this is not a weld through product 3M 08789
Polyurethane sachet 600ml - grey - this is not a weld through product 3M 08783
Polyurethane sachet 600ml - white - this is not a weld through product 3M 08788
Polyurethane sachet 600ml - black - this is not a weld through product 3M 08793
Sprayable seam sealer 2K polyurethane 150ml - grey 3M 08823
Sprayable seam sealer 2K polyurethane 250ml - grey 3M 08800
Sprayable seam sealer MS polymer grey 3M 08851
Super seam sealer can - grey 3M 08537
Super seam sealer - brush 3M 08540
Butyl cartridge highly flexible for joints greater than 3mm - grey 3M 08645
Terostat 9100 (1K PUR) adhesive sealant Teroson 153.65B
Terostat 9100 (1K PUR) adhesive sealant Teroson 112.72C
Terostat 9100 (1K PUR) adhesive sealant Teroson 129.19S
Terostat 9200 (1K PUR) adhesive sealant - black Teroson 120.20Q
Terostat 9200 (1K PUR) adhesive sealant - black Teroson 120.25W
Terolan light vehicle body sealant Teroson 128.60D
Terostat 9320 sprayable seam sealant - grey Teroson 139.15A
Terostat 9320 sprayable seam sealant - black Teroson 139.16B
Terostat 9320 sprayable seam sealant - ochre Teroson 139.17C
Terolan special sealant brushable Teroson 179.70H
Terostat II sprayable sealant band Teroson 193.00D
Terostat VII round profile plastic sealing band Teroson 112.46Z
Terostat IX putty Teroson 157.86J
MS Polymer Sealing - -
MS Polymer caulkable sealer - white 3M 0855
Terostat 9120 (MS Polymer) adhesive sealant - white Teroson 102.78X
Terostat 9120 (MS Polymer) adhesive sealant - black Teroson 113.23H
Terostat 9120 (MS Polymer) adhesive sealant - black Teroson 104.41R
Seam Sealing Light - -
Drip Chek clear 3M 08401
Drip Chek heavy 3M 08531
Silicone Sealant - -
Terostat 9140 silicone sealant - transparent Teroson 140.08B
Terostat 9140 silicone sealant - black Teroson 140.04X
Body Caulking - -
Body caulking 3M 08568
Structural Adhesive - -
Two component epoxy adhesive 3M 08122
Manual applicator gun 3M 08190
Panel Bonding Adhesive - -
Panel bonding adhesive + (nozzle 08193) 3M 08115
Requires manual applicator gun + nozzle 3M 08117
Tape and Film - -
Acrylic tape PT1100 double sided - 6mm x 40m 3M 80318
Acrylic tape PT1100 double sided -9mm x 20m 3M 80319
Acrylic tape PT1100 double sided 12mm x 20m 3M 80320
Polyolefin adhesion promoter 3M 05917
Abrasion resistance film 3M 08210
Abrasion resistance film 3M 08219
Sealing Tape and Primer - -
Terotape seam sealing tape 8mm x 6mm Teroson 8164590
Terotape seam sealing tape 10mm x 16mm Teroson 8164600
Terotape primer 420ml Teroson 8164610
Cavity Wax - -
Body shultz coatings - black - 1L can 3M 08861
Body shultz coatings - black - 500ml aerosol 3M 08877
Inner cavity wax aerosol (transparent) 3M 08909
Inner cavity wax aerosol (amber) 3M 08901
Inner cavity wax 1L can (amber) 3M 08911
Inner cavity wax 1L can (transparent) 3M 08919
Inner cavity wax 10L drum (amber) 3M 08921
Inner cavity wax 10L drum (transparent) 3M 08929
Description - Usage Supplier Product Number
Terotex HV 200 extra spray - 1L can Teroson 176.48
Terotex HV 200 extra spray - 10L tin Teroson 179.40A
Terotex HV 200 extra spray - 60L barrel Teroson 170.96J
Terotex HV 400 1L can Teroson 169.65Q
Terotex HV 400 10L tin Teroson 169.76C
Terotex HV 400 60L barrel Teroson 169.85M
Teroson cavity spray 500ml aerosol Teroson 155.71A
Underbody Wax - -
Terotex wax black 1L can Teroson 114.59F
Protective wax Teroson 122.73Q
Underbody Coating - -
Bodyguard stonechip coating (textured) can - black 3M 08868
Bodyguard stonechip coating (textured) can - white 3M 08878
Bodyguard stonechip coating (textured) can - grey 3M 08879
Bodyguard stonechip coating (flat) can - black 3M 08158
Bodyguard stonechip coating (flat) can - grey 3M 08159
Anti chip coating smooth - grey 3M 08886
Terotex record black 1L can Teroson 122.48N
Terotex record light 1L can Teroson 165.53S
Terotex anti chip compound light (UBC) 1L can Teroson 191.08V
Terotex anti chip compound black (UBC) 1L can Teroson 191.32V
Trim Adhesive - -
Auto adhesive - aerosol - clear (trim) 3M 08080
Auto adhesive - brushable - clear (trim) 3M 08150
Contact adhesive - aerosol - amber 3M 08090
Corrosion Protection - -
Zinc spray 3M 09113
Zinc spray Teroson 158.18T
Anti Corrosive Agent - -
Terotex HV 350 1L can Teroson 141.78L
Terotex HV 350 10L can Teroson 160.02T
Terotex HV 350 60L barrel Teroson 160.01S
Sound Deadening - -
Sound deadening sheets 3M 08840
Terodem SP 100 alu Teroson 190.33
Terodem SP 200 Teroson 190.55M
Terodem SP 300 50 x 50 Teroson 145.28R
Terodem SP 300 100 x 50 Teroson 134.29X
Flexible Part Repair - -
Flexible part repair material (FPRM) 3M 05900
Adhesives / Thread Locking - -
Lock N Seal 243 thread locking Loctite 13701
Stud N Bearing fit 271 Loctite 13704
Pipe sealant 577 Loctite 16604
Gasket - -
Multi gasket Loctite 25688
Silicone copper Loctite 19245
Silicone copper Loctite 82046
Silicone 596 black Loctite 19242
Silicone 596 black Loctite 59875
3020 gasket adhesive Loctite 31458
NVH Baffle - -
Sikabaffle 278 SIKA
Approved Service Material Supplier - Contact Details
3M
3M United Kingdom PLC

3M Centre
Cain Road
Bracknell
Berkshire
RG12 8HT
Telephone (01344) 858000
www.3m.com
Cooper Pegler
Burgess Hill
Sussex
RH 15 9LA
Telephone (014446) 42526
Sika Ltd
Watchmead
Welwyn Garden City
Hertfordshire
AL7 1BQ
Telephone (01707) 394444
www.sika.co.uk
SATA Spray Equipment
Minden Industrial equipment

16 Greyfriars Road
Moreton Hall
Bury St Edmunds
Suffolk
IP32 7DX
Telephone (01284) 760791
www.sata.com
Henkel Loctite Adhesives Limited
Technologies House
Wood Lane End
Hemel Hempstead
Hertfordshire
HP2 4RQ
Telephone (01442) 278000
www.loctite.co.uk
Teroson
Henkel Ltd
Apollo Court
2 Bishops Square Business Park
Hatfield
Hertfordshire
AL10 9EY
Telephone (01707) 635000
www.henkel.co.uk
Underbody sealer
Under floor areas and the front part of the spare wheel well are treated with a plastisol PVC underbody sealer. This material is
not suitable for re-treatment. When repairing areas of underbody sealer, strip the factory-applied underbody sealer back to a
suitable break point. Ensure that a clean metal surface is exposed and that the edge of the existing adheres soundly to the
panel.
Apply new underbody sealer between primer and surface paint operations. Apply seam sealer as necessary before application
of underbody sealer. Ensure that blanking plugs and grommets in the floor pan (except those used for wax injection) are fitted
before underbody sealer application. Refit any heat-fusible plugs which have been disturbed in repair with the aid of a hot air
blower, or replace with rubber grommets
CAUTION: Ensure that suspension units, wheels, tires, power unit, drive shafts, exhaust and brakes, (including all
mounting points), are shielded prior to application of fresh underbody sealer.
www.JagDocs.com
Area of Underbody Sealer Application - Floor Pan (Front)
Area of Underbody Sealer Application - Spare Wheel Well and Rear Side Member
Precautions During Body Repairs and Handling
Take care when handling the vehicle in the workshop. Underbody sealers, seam sealers, underbody wax and body panels may
be damaged if the vehicle is carelessly lifted.
Proprietary Anti-corrosion Treatments
The application of proprietary anti corrosion treatments in addition to the factory-applied treatment could invalidate the
corrosion warranty and should be discouraged. This does not apply to approved, compatible, preservative waxes which may be
applied on top of existing coatings.
Fitting Approved Accessories
When fitting accessories ensure that the vehicle corrosion protection is not affected, either by breaking the protective coating
or by introducing a moisture trap.
Do not screw self-tapping screws directly into body panels. Fit suitable plastic inserts to the panel beforehand. Always ensure
that the edges of holes drilled into panels, chassis members and other body parts are protected with a suitable zinc rich or
acid etch primer, and follow with a protective wax coating brushed onto the surrounding area.
Do not attach painted metal surfaces of any accessory directly to the vehicle's bodywork unless suitably protected. Where
metal surfaces are bolted together always interpose a suitable interface material such as weldable zinc rich primer, extruded
strip, or zinc tape.
Steam Cleaning
Due to the high pressure/temperature generated by steam cleaning equipment, there is a risk that certain adhesives and
corrosion prevention material may become softened or liquified.
Take care not to allow the steam jet to dwell on one area, and keep the nozzle at least 300mm from the panel surface.
CAUTION: Do not remove wax or lacquer from underbody areas during repairs.
Inspection During Maintenance Servicing
It is a requirement of the corrosion warranty that the vehicle is inspected for corrosion by a Jaguar Authorised Repairer during a
routine service, to ensure that the factory-applied protection remains effective.
Rectify any bodywork damage or evidence of corrosion found during inspection as soon as is practicable, both to minimise the
extent of the damage and to ensure the long term effectiveness of the factory-applied corrosion prevention treatment.
Underbody Protection Repairs
Whenever body repairs have been carried out, ensure that full sealing and corrosion protection treatments are reinstated. This
applies both to the damaged areas and also to areas where protection has been indirectly impaired, as a result either of
accident damage or repair operations.
Remove corrosion protection from the damaged areas before straightening or panel beating. This applies in particular to panels
coated with wax, PVC underbody sealer, sound deadening pads etc.
CAUTION: Do not use oxy-acetylene to remove corrosion prevention material. Large volumes of fumes and gases are
liberated by these materials when they burn.
The most common method of removal is by means of a hot air blower with an integral scraper. High temperatures can be
generated with this equipment which may cause fumes. Take care during its use.
Structural Adhesive
CAUTION: When separating a joint with metal to metal adhesive, it is important to avoid distortion. Heat gradually until
the bond weakens sufficiently to permit panel separation - do not apply excessive heat.
NOTE: When spot welding through metal to metal adhesive, take particular care to adjust the equipment setting to
ensure a suitable weld.
Metal to metal adhesive is applied to critical joint areas during factory assembly. The material used is a high temperature,
heat cured, nitrile phenolic which serves to bond two metal surfaces and also to seal the joint against ingress of dust,
moisture and fumes. This material is not suitable for service use and, during repair, should be substituted by an approved
structural adhesive. For panel specific information and to identify the areas of structural adhesive application in repair, refer to
the relevant sheet metal removal and installation procedure.
Expanding Foam Acoustic Seals
Expanding foam acoustic seals are used in various closed-sections of the body to improve vehicle refinement. The seals are
installed during the vehicle body manufacture and expand during the paint process up to ten times original size, thus locking
them into position. They are located such that they prevent noise accentuation along a section and reflect air borne noise
away from the cabin.
The seals have spilt functionality depending on location. The seals located at the base of the body pillars have a primary
function of preventing water ingress when wading. Their secondary function is to prevent noise and dust ingress.
The seal around the fuel filler has a primary function of preventing both fuel and water ingress. With a secondary function of
preventing noise and dust ingress.
The remaining seals primary function is to prevent noise accentuation along a section and reflect air borne noise away from the
cabin.
Another advantage of the seals is that they marginally increase the overall stiffness of the body and its structural performance
in case of a crash.
The seals are manufactured from an expandible polymer.
Replacing Expanding Foam Acoustic Seals
As paint oven temperatures used in a repair workshop are significantly lower than those that are used during manufacture of
the vehicle, (the temperatures are not sufficient to expand the foam), a different process is required to replicate the foam in
repair.
If a repair disturbs the expanding foam acoustic seal it must be reinstated. If access allows, (whether a new seal is fitted or
the original is reused), acoustic foam should be injected after paint refinishing. If access is not possible, or it is not practical
to apply expanding foam due to the nature of the repair, a suitable flexible PU sealer should be applied around the seal and
the corresponding body panel/s prior to assembly. In all cases the application of foam / sealer should form a seal between the
expanding foam acoustic seal and any adjacent panelwork.
Expanding Foam Acoustic Seals - A-pillar, (inner panel)

Expanding Foam Acoustic Seals - A-pillar, (reinforcement)
Expanding Foam Acoustic Seals - A-pillar, (upper)

Expanding Foam Acoustic Seals - B-pillar, (reinforcement)
Expanding Foam Acoustic Seals - Quarter Panel, (fuel filler)
www.JagDocs.com
Expanding Foam Acoustic Seals - Quarter Panel, (inner reinforcement)

Seam Sealer
A heat cured, PVC based sealant is applied to specific joint seams during factory assembly. This material is not suitable for
service use and during repair and should be substituted by an approved seam sealer.
NOTE: Where seams are inaccessible following the reassembly or fitting of components, ensure that a paste-type seam
sealer is applied to such seams. Certain seams also become inaccessible after the completion of panel repairs. In such
instances apply seam sealer and paint before final assembly.
Apply seam sealers after the application of primer and before the application of top coat. The sealer must form a continuous
bead, with the profile of the bead dependent on the type of seam. If the seam sealer is applied with a brush take particular
care to maintain the required coverage of the seam.
Ensure that all accessible repair seams are sealed following a repair. Damage to a vehicle often flexes areas of the body
remote from the impact. As a result the seam sealer in these areas may be disturbed by subsequent straightening and repair
operations. Check all seams in the vicinity of the area undergoing repair for evidence of cracked seam sealer, then clean out as
required and apply fresh seam sealer using the following procedure:
Clean the affected seam and re-treat any exposed metal areas with a suitable etch phosphate primer.
Treat affected area with an etch-acid primer.
Apply appropriate seam sealer as necessary.
apply appropriate colour coat (and under body sealer as applicable).
Provided access is adequate, apply seam sealer to both sides of a repair joint. Where access is limited to one side only, (e.g.
box section), treat the affected box member with cavity wax.
Cavity Wax
After repairs, always re-treat these areas with an approved cavity wax. In addition, treat all interior surfaces which have been
disturbed during repairs whether they have been treated in production or not. This includes all box members, cavities and door
interiors.
Before wax injection, ensure that the cavity to be treated is free from any contamination or foreign matter. Where necessary,
clear out any debris.
Ensure that cavity wax is applied after the final paint process and before refitting any trim components.
During application ensure that the wax covers all flanges and seam areas and that it is adequately applied to all repaired
areas of both new and existing panels.
It should be noted that new panel assemblies and complete body shells are supplied without wax injection treatment. Ensure
that such treatment is carried out after repairs.
Effective cavity wax protection is vital. Always observe the following points:
Complete all paint refinish operations before wax application.

Check the spray pattern of injection equipment.
Mask all areas not to be waxed.
Remove body fixings, such as seat belt retractors, if contamination is at all likely.
Move door glasses to fully closed position before treating door interiors.
Treat body areas normally covered by trim before refitting items.
Check that body and door drain holes are clear after the protective wax has dried.
Keep all equipment clean, especially wax injection nozzles.
Body Repairs - Water Leaks - Water Leaks
General
If water leaks occur after bodywork repairs, the cause can be established using the checks described below. A
systematic and logical procedure is required to locate water leaks. Before beginning extensive checks, a thorough visual
inspection must be carried out.
Visual Inspection
- The following characteristics may indicate existing leaks:
- Check the clearance and accurate fit of ancillary components such as the hood, tailgate, liftgate, doors, and so
on.
- Check for correct fit and possible damage to sealing elements such as blanking plugs, rubber door seals, and so
on.
- Check water drain holes for unhindered flow.
Various tests can be used to provide further information on possible leaks:
- Water test
- Washer test
- Road test
- Chalk (powder) test
Practical execution of tests and checks
Water test
NOTE: Never aim a jet of water directly at a rubber seal.
Carry out the water test with a second person present (in the passenger compartment).
Use variable washer nozzles (concentrated water jet to fine spray mist).
Start in the lower section and spray the whole area, working upwards in stages.
Washer test
Further tests can be carried out in the washer system.

Some leaks originate here, or only occur here.
The relevant passenger compartment should be checked using a torch during the wash procedure.
Road test
If no leaks are located during the tests above, road tests should be carried out on wet roads.
Road tests under various conditions:
- At various speeds.
- On various road surfaces (asphalt to cobbles).
- With loaded or unloaded vehicle.
- Driving through puddles (splash water).
Chalk test (powder test)
In this test, the clamping load and the bearing surface of the seal are checked.
Performing the test:
- Dust the door seal with powder or coat with chalk.
- Coat the bearing surface of the seal with a thin film of Vaseline.
- Slowly close the door and open it again.
- Check the width and continuity of the imprint on the door seal.
Other test equipment
Other equipment such as stethoscopes, UV lamps, special mirrors or ultrasound measuring instruments can be used to
locate leaks.
Rectifying the leak using recommended tools, auxiliary equipment and materials
Tools and auxiliary equipment:
- Dry, absorbent cloths
- Variable washer nozzle
- Torch, fluorescent tube
- Mirror
- Compressed air
- Seal lip installer
- Wet/dry vacuum cleaner
- Sealing compound compressor
- Remover for interior trim
- Cutter blade or pocket knife
- Wedge (wood or plastic)
- Hot air blower
- Special mirror for concealed leaks
- Air flow checker
- Sealing compound (tape and plastic compound)
- Multi-purpose sticker
- Clinched flange sealer
- Window sealing compound
- Water shield (PVC)
- Double-sided adhesive tape for water shield
- Methylated spirit (available from trade outlets)
- PU adhesive
- Silicone remover
- Tar remover
Water leaks according to mileage or running time
Increasing mileage has an effect on the problem of leaks in a vehicle. Possible influencing factors are:
Servicing and maintenance of seals:

- No maintenance, lack of maintenance or incorrect maintenance
- Using an incorrect agent
Damaged seals:
- As a result of aging, wear or incorrect handling/assembly.
Heavy soiling of the vehicle:
- Heavy soiling of a vehicle can seriously impair the function of water drainage channels in particular, and also of
rubber seals.
Age-related factors:
- Environmental factors
- UV radiation
- Extreme climatic conditions
Corrosion can have a serious impact on bodywork, in particular as a result of:
- Lightly or heavily rusted seal carriers
- Rusted body seal welds
- Perforation corrosion
Water leaks after body repairs
If a vehicle develops a leak after body repairs, the following points must be taken into consideration in particular:
The correct seating of ancillary components and their seals must be checked.
The correct alignment of doors/tailgate and liftgate must be checked. The associated seals must not be damaged and
must be installed correctly.
Check that panel seams are correctly sealed.
The correct seating of rubber grommets must be checked.
Directly-glazed windows must have correct and complete bonding.
Water drainage system
If a vehicle develops water leaks, then areas into which water is routed or drained should be checked first.
Water drainage system (illustration for reference only)
Item Description
1 Water drainage, front
2 Water drainage, side and rear
3 Roof drainage
4 Engine compartment drainage
Water leaks, diagnosis and corrective action: Front passenger compartment
Windscreen
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into A-pillar area or instrument cluster area and rocker panel area.
Cause:
- Breaks in adhesive beads
Corrective action:
- The breaks in adhesive beads can be located from inside by using compressed air. The leak can be identified
from outside by the escaping air.
- The second test method is by means of a water test. The outer trims must be raised carefully using a plastic
wedge. The leak should be located from inside by a second assistant.
www.JagDocs.com
Side windows
In the case of side windows, the same problems can arise as for a windscreen. The same corrective actions must therefore be
used.
Door seal
Diagnosis:
- Water ingress in the lower part of the interior door trim or in the rocker panel area.
Cause:
- The water shield fitted behind the interior door trim exists to drain off water that has entered the door via the
drainage holes, either downwards or outwards. If the water shield seal is damaged or has been fitted incorrectly,
then water can get into the passenger compartment.
- In addition to this, the drainage holes can become clogged with leaves, dirt or excess cavity protection agents.
Water gathers in the door and ingresses into the passenger compartment.
- Check water shield for damage or correct fitting.
- If the water shield needs to be re-bonded, then approved seam sealer should be used.
- Before the water shield is installed, the drainage holes must be checked for unhindered flow.
Door seals
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into the rocker panel area
Cause:
- Insufficient clamping load between seal and door.
Corrective action:
NOTE: When adjusting the clamping load, the profile alignment of the relevant components must always be taken
into consideration.
NOTE: Do not realign the flange too far in the direction of the door, as this can reduce the bearing surface of the
seal to the door.
- Check clamping load:

- The easiest way to check the clamping load of a seal to the respective bearing surface is by means of a paper
strip test. This consists of trapping strips of paper at various points between the door and the seal, and fully
closing the door. If it is possible to pull out the paper with no great resistance, then the clamping load is too
low.
- Adjust the clamping load:
- The clamping load is normally adjusted using the striker. When doing so, the edge alignment from the door to
the side panel, or from the front door to the rear door must be taken into account.
- Another setting method is to realign the panel flange for the seal mounting. The clamping load is increased by
moving the flange towards the door.
- Check the bearing surface:
- Apply chalk evenly to the surface of the seal. Evenly coat the bearing surface of the door with Vaseline.
- Close the door fully, the lock must engage. Open the door. The imprint of the chalk (bearing surface) can be
identified in the film of Vaseline.
- The bearing surface should be at least 5mm across at all points.
Other causes:
- The door seal must completely seal the door where it meets the bodywork.
- Water can ingress directly or indirectly into the interior of the vehicle if the seal is damaged at any point.
Corrective action:
- A damaged or worn door seal must always be renewed in full.
- When renewing the seal, the following must be taken into account:
- Always fit the seal first in the area of the narrow radii (corner points).
- Next, secure the seal to the flange evenly by tapping lightly with a rubber hammer. The installed seal must not
be kinked at any point.
NOTE: The prescribed length of a seal must not be shortened.
Other cause:
- The door seal is attached to the welded flange all the way round. If this welded flange is uneven or damaged at
any point (usually in areas with small radii) then this point could be subject to leaks.
- A stretched seal carrier can also cause a leak.
- In both cases, water gets into the vehicle interior under the seal carrier.
Corrective action:
- Align the deformed welded flange using a hammer and anvil block, prevent and, if necessary, repair any paint
damage.
Sliding roof/tilting roof
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water at sliding roof aperture
Cause:
- The sliding roof/tilting roof is installed in a water trap. The water drains off via the water trap, water drain holes
and drain hoses. The drain hoses lead downwards on both sides via the A-pillar and B-pillar.
- The drain holes or drain hoses can become clogged with leaves, dirt, underbody protection and so on.
Corrective action:
NOTE: In the case of a sliding or tilting roof, the external rubber seal and the lock actuator or latch mechanism
must be checked first of all.
- Check the water trap for leaks.

- Check the drain hoses for leaks and for correct connection to the water trap.
- Check the drainage system for unhindered flow, and blow out with compressed air if necessary.
- Check the external seal and the correct adjustment of the sliding roof.
Liftgate
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into rear headlining area and luggage area.
Cause:
- The leak problems of the tailgate and liftgate correspond to those of the doors.
- In addition to this, the area to be sealed is much bigger. The routing holes for cables and hoses must also be
sealed.
- The rubber grommets for the routing holes must be checked for damage and correct seating (fully unhooked).
- The mounting points of the liftgate hinges may leak.
Corrective action:
- Check the rubber grommets and renew if necessary.
- Check the hinge mounting points, and re-seal with sealing compound if necessary.
Forced air extraction
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into side luggage compartment area
Cause:
- The forced air extraction for the vehicle interior is located in the quarter panel lower extension.
- The rubber flap of the forced air extraction must be able to move freely.
Corrective action:
- Remove the forced air extraction.
- Check the seal area between the bodywork and housing, as well as the rubber flap.
- Renew seal if necessary.
Rear window
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into the luggage compartment area
Cause:
- Rear window leaking.
- Check for leak in the same way as for leaking windscreen.
Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks - Body and
Frame
Front End Body Dimensions

NOTES:
All dimensions shown are in millimetres (mm).
Dimensions shown to holes, are always taken from/to the hole centre. They are also always to the body panel surface,
not to the top of bolts or components.
Item From To Dimension
A Headlamp RH inboard fixing hole Front fender LH forward fixing hole 510.5
B Transmission LH mounting, forward stud Engine RH mounting, forward fixing hole 987.2
C Transmission LH mounting, rear stud Engine RH mounting, forward fixing hole 1091

A Front fender RH, rear fixing hole Front fender LH, rear fixing hole 1549.6
B Front fender RH, centre fixing hole Front fender LH, centre fixing hole 1518.1
C RH Headlamp top inboard fixing hole LH Headlamp top inboard fixing hole 771
A Front bumper RH top inboard fixing hole Front bumper LH top inboard fixing hole 770.9
www.JagDocs.com
A Instrument panel carrier RH top fixing hole Instrument panel carrier LH top fixing hole 1416
B Instrument panel carrier RH bottom fixing hole Instrument panel carrier LH bottom fixing hole 1416
Side Panel Dimensions

A Front door top hinge, top fixing hole Rear door top hinge, top fixing hole 1129.4
B Front door top hinge, top fixing hole Rear door bottom hinge, top fixing hole 1133.8
C Front door bottom hinge, top fixing hole Rear door top hinge, top fixing hole 1206.7
D Front door bottom hinge, top fixing hole Rear door bottom hinge, top fixing hole 1122.4
E Rear door top hinge, top fixing hole Rear door striker, top fixing hole 844.4
F Rear door bottom hinge, top fixing hole Rear door striker, top fixing hole 884.7
A Front seat belt retractor fixing hole Front seat belt anchorage fixing hole 1684.37
Rear End Body Dimensions

A RH Rear lamp location hole LH Rear lamp location hole 1501.8
B RH Rear lamp top fixing hole LH Rear lamp top fixing hole 1109.6
C Rear bumper RH outboard top fixing stud Rear bumper LH outboard top fixing stud 1024.7
Under Body Dimensions

A Front subframe front fixing hole Front subframe rear fixing hole 510.5
B Front subframe RH rear fixing hole Front subframe LH rear fixing hole 821
C Front subframe RH front fixing hole Front subframe LH front fixing hole 860
D Front subframe front fixing hole Front subframe rear fixing hole 983.4
www.JagDocs.com
E Front subframe front fixing hole Rear subframe rear fixing hole 3608.5
F Front subframe front fixing hole Rear subframe front fixing hole 3035.8
G Front subframe front fixing hole Rear towing eye rear fixing hole 4138.1
H Rear subframe LH rear fixing hole Rear towing eye rear fixing hole 1011.8
I Rear subframe RH rear fixing hole Rear towing eye rear fixing hole 560.8
J Front subframe front fixing hole Rear towing eye rear fixing hole 1015.3
K Rear subframe front fixing hole Rear towing eye rear fixing hole 1103.6
L Rear subframe RH rear fixing hole Rear subframe LH front fixing hole 1139
M Rear subframe RH front fixing hole Rear subframe LH front fixing hole 908.9
Gap and Profile measurements

The following information is to be used as a guide to assist the technician in installing exterior body panels and trim items so
as to achieve a correctly aligned and cosmetically acceptable vehicle.
NOTE: All dimensions shown are in millimetres, (mm).

Section Description Gap Profile
A-A Hood to front bumper cover 4.0 ± 2.0 N/A
B-B Hood to headlamp 4.0 ± 2.0 2.0 ± 2.0
C-C Hood to front fender 3.5 ± 1.0 0.5 ± 0.5
D-D Front fender to headlamp 2.0 ± 1.0 N/A
E-E Front fender to front bumper cover 0.0 ± 0.5 0.5 ± 0.7
A-A Front bumper cover to headlamp 3.0 ± 2.0 N/A
B-B A-pillar to hood 3.0 ± 1.3 -1.0 ± 0.9
C-C Front fender to front bumper cover 0.0 ± 0.5 0.5 ± 0.7
D-D Front door to front fender 3.65 ± 1.0 -0.5 ± 1.0
E-E A-pillar to windshield 4.0 ± 1.0 N/A
F-F Front bumper cover to front fender (inner sweep) N/A 0.5 ± 1.3

A-A Rocker panel finisher to front door 4.0 ± 1.5 N/A
B-B Windshield to roof panel 4.0 ± 1.1 N/A
C-C Front door to rear door 3.65 ± 1.0 -0.5 ± 1.0
www.JagDocs.com
D-D Front door to rear door at waist 3.65 ± 1.0 0.0 ± 1.0
E-E Front door to rear door upper 3.65 ± 1.0 0.0 ± 1.0
F-F Front door to roof 11.7 ± 1.6 N/A

A-A Rear door to quarter panel 3.65 ± 1.0 0.00 ± 1.0
B-B Rear door to quarter panel upper 7.9 ± 1.5 N/A
C-C Rocker panel finisher to rear door 4.0 ± 1.5 N/A
D-D Rear door to roof panel 7.9 ± 1.5 N/A

A-A Luggage compartment lid to rear window glass 6.0 ± 1.5 N/A
B-B Rear lamp to rear bumper cover 2.0 ± 0.9 -2.0 ± 1.5
C-C Rear lamp to rear quarter upper 2.0 ± 0.9 -2.0 ± 1.5
D-D Luggage compartment lid to rear bumper cover 6.0 ± 1.7 N/A
E-E Luggage compartment lid to quarter panel 3.5 ± 1.1 0.5 ± 0.5
F-F Rear lamp to rear bumper cover 2.0 ± 0.8 -2.0 ± 1.8
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front End Sheet Metal
Front end service panels

NOTE: The illustration may indicate either hand of the service panel, the opposite hand will be similar.
Item Description
1 Front bumper cover
2 Front bumper
3 Front fender
4 Hood
5 Hood hinge
6 Hood latch panel
7 Hood latch panel mounting bracket
8 Front fender support bracket
9 Fender apron panel front extension
10 Fender mounting plate
11 Hood strut mounting bracket
12 Front wheelhouse section
13 Front bumper mounting
14 Front side member
15 Front side member section
16 Front side member closing panel
17 Front side member closing panel section
18 Front side member & suspension top mount assembly
19 Fender apron panel
20 Fender apron panel front section
21 Fender apron panel closing panel
Time schedules, front end

The following information shows the total time taken to replace single panels and complete assemblies. This time includes
removal of Mechanical, Electrical and Trim, (MET), items, plus paint times based on Metallic Clear Over Base Paint, (blends to
adjacent panels are not included).
The times shown were generated by Thatcham, (the Motor Insurance Repair Research Centre), and are to be used as a guide
only.
Single panel times

Panel Description Hours
Hood 7.4
Front bumper cover 7.8
Front fender L/H 8.9
Front Fender R/H 9.1
Hood latch panel 6.6
Instrument panel console remove and install 5.3
Engine and suspension assembly remove and install 9.3
Combination panel replacement times
The following panel combination times show the total time to remove/install body panels, MET items and paint times based on
Metallic Clear Over Base Paint process, (blends to adjacent panels are not included).
Combination panel times

Hood
Hood hinge L/H and R/H
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Front fender
Hood latch panel
Hood latch panel mounting bracket
Front fender support bracket
Total Time L/H 23.5
R/H 23.6
Hood
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Front fender L/H and R/H
Hood latch panel
Hood latch panel mounting bracket L/H and R/H
Front fender support bracket L/H and R/H
Total Time 26.8
www.JagDocs.com
Hood
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Front fender
Hood latch panel
Fender apron panel
Fender apron panel closing panel
Front side member & suspension top mount assembly
Fender mounting plate
Front fender lower mounting
Engine and suspension assembly remove and install
Instrument panel console remove and install
Total Time L/H 44.3
R/H 44.5
Hood
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Front fender L/H and R/H
Hood latch panel
Front fender support bracket L/H and R/H
Fender apron panel L/H and R/H
Fender apron panel closing panel L/H and R/H
Front side member & suspension top mount assembly L/H and R/H
Fender mounting plate L/H and R/H
Front fender lower mounting L/H and R/H
Total Time 57.6
Hood
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Front fender
Hood latch panel
Front bumper mounting
Front side member section
Front side member closing panel section
Total Time L/H 28.0
R/H 28.1
Hood
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Front fender
Hood latch panel
Front fender support bracket mounting
Front fender lower mounting
Front side member
Front side member closing panel
Front wheelhouse section
Total Time L/H 37.6
R/H 37.4
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Closing Panel Front Section
Removal
1. NOTE: The fender apron closing panel front section is

manufactured from mild steel.
The fender apron closing panel front section is cut from the
fender apron panel closing service panel.
2. The fender apron closing panel front section is replaced in conjunction

with:
Front bumper cover
Hood
Front fender
Hood latch panel
Fender apron panel front extension
Fender apron panel front section

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove the fender apron panel front section.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Front Section
(501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
5. Disconnect the generator electrical connectors.
6. NOTE: Make sure the section is cut to cater for the extent
of damage and to allow a minimum 50mm staggered joint
with the fender apron panel front section.
Cut the front section from the fender apron panel closing
service panel.
7. CAUTION: Care should be taken not to cut through into
adjacent panels.
Using the new panel for reference and allowing for an

overlap, cut the old panel at the points indicated.
8. NOTE: To avoid unnecessary MAG plug welding on

installation, spot welds must be drilled from underneath
where this is possible.
Drill out the spot welds.
9. Separate the joints and remove the old panel.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Care should be taken not to cut through

into adjacent panels.
Offer up, align and clamp the new panel into position,
overlapping the old panel remnant. Cut through the new
panel, partially cutting the old panel, at the points where
the MAG butt joint is to be made.
2. Remove the new panel.
3. Cut and remove the old panel remnants.
Prepare the old and new panel joint surfaces.
4. Offer up the new panel and clamp into position. Check alignment, if
correct, proceed to next step, if not rectify and recheck before
proceeding.
5. Tack weld the butt joint.
6. NOTE: Spot welds must be installed 5mm away from the

originals and in the same quantities, whenever this is
possible. Where this is not possible, spot welds should be
installed adjacent to the original.
Spot weld.
7. Dress the tack welds.
8. MAG weld the butt joint.
9. Dress all welded joints.
1. The installation of associated panels and components is the reversal of removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The fender apron panel is manufactured from mild

steel.
The fender apron panel is serviced as a separate weld-on

panel.
2. The fender apron panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front fender
Hood
Hood hinge
Hood strut mounting bracket

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove the hood.

For additional information, refer to: Hood (501-02 Front End Body
5. Remove the hood hinge.
6. Remove the fender apron panel closing panel.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel
8. Remove the windshield wiper motor and linkage.

For additional information, refer to: Windshield Wiper Motor (501-16
Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).
9. Remove the ECM (engine control module).

For additional information, refer to: Engine Control Module (ECM)
(303-14A, Removal and Installation) /
Engine Control Module (ECM) (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V6
3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation) /
Engine Control Module (ECM) (303-14C, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
10. NOTE: If the hood strut mounting bracket is to be
replaced, it is not necessary to remove it.
Drill out the spot welds to remove the hood strut mounting
bracket.
11. NOTE: If the fender mounting plate is damaged it is

not necessary to remove it from the fender apron panel.
Drill out the spot welds to release the fender mounting

plate.
12. NOTE: If the fender mounting plate is undamaged it

can be reused by releasing it from the fender apron panel,
leaving it attached to the suspension top mount. Drill out
from underneath to allow spot welds to be used in
installation.
Drill out the spot welds, from underneath, to release the

fender mounting plate.
13. NOTE: Use a belt sander where there is no access to drill.

Installation
1. Drill holes in the new panel ready for MAG plug welding.
2. Prepare the old and new panel joint surfaces.
3. NOTE: If the hood strut mounting bracket is to be

replaced, it must be spot welded to the fender apron panel
prior to installation. If it is to be reused it should be MAG
plug welded to the fender apron panel after installation.
Install the new hood strut mounting bracket.
proceeding.
5. NOTE: Spot welds must be installed 5mm away from the originals and
in the same quantities, whenever this is possible. Where this is not
possible, spot welds should be installed adjacent to the original.
Spot weld.
6. Offer up, align and clamp the new fender mounting plate into position, if
proceeding.
Spot weld the new fender mounting plate into position.
7.
If the original fender mounting plate is being reused, spot

weld as indicated.
8.
MAG Plug weld.
9. Offer up, align and clamp the hood strut mounting bracket
into position and MAG plug weld.
10.
www.JagDocs.com

removal procedure.
Tighten the hood hinge to 25 Nm.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The fender apron panel closing panel is

The fender apron panel closing panel is serviced as a

separate weld-on panel.
2. The fender apron panel closing panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front fender

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove the front fender.

For additional information, refer to: Front Fender (501-27 Front End
Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
6. Remove the pedestrian protection hood actuator.

For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator
LH (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Removal and Installation) /
Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator RH (501-20C Pedestrian Protection
7. Remove the secondary bulkhead panel.

NA V6 - AJ27 (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation) /
Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH - 3.0L NA V6 - AJ27 (501-02 Front End
8. Remove the pedestrian protection actuator bracket.
9. Release and position the fuse box to one side.
10. Release and position the wiring harness to one side.

11. NOTE: Spot welds must be drilled from underneath,
this will make sure the new panel can be spot welded on
installation. Use a belt sander where there is no access to
drill.
Installation
proceeding.

Spot weld.
5. MAG Plug weld.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel Front Extension
Removal
1. NOTE: The fender apron panel front extensions are manufactured from
mild steel.
The right-hand and left-hand fender apron panel front extensions are
serviced bolted on the hood latch panel. On the vehicle they are welded
to the fender apron panels and inner wheelhouse.
2. The fender apron panel front extension is replaced in conjunction with:

1. Front bumper cover
2. Front bumper
3. Hood latch panel
4. Front fender

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove the hood latch panel.

For additional information, refer to: Hood Latch Panel (501-27 Front End

7. If the left-hand fender apron panel front extension is to be repaired,
www.JagDocs.com
remove the air conditioning (A/C) pipe.
8. Drill out the spot welds.
Installation
1. NOTE: If only one new fender apron panel front extension is to be

fitted, remove the other side from the service panel and discard.
Offer up the new hood latch service panel and clamp into position. Check
alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if not rectify and recheck
before proceeding.
2. With the new panel offered up and aligned, drill 3 holes, in

the areas indicated, ready for MAG plug welding.
3. Remove the new hood latch service panel.
5. Offer up the new hood latch service panel, align and clamp into position.
6. MAG Plug weld.
7. Remove the hood latch panel in readiness for the paint refinishing
process.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel Front Section
Removal
1. NOTE: The fender apron panel front section is

The fender apron panel front section is cut from the fender
apron service panel.
2. The fender apron panel front section is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Hood
Front fender
Hood latch panel
Fender apron closing panel front section

the following:
and Operation) /
4. NOTE: Make sure the fender apron closing panel front section is cut to
allow a minimum 50mm staggered joint with the fender apron panel
front section.
Remove the fender apron closing panel front section.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Closing Panel Front
Section (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).

6. NOTE: The section is cut as indicated to allow access to
dress the MAG butt weld.
Cut the old panel at the point indicated.
7. Drill out spot welds.
9. Cut the new front section from the fender apron panel
service panel at the point indicated.
Installation
1. Offer up, align and clamp the new panel into position
overlapping the old panel remnant. Cut along the edge of
the old panel, through the new panel where the MAG butt
joint is to be made.
proceeding.
5. Tack weld the butt joint.

Spot weld.
www.JagDocs.com

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Bumper Mounting
Removal
1. NOTE: The front bumper mounting is manufactured from

High Strength Low Alloy steel, 350MPa, (HSLA350).
The front bumper mounting is serviced as a separate

weld-on panel, it is also serviced on the front side member
& suspension top mount assembly.
2. The front bumper mounting is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Hood latch panel

the following:
and Operation) /


Installation
1. NOTE: Remove the caged nuts for the front bumper fixings, to
allow for preparation.
Prepare the old and new panel joint surfaces.
proceeding.

Spot weld.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Fender
Removal
1. NOTE: The front fender is manufactured from mild

steel.
The front fender is serviced as a separate bolt-on panel.
2. The front fender is replaced in conjunction with:


the following:
and Operation) /

5. Remove the front bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19
Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
6. Remove the fender splash shield.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Splash Shield (501-02 Front
End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
7. If the right-hand front fender is to be repaired, remove the windshield

washer reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Windshield Washer Reservoir
(501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).
8. Remove the headlamp assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Assembly (417-01 Exterior
9. Remove the rocker panel outer moulding.

access only.
Remove the front fender moulding.
Installation
1. Offer up the new panel. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next

step, if not rectify and recheck before proceeding.
2. Install the front fender.

Tighten to 10 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Fender Support Bracket
Removal
1. NOTE: The front fender support bracket is

The front fender support bracket is serviced as a separate

weld-on panel.
2. The front fender support bracket is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front fender
Hood latch panel

the following:
and Operation) /

6. If the left-hand front fender support bracket is to be repaired, remove

the air conditioning (A/C) pipe.
7. Release and position the front fender support bracket wiring harness to
one side.
8. NOTE: If the front fender lower mounting is
undamaged it should be retained for reuse.
Remove the front fender lower mounting retaining bolt.
9. NOTE: Use a belt sander where there is no access to

drill.
Installation
proceeding.

possible. Where this is not possible spot welds should be
Spot weld.
4. Offer up the front fender lower mounting and loosely install
its fixing bolt. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next
5. Tighten the front fender lower mounting fixing bolt.

Tighten to 10 Nm.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member
Removal
1. NOTE: The front side member is manufactured from High

Strength Low Alloy Steel, 350MPa, (HSLA350).
The front side member is serviced as a separate weld-on

panel, which includes the hood latch panel mounting
bracket. This method is to install a "long" section of the
service panel.
2. In this procedure, make sure that the vehicle is correctly aligned, it must
be placed on an approved alignment jig.
3. The front side member is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Hood
Hood latch panel
Front side member closing panel
Engine, transmission / transaxle, front subframe and front
suspension, as an assembly

the following:
and Operation) /
5. Remove the hood.

6. Remove the front wheelhouse section.

For additional information, refer to: Front Wheelhouse Section (501-27
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
7. Remove the engine, transmission / transaxle, front subframe and front

suspension, as an assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01A, Removal) /
Engine (303-01B Engine - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal) /
Engine (303-01D, Removal) /
Engine (303-01E, Removal) /
Transmission - 2.7L Diesel (307-01, Removal) /
Transmission - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (307-01B Automatic
Petrol, Removal) /
www.JagDocs.com
Transmission (307-01A Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V6 3.0L
Petrol, Removal) /
Transmission - 4.2L (307-01, Removal) /
Transmission - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (307-01B Automatic
Petrol, Removal) /
Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and
Installation) /
Front Subframe - 2.7L Diesel (502-00, Removal and Installation) /
Front Subframe - V6 3.0L Petrol (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and
Mounting System, Removal and Installation) /
Front Subframe - 4.2L, Vehicles Without: Supercharger (502-00, Removal
and Installation) /
Front Subframe - 4.2L, Vehicles With: Supercharger (502-00, Removal
and Installation).

9. If the drivers side front side member and suspension top mount is to be
repaired, remove the brake master cylinder and reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Master Cylinder (206-06
Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation) /
Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
10. If the left-hand front side member and suspension top mount assembly
is to be repaired, remove the fuel supply and return lines.
11. Release and position the front side member wiring harness to one side.
12. Remove any remaining miscellaneous components from the repair area.
13. NOTE: Retain the front fender support bracket

mounting if it is to be reused. If the front fender support
bracket mounting is to be renewed, it is not necessary to
remove or retain it.
Drill out the spot welds to remove the front fender support
bracket mounting.
14. Remove the bulk of the damaged panels by cutting through
the front side member and the front side member closing
panel as indicated.

into the front side member or its inner lower reinforcement.
Cut the front side member closing panel as indicated.
16. Drill out the spot welds from the front side member closing panel as
indicated.
17. NOTE: Retain the front side member closing panel remnant as it
will be used as a template.
Separate the joints and remove the front side member closing panel
remnant.
18. NOTE: Care should be taken not to cut through into

the front side member inner lower reinforcement.
Mark out the position where the front side member MAG
butt joint is to be made and cut through the panel at this
point as indicated.
19. NOTE: Where possible spot welds must be drilled out as indicated,
to allow the new panel to be spot welded on installation.
Drill out the spot welds as indicated.

20. NOTE: Retain the bolts for refitment on installation.
Remove the retaining bolts as indicated.
21. NOTE: Retain the front side member remnant as it will be used as
a template.
Separate the joints and remove the front side member remnant.
Installation
1. Drill out one spot weld, separate and cut a template from
the rear of the front side member remnant as indicated.
2. NOTE: Dress the panel joint surfaces of the template

to allow a good fit.
Offer up, align and clamp the template into position on the
new side member service panel. Cut along the edge of the
template, through the new panel, as indicated, where the
MAG butt joint is to be made.
3. Cut a template from the rear of the front side member

closing panel remnant as indicated.

to allow a good fit.
Offer up, align and clamp the front side member closing
panel remnant into position on the new side member
closing panel service panel. Cut along the edge of the
template, through the new panel, as indicated, where the
MAG butt joint is to be made.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Prepare the panel joint surfaces of the old and new front side member.
6. Offer up the new front side member and clamp into position. Check
before proceeding.
7. Install the retaining bolts.

Tighten to XXNm.
8. Tack MAG weld the front side member butt joint.
9. Dress the front side member MAG tack welds.
10. MAG weld the front side member butt joint.
11. MAG plug weld.

12. NOTE: Spot welds must be installed 5mm away from the originals
and in the same quantities, whenever this is possible. Where this is not
possible, spot welds should be installed adjacent to the original. Where
there is adhesive in the original joint, spot welds should be installed
through the original.
Spot weld.
14. Apply a zinc rich primer to any bare metal surfaces at this stage.
15. Drill holes in the new side member closing panel ready for
MAG plug welding.
16. Prepare the panel joint surfaces of the old and new front side member
closing panel.
17. Offer up the new front side member closing panel and clamp into
position. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if not rectify
and recheck before proceeding.
18. Tack MAG weld the front side member closing panel butt joint.
19. Dress the front side member closing panel MAG tack welds.
20. MAG weld the front side member closing panel butt joint.
21. MAG plug weld.
Spot weld.
24. NOTE: If a new front fender support bracket mounting is to be

installed, drill 3 holes ready for MAG plug welding.
Prepare the panel joint surfaces of the front fender support bracket
mounting and the front side member closing panel.
25. Offer up the front fender support bracket mounting and clamp into
26. MAG plug weld.
27. Dress the MAG plug welds.
www.JagDocs.com
28. Install the front bumper mounting.
For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Mounting (501-27
29. Make sure any remaining areas of bare metal created during this
procedure are treated with a zinc primer prior to the installation of outer
panels.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member and Suspension Top
Mount Assembly
Removal
1. NOTE: The front side member and suspension top mount assembly is,
an assembly of panels, manufactured from High Strength Low Alloy
Steel, 350MPa, (HSLA350) and mild steel.
The front side member and suspension top mount assembly is serviced
as a separate weld-on panel. The assembly includes, the front bumper
mounting, hood latch support panel, front side member, front side
member closing panel, front wheelhouse section, front fender support
bracket mounting, suspension top mount and the inner apron and
wheelhouse panels
2. In this procedure, to make sure that the vehicle is correctly aligned, it

must be placed on an approved alignment jig.
3. The front side member and suspension top mount assembly is replaced
in conjunction with:
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Front fender
Hood
Hood hinge
Hood latch panel
Fender apron panel
Hood strut mounting bracket
Instrument panel console

the following:
and Operation) /
5. Remove the fender apron panel front extension.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Front Extension
6. Remove the front fender support bracket.

For additional information, refer to: Front Fender Support Bracket
7. Remove the fender apron panel.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel (501-27 Front
End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
8. Remove the engine, transmission / transaxle, front subframe and front

suspension, as an assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01A, Removal) /
Engine (303-01B Engine - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal) /
Engine (303-01D, Removal) /
Engine (303-01E, Removal) /
Transmission - 2.7L Diesel (307-01, Removal) /
Transmission - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (307-01B Automatic
Petrol, Removal) /
Transmission (307-01A Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V6 3.0L
Petrol, Removal) /
Transmission - 4.2L (307-01, Removal) /
Transmission - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (307-01B Automatic
Petrol, Removal) /
Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and
Installation) /
Front Subframe - 2.7L Diesel (502-00, Removal and Installation) /
Front Subframe - V6 3.0L Petrol (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and
Mounting System, Removal and Installation) /
Front Subframe - 4.2L, Vehicles Without: Supercharger (502-00, Removal
and Installation) /
Front Subframe - 4.2L, Vehicles With: Supercharger (502-00, Removal
and Installation).

repaired, remove the brake master cylinder and reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Master Cylinder (206-06
Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation) /
Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
repaired, remove the brake booster.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Booster (206-07 Power Brake
Actuation, Removal and Installation).
12. Remove the left-hand and right-hand front seats.

and Installation).
13. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing.

For additional information, refer to: Heater Core and Evaporator Core
Housing (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and Installation).
14. Remove the front safety belt retractor.

For additional information, refer to: Front Safety Belt Retractor (501-20A
15. Remove the B-pillar side impact sensor.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Side Impact Sensor (501-20B
16. Remove the left-hand and right-hand front floor covering.
17. Remove the rear floor covering.
is to be repaired, remove the left-hand rear foot well duct.
19. If the right-hand front side member and suspension top mount assembly
is to be repaired, remove the right-hand rear foot well duct.
20. If the drivers side front side member and suspension top mount is being
repaired, remove the pedal box.
21. Release and position the insulating material at the inner bulkhead to
one side.
22. Release and position the inner bulkhead and floor panel wiring harness
to one side.
23. Drain the fuel tank.

is to be repaired, remove the left-hand under shield.
is to be repaired, remove the right-hand under shield.
is to be repaired, remove the fuel supply and return pipes.
27. For diesel engine vehicles only, if the left-hand front side member and
suspension top mount assembly is to be repaired, remove the fuel
cooler.
is to be repaired, release and position the underfloor wiring harness to
one side.
is to be repaired, remove the front to rear brake pipes.
30. Remove the exhaust heat shields.
31. Release and position the front side member and suspension top mount
wiring harness to one side.
32. Remove any remaining miscellaneous components from the repair area
as necessary.
33. NOTE: Remove the sealer to expose the spot welds.
34. NOTES:
Remove the sealer to expose the spot welds.
Use a belt sander where there is no access to drill. The three spot
welds at the rocker panel should be drilled from outside and right
through, to allow MAG plug welding on installation
www.JagDocs.com
35. NOTE: The removal of the bulkhead reinforcement is
required to gain access to drill out two spot welds.
Remove the bulkhead reinforcement panel, by performing a

saw cut at the points as indicated.
36. Separate the joints and remove the bulkhead reinforcement panel.
37. Drill out the spot welds as indicated.
39. NOTE: The spot welds indicated should be drilled from

inside the engine compartment, to allow spot welding on
installation.

40. NOTES:
Remove the NVH (noise, vibration and harshness)

sound deadening material to expose the spot welds.
The spot welds indicated should be drilled from inside

and right through, to allow MAG plug welding on
installation.
41. CAUTION: This step requires the aid of another technician as the
removed panel will be heavy.
Separate the joints and remove the old panel.
Installation
proceeding.
2. NOTE: To avoid overlapping MAG plug welds, the original

removal holes must be marked so that they can be
avoided when drilling the adjacent MAG plug holes.
Mark the position of the drilled holes as indicated, on the

new panel.

4. NOTE: Holes should be drilled avoiding the areas
previously marked.
Drill holes in the new panel ready for MAG plug welding.
6. NOTE: On installation, a MAG run replaces two spot

welds which cannot be MAG plugged due to restricted
access.
Prepare the old and new panel joint surfaces at the point
indicated, where the MAG run is to be performed.
proceeding.
8. MAG plug weld at the points indicated.

www.JagDocs.com
13. NOTE: A MAG weld run replaces the original two spot
welds as there is no access to install spot welds or MAG
plug welds in this area. The MAG weld run should be
performed avoiding the area of adhesive.
Perform a MAG weld run, of approx 30mm as indicated.
14. NOTE: Spot welds must be installed 5mm away from

the originals and in the same quantities, whenever this is
installed adjacent to the original. Where there is adhesive
in the original joint, spot welds should be installed through
the original.
Spot weld.
panels.
17. Install the NVH sound deadening material in the areas
indicated.
18. NOTE: Make sure all underbody joints are fully sealed following this
repair procedure.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member Closing Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The front side member closing panel is

manufactured from High Strength Low Alloy Steel, 350MPa,
(HSLA350).
The front side member closing panel is serviced as a

2. In this procedure, to ensure the vehicle is correctly aligned, it must be

placed on an approved alignment jig.
3. The front side member closing panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Hood
Hood latch panel
Front side member

the following:
and Operation) /
5. NOTE: This procedure assumes that if the front side member closing
panel is damaged, the front side member will also be damaged.
Therefore, the replacement procedure for the front side member closing
panel is combined within the front side member procedure.
Remove the front side member.

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member (501-27 Front End
Installation

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member Closing Panel Section
Removal
1. NOTE: The front side member closing panel section is

(HSLA350).
The front side member closing panel section is cut from the
front side member closing panel service panel.

3. The front side member closing panel section is replaced in conjunction

with:
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Hood
Hood latch panel
Front side member section

the following:
and Operation) /
5. NOTE: This procedure assumes that if the front side member closing
panel section is damaged, the front side member section will also be
damaged. Therefore the removal procedure for the front side member
closing panel section is combined within the front side member section
procedure.
Remove the front side member section.

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member Section (501-27
Installation

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member Section
Removal
1. NOTE: The front side member section is manufactured from

High Strength Low Alloy Steel, 350MPa, (HSLA350).
The front side member section is cut from the front side
member service panel, which includes the hood latch panel
mounting bracket.

3. NOTE: This procedure assumes that the front side member closing
panel section is damaged. Therefore, the procedure combines the repair
of the front side member section and the front side member closing
panel section.
The front side member section is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Hood
Hood latch panel
Front side member closing panel section
For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member Closing
Panel Section (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).

the following:
and Operation) /
5. Remove the hood.

6. Remove the front bumper mounting.

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Mounting (501-27
www.JagDocs.com
8. NOTE: Removal of the hood latch panel mounting
bracket is required to enable the section cut line to be
marked out and performed on the front side member.
Drill out the spot welds and remove the hood latch panel
mounting bracket.
9. NOTE: The measurements shown allow the section to

be performed, avoiding the inner reinforcements and
allowing for a minimum 50mm staggered joint with the
front side member closing panel section.
Mark out the position where the front side member section
MAG butt joint is to be made. Cut through the front side
member at this point, also cutting through the front side
member closing panel as indicated.
into the front side member.
Mark out the position where the front side member closing
panel section MAG butt joint is to be made. Cut through the
front side member closing panel at this point as indicated.
11. Drill out the spot welds from the front side member closing
panel remnant.
12. Separate the joints and remove the front side member closing panel
remnant.
Installation
1. NOTE: Removal of the hood latch panel mounting bracket is

required to enable the section cut line to be marked out
and performed on the front side member. Retain the hood
latch panel mounting bracket as it will be reused.
Drill out the spot welds and remove the hood latch panel
mounting bracket from the side member service panel.
2. Mark out the position on the front side member service

panel, where the section MAG butt joint is to be made and
cut the panel at this point as indicated.
3. Mark out the position on the front side member closing

panel service panel, where the section MAG butt joint is to
be made and cut the panel at this point as indicated.
4. Prepare the panel joint surfaces of the old and new front side member
and front side member closing panel sections.
5. Offer up the new front side member section and clamp into position.
Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if not rectify and
6. Tack MAG weld the front side member section butt joint.
7. Dress the front side member section MAG tack welds.
8. MAG weld the front side member section butt joint.
9. Dress the front side member section MAG butt joint.
11. Offer up the new front side member closing panel section and clamp into
12. Tack MAG weld the front side member closing panel section butt joint.
13. Dress the front side member closing panel section MAG tack welds.
14. MAG weld the front side member closing panel section butt
joint.

the original.
Spot weld the front side member closing panel section to

the front side member.
16. Dress the spot welds and the front side member closing panel section
MAG butt joint.
www.JagDocs.com
17. Drill holes in the new hood latch panel mounting bracket
ready for MAG plug welding.
18. Prepare the panel joint surfaces of the new hood latch panel mounting
bracket and the corresponding joints on the front side member section.
19. MAG plug weld the hood latch panel mounting bracket to
the front side member section.
20. Dress the hood latch panel mounting bracket MAG plug welds.
panels.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Wheelhouse Section
Removal
1. NOTES:
The left hand service panel is illustrated.
The front wheelhouse section is manufactured from

mild steel.
The front wheelhouse section is serviced as a separate

weld-on panel, the left-hand is serviced less the weld-on
air cleaner mounting bracket. It is also serviced on the front
side member and suspension top mount assembly, the
left-hand assembly includes the air cleaner mounting
bracket.
2. The front wheelhouse section is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front fender
Hood latch panel

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove the front fender support bracket.

For additional information, refer to: Front Fender Support Bracket

7. NOTE: If the left-hand front wheelhouse section is to be repaired,

retain the old panel if the air cleaner mounting bracket is to be reused.
8. If the left-hand front wheelhouse section is to be repaired,

drill out the spot welds for the air cleaner mounting bracket
from underneath so that it can be reused.
9. NOTE: If undamaged, the air cleaner mounting bracket should be

retained for installation on the new panel.
Separate and remove the air cleaner mounting bracket.

Installation
1. NOTE: If adjacent panels are being repaired and

access allows, spot welds should be installed where
possible.
proceeding.

Spot weld.
5. NOTE: If adjacent panels are being repaired and
access allows, spot welds should be installed where
possible.
MAG plug weld.
6. Prepare the panel joint surfaces of the air cleaner mounting bracket.
7. Offer up the air cleaner mounting bracket and clamp into position. Check
before proceeding.
8. Spot weld the air cleaner mounting bracket.

removal procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Hood Latch Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The hood latch panel is manufactured from mild steel.
The hood latch panel is serviced as a separate bolt-on panel and

includes the left-hand and right-hand fender apron panel front
extensions. These are removed and discarded unless damaged.
2. The hood latch panel is replaced in conjunction with:

2. Front bumper
3. WARNING: The hood latch panel and its associated components form
part of the pedestrian protection system, it is essential that any
repair or replacement operations do not affect the safe working of the
system.


the following:
and Operation) /
5. Remove the front bumper.

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper (501-19 Bumpers,
6. Remove both headlamp assemblies.
For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Assembly (417-01 Exterior
7. Remove the condenser core.

For additional information, refer to: Condenser Core - 2.7L Diesel
(412-03, Removal and Installation) /
Condenser Core - V6 3.0L Petrol (412-03 Air Conditioning, Removal and
Installation) /
Condenser Core - 4.2L, Vehicles Without: Supercharger (412-03, Removal
and Installation) /
Condenser Core - 4.2L, Vehicles With: Supercharger (412-03, Removal
and Installation).
8. Remove the radiator.

For additional information, refer to: Radiator (303-03A, Removal and
Installation) /
Radiator (303-03B Engine Cooling - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation) /
Radiator - Vehicles With: Supercharger (303-03C, Removal and
Installation) /
Radiator - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (303-03C, Removal and
Installation).
9. Remove the both hood latch panel braces.
10. Remove the cooling fan upper shroud.
11. Remove both crash sensors.

For additional information, refer to: Crash Sensor (501-20B Supplemental
Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
12. Remove the both hood latches.
13. Remove the hood safety hook guide.
14. Remove both hood latch panel buffers.
15. Release and lay aside the hood latch panel wiring harness.
16. Remove the old panel.

Installation
1. Offer up the new panel. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next

2. Install the hood latch panel.

Tighten to 10 Nm.
removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Hood Latch Panel Mounting Bracket
Removal
1. NOTE: The hood latch panel mounting bracket is

The hood latch panel mounting bracket is serviced as a

2. The hood latch panel mounting bracket is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Hood
Hood latch panel

the following:
and Operation) /

5. Remove the hood.

www.JagDocs.com
drill.
Installation
proceeding.
4. MAG plug weld.

removal procedure.
Roof Sheet Metal Repairs - Roof
Roof service panels
Item Description
1 Roof panel with sliding roof
2 Roof panel without sliding roof
Time schedules, roof panels

The following information shows the total time taken to install single panels and complete assemblies. This time includes
removal of Mechanical, Electrical and Trim, (MET), items, plus paint times based on Metallic Clear Over Base Paint, (blends for
only.
Single panel times

Roof panel without sliding roof 18.6
Roof Sheet Metal Repairs - Roof Panel Vehicles With: Sliding Roof Opening
Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The roof panel is manufactured from mild steel. The
roof panel is serviced as a separate weld-on panel.
2. The roof panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Headliner
Windshield
Rear window glass

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove both front seats.

and Installation).
7. Remove the windshield glass.

For additional information, refer to: Windshield Glass (501-11 Glass,
Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
8. Remove the rear window glass.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Window Glass (501-11 Glass,
9. Remove the roof opening panel frame.

For additional information, refer to: Roof Opening Panel Frame (501-17
Roof Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
10. Remove the driver and passenger side front scuff plate trim panels.
For additional information, refer to: Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05
11. Remove the driver and passenger side rear scuff plate trim panels.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05
12. Remove the driver and passenger side air curtain modules.
For additional information, refer to: Side Air Curtain Module (501-20B
13. Remove the rear seat backrest.
14. Remove the driver and passenger side rear safety belt retractors.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Safety Belt Retractor (501-20A
15. Remove the rear center safety belt retractor.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Center Safety Belt Retractor
(501-20A Safety Belt System, Removal and Installation).
16. Remove the driver and passenger side RF filters.
17. Remove the diversity antenna module.
18. Remove the antenna.

For additional information, refer to: Navigation System Antenna (419-07
Navigation System, Removal and Installation).
19. Release and position the roof wiring harnesses to one side
20. Position the roof opening panel front and rear drain hoses to one side.
21. Remove the driver and passenger side roof mouldings.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. NOTE: The slots should be made so that the new roof panel can be
brazed to the A-Pillar outer and inner.
Cut 2 slots in the new roof panel.

proceeding.
5. NOTE: Make sure the adhesive is kept away from the area of MIG
brazed slots.
Apply adhesive to the areas indicated.

6. Offer up the new panel and clamp into position.
7. Spot weld.
8. MIG braze the slots.
9. Remove any excess adhesive and dress all welded/brazed joints.

10. Make sure the external areas around the MIG brazed slots
are sealed as part of the paint preparation process as this
cannot be performed satisfactorily during panel
replacement.
11. Install NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) sound deadening pads.

removal procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
Roof Sheet Metal Repairs - Roof Panel Vehicles Without: Sliding Roof Opening
Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The roof panel is manufactured from mild steel. The
roof panel is serviced as a separate weld-on panel.
2. The roof panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Headliner
Windshield
Rear window glass

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove both front seats.

and Installation).


For additional information, refer to: Rear Window Glass (501-11 Glass,
9. Remove the headliner.

For additional information, refer to: Headliner (501-05 Interior Trim and
10. Remove the driver and passenger side front scuff plate trim panels.
11. Remove the driver and passenger side rear scuff plate trim panels.
12. Remove the driver and passenger side air curtain modules.
14. Remove the driver and passenger side rear safety belt retractors.
15. Remove the rear center safety belt retractor.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Center Safety Belt Retractor
(501-20A Safety Belt System, Removal and Installation).
16. Remove the driver and passenger side RF filters.
17. Remove the diversity antenna module.
18. Remove the antenna.

For additional information, refer to: Navigation System Antenna (419-07
Navigation System, Removal and Installation).
19. Release and position the roof wiring harnesses to one side
20. Remove the driver and passenger side roof mouldings.

Installation
1. NOTE: The slots should be made so that the new roof panel can be
brazed to the A-Pillar outer and inner.
Cut 2 slots in the new roof panel.

correct, proceed to next step, if not, rectify and recheck before
proceeding.
5. NOTE: Make sure the adhesive is kept away from the area of MIG
brazed slots.
Apply adhesive to the areas indicated.

7. Spot weld.
www.JagDocs.com
8. MIG braze the slots.
9. Remove any excess adhesive and dress all welded / brazed joints.
10. Make sure the external areas around the MIG brazed slots
are sealed as part of the paint preparation process as this
cannot be performed satisfactorily during panel
replacement.
11. Install the NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) sound deadening pads.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Side Panel Sheet Metal
Side service panels

Item Description
1 Front fender
2 Front door
3 Rear door
4 Front door skin panel
5 Rear door skin panel
6 Quarter panel
7 Rocker panel
8 Rocker panel front section (cut from rocker panel)
9 Rocker panel rear section (cut from rocker panel)
10 Rocker panel inner reinforcement
11 Rocker panel and b-pillar outer panel
12 B-pillar reinforcement
13 B-pillar inner panel
14 A-pillar outer panel
15 A-pillar reinforcement
16 Fender apron panel
17 Fender apron panel closing panel
Time schedules, side panels

The following information shows the total time taken to install single panels and complete assemblies. This time includes
only.
Single panel times

Front fender L/H 8.9
Front fender R/H 9.1
Front door 8.8
Rear door 8.7
Front door skin panel 11.1
Rear door skin panel 10.8
Quarter panel L/H 23.2
Quarter panel R/H 24.2
Rocker panel L/H 19.6
Rocker panel R/H 19.9
Rocker panel front section L/H 18.5
Rocker panel front section R/H 18.8
Rocker panel rear section L/H 16.7
Rocker panel rear section R/H 16.8
Windshield glass remove and install 2.2
Rear window glass remove and install 1.7
Headliner remove and install 3.3
Instrument panel console remove and install 5.3

Front fender
Front door
Total Time L/H 12.7
R/H 12.9
Rear door
Quarter panel
Rear window glass remove and install
Headliner remove and install
Total Time L/H 29.0
R/H 30.00

Front door
Rear door
Rocker panel and b-pillar outer panel
B-pillar reinforcement
B-pillar inner panel
Total Time L/H 39.0
R/H 39.0
Front fender
Front door
Rear door
Quarter panel
Total Time L/H 36.2
R/H 37.4
Front fender
Front door
A-pillar outer panel
A-pillar reinforcement
Fender apron panel
Windshield glass remove and install
Total Time L/H 46.4
R/H 46.6
www.JagDocs.com
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - A-Pillar Outer Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The A-pillar outer panel is manufactured from mild

steel.
The A-pillar outer panel is serviced as a separate weld-on

panel. It is not serviced with its riv-nuts for the fender
fixings or NVH (noise, vibration and harshness)
components.
2. NOTE: The A-pillar outer panel is spot welded to the A-pillar

reinforcement upper, which is boron steel. In repair, spot welds are
replaced with MIG braze and MIG braze slots in these areas.
In this procedure the upper butt joint is best performed as low as

possible due to the work involved in the area of MIG slot braze. If
damage dictates, it is permissible to make the section higher up the
pillar.
3. The A-pillar outer panel is replaced in conjunction with:

2. Front fender
3. Hood
4. Front door
5. Headliner
6. Instrument panel console
7. Windshield glass

the following:
and Operation) /
6. Remove the instrument panel console.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Console (501-12
Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).


10. Release and position the floor covering to one side.
11. Release and position the bulkhead insulating material to one side.
12. Release and position the inner rocker panel wiring harness to one side.

14. Remove the underfloor splash shield.
15. If the right-hand A-pillar outer panel is to be repaired, release and

position the underfloor wiring harness to one side.

17. Remove the front door.

For additional information, refer to: Front Door (501-03 Body Closures,
18. Remove the upper and lower front door hinges.
19. Remove the hood.

20. Remove the hood hinge.

21. NOTE: If a new fender apron panel closing panel is to
be fitted the section will not be required.
Drill out the spot welds and cut a section from the fender
apron panel closing panel, to allow access to the A-pillar
joints as indicated.

into the inner panels.
NOTES:
In this procedure the upper butt joint is best

performed as low as possible due to the work involved in
the area of MIG braze slots. If damage dictates, it is
permissible to perform the butt joint higher up the pillar.
Observe the increased pitch required for the MIG braze

slots in this area.
Using the new panel for reference and allowing for an

overlap, cut the old panel at the point indicated. Make sure
that the location of the upper butt joint is calculated to
allow for the installation of the MIG braze slots.
23. Using the new panel for reference and allowing for an
overlap, cut the old panel at the point indicated, where the
lower butt joint is to be made.
24. NOTE: A drill bit suitable for drilling boron should be

used on the upper spot welds, as indicated.
25. Separate the joints and remove the old panel, also releasing the NVH
components.
Installation
1. Trim the excess from the upper part of the service panel.
2. Install the riv-nuts into the new rocker panel front section
as indicated.

NOTE: Temporarily install the front door and hinges to

aid alignment.
Offer up, align and clamp the new panel into position,
overlapping the old panel remnant. Cut through the new
panel, partially cutting the old panel at the points where
the butt joints are to be made.
4. Remove the front door and hinges and the new A-pillar outer panel.
www.JagDocs.com
6. NOTE: Ensure the MAG plug holes are performed away from
the adhesive bond path.
7. NOTE: Observe the increased pitch required for the

MIG braze slots in this area.
Cut slots in the new panel ready for MIG braze slots.
8. NOTE: If necessary, renew the NVH components.
Prepare the old and new panel joint surfaces, including the NVH
components.
proceeding.
10. Remove the new A-pillar outer panel.
11. NOTE: Make sure the adhesive does not encroach into
the area of the MAG plug welds as it will contaminate the
weld (any unsealed areas must be sealed following the
repair).
Apply adhesive to the area as indicated.
12. Apply sealer adhesive to the NVH components as indicated.
13. Offer up the new A-pillar outer panel, align and clamp into position.
14. Tack MIG braze the upper butt joint.
15. Tack MAG weld the lower butt joint.

the originals and in the same quantities whenever this is
the original.
Spot weld.
17. MAG plug weld.

18. MIG Braze the slots.
19. Dress the tack welds/braze.
20. MIG braze the upper butt joint.

21. MAG weld the lower butt joint.
22. Prepare the old and new panel joint surfaces of the fender apron panel
closing panel section.
23. NOTE: If a new fender apron panel closing panel is to be fitted the
section will not be required.
Tack MAG weld the fender apron panel closing panel section.
24. MAG plug weld and MAG weld the fender apron panel
closing panel section.
25. Dress all welded/brazed joints.
www.JagDocs.com
26. NOTE: It may be necessary to temporarily seal the
opening whilst the foam cures, to prevent it encroaching
into the hood hinge area.
Apply expanding foam into the A-pillar as indicated.
27. Make sure that any open or exposed panel joints are suitably sealed
following this procedure.

removal procedure.
Tighten the hood hinge bolts to 17 Nm.
Tighten the upper and lower front door hinges to 30 Nm.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - A-Pillar Reinforcement
Removal
1. NOTE: The A-pillar reinforcement is manufactured from Bake

Hardened Steel, 300MPa, (BH300). It contains
reinforcements manufactured from High Strength Low Alloy
Steel, 340MPa (HSLA340).
The A-pillar reinforcement panel is serviced as a separate

weld-on panel. It is not serviced with its NVH (noise,
vibration and harshness) components.
2. NOTE: The A-pillar reinforcement is spot welded to the A-pillar

reinforcement upper, which is boron steel. In repair spot welds are
replaced with MIG braze slots in this area.
The A-pillar reinforcement is replaced in conjunction with:

2. Front fender
3. Hood
4. Hood hinge
5. Front door
6. Front door hinges
7. Fender apron panel closing panel
8. A-pillar outer panel
9. Fender apron panel
10. Headliner
11. Instrument panel console
12. Windshield glass

the following:
and Operation) /
5. Remove the fender apron panel.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel (501-27 Front
End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
6. Remove the A-pillar outer panel.

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Outer Panel (501-29 Side
Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
7. Remove the side air curtain module.


and Installation).
9. Remove the floor covering.
10. If the passenger side A-pillar reinforcement is to be repaired, remove

the heater core and evaporator core housing.
For additional information, refer to: Heater Core and Evaporator Core
Housing (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and Installation).
11. If the right-hand A-pillar reinforcement is to be repaired, remove the

central junction box.
For additional information, refer to: Central Junction Box (CJB) (418-00
Module Communications Network, Removal and Installation).
12. If the drivers side A-pillar reinforcement is to be repaired, remove the

pedal box.
13. Release and lay aside the insulating material at the inner bulkhead.
14. Release and position aside the inner bulkhead and floor panel wiring
harness.
15. NOTE: The NVH components may have already been

removed on the outer panel.
Remove the upper and lower NVH components and if

undamaged retain for reuse.
16. Remove an area of adhesive above the upper front door
hinge mounting point to expose hidden spot welds.
17. Remove the bolts as indicated and retain for reuse.

18. NOTE: A drill bit suitable for drilling boron should be
used on the boron spot welds.
Drill out the boron spot welds as indicated.
19. NOTE: A drill bit suitable for drilling Dual Phase Steel,
600MPa, (DP600) should be used.
20. From inside the vehicle, drill out the spot welds as
indicated.
www.JagDocs.com
21. Cut a window in the old panel, above the front door lower
hinge reinforcement, to enable access to the spot welds as
indicated.
22. NOTE: The spot welds indicated should be drilled right

through, to enable MAG plug welding and a MIG braze slot
on installation. The MIG braze slot is required as the
original panel is MIG brazed in this area.

24. NOTE: Care should be taken not to cause damage to

remaining panels when separating joints containing
adhesive.
Separate the joints and remove the old panel, observing

the areas of NVH component and adhesive as indicated.
Installation
proceeding.
2. With the new panel in position, mark the position of MAG
plug welds as indicated.
4. NOTE: In the area of the windshield wiper motor linkage

mounting, there may not be access to spot weld. In this
case, MAG plug welding is acceptable in this area.
5. Cut slots in the new panel as indicated.
6. NOTE: The MIG braze slot is required as the original

panel is MIG brazed in this area.
Cut an elongated slot between the two drill outs in the

A-pillar inner panel as indicated, ready for MIG brazing.
proceeding.

the areas of the MAG plug welds as it will contaminate the
weld.
11. Apply adhesive to the area as indicated.
www.JagDocs.com
13. Offer up, align and clamp the new panel into position.
14. Install the bolts as indicated.

Tighten to 25 Nm.
possible. Where this is not possible spot welds should be
the original.
Spot weld.
16. MAG plug weld.

18. MIG braze the elongated slot as indicated.
19. Dress all welded/brazed joints and remove any excess adhesive.
20. make sure any remaining areas of bare metal created during this
panels.
21. Install the upper and lower NVH components as indicated.
22. When installing the A-pillar outer panel, the spot welded
joint of the A-pillar reinforcement containing adhesive,
should be spot welded in the same locations to allow a
satisfactory weld.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - B-Pillar Inner Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The B-pillar inner panel is manufactured from mild

steel.
The B-pillar inner panel is cut from the bodyside inner front
section service panel.
2. The B-pillar inner panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Front door
Rear door
Rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel
B-pillar reinforcement
Rocker panel inner reinforcement
Headliner

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove the rocker panel inner reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Rocker Panel Inner Reinforcement
(501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
5. Cut the old panel at the point indicated.
6. Cut the old panel at the point
indicated.
8. NOTE: Care should be taken when separating and removing the old
panel as it will be used as a template.
Carefully separate the joints and remove the old panel.

Installation
1. Cut a template from the old panel as indicated.

to ensure a good fit.
new B-pillar inner panel. Cut along the edge of the
template, through the new panel, at the point indicated
where the MAG butt joint is to be made.
3. Remove the template from the new panel.
4. Using the old panel for reference and allowing for an

overlap, cut the new panel at the point indicated.
proceeding.
7. Cut the new and old panels at the point indicated, where
the lower MAG butt joint is to be made.
8. Remove the new B-pillar inner panel.
the area of MAG plug welds as it will contaminate the weld,
(any unsealed areas must be sealed following the repair).
Apply weld through adhesive to the area as indicated.
12. Tack MAG weld the butt joints.

13. Spot weld.
15. MAG plug weld.
16. MAG weld the upper butt joint.

17. MAG weld the lower butt joint.
procedure are treated with a zinc primer prior to the installation of other
panels.
20. Make sure the joint between the B-pillar inner panel and the rocker
panel inner panel is sealed following the completion of the B-pillar
procedures.

removal procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - B-Pillar Reinforcement
Removal
1. NOTE: The B-pillar reinforcement is manufactured from Dual

Phase Steel, 450MPa, (DP450). It contains an internal boron
reinforcement.
The B-pillar reinforcement panel is serviced as a separate

weld-on panel. It is not serviced with its NVH (noise,
2. NOTE: The B-pillar reinforcement is spot welded to the cant rail

reinforcement which is boron steel. In repair spot welds are replaced
with MIG braze slots in these areas.
The b-pillar reinforcement is replaced in conjunction with:

1. Front door
2. Rear door
3. Rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel
4. Headliner

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove the rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel.

For additional information, refer to: Rocker Panel and B-Pillar Outer
Panel (501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
5. Cut the old panel at the point indicated.
6. NOTE: A drill bit suitable for drilling boron should be used on the
boron spot welds.
7. NOTE: Care should be taken when separating and removing the old
panel as it will be used as a template. Care should also be taken in the
area of the NVH components.
Carefully separate the joints and remove the old panel.

Installation
1. Cut a template from the old panel, the cut should be made
approx 10mm below the hole as indicated.

to ensure a good fit.
new B-pillar reinforcement panel. Cut along the edge of the
template, through the new panel, at the point indicated,
where the MAG butt joint is to be made.

5. Cut slots in the new panel ready for MIG braze slots.
6. NOTE: If necessary, renew the NVH components.
components.
proceeding.
8. Remove the new B-pillar reinforcement panel.

9. Apply sealer adhesive to the NVH components, as
indicated.
11. Tack MAG weld the upper butt joint.
12. Install a tack MAG weld between the B-pillar reinforcement and the
rocker panel inner reinforcement to secure the panel in position, to
enable a final alignment check prior to welding.
13. NOTE: Temporarily install the rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel
and the front and rear doors and hinges to aid alignment.
Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if not, rectify and

14. Remove the front and rear doors and hinges and the rocker panel and
B-pillar outer panel.
16. MAG plug weld.
17. MAG weld the upper butt joint.
www.JagDocs.com
panels.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Door Skin Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The front door skin panel is manufactured from bake

hardened steel, (220 MPa), plus zinc.
The front door skin panel is serviced as a separate panel.
2. The front door skin panel is replaced in conjunction with:

1. Front door

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove the front door window regulator and motor.

For additional information, refer to: Front Door Window Regulator and
Installation).

6. Remove the exterior mirror.

For additional information, refer to: Exterior Mirror (501-09 Rear View
Mirrors, Removal and Installation).
7. Remove the front door latch.

For additional information, refer to: Front Door Latch (501-14 Handles,
8. Remove the front door outer window frame mouldings.
9. Remove the front door weatherstrips.

10. Remove the front door wiring harness.
11. Remove the front door impact absorbers.
12. Remove the front door glass run felt.
13. Disconnect the front door wiring harness, accessed behind the grommet
on the A-pillar.
14. Remove the screw and release the front door check strap from the body.

16. Abrade the areas of folded flange on the old front door skin
panel.
17. Separate the adhesive and remove the bulk of the old panel.
18. Separate and remove the old panel remnants from the front door frame.
Installation
proceeding.
4. Apply adhesive to the areas of folded flange as indicated.

5. Apply adhesive to the impact beam/reinforcements as
indicated.
6. Offer up the new panel, align and clamp into position.
7. Fold the flange of the front door skin panel, over the front
door frame as indicated.
www.JagDocs.com
8. NOTE: There is access to apply the expanding foam sealer
with the front door skin panel fitted to the front door
frame.
Apply expanding foam sealer to the area indicated.
9. Remove any excess adhesive or expanding foam sealer.
10. Dress the folded flange joints.
11. Install the front door.

Tighten to 30 Nm.
12. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if not rectify before
proceeding.
13. Install the NVH (noise, vibration and harshness)

components.
14. NOTE: Install the front door upper frame weatherstrip prior to
installing the front door.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Door Skin Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The rear door skin panel is manufactured from bake

hardened steel, (220 MPa), plus zinc
The rear door skin panel is serviced as a separate panel.
2. The rear door skin panel is replaced in conjunction with:

1. Rear door

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Door Window Regulator and
Installation).

6. Remove the rear door latch.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Door Latch (501-14 Handles,
7. Remove the rear door outer window frame mouldings.
8. Remove the rear door weatherstrips.
9. Remove the rear door wiring harness.

10. Remove the rear door impact absorbers.
11. Remove the rear door glass run felt.
12. Disconnect the rear door wiring harness, accessed behind the grommet
on the B-pillar.
13. Remove the screw and release the rear door check strap from the body.
14. Remove the rear door.

15. Abrade the areas of folded flange on the old rear door skin
panel.
16. Separate the adhesive and remove the bulk of the old panel.
17. Separate and remove the old panel remnants from the rear door frame.
Installation
proceeding.
4. Apply adhesive to the areas of folded flange as indicated.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Apply adhesive to the impact beam/reinforcements as
indicated.
7. Fold the flange of the rear door skin panel, over the rear
door frame as indicated.
8. Remove any excess adhesive.
9. Dress the folded flange joints.
10. Install the rear door.

Tighten to 30 Nm.
11. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if not rectify before
proceeding.
12. Install the NVH (noise, vibration and harshness)

components.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Rocker Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The rocker panel is manufactured from mild steel.
The rocker panel is serviced as a separate weld-on panel. It is not

serviced with its riv-nuts for the fender fixings, or NVH (noise, vibration
and harshness) components.
2. The rocker panel is replaced in conjunction with:

1. Front fender
2. Front door
3. Rear door

the following:
and Operation) /

and Installation).

7. Remove the front and rear door weatherstrips.

8. Remove the cowl side trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Cowl Side Trim Panel (501-05


11. Remove the C-pillar side impact sensor.

For additional information, refer to: C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor (501-20B
14. Remove the rear wheel and tire.

15. Remove the rear fender splash shield.
18. If the right-hand rocker panel is to be repaired, release and position the
underfloor wiring harness to one side.



For additional information, refer to: Rear Door (501-03 Body Closures,
22. CAUTION: Care should be taken not to cut through into the inner
panels.
Using the new panel for reference and allowing for an overlap, cut the
old panel at the points indicated.
www.JagDocs.com
24. Separate the joints and remove the bulk of the old panel.
Installation
1. Install the riv-nuts into the new rocker panel as indicated.
panels.
Offer up, align and clamp the new panel into position, overlapping the
old panel remnant. Cut through the new panel, partially cutting the old
panel at the points where the MAG butt joints are to be made.
6. NOTE: If necessary renew the NVH components.
components.
7. NOTE: Temporarily install the front and rear doors and front fender to
aid alignment.
Offer up the new panel and clamp into position. Check alignment, if
proceeding.
8. Remove the front and rear doors, front fender and the new rocker panel.
9. NOTE: Make sure the adhesive does not encroach into the area of the
butt joint as it will contaminate the weld (any unsealed areas must be
sealed following the repair).

11. Offer up the new rocker panel, align and clamp into position.
12. Tack weld the butt joints.
Spot weld.
14. MAG plug weld.
www.JagDocs.com
16. MAG weld the butt joints.

18. The joint between the rocker panel and A-pillar must be
sealed following the repair as indicated.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Rocker Panel and B-Pillar Outer Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel is manufactured from
mild steel.
The rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel is serviced as a separate

weld-on panel. It is not serviced with its NVH (noise, vibration and
harshness) components.
2. NOTE: The rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel is spot welded to the
cant rail reinforcement which is boron steel. In repair spot welds are
replaced with MIG braze and MIG braze slots in these areas.
The rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel is replaced in conjunction with:
1. Front door
2. Rear door
3. B-pillar reinforcement
4. Headliner

the following:
and Operation) /
and Installation).
6. Remove the right-hand and left-hand front scuff plate trim panels.
8. Remove the right-hand and left-hand rear scuff plate trim panels.



13. Release and position the roof wiring harness to one side.
14. Remove the roof moulding.





Remove the rear fender splash shield.
25. If the right-hand rocker panel is to be repaired, release and position the
underfloor wiring harness to one side.


28. Remove the rear door upper and lower hinges from the B-pillar.
www.JagDocs.com
29. Measure and mark out a section on the B-pillar upper, on
the vehicle as indicated.

NOTE: A drill bit suitable for drilling boron should be

used on the 4 upper boron spot welds.
Cut the section of the B-pillar upper at the points indicated

and drill out the spot welds.
31. NOTE: Care should be taken when separating and removing the
section as it will be used as a template.
Carefully separate the section of the B-pillar upper and remove.
32. NOTE: Dress the panel joint surfaces of the template to make sure
it is a good fit.
Offer up, align and clamp the template into position on the new rocker
panel and B-pillar outer panel. Cut around the edge of the template,
through the new rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel at the points
indicated, where the MIG brazed butt joint is to be made.
34. NOTE: This procedure shows the rocker panel part of the rocker
panel and B-pillar outer panel being installed to its service condition.
The rocker panel lower butt joints could be performed closer to the
B-pillar, dependant on the extent of the damage.
Installation
panels.
NOTE: Temporarily install the front door and the rear door and
hinges, to aid alignment.
panel at the points where the MAG butt joints are to be made.
2. Remove the front door and the rear door and hinges and the new rocker
panel and B-pillar outer panel.
5. Cut slots in the new panel ready for MIG braze slots.
www.JagDocs.com
6. NOTE: If necessary, renew the NVH component.
component.
7. NOTE: Temporarily install the front door and the rear door and
hinges, to aid alignment.
proceeding.
8. Remove the front door and the rear door and hinges and the new rocker
panel and B-pillar outer panel.
9. NOTE: Make sure the adhesive does not encroach into the
area of the butt joint as it will contaminate the weld (any
unsealed areas must be sealed following the repair).
10. Apply sealer adhesive to the NVH component as indicated.

11. Offer up the new rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel, align and clamp
into position.
12. Tack MIG braze the upper butt joint.
13. Tack MAG weld the lower butt joints.
Spot weld.
15. MAG plug weld.
17. Dress the tack welds/braze.
18. MIG braze the upper butt joint.
19. MAG weld the lower butt joints.


removal procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Rocker Panel Front Section
Removal
1. NOTE: The rocker panel front section is manufactured from mild

steel.
The rocker panel front section is cut from the rocker panel service panel.
It is not serviced with its riv-nuts for the fender fixings, or NVH (noise,
2. The rocker panel front section is replaced in conjunction with:

1. Front fender
2. Front door
3. Rear door

the following:
and Operation) /

and Installation).





16. If the right-hand rocker panel front section is to be repaired, release and



20. Cut the new rocker panel front section from the new rocker panel service
panel.
panels.

Installation
1. Install the riv-nuts into the new rocker panel front section
as indicated.
panels.
panel, at the points where the MAG butt joints are to be made.
www.JagDocs.com
components.
7. NOTE: Temporarily install the front and rear doors and front fender to
aid alignment.
proceeding.
8. Remove the front and rear doors, front fender and the new rocker panel
front section.

10. Offer up the new rocker panel front section, align and clamp into
position.
Spot weld.
13. MAG plug weld.
17. The joint between the rocker panel and A-pillar must be
sealed following the repair as indicated.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Rocker Panel Inner Reinforcement
Removal
1. NOTE: The rocker panel inner reinforcement is manufactured from Dual

Phase Steel, 600MPa, (DP600).
The rocker panel inner reinforcement is serviced as a separate weld-on

panel. This procedure defines the rocker panel inner reinforcement to be
sectioned to enable fitment of the B-pillar inner panel.
2. The rocker panel inner reinforcement is replaced in conjunction with:

1. Front door
2. Rear door
3. Rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel
4. B-pillar reinforcement
5. Headliner

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove the B-pillar reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Reinforcement (501-29 Side
Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
5. NOTE: When replaced in association with other inner and outer panel
sections, make sure there is always a minimum 50mm staggered joint
between every section.
Cut the old panel at the point indicated.
www.JagDocs.com
6. NOTES:
A drill bit suitable for drilling DP600 should be used.
There are spot welds located under the adhesive residue left by the
removal of the B-pillar reinforcement.
7. Using a belt sander, release the rocker panel inner reinforcement from
the MAG welds at the points indicated.
Installation
1. Cut a short section from the front end of the old panel, to be used as a
template.
2. NOTE: Dress the panel joint surfaces of the template to ensure a good
fit.
Offer up, align and clamp the template into position on the new rocker
panel inner reinforcement. Cut along the edge of the template, through
the new panel, at the point indicated, where the MAG butt joint is to be
made.
proceeding.
7. Remove the new rocker panel inner reinforcement.
8. NOTE: Make sure the adhesive does not encroach into the areas of the
MAG plug welds or butt joint as it will contaminate the weld.
Apply adhesive to the area, as indicated.

9. Apply adhesive to the area, as indicated.
11. MAG tack weld the butt joint.
Spot weld.
13. MAG plug weld.
www.JagDocs.com
panels.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Rocker Panel Rear Section
Removal
1. NOTE: The rocker panel rear section is manufactured from mild

steel.
The rocker panel rear section is cut from the rocker panel service panel.
It is not serviced with its NVH (noise, vibration and harshness)
components.
2. The rocker panel rear section is replaced in conjunction with:

1. Front door
2. Rear door

the following:
and Operation) /

and Installation).






18. If the right-hand rocker panel rear section is to be repaired, release and


21. Cut the new rocker panel rear section from the new rocker panel service
panel.
panels.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
panels.
panel, at the points where the MAG butt joints are to be made.
components.
6. NOTE: Temporarily install the front and rear doors to aid alignment.
proceeding.
7. Remove the front and rear doors and the new rocker panel rear section.
8. NOTE: Make sure the adhesive does not encroach into the
area of the butt joint as it will contaminate the weld (any
unsealed areas must be sealed following the repair).

10. Offer up the new rocker panel rear section, align and clamp into position.
Spot weld.
13. MAG plug weld.

removal procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear End Sheet Metal
Rear end service panels

Item Description
1 Luggage compartment lid
2 Rear bumper cover
3 Rear bumper
4 Back panel
5 Rear bumper mounting L/H
6 Rear bumper mounting R/H
7 Quarter panel
8 Quarter panel lower extension
9 Rear wheelhouse outer
10 Spare wheel well
11 Rear floor side extension
12 Rear side member section
13 Rear side member closing panel section
Time schedules, rear end

The following information shows the total time taken to replace single panels and complete assemblies. This time includes
adjacent panels are not included)
only.
Single panel times

Luggage compartment lid 7.5
Rear bumper cover 6.6
Back panel 9.4
Quarter panel L/H 23.2
Quarter panel R/H 24.2
Headliner remove and install 3.3
Rear window glass remove and install 1.7
Rear subframe and rear suspension remove and install 5.2

Luggage compartment lid
Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Quarter panel
Back panel
Total Time L/H 35.2
R/H 35.9
Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Quarter panel L/H and R/H
Back panel
Total Time 44.7
Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Quarter panel
Back panel
Rear wheelhouse outer
Rear side member section
Rear side member closing panel section
Spare wheel well
Rear floor side extension
Rear subframe and rear suspension remove and install
Total Time L/H 54.0
R/H 54.5
Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Quarter panel L/H and R/H
Back panel
Rear wheelhouse outer L/H and R/H
Rear side member section L/H and R/H
Rear side member closing panel section L/H and R/H
Spare wheel well
Rear floor side extension L/H and R/H
Total Time 70.5
Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Quarter panel
Back panel
Spare wheel well
Total Time L/H 50.1
R/H 50.2
Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Back panel
Spare wheel well
Total Time 26.8
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Back Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The back panel is manufactured from mild

steel.
The back panel is serviced as a separate weld-on panel, it

includes the back panel inner, right-hand and left-hand rear
bumper mountings, it also includes its weld studs.
2. The back panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper

the following: Health and Safety Precautions /
and Operation) /
4. Remove the rear bumper.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper (501-19 Bumpers,
5. Remove the battery.

For additional information, refer to: Battery (414-01 Battery, Mounting
and Cables, Removal and Installation).
6. Remove the battery tray.
8. Remove the loadspace left-hand trim panel.

9. Remove any electrical components in the local area of repair to prevent

damage.
10. Remove the auxiliary junction box (AJB).

For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) (418-00
11. Release the external back panel wiring harness and pull through into the
loadspace.
12. Remove the luggage compartment lid weatherstrip.
13. Remove the loadspace trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel (501-05
14. Remove the spare wheel and tire (if equipped).
15. Remove the subwoofer speaker (if equipped).
16. Release and position the back panel and loadspace wiring harness to
one side.
17. Remove the luggage compartment latch striker.
18. Remove the right-hand and left-hand forced air extraction grilles.
19. Remove the right-hand and left-hand muffler and tailpipe.

For additional information, refer to: Muffler and Tailpipe (309-00A,
Removal and Installation) /
Muffler and Tailpipe (309-00B, Removal and Installation) /
Muffler and Tailpipe (309-00C, Removal and Installation).
20. Remove the right-hand and left-hand muffler and tailpipe heatshield.
www.JagDocs.com
21. NOTE: Where applicable spot welds must be drilled from the
inside, this will enable the new panel to be spot welded on installation.
The lowest spot weld to the quarter panel lower extension has to be
drilled from outside and MAG plug welded on installation.
Installation
proceeding.

4. Apply adhesive to the areas indicated.
6. NOTE: Spot welds must be installed 5mm away from the originals and
in the same quantities, whenever this is possible. Where this is not
Spot weld.
7. MAG Plug weld.

8. Dress all welded joints and remove any excess adhesive.

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Quarter Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The quarter panel is manufactured from mild

steel.
The quarter panel is serviced as a separate weld-on panel,

it includes the quarter panel lower extension, rear lamp
mounting panel, rear lamp mounting panel insert, water
drain panel and the door striker reinforcement. It is not
serviced with its weld studs, or NVH (noise, vibration and
harshness) components.
2. The quarter panel is replaced in conjunction with:

1. Rear bumper
2. Rear bumper cover
3. Luggage compartment lid
4. Rear window glass
5. Headliner

the following:
and Operation) /


6. Remove the Rear Bumper.

9. If the left-hand rear quarter panel is to be repaired, remove the

loadspace left-hand trim panel.
10. If the right-hand rear quarter panel is to be repaired, remove the

auxiliary junction box (AJB).
damage.
12. Remove the rear muffler.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00C Exhaust
System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation) /
Rear Muffler (309-00C Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
13. Remove the exhaust muffler and tailpipe heatshield.
14. Remove the rear scuff plate trim panel.

15. Remove the loadspace trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel (501-05
16. Remove the forced air extraction grille.
17. Release and lay aside the back panel and loadspace wiring harness.
19. Remove the rear bumper cover side retainer.
20. Remove the roof moulding.

www.JagDocs.com
24. Remove the audio unit antenna amplifier.

For additional information, refer to: Audio Unit Antenna Amplifier
(415-01A Information and Entertainment System, Removal and
Installation).
25. If the left-hand rear quarter panel is to be repaired, remove the diversity
antenna module.
26. Remove the C-Pillar side impact sensor.

27. Remove the rear door striker.
28. Remove the luggage compartment lid.
29. If the right-hand rear quarter panel is to be repaired, drain the fuel tank.
30. If the right-hand rear quarter panel is to be repaired, remove the fuel
filler door.
31. If the right-hand rear quarter panel is to be repaired, remove the fuel
tank filler pipe.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (310-01 Fuel
Tank and Lines - 3.0L, Removal and Installation) /
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines - 4.2L, Removal and
Installation).
32. Remove the luggage compartment lid hinge.

33. NOTE: The upper butt joint must be performed below
the 4 metal thickness parts of the door and rear window
apertures, (to enable spot welding back).
Cut the old panel at the points illustrated, allowing for

overlap, ensuring the final cut is performed below the 4
metal thickness parts of the door and rear window aperture.
34. NOTE: This procedure assumes that the door striker

reinforcement panel is undamaged. In this case, the
original remains on the vehicle and the new door striker
reinforcement panel is removed from the quarter panel
service panel and discarded.
Drill out the spot weld.
35. NOTE: Use a belt sander where there is no access to drill.

E101672
L- -
36. Separate the joints and remove the old panel, also
releasing the NVH components.
Installation
1. NOTE: This procedure assumes that the door striker

reinforcement panel is undamaged. In this case, the
original remains on the vehicle and the new door striker
reinforcement panel is removed from the quarter panel
service panel and discarded.
Remove the door striker reinforcement panel from the

quarter panel service panel.
2. Trim the excess from the upper part of the service panel.
3. Prepare the old and new panel joint surfaces, including the NVH
components.
4. NOTE: Temporarily install the luggage compartment lid and
hinge to aid alignment.
Offer up, align and clamp into position, overlapping the old
panel. Cut the new and old panels at the points where the
MAG butt joints are to be made.
5. Remove the new panel, the luggage compartment lid and the old panel.
6. Where applicable, drill holes in the new panel ready for

MAG plug welding.
www.JagDocs.com
8. If necessary, renew the NVH components.
9. Apply sealer adhesive to the NVH components.
10. NOTE: Temporarily install the luggage compartment lid and hinge
to aid alignment.
Offer up the new panel, align and clamp into position.

Spot weld.
E101679
L- -
13. MAG plug weld.
14. MAG plug weld the new panel to the door striker
reinforcement panel.
17. NOTE: Stud dimensions: 6mm x 1.0mm thread, 20mm length.
Prepare the new panel and install the weld studs as indicated.

removal procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Quarter Panel Lower Extension
Removal
1. NOTE: The Quarter Panel Lower Extension is

The quarter panel lower extension is serviced as a separate

weld-on panel, it is also serviced on the quarter panel. It is
serviced without weld studs.
2. The quarter panel lower extension is replaced in conjunction with:

1. Rear bumper cover
2. Rear bumper

the following:
and Operation) /


damage.
7. Remove the Rear Bumper.

8. Remove the rear muffler.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00C Exhaust
System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation) /
9. Remove the exhaust muffler and tailpipe heatshield.
10. Remove the forced air extraction grille.

11. Release and lay aside the back panel and loadspace wiring harness.
12. Remove the rear bumper cover side retainer.

15. NOTE: Where applicable spot welds must be drilled

from the inside, this will enable the new panel to be spot
welded on installation. Use a belt sander where there is no
access to drill.

Installation
proceeding.

the original.
Spot weld.
7. MAG plug weld.
8. NOTE: Stud dimensions: 6mm x 1.0mm thread, 20mm length.
Prepare the new panel and install the weld studs as indicated.

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Bumper Mounting
Removal
1. NOTE: The rear bumper mounting is manufactured from

mild steel.
The rear bumper mounting is serviced on the back panel

and must be removed from this to carry out this procedure.
2. The rear bumper mounting is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper

the following:
and Operation) /

5. If the right-hand rear bumper mounting is to be repaired, remove the

battery.

battery tray.
8. Remove the rear bumper.


damage.

auxiliary junction box (AJB).
www.JagDocs.com
11. Release the external back panel wiring harness and pull through into the
loadspace.
13. Remove the spare wheel and tire (if equipped).
14. Remove the subwoofer speaker (if equipped).
15. Release and position the back panel and loadspace wiring harness to
one side.
16. Remove the right-hand or left-hand muffler and tailpipe as necessary.

For additional information, refer to: Muffler and Tailpipe (309-00A,
Removal and Installation) /
Muffler and Tailpipe (309-00B, Removal and Installation) /
Muffler and Tailpipe (309-00C, Removal and Installation).
17. Remove the right-hand or left-hand muffler and tailpipe heatshield as

necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Spot welds must be drilled from the inside, this will
enable the new panel to be spot welded on installation.
Drill the rear bumper mounting off the back panel service
panel.
proceeding.

the original.
Spot weld.

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Floor Side Extension
Removal
1. NOTE: The rear floor side extension is manufactured from

mild steel.
The rear floor side extension is serviced as a separate

weld-on panel. It is not serviced with its brackets or weld
studs
2. The rear floor side extension is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Quarter panel
Back panel
Rear window glass
Headliner

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove the quarter panel.

For additional information, refer to: Quarter Panel (501-30 Rear End
5. Remove the back panel.

For additional information, refer to: Back Panel (501-30 Rear End Sheet
Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
7. If the right-hand rear floor side extension is being repaired, release and
lay aside the battery positive cable.
drill.
9. NOTE: Retain the old panel for reference to the weld stud location
points.

10. NOTE: Drill out from underneath to allow spot welds
to be used in installation. If undamaged, retain the
mounting bracket for re-use on installation.
If the left-hand rear floor side extension is to be repaired,

drill out the spot welds, from underneath and remove the
mounting bracket.
11. NOTE: Drill out from underneath to allow spot welds

to be used in installation. If undamaged, retain the AJB
(auxiliary junction box) mounting bracket for re-use on
installation.
If the right-hand rear floor side extension is to be repaired,

drill out the spot welds, from underneath and remove the
AJB mounting bracket.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
2. NOTE: Stud dimensions: 6mm x 1mm thread, 20mm

length.
If the left-hand rear floor side extension is to be repaired,

using the old panel for reference, install the weld studs for
the left-hand muffler and tailpipe heatshield as indicated.

length.

using the old panel for reference, install the weld studs for
the right-hand muffler and tailpipe heatshield as indicated.

length.

install the weld stud as indicated.
proceeding.
Spot weld.
7. If the left-hand rear floor side extension is to be repaired, prepare the

panel joint surfaces of the mounting bracket.
8. If the left-hand rear floor side extension is to be repaired, offer up the

mounting bracket and clamp into position. Check alignment, if correct,
proceed to next step, if not rectify and recheck before proceeding.
9. If the left-hand rear floor side extension is to be repaired,

spot weld the mounting bracket as indicated.
10. If the right-hand rear floor side extension is to be repaired, prepare the
panel joint surfaces of the AJB mounting bracket.
11. If the right-hand rear floor side extension is to be repaired, offer up the
AJB mounting bracket and clamp into position. Check alignment, if
proceeding.
12. If the right-hand rear floor side extension is to be repaired,
spot weld the AJB mounting bracket as indicated.
panels.
repair procedure.

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Side Member Closing Panel Section
Removal
1. NOTE: The rear side member closing panel section is

(HSLA350).
The rear side member closing panel section is cut from the
rear side member closing panel service panel.
2. In this procedure, to make sure the vehicle is correctly aligned, it must

3. The rear side member closing panel section is replaced in conjunction

with:
Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Back panel
Spare wheel well
Towing eye bracket
Rear subframe and rear suspension, as an assembly

the following:
and Operation) /
5. NOTE: This procedure assumes that if the rear side member closing
panel section is damaged, the rear side member section will also be
damaged. Therefore the replacement procedure for the rear side member
closing panel section is combined within the rear side member section
procedure.
Remove the rear side member section.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Side Member Section (501-30
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Installation

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Side Member Section
Removal
1. NOTE: The rear side member section is manufactured from

High Strength Low Alloy Steel, 350MPa, (HSLA350).
The rear side member section is cut from the rear side
member service panel.
2. This procedure assumes that if the rear side member section is

damaged, the rear side member closing panel section will also be
damaged. Therefore this procedure combines the repair of the rear side
member section and the rear side member closing panel section.
3. NOTE: The rear side member closing panel section is

(HSLA350).
The rear side member closing panel section is cut from the
rear side member closing panel service panel.
4. In this procedure, to make sure the vehicle is correctly aligned, it must

5. The rear side member section is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Back panel
Spare wheel well
Towing eye bracket

the following:
and Operation) /
www.JagDocs.com
8. Remove the luggage compartment lid.

For additional information, refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid (501-03
Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
9. Remove the spare wheel well.

For additional information, refer to: Spare W heel Well (501-30 Rear End
10. Remove the rear floor side extension.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Floor Side Extension (501-30
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
11. Remove the rear muffler hanger bracket from the side member.
12. NOTE: The measurements shown allow the section to

be performed, avoiding the inner reinforcements and
allowing for a minimum 50mm staggered joint with the rear
side member closing panel section. The measurement is
taken from the edge of the hole in the rear side member,
not the inner reinforcement.
Mark out the position where the rear side member section
MAG butt joint is to be made. Cut through the rear side
member at this point, also cutting through the rear side
member closing panel as indicated.
into the rear side member.
Mark out the position where the rear side member closing
panel section MAG butt joint is to be made. Cut through the
rear side member closing panel at this point as indicated.
14. Drill out the spot welds from the rear side member closing
panel remnant.
15. Separate the joints and remove the rear side member closing panel
remnant.
Installation
1. Mark out the position on the rear side member service
panel, where the section MAG butt joint is to be made and
cut the panel at this point as indicated.
2. Mark out the position on the rear side member closing

panel service panel, where the section MAG butt joint is to
be made and cut the panel at this point as indicated.
3. Prepare the panel joint surfaces of the old and new rear side member
and rear side member closing panel sections.
4. Offer up the new rear side member section and clamp into position.
5. Tack MAG weld the rear side member section butt joint.
6. Dress the rear side member section MAG tack welds.
7. MAG weld the rear side member section butt joint.
8. Dress the rear side member section MAG butt joint.
10. Offer up the new rear side member closing panel section and clamp into
11. Tack MAG weld the rear side member closing panel section butt joint.
12. Dress the rear side member closing panel section MAG tack welds.
13. MAG weld the rear side member closing panel section butt
joint.
14. Dress the rear side member section MAG tack welds.
the original.
Spot weld the rear side member closing panel section to

the rear side member as indicated.
16. Dress the spot welds.
panels.

removal procedure.
1. Tighten the rear muffler hanger bracket bolts to 25 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Wheelhouse Outer
Removal
1. NOTES:
The rear wheelhouse outer is manufactured from mild

steel.
The illustration shows the right-hand service panel,

the left-hand is similar but without the fuel filler aperture.
The rear wheelhouse outer is serviced as a separate

weld-on panel.
2. The rear wheelhouse outer is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Quarter Panel
Rocker panel (rear, dog leg, part as a minimum)
Rocker panel inner reinforcement section
Quarter panel inner reinforcement, (new service panel required to
enable rear wheelhouse outer replacement)
Luggage Compartment Lid
Rear window glass
Headliner

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove the quarter panel.

For additional information, refer to: Quarter Panel (501-30 Rear End
5. Remove a section of rocker panel to allow access to the
joints for removal of the rear wheelhouse outer. Using the
rocker panel rear section procedure for reference, perform a
section cut in a suitable position, dependant on the extent
of damage. The section must be no less than that
indicated.
For additional information, refer to: Rocker Panel Rear
Section (501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
7. Remove the rear safety belt retractor.

8. Disconnect, release the inner quarter panel wiring harness and position
it to one side.
9. If the right-hand rear wheelhouse outer is being repaired, release the

battery positive cable and position it to one side.
10. Release the inner quarter panel insulating material and position it to
one side.
11. Drill out the spot welds from the striker reinforcement
panel.
12. NOTE: A new striker reinforcement panel is supplied
on the quarter panel service panel.
Separate the joints, the adhesive and the NVH (noise,

vibration and harshness) component and remove the striker
reinforcement panel.
13. NOTE: Care should be taken when separating and

removing the ECM (engine control module) mounting
bracket if it is to be reused.
If the right-hand rear wheelhouse outer is to be repaired,

drill out the spot welds as indicated and remove the ECM
mounting bracket. Retain for reuse on installation.
14. NOTE: It is necessary to section the quarter panel

inner reinforcement at the point indicated, to make sure the
integrity of the safety belt anchorage point. The right-hand
panel is illustrated, the left-hand is similar.
Cut the quarter panel inner reinforcement, horizontally,

approximately 90mm from the centre of the safety belt bolt
anchorage point as indicated.
15. NOTE: The right-hand panel is illustrated, the

left-hand is similar although there are additional spot welds
to drill out.
Drill out the spot welds from the quarter panel inner
reinforcement section at the points indicated.
16. NOTE: Retain the quarter panel inner reinforcement section as part
of this will be used as a template and to form a backing plate.
Separate the joints and remove the quarter panel inner reinforcement
section.
17. Cut the rocker panel inner reinforcement at the point

indicated.
19. NOTE: Care should be taken, when releasing the MAG

weld, as the rocker panel inner reinforcement section is to
be reused.
Using a belt sander, release the rocker panel inner

reinforcement from the MAG weld at the point indicated.
20. NOTE: Care should be taken when separating and removing the
rocker panel inner reinforcement section as it is to be reused.
Separate the joints and remove the rocker panel inner reinforcement
section. Retain for reuse on installation.
21. NOTES:
Where it is possible, spot welds should be drilled from

inside to enable them to be replicated on installation.
The quarter panel inner reinforcement section is

removed for this procedure, the illustration shows it in
place and is for reference only.
Installation
proceeding.
2. With the new panel in position, mark the position of MAG

plug welds as indicated.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Drill holes ready for MAG plug welding, including those
previously marked.

Spot weld.
7. MAG Plug weld.
8. Dress MAG plug welds.
9. If the right-hand rear wheelhouse outer is being repaired, prepare the

panel joint surfaces of the ECM mounting bracket.
10. Offer up the ECM mounting bracket and clamp into position. Check
before proceeding.
11. MAG Plug weld the ECM mounting bracket.
12. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove or bend the

safety belt mounting part of the template to aid alignment.
Retain the template as this will be used to form a backing
plate.
Offer up, align and clamp the old quarter panel inner
reinforcement, "template", into position on the inside of the
new quarter panel inner reinforcement. Cut along the top
edge of the template, through the new quarter panel inner
reinforcement, at the point where the MAG butt joint is to
be made.
13. Remove the template from the new quarter panel inner reinforcement.
14. Cut and form a backing strip, a minimum of 40mm in width,

from the template as indicated.
15. NOTE: The backing strip should be positioned centrally

so that it will fit equally between the original and the new
quarter panel inner reinforcement sections, where the MAG
butt weld is to be performed.
Offer up the backing strip to the original quarter panel inner

reinforcement and clamp into position. Check alignment, if
correct, proceed to next step, if not rectify and recheck
before proceeding.
16. Remove the backing strip.
17. Drill holes in the original quarter panel inner reinforcement

ready for MAG plug welding as indicated.
18. Prepare the panel joint surfaces of the new and the original quarter
panel inner reinforcement and the backing strip.
19. Offer up the backing strip, align and clamp into position.
20. NOTE: Do not dress the MAG plug welds.
MAG Plug weld the backing strip into position, as indicated.
21. Offer up the new quarter panel inner reinforcement and clamp into
24. NOTE: Do not dress the MAG butt weld.
MAG weld the butt joint.
25. NOTES:
The right-hand panel is illustrated, the left-hand is

similar although there are additional spot welds to install.
Spot welds must be installed 5mm away from the

Spot weld.
26. Prepare the old and new panel joint surfaces, ready for installation of
the rocker panel inner reinforcement section.
27. Offer up the rocker panel inner reinforcement section and clamp into
29. MAG plug weld.
32. NOTE: Do not dress the MAG welds at the quarter panel inner
reinforcement.
Dress all welded joints.
procedure are treated with a zinc primer, prior to the installation of outer
panels.
www.JagDocs.com
34. If the right-hand rear wheelhouse outer is being repaired,
prepare the NVH component at the fuel filler aperture,
apply sealer adhesive, and install as indicated.
35. NOTE: The NVH component at the striker

reinforcement panel should be installed with the new
quarter panel, sealer adhesive should be applied as the
new quarter panel is installed.
Remove the NVH component from the old striker

reinforcement panel, prepare, apply sealer adhesive and
install on the new striker reinforcement panel on the
quarter panel service panel.
36. NOTE: Adhesive must be applied to the striker
reinforcement panel as the new quarter panel is installed.
Apply adhesive to the new striker reinforcement panel on

the new quarter panel.

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Spare Wheel Well
Removal
1. NOTE: The spare wheel well is manufactured from mild steel.
The spare wheel well is serviced as a separate weld-on panel, it is not

serviced with the towing eye bracket, the spare wheel retaining bracket,
or its weld studs.
2. The spare wheel well is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper Back
panel
Towing eye bracket

the following:
and Operation) /
4. Remove the back panel.

For additional information, refer to: Back Panel (501-30 Rear End Sheet
Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
6. Disconnect the battery positive cable and position it to one side.
7. Remove the rear subframe and rear suspension, as an assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Subframe - V6 3.0L Petrol
(502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and
Installation).
8. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (310-01B,
9. Release the left-hand and right-hand luggage floor wiring harnesses and
position them to one side.
10. Make sure that the rear seats are covered to prevent any damage during
this repair procedure.
11. NOTE: If undamaged, the left-hand and right-hand rear bumper

retaining brackets should be reinstalled.
Remove the left-hand and right-hand rear bumper retaining brackets.

12. Remove the bolts as indicated.
www.JagDocs.com
13. NOTE: Remove the sealer to expose the spot welds.

14. NOTE: Retain the old panel for reference to the weld stud location
points.
15. NOTE: Drill out from inside the spare wheel well to allow spot
welds to be used in installation. If undamaged, retain the towing eye
bracket for re-use on installation.
Drill out the spot welds and remove the towing eye bracket from the old
panel.
16. NOTE: Drill out from underneath to allow spot welds to be used in
installation. If undamaged, retain the spare wheel retaining bracket for
re-use on installation.
Drill out the spot welds and remove the spare wheel retaing bracket
from the old panel.
17. NOTE: Drill out from underneath to allow spot welds to be used in
installation. If undamaged, retain the spare wheel well reinforcement
plate for re-use on installation.
Drill out the spot welds and remove the spare wheel well reinforcement
plate from the old panel.
Installation
1. NOTE: Stud dimensions: 6mm x 1mm thread, 20mm length.
Using the old panel for reference, mark up and prepare the new spare
wheel well and install the weld studs for the left-hand muffler and
tailpipe heatshield as indicated.
www.JagDocs.com
2. NOTE: Stud dimensions: 6mm x 1mm thread, 20mm length.
Using the old panel for reference, mark up and prepare the new spare
wheel well and install the weld studs for the right-hand muffler and
tailpipe heatshield as indicated.
proceeding.
7. NOTE: Make sure that the adhesive does not encroach into the
areas of the MAG plug welds as it will contaminate the weld.
8. Offer up, align and clamp the new panel into position.
9. Install the bolts as indicated.

Tighten to 25 Nm.
possible, spot welds should be installed adjacent to the original.
Spot weld.
11. MAG plug weld.
www.JagDocs.com
12. Prepare the panel joint surfaces of the spare wheel well reinforcement
plate.
13. Offer up the spare wheel well reinforcement plate and clamp into
14. NOTE: If a new spare wheel well reinforcement plate is installed,

two additional spot welds will be installed when the towing eye bracket
is installed.
Spot weld the original spare wheel well reinforcement plate to the spare
wheel well.
MAG plug welds are not required.
Drill through the two holes in the original spare wheel well reinforcement
panel, through the spare wheel well, ready for MAG plug welding.
16. Prepare the panel joint surfaces of the towing eye bracket.
17. Offer up the towing eye bracket and clamp into position. Check
before proceeding.

the towing eye bracket can be fully spot welded. If the original spare
wheel well reinforcement plate is installed, two MAG plug welds will be
required.
Spot weld the towing eye bracket to the spare wheel well.
the towing eye bracket can be fully spot welded. If the original spare
wheel well reinforcement plate is installed, two MAG plug welds will be
required.
MAG plug weld the spare wheel well reinforcement plate through the
spare wheel well into the towing eye bracket.
20. Prepare the panel joint surfaces of the spare wheel retaining bracket.
21. Offer up the spare wheel retaining bracket and clamp into position.
22. Spot weld the spare wheel retaining bracket to the spare wheel well.
www.JagDocs.com
24. Make sure that any remaining areas of bare metal created during this
panels.
25. Install the left-hand and right-hand rear bumper retaining brackets.
Tighten to 25 Nm.
26. Install the NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) sound deadening
material as indicated.
repair procedure.

removal procedure.
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System -
Front lower arm to front subframe retaining nut and bolt 175 129 -
Rear lower arm to front subframe retaining nut and bolt 175 129 -
Engine mount lower retaining nut 63 46 -
Front Shock absorber and spring assembly retaining bolt 175 129 -
Front subframe to body front retaining bolt
Stage 1 100 73 -
Stage 2 270° 270° -
Front subframe to body rear retaining bolt
Stage 1 80 59 -
Stage 2 240° 240° -
Front Stabilizer bar link retaining nuts 43 31 -
Front Stabilizer bar link retaining bolts 55 41 -
Rear Shock absorber and spring assembly retaining bolt 133 98 -
Rear subframe reinforcement plate retaining bolts 47 35 -
Rear subframe to body retaining bolts
Stage 1 80 59 -
Stage 2 240° 240° -
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System - Front Subframe V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Special Tool(s)
303-021
Engine support bracket
303-1436
Engine Lifting Bracket Front
502-005
Alignment Bolts, Subframe
General Equipment
Powertrain Jack
Removal
Procedures).
3. Refer to: Radiator Splash Shield (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
6. Secure the radiator assembly.
7.
Torque: 40 Nm
8. CAUTIONS:
Support
the engine on a
jack. The angle
may need to be
adjusted during
this procedure.
Make sure
to protect the
paintwork.
Special
Tool(s):
303-021
Special
Tool(s):
303-1436
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
www.JagDocs.com
14.
15. CAUTION:
Make sure to
support the
steering gear.
NOTE:
LHD illustration
shown, RHD is
similar.
16.
17.
18.
19. NOTES:
Repeat the step for the other side.

20. NOTE:
Note the fitted
position of each
bolt, mark the
washers and
sub-frame
before removal
to aid
assembly.
21. CAUTION:
Make sure the
wheel knuckle
is supported.
Failure to
follow these
instructions
may result in
damage to the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Note the fitted
position of each
bolt, mark the
washers and
sub-frame
before removal
to aid
assembly.
22. General Equipment: Powertrain Jack

23. CAUTION:
Take extra care
not to damage
the air
conditioning
(A/C) pipes
when lowering
the component.
NOTES:
This step
requires the
aid of another
technician.
Do not
disassemble
further if the
component is
removed for
access only.
24.
25.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger-tight at this stage.
2. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Torque:
Bolt 1 63 Nm
Bolt 2 63 Nm
Bolt 1 63 Nm
3. Torque: 12 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4. General Equipment: Powertrain Jack
5.
6. Install the special tool to the front subframe.

7. Install the special tool to the front subframe.
8. Torque:
Stage 1:80
Nm
Stage 2:
240°

11. Torque:
Stage 1:
100 Nm
Stage 2:
270°
12. CAUTION:
Make sure each
bolt aligns with
the removal
markings.
Torque: 175
Nm
13. CAUTION:
Make sure each
bolt aligns with
the removal
markings.
Torque: 175
Nm
14. NOTE: Repeat the step for the other side.
Torque: 175 Nm
15. Torque: 43 Nm
16. Torque: 43 Nm
17. Torque: 100

Nm
18. Torque: 45 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
19. Torque: 22 Nm
20. Torque: 5 Nm
21.
22.
23.
24.
25. CAUTION:
Make sure to
protect the
paintwork.
Special
Tool(s):
303-1436
Special
Tool(s):
303-021
27. Release the radiator assembly.
30. Refer to: Radiator Splash Shield (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
Procedures).
32. Refer to: Camber and Caster Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System - General Information,
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System - Rear Subframe V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Equipment
Powertrain Jack
Removal

3. Refer to: Fuel Tank Draining (310-00 Fuel System - General Information,
Installation).
5. Refer to: Driveshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-01

NOTES:
The fuel tank has a non-return valve in the filler stub

pipe, only the fuel present in the filler hose will be spilt.

7. Using the special tool, press and hold the brake pedal.
www.JagDocs.com
8. WARNING: If the fluid is spilled on the paintwork, the
affected area must be immediately washed down with cold
water.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that a new sealing washer is installed.
Torque: 35 Nm
9.
10.
11.
Torque: 47 Nm

14. WARNING: Install the M12 subframe bolts prior to
removing axle support.
Torque: 133 Nm
General Equipment: Powertrain Jack

Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:240°
17.
Installation

3. Refer to: Camber and Caster Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System -

www.JagDocs.com
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System - Rear Subframe Rear Bushing
TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
Forcing bolt
204-469
Reciever-bush
204-475
Replacer-bush
204-474
Remover bush
204-473
Remover support-bush
204-472
Removal
1. For additional information, refer to: Rear Subframe - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Installation).
Vehicles with 5.0L
2. For additional information, refer to: Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System,
All vehicles
3. NOTE: Note the orientation of the bushing before

removal.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Make sure the bushing is correctly orientated.
Vehicles with 5.0L
2. For additional information, refer to: Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System,
3. For additional information, refer to: Rear Subframe - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com

JAGUAR 2010XFRWorkshop PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

JAGUAR 2010XFRWorkshop PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

m

5.0 Litre S/C

References to LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand)

Vehicle LH and RH definition

Item Part Number Description

Powertrain LH and RH definition

How to use Repair Procedures

Important Safety Instructions

Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual

NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

Reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets

Types of self-locking nuts and bolts

Special Tools, Equipment, Materials and Torque Figures

Colors used in the graphic are as follows:

Blue - Component to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled.

One illustration may have multiple steps assigned to it.

How to use Diagnosis and Testing procedures

A representative tester graphic is used for voltmeters and ohmmeters.

INHALED: Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.

Only use new specified brake fluid from airtight containers.

Provide adequate ventilation when working on fuel systems.

Fuel must not be used as a cleaning agent.

Make sure that non-plated tools are used.

Repairs and Replacements

Service Repair Operation Numbering

References to Bank-1 and Bank-2

Disconnecting/Connecting the Battery

The vehicle to be jacked up

Reconnecting the Battery

Connecting a Slave Battery Using Jump Leads

Always connect the jump leads in the following sequence.

Slave battery positive first then vehicle battery positive.

Components should be thoroughly cleaned before inspection prior to reassembly.

Calibration of Essential Measuring Equipment

WARNING: Failure to comply may result in personal injury or damage to components.

Use of Control Modules

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD)

The diagnosis and testing sections within the manual cover:

Acids and Alkalis

e.g. caustic soda, sulphuric acid.

Used in batteries and cleaning materials.

Display Eye Hazard sign.

Highly flammable, explosive – observe No Smoking policy.

Following any direct contact with gas generant.

Wash affected areas thoroughly with water

Air Bags - Do's

Do store in an air bag safe when not installed to the vehicle.

Air Bags - Do Nots

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Highly flammable, combustible – observe No Smoking policy.

Skin contact may result in frostbite.

Air Conditioning Refrigerant - Do Nots

Do not expose refrigerant bottles to sunlight or heat

e.g. isopropanol, ethylene glycol, methanol.

Highly flammable, flammable, combustible.

See also Warning Symbols on Vehicles at the end of this subsection.

Ensure adequate ventilation.

Brake and Clutch Linings and Pads

Brake Fluids (Polyalkylene Glycols)

Chemical Materials - Do's

Chemical Materials - Do Nots

Clutch Linings and Pads

Corrosion Protection Materials